Full text of "Department of State bulletin"

See other formats

Mmm

^^^^Hr

.,iittf*y

lir^

^^BB

^c^oQiSaEm

"^^i^o^

Given By

i'itdv.ll*

// ..

tJ/i€/ u)eha/y£meni/ /cw C/tate^

O 'A

NORTH KOREAN FORCES INVADE SOUTH KOREA:

Security Council Action Requested — ^U.S. Air and

Sea Forces Ordered Into Action • Statements by the

President, Secretary Acheson, Ambassador Austin, and

Ambassador Gross. Texts of Security Council Resolutions .

ACHIEVING A COMMUNITY SENSE AMONG FREE
NATIONS— A STEP TOWARD WORLD ORDER •

Address by Secretary Acheson

KEEPING PEACE IN THE CARIBBEAN AREA •

By EduMrd A. Jamison

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 574
July 3, 1950

U. i. SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS

JUL 251950

'>-r„<^'

x^owy*. bulletin

Vol. XXIII, No. 574 • Publication 3902
July 3, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U. S. QovernmSCt Printing Office

Washington 25, D. C.

Price:

62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.50
Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
Of State Bdlletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and inter-
national agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislatii^e material in thefield
of international relations, are listed
currently.

NORTH KOREAN FORCES INVADE SOUTH KOREA

U.S. PRESENTS CEASE-FIRE
RESOLUTION TO SECURITY COUNCIL

Statement by Ernest A. Gross

Deputy U.S. Representative on Security Council ^

At 4 o'clock in the morning, Sunday, June 25th,
Korean time, armed forces from North Korea com-
menced an unprovoked assault against the terri-
tory of the Eepublic of Korea. This assault was
launched by ground forces along the 38th Parallel,
in the Ongjin, Kaesong, and Chunshon sectors,
and by amphibious landings on the east coast in
the vicinity of Jnagmung. In addition, North
Korean aircraft have attacked and strafed the
Kimpo airport in the outskirts of the capital city
of Seoul.

Under the circumstances I have described, this
wholly illegal and unprovoked attack by the North
Korean forces, in the view of my Government, con-
stitutes a breach of the peace and an act of aggres-
sion.

This is clearly a threat to international peace and
security. As such, it is of grave concern to my
Govermnenh It is a threat which must inevitably
be of grave concern to the governments of all
peace- and freedom-loving nations.

A full-scale attack is now going forward in
Korea. It is an invasion upon a state which the
United Nations itself, by action of its General As-
sembly, has brought into being. It is armed
aggi'ession against a government elected under
United Nations supervision.

Such an altack strikes at the fundamental pur-
poses of the United Nations Charter. Such an
attack openly defies the interest and authority of
the United Nations. Such an attack, therefore,
concerns the vital interest which all the members

' Made before the Security Council on June 25 and re-
leased to the press by the U.S. Mission to the U.N. on the
same date.

of the United Nations have in the organization.

The history of the Korean problem in the United
Nations is well known to you. At this critical
hour I will not review it in detail. But let me
recall only a few milestones in the development of
the Korean situation.

A joint Commission of the United States and
the Soviet Union for 2 years sought unsuccessfully
to agree on ways and means of bringing to Korea
the independence which we assumed would auto-
matically come when Japan was defeated. This
2-year deadlock prevented 38 million people in
Korea from getting the independence which it was
agreed was their right.

My Government, thereupon, sought to hold a
four-power conference at which China and the
United Kingdom would join the United States and
the Soviet Union to seek agreement on the inde-
pendence of Korea. The Soviet Union rejected
that proposal.

The United States then asked the General As-
sembly to consider the problem. The Soviet Union
opposed that suggestion. The General Assembly
by resolution of November 14, 1947, created the
United Nations Temporary Commission on Korea.
By that resolution the General Assembly recom-
mended the holding of elections not later than the
31st of March 1948, to choose representatives with
whom the Commission might consult regarding the
prompt attainment of freedom and independence
of the Korean people. These elected representa-
tives would constitute a national assembly and
establish a national government of Korea.

The General Assembly further recommended
that upon the establishment of a national govern-
ment, that government should in consultation with
the Commission constitute its own national secu-
rity forces and to dissolve all military or semi-
military formations not included therein. The
General Assembly recommended that the national

July 3, 1950

government should take over the functions of
government from the military command and from
the civilian authorities of North and South Korea,
and arrange with the occupying powers for the
complete withdrawal from Korea of the armed
forces as early as practicable and if possible within
90 days.

Elections were held in South Korea, and the
Coromission did observe them. A Government in
South Korea was set up as a result of the elections
observed by the Commission. The Commission
was unable to enter North Korea because of the
attitude of the Soviet Union.

The Temporary Commission in its report to the
third session of the General Assembly stated that
not all the objectives set forth for it had been fully
accomplished and that, in particular, unification
of Korea had not yet been achieved.

Notwithstanding the frustrations and difficulties
which the Temporary Commission had experienced
in Korea, the General Assembly at its third session
continued the Commission's existence and re-
quested it to go on with its efforts to bring North
and South Korea together.

One aspect of the resolution adopted by the third
session of the General Assembly should, I feel, be
particularly emphasized. The General Assembly
declared that a lawful government had been estab-
lished in Korea as a result of the elections observed
by the Commission and declared further that this
was the only lawful government in Korea. Tliis
is a most significant fact.

The General Assembly declared further than the
Government of Korea was based on elections which
were a valid expression of the free will of the elec-
torate of that part of Korea and which were ob-
served by the United Nations Commission.

In the light of this declaration, my Government
on January 1, 1949, extended recognition to the
Government of the Republic of Korea, and more
than 30 states have since that time also accorded
recognition to that Government.

The United Nations Commission worked toward
the United Nations objective of the withdrawal of
occupation forces from Korea, the removal of the
barriers between the regions of the North and
South, and the unification of that country under a
representative government freely determined by
its people.

In 1949, as in 1948, the Commission's efforts to
obtain access to North Korea which included both
direct intercourse with the northern authorities

and endeavors to negotiate through the Govern-
ment of the U.S.S.R. were fruitless. The Com-
mission was unable to make progress either toward
the unification of Korea or toward the reduction
of barriers between the Republic of Korea and the
northern authorities. The Commission reported
to the General Assembly that the border of the
38th Parallel was becoming a sea of increasingly
frequent exchanges of fire and armed raids, and
that this constituted a serious barrier to friendly
intercourse among the people of Korea.

The Commission observed the withdrawal of
United States forces, which was completed on June
19, 1949. Although it signified its readiness to
verify the fact of the withdrawal of Soviet occu-
pation forces from North Korea, the Commission
received no response to its message to the U.S.S.R.
and therefore could take no action.

At the fourth session, the General Assembly
again directed the Commission to seek to facilitate
the removal of barriers to economic, social, and
other friendly intercourse caused by the division
of Korea. The General Assembly also authorized
the Commission on October 21, 1949, in its discre-
tion, to api^oint observers and utilize the services
and good offices of persons whether or not repre-
sentatives of the Commission. The United Nations
Commission on Korea is presently in Seoul and
we have now received its latest report.

Mr. President, I have tabled a draft resolution ^
which notes the Security Council's grave concern
at the invasion of the Republic of Korea by the
armed forces of North Korea. This draft resolu-
tion calls upon the authorities in the North to
cease hostilities and to withdraw armed forces to
the border along the 38th Parallel.

The draft resolution requests that the United
Nations Commission on Korea observe the with-
drawal of the North Korean forces to the 38th
Parallel and keep the Security Council informed
on the implementation and execution of the resolu-
tion. The draft resolution also calls upon all
members of the United Nations to render every
assistance to the United Nations in the carrying
out of this resolution and to refrain from giving
assistance to the North Korean authorities.

The Security Council

RECAr.MNo the finding of the General Assembly in its
resolution of 21 October 1949 that the Government of the

' Adoirted by the Security Council on June 25, 1950, by a
vote of 9 to 0, with 1 abstention (Yugoslavia) ; U.S.S.R.
was absent.

Department of State Bulletin

Republic of Korea is a lawfully established government
"having effective control and jurisdiction over that part
of Korea where the United Nations Temporary Commis-
sion on Korea was able to observe and consult and in which
the great majority of the people of Korea reside ; and Uiat
this Government is based on elections which were a valid
expression of the free will of the electorate of that part of
Korea and which were observed by the Temporary Com-
mission; and that this is the only such Government in
Korea" ;

MiNDBTJL of the concern expressed by the General As-
sembly in its resolutions of 12 December 1948 and 21 Octo-
ber 1949 of the consequences which might follow unless
Member states refrained from acts derogatory to the re-
sults sought to be achieved by the United Nations in bring-
ing about the complete independence and unity of Korea ;
and the concern expressed that the situation described by
the United Nations Commission on Korea in its report
menaces the safety and well-being of the Republic of Korea
and of the people of Korea and might lead to open military
conflict tliere;

Noting with grave concern the armed attack upon the
Republic of Korea by forces from North Korea,

Determines tiiat this action constitutes a breach of the
•pence,

I. Calls upon the authoriites of North Korea (a) to
cease hostilities forthwith; and (b) to withdraw their
armed forces to the thirty-eighth parallel.

II. Requests the United Nations Commission on Korea
(a) to observe the withdrawal of the North Korean forces
to the thirty-eighth parallel ; and (b) to keep the Security
Council informed on the execution of this resolution.

III. Calls upon all Members to render every assistance
to the United Nations in the execution of this resolution
and to refrain from giving assistance to the North Korean
authorities.

U. S. AIR AND SEA FORCES
ORDERED INTO SUPPORTING ACTION

Statement hy President Trwnan

[Released to the press June 27]

In Korea, the Government forces, which were
armed to prevent border raids and to preserve in-
ternal security, were attacked by invading forces
from North Korea. The Security Council of the
United Nations called upon the invading troops to
cease hostilities and to withdraw to the 38th Par-
allel. This they have not done but, on the con-
trary, have pressed the attack. The Security
Council called upon all members of the United
Nations to render every assistance to the United
Nations in the execution of this resolution. In
these circumstances, I have ordered United States
air and sea forces to give the Korean Government
troops cover and support.

The attack upon Korea makes it plain beyond
all doubt that communism has passed beyond the
use of subversion to conquer independent nations
and will now use armed invasion and war. It has
defied the orders of the Security Council of the
United Nations issued to preserve international
peace and security. In these circumstances, the
occupation of Formosa by Communist forces
would be a direct threat to the security of the
Pacific area and to United States forces perform-
ing their lawful and necessary functions in that
area.

Accordingly, I have ordered the Seventh Fleet
to prevent any attack on Formosa. As a corollary
of this action, I am calling upon the Chinese
Government on Formosa to cease all air and sea
operations against the mainland. The Seventh
Fleet will see that this is done. The determination
of the future status of Formosa must await the
restoration of security in the Pacific, a peace set-
tlement with Japan, or consideration by the
United Nations.

I have also directed that United States forces in
the Philippines be strengthened and that military
assistance to the Philippine Government be accel-
erated.

I have similarly directed acceleration in the
furnishing of military assistance to the forces of
France and the Associated States in Indochina and
the dispatch of a military mission to provide close
working relations with those forces.

I know that all members of the United Nations
will consider carefully the consequences of this
latest aggression in Korea in defiance of the Char-
ter of the United Nations. A return to the rule of
force in international affairs would have far-
reaching effects. The United States will continue
to uphold the rule of law.

I have instructed Ambassador Austin, as the
representative of the United States to the Security
Council, to report these steps to the Council.

Soviet Help'Asked To Restore Korean Peace

In reply to inquiries from the press the State
Department on June 27 confirmed that the American
Embassy at Moscow communicated, on that date,
with the Soviet Foreign Office in regard to the inva-
sion of the Republic of Korea by North Korean
armed forces. The Embassy asked that the Soviet
Government use its influence with the North Korean
authorities for the withdrawal of the invading forces
and the cessation of hostilities.

July 3, 1950

Remarks hy Secretary Acheson

At his news conference on June 28 Secretary Acheson
made the following extemporaneous remarks concerning
the announcement hy President Truman of United States
support for the Republic of Korea in accordance with the
resolution of the Security Council of June 25.

There are a few points which I should like to
make before we go into the questions about the
matter which I am sure is uppermost in all of your
minds. That is the announcement by the Presi-
dent yesterday of decisions which he had taken. I
will not go into those decisions in detail but make
some points about them.

The first point I want to make is our feeling of
deep gratitude here in the Department, and re-
sponsibility also, for the almost unanimous world
reaction which has come from the action taken by
the United Nations and from the announcement
made yesterday by the President of his actions in
support of the United Nations.

In all parts of the world where free opinion ex-
ists, there has been an immediate response — a
response to the realization that this was, if there
ever was in the world, a test of whether the United
Nations is going to survive.

This attack was the most cynical, brutal, naked
attack by armed forces upon an undefended coun-
try that could occur. The world has understood
that, and it has understood that the actions taken
by the United States have been taken in support
of the United Nations.

The second point I want to make is that as soon
as we knew that this attack had taken place, and
had immediately conveyed that information to the
President and gotten his instructions, it was the
view of the President, and of the entire Govern-
ment of the United States, that our first responsi-
bility was to report this to the United Nations.
This was done in the middle of the night on Sat-
urday, June 24, and a meeting of the Security
Council was called on Sunday, June 25. From
then on, all action in Korea has been under the
aegis of the United Nations. That is a very
important point.

The next point that I want to make is one that I
am sure you understand. It is that the entire ac-
tion of the Government of the United States, since
a late hour on Saturday when this information
came to us, has been taken under Presidential lead-
ership and direction. Here, as in many other situ-
ations in the years in which I have been Under
Secretary and Secretary, the President has been

faced with the most difficult decisions which had
to be made quickly, and after taking full advice
he has assumed the responsibility and he has made
the decision.

The fourth point I would like to make is that
there has been complete unity among the Presi-
dent's advisers, civil and military. The Depart-
ments of State and Defense have worked practi-
cally as one department ever since this matter
arose, and in anticipation of possible difficulties
of this sort, so that we were able on the shortest
possible notice to present completed staff work to
the President. He had the view of his advisers
without having differences among his advisers.

The fifth point I should like to stress is the unity
which existed at the President's meeting yester-
day, at which the Secretary of Defense and I, and
our advisers, were present with the Congressional
leaders. Here, again, the understanding of the
problem, the understanding of the actions taken
showed complete unity.

The sixth point I should like to make is that
with very few exceptions the press and radio of
the United States has been unified in its comments
upon what was done and the necessity for doing it.
I assume, and I think I assume justly, that that
attitude on the part of the press and the radio
indicates that there is similar unity among the
people of the United States.

Finally, I should like to leave with you the
thought that the complexities and difficulties of
the international situation are great. This is a
time for very steady and sober talk and action.
It is not a time for general speculation, for trying
to stir up difficulties which do not exist, for imag-
ining possibilities which are remote. It is a time
for the very greatest steadiness, and it is a time,
as I have often said in the past, where, more than
ever, you gentlemen share with the officials of the
Government a very deep responsibility, which I
feel sure you are quite aware of.

U.S. ASKS SECURITY COUNCIL
TO ASSIST IN REPELLING ATTACK

Statement hy Ambassador Warren R. Austin
U.S. Representative to the Security Council ^

The United Nations finds itself confronted to-
day with the gravest crisis in its existence.

' Made before the Security Council on June 27 and re-
leased to the press by the U.S. Mission to the United
Nations on the same date.

Department of State Bulletin

Forty-eight hours ago the Security Council, in
an emergency session, determined tliat tlie armed
invasion of the Republic of Korea, by armed forces
from Northern Korea, constituted a breach of the
peace. Accordingly, the Security Council called
for a cessation of hostilities forthwith and the
■withdrawal by the Northern Korean authorities
of their armed forces to the 38th Parallel. The
Security Council also requested the United Na-
tions Commission on Korea to observe the with-
drawal and to I'eport. Finally, the Security Coun-
cil called upon all members to render every
assistance to the United Nations in the execution
of the resolution and to refrain from giving assist-
ance to the North Korean authorities.

The decision of the Security Council has been
broadcast to the Korean authorities and is known
to them. We now have before us the report of the
United Nations Commission for Korea which con-
firms our worst fears. It is clear that the authori-
ties in North Korea have completely disregarded
and flouted the decision of the Security Council.
The armed invasion of the Republic of Korea con-
tinues. The North Korean authorities have even
called upon the established Government of the
Republic to surrender.

It is hard to imagine a more glaring example of
disregard for the United Nations and for all the
principles which it represents. The most impor-
tant provisions of the Charter are those outlawing
aggressive war. It is precisely these provisions
which the North Korean authorities have violated.

It is the plain duty of the Security Council to
invoke stringent sanctions to restore international
peace.

The Republic of Korea has appealed to the
United Nations for jsrotection. I am happy and
proud to report that the United States is prepared
as a loyal member of the United Nations to furnish
assistance to the Republic of Korea.

I have tabled a resolution * which I ask the
Council to consider favorably as the next step to
restore world peace.

That resolution is as follows:
The Security Council,

Having Determined that the armed attack upon the
Republic of Korea by forces from North Korea constitutes
a breach of the peace,

Having Called for an immediate cessation of hostilities,
and

Having Called upon the authorities of North Korea to
withdraw forthwith their armed forces to the 38th Par-
allel, and

Having Noted from the report of the United Nations
Commission for Korea that the authorities in North Korea
have neither ceased hostilities nor withdrawn their armed
forces to the 3Sth Parallel, and that urgent military
measures are required to restore international peace and
security, and

Having Noted the appeal from the Republic of Korea to
the United Nations for immediate and effective steps to
secure peace and security,

Recommends that the Members of the United Nations
furnish such assistance to the Republic of Korea as may
be necessary to repel the armed attack and to restore
international peace and security in the area.

This is the logical consequence of the resolution
concerning the complaint of aggression upon the
Republic of Korea adopted at the 473d meeting of
the Security Council on June 25, 1950, and the
subsequent events recited in the preamble of this
resolution. That resolution of June 25 called upon
all members to render every assistance to the
United Nations in the execution of this resolution

* Adopted by the Security Council on June 27 by a vote
of 7 (U.S., U.K., France, China, Cuba, Ecuador, and
Norway)—! (Yugoslavia), with 2 abstentions (Egypt and
India) ; the U.S.S.R. was absent.

Article 27 of the U. N. Charter

1. Each member of the Security Council shall
have one vote.

2. Decisions of the Security Council on procedural
matters shall be made by an aJfirmative vote of
seven members.

3. Decisions of the Security Council on all other
matters shall be made by an affirmative vote of
seven members including the concurring votes of the
permanent members ; provided that, in decisions un-
der Chapter VI, and under paragraph 3 of Article
52, a party to a dispute shall abstain from voting.

Article 28 of U. N. Charter

1. The Security Council shall be so organized as
to be able to function continuously. Each member
of the Security Council shall for this purpose be
represented at all times at the seat of the Organi-
zation.

2. The Security Council shall hold periodic meet-
ings at which each of its members may, if it so
desires, be represented by a member of the govern-
ment or by some other specially designated
representative.

3. The Security Council may hold meetings at
such places other than the seat of the Organization
as in its judgment wUl best facilitate its work.

Editor's Note: A Security Council practice has
developed under which, if a permanent member of
the Security Council abstains from voting on a non-
procedural decision of the Council, such abstention
is not considered to be a veto.

July 3, 1950

and to refrain from giving assistance to the North
Korean authorities. This new resolution is the
logical next step. Its significance is affected by the
violation of the former resolution, the continua-
tion of aggression, and the urgent military
measures required.

I wish now to read the statement which the
President of the United States made today on this

critical situation.

[Here follows the President's statement as printed in
this issue on page 5.]

The keynote of the resolution and my statement
and the significant characteristic of the action
taken by the President is support of the United
Nations purposes and principles — in a word
"peace."

SOVIET VIOLATIONS OF TREATIES AND AGREEMENTS

The instability of peace the world over is due,
in large measure, to deliberate Soviet policy and
actions and to the wholesale Soviet violation of
basic agreemerds. Because of the U.S.S.R.''s rec-
ord in ignoring its international pledges, the faith
of the world in Soviet signatures had been badly
shattered. Whether it be the Yalta agreement or
a treaty of friendship, the U.S.S.R. has chosen to
ignore its sworn conwriitments whenever it has
found such action advantageous for its own
purposes.

As it ruthlessly pursues its expansionist objec-
tives in the postwar world, the Soviet Union is
building up a reputation as an irresponsible inter-
national marauder. Before the court of world
opinion, it stands indicted for disregarding its
international treaties and agreements, openly
flouting protocols and promises, and encouraging
violations of basic human rights by other treaty
signatories. Because of its policy of refusal to
work in concert with other nations, its preference
for abrupt and unauthorized unilateral action, and
its apparent determination to impose its will upon
the world, the value of agreements with the Soviet
Union has been nullified. From Yalta to the
present, the broken pledges of the U.S.S.E. have
marked international relations. A review of this
record is worthwhile.^

Europe

The uncertain peace of postwar Europe is pri-
marily due to the fact that the Russians have de-
liberately undermined the foundations upon which

' This study brings up to date the material published in
the BuiiETiN of June 6, 1948, p. 738.

peace was to be built. The Soviet Union has vio-
lated the Yalta agreement of February 1945, the
Potsdam Declaration of July 1945, and the peace
treaties so far concluded with the ex-German satel-
lites. Soviet violation of Allied armistice agree-
ments, refusal to act in concert with the other
Allies on control commissions, and even the ignor-
ing of the decisions of the Council of Foreign
Ministers can be added to those. The fact that
the framework of peace has never been completed,
that Austria still pleads for a treaty, and that the
settlement of the German question still plagues
Europe is also due to Soviet intransigence and the
unreliability of its word.

THE YALTA AGREEMENT

Wlien the Big Three met at Yalta in February
1945, the three Governments, the United States,
the United Kingdom, and the U.S.S.R., agreed
to assist liberated people to form "interim gov-
ernment authorities broadly representative of all
democratic elements in the population and pledged
to the earliest possible establishment through free
elections of governments responsive to the will of
the people." According to James F. Byrnes, for-
mer Secretary of State, Stalin accepted the Yalta
agreement without serious discussion and in an
atmosphere of genial camaraderie. Yet, Soviet
action has consistently undermined and made
meaningless this fundamental declaration.

The Potsdam Decisions and the Control Council

The Potsdam Declaration of July 1945 aimed at
the ultimate creation of a unified, democratic Ger-
many. To achieve this aim, the powers repre-
sented at the conference committed themselves to

Deparfment of State Bulletin

the destruction of German militarism, the wiping
out of nazisiu, the punishment of war criminals,
the decentralization of the political structure of
Germany, and the dissolution of concentrations of
economic power. A new democratic German gov-
ermnent was to be developed under the supervision
of an Allied Control Council (Ace), and the
four Allied zone commanders were to enjoy abso-
lute sovereignty in their respective zones unless
their powers were pre-empted by Ace legislation.
Besides dealing with Germany, the United States,
the United Kingdom, and the Soviet Union agreed
at Potsdam, among other things, to consult with
each other with a view to revising the procedures
of Allied Control Commissions for Rumania, Bul-
garia, and Hungary.

The lack of success of the program formulated
at Potsdam can be laid at the door of the Soviet
Union. From the inception of the Potsdam pro-
tocols, the U.S.S.R. has a record of wholesale vio-
lation of the agreement, refusal to abide by
decisions of the Control Councils, and a flagi'ant
usurijation of power on the Control Councils in
the satellite area.

GERMANY

Moreover, in dealing with Germany, the Soviet
Union has readily disregarded promises made at
meetings of the Council of Foreign Ministers
(Cfm). By a Cfm decision reached at Moscow,
March 19-April 24, IQIT, all German prisoners of
war were to be repatriated by December 1, 1948.
The U.S.S.R. not only did not return all German
prisoners by tliat date, but she unilaterally an-
nounced a new deadline of January 1, 1950.

Under the Paris Cfm communique of June 20,

1949, each occupying power in Germany agreed to
insure the "normal functioning" of transport be-
tween Berlin and the zones as well as between the
Soviet and Western zones. Since January 13,

1950, the Soviet authorities have intermittently
interfered with traffic between Berlin and Western
Germany.

Violations of the Peace Treaties

Upon ratification of the treaties of peace with
Hungary, Bulgaria, and Rumania, on September
15, 1947, the armistice period and the authority of
the Allied Control Commissions came to an end.
On this date, the treaties entered into force, and
the three Governments regained a type of nominal
sovereignty. In fact, however, the U.S.S.R. con-

tinued to exercise tutelary powers over them. In
consequence, the implementation of the treaties is
characterized by subservient fulfillment with re-
gard to obligations toward the U.S.S.R. but by
evasion, delay, and violations with reference to the
Western Allies. The Soviet Union condones and
in many cases, abets these infringements and, as the
tutelary power, must bear responsibility for them.

HUMAN RIGHTS

Under the peace treaties, the Hungarian, Bul-
garian, and Rumanian Governments undertook to
guarantee the enjoyment of human rights and
fundamental freedoms, including freedom of ex-
pression, of press and publication, of religious
worship, of political opinion, and of public meet-
ing. The U.S.S.R. directly aided and abetted
these Governments in failing to fulfill these human
rights clauses. Freedom of expression and of press
and publication no longer exist in any of these
countries. Freedom of worship is interfered with
time and again, either through subtle methods or
through drastic procedures such as the trials and
imprisonments of church leaders. Freedom of
political opinion is also violated by the forceful
elimination of all political groups opposing the
Communist-controlled governments of these coim-
tries.

On April 2, 1949, the United States and Great
Britain charged the three Governments with hav-
ing violated the human-rights obligations of the
peace treaties. All three Governments issued de-
nials and indicated their unwillingness to adopt
the requested remedial measures. The United
States and the United Kingdom thereupon in-
formed them that in the British and American
view a dispute had arisen concerning the interpre-
tation and execution of the peace treaties. Under
the treaties,^ any dispute concerning the execution
of the treaties, which is not settled by diplomatic
negotiations, should be referred to the heads of the
United States, United Kingdom, and U.S.S.R.
missions in the three countries. On May 31, 1949,
the United States called upon the United Kingdom
and U.S.S.R. to hold a meeting of the three heads
of mission in each country to settle the disputes
which had arisen over noncompliance with the
human-rights clauses. The Soviet Union, in a note
of June 11, 1949, refused to participate in the
meetings, contending that no such disputes had

' Art. 40, Hungarian treaty ; art. 36, Bulgarian treaty ;
and arts. 37 and 38, Rumanian treaty.

July 3, 1950

arisen and that there was, therefore, no reason for
such a meeting. A second United States note, de-
livered June 30, 1949, expressed regret for the
Soviet Union's disregard of the provisions of the
treaties and again asserted that disputes did exist
between the United States and the three satellite
Governments. In a memorandum dated July 19,
1949, the Soviet Union reaffirmed its previous con-
tention and, since that time, has consistently re-
fused to participate in a meeting on the matter.

By its stand, the Soviet Union violates the dis-
putes clause of the peace treaties and the offending
countries are encouraged to continue systematically
and willfully to violate their treaties.

Besides the flagrant violations of the human-
rights clauses, there have been other treaty viola-
tions. In each instance, the attitude of the Soviet
Government is to condone the violation.

HUNGARY

Under article 10 of her treaty, Hungary under-
took to honor her prewar bilateral treaties with
the Allied and Associated Powers, provided that
the other contracting party notified the Hungarian
Government, within a period of 6 months of the
coming into force of the peace treaty, that she
desired to keep in force or revive the bilateral
treaty in question. Among the prewar treaties
coming under the provisions of this article was
the Treaty of Friendship, Commerce, and Naviga-
tion of 1925 between the United States and Hun-
gary. Although the United States Government
duly notified Hungary, within the prescribed
6-month period, that she desired to keep this bilat-
eral treaty in force, the Hungarian Government
has evaded and refused to fulfill its obligations
under article 10 in at least two notable instances :
first, in the seizure of United States property ; and
second, in the arrest and trial of two American
citizens, Robert Vogeler and Israel Jacobson, who
were held incommunicado without access to United
States consular officers.

Under article 23 of the peace treaty, Hungary
undertook to pay the sum of 100 million dollars
as reparations to Czechoslovakia and Yugoslavia.
On February 27, 1949 (after the Moscow-inspired
Cominform declaration of June 28, 1948, against
Yugoslavia), the Yugoslav Minister to Hungary
delivered a note to the United States Legation at
Budapest stating that the Hungarian Govern-
ment had failed to abide by article 23 of the treaty
and that, as a result of the ill will of the Hungar-

ian Government, the enforcement of article 23
could not be carried out by direct negotiations
between the two Governments. The Hungarian
Govei-nment has, to this day, refused to comply
with article 23 of the treaty, and the Soviet Gov-
ernment has refused to participate in a meeting
of the three heads of mission at Budapest, pro-
vided for in article 40 of the treaty for the settle-
ment of disputes which cannot be solved by direct
negotiation.

Under article 28 of the treaty, Hungary under-
took to restore all legal rights and interests of the
United Nations and their nationals, as they existed
on September 1, 1939, as well as to compensate
such persons for property loss and war damage.
The Hungarian Government has given no indica-
tion that she intends to compensate American cit-
izens. On November 8, 1949, the United States
Legation at Budapest transmitted to the Hungar-
ian Minister for Foreign Affairs four new claims
and additional evidence with regard to 116 previ-
ous claims. Although Hungary has acknowledged
receipt of the note, she has taken no action to fulfill
these claims.

BULGARIA

The U.S.S.R. has openly aided and abetted the
Bulgarian Government in failing to fulfill com-
pletely or in totally ignoring treaty provisions lim-
iting the armed forces.^ The Soviet Union ac-
complished this fact by supplying Bulgaria with
arms, ammunition, and equipment in excess of
those needed for the armed foi'ce stipulated by the
peace treaty. In addition, the U.S.S.R., by nega-
tive and extremely dilatory acts, is tolerating Bul-
garian failure to reduce these forces to the limits
prescribed in article 10. The U.S.S.R., by nega-
tive and obstructionist tactics, aided and abetted
the Bulgarian Government in the formation, main-
tenance, and training of paramilitary organiza-
tions, i. e., the militia and the use of this organ-
ization by the Bulgarians to violate both the spirit
and letter of article 2, the human-rights clause of
the treaty. The U.S.S.R., encourages the Bul-
garian Government to deny the Governments of
the United States and United Kingdom their
rights, under the terms of the treaty, to informa-
tion pertaining to the Bulgarian armed forces or
the right to gather such information by investiga-
tion. The Soviet Government declined the United
States-United Kingdom invitation to name a So-

' Arts. 9, 10, 11, and 12.

DepartmenI of State Bulletin

viet rein-esentative to participate in a proposed
survey of the Greco-Bulgarian border.* It, there-
by, encouraged the Bulgarian Government's reply
that, under the terms of the peace treaty, the mat-
ter should be referred to the United States, United
Kingdom, and U.S.S.R. diplomatic missions. ( The
Soviet Government had already refused to partici-
pate in any such conventions under article 3G of the
peace treaty to settle disputes concerning the in-
terpretation or execution of the Bulgarian peace
treaty.)

RUMANIA

As in Bulgaria, the Soviet Government has con-
sistently refused to cooperate with American and
British chiefs of mission to consider the princi-
ples involved in the implementation of the mili-
tary clauses of the peace treaty with Rumania.
Both the Soviet and British chiefs of mission
agreed to a meeting on this matter, scheduling it
for May 18, 1948. However, the Soviet Ambas-
sador cancelled the scheduled meeting, saying that
he was "indisposed,"' and, on May 26, 1948, he
addressed a note to the American Minister stating
that there was no necessity for the proposed meet-
ing and no reason for putting the proposal into
effect. Thus, the Rumanian Government has felt
free to violate the military provisions of the peace
treaty.

Violations of Agreement With Iran

Soviet-Iranian relations are based formally on
the treaty of friendship of February 26, 1921,
which was reaffirmed in 1928. Article IV of this
treaty states :

In consideration of the fact that each nation has the
right to determine freely its political destiny, each of the
two contracting parties formally expresses its desire to
abstain from any intervention in the internal affairs of
the other.

In 1942, the U.S.S.R., United Kingdom, and Iran
signed a treaty of alliance in which the two large
powers agreed to respect the territorial integrity,
sovereignty, and independence of Iran. In the
1943 Tehran declaration, the U.S.S.R., United
Kingdom, and the United States expressed their
desire for the maintenance of the independence,
sovereignty, and territorial integrity of Iran. As
a signer of the United Nations Charter, the
U.S.S.R. subscribed to article II (par. 4), which
states :

* Note No. 056 of Feb. 16. 1948.

All members shall refrain in their international rela-
tions from the threat of use of force against the territorial
integrity or political independence of any State, or in any
manner inconsistent with the purposes of the United
Nations.

The U.S.S.R., in her relations with Iran, has vio-
lated all of these solemn commitments.

The Soviet Government, in a note to the United
States on November 29, 1945, admitted that Soviet
forces in Iran had prevented Iranian troops from
taking action after the outbreak against the Iran-
ian Government in northern Iran. This Soviet
action at least indirectly aided the Azerbaijan sep-
aratists and, thus, constituted interference in the
internal affairs of Iran, in violation of its 1921
pledge of friendship. Furthermore, violations of
the tripartite treaty occurred both during and
after World War II. By supporting the Azer-
baijan separatists while occupying Iran and by its
refusal to evacuate its troops except under United
Nations pressures, the U.S.S.R. violated the
Tehi-an declaration. The Iranian appeal to the
Security Council in January 1946 and its notifica-
tion to the Council on December 5, 1946, that the
U.S.S.R. had warned Iran to refrain from moving
troops into Azerbaijan were both based upon
charges of Soviet interference in the internal af-
fairs of Iran in violation of the United Nations
Charter. Moreover, the Soviet radio has repeat-
edly attacked the Iranian Government on false
grounds, has incited the Iranian people to violent
action against the government, and has given sup-
port to the illegal Tudeh Party.

Violation of Agreements Involving the Far East

KOREA

The Soviet Government openly violated the
joint United States-U.S.S.R. Moscow agreement
for the reestablishment of Korean independence
and the economic recovery of the country. The
two powers were to consult in the preparation of
proposals for the formation of a provisional Ko-
rean government. The U.S.S.R. representative on
the Joint Control Commission consistently refused
to allow such consultation except under unilateral
interpretations of the phrase "democratic parties
and social organizations" which, in each case,
would have excluded all but pro-Soviet political
groups. Moreover, the Soviet delegation refused
to consult with Korean groups whose representa-
tives had at any time expressed opposition to the

July 3, 7950

provision for placing Korea under trusteeship, as
envisaged in the Moscovf agreement.

The Joint Commission agreed to reestablish the
movement of persons, motor, rail transport, and
coastwise shipping between the zones of north and
south Korea. The Soviet Command in north
Korea refused to discuss or implement this agree-
ment and resisted efforts toward reestablishing
the natural economic unity of the country. Con-
cessions to economic coordination were made only
on a barter basis. No regularized movement of
persons or transport was established beyond that
allowed the United States to supply her outposts
that were accessible only by roads through Soviet-
occupied territory.

JAPAN

In the terms of the Potsdam Declaration, defin-
ing the conditions for the Japanese surrender.

Japanese military forces, after being completely
disarmed, were to be permitted to return to their
homes, "with opportunity to lead peaceful, pro-
ductive lives." On December 8, 1949, the U.S.S.R.
signed the Geneva Prisoners of War Convention,
setting forth the rights and obligations of coun-
tries holding prisoners of war.

TASS, the official Soviet news agency, on May
20, 1949, declared that there were 95,000 Japanese
prisoners of war in Soviet-held territory still
awaiting repatriation. According to Japanese
figures, an additional 376,929 Japanese were then
still under Soviet control. The discrepancy is ex-
plicable either by continued detention of Japanese
prisoners or an abnormally high death rate. The
U.S.S.R. refuses to give any information on the
matter and has walked out of Control Council
meetings in which the problem was broached.

The Korean Experiment in Representative Government

Statement hy John Foster Dulles
Consultant to the Secretary ^

The American people salute the Korean nation.
We honor the valiant struggle you are making for
liberty — human liberty and national liberty.

The American people enlisted in that struggle
175 years ago. We were, then, few, poor, divided,
and menaced. There were only about 3 million of
us. We were living precariously off the soil and
the seas. We had been divided by loyalties to 13
rival sovereign states. We were closely pressed
by the great military powers of that time — Spain
to the south, England and France to the north, and
Russia, which had moved into our continent, in
the west. Nevertheless, our founders saw that
Providence had given our people a unique oppor-
tunity' to show that a free society could develop a
spiritual, intellectual, and material richness which
could not be matched by a society of dictatorship
and that, if we took advantage of that opportunity,
our example would stimulate men elsewhere to cast
off the shackles of despotism. From its beginning,
our effort was consciously related to the general
welfare of mankind.

We went through many dark days and long
nights. But our exj^eriment succeeded. Our con-

' Made before the National Assembly of the Republic of
Korea at Seoul, Korea, on June 19 and released to the press
on the same date.

duct and example, despite many faults, did help
to show the infinite possibilities of free men, and it
encouraged men everywhere to pry loose the grip
of despotism and to take command of their own
destiny. The nineteenth century was, in most of
the world, an era of human liberation.

But the battle between liberty and despotism is
never-ending. It has no limits either in space or
in time. It is part of the constant struggle between
good and evil, a struggle that seems to have been
ordained for the testing of man.

DesiJotism, thrown onto the defensive in the
nineteenth century, has resumed the offensive in
the twentieth century. Already, the United States
has twice intervened with armed might in defense
of freedom when it was hard-pressed bj' unpro-
voked military aggression. We were not bound by
any treaty to do this. We did so because the
American people are faithful to the cause of
human freedom and loyal to those everywhere
who honorably support it.

Today, the Korean people are in the front line
of freedom, under conditions that are both dan-
gerous and exciting. You emerged from over 40
years spent under Japanese militarism. But you
have not emei'ged into conditions of placid ease.
Instead, you encounter a new menace, that of So-

Depaiiment of Sfafe Bulletin

viet communism. It denies the spiritual worth and
dignity of the individual human being. It insists
that ail men should be regimented into a pattern
of conduct made for them in Moscow. It seeks
to impose that degrading concept upon all men
everywhere.

Taking advantage of Japanese surrender terms,
Soviet communism has seized in its cruel embrace
the Korean people to the north of the 38th Paral-
lel ; and, from that nearby base, it seeks, by terror-
ism, fraudulent propaganda, infiltration, and in-
citement to civil unrest, to enfeeble and discredit
your new Republic, hoping, no doubt, that the
people might, m despair, accept the iron discipline
of the Soviet Communist Party.

That is a hard test for those who are only newly
training in the practice of representative govern-
ment.

Some observers felt that your task was a hope-
less one. You have proved them to be wrong.
Your faith and your works have confounded the
skeptics. You have already held two general elec-
tions in an atmosphere free of terrorism, and a
very high percentage of all eligible voters have
participated. Out of your electoral processes, has
come a stable and representative government.
You have developed a strong, disciplined, and
loyal defense establishment. Through hard work,
you are steadily improving your country's eco-
nomic condition.

There is solid ground for encouragement. No
doubt, there are difficult days ahead and many
problems yet unsolved, some internal, some exter-
nal. But what has already happened shows that
it lies within your power to achieve the goal of a
Korea that is strong and free. Nothing can pre-
vent that if you persist in your resolute will to be
free, and if each of you individually exercises the
self-controls that are required for the general
good. A free society is always a society of di-
versity. That is the secret of its richness. But
also it is a society in which men must voluntarily
curb their individualism to the extent needed to
enable the nation as a whole to avoid frustration
and to achieve creation.

As you establish here in South Korea a whole-
some society of steadily expanding well-being, you
will set up peaceful influences which will disinte-
grate the hold of Soviet communism on your fel-
lows to the north and irresistibly draw them into
unity with you. Never, for a minute, do we con-
cede that Soviet Communists will hold perma-
nently their unwilling captives. No iron curtain
can indefinitely block off the attracting force of
what you do if you persist in the way you have
been going.

You are conducting what may go down in his-
tory as the Great Korean Experiment, an experi-
ment which, in its way, can exert a moral influ-
ence in the twentieth century as prof oimd as that

which, in the nineteenth century, was exerted by
what was then called the Great American Experi-
ment. That is why the eyes of the free world are
fixed upon you. You carry the hopes and aspira-
tions of multitudes.

The American people give you their support,
both moral and material, consistent with your own
self-respect and your primary dependence on your
own efforts.

W& look on you as, spiritually, a part of the
United Nations which has acted with near una-
nimity to advance your political freedom, which
seeks your unity with the north and which, even
though you are technically deprived of formal
membership, nevertheless requires all nations to
refrain from any threat or use of force against
your territorial integrity or political independence.

The American people welcome you as an equal
partner in the great company of those who com-
prise the free world, a world which commands
vast moral and material power and resolution that
is unswerving. Those conditions assure that any
depotism which wages aggressive war dooms itself
to unutterable disaster.

The free world has no written charter, but it is
no less real for that. Membership depends on the
conduct of a nation itself; there is no veto. Its
compulsions to common action ai'e powerful, be-
cause they flow from a profound sense of common
destiny.

You are not alone. You will never be alone so
long as you continue to play worthily your part
in the great design of human freedom.

Tax Treaty Negotiations
To Open With Israel

[Released to the press June 16]

United States and Israeli tax officials are ex-
pected to meet at Washington on July 10, 1950,
for technical discussions of possibilities for im-
proving tax relations between the two countries
and to consider whether a basis exists for conven-
tions for the avoidance of double taxation with
respect to taxes on income and to taxes on the
estates of deceased persons.

If a basis for conventions is found, drafts of
the proposed terms will be prepared by the partici-
pants and submitted to their respective govern-
ments for consideration with a view to signing.

In preparation for the discussions, interested
persons are invited to submit information and sug-
gestions to Mr. Eldon P. King, Special Deputy
Commissioner of Internal Revenue, Bureau of In-
ternal Revenue, Washington 25, D. C.

July 3, 1950

ACHIEVING A COMMUNITY SENSE AMONG FREE NATIONS-
A STEP TOWARD WORLD ORDER

Address hy Secretary Acheson ^

For years to come, no Secretary of State will
speak at Harvard without tliinking of General
Marshall's address here 3 years ago. That speech
was an act of far-reaching importance. It may be
useful for his successor to put that act in a setting
in history and to show where it has led and where
it is now leading us.

Not 2 years had then passed from the end of the
war, but our hopes for the postwar world were
already dimmed.

In the anguish of war, the world had resolved
to build a new order in which peace, freedom, and
justice would be secure. These aspirations were
expressed in the Charter of the United Nations.
If ever a document spoke the feeling in the hearts
of all mankind, that document was the Charter.

It pledged that the nations would live together
as good neighbors; that they would unite their
strength to maintain the peace; that armed force
would not again be used, save in the common in-
terest ; that they would work together to advance
the well-being of all men everywhere.

That document was signed 5 years ago next
Monday.

It was essential to the success of this organiza-
tion, as Mr. Cordell Hull had said on April 9, 1944,
that the major powers recognize and harmonize
their basic interests.

The foreign policy of the United States was
firmly founded on the belief that this could be
done. We hoped that the union of our efforts with
those of our Allies in time of war could be con-

' Delivered before the Harvard Alumni Association,
Cambridge, Mass., on June 22 and released to the press
on the same date.

tinned. To this end, we were determined to ac-
commodate our basic interests with those of other
powers.

That determination found expression in our
actions.

Differences there were, but that was to be ex-
pected. We were prepared to look upon them as
the natural residue of years of mutual mistrust.
We were prepared to honor our wartime commit-
ments and the security requirements of other na-
tions. The overwhelming sentiment of our people
favored settlement of our points of friction, as
we regarded them, the immediate demobilization
of our armed forces and the inauguration of the
new era of peace.

But, as the ominous portents grew, doubt also
grew as to whether one of our late allies was, in
fact, intent on cooperation.

Review of Soviet Actions Since 1945

The year of the San Francisco conference was
also the year in which the Soviet Union renewed
intimidating pressures upon its neighbors, Iran
and Turkey. It was the year in which the Soviet
Union, in violation of agreements on which the ink
was scarcely dry, imposed governments of its own
choosing on Bulgaria and Rumania and supported
the imposition of a minority regime in Poland.

In the following year, 1946, the sequence of
Soviet actions filled out an unmistakable pattern.
This was the year in which the head of the Soviet
state made it clear in a speech to his people that the
wartime alliance with the non-Communist world
was at an end. This speech was followed by a
propaganda campaign of unrestrained hostility

Dspattmen\ of State Bulletin

against our country, which has continued to this
day.

This was the year also in which Soviet leaders
began a program of assistance to Communist-dom-
inated guerrillas in Greece and increased their
l^ressure on Turkey for control of the Straits.
This was the year when Soviet action in Germany
foreshadowed its intention to break up the four-
]iower control arrangement and to Sovietize the
Eastern zone, which it controlled. This was the
year in which the Soviet Union walked out of the
Security Council when called upon to honor its
agreement to withdraw its troops from Iran.

In this year, also, the Soviet control of Hungary
was consummated. In this year, the international
Communist movement began its efforts to block
the political and economic recovery of France and
Italy by strikes and other disruptive activities of
its parties in these countries.

The pattern was plain. Wherever the force of
Soviet arms prevailed, the Soviet Union would
take over virtual control. Where Soviet armed
forces could not reach, the international Commu-
nist movement was used to gain control by subver-
sion.

American Response to Soviet Actions

Three events which took place in 1947 helped to
crystallize the American response to Soviet con-
duct.

The first of these was President Truman's mes-
sage to Congress of March 12, requesting fimds for
the Greek- Turkish Aid Program. In his message,
the President declared it to be the policy of the
United States —

... to support free peoples who are resisting attempted
subjugation by armed minorities or by outside pressures.

. . . We must assist free peoples to work out their own
destinies in their own way.

The second event of 1947 was the speech of Gen-
eral Marshall from this platform on June 5th.

Its purpose was the revival of the working econ-
omy of the world so that free institutions could
exist.

Less than 1 month later, the Soviet Foreign Min-
ister, Mr. Molotov, walked out of the conference
at Paris at which the European Recovery Program
was launched.

That the Soviet Union would not only refuse
to participate in the European Recovery Program
but would also sabotage the effort was made ex-

plicit 2 months later at the founding of the Com-
munist Information Bureau.

There, the Soviet delegate announced that the
Soviet Union would bend every effort in order
that the European Recovery Program be doomed
to failure.

The Soviet effort to defeat the program did not
succeed. But its decision to obstruct rather than
participate did much to sharpen the cleavages of
a divided world.

The third event in 1947 which helped to mark
and to crystallize a development in American
thinking was the London meeting of the Council of
Foreign Ministers, and General Marshall's report
to the American people upon his return, on De-
cember the 19th.

In analyzing the reason for the frustration we
had encountered in our efforts to reach an agree-
ment with the Soviet Union on Germany, General
Marshall concluded — and this was a significant
step in the development of our thinking — that until
the political vacuum created by the war had been
filled by the restoration of a healthy European
community, we would not be able to achieve any
genuine agreements with the Soviet Union.

Agreements between sovereign states, General
Marshall reminded us, are usually the reflection
and not the cause of genuine settlements.

This was the issue, he said : we would not have
a settlement until the coming months had dem-
onstrated whether or not the civilization of West-
ern Europe would prove vigorous enough to rise
above the destructive effects of the war and restore
a healthy society.

As the issue became understood in these terms
by the American people and the other people of
the Western world, they responded with a succes-
sion of measures looking toward the strengthening
of the free world.

The pace of this response was quickened by the
Communist seizure of Czechoslovakia, 2 months
later.

The formation of the Western Union and the
signing of a defense treaty at Brussels in the early
months of 1948 gave expression to the European
resolve to unite both political and military strength
in the common defense.

This country, in statements by the President and
a resolution of the Senate, announced its support
of these efforts and its desire to help them.

In his inaugural address of January 20, 1949,
the President announced the intention of the

July 3, 7950

United States to enter into a treaty for the defense
of North Atlantic Area and to supply military
assistance to free nations.

Success of U.S. Efforts
To Strengthen Free World

In the 17 months which have since passed, we
have witnessed the rapid emergence of the North
Atlantic community as a political reality.

An unj^recedented rate of economic recovery
has now brought the productivity of Western
Europe, for the most part, above prewar levels.
Long-range economic problems are being met with
vigor and initiative. The nations of the North
Atlantic community are building a common de-
fense system for the primary purpose of prevent-
ing any further acts of aggression against this
area.

These measures of coalescence and of strength
evidence the determination of the free world that
the Soviet Union shall not, by coercion or subver-
sion, destroy the independence of free states.

Wherever free men and their governments have
been determined to preserve their freedom and
their independence and where assistance from the
United States could help them to do so, we have
given our help. Our aid is a supplement and not
a substitute. We have seen, in China, that even
help on a great scale cannot replace the will of the
people and their goveinment to preserve their
independence.

Elsewhere in the world, the assistance and en-
couragement we have given to men who were
stoutly helping themselves have been of decisive
importance. In accordance with our American
traditions and the responsibilities which our times
have thrust upon us, we have exercised a position
of leadership in strengthening the free world.

In the period we have been discussing, there
have been a number of Secretaries of State in this
country. There has been, however, but one Presi-
dent. The successive decisions — and they were
hard decisions — by which this policy has been
developed and applied were made by the President.

The consistency of purpose reflected in these
decisions, which I have enumerated, is evident to
all in retrospect. They are successive signposts,
with a constancy of destination.

Our goal has not changed. We continue to strive
for the fulfillment of the aspirations to which we
dedicated ourselves in the war. We seek to realize
the principles of the Charter of the United Na-

tions— a just and lasting peace, modei'ation and
mutual respect among nations, the advancement of
the well-being of mankind.

Our efforts to move toward this goal by agree-
ment among nations have been confronted witli a
great obstacle. That obstacle is the inordinate
ambition of the Soviet leaders, which is based on
their delusions about the non-Communist world.

We are taking measures which will enable us to
surmount this obstacle and move on toward our
objective. This is the meaning of our efforts to
strengthen the free world.

Strengthening Measures To Prevent War

I have said before — and it cannot be said too
often — that war is not inevitable. It is the deter-
mined purpose of this country, and of the like-
minded nations working with us, to prevent war.
We are building our strength in order that we may
eliminate the conditions which could give rise to
war, and we are on the threshold of a new period
in the successful forward-movement of this effort.
We face this new period with confidence, but we
must be very clear in our minds about our purposes
in the times that lie ahead.

We do not arm for purposes of conquest. Our
strength is a shield, whose purpose is twofold.

First, our strength is essential to a progressive
and successful resolution of the difficulties which
today beset the international community.

The obverse of General Marshall's conclusion
after the London meeting of the Council of For-
eign Ministers is that when the political vacuum
has been filled by the restoration of a healthy
European conmiunity, greater progi'ess will be
possible in settling differences in the world.
Strength is not a substitute for discussion and
accommodation.

As the leaders of the Soviet Union come to
appreciate that their analysis of the world situa-
tion and their policies flowing from that analysis
have been incori'ect, the possibility for reasonable
settlements of matters affecting the stability and
progress of the international community will
increase.

Until the Soviet leaders do genuinely accept a
"live and let live" philosophy, then, no approach
from the free world, however imaginative, and no
Trojan dove from the Communist movement, will
help to resolve our mutual problems.

This does not mean that discussion should not
take place or that every effort should not be made

Dapartment of Slate Bulletin

to settle any questions which are possible of
settlement.

It is our policy to be, as General Marshall put
it, the first to attend at international conference
tables and the last to retire.

We shall continue, through diplomatic channels
and through the United Nations, to keep open
every possibility for the adjustment of differences,
and we look forward confidently to the day when
the gradual process of accommodation will begin
to make itself felt.

To this end, we shall continue to give unfaltering
support to the United Nations. In addition to the
constructive work it is now doing, the United
Nations is a symbol of our hopes for harmony
among nations.

The second purpose of our strength is to enable
us to carry ahead a creative relationship with the
other nations of the free world. Our traditions
and our self-interest direct us toward the great
constructive tasks before us among the peoples of
the free world.

Democracy is a dynamic idea in the world.
Many millions of people look to this country for
leadership in applying both the moral and the
practical idea of democracy to the problems which
we and they face. It is our responsibility to dem-
onstrate the unlimited creative possibilities of the
democratic process for "better standards of life
in larger freedom," in the language of the United
Nations Charter.

Community Sense Among Free Nations

It is a fact of considerable importance, although
hardly recognized, that much of what the free
world has been doing to build its strength has
been in itself a great creative effort. The means
by which free men have sought to strengthen their
defenses have led, perhaps to some degree uncon-
sciously, to a community sense among free nations.
Both the North Atlantic community and the com-
munity of the American states are institutions
founded on pi'inciples which must eventually pre-
vail in a wider world.

Unlike the alliances of a former day, these
associations among states produce a community of
peoples where no dominance exists, a community
which is based on generous and willing coopera-
tion and on the primacy of individual liberty.
These are communities in which rules of mutual
aid and self-help are cardinal and in which the
duty and responsibility of aiding other free peo-

Ju/y 3, 1950

892500—50 3

pies to achieve their own development in their own
way are fully recognized.

Thus, the weaving of a community sense among
the nations who have joined their strength in these
common efforts is a substantial step toward the
realization of a world order based on consent and
dedicated to peace and progress. It has accom-
plished, in a great area of the world, a fuller reali-
zation of the principles of the Charter of the
United Nations since it has advanced international
cooperation to maintain the peace, to advance
human rights, to raise standards of living, and to
promote respect for the principle of equal rights
and self-determination of i^eoples.

The great effort in which we are engaged to
build a North Atlantic community is not merely
a means. It is in itself a creative act of historic
significance.

It is often true in history that men acting under
immediate compulsion are only partly aware of
the great consequences of what they have set in
motion. Measures taken to suit a narrow purpose,
if conceived in harmony with man's moral nature,
may leave a great creative legacy.

The barons at Runnymcde were seeking relief
from the oppressive and arbitraiy actions of a
despotic king, but the principles they enunciated,
embodied in the Magna Carta, laid the basis for
the restraints upon the state which are funda-
mental to individual liberty.

The complaints of the American colonists about
taxation, which might conceivably have been
settled through diplomatic negotiation, instead,
gave rise to that enduring statement of the in-
alienable rights of man, the Declaration of
Independence.

It is in the nature of democracy to recognize
that the means we choose shape the ends we
achieve. In a democracy, there are no final ends,
in the sense of a Utopia.

The followers of Karl Marx endure the dictator-
ship of a police state in the delusion that they are
ascending to a classless society. But a democratic
society camiot employ means which belie and
indeed destroy the possibility of achieving its
goals. Democratic society, by its conduct from
day to day, from week to week, and from year to
year, is creating its own future.

If we would continue to move toward our goal
of a world order in which peace, freedom, and
justice may be secure, the means we choose to
{Continued on page 38)

KEEPING PEACE IN THE CARIBBEAN AREA

ty Edward A. Jamison

On April 8, 1950, in the Council Chamber of the
Organization of American States (Oas), in the
Pan American Union building at Washington, the
representatives of 21 nations of the Western Hem-
isphere took part in an event of profound impor-
tance to peace and security among their own
governments and of significance to the peace of
the world. Meeting as representatives of govern-
ments of sovereign equality, these members of the
Council of the Oas, who were acting provisionally
as Organ of Consultation under the Rio treaty,
brought to a successful conclusion (without a dis-
senting vote in 6 hours of continuous voting and
debate) the second and third successful applica-
tions of that inter- American pact to controversies
between American states.

Here was a convincing demonstration of inter-
American solidarity in action. For over 3 months,
the consultative body of the Oas dealt with charges,
by one or another government of the Caribbean
area, that other American governments or their
officials had tolerated or even openly supported
activities directed from abroad against their own
existence. During that period, an Investigating
Committee of five members of the Organ of Con-
sultation carried out an intensive and thorough
examination within all the countries directly con-
cerned of the factual bases of these charges and
produced an objective and frank report.

The report, Which has been made public, was
the basis upon which the Organ of Consultation
on April 8 took firm and constructive action. It
approved resolutions which (1) made clear the
culpability of certain of the accused governments;
(2) called upon these governments to take st«ps

to remove the causes of the difficulties and to restore
their relations to a normal, friendly basis; (3) in-
dicated that repetition of the disturbing events
might well require more extreme action under the
Eio treaty ; and (4) laid the groundwork for other
general action to eliminate the causes of underly-
ing difficulties.^

Controlling International Strife Among Countries

The problems that revolutionary irregularities
create are not new in the general area of the Car-
ibbean, elsewhere in the Americas, or, for that
matter, in the world. For generations, and fre-
quently even in recent years, armed groups and
individual adventurers have sought by various
means to overthrow by force one or another of the
established governments of the area. Nor is such
action necessarily a strange phenomenon among
countries that had originally achieved indepen-
dence by revolutions, at times with the active
assistance of other governments and peoples.
However, the growth of concepts of international
order and the development of procedures for
making them efi'ective have produced an increas-
ing recognition of the fundamental fact that gov-
eriunents have a responsibility, if only as an
aspect of maintaining their own independence, of
preventing irregular activities which they can
control and which have the purpose of starting or
promoting civil strife in neighboring countries.

' For full texts of the resolutions approved on Apr. 8,
1950, see Bulletin of May 15, 1950, p. 771. Copies of the
resolutions, which have been issued in English, Spanish,
French, and Portuguese, may also be obtained from the
Pan American Union, Washington, D.C.

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

This purpose was the meaning of the action that
the American Republics took in 1928 at Habana
when manj' of them signed a treaty proscribing
sucli activities. Such, also, has been one of the pur-
poses, since that time, of numerous other inter-
American actions.

In 1947, the American states drew up the Inter-
American Treaty of Reciprocal Assistance, "the
Rio Treaty," which provides inter-American ma-
chinery for dealing not only with armed attack
or serious thieats from outside the hemisphere and
with open conflicts between American states but
also with any other fact or situation that ''might
endanger the peace of America" and "that affects
the inviolability or the integrity of the territory or
the sovereignty or the political independence of
any American State." The quoted language is
from article 6 of that treaty.

Applying the Rio Treaty

The Rio treaty became effective in December
1948 when the necessary ratifications by 14 gov-
ernments were completed. Shortly thereafter,
Costa Rica invoked the treaty, and its procedures
were applied to a dispute between that country
and Nicaragua, a dispute which was settled to the
satisfaction of both parties by their concluding,
on February 21, 1949, and subsequently ratifying,
a treaty of friendship. This settlement marked
the successful culmination of the first application
of the Rio treaty.^

On January 3, 1950, an American state again
invoked that treaty. The Government of Haiti,
through its representative on the Council of the
Oas, Ambassador Joseph L. Dejean, on that date,
requested the Chairman of the Council, Ambas-
sador Luis Quintanilla of Mexico, to p)lace before
that body charges by Haiti that the Government
of the Dominican Republic had committed acts of
intervention which affected the territorial inviola-
bility, the sovereignty, and the political independ-
ence of Haiti. The charges also included the
accusation that officials of the Dominican Govern-
ment had aided in the preparation of a conspiracy
in which an armed band was to overthrow the
established Government of Haiti. This armed
band, according to the charge, was proceeding
from the Dominican Republic under the leadership
of a former Haitian army officer. Colonel Roland,

* For an account of the situation by W. Tapley Bennett,
Jr., see Bxjlletin of June 5, 1949, p. 707.

who had been in exile in that country for some time
and whose activities had been the basis of earlier
action by Haiti under inter-American procedures
for settling disputes. Although Haitian officials
had thwarted the conspiracy, Haiti held that the
situation Mas sufficiently serious to warrant action
under article G of the Rio treaty.

Chairman Quintanilla lost no time in calling a
meeting to consider the Haitian invocation of the
treaty. Wlien the representatives gathered on
January 6, the Haitian Ambassador, who had only
recently been welcomed as the new representative
of his Govermnent on the Council, expounded fur-
ther the bases of the Haitian complaint.

Ambassador Joaquin Salazar of the Dominican
Republic replied by reading a formal note in
which, in the name of his Government, he not only
denied categorically the Haitian charges but also
called upon the Council to apply the terms of the
Rio treaty to the situation which the Dominican
Republic claimed had developed as a result of
failure of several other govenunents of the Carib-
bean over a period of years to carry out their
international obligations. This situation, he in-
dicated, had endangered and continued to endan-
ger the sovereignty of his government.

Debate on the Haitian Charges

The debate which ensued demonstrated that
most of the Council members clearly felt that valid
grounds existed for putting the treaty procedures
into effect. Whether this action should be taken
with respect to the specific charges presented by
Haiti alone, or whether the more general situation
presented by the Dominican Government (in
which other countries figured) should be dealt,
with as well was not, at first, clear. Actually, the
Council produced no definitive decision on the
issue at the January 6 meeting, but the importance
of the charges that Ambassador Salazar brought
out was recognized by reference to them in the
preamble of the resolution finally approved.

The resolution set for the precise decisions, how-
ever, on applying the treaty and declared the
need for a full investigation of the facts. The
Council followed the procedure for which an im-
portant precedent had been set in the Costa Rica-
Nicaragua case of the previous year. In the first
place, the Council convoked the Organ of Consul-
tation and called a meeting of Ministers of Foreign
Affairs, with time and place of the meeting not
specified.

July 3, 1950

In conformity witli article 12 of the treaty, the
Council itself may act provisionally as Organ of
Consultation until the meeting of Foreign Minis-
ters takes place. The significant precedent of the
Costa Rica-Xicaragua case showed, however, that
acting provisionally as consultative organ without
the actual holding of the Foreign Ministers meet-
ing, the Council may reach a satisfactory resolu-
tion of the problem.

Appointment of Investigating Committee

The second important decision embodied in
the resolution of January 6 was that the Council
should appoint an Investigating Committee to de-
termine the facts upon which subsequent decisions
of the consultative organ would be based. The
view that an impartial baring of the facts of the
situation would in itself have a salutary effect upon
the uneasiness which had so long characterized
relations among governments in the area had con-
siderable basis. Whatever delay might be entailed
was felt to be expendable, in this instance, because,
on the whole, the charges did not point to a threat
or international dereliction of such imminence that
a thorough search for the truth could be dispensed
with. Many of the charges dealt with activities
which, however important in producing a state
of tension, were incidents of the past.

Shortly after the meeting of January 6, Chair-
man Quintanilla announced the appointment of
the representatives on the Council to the Investi-
gating Committee. These were Ambassadors
Jose Mora of Uruguay, Eduards Zuleta Angel of
Colombia, Guillermo Gutierrez of Bolivia, and
Paul C. Daniels of the United States, and Minister
Alfonso Moscoso of Ecuador. At an organiza-
tional meeting, held the following day. Ambassa-
dor Mora was chosen chairman of the group.

The resolution approved by the Council on
January 6 stipulated that the Bases de Actuacion —
or terms of reference — of the Investigating Com-
mittee would be described in detail in a subsequent
meeting of the Council, acting provisionally as
Organ of Consultation. Accordingly, a second
meeting was held on January 11, in which it took
significant actions and set important precedents.

Decision To Discuss Dominican Case Separately

Perhaps, the most significant decision of this
meeting was that the Organ of Consultation should
take up the Haitian and Dominican petitions sep-
arately— dealing with the note presented by Haiti

as "Case A" and with that presented by the Do-
minican Republic as "Case B." In a sense, the
necessities of the voting procedures of the Rio
treaty, which provides that "the parties directly
interested" shall be excluded from voting when
the Organ of Consultation is dealing with a situa-
tion or dispute between American states, dictated
this decision. The Haitian petition was based on
charges directed against the Dominican Govern-
ment, while the note of the latter Government re-
ferred to a more general situation, covering a
considerably longer period, in which several other
goveriunents w ere charged with international dere-
liction. On the basis of agreement on the distinc-
tion between the two cases, the Council considered
Haiti and the Dominican Republic to be the
directly interested parties in "Case A"; and it also
approved the document setting forth the functions,
powers, and attributes of the Investigating Com-
mittee for dealing with that case.

The Council generally assumed that the Investi-
gating Committee would examine the facts of both
cases. A difficult problem, however, arose when
the Council attempted to determine, for voting
purposes, which governments were "directly in-
terested" in "Case B." Although the Dominican
note had mentioned several governments, Ambas-
sador Salazar indicated early in the meeting that
his Government regarded only Haiti, Cuba, and
Guatemala as parties to an existing dispute or sit-
uation. Since the immediate issue concerned the
voting privilege and since Guatemala, because of
not having ratified the Rio treaty, held no voting
right, the problem was reduced to determining
whether Cuba and Haiti were, in fact, directly
interested parties to "Case B." Considerable de-
bate followed on this issue with general insistence
that a government may become "directly inter-
ested" either through accusing others or by being
itself accused of an international wrongdoing.
This determination the Council decided did not
in itself imply culpability on the part of the ac-
cused. Finally, the necessary two-thirds majority
concluded that the Dominican Republic, Haiti, and
Cuba were the Governments, among those which
had ratified the treaty, which were "directly in-
terested" in "Case B."

The Council, thus, ajiproved the Investigating
Committee's Bases de Actuacion as applicable to
both cases. This document described in detail the
powers and functions of the Committee, which had
been charged, in general terms, in the resolution of

Department of State Bulletin

January 6 Mitli conducting an "on the spot investi-
gation of the facts and their antecedents." Its
terms authorized the committee ". . . to hear wit-
nesses, to receive depositions and to avail itself
of any other sources of" information" which it
miglit consider pertinent to its task. Furthermore,
the terms instructed it to prepare a report or re-
ports containing a recital of the facts, pertinent
documentary material, and its conclusions as a
result of the investigation. Meetings of the Com-
mittee and the transmittal of its report to the
Organ of Consultation were to be in private session,
but the Council decided that the consultative body
would decide on the documents to be made public
as well as other action that might be considered
advisable.

The Investigating Committee planned to visit
the countries which figured in the charges of cur-
rent importance; but since it could accomplish
considerable preparatory work at Washington,
the Committee immediately initiated a series of
meetings in which it heard the representatives of
governments, including the Foreign Minister of
Haiti, high Foreign Office officials of the Domini-
can Republic, and others. In this manner, the
Conunittee prepared the way for a thorough and
intensive examination in the countries concerned
of the basis for charges which were both specific
and complex.

Investigating Committee's Examination

This examination, which began in Haiti, lasted
for more than 3 weeks, during which time the
Committee also visited the Dominican Republic,
Cuba, Guatemala, and, briefly, Mexico. The ac-
tivities of the Committee, in this period, included
interviews both of a formal and informal nature
with the Presidents and high officials of each of
the directly interested governments, hearings of
the testimony of numerous witnesses who had
either participated in or were acquainted with
details of revolutionary irregularities, visits by
members of the Committee to areas in which
activities were either alleged to have been carried
on or which had significance for some other reason,
to say nothing of constant reviewing and ordering
of data which were acquired. The Committee left
no doubt that it was determined to make its inves-
tigation as thorough as it was impartial. The
work of the Committee, particularly in this phase,
together with the assistance given by all the gov-

ernments involved, offers an encouraging example
of the effective implementation of procedures for
peaceful settlement undertaken by a regional col-
lective security body.

When the Committee returned to Washington, it
undertook immediately the task of winding up the
investigation and analyzing the extensive data
compiled regarding the facts of the cases. Fur-
thermore, the Committee was obligated to point
out what it believed to be the basic factors con-
tributing to Caribbean irregularities and offer its
conclusions regarding steps which could eliminate
these factors and thereby avoid repetition of the
difficulties. It gave considerable attention to pre-
paring general considerations and drafting 5 reso-
lutions, covering all essential aspects of the
problem, which the Organ of Consultation may
propose for action.

The Council of the Organization, acting pro-
visionally as Organ of Consultation, received the
Committee's 73-page report at a special meeting in
the Council Chamber on March 13, 1950.^ The
Council had decided, in its previous meeting, that
the session in which it received the report would
begin as a closed meeting. No objection was ex-
pressed though a suggestion was made that the
doors be opened immediately to the press and
public.

The report itself was withheld from publication
for 6 days in order that the representatives of dis-
tant governments might have time to forward it
to their Foreign Offices. The manner in which
the contents of the document appear to have been
kept in confidence until the date of publication,
which was March 20, 1950, is a striking example
of the cooperative spirit which all the members of
the Council showed throughout the entire period.

Wlien the consultative body released the con-
tents of the document, the governments and the
public quickly appreciated the work the Commit-
tee had accomplished. This report was no white-
wash, nor was it, in any sense, a surrender to dip-
lomatic camouflage. Rather, it was a straight-
forward, clear-cut analysis of the factual basis of
charges made by two governments, with conclu-
sions which fixed responsibility and proposed steps

' The full test of the report of the Investigating Com-
mittee has been Issued in English, Spanish, and French by
the Pan American Union, Washington, D.C., as Docu-
ment C-I-67. Copies may be obtained by writing to the
Pan American Union.

July 3, 1950

for a solution of the immediate and underlying
difficulties. On March 22, Secretary Acheson ex-
pressed the full support of the United States for
the Committee's conclusions and recommendations
and i^raised the Committee for the thorougluiiess
and objectirlty of its work.*

Because oi its sigiiiGcance in the development of
the inter-American peace-keeping machinery, as
well as its importance in setting forth the basic
facts and considerations in the cases dealt with
the report itself merits careful attention as a his-
toric document. The following presents a sum-
mary of certain of its highlights.

Summary of Highlights in the Report

The Committee examined, first, "Case A," re-
sulting from the Haitian petition of January 3.
It found that several of the charges by Haiti
against the Dominican Republic had considerable
basis in fact. Of these charges several concerned
the activities of two Haitian exiles who were said
to have engaged in attacks upon the Haitian Gov-
ernment by radio from Ciudad Trujillo. The
Committee held that failure of the Dominican
Government to prevent incitement of this kind was
in violation of the Joint Declaration that each gov-
ernment had signed on June 9, 1949, in which each
had indicated that it would not tolerate activities
in its territory that had as their object the disturb-
ance of the internal peace of the neighboring
country. Recognizing the particular importance
of this Joint Declaration, as well as the subsequent
reaffirmation of it by the Dominican Government,
the Committee concluded that the Dominican Gov-
ermnent should have prevented certain of the
activities which were found to have taken place.

Of more immediate concern, however, was the
Haitian charge that the abortive plot of Novem-
ber-December 1949 (which Haitian police had
uncovered and suppressed) had involved, among
other things, contact between conspirators at
Port-au-Prince and the Haitian exile at Ciudad
Trujillo, ex-Colonel Astrel Roland, and that Do-
minican citizens and certain Government officials
had supported the preparations for the conspir-
acy. In this charge the Committee found much
truth. Not only did it establish the fact that a
conspiracy existed between persons in Haiti and
Roland for the purpose of overthrowing the Presi-
dent of Haiti, but it also found that certain Do-

* Bulletin of Apr. 3, 1950, p. 523.

minican officials aided this action, which a
Dominican diplomatic officer at Port-au-Prince
had transmitted $2,000 to the conspirators, and
that a Dominican citizen and former high official
". . . played a principal part in said cooperation."

In dealing with the petition of the Dominican
Republic, "Case B," the Committee indicated that
the complexity and scope of the complaints made
difficult an analysis of each in detail. After it
had dealt with certain examples of events, in-
dicative of the "state of unrest" of previous years,
which illustrated that no one government had felt
exclusively the problem of revolutionary activity,
it did analyze three of the situations which formed
a main basis of Dominican charges and the relation
of those to the "present situation." It found that
two of these, the Cayo Confites expedition of 1947
(which Cuba eventually thwarted) and the attack
at Luperon in June 1949 (in which one plane
actually made a water landing in Dominican ter-
ritorial waters) had gained considerable headway
as a result of toleration and, in some cases, open
support by officials of two Governments, Cuba in
the former case and Guatemala in the latter.

A third Dominican accusation was that fresh
preparations for warlike action against the Domin-
ican Government were undertaken, with aid from
the Cuban Red Cross, late in 1949 in Cuba. The
accusation also charged that the Cuban Red Cross
had engaged in constructing an airfield in Cuba
which was to be used as a starting point for an
attack on the Dominican Republic. In this case,
the Committee found that, although certain un-
usual circumstances surrounded the control of and
activities carried on in the name of the Cuban or-
ganization, the proposed airfield clearly could not
be used to facilitate a military invasion of the Do-
minican Republic.

Although the Committee found that the irregu-
larities in connection with the above specific Do-
minican complaints were matters of the past, it
stated that certain of the circumstances which
had contributed to them continued to exist and that
these were giving rise to new factors "indicative of
an abnormal situation in the Caribbean zone."
Specifically, it found (1) that various groups of
exiles ". . . not only persist in their struggle, but
also seek surreptitious support from govern-
ments"; (2) that some governmental authorities
were indicating a willingness to keep these exile
groups; (3) that certain agents of revolutionary
movements were occupying and using official posi-

Departmenf of State Bulletin

tions for their revolutionary purposes; (4) that
collections of war materials used in earlier revolu-
tionary attempts and a ''professionally subversive
element in certain sections" which were insuffi-
ciently controlled still existed.

All of these facts led to the conclusion that ele-
ments remained which were likely to create war-
like situations.

After it had dealt with the immediate factual
situation in each case, the Investigating Commit-
tee set forth a series of basic factors which, it be-
lieved, had contributed to Caribbean irregularities
and presented conclusions on steps which the coun-
tries concerned might take to eliminate such fac-
tors and avoid repetition of the irregularities.

Among those factors upon which the Committee
recommended sj^ecific action to the Organ of Con-
sultation were :

1. The limitations of the 1928 Convention on
Duties and Eights of States in the Event of Civil
Strife.^ This treaty, the inter-American instru-
ment which is specific and detailed regarding the
duties of states in situations such as those which
had troubled the Caribbean area, required review
in order to determine whether it should be made
more adequate and up to date in fixing the obliga-
tions of states in preventing ". . . the prepara-
tion and carrying out of activities which have the
purpose of fomenting civil strife in other coun-
tries." Although some members made suggestions
for strengthening it, the Investigating Commit-
tee's primary recommendation was that competent
inter-American organs should study this matter
thoroughly to determine what effective measures
they could work out on the matter.

2. The problem of political asylees, refugees,
and exiles. In this connection, the Committee
noted explicitly the problems created by the exist-
ence of an increased number of political exiles
in the Caribbean area, some with sincere and
idealistic purj^oses and others whose motives were
adventurous or mercenary. This problem is, in-
deed, implicit in almost every phase of the Com-
mittee's report. Here, again, the Committee
proposed that competent organs of the Oas make
a careful study to determine whether further in-
ter-American action might be practical or
desirable.

3. The lack of adequate measures to give effec-
tiveness to the principle of representative democ-

July 3, T950

racy, particularly as reflected in the free electoral
process. The relevance of this fundamental prob-
lem, although not set forth in explicit terms, was
implicit in many phases of the situation which the
Committee had examined. The difficulty of find-
ing means within a framework in which the non-
intervention commitment is precise and specific,
for promoting adequate respect for representative
democracy is quite clear, but the proposal that the
matter be subjected to careful study underlined
the need for seeking such means.

One aspect of the relation of the principle of
representative democracy to inter-American com-
mitments was, however, thought worthy of clari-
fication : the Committee proposed that the Organ
of Consultation declare in precise terms that, what-
ever might be the need for giving representative
democracy more effectiveness, it could find no
justification for asserting that the promotion of
that principle authorizes a government or gov-
ernments to violate international commitments
regarding nonintervention.

4. The need for some means to assure fulfillment
of the recommendations which the Organ of Con-
sultation might make with regard to the problems
presented to it. The establishment of a committee
with adequate powers to observe compliance with
whatever steps the Organ of Consultation might
agree upon was, therefore, proposed.

On the basis of the facts presented, the conclu-
sions reached on the Haitian and Dominican com-
plaints, and these general considerations, the In-
vestigating Committee prepared drafts of resolu-
tions, based upon the consultative organ's drafts,
which, in effect, summarized the Committee's con-
clusions regarding the factual situation in each
case and the steps which might be taken to correct
them as well as to deal with the general situation.
These, together with certain additional proposals
on more general questions, were the matters on
which the Organ of Consultation based its action
of April 8, referred to above.

At the meeting on March 13, the consultative
organ agreed that it would give approximately 3
weeks for governments to examine the Investigat-
ing Committee's report and formulate their views
on its recommendations.

The consultative organ began its consideration
on April 3. In this meeting and in others on the
two following days, it heard the points of view of
various governments, including those most directly
involved, and, during this time, members presented

various amendments to the Investigating Commit-
tee's draft resolutions. The first of these meet-
ings took on added significance since Foreign Min-
isters Ernesto Dihigo of Cuba, Ismael Gonzalez
Arevalo of Guatemala, and Vilfort Beauvoir of
Haiti were present.

The consultative organ's action culminated these
preparatory meetings and also concluded con-
sideration on the two cases.

With regard to that case in which Haiti was the
petitioner, the resolution of April 8 indicates that
irregularities for which the Dominican Govern-
ment had responsibility were contrary to inter-
American principles and that, although the danger
to peace which they represented had been dis-
pelled, their repetition would call for further
action under the Rio treaty. The resolution notes,
however, that the repeal of war powers which
President Trujillo had obtained in December
1949 — a grant of special power to declare war
which had figured in the Haitian petition and on
which Cuba also had requested action by the Organ
of Consultation — together with Dominican legis-
lation to prevent subversive activities in its terri-
tory, demonstrated the intention of that Govern-
ment to maintain peace and prevent events of the
kind which had been the basis of the Haitian
complaint.

Nevertheless, the resolution formally requests
the Dominican Government to "take immediate
and effective measures to prevent government offi-
cials from tolerating, instigating, encouraging,
aiding or fomenting subversive and seditious
movements against other governments" and to
comply strictly with the Joint Declaration of June
9, observance of which was held to be equally the
responsibility of Haiti. Furthermore, the con-
sultative organ pointed out to both governments
certain means for strengthening their relations.
It requested both to make every effort, within
limits of constitutional authority, to avoid sys-
tematic and hostile propaganda against each other
or other American governments.

The resolution dealing with the case emanating
from the Dominican complaint contains a clear
indication that revolutionary irregularities had
been directed against the Dominican Republic in
Cuba in 1947 and in Guatemala in 1949. Further-
more, the resolution establishes the fact that offi-
cials of those governments had not only expressed
their sympathy with these movements but also had,
in some cases, lent them aid. Certain of the facts

determined were held to be contrary to basic inter-
American norms, and the resolution indicates that
the irregularities, if repeated, will call for further
action under the Rio treaty. In this case, the reso-
lution notes that declarations "formulated by the
Chief Executives of Cuba and Guatemala, to which
reference is made in the Report of the Committee,
constitute a guaranty against future recurrence
of acts of this kind."

The resolution formally requests the Govern-
ments of Cuba and Guatemala, however, to take
adequate measures to prevent the existence in
their territories of armed groups conspiring
against other countries and to control war materi-
als of such groups as well as any illegal traffic in
arms. Favorable action on the resolution brought
the withdrawal of several more drastic proposals
for change. As a result of an amendment to this
resolution, the responsibility of the Dominican
Government for action contrary to inter- American
harmony was declared, and that Government was
also called upon to take adequate measures to in-
sure absolute respect for the principle of non-
intervention. Subsequent portions of the resolu-
tion (1) make a request, similar to that described
above, regarding hostile propaganda of all four
directly interested governments; (2) call upon
Cuba and the Dominican Republic to settle speed-
ily an outstanding controversy; and (3) reaffirm
the 14 conclusions approved by the Inter-Amer-
ican Peace Committee on September 14, 1949, that
contained a general restatement of existing prin-
ciples pertinent to the international difficulties
among Caribbean countries.

As a means of insuring effective fulfillment of
steps that the Organ of Consultation agreed upon,
the Investigating Committee recommended the
establishmenc of a committee with authority to re-
quest and receive pertinent information and to
promote, if necessary, a new meeting of the con-
sultative organ itself. This proposal, involving
significant precedent for future action, caused a
degree of uneasiness on the part of certain repre-
sentatives who feared that it might impinge, in
some way, on the principle of nonintervention.
Mexico proposed certain amendments that tem-
pered such apprehensions, and the consultative
organ approved the creation of a continuing com-
mittee, provisional in character.

This committee, to which Chairman Quintanilla
appointed the five members who had served on the
Investigating Committee, is to inform itself of the

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

manner in which the two resohitions are carried out
and to report to all the American governments
within 3 months after April 8, and again when its
work has been completed. The committee, which
has been installed, has taken the name "Special
Committee for the Caribbean" and is under the
chairmanship of Ambassador Mora of Uruguay.
The consultative organ gave unanimous approval
in the April 8 meeting to the Investigating
Committee's declaration that the principles of rep-
resentative democracy, of suffrage, and of partici-
pation in government do not authorize any gov-
ernment or group of governments to violate
inter-American commitments on nonintervention ;
the representative of Guatemala, although unable
to vote on the resolution, stated his Government's
full approval of the concept it expressed.

A fifth resolution, approved unanimously, stipu-
lates that the Council of the Oas, through its
competent organs, shall initiate studies of the diffi-
cult and complex questions that the Investigating
Committee propounded.

Such studies include the following subjects : (1)
the possibilities of stimulating and developing
the effective exercise of representative democracy,
with special emphasis on suffrage and the principle
of free elections; (2) means for strengthening and
improving the 1928 Habana Convention, prescrib-
ing measures governments should use to prevent
the preparation of activities designed to foment
civil strife in other countries ; and (3) the "regimen
of political asylees, exiles, and refugees."

That practical achievement rather than aca-
demic assessment is anticipated as a result of
these studies is attested by the careful stipulation
of procedures for handling them. These require
that, in the case of the 1928 Habana Convention,
a document be produced to be submitted directly
to the governments and that, on the other items,
topics be prepared for action at an Inter- American
Conference, the supreme organ of the Organization
of American States.

The consultative organ approved other resolu-
tions that urge the governments directly concerned
to normalize their mutual relations as soon as
possible and express the hope that governments
which have not ratified basic inter-American in-
struments will give this matter prompt attention.
Finally, the Organ of Consultation, after stating
that the members of the Investigating Committee
"have deserved well of the nations of America"

and merited a vote of "confidence and gratitude,"
formally terminated the action of the Council of
the Organization under the Rio treaty on the cases.

Conclusion

The success of international action may appear
to be measured in terms of resolutions and docu-
ments, detailed and often excessively wordy.
Nevertheless, the documents resulting from the
actions of the inter-American Organ of Consul-
tation summarized above reveal, in themselves,
achievements in the orderly development of free-
dom and international security in the Western
Hemisphere. Furthermore, many of the steps
which the various bodies took in producing that
finished work on specific cases constitute invalu-
able precedents which will either make the need
for future action less likely or strengthen the
means for meeting threats which, in the future,
may unfortunately occur.

The documents alone, however, can never tell
the whole story. Any impression that the 3
months in which the inter-American peace ma-
chinery was at work on these problems were com-
pletely devoid of rivalry, the struggle for political
advantage, or even hostility would be misleading.
Issues were involved which touch most directly
upon the sensitive spots in relations among the
American states. Basically, though, the spirit of
the "convivencia interamericana" — a term which
no English ti'anslation can adequately express —
characterized the proceedings from their begin-
ning to the successful outcome of the meeting of
April 8. This spirit was expressed in the unend-
ing efforts of all the members of the Investigating
Committee in their impartial search for facts,
in the cooperative assistance that the governments
directly involved gave to the Investigating Com-
mittee, and in the manner in which the losers as
well as those who had been successful accepted the
hotly debated issues, once they were solved.

The ultimate test of success for this venture in
inter-American peace-keeping will, of course,
depend upon the long-range results in reliev-
ing tensions and eliminating the basic causes of
the irregularities from which it stemmed. Early
indications of more than transitory success in this
regard are encouraging. In any circumstances,
the inter-American community has, once again,
demonstrated its capacity to use effectively the ma-
chinery for peace and security which it has
devised.

July 3, J 950

Upholding Principles and Rights

of Others in the Process of International Negotiation

hy Philip C. Jessup
Ambassador at Large '■

Negotiation is as old as human society. The
goal toward which we strive is the place where the
processes of negotiation eventually prevail and the
drums of war are silenced by the triumphant
symphony of peace. That is the goal of the for-
eign policy of the United States. International
negotiation is a process and means, not an end
in itself. To be successful, it must take place in
a situation where nations, for whatever reason, are
willing to reconcile their interests with each other.
The basic difficulty which we should keep in mind
in discussing the role of negotiation is the diffi-
culty of creating a situation wherein nations are
willing to reconcile and adjust their interests.

The process of international negotiation re-
quires concessions but not concessions at the ex-
pense of principles or of the rights of others. Ap-
peasement is again a distortion of negotiation and
creates instead of allaying tension.

There is unfortunately abroad in the world
today a philosophy which sees no evil in tension.
That philosophy, put into practice on a national
scale, is the natural and inevitable result of a dis-
regard of what the Charter of the United Nations
calls "faith in fundamental human rights, in the
dignity and worth of the human person." The
system of the Soviet police state, like that of the
similar Nazi regime, sees no value in the individ-
ual. From this point they move with some logic
and no humanity to the denial of the concept of
the equality of states which is one of the principles
on which the United Nations is based. The ])olice-
state system cannot confine its theory of brutal
suppression within its own frontiers. This is in-
deed the absolute power which corrupts absolutely.
In international relations, it results in the practice
which we witness constantly of denying the right
of smaller states to assert or even to formulate

' Excerpts from an address delivered at Hamilton Col-
lege, Clinton, N.Y., on June 11 and released to the press
on the same date.

their own policies. Some smaller states have un-
happily been forcibly sucked into the Soviet orbit
and are compelled as satellites to revolve around
the Soviet Union. That is why a Bulgarian can
be tried for treason, not to Bulgaria but to the
Soviet Union. That is why Yugoslavia is itself
considered traitorous — again to the Soviet Union.

Difficulty in Peaceful Adjustments With U.S.S.R.

The process of negotiations between a govern-
ment which, like ours, believes in freedom and a
government like that of the Soviet Union which
does not is obviously difficult. We have differ-
ent sets of values and different objectives. It is
difficult, but it is not impossible. There have
been situations in which we have negotiated with
the Soviet Union, and we are prepared to do so
again. Particularly we are always ready to carry
on that form of multipartite negotiation which is
the essence of the United Nations system. The
difficulty wliich for the time being blocks that
channel of negotiation is the refusal of the Soviet
Union to particijjate in the various organs, com-
missions, and committees of the United Nations
because they are unwilling to have the majority
decide how the question of Chinese representation
should be settled.

Control of Atomic Weapons

I should like to discuss by way of example one
question which is of prime importance and on
which the Soviet Union now refuses to negotiate
in the United Nations though called upon by the
General Assembly to do so. The question is that
of the international control of atomic weapons.

Immediately after the revelation to the world
of the discovery of the atomic bomb, in August
1945, the United States voluntarily took steps to
insure that the development of atomic energy
would be f)laced under international control and

Deparfmeni of Sfate Bulletin

that atomic energy would be used only for peace-
ful purposes.

The first step was a meeting between the Presi-
dent and the Prime Ministers of tlie United King-
dom and Canada in November 1945. The three
agreed upon a declaration calling for international
action under the United Nations.

A month later, in December 1945, the Secretary
of State met in Moscow with the Foreign Minis-
ters of the United Kingdom and Soviet Union
and agreed to sponsor a resolution in the United
Nations setting up an international Atomic
Energy Commission. This resolution was unani-
mousl}' approved by the General Assembly at its
first session in 1946, and a Commission was es-
tablished within the United Nations.

This Commission and its Committees held over
200 meetings extending over a period of almost 2
years. After thorough study, a majority of the
members of the Commission evolved the basic out-
lines of an effective international control system
for atomic energy. Only the Soviet Union and
its satellites disagreed with the majority findings.
They proposed a completely different plan which
the majority found not to be a plan for effective
control. In 1948, the Commission finally reported
the deadlock which had developed to the Security
Council.

The deadlock in the Commission was paralleled
in the Council. The Council was barred from
approving the Conmiission's majority plan by the
Soviet veto.

The reports of the Commission were then con-
sidered by the General Assembly, and 40 member
governments voted to approve the Commission's
proposals. Only the Soviet bloc voted against
them. The Assembly called on the Commission
to resume its work. It also called on the per-
manent members of the Commission — the perma-
nent members of the Security Council plus Can-
ada—to consult together to determine if a basis
for agreement existed. The Soviet representative
opposed this proposal. He stated that there was
no basis for consultation, and that such discus-
sions were unnecessary.

After the Assembly session, the Commission
did start meeting again. But it found itself still
confronted by the impasse created by the Soviet
Union's unwillingness to negotiate on the basis of
a plan wliicli would provide adequate safeguards.
After long deliberation the Commission concluded
that no useful purpose was being served by con-
tinuing discussion until such time as the permanent
members found a basis for agreement.
_ Last fall, at New York, after several consulta-
tions among the permanent members had resulted
m no progress, the General Assembly considered
further the work of the Atomic Energy Com-
mission. The Assembly reaffirmed its support
for the United Nations plan. The Assembly again
called for consultations among the permanent
members and requested them to explore all avenues

July 3, 1950

which might lead to agreement. These consulta-
tions were begun. They were suspended in Jan-
uary of this year as a result of the Soviet walk-out.

The ]3lan evolved by the majority of the members
of the United Nations involves the concept of an
international agency which would manage all
atomic activities on behalf of the signatory nations.
This plan was based on proposals submitted by
the United States in 1946. We are justly proud
of these proposals. We offered, in effect, to turn
over our atomic resources and capacity to an inter-
national authority so that these resources could
benefit all mankind, and so that the world would
not live under the threat of an atomic war. Our
original proposals were modified and elaborated
in negotiations although their essential objectives
were retained. The plan finally worked out was
not an "American plan" but oiie formulated and
approved by the overwhelming majority of the
United Nations. It is a United Nations plan.

Tlie international agency to be established under
this scheme would :

a. Own all uranium and thorium, the basic
source materials, from the moment they are mined
until they are finally consumed as nuclear fuel.

b. Own, manage, and operate all facilities using
or producing dan<rcrous quantities of nuclear
fuel — such as Oak Ridge and Hanford.

c. License all nondangerous facilities and activ-
ities operated nationally.

d. Carry on research.

e. Exercise thorough-going rights of inspection
and survey in order to locate new ore sources and
to detect or prevent clandestine activities. Mili-
tary reservations would not be exempted from
inspection.

The agency would be a servant of the signatories.
The principles governing the agency's policies in
the production and stockpiling of production fa-
cilities would be spelled out in the agency's charter.
The treaty would also provide for the prohibition
of the manufacture, possession, and use of atomic
weapons. And it would make that prohibition
effective by the control system it established. The
treaty would provide for the disposal of existing
stocks, would prescribe the stages whereby controls
would go into effect, define violations, and provide
effective enforcement measures.

The Soviets reject the concept of a strong inter-
national authority. Atomic operations would
continue mainly on a national basis. Their pro-
posals provide that :

a. Atomic weapons would be "prohibited" by a
paper convention.

b. An International Control Commission would
be established but its powers would be limited to
making recommendations to governments and to
the Security Council, where the veto would apply.
Any one of the permanent members of the Coun-
cil could thus prevent action.

c. Nations would continue to own materials and

own, operate, and manage all dangerous atomic
energy facilities.

d. Atomic plants would be subject to some kind
of "periodic" inspection. But the Soviet Union
has not been clear as to how this inspection would
work. The Control Commission would have "ac-
cess" to facilities and "acquaintance" with pro-
duction operations, but inspections would be "pe-
riodic" and "normally inspectors will visit only
declared plants."

The basic issue between the United Nations
plan and the Soviet plan is that of effective versus
ineffective control, of real control versus a pre-
tense of control. The United Nations plan recog-
nizes that the nature of atomic energy production
dictates the need for close control at all stages of
development. From the time it leaves the mine
until it reaches the end product, the production of
atomic energy is a Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde: It
can be turned to beneficial or destructive uses. It
can transform itself from Dr. Jekyll to Mr. Hyde
at any moment and at any stage.

No halfway measures — such as "Monday and
Thursday" inspections or "periodic" inspections —
would offer assurance against the diversion of
nuclear fuel from peacetime to military use. Our
federal or any state government would never be
satisfied with a system for inspecting banks or
meat-packing plants which was based on the no-
tion that the institution to be inspected should be
warned in advance when the inspectors would
arrive. Can we as a nation accept such a notion
where our very national existence may be
involved ?

The Soviet control convention is so devoid of
effective safeguards tliat all that remains in effect
is a convention on prohibition — a paper conven-
tion on prohibition. Such a convention is no bet-
ter than the good faith of its signatories. This
we must realize, as a result of bitter experience,
is not good enough. It is indeed worse than no
plan at all. It might deceive some with its il-
lusory security, but it would not in fact provide
the substance of security. It might bring atomic
disarmament in the West. But the West would
have no assurances as to the atomic disarmament
actually carried out in the Soviet world, behind
the Iron Curtain.

MEASURES FOR SECURITY

The difference between the United Nations and
the Soviet plans reflects a fundamental cleavage
between the aims of the majority and the minority.
Representatives of Canada, China, France, the
United Kingdom, and the United States reported
as follows to the General Assembly in 1949 :

All the Sponsoring Powers other than the U.S.S.R.
put world security first and are prepared to accept in-
novations in traditional concepts of international co-
operation, national sovereisnty and economic organiza-
tion where these are necessary for security. The
Government of the U.S.S.R. puts its sovereignty first and

is unwilling to accept measures which may impinge upon
or interfere with its rigid exercise of unimpeded state
sovereignty.

The willingness to accept some restrictions on
sovereignty is one of the great and hopeful at-
titudes in the world today. The Schuman pro-
posal with respect to the European coal and steel
inditstries is the most recent example of this pro-
gressive spirit.

The behavior of the Soviets in the atomic energy
negotiations shows these features :

1. Distrust of the proposals of other nations.

2. An effort to get concessions from other
nations without yielding anything themselves.

3. Bitter denunciation of the opposition, and
vicious propaganda attempts to sow discord and
arouse suspicion.

4. Finally, steady freezing of Soviet opposition,
as though their own propaganda had a certain
self-propagating quality.

This last feature is most disturbing. Yet the
Soviet system seems to have this effect. Public
statements from the Kremlin set the tone and
give the cue to many organizations and publica-
tions throughout the world which, in some form
or other, repeat the Kremlin's ideas. These are
then reported back as the sentiment of the peoples
of the world. These reinforcing echoes of their
own voices apparently solidify the original views
of the Kremlin. It is as though, in the words of
Mr. X, in his now famous article in Foreign
Affairs :

It is an undeniable privilege of every man to prove
himself right in the thesis that the world is his enemy;
for if he reiterates it frequently enough and makes it the
bacliground of his conduct he is bound eventually to be
right.

It seems that there could be no clearer statement
of what is happening in the Atomic Energy Com-
mission of the United Nations. At the start of
the negotiations, either from motives having to do
with their internal situation, or from suspicion
of the motives of others, the Soviet representatives
took the position that the majority plan was a
hostile gesture. Failing to make an objective
study of the elements essential to any real con-
trol, and with no informed body of public opinion
which could cause them to reconsider their original
position, the Kremlin has seemed to become in-
creasingly committed to a course which is as
dangerous to the Soviet Union as it is to the rest
of the world.

The appropriate forum for atomic energy nego-
tiations as approved by the last General Assembly
is the forum of the six permanent members of the
United Nations Atomic Energy Commission. The
United States stands ready at all times to take part
in the consultations in that forum whenever the
Soviet Union chooses to return to it.

We believe the United Nations plan is an effec-
tive plan. It has our support. But, as the Presi-
dent said last February,

Department of State Bulletin

... It has our support not because of its form or its
words Init because we believe it would achieve effective
control. The stakes are too large to let us, or any nation,
stand on pride of authorship. We ask only for a plan
that provides an effective, workable system — anything
less would be a sham agreement. Anything less would
increase, not decrease, the dangers of the use of atomic
energy for destructive purposes. We shall continue to
examine every avenue, every possibility of reaching real
agreement for effective control.

But we will not rely merely on a paper conven-
tion "prohibiting" the use of the atomic bomb.
We must not only prohibit the use of the bomb,
we must also establish a system which will make
that prohibition effective. That is the crucial dif-
ference between the United Nations and Soviet
plans. It is the difference between eliminating or
continuing to live under the threat of atomic war.

Strength as Basis for Negotiating With Soviets

These negotiations illustrate the difficulty of
peaceful adjustments with the Soviet Union. It
would be dishonest to deny that the attitude and
action of the Soviet Union creates a threat to the
peace of the world. Their actions do belie their
peaceful protestations. They are devoting a
huge proportion of their resources to military pur-
poses. There is nothing in their history to indi-
cate that this great military machine of theirs is
dedicated to the cause of peace and freedom.
There is abundant evidence to the contrary.
There is nothing in their political literature or
philosophy to indicate that they respect weakness
even though it were weakness inspired by benevo-
lence and good will. Neither we nor other nations
who share our view of life and dedication to free-
dom are willing to place ourselves at the mercy of
the Soviet Union. The fate of the Baltic states,
of a Czechoslovakia, of a Hungary, or a Poland
is not one which we crave for ourselves or our
children.

In the face of such an aggressive imperialist
system as that of the Soviet Union, there is a pre-
requisite to negotiation. That prerequisite is
strength. It must be a strength sufficient to be
apparent to the rulers in the Kremlin. It must
be sufficient and sufficiently long maintained to
convince those rulers that their policies, their will
cannot be imposed. It must be an economic
strenght which continues to demonstrate the fal-
lacy of their Marxian concept that capitali.sm con-
tains the seeds of its own decay. It must be a
military strength which negates the possibility of
a repetition of the tragic histories of armed sub-
jection. It must be a spiritual strength which not
only stands firm but which marches confidently
forward to greater and greater well-being for the
common man and woman in every part of the
■world. On the basis of such strengtli in the free
world, the Kremlin may decide that it too has an
interest in avoiding conflict and reducing tensions.
Then negotiations may lead to their rightful goal.

Army Attache, Declared Persona
Non Grata, Withdrawn From Rumania

[Released to the press June 21]

The Rumanian Oovemment has declared persona non
grata Capt. Herschel Butsinpiller, United States Assistant
Army Attach^ of the American Legation, Bucharest, Ru-
mania. In conformity with customary diplomatic prac-
tice, the United States Government is tvithdraimng Cap-
tain Butsinpiller hut has denounced the basis of the
Rumanian Government's demand.

The United States Charge d' Affaires at Bucharest, Murat
Williams, on June 20 delivered informally to the Rumanian
Foreign Office the reply of the United States Government
as follows:

The Government of the United States has taken
note of the manner in which the Rumanian Gov
ernment has misrepresented an action on the part
of certain members of the American Legation re-
lating to the disposal of some obsolete small arms
ammunition. The United States Government has
also noted the Rumanian Government's demand in
this connection for the recall of Captain Herschel
Hutsinpiller, Assistant United States Army At-
tache at Bucharest.

It is illustrative of the conduct of diplomatic
relations by the Rumanian Government that,
through its organs of propaganda, it should have
launched a new virulent attack against the Ameri-
can Legation and the United States Government
on the basis of an artificially exaggerated and
distorted incident, without so much as first seeking
an explanation through the American diplomatic
representatives in Rumania.

It is also characteristic that, after stating on
June 9 that the Rumanian Government "would
leave it up to the United States Government to
decide what to do about Captain Hutsinpiller" and
without awaiting the transmission of a reply from
the Government of the United States, the Ruma-
nian Ministry of Foreign Affairs on June 14 should
have peremptorily demanded the recall of Captain
Hutsinpiller.

The quantity of the ammunition in question was
negligible. It was disposed of in an open manner
which belies assertions that this action had a clan-
destine or secretive character. The false construc-
tion placed by the Rumanian Government-con-
trolled press on the intentions of the United States
Government and its representatives in connection
with this insignificant incident is patent on its face.

The United States Government is withdrawing
Captain Hutsinpiller. At the same time, it repu-
diates the alleged justification for the Ministry's
demand. The use which the Rumanian authorities
have made of this episode and the abuse, on this as
on former occasions, of the right to declare a
foreign official unacceptable can only lead to the
conclusion that the Rumanian Government's action
is not really based upon the incident or upon the
conduct of Captain Hutsinpiller but is part of a
deliberate and centrally directed policy, being car-

July 3, 1950

ried out throughout Eastern Europe, to mterrupt
the normal conduct of diplomatic relations between
the United States and the states of that area.

On June 6, 1950, the official organ of the Ruma-
nian Workers Party (Communist) launched a new
propaganda attack upon the American Legation
at Bucharest by publishing a letter signed by a
janitor of its service attache's office. The letter
stated that the writer had been an eye witness to
the destruction by two enlisted men attached to
that office of "four cases and a small sack contain-
ing ammunition for pistol and automatic weapons."
This ammunition was said to have been thrown
into Lake Snagov, a small lake in the environs of
Bucharest, from the jetty of a "villa" occupied by
Captain Hutsinpiller.

The Rumanian press as a whole took up the
Government-inspired cry. It related the incident
to trials of the past few years which are purported
to demonstrate espionage and subversive activities
of the American and British diplomatic missions.
The most recent of these trials produced alleged
evidence that the British Legation was hiding
arms to be supplied to groups of Rumanian dissi-
dents. The ammunition-dumping incident was
given a similar interpretation.

The underlying facts of the situation appear
to be that the reported incident involved the dispo-
sal of a small quantity of outdated ammunition
left over from the supplies of the United States
military representation of the Allied Control Com-
mission for Rumania. During the Armistice
period, that mission represented the United States
as one of the three occupying powers. It was with-
drawn in December 1947 in conformity with pro-
visions of the Treaty of Peace with Rumania.

In addition to Captain Hutsinpiller, who has
been on duty in Rumania since March 191:7, the
Americans mentioned in the Rumanian account
are Sgt. John K. Reynolds and Corp. Byron L.
Bird. The two enlisted men left Rumania June
10 according to previous schedule, in line with the
current, reduction of our Legation's staff. Captain
Hutsinpiller is leaving June 2.5.

Rumania Protests Against Travel
Restrictions on Personnel in U.S.

Statement by Secretary Acheson

[Released to the press June 23]

Over the past 3 years, the Rumanian Govern-
ment has subjected our diplomatic representation
at Bucharest to progressively severe restrictions,
impediments, and discourtesies. These not only

drastically curtail the performance by our mission
of its normal diplomatic and consular functions,
but they also violate the existing consular agree-
ment with Rumania and effectively deprive our
chief of mission of rights and privileges to which
he is entitled by his special responsibilities under
the Treaty of Peace with Rumania.

For a year now, there have been in effect in
Rumania travel restrictions which, as adminis-
tered by the Rumanian authorities virtually con-
fine our representatives to Bucharest and its imme-
diate environs. Theoretically, these restrictions
are imposed on all diplomatic personnel. Theo-
retically also, our people may travel to a few des-
ignated" places by special permission. This is of
little value since the Rumanians as a rule delay un-
duly or fail to issue travel permits.

At the time the travel restrictions were imposed,
we were given informal assurance that we had only
to ask and we would be permitted to travel to
Constanza in connection with incoming shipments
for the Legation. This, like many other such as-
surances, has proved hollow.

The Rumanian Government has deprived our
personnel of premises for which they had rental
contracts at destinations where they might be per-
mitted to go. AVlien no other accommodations are
available, it is of little use for them to travel
there.

Altogether the restrictions and harassments to
which our mission in Rumania has been subjected
by the Rumanian Government are more compre-
hensively severe than those of any other country.
We do not accept the thesis that we must conduct
our relations toward one state and its representa-
tives, regardless of its behavior toward us and our
representatives, in the same way as we would
toward other states.

The institution on May 25 of the travel-pro-
cedure applicable to personnel of the Rumanian
Legation here involves reciprocity of diplomatic
comity, a principle which the Rumanians have em-
jjhasized to an extreme degree.^ As the Rumanian
Government was informed, our administration of
the travel procedure will be carried out with a view
to the current treatment of our representatives in
Rumania.

It is interesting to note that the Rumanian pro-
test recognizes that the imposition of travel re-
strictions by a receiving country upon the official
personnel of a sending country constitutes a lim-
itation on the normal activity of a diplomatic mis-
sion. When the Rumanian Government is disposed
to remove the restrictions which it has placed on
the travel of our representatives in Rumania, we
will be ready to alter appropriately the restrictions
which are presently applicable to ijersonnel of the
Rumanian Legation here.

' Bulletin of June 5, 1950, p. 921.

Department of State Bulletin

The Need for an International Trade Organization

Views of Howard W. McGrath
Attorney General

The following letter dated April I4, 1950, was sent
from the Attorney General, Hoicard W. McOrath, to the
Chairman of the House Committee on Foreign Affairs,
John Kce.

My dear Mr. Congressman : This is in response
to your request for the views of the Department
of Justice with respect to tlie approval of tlie
Havana Charter for an International Trade Or-
ganization, commonly known as the Ito Charter.

The Department of Justice is primarily inter-
ested in Chapter V of the Ito Charter which
would provide the first international machinery
intended to cope with restrictive business prac-
tices. Since others will, or have, commented on
other parts of the proposed Charter which relate
more directly to the work of their particular de-r
partments, I would like to direct my remarks to
Chapter V.

As you are well aware, production and market-
ing of important raw materials and manufactured
commodities in world trade are frequently con-
trolled by cartels, combines and other restrictive
international business arrangements. In their de-
sire to increase profits and avoid competition these
organizations engage in practices which reduce
the volume of world trade and employment, such
as division of fields of activity, division of mar-
kets, allocation of production or export quotas,
restriction on new capacity and fixing of prices
and terms of sale. The policy of the United
States to eliminate restrictive practices in the
foreign trade of our country has long been es-
tablished.

In the successful negotiation of the Ito Char-
ter, in general, and Chapter V in particular, fifty-
four other nations important in international
trade have now indicated a willingness to work
together with the United States in extending the
general policy of eliminating restrictive practices
in world trade. The success of our Government's,
negotiations in getting such an agreement among
other delegations representing different national
experiences and traditions is in itself an accomp-

Jo/y 3, 7950

lishment, and a real step toward breaking down
barriers to world trade.

I should like to point out at the outset that the
Ito Charter clearly preserves the strength of our
competitive traditions and our antitrust laws and
their administration. The Ito is not given the
power to interfere with the domestic laws or pro-
cedures of the United States or any other nation.

The Charter contains an express provision that
"no act or omission to act on the part of the Or-
ganization shall preclude any Member from en-
forcing any national statute or decree directed
toward preventing monopoly or restraint of
trade." This provision keeps inviolate our anti-
trust legislation. It says in effect that if the Ito
does not find a violation of the Charter in a partic-
ular instance, but the United States nevertheless
finds that its laws have been violated, the right of-
the United States to enforce its laws is not im-
paired. Ito decisions or recommendations — or
lack of them — do not supersede, supplant or mod-
ify in any way our antitrust laws.

The Charter should provide a useful instrument
for extending the principles of our competitive
system to other countries and thereby render the
enforcement of the antitrust laws themselves in-
creasingly effective. While the Charter does not
write a Sherman Act for the world, it does set a
pattern, clearly recognizable as American in ori-
gin, for curbing restrictive business practices, such
as I have pointed out above, affecting international
trade. The Organization would be empowered to
receive complaints from Member governments,
initiate investigations, hold hearings, and make
reports and recommendations for remedial meas-
ures, with final action resting in the individual
governments. Subscribing nations, agreeing to
this pattern, commit themselves to take such meas-
ures as will achieve the objective of the Charter.
The effect of this commitment is to raise the stand-
ards of other countries for curbing cartels and
restrictive business practices toward our level —

and not the reverse. In this respect, the Charter
helps to extend the concepts of free enterprise
upon which our own antitrust laws are based.

The commitment of Members to take full account
of Ito recommendations for remedial action in
specific instances, can be most useful in prevent-
ing cartels and conspiracies in restraint of interna-
tional trade. Thus, the Ito provides machinery
for effecting a substantial measure of international
cooperation in avoiding restrictive business prac-
tices, and bringing about an increasing acceptance
of free enterprise objectives.

Frequently, in the course of investigating or
prosecuting restraints upon our foreign commerce
we find some of the guilty parties wholly outside
the jurisdiction of our courts. This means that
while we may cut off some parts of the offense,
complete and adequate relief cannot always be
achieved. The result in some cases may be to limit
the effectiveness of the Justice Department and of
our courts in eliminating violations of our anti-
trust laws. The Charter provides methods which
are designed to overcome these jurisdictional limi-
tations.

One of these methods consists of voluntary con-
sultation among Member nations. Wlien a 'Mem-
ber nation considers that in any particular in-
stance a business practice has or is likely to have
a harmful effect, it may consult directly with other
Members concerned "with a view to reaching mu-
tually satisfactory conclusions." Or, if Members
wish, they may request the Ito to facilitate such
consultation. This contemplates a cooperative
method by which Members may agree among
themselves as to the best means of dealing with
mutual problems of international cartels or re-
strictive business practices. In carrying out cor-
rective measures, each Member is to act within its
own jurisdiction in accordance with its own con-
stitution and economic organization. In this way
irritating jurisdictional obstacles may be avoided.
Another method for avoiding jurisdictional bar-
riers consists of cooperation among Members "for
the purpose of making more effective within their
respective jurisdictions any remedial measures
taken in furtherance of the objectives of this
Chapter and consistent with tlieir obligations
under other provisions of this Charter." By this
procedure restrictive or monopolistic practices
may be eliminated voluntarily and amicably.

The possibilities of Ito success, so far as Chapter
V is concerned, seem good. I am sure that many
other governments have had unhappy experiences
with international cartels and would welcome a
mechanism through which harmful practices of
these enterprises might be curbed. It is hearten-
ing to note that Sweden, Norway, Canada, and
more recently Great Britain, have passed statutes
providing for continuing commissions to investi-
gate restrictive business practices within their
respective jurisdictions. These laws will help im-
plement their obligations under the Charter. The

significance of the new British law relative to the
Ito Charter was indicated in the House of Lords
during debate on the Bill. In asking for a second
reading on July 5, 1948, the First Lord of the
Admiralty (Viscount Hall), stated:

The present Bill was drafted at the same time as the
Charter was being given its final shape at Havana. The
two documents are entirely consistent; the procedure of
the International Trade Organization will, like our own,
be one of investigation into particular restrictive arrange-
ments to try to establish what effects they have on inter-
national trade. If at a later date His Majesty's Govern-
ment ratify the Charter, and are called upon to take any
action under Chapter V, this Bill will provide us with
adequate power to carry out our international obliga-
tions . . . The Bill is in line with developments in other
countries ... It has the support of all Parties in its
general purpose.

Furthermore, the Austrian Government has re-
cently introduced antitrust legislation in its Par-
liament, a commission under the Minister of Com-
merce of Denmark is drafting anti-monopoly
legislation, and the French Government is also
drafting an antitrust law.

The significant progress that has been made in
assisting the economic recovery of Western Europe
has made possible an increasing emphasis under
the ERP for the creation of an integrated Western
European economy. The liberalization of trade
and the creation of a wide Western European
market as measures to obtain increased produc-
tivity, lowered costs, a higher standard of living
and the establishment of a viable European econ-
omy can be promoted by the Ito. Following the
termination of the European Recovery Program
the Ito may well become the most important
single international instrument for the attain-
ment of an expanding competitive international
trade. Under Chapter V machinery can be estab-
lished to help prevent the regrowth of cartel ar-
rangements which would nullify by private agree-
ment these economic objectives. Promptness in
getting the Ito under way will, I believe, help to
facilitate world economic recovery and promote
continued prosperity.

The Ito represents the high water mark in
efforts to establish a cooperative intergovern-
mental organization equipped with the machinery
and procedures necessary to solve common prob-
lems in the field of international business prac-
tices. If the Ito is competently and adequately
staffed, and properly administered, it should in
my opinion, prove most helpful in eliminating in-
ternational restrictive cartel arrangements which
have worked hardships on American and foreign
economies alike. This, in turn, would also remove
an important source of international ill-will gener-
ated by restrictive cartel activities. Participation
in the Ito could provide a valuable supplement
to the unilateral action to which we have in the
past been limited.

I therefore believe we should support this Char-
ter and should participate actively in the Ito.

Department of State Bulletin

Commission on Migratory Labor

FIRST MEETING HELD

The President's Commission on Migratory La-
bor held its first meeting on June 23 to hear facts
presented by Government agencies on migi'atory
labor problems.

The President appointed Maurice T. Van Hecke,
now professor of law, North Carolina University,
Chairman of the Commission, and named as the
other members:

Robert E. Lucey, Catholic Archbishop of San Antonio,

Texas
Paul Miller, Chief, University of Minnesota Extension

Service
William Leiserson, former Chairman of the Mediation

Board
Peter H. Odegard, University of California, Professor,

Political Science

The number of migratory workers in the United
States has been variously estimated at from 1 to 5
million workers.

During this meeting the Commission received
data from the Department of Labor on manpower
problems, existing legislation and housing diffi-
culties ; from tlie Department of Agriculture con-
cerning industries using migratory labor; from
the Department of State on international compli-
cations ; from the Department of Justice on immi-
gration aspects; and from the Federal Security
Agency on welfare problems.

The Commission will formally open its offices
on June 26, in Temporary Building V at 14th
Street and Pennsylvania Avenue, NW.

The two Washington meetings will form the
background for public hearings in various sections
of the nation, beginning in California and Texas.

Previous studies have shown that in many in-
stances living standards among migratory workers
and their families are markedly below those of
other elements in the population, and that because
of the absence of a fixed residence as well as their
specific exemption in various laws, the migratory
workers are frequently denied the benefits of Fed-
eral, as well as State and local, social legislation.

Besides the domestic migratory workers, the
United States since tlie war has imported farm
laborers, principally from Mexico. The migra-
tion from Mexico is governed by an international
agreement which was renegotiated on several
occasions, the current agreement having been
signed in 1949. A number of organizations have
taken a stand against the further importation of
alien workers, contending that domestic labor can
fulfill the needs in the United States, while other
organizations have insisted that agricultural pro-
duction would suffer if employers could not fall
back upon alien labor in instances where domestic
labor proved to be insufficient.

EXECUTIVE ORDER 101291

By virtue of the authority vested in me as President of
the United States, it is hereby ordered as follows :

1. There is hereby created a Commission to be known as
the President's Commission on Migratory Labor, which
shall consist of a Chairman and four other members to be
designated by the President.

2. The Commission is authorized and directed to inquire
into

(a) social, economic, health, and educational condi-
tions among migratory workers, both alien and domestic,
in the United States ;

(b) problems created by the migration of workers, for
temporary employment, into the United States, pursuant
to the immigration laws or otherwise ;

(c) responsibilities now being assumed by Federal,
State, county and municipal authorities with respect to
alleviating the conditions among migratory workers, both
alien and domestic ;

(d) whether sufficient numbers of local and migra-
tory workers can be obtained from domestic sources to
meet agricultural labor needs and, if not, the extent to
which the temjMrary employment of foreign workers may
be required to supplement the domestic labor supply ; and

( e ) the extent of illegal migration of foreign workers
into the United States and the problems created thereby,
and whether, and in what respect, current law enforce-
ment measures and the authority and means possessed by
Federal, State, and local governments may be strength-
ened and improved to eliminate such illegal migration.

3. The Commission shall make a report of its studies to
the President in writing not later than December 15, 1950,
including its recommendations for Governmental action,
either legislative or administrative.

4. In connection with its studies and inquiries, the Com-
mission is authorized to hold such public hearings and to
hear such witnesses as it deems appropriate.

5. To the extent that the studies, inquiries, and recom-
mendations of the Commission involve considerations of
international arrangements and policies the Commission
shall consult with the Department of State.

6. All executive departments and agencies of the Fed-
eral Government are authorized and directed to cooper-
ate with the Commission in its work and to furnish the
Commission such information and assistance, not incon-
sistent with law, as it may require in the performance of
its duties.

7. During the fiscal year 1950, the compensation of the
members of the Commission (including traveling expenses
and per-diem allowances) and the exjpenditures of the
Commission shall be paid out of an allotment made by the
President from the appropriation appearing under the
heading "Emergency Fund for the President" in the Inde-
pendent Offices Appropriation Act, 1950 (Public Law 266,
approved August 24, 1949) ; and during the fiscal year 1951
such compensation and expenditures shall be similarly
paid from any corresponding or like appropriation made
available for the fiscal year 1951. Such payments shall be
made without regard to the provisions of section 3681 of
the Revised Statutes (31 U.S.C. 672), section 9 of the Act
of March 4, 1909, 35 Stat. 1027 (31 U.S.C. 673) and such
other provisions of law as the President may hereafter
specify.

8. Thirty days after rendition of its report to the Presi-
dent, the Commission shall cease to exist unless otherwise
determined by further Executive Order.

Haekt S. Teuman
The White House
June S, 1950

' 15 Fed. Reg. 3499.

July 3, 1950

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Calendar of Meetings'

Adjourned During June 1950

Port-au-Prince Bicentennial Exposition Port-au-Prince ....

Ilo (International Labor Organization): Governing Body: 112th Session Geneva

Congress of International Association for Protection of Industrial Property Paris

International Agricultural Genetics Congress Rieti, Italy

IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization):

Council: Tenth Session Montreal

Assembly: Fourth Session Montreal

Legal Committee: Sixth Session Montreal

High Frequency Assignment Planning Meeting for European-Mediter- Paris

ranean Region.
United Nations:

Economic and Social Council:

Economic Commission for Latin America: Third Session Montevideo

Economic Commission for Europe: Fifth Session Geneva

Technical Assistance Conference Lake Success

Who (World Health Organization) :

Executive Board: Sixth Session . Geneva

International Meeting of Tonnage Measurement Experts Stockholm

Fag (Food and Agriculture Organization) :

Latin American Nutrition Conference: Second Session Rio de Janeiro ....

International Congress for the Education of the Deaf and Dumb . . . Groningen, Netherlands .

Biennial Session of the International Committee on Weights and Measures . Sfevres, France ....

Conference of World Organization for Brotherhood Paris

Brussels Colonial Fair, Third Brussels

Tenth International Ornithological Congress Upsala, Sweden ....

Twenty-fourth Session of the Journees M6dicales Brussels

International Wool Conference Stockholm

Nineteenth General Assembly of the International Criminal Police Com- The Hague

mission.

Third Session, International Wheat Council London

International Oil Shale Conference Glasgow

In Session as of June 30, 1950

United Nations:

Advisory Council for Libya Tripoli

Visiting Mission to Trust Territories in the Pacific Pacific Area

Trusteeship Council: Seventh Session Lake Success

International Law Commission: Second Session Geneva

Permanent Central Opium Board: 55th Session, Narcotic Drugs Super- Geneva

visory Body: 34th Session; and Third Joint Session of Pcob and
Ndsb.

National Capital Sesquicentennial Celebration Washington

Ilo (International Labor Organization):

33rd International Labor Conference Geneva

UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organiza-
tion) :

Seminar on Adult Education Salzburg, Austria . .

Swiss-Allied Accord, Four Power Conference on Bern

IcAO Council: Eleventh Session Montreal

Caribbean Commission: Tenth Meeting Martinique

Sugar Council, International: Meeting of Special Committee London

North Atlantic Council: Planning Board for Ocean Shipping London

Electric Systems, International Conference on Large High Tension: 13th Paris

Biennial Session.

' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
34 Department of Sfafe Bulletin

Feb.

12-June 8

May

26-June 3

Mav

29-June 3

May 30-June 2

May

16- June 5

May

30-June 20

May

30-June 20

June

6-June 26

June 5-

Mav

31-June 14

June

12-15

June

2-16

June

2-16

June

5-13

June

5-9

June

8-11

June

10-25

June

10-17

June

10-14

June

12-18

June 19-21

June

19-20

June

26-

Apri

U-

Apri

June

14-

April

15-

June

18-

June

20-

June

22-

June

26-

June

26-

June

27-

June

29-

Calendar of Meetings — Continued
Scheduled July 1-August 31, 1950

United Nations:

Economic and Social Council:

Eleventh Session Geneva July 3-

Commission on Narcotic Drugs: Fifth Session Lake Success Aug. 21-

Subcommission on Statistical Sampling: Fourth Session Lake Success Sept. 5-

Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East, Regional Conference Bangkok September

of Statisticians.

Special Committee on Information Transmitted under Article 73(e) of Lake Success Aug. 18-

the Charter.

General Assembly; Fifth Session Lake Success Sept. 19-

Meeting of the Council, International Organization for Standardization . Geneva July 3-

Thirteenth International Conference on Public Education Geneva July 6-

General Assembly of the International Union of Biological Sciences . . . Stockholm July 7-

International Congress of Private Law Rome July 8-

Eighth International Congress of Agricultural Industries Brussels July 9-

Fao (Food and Agriculture Organization):

International Meeting on Dairy Technology Reading, England . . . July 10-

Meeting of Fisheries Technologists Bergen, Norway .... Sept. 17-

Fourth World Power Conference London July 10-

Seventh International Botanical Congress Stockholm July 12-

Unesco (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organiza-
tion):

Seminar on "The Teaching of Geography as a Means of Developing Montreal July 12-

International Understanding."

Seminar on the Improvement of Textbooks, Particularly of History Brussels July 12-

Books.

Seminar on the Role of Public and School Libraries in Adult Education. Malmo, Sweden .... July 24-

North Atlantic Council: Military Production and Supply Board .... Copenhagen July 12-

Cancer, Fifth International Congress of Scientific Research and Social Paris July 17-

Struggle Against.

Sixteenth International Congress of Ophthalmology London July 17-

Second Meeting of the International Commission for the Regulation of Oslo July 17-

Whaling.

Fourth A.ssembly, World Organization of the Teaching Profession . . . Ottawa July 17-

Third International Conference of the Legal Profession London July 19-

Sixth International Congress of Radiology London July 2.3-

Sixth International Conference of Directors of Mine Safety Research . . Paris July 24-

Stations.

Sixth International Pediatrics Congress Ziirich July 24-

Fourth International Congress of Soil Science Amsterdam July 24-

International Institute of Administrative Sciences: Eighth International Florence July 25-

Congress.

Congress of the International Union for Prevention of Venereal Disease . Ziirich July 29-

First United States International Trade Fair Chicago Aug. 7-

Eleventh International Exhibition of Cinematographic Art Venice Aug. 8-

Radio and Television Exhibition Copenhagen Aug. 11-

Penal and Penitentiary Commission, Twelfth Congress of the Interna- The Hague Aug. 13-

tional.

International Congress of the History of Science Amsterdam Aug. 14-

Fifth International Congress on Microbiology Rio de Janeiro .... Aug. 17-

Edinburgh Film Festival Edinburgh Aug. 20-

Izmir International Trade Fair Izmir Aug. 20-

Eighth Convention of Speech and Voice Disorders Amsterdam Aug. 21-

Itu (International Telecommunication Union):

Fifth Session, Administrative Council Geneva Aug. 21-

Extraordinary Administrative Radio Conference The Hague Sept. 1-

First International Congress on Archives Paris Aug. 23-

Vineyards and Wine, Sixth International Congress on Athens Aug. 23-

International Federation for Housing and Town Planning: 20th Interna- Amsterdam Aug. 27-

tional Congress.

Ninth International Congress of the Historical Sciences Paris Aug. 28-

Ilo-Who Meeting of Joint Committee on Industrial Hygiene Geneva Aug. 28-

First International Conference on Alcohol and Traffic Stockholm Aug. 30-

International Conference of Mathematicians Cambridge, Mass. . . . Aug. 30-

iuly 3, 1950 35

U.S. Delegations to
International Conferences

Methods and Techniques of Adult Education

The Department of State announced on June 19
that the United States delegation to the Inter-
national Seminar on Methods and Techniques of
Adult Education, to be held near Salzburg,
Austria, June 18-July 29, is as follows :
Chairman

Watson Dickerman, assistant professor of education,
School of Education, University of California, Berkeley,
Calif.

Delegates

Ruth M. Brewer, assistant to director, Chicago Council on
Foreign Relations, Chicago, 111.

Robert H. Levin, national education director. Amalgam-
ated Clothing Workers, Headquarters, Congress of
Industrial Organizations, New York, N. Y.

Thomas A. Van Sant, director. Adult Education, Baltimore
Board of Education, Baltimore, Md.

The United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization (Unesco) and the World
Federation of United Nations Associations are
jointly sponsoring the Seminar, which is being
convened in response to a recommendation of the
Unesco International Conference on Adult Edu-
cation held at Elsinore, Denmark, in June 1949.

The objective of the Seminar is to make a practi-
cal study of the methods and techniques of adult
education with a view to contributing to the ad-
vancement of such methods and techniques ; arriv-
ing at a general concept of adult education and
practical conclusions with regard to leadership
training and seminar techniques; and preparing
documents designed to assist adult education
leaders and workers not present at the Seminar.
An integral part of this study will be consideration
of ways and means by which adult education can
be used to promote international understanding.

It is expected that the Conference will establish
four working groups to deal specifically with the
following topics : organization and administration
of adult education programs; intellectual and
scientific training techniques employed to foster
the adult's mental development; the economic and
social training of adults; and methods and tech-
niques appropriate for initiating adults into the
arts, as well as activities suitable to the educational
use of spare time.

Ornithological Congress

The Department of State announced on June 12
that Dr. Alexander Wetmore, Secretary of the
Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C., has
been named chairman of the United States dele-
gation to the Tenth International Ornithological
Congress which convened at Upsala, Sweden, on
June 10. Dr. Wetmore is also President of the

Congress. Assisting Dr. Wetmore are the follow-
ing United States delegates :

Dr. Herbert Friedmann, curator of birds, United States

National Museum, Washington, D.C.
Dr. Alfred O. Gross, professor of biology and director,

Kent Island Scientific Station, Bowdoin College,

Brunswick, Maine
Frederick C. Lincoln, assistant to the director. Fish and

Wildlife Service, Department of the Interior
Dr. S. Dillon Ripley, curator of birds, Peabody Museum,

Yale University, New Haven, Conn.
Dr. Josselyn Van Tyne, curator of birds. Museum of

Zoology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.

The Tenth Congress, the first since World War
II, was organized by the Ornithological Society
of Sweden. On the program of the Congress are
included discussions on bird bandino^ and bird
migration. In addition, delegates will have an
opportunity to observe the migration, hibernation,
estivation, and feeding habits of various birds
through excursions before and after the Congress
to many points of ornithological interest, such as
breeding places, in Sweden.

The United States is one of the few nations in
which ornithology is a matter of practical govern-
ment administration. This fact is the result of
the enactment of such basic laws as the Lacey Act,
the Migratory Bird Treaty Act, which imple-
mented conventions between the United States and
Canada and between the United States and Mexico,
and the Migratory Bird Conservation Act.

Consular Conference

The Department of State announced on June 5
the opening of a 3-day consular conference at Rio
de Janeiro. The American Ambassador to Brazil,
Herschel V. Johnson, ranking Embassy officers,
representatives from the Department, and prin-
cipal officers of the consular posts in Brazil are
meeting to discuss subjects of common interest,
with emphasis on consular and administrative
matters. This conference is being held in pursu-
ance of the Department's policy of bringing
together departmental and field officers fop
discussion of mutual problems.

Representing the Department are the following
officers :

William P. Hughes, executive director, Bureau of Inter-
American Affairs

Elbridge Durbrow, chief-designate. Division of Foreign
Service Personnel

William K. Ailshie, special assistant, OflSce of Consular
Affairs

Principal officers from consular posts attending
the conference are :

Julian C. Greenup, consul general, Sao Paulo

V. Lansing Collins, Jr., consul, Porto Alegre

George E. Miller, consul, Recife

Robert C. Johnson, Jr., consul, Salvador

Arthur G. Parsloe, consul, Santos

Williams Beal, vice counsul, Vit6ria

George T. Colman, consul, BeWm

Richard A. Godfrey, vice consul, Fortaleza

Department of State Bulletin

Technical Assistance

The Department of State annoimced on June 13
that the following United States delegation has
been designated to attend the first meeting of the
United Nations Technical Assistance Conference
which convened at Lake Success on June 12.

United States Representative

Willard L. Thorp, Assistant Secretary for Economic Af-
fairs, Department of State

Deputy United States Representative

Walter Kotschnig, Director, Office of United Nations Eco-
nomic and Social Affairs, Department of State

Advisers

Eleanor Dennison, Office of United Nations Economic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

William O. Hall, Director, Office of International Admin-
istration and Conferences, Department of State

Louis K. Hyde, Jr., United States Mission to the United
Nations, New York

Paul W. Jones, Jr., Division of International Administra-
tion, Department of State

In recognition of the need for a broad attack on
problems of economic development, the President
of the United States, in his inaugural address of
January 20, 1949, called upon all countries to pro-
vide technical assistance for the development of
underdeveloped areas, such assistance to be ren-
dered where practicable through the United Na-
tions and the specialized agencies of the United
Nations.

After the Secretary-General of the United Na-
tions, pui-suant to a resolution of the Economic
and Social Council, had, in May 1949, issued a
report on the extent and manner in which the
United Nations and the specialized agencies could
contribute to a technical assistance progi'am, the
Economic and Social Council, meeting at Geneva
in the summer of 1949, studied such questions as
how the expanded program should be planned and
coordinated, how it should be financed, and how
it should be administered.

Arrangements were made, and, subsequently,
unanimously approved by the members of the
United Nations in the General Assembly in the
fall of 1949, for annual programs of technical
assistance to be planned by the secretariats of the
various agencies acting together; for the over-all
program to be financed through a special account
to be established by the United Nations, to which
all governments belonging to any of the partici-
pating organizations would be invited to contrib-
ute; for this fund to be distributed among the
organizations on the basis of agreed percentages ;
and for the respective secretariats to have respon-
5ibility for administering and operating the pro-
2;ram, while policy control would be vested in the
Economic and Social Council and ultimately in
-he General Assembly of the United Nations and
:he conferences or governing bodies of the
igencies.

The forthcoming Conference will be primarily

concerned with ascertaining the total amount of
contributions available from participating gov-
ernments for the execution of the technical assist-
ance programs of the United Nations and the spe-
cialized agencies during the first year of its opera-
tion. The Conference must also give final consent
to plans for the allotment of proportionate shares
of the total amount of contributions to the various
participating organizations.

Plans are now under way for the coordination
of bilateral programs to be carried out by the
United States with those of the United Nations.

Wlieat Council

The Department of State announced on June 16
that the third session of the International Wlieat
Council will convene at London on June 19
with the following United States delegation in
attendance :

Delegate

Stanley Andrews, director. Office of Foreign Agricultural
Relations, Department of Agriculture

Alternate Delegate

Elmer F. Kruse, assistant administrator for commodity
operations. Production and Marketing Administra-
tion, Department of Agriculture

Advisers

Maurice M. Benidt, chief. International Wheat Agreement
Staff, Production and Marketing Administration, De-
partment of Agriculture

James O. Foster, director. Commodities Division, Office of
International Trade, Department of Commerce

Francis A. Linville, assistant chief. Economics Resources
and Security Staff, Department of State

Paul O. Nyhus, agricultural attach^, American Embassy,
London

Adviser and Secretary

Gordon Eraser, United States member of Executive Com-
mittee of Wheat Council, London

The International Wlieat Council was estab-
lished in 1949 pursuant to the terms of the Inter-
national Wheat Agreement of March 23, 1949, an
instrument designed to assure supplies of wheat
to importing countries and markets for wheat to
exporting countries at equitable and stable prices.
Administration of the provisions of the agreement
is the primary function of the Council which is
composed of the 39 exporting and importing
countries parties to the agreement. Each coun-
try may be represented on the Council by a dele-
gate, an alternate, and such technical advisers as
are necessary.

The forthcoming session of the Council will
discuss how quantities brought into the agreement
by accessions and by increase of quotas shall be
apportioned among the exporting countries. This
apportionment involves agreement among the
four exporting counties, i.e., Australia, Canada,
France, and the United States.

Ajnong other subjects for consideration by the
third session of the Council are: review of the

iuly 3, 1950

operative problems connected with the recording
of sales and the reporting of the status of quota
fulfillment to members by the Secretariat ; review
of changes in the rules of procedure suggested by
the Executive Committee and determination of
powers to be delegated to the Executive Commit-
tee; election of members of the Executive Com-
mittee for the crop year 1950-51; election of a
chairman and vice chairman ; elaboration of a
budget for 1950-51; and the time and place of the
next meeting of the Council.

Congress for Education of Deaf and Dumb

The Department of State announced on June 5
that Leonard M. Elstad, president of Gallaudet
College, Washington, D.C., and Maj. Jerome G.
Sacks, MSC, assistant chief of the Clinical
Psychology Branch, Office of the Surgeon General,
Department of the Army, will represent the
United States Government at the International
Congress for Education of the Deaf and Dumb at
Groningen, the Netherlands, beginning June 5.

The Netherlands Government is sponsoring this
Congress in commemoration of the establishment
160 years ago of the Royal Institution for the
Deaf and Dumb in Groningen.

Teaching by ear or vibration, by talking visibly,
and other methods of improving the means of
communication by the deaf will be intensively
studied at the forthcoming Congress. Although
considerable progress has been made in the United
States, in recent years, in developing improved
methods for teaching children born without hear-
ing to speak, in many other countries such instruc-
tion is confined to lip reading and sign language.

In many other countries, little stress is placed
on the education of deaf students after the com-
pletion of the elementary grades, in contrast to
the United States where the deaf are urged to
complete at least a hig'h school education and
where there is the only college in the world for
deaf students. In an effort to find means of rais-
ing educational standards for the deaf every-
where, the forthcoming Congress will discuss pro-
grams of vocational education, higher education,
and out-of-school education for the deaf.

Other topics which have a close correlation to
improvement of means of communication by the
deaf and their education will also be discussed.
Among the topics will be: the testing of the deaf;
language and thinking — psychological problems
of the deaf ; and aftercare of the deaf.

Journees Medicates

The Department of State announced on June 8
that two delegates have been named to represent
the United States Government at the 24th session
of the Journees Medicales (Medical Days of Brus-
sels) convening at Brussels on June 10. They are:
Col. Robert U. Merikangas, MC, USA, Chief of
Medicine, 97th General Hospital, Frankfort, Ger-

many; and Walter G. Nelson, Medical Director,
Public Health Service, American Embassy, Paris,
France.

Annual meetings of the Journees Medicales are
sponsored by the Belgian Government to bring
together distinguished doctors with the object of
keeping the practicing physician in touch with
current medical research. An International Expo-
sition of Sciences and Arts as applied to medicine,
surgery, pharmacy, and hygiene will, as in the
past, be held in conjunction with the 24th session.
Representatives of the United States Govern-
ment have participated in most of the meetings of
this organization since 1932.

U.S. Representative Named

to NAC Board for Ocean Shipping

The Department of State announced on June 19
that Huntington T. Morse, special assistant to the
administrator of the Maritime Administration of
the Department of Commerce, has been appointed
the United States representative on the North At-
lantic Planning Board for Ocean Shipping. Mr.
Morse will fill this post in addition to his other
present duties.

At its fourth session in London, on May 18, the
North Atlantic Council announced that it had
established, in furtherance of article 9 of the
Treaty, a North Atlantic Planning Board for
Ocean Shipping.^ This Board will report directly
to the Council and will work in close cooperation
with other bodies of the Treaty organization in all
matters relating to merchant shipping in defense
planning.

Achieving a Community Sense — Continued from.'page 17
overcome the obstacles in our path must be con-
sonant with our aims, and must accord with our
deepest moral sense.

The fundamental moral value on which our
society rests is the brotherhood of man. To the
extent that our actions abroad, and our relations
among ourselves at home, are expressive of this
humanist principle, we shall create a good that
will live after us.

It is not in the words we profess, but in what we
do, and in how we do it, that our ends will be
found.

Justice Holmes expressed it:

Man Is born a predestined idealist, for he is born to act.
To act is to alfirm the worth of an end, and to persist in
aflirming the worth of an end is to make an ideal.

' Bulletin of May 29, 1950, p. 830.

Department of State Bulletin

The United States in the United Nations

[June 24-30]

Security Council

The Security Council on June 27 adopted a
resolution, introduced by the United States, rec-
ommending that United Nations members "fur-
nish such assistance to the Republic of Korea as
may be necessary to repel the armed attack and to
restore international peace and security in the
area."' ' The resolution, opposed only by Yugo-
slavia, received seven affirmative votes. The
Soviet representative was not present. Egypt
and India stated tliat they had not received in-
structions from their Governments and, therefore,
could not participate in the vote. However, at a
Council meeting on June 30, the Indian repre-
sentative announced that his Government accepted
the resolution, while the Egyptian representative
said that Egypt would have abstained in the vote,
because it considered that the Korean situation is
just another element of the East-West conflict.

In presenting the resolution, Warren E. Austin
of the United States called it a "logical conse-
quence" of the Council's resolution of June 25 ^ and
of the North Korean authorities' failure to observe
it. Ambassador Austin read President Truman's
statement of June 27 ^ announcing that United
States air and sea forces had been ordered "to give
the Korean Government troops cover and sup-
port." In concluding his remarks. Ambassador
Austin said that the "keynote of the resolution and
my statement and the significant characteristic of
the action taken by the President is support of the
United Nations purposes and principles — in a
word 'peace'." *

Two Yugoslav resolutions were defeated by the
Council. At the emergency meeting on June 25,
Yugoslavia proposed that the Council call for
cessation of hostilities and withdrawal of forces
and "invite the Government of North Korea to
state its case before the Security Council." At the
June 27 meeting, Yugoslavia presented a resolu-
tion by which the Council would renew its call

' See ante p. 7.
' See ante p. 4.
' See ante p. 5.
* See ante p. 6.

July 3, 1950

for cessation of hostilities, invite the North
Koreans to send a representative to the United
Nations, and, in addition, initiate a procedure of
mediation.

Economic Commission for Latin America

The Economic Commission for Latin America,
which held its third session at Montevideo, Uru-
guay, on June 5-21, adopted a number of resolu-
tions dealing with problems of economic develop-
ment, technical assistance, immigration, foreign
investments, foreign trade, and agricultural credit.
The most important of the resolutions, one on
economic development and anticyclical policy, con-
tains a declaration of general principles. The
resolution was strongly endorsed by the 17 Latin
American delegations present (Costa Rica, Peru,
and Venzuela were not represented) and ap-
proved by the French, Netherlands, and United
Kingdom delegations. The resolution is so sweep-
ing in character, however, that the United States
delegation felt compelled to state that, although
it would vote in favor of the resolution, it did so
"subject to study by its government to determine
whether there is anything in the resolution which
may not be in harmony with United States eco-
nomic policy and international commitments."

Trusteeship Council

Discussion of the annual reports on the trust
territories of British and French Togoland was
completed by the Trusteeship Council on June 29,
and a committee consisting of Belgium, Iraq, the
Philippines, and the United States was appointed
to draft the Council reports on these territories.

Excejit for an annex including individual opin-
ions of Council members, examination of the
drafting committee's report on Australia's annual
report on New Guinea was concluded on June 28.
Approval was given to the drafting committee's
report on New Zealand's annual report on Western
Samoa on June 29. On that day, the Council also
approved nine resolutions submitted by its ad hoc
Committee on Petitions dealing with petitions
from New Guinea and the British and French
Cameroons.

General Policy Page

North Korean Forces Invade South Korea:
U.S. Presents Cease-Fire Resolution to Se-
curity Council. Statement by Ambassador

Ernest A. Gross 3

U.S. Air and Sea Forces Ordered Into Sup-
porting Action. Statement by the Presi-
dent; Remarks by Secretary Acheson ... 5
U.S. Asks Security Council To Assist in Re-
pelling Attack. Statement by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin 6

The Korean Experiment in Representative
Government. Statement by John Foster
Dulles 12

Achieving a Community Sense Among Free
Nations — A Step Toward World Order.
Address by Secretary Acheson 14

Keeping Peace in the Caribbean Area. By

Edward A. Jamison 18

Upholding Principles and Rights of Others in
the Process of International Negotiation.
By Philip C. Jessup, Ambassador at Large . 26

Army Attach^, Declared Persona Non Grata,

Withdrawn From Rumania 29

Rumania Protests Against Travel Restrictions
on Personnel in U.S. Statement by Secre-
tary Acheson • • • • 30

Treaty Information

Soviet Violations of Treaties and Agreements. . 8

Page

Tax Treaty Negotiations To Open With Israel . 13
The Need for an International Trade Organiza-
tion. Views of Howard W. McGrath,
Attorney General 31

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

The United States in the United Nations ... 39

International information and
Cultural Affairs

Commission on Migratory Labor. Executive

Order 10129 33

International Organizations and
Conferences

Calendar of Meetings 34

U.S. Delegations:

Methods and Techniques of Adult Educa-
tion 36

Ornithological Congress 36

Consular Conference 36

Technical Assistance 37

Wheat Council 37

Congress for Education of Deaf and Dumb . 38

Journ^es Medical es 38

U.S. Representative Named to Nac Board for

Ocean Shipping 38

mmy&^mtdo^

Edward A. .Tamison, author of the article on keeping peace in the
Americas, is ofiicer in charge, Special Political Affairs, Office of Re-
gional American Affairs.

U. 5. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE) 19B0

tJne/ ^eha/yi7}teni/ ^ t/taie^

-fcti^

ACT OF AGGRESSION IN KOREA:

Address by Secretary Acheson '^^^^^' 43

Statement by John Foster Dulles 49

SUPPORT OF MUTUAL DEFENSE ASSISTANCE

PROGRAM FOR 1951 • Statement by Secretary
Acheson 31

LABOR'S ROLE IN WORLD AFFAIRS • By Bernard

Wiesman 54

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 575
July 10, 1950

^ENX o^

<'^^^^*.

^Ae Qlefi€t/)tim,&rvt jCL ^ate V^ W i 1 \D L 1 i 1

Vol. XXIII, No. 575 • Publication 3906
July 10, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.C.

Price:

62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.60

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

Tlie Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
terruitional agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

ACT OF AGGRESSION IN KOREA

REVIEW OF U.N. AND U.S. ACTION
TO RESTORE PEACE

Address hy Secretary Acheson'^

I would like to review with you the facts of the
situation which I am sure is uppermost in your
minds — the events which have been taking place
and are now going on in Korea.

I think you will agree that this has been what
newspaper men call a fast-breaking story.

The immediate events of the story go back less
than 5 days. On Saturday afternoon — it was just
before daybreak of Sunday morning in Korea —
without warning and without provocation, Com-
munist forces of the north launched a coordinated
full-scale assault on the Republic of Korea. After
heavy artillery fire, Communist infantry began
crossing the 38th parallel at three points, while
amphibious forces were landing at several points
on the east coast, some 20 miles to the south.

First reports to reach the capital at Seoul, 30
miles below the 38th parallel, were fragmentary
and confused. There had been small border
forays on many previous occasions, and the mag-
nitude of this attack was not immediately cleai'.

Our Ambassador at Seoul, John Muccio, imme-
diately got in touch with Korean Army headquar-
ters, through our Military Advisory Group, and,
as soon as it became evident that this was more
than another border incident, he cabled the State
Department.

Ambassador Muccio's cable reached the State
Department code room at 9 : 26 Saturday night,
having crossed an inquiry the Department had
sent to him a few minutes before, based on the
first press flash on the action.

' Delivered before the 17th annual convention of the
American Newspaiser Guild, Washington, D. C, on June 29
and released to the press on the same date.

Within a matter of minutes, the message was
decoded and the Department was alerted for
action.

By 10 : 30 p.m., our Assistant Secretary for Far
Eastern Affairs, Dean Rusk, and the Secretary of
the Army, Frank Pace, were conferring at the
Department.

By 11:00, Secretary Pace had alerted the De-
partment of Defense, a full operating staff was on
duty at our Bureau of Far Eastern Affairs, and I
had discussed the situation by phone with the
President.

Action developed along two fronts in the State
Department during the night.

One group of Department officers worked
through the night preparing for a meeting of the
Security Council which we had immediately re-
quested. The United Nations had established the
Republic of Korea and had, since early 1948, main-
tained a Commission in Korea. We, therefore,
felt a primary responsibility to bring this matter
to the immediate attention of the United Nations.

By Sunday afternoon, within 20 hours of the
time the first official word of this invasion was re-
ceived here, the Security Council had taken its
first action. Representatives of 10 member na-
tions of the Security Council had been assembled
from their Sunday places of rest — the eleventh
was the representative of the Soviet Union, who
stayed away. After hearing the report of the
United Nations Commission concerning the un-
provoked act of aggression, the Security Council
passed a resolution which called for an immediate
end to the fighting and for the assistance of all
members in restoring the peace. All actions
taken by the United States to restore the peace in
Korea have been under the aegis of the United
Nations.

Another group of Department officers, mean-
while, were working with their colleagues in the

Jo/y TO, 7950

Defense Department, consulting on measures to
be taken within the framework of existing policy
and plans and the emergency orders of the
President.

Complete Study Ready for President

The President flew to Washington. By the
time he had arrived, at 7 : 20 Sunday evening, com-
pleted staff work and recommendations had been
prepared and were laid before him. The De-
partments of State and Defense had worked as
one department, with complete agreement and co-
ordination of effort.

During Sunday night and early Monday morn-
ing, actions flowing from the conference with the
President were set in motion. General MacAr-
thur was authorized to respond at once to urgent
appeals from the Govermnent of Korea for addi-
tional supplies of ammunition and in a matter of
hours was flying into Korea loaded transport
planes with fighter protection to assure their safe
arrival. At about the same time, the Seventh
Fleet with all men aboard was steaming north out
of Subic Bay, to be on hand in case of need.

It became possible on Monday to get a clearer
picture of the military situation, by sifting the
fragmentary and sometimes conflicting reports
we had been receiving from many different
sources.

From the size and speed of the Communist at-
tack, it was evident that it was a premeditated ac-
tion ; that it had been carefully plotted for many
weeks before. The initial thrust, supported by
planes and tanks, had clearly caught the Korean
Government troops by surprise. Although the
defending forces rallied and launched several
small counteractions, it did not appear that they
were in a position to bar the tank-and-plane-sup-
IJorted Communist thrust down the corridor to the
capital city.

By Monday night, in the light of this situation,
recommendations were prepared by the President's
civil and military advisers on the course of action
to be taken. In preparing these recommendations,
it was clear to all concerned that this act of ag-
gression had brought in issue the authority and,
indeed, the continued existence of the United Na-
tions and the security of the nations of the free
world, including the United States and its forces
in the Pacific. These recommendations were pre-
pared with the sober realization of the issues in-

volved and with the full agreement of all the
President's advisers.

As in many other situations which have arisen
in the years in which I have served as Under
Secretary and Secretary, the President was faced
with difficult decisions which had to be made
quickly. And as in the previous cases, the Presi-
dent assumed the responsibility, made the deci-
sions, and has given leadership and direction to
the entire action of the Government of the United
States.

Consultations with Congressional leaders on
Tuesday morning demonstrated a complete unity
in understanding the problem and the course of
action which needed to be taken.

At Tuesday noon, the President announced the
actions which this Government would take to sup-
port the United Nations and uphold a rule of law
in the Pacific area.

In the interval between the meetings of the Se-
curity Council on Sunday and again on Tuesday,
the United Nations Commission on Korea had con-
firmed tlie fact that the Communist authorities in
North Korea had ignored the cease-fire order and
defied the authority of the United Nations. There-
fore, the Security Council recommended at its
meeting Tuesday night that member nations give
aid to the Rei^ublic of Korea and help to restore
peace and security to the area.

Yesterday — i days after the fighting began — the
fall of Seoul was confirmed, but American air
and sea support for Korean Government troops
was beginning to make itself felt, and peace-loving
nations the world over were able to hope that this
act of brutal, unprovoked, and naked aggression
would not be allowed to succeed.

Historical Background

It may be useful at this point to review briefly
the background of recent history against which
the present act of aggi'ession against Korea is to
be considered.

Since the nineteenth century, American mission-
aries, doctors, and educators have been especially
active in Korea, so that through the years of
Japanese occupation, which began in the first dec-
ade of this century, the Korean people came to
regard the United States as a symbol of the free-
dom and independence to which they aspired.

In the Cairo Declaration of December 1943, the
United States, the United Kingdom, and China
pledged their determination that Korea would be-

DeparlmenI of Sfafe Bulletin

come free and independent. This pledge was re-
affirmed in the Potsdam Declaration of July 26,
1945. and was subscribed to by the Soviet Union
when it entered the war against Japan 13 days
later.

The defeat of Japan made it possible for Korea
to look forward to the realization of its desire for
independence.

On the day following the first Japanese offer
of surrender, which was made on August 10, 1945,
the Secretary of War submitted to the Secretary
of State a plan for the arrangements to be fol-
lowed in accepting the surrender of Japanese
troops in various places. To meet the immediate
problem, it was proposed that the nearby Soviet
troops accept the surrender of Japanese armed
forces in Korea down to the 38th parallel and that
American troops be brought up from Okinawa
and the Philippines to accept the surrender of
Japanese troops in the southern part of Korea.
This arrangement was approved by the Joint
Chiefs of Staff, the State-War-Navy Coordinating
Committee, and the President and, after it had
been accepted by Generalissimo Stalin, was in-
corporated in the first general order to be issued
by General AlacArthur as Supreme Commander
for the Allied Powers on September 2, 1945.

Soviet troops had occupied the northern part
of Korea on August 12. The Soviet desire and
intention to put troops into Korea had been made
evident at the Potsdam discussions, 1 month be-
fore. On September 8, American troops had been
landed to accept the surrender of the Japanese in
the southern part of Korea, 4ind we began efforts
to negotiate with the Soviet Union for the unifi-
cation and independence of the country.

We soon found that the Soviet Union consid-
ered the 38th parallel not as a line drawn on a
map for the sake of administrative convenience
but as a wall around their preserve.

U.S.S.R. BLOCKS KOREAN UNITY

At the Moscow meeting of Foreign Ministers in
December 1945, a joint commission for the unity
and independence of Korea was agreed to between
the Soviet Union and ourselves, but we found that
every effort to give effect to this agreement and
i:irevious agreements was blocked by Soviet in-
transigence.

The United States was unwilling to permit this
situation to delay further the realization of Korean
independence.

This Government therefore laid the question
of Korean independence before the United Na-
tions. The General Assembly of the United Na-
tions, in November 1947, called for an election in
Korea under the observation of a United Nations
Commission, to choose a representative national
assembly for the purpose of drafting a democratic
constitution and establishing a national gov-
ernment.

The Soviet Union refused to allow the United
Nations Commission to enter its zone. Conse-
quently, the right of the Korean people to par-
ticipate in a free election to establish a free govern-
ment was confined to southern Korea. The
election was held there, and the Government
of the Republic of Korea was established on
August 15, 1948.

U.S. EFFORTS TO SUPPORT REPUBLIC

It has been the aim of the United States to pro-
vide the people of the Republic of Korea with suf-
ficient assistance and support to enable them to
progress through their own efforts toward free-
dom and independence. The transfer of functions
from the United States Army Military Govern-
ment to Korean agencies was carried out
progressivelj' from the moment of the establish-
ment of the Republic.

The United States has continued to give assist-
ance and support to the Republic, both within the
framework of the United Nations and directly.
We have trained and equipped Korean defense
forces, we have extended economic aid and tech-
nical advice, fostered exchange of students and
professors, and, in general, done everything pos-
sible to help the people of Korea in establishing
a democratic jiolitical and economic structure re-
sponsive to their needs.

The Government of the Republic of Korea was
accepted by the United Nations, in December 1948,
as the validly elected, lawful Government of the
area in which elections were permitted — and the
only such Government in Korea. The General
Assembly established a reconstituted Commission
to continue to work for unification and a repre-
sentative government for the entire country.

The United States recognized the new govern-
ment on January 1, 1949. Many other members
of the United Nations have since done the same.
Membership of the Republic of Korea in the
United Nations has been blocked by the Soviet
veto.

July 10, 1950

38TH PARALLEL— A PART OF THE IRON CURTAIN

Meanwhile, the 38th parallel had become a part
of the Iron Curtain. Behind that curtain, the
Soviet Union established a Communist regime.
The formal creation of this regime was proclaimed
on September 9, 1948, as the so-called "Democratic
People's Republic of Korea," claiming jurisdiction
over the entire country. This regime has lived,
as it was created, in complete defiance of the
United Nations.

The great single fact which stands out from this
summary history is that a peaceful people ruled
by a sovereign independent government of their
own choosing, brought into being by the United
Nations and recognized by the great majority of
the free nations of the world, was attacked in a
cynical and brutal act of aggression.

We are confronted with a direct challenge to
the United Nations. Whether this organization,
which embodies our hopes for an international
order based on peace with justice and freedom,
can survive this test will depend upon the vigor
with which it answers the challenge and the sup-
port which it receives from free nations.

Free Nations Answer Aggression

The President has enunciated the policy of this
Government to do its utmost to uphold the sanctity
of the Charter of the United Nations and the rule
of law among nations. We are, therefore, in con-
formity with the resolutions of the Security Coun-
cil of June 25 and June 27, giving air and sea
support to the troops of the Korean Government.
This action, pursuant to the Security Council reso-
lutions, is solely for the purpose of restoring the
Republic of Korea to its status prior to the in-
vasion from the north and of reestablishing the
peace broken by that aggression.

In order that the Communist movement may
not further threaten the security of the Pacific
area by force of arms, we shall increase military
assistance to the Philippines and to the forces of
France and the Associated States in Indochina.

The President has also ordered the Seventh
Fleet to prevent any attack on Formosa, and we
have called upon the Chinese Government on
Formosa to cease all air and sea operations against
the mainland. This action is not intended to
determine the future status of Formosa, which

can be settled only upon the restoration of peace
and security in the Pacific, a peace settlement with
Japan, or consideration by the United Nations.

As a further measure toward the restoration of
peace, we have, through our Embassy in Moscow,
asked the Soviet Government to exercise its in-
fluence with the North Korean authorities for the
withdrawal of the invading forces and the cessa-
tion of hostilities in Korea.

In conclusion, the action of the United States
Government in Korea is taken in support of the
authority of the United Nations. It is taken to
restore peace and security to the Pacific area.

It is taken in the conviction that peace and
security cannot be obtained by sacrificing the in-
dependence of nations to aggression.

Free men the world over have spoken out with
one voice since this dawn attack was launched 5
days ago. They endorse our resolve and stand
with us in support of the United Nations. Those
Governments in a position to provide armed forces
to assist in the support of the Republic of Korea
are already taking steps to provide that support.

It is now clear to all — if indeed, it was not clear
before — that free nations nmst be united, they
must be determined, and they must be strong, if
they are to preserve their freedom and maintain
a righteous peace. There is no other way.

THE PRESIDENT AUTHORIZES
USE OF GROUND UNITS

[Released to the press hy the White Bouse June 30]

At a meeting with Congressional leadere at the
White House this morning, the President, together
with the Secretary of Defense, the Secretary of
State, and the Joint Chiefs of Staff, reviewed the
latest developments of the situation in Korea.

The Congressional leaders were given a full
review of the intensified military activities.

In keeping with the United Nations Security
Council's request for support to the Republic of
Korea in repelling the North Korean invaders and
restoring peace in Korea, the President announced
that he had authorized the United States Air Force
to conduct missions on specific military targets in
Northern Korea, wherever militarily necessary,
and had ordered a naval blockade of the entire
Korean coast.

General MacArthur has been authorized to use
certain supporting ground units.

Deparimeni of Sfafe Bulletin

ANSWER TO CHINA'S OFFER
TO SEND TROOPS

[Released to the press July 2]

On June 29 and 30, the Chinese Qovernment informed
the Ooveniniciit of the United States of the willinciness of
the Chinese Qovernment to send land troops to South
Korea to assist in the operations now going on in that
country. The Chinese Qovernment asked for the opinion
of the United States Government on this matter. The
aide-mimoires received from the Chinese Qovernment
follow.

Aide-memoire of June 29

The Government of the Eepublic of China re-
ceived today a communication from the Secretary-
General of the United Nations requesting it, in
accordance with the resohition adopted by the
Security Council on June 27, 1960, to furnish such
assistance to the Republic of Korea as may be
necessary to help repel the armed attack from
North Korea. The Chinese Republic is willing
to send land troops to South Korea to assist in the
operations for the purpose. The Chinese Govern-
ment will be glad to be apprised of the opinion of
the United States Government at its earliest con-
venience. In view of the urgent situation in South
Korea, the Chinese Government is instructing the
Chief of the Chinese Mission in Japan to approach
General MacArthur and inquire about the pos-
itive measures which may be desired.

Aide-memoire of June 30

The Chinese Government will make available
for use in South Korea to repel the armed attack
of North Korea one army of seasoned troops of
approximately 33,000 men suitable for operations
in plains or hilly terrain.

These troops carry the best equipment at China's
disposal.

For the transportation of these troops the
Chinese Government will provide 20 air trans-
ports of the type of C-46 ancl, if necessary, can give
a reasonable amount of air cover. If the troops
are to be transported by sea, the Chinese Govern-
ment can provide a moderate amount of naval
escort.

These troops can be ready for embarkation in
five days.

The United States Qovernment, icithont assuming in
any way to speak for the United Nations, expressed its
opinion to the Chinese Qovernment on July 1 in the fol-
loiving terms.

In response to the request contained in the
Chinese Embassy's Aide-Memoire of June 29,
1950, the appropriate authorities of the Govern-
ment of the United States have given considera-
tion to the expression of willingness on the part

of the Government of the Republic of China to
furnish ground forces for service in Korea in sup-
port of the United Nations.

The Secretary of State desires to inform His
Excellency the Ambassador of the Republic of
China of the deep appreciation of the United
States Government for this prompt and substan-
tial demonstration of support for the United
Nations on the part of the Government of the
Republic of China. In light, however, of the
threat of invasion of Taiwan by Communist forces
from the mainland, a threat repeated in the last
day or so by spokesmen for the Chinese Com-
munist regime in Peiping, it is the view of the
Government of the United States of America that
it would be desirable for representatives of Gen-
eral MacArthur's Headquarters to hold dis-
cussions with the Chinese military authorities on
Taiwan concerning the plans for the defense of
the island against invasion prior to any final de-
cision on the wisdom of reducing the defense forces
on Taiwan by transfer of troops to Korea. It
is understood that General MacArthur's Head-
quarters will be in communication with the ap-
propriate Chinese military authorities on Taiwan
with a view to the dispatch from Tokyo of repre-
sentatives of General MacArthur's Headquarters
for this purpose.

U.S.S.R. RESPONDS TO REQUEST
FOR MEDIATION

[Released to the press June Z9'\

The American Embassy at Moscow on June 27,
1950, communicated with the Soviet Foreign Of-
fice in regard to the invasion of the Republic of
Korea by North Korean armed forces.

The Embassy called to the attention of the So-
viet Foreign Office the fact that forces of the
North Korean regime had crossed the 38tli paral-
lel and had invaded, in force, the territory of the
Republic of Korea at several points. It was also
pointed out that the refusal of the representative
of the Soviet Union to attend the Security Coun-
cil meeting in New York despite the clear threat to
the peace and despite the obligations of a Council
member under the United Nations Charter re-
quired the Government of the United States to
bring this matter directly to the attention of the
Government of the U.S.S.R.

The Embassy concluded by calling attention to
the universally known close relations between the
Soviet Union and the North Korean regime and
stated that the United States Government was
asking assurances that the Soviet Union would
disavow responsibility for this unwarranted and
unprovoked attack and that it would use its influ-
ence with the authorities of North Korea to with-
draw their invading forces at once.

Ambassador Alan G. Kirk today was read the

Ju/y 10, 1950

following statement by Deputy Soviet Foreign
Minister Andrei Gromyko :

In connection with the statement of the Government of
the United States of America transmitted by you on June
27, the Soviet Government has instructed me to state the
following :

1. In accordance with facts verified by the Soviet Gov-
ernment, the events talking place in Korea were provoked
by an attacli by forces of the South Korean authorities
on border reuions of North Korea. Therefore the respon-
sibility for these events rests upon tlie South Korean
authorities and iipon those who stand behind their back.

2. As is known, tlie Soviet Government withdrew its
troops from Korea earlier than the Government of the
United States and thereby confirmed its traditional prin-
ciple of noninterference in the internal affairs of other
states. And now as well the Soviet Gdvernment adheres
to the principle of the impermissibility of interference by
foreign powers in the internal affairs of Korea.

3. It is not true that the Soviet Government refused to
participate in meetinss of the Security Council. In spite
of its full willingness, the Soviet Government has not been
able to take part in the meetings of the Security Council
in as much as, because of the position of the Government
of the United States, China, a permanent member of the
Security Council, has not been admitted to the Council
which has made it impossible for the Security Council to
take decisions having legal force.

PRECEDENT CONTRADICTS SOVIET
ALLEGATION OF ILLEGALITY IN U.N. ACTION

[Released to the prcus June SO]

In its reply to the United Nations and to the
United States, the U.S.S.K. alleges that the ac-
tion of the Security Council with respect to Korea
was illegal, since, the action taken did not have
the concurring votes of all the permanent mem-
bers. In its reply of June 29, to the United States
communication of June 27, asking the U.S.S.R. to
use its influence with the North Korean authori-
ties to cease hostilities, the U.S.S.R. made the same
point and contended, further, that the action of
the Council was illegal because the representative
of China participating in this action was not the
representative of the Feiping regime.

With respect to article 27 of the Charter dealing
with Security Council voting, it is provided that
substantive questions be decided by an affirmative
vote of seven members including the concurring
votes of the permanent members.

By a long series of precedents, however, dating
back to 1946, the practice has been established
whereby abstention by permanent members of the
Council does not constitute a veto.^

In short, prior to the Soviet allegations, every
member of the TTnited Nations, including the
U.S.S.R. accejjted as legal and binding decisions of
the Security Council made without the concur-
rence, as expressed tlirough an affirmative vote,
of all permanent members of the Council.

As to the Soviet claim concerning the Chinese
vote, the rules of procedure of the Security Coun-

' See Bulletin of July 4, 1948, p. 3.

cil provide the machinery for the seating of an
accredited representative of the Security Council.
No affirmative action has been taken which, by
any stretch of the imagination, could give force
to the contention of the U.S.S.R. that a representa-
tive of the Peiping regime should be regarded as
the representative of China on the Security Coun-
cil. The credentials of the representative of the
National Government of China were approved by
the Council, and the Soviet attempt, at a later
date, to withdraw this approval was defeated.
Therefore, the vote of the Nationalist representa-
tive on June 25 and 27 was the official vote of
China.

A list of some of the more important prece-
dents involving action by the Security Council on
substantive matters taken without the concurrence
of an affirmative vote by the Soviet Union follow :

Palestine Case

On April 16, 1948, the Soviet Union abstained
on a resolution which called for a truce in
Palestine.

On IMay 22, 1948, the Soviet Union abstained on
a resolution for a "cease-fire"' in Palestine.

On July 15, 1948, the Soviet Union abstained
on a resolution ordering a "cease-fire" in Palestine
and giving instructions to the Mediator there.

On November 4, 1948, the Soviet Union ab-
stained on a resolution calling upon all govern-
ments concerned to withdraw beyond positions
they held in Palestine on October 14. 1948.

In none of these instances has the Soviet Union
challenged the legality of the action taken by the
Security Council.

Kashmir Case

On January 17, 1948, the Soviet Union abstained
on a resolution calling upon the parties concerned
to avoid actions aggravating the situation.

On January 20, 1948, the Soviet Union ab-
stained on a resolution for setting up a United
Nations Commission for India and Pakistan and
which gave that Commission broad terms of ref-
erence.

On April 21, 1948, the Soviet Union ab-
stained on a resolution expanding the terms of
reference of the United Nations Commission for
India and Pakistan and which set the terms for
bringing about a "cease-fire" and the conditions
for the holding of a plebiscite.

On June 3, 1948, the Soviet Union abstained
on a resolution which affirmed previous resolution
and ordered the United Nations Commission to
proceed to the area.

In none of tiiese instances has the Soviet Union
challenged the legality of the action taken by the
Security Council.

Indonesian Case

On December 24, 1948, the Soviet Union ab-
stained on a resolution calling upon the parties

Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bulhfin

to cease hostilities and ordering the release of
Indonesian officials. In that ease, the French also
abstained.

On January i2S. 1949, the Soviet Union abstained
on a nnmber of paragraphs of a resolution setting
up tlie United Nations Commission for Indonesia
with wide powers.

In none of these instances has the Soviet Union
challenged the legality of the action taken by the
Secnritj' Council.

Furthermore, the Soviet Union has never ques-
tioned the legality of action taken by the Security
Council in which it voted with tlie majority but
on which other permanent members of the Council
abstained.

This action has occurred in at least thi'ee sub-
stantive decisions :

1. In the action of the Council on December 28,

1948, in which a resolution was passed calling on
the Netherlands to set free political prisoners in
Indonesia (a resolution introduced by the repre-
sentative of China). France and the United
Kingdom abstained on this resolution.

2. In the action of the Council on March 4,

1949, recommending to the General Assembly that
Israel be admitted to United Nations membership.
The United Kingdom abstained on this resolution.

3. In the action of the Council on March 5,
1948, i-ecommending consultation of the perma-
nent members of the Council in connection with
the Palestine situation. The United Kingdom
abstained on this resolution.

Tlie voluntary absence of a permanent member
from the Security Council is clearly analogous to
abstention.

Furthermore, article 28 of the Charter provides
that the Security Council shall be so organized
as to be able to function continuously. This in-
junction is defeated if the absence of a repre-
sentative of a permanent member is construed to
have the effect of preventing all substantive action
by the Council.

No one of the 10 members of the Council par-
ticipating in the meetings of June 2.5 and June
27 raised any question regarding the legality of
the action — not even the member who dissented
on June 27.

ECA AIDS SOUTH KOREA

The Economic Cooperation Administration an-
nounced on June 26 that it took immediate action
to back up the resistance of the South Korean
people in their heroic struggle to maintain their
independence.

Dr. Edgar A. J. Johnson, Director of ECA's
Korean pi-ogi-am, stated that "primary emphasis is
being placed upon the setting up of machinery for
the jH'ompt procurement of supplies and equip-
ment that can be shipped to Korea from Japan or
the United States." Dr. Johnson said that 'Sve

July 10, 1950

will bend every effort to meet the ci'isis that immi-
nently threatens a free nation."

ECA"s immediate-action program consisted of:

1. Diverting all vessels carrying war nonessen-
tials to ports where they would not fall into Com-
munist hands.

2. Rearranging shipping schedules so that all
available supply vessels could be used to rush mili-
tary supplies to the besieged peninsula.

;3. Insuring that nonmilitary supplies, such as
fertilizer, are diverted to other ports to keep dock
workers free for unloading of guns and ammuni-
tion.

4. Switching its procurement progi-am to an
emergency basis. (Essential commodities like
petroleum and foodstuffs would be given priority
over such normal peacetime exports as fertilizer
and raw cotton.)

5. Coordinating its activities with the United
States Army Forces in Japan.

A MILITARISTIC EXPERIMENT

Statement by John Foster Dulles ^

I have just returned from 2 weeks in Korea and
Japan. Last week I was in Seoul, the capital of
Korea, on the invitation of President Ehee. Now
he is a fugitive, and the Embassy residence where
Mrs. Dulles and I were staying is being looted by
the Reds.

Earlier this week, Mrs. Dulles and I were quietly
dining at our Embassy in Tokyo with General
and Mrs. MacArthur. Now the General is lead-
ing the American and Allied air, sea, and land
forces, fighting the Red aggressors in Korea.

Events have happened fast. The Communists
of North Korea struck hard and suddenly with
strong forces well-equipped with Russian tanks,
Russian planes, and Russian heavy artillery.
They have made big initial gains, and it will not
be easy to stop them and throw them back.

Why did the North Korean Reds make this
armed attack on the peaceful Republic of South
Korea ? One thing is certain, they did not do this
purely on their own but as part of the world
strategy of international communism.

It is possible to make a good guess as to why
Communist strategy directed this present attack
against the Republic of Korea.

Reason for Attack

In the first place, the Republic of Korea was
growing in such a healthy way that its presence
on the continent of Asia was an embarrassment to
the Communist areas. In South Korea, I talked

' Prepared portion of a radio interview over CBS at
Wasliinfiton, D.C., on July 1 which was released to the
press on the same date.

with all sorts of people, and everywhere I got the
impression of a happy, wholesome society. There
had just been the second general election, which
was watched by representatives of the United Na-
tions. It was a free and fair election ; 80 percent
of the eligible voters had gone to the polls, and
the representatives elected were men and women
of fine character. I attended the opening of the
Assembly, and it was an inspiring event.

The economy of the country was picking up
with some American economic help. All in all,
the prospects were good.

This Republic of Korea was attracting a con-
stant stream of refugees from the north who
wanted to escape from Communist despotism.
Just 2 weeks ago tonight, at this very hour, I was
meeting at Seoul with a group of 3,000 Christian
refugees from the north. We were in a great new
church which was in process of construction. I
talked to the refugees through an interpreter, and
I have never seen men and women more clearly
dedicated to Christian principles.

The Communists seem to have felt that they
could not tolerate this hopeful, attractive Asiatic
experiment in democracy. They had found that
they could not destroy it by indirect aggression,
because the political, economic, and social life of
the Republic was so sound that subversive efforts,
which had been tried, had failed. The people
were loyal to their Republic. Therefore, if this
experiment in human liberty was to be crushed,
this crushing could only be done by armed attack.
That is what is being attempted.

A second reason which doubtless influenced them
was the desii-e to embarrass our plans for putting
Japan more and more onto a peace basis, with in-
creasing self-government in the Japanese people
themselves. I went to Japan so as to be able to
advise the President and the Secretary of State
as to what our next moves should be in carrying
forward the program of making Japan a full mem-
ber of the free world. Secretary of Defense John-
son and General Bradley, the Chief of Staff, were
in Japan at the same time looking into the situa-
tion from the standpoint of its security aspects.

The Communists must have feared the positive
and constructive steps which we were considering
in regard to Japan. They probably felt that if
they could capture all of Korea this would throw
a roadblock in the path of Japan's future develop-
ment. The Russians already hold the island of
Sakhalin, just to the north of Japan, and Korea is
close to the south of Japan. Thus, if the Com-
munists have not only Sakhalin to the north but
also Korea to the south, Japan would be between
the upi^er and lower jaws of the Russian Bear.
That, obviously, would make it more difficult to
provide the Japanese people with security as self-
governing, unarmed members of the free world.

Broadly speaking, the United States was de-
veloping positive and constructive policies to check

the rising tide of communism in Asia and the
Pacific. The Communist leaders doubtless expect
their action in Korea to dislocate our plans.

Attack Strengthens Free World

They will, I think, be disappointed. The result
of their armed attack on the Republic of Korea
will be to strengthen both the resolution and the
capabilities of the free world. We now know we
have to meet a new danger to world peace and
security. We have always known that Commu-
nists believed in advancing their cause by methods
of violence. We have, however, hoped, up to now,
that they would limit themselves to violence of an
internal character such as strikes, sabotage, and
possibly guerrilla and civil warfare. We hoped
that they would not use military might to attack
and conquer peaceful countries in open violation
of the principles established by the United Na-
tions to insure international peace and security.

The Korean attack marks a new phase in Com-
munist recklessness. If the members of the United
Nations sat idly by and did nothing to repel the
present armed attack, then almost certainly that
method would be used elsewhere. One country
after another would be conquered by Red armies,
and the result would be to make a third world war
almost certain. Also, by that time, the Russian
position would be so strong that the United States
and other remnants of the free world would be in
great peril.

Fortunately, the world is organized for peace
better than in 1939. The United Nations Security
Council acted almost instantly to condemn the ag-
gression on Korea and called on the member states
to help repel the attack. The j^rompt response of
the United States and other members shows that
aggressors cannot now act with impunity.

The President of the United States, with bi-
partisan backing, has given our nation, and indeed
the entire free world, fine leadership. Tlie Ameri-
can people are united for action, not only in Korea
but also, as the President has pointed out, to pre-
vent Formosa, Indochina, and the Philippines
falling into Communist aggression.

In my recent book. War or Peace, I said that
men would never see lasting jjeace unless they
were willing to mobilize for peace the moral and
material resources that they would mobilize for
war.

We are now waging peace. I think we shall
win it. It will not be won easily. It will require
sacrifices and will involve risks. It seems that
the immediate risk is not general war but rather
that of an experimental probing effort to find out
whether, under present world conditions, armed
aggression pays. That militaristic experiment
nuist fail. If we, with other free nations, make
it fail, then we will have made an epochal step
toward lasting peace.

Department of State Bulletin

Support of Mutual Defense Assistance Program for 1951

Statement by Secretary Acheson ^

I appear before you today to support an ap-
propriation for the continuance of the Mutual De-
fense Assistance Program during fiscal year 1951.
This appropriation is required for three purposes :
First, to provide new obligational authority for
the program which is proposed for the forthcom-
ing 12 months ; second, to provide cash to liquidate
this year's contract authority ; and third, to make
available, for use in fiscal year 1951, that small
portion of cash and contract authority which is
required to complete the current program and
which may still remain unobligated on June 30.

On October 28, 1949, Congress appropriated
$814,010,000 in cash and $500,000,000 in contract
authority for the purposes of carrying out the
Mutual Defense Assistance Act of 1949. This
represented a total of $1,314,010,000 in new obli-
gational authority.

The appropriation of these funds did not occur
until late last year. Their expenditure, in large
part, was made contingent upon certain condi-
tions precedent which were not fulfilled until late
in January. Nevertheless, as was estimated in
hearings before this Committee last year, it has
been possible to obligate these funds almost com-
pletely. Thus, we have been able to inaugurate
the planned programs of aid which are so essen-
tial to our security and to proceed with further
plans and programs which are solidly based on
the foundations thus constructed. The legisla-
tion before this Committee includes a request that
that the small proportion of authorized funds not
yet obligated be made available for future obli-
gation. This is necessary in order to complete the
1950 progi-ams already begun. Also in the legis-
lation before you is a request for appropriations
to liquidate $455,523,729 worth of contract obli-
gations which have been entered into pursuant to
the authority granted last year.

The most important aspect of the proposed

" Made before the Senate Appropriations Committee on
June 26 and released to the press on the same date.

legislation, is, of course, the provision of funds
for the continuation of the Mutual Defense As-
sistance Program in 1951. For this purpose,
$1,222,500,000 is requested. The total is proposed
to be allocated as follows :

Allocation of 1951 MDAP Funds

A total of 1 billion dollars for provision of
military assistance to our partners in the North
Atlantic area; $131,500,000 for provision of mili-
tary assistance to Greece, Turkey, and Iran;
$16,000,000 for provision of military assistance to
the Republics of the Philippines and Korea, and
$75,000,000 for provision of assistance in the gen-
eral area of China.

I want to assure this Committee that I fully
appreciate that these are not small sums. It is
equally true that the problems we face are neither
small nor susceptible of cheap and easy solution.
The most careful and extensive consideration of
the need for these appropriations has been given
by the three agencies of the executive branch pri-
marily concerned — the Department of Defense,
the Economic Cooperation Administration, and
the Department of State. We have sought care-
fully to determine what is necessai-y in the present
world situation to maintain and enhance our se-
curity, what are the most effective and best means
for achieving that result, and what is required to
assure that we will obtain the maximum return.

When this Committee and the Congress last
year considered and approved an appropriation
for military assistance for nations in the North
Atlantic area, there had been a similar careful ex-
amination of requirements and methods, but there
was absent then an element of great importance
which is present now. That element is experience.
This year, we have the benefit of actual operation
of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization
(Nato) . The results to date are highly encourag-
ing ; they are real ; they are substantial ; they augur
well for the future.

The members of the North Atlantic Treaty have

July 10, 1950

achieved an amazing record, a record of peace-
time cooperation for peace unprecedented in his-
tory. Let us quickly review these remarkable
accomplishments from the point of view of what
they signify with respect to the next year.

Achievement of NAP Countries

The quick agreement of the North Atlantic
Treaty countries upon a strategic concept for the
integrated defense of the North Atlantic area as-
sured us that all the member nations are agreed
that tlie defense of the North Atlantic area can
not and will not be based on 12 individual and
separate nationalistic defense schemes but, rather,
on a coordinated and integrated defense plan for
the entire area, under which each nation would
play the role for which its location and resources
best fit it. We knew last year that such an agree-
ment must be reached if the task of defending the
area was to be met efficiently and effectively. The
fact that it was reached, and that it was reached
quickly, is significant of the mutual realization
and acceptance of the need for it by all the Treaty
members.

The progress made under the North Atlantic
Treaty is not confined to the acceptance of the
basic principles contained in the mutually agreed
and approved strategic concept. This was but
the fii-st step in a long series required to give life
and strength to the compact.

An effective organization, designed to meet and
solve the problems involved, has been established
by the North Atlantic Treaty countries. That or-
ganization, on its military side, provides the
means to reach sound collective military judg-
ments, with respect to the defensive requirements
for the North Atlantic Treaty area. On its fi-
nancial and economic side, it provides a means for
tackling the difficult problems involved in finding
ways and means to meet the common need for in-
creased strength. Illustrative of common prob-
lems are those involved in agreeing upon
production location and procedures, financing of
production, and transfers, standardization, and
the like. The agreement reached at the recent
North Atlantic Treaty Council meeting to estab-
lish a permanent Council of Deputies will provide
a mechanism in continuous operation to guide,
coordinate, and integrate the work of the various
subordinate bodies of the organization.

Outstanding in the progress of the Nato to date
is the resolution of the North Atlantic Treaty
Council urging governments in developing forces
for the defense of the North Atlantic area to con-
centrate on the creation of balanced collective
forces rather than balanced national forces. This
resolution, which, significantly, also urged the
progressive build-up of defense forces, exemplifies
the realistic and forthright determination of all
members to proceed vigorously and to base their
efforts on a principle of fundamental importance.

The bilateral agreements between the North

Atlantic Treaty countries and the United States,
under which our aid is provided, are solemn under-
takings wliich assure that our assistance is but a
part of, and is matched by, a cooperative self-help
program designed to increase the defensive
strength of the area. That these undertakings
were sincere and earnestly supported by all par-
ticipants has been borne out by the implementing
deeds thereunder. Thus, in spite of the continued
necessity of attaining economic recovery and sta-
bility, wliich is essential to the success of any
defense effort in Western Europe, oiu- European
partners are progressively devoting greater effort
and more funds to meeting defense needs. In spite
of the violent and full-scale Soviet propaganda at-
tacks against the program of defense, and despite
Soviet efforts to promote strikes and violence to
prevent the unloading of material being shipped
under this program, these nations have proceeded
courageously, steadily, and effectively to increase
the defensive strength of the area, through their
own efforts and with our help. The fact that they
have and are so acting is significant of a new spirit
which is being developed in Eui'ope, a spirit which
is based upon the conviction that the job can and
will be done.

The proposals recommended by the Administra-
tion for fiscal year 1951 are specifically related to
these accomplishments. The manner in which
next year's program has been developed demon-
strates this fact. "Wliile based on a variety of
factors, those fundamental to our consideration
here are: First, the program consists of those
items most urgently needed at this time, based
on the i-equirements for the defense of the area as
they have been developed by the planning of the
Treaty Organization; second, it takes account of
the ability of the European nations, actively co-
operating together on the basis of self-help and
mutual aid, tlirough their own increased military
production, to fill these requirements without
destroying their economic stability; third, it is
limited by the capability of the European nations
to support forces and the capacity of those forces
to assimilate the aid which can be furnished; and
fourth, it is governed by our own military supply
position and capacity to furnish aid.

Assistance Promotes Security of U.S.

What has been agreed to, accomplished, and
undertaken to date offers us full assurance that
our aid will contribute to the integrated defense of
the area; that it will be utilized solely for the
build-up of balanced collective defense forces, and
that we will, thereby, promote the security of the
United States.

This program for next year will certainly not
complete the task of building adequate defensive
strength in the North Atlantic area. Much re-
mains to be done; Soviet Russia still pursues the
course of arming for aggression, threatening the
weaker nations, jn-obing for their weakest spots,

Department of State Bulletin

refusinp; to work through the United Nations for
peace. We have not yet been able fully to deter-
mine the exact size and nature of the defensive
strength required to insure us against future ag-
gression against the North Atlantic area. We do
know that our defenses are far too weak; we do
know that we must aid our partners to build up
their forces swiftly.

We also know that the spirit of the peoples of
the North Atlantic area is progressively more
hopeful, reflecting an increasing conviction that
free peoples, working freely together on terms of
equality and mutual understanding, can make
their own defense a real and attainable objective.
We and our partners must continue to work hard;
we must work effectively. Each must do what he
best can to achieve the goal. By working together,
our cherished freedoms can be maintained.

Turning to the recommendation of continued
militaiy assistance for Greece and Turkey, we find
ourselves with a more extensive and equally en-
couraging record. The success which has been
achieved by the peoples of Greece is clear proof
that the forces of aggression can be halted by in-
voking the pi'oper measures at the proper time.
The Greek Government now has full control of
all its territories for the first time since 1940.
These hard-won gains must not be lost. Greece
must continue to build up its defensive strength in
order to maintain its internal security which is
so essential to the attainment of economic and po-
litical stability. The people of Greece must be aole
to subdue, quickly, any possible recrudescence of
Communist guerrilla activities. The successes so
far, which United States aid enabled the Greeks
to attain, do make it possible for military assist-
ance from the United States to be reduced sub-
stantially below that provided last year. The
Greek program is a concrete illustration of the
practical values of providing military assistance
to peoples determined to defend themselves and
their liberties.

The record of our program of military assistance
to Turkey is another one of which we can be proud.
The Turkish people, even before any provision of
assistance by us, and unprepared for modern war-
fare though they were, withstood Soviet pressures.
With our assistance, supplementing their own de-
termination, this strong resistance against con-
tinued Soviet pressures has been based on an in-
creasing ability to meet force with force. The
Turkish will to resist is characterized by its ex-
penditure of 35^0 percent of its revenues for

military purposes. These heavy expenditures,
which cannot be increased without serious en-
dangering of the Turkish economy, cannot provide
the equipment which is required to complete the
modernization of the Turkish armed forces and
to provide the further training in modern warfare
which is needed. Our continued assistance will
enable Turkey to meet the requirements imposed
by a ruthless potential aggressor.

I need not, in discussing the request for the con-
tinuation of military assistance to Iran, elaborate
on its strategic position and the importance to the
free world of maintaining its security. To main-
tain its security, Iran needs modern well-equipped
forces. Iran cannot, in its present economic con-
dition, meet its needs without help. It requires
assistance to modernize its forces and to meet its
most urgent military deficiencies. We propose to
aid Iran in filling some of its most urgent needs
in order that it may become capable of meeting
its security problems.

The situation in the Far East was never more
than today a matter of the gravest concern to this
Government. The bill before the Committee pro-
vides $16,000,000 in additional funds for aid to
Korea and the Philippines and $75,000,000 for aid
in the general area of China. The importance of
obtaining these funds need not be underlined.
All matters relating to United States aid in the
Far East are now in the hands of the President
for his decision so far as the executive branch is
concerned. Under these circumstances and at his
direction, I shall not talk today about possible
courses of action in that area. It must be obvious
that the immediate passage of tlris bill, with the
funds which it will provide for use in the Far East
and the flexibility which it contains, is of the
greatest importance.

In summary, I would like to repeat what I said
earlier : It is our sincere and honest judgment that
this program, and every dollar of it, is urgently
needed for the security of our friends and our-
selves. Military assistance is not a panacea of
all the ills of the world, nor will this pi-ogram solve
all the problems with which we must deal. I am
convinced, however, that this aid will contribute,
and materially contribute, to the creation of situ-
ations in which we may be able more efl'ectively to
deal with and to solve those problems.

Our objective is peace. If we are to have peace,
the free nations of the world must be strong.
This program will aid them in the achievement
of that strength which will discourage aggression
and promote peace.

July 10, 1950

LABOR'S ROLE IN WORLD AFFAIRS

hy Bernard Wiesman ^

American labor is so important a segment of the
American population and so dynamic a force in
American economics and politics that it must play
a major part in the shaping of American diplo-
macy. Even if labor were to remain completely
silent, its very silence would influence American
policy and remove one of the most potent in-
fluences which now constitute America's activity
in world affairs.

Labor's role in world affairs is obviously that
of one section of the American people and pre-
supposes similar activity by other elements of
American life whether they be in industry or
agriculture, in religion or in education.

Labor is more than a numerical portion of the
American population so far as world affairs are
concerned. Labor has a special significance in
the production of essentials of national life and
of international trade. In addition, it has a par-
ticular importance in people-to-people relation-
ships. In the present phase of world progress,
working people are in the lead in what might be
described as a revolutionary development. In
some of the older industrial countries, labor has
come of age and has begun to exercise the duties
of the head of the family. In newer countries,
there is an almost frantic haste to bridge within
months or years the experience of many centuries.
In such areas, working people are being invited
to take on roles of responsibility in the political,
social, and economic life of their country for which
they have lacked even the most elementary of the
three E's. Whether this situation is good or bad

' This article is based on an address delivered before
the eight annual conference of the Labor Education As-
sociation at Swarthmore, Pa., on June 17.

is not the question. It is a fact, and we must try
as a nation to face facts and to build upon them
the structures which, in the long range, will be
in the best interests of all concerned.

Control of the organized labor movement of the
world is among the foremost objectives for which
the Kremlin is now waging its cold war. Labor's
role in world affairs, therefore, becomes a matter
of major significance to our country as a whole.
Leaders in AFL, CIO, and Railway Brotherhoods
have a keen realization of that fact and have taken
effective steps aimed to checkmate the Comin-
form's program as exemplified in the so-called
World Federation of Trade Unions (Wrru).

Labor's Role in Promoting Freedom

What organized labor can do to promote the
basic freedoms in the present world is a respon-
sibility for labor to decide. The Department of
State has no desire to dictate to labor what it
should do or to try to control what labor does.
We know that we neither have the right nor the
wisdom to manage the affairs of a free world labor
movement. The Department of State realizes the
fundamental truth in what President Truman re-
cently said concerning the effectiveness of Ameri-
can labor's testimony among workers in other
lands.

The Department, therefore, asks the trade-union
leaders of this country to carry America's message
abroad through all available channels and to see
that workers in other lands come to know what
our freedoms mean and to choose those freedoms
as their way of life. We want American trade
unionists to show other workers that the strength
of our nation is in its freedom, its friendliness, its

Department of State Bulletin

hope of helping others, its moral principles. We
want American trade unionists to show workers of
otlier lands that the American worker is about as
close as anyone can get to the average American
citizen, that he is a hard-working decent guy who
aims to earn his pay and get more of it, using it
for a comfortable living for his family, going to
church on Sunday, and sending his youngsters to
school and many of them to college.

If the masses of workers in other lands could
know American workers as they are, they would
reject instinctively the deceits of the Cominform,
which are predicated upon the thesis that Ameri-
can workers are either fools or knaves. The kind
of false propaganda which they peddle is based
upon the fiction that American labor leaders are
the tools of the State Department and that the
State Department is the tool of Wall Street.

The propagandists of the so-called World Fed-
eration of Trade Unions attack the new Inter-
national Confederation of Free Trade Unions as
a sort of Titoist deviationism and label it the
"Yellow Internationale." They use that label in
countries outside of the Orient. In that area, they
presumably use a different adjective.

Labor's Contribution

to International Cooperation

The trade-union centers of this country, AFL,
CIO, and Railway Labor Executives, are actively
committed to a program of international co-
operation to advance free trade unionism and to
unmask and discredit the Wftu as the satellite
of the Cominform. The AFL, the CIO, and the
United Mine Workers all participated in the
founding, last December at London, of the In-
ternational Confederation of Free Trade Unions
(IcFTu). The Railway Labor Executives under-
standably make their international cooperation
through the IcFTU-affiliated International Trans-
portworkers' Federation (Itf). Credit should be
acknowledged to the part played by two great
American trade unionists in bringing about the
affiliation of the Railway Labor Executives with
the Itf at a time when it was the sole rallying
point of international opposition to the Wftu.
I refer to the late Bob Watt, of the AFL, and the
late Harry Frazer, of the Railway Labor Exec-
utives.

Membership in these world organizations is by
no means the only evidence of AFL or CIO ac-
tivity internationally. Both have standing in-

ternational committees composed of executive
council members and full-time international
representatives. Both devote an extensive por-
tion of the time of the aimual conventions to in-
ternational affaii's and the President and Secre-
tary-Treasurer of each take direct personal in-
terest in the international activity.

The Free Trade Union Committee of the AFL
has been an active and constructive force in Europe
and Asia. Tlie Amalgamated Clothing Workers
is an example of international activity by one of
the great trade unions of the CIO. The UAW
is another CIO union which has shown initiative
in international activity. A further example, per-
haps the most dramatic because of its far-reaching
influence is the International Ladies Garment
Workers Union.

The specialized Latin American activities of the
AFL, and of the CIO, should also be noted espe-
cially in view of this country's good-neighbor
policy.

Traditional ties with other countries have also
brought fraternal relations between the trade-
union movements. A half-century practice of ex-
changing fraternal delegates has knit a bond be-
tween the AFL and the British Trades Union Con-
gress, while both AFL and CIO have sent special
representatives to Italy and Israel to help the
trade-union movements there meet their postwar
problems.

Trade-union dollars are backing up the words
of convention resolutions, and day-to-day efforts
of trade-union leaders abroad are translating the
policies of international committees.

Activities of International Labor Organizations

The International Confederation of Free Trade
Unions is the trade-union center of the free world
to which belongs almost every major labor organi-
zation which is free to choose. Those affiliated
with the International Federation of Christian
Trade Unions and a small handful of others re-
main outside at present, for cogent national rea-
sons. American labor leaders have tried hard to
secure the affiliation of all trade-union centei-s of
the free world, but the Christian unions, which
are of great importance in certain European coun-
tries, have a long tradition of international col-
laboration to seek Christian ideals of employer-
worker relations as distinguished from the Social-
ist philosophy which permeates the thinking of
their major rivals. Italy now has a unified trade-

July 10, 1950

union center of major non-Communist unions to
compete with the Communist-controlled Federa-
tion headed by Di Vittorio.

The International Confederation of Free Trade
Unions with headquarters at Brussels was cre-
ated only in December. Late in May, the Icftu
held its first Council meeting and gave evidence
that it has begun to function. Icftu is sending a
delegation of five members, including two Ameri-
cans, to make a 3-month survey of the situation in
Asian countries with a view to determining what,
if any, regional organization should be established.
Later in the year, the possibility of a Latin Amer-
ican regional set-up will be investigated. A re-
cent meeting at Dusseldorf, to consider the prob-
lems of the Ruhr, indicates the possible develop-
ment of a European unit. The Icftu is getting
under way as a nongovernmental organization with
category A consultative status with the Economic
and Social Council of the United Nations, the In-
ternational Labor Organization, etc. The Icftu
intends to be the voice of free world labor, sustain-
ing the cause of legitimate trade unions as essen-
tial in any economic democracy and as bulwarks
of any political democracy. All major American
trade unions have shown their support for the
Icftu, but it is to be expected that the unions ex-
pelled by the CIO for devotion to the Communist
Party will confirm that misguided zeal by affiliat-
ing with the Wftu.

The AVorld Federation of Trade Unions wears
a resjiectable label, placed upon it by a great
American labor leader who had thought that
active participation in Wftu would contribute to
a democratic peace. He was eager to emphasize
that it should be a bona fide trade-union system,
rather than a political mechanism for labor, but
he has long since concluded that the ideals he
sought could not be achieved in a Wftu controlled
by the Kremlin. The Wfitt was Moscow's major
postwar front organization through which Mos-
cow sought to manipulate world opinion, to con-
trol the international policies of national trade-
union centers, and to infiltrate national centers.
It was founded in 1945, and, in 1949, the three
major free trade-union members withdrew. They
had decided that they could no longer associate
with a Wftu which in 1945 appealed for all pos-
sible aid for reconstruction of Europe and which
in 1947 refused even to publicize the Marshall
Plan. The Wftu, free of the restraining influ-
ence of the legitimate trade unionists from the

United States, United Kingdom, and Nether-
lands, has enrolled itself in the service of the Com-
inform even to the extent of denouncing the
Wftu Executive Council member from Yugo-
slavia severing ties with him as a Titoist, and of
divorcing tiie Yugoslav labor oi-ganization of
which he is Secretary General, from contact with
other members of the Wftu. The color of the
Wftu was also shown by the pronounciamentos
at its Peiping meeting late last year. In language
of plainly incendiary character, it called upon the
workers of Asia to follow the example of China
and to overthrow their alleged exploiters in the
governments of the new and old nations of Asia.
The Wftu delegates at Peiping included a choice
collection of Asian representatives who have been
in process of education at Moscow for many years
and who are evidently being returned to their
native lands for subversive activities among the
workere in such countries as India, Indonesia, and
Malaya.

Perhaps, the best description of the Wrru of
today is that it is the company union for the Com-
inform in which membership ordinarily is com-
pulsory for Communist-dominated unions and
through which the Wftu management hopes to
sabotage and destroy legitimate, and hence free,
trade unionism.

In this hemisphere, the Confederation of Latin
American Workers predated the Wftu but rarely
has deviated from the master pattern.

AFL and CIO leaders are now working with
the Icftu leadership toward a legitimate demo-
cratic regional organization. The sponsors of the
Inter-American Confederation of Labor, estab-
lislied only 2 or 3 years ago as a rallying point for
iniions free of Communist control, are eager to
take such steps as will effectuate their original
intent in union with the Icftu. Similiar
strengthening of two other regional organizations
is expected through the Icftu. I refer to the
Asian Federation of Labor which held its first
regional meeting in Ceylon last January and to
the ERP-Trade Union Advisory Committee in
Europe.

Mention must be made of another form of inter-
national cooperation among workers. I refer to
the international trade secretariats or, as they
might be called, the international industrial or
craft federations. There are more than a dozen
of these affiliated with the Icftu in a cooperating
arrangement which preserves the essential auton-

Department of State Bulletin

omy of these federations. This group includes
the International Federation of Transport work-
ers wliich combines national organizations repre-
senting between 4 and 5 million workers in marine,
rail, highway, and air transport in countries all
over the world. The International Metal Work-
ers, the Miners' Federation, the Textile "Workers
are among the next largest. Only one of these
groups has chosen to desert freedom and that one
is the journalists' union where leadei-ship was
secured on a narrow margin and the organization
perverted to Communist aims. Organizations
such as the Newspaper Guild have accordingly
left the group.

In Europe, most of these international trade
secretariats have functioned since early in this
century. They have supplied fraternal ties among
workers in the great industries, and those which
have enjoyed any substantial income have been im-
portant factors in the economic life of the Conti-
nent. They are not competitors of the Icftu.
They have their own financing through dues col-
lected from national affiliates such as the Kailway
Labor Executives, the Machinists, the UAW-CIO,
the Mine Workers, etc.

The importance of their work is emphasized by
the energy with which the World Federation of
Trade Unions, having failed to capture the secre-
tariats, has undertaken to set up rival organiza-
tions. The Wrru program, originally, was to
transform the autonomous secretariats into indus-
trial departments of the Wrru. Wlien the major
free unions left the Wrxu, it undertook to estab-
lish international unions with the appearance of
autonomy which could invite the affiliation of out-
fits such as the International Longshoremen's and
Warehousemen's Union. There Wrru agencies
have sought to get the affiliation of any national
unions of like-minded leadei'ship even when the
national trade-union center has repudiated the
Wftu itself and denounced all of its arms and
legs.

Labor's role in world affairs is recognized in
the operations of the United Nations and its organs
and specialized agencies. On the one hand, many
national delegations include among their dele-
gates or advisers men and women from labor-
union leadership. On the other hand, as author-
ized in the Charter of the United Nations,
international nongovernmental organizations have
been accorded consultative status with the Eco-
nomic and Social Council and its commissions.

The Icftu and the Ifctu now are among the cate-
gory A consultants which also include the Wftxt.
The Transport workers are in category B which
consists of the more specialized groups. Ameri-
can labor leaders have been among the United
States delegations to the International Trade Or-
ganization Preparatory Conference and to confer-
ences of the World Health Organization and of
the United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization as well as on the National
Commission for Unesco.

The Operation of the ILO

I have reserved mention of the International
Labor Organization until now. The Ilo is the
unique intergovernmental organization which,
since 1919, constitutionally includes in its confer-
ences and Governing Body, representatives of
employers and workers who jointly share author-
ity on a par with those of governments in formu-
lating international labor standard treaties. It
was created at the urgent demand of a few great
progressive leaders at Versailles. The Ilo is ded-
icated to the principle that enduring peace must
be founded on social justice and that the pro-
gressive improvement of conditions among work-
ers anywhere is essential to the well-being of
people everywhere. At Philadelphia, 6 years ago,
the principles of 1919 were reviewed by the repre-
sentatives of employers, workers, and governments
of member nations so that social progress could be
charted even while war was being desperately
waged. The solemn declaration of Philadelphia
has since been annexed to the Ilo Constitution and
demonstrates general acceptance of the facts that
"poverty anywhere constitutes a danger to pros-
perity everywhere," that "labor is not a commod-
ity," and that "freedom of expression and of
association are essential to sustained progress."

Another quote from the declaration of Phila-
delphia expresses a concise and far-reaching phi-
losophy about labor's role in world affairs :

The war against want requires to be carried on with
unrelenting vigour within each nation, and by continuous
and concerted international effort in which the represent-
atives of workers and employers, enjoying equal status
with those of Governments, jdin with them in free dis-
cussion and democratic decision with a view to the pro-
motion of the common welfare.

In the framing of that declaration, representa-
tives of the workers and employers of this coun-
try shared with representatives of this Govem-

July 70, 1950

ment. The declaration itself was transmitted by
President Roosevelt to both Houses of the
Congress.

What is an objective estimate of Ilo's contribu-
tion to the world?

The Ilo has substantially benefited the world by
building within the minds and consciences of gov-
ernments, employei's, and workers a realization of
national duty and international responsibility,
progressively, to improve the conditions of life
among working people. Many tangible proofs
exist of Ilo service to member nations, but it has
most significantly served by causing responsible
leaders to recognize the need and to accept the
challenge that remedies must be found together.

Role of the Trade Unionists

In the State Department, the importance of
having expert knowledge of what labor is think-
ing and doing is evidenced in several ways. The
Department itself, under the reorganization of
1949, has a labor adviser in each of the four geo-
graphic areas, headed by Assistant Secretaries of
State, one in the German Affairs office, which has
equivalent status because of its operating respon-
sibilities, in addition to the Labor Adviser to the
Assistant Secretary for Economic Affairs, who
has active responsibility for relations extending
beyond the limits of any single area. Their duties
concern the activities and interests of national and
international labor organizations which extend
beyond the areas of any single geographic area and
involve political as well as economic matters.

The Department of State has trade-union con-
sultants from the AFL and the CIO who provide
valuable advice and liaison.

Top officers of the Department, beginning with
Secretary Acheson, have meetings with represen-
tative labor leaders from time to time. On some
matters, such as policy concerning relations with
Spain and the Argentine, trade unionists freely
criticize the Department's policies after careful
considerations of general over-all character which
included American labor's well-known views on
the subject. On most matters, however, American
trade unions stand firmly in support of American
foreign policy.

The Foreign Service of the United States now
includes about 30 labor attaches and labor re-
porting officers, including several trade unionists,
whose duties include knowing what the trade
unions are thinking and doing, advising Embassy

and Departmental officers of any significant de-
velopments and helping to transmit some under-
standing to trade unionists and government of-
ficials about what American labor is and does.

The Department of Labor also recognizes the
responsibility of our Govermnent to promote
understanding and cooperation among the work-
ing people and the trade unions of all countries
accessible to us. Under the Assistant Secretary
of Labor, Philip Kaiser, there is an Office of In-
ternational Labor Affairs with which our office
works closely and cooperatively. The State De-
partment does not duplicate the technical services
of the Department of Labor in connection with
international labor standards. An interdepart-
mental committee on international social policy
provides the vehicle for formal cooperation among
the several departments concerned with specific
problems. Through that device, position papers
on labor matters which may arise at Ilo or United
Nations meetings are normally formulated.

The Labor Department has a trade union ad-
visory committee on international labor affairs
which has furnished a useful channel for con-
sultation and cooperation.

EGA, of course, has formalized labor's partici-
pation in its top councils here and abroad.

Labor's role in world affairs would be meaning-
less if economic isolation were to govern its poli-
cies. The IcFTu Constitution declares as one of
its aims to —

advocate with a view of raising the general level of pros-
perity, increased and properly planned economic coopera-
tion among the nations in such a way as will encourage
the development of wider economic units and freer ex-
change of commodities and to seek full participation of
workers' representatives in olBcial bodies dealing with
these questions.

The pressing need among free peoples is to
reduce, as rapidly as consistent with the general
welfare, such artificial barriers as lead to mis-
understanding, suspicion, or exploitation. It is
to be devoutly hoped that trade unionists in all
free countries, including our own, can lead in pro-
moting the brotherhood of peoples and finding
the ways to make the adjustments necessary to
prevent or minimize local repercussions.

Conclusion

My experience in 20 years of intimate collabora-
tion with the trade-union movement of the United
States and of considerable experience with the

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

trade-union movements of other countries leads
me to assert that what is good for labor inter-
nationally is generally good for our country and
all other countries which shai'e our basic beliefs.
Workers constitute around one third of the popu-
lation, and, in many countries, the trade-union
movement which speaks on their behalf includes in
its membership one out of every three or four
workers.

The chief area of controversy usually comes in
the exercise of judgments as to whether a specific
program is good for labor and for the general
public. Honest men of good will can diiler objec-
tively in reaching a decision and, once taken, can
work to carry out that decision even if it does not
appear to any of them to be perfect. One of the
most unfortunate aspects of the trial by accusation
through which the Department is now passing is
that real common goals have been obscured by con-
troversy which should have been avoidable.

I refer to that controversy as I approach what
to me is perhaps the greatest contribution which
American labor can make in world affairs at this
time. Basic American foreign policy is, I hon-
estly believe, designed to accomplish goals which
are good for mankind and which are essential in
combating the threatened enslavement of the
minds and bodies of men.

If that objective is true, as I believe it to be, the
next problem is how to persuade the people of our
country and of the world that these goals are
their goals and that we should all work together
to attain them. It is my opinion — and one shared
widely within the Department of State — that the
American trade unions, in cooperation with the
International Confederation of Free Trade
Unions — can best convince the workers of other
lands that they should support these goals in their
own self-interest.

If I know trade unions at all, I know that they
must rest their first judgments on the credentials
a man carries. If he carries a card in a union, it
takes him as a brother unless he proves himself
to the contrary. If he carries a message to that
union, it goes on the assumption that it is designed
to be in its interest. So with American foreign
policy. If American trade unionists will take
these basic American foreign policies which they

believe are in the best interests of their brothers
and sisters of the Icfttj and endorse them for the
consideration and support of associated free trade
unions around the world, they will strike a deadly
blow at the propaganda of the Cominform and the
Wftu. Labor's endorsement is worth far more
than tons of newsprint or hours of radio time by
official spokesmen so far as convincing workers in
other lands that we are really their friends.

The essence of trade unionism, whether non-
denominational, or Socialist, or Christian, is to
be a good provider and to share its strength with
its brothers. It combines the patriotism of the
loyal citizen with the brotherhood among workers
which is truly international. With that combina-
tion Labor's role in world affairs must be active
and should always be a firm foundation for the
building of a peace and social justice.

Special Staff To Assist
Ambassador Grady in Iran

[Released to the press June 28]

Dr. Henry F. Grady, whose appointment as
United States Ambassador to Iran was confirmed
by the Senate on June 26, will have the assistance
of a special economic staff, some of whose members
have preceded him to Tehran in the past few days.
Ambassador Grady, who has been in Athens con-
cluding his duties there as Ambassador and Chief
of the American Aid Mission, is expected to arrive
in Tehran shortly.

The special staff will assist the Ambassador in
assessing the present economic situation in Iran
with authority to recommend to both Governments
appropriate steps which might be taken to bring
about improved conditions in the economic life of
this important Middle Eastern country.

The economic staff, which is expected to remain
in Iran for about 3 months, will include Leslie A.
Wheeler, a senior Foreign Service officer and well-
known specialist in agricultural economics;
George Woodbridge, officer in charge of economic
affairs, Office of Greek, Turkish, and Iranian Af-
fairs of the Department of State ; and Paul Parker,
the Middle East representative of the Treasury
Department. Leslie L. Kood, a Foreign Service
officer assigned to the Embassy, will serve as execu-
tive secretary of the staff. It is expected that a
few additional specialists may be added at a later
date.

My 10, 1950

Answer to Soviet Protest on MacArthur Clemency Circular

U.S. NOTE OF JUNE 8, 1950 >

• The Department of States aclmowledges the re-
ceipt of note No. 74 of May 11, 1950 from the Em-
bassy of the Union of Soviet Socialist Kepublics.
The note calls attention to Circular No. 5 "Clem-
ency for War Criminals" issued by command of
General MacArthur on March 7, 1950. It is al-
leged that the circular runs counter to the Charter
of the International Military Tribunal for the
Far East and the decision of the Far Eastern
Commission of April 3, 1946, relating to the appre-
hension, trial and punishment of war criminals
in the Far East. The Government of the United
States is urged to take measures to have Circular
No. 5 revoked.

Inasmuch as the matters referred to in the note
are vrithin the jurisdiction of the Far Eastern
Commission, the request of the Soviet Government
should have been addressed to the Commission.
In this connection the attention of the Soviet Gov-
ernment is called to the minutes of the 193d meet-
ing of the Fec, May 18, 1950 which contain a
statement of the views of the United States on the
parole of Japanese war criminals. Nevertheless,
as the position of the Soviet Government is at
variance with the views of the Government of the
United States, those views are set forth for the
Soviet Government's information.

The Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers
is the sole executive authority for the Allied
Powers in Japan, and as such, has the responsi-
bility for carrying out the judgments of any inter-
national courts appointed by him. This is spe-
cifically recognized by Article 17 of the Charter
of the International Military Tribunal for the
Far East and by paragi-aph 5 (b) (1) of the Far
Eastern Commission policy decision of April
3, 1946.

Under Article 17 of the Charter of the Inter-
national Military Tribunal for the Far East the
Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers may
"at any time" reduce or otherwise alter a sentence
of the Tribunal except to increase its severity and
paragraph 5 (b) (2) of the Far Eastern Commis-

' Delivered on June 8 to the Soviet Embassy at Wash-
ington, and released to the press on the same date.

sion policy decision of April 3, 1946, confirms that
he has "the power to approve, reduce or otherwise
alter any sentences," imposed by any international
courts appointed by him. Whether the Supreme
Commander can exercise his power to reduce or
otherwise alter a sentence "only while considering
the question of the approval of this sentence" as
contended in the Soviet Government's note or
whether this may be done "at any time" as provided
by Article 17 of the Charter quoted above is un-
necessary to consider at this time as no reductions
or alterations in the sentences imposed by the In-
ternational Military Tribunal for the Far East
have been made by the Supreme Commander and
none are contemplated by him.

The Soviet Government is apparently under the
impression that paroles such as are provided for
by Circular No. 5 are alterations of the sentences
imposed by the International Military Tribunal.
This is fundamental error. A parole is in no
sense an alteration of a sentence but permission by
the appropriate authority for the convicted crimi-
nal to serve part of his sentence outside of prison
under certain conditions and controls and subject
to being returned to prison for serving the re-
mainder of the sentence if the conditions of the
parole are violated. This method of dealing with
convicted criminals is in accordance with the prac-
tice in enlightened and democratic countries.

For the reasons indicated the Government of
the United States declines the request of the Soviet
Government that it take measures looking to the
revocation by the Supreme Commander of his Cir-
cular No. 5.

SOVIET NOTE OF MAY 11, 1950

[Translation]

The Embassy of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics, under instructions from the Soviet
Government, has the honor to communicate to the
Department of State of the U.S.A. the following.

On March 7 of this year. General MacArthur,
Commander-in-Chief for the Allied Powers in
Japan, issued Circular No. 5 by which it was es-
tablished that all the war criminals who are now
serving terms in prison in Japan, according to

Department of State Bulletin

sentence, may be released before the completion
of their terms.

As is well known, 16 Japanese major war crim-
inals who were sentenced to imprisonment by the
International Military Tribunal for the Far East,
for the gravest crimes against humanity, are serv-
ing their sentences in Japan.

The circular of the Commander-in-Chief repre-
sents an attempt to free by a unilateral order the
major Japanese war criminals from completing
their punishment, which was determined and came
into legal force by the sentence of the Inter-
national Tribunal, in which representatives of the
U.S.S.R., the U.S.A., Great Britain, France,
China, the Netherlands, Canada, Australia, New
Zealand, India, and the Philippines participated.
Such acts of the Commander-in-Chief, directed
towards changing or entirely reversing the de-
cision of the International Tribunal established
on the basis of the agreement between the U.S.A.,
Great Britain, the U.S.S.R., and China, authoriz-
ing the said Court to determine the degree of
punishment for the major Japanese war criminals,
guilty of committing the gravest crimes against
humanity, constitute a gross violation of the ele-
mentary norms and principles of international
law.

According to Article 17 of the Charter of the
International Military Tribunal, as well as accord-
ing to clause "B" (2) of paragraph 5 of the de-
cision of the Far Eastern Commission of April 3,
1916 concerning "the apprehension, trial, and pun-
ishment of war criminals in the Far East," the
Commander-in-Chief has the right to reduce or
otherwise alter the sentence pronounced by the
International Tribunal only while considering the
question of the approval of this sentence. Neither
the Charter of the Tribunal nor the afore-men-
tioned decision of the Far Eastern Commission
contain any provisions which would give the Com-
mander-in-Chief the right to reduce or otherwise
alter the sentence after it has been approved and
put into effect.

The sentence pronounced by the International
Tribunal in regard to Sadao Araki, Kiitsiro Hir-
anuma, Mamoru Sigemitsu and 13 other defend-
ants was approved by the Commander-in-Chief
after consultation with the Allied Council and
with the representatives of other powers which are
members of the Far Eastern Commission. On
November 24, 1948, the Commander-in-Chief an-
nounced his approval of the sentence of the In-
ternational Military Tribunal in the case of the
said Japanese major war criminals. In addition,
the Commander-in-Chief declared that he did not
find any omissions which could serve as a basis
for introducing any modifications in the sentence.
By his approval of the sentence of the Inter-
national Military Tribunal, the Commander-in-
Chief exhausted the authority granted him by the
Charter of the International Military Tribunal
for the Far East and by the decision of the Far

Eastern Commission of April 3, 1946, concerning
the introduction of modifications in the sentence
pronounced by the said International Military
Tribunal. By issuing the circular mentioned
above, the Commander-in-Chief exceeded his
authority, strictly limited by the provisions of the
appropriate international documents, which are
the Charter of the International Military Tri-
bunal and the policy decision of the Far Eastern
Commission of April 3, 1946, concerning "the
apprehension, trial, and punishment of war crim-
inals in the Far East."

The Soviet Government calls the attention of
the Govermnent of the United States to the acts
of General MacArthur, mentioned above, which
violate the agi'eement concerning the establish-
ment of an International Military Tribunal for
the Far East, reached between the U.S.S.R., the
U.S.A., Great Britain, China, and other countries
participating in the Tribunal, and which run
counter to the Charter of the International Mili-
tary Tribunal for the Far East and the decision
of the Far Eastern Commission of April 3, 1946.
The Soviet Government urges the Government of
the United States to take measures immediately
to revoke the afore-mentioned illegal Circular No.
5 of March 7 of this year in regard to the Japanese
major war criminals sentenced by the Interna-
tional Military Tribunal for the Far East.

Soviet Walk-Outs Flout

Democratic Process in United Nations

Statement hy Francis B. Sayre

U.S. Representative on the Trusteeship Council'^

The withdrawal of the Soviet representative
from this meeting repeats what now appears to
be the standard Soviet practice in the United Na-
tions organizations where China is represented.

Under the Council's rules of procedure, any
question regarding the credentials of any repre-
sentative on the Trusteeship Council is decided
by the majority vote of the Council after exami-
nation of the credentials by the Secretary-Gen-
eral. This has been done and the Council has
made its decision.

The United States accepts the decision just
taken by the Council. If the decision had been
otherwise, the United States, although opposed
to it, would have been prepared to abide by that
decision and continue its cooperation in the work
of the Council. I would ask the Trusteeship
Council members to consider the prospects for ef-
fective action by the Council or any other United
Nations organizations if all the members showed

" Made on the occasion of the withdrawal of the Soviet
representative from the meeting of the Trusteeship Coun-
cil on June 1, 1950, and released to the press by the U.S.
Mission to the United Nations on the same date.

July 10, J 950

the same arbitrary and dictatorial attitude as the
representative of the U.S.S.R. and absented them-
selves or refused to recognize decisions of the
organizations concerned whenever their own views
on any particular problem were not accepted.
Clearly, such an attitude would make it impossible
for the United Nations organizations to operate
effectively.

Needless to say, neither this Council nor other
United Nations organizations and agencies can
for one moment agree to the doctrine that the will-
ful absence of a single member can have any ef-
fect whatever upon the validity of decisions taken.
As members of this Council are well aware, the
Trusteeship Council operated during most of its
first two sessions as well as during its last session
without the benefit of Soviet participation. The
Council is fully able to do so again.

The very kernel of democracy is the acceptance
by all of the will of the majority under a system
which protects the rights of the minority. With-
out this, democratic government and world co-
operation become impossible. The growing prac-
tice on the part of the Soviet Government to re-
fuse to accept the vote of the majority is an attack
upon the fundamental principles of democracy and
upon the United Nations itself. It is tantamount
to an open flouting of the burning desire of well-
nigh all the peoples of the world for peace and
world cooperation.

Czechoslovak U.N. Representative
Resigns; U.S. Grants Asylum

[Released to the press June 13]

Vladimir Houdek, on May 16, 1950, announced his resig-
nation as permanent representative of Czechoslovakia to
the United Nations and wrote as follows to the Acting
Secretary-Oeneral of the United Nations.

The recent events in Czechoslovakia forced me as
Permanent Representative of the Czech Republic
to the United Nations to subject my relations to the
government I represent to a thorough and funda-
mental examination. These events show me that a
few individuals installed in a "Rokossowski way"
in the top positions mechanically apply methods
which are flagrant contradiction to our best tradi-
tions. Czechoslovak thus ceased to exist as an in-
dependent state. In protest of this development I
am submitting my resignation from the post of
the Permanent Representative of Czechoslovakia
to the United Nations.

At the same time, Mr. Houdek addressed the following
communication to President Truman.

JVIr. President : As a result of the recent events
in Czechoslovakia I deemed it my duty to resign
today from the post of the Czechoslovak Perma-
nent Representative to the United Nations. I did
so in order to protest before the whole world
against the methods which are being used in
Eastern European countries, including my own,
against the people who have brought the greatest
sacrifices in the interest of their nation both dur-
ing the war and after. These methods have been
imported to our country by a few individuals in-
stalled in a "Rokossowski way" in the top positions.
They ai'e in flagrant contradiction to our best tra-
ditions. The treatment of the American diplomats
by the Czechoslovak Ministry for Foreign Aii'aira
recently was but another expression of this atti-
tude. I cannot agree with this development. I
have therefore resigned from my present position
and ask you to grant me an asylum for me and my
family in the United States.

I arrived in the United States with my wife and
daugliter in 194G, and have been here ever since,
first as the member of the Czechoslovak Embassy
in Washington and later as the Permanent Repre-
sentative of Czechoslovakia to the United Nations.
During our stay in Washington a second daughter
of ours was born. Prior to my arrival in the
United States I was the Secretary for Slovak Af-
fairs to the late President Benes.

In submitting my request, I wish to say that the
only relatives we have in this world outside Czech-
oslovakia are living in the United States. This
not being the only reason I hope that the asylum
for us will be granted.

These public statements indicate that Mr. Hou-
dek can retain no ties with the Czechoslovak Com-
munist dictatorship. Were he to be returned to
Czechoslovakia, his life would of course be forfeit,
other potential defectors would be effectively dis-
couraged, and the Communist security apparatus
would, thereby, have gained a marked benefit.

It has been the traditional policy of the United
States to give sympathetic consideration to the
granting of asylum to political refugees. How-
ever, when requests are made to this Government
for political asylum, the Department considers
each according to its individual circumstances.
After careful consideration of Mr. Houdek's re-
quest, this Government, in accordance with the
procedure for dealing with such matters, has deter-
mined that it will not require him to depart from
the United States at this time.

Department of State Bulletin

CARRYING OUT POINT 4: A COMMUNITY EFFORT

Address hy Secretary Acheson^

It is a great pleasure for me to be with you tliis
morning and, particularly, a great pleasure to be
introduced by my own governor of Maryland.
Last night, as Governor Lane said, you listened to
Mr. Hoffman who gave you a very broad and com-
prehensive survey of the problems which exist in
the field of the foreign relationships of the United
States. This morning, I want to take one of those
problems and put it in a much narrower frame
than we had last night. I am taking this particular
problem, because it is of very great practical im-
portance to all of us here. It is of great impor-
tance to the United States. It is of great impor-
tance to the Secretary of State as one who will
have charge, I hope, of administering the law
which is about to be implemented by the Congress,
and it is a program in which you governors as a
practical matter can be of very great assistance.

First of all, let me put this program in its
frame.

I have recently come back from meetings abroad
in which we have been dealing primarily with the
defensive system of the Western world. That
whole defensive system is to create a shield behind
which the great constructive actions of the world
can go on. Our military programs are not an end
in themselves; they are a means, and, just as in
the early days, some members of the community
have to protect those people who are working in
the fields, who are building houses, who are doing
the constructive tasks of the community. So, to-
day, we must have this protective shield. I have

' Made before the Council of State Governments, White
Sulphur Springs, W. Va., on June 20 and released to the
press on the same date.

spoken in other places about the keystone role of
the Atlantic community in the constructive tasks
of the world, and I shall not talk about that this
morning. This great Western community with its
tremendous skills, with its great productive ca-
pacity, must be in the very center of the whole
effort of the free world to make itself strong, and
virile, and self-reliant.

What I should like to mention today is a task
which belongs to the Western world in its rela-
tions with less fortunate peoples. We have many
I^roblems of our own, and we will work those out
in the West. We have to take barriers away from
the flow of trade ; we have to get greater coopera-
tion in the intellectual and other spheres ; we have
to make our own views known throughout the
world much more vigorously than we are doing
at present ; but those are intra-Western problems.
There are another series of problems which have
to do with the relation of the Western world to that
vast unnumbered millions of people who live in
Asia, and in Africa, and in the Middle East. These
areas are called the underdeveloped portions of
the world.

It is in regard to this problem that I should
like to talk with you this morning and that, to be
very brief, has to do with what has become known
as the Point 4 Program — that is, the program of
technical assistance. It is a program which was
originally announced by the President in his
inaugural address in 1949. The law which permits
us to go forward with technical assistance has
been passed by the Congress, and the matter of
providing funds for it is now before the House
and the Senate ; and I want to talk for a few mo-
ments about the nature of that problem and about

Jo/y JO, 7950

the help which you governors can give to us in
carrying it out.

I think the program has been very much mis-
understood. In many areas, it is talked of as
though it were a give-away program, a program
which is going to take hundreds and hundreds of
millions of dollars.

That is not what we are talking about. We are
talking about a program of technical assistance.
It is a jirogram which costs comparatively little
money, and the money which we have asked from
the Congress is very small indeed compared to
what may be accomplished. It is very hard for
you in the United States to understand what can
be accomplished by the program because the things
we are doing are common phrases to you.

Every one of j'ou governors has under you de-
partments which are doing the sort of thing which
we want to carry to peoples in other parts of the
world, and I venture to say that it does not take 20
minutes a week, or 20 minutes a month, perhaps,
of your time. Take, for instance, the question of
the water supply. I am not talking about the
quantity — I undei'stand that Governor Dewey has
a problem about that, and I know there are prob-
lems in the Western States that have to do purely
with the quantity of water which is available. I
am talking about the purity of the water which is
available. To you, that is just a thing that
happens automatically.

Every one of your cities, every one of your towns,
has a water supply. There is a municipal official
in most cases, sometimes a State official, who every
few hours takes a sample out of the tap into his
test tube, does some things which I do not under-
stand with it, and automatically issues some orders
so that the chlorination is increased, or something
else is put in the water. You never pay any atten-
tion to it, and, yet, this is one of the most funda-
mental problems to millions and millions of people
in the world.

There are areas where there is not a single drop
of water which we can drink without getting some
dreadful intestinal disease, and one of the ex-
traordinary things to visitors from the underde-
veloped parts of the world who come to the United
States is to see people go to a tap, get some water
in a glass, and drink it. They are perfectly
amazed by what happens. One man who came to
us from the Far East was on the fifteenth floor of
his hotel, and he saw somebody taking some water
out of the tap, and he was amazed by this — and we

said : "Are you impressed by the fact that we have
running water on the fifteenth floor?" And he
replied : "We are not so much surprised by that as
by the fact that you drink it!"

That is the sort of thing that is so important.
And how can you help us? Well, here is a prac-
tical illustration.

State Assistance

A few years ago, we asked Governor Youngdahl,
of Minnesota, if he would lend us one of his
experts from the Minnesota Department of Health.
His name was Edmund Wagner, and the State of
Minnesota lent him to us, and we sent him to
Brazil to work out a water system on an experi-
mental basis for a small town. Tliis town was on
the banks of the Amazon, and people would go to
the river, and then dip out a bucket of water, take
it home, and wash, and use it for cooking and
drinking ; and everybody in this town was ill from
intestinal parasites which came from this water,
and it had a very serious effect on the people.

Mr. Wagner worked out a very simple water
system for this town on the Amazon, the sort of
system which would be almost too primitive for
most American communities, put it in operation,
and within 2 or 3 years this town began to be
trebled, and again people came from miles around,
because this was one place where you could get
pure water. And then, the pumping system al-
lowed the town to get away from the banks of the
Amazon, and it went into the higher gi-ound, and
the water went up there. But here in the middle
of Brazil is a city which is the envy of that entire
country because one officer from the State of
Minnesota went down and put in an experimental
system.

Not long ago, we asked Governor Dever, of the
State of Massachusetts, to lend us Clarence Ster-
ling of their Department of Sanitation. He went
to Santiago, Chile, and there he put into effect a
sewer system. The effect of this was so startling
in Chile that all of Latin America asked for Mr.
Sterling, and he spent several years in South
America putting these systems into country after
country, and now he is back again in Massachusetts
with this work well-done.

Governor McMath has lent us William Bell,
one of their sanitary engineers, who went to Mex-
ico to install a sanitation system. The city of
Seattle, Washington, recently released its Public
Health Director, Dr. Emil Palmquist, and its Di-

Department of State Bulletin

rector of Sanitation, Frederick Aldrich, and they
undertook a public healtli mission in Iran. An-
other liealth man from Governor Langlie's State of
Washington, Herbeit Colwell, went out with the
ECA mission to Greece to fight malaria. He
started working witli the United Nations Organi-
zation, the World Health Organization, and the
ECA ; and this man, and a half dozen people work-
ing on this whole scheme in Greece, have reduced
the incidence of malaria in Gi'eece from 2 million
cases a j'ear to 50 thousand.

Now, there is another area in which we need
help from you. When one of you governors takes
office, you have whole operating school systems, tax
systems, road systems. All of that is working.
You have school boards and road districts, and
all of tliat sort of thing. Since the end of the war,
there are nine countries in Asia which have become
independent. Those nine countries have a popu-
lation of over 600 million people, and, in many of
them, the entire system of government has to be
started from the ground up.

Success of Individual Effort

Many of these governments have asked us for
experts who will go out to help them to organize
the simple administration of government depart-
ments, and we are going to ask you for help in
getting them to do that work. Just a few years
ago, for instance, the Government of Bolivia
wanted to set up a system for running rural schools.
They did not know how to do that. So, we asked
the Governor of New Mexico if he would lend us
one of his men, which he did. That man went
down to Bolivia, and set up a very simjile system
of count}' school administration. This was so
sensational in Bolivia that six countries in South
America asked for this officer, Ernest Maes, of
New Mexico, who went to the six countries and set
up this county school administrative system.

Governor Duff has lent us Dr. Powers, who is
reorganizing the normal schools in Ecuador. The
Director of Vocational Education of Connecticut,
Dr. A. S. Boynton, has been lent to us by Governor
Bowles, who is setting up industrial schools in
Panama.

Now there are dozens of other State officials and
municipal officials who are out doing this work in
the area in which we have been j^ermitted to do
it in the past — which has been largely in South
America. Now, if this Point 4 legislation is
passed, we will have an oi^portmiity to carry this

work into other areas of the world which need it
very badly, and those are particularly in Asia and
Africa.

In the agricultural field, for instance, in which
you are so rich in talent, we will need a great deal
of help. Recently, we had a problem in Liberia.
The dry season in Liberia used to be called a
"hungry season," because they did not know how
to grow food during that dry period, and there
was a great deal of starvation and a great deal of
siclmess in Liberia during the dry season. We
asked Governor Fuller Warren if he would lend us
a man who could work on that problem, and he
lent us Frank Pindar, who went to Liberia.

Now, this did not take millions of dollars or
vast equipment. In fact, Frank Pindar went off
with a small amount of baggage, and he had a sack
of corn, half dozen ordinary hoes, and a shotgun.
We asked him who the shot gun was for, and he
said that was for crows, so we thought it was all
right to let him take it. He went to Liberia, and
there he taught people how to gi-ow vegetables in
a dry season — the simi^lest kind of irrigation, the
simplest sort of cultivation of the soil to bring
whatever moisture there was up to the surface —
and the result of all of that now is that the work
of this one man in Liberia has completely dissi-
pated this "hungry season." People can now eat
during the dry season in Liberia.

Now, these people that we send out are not
merely technicians; they are not merely people
to teach this, that, or the other technique; but
they are the great apostles, the gi-eat spreaders of
democracy. One of the things that we have
learned — and we have learned it the hard way —
is that great programs which seem so important
to us from the American side look quite dif-
ferently to the people who are on the receiving
end. We often think that when we put forward
a program which fills ship after ship of commodi-
ties, and off they go to various parts of the world,
that the people on the receiving end must be very
much impressed by our tremendous productive
power, by our generosity, and all that sort of
thing. We see it from the outgoing point of view.
We see great warehouses full of goods; we see
tremendous ocean liners full of things.

That is not the way it looks on the other end.
The way it looks to the person in the Far East or
Southeast Asia is not from the point of view of
the vast ship crowded with material coming in,
but it looks to him like a bowl of rice. Wlien there

July 10, 1950

is a little bit of rice in it, it is not terribly impres-
sive. That is what he sees, and we have to look
at our program through other people's eyes. One
of the important things is that we should have
these apostles of democracy who go out and work
with people — not merely officials who work with
officials of government, not merely people who live
in the good hotels and walk into government
offices, but men who go into the back country; a
man who can take a simple agricultural instru-
ment and show people how to use it, a man who can
explain the difference between different types of
seed. If you can improve by 10 percent the quality
of rice seed in Asia, you have almost solved the
food problem. It is as simple as that. And, yet,
the men who go out have to work with the people.
You can not say to them, "This is the way it is
done in the agricultural college of Iowa," or some-
thing of that sort. You have to understand their
nature. You have to understand their back-
ground, their religious or other prejudices, and
you have to teach them how to help themselves.

Cooperation: An American Tradition

That is what these men that you have lent us
have been doing. This is in the American tradi-
tion. This is the right way for America to act.
If you think back over our history, and you think
of tlie great people who did this sort of thing in
our early days, you remember Eleazer Wheelock
going up the Connecticut Kiver Valley when the
frontier was at Springfield — and going beyond the
frontier up to Hanover to start a school for the
Indians. And you remember Pere Marquette going
out into the Micliigan area with nothing except
what he had on his back — but going out to teach
and instruct and live with these people. And over,
and over, and over again this was true in the early
days of the United States. Now, the fi'ontier has
gone very much beyond our own country, and here
is another challenge to Americans. And we need
not only these highly skilled men that you can give
us, but we need younger men, too. I have often
wondered whether that spirit of adventure and
hardship still exists in the United States. I think
it does, but I think it is an open question. 1 won-
der how many volunteers from all our colleges,
who are graduating this June, you would get if
you went to them and said, "I want to offer you a
hard life; you are not going to be paid much; you
are going to live in backward areas of the world
where there is disease lurking everywhere; you

are going to work and to live with people who
know nothing and are going to be very suspicious
of you. But here is one of the great tasks which
the United States, and the United Nations, and
the other Western countries can bring to the under-
developed parts of the world. Will you go out and
take this missionary task with you?" How many
would go? I think we would be surprised. I
think a lot of boys and girls would do that.

I am talking to j'ou about this program not be-
cause it is exciting or anything of that sort ; it is not
nearly as much fun to talk about this or to listen
to this as it is to talk about what men in the Krem-
lin are up to; that is much more fun than this sort
of thing, but this is something we can do.

People come to me, and they say foreign policy
is all right, and we like to read this, and that, and
the other columnist, but how can the American
people — how can a person participate in our for-
eign policy ? Well, here is a way you can partici-
pate in it. Every one of you governors can helj)
us. We will be coming to you and asking you for
men, and it is going to be very inconvenient for
you. You will not want to let some of these people
go, but we are going to ask you to do that. You
can explain to your people how important it is, and
we are going to ask you to get some volunteers
from the younger people in your States, and you
can explain that to them. And it seems to me that
if the people of your communities could feel that
they had a part in this work because their city
engineer or the head of their State health depart-
ment is going to a particular country, and if they
could follow his work, and if they could get letters
from him which are printed in the papers, and if
everybody in that community could follow what a
man they know, with a few assistants, is doing in
some distant part c f the earth, then you would get
this real feeling that the world is, after all, one
world and it is not as large as it seems.

This program is now before Congress. It went
before the Congress as a complete bipartisan pro-
posal. It was worked out in the House and Senate,
and bills were put in by Republicans and Demo-
crats jointly. The Senate Conunittee on Foreign
Relations reported it out unanimously. The
House committee was practically unanimous. It
was passed by a very large majority in both
Houses. Now, we come to the very difficult thing
of getting the money for it, and, now, we are
running into attacks — a narrow attack, isolation-
ist points of view are brought up, and the whole

Department of State Bulletin

program is being misrepresented and damaged.
The sort of attack that we have was ilhistrated the
day before yesterday by two men who attacked it
for exactly opposite reasons. One attacked it be-
cause we had been talking with various countries
about programs in advance of the Congress appro-
priating the money, and we were criticized very
severely by him for doing that. He said, "Here
you are putting pressure on the Congress. You go
and talk to this, that, and the other country about
a program before Congress has given you money.
That is very bad." And he had hardly gotten
through with that before another man got up and
said, "The trouble with you fellows is that you
haven't got a fully detailed program. Why don't
you talk to these countries and find out exactly
what it is going to cost before you come in and ask
us for the money T' Well, you cannot win. You
get it coming and going on that basis.

But I believe that the Congi'ess is going to give
us the money for this program. I believe it will
have the most tremendous effect in parts of the
world which it is very difficult to reach in any
other way. I have been asked: Wliy don't you
set up a great Marshall Plan for Asia ? Perhaps,
later in the day, Ambassador Jessup can talk with
you about the problems of Asia. But you will find
that it is wholly different from the problem of
Europe. In Europe, you have a more or less
homogeneous community with problems which are
fairly identical, people who are used to working
together and understand that each one is depend-

ent on the other. In Asia, you have vast distances,
different peoples, peoples who are quite ditferent
racially, whose languages are wholly different, who
have absolutely no common experience of any sort
at all. Most of these Asian countries have had
their connections with the world through individ-
ual Western countries and not with one another.
They do not want a Marshall Plan for themselves;
they do not want to be brought into one common
operation. Each one is dealing with its own prob-
lem in its own way, and we have got to adapt our-
selves to the world in which we live. We might
wish it were different, but it is not different, and,
therefore, we must adapt ourselves to the situation
which confronts us. In doing that, we can, with
this technical assistance program, be of real help to
individual people in this great part of the world
and make them realize that it is not merely the
Communists who send people out to live in the
country and teach them doctrines of one sort but
that we also are willing to send people who will live
with them and that we are not teaching them
doctrines. They must realize that we are teach-
ing them how to do things which are going to let
them develop in their own way and that we are
helping them, not trying to coerce them, or rule
them, or use them for our own purposes. That, I
submit to you, is the purpose, the significance, the
object of this Point 4 Program.

I hope very much that we can have the support
of all of you governors not only in getting the
authority to do it but also in carrying it out after
we have gotten that authority.

The Need for an International Trade Organization

Statement hy Charles F. Brannan
Secretary of Agriculture ^

In appearing before you to discuss the proposed
charter for an International Trade Organization,
I should like to speak particularly of the relation
of this charter to United States agriculture.

Agriculture has a very real interest in this
charter. American agriculture produces a good
deal more of many important agricultural prod-
ucts than is consumed in the United States, in-
cluding wheat, cotton, tobacco, lard, and many
fruits and vegetables. In the crop year 1948^9,

' Made before the House Committee on Foreign Affairs
on May 1, 1950.

our agricultural exports were valued at over 31^
billion dollars. We sent abroad about 40 percent
of our wheat, 32 percent each of our cotton and
our rice, 22 percent of our tobacco, almost 30 per-
cent of our raisins and over 40 percent of our
prunes, 30 percent of our peanuts, and 25 percent
of our hops — to mention some of the more strik-
ing items.

The level of our agricultural exports during
recent years has been higher than normal because
of emergency and postwar requirements. Much
of this was implemented by the financial assist-

iuly JO, 7950

ance this country has been giving the purchaser
countries. With the progressive restoration of
agricultural production abroad, we can expect an
over-all shrinkage of our agricultural exports from
the high level reached during the emergency
period.

This return of our farm exports toward more
normal levels will require adjustments in our agri-
cultural production. Should our agricultural ex-
l^orts drop to the levels which prevailed in the
late thirties, serious production curtailments
could not be avoided. On the other hand, to the
extent we succeed in maintaining our agricultural
exports at their present levels, the domestic ad-
justment i^roblem will be reduced.

The history of the 1930's indicates that we cannot
hope to maintain a high level of agricultural ex-
ports unless conditions favorable to multilateral
nondiscriminatory trade are restored in the portion
of the world economy with which we carry on the
bulk of our trade. You will recall that the trade
restrictions and exchange controls employed by
foreign countries in the thirties hurt our agi-icul-
tural exports considerably more than they did our
industrial exports. This was because foreign
countries turn to alternative sources of supply,
such as stinndation of domestic production, for
many of the agricultural products normally pur-
chased from the United States more readily than
they did for the products of our industry which
they found more difficult to purchase elsewhere.

IJnder the impact of the war and postwar emer-
gency, foreign governments have greatly increased
their intervention in trade by such means as eni-
bargoes and quotas, exchange controls and arti-
ficial exchange rates, state-trading monopolies,
and bilateral or regional trade and payment ar-
rangements. Recourse to these restrictive and
discriminatory measures has sometimes been justi-
fied by the difficidties encountered by many foreign
countries in balancing their trade and payments
with the United States and other so-called hard-
currency countries. EGA assistance is helping
many of those countries overcome their acute finan-
cial difficulties. But if the world is to obtain last-
ing benefits from the rebuilding of the war-torn
economies, it is necessary that those abnorrnal trade
restrictions and discriminations be discontinued as
I'apidly as improvements in international financial
and trade conditions permit.

To assure international cooperative progress to-
ward this objective, and thus to provide for a
revival of multilateral nondiscriminatory trade, is
the principal objective of the Ito charter.

EHorts on Behalf of World Trade

Thus — as has been pointed out by those who
have already testified before this Committee — it
would supplement our efforts through EGA. It
would also supplement o>ir trade agreement pro-
gram and the international monetary and finan-
cial arrangements of Bretton Woods. Further-

more, it would help achieve the United Nations
Food and Agi'iculture Organization's objectives
of improved nutrition and standards of rural liv-
ing throughout the world. Signatory countries
to this charter would undertake to work together
to avoid the type of situation we had in the thirties.
In addition to the interest of American farmers
in the charter because of the need to export farm
products, they have an overwhelming interest in
the maintenance of other portions of the United
States economy in an active healthy condition.
It is my belief that the cooperation of nations in
the establishment of the International Trade
Organization provided for in the charter being
considered by this Committee will advance those
interests. Other witnesses will elaborate on these
aspects of the charter. I would like now to turn
to the specific provisions of the charter as they
relate to matters of most direct interest to Ameri-
can farmers.

The charter approach is a realistic approach.
The Habana conference and the other interna-
tional meetings in which this charter was drafted
did not stop with the establishment of broad
principles. They studied specific difficulties likely
to be encountered, and they wrote into the charter
provisions allowing for sufficient flexibility to deal
with the realities of the trade situation.

For example, there is a "general escape clause"
similar to that included in the more recent trade
agreements. It provides, in essence, that any
countiy may suspend obligations undertaken
under "the charter or may withdraw tariff conces-
sions if, as a result of unforeseen developments,
increased imports of a product cause or threaten
serious injury to domestic producers.

As concerns import restrictions on agricultural
products, the charter develops what I believe to be
a fair basis for meeting the very difficult problem
of imports of products on which we have domestic
support programs. As you know, we have tradi-
tionally imported substantial quantities of agri-
cultural pi'oducts of kinds similar to, or supple-
mental to, those we produce in this country. We
have a serious basic problem because imports of
these commodities, many of them interrupted dur-
ing the war, are resuming just at the time when we
are struggling hardest with the problem of adjust-
ing our agriculture to a peacetime basis through
the support of the domestic market.

It is obvious that we cannot permit imported
products to take advantage of a market support
operation designed to help United States pro-
ducers. On the other hand, it would be unwise for
us to take the other extreme and completely pro-
hibit imports of a product traditionally imported
into the United States. The one action would be
unfair to us. The other would be unfair to foreign
countries. Moreover, it would lead to a type of
economic warfare which, in the long run, would
harm the export market for United States agricul-
tural products.

Department of State Bulletin

The churtcr deals with fhis problem by pennit-
ting restriction upon imports of an agricnltnral
conunodity beino- supported under any domestic
program in the same proportion as the domestic
produceis benefiting trom that program accept
restrictions on the production or marketing of
that con)niodity.

This is not a simple rule to apply, but I am
sure that the Committee will recognize it as a
fair principle on which to base any continuing
import restriction. Moreover, it does not prevent
the mutually beneficial development of trade be-
tween countries that sign the charter.

In addition to this principle regarding continu-
ing import restrictions, the charter permits tem-
porary use of restrictions on imports of agricul-
tural products in connection with operations to
remove temporary surpluses.

Subsidy Provisions and Commodity Studies

I would next like to mention the relationship
between the subsidy provisions of the charter and
our agricultural programs. One objective of our
farm legislation is to maintain a fair relationship
between agricultural and nonagricultural incomes.
Sometimes our price-support program results in
holding domestic prices up when world prices are
falling. This tends to price us out of our foreign
market. Export subsidies can be used to offset
such differentials. The charter permits this in
special cases, even though it bans export subsi-
dies in general. Again, however, it imposes a
limitation that, I believe, we must recognize as
fair. It requires that a country using export sub-
sidies does not use them to push its export quanti-
ties beyond an equitable share of world trade in
the commodity involved. This limitation aims
to prevent international economic warfare which
would be harmful to all producers of the com-
modity anywhere in the world.

The charter recognizes, however, that limita-
tions on subsidized exports alone cannot solve the
problems arising in the world economy as a re-
sult of the accumulation of burdensome surpluses
of a primary product. Therefore, there is a spe-
cial chapter — chapter VI — on international com-
modity agi'eements. It provides machinery for
intergovernmental study of world connnodity
problems and for cooperation among the inter-
ested governments in efforts to achieve a solution
of those problems in a manner fair to both pro-
ducers and consumers. International bodies
studying commodity situations are already in ex-
istence in the instances of such important products
as wheat, cotton, and sugar.

We already have an international agi-eement for
wheat approved by the Congress last year. That
agreement gives a specific example of one way in
which an international commodity problem can
be handled under the charter chapter on interna-
tional commodity agreements. I should add that

the extended international discussion that led to
the initialing of the commodity agreement chap-
ter of tlie charter by representatives of 513 coun-
tries was an important preparatory process that
helped make possible the final negotiation of the
Wheat Agreement.

I might say just a word about the Wheat Agree-
ment. American wheat growers responded whole-
heartedly to the war and jDostwar appeal to pro-
duce in abundance to feed a hungry world, and
they have developed wheat production so that it
can be maintained substantially above prewar
levels. Thus they have a real and legitimate in-
terest in their share in foreign markets. During
the life of the Wheat Agreement, they will have a
large guaranteed export market in the participat-
ing importing countries.

The producers of other export staples, as for
example cotton, who also may in the future be
faced with the threat of an accumulation of bur-
densome surpkises, are interested in the Wheat
Agreement because they may want to use a simi-
lar technique in future years.

The over-all importance of the Wlieat Agree-
ment, and of other commodity agreements that
might be concluded in the future, from the view-
point of international economic relations, cannot
be underestimated. There is a basic interdepend-
ence among the leading trading countries of the
world, and this is particularly important in the
field of agriculture. You cannot satisfactorily
solve the problem of wheat in terms of United
States pi'oduction for the United States market,
any more than the British can solve it in terms
of production and consumption in the Uiiited
Kingdom alone. Unless all of the governments
principally concerned get together to discuss the
pi'oblems that arise out of their common interest in
wheat, all will suffer more than need be. The same
is true for many other agricultural commodities.
Only by friendly cooperation among the main con-
suming and producing countries will we be able
to assure a measure of stability in the world's com-
modity markets.

There is one additional point I should stress in
respect to the commodity agreement chapter of the
charter. It does not permit the indiscriminate use
of intergovernmental agreements to control trade.
It limits recourse to control agreements to cases
of real difficulty. In fact, the charter permits such
agreements only when there is or threatens to be a
burdensome surplus of a primary commodity
which cannot be corrected by normal market forces
in time to pi'event hardship to a large number of
small producers.

I would like, in conclusion, to stress that leading
farm organizations have expressed support for the
principles of the Ito charter.

American farmers recognize the need to supple-
ment international political cooperation by eco-
nomic cooperation.

I urge favorable action on this charter.

July 10, 1950

The Need for an International Trade Organization

Statement hy Charles Sawyer
Secretary of Commerce ^

The Department of Commerce has a vital in-
terest in the international trade of the United
States. It has this interest because it is charged
with serving the American business community
and aiding in the maintenance of a strong domes-
tic economy in addition to the part it plays in the
development of our foreign economic policy.
Bearing these responsibilities in mind, I want to
make clear at the outset that, in our judgment,
adherence to the charter will have beneficial re-
sults for our country.

Over the past few weeks, you have heard the
testimony of many witnesses. Most of these have
spoken in favor of joining the Ixo. Since you
have heard both sides of the question, I shall not
impose on you a repetition either of the arguments
or the charter's details. What I should like to
do is to comment on the attitude of business toward
the Ito.

I am aM'are of the criticisms that have been
made by a number of business organizations.
Nevertheless, while these groups have differed re-
garding details in the chaiter, I believe that they,
as well as those which have spoken in favor, agree
with the basic principles of the Ito. All are con-
vinced that something is wrong in world trade
today, and all are of like mind that something
needs to be done about it.

Criticisms of Charter

Criticisms of the charter have been many and
varied. On the one hand, the charter has been
called an impractical idealistic document; on the
other hand, it is criticized because of its conces-
sions to the realities of the world in which we are
now living. While some have said that the char-
ter is too technical and complicated, others feel
that it is full of platitudes and generalizations.
The most frequent criticisms, however, have been

' Submitted to the House Foreign Affairs Committee
on May 11, 1950.

leveled at the so-called "exceptions" to the charter
and the fact that it might cause an increase in
imports which these people feel would be bad for
the country.

I do not believe that these criticisms should be
ignored. They have been made in the main by
sincere and conscientious individuals and organi-
zations which have studied the charter. I should,
therefore, like to devote a few lines to them. The
avenues of trade are still congested with restric-
tions and discriminatory arrangements instituted
to deal with abnormal economic conditions with
which you are all familiar. Our businessmen com-
plain about them every day. The point is that
the charter did not create those conditions ; yet it
cannot fail to recognize their existence. In other
words, many of the criticisms which have been
leveled at the charter should really be directed
against world conditions. If the charter did not
recognize the state of affairs today it would not
be worth having because it would be based on illu-
sions and wishes — not on realities.

The establishment of the Ito, however, will give
us an opportunity to work continuously at the
ailments which now afflict international trade.
For adequate diagnosis and treatment we need a
continuous appraisal. Nations must consult with
one another to find out what is wrong and reach
agreement on what must be done.

I do not believe that the charter will usher in
a new era; neither am I so cynical as to believe
that it is worthless. It is a step forward; it is
more than we have now. It ]>rovides for the elim-
ination of many nuisances and unnecessary trade
barriers that plague the trader today. I have in
mind, for example, the field of customs formali-
ties— often referred to as "invisible tariffs." What
the charter seeks to do in tliis, as in other fields,
is to establish agreed rules or principles of rea-
sonableness or fairness in the administration of
customs and related regulations and thus to elim-
inate or cut down some of the foi-malities and
complexities that have become a part of customs
administration all over the world.

Department of State BuUelin

I should like to direct your attention to two
points with which critics of the Ito have been
principally concerned. One of these relates to
the so-called "exceptions." The critics feel that
the charter would be unfair to the United States
because our trade would be carried on without
exceptions while the trade of other countries
would be carried on under the exceptions. This
arjiument does not hold water. The charter binds
all of the member nations to live up to its terms.
Some of these terms are unqualified. Those
which relate to customs procedures, internal taxes
and regulations, and restrictive trade practices
are examples.

It is true that exceptions ai'e written into the
charter to provide for the unusual conditions to
which I have already referred. It should be kept
in mind, however, that some were put in at our
request for our benefit. Some benefit no other
country, an example being the preference excep-
tion regarding trade between the United States
and the Philippines and Cuba. Other exceptions
we asked for and got were those relating to secu-
rity considerations, import quotas on certain agri-
cultural products, and the use of the "escape
clause" in connection with tariff concessions.

Need for Compromise

Now in order to get these exceptions, and to get
otlier countries to agree to general principles
which both the proponents and opponents of the
charter have agreed are desirable, we had to com-
promise on some issues. After all, we were deal-
ing with a large group of sovereign independent
nations, many of whom have varied backgrounds,
traditions, and customs. We have always com-
jiromised in order to reach mutually satisfactory
conclusions in dealing with other nations. If we
were unwilling to give and take we would make no
progi-ess.

Some criticism of the charter has also come from
those who fear the effects of greater imports into
the United States. This is a problem in which
I am intensely interested. The charter, as you
know, provides certain rules for trade. It does
not in itself cause trade to flow. Thus, it will not
by itself create more or less imports. And it does
not require us to take any action with respect to
tariffs to which we are not already committed
under the Trade Agreements Program.

With regard to the question of imports, I should
like to point out that the great bulk of the business
community not only does not fear imports but is
taking active steps to encourage them. Among
the national organizations which have taken this
position are such diverse groups as the National
Association of Manufacturers, the Chamber of
Commerce of the United States, the United States
Council of the International Chamber of Com-
merce, the National Foreign Trade Council, the
Congress of Industrial Organizations, the Ameri-

can Farm Bureau Federation, and a host of other
organizations well-known to you. In an expand-
ing economy, more goods will be exchanged, not
less, and goods must flow into the United States
as well as out if we are eventually to avoid subsi-
dizing our foreign trade with dollar loans and
grants.

I should also like to call your attention to the
provisions dealing with so-called restrictive busi-
ness practices. Experience has shown that cer-
tain activities of private international cartels,
such as the allocation of trade territories and in-
dustrial fields, limitation of production, and price
fixing, can restrict the flow of trade and limit
competition just as effectively as any government-
imposed tariff or quota. For a long time, it has
been our general policy in this country to elim-
inate such practices, but very few other countries
have heretofore been concerned with this subject
to any appreciable extent. Under the Ito char-
ter, however, each member nation would be re-
quired to take steps to assure that enterprises in
its jurisdiction do not engage in practices which
restrain international trade and interfere with the
realization of any of the objectives of the charter.

In the light of the hard facts and realities of
the present world, I believe that the Ito charter
is in the interest of the United States — and I want
to emphasize that by participating in the Ito,
we do not prejudice our ability to seek improve-
ments as soon as they can be achieved. I believe
we are right in hoping for a day when world
trade will conform more nearly to the conditions
of business practice within the borders of this
country. We should, therefore, in my judgment,
approve an agreement that advances us toward
our objective even if it is not entii'ely perfect.

Whatever the shortcomings of the Ito charter,
I am convinced that our failure to ratify would be
a mistake. The alternative is likely to be a period
of more restrictive and conflicting systems of for-
eign trade control on the part of many countries.
We would probably see greater efforts at national
self-sufficiency, and wider governmental interven-
tion in commerce. Controls which become no
longer justifiable on economic grounds might be
continued for bureaucratic or political reasons,
and our only recourse would be retaliation which
would be bound to have depressing effects upon the
economic progress and prosperity of the United
States.

Stated simply, I believe the charter should be
approved because its fundamental premises are
good and agreed to by most businessmen ; because
most of its provisions are constructive; and be-
cause there is nothing in it which will harm the
position of the United States or its businessmen.
The common-sense approach to this problem
would seem to be to approve this charter and then
to work with other member countries through
the International Trade Organization to accom-
plish our purposes.

July 10, 1950

Relaxing Restrictions on Foreign Investment in Germany

PROCEDURE ESTABLISHED

BY ALLIED HIGH COMMISSION

[Released to the press June 15]

At its meeting in Berlin today, the Council of
the Allied High Commission approved the detailed
procedure prepared by its financial advisers for
the first stage in the i^rogressive relaxation of the
present i-estrictions on foreign investment in
Germany.

The formulation of this procedure, which is to
be operated on a licensing system under the direc-
tion of the Allied Bank Commission and based on
Military Government Laws No. 52 and No. 53,
follows the approval in principle by the Council,
on May 31, 1950, to the reopening of Germany to
foreign investment. The new opportunities,
which are to be granted to foreign owners of prop-
erty and funds in Germany and to foreigners wish-
ing to bring new capital into Germany, were the
subject of discussions with the Federal Finance
Minister on June G, 1950, and with the representa-
tives of the Benelux Governments on June 9, 1950.
The decision of the High Commission has eifect
in the area of the Federal Eepublic of Germany
and in the American, British, and French sectore
of Berlin.

In deciding on the new procedure which, it is
hoped, will contribute to the economic recovery of
the Federal Republic, the High Commission has
had to take into account a ninnber of considera-
tions of which the most important are the need
to safeguard Germany's foreign-exchange posi-
tion, to prevent undue concentration of foreign
capital in German industry, and to provide equal-
ity of opportunity and treatment (for foreign in-
vestment made from blocked funds now held in
Germany and new funds from abroad) as between
existing foreign owners of property, prewar cred-
itors, and new foreign investors and German
investors.

Further measures of liberalization and relaxa-
tion will be introduced in the light of the experi-
ence gained in the operation of the present new
procedure. However, it is not foreseen that con-
vertibility in foreign exchange of capital or in-

come from old or new investments will be per-
mitted.

Pi'incipal features of the scheme are:

(1) Cajiital equipment, raw materials and semi-
finished goods, and engineering and other techni-
cal services may be brought into the Federal Re-
l^ublic for investment purposes under special
license ;

(2) Deutchemarks may be acquired from the
Bank Deutscher Laender at the current rate of
exchange against acceptable foreign currencies
and may be used in Germany under the same con-
ditions as govern the use of existing foreign
balances ;

(3) Foreign owners of claims, expressed in for-
eign currencies against German persons, corpora-
tions, or German public bodies will be permitted
by special license to enter into voluntary agree-
ments with the debtors for repayment in deutsche-
marks ;

(4) Foreign-owned real estate or other non-
monetary property may be sold in Germany or
transferred to another foreign owner for foreign
exchange consideration by special license ;

(5) Foreign owners of deutschemark bank bal-
ances (including deutschemarks acquired by the
above methods) and foreign-owned or -controlled
German corporations will be allowed by general
license to invest in real estate, in securities issued
b}' public bodies, and in pul)licly-dealt-in securi-
ties and, by special license, will be allowed to ac-
quire investments in private business enterprises
and loans ;

(6) The permitted daily drawings from foreign-
owned deutschemark balances for travel expenses
in Germany will be increased to DM 75 per person
with a maximum of DM 200 per day per family.
General licenses imder Military Government Laws
Nos. 52 and 53 to give legal effect to the above
arrangements will be issued by Bank Deutscher
Laender in the near future.

In reaching its decision to relax restrictions on
foreign investment in Germany, the Allied High
Commission lias been influenced by the urgent need
for new capital investment in Germany to insure

Department of State Bulletin

the continued economic recovery of the Federal
Republic. It recognizes that tlie foreign investor
has a part to phiy in providing tlie necessary
cajiital for this purpose.

In order to attract new foreign capital to Ger-
many and to encourage productive use of existing
foreign funds in Germany, the High Commission
ap]ireciates tliat the regulations governing the em-
l^loyment of foreign funds must be as liberal as
possible and that exchange-control restrictions
must be kept to a minimum. At the same time,
the overriding necessity of safeguarding the sta-
bility of tlie currency and of maintaining foreign-
exchange accruals, upon which the general stand-
ard of living and the level of imports so largely
depend, must be borne in mind. It is for these
reasons that it is possible to proceed only by pro-
gressive stages in the removal of the restrictions
on existing foreign owners of assets and on new
investors and in restoring the normal contractual
relationship between creditors and debtors.

In opening the way for an increase in foreign
investment in Gei-many, certain additional safe-
guards are essential. These have been provided
for in the detailed scheme. The development of
new foreign investment is to be kept under con-
stant survey to prevent any undue concentration
of economic power. Finally, the same opportu-
nities as are afforded to new foreign investors are
made available to old creditors and existing prop-
erty owners.

Inquiries in connection with this policy and
applications for special licenses should be ad-
dressed to the Bank Deutscher Laender at Frank-
fort, Germany, or to the appropriate Land Cen-
tral Banks in the Federal Republic of Gennany.

REGULATIONS GOVERNING
FOREIGN INVESTMENT IN GERMANY

Tlie Department of State on June 16 released to the press
the details of the new policy concertmiri foreign invest-
ments in the Federal Republic of Qermany and, the Ameri-
can. British, and French sectors of Berlin. This policy
was apprnrid by the Allied High Commission at its meet-
ing in Berlin on June 15, 19.50, and was announced in sum-
mary in the Department's press release 638 of June 16,
1950. The details of the new regulations are as follows:

A. Subject to the provisions of paragrapli B. below :

(1) Foreign owners of DM balances may utilize and
dispose of .such balances, including DM proceeds from
settlements referred to in paragraph (6) below, as follows :

(i) disbursements which are now or which may
hereafter be permitted by general licenses issued pursuant
to Military Government Laws Nos. 52 and 53. General
licenses will l)e issued which will enable foreign owners
to utilize and dispose of their DM balances subject to the
same limitations as apply to German owners but only in
so far as foreign exchange control objectives of the Federal
Republic are not contravened. In particular, the existing
general license for travel expense will be amended to per-
mit the account owner to withdraw up to DM 75 per day
per person to cover the travel expenses in Germany for

himself and members of his family provided the total of
such withdrawals does not exceed DM 200 per day.

(ii) investments in real estate and in securities
issued by public bodies and their agencies and securities
publicly dealt in to be permitted in accordance with a
general license to be issued pursuant to M. G. Laws Nos.
52 and 53 which will provide tliat re.'il estate and se-
curities so acquired shall be subject to the provisions of
such laws.

(iii) investments in private business enterprises
and loans will be permitted in accordance with special
licenses to be issued on a case bv case basis pursuant to
M. G. Laws Nos. 52 and 53.

(2) Foreign owners of real or other property in the
Federal Republic of a nimmonetary nature will be per-
mitted in accordance with special licenses to be issued on
a case by case basis pursuant to M. G. Laws Nos. 52 and 53 :

(i) to dispose of such property subject to the same
limitations which apply to German owners of similar
property on condition that any DM or other proceeds
accruing therefrom shall be paid into a blocked account
in the name of the foreign owner, which may be utilized
in the same manner as outlined in paragraph (1) above;

(ii) to transfer title to any such property to other
foreigners for foreign-exchange considerations provided
that such transfers are not for the purpose of avoiding
foreign exchange control objectives of the Federal Repub-
lic and that such property was not acquired after the date
of the lifting of the investment moratorium.

(3) Foreign-owned or -controlled business enter-
prises organized under German law and operating in the
Federal Republic will be freed by way of a general license
from any restrictions under 51. G. Laws Nos. 52 and 53
which do not affect the operations of German enterprises
except for the control of investments to the extent set
forth in paragraphs 1 (ii) and 1 (iii) above.

(4) Foreign persons will be permitted in accordance
with special licenses to be issued pursuant to M. G. Laws
Nos. .52 and 53 to bring into the Federal Repul)lic capital
equipment, raw materials and semifinished goods, engi-
neering and other technical services for use in the Federal
Republic subject to the same regulations as apply to
German-owned properties on condition that any DM or
other proceeds accruing therefrom shall be jiaid into a
blocked account in the name of the foreign owner, which
may be utilized in the same manner as outlined in para-
graph (1) above.

(5) (i) The Bank Deutscher Laender will be author-
ized, under the supervision of the Allied High Commission
or its designated agency, to sell deutschemarks, at the
current rate of exchange, against acceptable foreign cur-
rencies including those placed at the disposal of the Bank

Information on Doing Business
With Germany and Austria

The Economic Cooperation Administration an-
nounced on June 12 that materials on Doing
Business With Austria and Doing Business With
Germany are now available from its OflBce of Small
Business at Washington.

These materials, prepared by the OflBce of Inter-
national Trade, Department of Commerce, con-
tained detailed information of interest to American
businessmen engaged in, or contemplating, trade
witli German and Austrian firms.

In addition to describing general trade possibil-
ities with these ECA countries, the materials
discuss exchange controls and capital movements,
exchange rates, and trade procedures and regu-
lations.

July 10, 1950

Deutscher Laender under existing payment agreements or
pursuant to such subsequent payment arrangements as
may be set up. Foreign excliange derived under tliis pro-
vision shall be held by the Bank Deutscher Laender sub-
ject to the same controls as other foreign exchange
resources.

(ii) DM balances created or other assets acquired
as a result of the foregoing, including income, shall be
held subject to the provisions of M. G. Lavps Nos. 52 and
53 and may be utilized in the same manner as outlined
in paragraph (1) above.

(6) (i) Foreign owners of securities, claims or other
obligations expressed in foreign currencies which repre-
sent debts of private persons, firms or coiiiorations in the
Federal Republic will be permitted in accordance with
special licen.ses to be issued pursuant to M. G. Laws Nos.
52, 53 and 63 to enter into voluntary agreements with the
debtors for the settlement of such debts in DM provided
that :

(a) Such securities were issued or the claims or
other obligations arose prior to September 1, 1939, and
were, except in the case of bonds, held by the present owner
on the date the lifting of the investment moratorium is
announced.

(b) Any DM received by the foreign owners as
a result of any such settlements shall be paid into a
blocked account in the name of the foreign owner, which
may be utilized in the same manner as outlined in para-
graph (1) above.

( c ) The security, claim or other obligation, if sub-
ject to the provisions of the Law for the Settlement of
Matters Concerning Foreign Currency Securities (Vali-
dation Law) when enacted, shall have been duly validated
pursuant to the provisions of such Law.

(d) It is established that all other foreign credi-
tors of the German debtor involved have been given at least
60 days notice of the proposed .settlement by publication
and by registered letter where possible; such notice to
inform creditors that any ob.iections to the proiX)sed set-
tlement must be registered with the designated licensing
authority within the stipulated time. The licensing
authority shall be empowered to withhold licenses for a
settlement when in its opinion a prima facie case of
reasonable objection has been established by one or more
creditors within the stipulated time on the ground that
the proposed settlement would lead to a preference be-
tween creditors or to bankruptcy of or foreclosure pro-
ceedings against the debtor.

(ii) Public bodies and their agencies will be per-
mitted in accordance with special licenses issued pur-
suant to M. G. Laws Nos. 52 and 53, to enter into volun-
tary agreements with foreign owners of foreign currency
claims to settle such claims in DM provided that such
settlements can be made by the public body or agency
thereof without impairing other obligations or causing
additional "borrowing and that the conditions .set forth
in subparagraphs (6) (i) (a) (b) (e) and (d) above
are met.

(ill) As used herein, the term "foreign owners"
shall mean owners who are not residents of the area
constituting "Das Deutsche Reich" as it existed on 31
December 1937.

B. It is not intended that the provisions of paragraph
A. above will result in unduly increasing foreign owner-
ship in industry and commerce in the Federal Republic.
Therefore, appropriate limitations may subsequently be
imposed on the provisions of paragraph A. should deter-
mination be made that an undue proportion of industry
and commerce in the Federal Republic would otherwise
come under foreign ownership. Moreover, any licenses
issued pursuant to the provisions of paragraph A. above
shall provide that the parties to the transactions are not
thereby exonerated from the requirement of full com-
pliance with decartelisiation and deconcentration legis-
lation in force in the Federal Republic.

U.S. Will Designate Civilian
High Commissioner for Austria

Following is the te.i-t of the United States note sent by
Ambassador Alan O. Kirk to A. Y. Yyshinsky, the Minister
for Foreign Affairs of the Soviet Union, on June 12, 1950,
and released to the press on June 15.

I have the honor to refer to the situation in
which the deputies for the Austrian treaty nego-
tiations have been unable to reach agreement on
tlie terms of an Austrian state treaty. It will be
recalled that Austrian independence was pledged
in the Moscow Declaration of 1943, and my Gov-
ernment regrets exceedingly the failure to reach
an agreement which would result in the fulfillment
of this pledge.

The Foreign Ministers of the United Kingdom,
France, and the United States at their meeting
in London on May 18 reaffirmed that their policy
with respect Austria requires the earliest possible
completion of an Austrian treaty which will lead
to the restoration of a free and independent Aus-
tria in accordance with the pledge given in the
Moscow Declaration and to the withdrawal of the
forces of occupation. The three governments
further agreed that they are ready at any time to
settle without delay all outstanding issues of the
treaty, provided that this will definitely bring
about agreement on the treaty as a whole.

In the absence of a treaty, the three governments
agreed that they are prepared to carry out such
measures as may properly be taken to strengthen,
within the framework of existing quadripartite
agreements, the authority of the Austrian Gov-
ernment and to lighten the burden of the occupa-
tion on Austria to the greatest extent possible as
requested by the Austrian Government in recent
notes to the occupying powers. The three For-
eign Ministers further agreed to proceed at an
early date to appoint civilian high commissioners
in Austria in accordance with the provisions of
Article 9 of the Control Agreement of June 28,
1946.

My Government would be pleased if the Gov-
ernment of the Soviet Union, pending final de-
cision on the treaty, would associate itself with
the program determined upon by the three For-
eign Ministers. In the meantime, my Govern-
ment will, on its part, as a first step in such a pro-
gram, proceed at an early date to designate a
civilian high commissioner to replace its present
military commander in Austria and hopes that the
Soviet Government will take similar action.

Visit of Burmese Banker

Mr. Tin Tun, chief accountant of the Union
Bank of Burma, has arrived in Washington to
begin a 3-month visit in the United States for the
purpose of observing financial institutions.

Department of State Bulletin

REPORT ON INTERNATIONAL REFUGEE ORGANIZATION

iy George L. 'Warren

The General Council of the International Ref-
ugee Organization (Iro) held its fifth session in
Geneva from March 14 through March 22, 1950.
The Executive Committee met concurrently from
March 8 through March 21, 1950.

At the fourth session of the Council held in Ge-
neva in October 1949, the General Council decided
to extend the period of Iro operations from June
30, 1950, to March 31, 1951, in order to complete
the task of resettling all eligible refugees in central
Europe who might qualify for resettlement and to
complete arrangements for the continuing care of
refugees requiring permanent institutional treat-
ment. It was planned at the fifth session of the
Council to review the remaining tasks facing Iro
to reach more specific decisions as to the termina-
tion of services and to give further consideration
to the organization of legal protection for refugees
under the objectives of the United Nations after
the termination of Iro. The Executive Committee
was convened on March 8, 1950, to consider and
to comment upon reports of the Director-General
to be transmitted thereafter to the General Council
for action.

Of the 18 member governments of Iro, 16 were
represented at the meeting ; China and Iceland not
being represented : ^

Australia

Luxembourg

Belgium

Netherlands

Canada

New Zealand

Denmark

Norway

Dominican Republic

Switzerland

France

United Kingdom

Guatemala

United States

Italy

Venezuela

Chairman; Dr. V. Montoya of Venezuela as Sec-
ond Vice-Chairman ; and Mr. A. B0gh-Andersen
of Denmark as rapporteur.

Executive Committee

The Executive Committee considered the semi-
annual report of the Dii-ector-General for the pe-
riod July 1 through December 31, 1949; partial
financial reports for the first and second quarters
of the fiscal year 1949-50; and gave attention to
the problems of the resettlement of refugees re-
maining in Shanghai and on the island of Samar
in the Philippines. Incidental to its consideration
of the Director-General's report it recommended
that the Council approve the recommendation of
the Director-General that all refugees qualifying
for resettlement for whom definite destinations
were available should be maintained in Iro camps
after June 30, 1950, until their resettlement had
been accomplished.

This decision while maintaining the principle
of earlier resolutions was taken in the conviction
that such action would facilitate the movement of
these refugees and contribute to the greater ac-
complishment of the task remaining before Iro.

The Committee noted with satisfaction that the
Director-General had made available without cost
to the United Nations Relief for Palestinian Ref-
ugees, in accordance with authority previously
given, approximately 600,000 dollars in supplies

Dr. P. J. de Kanter of the Netherlands presided
as Chairman of the Council for the session. Mr.
P. Zutter of Switzerland served as First Vice-

' Representatives of the Governments of Israel, Mexico,
and Sweden, of the United Nations, the Vatican, Ilo, and
Who also attended as official observers and representa-
tives of many voluntary agencies serving refugees were
present.

Jo/y ?0, 1950

surplus to Iro operations and that Iro had com-
pleted arrangements to make an interest-free loan
to the United Nations in an amount of 2,800,000
dollars in other currencies than United States dol-
lars for the relief of Palestinian refugees.

The Committee also welcomed information from
the Director-General that negotiations with the
Western European countries for the transfer of
Iro responsibility with respect to residual refugees
who will remain on their territories had proceeded
satisfactorily. The plan of expenditure for the
supplementary period of operations 1950-51 pre-
sented by the Director-General totaling 55,165,456
dollars was recommended to the General Council
for adoption. Included in these expenditures was
an item of 27,219,000 dollars for transportation
covering the cost of movement of approximately
100,000 refugees to the United States, 20,000 to
Australia, 10,000 to Canada, and 17,000 to all other
countries.

General Council

The General Council accepted the reports of the
Director-General; adopted the plan of expendi-
ture for the supplementary period after June 30,
1950; and approved the decision to maintain re-
settleable refugees in camps after June 30, 1950,
until their resettlement had been accomplished.
The Council gave serious attention to the financial
reports and urged the Director-General to pay
particular attention to the control and reduction
of inventory supplies in order that all resources
of the organization might be fully applied to the
accomplishment of the remaining tasks. The
Council also gave special consideration to the
problems of refugees remaining in Austria and
Italy and urged the Director-General to make
special efforts to reduce the number of refugees
in those countries in order that they might not be
further burdened after the termination of Iro by
refugees remaining in their territories. AVith re-
spect to the problem of protection of refugees
particularly in Germany the Council recom-
mended to the High Commission for Germany
that the German Federal Government be requested
to give consideration to adherence to the draft
convention on the protection of refugees presently
under consideration by the Economic and Social
Council when this convention becomes open for
signature.

On the initiative of the representative of
France, the Council sent a further communication

to the United Nations with respect to the afford-
ing of protection to refugees by the High Com-
missioner for Refugees when he assumes office on
January 1, 1951. It was recommended that cer-
tain listed provisions of the Iro constitution which
were deemed no longer applicable to the provi-
sion of protection to refugees should not be ap-
plied and that the High Commissioner should not
be bound in his activities by decisions which the
Iro had found it necessary to take restricting its
services to refugees for administrative or financial
reasons. In the course of the discussion on the
adoption of this recommendation to the United
Nations, the United States representative made a
statement that the United States Government
would not find it possible to make a further con-
tribution to Iro after the contribution for the sup-
plementary period June 30, 1950-March 31, 1951,
then under consideration in the Congress, had been
made. This statement reflected the judgment that
ujion the conclusion of Iro services in 1951 the
need for international funds for the direct as-
sistance of refugees would no longer exist because
the numbers of refugees remaining in any par-
ticular country will not constitute more than a
normal burden upon that country.

A decision was also reached by the General
Council with respect to the termination of the In-
ternational Tracing Service which has done com-
mendable work in reuniting members of families,
in locating missing children, and in supplying in-
valuable records concerning the experiences of
refugees and displaced persons during the war.
The Director-General was instructed to reduce the
staff of the Service progressively with the view to
the ultimate transfer of the function of tracing
missing persons to the High Commission for Ger-
many on March 31, 1951.

The Director-General re^Dorted satisfactory
progress in concluding arrangements for the con-
tinuing care of refugees for whom institutional
treatment must be provided after the termination
of Iro. The details of such arrangements with
Norway, Sweden. Belgium, and New Zealand were
made known to the Council, and during the course
of the session the French Government announced
its agreement to receive 900 aged persons from
Germany for permanent care in private institu-
tions in France.

The Council adjourned its fifth session on March
22, 1950, after resolving to convene its next session
at Geneva on or about October 9, 1950.

Deparfment of State Bulletin

THE DEPARTMENT

PUBLICATIONS

Report on Department's
Security Program Being Studied

[Released to the press June 15]

The Department has just received the report
of the Subcommittee of Two ^ concerning tlie
practical operations, enforcement, and day-to-day
policing of the security program in the Depart-
ment of State. The Department is very happy to
observe that they felt that the security officers
■whom they interviewed are alert, capable, and
well-trained men with a thorough grasp of their
subject. The report contains suggestions de-
signed to improve the Department's security pro-
gram in certain particulars. These suggestions
were made in a constructive spirit, and we are
examining them most carefully in order to deter-
mine whether they should be put into effect and
whether they are possible in the light of our cur-
rent budgetary situation.

One suggestion on which particular comment
might be appropriate is that aliens employed by
the Department abroad should be replaced as rap-
idly as possible with United States citizens. The
difficult administrative, budgetary, and human
problems which such a project presents have been
under consideration for some time, and a gradual
program of replacement is now under way.

In considei'ing this problem, however, it should
be borne in mind that the great bulk of these em-
ployees are engaged in routine and administrative
tasks completely removed from matters involving
any classifaed data or questions relating to national
security. Many of these aliens have been in the
employ of the United States Government for 10,
20, and 30 years. They have demonstrated, often
in exceedingly trying circumstances and some at
the cost of their lives, that they are carrying out
their assigned duties faithfully and with great
credit both to the United States and to themselves.
The value of their services must not be overlooked.

'The subcommittee of the Senate Foreign Relations
Committee, that is investigating the charges of Senator
McCarthy of Communist penetration of the Department
of State, appointed a subcommittee, consisting of Sen-
ators Theodore Francis Green and Henry Cabot Lodge,
Jr., to inspect precautions that the Department is taking
in its missions abroad against Communist espionage. The
Senators made an 11-day inspection trip abroad and
submitted their report on June 14.

Recent Releases

For sale hy the Superintendent of Documents, Oovem-
ment Printing Office, Wushinriton 25, D. C. Address re-
quests direct to the Suixrinlcndcnt of Documents, except
in the case of free puhlications, which may he obtained
from the Department of State.

Air Transport Services. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1955. Pub. 3011. 15 pp. 10«f.

Agreement and accompanying exchange of notes be-
tween the United States and the Dominican Re-
public— Signed at Ciudad Trujillo July 19, 1949; en-
tered into force July 19, 1949.

Economic Cooperation With Sweden Under Public Law
472 — 80th Congress, as amended. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2034. Pub. 3776. 9 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Sweden,
amending agreement of July 3, 1948 — Effected by ex-
change of notes, signed at Washington January 5 and
17, 1950 ; entered into force January 17, 1950.

Foreign Service List, April 1, 1950. Pub. 3792. 165 pp.
30^ a copy ; $1.50 a year domestic, $2 a year foreign.

Lists officers in the American Foreign Service, their
po.sts of assignment, and 2 indexes : geographic and
personnel.

United States Educational Foundation in Egypt. Trea-
ties and Other International Acts Series 2039. Pub. 3799.

11 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Egypt —
Signed at Cairo November 3, 1949 ; entered Into force
November 3, 1949 and exchange of notes — Signed at
Cairo November 3, 1949.

Economic Cooperation With Denmark Under Public Law
472 — 80th Congress, as amended. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2022. Pub. 3802. 9 pp. 5(f.

Agreement between the United States and Denmark
amending agreement of June 29, 1948 — Effected by ex-
change of notes, signed at Wa.shington February 7,
1950; entered into force February 7, 1950.

Economic Cooperation With Italy Under Public Law 472 —
80th Congress, as amended. Treaties and Other Inter-
national Acts Series 2028. Pub. 3804. 9 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Italy-
Effected by exchange of notes, signed at Washington
February 7, 1950 ; entered into force February 7, 1950.

Mutual Defense Assistance. Treaties and Other Inter-
national Acts Series 2016. Pub. 3805. 21 pp. 100.

Agreement between the United States and Norway —
Signed at Washington January 27, 1950; entered into
force February 24, 1950.

U.S. National Commission UNESCO News, April 1950.

Pub. 3807. 16 pp. 100 a copy; $1.00 per year, domestic;
$1.35 per year, foreign.

Prepared monthly for the United Nations Educa-
tional, Scientific and Cultural Organization.

July 10, 1950

The United States in the United Nations

Security Council

[July 1-7]

On July 7, the Security Council approved a joint
French-British resolution which recommends that
United Nations members providing military forces
under the Council resolutions on Korea make such
forces available to a unified command under the
United States and requests the United States to
designate the commander of such forces. This
unified command is authorized, at its discretion,
to use the United Nations flag in the course of
operations against North Koi'ean forces, together
with the flags of the various nations participating.
The United States is asked to report to the Coun-
cil, as ajapropriate, on the course of action taken
under the unified command. Seven votes sup-
ported the resolution, and none opposed it.
Egypt, India, and Yugoslavia abstained.

Ambassador Warren R. Austin told the Council
that the United States accepted the responsibilities
placed upon it by this resolution, adding that the
United States Government had not sponsored the
resolution because of the "special responsibilities"
imposed on her by the resolution.

Secretary-General's Communique on Korea

Following the adoption by the Security Council
on June 27 of a resolution recommending the
United Nations members "furnish such assistance
to the Republic of Korea as may be necessary to
repel the armed attack and to restore international
peace and security in that area," the Secretary-
General of the United Nations sent the following
telegram to member governments :

I have the honour to call the attention of your Govern-
ment to the resolution adopted by the Security Council
at its 474th meeting on 27 June 1950 which recommends
that the Members of the United Nations furnish such
assistance to the Republic of Korea as may he necessary
to repel the armed attack and to restore international
peace and security in that area. In the event that your
government is in a position to provide assistance, it would
facilitate the implementation of the resolution if you were
to be so good as to provide me with an early reply as to
the type of assistance. I shall transmit the reply" to the
Security Council and to the Government of the Republic
of Korea.

By July 10, the following states, in communica-

tions to the Secetary-General, had indicated their
support of Security Council action with respect
to Korea :

Afghanistan
Argentina
Australia
Belgium
Bolivia
Brazil
Burma
Canada
Chile
China
Colombia
Costa Rica
Cuba
Denmark
Dominican
Reimblic
Ecuador

El Salvador

Ethiopia

Greece

Guatemala

Haiti

Honduras

Iceland

India

Iran

Iraq

Israel

Lebanon

Luxembourg

Mexico

Netherlands

New Zealand

Nicaragua

Norway

Panama

Pakistan

Paraguay

Peru

Sweden

Syria

ThaUand

Turkey

Union of

South Africa
United Kingdom
United States
Uruguay
Venezuela

The following states had not replied to the
Secretary-General's communication on Korea :

Byelorussia Ukraine

Egypt ' Yugoslavia ^

Liberia

The U.S.S.R., Czechoslovakia, and Poland have
rejected as "illegal" the Security Council action
on Korea. Yemen took note of the resolution of
June 25, calling for a cease-fire in Korea, and Saudi
Arabia took note of the-resolution of June 27.

The Council of tlie Organization of American
States on June 28 adopted a resolution declaring
"its firm adherence to the decisions of the compe-
tent organs of the United Nations." Italy, a non-
member of the United Nations, has also indicated
general support for Security Council action on
Korea.

Following is a letter, dated July 6, 1950, from Ambassa-
dor Warren R. Austin to Sccretary-Oeneral Trygve hie
concerning United States assistance to Korea:'

Upon the instruction of my Government, I have
the lionor to acknowledge receipt of your com-
munication of June 29, 1950, in which you request
information concerning the type of assistance the
Government of the United States is prepared to

' These two states are members of the Security Council ;
Yugoslavia voted against the resolution of June 27 ; and
Egypt did not participate in the decision.

' U.N. doe. S/1580.

Department of State Bulletin

offer pursuant to the resolution adopted by the
Security Council on June 27, 1950, which recom-
mends that the Members of the United Nations
furnish such assistance to the Republic of Korea
as may be necessary to repel the armed attack and
to restore international peace and security in the
area.

In response to your request, I am authorized to
inform you that, in support of the resolutions
approved by the Security Council relative to the
attack upon the Republic of Koi'ea by invading
forces from North Korea, the President of the
United States has ordered United States air and
sea forces to give the Korean Government troops
cover and support and has authorized the use of
certain supporting ground units. The President
has also authorized the United States Air Force
to conduct missions on siJecific military targets in
Northern Korea wherever militarily necessary and
has ordered a naval blockade of the entire Korean
coast. The United States will continue to dis-
charge its obligations as a member of the United
Nations to act vigorously in support of the Se-
curity' Council's resolutions.

The United Kingdom, New Zealand, Australia,
Canada, China, and the Netherlands have offered
specific military assistance. In addition, Chile
has offered "regular and adequate supplies of
cooper, saltpetre, and other strategic materials to
countries responsible for operations"; Thailand
has offered foodstuffs, such as rice; Denmark has
offered to make available certain medicaments;
Norway has suggested that its tonnage might be
offered for transportation purposes; Nicaragua
has stated that she is prepared to assist in food-
stuffs and rubber, and if deemed advisable, to
contribute pei'sonnel; and the Philijipines is pre-
pared to contribute, as called upon, such amounts
of copra, coconut oil, soap, rice, and certain medi-
caments as may help to facilitate the implementa-
tion of the resolution.

Economic and Social Council

The United Nations experts' recommendations
on full employment, the related item on methods
of financing of economic development of under-
developed countries, and the draft Covenant on
Human Rights are among the main topics on the
52-item agenda adopted by the Economic and
Social Council at the opening of its eleventh ses-
sion at Geneva on July 3. The Council will also
review reports of a number of its subsidiary bodies
and of the specialized agencies. Representatives
of the Soviet Union, Poland, and Czechoslovakia
were absent.

The Council decided to refer the draft Human

Rights Covenant to the Social Committee for con-
sideration of the draft's broad aspects with a view
to transmitting it with relevant documentation to
the General Assembly. The United States repre-
sentative supported this proposal on the under-
standing that the Committee would consider only
the general aspects of the Covenant, although
earlier he had supported a recommendation to send
the Covenant to the General Assembly without
discussion.

The Secretary-General's arrangements for a
training program in public administration were
noted with approval by the Council, which recom-
mended that additional activities undertaken in
the field of training in public administration, at
the request of member governments, be considered
under the expanded program of technical assist-
ance. The United States representative's endorse-
ment of this Council action was based on the under-
standing that activities financed under the tech-
nical assistance account would be limited to re-
quests from underdeveloped countries.

Trusteeship Council

On July 5 and 6, the Trusteeship Council heard
and discussed statements from representatives of
various groups in French and British Togoland
to which the Council had earlier agreed to grant
oral hearings in connection with certain petitions.
Following statements by representatives of the
All-Ewe Conference, the Togoland Union, the
Supreme Council of Natural Rulers of Togoland,
and the Togoland Progress Party, Council mem-
bers questioned them on their various proposals
for unification of the Ewe people and Togoland
and on the comparative strength of Togolese ad-
herence to their views.

The first two parts of the Council's report on
the United States annual report on the trust terri-
tory of the Pacific Islands and the entire Council
report on Australia's annual report on New Guinea
were adopted on July 6.

International Civil Aviation Organization

The assembly of the International Civil Avia-
tion Organization, after a 3-week review of the
entire field of international air transport, con-
cluded its fourth session at Montreal on June 20.
The Assembly approved the report of the Icao
Council relating to its work of the past year and
elected a new Council of 20 nations to serve as
IcAo's executive body for the next 3 years. The
Assembly also took action on a number of matters
in the technical, economic, legal, and administra-
tive fields.

July 10, 7950

Genera! Policy

Act of Aggression in Korea: Page

Review of U.N. and U.S. Action To Restore

Peace. Address by Secretary Acheson . 43

Tlie President Authorizes Use of Ground

Units 46

Answer to China's Offer To Send Troops . 47
U.S.S.R. Responds to Request for Media-
tion 47

Precedent Contradicts Soviet Allegation of

Illegality in U.N. Action 48

ECA Aids South Korea 49

A Militaristic Experiment. Statement by

John Foster Dulles 49

Special Staff To Assist Ambassador Grady in

Iran 59

Czechoslovak U.N. Representative Resigns;

U.S. Grants Asylum 62

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Soviet Walk-Outs Flout Democratic Process
in United Nations. Statement by Francis
B. Sayre 61

Report on International Refugee Organiza-
tion. By George L. Warren 75

The United States in the United Nations . . 78

Economic Affairs

Labor's Role in World Affairs. By Bernard

Wiesman 54

Treaty Information

The Need for an International Trade
Organization :
Statement by Charles F. Brannan, Secre-
tary of Agriculture 67

Treaty Information — Continued

Statement by Charles Sawyer, Secretary of ^^^^
Commerce 70

Occupation Matters

Answer to Soviet Protest on MacArthur
Clemency Circular:

U.S. Note of June 8, 1950

Soviet Note of May 11, 1950

Relaxing Restrictions on Foreign Investment

in Germany

U.S. Will Designate Civilian High Commis-
sioner for Austria

Technical Assistance

Carrying Out Point 4: A Community Effort.
Address by Secretary Acheson

National Security

Support of Mutual Defense Assistance Pro-
gram for 1951. Statement by Secretary
Acheson

International Information and
Cultural Affairs

Visit of Burmese Banker

The Department

Report on Department's Security Program
Being Studied

Publications

Recent Releases

72
74

Bernard Wiesman, autlior of the article on labor's role iu
world affairs, is Acting Labor Adviser, Office of Assistant Secre-
tary for Economic Affair.'^.

Oeorge L. Wurren, author of the article on the Iko, is adviser on
refugees and displaced per.sons, Department of State. Mr. Warren was
United States representative to the fifth session of the General Council
and to the seventh session of the Executive Committee of Iro.

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1960

J/ie/ ^eha^t^^en(/ ,c^ t/iaie/

U.S. COMMANDS U.N. MILITARY FORCES IN

KOREA • Text of Security Council Resolution .... 83

THE UNITED NATIONS AND KOREA • By Ambassador

Philip C. Jessup 84

U.S. MILITARY ACTIONS IN KOREA • Address by

John Foster Dulles 88

POINT 4: AN INVESTMENT IN PEACE • Address by

the President 93

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 576
July 17, 1950

^vi®"'' o*.

^'ATBS o*

^^»HT o.

*^.wy*. bulletin

Vol. XXIII, No. 576 • Publication 3913
July 17, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.C.

Peice:

62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.50

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has

been approved by the Director of the

Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1949).

Note; Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government u)ith information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

U i. W^+- '>4

U.N. Places Unified Command

of Military Forces in Korea Under United States

(Otr.

s-v*-vr^i, (. V Va

III 11 jt^

TEXT OF SECURITY COUNCIL RESOLUTION'

"The Security Council,

"Ha\'ing determined that the armed attack upon
the Kepublic of Korea by forces from North
Korea constitutes a breach of the peace.

"Having recommended that the members of the
United Nations furnish such assistance to the Re-
public of Korea as may be necessary to repel the
armed attack and to restore international peace
and security in the area,

"1. Welcomes, the prompt and vigorous sup-
port which Governments and peoples of the United
Nations have given to its resolutions of 25 and 27
June 1950 to assist the Republic of Korea in de-
fending itself against armed attack and thus to
restore international peace and security in the
area;

"2. Notes that members of the United Nations
have transmitted to the United Nations offers of
assistance for the Republic of Korea ;

"3. Recommends that all members providing
military forces and other assistance pursuant to
the aforesaid Security Council resolutions make
such forces and other assistance available to a uni-
fied command under the United States;

"4. Bequests the United States to designate the
commander of such forces ;

"5. Authorises the unified command at its dis-
cretion to use the United Nations flag in the course
of operations against North Korean forces concur-
rently with the flags of the various nations
participating;

"6. Bequests the United States to provide the
Security Council with reports as appropriate on
tlie course of action taken under the unified
command."

GENERAL MacARTHUR DESIGNATED
AS COMMANDING GENERAL

Statement by the President

[Released to the press by the White House July 8]

The Security Council of the United Nations, in
its resolution of July 7, 1950, has recommended
that all members providing military forces and
other assistance pursuant to the Security Council
resolutions of June 25 and 27, make such forces and
other assistance available to a unified command
under the United States.

The Security Council resolution also requests
that the United States designate the commander
of such forces, and authorizes the unified command
at its discretion to use the United Nations flag in
the course of operations against the North Korean
forces concurrently with the flags of the various
nations participating.

I am responding to the recommendation of the
Security Council and have designated General
Douglas MacArthur as the Commanding General
of the military forces which the members of the
United Nations place under the unified command
of the United States pursuant to the United Na-
tions' assistance to the Republic of Korea in repel-
ling the unprovoked armed attack against it.

I am directing General MacArthur, pursuant to
the Security Council resolution, to use the United
Nations flag in the course of operations against the
North Korean forces concurrently with the flags
of the various nations participating.

' Introduced by France and U.K. (S/1588) and adopted
on .luly 7 by a vote of 7 to 0, with 3 abstentions (Egypt,
India, and Yugoslavia) ; Soviet Union was absent.

July 17, 1950

Ambassador Austin Comments on Resolution

On July 7, Ambassador Austin told the Security
Council that the United States accepts the responsi-
bility and makes the sacrifice that is involved in
carrying out these principles of the United Nations.
In spirit, if not in word, this resolution has been in
efCect since the very first resolution was adopted
in response to the call for help from Korea.

The United Nations and Korea

hy Philip 0. Jessup
Atribassador at Large ^

The Communist-inspired attack on the Repub-
lic of Korea is the most barefaced attack on the
United Nations itself. An assault upon the
United Nations headquarters at Lake Success
could hardly have been more direct or more re-
vealing. Of all the countries in the world, none
is more closely identified with the United Nations
than the Republic of Korea. Despite the ac-
tions of the Soviet Union, from March 20, 1946,
to September 23, 1947, to prevent the establish-
ment of Korea as a free and independent nation,
the United Nations helped to set it up when the
United States laid the case of Korea before the
world organization.

As could be expected, the propaganda of world-
wide Communist imi^erialism has tried to hide its
aggression under a flood of lies. As Al Smith
used to say, "Let's look at the record."

Record on Korea

Fortunately, the record is crystal clear. There
have been times in history when serious and con-
scientious scholars have debated the question
"Wlro started the war?" No serious or conscien-
tious scholar can have any question here. The
North Korean Communist forces attacked the Re-
public of Korea without warning, without provo-
cation, without any justification whatsoever. It
has never been more true than in this case that
actions speak louder than words. Communist
peace propaganda has sought to lull the peoples
of the free world at the very moment when Com-
munist imperialism was preparing and launching
this war of aggression.

Knowledge of the facts of the situation does
not depend upon statements by the Korean Gov-
ernment nor upon statements by the Americans

* Highlights of an address made before the Institute of
Public Affairs, University of Virginia, Charlottesville, Va.,
on July 10 and released to the press on the same date.

on the spot. The United Nations has a Commis-
sion in Korea. At the last meeting of the General
Assembly, this Commission was specifically au-
thorized to have teams of observers to watch the
38th parallel, north of which the Communist
forces were entrenched. This United Nations
Commission is composed of representatives of the
following countries: Australia, China, India, EI
Salvador, Turkey, the Philippines, and France.
The Commission's team of observers had con-
cluded an on-the-spot survey, barely 24 hours be-
fore the Communist forces attacked. Here is
what these impartial United Nations representa-
tives reported.

U.N. COMMISSION REPORT

The principal impression left with observers after
their field tour is that the South Korean Army is organized
for defense and is in no condition to carry out an attack
on a large scale against forces of the North . . .

This impression, they said, was based on eight
observations including the facts that "there is no
concentration of [South Korean] troops and no
massing for attack visible at any point".

At several points, North Korean forces are in effec-
tive possession of salients on the south side of the par-
allel, occupation in at least one case being of fairly recent
date. There is no evidence that South Korean forces
have taken any steps for or making any preparation to
eject North Korean forces from any of these salients . . .

So far as the equipment of South Korean forces Is con-
cerned, in absence of armour, air support, and heavy
artillery, any action with object of invasion would, by
any military standards, be impossible . . .

In general, they reported, the attitude of South Korean
commanders is one of vigilant defense. Their instruc-
tions do not go beyond retirement in case of attack upon
previous prepared positions . . .

Immediately after the Communist forces of the

Hepaiimen^ of Stale Bulletin

North attacked and began their invasion of the
Eepublic of Korea the United Nations Commis-
sion reported as follows to Secretary-General Lie :

Commission met this morning 1000 hours and con-
sidered latest reports on hostilities and results direct
observation along parallel by Uncok Military observers
over period ending forty-eight hours before hostilities be-
gan. Commission's present view on basis this evidence
is first that judging from actual progress of operations
Northern Regime is carrying out well-planned concerted
and full scale invasion of South Korea, second that South
Korean forces were deployed on wholly defensive basis in
all sectors of the parallel and third, that they were taken
completely by surprise . . .

The Security Council had the evidence and
passed judgment immediately. The judgment of
the Security Council is the judgment of the world
organization. The Communist invaders have been
adjudged as having launched an armed attack and
no amount' of Communist propaganda will succeed
in hiding the "mark of Cain" on their foreheads.

U.N. RESOLUTION

In view of the attemjit of Communist propa-
ganda to confuse the issue let us get one other
point clear on the record. The Communist forces
attacked on Sunday, June 25, at 4 : 00 a.m., Korean
time. The United Nations Security Council met
at 2 : 00 p.m. Washington time on Sunday, June
25th, and by 6 : 00 p.m. that afternoon adopted a
resolution determining that the armed attack of
the North Koreans constituted a breach of the
peace. They called upon all members of the
United Nations to assist.

AVliat had the United States done before the
Security Council issued this judgment and ap-
peal? The only steps which the United States
took prior to 6 : 00 p.m. on Sunday were :

U.S. ACTION

(1) It took the initiative in the early morning
hours of Smiday to call the Security Council to
consider this aggression immediately.

(2) It began the evacuation of American women
and children from the danger area.

(3) In the immediate vicinity of Seoul, the
capital of Korea, it provided the necessary mili-
tary protection to keep these women and children
from being killed during the course of the evac-
uation.

It was not until 10 : 30 p.m. on June 25, after
the Security Council had passed its resolution, that
the first orders were issued by the President of
the United States directing that assistance should
lie given to the Republic of Korea in pursuance of
the Security Council resolution.

During the next day, as the armed forces from
North Korea advanced southward, the United
States continued to carry out the resolution of
June 25 by increasing its aid to the Korean
Government.

'\\1ien the Security Council met again two days
later, on June 27th, and made more specific its ap-
peal for help to the Republic of Korea, the Presi-
dent of the United States ordered an intensifica-
tion of our help. The free world greeted these
actions with enthusiastic approval and forty-six
members of the United Nations have already sig-
nified to the headquarters of the United Nations
their approval and support of the Security Coun-
cil resolution. The armed forces of six members,
in addition to those of the United States, are either
already participating in giving help to the Repub-
lic of Korea or have announced that these forces
are being made available. Other members have
offered other types of material assistance. Here
indeed is collective security in action.

Before going back to consider these matters in
more detail let us summarize these essential points
which the record proves.

(1) The Communist forces in North Korea at-
tacked without warning and without provocation.
They started it. That is what the Prime Minister
of India, Pandit Nehru, calls the "Major fact of
well-planned invasion and aggression of South
Korea".

(2) The Security Council as the authorized rep-
resentative of the world's organization responsible
for the maintenance of international peace and se-
curity has found that these are the facts which
were established by the report of its own United
Nations Commission on the spot.

( 3 ) The United States acted promptly as a loyal
member of the United Nations and everything
which it has done has been in support of the action
of the United Nations in the effort to stop the
Communist armed attack and to restore peace in
the area.

Let us now go back to consider some of these
items in more detail. Let us first look at the Com-
munist propaganda line which says in effect that
the United Nations has no right to keep the peace
when it is Communist imperialists who have com-
mitted a breach of the peace.

Answer to Soviet Illegality Charge

The Soviet Union argues that the Security
Council is without power to act if their represent-
ative violates his Charter obligation to participate
in its meetings.

It is necessary first to recall that article 24 of
the Charter says that the members of the United
Nations confer on the Security Council "primary
responsibility for the maintenance of interna-

Ju// 17, 7950

tional peace and security". In the next place
article 28 of the Charter says that —

The Security Couucil shall be so organized as to be able
to function continuously. Rach member of the Security
Council shall for this purpose be represented at all times
at the seat of the Organization.

This is the language of the Charter. It is per-
fectly clear that a state which is a member of the
Security Council is obligated to be in a position
at all times to take part in its work. This provi-
sion would have no meaning if in spite of having
a representative at the seat of the organization
the representative should have a right to refuse to
attend the meetings. The Soviet Union has thus
violated its obligations under the Charter by re-
sorting to the tactics of "walking out."

Disregarding this question, the Soviet Union
argues that it nevertheless has the power to
cripple the functioning of the Security Council
because article 27 of tlie Charter says that deci-
sions of the Security Council on substantive
matters —

. . . shall be made by an affirmative vote of seven
members including the concurring votes of the permanent
members.

Since the Soviet Union is a permanent member,
it is argued that the absence of their concurring
vote invalidates the action of the Council.

The history of the drafting of this article and
of its application in practice leads to quite a differ-
ent conclusion. The provision which I have just
cited from article 27 about the concurring votes
of the permanent members iSj of course, the legal
language describing the decision at the San Fran-
cisco conference to give the permanent members
a veto on substantive questions. The Charter is
a constitutional document and like all constitu-
tions, including that of the United States, the
exact meaning of its words is developed by
practice.

U.S.S.R. PAST ACTIONS CONTRADICT CHARGE

One of the practices in the Security Council
which has developed over the years is the prac-
tice of abstaining from voting on questions which
are put to the vote. The Soviet Union, begin-
ning in April 1948, abstained in four instances
on Security Council resohitions dealing with
Palestine.^ Beginning in January 1948, the So-
viet Union abstained on four resolutions dealing
with the Kashmir case. Beginning in December
1948, the Soviet Union abstained on two resolu-
tions in the Indonesian case. In none of these
ten cases has the Soviet Union challenged the le-
gality of the action taken by the Security Council.
Furthermore, tlie Soviet Union has never ques-
tioned the legality of action taken by the Security
Council in which it voted with the majority but

' See BtTLLETiN of July 10, 1950, p. 48.

on which other permanent members of the Coun-
cil abstained. This has occurred in at least three
instances. We thus already have over a dozen
cases in which it has been established that the
meaning of article 27 of the Charter is that, while
the negative vote of a permanent member can de-
feat the substantive resolution, the failure of a
permanent member to vote for a resolution does
not defeat it.

Clearly it can make no difference in terms of
the application of the Charter on this point
whether the representative of a permanent mem-
ber sits at the table and abstains or whether he
fails to come at all. The essential difference re-
lates to tlie question of a member's sense of re-
sponsibility and willingness to discharge its obli-
gations under the Charter. The Soviet Union
had the legal power to attend the meeting of the
Security Council and, by taking the responsibility
before the world, to cast a veto to block Security
Council action. The U.S.S.R. did not have the
power to block action by staying away from the
meeting in violation of its obligations under ar-
ticle 28.

The consideration of this part of the Soviet
Union's argument would not be complete without,
mention of the excuse which the Soviet Govern-
ment has given for its recent refusal to cooperate
with the United Nations. The excuse is that a
majority of the members have not accepted the
Soviet view that the representative of the Chinese
Communists should be seated as the representative
of China. The position of the United States on
this point has been frequently stated. Our po-
sition is that we are always ready to abide by the
decision which is made by any one of the organs
of the United Nations in accordance with the es-
tablished procedures of that organ. We have
never taken the position that we will disregard
decisions merely because we do not agree with
them. We have made it very clear that we do not
believe that this question of deciding what repre-
sentative is entitled to sit for his government is
subject to the veto. We believe that under es-
tablished rules this is a procedural question to
which the veto does not apply.

It is also necessary to recall that the Soviet
tactics of resorting to a walk-out in the United
Nations has not been confined to the pretext of
the issue of Chinese Communist representation.
Mr. Gromyko resorted to the same tactics in the
case of Iran in 1946; the trick was unsuccessful
then as now. If the question is asked whether
China was represented at the meetings of the Se-
curity Council on June 25th and 27th, the answer
is clearly yes. The Security Council had consid-
ered the claim of the Soviet Union that the Chinese
Government was not entitled to represent China,
and it rejected this claim. Until this decision is
changed by a duly authorized organ of the United
Nations, it obviously stands as the decision which
the members are bound to follow.

Department of State Bulletin

U.S. vs. U.S.S.R. Policy Toward Asia

It is a familiar pattern of international Com-
munist propaganda that they loudly accuse others
of the sins which they themselves have committed.
It is therefore not surprising that they accuse the
United States of imperialism in Asia, because the
Russian imperialistic design is the same in Asia
today as it was under the Czai's. The Soviet en-
croachments upon Chinese sovei"eignty in Man-
churia, Mongolia, Sinkiang, and elsewhere have
frequently been pointed out. The Soviet Union
and its satellites were the only members of the
United Nations which refused during the last Gen-
eral Assembly to join in approving a resolution
reasserting the historic American doctrine of
respect for tlie integrity of China.

The experience of so-called Communist "libera-
tion" of strongly nationalist states like Poland,
Czechoslovakia, Latvia, Lithuania and Estonia
holds out the gloomiest prospects for the peoples
of Asia. During the period of this type of Soviet
"liberation,"' what has been the record of the
Western world? The Philippines and Burma
have become separate independent states. India,
Pakistan and Ceylon have become independent
states, members of the Commonwealth. Indonesia
has also become independent and a member of the
Netherlands-Indonesian Union. Cambodia, Laos,
and Vietnam have become independent members
of the French Union. Once again, the record is
the proof to which we turn. The Communist
propaganda cannot wipe out the facts.

The Ignited States has steadily supported the
development of independent nationalism through-
out Asia. We supported the cause of Indonesia
in the United Nations Security Council when the
Communist international movement was denounc-
ing the Indonesian patriotic leaders, Sukarno and
Hatta as "traitors." It was the United States
which took the case of Korea to the United Na-
tions and sought United Nations guaranties for
Korean independence. It was the Soviet Union
which by walkout and noncooperation blocked the
union of the country which all real Korean patriots
desire.

The objective and purpose of the United States
in Korea today is to support the United Nations
effort to restore and maintain peace. We are help-
ing to carry out Security Coimcil resolutions which
call for a cease-fire, the withdrawal of the North
Koreans to the SSth parallel, and for the restora-
tion of international peace and security in the
area. Thereafter, we shall continue our policy
of supporting the United Nations in its efforts to
secure a permanent adjustment of the situation
in Korea in the interest of the Korean people. We
have no other or separate interest of our own.

Other Attaclts To Be Defeated

It is always true that at times when thought and
action are concentrated upon meeting an emer-

gency a conscious effort is required to keep in
mind the importance of moving forward with
long-range plans. The present situation in Korea
requires and is receiving the concentrated atten-
tion of the Government of the United States. But,
at the same time, we must go forward with many
other plans and policies. It should be particularly
emphasized that this great demonstration of com-
bined action under the United Nations cannot be
allowed to slacken the efforts of this world organi-
zation to grapple with the fundamental problems
affecting the peace and welfare of mankind. One
of the most important of the long-range efforts of
the United Nations is the program of technical
assistance which is allied to our own Point 4 Pro-
gram. Sudden aggressive armed attacks on
peaceful, independent states must be met and rolled
back, but the peace and welfare of mankind are
always under attack by poverty and disease. Our
resources are adequate to cooperate in this peren-
nial struggle at the same time that we are meeting
the emergency of the moment. We have demon-
strated to the world our will and our ability to
meet the emergenc_y; surely we will not fail
through support of the Point 4 Program to do our
full part in the longer campaign.

Charging South Korea as Aggressor
Reminiscent of Nazi Tactics

Statement hy Secretary Acheson

[Released to the press July 5]

In regard to the Korean hostilities, four sunple
points must be recognized and long-remembered
by all the world. The people of this free nation
have clearly shown that they know the truth and
are not going to be misled by false versions of it.
These are the facts:

1. The present troubles in Korea started not
when the United Nations Security Council acted
or when the United States and others acted in
support of the Security Council. It all started at
dawn on Sunday, June 25, Korean time.

2. At that time, troops from North Korea, with-
out any provocation whatever, crossed the 38th
parallel and launched an aggressive attack against
the Republic of Korea. All the reliable witnesses,
on the scene, at the time, including the United
Nations Commission, have established that the
North Korean forces were the aggi'essors.

3. The Security Council of the United Na-
tions acted in support of tlie Republic of Korea
only after it was satisfied that this was a case of
utterly unprovoked aggression.

4. Any contention that hostilities were started by
the Republic of Korea is clearly in the category of
the Nazi claims of 1939 that Poland started hos-
tilities by attacking Nazi Germany.

July 17, 1950

U.S. Military Actions in Korea

Addresses iy John Foster Dulles
Consultant to the Secretary

NEW PHASE OF AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY >

The Korean affair obviously brings us nearer
to the day of fateful decision. Also, it makes it
more probable that we will make the kind of
effort needed to fend off the utter disaster of war.

The danger of war has lain largely in our past
failure to see clearly and respond adequately to
the peril that stems from Soviet communism.
That slowness is probably inevitable in a democ-
racy when national policy depends on public
opinion. However, even now it is not too late
to put peace onto a more stable basis than ever
before.

The nature of the Soviet Communist threat has
been fully set out by Stalin himself in his Prob-
lems of Leninism. The latest English edition,
printed in Moscow, is dated 1940. Stalin there
outlines the program, whereby, Soviet commu-
nism expects to extend its system throughout the
world and establish its "one world" of state so-
cialism. The plan is to conquer the weaker coun-
tries, one by one, by methods of propaganda,
penetration, subversive warfare, and, as a last
resort, open war. The strongest non-Communist
countries, notably the United States, will be left
to the last and, gradually, encircled and their
economies weakened until, finally, they are sup-
posed either to capitulate voluntarily or be over-
thrown by open assault which the Communist
countries will presumably then have the power to
launch successfully. Stalin points out, and this
dates back to 1925, that the "road to victory"
oyer the West lies through "revolutionary al-
liance with the liberation movement" in the col-
onies and countries of the East. The hostile tide
of communism in Asia, which looms so danger-

'An address made at Colgate University Conference on
American Foreign Policy, Hamilton, N. Y., in July 7 and
released to the press on the same date.

ously today, has been announced and actively nur-
tured for 25 yeai-s.

Stalin's Strategy

Stalin's book, which is the present-day Commu-
nist bible, except in Yugoslavia, gives us the same
preview that Hitler gave in Mein Kamvf.
There is, however, an important distinction be-
tween the Hitler program and the Stalin pro-
gram. Hitler felt that his whole program had to
be achieved in short order, during his own life-
time. That required intensive and sustained of-
fensive action. In the case of the Communist
program, there is no such time urgency. It is
anticipated that full realization of the Commu-
nist conquest may take what Stalin refers to as
"an entire historical era." And, he teaches, that
"tactics of retreat" are as important as tactics of
attack. Also, he teaches, the necessity of com-
promise when, as he puts it, this is necessary "to
buy off a powerful enemy and gain a respite."

Therefore, under the Connnunist program, war
by Russia is not necessarily inevitable or immi-
nent if we are powerful enough to make it seem
expedient to the Soviet Communist leaders to use
tactics of delay or compromise.

U.S. Awakens to Reality

We have only recently begun to take seriously
Stalin's world program for comnumism, long an-
nounced, superbly implemented, and already one-
third consummated. Our national attitude has
only gradually moved toward realism. There has
been an evolution through four phases:

1. Cooperation. — That was the war phase.
When Hitler made the Soviet Union and the
United States war allies, there was a military ne-
cessity of cooperation that made it expedient to
draw a veil over the basically hostile attitude of
Soviet communism toward the United States. We

Deparfment of Stale Bulletin

emphasized the courageous fighting qualities of
the Russian people, and we ignored the basic an-
tipathy toward us of the Communist leaders. On
the theory that the Soviet Union had to be given
inducements to prevent her making a separate
peace with Germany and to get her to enter into
the war against Japan, we agreed to go along
with large Soviet postwar expansion in both cen-
tral Europe and in Asia.

2. Non€ooperation.—T\\& second phase of our
policy came immediately after the close of the
fighting. The Soviet Union then sought to secure
continuing support from the United States for
her expansionist policj'. Her leaders argued that
postwar cooperation of the Soviet Union and the
United States was necessary in order to assure
world peace and that that cooperation neces-
sitated the United States acquiescing in the ex-
pansionist ambitions of the Soviet Union. That
■was in essence the Molotov thesis which was pre-
sented at the first Council of Foreign Ministers
meeting at London, in September 1945, which I at-
tended with Secretary Byrnes. We then made the
momentous decision that we would not continue in
time of peace the Yalta type of appeasement which
had seemed necessary in time of war.

That decision taken at London, in the fall of
1945, did not, however, immediately make itself
felt throughout all aspects of the United States
foreign policy. Notably, there was a lag in bring-
ing our Eastern policy into line with our Western
policy. Many Eastern students were impressed by
the abuses and deficiencies of existing Eastern gov-
ernments and felt that a good dose of Communist
reform might be healthy.

3. Prevention. — The third phase of American
policy was marked by realization that there was
in fact an irreconcilable conflict between the am-
bitions of Soviet communism and the interests and
welfare of the United States and that we needed
to assert ourselves positively to prevent the ex-
tension of Soviet communism. This new ap-
proach came out of the 1947 Moscow and London
Conferences of the Council of Foreign Ministers
which I attended with Secretary Marshall. Be-
tween these two Council meetings came the Mar-
shall Plan proposal (June 1947) . We then clearly
saw that we were threatened by a so-called "cold
war," and we made up our minds to make positive
efforts to strengthen the free world and to fill up
military, economic, and moral vacuums into which
Soviet communism was moving.

Our maximum efforts were directed to Europe.
But there was also a change of policy in the Far
East, as indicated by the fact that in August 1948
Secretary Marshall advised our Embassy in China
that "the LTnited States Government must not
directly or indirectly give any implication of
support, encouragement, or acceptability of
coalition govermnent in China with Communist
participation."

We have, however, up to now, assumed, and

that was a fair working hypothesis, that com-
nuniism would probably limit itself to "cold war"
tactics and that there would not be open military
attack. However, some preparations were made
as against the possibility of armed attack, notably
in Western Europe. We made the North At-
lantic Treaty and adopted the Military Assistance
Program.

4. Opposition. — The fourth phase of policy is
marked by the North Korean attack upon South
Korea and our active fighting opposition under
the direction of the United Nations. The Korean
affair shows that communism cannot be checked
merely by building up sound domestic economies.
The South Korean experiment in democracy was
as hopeful as could be expected. There was politi-
cal, intellectual, and economic freedom. The sec-
ond national election had just been held, and the
majority elected were independent of the party
in power which controlled the police force and the
election machinery. The fact that that could hap-
pen is good evidence of political freedom. As
recently as 2 weeks ago, I met with the Korean
National Assembly, with leading educators, with
religious groups, businessmen, and representa-
tives of labor. I conferred with our mission, and
economic advisers, and with the Korean Commis-
sion of the United Nations. All the evidence was
that the Republic of Korea provided a wholesome,
free society and one which could not be over-
thrown by subversive efforts. Such efforts had,
indeed, been repeatedly tried and had failed. The
military blow from the north dissipates the thesis
that internal reform and well-being is itself a
sufficient defense against Communist aggression.

Korea Attack Part of Communist Plan

The armed attack that occurred shows that,
while the Soviet Union seems not at the moment
prepared to engage its own army, nevertheless,
international communism is prepared to use, in
open warfare, the armed forces of puppet and
satellite Communist states which are equipped
with armament of Russian manufacture.

It was realized for some time that the Republic
of Korea was in danger of attack from the north.
Proof of that is found in the fact that the United
Nations continued its Korean Commission after
the government of the Republic had been set up
under United Nations supervision, and in the fall
of 1949, the General Assembly added to the func-
tions of the Commission the task of maintaining
military observation along the northern frontier.

When, I, myself, went to the Far East, on June
14th, it was primarily to look into the possibilities
of the Japanese peace treaty. But I went first to
Korea to acquaint myself personally with a situa-
tion which, for several years, I had dealt with
as a United States delegate to the United Nations.
I was concerned about the increasing insistence
by the North Korean Communist regime that it
must rule all of Korea and the intensive Com-

Jo/y 17, 7950

munist propaganda in South Korea that it had
better succumb to communism without resistance,
because neither tlie United Nations nor the United
States would give protection if the Republic
should be attacked.

Before leaving Washington, I drafted a speech
to be made in Korea. In it I said that if the
Republic of Korea were attacked, it could expect
support from the United Nations. I pointed out
that the United Nations Charter required all na-
tions "to refrain from any threat or use of force
against your territorial integrity or political in-
dependence" and, I added, that the United States
stood behind the United Nations. I concluded
with these words:

You are not alone. You will never be alone so long
as you continue to play worthily your part in the great
design of human freedom.

That address was made on June 19th at the
opening of the Second National Assembly. It
was broadcast in the Korean language, through-
out Korea, and Korean language leaflet copies
were widely distributed. Nevertheless, 6 days
later the North Korean army struck, in a long-
prepared and fully implemented effort. There
were ample supplies of Russian-made planes,
tanks, and heavy artillery. The Republic's army
fought bravely iDut hopelessly. It had no combat
planes, no tanks, and no artillery heavy enough to
stop the invading tanks. Unopposed enemy
planes flew low, strafing the civilian population,
setting fire to gasoline supplies, and spreading
terror throughout the capital area. In 3 days,
Seoul, 30 miles south of the northern border, was
captured, and the tank formations moved on to
the south.

New Phase in American Foreign Policy

This open military attack and United Nations
resistance to it opens a new phase in American
foreign policy. It will, I hope and believe, arouse
us to a greater effort than any we have yet made
to fend off the danger of war. It may require
us to devote a greater percentage of our vast eco-
nomic productivity to military production so that
other free nations will not be exposed to being
overrun by Communist satellite forces equipped
with armament furnished by Russia.

What has happened to the Republic of Korea
shows, I fear, that the communistic assaults can-
not be prevented merely by economic aid or merely
by developing good societies. The open military
assault on the Republic of Korea occurred be-
cause the Republic of Korea was too good a so-
ciety to be tolerated on the otherwise Communist-
dominated mainland of north Asia, and because
it was so good that it could not be overthrown
from within by indirect aggression. Dii-ect ag-
gression was the only way to blot out this moral
salient on the Communist mainland.

There are probably two further reasons for the
attack. One was that if it succeeded it would

envelop Japan both from the north, where the
Russians now have already gained hold of all of
Sakhalin Island and the Kurile Islands, and from
the south, where Korea is only separated by a
narrow strait from the south of Japan. There
was doubtless a desire to throw a roadblock in
the way of the positive program of the United
States for putting Japan onto a peaceful and self-
governing basis, as part of the free world.

Furthermore, the Communists doubtless calcu-
lated that if the attack failed through the use of
United States force to repel the attack, the process
would bog down the West in the mire of anti-
colonialism in Asia.

As we have seen, Stalin long ago calculated that
the best way to conquer the West was to involve
it in fighting the anticolonial aspirations of Asia
and the Pacific. The colonial powers, including
the United States in the Philippines, Britain in
India, Burma, and Ceylon, and the Dutch in In-
donesia, by wise statesmanship, extricated them-
selves largely from this trap. No doubt the Korean
venture is designed in part to draw the Western
world back into that trap. That is a danger that
has to be carefully avoided by relating our conduct
to the policies of the United Nations which, as an
organization, is strongly dedicated to self-gov-
ernment and independence for the non-self-gov-
erning peoples of the world.

Prospects for Peace

The situation is certainly fraught with danger.

However, if the members of the United Nations
support and make good the Security Council de-
cision to repel and throw back the unprovoked
military aggression in Korea; if the defensive
military position around the periphery of Soviet
control is strengthened, so that satellite forces can-
not easily break through with violence ; if the colo-
nial powers support the newly born nations and
avoid general entanglement with the legitimate in-
dependence aspirations of the Asiatic peoples;
then there will be a condition where peace is
likely, unless the Soviet Union itself connnits its
total might to total war. It may not be prepared
to do this because of its relative economic weak-
ness.

Speaking in Tokyo on June 22, 1950, I pointed
out that, in terms of key commodities such as
steel, aluminum, electric power, and crude oil, the
United States had an advantage over the Soviet
Union of anywhere from five or ten to one. I
concluded "Any struggle that openly pitted the
full might of the free world against that of the
captive world could have but one outcome. That
would be the total demolition of the artificial,
rigid, and relatively weak structure that Soviet
communism has built." I believe that that is a
correct analysis of the present situation. I do
believe, however, that it will be necessary for us
to convert more of our economic potential into
present strength in order that the free nations who

Department of State Bulletin

are menaced by Communist military attack can
be better protected.

In the case of Korea, it was felt necessary to
give a very low priority to the military position
of the Republic of Korea because of the great
shortage of available military equipment. Con-
gress had appropriated funds to extend the Mili-
tary Assistance Program to Korea. However, it
had not yet been found possible to convert that
appropriation into a reality. When I was there,
the Korean defense establishment pointed out
that while the morale and discipline of the Re-
public's army was first class, they could not
be expected to hold for long without a single com-
bat plane, without any tanks, without antiaircraft
guns, and without artillery sufficient to stop the
known concentrations of enemy tanks on the
border.

We are now having to make good that deficiency
in a costly way.

What has happened in Korea will, I think,
bring home to the American people the need of
adequate measures to strengthen the free world
as against the possibility of sudden, armed attack.
If we do that, we can close the most dangerous
remaining loophole for war.

If we have strength ; if we and the other mem-
bers of the free worlcl put that strength at the
disposition of the United Nations ; if the United
Nations continues to show a capacity for decisive
action, that will check the likelihood of a series
of little wars which could develop into a big war.

Relations between the free world and the Com-
munist world are no doubt in a dangerous phase.
It is a period of testing. Out of it could come
great disaster. Equally, the test could supply
proof that peace has been established on a basis
sounder than ever before in history.

THE INTERDEPENDENCE OF INDEPENDENCE ^

The Declaration of Independence is expressed
not in terms of American rights but in terms of
the natural moral rights of all men. It proceeds
from the promise that all men "are endowed by
their Creator with certain inalienable Rights," and
the Founding Fathers made it clear that they were
setting a pattern of freedom for men everywhere.

Largely under the inspiration of that example,
the nineteenth century became a great period of
liberalism, when human beings freed themselves
from the yoke of despotism. Wherever they
sought to do so, they had the support of the United
States.

We early established the Monroe Doctrine, to
warn Czarist Russia and its allies to keep their
hands off the republics of this hemisphere whose

' In an address made at the Sesquicentennial Fourth of
July Celebration, at Washington, D.C., and released to
the press on the same date.

July 17, 1950

continuing independence, we said, was vital to our
own peace and happiness. Toward the end of the
nineteenth century, we enunciated the "Open
Door" policy for China, to help the Chinese people
develop in their own way, free of alien domination.
In this twentieth century, we have joined in two
world wars when the freedom of the West was im-
periled by military despotism. Five years ago,
we signed the United Nations Charter and,
thereby, pledged ourselves to seek universal re-
spect for human rights, and fundamental free-
doms, and the preservation of political independ-
ence as against violent attack.

U.S. Tradition — Support of Human Freedom

The history of our Nation makes a consistent,
unfolding pattern. We have supported human
freedom and political independence throughout
the world, both as a matter of good morals and
because we saw that our own freedom was an inte-
gral part of total human freedom.

The United States can never be isolationist, and
it never will be so long as we are true to our herit-
age. An isolationist America would be a contra-
diction in terms, for America has from the be-
ginning been a symbol of the universal cause of
human liberty. Wltat we are doing today is in
keeping with the tradition of our past.

I was in Korea only 2 weeks ago and saw with
my own eyes that that Republic was a land of
freedom. The people had just had their second
general election. Eighty percent of the eligible
voters had gone to the polls. A majority of the
representatives elected were independent of the
party which controlled the election machinery and
the police force. That is proof of real political
liberty.

I talked with leading educators and attended
a gathering of professors and students at one of
their leading universities. I spent an evening of
religious worship with 3,000 Christian refugees
who had fled from the northern dictatorship of
atheistic communism so as to enjoy the religious
and intellectual liberty of the Republic of Korea.
There was no doubt as to the reality of that liberty.
The people were happy and industrious and using
energetically and cooperatively their new-found
freedom.

The society was so wholesome that it could not
be overthrown from within. That had been tried
and failed. So early Sunday morning, 9 days
ago, open aggression was brought into play.
Without warning, heavy tank formations drove
down from the north, moving through the valleys
to converge first upon the capital of Seoul, then to
fan out to the south. They were preceded and
covered by combat planes which, swooping low,
machine-gunned and terrorized the civilian popu-
lation. The forces of the Republic had no combat
planes, tanks, or heavy artillery with which to
oppose them.

Korean Attack— Military Despotism

Tlie long-prepared, suddenly exploded, ruthless
attack was characteristic of military despotism.
It was, in miniature, the kind of attack that could
hit us if we are content to live in a world where
such methods are tolerated. The struggle in Ko-
rea represents the timeless issue of whether lovere
of liberty will be vigilant enough, brave enough,
and united enough to survive despotism.

The United States, as a member of the United
Nations, had helped to create the Korean Kepublic.
We had given it economic aid. We alone of the
free world had military strength in the immediate
area. We were the logical first defenders of the
liberty that had been assaulted.

It was, however, important that we should not
act alone or without international sanction. The
United Nations had been established for the very
purpose of dealing with such situations. Its Se-
curity Council met within a few hours of the open-
ing of the assault. All of the members were
present, except the Soviet Union, which sought by
absence to veto restraint on the aggressive action
of its satellite in North Korea. The Council,
nevertheless, acted. It had a direct report from
its own Commission in Korea and, in the light of
that report, unhesitatingly, branded the attack as
a breach of the peace. It called upon the member
states to assist in repelling it.

President Truman, with bipartisan support,
acted promptly and vigorously to bring the United
States to respond to that appeal. The Govern-
ments of many other members of the United Na-
tions did likewise.

Thus, we see international authority at work to
prevent the committing, against the Republic of
Korea, of what I call "international murder."

The task undertaken is not a light one and be-
fore it is finished we shall all of us have to pay a
price. Already, today, in Korea, our youth are
beginning to pay the final price of life itself. The
rest of us may have to cut down on our economic
indulgence so that, out of our great productive
capacity, we can help our friends to match the of-
fensive power which the Soviet Union, out of its
economic poverty, supplies to its friends.

Threat to Liberty

I am confident that what has happened in Korea
will arouse the American people. We have never
flinched when a great principle was involved. We
are engaged, toclay, in the same battle which was
begun in 1776. Our own liberty cannot long be
safe in a world where despots can strike down lib-
erty, piecemeal, with fire and sword.

We have, today, the great opportunity to join
with the other fi-ee societies to prove that unpro-
voked aggression does not pay. If we sternly
teach that lesson in terms of the North Korean
adventure, then our own peace will be more secure
than ever before. But if the free world fails to

rally to the support of one of its stricken members,
then one by one others would be struck down and
military despotism, intoxicated by repeated vic-
tories, would lose all sense of restraint.

The United States has been ever bound, by faith
and by sacrifice, to the cause of righteousness.
Washington, under the shadow of whose monu-
ment we stand, committed our Nation in its youth-
ful dedication. Lincoln, whose shrine adjoins,
said that our Declaration of Independence en-
visioned liberty "not alone to the people of this
country but hojje for the world for all future time."
We have never sat idly by when despots attempted
by violence to snuff out that hope. Today, we face
a new test. I am confident that our response will
be worthy of our great heritage and that we shall
not be afraid to live sacrificially and even danger-
ously in a righteous cause.

U.N. Commission Reestablishes
Headquarters in Korea

[Released to the press by the

U. N. Department of Public Information July 1]

The United Nations Commission in Korea on
July 1 adopted, in Tokyo, the following resolution :

Whekeas information has been received from the Com-
mission's advance party, including the Chairman and the
Rapporteur, at present in Pusan (ITusan), Southern Ko-
rea, that satisfactory arrangements have now been made
for the return of the Commission to the Republic of Korea.

Recalijng the Commission's decision of 27 .June 1950
to ti'ansfer its headquarters temporarily from Seoul and
to hold itself ready to return to Korea immediately sub-
ject to developments,

Decides to reestablish its seat forthwith in the Republic
of Korea, and

Whereas facilities at present available in the Republic
of Korea are limited, the Commission further decides to
constitute the members of the Commission at present in
Tokyo as an Ad Hoc Committee for the purpose of en-
abling the Commission in the Republic of Korea to keep
in close touch with international developments and in
particular with the Security Council.

The Commission members, at present in Pusan,
Southern Korea, who, in accordance with this res-
olution now constitute the United Nations Com-
mission on Korea, are : the Commission Chairman
Dr. Yu-wan Liu (China), Henri Brionval
(France), A. B. Jameison (Australia), who is the
rapjDorteur of the Commission and C. Kondapi,
deputy representative of India. The represent-
atives of the remaining three member states of the
Commission — El Salvador, Philippines and Tur-
key— will remain in Tokyo to constitute the Ad
Hoc Committee.

Col. Alfred G. Katzin, personal representative
of Secretary-General Lie in Korea, arrived in that
country on July 7 ; and, on July 8, he presented his
credentials from the Secretary-General to the
Korean Government.

Department of State Bulletin

Point Four: An Investment in Peace

Address iy the President ^

It is hard for us to realize just how bad eco-
nomic conditions are for many peoples of the
world. Famine, disease, and poverty are the
scourge of vast areas of the globe. Hundreds of
millions of people in Asia, for example, have a
life expectancy of 30 years or less. Many of
these people live on inadequate diets, unable to
perform the tasks necessary to earn their daily
bread. Animal plagues and plant pests carry
away their crops and their livestock. Misuse of
natural resources exposes their land to flood or
drought.

Conditions such as these are the seedbed of po-
litical unrest and instability. They are a threat to
the security and growth of free institutions every-
where. It is in areas where these conditions exist
that communism makes its greatest inroads. The
people of these areas are eagerly seeking better liv-
ing conditions. The Communists are attempting
to turn the honest dissatisfaction of these people
with their present conditions into support for
Communist efforts to dominate their nations.

In addition to these attempts at persuasion, the
Communists in these countries use the weapon of
fear. They constantly threaten internal violence
and armed aggression.

The recent unprovoked invasion of the Republic
of Korea by Communist armies is an example of
the danger to which the underdeveloped areas par-
ticularly ai'e exposed.

It is essential that we do everything we can to
prevent such aggression and to enforce the prin-
ciples of the United Nations Charter. We must
and we shall give every possible assistance to
people who are determined to maintain their in-
dependence. We must counteract the Communist
weapon of fear.

But we must not be misled into thinking that
our only task is to create defenses against aggres-
sion. Our whole purpose in creating a strong

" Made at the annual convention of the American
Newspaper Guild, at Washington, D.C., on June 28 and
released to the press by the White House on the same
date.

defense is to permit us to carry on the great con-
structive tasks of peace. Behind the shield of a
strong defense, we must continue to work to bring
about better living conditions in the free nations.

Strengthening Undeveloped Nations

Particularly in the underdeveloped areas of the
world, we must work cooperatively with local gov-
ernments which are seeking to improve the welfare
of their people. We must help them to help them-
selves. We must aid them to make progress in
agriculture, in industry, in health, and in the edu-
cation of their children. Such progress will in-
crease their strength and their independence.

The growing strength of these countries is im-
portant to the defense of all free nations against
Communist aggression. It is important to the eco-
nomic progress of the free world. And these
things are good for us as well as good for them.

For these reasons, I recommended in my in-
augural address the program that has become
known as "Point 4." Tlie Congress has recently
authorized technical assistance to underdeveloped
areas under this program. This new law marks
Congressional indorsement of a practical and sen-
sible course of action that can have tremendous
benefits for the future of the world.

It is possible to make tremendous improvements
in underdeveloped areas by very simple and inex-
pensive means. Simple measures, such as the im-
provement of seed and animal stocks, the control
of insects, the dissemination of health information,
can make great changes almost overnight. This
does not require vast expenditures. It requires
only expert assistance offered to the people on a
genuinely cooperative basis. We have already
seen, on a relatively small scale, what can h&,
accomplished.

I am going to give you a factual — a reporter's —
account of a few technical assistance projects which
have raised living standards in the countries where
they were carried out. These are a preview of

Ju/y ?7, 1950

what a full-scale Point 4 Program can mean in
the future.

Successful Assistance Projects

In northern India, there is a very rich farming
area known as the Terai district. In recent years,
the malaria mosquito forced people to leave this
land. One hundred and four villages were aban-
doned. Even in the face of India's tragic food
shortage, no crops were planted in this rich soil.

India called on the World Health Organization
for help, and that organization sent a malaria con-
trol team which arrived in northern India in April
1949. In the face of great difficulties, this inter-
national group sprayed the area with DDT.

Today, a year later, no infected mosquito is to
be found in any village in the Terai district.
Local workers have been trained to continue the
spraying. Families who were refugees from ma-
laria, only 1 year ago, are back in their homes, and
their fields are green again.

This demonstrates how a simple program can
make tremedous improvements in a short time.

Let me give you another example of what Point
4 can mean; this one in Iran. This story con-
cerns not an international organization but one
of our American voluntary groups, the Near East
Foundation.

Four years ago, the Government of Iran asked
the Foundation to set up a demonstration project
in a group of 35 villages not far from the capital
at Tehran. The Foundation brought village lead-
ers to a series of training courses. It won their
confidence, and through these leaders, it began to
carry out agricultural and health improvements.
The Foundation met a water shortage by drilling
deep wells. It overcame water-borne diseases
with an inexpensive water filter. It sprayed
homes with DDT. It sprayed crops with insecti-
cides. It helped to organize schools in each of
the 35 villages.

Today, only 4 years later, the village people are
at work in new carpentry shops, vegetable gardens,
and orchards. And, most startling of all, the
yield of grain in this area has tripled.

The effects of the Near East Foundation's work
are spreading throughout Iran. This story will
be matched many times over, under the Point 4
Program.

IVIy next illustration is in the Eepublic of Li-
beria on the west coast of Africa. Here a United
States Government economic mission has been
working since 1944 — headed, incidentally, by a
former agricultural extension agent from Mis-
souri. This mission in Liberia has laid out roads,
and mapped the timber supply, and helped to open
up an iron deposit. Agricultural technicians have
helped to expand rice production for the local
market and the production of palm oil and cocoa
for export.

The effect of these steps has been remarkable.
In one village near Monrovia, the cash income of

the people, derived from selling rice, cocoa, and
palm oil, has increased from 5 dollars per pei-son
a year to 35 dollars, since the arrival of our eco-
nomic mission.

Our mission — which has only five Americans in
it — has worked in close cooperation with the Li-
berian Government. That Government already
has built three new agricultural experiment sta-
tions. This is remarkable progress, but it is only
the beginning of the economic development which
Liberia needs to become a prosperous member
of the family of nations.

Point 4: Equipment for Independence

These achievements I have cited are samples of
the kind of work that needs so badly to be done
in underdeveloped areas all over the world.

Under the expanded Point 4 Program, we can
greatl}' enlarge the scope of these activities. There
are tremendous opportunities to improve living
standards for wide areas of the globe. It may
prove altogether possible, for example, through
the activities of the Food and Agriculture Organi-
zation, to wipe out the scourge of rinderpest, the
fatal animal disease that is responsible for much
of the rural poverty of the Far East. The devel-
opment of hybrid rice seed, which the Food and
Agriculture Organization is now working on,
could conceivably increase rice production by 10
percent and improve the health and living condi-
tions in the Orient immeasurably. As an example
of what hybrid seed can do, our corn hybrids,
where they have been used in Italy, have increased
corn production by over 25 percent.

Aside from these basic improvements in agri-
culture and health, it is equally important, in
many areas, to build modern communication and
transportation systems and to establish local in-
dustries. Without these, the underdeveloped
areas cannot put their natural resources to use for
their own benefit and in profitable trade with the
rest of the world. Building roads, and railroads,
and factories will require considerable amounts of
public and private capital. To aid the flow of
American capital abroad, I have recommended
that the Congress provide for limited guaranties
to encourage greater investments overseas. I am
hopeful that this legislation will be enacted soon.

Point 4 is not now — and should not become — a
matter for partisan differences of opinion. How-
ever, some critics have attempted to ridicule Point
4 as a "do-good" measure; others have said it is
a waste of money. This is the most foolish kind
of shortsightedness. If we fail to carry out a
vigorous Point 4 Program we run the risk of
losing to communism, by default, hundreds of
millions of people who now look to us for help
in their struggle against hunger and despair.

Point 4 is an investment in a peaceful and pros-
perous world. It is a program which will bring
increasing results over the years. It will bring
about a chain reaction in economic development.

Department of Slate Bulletin

It will serve to create economic health where pov-
erty existed, and to equip the people of under-
developed areas to carry forward their economic
gains and preserve their independence.

A major share of this world campaign to im-
prove the livelihood of peoples will be carried out
under the United Nations.

U.N. Technical Assistance Program

In the United Nations Charter, each member
government pledged that it would promote so-
lutions of international economic, social, health,
and related problems.

At its last session, the General Assembly voted
unanimously to support a technical assistance
program for raising the standard of living in
underdeveloped areas.

Two weeks ago, the United Nations conducted
a Technical Assistance Conference to make plans
and to raise funds for this new program. Fifty-
four nations attended and 50 of them offered
contributions.

By the end of the Conference, more than 20
million dollars had been pledged. The United
States pledged 12 million dollars, subject, of
course, to the appropriation of the necessary funds
by the Congress. This was the largest single
contribution, but, in relation to their resources,

a number of other nations contributed more.

The outstanding characteristic of this Technical
Assistance Conference is the fact that it demon-
strated clearly the common desire of the peoples
of the world to work together for human advance-
ment. In a world dark with apprehension, the
Point 4 idea offers new hope.

All our citizens must play a part in making the
Point 4 Program a success. Our missionary
groups, our philanthropic and charitable agencies,
must continue the efforts they have been making
over the years for the improvement of conditions
in foreign lands. Our young people can find
careers in the pioneering woi'k of bringing tech-
nical assistance to these countries. Our unions
and our business organizations should enlarge
their foreign contacts and bring the benefits of
their experience to less developed countries. You
newspaper men and women can help Point 4 to
achieve its aims by telling its story to the Ameri-
can people and to the people of the world.

Our Point 4 Program and the work of the
United Nations are constructive ways to build the
kind of world where all nations can live in peace-
ful prosperity, dedicated to the purpose of cre-
ating better lives for their people. We support
this program because we seek a peaceful world,
and a free world, where all men can live as good
neighbors.

Foreign Relations Volumes Released

American Republics

The Department of State announced on June 17
that it released on that date Foreign Relations of
the United States, 1933, Volume IV, The Amer-
ican Republics. This volume contains the general
section on problems of a multilateral nature and
on relations with Argentina. Volume V, con-
taining papers on bilateral relations with the
other republics of the Western Hemisphere for
1933, will be published later. Volume II, dealing
with the British Commonwealth, Europe, the
Near East, and Africa, and Volume III, on the
Far East, have previously been published.

Efforts to restore peace and to maintain good
relations between the states of the Western Hem-
isphere are the chief subjects of this volume.
Leading jDlace is given to the Seventh Interna-
tional Conference of American States held at
Montevideo in December 1933. Other major chap-
ters of this volume record the combined efforts of
the League of Nations and of the United States
and other American governments to settle the
Chaco dispute between Bolivia and Paraguay and
the Leticia dispute between Colombia and Peru.

Copies of this volume (Ixxxiv, 812 pp.) may be
purchased from the Superintendent of Documents,
United States Government Printing Office, Wash-
ington 25, D.C., for $3.00 each.

Political and Economic Problems

The Department of State released on June 27
Foreig?!, Relations of the United States, 1933, Vol-
ume I, General. This volume contains more than
800 documents on international political and eco-
nomic problems, the multilateral aspects of which
cannot be listed under separate country headings.
Volumes II (British Commonwealth, Eui'ope,
Near East, and Africa), III (Far East), and IV,
dealing with diplomatic negotiations among the
American Republics and on relations with Argen-
tina, have previously been published. Volume V,
covering bilateral relations with the other Ameri-
can Republics, will be issued later.

Documents in volume I relate to the Conference
for Reduction and Limitation of Armaments, the
major political problem.

Other documents in this volume are devoted to
the London Economic Conference.

Negotiations ancillary to the London Economic
Conference, such as those relating to silver, copper,
and wheat, are separately treated; similarly are
those concerned with intergovernmental debts,
initiation of the reciprocal trade agreements pro-
gram, and the Foreign Bondholders Protective
Council.

Copies of this volume (xciii, 991 pp.) may be
purchased from the Superintendent of Documents,
for $3.75 each.

Ju/y U, 7950

New Challenges to American Diplomacy

hy George C. McGhee^ Assistant Secretary

for Near Eastern, South Asian, and African Affairs '

American policies grow out of the attitudes and
vital interests of the American people. The pur-
pose of our policies is, of course, to preserve and
advance those interests. Now, what are the most
important, the most vital of our American in-
terests in the year 1950 ?

First, you will agree that our fundamental
national interest is in peace and security. There-
fore, it is our policy to create and maintain a world
climate of peace; to eliminate the recurrent threat
of war.

Second, we have a vital interest in being able
to continue to enjoy, here in this country, our
own democratic way of life. Our policies are,
therefore, designed to strengthen, both here and
abroad, the rights and freedoms of the individual
which are basic to our system.

Third, we have an interest in economic progress,
both as an end in itself and as a means of achieving
our other objectives. Our policies must aim at
improving our own standard of living. They
must help to promote healthy economic conditions
generally throughout the world.

A New American interest

Now if we look back over the past half century,
we see that these vital interests in peace, freedom,
and economic progress have been continuously
threatened and periodically attacked. The ex-
perience of two world wars and a major depres-
sion has taught us that we have a fourth vital
interest. It has become clear that the peace, the
freedom, the economic progress — more than
these — the very survival of our country — depend
on a clear recognition and a vigorous pursuit of
that fourth national interest.

We have learned, in short, that we have a vital

' An address made before the Northwest Institute of
International Relations at Portland, Oreg., on June 22 and
relea.sed to the press on the same date.

interest in building an international community
based on principles which have become universally
accepted among civilized men but which have not
been universally practiced among nations. Such
an international community would permit the
application, between nations, of the same basic
principles that apply between individuals within
a democracy. Each country would be able to
make its own unique contribution to the world
community in the light of its own particular his-
tory, interests, and capabilities.

Such a community, we have come to believe,
offers the best and perhaps the only chance of
preserving and promoting our national interests.
I think it is accurate to say that the building of
this community constitutes the boldest challenge
to American leadership in the world today. To
the present generation of Americans, it offers a
tangible hope for a better world.

We have, moreover, already taken the lead in
creating such a community, and much progress
has been made. The Charter of the United
Nations embodies the principles, and the organi-
zation of the United Nations provides a founda-
tion, on which an international community can be
built. We have taken further action to strengthen
the foundation by means consistent with the
Charter, such as the Rio pact and the North At-
lantic Treaty.

I need not recount to you all that the free
nations of the world have done to organize and
strengthen themselves in the 5 short years since
the end of hostilities. I predict that men will
look back on this period as one of remarkable
progress toward this end. Indeed, I think we
tend to underestimate our achievements, to play
down what we have succeeded in doing, and to
highlight what we have not done.

Perhaps, on the other hand, we have not always
correctly estimated the difficulties that were in-
hei-ent in what we were trying to do. Perhaps,
we did not foresee, and could not have foreseen.

Department of State Bulletin

that some of these difficulties would become serious
obstacles to the building of an intei-national
community.

Obstacles To Building a World Community

One of those obstacles was a direct consequence
of the war. It was nothing less than the tem-
porary eclipse of Western Europe as a produc-
tive and jjrogressive force in the world. What
had been a great workshop, the largest single
aggregation of skilled people in the world, an
essential link in world trade, and the center of
far-flung empires, was a continent in chaos and
despair. Iklillions of its people were homeless,
jobless, hungry, and without hope at the war's
end.

With our help, these people are rebuilding their
lives, reorganizing their societies in a new and
more cooperative spirit. Today, Western Europe
is still a stronghold of freedom. The gi-atifying
response to the bold proposal of FrencTi Foreign
Minister Schuman for the integration of the basic
European industries, and to the proposed forma-
tion of the European Payments Union, shows that
its members are playing an active and creative
part in the building of our international
community.

The postwar collapse of Western Europe might
have delayed indefinitely and even prevented the
building of a strong community of free nations.
The fact that the trend has been reversed by a
combination of creative imagination, planning,
and sheer hard work, is, as General Marshall put
it, a "near miracle." The fact that the Western
European countries have not all rebuilt their
economies on strictly American lines seems to
trouble some people. To me, it demonstrates that
there is room for wide diversity of approach to
the problems of a free world. We Americans
should welcome that divei'sity, for it is a funda-
mental principle of our own way of life.

THREAT OF SOVIET IMPERIALISM

A second serious obstacle to the building of an
international community is, of course, the threat
of Soviet imperialism. We have watched the So-
viet design unfolding over the past 5 years. We
see it at work, today, in many parts of the world,
including the Far East, and we have been forced
inescapably to the conclusion that it is hostile to
the creation of a community of free nations. Its
facade of Marxist communism has been clearly re-
vealed as a mask for naked aggression.

The men in the Kremlin want to organize the
world, to be sure. But they want to organize it
on principles that civilized men have rejected and
fought during hundreds of years. The Soviet
principle is rule by absolute power, the power of
a small group of men over other men, the power
of one nation over other nations. The means of
achieving this power are the police state, subver-
sion, and concealed aggression.

July 17, 1950

894368—50 3

We believe that we have learned how to meet
that threat. We may not always be able to con-
tain it at every point, but we are confident that
we can not only contain but overcome it in time
by a great cooperative effort of free men. We
shall overcome it in the very act of building an
international community so strong, so free, and so
prosperous that all peojile will want to be a part
of it, even those whose governments are now
opposing it.

UNDERDEVELOPED AREAS

But even if Western Europe had not suffered a
temporary eclipse, even if the Soviet Union had
been a strong and willing partner, we would still
have had to deal with a third obstacle to the build-
ing of an international community. We would
still have been faced with the fact that large areas
of the world and hundreds of millions of people
are not yet in a position to make t'heir full con-
tribution to the economic and political life of an
international community.

I want to talk tonight about some of these areas,
in South Asia, Africa, and the Near East, which
constitute my special responsibility in the State
Department. Although these areas have rich ma-
terial resources and human potentialities, they are
included in the "underdeveloped" regions of the
world. This region contains almost 700 million
people. It includes the great subcontinent of India
and Pakistan, two nations which have only re-
cently joined the international community as fully
independent members. It includes the expanses of
the Near East, with states as old as Greece and
Iran and as young as Israel and Jordan. It in-
cludes also the continent of Africa, with its inde-
pendent peoples of Liberia and Ethiopia and its
numerous protectorates, colonies, and trust terri-
tories administered by European powers.

The people of this area practice five great re-
ligions: Islam, Christianity, Hinduism, Judaism,
and Buddhism. They speak more than 145 lan-
guages. Much of what we now know and value
in the realm of science, art, religion, and philos-
ophy, we drew from their early cultures.

How can one generalize about an area so vast?
If there is a common denominator among these
lands and their peoples it is the fact that all have
great potentialities which have not yet been real-
ized. Another common characteristic of these
people is their growing realization that they have
not participated fully in the world's progress and
their desire to make up for lost time.

Symbols of Progress

They have made substantial progress in terms
of political independence, representative govern-
ment, and personal freedom. In the period be-
tween the two world wars, Egypt, Saudi Arabia,
and Iraq gained full independence. More recently,
this area has given birth to nine other nations:

Syria, Lebanon, Israel, and Jordan in the Near
East; India, Pakistan, Ceylon, and Burma in
South Asia. Libya has been promised its inde-
pendence by 1952 and Italian Somaliland within
10 years.

Political independence, however, is only one
symbol of progress . It is not the only symbol.
These people are beginning also to associate prog-
ress with a chance to better their lot in the world.
They want better food, better housing, better
schools, better health, and they are willing to make
great efforts in order to obtain them. Although
this new urge creates great dislocations and on
occasion disappointments, it is on balance an en-
couraging development. It shows a growing
understanding on the part of these peoples of their
ability to help themselves. It shows a will to
change. It is a force which, if used for construc-
tive ends, can help achieve our objective of creating
a stable international community.

Now what do these distant events mean to Amer-
icans? Do they affect our vital interests, and, if
so, how should we shape our policies ? Whenever
these questions are asked of me, in one form or
another, I think of the tragic and ironic remark
that Neville Chamberlain made at the time of
Munich, when he said, in a broadcast, that Czecho-
slovakia was a far-away country of which we knew
little.

During the past year, I have visited almost all
of the countries under discussion. The places and
the peoples I have been describing may seem far
away to you, and we Americans may still know
little about them. But surely we know — or should
know by now — that there is no corner of the world
so remote that its fate cannot affect our own.

Community Problems on a Familiar Scale

But let us assume that our interest in these far-
off peoples still needs to be demonstrated. Most
of the states, I have mentioned, belong to the in-
ternational community of which we have been
speaking. Let us, by the convenient device of
oversimplification, reduce this community problem
to a familiar scale. Let us suppose that a com-
parable community problem existed in a city like
Portland.

Suppose you could apply the term underdevel-
oped to two-thirds of the people of that city, whicli
is about the proportion of peoples of underdevel-
oped areas to the population of the world as a
whole. That figure would mean that two-thirds
of the men, women, and children of Portland
are now living in dire poverty, hunger, disease,
and ignorance, amidst one-third that are enjoy-
ing all of the benefits of the good life in this
beautiful city.

In this imaginary Portland, it would mean that
among the citizens you would have an annual death
rate of 28 per thousand, compared with 10 for the
more favored citizens, although the birth rate
would be 44 per thousand, rather than 26. Infant

mortality would be 153 per thousand live births,
instead of 25. Deaths from tuberculosis might
be as high as 283 per hundred thousand, instead
of 33. These are figures from a representative
part of the underdeveloped area.

More than eight out of ten adults in this group
could not read or write. In other words, they
would have an illiteracy rate of 80 percent instead
of 3 percent. Their per capita income would be
somewhere between 5 and 85 dollars a year, instead
of the average American figure of 1,410 dollare.
Suppose that the life expectancy of this two-thirds
of Portland's population, instead of C3 yeai-s, were
about 30 years ; that, in other words, these particu-
lar citizens of Portland could expect to die when
the rest of your citizens were approaching the
most productive and useful years of their lives.

If you can imagine such a situation, I think you
will agree that it would create a grave problem
for the whole imaginary community of Portland.
Indeed, the two-thirds would scarcely be convinced
that the community as organized offered them
adequqate oiDportunities. They would have little
incentive to support the community but would seek
to change it or — failing that- — to overthrow it by
force. They would form an easy foil for trouble-
makei-s and agitators. The privileged one-third
would, indeed, have an uneasy and insecure
existence.

I have not talked about the underdevelo])ed
lands of South Asia, Africa, and the Near East
in terms of the Soviet threat, and I shall not do
so. Communism in these particular areas is not
an immediate danger. The problem in these areas
is not to put out fires, since the sparks of com-
munism have not found adequate fuel there. But
comnuuiism may well become a threat if the grow-
ing aspirations of these peoples are frustrated.
The problem is to help the peoples of these areas
build a house that will be fireproof. And when
we think of the time required for the building, we
think in terms not of months or years but of
decades.

What should our policies be toward these un-
derdeveloped peoples'? What type of assistance
can we render them that is within our means and
will be effective in meeting their particular
problems ?

Policies Toward Asia, Africa, and Near East

First, we must keep in mind that we are deal-
ing with proud and independent peoples. In
many instances, they are the direct inheritors of
distinguished civilizations that provided the basis
for our own more recent civilization. Their de-
velopment will not take place along the same lines
as ours. They must develop in their own way, and
their way— for them— can be just as right as is
our way— for us. The goals toward which they
strive, although not always identical with ours, can
assure them the same fullness of life and the

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

same opportunities to make a contribution to the
world eomniunity as does ours.

In any event, they intend to shape tlieir own
future. Fortunately, that future is, today, in the
hands of some ^I'^i^t leaders, with whom we are
working on a basis of mutual understanding and
respect. Several of these leaders have only re-
cently visited the United States at our invitation.
We hope, increasinfjly, to convince them that our
attitude toward them is friendly and disinter-
ested: that we have no desire to dominate them,
to enlist them in any "bloc" in pursuit of our
own interests, or to force our economic system or
ideologies upon them.

We must also not think of assistance as being,
exclusively, in terms of financial aid. Indeed, I
am afraid that we have, as a result of the highly
successful European Recovery Program, which
was basically financial in nature, come to attach
too much importance to financial assistance and
too much confidence in its ability to meet all prob-
lems. There are in the underdeveloped areas too
many other limiting factors, too many other basic
problems to be overcome to permit the useful ex-
penditure of large amounts of capital in a short
time, even if such funds existed in inexhaustible
supply, which they do not. Dreams of a Ten-
nessee Valley Authority for the Tigris-Euphrates
Valley must await the achievement of less am-
bitious beginnings with smaller dams and works.

But beginnings must be made. Our efforts must
begin where the people of the underdeveloped
areas now are. We must help them with all the
various means at our disposal — financial, tech-
nical, administrative, and moral assistance,
to meet their basic problems in their way, to in-
crease production of food, to pi'ovide better
houses, better roads, schools, health, and public
administration.

We know that we cannot oifer them our own
standards. We cannot, even within the city of
Portland, guarantee absolute uniformity of liv-
ing standards even though there is an opportunity
for all people. We can, however, demonstrate our
desire to assist by means of tangible evidence of
progress. We can give these peoples hope which
will provide the incentive to seek their future in
continued cooperation with us and the other free
nations of the world, within the framework of the
United Nations.

What have we done so far? Is it enough?

FORMS OF U.S. ASSISTANCE

Apart from the magnificent work which our
private organizations have carried on in these
areas for many years, American aid has thus far
been modest. It has taken a number of forms, in
response to many diverse situations.

We have extended loans, through the Export-
Import Bank, for development projects in Greece,
Turkey, Egypt, Israel, Saudi Arabia, Afghanis-
tan, Ethiopia, and Liberia. We have supported

loans to India and Iraq by the International Bank
for Eeconstruction and Development. The Euro-
pean Recovery Program has enabled us to con-
tribute, directly, to economic rehabilitation and
development in Greece and Turkey and to eco-
nomic development in the overseas territories of
European nations in Africa; In Greece and
Turkey, and now Iran, we have met special
emergencies with a highly successful program of
military aid, under the Mutual Defense Assistance
Program.

We have, as you know, been carrying on a pro-
gram for the exchange of teachers, students, and
technicians of various kinds. We can now pro-
vide scholarships under Fulbright agreements
with Greece, India, Burma, Egypt, Iran, and
Turkey. We set great store by these exchange
programs. We hope to extend them considerably.

Congress has now authorized the Point 4 Pro-
gram of technical assistance, and we hope that
approjiriation will soon be made to perinit that
vital program to get under way. The area under
discussion, which includes a large portion of the
underdeveloped part of the world, was very much
in Pi'esident Truman's mind when he first an-
nounced his program of technical assistance.

UNITED NATIONS AID

From now on, a sizable part of our technical
assistance will go forward through the United
Nations and its specialized agencies. I want to
mention just one of these projects which is now
being put into operation. That is a United Na-
tions program of relief and works projects for the
Arab refugees from Palestine, for which the Con-
gress has recently authorized an American con-
tribution of about 27 million dollars.

This project grew out of a United Nations Eco-
nomic Survey Mission headed by Gordon Clapp,
Chairman of the Board of the Tennessee Valley
Authority. I can give you no better statement of
our policy toward the underdeveloped areas than
by quoting from his report.

Higher living standards [says the Introduction to this
report] cannot be bestowed by one upon another like
a gift. An improved economy does not come in a neat
package sold or given away in the market place. A higher
standard of living must grow out of the application of
human skill and ingenuity to the physical resources of
a country or region.

The highly developed nations of the world did not make
their way by wishing. By work and risk they forced
the earth, the soil, the forests and the rivers to yield
them riches. They pooled their energy and resources by
taxation and mutual enterprise to discover new ways of
doing tilings. They worked, they invented, they edu-
cated and trained their children, and they invested in
their national and in their private enterprises. This they
must continue so to do, if they are to maintain the standard
of living they have achieved.

There is no substitute for the application of work and
local enterprise to each country's own resources. Help

July 17, 1950

to those who have the will to help themselves should be
the primary policy guiding and restraining the desire
of the more developed areas of the world to help the less
developed lands.

This, I believe, is both an accurate and a realistic
statement of our policies toward the peoples of
the underdeveloped areas of the world. Our ap-
proach to these jjeople, and it is a characteristically
American approach, is on the level of partnership.
We know that human progress cannot be bestowed ;
that it must grow out of cooperative effort ; out of
mutual respect. We know also that it can only
be made to grow among those who have the will
to help themselves.

Among the many who have that will and who
look to us for cooperation, there is a natural im-
patience to get on with the job, a tendency to feel
that the United States is not doing enough to as-
sist the underdeveloped areas to play their part
in the building of a community of free nations.
Indeed, we must do so, since it is in our own vital
interests to achieve this objective. We must make
certain that we leave nothing undone that is within
our capability to assure that other peoples are con-
vinced that their own aspirations can best be
served within the community of free nations.
Only by so doing can we assure the realization of
our own aspirations.

Support for an Expanded Information and Education Program

Statement hy Secretary Acheson ^

I welcome warmly the action of Senator Benton
and the 12 Senators ^ associated with him in intro-
ducing Senate Resolution 243, calling for "a
greatly expanded program of information and ed-
ucation among all the peoples of the world to the
full extent that they can be reached." The spon-
sors of this resolution have accurately diagnosed
one of the elements not only vital but, in fact, indis-
pensable to the conduct of American foreign rela-
tions today. We must make the truth known to
the peoples of the world. This is a task that calls
for greatly expanded and intensified efforts.

Truth in the world today is a political force,
Nothing makes plainer the power of this force, I
think, than the Communist fear of it. Behind
the Iron Curtain, it has been said, "Truth is trea-
son." We are familiar with the immense machin-
ery of the police states for insuring that the words
and acts of their citizens conform slavishly to the
doctrines advocated publicly by their masters.
That machinery has also, as one of its primary
tasks, to exclude the truth, to suppress facts. Some
of tliese facts seem to us curiously harmless, but
once you begin to exclude the truth, to found your
state on deliberately preserved ignorance and de-
liberately disseminated falsehood, even very simple
facts have a potentially explosive force.

' Made before a subcommittee of the Senate Committee
on Foreign Relations on S. R. 243 on July 5 and released to
the press on the same date.

' Submitted by Senator Benton on March 22 for himself
and Senators Douglas, Flanders, Fulbright, Graham. Hen-
drickson, Lehman, McMahon, Morse, Mundt, Smith
(Maine), Sparkman, and Tobey.

100

Communist States Fear Truth

The Communist states have not only shown their
fear of truth by elaborate internal controls and
policing. They have set up at their borders bars
against free communication and free movement of
men, books, ideas — against all the carriers of truth
and information. They have pursued a policy of
deliberate self-isolation. They are afraid to let
their citizens look out, and they are afraid to let
others look in. The recent demands that the
United States close its information services in Ru-
mania and Czechoslovakia are witnesses to the
power of truth as a political force. So is the Soviet
jamming of our radio broadcasts.

If totalitarian regimes cannot flourish where the
truth is fully available, free and democratic coun-
tries cannot flourish unless their citizens do have
access to the truth. The freedom of free nations
grows out of the minds of its citizens. Free men
make up their own minds, on the basis of free
access to the truth, to the facts.

The growth of an international community of
free and democratic nations depends upon the
ready and free flow of facts, ideas, and people.
Only this free flow of facts, ideas, and people can
make clear the common bonds and interests of na-
tions and allow them to settle their differences
peaceably and justly.

International Communist propaganda has been
engaged in a great campaign of falsification, dis-
tortion, suppression, and deception. We have had
recently in Korea an illustration of the cruel de-
ception being practiced by Communist propaganda
on the universally felt desire for peace. Just a

Department of State Bulletin

few weeks before Cominmiist armed forces
launched tlieir carefully planned attack across the
38tli parallel, over half the population of North
Korea was reported to have signed Communist-
circulated petitions for peace. The cynical ag-
gression of communism in Korea, and the false-
hoods that have preceded and accompanied it,
make inescapably clear the unportance of the ob-
jectives in this proposed resolution.

This country has been a special target of the
Communist campaign of falsehood and abuse.
We have not been selected as a target simply be-
cause the Communists do not love us. The Com-
munist effort to misrepresent and discredit the
aims and nature of American life, and the aims
and nature of American foreign policy, has pri-
marily a great strategic value in the furtherance
of Communist world objectives. This Commu-
nist campaign, therefore, jeopardizes the security
of the United States and is a threat to the security
of the free world.

Objectives of Communist Campaign

One of the strategic objectives of this Commu-
nist campaign is to divide the free world, whose
unity is essential to its strength and essential to
the elimination of Communist expansion.

Another is to confuse the world about the nature
of democratic aspirations and ideals and to weaken
the moral force and attraction of the free world.

Another is to spread deception about the free
world's strength and resources, of every kind, and,
thus, to weaken the free world's confidence in itself.

Another is to sow doubts regarding the free
world's firmness of purpose, its determination to
fulfill the international obligations it has accepted
in the cause of freedom, and, thus, to produce ir-
resolution, fear, and uncertainty.

So far as Communist efforts to foster falsehood
about the United States are successful, they serve
these Communist designs. They help to drive
wedges between the United States and other coun-
tries, to create hesitancy, and to prevent clear,
effective, imified resistance against Communist
aims.

We must, therefore, make unmistakable the
truth about the United States and the other free
nations. In doing this, we will make plain the
essential bond of common beliefs, and common in-
terests that underlie differences in national cus-
toms and circumstances. We must make plain the
facts of international relationships today, so that
every man has an opportunity to make a true judg-
ment on the immense issues and decisions that con-
front him. We must make plain the difference
between Communist pretensions and Communist
performance.

The President, in his address before the Ameri-
can Society of Newspaper Editors on April 20,^
said,

Our task is to present the truth to the millions of people

wlio are uninformed or uiisiuformed or unconvinced. Our
task is to reach them in their daily lives, as they work
and learn. We must be alert, ingenious, and diligent in
reaching peoples of other countries, whatever their edu-
cational and cultural backgrounds may be. Our task is
to show them that freedom is the way to economic and
social advancement, the way to political independence, the
way to strength, happiness, and peace.

. . . We must pool our efforts with those of the other
free peoples in a sustained, intensified program to promote
the cause of freedom against the propaganda of slavery.
We must make ourselves heard round the world in a
great campaign of truth.

The President directed me at that time "to plan
a strengthened and more effective national effort
to use the great power of truth in working for
peace." In accordance with that directive, the
Department of State has submitted to the Presi-
dent a plan for a broader and stronger program of
information and education designed to carry out "a
great campaign of truth," in the interest of a free
and peaceful world. That plan is presently being
considered by the President. It is dedicated to the
achievement of the principles and purposes so
clearly set forth in the proposed resolution.

Necessity for a Truth Campaign

The task of telling the truth, as the President
has emphasized, is not "separate and distinct from
other elements of our foreign policy. It is a
necessary part of all we are doing to build a peace-
ful world." It is essential to the success of our
foreign policy that the military, political, and
economic measures we are taking be accompanied
by an effective information program. The Mar-
shall Plan, Point 4, military aid must be seen fully
and truthfully in the widest context of the United
States' hopes and aspirations. The facts about
what we do, the facts about why we do it, the facts
about the way we do it, are integral parts of what
we do in foreign affairs.

We must remember in these efforts that the truth
is a hard master.

We must always be on our guard against per-
mitting what we say to outrun what we do. We
must recognize that the more fully our principles
are understood, the more closely our practice will
be inspected. Our performance must not lag be-
hind our principles. We must remember, too, that
jieoples speaking to peoples involves peoples lis-
tening to peoples. We must remember that the
truth cannot be monopolized.

In the struggle for men's minds and men's al-
legiances, the free nations have great advantages.
The truth is on their side. In addition, the free
nations have developed to a high degree as in-
tegral parts of their free institutions, technical
resources and skills for discovering the truth and

' For a complete text of President's address, see Bttlle-
TiN of May 1, 1950, p. 669.

July 17, 7950

101

for telling the truth. The democratic concept has
depended on the ability of every man to learn the
truth and to act as an individual on the basis of it.
Just as totalitarian states by their nature are
equi^Dped to suppress the truth, so the free nations
are equipped by their nature to discover and dis-
seminate it. These great resources, implicit in
democratic life, must be utilized to the fullest.
The emphasis placed in the sixth point of Senate
Resolution 243 on the efforts of private American
citizens seems to me to recognize this essential
principle, and I welcome particularly this em-
phasis on private participation. Governments can
do only a very small part of the task. It is the
individual citizens, the private organizations, the
independent groups, who make the major contribu-
tion to insuring that the truth is known.

There has never been a time when men every-
where who value freedom had a greater need to
know the truth.

Senate Resolution 243

Whekeas the struggle now raging between freedom and
communism is a contest for the minds and loyalties of
men ; and

Whekeas in such a struggle force and the threat of
force do not change men's minds or win their loyalties ;
and

Whereas the real methods of Communist aggression
are incessant and skillful propaganda designed to prepare
the way for political Infiltration, for sabotage, and for
the consolidation of power by suppression and terror ; and

Whereas these tactics have poisoned and continue to
poison the minds of hundreds of millions throughout the
world; and

Whereas we have learned that such Communist meth-
ods cannot be beaten back by arms and dollars alone but
require world-wide offensive in behalf of the ideas which
express our democratic principles and aspirations : There-
fore be it

Resolved, That the United States should initiate and
vigorously prosecute a greatly expanded program of in-
formation and education among all the peoples of the
world to the full extent that they can be reached — with a
view to closing the mental gulf that separates the United

States from other peoples and that now blockades the
universal hope for freedom and peace ; be it further

Resolved, That it is the sense of the Senate that any
such program should encompass, among other things —

(1) maintenance, through the United Nations and
through our own diplomacy, of a steady and steadily in-
creasing pressure in behalf of world-wide freedom of
information ;

(2) acceleration of the work of the United Nations
Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization to the
point where, with effective leadership, it has a chance to
make a significant, perhaps decisive, contribution to
peace ;

(3) development of the activities of the Offices of
International Information and Educational Exchange in
the Department of State, in the following ways among
many others —

(a) preparation and execution of a comprehensive
world-wide program to exhibit documentary and educa-
tional motion pictures designed to explain the democratic
principles and ideals which underlie our foreign policy ;

(b) significant and immediate expansion of our
program for bringing foreign students to the United
States ;

(c) creation of a world broadcasting network
capable of broadcasting on long wave, short wave, or
medium wave, with an ultimate goal of reaching virtually
every radio set in the world ;

(d) use of any and all possible means to reach
people who are shut off from the free world by censorship
and suppression ;

(4) promotion of democratic education abroad, not-
ably in the occupied areas of Germany and Japan ;

(5) convening of a conference of non-Communist na-
tions now conducting international information programs,
with a view to reaching a better understanding on com-
mon themes and on greatly increasing the effectiveness of
the projection of such themes ;

(6) encouragement of the establishment of a nongov-
ernmental agency to help inspire and guide the efforts of
the millions of private American citizens who might use
their talents and resources and contacts overseas in fur-
therance of the programs and objectives of this resolution,
and be it further

Resolved, That it is the sense of the Senate that the in-
ternational propagation of the democratic creed be made
an instrument of supreme national policy — by the develop-
ment of a Marshall plan in the field of ideas.

102

Department of State Bulletin

Forging a Free World With a Truth Campaign

hy Edward W. Barrett

Assistant Secretary for Public Affairs '

Since the early 1940's, it has been apparent to the
American people that a new era had arrived in
world affairs — the era of the interdependence of
nations, making international cooperation an im-
perative.

In order to defeat the Axis Powers in World
War II, we discovered that we had to pool our
physical and moral resources with those of our
Allies and organize a high command to direct our
collective effort. And by reaching the minds of
the enemy peoples, we weakened their resolution
and brought peace nearer.

Along with other free nations, we realized while
the fighting was still going on that voluntary
collaboration would also be required to deal with
the problems of the postwar world. We agreed
that intensive information activities would be
needed to mobilize the support of the peoples of
the world in a determined effort to rebuild shat-
tered economies, to extend human freedoms, and
to avert a recurrence of war. We joined in the
establishment of the United Nations, only to see
the United Nations — despite its great accomplish-
ments— deprived of the power to safeguard world
peace by tlie peculiar tactics of the Soviet Union.
We found that the struggle between tyranny and
freedom was still going on. The only difference
was that the enemies of freedom were using not
guns but threats of war, political and economic
pressures on weaker countries, and the subversive
activities of fifth columnists in every land, in-
cluding our own.

I doubt very much whether the United States
has ever faced a more difficult and perilous world
situation than now, even allowing for the events
in recent weeks which have signalized a forward
leap in the collective strength of the free nations
at the expense of Soviet imperialist ambitions.

' An address made at Bard College, Annandale-on-Hud-
son, N.y., on June 17 and released to the press on the same
date.

The world situation is still precarious. This is no
time to be baselessly undermining public confi-
dence in those to whom the all-important conduct
of our foreign policy is entrusted.

But, unfortunately, we still have with us those
who are perfectly willing to undermine confidence
in the United States at home and abroad for cheap
political reasons, who do not hesitate to make loose
charges first and search for evidence later, who
resort to reckless smear tactics. However, it is
heartening to know that at Washington there are
many, many more men of both parties who have
submerged political rivalries in the field of foreign
affairs — men, for example, like Herbert Lehman
and John Foster Dulles, to cite but two from this
State. Such men are working devotedly, and
without headlines, to strengthen their Govern-
ment in the international field, to help their Gov-
ernment in the difficult job of eliminating any
possible security risks, and to help devise ever
stronger international policies for their Govern-
ment. We should bow to such fine decent public
servants who realize there is a limit to politics.
It is because of them that the damage done by
selfish irresponsibles is now being repaired. The
passage by the Congress of the full foreign aid
bill while Secretary Acheson was in Europe, for
the recent London meetings, gave an impressive
demonstration that a unified Am'^rica is still back-
ing up a consistent line of policy. The strong pleas
by leaders of both of our major political parties
for increased two-party collaboration in the mak-
ing and the carrying out of our policy has also
had a salutary effect at home and abroad. The
signs point clearly now to a renewed, indeed inten-
sified, bipartisan policy, enabling us to cooperate
with our friends abroad to even better effect.

Building a Community of Free Nations

Certainly there is no mistaking either the need
for the closer association of the Atlantic pact na-

Jo/y J 7, J 950

103

tions or the real progress that is being made in
that direction. The agreements reached by the
North Atlantic Treaty Council at London show
that the powerful democracies of this Atlantic area
are forging a true community of free nations.
Through the increasing coordination of their mili-
tary, moral, economic, and political strength, they
are reducing the likelihood of war and bringing
nearer the day when at least the majority of the
world's peoples can realize the goals of the United
Nations Charter.

So far as it is within our power to prevent them,
there are two things that we must not allow to
occur — that is, for the industrial complex of West-
ern Europe to fall into the grip of the Soviet Union
or for any more of the potentially great nations of
Asia and the Far East to suffer that fate. If either
happened, our hopes for a free world society would
be set back. If both happened, so far as we were
concerned, the ballgame would be oyer.

Those two eventualities are precisely what the
Soviet Union is aiming for, and precisely what we
and our friends are determined shall not take
place.

There is no need for me to review now the vig-
orous actions which we are taking in concert with
the nations of Western Europe to shatter the So-
viet ambitions. AVe believe we can make Soviet
aggression too hazardous to be risked. We seek
to render Soviet subversion ineffective by building
up economic, social, and political stability.

In the Far East and Asia, as you know, we have
respected and supported movements toward na-
tional independence. We encourage emerging new
nations to prove to themselves that only democ-
racy— in the words of Nehru — can "deliver the
goods, materially and spiritually," and by direct
aid, support their efforts toward advancement.
Now that Cliina has fallen under the control of
Moscow, an already delicate political situation has
worsened. We must act wisely and firmly in help-
ing to prevent the further spread of communism
among the Asian millions. As a newcomer in gov-
ernment, I feel we are doing so.

In Europe, in Asia, and the Far East, in other
world areas, we must continue to act positively
wherever freedom is in danger for our own free-
dom is at stake.

Truth as a Tool f r Freedom

I am especially concerned with the positive ac-
tion of supplying truth and promoting mutual un-
derstanding. My job, in the State Department,
is to see that we do not neglect the vitally impor-
tant factor of world public opinion in our interna-
tional relations. The description of 1;he so-called
"cold war" as a contest to win the minds of men
has been worked to death, but it remains a decisive
guidepost for shaping our policies and actions.

In his recent address to the American Society of
] .ewspaper Editors, President Truman cut to the
] eart of the matter. He said:

The cause of freedom is being challenged throughout the
world today by the forces of imperialist communism. . . .
Deceit, distortion, and lies are systematically used by them
as a matter of deliberate policy. . . .

We cannot run the risk that nations may be lost to the
cause of freedom because their people do not know the
facts.

It is hard for me to conceive that anyone in this
day could question the need for us to reach into
every nation in the world with a barrage of truth-
ful information about the kind of people we are,
how we really live, and what our intentions are
toward other peoples. It is surely self-evident
tliat we must make the citizens of other free na-
tions understand that we have a real community of
interests and that we must pull together if we
are to have a world in which a decent kind of life
is possible.

It may sound dry as dust to us, but the clear
explanation of United States foreign policy and
the views of our leading statesmen and of the
American people on the world situation are of the
liveliest interest to people abroad. The more we
reach people abroad with that kind of factual in-
formation, the better our prospects of pulling to-
gether in the common cause of freedorn. We are
building mutual trust and understanding on the
only basis on which they can be built — that of
knowledge of the facts as they exist. Any man
who really knows what is going on is a long way
toward knowing what to do about it.

The power of the simple, unadulterated truth is
precisely our answer to the distortions of Com-
mimist propaganda, and I, for one, am confident
that if we hit with the truth hard enough, long
enough, and on a sufficient scale — and that means
no less than a world-wide scale — we can make the
Communist propaganda start backfiring not only
outside the Iron Curtain but inside it as well. I
do not want to make it sound easy ; it is not. It is
a terrific and arduous job, but it is one that we
must get done — through both public and private
cliannels.

I believe that we must intensify greatly our ef-
forts along these lines. In the Department of
State, we are now completing a thorough study
and analysis of the complete range of our infor-
mational, educational, and cultural exchange pro-
grams to appraise the results we are getting and
to discover ways of getting better results. We
are very eager to measure up to what the Presi-
dent recently described as the need for a great
new "campaign of truth."

Meanwhile, we have encouraging evidence that
we are accomj^lishing something very wortliwhile
in what we are now doing through the world-wide
broadcasts of the Voice of America, the daily
Morse code transmission of official texts and in-
formation to missions abroad for public release,
tlie showing of documentary films and photo-
graphic displays, the services of libraries and in-
formation centers open to the general public, the
legwork of public affairs and information and

104

Department of State BuUefin

cultural officers of the Foreign Service, and our
practice of bringing students, teachers, laborers,
and jirofessional people to the United States so
and they can go back home with first-hand infor-
mation about American democracy.

Very briefly, I would like to give 3'ou a few
highlights which will suggest the promise this
type of activity offers.

The radio Voice of America is now operating on
a 24-hour schedule, with a total of 70 daily pro-
gi-ams in 24 languages. About 30,000 words are
beamed out daily in news reports, commentaries
and news analyses, and features on American life.
It is impossible to be accurate about how many
people we are reaching with this international
radio network, but we estimate our potential listen-
ing audience at 300 million people. We do have
one solid basis of measurement — letters from
listeners. In 1949, excluding the Iron Curtain
countries, the Voice received from abroad around
10,000 letters a month. The number has now in-
creased to a monthly rate of 25,00. I think that is
impressive evidence of the impact which the Voice
is making.

A German recently wrote the Voice in colorful
English as follows:

Having just returned from Russian captivity, I wish
to inform you tliat I have experienced in Russia that your
transmissions in Russian language are paid attention to
and that the Russians lUje very much to listen in for them.

Even the officials of the Slinistry of National Security
occupied in our camps sent off the prisoners of war whom
they were trying at 9 o'cloclv in order to hear the Voice of
America. Next day the party men of course assured one
another that it was a big twaddle what they had told on
the Voice of America — but they heard it every one !

From many sources, we are able to piece together
bits of information which add up to this: That
we are still reaching a hard core — a substantial
core — of listeners in the Soviet Union. There are
many Russian citizens whose experience in slave
labor camps and the like have left them with little
fondness for the Communist dictatorship. We
are reaching them with the truth about what is
going on in the outside world, and I think it is
most unlikely that what they are learning stops
with them. They are surely passing it on through
the grapevine to be found in any land smothered
by oppression and denied access to news of the
outside world. There is always a great hunger
for news where it has been arbitrarily cut off. This
is our opportunity to keep alive, even in Russia,
the possibility of ultimate cooperation between
our people and a free Russian people. Meanwhile,
the more we reach the Russian people with honest
news, the more we force the Russian dictators to
beware of an explosion within if they step too far
in their adventures abroad.

Soviet Reaction

Probably the best measure of the impact of the
Voice is the case of jitters it seems to have instilled

in the men in the Kremlin. As you know, the
wholesale Russian jamming operation which began
April 24, 1949, is still going on 24 hours a day. In
devoting several hundred Soviet transmitters to
this jamming operation, the Soviet Government
is spending more money to keep our broadcasts
out than we are spending on our entire world-wide
Voice operations. You know, too, that we have
long had engineers devising methods of breaking
through the jamming. That costs money, and the
Congress voted it — 11.5 million dollars. We are
now getting through the jamming on a scale which
is still less than can satisfy us but is enough to
keep the Soviet rulers acutely uncomfortable. We
mean to make them more so. I can now announce
that, as a result of recent frantic Russian attempts
to shut us out of Czechoslovakia, we are today
doubling our Voice of America output in the Czech
and Slovak languages. We shall not let them shut
out the truth as long as we can help it. The more
we can keep the Russian bear busy scratching his
own fleas, the less likely he is to molest the rest of
the world.

The jamming of the Voice is by no means the
only evidence of the fear of all the Iron Curtain
governments of having their peoples reached by
truthful information. Hungary, Bulgaria, Czech-
oslovakia, and Communist China have adopted
oppressive tactics to prevent people from listening
to our broadcasts, such as heavy fines, imprison-
ment, and confiscation of the radios of those caught
listening. For an extreme example, on April 22,
1950, a Hungarian court at Gyor sentenced Agos-
ton Rohring, Jr., t6 death on charges of hiding
arms and of listening — in the words of the court
"to the United States imperialistic radio which
incites to war." Nevertheless, a Hungarian-born
United States citizen, who returned March 27
from a visit in Hungary, said he did not speak with
anyone who did not eagerly await the daily VOA
broadcast, despite the severe punislunent they
would face if detected.

We are now witnessing a systematic campaign
to black-out our information activities entirely in
the Iron Curtain countries. Most of our informa-
tion centers have been shut down in the Iron Cur-
tain countries or so cramped by Governmental
edicts as to render them practically useless. The
Iron Curtain is seeking daily to increase the isola-
tion of the peoples within from any and all healthy
contacts with the outer world. This development
points all the more emphatically to the importance
of the Voice broadcasts and the value of increasing
its power. Foy Kohler, who returned last year
from long duty in Moscow to head up the Voice,
said recently that he would like to see an expanded
Voice of America which could reach loud and clear
throughout the world in all languages. I go along
with him in that, and I agree that it would be
worth to us every cent it would cost. That cost,
incidentallj^, would amount annually to about the
cost of 6 minutes of the kind of shooting war which
we financed in World War II.

July 17, 7950

105

other Measures of Strength

I would like to highlight another way in which
we are cultivating understanding between our-
selves and other peoples and correcting miscon-
ceptions about the American people and our way
of life which are circulated abroad. I refer to our
educational exchange and exchange of persons pro-
grams, under which we bring to this country a
great number of foreign teachers, officials, editors,
industrialists, labor leaders, students, and people
from other walks of life. We welcome every op-
portunity to enable these visitors to move freely
among us, to work and study with us, to see the bad
with the good, and then go back to their own lands
to i-eport on what they have seen and learned. I
would like to see this program expanded until we
had a stream of visitors from every country in the
world. As an illustration of the importance of
this activity, there are now 5,000 Chinese students
studying in American schools and universities and
learning about us while living among us. Most of
them will probably go back to China, where they
can potentially serve as a potent corrective to the
attacks now being made on us by the Communist
regime. I ask you to ask yourselves only one
question : What would we not give to have an equal
number of Soviet students live among us and then
go back to their own land to report on what they
had seen ?

The simple, unadulterated truth that we are

trying to get across to the citizens of other coun-
tries is that the United States is pursuing a gen-
uine policy of peace. We are spending billions
and sending thousands of our ablest people abroad
to assist other nations in solving their difficulties,
so that they may join their growing strength with
ours in creating a world free of war, free of polit-
ical oppression, and free of economic or any other
foi'm of human slavery. As a result of what we
and other free nations are accomplishing together,
we are beginning to see new horizons in interna-
tional understanding, the light of the day in which
the peoples of the world will have what they
want — a world in which the diversity of human
skills and the force of human energies can be con-
centrated on lifting standards of living, materially
and spiritually, throughout civilization.

I think that there is no higher purpose to which
you could give your support. As American citi-
zens, you have the opportunity to make your in-
fluence felt by supporting these ultimate aims of
American policy. We cannot remind ourselves
too often that the Voice of America is the collec-
tive voice of this nation. You are a part of that
voice.

We can eventually forge a world of decency, of
freedom, and of peace if we push ahead, if we
boldly use the great weapons of economics and
truth at our command — and if we keep our heads
and use our heads.

Analysis of Senator McCarthy's Public Statements

MILWAUKEE SPEECH

The Deportment of State on June 17 made public^ the
following analysis of some of the factual inaccuracies in
the speech delivered hy Senator McCarthy at Milirnukee,
Wisconsin, to the Reputjlican State Convention of 'Wiscon-
sin on June 9, 1950.

Several misstatements which Senator McCarthy
made at Milwaukee, he has repeated since in his
speech of June 15 at New London, Connecticut, to
the convention of the National Editorial Associa-
tion. In particular, he repeated at New London
the first misstatement dealt with here — Senator
McCarthy's perversion of the record of Secretary
Acheson's position in the matter of the loan to
Poland. The actual record of the Senate Commit-
tee which explored this matter is set forth in this
release. He has also since repeated his asser-
tions— which are here once again shown false —
about United States policy with regard to Poland
and China and about State Department files.

' Department of State press release 648.
106

1. SENATOR McCarthy said: Prom October 1945,
to March of 1947, Acheson's law firm was retained by
the Communist government of Poland to obtain a 90 mil-
lion-dollar loan from the United States. The loan was
put through and Acheson's firm received a fee of over 50
thousand dollars, according to Acheson's sworn testimony.
During this time, Acheson was Assistant Secretary. . . .
He admitted in January 1949, that he was charged with
responsibility of making that loan ! Fifty million of that
90 million went to equip and arm the Communist army
and the dreaded . . . Communist secret police ... It
was Mr. Acheson who placed the guns, the whips, the black-
snakes, and the clubs in the hands of those Communists,
[and] . . . who furnished them with bullets to keep a
Christian population under Soviet discipline . . .

The Facts : This charge, with its innuendoes, is
utterly false and based on a deliberate distortion of
the public record. The circumstances of the loan
to Poland were carefully scrutinized by the Senate
Committee on Foreign Relations in January 1949,
prior to the confirmation of Mr. Acheson's nomi-

Deparfment of State Bulletin

nation as Secretary of State. The Committee's
hearings establislied that Mr. Acheson had severed
all connections with his former law firm 5 years
before the Polish loan wns approved by the De-
partment of State; that he acted on the loan only
after it had been recommended by the various divi-
sions of the Department, including Will Clayton's
economic divisions and the political divisions ; and
that the Department, at that time, still had hopes
that the Mikolajczyk government, then in power
in Poland, might be saved from Russian domina-
tion.

Any person really desiring the facts would care-
fully have examined the record of the Committee
on Foreign Relations. The entire published record
of this Committee's hearings dealing with this
question is set forth below:

The Chairman: There have been charges over the radio
that there was some activity by that firm [Covington, Bur-
lin.u', iiublee, Achesoa & Sliorb] with regard to a Polish
loan while you were in the State Department. Can you
tell us about that?

Mr. Acheson: Yes, Mr. Chairman. I shall be glad to do
that.

The Chairman: I assume, of course, that while you
were in the State Department you had severed your
relationships with the firm as far as the receipt of any
iwrtion of their revenues as compensation.

iff. Acheson: On the 1st of February 1945 [subsequently
corrected to February 1, 1941], when I took the oath as
Assistant Secretary of State, I severed all connection of
any sort with my tirm. The interest which I had in it was
valued, computed, and paid to me by the firm, and I had
no further connection with it until I returned to private
practice on July 1, 1947.

The Chairman: Was your name dropped from the firm?

Mr. Acheson: My name was not dropped from the title
of the firm. It was dropped from the list of partners who
were connected with the firm. The name and style of
the firm remained the same.

The Chairman: Like many firms, they wanted the firm
name to go on, as I understand.

Mr. Acheson: That was the desire of my partners, a
desire in which I acquiesced.

I'he Chairman: But on the list of attorneys in the firm,
your name was not included?

Mr. Acheson: Certainly not.

Senator Wiley: You had no financial interest in it?

Mr. Acheson: No, sir.

The Chairman: You were starting to tell us about the
charge with respect to the Polish loan in which your
firm, while you were in oflice, had some unusual inter-
est. Tell us about that.

Mr. Acheson: This matter, Mr. Chairman, was a matter
which was begun and finished at a time when I had no
connection with the firm whatever. In October 1945, the
Polish Supply Mission employed the senior partner of
that firm, Mr. Edward B. Burling, and some of his asso-
ciates, to work with that Supply Mission in the drafting
of contracts, papers, and so forth, having to do with a
loan which the Supply Mission wished to make with the
Export-Import Bank. That work continued from Octo-

ber 1945 until March 1947. It consisted In drawing up
in legal form various conditions which were to be imposed
to the granting of that loan. After the loan was granted
and approved by the Export-Import Bank, there were
various legal documents having to do with the nature of
the payment and repayment, in which the firm assisted.
After the loan began to be paid out, there were contracts
which were made between the Polish Supply Mission and
various suppliers in the United States. The firm assisted
in that matter.

In March 1947, after the President of the United States
made a strong statement of disapproval of the activities
of the Polish Government, the firm notified the Polish
Supply Mission that they were no longer at its service.

It has been stated somewhat extravagantly that the
firm received in the neighborhood of a million dollars for
its services. Its services for the period October 1945 to
March 1947 were paid for on the basis of the time of
the various people engaged in it, and the total fee was
50,175 dollars.

The Chairman: And not a million?

Mr. Acheson: No, sir ; it was not that.

I think it would be appropriate at this point, in view
of the charges that I had something to do with the grant-
ing of this loan, which was of benefit to a firm with which
I had been connected, to state the facts in regard to that
matter. The Polish Supply Mission and the Polish Gov-
ernment approached the United States in 1945 for two
credits. One was a credit of 40 million dollars to be
used for the purchase of coal cars. The other was a
credit of 50 million dollars to be used for the purchase
of surplus supplies owned by the United States and located
in Europe. The matter of this loan was discussed in the
State Department for sometime and was also discussed
with the Secretary of State, who was in Europe. It was
discussed in 1945 and 1946.

On April 24, 1946, at a time when I was Acting Secre-
tary of State, the various divisions of the State Depart-
ment, including the economic ones under Mr. Clayton
and the political ones under the political ofiicers, recom-
mended that these credits should be granted on certain
conditions. That recommendation was approved by me,
and on April 24, 1946, a release was given stating what
the conditions were and stating an exchange of notes
between the Polish Government and the Government of
the United States.

Subsequently, some of the conditions imposed were, in
the opinion of the Government of the United States, not
fulfilled by the Government of Poland, and again, as
Acting Secretary of State, I suspended the loan until
those conditions were met.

A matter which was not stated as a condition of the
loan, but was a consideration which entered into the
making of it, was that there should be free elections in
Poland. Those elections were held. They were not re-
garded by the State Department or by the President
of the United States as free elections. The President
made a statement on that subject, and so did I. How-
ever, since this matter was not a condition to the loan,
the loan was not again suspended.

The consideration which led to the granting of 40 mil-
lion dollars for the purchase of coal cars was the great
necessity of supplying Polish coal to western Europe.

iu\Y 17, 1950

107

That coal is now being supplied in very substantial quan-
tities with the use of these cars.

The Chairman: May I ask you one question : Did your
former firm have any relation whatever to the policy
matters that were determined or was it purely a legal
arrangement about these contracts and drafting of the
instruments that were necessary to bring about the loan?

Mr. Achcson: It was purely a legal matter, Mr. Chair-
man. The firm had nothing to do with the question of
whether or not the loan should be granted.

The Chairman: That is what I had in mind.

Senator Vandenhcrg: At that point, Mr. Acheson, was
it the policy of the Government to make the loans sub-
ject to these suspensions and reservations that you have
indicated?

Mr. Acheson: That was correct. Senator Vandenberg.

Senator Vandenberg: Would the.se be the instructions
also to our Ambassador at Warsaw?

Mr. Acheson: I do not think I understand that question.

Senator Yandenl)crg: To come right down to the bare
bones of it, why would there then be a dispute, or an
alleged dispute, between the American Ambassador at
Warsaw, in respect to this thing and our representatives
in Paris?

Mr. Acheson: There was throughout the consideration
of this loan a difference of opinion between the American
Ambassador in Warsaw and the officers of the State
Department, including the Secretary and myself, who were
charged with responsibility in it. That was a difference
of view. It was one in which the unanimous opinion of
the officers of the State Department was on one side and
the Ambassador took a different view.

It has been stated, and I have seen it in the press, that
the Ambassador resigned on account of this loan. That is
not the fact. The loan was made on the 24th of April 1946.
The Ambassador resigned on the 31st of March 1947.

Senator Vandenhcrg: Was this PolLsh Government,
which your firm represented in this connection, what we
would call a satellite government or was it still a govern-
ment which pretended — at least, through the cooperation
of Mikolajczyk — to still be, in pretense at least, a coalition
government?

Mr. Acheson: It was the latter, Senator Vandenberg.
This was the Mikolajczyk government, and there was,
during that period, a hope that it might in some respects
be free from complete Russian domination.

Senator Wiley: I want to make an inquiry. I under-
stand, Mr. Acheson, that you claim that you yourself,
personally, in no way profited from this transaction that
your firm had ; that at the time that the firm was engaged
by the Government of Poland you had no legal or financial
interest in the firm ; that you had really stepped out from
it; is that correct?

Mr. Acheson: That is correct. Senator.

Senator Wiley: And never since have you received any
remuneration from this transaction?

Mr. Acheson: That is correct, Senator.

Senator Smith: Mr. Chairman, might I ask another
question in that connection?

The Chairman: Yes.

Senator Smith: Mr. Acheson, I understood you to say
that in February 1945, when you became Under Secretary

of State, you severed your connection with the firm. I also
understood you to say that prior to that time, in 1944, if I
have the figures correct, you were Assistant Secretary of
State in other matters in the State Department. Were
you an active member of your law firm during that period?

Mr. Acheson: No, Senator. You misunderstood me, I
think. What I believe I said was that on the 1st of Febru-
ary 1941 I entered the service of the Government. At that
time, I severed all connection with my firm and did not
reestablish any connection with it whatever until July
1947, wlien I returned to private life.

Senator Smith: Thank you. That is what I wanted to
bring out. I was not quite clear about that.

Senator Tydings: I think you said in your direct testi-
mony that at one time this loan was suspended. Is that
correct?

Mr. Acheson: That is correct. Senator Tydings.

Senator Tydings: At that time, was your former law
firm still representing the Polish Government?

Mr. Acheson: Ye.?, sir; that is correct.

Senator Tydings: Then it seems to be an inference that
the steps and your part in the suspension of the Polish
loan were adverse to the interests of your law firm. Is
that correct?

Mr. Acheson: That is correct. Senator Tydings.

Senator Tydings: I would like to ask you now if the
first name in your firm does not represent the name of a
man who is deceased, Mr. Harry Covington.

Mr. Acheson: That is true.

Senator Tydings: Isn't it a matter of fact that when
a law firm is organized, in a matter of law, and any
member dies or withdraws from the firm, that in the
nature of the partnership the goodwill of the name itself,
even though a member leaves the firm, the remaining
partners can continue to keep his name as a part of the
firm?

Mr. Acheson: That is true. Senator Tydings. It is a
very common practice.

Senator Tydings: I think it is supported by numerous
cases in the court.

Mr. Acheson: I should believe so.

Senator Tydings: Where a man leaves a law firm, the
remaining partners are entitled to the goodwill created
by the old name, and in case of death the same thing
applies. It belongs to the partnership and not to the
individual once the goodwill label is created. Is that
correct?

Mr. Acheson: I believe so. I can't answer authorita-
tively. I have not looked it up.

Senator Tydings: During the negotiations between the
State Department and the Polish Government concerning
this loan, did your law partners at any time talk to you
about tlie loan or urge its rejection, adoption, modification,
or alteration?

Mr. Acheson: No, Senator. I had no conversation with
any of them of any sort.

Senator Tydings: Then, when you severed your con-
nection with your law firm as you have stated, during the
time you filled the Government position, none of your
partners or associates in your office in any manner, shape,
or form contacted you to assist them in work that was in

108

Department of State Bulletin

the office that might also have some connection in the
State Dopartniont ; is that correct?

Mr. Achesoii: That is correct, Senator.

As I can recall it, and I think my memory is clear, in
the 6I2 years in which I was in the State Department I
had one call from one member of that firm and that was
to tell me that a client that he represented, who was an
exporter of materials, would like to know whether the
State Department would be pleased if that firm ceased
exporting materials to Japan. I told him that the State
Department would indeed be pleased at that action and
that action was taken, and I believe that is the only
conversation on any matter of business which I had with
any one of my partners in <i\n years.

Senator Tydings: That is all, Mr. Chairman.

Senator Vandcnberp: Do you think there is any chance
for public misunderstanding through the retention, let us
say, of the name of the Secretary of State in the title of
a law firm?

Mr. Aclicson: I should think that there might very
easily be, and it will be my recommendation to my part-
ners that they would please me very much, and I think
serve themselves, by dropping my name from the title of
the firm. [The firm name now is Covington, Burling,
Rublee, O'Brian and Shorb.]

2. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID : I pointed out to the
Senate 4 days ago that some of those men who the FBI
listed as Soviet agents are still working in the State
Department shaping our foreign policy at this very
moment.

The Facts: Wliat Senator McCarthy actually
had said to the Senate 4 days before was that:

At least three of those listed as Communist agents by
the FBI 3 years ago are still holding high positions in
the State Department. . . . Those names I have checked
and I know the persons are working in the State Depart-
ment. . . . I . . . have the proof that those men are
working in the State Department as of this very moment.

Instead of proof, Senator McCarthy now pro-
duces a watered-down version of his previous
charge, which the Department also refuted in its
statement of June 9.

In his speech to the Senate, Senator McCarthy
further stated that the names of the three so-called
"agents" still in the Department were also among
the 106 submitted by bim to the Tydings Subcom-
mittee. In actuality, of a total of 20 persons
hypothesized on the cliart as ''agents," there is only
one who — after thorough reinvestigation, includ-
ing a full P"BI investigation, and clearance uitder
the Department's loyalty and security proce-
dures— is still in the employ of the Department.
That one does not hold a "high position." His
grade is GS-9. Furthermore, that one is not on the
list of 106 which Senator McCarthy gave the Sub-
committee.

3. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID: (immediately after
asserting that "untouchables" in the State Department
were plotting the "Communistic enslavement of the world"
and that the Administration was protecting "Communists

July 17, 1950

and traitors in Government") : As an example, I would
like to give you the complete case proven on Dr. Philip
Jessup, the State Department's Amhassador-at-Large. . . .
This is the man who, under the guidance of Lattimore,
is determining to a large extent our Far Eastern pol-
icy. . . . The documentary evidence shows that Jessup
belonged to five organizations which had been officially
declared as fronts for and doing the work of the Commu-
nist Party . . .

The Facts : On the Senate floor on June 6, and
under the protection of his Senatorial immunity,
Senator McCarthy had gone even farther — he vir-
tually said that Ambassador Jessup was a member
of the Communist Party :

Their [The Communist Party's] top aim was to get
some of their members on that Executive Committee [of
the Institute of Pacific Relations], to control that. For
example, we find Frederick V. Field, we find Philip C.
Jessup, and Harriet Moore, a very well-known Commu-
nist.

Ambassador Jessup, in his testimony before the
Tydings Subcommittee, demonstrated the com-
plete falsity of Senator McCarthy's allegations,
and the Department has repeatedly set forth the
facts — particularly in its analysis, on May 28,^ of
Senator McCarthy's May 25 speech at Rochester,
New York, and of the various documents which
he presented at that time as "evidence."

4. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID: So far, those who
object to our methods in this present fight have offered
as their only alternative that we go back to the method
used for the past 16 years during which the Communists
have been permitted to take control of our State Depart-
ment, infiltrate our Government, and work with the Soviet
Union to accomplish the two major Russian aims :

1. To create a Red China ; and

2. To create a Red Poland.

The Facts : The Department of State has stren-
uously objected to the methods adopted by Sen-
ator McCarthy. The objection stems from the
irresponsible and destructive approach which the
Senator has seen fit to adopt in his attacks. The
Department has actively solicited constructive
suggestions and criticism from the Congress, pri-
vate organizations, and individual citizens regard-
ing the conduct of our foreign relations, so that
the policies of the Department may be as repre-
sentative of the best thinking of the American
people as possible. Senator McCarthy's repeated
misstatements concerning the Department and its
policies obviously do not fall into this category.

In Poland, the Department did everything in its
power to bring about free elections and the estab-
lishment of an independent democratic govern-
ment. That this effort so far has been unsuccess-
ful is strictly attributable to the realities of the
situation which Senator McCarthy deliberately
ignores ; viz., the geographic proximity of Poland
and the Soviet Union combined with the political

' Bulletin of June 19, 1950, p. 1013.

109

blackjack of scores of Red divisions in and around
Polish territory. Soviet intransigence left the
United States Government only the alternative of
force which even Senator McCarthy, under the
circumstances, might hesitate to recommend.

In China, the United States Government poured
out billions of dollars for economic, fiscal, and
military assistance of the anti-Communist forces.
This effort was frustrated by the fact that there
ultimately ceased to exist in China any political
entity with the organic integrity and determina-
tion to combat communism on a scale which would
make further support practical and effective.

5. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID : For nearly 20 years
we have allowed dilettante diplomats to do the "fighting"
for us with kid gloves in perfumed drawing rooms . . .

The Facts : The members of the United States
Foreign Service are drawn from all States of the
Union and from all walks of life. Angus Ward,
Consul General in China, for almost a year im-
prisoned with his staff of 18 by the Chinese
Communists, saw none of Senator McCarthy's
imaginary perfumed drawing rooms. He and
his people suffered real hardship in real risk of
their lives. Departmental obsei'vers were fre-
quently under fire during the Greek civil war
and similarly exposed in the war between the
Israeli and the Arabs for Palestine. Consul Gen-
eral Thomas Wasson was killed by a sniper at
Palestine in 1948. Officers assigned to certain
posts in Southeast Asia are required by Depart-
mental order to carry firearms for their personal
protection. Out of some 8,000 officers in the
Foreign Service, about 2,000 are veterans. Sen-
ator McCarthy is simply repeating, here, frayed
cliches based on ignorance or malice.

6. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID: This letter [from
the Secretary of State to Representative Sabath] shows
that the Department insisted on hiring 205 individuals
who had been declared unfit ... by the President's own
Security and Loyalty Board ... I told him [the Presi-
dent] I had the names of 57 individuals whose files would
indicate that they were with Communists or loyal to the
Party ... My continual investigation has increased that
list to 81 ... I have given them 25 more names, totaling
106 .. . The FBI gave the State Department a detailed
chart . . . showing that there were a total of 124 .. .
2 months later 106 .. . were still working in the Depart-
ment . . .

The Facts: At Wheeling, West Virginia, on
February 9, 1950, Senator McCarthy asserted in a
Lincoln Day address:

. . . While I cannot take the time to name all the men
in the State Department who have been named as active
members of the Communist Party and members of a spy
ring, I have here in my hand a list of 205 — a list of
names that were made known to the Secretary of State
as being members of the Communist Party and who
nevertheless are still working and shaping policy in
the State Department.

The next day, he said he had the names of "57
card-carrying members of the Communist Party"
allegedly working in the Department. Later, he
talked in terms of 81 security risks of various
sorts. Then, he said he would stand or fall on his
ability to prove that there was one "top espionage
agent" in the State Department. Recently, he has
directed his attention to the Civil Service clear-
ances, 7 years ago, of two Chinese for Office of
War Information employment. Reverting to his
numbers game, he now injects a new "106," paired
with another big "3."

To date, Senator McCarthy has utterly failed
to prove that there is a single Communist or pro-
Communist in the State Depai-tment.

7. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID : He [President Tru-
man] announced that he would make available not all
of the files, but the loose-leaf, raped, and denuded State
Department files in some of the cases — files which, ac-
cording to a House Committee rejiort based on an FBI
survey, had been extensively tampered with.

The Facts : Here, Senator McCarthy dishes up
once again a previous assertion already refuted
by the Department — most recently in its May 25
analysis^ of the Senator's May 15 speech in
Atlantic City.

As the Department then pointed out, these files
are now as rigidly controlled, accurate, and com-
plete as it is possible to make them. The files de-
livered to the Subcommittee are complete files —
State Department reports, FBI reports, interro-
gations, hearings, administrative memoranda,
even pencilled working papers — everything. On
May 10, when the Committee started examining
the files, Senator Tydings is quoted as having
said :

These 81 files contain not only all of the data which
the State Department investigators have assembled, but
also all of the loyalty data which the FBI has gathered
and referred to the State Department and which has
been made a part of these files.

Thus the Committee will have the complete record from
all sources . . .

8. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID : It is the Lattimore-
Acheson plan for Soviet conquest of the Pacific . . . This
is what he [Owen Lattimore] says . . . This ... by the
architect of our State Department Far Eastern policy
. . . Lattimore's master plan . . . bought lock, stock and
barrel by Acheson . . . The Lattimore-Acheson axis
served the purpose of the Kremlin . . .

The Facts : Both the State Department and Mr.
Lattimore himself have rejaeatedly reiterated the
falsity of these assertions. Mr. Lattimore is not
an employee of the State Department and is not
the "architect" of its Far Eastern policy. Senator
Tydings asked Secretaries Hull, Byrnes, Marshall,
and Acheson * whether such a characterization oi

' Bulletin of June 12, 1950, p. 968.
* Bulletin of June 12, 1950, p. 972.

110

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

Mr. Lattimore was true or false. They all replied
that it was false.

9. SENATOR MCCARTHY SAID: "This is the Ache-
sou who reinstated and put in charge of personnel in the
Far East, John Stewart Service . . ."

The Facts : The following letters from the then
Secretary of State, Mr. James F. Byrnes, and for-
mer Undersecretary Joseph C. Grew clearly set
forth the circmnstances of Mr. Service's rein-
statement to the Foreign Service — by Secretary
Byrnes on the reconnnendation of the Foreign
Service Personnel Board:

August 14, 1945

My deak Mr. Service : I am advised that the Grand
Jury, after hearing the testimony of witnesses, has found
nothing to warrant an indictment against you.

One of the fundamentals of our democratic system is the
investigation by a Grand Jury of criminal charges. By
that process you liave been cleared.

T am advised that at the time of your arrest you were
placed on leave of absence with pay. I am happy to
approve the recommendation of the personnel board that
you be returned to active duty. You have now been
reassigned to duty in the Department for important worlj
in connection with Far Eastern Affairs.

I cnngratulate you on tliis happy termination of your
ordeal and predict for you a continuance of the splendid
record I am advised you have maintained since first you
entered the Foreign Service.

With all good wishes,
Sincerely yours,

James F. Byrnes

August 14, 1945

Dear Service: The Secretary has just told me of the
letter he has written you expressing his pleasure at your
complete vindication. I just want to add a personal word
of my own.

When I learned, only a few days before your arrest,
that your name had been coupled with thefts of official
documents I was inexpressibly shoclsed. Having known
you for some time and of the high calibre of your work
I could not believe that you could be implicated in such
an affair. As the Secretary has stated, you have been
completely cleared of any such imputation by operation
of our democratic machinery of investigation and law
enforcement.

I am particularly pleased that you are returning to duty
in the field of your specialization. Far Eastern Affairs,
where you have established an enviable record for integrity
and ability.

With all good wishes,
Sincerely yours,

Joseph C. Grew

Mr. Service has never been in charge of per-
sonnel in the Far East. At the end of 1948, Mr.

Service was assigned to the Department in line
with the established policy of rotating Foreign
Service officers and bringing back to the United
States those who, like Mr. Service, have spent
considerable time in the field. For 3 months in
1949, Mr. Service served on the Foreign Service
Selection Board, which includes public as well as
governmental members. The Board recommends
promotions throughout the Foreign Service, but it
does not deal with assignment and is not in charge
of field personnel in the Far East or anywhere else.
During the remainder of his Washington assign-
ment, in 1949, Mr. Service served as a special assist-
ant in the Division of Foreign Service Personnel
but had nothing to do with appointments or assign-
ments in the Foreign Service. He has never been
in charge of the Foreign Service personnel in the
Far East.

10. SENATOR McCarthy said : . . . Jessup was in
charge of the publication of a Communist-front known as
the Institute of Pacific Relations. This publication under
Jessup spearheaded the Communist Party line and spewed
forth the Communist Party line perfumed sewerage . . .
This publication was supported by Communist money.
Along with the material being furnished you are photo-
stats of checks totaling $6,000, all signed by the self-pro-
claimed Communist, Frederick Vanderbilt Field.

The Facts : Once again — as it has done follow-
ing each of Senator McCarthy's ASNE, Chicago,
Atlantic City,^ and Rochester ^ speeches — the De-
partment states these facts :

a. Senator McCarthy grossly exaggerated Dr.
Jessup's relationship with Far Eastern Survey,
the publication to which he refers, based on the
single fact that, in 1944, Dr. Jessup sei'ved on the
Research Advisory Committee of the American
Council of the Institute of Pacific Relations.

b. As for Senator McCarthy's charges and im-
plications that the Institute or its publication were
bought and paid for by "Communist money," about
half of the Institute's budget was met by the
Rockefeller Foundation and the Carnegie Corpo-
ration. Mr. Field's contributions were only a drop
in the bucket as compared witli the generous dona-
tions of large industrial concerns.

Senator McCarthy in previous speeches, had
claimed to have "evidence" of contributions from
Mr. Field totaling $6,500 in 2 years. Signifi-
cantly, however, following the Department's ex-
posure of the fact that one of the photostated
checks included in that "evidence" was payable not
to the Institute of Pacific Relations but to the
American Council on Soviet Relations, a totally
unrelated organization, he now reduces his figure
to $6,000.

" See Bulletin of June 12, 1950, p. 963, 966, 96S, for
analysis.

" Bulletin of June 19, 1950, p. 1012.

My 77, 7950

Where We Stand Today

hy Francis H. Russell

Director, Office of Public Affairs ^

It is a good thing for us to give some attention
every once in a while to that famous bit of advice
of Daniel Webster. "When the mariner," he said,
"has been tossed for many days in thick
weather ... he naturally avails himself of the
first pause in the storm to take his latitude and
ascertain how far the elements have driven him
from his true course. Let us," said Webster, "im-
itate this prudence."

The storm Webster was concerned about had
been a storm of words. The American people to-
day are entitled to feel that they know what Web-
ster meant. In fact, we may wonder whether
Webster could possibly have had any idea of what
a storm of words can really be. In a time of the
nation's most pressing need for unity, vision, and
clear-headedness, the air has been filled instead
with patently false accusations, trumped-up sus-
picion, and artificial schisms. Our energies have
been diverted from the dangers that are real to
bogies that are fictitious.

But we are beginning to emerge from this emo-
tional and mental orgy. Although this impres-
sion that we are on the point of enjoying a pause
in the storm may jirove wholly illusory, it may
be prudent to make believe there is a jaause while
we try to "take our latitude" in the real world
that lies about us.

Let us first remind ourselves that in the impor-
tant struggles of mankind victory has never come
easily and at once. Always along the way there
are ebbs and flows. If it were a matter of all
victories and no setbacks, we should not have to
spend our concern on the issue.

I should like to examine broadly this evening
how we stand with respect to the ebb and the flow
in the two great tasks that today face the people
of the world : the first, of course, being the task
of creating a healthy world order with adequate
political instrumentalities to make possible world

' An nddress made at Radcliffe College, Boston, Mass.,
June 19 and released to the pre.ss on the same date.

peace and economic and social progress; and the
second, the task of protecting and advancing hu-
man freedom.

It is a ticklish business plotting broad trends
contemporaneously but that is what anyone must
do who wants to "take his latitude" and map his
course.

This plotting does not call for a discourse on
the successes that we have achieved in our foreign
policy during the past half decade : the setting up
of international institutions on a democratic pat-
tern, the United Nations with its specialized agen-
cies, the North Atlantic Treaty Organization, the
Organization of American States; the program
for economic recovery in Europe; the plans for
military security of the democracies, and all the
rest. They are firmly in the record. So are the
obstacles that have been faced : inertia, ancient
hatreds, totalitarian measures of aggression.
Wliat I would like to do, rather, is to examine two
or three of the most crucial world situations and
to point to some recent developments that bear
on our current reckoning.

The Far East

The major development in the Far East has
been, of course, the seizure of China by the Chinese
Communists.

There is a tendency sometimes for Americans
to ask themselves and those who have been most
immediately responsible for our policies in that
area, "Wliat went wrong? Wlio was asleep at the
switch ? "Wliat was it that should have been done
that was not done?" China constitutes a large
chunk of the world's surface, and the people who
inhabit that area are a sizable portion of the
world's population. The overrunning of that
area by forces allied to the Kremlin is, obviously,
an adverse factor of some magnitude in the cur-
rent issue between totalitarianism and democracy.

It is natural for people who have been largely
preoccupied with domestic jjroblems, over which

112

Department of State Bulletin

we liave a larpe measure of control and where, if
something goes wrong, we can pin the responsi-
bility, to assume the same attitude toward prob-
lems abroad. But, obviously, there is a oasic
difference. Since we believe in the right of each
people to work out their own way of life, we
realize, when we stop to think of it, that it is not
and should not be possible for the people of one
country to have the final deteiunination on what
shall take place in another country. We may^
take a friendly interest. We may offer help. We
may recognize the importance of what takes place
in another country to the cause of world peace
and freedom, but, in the final analysis, it is for
the people of each coimtry to determine whose help
they will accept, what use they will make of it,
and wliat leaders they will follow.

The Chinese people for more than a generation
have been in a mood of revolt against the feudal
system that had prevailed in their country since
the dawn of history. They knew that modern
methods of government and modern technology
made possible a higher standard of living than
they enjoyed. For a decade, they pinned their
hopes for the accomplishment of their objective
of a better life on the Kuomintang. Gradually,
however, the idea became fixed in the minds of
the Chinese people that the Kuomintang had
come under the domination of a small clique of
men who had no interest in the welfare of the
Chinese people as a whole and that the Kuomin-
tang was either unable or unwilling to make the
necessary changes in Chinese life. With the
spread of this conviction, support for the regime
disappeared.

Many of the soldiers in the Nationalist Army
merely laid down their arms when they came into
the presence of the Communist forces, because they
felt the Government they were supposed to be
fighting for offered no hope for them or their
families. The Nationalist Government was driven
farther and farther back and, finally, off the main-
land of Asia onto Formosa.

U.S. POLICY IN ASIA

There were three things that the United States
could do to stem this development. Two of them
she did. The first was to provide substantial as-
sistance to the Nationalist Government in the
form of military equipment, food and other sup-
plies, and funds. More than half of the total in-
come of the Nationalist Government, during tlie
4 years following the cessation of the war with
Japan, came in tlie form of assistance from the
United States. In all major engagements, the
Nationalist Armies had a superiority in equip-
ment over the Communist forces.

The second thing that we could do, and did, was
to send a great American of our time, one whose
integi'ity and persuasiveness are unexcelled,
George Marshall, in an effort to convince the
Kuomintang of the necessity of measures on its

part to reestablish itself with the Chinese people
and to offer American economic aid in any such
effort. General Marshall failed in this effort. It
can be assumed that any other person that coidd
have been sent would have failed too.

The third thing that we could have done, but
did not do, was to send American generals, Ameri-
can aviators, American soldiers, to take part in
the Chinese civil war. If we had sent forces on a
sufficient scale there can be little doubt but that
the Communist armies would have been turned
back — but with two results :

First, we would, thereby, have committed our
limited resources to China, whose productive
power and strength from the point of view of in-
ternational strategy is very small, at the expense
of Western Europe which is second only to the
United States in its peacetime and wartime
potential.

Secondly, and even more important, if we had
sent American armed forces to take part against
the Chinese Communists, we would have wound
up with the resentment of the Chinese people who
would have considered that we had crammed down
their throats a government in which they had lost
all confidence and all respect. More tlaan that,
we would have incurred the resentment of other
hundreds of millions of people who live on the
periphery of China. We would have "won a
battle and lost the campaign" in the effort to forge
ties of friendship between ourselves and the peo-
ple of the East. We could not and we cannot
afford to make enemies of the entire population
of the Far East either in terms of our current ob-
jectives or in terms of the long-range relations
between the peoples of that area and the West.

The determination of the Chinese people to
abandon the Nationalist Government, and the re-
sulting seizure of power by the Communists, is an
adverse development which should not and cannot
be minimized.

RECENT DEVELOPMENTS

But I said I was going to talk in terms of recent
developments and their significance for the imme-
diate future. The significant change in the situa-
tion in the Far East is this :

Up to the present time, we have been attempting
to deal with a situation in a country where the
Government was losing the support of the people,
disastrously and increasingly, day by day. For
that reason, the aid which we gave in large
amounts was ineffective. There was no govern-
ment that was representative of the people with
whom the United States could work to preserve
and extend the freedom of the Chinese people.
The creation of such a government was a matter
beyond the power of the United States.

Now, however, the situation that we face in the
Far East, while still one of great difficulty, is one
that has less of the characteristics of a quagmire.

July 17, 1950

113

It is sometimes better to take a step or two back
and get a firm footing.

In the case of China, the possibilities of action
on our pait for the immediate future are severely
limited, but they are definable. We intend to do
everything we can to maintain communication
with the Chinese people ; to make it plain to them
that we are prepared to aid them in their efforts
to improve their lot to the extent they make pos-
sible by renouncing the foreign domination which
sooner or later they will know has been foisted
upon them.

By contrast, there are countries like Australia,
New Zealand, the Philippines, and Japan where
democracy is well-established and where we shall
do everything that is necessary to prevent their
independence and democracy from being success-
fully attacked.

In between are the countries like Indonesia,
Indochina, Burma, and Korea, where independ-
ence has only recently been won and where the
new Governments and their people are struggling
against fearful odds to get democratic institu-
tions started and to improve the desperately low
standards of living. They are faced with nearly
overpowering problems : illiteracy, wretched
health, an utter lack of experience in self-govern-
ment, frequently not even adequate means of
communication laetween the government and the
people. These people are not interested in becom-
ing party to the world's ideological struggle, in
being cannon fodder in what they regard as other
people's battles. They feel that they have prob-
lems enough of their own. They will shy away
from any effort to involve them.

If, however, we can convince them that our
objectives with respect to them are only to help
them accomplish their own objectives of internal
development and improvement they will welcome
our aid, and, through it, they will be better able
to prevent Soviet penetration or domination.

The United States is the best able of all coun-
tries in the world to assist these people. Our big
job is to convince them that we desire to assist
them without requiring them to assume commit-
ments.

We are, therefore, dealing with a manageable
situation now in the Far East. We are dealing
with a situation wliere the things that we wish
to do can be done and not, as before, with a de-
teriorating situation that was beyond our power
to influence. We are dealing with a situation
where there are long-term factors which can work
strongly in our favor. There is not only the good
will that will accrue to us from our past and
present policies, but there is the ancient deep-
seated determination of tlie Chinese people to
throw off any outside domination. Tliere is the
ability of the American people to cooperate with
other peoples who are engaged in improving their
standard of life. There is the appeal of human
freedom, an appeal which becomes stronger the
more it is denied.

In the Far East, then, we are in a situation
where one of our valued allies has temporarily
gone under. We have witnessed an eastern "Bat-
tle of France." But the lines in this struggle for
peace and freedom are now drawn on more fav-
orable territory. The struggle in this area for
freedom and progress is by no means irretrievably
lost.

The European Situation

Let us look at the situation in Europe. The
Economic Recovery Program is well under way.
Much of the rubble has been cleared away. The
factories ai'e in operation. The people are being
fed. Two problems remain of serious dimen-
sions.

GERMANY

First is the problem of Germany. Germany is
the greatest center of productive power outside the
United States. It is a matter of first importance
that this power not come into the hands of those
who are directing the Soviet conspiracy against
the freedom of tlie world. It is equally important
tliat the German people themselves not be per-
mitted again to become a threat against the world.
Both of these ends can be met only by making
Germany an integral part of a closely knit pattern
of Western Europe.

It has been apparent that the leadership in this
effort would have to come from the French. For
a few years following the war, the French gave no
indication that they had tlie will or the capacity
to undertake this leadersliip. Their morale had
been sliattered by the experience of the war. The
British, concerned with their own special eco-
nomic problems and wanting to maintain their po-
sition as the center of the British Commonwealth
of nations, were unwilling to merge their political
and economic sovereignty in sucli a pattern of
Western Europe. Now, however, with the pro-
posals recently made by Mr. Schuman for a
French-German coal and steel pool, in which other
European countries would be invited to join, the
action that can and must be taken to solve the
problem of Germany and of Western Europe has
become much clearer. This reemergence of
French statesmanship is one of the most encour-
aging signs of the postwar period. Tlie "flow"
here is setting in.

PROBLEM OF SECURITY

The second problem of Europe is security
against the possibility of aggression by the Soviet
Union. This security has been profoundly and
favorably affected by tlie developments that have
recently taken place in weapons of war. The
countries that want peace and security today are
more fortunate than those that wanted them when
Hitler was on the march. The rise of Hitler coin-

114

Departmenf of State Bulletin

cided with a period of superiority of weapons of
aggression over weapons of defense. The ar-
mored division and the bombing pUme were
mightier tlian the means cf defense against them.
The only elfective defense then was to construct a
more powerful offense.

Today, there are indications that the pendulum
is swinging buck, that the balance will be in favor
not of countries who are threatening to engulf
other peoples but in favor of those who wish to
defend themselves, their peace, and their liberties
against aggression. This development is un-
favorable from the point of view of the Soviet
Union, which has made abundantly clear its pur-
pose of extending as far and as rapidly as possible
the number of countries satellite to it. The jet
fighter plane, the guided missile, the improved
bazooka, and radar are all weapons of defense,
not weapons of aggression. They are, therefore,
weapons that strengthen the hands of the people of
the world who covet no additional territories, no
domination over other peoples. They strengthen
the non-Communist world which wishes only for
the right of each people to work out its own way of
life in its own way. The "flow" here in the di-
rection of peace is strong.

BATTLE OF IDEOLOGIES

The third problem today relates to the struggle
for the minds of men. It has fallen to our lot to
be living at the point in world history when two
great concepts of human existence are pitted in
what may be the conflict from which one or the
other will emerge and prevail for as long into the
future as we can see.

One concept is, of course, the belief that the life,
the interests, the integrity, the growth, the hap-
jjiness of the individual human being is the ulti-
mate value and that human institutions exist to
promote that value. This belief is the concept of
life that emerges from the great religions of the
world. It has been developed by the political
philosophers of the Western world. It has pro-
duced among other ways of life our American de-
mocracy. The preamble to the Constitution of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts puts it like this :

The end of government is to furni.sh all of the individuals
who compose it with the power of enjoying the blessings
of life.

The other philosophy, that also has roots going
far back into history, is premised upon the con-
cept of the state, the corporate entity, as the ulti-
mate value. Human beings exist only as expend-
able items, as cogs, of no value in themselves other
than as they contribute to this artificial entity.
This philosophy asserts that all human thought,
all human activity must be dominated by the state
and devoted to the ends of the state. This con-
cept, the intellectual product of Hegel, Fichte,
Feuerbach, and Kant, produced as one of its off-
shoots nazism; as another, Soviet communism.

The results of its application are found in the
present-day police state, slave labor, the drive for
world domination, the effort to create artificial eco-
nomic chaos and want, the efforts to render inter-
national institutions ineffective, in the drive to
intensify international insecurity and tension, and
in the all-out assault upon human freedom.

The Soviet leaders have several kinds of head-
start in the race for the minds of the people of the
world. They have been carrying on an energetic
propaganda campaign for several score of years.
Their philosophies are rigid and uniform so that
they lend themselves to packaged thinking and
packaged explanation. It is easier to tear down
and to destroy than it is to build. It is easier to
create doubt and suspicion than it is to create con-
fidence. It is easier to set forth a rigid monolithic
theory than something whose virtues flow from
diversification and flexibility.

But here, too, there has been a "flow." There
has been growing discrimination by the great ma-
jority of people in appraising various proposals
for an easy out from their problems. There has
also been a growing awareness of the spurious na-
ture of many proposals to which the attractive
word "peace" has been affixed.

For example, the Communists have recently
been active in Europe in obtaining signatures to
what they call "an appeal." This appeal reads as
follows :

We demand the absolute banning of the atom weapon,
arm of terror and mass extermination of populations.

We demand the establishment of strict international
control to insure the implementation of this banning
measure.

We consider that any government which would be lirst
to use the atom weapon against any country whatsoever
would be committing a crime against humanity and
should be dealt with as a war criminal.

We call on all men of good will throughout the world
to sign this appeal.

The Communists are now making plans to cir-
culate this appeal in this country in a campaign
beginning in the next 2 or 3 weeks and extending
through next October.

What is the background of this "appeal?"

True Nature of the Soviet "Appeal"

The United Nations has been tackling the prob-
lem of how to achieve security against the de-
structiveness of the atom bomb for the past 4 years.
All of the member nations outside of the Soviet
Union with its satellites are agreed on the essen-
tials for effective control. The basic factors of the
situation have led to these essentials with the in-
evitability of the multiplication table. Because
the stuff that is used for atomic power to run fac-
tories can in a matter of hours be put into a piece
of machinery that converts it into an atom bomb,
it is necessary to have some international agency,
in which all nations will have confidence, in con-
trol of atomic materials from the time the minerals
are first extracted from the earth until the last

July 17, 7950

115

ounce of energy has been expended. Mere prom-
ises will not suffice. We have found that Soviet
promises are often broken. We must assume that
they would be broken in the future. Production
and control by an international agency is the only
guaranty of security. All the members of the
United Nations except the Soviet Union and its
satellites have indicated their willingness to take
this course.

Why has the Soviet Union I'efused? Because
the operations of an international agency would,
to some degree, breach the Iron Curtain that the
Soviet Union has erected around the area of the
earth that it controls. Faced as it was by the ne-
cessity of a choice between cooperating in a pro-
gram of secui-ity against the atom bomb and main-
taining the Iron Curtain, the Soviet Union chose
the latter. To put a better front on this position,
however, it has come up with some alternatives —
alternatives whicli place a premium upon bad faith
and evasion. The Soviet Union proposals are:
First, that all countries agree not to make any
atomic bombs and, second, that all countries agree
not to be first to use the atom bomb.

The first of these proposals means that coun-
tries with democratic institutions whose budgets
and policies are necessarily matters of public
knowledge would be at the mercy of countries
which operate behind an iron curtain and whose
every activity is a state secret.

The second agreement would mean that during
the period when the Soviet Union was supreme in
mass armies, which it refuses to reduce, and com-
paratively weak in its development of atomic
weapons, it would be asking the rest of the world
to discard atomic weapons and leave itself at the
mercy of the Soviet armies. The "appeal" which
the Communists are circulating is an appeal to
provide these strategic advantages for the Soviet
Union.

It is necessary in the present world for people
to read the fine print in resolutions that are pre-
sented to them; even more, to read between the
lines of the fuie print.

In spite of propaganda barrages, however,
democracy and freedom still remain for the great
majority of the people of the world the most at-
tractive way of life. This fact is shown by the
votes in the United Nations. It is shown by the
vast dissatisfactions among many of the people
living in police states behind the Iron Curtain.

Moreover, believers in democracy are once again
becoming articulate. We are beginning to reex-
amine and define the things by which we live.
There has been an encouraging increase in articles
and books on the philosophical foundations of
democracy. We are once again taking on the job
of becoming political philosophers and are meet-
ing the adversary in that field.

These, I believe, are some of the developments
in the world's situation during the last few weeks
and months that future historians may point to as
milestones at the midpoint of the twentieth cen-

tury having significant bearing on the effort to
build a world marked by confidence and coopera-
tive effort.

They are not guaranties of success. No genera-
tion can pass on to its successors the boon for
human freedom fully forged and forever guaran-
teed. The most each age can do is to bequeath to
the next a living freedom, to be extended, strength-
ened, and, if necessary, defended. The most that
any generation can ask is to have a freedom to
defend.

There are, as we have seen, those who get greater
zest out of throwing stones at those who are in
the front line than in joining in the effort. But
that has always been.

I said when I began that there were two issues
in the world. One was creating the structure of
peace and the other protecting our freedoms. In
fact, however, they are one and the same. The
struggle for freedom today is the struggle for
peace. Those who menace our peace would de-
stroy our freedom. It is because freedom is being
challenged all over the world that we have become
universally preoccupied with the defense of peace.
It is because freedom is won or lost in so many
different ways and in such varying degr-ees that
these efforts reach into every kind of activity and
every area of life, compelling us to work on a
universal front.

Present U.S. Strategy

It is for this reason that the broad strategy
which we must follow is the strategy of doing
what has to be done. It used to be a tenet of
nineteenth century international political philos-
ophy that the people of the United States should
concern themselves only with the things that they
are able effectively to control. That was true in
the nineteenth century world. It is not true in
the world of today. The people of Arizona, can-
not make their will absolutely effective in Massa-
chusetts, but they have a right, indeed a duty, to
take a position on matters in Massachusetts that
affect the national interest. Similarly, the world
today is one, and we cannot make it otherwise.

The history of the last 3 years in Greece is a
case in point. There were those who said that
we should not give assistance to the Greek Gov-
ernment in its effort to preserve the freedom of
that country from outside aggressions, because
we were not in a position to exercise absolute au-
thority in that sector of the world, because we
could not guarantee the outcome. However, be-
cause the Greeks were threatened with engulf-
ment, and because the free world could not afford
to see one country after another succumb, we
provided help, and, today, Greece and Turkey,
and the Near East to which they are the path-
way, are still free. A world order is emerging
in which the test of what each country is called
upon to do is not its own ability to control the

116

Department of State Bulletin

outcome, but rather what is needed as a part of
the whole.

This new world order will not, we may be sure,
be patterned exactly on anythinj^ that has gone
before. Like all living, strong political organ-
isms, it must be fashioned according to the par-
ticular facts and needs with which it must deal.
It will be a complex of United Nations organs
and agencies, coal and steel and atomic energy au-
thorities, North Atlantic and inter- American, and
other regional oi-ganizations, all designed for the
job at hand.

Here again, it seems clear, events are in our
direction. These organizations are democratic in
their structure and operation. They are based
upon the principles of free discussion, free voting
by the membei-s, the prevailing of the will of the
majority with safeguards of the rights of the
minority. These are our kind of outfit. Col-
lectively, they can carry us far down the road to
a healthy world.

We cannot afford to be either optimists or pessi-
mists in this great struggle of our time. The out-
come is not predetermined. It is largely in our
hands, because the leadership of the free world
has fallen to us. What we say, what we do, what
we tear down, what we support, all bear on the
extent of each ebb and the strength of each flow
and will determine the final direction of the tide.

U.S. Replies to Rumanian Protest
Against Restrictive Travel Order

[Released to the press July 6]

The United States Oovernment has replied to the Ru-
manian Goi-erninent's protest of June 19, 1950, regard-
ing the institution of restrictions on travel by personnel
of the Rumanian Legation at Washington} The text of
the United States note, delivered to the Rumanian Le-
gation on July 3, 1960, follows.

The Secretary of State presents his compli-
ments to the Honorable the Minister of Rumania
and, with reference to his note No. 2421 of June
19, 1960, has the honor to respond to the Ku-
manian Government's protest against regulations
which the United States Government has insti-
tuted in respect of travel by personnel of the Ru-
manian Legation at Washington.

It is of interest to note the Rumanian Govern-
ment's explicit acknowledgment that the imposi-
tion of travel restrictions by a receiving govern-
ment upon the oflBcial pereonnel of a sending
government constitutes a limitation of the normal
activity of a diplomatic Mission. With this view,
the United States Govermnent readily agrees.

Restrictions of movement, like restrictions
upon the free flow of information and cultural
exchange as imposed by the Rumanian Govern-

" Bulletin of June 5, 1950, p. 921 ; July 3, 1950, p. 30.
July 17, 1950

ment, are basically distasteful to the American
people and its Government. Travel regulations
applicable to personnel of the Rumanian Lega-
tion at Washington have been instituted merely as
a reciprocal limitation of dipkunatic privilege in
view of the nature and effect of travel restrictions
as applied by Rumanian authorities to membei-s
of the American Legation at Bucharest.

On the one hand, the Rumanian Government
complains that restrictions on the travel of its Le-
gation jDersonnel tend to prevent its diplomatic
Mission from carrying on its normal activity.
On the other hand, the Govermnent of Rumania
alleges that its own travel restrictions are applied
without discrimination to all diplomatic Missions
in Rumania. The inescapable deduction from
this argument, if taken at face value, would be
that the Rumanian Government is applying
measures which tend to prevent the performance
of normal activities by all diplomatic Missions in
Rumania.

Without debating the artificial contention of
the Rumanian Government that its travel restric-
tions are nondiscriminatory, it may be said that
the United States Government rejects the thesis
that, no matter how obstructive and abnormal the
behavior of a particular state toward American
interests and official American representatives, the
conduct of United States relations with that state
must correspond uniformly with the conduct of
United States relations with other states.

At such time as the Rumanian Government may
be disposed to remove the restrictions which it
has placed upon the travel within Rumania of
American Legation personnel, especiallv in per-
formance of tTie normal functions of a diplomatic
Mission, the United States Government will be
prepared to alter accordingly the restrictions
which presently apply to travel by personnel of
the Rumanian Legation within the United States.
Meanwhile, as the Rumanian Government has
been informed, the travel procedure will be ad-
ministered with a view to the current treatment
in this regard by Rumanian authorities of the
United States representatives in Rumania.

U.S. Survey Mission To Study
Philippine Economic Situation

STATEMENT BY THE PRESIDENT

[Released to the press iy the White House June 29]

The United States Government, at the request
of President Elpidio Quirino, is sending an Amer-
ican Economic Survey Mission to Manila to study
and report on the jDresent pressing economic prob-
lems of the Philippines. When President Quirino
was in Washington last February he discussed

117

with me some of the difficulties which face his
country. The idea of this mission has developed
out of these discussions and subsequent ones in
Manila between President Quirino and Ambassa-
dor Cowen.

The purpose of this mission will be to survey the
entire Philippine economic situation, to make rec-
ommendations on measures of self-help which
might be undertaken by the Philippine Govern-
ment itself, and to make recommendations on ways
in which the United States might be helpful.
President Quirino has assured me that this mission
will receive the fullest cooperation of the
Philippine Government.

The Honorable Daniel W. Bell, President of the
American Security and Trust Company of Wash-
ington, and formerly Under Secretary of the
Treasury, has accepted the important position of
chief of the mission. He will be my personal rep-
resentative, with the personal rank of Ambassador,
and will report directly to me. The deputy chief
of the mission will be Maj. Gen. Kichard J. Mar-
shall, President of the Virginia Military Institute,
who has had many years' experience in the Philip-
pines. He will have the personal rank of Minister.
Work is now proceeding actively on the selection
of the other members of the mission, and I hope
it will be prepared to start its work early in July.

I consider this mission to be of the highest im-
portance, not only because of the results which I
expect it to produce but also because it is a symbol
of the half-century of intimate relationship be-
tween the Philippine and American peoples. It
is my hope that the mission will further solidify
this historic association.

SURVEY MISSION MEMBERSHIP

The Department of State announced on July 7
that the Economic Survey Mission to the Philip-
pines will arrive at Manila on July 10.

Members and advisers of the Mission follow :

Memiers

Daniel W. Bell (Chief of Mission), President, American
Security and Trust Company, Washington, D.C.

Richard J. Marshall (Deputy Chief of Mission), Major
General, U.S.A., Ret., Superintendent, Virginia Mili-
tai-y Institute, Lexington, Va.

Edward M. Bernstein (Chief Economist) (On leave of
absence from the International Monetary Fund),
Washington, D.C.

August L. Strand (Agricultural Survey), President, Ore-
gon State College, Corvallis, Oreg.

Francis McQuillin (Industry and Power), Assistant to the
President, West Penn Power Company, Pittsburgh,
Pa.

Advisers

Alvin H. Cross (Fiscal Management), Deputy Commis-
sionar, Accounts and Collection TJnit, Bureau of In-
ternal Revenue, Department of the Treasury

Michael J. Deutch (Industrial Engineering), 1737 H
Street, NW., Washington, D.C.

David I. Ferber (Political Adviser), Foreign Service OflS-
cer. Department of State

Lawrence Fleishman (Fiscal Management), Supervising
C\istoms Agent, Department of the Treasury, Seattle,
Wash.

Joseph B. Friedman (Legal Affairs), 1026 Woodward
Building, Washington, D.C.

Wilbur A. Gallahan (Fiscal Management), Tax Adviser
to the Commissioner of Internal Revenue, Depart-
ment of the Treasury

William T. Heffelfinger (Fiscal Management), Assistant
to the Fiscal Assistant Secretary of the Treasury,
Department of the Treasury

Richard A. jMiller (Distribution and Trade), 420 East 23d
Street, New Yorli

Austin Nisonger (Fiscal Management), Deputy Chief,
Accounting Division, Civil Aeronautics Administra-
tion, Department of Commerce

Jameson Parker (Public Relations), 2116 Bancroft Place,
NW., Washington, D.C.

Clarence M. Purves (Agriculture), Assistant Chief, Re-
gional Investigations Branch, Office of Foreign Agri-
cultural Relations, Department of Agriculture

Louis Shere (Taxation), Professor of Economics and Di-
rector of Tax Research, University of Indiana, Bloom-
ington, Ind.

William W. Tamplin (Mining), Bureau of Mines, Depart-
ment of the Interior

Donald Thompson (Banking), Vice President, Federal Re-
serve Bank of Cleveland, Cleveland. Ohio

Carlton L. Wood (Distribution and Trade), Office of In-
ternational Trade, Department of Comniei-co

German Export- Import Figures
for 1947-48 Released

The Department of State on June 22 released
the report of an international firm of auditors
on the audit of the Joint Export-Import Agency
accounts for the years 1947-48. JEIA was the
official military government agency which, during
the period covered by these accounts, was respon-
sible for the trade and commerce of the United
States-United Kingdom bizonal area of Germany.
The agency's responsibility was, subsequently, ex-
tended to the French zone as well.

With the formation of the German Government
late in 1949, JEIA's responsibilities were gradu-
ally assigned to German agencies, and the organi-
zation was terminated on December 19, 1949.
The organization is now in liquidation, and an
audit for tlie period from January to September
30, 1949, is now under way, with final audit at date
of complete liquidation.

Assets on December 31, 1948, consisted of bal-
ances in foreign banks of $296,328,274 and ac-
counts receivable at $182,312,474, for a total of
$478,640,748. The principal liabilities were ac-
counts payable at $82,174,711, and the capital of
the agency was $125,355,504, consisting of equal
United States-United Kingdom contributions in
the manner specified in the bizonal fusion agree-
ment of December 2, 1946.

118

Department of State Bulletin

The United States in tiie United Nations

[July 8-14]

Secretary-General's Communique on Korea

All United Nations members, with the excep-
tions of Yugoslavia and Egypt, had, by July 13,
replied to the circular telegram sent out by Secre-
tary-General Lie inquiring about the type of as-
sistance members might be prepared to offer in
implementation of the Security Council resolution
of June 27.^ Fifty-two replies from members, as
well as two from nonmembers — Italy and the
Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan, acknowledge the
communication and indicate moral support and, in
some cases, offer direct military assistance or other
material aid. Byelorussia, the U.S.S.E., Czecho-
slovakia, Poland, and the Ukraine rejected the
Security Council action as "illegal, as did the
Chinese Communist regime and North Korea.

Economic and Social Council

During the second week of its eleventh session,
now in progress at Geneva, the Economic and
Social Council concluded general debate on meth-
ods for financing economic development of under-
developed countries, approved the report of the
Statistical Commission, including the resolutions
contained therein, and almost completed consider-
ation of the report of the Transport and Com-
munications Commission.

The question of methods for financing economic
development of underdeveloped countries was re-
ferred to the Council's Economic Committee for
more detailed study. In the course of the general
debate, Isidor Lubin of the United States com-
mented on the progress that had been made in
reaching a common understanding of the basic
elements of the problem of economic development.
Not only was there a full realization that internal
effort and organization on the part of the coun-
tries themselves is required, he said, but also that
capital from foreign sources, both private and pub-
lic, can play a vital part in the process. One of
the major tasks before the Council, Mr. Lubin con-
tinued, "is to try to analyze the conditions and
factors which may affect the pace and scope of
economic development in the near future."

The Council approved a number of proposals of
the Transpor-t and Communications Commission

" BuLLEi'iN of July 3, 1950, p. 7.

in connection with consideration of its report.
One of the approved resolutions recommends rati-
fication of the convention establishing the Inter-
governmental Maritime Consultative Organiza-
tion, and, in this connection, Mr. Lubin announced
that the United States Senate had ratified this
convention. Other resolutions involved proposals
to remove barriers to international transport of
goods, coordination of inland transport, maritime
shipping affecting Latin America, international
road transi^ort, the problem of pollution of sea
water, and implementation of the decisions of the
Atlantic City telecommunications conference in
1947.

A resolution authorizing the Secretary-General,
on the advice of the Interim Coordinating Com-
mittee for International Commodity Arrange-
ments, to convene a conference to consider inter-
national commodity problems was referred, after
India's opposition, to the Council's Economic
Committee for further study.

Interim Committee

On July 13, the Interim Committee opened dis-
cussion on disposition of the former Italian colony
of Eritrea, with presentation of the report of the
United Nations Commission for Eritrea by Kap-
porteur Ziaud Din of Pakistan. The report puts
forth three different proposals for the disposition
of Eritrea. The first, favored by the delegations
of Burma and the Union of South Africa, calls
for a federation of Eritrea, as a self-governing
unit, with Ethiopia, under the sovereignty of the
Ethiopian Crown. The second proposal, submit-
ted by the Norwegian delegation, suggested re-
union of Eritrea with Ethiopia, with provision
that the western province could provisionally and
for a limited period of time be left under the pres-
ent British administration. The third proposal,
submitted by Guatemala and Pakistan, would
place Eritrea under direct United Nations trus-
teeship for a maximum period of 10 years, at the
end of which it would become independent.

In the ensuing debate the Norwegian and South
African delegates supported, in general, the pro-
posals of their Commission representatives, while
the United Kingdom delegate spoke in favor of
a partition plan. The Burmese and Pakistani
representatives, lacking instructions, reserved
their right to speak when the debate resumes on
July 14.

July 17, 1950

119

General Policy p^^^

U.N. Places Unified Command of Military
Forces in Korea Under United States:
Text of Security Council Resolution ... 83

General MacArthur Designated as Com-
manding General. Statement by the
President 83

The United Nations and Korea. By Philip

C. Jessup 84

Charging South Korea as Aggressor Reminis-
cent of Nazi Tactics. Statement by
Secretary Acheson 87

U.S. Military Actions in Korea. Addresses
by John Foster Dulles:
New Phase of American Foreign Policy . . 88

The Interdependence of Independence . . 91

New Challenges to American Diplomacy. By

George C. McGhee 96

Where We Stand Today. By Francis H.

Russell 112

U.S. Replies to Rumanian Protest Against

Restrictive Travel Order 117

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

U.N. Places Unified Command of Military
Forces in Korea Under United States:
Text of Security Council Resolution ... 83

General MacArthur Designated as Com-
manding General. Statement by the

President 83

The United Nations and Korea. By Philip

C. Jessup 84

The United Nations and Page

Specialized Agencies — Continued

U.N. Commission Reestablishes Headquarters

in Korea 92

The United States in the United Nations . . 119

Economic Affairs

U.S. Survey Mission To Study Philippine
Economic Situation:

Statement by the President 117

Survey Mission Membership 118

International Information and
Cultural Affairs

Support for an Expanded Information and
Education Program. Statement by Sec-
retary Acheson 100

Forging a Free World With a Truth Cam-
paign. By Edward W. Barrett .... 103

Technical Assistance

Point Four: An Investment in Peace,
dress by the President

Ad-

The Department

Analysis of Senator McCarthy's Public State-

ments

106

Publications

Foreign Relations Volumes, 1933, Released . 95

German Export-Import Figures for 1947-48

Released 118

U. S, GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1980

^Ae/ z/)eh€f/)^tmeni/ 4)^ ^aie^

JUSTICE BASED ON HUMAN RIGHTS: A THREAT

TO TYRANNY • Address hy the President 123

THE WORLD COTTON SITUATION 145

FOURTH SESSION OF CONTRACTING PARTIES

TO GATT • By Melvin E. Sinn 150

ADMINISTERING THE DISPLACED PERSONS

ACT • By Herv4 J. L'Heureux 125

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 577
July 24, 1950

Qje/ia/y^me^ ^/ y^te J3llilGiin

Vol. XXIII, No. 577 . Pubucation 3919
July 24, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documenti

U.S. Qovernment Printing Office

Washington 26, D.O.

Prick:

62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.50

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1849).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
oy State BtJU-Exra as the soiu-ce will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as speciai
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

Justice Based on Human Rights: A Threat to Tyranny

Address by the President ^

To our forefathers, the courts were the distinc-
tive symbol of the kind of government — the kind
of society — which they were creating in the wilder-
ness of this continent. This new nation was to be
a democracy based on the concept of the rule of
law. It was to be a society in which every man
had rights — inalienable rights — rights which
were not based on creed, or rank, or economic
power but on equality. In such a society, the
courts had the function not only of dealing out
justice among citizens but of preserving justice
between the citizens and the state.

The founders of this country had a very clear
conception of the corruptibility of power — of the
innate danger in all human affaii-s of the selfish
or arbitrary exercise of authority. To guard
against this ever-present danger, they adopted the
principle that there is a fundamental law — ex-
pressed in the Constitution, and particularly in the
Bill of Rights — to which every exercise of power
has to conform. The purpose of this fundamental
law is to protect the rights of the individual. To
apply this underlying law became the special task
of the courts.

This concept of justice based on individual
rights is so familiar to us that we take it for
granted. Yet, in essence, it is a revolutionary con-
cept. It has always been a threat to absolutism
and tyranny. It was the great weapon in our
own Eevolution and the basis of our Republic.
Today, in a world where absolute power is again
on the march, this concept of justice has tremen-
dous strength. It is a challenge to the new forms
of tyranny as it was to the old.

Totalitarian Concept of Justice

In our lifetime, we have witnessed a world-
wide attack on this ideal of justice. Fascism,
nazism, Soviet communism, all have tried to con-

" Made at the laying of the cornerstone of the new
United States Courts Building in the District of Columbia
(111 June 27 and released to the press by the White House
on the same date.

vince people that our concern with individual
human rights is false and fraudulent.

In the areas under their control, these totali-
tarian movements have swept away all restraints
on their own power. They have subjected their
own people to all the evils of tyranny — to kid-
naping, torture, slavery, murder — without hope
of redress or remedy. They have made a mock-
ery of the forms of justice. Their judges are
prosecutors; their prosecutors are hangmen;
their defense attorneys are puppets. Their trials
are coldly calculated displays of propaganda,
based on torture and designed to spread
falsehood.

Wherever nations or peoples have been over-
come by totalitarianism, the practice of justice
has been snuffed out. But the ideal remains, deep
in the hearts of men. Men will always long for
protection against the midnight arrest, the slave
camp, the torture chamber. Men will never ac-
cept these things as right. Today, men feel more
deeply than ever that all human beings have
rights and that it is the duty of government to
protect them.

Today, we are participating in a great inter-
national movement for the better protection of
individual rights. New methods of protecting
and advancing human rights are being proposed
and discussed. Across the world, men of good
will are seeking new ways of making human
rights triumphant over tyranny.

steps for Triumph Over Tyranny

The first step was taken in the Charter of the
United Nations. Weary of the crimes of the Axis
tyrants, all the united nations pledged themselves,
in the Charter, to promote universal respect for
and observance of human rights and fundamental
freedoms. The San Francisco conference ended
with the promise that there would be, in time,
an international bill of rights, which would be
as much a part of international life as our own
Bill of Rights is part of our life under the
Constitution.

July 24, 1950

123

From this point, many steps have been taken
toward the creation of an international law and
morality which will protect human rights against
the misuse of arbitrary power.

By the judgment of the Niirnberg Tribunal,
October 1, 1946, it was established that the highest
officials of a government are answerable before
the bar of an international court for committing
war crimes, crimes against peace, and — in connec-
tion with either of these — crimes against hu-
manity. This great principle was further con-
firmed by a resolution of the United Nations Gen-
eral Assembly of December 11, 1946.

International action is also being taken against
the crime of genocide — the slaughter of entire hu-
man groups — whether committed in time of peace
or in time of war. One of the most shocking
examples of genocide was the Nazi attempt to
exterminate an entire religious group deliberately
and methodically. The General Assembly of the
United Nations has denounced this terrible prac-
tice and has affirmed that genocide is a crime
under international law.

To prevent and punish the crime of genocide
in the future, a multilateral convention on the sub-
ject was prepared and approved by the General
Assembly of the United Nations in December of
1948. The convention is now before the various
members of the United Nations, as well as some
nonmember nations, for ratification. Over half
the ratifications necessary to bring the convention
into force have already been deposited.

I have asked the Senate of the United States
to give its advice and consent to the ratification
of that convention. I am hopeful that the Sen-
ate will do so before this Congress adjourns. We
must do our part to outlaw forever the mass
murder of innocent peoples.

Covenant of Human Rights

Another step toward the international protec-
tion of human rights was taken by the General
Assembly of the United Nations in December
1948, when it proclaimed the Universal Declara-
tion of Human Rights. Like our own Declara-
tion of Independence, this document asserts that
all membei's of the human family are endowed
with certain inalienable rights. It enumerates
and describes these fundamental rights and
freedoms.

But the Declaration of Human Rights is only
an appeal to the conscience of the world. It
offers no means of redress when rights are vio-
lated. To meet this need, a multilateral conven-
tion is now in preparation. This is designed to
make binding law out of a number of the guiding
principles of the Declaration. It will be known
as the Covenant on Human Rights.

The task of obtaining general agreement on such
a Covenant in the face of existing differences in
legal systems and of language barriers is, of

124

course, an arduous one. I have faith, however,
that the Covenant will ultimately be adopted and,
also, that it will be followed by other agreements
to give effect to the principles enunciated in the
Declaration of Human Rights.

Thus, bit by bit, new concepts of international
law and justice are taking form. Through an in-
ternational society of nations, the concept is de-
veloping that the barbarous treatment of individ-
uals by any nation is the concern of all nations.
This growth of international law is most im-
portant in building for peace.

It is a mistake to underestimate the significance
of these developments. In our divided world, it
is easy to point to the tremendous gulf between
the concept of individual human rights and the
attainment of conditions which will insure their
enjoyment. It is easy to be discouraged by the
difficulty of creating international safeguards
against the infringement of these rights.

Governments Created To Serve Human Rights

But we must remember that it is our belief that
governments are created to serve human rights.
We must understand clearly that our belief in
human rights is shared today by peoples all over
the world. We must have faith and vision
sufficient to realize that this belief is the rock on
which the peoples of the world can build a better
and a peaceful future.

In its beginnings, this world movement toward
the protection of human rights may not appear
particularly impressive. But the courts of the
District of Columbia were not very impressive,
either, when they were first set up, 150 years ago.
They were without buildings or physical equip-
ment and uncertain of their jurisdiction. These
courts have grown strong, because they are based
on a living truth. And so it will be with the quest
for the international protection of human rights.
It, too, will succeed, because it is based upon the
same great concept.

On us, as a nation, rests the responsibility of
taking a position of leadership in the struggle for
human rights. We cannot turn aside from the
task if we wish to remain true to the vision of
our forefathers and the ideals that have made our
history what it is.

Above the outward forms of our Government,
above our laws and the Constitution itself, there
is an eternal law of justice. This is the justice
of a God who created mankind to live together in
brotherly love. This is the justice by which all
the deeds of men are judged. The fundamental
purpose of our lives is to strive toward it, to the
best of human ability.

As a nation, we must devote ourselves to that
struggle. In the words of the ancient Hebrew
prophet, we should say, "Let judgment run down
as waters, and righteousness as a mighty stream."

In no other way can the nations of the earth
endure.

Department of State Bulletin

ADMINISTERING THE DISPLACED PERSONS ACT OF 1948, AS AMENDED

iy Herve J. VHeureux
Chiefs Visa Division

The Displaced Persons Act of 1948, as amended
by Public Law 555, gives the Department of State
and its consular officers major responsibility for
administering four new programs :

1. The immigration of up to 18,000 Polish vet-
erans in Great Britain, sometimes referred to as
Anders Army Poles ;

2. The immigration of up to 4,000 refugees from
China ;

3. The immigration of Greek refugees and of
certain nationals of Greece, entitled to preference
status under our regular quota laws;

4. The immigration of European refugees in
Europe outside Germany, Austria, and Italy, some-
times called "out-of-zone refugees."

Together with the Displaced Persons Commis-
sion and the Immigration and Naturalization
Service, the Department of State and its consular
officers, as in the past, share responsibility for
;he immigration of all other persons who may be
ssued immigration visas under the act, with these
nodifications :

1. The program for the admission of persons
)f ethnic German origin, formerly exclusively in
-he hands of the consuls, and of the Immigration
,nd Naturalization Service has now been made the
)rimary responsibility of the Displaced Persons
I!ommission whose favorable findings are subject
Jo review by the consuls and by the immigration
tuthorities. Assurances of employment, housing,
nd against becoming a public charge are now re-
uired to be submitted, for this class of immigrants,
o the Displaced Persons Commission, as in the
ase of eligible persons and eligible displaced
rphans ;

uly 24, 1950

2. Although under the original act the Displaced
Persons Commission had exclusive authority to
determine the eligibility of displaced persons
under the act. Public Law 555 leaves the first de-
termination of such eligibility in the hands of the
Commission but gives the consular officer and the
Immigration and Naturalization Service the right
to review those cases approved by the Displaced
Persons Commission and to take adverse action
if they do not agree with the findings of the
Commission.

Briefly, the principal problems confronting the
Department and our consular officers in adminis-
tering those programs of the Displaced Persons
Act for which the Department of State carries
major responsibility, are these :

As soon as the President signed the amendnsents
to the Displaced Persons Act, the Department sent
instructions to its consular officers in Germany,
Austria, and Italy that informed them of the
major provisions of the new act and enabled them
to issue visas in most cases that originate with
the Displaced Persons Commission. Also, the
Visa Division commenced the preparation of a
first draft of regulations which are expected to
cover all phases of the consular responsibilities in
relation to the Displaced Persons Act.

The regulations, although desirable and help-
ful in implementing the act, are actually not re-
quired by the act except in relation to assurances
which may be submitted in lieu of affidavits or
other evidence of support for certain groups.
However, it is planned to cover by regulation the
full range of the program and to anticipate as
many questions as may arise under the act so that

125

in administering the act questions of interpreta-
tion and policy will cause a minimum of delay.

In reference to the procedure and problems in
relation to those parts of the displaced persons
program for which the Department carries the
major responsibility, certain general observations
apply to all four groups.

In lieu of affidavits of support or other evidence
of support, assurances of employment, housing,
and against becoming a public charge, may be
submitted by a citizen or citizens of the United
States for the Polish veterans in Great Britain,
refugees from Cliina, the Greek refugees and
Greek preferentials, and for the so-called Euro-
pean "out-of-zone" refugees.

Congress has made this provision in order that
American organizations interested in these groups
of refugees may assist in their resettlement. In
these cases, either form of evidence will be ac-
ceptable and either may be used for different indi-
viduals. Affidavits of support in these cases may
be submitted by aliens as well as by citizens ; only
assurances of employment, housing, and against
becoming a public charge must be submitted by a
citizen or citizens of the United States. If the
alien submits a satisfactory affidavit of support,
which may indicate available employment, he is
exempt from the contract labor provisions in sec-
tion 3, Act of February 5, 1917. He is likewise
exempt from those provisions of the Act of Feb-
ruary 5, 1917, which bar aliens whose passage is
paid for by corporations and others. In other
words, an applicant is entitled to the exemptions
specified whether he submits affidavits of support
or an assurance as authorized in the Displaced
Persons Act of 1948, as amended.

Although the Department and its consular offi-
cers will do everything possible to assist in ad-
ministering the Displaced Persons Act, every
effort will be made to prevent the entry into the
United States of any alien who may be a source
of danger to our country. The question of se-
curity shall be paramount. Therefore, consular
officers are being instructed to exercise particular
care in screening applicants of the groups referred
to inasmuch as the thorough investigation and
written report required of eligible displaced per-
sons and persons of German ethnic origin is not
required for these groups.

All groups referred to must meet certain resi-
dence requirements in order to qualify under the

act. A Polish veteran, for example, must have
resided in the British Isles on June 16, the effec-
tive date of the amended act. The question has
been raised whether a person meeting this resi-
dence requirement who has since moved to other
countries, for example, to a country in the Western
Hemisphere, without being firmly resettled there,
could apply there for a visa. It is doubtful that
Congress intended that he should be permitted to
apply there for a visa. For the time being, at
least, the issuance of visas to Polish veterans will
be restricted to our consular offices in the British
Isles.

There are exceptions, of course. Eefugees from
China, if otherwise qualified, may apply for visas
anywhere in the world outside of the United
States as long as they are not firmly resettled.
The same rule applies in the case of Greek refu-
gees, some of whom have found temporary asylum
in neighboring countries.

In cases in which affidavits of support have
already been submitted for aliens in the four
groups described, new affidavits may not have to
be submitted, assuming the date of preparation of
such affidavits and corroboratory evidence is rea-
sonably current. No rule applies, except that of
reason, regarding the length of time such affidavits
may be regarded as having probative value. This
value depends to a great extent upon the relations
between the applicant and the sponsor, the surplus
margin of income shown, and the apparent per-
manency of the means of support of the sponsor
as indicated in the affidavit and accompanying
evidence. The consul, of course, has the final re-
sponsibility to determine whether the evidence
submitted is satisfactory. Wherever doubt exists
in the mind of the sponsor, he should possibly sub-
mit new evidence to the consul.

The Department of State is preparing assurance
forms for use by citizens and American organiza-
tions who wish to sponsor persons within the four
groups. The Department's regulations will set
forth, in considerable detail, the manner in which
these assurances are to be submitted.

As a rule a sponsor will have to submit assur-
ances directly to the consular office in which the
alien plans to apply for his immigration visa. It
is not planned to sot up a "validation procedure"
similar to that of the Displaced Persons Commis-
sion at Washington. However, the Department
will exercise a general supervision over the work
performed by consuls as it is presently doing with

126

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

reference to all consular activities. It also plans
to require consuls to refer to the Department un-
named assurances ; that is, assurances which do not
identify an alien by name but only by skill, if the
consul within a reasonable period of time is un-
able to find an applicant meeting the requirement
of the assurance. The Department will then refer
these assurances to other consular offices where
Such applicants might be registered. The Depart-
ment will also request consuls to set up a vocational
index for all registrants so they can handle "un-
named assurances" as expeditiously as possible.

Polish Veterans in Great Britain

Eighteen thousand immigration visas may be
issued to Polish veterans in Great Britain. The
act requires that these persons, in order to qualify,
must have resided in the British Isles on June 16,
1950, and must have registered for immigration
visas with an American consul in Great Britain
before that date. The terms "Great Britain"
and "British Isles," as used in the act, are con-
sidered to be synonymous. The Department does
not know how many persons in Great Britain may
qualify under this provision. Requests for in-
formation regarding specific cases should be
addressed to the American consul with whom the
applicant is registered, otherwise to the consul gen-
eral at London who will, most likely, be desig-
nated as the coordinator for the Polish program.
Within a few weeks, consuls in England will begin
to process cases under this program, particularly
cases in which satisfactory affidavits of support
have been submitted. In determining whether an
applicant is firmly resettled in England, the con-
sul will be guided by the expressed Congressional
intent that registration for an immigration visa
with an American consular officer in Great Britain
before June 16 shall be considered indicative of the
failure of such registrant to become either firmly
settled or resettled, notwithstanding the provisions
of British legislation, except in the case in which
such person has applied for British citizenship.

To qualify as a "Polish veteran," a person does
not have to be a native of Poland. As a matter of
fact, many Polish veterans were born in other
central European countries, such as Czechoslo-
vakia.

Refugees From China

Four thousand immigration visas may be issued
to refugees from China. They must be "Iro ref u-

Jo/y 24, J 950

gees" who resided in China on July 1, 1948, or on
June 16, 1950, and who are either still in China
or have departed but have not been ijermanently
resettled. Most of the beneficiaries of this pro-
vision are the so-called Samar refugees, persons
who were received for temporary refuge by the
Goverimient of the Philippine Islands after the oc-
cupation of parts of China by Communist forces.
The files of these aliens are being assembled and
forwarded to Manila, pending the opening of an
office at Samar. Therefore, affidavits or assur-
ances, when the assurance forms become available,
may be sent directly to the American Legation at
Manila. Every effort is being made to hasten the
implementation of this program, but technical diffi-
culties must be overcome in setting up offices at
Samar and in providing staff and equipment. An-
other serious question will be presented in con-
nection with this group as far as the security check
is concerned since, in many instances, security files
established in various consular offices in China
have been destroyed.

The Department is making efforts to have the
United States Public Health Service examine all
applicants at Samar at the earliest possible date,
even before a consular office is actually opened,
thereby eliminating applicants mandatorily inad-
missible on medical grounds.

Greek Refugees and Greek Preferentiais

Seven thousand five hundred visas are author-
ized to be issued to Greek refugees and 2,500 to
Greek preferentiais. The Greek refugees are na-
tives of Greece, who are either victims of military
operations in Greece by the Nazi government or
by military operations in Greece by the Com-
munist guerrillas. The term "native" as used in
the Act will be interpreted to mean persons born
on Greek soil and other persons chargeable to the
Greek quota under the Immigration Act of 1924.

Greek preferentiais are persons who, prior to
June 30, 1950, were residents and nationals of
Greece and are eligible for admission into the
United States as first or second preference quota
immigrants; that is, as the wife or minor child
of an alien admitted for permanent residence, or
as parent, or husband by marriage subsequent to
January 1, 1948, if an American citizen; or as a
skilled agriculturist, as provided in the 1924 act.
The term "nationals of Greece" will be interpreted
as including any person who is a citizen of Greece
regardless of his place of birth or the quota to

127

which he is chargeable under the Immigration Act
of 1924,

Many more persons will undoubtedly qualify for
admission under these provisions than the number
of visas authorized for them. Greek refugees will
be issued visas in the order of their registration,
and they should be advised to register with the
American consular offices, in the district where
they reside, at the earliest possible date. Imme-
diate registration is also advised for alien wives
and minor children, of lawfully admitted perma-
nent residents of the United States, who intend to
apply for visas. The alien relatives in the United
States should file with the Immigration and Nat-
uralization Service Form 1-475 verifying their
lawful admission, which form will then be sent
to the appropriate American consular office.
American citizens who desire to bring in their
alien parents or their husbands by marriage since
January 1, 1948, should be advised to file with the
Immigi-ation and Naturalization Service Petition
Form 1-133.

European Refugees in Europe

This class consists of aliens who, between Sep-
tember 1, 1939, and January 1, 1949, entered an
area or country in Europe outside Italy or the
American, British, or French sectors or zones of
Germany or Austria. In order to qualify under
this class, the aliens must establish that they are
persons of European national origin displaced
from the country of their birth or nationality or
of their last residence, as a result of events subse-
quent to the outbreak of World War II ; and they
must be unable to return to any of such countries
because of persecution or fear of persecution on
account of race, religion, or political opinions.
Also, they must not have been firmly resettled in
any other country. Between July 1, 1950, and
June 30, 1954, 50 percent of the nonpreference por-
tion of the immigration quotas under the 1924
act will be made available to such aliens. Visas
issued to them are in addition to those 341,000
authorized under the Displaced Persons Act.

In determining what constitutes "last residence,"
the Department plans to define in its regulations
this term as meaning the country of the alien's
residence in which he had the right to reside per-
manently and the right to work.

The issuance of quota visas under the Displaced
Persons Act does not depend on the availability
of quotas since future quotas are charged where

the current quota is oversubscribed. Therefore,
the incentive to an alien to misrepresent his place
of birth in order to be chargeable to a more favor-
able quota does not exist in the case of eligible
displaced persons who may be issued visas under
the act. Consular officers will, therefore, be in-
structed not to insist upon presentation of birth
certificates if they are not reasonably procurable.
An exception applies only in cases where a consul
knows, or has reason to believe, that an applicant
for a visa was not born in the country he lists as
his country of birth. In such case, the consul will
require secondary evidence in the absence of a
birth certificate. Also, where police certificates
are not reasonably available, as a rule, the consul
will accept, instead, character references and other
evidence.

In addition to the major groups, there is another
gi-oup of persons benefiting under the Displaced
Persons Act of 1948, as amended, for whose im-
migration the Department carries the primary and
major responsibility. This group includes alien
children, chargeable to the German or Austrian
quotas under the provisions of the Immigration
Act of 1924, for whom section 12 of the Displaced
Persons Act, as amended, contains special pro-
vision for the issuance of visas. In order to qual-
ify for visa issuance, these children must not have
passed their sixteenth birthday on June 25, 1948,
and before May 1, 1949, must have been legally
adopted, under the laws of the country in which
they resided, by American citizens residing abroad
temporarily. These children are accorded what
might be called a "super priority" in that they are
entitled to be issued quota visas ahead of any other
group specified in the Immigration Act of 1924
and in preference to any alien admissible as a
quota immigrant under the Displaced Persons Act.
This provision is intended to facilitate the admis-
sion of children adopted by members of the armed
forces and other American personnel temporarily
stationed during the war and postwar period in
Germany. In view of the rather stringent date-
line requirements, possibly few qualified appli-
cants will fall in this category.

Notwithstanding the top priority provided for
the issuance of visas to these children, they are
classifiable as nonpreference quota immigrants.
Tliese children are exempt from paying visa fees
and are also exempt from the provisions of the
contract labor law and from those excluding pro-
visions of the 1917 act barring the admission of

128

Department of State Bulletin

aliens whose passage has been paid for by cor-
liorations, individuals, or others.

In regard to the four groups discussed earlier,
that is, the refugees from China, Polish veterans
in Great Britain, Greek refugees and Greek
preferentials, and European refugees in Europe,
a few general observations should be made.

Spouses and unmarried dependent children
under 21 years of age, including adopted children
and stepchildren of pei-sons qualifying for visa
issuance as membere of any of the four groups
described, may be issued visas within the numeri-
cal limitation provided for each group if such
persons are otherwise admissible into the United
States.

The Department has been asked whether visas
authorized to be issued to these special groups are
exclusively reserved for them or, if not used by
these special groups, whether they can be used by
the general group of eligible displaced persons.
It was not the intent of Congress to reserve, ex-
clusively, for example, 18,000 visas for Polish
veterans in England if there should not be so many
qualified applicants. On the other hand, consular
officers should be given ample time to issue visas
to these special groups before they can reasonably
conclude that there are not any more qualified ap-
plicants and that, accordingly, unused numbers
earmarked for them can be made available to
eligible displaced persons. This whole question
will have to be reviewed after the programs have
been under way for some time.

The Department expects to publish its regula-
tions very shortly. However, in order to give full
implementation to the act, personnel changes must
be made; the opening of new offices will be re-
quired; additional supplies and equipment must
be obtained ; the proposed regulations must be ap-
proved by the Department's legal adviser and by
the Attorney General before they can be signed
by the Secretary of State ; and other phases of the
work must be coordinated with appropriate politi-
cal officers and by those officials of the Department
who are charged with the administration of the
Foreign Service.

The Visa Division is a technical unit which is
responsible for only one phase of consular adminis-
tration of the displaced persons program, namely,
supervision of the execution of the law and the
regulations. Administration and policy are
primarily the responsibility of other units of the
Department.

As in the past, the Visa Division welcomes any
suggestion from public or voluntary agencies, from
other citizen groups interested in the administra-
tion of the program, and from our consular per-
sonnel. Many valuable and helpful suggestions
have already been received. The Department of
State is making every effort to resolve procedural
and policy questions in a mutually satisfactory
way and in a way that it believes to be in compli-
ance with the intent of Congress.

Scope of Atomic Energy
Program Expanded

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press hy the White House July 7]

I have today transmitted to the Congress a sup-
plemental appropriation request for the Atomic
Energy Commission for fiscal year 1951, in the
amount of 260 million dollars, to enable the Com-
mission to build additional and more efficient
plants and related f acilties required in furtherance
of my directive of January 31, 1950. That direc-
tive called upon the Commission to continue its
work on all forms of atomic weapons, including the
hydrogen or fusion bomb. These additional plants,
like the existing facilities, will provide materials
which can be used either for weapons or for fuels
potentially useful for power purposes. The plants
will be of advanced design, and their operation
will provide new knowledge that will speed the
progress of the atomic energy program. In this
new undertaking, the Atomic Energy Commission
has my complete confidence, based upon the able
and vigorous leadership which it has given to the
atomic energy program in the past. We shall,
moreover, continue to depend heavily upon the in-
genuity and cooperation of American industry.

The expansion in the scope of our atomic energy
program gives added emphasis to the fact that
atomic energy has great potentialities both for de-
struction and for the benefit of mankind. From
the very outset, we have stood, and we continue to
stand, firm in our desire for effective international
control of atomic energy to insure its use for peace-
ful purposes only. This is a fundamental objec-
tive to which this Government and the vast
majority of the United Nations have committed
their best efforts. Agreement on this goal would
make the facilities of our atomic energy enterprise
fully available for peaceful purposes. Until this
objective is achieved, however, we must strengthen
our own defenses by providing the necessary
atomic energy production capacity.

July 24, 7950

129

Assistance Placed at Disposal
of Unified Command in Korea

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press July 12]

Fifty-six out of 59 members of the United Na-
tions have responded to the Security Council reso-
lution of June 27 ^ which recommended that the
members of the United Nations furnish such as-
sistance to the Republic of Korea as may be neces-
sary to repel the armed attack and to restore inter-
national peace and security in the area.

Three of these 56, the U.S.S.R., Czechoslovakia,
and Poland, rejected the resolution.

Of the remaining 53 states which replied, with
possibly one exception, all have given at least
some moral support to the resolution.

Military assistance has been oifered by the
United Kingdom, New Zealand, Australia, Can-
ada, the Republic of China, and the Netherlands.
I understand that other states are considering
making offers. Other assistance, chiefly economic,
has already been offered by Thailand, Norway,
Denmark, Chile, the Philippines, and Nicaragua.

The Security Council resolution recommencling
a unified command under the United States was
passed on July 7.^ The machinery has not yet been
created to take full advantage of the vigorous sup-
port which has been given to the United Nations
resolutions. It is expected that this machinery
will be set up in the very near future. In the
meantime, however, naval and air contingents
from Australia, New Zealand, and the United
Kingdom are already operating under the unified
command, and contributions from Canada and the
Netherlands will be arriving shortly.

Many states have indicated a desire to assist but
do not know what types of assistance within their
capabilities would be useful. Advantage will be
taken of these offers as soon as channels are set up.

Your prompt and accurate reporting of the situ-
ation, the dispatch and efficiency with which you
carried out the evacuation of the many American
citizens for whom you were responsible, and the
confidence which you have inspired in the face of
the unpi'ovoked aggression against Korea are in
the finest tradition of the Foreign Service.

Korean Foreign Minister
Expresses Gratitude for U.S. Aid

[Released to the press July 15]

Secretary of State Acheson has received the following
message, dated July H, from the Foreign Minister of the
Reinihlic of Korea, Ben C. Limb.

In this hour of extreme trial for the Korean
nation, I want you to know how deeply grateful
we are for the magnificent fight America is waging
to save Korea as well as democracy, and for your
own great personnel service in it. Korea is very
proud to be the front-line ally of the United States
and the United Nations and most emphatically
pledges all in her power to win a lasting victory
for tlie cherished common cause.

The Government and people of Korea feel sure,
and I know you do, that now is the time and Korea
is the place to demonstrate to the world once and
for all that democracy is the only way of peaceful
life, and that despotic Communism must be de-
cisively defeated. The morale and stamina of our
forces are very high. The fighting ability and
the material power of the American and Allied
Forces are unsurpassed. I know that our over-all
victory is only a question of time. We are all very
confident here.

Korea will never forget what the government
and people of America are doing for her; it will
go down in Korean history for many centuries as
a great turning point in her national life. I shall
highly appreciate it if you will kindly convey this
sentiment to President Truman, the Armed
Forces, and the people of the United States.

Ambassador Muccio Commended
on Performance of Duty in Korea

[Released to the press July 13]

Secretary Acheson has sent the following message to
John J. Muccio, United States Ambassador to the Re-
public of Korea.

The President has asked me to extend to you and
to your staff his appreciation and commendation
for your courageous and effective performance of
duty since the onset of the present emergency in
Korea.

' Bulletin of July 3, 1950, p. 7.
' Bulletin of July 17, 1950, p. 83.

United States Policy
in the Korean Crisis

The Department of State released on July 20
United States in the Korean Crisis. The Depart-
ment in this publication presents the documents
bearing on United States policy toward the de-
velopments in Korea in order to place full and
accurate information on such critical events before
the people of the United States and the world so
that they may reach informed judgments concern-
ing the actions of this Government.

Included in this account is a narrative describ-
ing the events from June 25, 1950 (Korean time),

130

Department of Slate Bulletin

when the North Korean forces launched an all-out
offensive across the 38tli parallel against the Re-
public of Korea to July 8 when President Truman
complied with a Security Council resolution, re-
questing all nations supplying forces and other
assistance for the defense of the Republic of Korea
to put them under a unified command headed by
the United States, and designated General Mac-
Arthur as commanding general of the forces
operating in Korea.

More than a himdred accompanying dociunents
cover the period from June 25-July 11, 1950.

United States Policy hi the Korean Crisis (xi,
68 pp.). Department of State publication 3922,
may be purchased from the Superintendent of
Dociunents, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington 25, D.C., for 25(4 a copy.

Soviet World-Peace Appeal
Called Propaganda Trick

Stateme7\t hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press July 12]

I am sure that the American people will not be
fooled by the so-called world-peace appeal or
"Stockholm Resolution" now being circulated in
this country for signatures. It should be recog-
nized for what it is — a propaganda trick in the
spurious "peace offensive of the Soviet Union.

The resolution was adopted last March at the
Stockholm session of the Partisans of Peace, an
international organization established by the
Communists, and the campaign for signatures in
the United States is being actively promoted by
the Communist Party.

An analysis of the petition shows that it tries to
do two things: (1) promote the unenforceable
Soviet proposals concerning atomic energy, ignor-
ing the effective control plan approved by the over-
whelming majority of the United Nations and
opposed only by the Soviet Union and four of its
satellites; and (2) center attention on the use of
atomic weapons by branding as a war criminal the
first nation to use atomic weapons, ignoring the
aggression in other forms presently being prac-
ticed by the Communists.

As for the second point, namely, that the first
nation to use atomic weapons will liave committed
a crime against humanity and should be branded as
a war criminal, it is obvious that this is an utterly
cynical begging of the question. The real crime
against humanity is aggression and, in particular,
the deliberate resort to armed aggression in defi-
ance of the United Nations. The war criminals
are the people who sanction such action. The
weapons used are quite incidental to the crime.
Thus, the Communists throughout the world have

given the lie to the Stockholm proposal in their
support of North Korean aggression.

Just before the North Korean armed forces
launched their unprovoked attack against the Re-
public of Korea, more than half the population of
North Korea was reported to have signed the peti-
tion. This illustrates better than anything else
the basic hypocrisy of the Communist "peace
appeal."

Soviet Tactics Again Stall
Negotiations on Austrian Treaty

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press July 12]

The deputies for the Austrian treaty negotia-
tions met in London on July 10 for their 256th
meeting. In obvious preparation for this meeting,
the Soviet Government on July 8 sent to the Amer-
ican Embassy in Moscow a second note regarding
the Allied position in Trieste. This second note
merely repeats the unfounded allegations in the
Soviet note of April 20.

This Government's I'eply of June 16 ^ adequately
answered those allegations. There is, of course,
no valid reason for linking the two questions, but,
true to the Soviet propaganda pattern, the Soviet
deputy for the Austrian treaty negotiations, at the
July 10 meeting, instead of discussing the remain-
ing unagreed articles of the Austrian treaty,
utilized the meeting to read a prepared statement
on Trieste.

This Soviet action once again emphasizes that
the Soviet Government does not wish to conclude
an Austrian treaty at this time despite the pledge
which it made in the Moscow Declaration in 1943
to reestablish Austria as a free and independent
nation.^ The efforts of the Western deputies to
negotiate and conclude the treaty were unsuccess-
ful and, in view of the impasse, the -deputies ad-
journed, with the Western deputies a^eeing to
meet again on September 7. The Soviet deputy
stated that it would be necessary for him to refer
to his Government for consideration the Western
proposal to meet again on September 7.

The British, French, and United States Foreign
Ministers agreed at their meeting in London last
May that their respective Governments are ready
at any time to settle without delay all outstanding
issues of the treaty provided that this will defi-
nitely bring about agreement on the treaty as a
whole. ^ The principles agreed upon by the three

'For text of the U.S. note, answering the Soviet note
of April 20, see Bulletin of June 26, 1950, p. 1054.
' Bulletin of Nov. 6, 1943, p. 311.
• Bulletin of June 26, 1950, p. 1054.

July 24, 1950

131

Foreign Ministers were communicated to the So-
viet Government on June 12 * in the hope that the
Soviet Government would agree to associate itself
with the program and that more definite progress
in the solution of the Austrian problem might thus
be achieved. No reply has been received from the
Soviet Government to this approach.

The only true basis on which Austria can exer-
cise full sovereignty is by four-power agreement
and the withdrawal from Austrian soil of all forces
of occupation. It is fundamental that the Gov-
ernment of the United States desires the achieve-
ment of this objective.

Soviet actions designed to prevent conclusion of
the Austrian treaty must necessarily result in a
delay in the fulfillment of Austria's desire, with
which this Government is in full sympathy, to
enjoy complete independence. Under these cir-
stances, the three Western Governments are en-

deavoring, within the framework of existing
four-power agreements, to carry out such measures
as may properly be taken to strengthen the au-
thority of the Austrian Government and to lighten
Austria's occupation burdens.

It should be borne in mind, in this connection,
that any steps heretofore taken or to be taken by
this Government to reduce Austria's occupation
burdens are not regarded as a substitute for the
treaty. Our actions, in this respect, are endeavors
on our part to take such constructive measures as
may properly be taken, pending conclusion of the
treaty, to fulfill our obligations under the Control
Agreement of 1946 ^ which provides that the
Allied Commission for Austria shall assist the
freely elected Government of Austria to recreate
a sound and democratic national life and to assume
as quickly as possible full control of its own affairs
of state.

Soviet Delay in Repatriating German War Prisoners

COMPLETE DISREGARD OF HUMAN RIGHTS

[Released to the press July 141

Following is the text of a note delivered today to the
Soviet Foreign Office by the American Embassy at Mos-
0010 on the subject of prisoners of war still in Soviet
custody.

The Ambassador of the United States of Amer-
ica presents his compliments to the Minister of
Foreign Affairs of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics and on instructions for his Govern-
ment has the honor to refer to the Soviet press
announcement of May 5, 1950, stating that the
repatriation of German prisoners of war from the
Soviet Union to Germany has been completed with
the exception of 9,717 persons convicted of grave
war crimes, 3,815 persons whose alleged war crimes
are in the process of investigation, and 14 persons
detained owing to illness.

The Government of the United States shares the
shock and concern of the German people over this
public announcement, and is unable to give cre-
dence to the Soviet statement that there are only
13,546 German prisoners of war in its custody.
These figures are completely at variance with the
information in the possession of the Govenunent
of the United States, showing that large numbers
of German prisoners of war known to have been in

* Bulletin of July 10, 1950, p. 74.
' Bulletin of July 28, 1946, p. 175.

the Soviet custody have not yet been returned to
their homes.

The Soviet Government is again informed that,
in accordance with the agreement reached by the
Council of Foreign Ministers at Moscow in April
1947 for the repatriation before December 31,
1948, of all German prisoners of war in the custody
of the four occupying powers, the United States,
the United Kingdom, and France did in fact re-
patriate all German prisoners of war in their
custody prior to the agreed date. The United
States, on its part, actually completed its program
of repatriation of German prisoners of war as
early as June 30, 1947.

Tlie Government of the Soviet Union has repeat-
edly failed to respond to requests for pertinent
information of its actions under the agreement of
April 1947. On January 24, 1949, the Soviet Min-
ister of Foreign Affairs, in acknowledging receipt
of one of these inquiries, admitted that an unspec-
ified number of German prisoners of war were still
held in Soviet custody, failing however to furnish
any information concerning them, but stating
unequivocally that the Soviet Government would
complete the repatriation of German prisoners of
war remaining in its custody during 1949. It is
clear from the announcement of May 5, 1950, that
the Soviet Government has failed to honor this

132

Department of State Bulletin

commitment just as it lias failed to honoi" its earlier
commitment of April 1947. In this connection,
the Government of the United States desires to
make it plain that the arbitrary reclassification
by the Soviet Government of prisoners of war as
civilians would not, of course, have the effect of
relieving- the Soviet Government of its obligation
to return these persons to their homes and families.
By its delay in repatriating these German pris-
oners of war, and by its repeated refusal to furnish
information concerning them, the Soviet Govern-
ment has caused suffering and anxiety for large
numbers of prisoners of war in the Soviet custody
and their relatives and friends, and has demon-
strated a complete disregard for the fundamental
human rights of the unfortunate persons con-
cerned. The Soviet Government alone has the
power to mitigate this suffering, and it could do so
by taking the following steps :

(1) Furnish full information on the identifica-
tion of the 9,7l7 persons alleged to have been con-
victed of grave war crimes, the 3,815 persons whose
alleged war crimes are in the process of investiga-
tion, and the 14 persons said to be under treatment
for illness, who are still retained by the Soviet
Union as stated in the Soviet announcement of
May 5. This information would include the
present location and treatment of these persons,
data on the sentences imposed on those said to have
been convicted of war crimes, and the status of the
investigations pending, as well as information
with respect to measures taken by the Soviet
Government to ensure the right of these prisoners
of war to correspond with their families in
Germany.

(2) In accordance with the Geneva Convention
of July 27, 1929, to which the Soviet Union is a
party, to provide information on the number,
identity, date of death and place of burial of pris-
oners of war and civilian internees who have died
in captivity in the Soviet Union or in transit.

(3) Permit investigation in the Soviet Union
by an impartial international body in order that
the actual fate of the prisoners of war known to
have been in Soviet custody may be ascertained.
For this purpose, the Government of the United
States suggests the appointment of an ad hoc com-
mission designated by the United Nations, or a
^roup composed of representatives of the four
powers now occupying Germany, or representa-
:ives of neutral powers, or any other group mutu-
illy acceptable. It is noted in this connection that
he United States, the United Kingdom, and
France, at the time when they still had German
prisoners of war in their custody, furnished full
nformation concerning them to the interested
)arties, and permitted full and impartial access to
he prisoners of war by international agencies.

In concerning itself at this time with the ques-
ion of German prisoners of war, a question on
vhich the Soviet Government has made and

broken specific commitments, the Government of
the United States does not overlook the equally
disturbing parallel situation concerning the So-
viet failure to repatriate, or to account for, the
numerous nationals of the German-occupied coun-
tries who were taken prisoners during the war, or
who were brought to the U.S.S.K. as civilian in-
ternees.

Information concerning the action which the
Soviet Government is prepared to take on this
matter would be welcomed by the Government of
the United States, which would be willing to coop-
erate in any appropriate way.
* * *

The British and French Embassies are also com-
municating with the Soviet Government on this
subject.

As is well-known, the continued detention of
German prisoners of war in the Soviet Union has
been a matter of concern to the United States
Government ^ and to the Governments of the
United Kingdom and France for a considerable
period. The Foreign Ministers of the United
States, the United Kingdom, and France issued a
statement at London on May 12 with respect to
this subject which stated that the Foreign Min-
isters had agreed to take all possible steps to ob-
tain information bearing on the fate of prisoners
of war and civilians not yet repatriated from the
Soviet Union and to bring about repatriation in
the largest possible number of cases.

Americans Visiting Abroad

Ernest Carroll Faust, head of the Division of
Parasitology, Tulane University School of Medi-
cine, New Orleans, Louisiana, will lecture at the
University of Chile for the summer term.

Clifford H. MacFadden, assistant professor of
geography, at the University of California, Los
Angeles, will teach geography at the University
of Ceylon, Colombo, Celyon, for 1 year.

Francis M. Rogers, associate professor of ro-
mance languages and literature and dean of the
graduate school of arts and sciences, Harvard
University, will lecture for C weeks in Brazil.

John M. Henderson, of the Division of Public
Health, Columbia University Medical School, will
serve as visiting consultant at various schools of
public health and confer with public health offi-
cials in Argentina, Brazil, and Chile for 3 months
this summer.

These visits have been made possible through
grants-in-aid awarded by the Department of State.

1 For texts of previous communications on the subject
of German prisoners of war in Soviet custody, see Bitl-
LETiN of Jan. 16, 1949, p. 77; Mar. 27, 1949, p. 389; June
26, 1949, p. 824.

o/y 24, 1950

133

Soviet "Beetle'' Charge Labeled Ridiculous Propaganda

COMMUNIST FABRICATIONS AIM TO
COVER PEST CONTROL FAILURE

[Released to the press July 6]

The Soviet Government, in a note dated June
30, 1950, has identified itself with ridiculous propa-
ganda statements emanating for several weeks past
from Eastern European Communist regimes alleg-
ing that the occurrence of potato bugs in certain
areas of Eastern Germany has been caused by the
"dropping" of these insects fi'om American air-
planes.

It is interesting to note that the Soviet propa-
gandists have borrowed this whole invention from
the Nazis who during the war used to level the
same fantastic charge against Allied airplanes.

The facts — of which the Soviet Government was
undoubtedly aware when making ita charges^are
that potato bugs, or Colorado beetles, have existed
in Germany since before the war; have been
spreading rapidly in wartime due to the absence
of effective countermeasures ; and were recognized
as a serious threat to the East zone economy by
the Eastern German puppet government several
months prior to the date of the alleged American
bug offensive. A decree by the so-called German
Democratic Republic, dated March 2, 1950, ordered
the initiation of a major antipotato beetle cam-
paign throughout the entire area of the Soviet
zone. Special measures were to be concentrated
in a belt following the Czechoslovak and Polish
borders, apparently in an attempt to protect east-
ern Europe and the U.S.S.R. from further beetle
invasions. This problem had been one of major
concern to the Polish authorities as early as May
1949 when a nation-wide conference was held in
Warsaw, devoted to the combating of plant pests,
especially the potato beetle. Furthermore, the
Soviet Government itself issued a pamphlet en-
titled. The Colorado Potato Beetle^ signed for
printing May 16 — 6 days before United States
planes are supposed to have "dropped" the beetles
over Eastern Germany — in which the population
of the Soviet Union was instruct-ed to take special
precautions against an invasion of potato bugs
from Germany.

Manifestly, the Eastern German authorities
have been unable to cope with the problem. On

134

May 17, the official paper of the Socialist Unity
(Communist) Party for Saxony-Anhalt published
an appeal to the population, betraying distinct
alarm at long last to institute search parties and
other countermeasures. The appeal contains this
sentence: "The annual increase of swarms can be
traced to the fact that searches and chemical coun-
termeasures have repeatedly and consistently been
instituted too late, in spite of all orders." Mean-
while, the potato bug has spread farther into East-
ern Europe; and Soviet-German authorities are
faced with one other problem : the threat of a seri-
ous potato shortage this year, caused by a number
of factors besides the bug, such as inadequate agri-
cultural methods and last year's poor crop in
Eastern Germany which compelled the peasants
to consume a substantial portion of seed potatoes
during the planting season.

U.S. REPLY TO SOVIET NOTE

[Released to the press July 7]

The followinff is the text of the United States reply to
the Soviet note of June 30 alleging American responsibility
for potato crop infestation in East Qermany. The United
States note was delivered to the Soviet Foreign Ministry
hy the United States Embassy at Moscow today.

While reluctant to give weight and credence to
this communication (The Soviet Note of June 30)
as an official message of the Ministry of Foreign
Affairs of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
the Government of the United States nevertheless
now feels obliged, in view of the extraordinary al-
legations contained therein, to point out that the
Ministry of Foreign Affairs has neglected to ac-
quaint itself with the most elementary and gener-
ally known facts of the situation with which its
communication purports to deal.

It is apparent that the Ministry has not even
troubled to consult with competent Soviet and
Eastern European experts familiar with the his-
tory of potato crop infestation in Eastern Europe
and whose description of the progress of this
infestation over a period of years has appeared in
official Soviet and other Eastern European pub-
lications.

Department of State Bulletin

This Government prefers to consider that the
Ministry has neglected to consult even its own of-
ficial publications on this subject rather than to
believe that the Soviet authorities are trafficking
lightly for propaganda or other purposes in mat-
ters vital to the welfare of the people of Eastern
Europe.

What has happened in obvious enough : the Com-
munist authorities in Eastern Germany have failed
to bring the bug problem under control and pro-
tect the agriculture of other satellite countries and
of the Soviet Union. Moreover, they are in need
of an excuse for the anticipated shortage. Instead
of holding them responsible for the hardships their
failure will cause to the people of Eastern Ger-
many and Eastern Europe, the Soviet Government
has resorted to a well-known device and invented
a "saboteur" — this time in the guise of the United
States Air Force. Soviet and German Communist
authorities are undoubtedly aware of the fact that
American aircraft have strictly and consistently
observed the established corridor and have at no
time flown over the areas in which the beetles are
alleged to have been dropped.

In the present world situation, fraught with ex-
plosive tensions, the Soviet Government has chosen
to poison the atmosphere even further with one of
the most fantastic fabrications that has ever been
invented by one government against another. In
this whole absurd and ridiculous propaganda in-
vention, this is the one fact that deserves to be
noted.

U.S. ANSWERS CZECHOSLOVAK CHARGES

[Released to the press July 7]

The follotmng is the text of a note sent by the Amer-
ican Embassy at Praha to the Czechoslovak Foreign
Office on July 6 with reference to Cxechoslorak allega-
tions concerning the potato bug.

The American Embassy presents its compli-
ments to the Czechoslovak Ministry of Foreign
Affairs and has the honor to make the following
observations with reference to the potato bug :

To the extent that the potato bug represents a
Czechoslovakian domestic problem, it is not a
matter of concern to the American Embassy,
which nevertheless expresses its sympathy over
the damage to Czechoslovak agricultural produc-
tion caused by the insect in question.

To the extent, however, that efforts have been
made in Czechoslovakia to connect the United
States with the presence of the potato bug in this
country, the matter is of legitimate interest to the
American Embassy, which declares that allega-
tions to the effect that the United States encour-
ages the depredations of the potato bug in Czecho-
slovakia, or that the United States has sought
clandestinely to introduce the potato bug into
Czechoslovakia, are false and preposterous.

The Embassy ventures to suggest the inherent

unsuitability of the potato bug (doryphora de-
comlineata) as an instrument of national policy.
The Embassy doubts whether the potato bug,
even in its most voracious phase, could nibble
effectively at the fabric of friendship uniting the
Czechoslovak and the American people.

The Embassy avails itself of this opportunity
to renew to the Ministry the assurance of its
highest consideration.

U.S.-Spain Amend Air Agreement

[Released to the press June 23]

Negotiations between delegations of the Gov-
ernments of the United States and Spain to amend
the air transport services agreement between the
two Governments signed on December 2, 1944,
were concluded today.

After a cordial interchange of the viewpoints
of both delegations, it has been agreed that the
agreement shall be amended in the following
respects :

Air carriers of Spain will be permitted to con-
duct services to the United States over the follow-
ing routes :

Route 1

A route from Spain to San Juan, Puerto Rico,
via Lisbon, the Azores and Bermuda, and Caracas ;
in both directions.

Route 2

A route from Spain via Lisbon, the Azores and
Bermuda to Miami, and beyond Miami (a) to
Mexico and (b) to Habana and points beyond in
the Caribbean area and the west coast of South
America ; in both directions.

Under the existing agreement, the United States
has two routes through Spain :

Route 1

A route from New York through Lisbon to
Barcelona, proceeding therefrom to Marseilles,
and possible points beyond, in both directions.

Route 2

A route from New York through Lisbon to
Madrid proceeding therefrom (a) to Rome and
points beyond and (b) to Algiers and points
beyond, in both directions.

The United States route to Spain via South
America and Africa contained in the original
agreement will be deleted, inasmuch as United
States civil air carriers now have no interest in
using this route.

Articles dealing with machinery for arbitration
and determination of rates were added to the
agreement.

iM\i 24, 1950

135

The Need for an International Trade Organization

Views of Maurice J. Tobin
Secretary of Labor

The following letter dated March 10, 1950, was sent
from the Secretary of Labor, Maurice J. Tobin, to the
Chairman of the House Committee on Foreign Affairs,
John Kee.

Dear Congressman Kee: On May 24, 1949, I
submitted to your Committee a statement of my
views on the question of United States approval of
the Charter for an International Trade Organiza-
tion. I would like to take this opportunity to
supplement my earlier statement with respect to
events which have occurred since the original state-
ment was made.

The problem of maintaining full employment
was the subject of intensive discussion at the 1949
meetings of the International Labor Conference
and the Economic and Social Council of the United
Nations, and at the current (1950) meetings of the
Economic and Employment Commission of the
Economic and Social Council. The intensity of
this discussion was to some extent a reflection of
events in the United States and of concern as to
the course which these events would take. Despite
the basic health of our economy, the prospects of
its continued prosperity, and the clearly tempo-
rary character of the 1949 recession, fear was
widely expressed that any drying-up of American
purchasing power would curtail foreign sales in
our markets, with serious resulting effects upon
the other economies involved.

Under these circumstances, the renewing of our
pledge to maintain full employment at home, as
set forth in the Employment Chapter of the Ito
Charter, is clearly appropriate. The taking of
other steps to expand world trade, on a multilat-
eral basis, as envisaged in the Charter, is also es-
sential as an adjunct in the international field to
the measures which we take at home to maintain
full employment.

Specifically, the Employment Chapter of the
Charter obligates the United States to take meas-
ures with a view to achieving and maintaining full
employment through actions appropriate to our
own political, economic, and social institutions.

136

Such a commitment is fully in keeping with our
own domestic policy of maintaining a high and
productive level of employment as set forth in the
Employment Act of 1946. The furtherance of this
aim throughout the world should do much to aid in
the expansion of world trade and the general rais-
ing of living standards.

I want to repeat my earlier statement to the
Committee that the Employment chapter of the
Charter preserves our right to seek full employ-
ment with the minimum of Government interven-
tion that we ourselves determine to be wise. In
other words, in accepting the Charter we would
not be agreeing to any planning or control that
we ourselves do not find to be necessary. We
would not be agreeing to give the other nations
of the world any power to compel us to take steps
that we ourselves are unwilling to take. We
would remain free to devise our own policies and
progi'ams.

The employment pledge is very specific on this
point stating that:

"Each member shall take action designed to
achieve and marntain full and productive em-
ployment and large and steadily growing de-
mand within its own territory thru measures
ap-propriate to its political, economic and social
institutions. ^^ (Italics supplied.)

Our freedom of domestic action can be well
illustrated by reference to the specific proposals
for maintaining full employment which have been
referred to or discussed at international meetings
during the last year. At none of the sessions was
there any question that a country's choice of meth-
ods was its own, and that it would remain so
should the Charter for an International Trade
Organization come into effect. There is now be-
fore the Employment Commission of the Eco-
nomic and Social Council, for example, a report
by a group of experts appointed by the Secre-
tary-General of the United Nations concerning
further steps which the nations of the world might

Department of State Bulletin

take to aid in tlie maintenance of full employment,
entitled "National and International Measures
for Full Employment." This report deserves a
great deal of study. Many of its details include
things that we now do under the Employment Act
of 194G; others would require further legislative
action. It is unmistakably clear, however, that
whatever our reaction to tlie report, we are not
committed to it or any part of it until and unless
we ourselves decide tliat it has merit. This is
the case now ; it would continue to be the case
after the Ito Charter comes into effect.

The months since the submission of my earlier
statement have also seen the development of the
Point IV Program as one of the most significant
parts of our foreign economic policy. This pro-
gram is a voluntary program on the part of the
United States which pursues further the same
broad objectives as the Economic Development
Chapter of the Charter. The role of the Inter-
national Trade Organization in the field of eco-
nomic development would buttress and facilitate
the sound realization of the program which we
are initiating. The Ito Charter as a whole
would ensure that the products of economic de-
velopment have a maximum opportunity to move
in the channel of world trade and to contribute
to a general raising of world living standards.

STATEMENT SUBMITTED ON MAY 24, 1949

I appreciate this opportunity to present my
views on the Charter for an International Trade
Organization to the members and have heard in
some detail of the basic problems which were
involved in its negotiation from members of the
Department of LaJbor staff who participated in the
drafting conferences which led to the document
presented to you for acceptance.

Interrelations of Labor and Trade

I regard the Charter as a great achievement in
an important field and a forward step in foreign
relations. Not only does it provide for an inter-
national forum in which trade matters can be
discussed and differences ironed out, but agree-
ment has been reached on many important points
of substance in a way which should strengthen
the economic base upon which healthy world trade
and prosperity are founded. These points of
agreement, affecting matters of basic employment
policy, the problems of economic development, the
multitude of commercial problems (such as those
involving the nondiscriminatory use of quotas and
internal taxation), the special problems of inter-
governmental commodity agreements, and inter-
national cartels, have in every case the merit of
minimizing restrictions and promoting freedom
of trade and enterprise. This achievement is the
more notable because it has occurred in a world
which for over two decades has been moving in

July 24, 1950

895251—50 3

the direction of more and more government inter-
vention in economic life. If we can achieve the
trade freedom for which the Charter provides and
maintain that degree of freedom, the accomplish-
ment will be substantial.

Maintaining the maximum of goods in world
trade with a minimum of restrictions has implica-
tions beyond the immediate effects on trade. Free
institutions in the world of trade have their influ-
ence upon the maintenance of freedom in other
situations. The effects of the Charter can be ex-
pected to contribute, for example, to the healthy
and improving economic environment which sup-
ports and strengthens the kind of free trade union
movement which we have found to be essential to
the survival of democratic institutions.

I do not need to dwell at length upon the obvious
importance of healthy and unfettered world trade
to the welfare of the wage and salary workers of
the United States. As our industrial system has
developed, it has brought with it increasing inter-
relationships between our production and distribu-
tion mechanisms and the trade channels of the
world. In 1947, for example (the latest year for
which such data are available), almost two and
one-half million jobs in American nonagricul-
tural establishments were dependent upon export
trade. This represented 5.6 percent of non-
agricultural employment at the time; in some
individual industry groups, the proportion was as
high as 15 percent. Many additional jobs in the
agricultural sector of our economy are also de-
pendent on export markets. The flow of raw ma-
terials into this country is an essential part of the
fabric of the production process ; imports of con-
sumers' goods into our markets help to raise our
own consumption level. Imports into this coun-
try contribute to the support and maintenance of
the export markets on which so many of our jobs
at home depend.

Restrictions on the regular flow of trade in es-
tablished channels can have serious repercussions
on our own employment. The impact of a single
restrictive action can be illustrated by the situa-
tion in the United States textile industry during
the spring and sunnner of 1948, when unreason-
able licensing requirements of one of our Carib-
bean neighbors resulted in a piling-up in ware-
houses of textile yardage equivalent in manhour
requirements to roughly a full month's production
of more than 40,000 textile wage earners. On a
broader scale, the continuation of unpredictable
interruptions to trade can seriously affect the
livelihood of important groups of workers in our
economy.

From the point of view of safeguarding the
welfare of workers in our domestic industry, we
must also be certain that our commitment does
not lightly remove justifiable protection or elimi-
nate the possibility of necessary withdrawals of
tariff or other concessions in the event that se-
rious injury threatens the weaker portions of our

137

economy. I do not feel that we have given up,
in tlie Charter, our basic ability to protect Ameri-
can jobs, where appropriate, through proper tar-
iff protection, or to withdraw concessions which
threaten employment. The Charter provides the
same mechanisms for doing this which is speci-
fied in the successfully-applied procedures of our
own Trade Agreements Act and for an appi'o-
priate degree of international consultation.

The welfare of the wage and salary worker is
related to world trade in more ways, however,
than through the impact of specific trade restric-
tions or protective devices. High levels of world
trade mean high consumption levels. The wel-
fare of our poj^ulation at home can best be sought
by achieving a level of world trade in which there
is a continually rising volume of goods to be ex-
changed, based upon continually rising produc-
tion and purchasing power to buy the goods that
are produced.

The goal of a higher consumption of goods
and services implies something more than the
process of removing barriers to trade. It also im-
plies taking steps to establish and insure the con-
tinued existence of a healthy economic base upon
which world trade can develop. Such positive
steps must be taken in conjunction with efforts to
minimize restrictions on existing trade channels.
The two approaches complement each other.

Provisions for Employment
and Economic Activity

Positive steps to expand world trade are pointed
to in the Charter's chapter on employment and
economic activity, and in the Chapter on Eco-
nomic Development. From a long-range point of
view, these chapters may well prove to be as im-
portant to the full development of world trade,
and to improved consumption levels that in-
ci'eased trade brings, as are many of the remain-
ing provisions of the Charter. I want to discuss
the broad purposes of the provisions of these
chapters.

The basic obligation assumed in the Employ-
ment Chapter is agreement to take steps to main-
tain full and productive domestic employment.
The basic obligation is similar to that provided in
articles 55 and 56 of the United Nations Charter.
It is also similar to that provided by our own
Employment Act of 1946. It reserves to us the
choice of measures to achieve full and productive
domestic employment. As an obligation, it does
not go beyond the obligation we have already as-
sumed to the population of our own country.

Why, then, it might be asked, is it necessary to
repeat this obligation, already self-imposed, in
an international document? The answer is to be
found in the wides|)read concern of the nations
of the world over the possibility of large-scale
unemployment, over the possibility that they
might not be able to maintain the nondiscrimina-
tory principles of the Charter in the face of major

economic difficulties. Each has been concerned to
have a positive statement of the other nations'
intent, even though fully aware that a statement
of determined intention is something less than an
ironclad guaranty of successful performance.

It is especially important that the United
States join in expression of this determination.
Concern over the possible effects of serious unem-
ployment in any country on world trade and on
the economies of all countries is well-known. Al-
though our own external trade may sometimes
seem small to us in relation to our total volume
of production, it is a fairly large proportion of
world trade in terms of dollar volume. Most im-
portant, our market bulks very large in the total
market of some individual nations. Disappear-
ance of this market through a drying-up of United
States purchasing power might have serious effects
on their economies. Our production system is the
envy of the world, and we need lack no confidence
in our ability to maintain our economic system on
a prosperous basis. Nevertheless, it must be rec-
ognized that fear of serious unemployment in the
United States has been an important factor in
negotiations, in conference after conference to
which our delegates have gone during the postwar
period, including those which have been in prep-
aration for the International Trade Organization.

There were many representatives at the confer-
ences leading up to the formulation of the Havana
charter who wanted the United States to assume
greater obligations to control its economy in the
interest of providing a more certain guaranty of
full employment. This was not agreed to by our
delegates. There can be no question about our
continued right under the Charter's Employment
Chapter to seek full employment with the mini-
mum of government intervention that we ourselves
determine to be wise.

The obligation to take preventive action to main-
tain full and productive employment obviously
must have its counterpart in the event that we
cannot maintain full employment, despite our best
efforts. The Charter obligates us to consult with
other nations on action to be taken in the event that
another economic crisis does affect world trade.
It would be unrealistic not to make such provision.
If we should have economic problems ahead, we
will want to handle them in such a way as to pre-
serve the cooperative and reciprocal trade rela-
tionships that we ai'e building up during times of
prosperity. We want the machinery we are build-
ing to weather, and not to flounder, in time of
storm.

Provisions for consultation in time of crisis must
be drawn with extreme care. We cannot agi'ee to
advance commitment of our resources or arbitrary
abridgment of the rights we have acquired by
negotiation with individual nations on a great
many trade matters. I do not propose in this
statement to elaborate on these provisions. It is
my understanding that expert and detailed testi-
mony on this matter will be offered before the

138

Deparlment of State Bulletin

Committee. The basic point I want to make is re-
lated to the over-all principle of consultation. If
we get into economic difficulties, we must coop-
erate, in our own interest and in the interest of
world economic stability, to minimize the effects
of our own troubles on other nations. We cannot
escape the fact that our own economy is of great
importance in the world economy or, tlie fact that
our economic difficulties can have wide repercus-
sions. Moreover, I do not see how we can avoid
becoming the subject of official discussion in in-
ternational forums in the event that we do begin
to have serious unemployment. Nor do I see how
we can avoid participation in cooperative endeav-
ors to solve serious world-wide problems. What
specific results this consultation will lead to cannot
be foreseen, as we cannot foresee the precise kinds
of economic problems with which we shall be deal-
ing. All that we can provide for at this time is
a mechanism and certain essentially procedural
rules concerning consultation. We cannot agree,
and I do not believe that we would be agreeing in
the charter, to go bej'ond the stage of consultation
and of cooperation on a basis to which we agree
in dealing with the most difficult problems of se-
rious economic maladjustment.

The undertaking to maintain full and produc-
tive employment is supplemented in the Employ-
ment Chapter by a separate undertaking to main-
tain fair labor standards, particularly in produc-
tion for export. Since the problem of competition
from countries with lower labor standards than
our own has been a perennial problem in our tariff
history, that is a provision we should welcome. Its
effectiveness will be realized at an extremely slow
rate, of course, because of the tremendous difficul-
ties involved in raising labor standards in coun-
tries with very low productivity. The method
of implementing the fair labor standards obliga-
tion will remain a domestic matter. Close rela-
tionship will obviously have to be maintained with
the Intei'national Labor Organization, which has
primary responsibility among the specialized
agencies in the labor field. The charter provides
an avenue of appeal to the Ito itself if it can
be shown that a country's failure to maintain fair
labor standards has the effect of nullifying or im-
pairing another Member's benefits under the
Charter.

ITO and Economic Development

The Chapter on Employment and Economic Ac-
tivity emphasizes chiefly the attainment and main-
tenance of employment. The chapter on economic
development looks to another major source of
the future expansion of world trade, through the
raising of productivity levels and realizing the
potential capacity of relatively underdeveloped
areas. The contribution to be made to world trade
and living standards here is the kind which is en-
visaged in the principles of Point 4 of President
Truman's inaugural message.

July 24, 1950

The Economic Development Chapter envisages
no intervention in the development plans of any
member nation. The responsibility for develop-
ment is a domestic one in each country, and devel-,
opment will necessarily take different forms in
each. Development in some countries may con-
centrate on industrialization, in others on exploi-
tation of mineral resources or the development of
sizable projects in the field of transport or power,
and in others on the achievement of higher pro-
ductivity in agriculture. Although a domestic
responsibility, development will necessarily re-
quire assistance from the capital, technical, and
industrial resources of the capital-exporting coun-
tries. Their cooperation on a voluntary basis is
important and offers advantages to them as well
as to the developing countries. The role of the
Ito under the Charter is essentially a coordinat-
ing role. Members in need of technical advice or
financial assistance may come to the organization
for aid. The organization will help them find
such assistance, which may take the form of pri-
vate technical service from other nations, paid
for by the developing country, or reference to the
collaborative aid of another specialized intergov-
ernmental organization, such as the International
Bank for Reconstruction and Development.

It is entirely likely that the actual role of the
International Trade Organization in the field of
positive economic development will be limited.
The primary sources for developmental aid will
continue to be private investment and govern-
mental aid. Among the intergovernmental agen-
cies, the role of the World Bank, the technical aid
supplied by such specialized agencies as the Inter-
national Labor Organization, and work done un-
der the auspices of the Economic and Social
Council should prove to be of equal or greater
importance.

The Ito has a necessary role in the development
field because of its special role in cases where
trade barriers are used to protect development.
In this connection, the Ito provides a mechanism
through which restrictions on trade during the
developmental process, especially when exercised
through quantitative restrictions rather than
tariff rates, can be held to a reasonable and super-
vised minimum. This necessary concern of Ito
members with problems of development may re-
quire attention to various phases of the problem
of development, including helping the nation in-
volved to find technical assistance or means to de-
velopment other than trade restrictions.

One of the most difficult problems faced in
drafting the Charter was the question of the use
of restrictions otherwise prohibited by the
charter for purposes of economic development.
At times during the negotiations, the provisions
relating to the use of trade restrictions for "devel-
opmental" purposes threatened to offer the widest
loopholes for escape from basic commercial policy
rules. The deliberations were characterized by

139

disputes between the industrialized countries and
the relatively undeveloped nations, with the lat-
ter contending that limitations on their right
to use restrictive trade practices were designed to
keep them from industrializing. This miscon-
ception was corrected ordy by agreement of the
larger industrial nations to an express endorse-
ment of the idea of development and by a com-
mitment on their part to cooperate in such devel-
opment by imposing no unreasonable barriers to
the international movement of capital and skills
for developmental purposes. The more difficult
problems of the use of trade barriers and re-
gional preferences for development purposes were
worked out through a series of elaborate and tech-
nical articles, which will be best reviewed by the
Committee during the course of the expert testi-
mony before it.

The Charter is the product of negotiations
among many people from many nations, each
bringing his own experience and the reflection of
his own political, economic, and social institu-
tions. This is an element of strength in the
charter. The basic provisions of the employment
chapter, for example, were embodied in the origi-
nal United States proposals which led to the Char-
ter. Both the employment and the economic de-
velopment provisions embody principles which are
an accepted part of our own national and foreign
economic policy. They embody the positive steps
which we must consider seriously in our own self
interest and as part of our participation in world
affairs.

I respectfully urge that your Committee rec-
ommend unqualified acceptance of the Charter for
an International Trade Organization.

Clarification Asitedon Senate Coffee Report

Statement by Edward G. Miller

Assistant Secretary for Inter-American Affairs ''^

I greatly appreciate your courtesy in giving the
Department of State this hearing. I assure you
of the desire of the Department to work coopera-
tively with your Committee and with all of the
other committees of Congress that consider sub-
jects relating to United States foreign policy. I
hope that you individually and collectively will
take advantage of our desire to be of assistance
whenever you want our help.

Especially in view of the strong protests which
have been made to the Department by the coffee-
producing countries regarding your subcommit-
tee's report on coffee, I believe that it is important
from the standpoint of our foreign relations that
the Committee be informed of the attitude of these
countries toward the report and the interpreta-
tion which they are placing upon its recommenda-
tions. I know that this Committee and the mem-
bers of the subcommittee are as anxious as the
State Department to correct any misunderstand-
ings or misapprehension regarding the intent of
the report.

Officials of the Department have previously ap-
peared before the subcommittee which prepared
the report to answer questions and to provide data.
The Department has endeavored to give the sub-
committee all assistance possible in obtaining such
material as it required from Embassy sources.
The Department did not, however, see the report

' Made before the Senate Committee on Agriculture and
Forestry on June 20 and released to the press on the same
date.

itself before it was made public, and was, there-
fore, not able to comment in advance on those sec-
tions which it might have recognized as poten-
tially troublesome. I doubt that even we in the
Department could have foreseen the full measure
of resentment which the report has aroused. That
it is resented deeply, not only by the governments
of the countries which have lodged protests with
the Department but by their citizens, is becoming
increasingly apparent. Our Embassies in the
principal coffee-producing countries report that
even those newspapers which are customarily
friends of the United States have been sharply
critical of the United States on this issue and that
many of the attacks have been extremely bitter.

It is always to this Government's interest to
maintain relations with neighboring countries on
as friendly a basis as possible. The opening par-
agraphs of the subcommittee's report express what
I am sure is a sincere concern for the welfare of
the Latin American people. Recognizing, then,
the fund of good will which exists, I am hopeful
that the Committee will be able to develop its
final position on the coffee report in a form which
will both make possible the attainment of the de-
sirable objectives, upon which I am sure we can
all agree, and demonstrate a full understanding
of the position of the coffee-producing countries.
Our record for cooperation within the hemisphere
on matters relating to coffee is one of long stand-
ing. It has been of mutual benefit; and I hope
that it can be maintained.

140

Department of State Bulletin

The State Department is not here to plead a
case for high coffee prices. The Department takes
no position regarding the fairness or unfairness
of any given level of coffee prices. It assumes
that under a system of free private enterprise,
such as we encourage in the United States, prices
will adjust automatically to reflect a fair balance
between the conflicting interests of producer and
consumer, always assuming, of course, that the
market is broad enough to assure competition of
sellers and buyers. Coffee prices may seem ex-
tremely high to us at the present time. During
the period of the thirties, they seemed to the
coffee-producing countries to be unduly low, and
I am sure that this Committee will understand
me when I say that, I believe, the 1930's would not
be a fair base period to select for coffee.

I realize that the price of coffee is an important
consideration for the American consumer, and I
can appreciate his confusion at seeing the price
double within a few months. I fully understand
his desire to have this sudden price rise investi-
gated, and I believe that the subcommittee should
Be commended for its efforts to uncover any market
manipulation which contributed to the increase
in prices. The Department is not trying in any
way to shield any individual or group of in-
dividuals— in the United States or abroad — who
may have taken unfair advantage of the tight
situation which developed in the coffee market
last fall. Furthermore, it recognizes that with
the virtual disappearance of the Brazilian Gov-
ernment-owned stocks, which had served as a buf-
fer for so many years, the possibilities of manipu-
lation were appreciably increased.

Propriety of Statements Questioned

On the other hand, the Department believes
strongly that no accusations of manipulation of
markets, or collusion between producing interests,
should be made unless and until there is clear
evidence to substantiate such charges. With re-
spect to such matters, the Department must rely
largely on other agencies of the Government and
on the findings of Congressional committees of
investigation. Apparently, the subcommittee
itself has had some difficulty in developing infor-
mation of this character. I am informed that no-
where in the report or in the record of the hearings
is conclusive evidence presented to show that there
actually was collaboration on the part of the pro-
ducing countries to withhold coffee from this
market in order to bring about a rise in price.
Accordingly, I question the propriety of the state-
ment on page 16 of the report that "it is likely"
that the decision of the National Coffee Depart-
ment of Brazil to close out its coffee stocks in 1948
was "the prelude of a well-laid campaign by Bra-
zil and Colombia to raise coffee prices." The Na-
tional Coffee Department of Brazil has been en-
deavoring to liquidate its surplus coffee stocks

over a long period of years, and it was logical to
suppose that it would eventually succeed.

Another section of the report refers to the fact
that the National Federation of Coffee Growers
of Colombia is currently holding considerable
stocks of coffee and that both Colombia and Bra-
zil undertake, from time to time, to support coffee
prices either by maintaining a fixed buying price
or by assisting in the financmg of the crop. This,
surely, cannot be regarded as evidence of price
rigging. Maintenance of pi-ice supports for agri-
cultural commodities is an accepted practice of
many governments, including our own. As surely
as the withholding of stocks leads to a temporary
price increase, their future liquidation will lead to
a decrease in prices, and each goverimient must
make its own decision as to what rate of disposal
is in the best interests of its producers. Unless
there is collaboration among suppliers to misrep-
resent the facts, and thus to mislead consuming
interests, these price-support programs cannot
properly be regarded as market manipulation.

If, on the other hand, what the subcommittee
had in mind was manipulation by individual
speculators, and if there is evidence of such opera-
tions, certainly the situation should be investi-
gated by the Department of Justice, and any in-
fringement of our antitrust laws should be
IDunished. The State Department, of course, fully
subscribes to the thesis that the Attorney General
should be vigilant in protecting the consumer
against any infraction of our laws, whether by
foreign or by domestic speculators. Recommen-
dation 7 seems to me, however, in the circum-
stances, to prejudge the case. It requests the
Attorney General to bring civil suit under the
antitrust laws to compel disposition of the coffee
stocks which the National Federation of Coffee
Growers of Colombia holds in the United States.
On the basis of the evidence presented in the re-
port, I believe that it should have simply proposed
that the Attorney General make an investigation
to determine whether there might be basis for
charges under our antitrust laws.

The Department's principal interest in the re-
port, however, relates to some of the other recom-
mendations. Surprisingly, little or no informa-
tion is supplied in the report by way of background
on such recommendations. This, together with
the fact that they appear to the Governments and
the people of the Latin American countries to be
either a reflection upon the Governments or an
attack upon their economies, accounts very largely,
I believe, for the reaction which the report has
aroused. I shall take these recommendations in
order beginning at recommendation 9 and ask that
you examine them with me from the viewpoint of
our Latin American friends.

Recommendations Arousing Protests

Recommendation 9 is that at all future meetings
of the Special Commission on Coffee of the Inter-
American Economic and Social Council, a repre-

Ju/y 24, 1950

141

sentative of the Department of Justice, detailed
for that purpose by the Attorney General, be pres-
ent. Very little information is given in the body
of the report regarding the activities of the Coffee
Commission. There is one statement to the effect
that most of the representatives on the Coffee
Commission also represent their countries on the
Pan American Coffee Bureau, which is a sales pro-
motion organization, and which has been accused
of endeavoring to influence the trend of coffee
prices. The implication which is immediately
drawn from the subcommittee's recommendation
by the foreign representatives on the Commission
is: first, that they are suspected of being unable
to divorce their trade interests from their official
duties, and second, that surveillance is required to
prevent them from using the Commission as a
front for other activities, which might be detri-
mental to the United States consumer. This is a
case where misunderstanding can be harmful.

In order to save your time, I should like, at this
point, to incorporate by reference the testimony of
the Department's representative before the sub-
committee regarding the importance of coffee to
Latin America and the origin, purpose, and sig-
nificance to Latin American producers and to
United States consumers of the inter-American
coffee agreement. For the coffee producers, it
meant material assistance during one of their
darkest hours. For our consumers, it has meant
that supplies are now undoubtedly more adequate,
because it helped check a very substantial decline
in coffee production. The testimony in question
begins on page 818 of part 2 of the hearings. From
that testimony, it will be noted that this agreement
was a treaty which was approved by the Senate,
and the protocols extending it were presented to
the Senate for their advice and consent.

From that testimony, it will also be noted that
it was apparent by 1945 that conditions in the
world coffee industry had changed significantly.
Brazil's production, which had accounted for the
major part of the world's exports, had declined
greatly. Consumption in the United States had
increased substantially during the war years, and
European markets were again becoming accessible.

This change with respect to the world coffee sit-
uation was referred to in the report of the Senate
Foreign Relations Committee submitted by Sen-
ator Lodge on February 19, 1947. The report
pointed out that because of the changed situation
the United States had suggested that the quota
provisions of the agreement be rendered inopera-
tive. The same report also indicated that the
United States view regarding the quotas had pre-
vailed notwithstanding some reluctance by other
signatory governments.

From the time the quota provisions were
dropped on October 1, 194.5, the Coffee Agreement
ceased to be a factor in the world coffee-price sit-
uation. The coffee-producing countries wished,
nevertheless, to see the agreement extended — not
because it could be of any further assistance to

them pricewise, but because of what it had meant,
and because it would be an indication of our con-
tinuing interest in their coffee problems.

It was later decided, again upon the initiative
of the United States, to allow the agreement to
terminate altogether. In the report of the For-
eign Relations Committee on April 20, 1948, rec-
ommending approval of the final protocol, which
extended the agreement until September 30, 1948,
the Committee pointed out that the protocol pro-
vided that the Coffee Board "should undertake
to make arrangements to transfer its functions,
assets, and records to an appropriate inter-Amer-
ican or other international organization" by Sep-
tember 30, 1948, and said "The Foreign Relations
Committee which has repeatedly urged the more
effective coordination of existing international or-
ganizations, believe that the program contem-
plated for tlae Coffee Board would be a step in the
right direction."

In pursuance of this provision of the protocol,
the United States join with the other members in
petitioning the Organization of American States
to assume responsibility for certain aspects of the
work carried out by the Coffee Board under the
agreement. The Inter-American Economic and
Social Council agreed that "in order to provide
facilities necessary for keeping the world coffee
situation under continuous review and for collect-
ing, analyzing and disseminating information
bearing on long-range coffee developments," it
would create a Special Commission on Coffee.

COFFEE COMMISSION

The Coffee Commission is merely a consultative
body. Any recommendations it makes must be
passed upon by the Economic and Social Council
of the Organization of American States. It has
no staft' and no separate budget. Its principal
activities are to improve coffee statistics and to
cooperate with the Institute of Agricultural Sci-
ences in Turrialba, Costa Rica, on projects for the
improvement of coffee production and handling.
It is, nevertheless, a symbol of cooperation be-
tween the governments of the American Republics.
The coffee-producing countries believe, very
strongly, that, during the period of the operation
of the agreement, coffee consumers in the United
States, especially because of the relatively low
prices during the period of price control, have been
the principal beneficiaries of this cooiDeration.

The Coffee Commission now meets about once
a month and prior to the coffee investigation, so
far as the Department is aware, no question had
even arisen regarding the desirability of holding
open meetings, because no one had evidenced any
interest in attending. Statistics on coffee have
appeal for a very small group, and the general
interest in technical assistance has been focused on
a whole program, rather than on the $27,000
project for the year ending June 30, 1950, that is
being carried out on coffee at Turrialba.

142

Departmenf of Stafe Bulletin

I hope that with tliis background you may be
able to appreciate why the recominendatioa that
a repi"esentative of the Depai'tnient of Justice at-
tend the meetings of tlie Coffee Commission has
been interpreted by the members of the Commis-
sion as an afl'ront both to themselves and to their
govermnents. The Commission believes, and
made evident at the special meeting which
it called last Friday afternoon to consider the
coffee report, that it has been placed in an un-
favorable light ; that the affront was not deserved ;
and that it has no adequate means of protecting
itself. However, among other actions taken at
the meeting of the Commission on Friday was a
decision, by unanimous vote, that the Commis-
sion's meetings would customarily be open to any-
one who might wish to attend. The Department
believes that this decision was a wise one in that
it should help protect the Commission against un-
warranted criticism in the future, and it may lead
to a somewhat better understanding of the Com-
mission's activities both on the part of the public
and the press. I must, therefore, in all respect,
say that in my opinion this recommendation was
unwise.

QUARTERLY REPORTS

With respect to recommendation 10, that the
Bureau of the Census undertake to make regular
quarterly reports of the stocks of green and roasted
coffee on hand, I should like to mention that the
Coffee Commission some months ago requested the
United States representative to take this matter
up with the Bureau of the Census and to see
whether data on stocks could not be collected reg-
ularly. It was disappointed to learn that this
was not possible at that time, largely because funds
for this purpose were not available. If, as a re-
sult of your interest in the matter, this difficulty
can be overcome, a real improvement in our own
statistics on coffee could be realized. This might
serve as a useful example to other countries in-
terested in international trade in coffee.

Recommendation 11 is one to which the other
American Republics have taken strong exception
and which the State Department would not be
able to support. It suggests "that the United
States, through diplomatic channels, offer to assist
the Brazilian and Colombian Governments in such
a way as may seem feasible to aid these countries
in acljusting their official exchange rates of the
cruzeiro and the peso to the certificate-of-exchange
or realistic value of these jnoneys." Brazil and
Colombia are both members of the International
Monetary Fund, as is also the United States. The
Fund is the international authority on questions
of exchange, and the subject is a highly technical
one. Any request for an adjustment of exchange
rates must, under the Fund's regulations, originate
with the country desiring the change and come
before the directors of the Fund for consideration.
The United States Director on the Fund has an

opportunity, at that time, to make known the
views of this Government, and any action by this
Government through channels other than the
Fund would be considered inappropriate.

Recommendation 12 of the report urges the cof-
fee-producing countries "to establish full reliable
statistical organizations within their governments
that will provide accurate statistics on stocks of
coffee both in warehouses and interior, proper crop
estimates, tree census, acreage, etc."

This is another instance where I believe that
the wording of the recommendation could be im-
proved. I believe that no one is more aware of
the need for improvement of coffee statistics than
the producing countries themselves. Through
their representatives on the Special Commission
on Coffee, they have recently devoted much time
and thought to the preparation of a questionnaire
which has now been sent to the government of
each coffee-producing country in an effort to ob-
tain data which will be accurate, comparable, and
up to date. The Commission has also worked
with the United Nations Food and Agriculture
Organization to try to insure that the 1950 census
of agriculture which is now being taken in many
of the countries of the hemisphere will increase
the statistical information on coffee. But you will
note that the subcommittee's recommendation re-
fers not to reliable statistics but to "reliable statis-
tical organizations." This has been interpreted
by the coffee-producing countries as a reflection
not on their statistics — which they will readily
admit are not as comprehensive as they would like
to have them — but on their public officials. I'm
sure that no such interpretation was intended and
that a slight revision of wording would have elim-
inated the misunderstanding.

ANOMALOUS RECOMMENDATIONS

Recommendations 13 and 14 can best be consid-
ered together. One recommends that the United
States offer technical assistance to friendly nations
other than those in the Western Hemisphere in
expanding their coffee production. The other ad-
vises careful scrutiny of any loans made by this
Government to the Central and South American
countries in view of the fact that their economies
are largely dependent on coffee and that any per-
manent decline in consumption comparable to that
which occurred in the first 4 months of this year
will, ultimately, result in "a crash in coffee prices."
These two recommendations, presented in conjunc-
tion seem to be an anomaly. If the price of coffee
should fall to a level which might endanger the
financial structure of the countries now producing
coffee, it would not appear to be a promising field
for development in other countries under the tech-
nical assistance program.

Actually, I doubt that the first 4 months of this
year afford a reliable guide to future consimiption
trends. That was the period immediately follow-
ing the rapid price increase, and the hoarding

July 24, 1950

143

which we know occurred during the last quarter
of 1949 probably finds its parallel in the dis-
hoarding which took place during the first quarter
of 1950. I understand that there is a wide differ-
ence of opinion among men who know the coffee
trade best as to what effect the price increase is
likely to have on consumption in the long run.
In view of this fact, it seems to me that the need
for recommending special precautions with re-
spect to loans made to coffee-producing countries
has not been established. All loans made by the
Government will continue to be carefully scruti-
nized as to their economic and financial sound-
ness, and a determination as to repayment ability,
based upon the long-term internal and external
financial outlook, is always a fundamental
consideration.

With reference to the recommendation that the
United States encourage the production of coffee in
countries outside the hemisphere, there would ap-
pear to be no reason for placing a geographical
restriction on whatever aid may be offered through
the technical assistance program. If the outlook
is for a continuance of short supplies, we would,
logically, welcome increased production in any
country, including those to the south, which have
customarily supplied more than 95 percent of our
coffee imports and cooperated fully both with this
Government and with the domestic coffee trade in
endeavoring to meet our requirements. If the as-
sumption on which the recommendation was based
was that no assistance would be required to en-
courage production in areas which are already ac-
quainted with coffee culture, I believe that the
assumption was in error. Actually, improved cul-
tural practices could be introduced, advanta-
geously, in many countries which are now large
producers, and support and encouragement of ex-
perimental work on coffee in institutions such as
the Inter-American Institute of Agriculture in
Turrialba is urgently needed.

Kecommendation 15 is that the Economic Co-
operation Administration refuse to authorize any
further allocation of dollars for the purchase of
coffee. The coffee-producing countries might well
ask why their principal procluct should be singled
out for special restrictions. Is it punishment for
allowing prices to rise or is it to be interpreted
merely as an effort on the part of the United States
to obtain the lion's share of a limited supply?
Whatever the explanation, it is fresh salt in an old
wound. As you probably know, the EGA pro-
gram is regarded by many of these countries as
an obstacle to their own industrial development.
They have pointed out that this program for Euro-
pean reconstruction operates to their disadvan-
tage in at least two ways. First, they fear that
through possible future development of colonial
possession, active competition for their products
may be built up. Second, because of the strain
which it placed, especially in the early years, on
our industrial plant, they claim that the Marshall
Plan delayed them in obtaining new equipment

and replacement parts which were needed to face
the new competition. They asked, at one time,
for a Marshall Plan for South America, pointing
out that they were relatively undeveloped and that
capital was urgently needed. They could point
to an excellent record of cooperation with this
Government throughout the war in supplying
products which we then urgently needed. Our
answer included the assurance that they would
benefit, at second hand, from the demand for their
products which would develop in Europe as a
result of the flow of EGA dollars to the European
countries.

Actually, they have benefited much less from
the program than might have been expected. The
surplus disposal provisions of the EGA Act
limited procurement of agricultural products to
the United States if surplus stocks were available,
even when prices here were substantially higher
than elsewhei'e. So far as competing commodities
were concerned, therefore, Latin American coun-
tries were out of the market. They still might
benefit, however, from the purchase of petroleum,
coffee, sugar, and other tropical products, but it
would be difficult to establish the fact that their
export of coffee to Europe is larger because of the
EGA program. A relatively small amount of
coffee has actually been financed by EGA, and most
of this has been of inferior grades that are not
used in appreciable quantities in the United States.
In view of all the circumstances, it is understand-
able, I think, that they should regard the recom-
mendation regarding EGA procurement of coffee
as added evidence that the subcommittee is not
sympathetic to their problems.

View on Proposed Legislation

I do not wish to comment in detail on the other
recommendations of the report because they are,
in general not so directly related to the foreign
policy of the United States as are those that I have
already discussed with you, and since the Com-
mittee will presumably receive comments from
the agencies of the Government which are most
closely concerned. However, since two of the
recommendations deal with the only legislative
action proposed in the report, I should like to
indicate the present thinking of the Department
with respect to them.

The Department would have no objection, in
principle, to the bill proposed in recommendation
4 which would place trading in coffee under the
Commodity Exchange Act. The Department is
at present aware of no reason why. from the for-
eign policy viewpoint, coffee should not be subject
to the same legislation in respect of trading on
the commodity exchanges that applies to a large
number of staple commodities that are primarily
of domestic origin. In fact, unless there are prac-
tical reasons why this should not be done, the re-
duction that has gradually occurred over a period
(Continned on page 157)

144

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

The World Cotton Situation

REPORT ON NINTH PLENARY MEETING

OF INTERNATIONAL COTTON ADVISORY COMMITTEE

The International Cotton Advisory Commit-
tee convened its ninth plenary meeting on May 22
at AVashington to strive for further progress
toward its three major, continuing objectives
which are :

1. To furnish information regarding the current
economic position of cotton in the world.

2. To serve as a forum for the exchange of views
and ideas designed to facilitate solution of prob-
lems affecting the world's cotton industry.

3. To formulate suggestions for international
economic study in dealing with world cotton
problems.

Summary of Action

The Committee took no action on negotiating
an international cotton agreement but recom-
mended that the Standing Committee continue to
keep the world cotton situation under continuous
review and "make such recommendations to mem-
ber governments as it deems appropriate and com-
patible with their international obligations."

The Committee, although recognizing that bal-
ance-of-payments difficulties constitute a world-
wide problem whose solution is outside its scope,
agreed that the world for years to come will be
highly dependent upon raw cotton exports from
the United States. It took note of the fact that
those exports, at present, are made possible largely
through exceptional financing methods. In this
connection, the Committee asked its Standing
Committee, with the assistance of the Secretariat,
to follow developments in the balance-of-pay-
ments situation as it affects cotton and to report
on the matter at the tenth plenary meeting.

With reference to increasing world cotton con-
sumption, the Committee invited all member gov-

ernments to help raise clothing standards in their
countries through a study of national clothing
habits and by assisting manufacturers in carrying
out necessary sales promotion programs and by
further research and development of cotton pro-
duction and processing methods.

The Committee, reaffirming a resolution at its
eighth plenary meeting, recommended again to
member governments that where satisfactory steps
have not already been taken for the purpose, they
establish a national coordinating agency or desig-
nate an existing office to supply the Secretariat
with needed statistical and other information.
It recommended, furthermore, that such coordi-
nating agency of office serve also to distribute to
all appropriate agencies and offices of the respec-
tive governments information and material re-
ceived from the Secretariat and generally keep in
close touch with the Secretariat.

The Committee commended the Secretariat for
its report and published periodicals. One of the
studies prepared by the Secretariat was the An-
nual Review of the World Cotton Situation. This
document contains an analysis and summary of
developments during the current season and pros-
pects for the future in the various sectors of the
world economy — production, consumption, stocks,
trade, and prices.

Representation

Representation at the ninth plenary meeting was
the largest since the organization of the Com-
mittee 11 years ago. Edwin D. White (United
States) was elected chairman of the Standing
Committee which meets regularly during the year
at the permanent Secretariat at Washington to
keep the world cotton situation continuously under
review and promote the flow of information be-
tween the Committee's member governments.

Jw/y 24, ?950

145

The Governments of the following States were
represented at the Meeting by delegates :

Argentina

Australia

Austria

Belgium

Brazil

Canada

China

Esypt

France

Greece

India

Italy

Mexico

Netherlands

Pakistan

Peru

Turkey

United Kingdom

United States

The Governments of the following States were
represented by observers :

Bolivia

Colombia

Ceylon

Cuba

Denmark

Dominican Republic

Ecuador

Finland

Germany,

Federal Republic of
Guatemala
Haiti
Israel
Korea

Klcaragua

Panama

Philippines

Poland

Portugal

Supreme Command

Allied Powers
Sweden
Switzerland
Syria

Union of South Africa
Venezuela
■Jugoslavia

The following International Organizations were
represented by observers:

Intergovernmental Organizations

Food and Agriculture Organization of the United
Nations

Interim Coordinating Committee for International
Commodity Arrangements of the United
Nations

International Bank for Reconstruction and Devel-
opment

International Monetary Fund

Organization for European Economic Cooperation

Nongovernmental Organisations

International Federation of Master Cotton Spin-
ners' and Manufacturers' Association

Summary Review of World Cotton Situation

The 1949-50 season has been of special impor-
tance for cotton. It is the first in the prewar era
to see an increase in the world supply (carry-over
plus production) of cotton. World production
has expanded on a broad front. At about 31 mil-
lion bales, it is expected to exceed consumption by
some 2 million bales. This amount would result
in a world carry-over of about 17 million bales on
August 1, 1950, this carry-over being actually and
proportionately the greatest in the United States.
Keintroduction of acreage restrictions in the
United States and Egypt will affect production in
the 1950-51 season. Despite prospective expan-
sion in the Indian Union, Pakistan, and elsewhere,
the global production in 1950-51 will possibly be
moderately smaller than in the current season.

World consumption of cotton, estimated at ap-
proximately 29 million bales in 1949-50, has shown
relatively little change in the past 4 seasons and

is still slightly less than the prewar (1934-38)
average. Unsettled conditions in the Far East
and the rebuilding of textile inventories in other
areas are among the local and short-term factors
offsetting each other in the current season. In the
face of substantial increases over prewar levels in
general economic activity and in consumption of
other fibers, the failure of cotton consumption to
expand is a world problem of great importance.
The review concludes that it is difficult to envisage
any significant and sustained advance in global
cotton consumption in the near future, with cotton
and cotton textile prices at current levels, and in
the context of the continuing world dollar short-
age, unless special mitigating arrangements are
made.

International trade in cotton has made further
gains, and world exports in 1949-50 are expected
to total 11.5 million bales — half a million bales
more than in 1948-49. The increased movement,
chiefly in dollar cottons, has been given assist-
ance by United States foreign aid programs and
impetus by the prospect of a smaller crop in the
United States next season.

Prices for cotton in national currencies have fol-
lowed divergent courses in 1949-50, moving up-
ward sharply in countries where currencies were
devalued and receding slightly in others. At the
same time, the United States price supports were
again operative and continued to influence, to some
extent, world prices for medium staples. Since
the announcement of acreage restrictions for the
1950-51 crop in the United States, market prices
have been stronger.

The review draws attention to the intensified
competition from rayon, which had a price advan-
tage over cotton in all major consuming countries
in 1949-50. This advantage was greatly enhanced
in Europe as a result of the higher cost of cotton
following devaluation. The displacement of cot-
ton by rayon is to some extent affected by consum-
ers' preferences for cotton, on the one hand, and
by insufficient supply of rayon on the other. In
the latter connection, note is taken of the fact that
in countries where rayon production is not already
close to the limit of capacity it is expanding rap-
idly.

Resolutions Approved

RESOLUTION I

It is Resolved:

That Messrs. Price, Waterhouse and Company's "Re-
port and Summary of Cash Receipts and Disbursements
for the Fiscal Year ending June 30, 1949" contained in
their letter of August 22, 1949, be accepted along with
the Secretariat's statement of the financial position of the
Committee as of March 31, 1950.

RESOLUTION II

It is Resolved:

(1) That the Standing Committee be authorized to ap-
prove expenditures in the twelve months ending June
30, 1951, in the following amounts :

146

Department of State Bulletin

Salaries, including tax reimbursements $48, 000

Office expenses (supplies, printing, duplicating,

binding, etc.) 6,000

Communications (cable, telephone, telegraph,

messenger and jwstage) 2,000

Transportation 9, 500

OflSce equipment 2, (XK)

Miscellaneous exiHjnses 1, 000

Total 68, 500

(2) That the Standing Committee be authorized to in-
crease expenditures, if necessary to carry out the approved
program of work, bv an amount not exceeding 15 percent
of the total of $68,500.

(3) That the Standing Committee be further authorized
to make such shifts and adjustments of funds from one
item to another within the total as it shall find to be in
the best interest of the work.

resolution iii

Wheeeas:

A graduated scale for contributions by member govern-
ments was established by Resolution II of the Sixth
Plenary Meeting, based on Ave categories of contributions
according to the annual average of total cotton exports
and imports in the five years of 1934-35 through 1938-39,
and

"Whereas:

It is deemed that postwar trade in cotton is insuffi-
ciently stabilized to afford a basis for a revision of the
scale of contributions,

Jt is Resolved:

(1) That assessments of member governments be made
according to the formula adopted for 1947-48, based on
the annual average of total cotton exported and imported
in the five years, 1934-35/1938-39, insofar as practicable,
and

(2) That assessments in 1950-51 conform to the fol-
lowing schedule :

Group I Over 4.000,000 bales $12, 000

United States

Group II 2,000,000 to 4,000,000 bales 8, 000

United Kingdom

Group III 500,000 to 2,000,000 bales 4, 000

Brazil Indian Union

China Italj;

Egypt Pakistan

Prance

Group IV 100,000 to 500,000 bales 2,500

Anglo-Eiiyptian Canada

Sudan Czechoslovakia

Argentina Mexico

Austria Netherlands

Belgium

Group V Less than 100,000 bales 1, 000

Australia

Greece

Turkey

Total 71,000

(3) That the contribution of a government newly ac-
ceding to membership in the International Cotton Ad-
visory Committee at any time during a fiscal .vear shall be
the annual assessment as calculated in accordance with
Section (1) of this Resolution, multiplied by the number
of quarters of the year in which the government is a mem-
ber and divided by four.

(4) That on resignation of a member, no refund shall
be made of any part of that member's contribution for any
unexpired portion of a financial year remaining at the
time of the member's resignation.

July 24, 1950

895251—50 4

(5) That the Standing Committee be requested to sub-
mit to the 10th Plenary Meeting a revised schedule of
assessments of contributions for member governments
for the year 1951-52, and to consider ways and means of
increasing the revenues of the Committee such as making
a charge for copies of its publications distributed to other
than member governments.

resolution iv

Whereas :

A Reserve Fund has been set up in accordance with
Resolution II of the Sixth Plenary Meeting and Resolu-
tion VI of the Seventh Plenary Meeting, and

Whereas :

The Reserve Fund on July 1, 1948 was $50,000.00, and

Whereas:

A Working Fund is needed from which to defray the
operating expenses of the Committee,

It is Resolved:

(1) That the Plenary Committee declare that the
amount of Reserve Fund on July 1, 1949, was $50,000.00.

(2) That Paragraphs 3, 4, and 5 of Resolution VI,
Seventh Plenary Meeting continue to be applicable to
the Reserve Fund.

(3) That any funds of the Committee in excess of
$50,000.00 shall constitute the Working Fund.

RESOLUTION V

Whereas :

It was agreed in Resolution VII of the Eighth Plenary
Meeting that invitations to accede to the International
Cotton Advisory Committee be held open to all members
of the United Nations of the Food and Agriculture Organ-
ization of the United Nations, having a substantial inter-
est in cotton ; and that the Standing Committee be au-
thorized to consider and to act upon applications for
membership from any other government having a sub-
stantial interest in cotton.

It is Resolved:

(1) That the Standing Committee be requested to
send to all governments eligible under Resolution VII of
the Eighth Plenary Meeting formal invitations to accede
to the Committee,

(2) That the authority of the Standing Committee to
consider and act upon the applications of other govern-
ments to accede to the Committee be reaffirmed,

(3) That the Standing Committee be requested to es-
tablish forthwith procedures for acting upon any ac-
ceptance, application, or withdrawal by such govern-
ments.

RESOLUTION Vi

Whereas :

The action developing from Resolution VIII of the
Eighth Plenary Meeting has yielded very useful results
and promises further benefits,

It is Resolved:

(1) To reaffirm Resolution VIII of the Eighth Plenary
Meeting,

(2) To recommend again to member governments that
where satisfactory organizational measures have not al-
ready been taken for this purpose, they consider favorably
the establishment of a National Coordinating Agency or
the designation of an existing office to provide the Secre-
tariat with all the information referred to in Resolution
VIII of the Eighth Plenary Meeting as well as to distrib-

147

ute to appropriate agencies and officers of tlieir govern-
ments all the information and material received from
the Secretariat, and generally to keep in close contact
with it,

(3) To recommend again to member governments that
they ascertain that statistical and other information re-
quested by the Secretariat, as specified in Annex A of
Resolution VIII of the Eighth Plenary Meeting, be sup-
plied regularly and rapidly.

RESOLUTION VII

Whereas :

Adequate data on the prices of cotton are of special
importance, and

Whereas :

It is not now possible to compute prices of various
growths on a world-wide basis,

/* is Resolved:

That member governments examine their facilities for
assembling price statistics in their respective countries
and consider the desirability and possibility of further
practical measures for the improvement of their price
information.

resolution viii

Whereas :

The Committee appreciates the excellent reports on the
Developing World Cotton Situation prepared by the Stand-
ing Committee and Secretariat, and

Where^as :

The information and Statistics furnished in these re-
ports are very valuable and some of the suggestions made
by the Standing Committee on various items merit con-
tinued consideration, and

Whereas:

The Committee also appreciates the high quality of the
Monthly Review and Quarterly Statistical Bulletin pre-
pared by the Secretariat

It is Resolved:

(1) That this Plenary Committee place on record Its
indebtedness to the Chairman, members of the Standing
Committee, the Secretariat, and others who participated
in the preparation of these reports, and

(2) That Parts A and B of the "Report on the Develop-
ing World Cotton Situation," prepared by the Secretariat
and the Standing Committee as working documents for
the Ninth Plenary Meeting of the International Cotton
Advisory Committee, be printed and sold to the public,
including as an annex the relevant resolutions of this
meeting.

Note : Resolution VIII was adopted with the reservation that
no restricted material supplied by other international bodies
would be published.

RESOLUTION IX

It is Resolved:

To continue to publish

(a) The Monthly Review of the World Cotton Situation
in accordance with the following schedule:

Publication date

July 15, 1950
August 15, 1950
September 15, 1950
October 15, 1950
November 15, 1950

Containing information
received through
June 30, 19.50
Julv 31, 1950
August 31, 1950
September 30, 1950
October 31, 1950

December 15, 1950
January 15, 1951
February 15, 1951*
March 15, 1951
April 15, 1951
May 15, 1951
June 15, 1951

November 30, 1950
December 31, 1950
January 31, 1951
February 28, 1951
March 31, 1951
April 30, 1951
May 31, 1951

•To Include annual statement on the World Cotton Situation
prepared for the Tenth Meeting of the Plenary Committee, and

(b) The Quarterly Statistical Bulletin for cotton and
competing fibers in accordance with the following
schedule :

September 15, 1950
December 15, 1950

March 15, 1951
June 15, 1951

RESOLUTION X

information is lacking on the following

Whereas :

Adequate
subjects

It is Resolved:

That the Secretariat undertake the work specified
below :

(1) The publication of information and statistics as
they become available of

(a) The production of cotton in individual countries
by staple length and grade ;

(b) The United States C.C.C. stocks, by staple length
and grade ; and the price policy regarding same from time
to time ;

(2) An investigation into the availability of informa-
tion concerning the supply of textile machinery, report-
ing to the next (Tenth) Plenary Meeting and if possible
making an interim report before then ;

(3) The transmittal of such condensed and bibliograph-
ical Information as is published and can be obtained from
member governments on :

(a) Relative production costs and farm incomes
from cotton and food crops including methods of account-
ing and actual results of investigations undertaken;

(b) New discoveries in the field of pest controL

RESOLUTION XI

It is Resolved:

That the following draft Resolution submitted by the
Peruvian Delegate be referred to the Standing Committee
for consideration and for such action as It deems desir-
able, bearing in mind budgetary limitations.

"Wherbias :

Resolution (Document 26) of the Fifth Plenary Meet-
ing, May 1946, states in item 8 'That the official and work-
ing languages of the International Cotton Advisory Com-
mittee be the same as those adopted by the United Na-
tions,'

Whereias :

It Is convenient to the Spanish-speaking people for their
full understanding of the work of this Committee and its
reports

It is Resolved:

That all the proceedings and information now being
compiled by the International Cotton Advisory Committee
and all subsequent proceedings and data, be published in

Spanish."

resolution xii

Whereas :

(1) Governments are concerned to increase general
standards of living for their populations, the more so

148

Department of State Bulletin

after the disruption of national economies caused by the
war,

(2) Governments are concerned that farmers receive
remunerative prices for their output,

(o) If both these objectives are to be met, production
and price policies must be evolved which give due regard
to the interests of both producers and consumers,

(4) World cotton consumption has not increased since
1947 in proportion to the general recovery in economic
activity and the rise in population,

(5) Cotton production since the end of the war has
increased in the dollar area, but remains below prewar
levels in some other areas, due mainly to the need for
food crops,

(6) Cotton stoclis increased in 1949/50 for the first
time since the war, mostly in the United States, resulting
in the reintroduction of acreage controls in that country ;
while at the same time cotton stocks have decreased else-
where,

(7) Postwar international trade in cotton is still greatly
hampered by the world-wide dollar shortage,

(S) Very outstanding results have already been at-
tained in the field of genetics and methods of production,

(9) The relatively higher price of cotton may in itself
have an unfavorable influence on the consumption of
cotton, and may stimulate recurring surplus production,

(10) Most of the non-dollar cottons currently enjoy
over the doUar cottons relatively wider price differentials
than the normal price premiums and discounts accounted
for by the difference in quality and grade,

(11) Technological progress has considerably improved
the quality of synthetic fibers, at the same time reducing
costs materially, resulting in keener competition with
cotton, which has been intensified by the effect of de-
valuation in many countries,

It is Resolved:

That the Meeting express in terms of the following para-
graphs, A through F, its views, conclusions, and recom-
mendations with respect to measures that governments
might appropriately take to improve the conditions for
consumption of cotton.

A. Cotton Consumption

The Committee considers that for various reasons,
Including the low level of incomes in many countries and
the failure of cotton consumption to respond to rises in
the level of incomes in other countries, the present ag-
gregate level of world consumption of cotton is unsatis-
factory, particularly In view of the general objective of
member governments of promoting for their populations
minimum standards of clothing (along with food and
housing).

The population in the countries where the level of
income is low is generally very dense and under-clothed,
and even a small Increase in the per capita consumption
of cotton and cotton goods in these countries would bring
about a large over-all increase in world consumption of
cotton.

With a view to creating conditions favorable for the
expansion of cotton consumption but without requesting
any preferential treatment for cotton vis-S-vis other
fibers, the Committee invites all member governments
to examine the factors which appear to hamper such ex-
pansion and when appropriate to modify national policies
which may contribute to this result, having special regard
to the following fields :

1. The practicability of reducing or removing im-
pediments, whether fiscal, commercial, or by other regu-
lations, on the exports and imports of cotton and cotton
goods and on the flow of internal trade in cotton and
cotton goods ;

2. Promoting a study of national clothing habits
and assisting manufacturers to popularize suitable cloth-
ing items with necessary sales promotion ;

3. Encouraging technical assistance in the field
both of agricultural and industrial production;

July 24, 1950

4. Supplying of cotton textile machinery on an easy
and long-term commercial basis ; and

5. Promoting research and developing alternative
uses of cotton.

B. Cotton and the Balance of Payments

While recognizing that balance-of-payments difficul-
ties are a world-wide problem, the solution of which is
not within the scope of this Committee, it seems never-
theless appropriate to remind member governments that
the level of textile activity in the world is still, and will
be for years to come, highly dependent upon the main-
tenance of large exports of raw cotton from hard currency
countries, which are at present largely made possible by
exceptional methods of financing.

The Committee invites the Standing Committee to
follow developments in the balance-of-payments situation
as it affects cotton and to report on the matter at the
Tenth Plenary Meeting.

C. Prices

Recognizing fully the essential objective of protecting
both the level and the stability of cotton growers' income
and providing textiles for a living standard as high
as possible, and calling the member governments' atten-
tion to outstanding and progressive achievements in the
field of synthetic fibers, the Committee:

1. Invites the Governments of all producing coun-
tries to give serious consideration to such modification of
their respective national production and price policies as
may be required to enable the world's consumers of cot-
ton and cotton goods to receive the maximum benefit from
improvements in technology and efficiency, and thereby
to contribute to the maintenance of cotton's position as
the most widely used and popular textile fiber and to an
Improvement of cotton's competitive position;

2. Invites the Governments of all consuming coun-
tries to take all practicable measures to increase the effi-
ciency of production and distribution of cotton goods ;

3. Invites all member governments to make every
effort to keep the greatest possible quantity of cotton
flowing in international trade at fair and reasonable
prices.

D. Research

The Committee draws the attention of the member
governments to the fact that research efforts are more
than ever necessary. It is only insofar as such research
in cotton production, manufacturing and distribution
meets with increasing success that cotton will be able to
maintain its outstanding position in the textile world,
and that cotton farmers will be able to maintain a satis-
factory outlet for the production of their land. Member
governments are requested to send their published infor-
mation, which may be of special interest to other govern-
ments, to the Secretariat for distribution.

E. Concessional Price Arrangements

The Committee, fully aware that the aggregate con-
sumption of cotton depends on the quantity of cotton and
cotton goods which can effectively move into international
trade from producing to consuming countries and noting
the present dilBculties which impede such international
trade, feels that every effort should be undertaken to
increase it.

Very serious objections in principle have been raised
against exceptional devices as being incompatible with the
normal, free flow of trade.

The Committee has therefore not found any possibility
of elaborating an arrangement of this kind, which would
help to solve the ditficulties, but if member governments
develop specific proposals regarding concessional prices
for cotton and cotton goods, they may be presented to the
Standing Committee for study and report to the Tenth
Plenary Meeting. Any such proposal should relate to
trade over and above normal trade and contain adequate
safeguards for the protection of the interests of other
exporting and importing countries.

149

F. International Cotton Agreement

Having in mind the present tendency of world cotton
production to exceed effective demand and the unstable
factors in the world cotton trade situation, the Committee
anticipates that the Standing Committee, under its original
terms of reference, will keep the vporld cotton situation
under continuous review and will make such recommenda-
tions to member governments as it deems appropriate
and compatible with their international obligations.

The Committee notes the discussion of intergovern-
mental measures relating to commodity agreements pre-
pared by the Interim Coordinating Committee for Inter-
national Commodity Arrangements of the United Na-
tions, which appears in Section A of the Report on the
Developing World Cotton Situation, and invites the Stand-
Committee to consider these measures in relation to cot-
ton and to report to the Tenth Plenary Meeting.

RESOLUTION XIII

Whereas :

The Government of Pakistan through its delegation has
invited the Committee to hold its Tenth Plenary Meeting
in Pakistan in the second fortnight of February 1951, and

Wherel^s :

It has been determined that an opening date approxi-
mating February 20, 1951, will be convenient alike to the
Government of Pakistan and to the Committee,

It is Resolved:

(1) That the Committee accept the gracious invitation
of the Government of Pakistan, and

(2) That a letter be addressed to the Government of
Pakistan expressing the warm thanks and appreciation
of the Committee.

resolution xiv

Wheehias :

The Government of India through its delegation has
expressed a desire to extend a most cordial invitation to
the Committee to hold its Tenth Plenary Meeting in India
and has in conclusion expressed its desire to be host to
the Committee at some future date,

It is Resolved:

(1) That the Committee express to the Government of
India warm thanks and appreciation and

(2) That the Committee take note of the interest of
the Government of India for the future.

RESOLUTION XV

It is Resolved:

(1) That the Delegates to this Ninth Plenary Meeting
of the International Cotton Advisory Committee express
to the Government of the United States their appreciation
and thanks for the excellent arrangements made for this
Meeting and for the hospitality and courtesy with which
they have been received ;

(2) That they express thanks, particularly to the
Chairman of this Meeting, the Honorable Charles F. Bran-
nan ; the Vice Chairman, Mr. Edwin D. White ; the Secre-
tary General, Dr. Arthur W. Palmer, and to the other
members of the Secretariat and of the International Con-
ferences Division of the State Department for their per-
sonal contributions to the success of the present Meeting ;
and

(3) That they wish the Chairman to convey to the
Government of the United States and its officials this
expression of their appreciation.

Fourth Session of the Contracting Parties

to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade

by Melvin E. Sinn

The Conference recently held at Geneva from
February 22 to April 3, 1950, was the latest in a
series convened in accordance with the provisions
of article XXV of the General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade, which provide that :

Representatives of the Contracting Parties ' shall meet
from time to time for the purpose of giving effect to those
provisions of tliis Agreement which involve joint action
and, generally, with a view to facilitating the operation
and furthering the objectives of this Agreement.

Three previous sessions of the Contracting
Parties have been held : the first at Habana in
1948, the second at Geneva from August-Septem-
ber 1948, and the third at Annecy, France, from

The words "Contracting Parties" are capitalized when
used in the collective sense of the contracting parties
acting jointly.

April-August 1949, where tariff negotiations were
held concurrently. The fact that more countries
were represented at the fourth session of the Con-
tracting Parties than at any previous session indi-
cates the importance which nations are attribut-
ing to cooperative action in the field of interna-
tional trade. The following countries were repre-
sented at the Conference as contracting parties :
Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Burma, Canada,
Ceylon, Chile, Czechoslovakia, France, India,
Luxembourg, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway,
Pakistan, Southern Ehodesia, the Union of South
Africa, the United Kingdom, and the United
States. During the course of the session, Greece
and Indonesia, who were also represented at the
Conference, became contracting parties. The
Netherlands sponsored Indonesia under the pro-
visions of Article XXVI of the Agreement.

150

Department of Slate Bulletin

Denmark, the Doiuiiiican Republic, Finland,
Italy, Sweden, and Ui'uguay, who participated in
the 1949 Annecy taritf negotiations, were repre-
sented, and all except Ui'iiguay have now acceded
to the Agreement. Austria, the German Federal
Republic, and Turkey were also represented and
expect to partici]iate in the next round of tariff
negotiations. Observers at the Conference in-
cluded representatives from the International
Monetary Fund, the Economic Commission for
Europe, the Organization for European Economic
Cooperation, and the Allied High Conmiission.
During the session, notice of withdrawal from the
Agreement was received from the Nationalist
Government of China.

The United States delegation to the Conference
was headed by Ambassador Henry F. Grady,
■with John W. Evans, chief of the Economic Re-
sources and Security Staff of the Department of
State, as vice chairman.

Work of the Conference

As in previous sessions, the Conference pro-
ceeded by first considering items in plenary ses-
sion and then referring those which required
further study to working groups. For purposes
of analysis, the business covered by the fourth
session can be roughly divided into three cate-
gories: (A) preparations for the next round of
tariff negotiations, (B) examination of trade
practices, and (C) other problems arising from
the operation of the Agreement.

Preparation for the Tariff Negotiations

One of the most important tasks of the Con-
ference was to make advance preparations for the
third round of tariff negotiations which had been
decided upon by the third session at Annecy. The
Contracting Parties accepted an invitation from
the United Kingdom to hold the negotiations,
•which will begin on September 28 of this year,
at Torquay, England. They also decided to holcl
their fifth session at the same place beginning on
November 2, the two conferences to run concur-
rently. The Torquay tariff negotiations will be on
a large scale, with approximately 40 countries par-
ticipating. About 400 separate bilateral negotia-
tions will take place, as compared with 123 com-
pleted at Geneva in 1947 and 147 at Annecy in
1949.

Revalidation of Geneva and Annecy Schedules

In preparing for the forthcoming tariff negotia-
tions, the Contracting Parties were anxious to in-
sure that the negotiations will not be made the oc-
casion for raising tariffs, even though the technical
right exists in article XXVIII to adjust individual
rates in the tariff schedules after January 1, 1951.
To achieve this purpose, the Contracting Parties
considered a proposal designed to extend the as-
sured life of the Geneva and Annecy schedules

July 24, 1950

for a further period beyond January 1, 1951. Al-
though the Contracting Parties decided not to take
any definitive action before the Torquay negotia-
tions, they did pass a resolution recommending
that such an extension be made and further that in-
dividual contracting parties take the steps neces-
sary to be in a position to extend until January
1, 1954, the assured life of the tariff schedules
when the Torquay negotiations are completed.

The Contracting Parties also reaffirmed the rule,
followed at previous negotiations, that the binding
of a low tariff rate should be considered equivalent
in principle to the substantial reduction of a high
rate.

Participation of Switzerland

In September 1949, Switzerland had been in-
vited to participate in the third round of tariff
negotiations and in her reply had indicated cer-
tain special difficulties which she anticipated would
result from acceptance of the obligations of the
Agreement. The Contracting Parties examined
several proposals by which they hoped to meet
these difficulties and enable Switzerland to par-
ticipate. After long and sympathetic considera-
tion, however, the Conti'acting Parties concluded
that none of the particular proposals advanced
could both meet the Swiss position and be regarded
as satisfactory to the Contracting Parties. The
Contracting Parties hoped that a way might still
be found within the letter and spirit of the Agree-
ment for Switzerland to participate.

Participation of Western Germany

A vote of 17-1 rejected a proposal by Czecho-
slovakia that Western Germany should be excluded
from the Torquay negotiations.

EXAMINATION OF TRADE PRACTICES

The Contracting Parties conducted an extensive
survey of the use of quantitative restrictions in
the light of the requirements of the Agreement and
approved two reports on the subject. The first
report consists of a close examination of the
various techniques used in the imposition of quan-
titative restrictions on imports and exports and
suggests specific measures to minimize their harm-
ful effects. The second report considers the dis-
criminatory application of import restrictions per-
mitted by the postwar transitional period arrange-
ments of the Agreement.

Review of Quantitative Restrictions on Imports
and Exports

The final report of the Contracting Parties re-
flected general agreement that, with certain minor
exceptions, the following types of export restric-
tions were inconsistent with the provisions of the
General Agreement :

(a) Those export restrictions used by one coun-

151

try for the purpose of obtaining the relaxation of
another country's import restrictions.

(b) Those export restrictions imposed by one
country to obtain a relaxation of another coun-
try's export restrictions on commodities in short
supply or to obtain an advantage in the procure-
ment from another country of such commodities.

(c) Restrictions imposed by a country on the
export of raw materials in order to protect a do-
mestic fabricating industry.

(d) Export restrictions used by a coimtry to
avoid price competition among its exporters.

On the import side, the Contracting Parties
agreed that every effort should be made to mini-
mize the incidental protective effect resulting from
the imposition of quantitative restrictions even
where those restrictions were imposed legitimately
for balance-of-payments reasons. The report sug-
gested several methods of accomplishing this ob-
j ecti ve. It urged members to avoid encouragement
of investment in enterprises which could not sur-
vive without protection when the balance-of-pay-
ments justification for such protection has disap-
peared. The report also urged the members to take
every opportunity to impress upon producers, re-
ceivmg incidental protection from balance-of-pay-
ments restrictions, the temporary nature of the
restrictions. It asked countries to administer such
restrictions as are necessary on a flexible basis and
to adjust them to changing circumstances. The
report agreed that where quotas are necessary,
they should preferably be unallocated and should
apply without discrimination to as many countries
as possible.

The report cited certain instances of the misuse
of import restrictions :

(a) Maintenance by a country of balance-of-
payments restrictions which give priority to im-
ports of particular products on the basis of the
competitiveness or noncompetitiveness of such im-
ports with a domestic industry.

(b) The imposition by a country of administra-
tive obstacles to the full utilization of import
quotas in order to afford protection to a domestic
industry.

(c) The use of import restrictions as a means of
retaliation against a country which has refused
to conclude a bilateral trade agreement with the
country concerned.

The report also recommended that each con-
tracting party review its system of import and
export restrictions in the light of the report and
that officials responsible for the administration of
quantitative restrictions and those engaged in
negotiating bilateral agreements be made familiar
with the conclusions reached.

Discriminatory Application of Import
Restrictions

The Contracting Parties examined the docu-
mentation submitted on the discriminatory appli-

cation of import restrictions under the transitional
arrangements of article XIV and annex J of the
Agreement and prepared the first in a series of
annual reports required by the provisions of para-
graph 1 (g) of article XIV. The report is based
on information received from 20 countries which
are applying import restrictions under these tran-
sitional arrangements. It indicates that although
many countries have made rapid strides in elim-
inating their balance-of-payments difficulties, they
have not yet been able to earn the amounts of hard
currencies which their importers would desire to
expend under a regime of nondiscriminatory im-
portation. They have, therefore, had to conserve
their hard-currency earnings for essential imports
while, at the same time, allowing their importers
a relatively greater degree of freedom with respect
to purchases in the soft-currency areas.

Because the Agreement contemplates that rela-
tive prices shall still be an important factor in
determining the source of imports, even in the case
of countries permitted to discriminate as between
hard- and soft-currency areas, close examination
was made of the administrative devices used to
implement this objective.

The Contracting Parties also considered the
effect of bilateral agreements on trade patterns.
They concluded that although devaluation and in-
creased production had done much to minimize the
effect of bilateral agreements, a danger existed that
such arrangements, together with the relatively
high prices prevailing in certain soft-currency
areas, might attract exports that would otherwise
have been sent to dollar markets and assisted in
easing balance-of-payments difficulties.

The Contracting Parties also utilized informa-
tion obtained during the examination of individual
countries' import restrictions to determine which
countries should be invited to consult at the next
session with respect to intensifications in their im-
poi"t programs. The most important members in
this category are the sterling area countries, which,
in July 1949, agreed to attempt to reduce their
dollar imports by 25 percent below the 1948 level.
Australia, Ceylon, Chile, India, New Zealand,
Pakistan, Southern Rhodesia, and the United
Kingdom were invited to consult at the fifth
session.

OTHER PROBLEMS ARISING

FROM OPERATION OF THE AGREEMENT

Rectifications and Modifications of Schedules

The problem of rectifications and modifications is
a highly technical one, involving careful work in
the correction of errors in the tariff schedules an-
nexed to the General Agreement. The Contract-
ing Parties approved rectifications to the authentic
texts of the Geneva and Annecy tariff schedules
of a number of countries, correcting errors in cer-
tain parts of these schedules, and also approved
corrections in annex C of the General Agreement
and in the "First Protocol of Modifications." An-

152

Department of Slate Bulletin

nex C contains a list of temtories which are con-
nected with the Benelux Customs Union by
common sovereignty or relations of protection or
suzerainty, while the "First Protocol of Modifica-
tions'" contains revisions affecting certain articles
of the General Agreement. The results were em-
bodied in a Protocol of Rectifications which was
opened for signature at the end of tlie session and
signed by John W. Evans for the United States.

Australian Fertilizer Subsidies

The Contracting Parties examined a complaint
by Chile with respect to an Australian subsidy on
imports of ammonium sulphate. The Chilean
complaint protested against Australia's retention
of a subsidy on imports of ammonium sulphate
when a similar subsidy had been removed from im-
ports of sodium nitrate, a competing product of
Chile. The Contracting Parties, although decid-
ing that the Australian action was not contrary to
the Agreement, took into consideration the fact
that a subsidy had been paid on both products at
the time that a tariff concession on sodium nitrate
had been granted by Australia at the 1947 negotia-
tions. The Contracting Parties therefore, acting
under the provisions of article XXIII of the
Agreement, on "Nullification and Impairment,"
recommended an adjustment by Australia which
would remove any competitive inequality which
the Australian action had created.

Economic Development Measures

The Contracting Parties considered applica-
tions under article XVIII of the Agreement by
Haiti, Ceylon, and Syria and Lebanon for per-
mission to use special measures to promote their
economic development. They rejected the appli-
cation of Syria and Lebanon because those coun-
tries had failed to supply the information required
to determine whether the criteria of the Agree-
ment were complied with. Subject to certain limi-
tations and conditions, they granted a waiver to
Ceylon for a period of 5 years to permit the regu-
lation of the importation of cotton verties, or
sarongs, in order to promote the development of a
local industry. In the case of Haiti, action on an
application for a release to cover a measure for
protection of its tobacco products industry was
scheduled for consideration at the next session.

Budget

The Contracting Parties approved a revised
budget report for 1949-50. It was designed to
take into account the contributions of governments
expecting to accede to the Agreement at the third
round of tariff negotiations and also the contri-
bution of Indonesia which became a contracting
party during the course of the session.

Derestriction of Documents

In order that the work of the Contracting
Parties might be made more readily accessible to

businessmen, students, research workers, journal-
ists, and the public in general, the Contracting
Parties unanimously approved a proposal by the
United States which would automatically dere-
strict most conference documents 90 days after the
end of a session.

Waiver on U.S. Potato hnports

A request by the United States was granted,
permitting the United States to alter the figure
in its tariff schedule which determines the quantity
of potatoes that may be imported at the reduced
rate of duty negotiated in 1947. Under the waiver,
the United States may limit the importation of
table stock potatoes at the reduced rate to 1 million
bushels, plus any amount by which the domestic
crop in 1950 shall fall below 335 million bushels,
instead of 350 million as originally provided in
the Agreement.

Special Exchange Agreements

Under the provisions of article XV of the
Agreement, contracting parties not members of
the International Monetary Fund must either be-
come members of the Fund or sign a special ex-
change agreement having substantially equivalent
effect. The Contracting Parties examined the
position of countries affected by the provisions of
this article and also considered proposals to im-
plement the procedural aspects of the special ex-
change agreements.

Application of Norwegian Tariff Conxiessions

Because of the inability of the new Norwegian
Storting to act by April 30, 1950, the Contracting
Parties agreed to extend to June 30, 1950, the date
by which Norway must put into effect its Annecy
tariff concessions.

MEN for Japan

At the close of the session, the United States
made a short statement indicating that she still
considered it desirable for the Contracting Parties
to devise some way of extending most-favored-
nation treatment to Japan on a reciprocal basis
and that the question may be raised at the fifth
session.

Conclusion

This latest session of the Contracting Parties
has again proved the value of the General Agree-
ment as a vital and effective force in setting stand-
ards of fair practices in international trade, in
providing a forum for the hearing and settlement
of disputes, and in exerting a constant influence
in the direction of restoring world trade to a multi-
lateral and nondiscriminatory basis.

The General Agreement, although young in
years, has, nevertheless, demonstrated itself to be
mature, dynamic, and effective in its operation.

i»lY 24, 1950

153

German Participation
in International Bodies ^

It is the policy of the Allied Governments, an-
nounced in the Petersberg protocol, to promote
and encourage German membership of all the rec-
ognized international bodies. In this regard the
Petersberg agreement states :

The High Commission and the Federal Government are
agreed to promote the participation of Germany in all
those international organizations through which German
experience and support can contribute to the general
welfare.

Since the Petersberg agreement was signed (No-
vember 22, 1949) considerable progress has been
made in the accession of Western Germany to in-
ternational bodies.

Following is a list of international organiza-
tions to which the Federal Government adheres:

1. Organization for European Economic Co-
operation (Oeec).

2. International Authority for the Euhr.

3. Customs Committee of the European Cus-
toms Union Study Group.

4. International Union for the Publication of
Customs Tariffs.

5. International Wlieat Council.

6. Central Rhine Commission.

Following are the organizations and confer-
ences in which the Federal Government has par-
ticipated or will participate :

1. Meetings of Contracting Parties to the Gen-
eral Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (Gatt).
(German observer.)

2. Third Assembly of the World Health Organ-
ization (Who). (German observers.)

3. International Anti-VD Commission of the
Rhine ( Who ) . ( Part of Who. )

4. International Labor Organization (Ilo) Con-
ferences :

(a) On Social Insurance and Working Con-
ditions of Rhine Boatmen (Oct., Nov., Dec. 1950).
(German delegation.)

(b) 33rd Session of Ilo Conference. (Ger-
man observers.)

(d) Preliminary Conference on Migration
(April 1950). (Gennan observers.)

(e) Preparatory Tripartite Technical Con-
ference on Training Adults. (German observers.)

5. Invitation extended by Dutch Government to
Federal Government to send a representative to

'Reprinted from Information Bulletin of U. S. High
Commissioner for Germany of July 1950.

154

Conferences of Italian and Austrian Experts on
Tobacco Production to be held in Rome in Septem-
ber 1950. (German delegation will attend.)

6. Conference on the Control of Plant Diseases —
Holland, April-May 1950. (German representa-
tives attended.)

7. International Committee for Colorado Beetle
Control, Florence, January 1950. (German rep-
resentatives attended. )

8. Conference on Agricultural Technology held
under Fag auspices in Geneva in March 1950.
(German observers.)

9. Meeting of the International Seed Testing
Authority (United States Government-spon-
sored). (German observers.)

10. Biennial Art Exposition, Venice, June 1950.
(German exhibits.)

11. International Congress at Groningen, June
1950, on occasion of the 160th anniversary of the
founding of the Royal Netherlands Institute for
the Deaf and Mute. (German representatives
attended.)

12. International Poplar Committee, Geneva
April 18-21. (German experts attended.)

Following are the international organizations in
which German participation has been or is under
consideration by the Allied High Commission :

1. United Nations Food and Agriculture Or-
ganization (Fao).

2. United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization (Unesco).

3. International Committee for Bird Preserva-
tion.

4. Twenty-eighth International Industrial Ex-
hibition, Padua, June 1950.

Following are the international organizations
in which participation has been invited and is
under consideration by the Federal Government :

1. International Patent Office at The Hague.

2. International Wine Office.

3. International Commissions, established under
the Fishery Convention of Juno 1885 among the
Netherlands, Switzerland and Germany, on (i)
Rhine pollution and (ii) salmon fishery.

4. Twenty-fourth International Congress on
Sociology to be held in Rome in September 1950.

5. United Nations Social Activities Division.

G. The International Office for Animal Diseases

in Paris.

7. Eighth International Congress of Agricul-
tural Industries (Invitation from Permanent Na-
tional Agricultural Committee of Belgium).

8. International Refrigerator Car Company.

9. Fourteenth Levant Fair, Paris, September
1950.

10. Permanent International Agricultural Ex-
position in Tehran, October 1950.

Department of State Bulletin

U.S. Delegations to International Conferences

Agricultural Industries

The Department of State announced on June
22 that Dr. Guido Edward Hilbert, chief, Bureau
of Agricultural and Industrial Chemistry, De-
partment of Agriculture, has been named United
States delegate to the Eighth International Con-
gress of Agricultural Industries, to be held at
Brussels from July 9-15. The American Am-
bassador at Brussels has been requested to name
a member of the Embassy to act as alternate for
Dr. Hilbert.

This Congress is one of a series of meetings
organized in various capitals of Europe by the
International Commission of Agricultural Indus-
tries, which has its headquarters at Paris, for the
purpose of developing new and improved agricul-
tural techniques for use in combating malnutri-
tion. The United States Government is not a
member of the Commission, but it has sent offi-
cial delegates to several of the previous congresses.
The Seventh Congress was held at Paris in July
1948.

Discussions at the forthcoming meeting will
cover such subjects as the development of agricul-
tural industries in tropical countries, the world
market for raw foodstuffs, agricultural produc-
tion, and agricultural sciences.

Sugar Council

The Department of State announced on June
26 that Elmer F. Kruse, Assistant Administrator
for Commodity Operations, Production and Mar-
keting Administration, Department of Agricul-
ture, has been named United States delegate to the
meeting of the Special Committee of the Inter-
national Sugar Council at London beginning on
June 26. Others on the United States delegation
are:

Alternate Delegate

Lawrence Myers, director, Sugar Branch, Production and
Marketing Administration, Department of Agriculture

Advisers

Stanley Andrews, director. Office of Foreign Agricultural
Relations, Department of Agriculture

Howard H. Tewksbury, director, Office of East Coast Af-
fairs, Department of State

James C. Foster, director. Commodities Division, Office
of International Trade, Department of Commerce

Francis A. Linville, assistant chief. Economic Resources
and Security Staff, Department of State

Paul O. Nyhus, agricultural attach^, American Embassy,
London

Adviser and Secretary

Catherine T. Corson, Sugar Branch, Production and Mar-
keting Administration, Department of Agriculture

In 1948, the International Sugar Council es-
tablished the Special Committee to make a study
of the sugar situation with a view to ascertaining
the need for negotiating a new international sugar
agreement. The effective provisions of the exist-
ing International Sugar Agreement, which came
into force on September 1, 1937, have not been in
operation since the outbreak of World War II,
although the Council, which was established pur-
suant to terms of the agreement, continued to
function as a standby organization to keep the
sugar situation under study.

At the forthcoming meeting of the Special Com-
mittee, approximately 20 sugar-exporting and im-
porting countries will discuss the world sugar out-
look and the Cuban proposal for a new inter-
national sugar agreement. The meeting will also
decide whether sufficient areas of agreement exist
among sugar-exporting and importing countries
to warrant the convening of a conference in the
fall of 1950 to negotiate a new international sugar
agreement.

High Tension Electric Systems

The Department of State announced on June
29 tliat the United States delegation to the thir-
teenth session of the International Conference on
Large High Tension Electric Systems, wliich con-
vened at Paris on June 29 is as follows :

Chairman

B. Robert deLuccia, Chief, Bureau of Power, Federal
Power Commission

Vice Chairman

Frederic Attwood, Chairman, United States National
Committee, International Conference on High Tension
Electric Systems

July 24, 1950

155

Delegates

Eugene O. Crittenden, Associate Director, National Bu-
reau of Standards, Department of Commerce

Orin A. Demuth, Cliief, Brancli of System Engineering,
Bonneville Power Administration, Department of the
Interior, Portland, Oreg.

Carl H. Giroux, Special Assistant, Corps of Engineers,
Department of the Army

Cecil L. Killgore, Assistant to the Chief Designing Engi-
neer, Bureau of Reclamation, Department of the
Interior, Denver, Colo.

The International Conference on Large High
Tension Electric Systems, founded in March 1921,
is an organization with a membership of approxi-
mately 1,400 technicians, executives, and govern-
mental officials from various countries. Its
members meet biennially to exchange information
on the most recent progress in design, construc-
tion, and operation of high tension electric
systems.

The work of this session is divided into four
sections as follows: (1) generation, transforma-
tion, and rupture of current; (2) construction,
insulation, and maintenance of overhead and un-
derground lines; (3) operation, protection, and
interconnection of networks; and (4) higher
voltages than that actually used.

Study Group on Germany

The Department of State announced on June
30 that Lewis W. Douglas, American Ambassador,
London, and the United States member of the
Intergovernmental Study Group on Germany, will
attend the first meeting of this body at London
beginning July 3, 1950. Other members of the
United States delegation are :

Alternate United States Member

Jacques J. Reinstein, Director, Office of German Economic
Affairs, Department of State

Special Adviser

Samuel Reber, Counselor, Office of the United States High
Commissioner for Germany, Frankfort on the Main,
Germany

Assistant to the United States Member

William C. Trimble, First Secretary, American Embassy,
London

Advisers

John W. Auchincloss, OflSce of German Political Affairs,
Department of State

John A. Calhoun, Deputy Director, Office of German Polit-
ical Affairs, Department of State

Robert Eisenberg, Economic Specialist, Office of German
Economic Affairs, Department of State

George H. Jacobs, Acting Officer in Charge, Office of Ger-
man Economic Affairs, Department of State

Brunson MacChesney, Professor of LavF, Northwe.stern
University Law School, Chicago, 111.

Covey T. Oliver, Professor of Law, University of Cali-
fornia Law School, Berkeley, Calif.

Gardner Palmer, Adviser, Office of Financial and Develop-
ment Policy, Department of State

Henry Parkman, United States Representative on Inter-
national Authority for the Ruhr, American Consulate
General, Frankfort on the Main, Germany

John M. Raymond, Assistant Legal Adviser, Office of the
Legal Adviser, Department of State

Legal Assistant

Donald A. Wehmeyer, Assistant to the Legal Adviser,
Office of the Legal Adviser, Department of State

Agreement to establish the Intergovernmental
Study Group on Germany was announced in the
joint declaration on Germany issued at London
on May 14, 1950, by Foreign Ministers Acheson,
Bevin, and Schuman.

ECOSOC CEIeventh Session)

The Department of State announced on June
30 that Isador Lubin, recently named by Presi-
dent Truman as United States representative to
the United Nations Economic and Social Council,
will attend the eleventh session of that body at
Geneva beginning July 3. Assisting Mr. Lubin at
this session will be the following :

Deputy United States Representative

Walter Kotschnig, Director, Office of United Nations
Economic and Social Affairs, Department of State

Advisers

Robert E. Asher, Alternate United States Representative
to the Economic Commission for Europe, Geneva

Kathleen Bell, Office of United Nations Economic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

Henry J. Bitterman, Adviser, Office of International
Finance, Department of the Treasury

John Gates, Jr., Office of United Nations Economic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

Gerhard Colm, Economist, Council of Economic Advisers,
Executive Office of the President

Joseph Coppock, Adviser, Office of International Trade
Policy, Department of State

Eleanor Dennison, Office of United Nations Economic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

Arthur E. Goldsehmidt, Special Assistant to the Secretary,
Department of the Interior

Haldore Hanson, Chief, Technical Cooperation Projects
StatT. Interim Office for Technical Cooperation and
Development, Department of State

Gladys Harrison, Assistant General Counsel, Office of the
Administrator, Federal Security Agency

Louis Henkin, Division of International Administration,
Department of State

Frances Kernohan, Assistant Officer in Charge, United
Nations Social Affairs, Office of United Nations Eco-
nomic and Social Affairs, Department of State

Lewis L. Lorwin, Economic Adviser, Office of International
Trade, Department of Commerce

Alvin Roseman, United States Representative for Special-
ized Agency Affairs, Geneva

Charles D. Stewart, Assistant Commissioner, Bureau of
Labor Statistics, Department of Labor

William Stibravy, Office of Financial and Development
Policy, Department of State

Press Relations Officer

Donald C. Dunham, American Legation, Bern

Tlie Economic and Social Council was estab-
lished in accordance with the United Nations
Charter as one of the principal organs of the
United Nations for the purpose of promoting
higher standards of living, full employment, eco-
nomic and social progress, international cultural
and educational cooperation, and respect for ob-
servance of human rights and fundamental
freedoms. Nine functional commissions, three

156

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

regional commissions, as well as certain standing
and ad hoc committees and special bodies comprise
the structure of the Council. Eighteen countries
are represented on the Council.

Since its beginning, the Council has worked on
many projects in the economic and social field, of
which one of the most recent is the technical assis-
tance program. Through this project, the Coun-
cil, in collaboration with the specialized agencies,
is attempting to overcome conditions of poverty,
disease, and hunger in underdeveloped countries
and territories. The Council's Commission on
Human Rights has prepared a draft international
covenant on human rights, and draft international
conventions regarding freedom of information
and of the press have been formulated by the
Council's Subcommission on Freedom of Infor-
mation and of the Press. The Council has been
active also in such matters as the care of children
and displaced persons, better conditions of employ-
ment, the improvement and expansion of produc-
tion and trade, and the development of adequate
transport and communications facilities.

Of the 51 items on the agenda for the forth-
coming session, the following are of primary
interest to the United States Government: the
question of national and international measures
required to achieve full employment; technical
assistance for the economic development of under-
developed areas; methods of financing economic
development ; convention on statelessness; the con-
tinuing needs of children; and the development
of a long-range program of social welfare. In
addition, the Council will review reports of seven
functional commissions, three regional commis-
sions, and eight specialized agencies. The Council
will make recommendations regarding work in
the economic and social fields to be undertaken or
discontinued by these commissions, the General
Assembly, and the specialized agencies concerned.

Teaching of Geography

The Department of State announced on July 11
that the United States delegation to the United
Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Or-
ganization (Unesco) international seminar on the
teaching of geography as a means for developing
international understanding, to be held at Mon-
treal from July 12-August 23, is as follows :

Chairman

Zoe Agnes Thralls, professor of education and geography,
University of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, Pa.

Delegates

Thomas P. Barton, professor of geography, University of

Indiana, Bloomington, Ind.
Sister Mary Ursula Hauk, teacher of geography and

English, .Johnstown Central Catholic High School,

Johnstown, Pa.
Marion H. Seibel, critic teacher, New York State College

for Teachers, Buffalo, N. Y.

The topic of study for the seminar, which is one
of a number of seminars being sponsored by
Unesco, is "How can the teaching of geography

Jo/y 24, 7950

in its various branches — physical geography, eco-
nomic geography, and human geography — be used
as a means for developing international under-
standing?" Emphasis will be placed on teaching
problems and methods, on the education and train-
ing of geography teachers, and on the study of
practical techniques to be applied in the classroom.
The study groups which will carry out the work
of the seminar will give consideration also to the
relationship between geography and other subjects
of study, the use of audiovisual teaching aids, and
suggested techniques for the use of schools in war-
devastated or underdeveloped countries.

Coffee Report-

-Continued from page 144

of years in the annual coffee carry-over would ap-
pear to support the judgment of the subcommittee.

Recommendation 8 and the legislation proposed
thereunder, apparently contemplate establishing
a withholding tax implemented by a tentative
substantial withholding from transfers pending
determination by the Commissioner of Internal
Revenue of the nature and results of the transac-
tions involved within the United States. The ad-
ministration of such a withholding tax would ap-
pear to be a difficult administrative task involving
controls and impediments to transfers which
might become of foreign policy concern. I believe
that this proposal should be carefully studied by
the appropriate agencies. It is my understanding
that the tax revision bill now pending before other
committees of the Congress contains recommenda-
tions for imposing a tax on the capital gains of
nonresident aliens and that the matter will re-
ceive careful attention.

There are a number of places in the body of the
report where the drafting might have been im-
proved from the viewpoint of our foreign affairs.
I should like merely to refer to one case in which
different language would have had a greater ap-
peal to our good neighbors to the soutTi. This is
the discussion of the award by the Brazilian Gov-
ernment of the Order of the Southern Cross to
Mr. Robbins and Mr. Kurtz which begins on page
16 and concludes at the top of page 17.

Before closing this statement and attempting to
answer any questions you may wish to ask, I should
like to ask your aid in giving a fully satisfactory
answer to a question put to Secretary Acheson
yesterday morning jointly by the Ambassadors
of the coffee-producing countries. This question
was whether the report of your subcommittee is
to be considered as marking a change in United
States foreign policy as it relates to Latin Amer-
ica. I believe that real doubt as to the intentions
of this Government has been created by the report.
The Department is convinced that this is not the
intent of the Committee and will, of course, do its
best to dispel the doubt. I earnestly request that
you, in the manner you may consider most ap-
propriate, help the Department to answer the
Ambassadors' question.

157

The United States in the United Nations

July 15-21

Interim Committee

Continuing consideration of the report of the
Commission for Eritrea, the Interim Committee
heard the views of Ethiopia, Italy, New Zealand,
Canada, and the United States on the disposition
of that former Italian colony. Charles P. Noyes
of the United States reiterated that his Govern-
ment continues to believe "the best and most equit-
able solution would be the immediate incorpora-
tion of all of Eritrea, excluding the Western
Province, into Ethiopia." The United States is
willing, however, to give careful consideration to
a compromise solution involving federation of
Eritrea and Ethiopia under the sovereignty of the
Ethiopian crown. Such a formula, he continued,
"holds out the best promise of a harmonious recon-
ciliation of all the interests involved." He ex-
plained the United States opposition to either
independence or trusteeship for Eritrea.

Ethiopia favored the union of Eritrea with
Ethiopia and opposed independence, the solution
with which Italy agreed. Both Canada and New
Zealand supported our view that some form of
federation between Eritrea and Ethiopia would be
most likely to harmonize conflicting interests.

International Court of Justice

An advisory opinion on the international status
of Southwest Africa was delivered by the Inter-
national Court of Justice at The Hague on July 11
and on the second phase of the case concerning
interpretation of the peace treaties with Bulgaria,
Hungary, and Rumania on July 18.

In the former opinion, the Court stated its
unanimous view that Southwest Africa is a terri-
tory under international mandate assumed by the
Union of South Africa on December 16, 1920. In
its opinion, requested by the General Assembly,
the Court, in answer to three specific questions,
decided: (a) by a 12-2 vote, that the Union of
South Africa continues to have international obli-
gations toward the territory resulting from the
mandate, including the obligation to submit re-
ports on the territory and to transmit petitions
from its inhabitants, with supervisory functions

being exercised by the United Nations in place of
the League of Nations and reference to the Perma-
nent Court of Intei'national Justice being replaced
by reference to the International Court of Justice ;
(b) unanimously, that the provisions of chapter
XII of the United Nations Charter (pertaining to
the international trusteeship system) are appli-
cable to the territory of Southwest Africa in the
sense that they provide a means by which it may
be brought under the trusteeship system, but, by 8
votes to 6, that the Charter imposes no legal obli-
gation on the Union of South Africa to place the
territory under trusteeship ; and (c) unanimously,
that the Union of South Africa, acting alone, is
not competent to modify the international status
of Southwest Africa but that such competence
rests with the Union acting with the consent of the
United Nations.

In general, the opinion sustained the views pre-
sented to the Court by the United States. Written
statements wei'e also filed by Egypt, India, Poland,
and the Union of South Africa, and oral state-
ments were presented on behalf of the Philippines,
the Union of South Africa, and the United Nations
Secretary-General.

In the second case, the Court, also in reply to
questions from the General Assembly, by a vote of
11-2, decided that, if one party is obligated but
fails to appoint a representative to a treaty com-
mission under the peace treaties with Bulgaria,
Hungary, and Rumania, the United Nations
Secretary-General is not authorized, upon the
request of the other party to the dispute, to appoint
the third member of the Commission.

On March 30 the Court had answered affirma-
tively the first two questions referred to it by the
Assembly in connection with the alleged human
rights violations in Bulgaria, Hungary, and
Rumania. Those questions were (1) whether a
dispute subject to the treaty settlement provisions
existed, and (2) if so, whether the three countries
were obligated to appoint treaty commission rep-
resentatives. Benjamin V. Colien presented oral
argument on behalf of the United States in both
phases of the case. The Court's opinion in the
second phase rejected the contentions of the
United States.

158

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

Trusteeship Council

Oil July 14 the Trusteeship Council adopted a
resolution proposed by the United States and
Argentina which expressed the hope that the ad-
ministering authorities of British and French
Togoland would proceed with their plans for solu-
tion of the Ewe problem in those two territories
and would insure equitable representation on the
Consultative Commission of the various gi'oups
residing in the territories; requested a progress
report at the next Council session; and recom-
mended that, pending final settlement of the prob-
lem, the common traits and traditions of the Ewe
people in the two trust territories be preserved.
In the voting, only Iraq and the Philippines
opposed the resolution, while China abstained.

A special report to the General Assembly trans-
mitting the draft trusteeship agreement for the
former Italian colony of Somaliland was approved
on July 14. On July 20, the Council approved a
request to the Assembly for funds for a visiting
mission to that territory, if the draft trusteeship
agreement receives Assembly approval, as well as
to the trust territories of Tanganyika and Ruanda-
Urundi.

In connection with the administering powers'
annual reports on the trust -territories, the Coun-
cil's repoil to the Security Council on the United
States annual report on the Trust Territory of the
Pacific Islands, a strategic area, was adopted on
July 14 and the Council's report to the General
Assembly on the British Togoland report on July
20. On the latter date, the Council also gave its
approval to the first two parts of its Assembly
reports on Australia's report on Nauru and on the
French Togoland report.

Economic and Social Council

The Economic and Social Council, in the third
week of its eleventh session at Geneva, concluded
general debate on full employment and referred
the item to the Economic Committee for more
detailed study. It also completed action on the
reports of the Population and Social Commissions
and of the Commission on Status of Women.

For its discussion of full employment, the Coun-
cil had before it the report of a group of experts
on "National and International Measures for Full
Employment," on which member governments had
been invited to submit their views. Isidor Lubin
of the United States, in his statement on this re-
port, told the Council that American people will
not again tolerate a major depression. "Through
our free institutions," he said, "we shall pursue a
policy of steadily rising production and employ-
ment. We shall do this not for domestic reasons
alone. We shall do it, also, because we recognize
the place of American economy in the world
economic and political structure."

Following a discussion of the specific recom-
mendations of the experts' report, Mr. Lubin

submitted a proposal that United Nations member
governments report periodically to the Secretary-
General on their economic situation and their
policies and programs for employment. The Sec-
retary-General would analyze the reports and
make studies on the problems of full employment
in the world economy. The reports and studies
would be considered by the Economic and Employ-
ment Commission, whicli would make recom-
mendations for action to the Council. The United
States further recommended preparation of a
report on underemployment, particularly in under-
developed countries.

In connection with the consideration of the
report of the Social Commission, the Council ap-
proved a long-range work program for the Com-
niission, a broad program for social rehabilitation
of the physically handicapped, and plans for revi-
sion and expansion of the United States advisory
social welfare services. The Secretary-General
was asked to prepare a report on the world social
situation. Welfare of the aged, migration, social
rehabilitation of the physically handicapped and
a declaration of child rights were the topics of
other resolutions.

Turning to the report of the Commission on the
Status of Women, the Council approved resolu-
tions dealing with a possible draft convention
grantmg women equal political rights, as well as a
convention on the nationality of married women
which the International Law Commission was
asked to draft. Political education for women, the
role of women in the technical assistance program,
the application of penal law to women, educational
opportunities for women, the problem of Greek
mothers whose children have not yet been repatri-
ated, and the plights of male and female survivors
of Nazi concentration camps who were victims of
so-called scientific experiments were the subject of
other proposals. The United States supported aU
of these resolutions.

With approval of the Population Commission's
report, the Council endorsed recommendations for
studies by the Secretary- General of the interrela-
^on of demographic, economic, and social factors.
This involved a special field study of this problem
in India, a study which Walter Kotschnig, for the
United States, strongly supported in the Social
Committee's discussion. The Secretary-General
was also asked to press forward studies on migra-
tion, including a study of practical measures^for
the international financing of European migration
to underdeveloped areas. Another of the recom-
mendations is to call the attention of the Technical
Assistance Board to the Commission's recom-
mendations on the demographic aspects of tech-
nical assistance. Unless some of the related demo-
graphic aspects were elucidated, Mr. Kotschnig
said in the Social Committee, it might be difficult
to carry through some parts of the technical
assistance program.

July 24, 1950

159

General Policy Page

Justice Based on Human Rights: A Threat to

TjT-anny. Address by the President . . 123

Assistance Placed at Disposal of Unified
Command in Korea. Statement by
Secretary Acheson 130

Ambassador Muccio Commended on Per-
formance of Duty in Korea 130

Korean Foreign Minister Expresses Gratitude

for U.S. Aid 130

United States Policy in the Korean Crisis . . 130

Soviet World-Peace Appeal Called Propa-
ganda Trick. Statement by Secretary
Acheson 131

Soviet "Beetle" Charge Labeled Ridiculous
Propaganda :
Communist Propaganda Aims To Cover

Pest Control Failure 134

U.S. Reply to Soviet Note 134

U.S. Answers Czechoslovak Charges . . . 135

Treaty Information

Soviet Tactics Again Stall Negotiations on
Austrian Treaty. Statement by Secre-
tary Acheson 131

Soviet Delay in Repatriating German War
Prisoners — Complete Disregard of Hu-
man Rights 132

U.S.-Spain Amend Air Agreement 135

The Need for an International Trade Organ-
ization. Views of Maurice J. Tobin,
Secretary of Labor 136

Fourth Session of the Contracting Parties to
the General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade. By Melvin E. Sinn 150

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

The United States in the United Nations . . 158

Occupation Matters page
Soviet Delay in Repatriating German War
Prisoners — Complete Disregard of Hu-
man Rights 132

National Security

Scope of Atomic Energy Program Expanded.

Statement by the President 129

International Organizations and
Conferences

The World Cotton Situation — Report on
Ninth Plenary Meeting of International

Cotton Advisory Committee 145

Fourth Session of the Contracting Parties to
the General Agreement on Tariffs and

Trade. By Melvin E. Sinn 150

German Participation in International Bodies . 154
U.S. Delegations:

Agricultural Industries 155

Sugar Council 155

High Tension Electric Systems 155

Study Group on Germany 156

Ecosoc (Eleventh Session) 156

Teaching of Geography 167

International Information and
Cultural Affairs

Americans Visiting Abroad 133

The Congress

Clarification Asked on Senate Coffee Report.
Statement by Edward G. Miller Assist-
ant Secretary for Inter-American Affairs . 140

The Department

Administering the Displaced Persons Act of
1948, as Amended. By Herv6 J.
L'Heureux 125

'wn^}mml(yy^

Melvin E. Sinn, author of the article on the fourth session of the
Contracting Parties to GATT, is foreign affairs analyst on the Com-
mercial Policy Staff. Mr. Sinn also accompanied the U.S. delegation
to the Geneva meeting.

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTIN6 OFFICEi 1*10

A-

iJAe/ ^eha/yimteni/ ,(w tftale^

THE KOREAN SITUATION:

The President's Message to the Congress 163

Authority of the President To Repel Attack 173

Chronology of Events, 1949-50 179

EXPANDED INFORMATION PROGRAM VITAL TO

NATIONAL SECURITY 194

BENELUX— A CASE STUDY IN ECONOMIC UNION •

Ky Howard J. Hilton, Jr 181

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 578
July 31, 1950

^,jl».NT 0«,

^<V»"» o.

.jAe z!/^€fi(M(tment /w c/lciie

bulletin

Vol. XXIII, No. 578 • Publication 3926
July 31, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.C.

Price:

62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.60
Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
curren tly.

(AS..'w^. o~l ^^^rzA^-^y^ji^J::,

^. if, i ')^'^

The Korean Situation: Its Significance to the People
of the United States

The Presidents Message to the Congress

[Released to the press hy the White House July ifl]

I am reporting to the Congress on the situation
which has been created in Korea and on the actions
■which this Nation has tal^en, as a member of the
United Nations, to meet this situation. I am also
laying before the Congress my views concerning
the significance of these events for this Nation and
the world and certain recommendations for legis-
lative action which, I believe, should be taken at
this time.

Background on Korean Invasion

^At 4 o'clock in the morning, Sunday, June 25,
Korean time, armed forces from north of the 38th
parallel invaded the Republic of Korea.

The Eepublic of Korea was established as an
independent nation in August 1948, after a free
election held under the auspices of the United Na-
tions. This election, which was originally in-
tended to cover all of Korea, was held only in the
part of the Korean peninsula south of the 38th
parallel, because the Soviet Government, ip^hich
occupied the peninsula north of that parallel, re-
fused to allow the election to be held in the area
under its control.

The United States, and a majority of the other
members of the United Nations, have recognized
the Republic of Korea. The admission of Korea
to the United Nations has been blocked by the
Soviet veto.

In December 1948, the Soviet Government
stated that it had withdrawn its occupation troops
from northern Korea and that a local regime had
been established there. The authorities in north-
ern Korea continued to refuse to permit United
Nations observers to pass the 38th parallel to su-
pervise or observe a free election or to verify the
withdrawal of Soviet troops.

Nevertheless, the United Nations continued its
efforts to obtain a freely elected government for
all of Korea, and at the time of the attack, a United

My 37, 7950

Nations Commission, made up of representatives
of seven nations — Australia, China, El Salvador,
France, India, the Philippines, and Turkey — was
in the Republic of Korea.

Just 1 day before the attack of June 25, field ob-
servers attached to the United Nations Commis-
sion on Korea had completed a routine tour, last-
ing 2 weeks, of the military positions of the
Republic of Korea south of the 38th parallel. The
report of these international observers stated that
the army of the Republic of Korea was organized
entirely for defense. The observers found the
parallel guarded on the south side by small bodies
of troops in scattered outposts, with roving pa-
trols. They found no concentration of troops and
no preparation to attack. The observers con-
cluded that the absence of armor, air support,
heavy artillei-y, and military supplies precluded
any offensive action by the forces of the Republic
of Korea.

On June 25, within a few hours after the in-
vasion was launched from the north, the Commis-
sion reported to the United Nations that the at-
tack had come without warning and without prov-
ocation.

The reports from the Commission make it un-
mistakably clear that the attack was naked, de-
liberate, unprovoked aggression, without a shadow
of justification.

This outright breach of the peace, in violation of
the United Nations Charter, created a real and
present danger to the security of every nation.
This attack was, in addition, a demonstration of
contempt for the United Nations, since it was an
attempt to settle, by military aggression, a ques-
tion which the United Nations had been working
to settle by peaceful means.

The attack on the Republic of Korea, therefore,
was a clear challenge to the basic principles of the
United Nations Charter and to the specific actions
taken by the United Nations in Korea. If this

163

challenge had not been met squarely, the effective-
ness of the United Nations would have been all
but ended, and the hope of mankind that the
United Nations would develop into an institution
of world order would have been shattered.

U.N. Action

Prompt action was imperative. The Security
Council of the United Nations met, at the request
of the United States, in New York at 2 o'clock in
the afternoon, Sunday, June 25, eastern daylight
time. Since there is a 1-i-hour difference in time
between Korea and New York, this meant that
the Council convened just 24 hours after the at-
tack began.

At this meeting, the Security Council passed a
resolution which called for the immediate cessa-
tion of hostilities and for the withdrawal of the
invading troops to the 38th parallel,^ and which
i-equested the members of the United Nations to re-
frain from giving aid to the northern aggi'essors
and to assist in the execution of this resolution.
The representative of the Soviet Union to the
Security Council stayed away from the meeting,
and the Soviet Government has refused to support
the Council's resolution.

The attack launched on June 25 moved ahead
rapidly. The tactical surprise gained by the ag-
gressors, and their superiority in planes, tanks,
and artillery, forced the lightly armed defenders
to retreat. The speed, the scale, and the coordina-
tion of the attack left no doubt that it had been
plotted long in advance.

Wlien the attack came, our Ambassador to
Korea, John J. Muccio, began the immediate evac-
uation of American women and children from the
danger zone. To protect this evacuation, air
cover and sea cover were provided by the Com-
mander in Chief of United States Forces in the
Far East, General of the Army Douglas MacAr-
thur. In resjjonse to urgent appeals from the
Government of Korea, General MacArthur was
immediately authorized to send supplies of am-
munition to the Korean defenders. These sup-
plies were sent by air transport, with fighter pro-
tection. The United States Seventh Fleet was or-
dered north from the PhilipiDines, so that it might
be available in the area in case of need.

Throughout Monday, June 26, the invaders con-
tinued their attack with no heed to the resolution
of the Security Council of the United Nations.
Accordingly, in order to support the resolution,
and on the unanimous advice of our civil and mili-
tary authorities, I ordered United States air and
sea forces to give the Korean Government troops
cover and support.

On Tuesday, June 27, when the United Nations
Commission in Korea had reported that the north-
ern troops had neither ceased hostilities nor with-
drawn to the 38th parallel, the United Nations

' Bulletin of July 3, 1050, p. 4.
164

Security Council met again and passed a second
resolution recommending that members of the
United Nations furnish to the Republic of Korea
such aid as might be necessary to repel the attack
and to restore international peace and security in
the area.^ The representative of the Soviet Union
to the Security Council stayed away from this
meeting also, and the Soviet Government has re-
fused to support the Council's resolution.

World Response to U.N. Action

The vigorous and unhesitating actions of the
ITnited Nations and the United States in the face
of this aggression met with an immediate and
overwhelming response throughout the free world.
The first blow of aggression had brought dismay
and anxiety to the hearts of men the world over.
The fateful events of the 1930's, when aggression
unopposed bred more aggression and eventually
war, were fresh in our memory.

But the free nations had learned the lesson of
historJ^ Their determined and united actions up-
lifted the spirit of free men everywhere. As a
result, where there had been dismay there is hope ;
where there had been anxiety there is firm
determination.

Fifty-two of the 59 member nations have sup-
])orted the United Nations action to restore peace
in Korea.

A number of member nations have offered mili-
tary support or other types of assistance for the
United Nations action to repel the aggressors in
Korea. In a third resolution, passed on July 7,
the Security Council requested the United States
to designate a commander for all the forces of the
members of the United Nations in the Korean op-
eration and authorized these forces to fly the
United Nations flag.^ In response to this resolu-
tion. General MacArthur has been designated as
commander of these forces. These are important
steps forward in the development of a United
Nations system of collective security. Already,
aircr*t of two nations — Australia and Great
Britain — and naval vessels of five nations — Aus-
tralia, Canada, Great Britain, the Netherlands,
and New Zealand — -have been made available for
operations in the Korean area, along with forces
of Korea and the United States, under General
MacArthur's command. The other offers of as-
sistance that have been and will continue to be
made will be coordinated by the United Nations
and by the unified command, in order to support
the effort in Korea to maximum advantage.

All the members of the United Nations who
have endorsed the action of the Security Council
realize the significance of the step that has been
taken. This united and resolute action to put
down lawless aggression is a milestone toward the
establishment of a rule of law among nations.

"■ Bulletin of July 3. 1950, p. 7.
= Bulletin of July 17, 1950, p. 83.

Department of Stale Bulletin

Only a few countries have failed tb support the
common action to restore the peace. The most
important of these is the Soviet Union.

Soviet Attitude Toward Restoring Peace

Since the Soviet representative had refused to
participate in the meetings of the Security Coun-
cil, which took action regarding Korea, the United
States brought the matter directly to the attention
of the Soviet Government in Moscow. On June
27, we requested the Soviet Government, in view
of its known close relations with the north Korean
regime, to use its influence to have the invaders
withdraw at once.^

The Soviet Government, in its reply on June 29 ^
and in subsequent statements, has taken the posi-
tion that the attack launched by the north Korean
forces was provoked by the Republic of Korea and
that the actions of the United Nations Security
Council were illegal.

These Soviet claims are flatly disproved by the
facts.

The attitude of the Soviet Government, toward
the aggression against the Republic of Korea, is
in direct contradiction to its often expressed in-
tention to work with other nations to achieve
peace in the world.

For our part, we shall continue to support the
United Nations action to restore peace in the
Korean area.

U.S. Support of U.N. Resolutions

As the situation has developed, I have author-
ized a number of measures to be taken. Within
the firet week of the fighting. General MacArthur
reported, after a visit to the front, that the forces
from north Korea were continuing to drive south,
and further support to the Republic of Korea was
needed. Accordingly;, General MacArthur was
authorized to use United States Army troops in
Korea and to use United States aircraft of the
Air Force and the Navy to conduct missions
against specific military targets in Korea north of
the 38th parallel, where necessary, to carry out
the United Nations resolution. General Mac-
Arthur was also directed to blockade the Korean
coast.

The attacking forces from the north have con-
tinued to move forward, although their advance
has been slowed down. The troops of the Re-
public of Korea, though initially overwhelmed
by the tanks and artilleiy of the surprise attack
by the invaders, have been reorganized and are
fighting bravely.

United States forces, as they have arrived in
the area, have fought with gi'eat valor. The Army
troops have been conducting a very difficult delay-
ing operation with skill and determination, out-

* Bulletin of July 10, 1950, p. 47.
' Bulletin of July 10, 1950, p. 48.

July 31, J 950

numbered many times over by attacking troops,
spearheaded by tanks. Despite the bad weather
of the rainy season, our troops have been valiantly
supported by the air and naval forces of both the
United States and other members of the United
Nations.

Nature of Military Action in Korea

In this connection, I think it is important that
the nature of our military action in Korea be un-
derstood. It should be made perfectly clear that
the action was undertaken as a matter of basic
moral principle. The United States was going to
the aid of a nation established and supported by
the United Nations and unjustifiably attacked by
an aggressor force. Consequently, we were not
deterred by the relative immediate superiority of
the attacking forces, by the fact that our base of
supplies was 5,000 miles away, or by the further
fact that we would have to supply our forces
through port facilities that are far from satis-
factory.

We are moving as rapidly as possible to bring to
bear on the fighting front larger forces and heavier
equipment and to increase our naval and air su-
periority. But it will take time, men, and material
to slow down the forces of aggression, bring those
forces to a halt, and throw them back.

Nevertheless, our assistance to the Republic of
Korea has prevented the invaders from crushing
that nation in a few days — as they had evidently
expected to do. We are determined to support the
United Nations in its effort to restore peace and
security to Korea, and its effort to assure the peo-
ple of Korea an opportunity to choose their own
form of government free from coercion, as ex-
pressed in the General Assembly resolutions of
November 14, 1947, and December 12, 1948.

Implications for World Peace

In addition to the direct military effort we and
other members of the United Nations are making
in Korea, the outbreak of aggression there re-
quires us to consider its implications for peace
throughout the world. The attack upon the Re-
public of Korea makes it plain beyond all doubt
that the international Communist movement is
prepared to use armed invasion to conquer inde-
pendent nations. We must, therefore, recognize
the possibility that armed aggression may take
place in other areas.

In view of this, I have already directed that
United States forces in support of the Philippines
be strengthened and that militaiy assistance be
speeded up to the Philippine Government and to
the Associated States of Indochina aJid to the
forces of France in Indochina. I have also or-
dered the United States Seventh Fleet to prevent
any attack upon Formosa, and I have requested the
Chinese Government on Formosa to cease all air
and sea operations against the mainland. These

165

steps were at once reported to the United Nations
Security Council.'^

Our action in regard to Formosa was a matter of
elementary security. The peace and stability of
the Pacific area had been violently disturbed by
the attack on Korea. Attacks elsewhere in the
Pacific area would have enlarged the Korean
crisis, thereby rendering much more difficult the
carrying out of our obligations to the United
Nations in Korea.

In order that there may be no doubt in any
quarter about our intentions regarding Formosa,
I wish to state that the United States has no ter-
ritorial ambitions whatever concerning that island,
nor do we seek for ourselves any special position
or privilege on Formosa. The present military
neutralization of Formosa is without prejudice to
political questions affecting that island. Our de-
sire is that Formosa not become embroiled in
hostilities disturbing to the peace of the Pacific
and that all questions affecting Formosa be set-
tled by peaceful means as envisaged in the Charter
of the United Nations. With peace reestablished,
even the most complex political questions are sus-
ceptible of solution. In the presence of brutal
and unprovoked aggression, however, some of
these questions may have to be held in abeyance
in the interest of the essential security of all.

The outbreak of aggression in the Far East does
not, of course, lessen, but instead increases, the
importance of the common strength of the free
nations in other parts of the world. The attack
on the Republic of Korea gives added urgency to
the efforts of the free nations to increase and to
unify their common strength, in order to deter a
potential aggressor.

To be able to accomplish this objective, the free
nations must maintain a sufficient defensive mili-
tary strength in being and, even more important,
a solid basis of economic strength, capable of
rapid mobilization in the event of emergency.

Growing Strength of Free World

The strong cooperative efforts that have been
made by the United States and other free nations,
since the end of World War II, to restore eco-
nomic vitality to Europe and other parts of the
world and the cooperative efforts we have begun
in order to increase the productive capacity of un-
derdeveloped areas are exti-emely important con-
tributions to the growing economic strength of all
the free nations and will be of even greater im-
portance in the future.

We have been increasing our common defensive
strength under the treaty of Eio de Janeii-o and
the North Atlantic Treaty, which are collective
security arrangements within the framework of
the United Nations Charter. We have also taken
action to bolster the military defenses of indi-

" Bulletin of July 3, 1950, p. 7.
166

vidual free nations, such as Greece, Turkey, and
Iran.

The defenses of the North Atlantic Treaty area
were considered a matter of great urgency by the
North Atlantic Council in London this spring.
Recent events make it even more urgent than it
was at that time to build and maintain these
defenses.

Under all the circumstances, it is apparent that
the United States is required to increase its mili-
tary strength and preparedness not only to deal
with the aggression in Korea but also to increase
our common defense, with other free nations,
against further aggression.

increased Strength Needed by U.S.

The increased strength which is needed falls
into three categories.

In the first place, to meet the situation in Korea,
we shall need to send additional men, equipment,
and supplies to General MacArthur's command
as rapidly as possible.

In the second place, the world situation requires
that we increase substantially the size and materiel
support of our armed forces, over and above the
increases which are needed in Korea.

In the third place, we must assist the free na-
tions associated with us in common defense to
augment their military strength.

Of the three categories I have just enumerated,
the first two involve increases in our own military
manpower, and in the materiel support that our
men must have.

MILITARY MANPOWER

To meet the increased requirements for military
manpower, I have authorized the Secretary of De-
fense to exceed the budgeted strength of military
personnel for the Army, Navy, and Air Force and
to use the Selective Service system to such extent
as may be required in order to obtain the increased
strength which we must have. I have also author-
ized the Secretary of Defense to meet the need for
military manpower by calling into active Federal
service as many National Guard units and as many
units and individuals of the Reserve forces of the
Army, Navy, and Air Forces as may be required.

I have directed the Secretary of Defense and the
Joint Chiefs of Staff to keep our military man-
power needs under constant study, in order that
further increases may be made as required. There
are now statutory limits on the sizes of the armed
forces, and, since we may need to exceed these lim-
its, I recommend that they be removed.

SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT

To increase the level of our military strength
will also require additional supplies and equip-
ment. Procurement of many items has already
been accelerated, in some cases for use in Korea, in

Department of Stale Bulletin

others to replace reserve stocks which are now be-
ing sent to Korea, and in still others to add to our
general level of preparedness. Further increases
in procurement, resulting in a higher rate of pro-
duction of military equipment and supplies, will
be necessary.

APPROPRIATIONS

The increases in the size of the armed forces, and
the additional supplies and equipment which will
be needed, will require additional appropriations.
Within the next few days, I will transmit to the
Congress specific requests for appropriations in the
amount of approximately 10 billion dollars.

Tliese requests for appropriations will be ad-
dressed to the needs of our own military forces.
Earlier, I referred to the fact that we must also
assist other free nations in the strengthening of
our common defenses. The action we must take
to accomplish this is just as important as the
measures required to strengthen our own forces.

The authorization bill for the Mutual Defense
Assistance Program for 1951, now before the
House of Representatives, is an important imme-
diate step toward the strengthening of our collec-
tive security. It should be enacted without de-
lay.

Strengthening Other Free Nations

But it is now clear that the free nations of the
world must step up their common security pro-
gram. The other nations associated with us in
the Mutual Defense Assistance Program, like our-
selves, will need to divert additional economic re-
sources to defense purposes. In order to enable
the nations associated with us to make their maxi-
mum contribution to our common defense, further
assistance on our part will be required. Addi-
tional assistance may also be needed to increase
the strength of certain other free nations whose
security is vital to our own.

In the case of the North Atlantic area, these re-
quirements will reflect the consultations now going
on with the other nations associated with us in the
North Atlantic Treaty. As soon as it is possible
to determine what each nation will need to do, I
shall lay before the Congress a request for such
funds as are shown to be necessary to the attain-
ment and maintenance of our common strength at
an adequate level.

The steps which we must take to support the
United Nations action in Korea, and to increase
our own strength and the common defense of the
free world, will necessarily have repercussions
upon our domestic economy.

Many of our young men are in battle now, or
soon will be. Others must be trained. The equip-
ment and supplies they need, and those required
for adequate emergency reserves, must be pro-
duced. They must be made available promptly,

July 31, 1950

at reasonable cost, and without disrupting the
efficient functioning of the economy.

Protecting Economic Growth

We must continue to recognize that our strength
is not to be measured in military terms alone. Our
power to join in a common defense of peace rests
fundamentally on the productive capacity and
energies of our people. In all that we do, there-
fore, we must make sure that the economic
strength which is at the base of our security is
not impaired, but continues to grow.

Our economy has tremendous productive power.
Our total output of goods and services is now
running at an annual i-ate of nearly 270 billion
dollars — over 100 billion dollars higher than in
1939. The rate is now about 13 billion dollars
higher than a year ago and about 8 billion dollars
higher than the previous record date reached in
19-18. All the foregoing figures have been adjusted
for price changes and are, therefore, a measure of
actual output. The index of industrial production,
now at 197, is 12 percent higher than the average
for last year and 81 percent higher than in 1939.

We now have 611/2 million people in civilian em-
ployment. There are 16 million more people in
productive jobs than there were in 1939. We are
now producing 11 million more tons of steel a year
than in the peak war year 1944. Electric power
output has risen from 128 billion kilowatt hours
in 1939, to 228 billion hours in 1944, to 317 billion
hours now. Food production is about a third
higher than it ever was before the war and is prac-
tically as high as it was during the war years, when
we were sending far more food abroad than we
are now.

The potential productive power of our economy
is even greater. We can achieve some immediate
increase in production by employing men and fa-
cilities not now fully utilized. And we can con-
tinue to increase our total annual output each year,
by putting to use the increasing skills of our grow-
ing population and the higher productive capacity
which results from plant expansion, new inven-
tions, and more efficient methods of production.

With this enormous economic strength, the new
and necessary programs I am now recommending
can be undertaken with confidence in the ability
of our economy to bear the strains involved. Nev-
ertheless, the magnitude of the demands for mili-
tary purposes that are now foreseeable, in an
economy which is already operating at a very high
level, will require substantial redirection of eco-
nomic resources.

ACTION AGAINST SHORTAGES

Under the program for increasing military
strength which I have outlined above, military
and related procurement will need to be expanded
at a more rapid rate than total production can

167

be expanded. Some materials were in short supply
even before the Korean situation developed. The
steel industry, for example, was operating at ca-
pacity levels and, even so, was not able to satisfy
all market demands. Some other construction
materials, and certain other products, were also
under pressure and their prices were rising — even
before the outbi'eak in Korea.

The substantial speed-up of military procure-
ment will intensify these shortages. Action must
be taken to insure that these shortages do not inter-
fere with or delay the materials and the supplies
needed for the national defense.

PROTECTION AGAINST INFLATION

Further, the dollars spent now for military pur-
poses will have a magnified effect upon the econ-
omy as a whole, since they will be added to the high
level of current civilian demand. These increased
pressures, if neglected, could drive us into a gen-
eral inflationary situation. The best evidence of
this is the recent price advances in many raw
materials and in the cost of living, even upon the
mere expectancy of increased military outlays.

In these circumstances, we must take action to
insure that the increased national defense needs
will be met and that in the process we do not bring
on an inflation, with its resulting hardship for
every family.

At the same time, we must recognize that it will
be necessary for a number of years to support
continuing defense expenditures, including assist-
ance to other nations, at a higher level than we
had previously planned. Therefore, the economic
measures we take now must be planned and used
in such a manner as to develop and maintain our
economic strength for the long run as well as the
short run.

SAFEGUARDS THROUGH LEGISLATION

I am recommending certain legislative measures
to help achieve these objectives. I believe that
each of them should be promptly enacted. We
must be sure to take the steps that are necessai-y
now, or we shall surely be required to take much
more drastic steps later on.

First, we should adopt such direct measures as
are now necessary to assure prompt and adeqiuite
supplies of goods for military and essential civil-
ian use. I, therefore, recommend that the Con-
gress now enact legislation authorizing the
Government to establish priorities and allocate
materials as necessary to promote the national
security; to limit the use of materials for nones-
sential purposes; to prevent inventory hoarding;
and to requisition supplies and materials needed
for the national defense, particularly excessive and
unnecessary inventories.

Second, we must pi'omptly adopt some general
measures to compensate for the growth of demand
caused by the expansion of military programs in a

period of high civilian incomes. I am directing all
executive agencies to conduct a detailed review of
Government progi-ams, for the purpose of modify-
ing them wherever practicable to lessen the de-
mand upon services, commodities, raw materials,
manpower, and facilities which are in competition
with those needed for national defense. The Gov-
ernment, as well as the public, must exercise great
restraint in the use of those goods and services
which are needed for our increased defense efforts.

Increase in Revenues

Nevertheless, the increased appropriations for
the Department of Defense, plus the defense-re-
lated appropriations which I have recently sub-
mitted for power development and atomic energy,
and others which will be necessary for such pur-
poses as stockpiling, will mean sharply increased
Federal expenditures. For this reason, we should
increase Federal revenues more sharply than I
have previously recommended, in order to reduce
the inflationary effect of the Government deficit.

There are two fundamental principles which
must guide us in framing measures to obtain these
additional revenues :

(A) We must make every effort to finance the
greatest possible amount of needed expenditures
by taxation. The increase of taxes is our basic
weaj^on in offsetting the inflationary pressures ex-
erted by enlarged government expenditures.
Heavier taxes will make general controls less
necessary.

(B) We must provide for a balanced system of
taxation which makes a fair distribution of the
tax burden among the different groups of indi-
viduals and business concerns in the Nation.
A balanced tax program should also have as a
major aim the elimination of profiteering.

At an appropriate time, as soon as the neces-
sary studies are completed, I shall present to the
Congress a program based on these principles to
assui'e the financing of our needs in a manner
which will be fair to all our citizens, which will
help prevent inflation, and which will maintain
the fiscal position of the Nation in the soundest
possible condition.

Control of Credit

As a further important safeguard against in-
flation, we shall need to restrain credit expansion.
I recommend that the Congress now authorize the
control of consumer credit and credit used for
commodity speculation. In the housing field,
where Government credit is an important factor,
I have directed that certain available credit re-
straints be applied, and I recommend that further
controls be authorized, particularly to restrain
expansion of privately financed real estate credit.
These actions will not only reduce the upward
])ressure on prices but will also reduce the demand
for certain critical materials which are required
for the production of military equipment.

168

Department of State Bulletin

Third, we must take steps to accelerate and in-
crease the production of essential materials, prod-
ucts, and services. I recommend, therefore, that
the Congress authorize, for national defense pur-
poses, production loan fj;uaranties and loans to
increase production. I also recommend that the
Congress authorize the making of long-term con-
tracts and other means to encourage the produc-
tion of certain materials in short supply.

In the forthcoming midyear economic report,
I shall discuss in greater detail the current eco-
nomic situation and the economic measures which
I have recommended. If these measures are made
available promptly, and firndy administered, I
believe we will be able to meet military needs
without serious disruption of the economy.

If we are to be successful, there must be sensible
and restrained action by businessmen, labor, farm-
ers, and consumers. The people of this country
know the seriousness of inflation and will, I am
sure, do everything they can to see that it does not
come upon us. However, if a sharp rise in prices
should make it necessary, I shall not hesitate to
recommend the more drastic measures of price
control and rationing.

Need for Building Strength

The hard facts of the present situation require
relentless determination and firm action. The
course of the fighting thus far in Korea shows that
we can expect no easy solution to the conflict there.
We are confronted in Korea with well-supplied,
well-led forces which have been long trained for
aggressive action. We and the other members of
the United Nations who have joined in the effort
to restore peace in Korea must expect a hard and
costly militai'y operation.

We must also prepare ourselves better to fulfill
our responsibilities toward the preservation of in-
ternational peace and security against possible
further aggi'ession. In this effort, we will not
flinch in the face of danger or difficulty.

The free world has made it clear, through the
United Nations, that lawless aggression will be
met with force. This is the significance of
Korea — and it is a significance whose importance
cannot be overestimated.

I shall not attempt to predict the course of
events. But I am sure that those who have it in
their power to unleash or withhold acts of armed
aggi-ession must realize that new recourse to ag-
gression in the woidd today might well strain to
the breaking point the fabric of world peace.

The United States can be proud of the part it
has played in the United Nations action in this
crisis. We can be proud of the unhesitating sup-

port of the American people for the resolute ac-
tions taken to halt the aggression in Korea and
to sujjport the cause of world peace.

The Congress of the United States, by its strong,
bipartisan support of the steps we are taking and
by repeated actions in support of international
cooperation, has contributed most vitally to the
cause of peace. The expressions of support which
have been forthcoming from the leaclers of both
political parties for the actions of our Govern-
ment and of the United Nations in dealing with
the present crisis have buttressed the firm morale
of the entire free world in the face of this
challenge.

The American people, together with other free
peoples, seek a new era in world affairs. We seek
a world where all men may live in peace and free-
dom, with steadily improving living conditions,
inider governments of their own free choice.

For ourselves, we seek no territory or domina-
tion over others. We are determined to maintain
our democratic institutions so that Americans
now and in the future can enjoy personal liberty,
economic opportunity, and political equality. We
are concerned with advancing our prosperity and
our well-being as a nation, but we know that our
future is inseparably joined with the future of
other free peoples.

We will follow the course we have chosen with
courage and with faith, because we carry in our
hearts the flame of freedom. We are fighting for
liberty and for peace — and with God's blessing we
shall succeed.

U.S. and Belgium Consult
on Korean Assistance

[Released to the press July 22]

The Belgian Government is exchanging views
with the United States Government regarding
assistance in the Korean conflict. These discus-
sions were instituted as a result of Belgium's de-
cision which was communicated to the Secretary-
General of the United Nations. The two Govern-
ments are, at jDresent, in consultation with a view
to ascertaining what types of aid Belgium can best
furnish consistent with its international obliga-
tions. It is planned, as a first step, that the
Belgian Government will lend assistance in air
transport operations to and from the Korean
theatre. A communication to this effect has been
made this morning to the Secretary-General of
the United Nations.

July 31, 1950

169

Prime Minister Neliru's Appeal To Settle Korean Problem
by Admitting Chinese Communists to U.N. Rejected

[Released to the press July 19]

On July IS, Prime Minister Nehru, through the Indian
Ambassador at Washington, transmitted to Secretary
Acheson a message concerning the Korean situation. On
July 18, the Secretary replied, through the American
Ambassador at New Delhi. On July 19, the Indian Prime
Minister transmitted, through the Indian Ambassador at
Washington, a reply to the Secretary's message. Texts of
the messages follow.

PRIME MINISTER NEHRU'S MESSAGE OF
JULY 13

In interviews which your Ambassador has had
with officials of the Ministry of External Affairs,
we have explained India's position in the Korean
dispute.

India's purpose is to localize the conflict and to
facilitate an early peaceful settlement by break-
ing the present deadlock in the Security Council so
that representatives of the People's Government of
China can take a seat in the Council, the Union
of Soviet Socialist Eepublics can return to it, and,
whether within or through informal contacts out-
side the Council, the United States of America, the
Union of Soviet Socialist Eepublics, and China,
with the help and cooperation of other peace-
loving nations, can find a basis for terminating
the conflict and for a permanent solution of the
Korean problem.

In full confidence of Your Excellency's deter-
mination to maintain peace and thus to preserve
the solidarity of the United Nations, I venture to
address this personal appeal to you to exert your
great authority and influence for the achievement
of this common purpose on which the well-being
of mankind depends.

SECRETARY ACHESON'S MESSAGE OF JULY 18

I am deeply appreciative of the high purpose
which prompted Your Excellency in sending the
message which I received on July 13, 1950, through
your distinguished Ambassador in Washington

170

and your subsequent message of the I7th trans-
mitting Prime Minister Stalin's reply to your
similar letter to him of July 13. Both the Presi-
dent and I have given the most thoughtful consid-
eration to these communications.

One of the most fundamental objectives of the
foreign policy of the United States is to assist in
maintaining world peace, and the Government of
the United States is firmly of the opinion that the
United Nations is the most effective instrument yet
devised for maintaining and restoring interna-
tional peace and security. The United States is,
therefore, eager to do all that is proper and pos-
sible to preserve and strengthen the United
Nations.

The purpose of the United States Government
and of the American people with respect to Korea
is to support by all means at our disposal the deter-
mination of the United Nations to repel the armed
attack upon Korea and to restore international
peace and security in the area. We desire both to
prevent the spread of aggression beyond Korea
and to end it there — as required by the Security
Council of the United Nations.

We are deeply conscious of the fact that law-
abiding governments and peoples throughout the
world have a vital stake in the issues involved in
this aggression and in the success of the United
Nations in dealing with it. It is painful to real-
ize that there could have long since been a restora-
tion of peace and the saving of the lives of those
fighting on behalf of the United States had not
a small minority of the United Nations failed to
meet their obligations under tlie Charter and re-
fused to use their authority and influence to pre-
vent or stop tJie hostilities. The acceptance of
their obligations and the exercise of their author-
ity and influence in accordance with those obliga-
tions would restore peace tomorrow.

A breach of the peace or an act of aggression
is the most serious matter with which the United
Nations can be confronted. We do not believe
that the termination of the aggression from noi'th-
ern Korea can be contingent in any way upon the

Department of State Bulletin

determination of other questions which are cur-
rently before the United Nations.

There has not been at any time any obstacle to
the full participation by the Soviet Union in the
■work of the United Nations except the decision of
the Soviet Government itself. The Security
Coinicil has shown that it is both competent and
willing to act vigorously for the maintenance of
peace.

In our opinion, the decision between competing
claimant governments for China's seat in the
United Nations is one which must be reached by
the United Nations on its merits. It is a question
on which there is at present a wide diversity of
views among the membership of the United Na-
tions. I know you will agree that the decision
should not be dictated by an unlawful aggression
or by any other conduct which would subject the
United Nations to coercion and duress.

I know that Your Excellency shares our earnest
desire to see an early restoration of peace in Korea
in accordance with the resolutions of the Security
Council, and I assure you of our eagerness to work
with you and your great country to establish in
the^United Nations a means by which the fear of
aggression can be permanently lifted from the
peoples of the earth.

PRIME MINISTER NEHRU'S MESSAGE OF
JULY 19

I thank you for your letter which your Ambas-
sador convej'ed to me last night.

I am grateful to President Truman and to you
for the consideration that you have given to my
message of the 13th July and to the subsequent
communication forwarding Marshal Stalin's reply
to my message to him of the same date.

I recognize that one of the most fundamental
objectives of the foreign policy of the United
States is to assist in maintaining world peace, and
that the Government of the United States is firmly
of the opinion that the United Nations is one of
the most effective instruments yet devised for
maintaining and restoring international peace and
security. As Your Excellency must be aware, the
maintenance of peace and support of the United
Nations has consistently been the policy of the
Government of India.

My suggestion for breaking the present dead-
lock in the Security Council, so that representa-
tives of the People's Government of China can
take their seat in the Council and the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics can return to it, was
designed to fulfill this policy, not to weaken it. In
voting for the resolutions on Korea adopted by the
Security Council, on the 25th and 27th June, it was
our purpose to strengthen the United Nations in
resisting aggression.

Since the Government of India recognized the
People's Government of China on 30th December
1949, it has been our endeavour to bring about the

July 31, 1950

admission of its representatives to the various
organs and agencies of the United Nations. Our
present proposal was a renewal of this effort. It
was made on its merits and also in the hope that
it would create a suitable atmosphere for the peace-
ful solution of the Korean problem. I do not think
that the admission of China now would be an
encouragement of aggression.

I am requesting our Ambassador in Moscow to
communicate the text of Your Excellency's letter
to me, and of my reply, to Marshal Stalin. Ar-
rangements are also being made to release at 3 a. m.
tomorrow (20 July, Indian standard time), copies
of these two letters, of my messages to Your Excel-
lency and to Marshal Stalin dated 13th July, and
of the messages exchanged between Marshal
Stalin and me on the 15th and 16th July, respec-
tively.

Korea in Perspective

Extemporaneous Remarks hy Secretary Acheson ^

Tomorrow evening, it will be exactly 4 weeks
since the attack took place in Korea. I thought
it might be useful if we stopped for a moment and
surveyed bi'oadly what has happened in the 4
weeks which have followed that attack. I think
we become so absorbed in the daily report of the
fighting in Korea that it might be useful to get
some perspective in the larger field.

This attack, as you know, was a very carefully,
well-planned sneak attack which was supposed to
overwhelm the Republic of Korea in a very short
time. As a result of the prompt, vigorous, and
determined action of the free world that has not
happened.

What has happened in the month is that there
was an instantaneous and vigorous response from
the Security Council of the United Nations. Here,
it was confronted with a clear case of aggression,
and it met that issue squarely and clearly. That
is a most important development.

Following that, there was instantaneous and
strong support of the United Nations from the
United States. The United States was joined in
that by other nations which promptly made forces
available, so that you have not only strong action
by the United Nations, strong action by the United
States, you also have actual participation in the
resistance to aggression by other countries and
overwhelming international support throughout
the entire free world for the action of the United
Nations. You have a united free world, you have
a united country and a united nation behind the
United Nations. So much for the larger interna-
tional picture.

' Made at a news conference on July 21, 1950 and re-
leased on the same date.

171

In the United States, the President has imme-
diately assumed the leadership in this critical
period, and a program was presented by him to
Congi-ess on Wednesday which again met with a
warm response from the Congress. He did not, as
he said, put this forward as tlie complete program.
There are other matters which he said would be
presented to the Congress as soon as they could be
worked out. Those are largely related to our as-
sistance in strengthening the other free nations
associated with us.

Now, all of these steps have taken place within a
month. They have brought about this extraordi-
nary degree of unity within the free world and
within the country, this vigorous response to the
aggression and a very determined effort on the
part of the United States to put itself in a position
of security.

I do not recall any period of 4 weeks in the his-
tory of the United States when so much has been
accomplished.

General MacArthur's Estimate
of the Korean Situation

The following message from General Mac Arthur to the
President icas received on Julij IS and released to the
press t)y the White House on July 20.

The following is my current estimate of the
Korean situation :

With the deployment in Korea of major ele-
ments of the Eighth Army now accomplished, the
first phase of the campaigii lias ended and with it
the chance for victory by the North Korean forces.
The enemy's jslan and great opportunity depended
upon the speed with which he could overrun South
Korea once he had breached the Han River line
and with overwhelming ntimbers and superior
weapons temporarily shattered South Korean re-
sistance. This chance he has now lost through
the extraordinary speed with which the Eighth
Army has been deployed from Japan to stem his
rush. Wlien he crashed the Han Line the way
seemed entirely open and victory was within his
grasp.

The desperate decision to throw in piecemeal
American elements as they arrived by every avail-
able means of transport from Japan was the only
hope to save the situation. The skill and valor
thereafter disj^layed in successive holding actions
by the ground forces in accordance with this con-
cept, brilliantly supported in complete coordina-
tion by air and naval elements, forced the enemy
into continued deployments, costly frontal attacks
and confused logistics, which so slowed his ad-
vance and blunted his drive that we have bought
the precious time necessary to build a secure base.

I do not believe that history records a com-

parable operation which excelled the speed and
precision with which the Eighth Army, the Far
East Air Force and the Seventh Fleet have been
deployed to a distant land for immediate commit-
ment to major operations. It merits highest com-
mendation for the commanders, staffs and units
concerned and attests to their superior training
and high state of readiness to meet any eventual-
ity. This finds added emphasis in the fact that
the Far East Command, until the President's great
pronouncement to support the epochal action of
the United Nations, had no slightest responsibility
for the defense of tlae Free Republic of Korea.
With the President's decision it assumed a com-
pletely new and added mission.

It is, of course, impossible to predict with any
degree of accuracy future incidents of a military
campaign. Over a broad front involving continu-
ous local struggles, there are bound to be ups and
downs, losses as well as successes. Our final sta-
bilization line will unquestionably be rectified and
tactical improvement will involve planned with-
drawals as well as local advances. But the issue
of battle is now fully joined and will proceed along
lines of action in which we will not be without
choice. Our hold upon the southern part of Korea
represents a secure base. Our casualties despite
overwhelming odds have been relatively light.
Our strength will continually increase while that
of the enemy will relatively decrease. His supply
line is insecure. He has had his great chance but
failed to exploit it. We are now in Korea in force,
and with God's help we are there to stay until
the constitutional authority of the Republic is
fully restored.

Korean Commission Concerned Over
Breach of Geneva Conventions

[Released to the press hy V. N. Department of Piiblic
Information July H'i

The United Nations Commission on Korea, at
its meeting held today in Pusan, expressed grave
concern at reports of the shooting of prisoners and
other acts contrary to humanitarian principles in
the course of the present conflict in Korea.

In a personal statement issued at the same time,
the current Chairman of the Commission, Angel
Gochez Marin, the representative of El Salvador,
declared :

The Commission has considered the grave implications
of tlie acts committed during the present conflict against
the Geneva Conventions which provide for protection on
both sides of military wounded and sielj, of war jjrisoners,
of civilian internees and of the civilian population.

The Commission is convinced that sucli actions are not
only barbarous and conti-ary to the basic principles of
humanity but can have no other effect than embittering
relations between the people of Korea still further, and
postponing to a more remote date any hope of an ultimate
settlement or of unification in this country.

172

Department of State Bulletin

Mr. Marin referred to Secretary-General
Trygve Lie's appeal to the North Korean author-
ities and to the Kepublic of Korea, suggesting that
both use the services cf the International Red
Cross to insure implementation of the Geneva con-
ventions in the Korean conflict. The Chairman
then said :

The Commission believes it will be failing in its duty if
it does not make every possible effoit to secure tlie adop-
tion of these humanitarian measures in the present hos-
tilities. It therefore makes a heartfelt appeal for action to
be taken by the North Korean authorities and the Republic

of Korea that will ensure that no lireach of the Conven-
tions are committed liy tlieir forces.

The Commission feels deeply that at all costs anything
that will further embitter relations must bo avoided. It
is convinced that nothing is better calculated to keep alive
hatred in Korea than cruel and barbarous acts contrary
to the Geneva Conventions.

The Commission is in session on the soil of Korea and
will wholeheartedly support any steps which might be
taken by the International Red Cross, by the Republic of
Korea or by the North Korean authorities to establish
measures for the application of the Conventions.

The Chairman's message was broadcast from the
Commission's headquarters in Korea.

Authority of the President To Repel the Attack in Korea

DEPARTMENT OF STATE MEMORANDUM
OF JULY 3, 19501

[Excerpts]

This memorandum is directed to the authority
of the President to order the Armed Forces of
the United States to repel the aggressive attack
on the Republic of Korea.

As explained by Secretary Acheson to the press
on June 28, as soon as word of the attack on Korea
was received in Washington, it was the view of
the President and of all his advisers that the first
responsibility of the Government of the United
States was to report the attack to the United
Nations.

Accordingly, in the middle of the night of Sat-
urday, June 24, 1950, Ambassador Gross, the
United States deputy representative at the Se-
curity Cotmcil of the United Nations, notified
Mr. Trygve Lie, the Secretary-General of the
United Nations, that armed forces from North
Korea had commenced an unprovoked assault
against the territory of the Republic of Korea.

The President, as Commander in Chief of the
Armed Forces of the United States, has full con-
trol over the use thereof. He also has authority
to conduct the foreign relations of the United
States. Since the beginning of United States
history, he has, upon numerous occasions, utilized
these powers in sending armed forces abroad. The
preservation of the United Nations for the main-
tenance of peace is a cardinal interest of the
United States. Both traditional international law
and article 39 of the United Nations Charter and
the resolution pursuant thereto authorize the
United States to repel the armed aggression
against tlie Republic of Korea.

Constitutional Powers of the President

The President's control over the Armed Forces
of the United States is based on article 2, section
2 of the Constitution which provides that he "shall
be Commander in Chief of the Army and Navy
of the United States."

In United States v. Sweeny, the Supreme Court
said that the object of this provision was "evi-
dently to vest in the President the supreme com-
mand over all the military forces, — such supreme
and undivided command as would be necessary
to the prosecution of a successful war." ^

That the President's power to send the Armed
Forces outside the country is not dependent on
Congressional authority has been repeatedly em-
phasized by numerous writers.

For example, ex-President William Howard
Taft wrote :

The President is made Commander in Chief of the Army
and Navy by the Con.stitution evidently for the purpose
of enabling him to defend the country against invasion,
to suppress insurrection and to take care that the laws
be faithfully executed. If Congress were to attempt to
prevent his use of the Army for any of these purposes,
the action would be void. . . . Again, in the carrying on
of war as Commander in Chief, it is he who is to deter-
mine the movements of the Army and of the Navy. Con-
gress could not take away from him that discretion and
place it beyond his control in any of his subordinates, nor
could they themselves, as the people of Athens attempted
to carry on campaigns by votes in the market-place.'

Professor Willoughby writes :

As to bis constitutional power to send United States
forces outside the country in time of peace when this is
deemed by him necessary or expedient as a means of
preserving or advancing the foreign interests or relations
of the United States, there would seem to be equally little
doubt, although it has been contended by some that the
exercise of this discretion can be limited by congressional
statute. Tbat Congress has this rigbt to limit or to

^ This memorandum also appeared in H. Rept. 2495,
81st Cong., 2d sess., p. 61.

Ju/y 3?, 1950

129.

"157 U.S. (1895) 281, 284.

^ Our Chief Magistrate and His Powers, 1916, pp. 128-

173

forbid the sending of United States forces outside of the
country in time of peace has been asserted by so eminent
an authority as ex-Secretary Root. It would seem to
author, however, that the President, under his powers as
Commander in Chief of the Army and Navy, and liis gen-
eral control of the foreign relations of the United States,
has this discretionary right constitutionally vested in him,
and, therefore, not subject to congressional control. Es-
pecially, since the argument of the court in ilyerg v.
United States with reference to the general character of
the executive power vested in the President, and, appar-
ently, the authority impliedly vested in him by reason of
his "obligation to take care that the laws be faithfully
executed, it is reasonable to predict that, should the ques-
tion be presented to it, the Supreme Court will so hold.
Of course, if this sending is in pursuance of express provi-
sions of a treaty, or for the execution of treaty provisions,
the sending could not reasonably be subject to constitu-
tional objection.'

In an address delivered before the American Bar
Association in 1917 on the war powers under
the Constitution, Mr. Hughes stated that "There
is no limitation upon the authority of Congress to
create an army and it is for the President as
Commander-in-Chief to direct the campaigns of
that Army wherever he may think they should be
carried on." He referred to a statement by Chief
Justice Taney in Fleming v. Page (9 How. 615) in
which the Chief Justice said that as Commander
in Chief the President "is authorized to direct the
movements of the naval and military forces placed
by law at his command." ^

At the time the approval of the Treaty of Ver-
sailles was under consideration in the Senate, there
was under discussion a reservation to article 10,
presented by Senator Lodge, to the effect that
"Congress . . . under the Constitution, has the
sole power to declare war or authorize the employ-
ment of the military or naval forces of the United
States." Senator Walsh of Montana stated in de-
bate on November 10, 1919 that the statement was
a recital of "What is asserted to be a principle of
constitutional law." He said that if —

any declaration of that character should ever be
made by the Senate of the United States, it would be
singularly unfortunate. It is not true. It is not sound.
It is fraught with the most momentous consequences, and
may involve disasters the extent of which it is hardly pos-
sible to conceive.

The whole course of our history has been a refutation
of such a declaration, namely, that the President of the
United States, the Chief Executive of the United States,
the Commander in Chief of the Army of the United States,
has no power to employ the land or naval forces without
any express authorization upon the part of Congress.
Since the beginning of our Government, our Navy has been
.sent over the seven seas and to every port in the world.
Was there ever any congressional act authorizing the
President to do anything of that kind?

He stated that our Navy travels the sea "in order
to safeguard and protect the rights of American
citizens in foreigns lands. Who can doubt that
the President has no authority thus to utilize the
naval and land forces of the United States?"

Mr. Borah stated :

I agree fully with the legal or constitutional proposition
which the Senator states, and I hoi)e this [reservation]
will be stricken out. It is an act of supererogation to put
it in. It does not amount to anything. It is a recital
which Is not true.

It can not change the Constitution, and it ought not to be
there. ... It would simply be vain and futile and, if I
may say so, with due respect to those who drew it, the
doing of an inconsequential thing." "

Not only is the President Commander in Chief
of the Army and Navy, but he is also charged with
the duty of conducting thi', foreign relations of
the United States and in this field he "alone has
the power to speak or listen as a representative of
the Nation." '

Obviously, there are situations in which the
powers of the President as Commander in Chief
and his power to conduct the foreign relations of
this country complement each other.

The basic interest of the United States is inter-
national peace and security. The United States
has, throughout its history, upon orders of the
Commander in Chief to the Armed Forces and
without congressional authorization, acted to pre-
vent violent and unlawful acts in other states from
depriving the United States and its nationals of
the benefits of such peace and security. It has
taken such action both unilaterally and in concert
with others. A tabulation of 85 instances of the
use of American Armed Forces without a declara-
tion of war was incorporated in the Congressional
Record for July 10, 1941.

Purposes for Sending American Troops Abroad

It is important to analyze the purposes for
which the President as Commander in Chief has
authorized the despatch of American troops
abroad. In many instances, of course, the Armed
Forces have been used to protect specific American
lives and property. In other cases, however,
United States forces have been used in the broad
interests of American foreign policy, and their use
could be characterized as participation in interna-
tional police action.

The traditional power of the President to use
the Armed Forces of the United States without
consulting Congress was referred to in debates in
the Senate in 1945. Senator Connally remarked :

The historical instances in which the President has di-
rected armed forces to go to other countries have not
been confined to domestic or internal instances at all.
Senator Millikin pointed out tliat in many cases the
President lias sent troops into a foreign country to pro-
tect our foreign policy . . . notably in Central and South
America. That was done, he continued, in order to keep
foreign countries out of there — was not aimed at pro-
tecting any particular American citizen. It was aimed
at protecting our foreign policy.

' The Confititutional Law of the United States, 1929,
vol. Ill, p. 1567.)
' S. doc. 105, 65th Cong., 1st sess., p. 7.

174

' 58 Cong. Rec, pt. 8, p. 8195, Nov. 10, 1919, 66th Cong.,
1st sess.

' United States v. Curtiss-Wright Export Corp. et al.
(209 U.S. (1936) 304, 319).

Departmenf of State Bulletin

To his remark that he presumed that by the
Charter of the United Nations we had laid down
a foreign policy which we could protect, Senator
Connally replied that that was absolutely correct.
He added :

I was trying to indicate tliat fact by reading the list of
Instances of intervention on our part in order to keep
another government out of territory in this hemisphere.
That was a question of carrying out our international
policy, and not a question involving the protection of some
American citizen or American property at the moment."

During the Boxer Rebellion in China in 1900-
1901, the President sent about 5,000 troops to join
with British, Eussian, German, French, and Japa-
nese troops to relieve the siege of the foreign
quarters in Peking and reestablish the treaty
status. This was done without express congres-
sional authority. In defining United States policy
at the time Secretary of State Hay said :

. . . The purpose of the President is, as it has been
heretofore, to act concurrently with the other powers ;
first, in opening up communication with Peking and
rescuing the American officials, missionaries, and other
Americans who are in danger; secondly, in affording all
possible protection everywhere in China to American life
and property; thirdly, in guarding and protecting all
legitimate American interests ; and, fourthly, in aiding
to prevent a spread of the disorders to the otlier provinces
of the Empire and a recurrence of such disasters. It is,
of course, too early to forecast the means of attaining this
last result ; but the policy of the Government of the
United States is to seek a solution which may bring about
permanent safety and peace to China, preserve Chinese
territorial and administrative entity, protect all rights
guaranteed to friendly powers by treaty and international
law, and safeguard for the world the principle of equal
and impartial trade with all parts of the Chinese Empire.'

After the opening up of Japan to foreigners in
the 1850's through the conclusion of commercial
treaties between Japan and certain Western pow-
ers, antiforeign disturbances occurred. In 1863,
the American Legation was burned following pre-
vious attacks on the British Legation. The com-
mander of the U. S. S. Wyoming was instructed
to use all necessary force for the safety of the lega-
tion or of Americans residing in Japan. Secretary
of State Seward said that the prime objects of the
United States were :

First, to deserve and win the confidence of the Japanese
Government and people, if possible, with a view to the
common interest of all the treaty powers ; secondly, to
sustain and cooperate with the legations of these powers,
in good faith, so as to render their efforts to tlie same end
effective."

In 1864, the Mikado, not recognizing the treaties
with the Western powers, closed the straits of
Shimonoseki. At the request of the Tycoon's
government (opposed to the Mikado), American,
British, French, and Netherlands forces, in a joints

' Cono- R^r., 79th Cong., 1st sess., vol. 91, pt. 8, Nov. 26,
1945, p. 10967. I

' John Bassett Moore, A Digest of International Law,
vol. V, p. 482. See also Taf t, op. cit. pp. 114-115 ; Rogers,
op. at. pp. ."iS-fia.

" John Bassett Moore, A Digest of International Law,
vol. V, pp. 747-748.

July 31, 7950

operation, opened the straits by force. The ob-
ject of the Western powers was the enforcement of
treaty rights, with the approval of the govern-
ment that granted them.''

Again, in 1868, a detachment of Japanese troops
assaulted foreign residents in the streets of Hiogo.
One of the crew of the Oneida was seriously
wounded. The safety of the foreign population
being threatened, naval forces of the treaty powers
made a joint landing and adopted measures to
protect the foreign settlement."

Former Assistant Secretary of State James
Grafton Rogers has characterized these uses of
force as "international police action", saying :

They amounted to executive use of the Armed Forces to
establish our own and tlie world's scheme of international
order. Two American Presidents used men, ships and
guns on a large and expensive scale."

In 1888 and 1889, civil war took place in Samoa
where the United States, Great Britain, and Ger-
many had certain respective treaty rights for the
maintenance of naval depots. German forces
were landed, and the German Government in-
vited the United States to join in an effort to re-
store calm and quiet in the islands in the interest
of all the treaty powers. The commander of the
United States naval forces in the Pacific was in-
structed by the Secretary of the Navy that the
United States was willing to cooperate in restor-
ing order "on the basis of the full preservation
of American treaty rights and Samoan authority,
as recognized and agreed to by Germany, Great
Britain, and the United States." He was to ex-
tend full protection and defense to American citi-
zens and property, to protest the displacement of
the native government by Germany as violating
the positive agreement and understanding between
the treaty powers, but to inform the British and
German Governments of his readiness to cooperate
in causing all treaty rights to be respected and
in restoring peace and order on the basis of the
recognition of the Samoan right to independence.'*

On July 7, 1941, The President sent to the Con-
gress a message announcing that as Commander
in Chief he had ordered the Navy to take all neces-
sary steps to insure the safety of conununications
between Iceland and the United States as well as
on the seas between the United States and all other
strategic outposts and that American troops had
been sent to Iceland in defense of that country.
The United States, he said, could not permit "the
occupation by Germany of strategic outposts in
the Atlantic to be used as air or naval bases for
eventual attack against the Western Hemisphere."
For the same reason, he said, substantial forces of
the United States had been sent to the bases ac-

" John Bassett Moore, A Digest of International Law,
vol. v, p. 750; S. Ex. Doc. 58, 41 Cong. 2d sess.

" Report of the Secretary of the Navy, 1868, p. xl.

" World Policing and the Constitution, published by
the World Peace Foundation, 1945, pp. 66, 67.

"John Bassett Moore, A Digest of International Law,
vol. I, pp. 545-546.

175

quired from Great Britain in Trinidad and British
Guiana in the South to forestall any pincers move-
ment undertaken by Germany against the Western
Hemisphere.^^

Thus, even before the ratification of the United
Nations Charter, the President had used the
Armed Forces of the United States without con-
sulting the Congress for the purpose of protecting
the foreign policy of the United States. The rati-
fication of the United Nations Charter was, of
course, a landmark in the development of American
foreign policy. As noted above, Senator Connally
and Senator Millikin agreed that the President was
entitled to use armed forces in protection of the
foreign policy represented by the Charter. This
view was also expressed in the Senate debates in
connection with the ratification of the Charter.
For example, Senator Wiley made the following
pertinent statement :

It is my understanding, according to the testimony
given before the Foreign Relations Committee of the
Senate, that the terms "agi'eement or agreements" as used
in article 4.3 are synonymous with the word "treaty." On
the other hand, I recognize that Congress might well in-
terpret them as agreements brought about by the action
of the Executive and ratified by a joint resolution of both
Houses. These agreements would provide for a police
force and the specific responsibility of each nation. But
outside of these agreements, there is the power in our
Executive to preserve the peace, to see that the "supreme
laws" are faithfully executed. When we become a party
to this charter, and define our responsibilities by the agree-
ment or agreements, there can be no question of the power
of the Executive to carry out our commitments in relation
to international policing. His constitutional power, how-
ever, is in no manner impaired."

An even fuller exposition of the point was made
by Senator Austin, who stated :

Mr. President, I am one of those lawyers in the United
States who believe that the general powers of the Presi-
dent— not merely the war powers of the President but the
general authority of the President — are commensurate
with the obligation which is imposed upon him as Presi-
dent, that he take care that the laws are faithfully exe-
cuted. That means that he shall take all the care that is
required to see that the laws are faithfully executed.

Of course, there are other specific references in the Con-
stitution which show that he has authority to employ
armed forces when necessary to carry out specific things
named in the Constitution; but the great over-all and
general authority arises from his obligation that he take
care that the laws are faithfully executed. That has
been true throughout our history, and the Chief Executive
has taken care, and has sent the armed forces of the
United States, without any act of Congress preceding their
sending, on a great many occasions. I have three dif-
ferent compilations of those occasions. One of them runs
as high as 150 times ; another of them 72 times, and so
forth. It makes a difference whether we consider the
maneuvers which were merely shows of force as com-
bined in the exercise of this authorit.y — as I do — or
whether we limit the count to those cases in which the
armed forces have actually entered upon the territory of
a peaceful neighbor. But there is no doubt in mv mind of
his obligation and authority to employ all the force that
is necessary to enforce the laws.

"■ Coiiff. Rec, 77th Cong., 1st sess., vol. 87, pt. 6, July 7,
1941, p. 5868.

" Cong. Rec, 79th Cong., 1st sess., vol. 91, July 27, 194.5,
p. 8127-8128. ...

176

It may be asked. How does a threat to International
security and peace violate the laws of the United States? u
Perhaps, Mr. President, it would not have violated the laws '
of the United States previous to the obligations set forth
in this treaty. Perhaps we have never before recognized as
being true the fundamental doctrine with which I opened
my remarks. But we are doing so now. We recognize
that a breach of the peace anywhere on earth which
threatens the security and peace of the world is an attack
uiion us; and after this treaty is accepted by 29 nations,
that will be the express law of the world. It will be the
law of nations, because according to its express terms it
will bind those who are nonmemliers, as well as members,
and it will be the law of the United States, because we
shall have adopted it in a treaty. Indeed, it will be above
the ordinary statutes of the United States, because it will
be on a par with the Constitution, which provides that
treaties made pursuant thereto shall be the supreme law
of the land.

So I have no doubt of the authority of the President
in the past, and his authority in the future, to enforce
peace. I am bound to say that I feel that the President is
the officer under our Constitution in whom there is exclu-
sively vested the responsibility for maintenance of peace."

Action contrary to the Charter of the United
Nations is action against the interests of the
United States. Preservation of peace under the
Charter is a cornerstone of American foreign
policy. President Truman said in his inaugural
address in 1949 :

In the coming years, our program for peace and free-
dom will emphasize four major courses of action.

First, we will continue to give unfaltering support to
the United Nations and related agencies, and we will
continue to search for ways to strengthen their author-
ity and increase their effectiveness.

In the Korean situation, the resolution of the
Security Council of June 2.5 determined, under
article 39 of the Charter, that the action of the
North Koreans constituted a breach of the peace
and called upon "the authorities in North Korea
(a) to cease hostilities forthwith; and (b) to with-
draw their armed forces to the thirty-eighth
j^arallel."' It also called upon "all Members to
render every assistance to the United Nations in
the execution of this resolution." This is an appli-
cation of the principles set forth in article 2, para-
graph 5 of the Charter, which states : "All Mem-
bers shall give the United Nations every assistance
in any action it takes in accordance with the
present Charter . . ." The Security Council reso-
lution of June 27, passed after the North Korean
authorities had disregarded the June 2.'i resolution,
recommended "that Members of the United Na-
tions furnish such assistance to the Republic of
Korea as may be necessary to repel the armed
attack and to restore international peace and se-
curity in the area." This recommendation was
also made trnder the authority of article 39 of the
Charter.

The President's action seeks to accomplish the
objectives of both resolutions.

The continued defiance of the United Nations
by the North Korean authorities would have meant
that the United Nations would have ceased to

" Conq. Rrc. T9th Cong., 1st sess., vol. 91, Julv 26, 1945,
p. 8064-8065.

Department of Slate Bulletin

exist ;is a serious instrumentality for the main-
tenance of international peace. The continued ex-
istence of the United Nations as an effective inter-
national organization is a paramount United
States interest. The detiance of the United Na-
tions is in clear violation of the Charter of the
United Nations and of the resolutions adopted by
the Security Council of the United Nations to
bring about a settlement of the problem. It is a
threat to international peace and security, a threat
to the peace and security of the United States and
to the security of United States forces in the
Pacific.

These interests of the United States are inter-
ests which the President as Commander in Chief
can protect by the employment of the Armed
Forces of the tJnited States without a declaration
of war. It was they which the President's order
of June 27 did protect. This order was within
Ills authority as Commander in Chief.

USE OF LAND AND NAVAL FORCES

OF THE UNITED STATES

FOR PROTECTION PURPOSES '^

The United States has used its land and naval
forces in foreign territories during peacetime on

many occasions during the past hundred years.
They have been landed, inter alia, for the protec-
tion of American citizens and American territory,
as in the instance of the Spanish Floridas in 1817 ;
for the protection of American citizens located in
disturbed areas ; for the suppression of piracy ; for
meting out punishment (in an early day) to law-
less bands who had murdered American citizens;
for the suppi-ession of local riots and the preserva-
tion of order; for the purpose of securing the pay-
ment of indemnity ; and to jjrevent massacre.

Although there may have been eai'lier instances,
the first instance that has been drawn to my atten-
tion of the landing of United States troops oc-
curred in 1812 when President Monroe sent forces
to expel freebooters who had taken possession in
the name of the Governments of Buenos Aires and
Venezuela of Amelia Island, off the coast of Flor-
ida. Although the island belonged to Spain the
measure was not taken in concert with the Span-
ish Government or the local authorities of Florida.
I find that as late as 1932 iVmerican forces were
sent to Shanghai owing to the Sino-Japanese con-
flict as a measure of protection for the lives and
property of American citizens in that area.

A list of various landings of American forces
and the occasions therefor follows :

Place

Year

Purpose

9.
10.
11.

12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

24.
25.
26.
27.

28.
29.

Amelia Island 1812 To protect Spanish island from foreign invasion or control.

Spanish Florida 1814 To expel the British.

Cuba 1823 To pursue and break up an establishment of pirates.

Puerto Rico 1824 To atone for insult to the flag and procure apology.

Falkland Islands 1831 To procure the release of certain vessels and their crews.

Island of Sumatra 1832 To punish natives for attack and seizure'of American ship and murder of crew.

Fiji Islands 1840 To punish natives for an attack upon Americans.

Samoa 1841 To punish natives for the murder of a white man.

Island of Johanna 1851 To collect indemnity (display of force).

Japan 1853-54. ... To procure a commerical treaty.

China 1854 American and British forces acted jointly during civil war in China to

protect American and British nationals.

Greytown 1854 To protect American property rights.

Fiji Islands 1855 To protect American life.

Uruguay 1855 To protect American consulate and American life and property.

China 1856 To prevent injury to American interests.

Egypt 1858 To secure protection of American citizens.

Uruguay 1858 To protect life and property of foreign residents; action taken at request

of regular Government in conjunction with forces of other powers.

Fiji Islands 1858 To punish natives for murder of two Americans.

China 1859 To restore order in Shanghai.

Kisembo, Africa 1860 To prevent destruction of American property.

Panama 1860 To restore order during insurrection.

Japan 1863 To obtain redress for an unwarranted attack upon an American vessel.

Do 1864 To open the Straits of Shimonoseki in conjunction with other powers;

action taken at request of the Tycoon's government.

Formosa 1867 To punish natives who had murdered the crew of a wrecked American bark.

Japan 1868 To protect American interests during local hostilities.

Uruguay 1868 To protect American interests at request of local authorities.

Korea 1871 To capture Korean forts after a surveying party which had been granted

permission to make certain surveys and soundings in the interest of

science and commerce had been treacherously attacked.

Honolulu 1874 To suppress riotous proceedings at request of local authorities.

Me-xico 1876 To preserve order, pending arrival of regular Government forces after

evacuation of revolutionists.

" Reprinted from H. Rept. 2495, 81st Cong., 2d sess., p. 67.

Ju/y 37, 7950

896355—50-

177

Place Year Purpose

30. Egypt 1882 To suppress riots and protect American interests.

31. Korea 1888 To protect American residents.

32. Samoa 1888 To establish a stable government; joint action by United States, Great

Britain, and Germany.

33. Haiti 1888 To obtain the release of an American merchant vessel captured by a

Haitian war vessel.

34. Navassa Island 1891 To protect American life and property.

35. Chile 1891 To protect American consulate at Valparaiso.

36. Hawaii 1893 To protect life and property at the time of the deposition of the Queen.

37. Brazil 1893 To protect American commerce in Brazilian waters during a revolt of

the Brazilian Navy; it was reported that the insurgents had the
assistance of certain European powers.

38. Korea 1894 To protect the American Legation.

39. Samoa 1899 To assist in settling controversy over succession to Samoan throne.

40. Nicaragua 1899 To protect life and property, upon petition of foreign merchants during

insurrection.

41. China 1900 To protect life and property at time of Boxer uprising.

42. Dominican Republic 1903 To protect American interests.

43. Do 1903 To protect American lives and property and to prevent fighting within

certain area.

44. Honduras 1907 To protect American consulate and American interests during hostilities

between Honduras and Nicaragua.

45. Nicaragua 1910 To protect American life and property during revolution; to prevent the

bombardment of Blueflelds.

46. Honduras 1910-11 .... To protect American interests during revolutionary disturbances.

47. China 1911 To protect the consulate and property of American citizens of Foochow.

48. Do 1911 To protect American consulate and American citizens at Chinkiang.

49. Do 1911 To increase the guard of the American Legation at Peking.

60. Do 1912 To keep open the railroad from Peking to the sea.

51. Do 1912 To extend protection.

52. China, Swatow 1912 To save a woman and some children and conduct them to safety.

53. Cuba 1912 To quell uprising; to protect American life and property.

54. Honduras 1912 To protect an American-owned railroad.

55. Nicaragua 1912-13. ... To protect American property, at request of Government of Nicaragua.

66. Dominican Republic 1912-14. ... To protect Dominican customshouses, in conformity with the provisions

of the treaty of 1907.

57. China, Chapei 1913 To prevent disorder and give protection.

68. China, Shanghai 1913 For protection.

59. Paris 1914 To act as a guard for the American Embassy.

60. Mexico, Veracruz 1914 To enforce demands for amends for affronts and indignities to an officer

of the LT. S. S. Dolphin and the crew of the whaleboat of the Dolphin.

61. Haiti 1914-1915. . To protect American life and property during disturbed conditions.

62. China, Nanking 1916 To quell a riot.

63. Mexico 1916-17. ... To pursue Villa after his invasion of American territory.

64. Dominican Republic 1916-24. . . . To suppress revolution; to establish military government.

65. Cuba 1917-19. ... To protect American consulate and American lives and property during

insurrection and banditti fighting.

66. China, Chungking 1918 For protection during a political crisis.

67. Honduras 1919 To cooperate with the forces of Honduras in maintaining order in a neu-

tral zone.

68. Panama 1919 To extend protection, at request of Panamanian Government.

69. China, Kiukiang 1920 To restore order during riot.

70. China, Youchow 1920 To guard American property.

71. Guatemala 1920 To protect the American Legation during local fighting.

72. Smyrna 1922 To protect American life and property during the advance of Turkish

forces on that city.

73. China, Tungchow 1922 To protect against possible violence by retreating Fengtien forces.

74. China, Foochow 1922 To protect American nationals.

75. China, Masu Island 1923 To protect Americans again.st brigandage.

76. Honduras 1924 To protect American life and property during unsettled conditions;

intermittent landing of forces.

77. Do 1925 To protect American property.

78. Panama 1925 To extend protection during unsettled conditions, at request of Panama-

nian Government.

79. Nicaragua 1926 To protect life and property during revolution.

80. China, Hankow 1927 To protect lives and interests of Americans during mob-riot disturbances.

81. China, Shanghai 1927 To protect American lives and property.

82. China, Nanking 1927 ' ' To afford protection against looting and general disorder.

83. China, Chinkiang 1927 To extinguish fire on American property caused by gunfire.

84. China, Canton 1927 To aid in evacuation.

85. China, Shanghai 1932 To strengthen forces at Shanghai, as a measure of protection for the lives

and property of American nationals.

178 Department of State Bulletin

KOREA: CHRONOLOGY OF EVENTS
JULY 1, 1949 TO JUNE 30, 1950 1»

JuJu 1, 19 ',9: Korean Milltwry Advisory Group (KMAG)
established.

August 4, 19i!>: North Korean forces launch a new and
large-scale invasion of the Ongjin Peninsula, but are re-
pulsed after heavy fighting.

August 6, 19^9: Generalissimo Chiang Kai-shek arrives
in Korea for talks with President Rhee on projected
Pacific Fact.

August 9, 19^9: North Korean radio calls for revolt
against the government of Syngman Rhee in South Korea.

August 2S, 191,9: The Republic of Korea is formally ad-
mitted to membership in the World Health Organization
as its sixty-fifth member.

Scptemhcr: The "Democratic People's Republic of Ko-
rea" fails to hold the all-Korea election called for in the
manifesto issued on June 28, j949, by the Communist-
dominated Democratic Front for the attainment of uni-
fication of the fatherland. No explanation is given for
the failure to carry out previously announced plans.

September 9-20, 19^9: Extremely heavy guerrilla war-
fare commences across 38th parallel; heavy casualties are
reported on both sides.

September 22, 191i9: Steamship Kimball Smith defects
to Chinnampo, North Korea, with EGA employees, Willis
and Meschter, held captive by crew.

September 28, 19 1,9: The United States Congress passes
the Mntual Defense Assistance Act, which authorizes ex-
penditure of $27,0(J0,000 for military aid to Iran, the
Philippines, and the Republic of Korea.

October 2, 19J,9: The United States presents to the
Soviet Foreign Office a note requesting that the U. S. S. R.
assist in determining the location of the missing ship and
EGA officials and facilitate their return.

Two hundred and forty-nine guerrillas are executed on
Cheju Island with approval of President Rhee as a result
of riots earlier in the year. Those executed include 1
officer and 20 enlisted men of Ninth Regiment, formerly
stationed on Cheju.

October 6, 1949: "Democratic People's Republic of Ko-
rea" recognizes the People's Republic of China.

October 10, 1949: Tlie President signed Public Law 343,
the third deficiency bill appropriating $.30,000,000 for eco-
nomic assistance to the Republic of Korea during the
period July 1-October 15, 1949, and covering sums ap-
propriated by Public Law 1.54 of June 30, 1949, which per-
mitted spending on the basis of the annual budget esti-
mate for 1 month ending July 30, 1949, and Public Law
196 approved August 1, 1949, permitting the continuation
of spending on the same basis until August 16, 1940.

October 12. 1949: S. 2319 authorizing an appropriation
of $120,000,000 for economic assistance to the Republic of
Korea passed by the Senate.

October 14, 1949: The U. S. S. R. rejects the request
made in the American note of October 2, stating that the
matter is within the province of the "Democratic People's
Republic of Korea."

The Foreign Minister of the "Democratic People's Re-
public of Korea" sends a letter to the Secretary-General
of the UN challenging the legality of UN activity in
Korea and expressing determination to drive the UN Com-
mission out of Korea.

North Korean forces begin a new offensive on the Ong-
jin Peninsula, and severe fighting continues for several
days.

October 22, 1949: The UN General Asseml^ly decides to
continue the UN Commission on Korea (UNCOK) and to
charge it to investigate developments "which might lead
to or otherwise involve military conflict in Korea."

The Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East
(ECAFE) admits the Republic of Korea as an associate
member and rejects the application of the "Democratic
People's Republic of Korea."

"• Reprinted from H. Rept. 2495, 81st Cong., 2d sess.,
p. 69.

July 37, 7950

October 25, 1949: The Home Minister of the Republic
of Korea announces that "SKLP (South Korea Labor
Party) Extermination Week" will begin on November 1;
those who wish to repent and join the National Guidance
Alliance (an organization for converted ex-Gommunists)
are urged to do so before that date.

October 28, 1949: The President of the United States
signs Public Law 430, second supplemental appropriation
bill, appropriating another $30,000,000 for economic aid
to the Republic of Korea during the period October 15,
1949 to February 15, 1950.

October 29, 1949: Tlie United States presents to the
U.S.S.R. a second note concerning the Steamship Kim.-
ba!l Smith and the two American officials of the Economic
Cooperation Administration held in northern Korea.

November 7, 1949: The "Democratic People's Republic
of Korea" recognizes the (East) German Democratic Re-
public.

yovcmbcr 14, 1949: The U.S.S.R., replying to the
American note of October 29, agrees to inform the North
Korean authorities, through the Soviet Ambassador in
Pyongyang, of the United States request for information.

November 15. 1949: In a radio broadcast, the "Demo-
cratic People's Republic of Korea" acknowledges for the
first time the presence of the two American officials in
northern Korea and states that the authorities in the north
are willing to turn them over to the American Government.

November 23, 1949: The Republic of Korea is admitted
to membership in the UN Food and Agriculture Organiza-
tion.

November 24-25, 1949: Village people's committees are
elected in North Korea.

Novc(m,ber 26, 1949: The new Secretary General of the
UN Commission on Korea and other staff members arrive
in Seoul.

December 3. 1949: Township people's committees are
elected in North Korea.

December 11, 1949: Meschter and WiUis, the two Ameri-
can officials of the Economic Cooperation Administration
held in North Korea since September 22, are turned over
to a representative of the American Embassy at the 38th
parallel.

December V,, 1949: Kim II Sung, Premier of the "Demo-
cratic People's Republic," and party leave North Korea
for Moscow to participate in the celebration of Stalin's
seventieth birthday.

December 17, 1949: Republic of Korea approved pro-
gram discussed with them by MDAP Survey Team.

December 26, 1949: MDAP Survey Team arrives in Re-
public of Korea. Chung Paek, prominent and long-time
Communist arrested in South Korea in late November on
his return from North Korea, denounces the Nortli Korean
rerfme and pledges his allegiances to the Republic, lend-
ing prominence to the National Guidance Alliance and the
South Korea "Voluntary Surrender Week."

Jimuarij 12. 1950: Ambassador Philip Jessup speaks be-
fore the National Assembly of the Republic of Korea.

January IS. 1950: UN International Children's Emer-
gency Fund (UNICEF) announces plans for a .$550,000
child welfare program in Korea; Dr. Clarence W. Mac-
Charles, of Canada, is named director.

January 19. 1950: H. R. 5330 authorizing the appropria-
tion of $120,000,000 for economic assistance to the Re-
public of Korea defeated in the House of Representatives
by a vote of 192-191.

January 26, 1950: The military defense assistance pro-
gram and Korea Military Advisory Group (KMAG) agree-
ments are signed.

February 8, 1950: The UN Economic and Social Council
(ECOSOC) at Lake Success endorses the Republic of
Korea's application by membership in the United Nations
Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization
(UNESCO).

February 9, 1950: S. 2319 authorizing the appropria-
tion of $120,000,000 for economic assistance to the Re-
public of Korea for fiscal year 1950 with an amendment
extending aid to China passed by the House of
Representatives.

779

Feiiuary 10, 1950: S. 2319, as amended by the House,
passed by the Senate; President Rhee hands foreign
correspondents message of gratitude for passage of the aid
bill.

February 1^, 1950: President Rhee, accompanied by
Foreign Minister, Director of Office of Public Informa-
tion (OPI), Deputy Chief of Staff of Korean Army, and
staff, departs for Tokyo for consultation.

February 15, 1950: Korea requests spare parts and am-
munition for 10 ATO planes, and State Department allo-
cates money to Defense Department.

Febrmir^ 17, 1950: The World Health Organization
grants the Republic of Korea .fTSO.OOO for public health
program for fiscal year 1950.

February 2Ji, 1950: The Republic of Korea signs a con-
tract with Japan for export of 100,000 metric tons of rice
to Japan at $142 per ton.

February 27, 1950: President Truman transmits to the
United States Congress requests for appropriation of
.?60,000,0<J0 for aid to the Republic of Korea for fiscal year
1950 and for the authorization of $100,000,000 for economic
assistance for fiscal year 1951.

March 3, 1950: Headquarters of the Special Army-
Police Joint Search Organ in South Korea announces
arrest of 196-man "destruction party" led by Ch'oe Yung
Ch'oo. The party allegedly was taking orders from the
North Korean Vice Minister of Internal Security in order
to stage a revolt in March.

March 4, 1950: The Secretary-General of the UN an-
nounces that, in compliance with a request from the UN
Commission on Korea, eight observers are being sent to
Korea to observe clashes along the 38th parallel.

March 15, 1950: Korean program submitted by Depart-
ment of Defense to Department of State.

March 20, 1950: KMAG agreement ratified by Korean
legislature.

March 29, 1950: Korean military aid program approved
by State Department.

March 30, 1950: The South Korea Assembly ratifies the
Korea Military Advisory Group and military defense-
assistance program agreement by a vote of 90 to 1.

March 31, 1950: The United States House of Represent-
atives passes H. R. 7797, authorizing the appropriation of
$100,000,000 for aid to the Republic of Korea during fiscal
year 1951.

April 3, 1950: Korean Ambassador in Washington
(John M. Chang) is handed United States aide-memoire
regarding financial situation in Korea and ECA assistance.

April Ji, 1950: United States Ambassador to Korea
(John J. Muccio) hands United States aide-memoire to
President Rhee. Ambassador Muccio is subsequently re-
called for consultation regarding financial situation in
Korea.

April 11, 1950: South Koreans request armament and
ammunition for PC boats (sec. 408 (e) MDA Act).

April 19, 1950: The Office of Public Information of the
Republic of Korea announces that a general election for
members of the National Assembly is to lie held on May 30.

April 20, 1950: Air Force directed to supply machine
guns, spare parts, and ammunition to South Korea under
section 408 (e) of the MDA Act on patrol craft sailing
from west coast in May 1950.

April 2//, 1950: The Foreign Minister of the Republic
of Korea invites the United Nations Commission on Korea
to observe general elections in the Republic. Allocation
made by Department of State to Defense Department of
funds to carry out supply action by Air Force.

April 28, 1950: Fulbright agreement between United
States and Korea (ROK) is signed.

May 5, 1950: Senate passed S. 3304, authorizing the

appropriation of 100 million dollars for economic assist-
ance to the Republic of Korea.

May 15, 1950: State Department authorizes additional
Army and Coast Guard military assistance to South
Korea.

May 18, 1950: House and Senate conferees agreed on
H. R. 7797.

May 23, 1950: H. R. 7797 as reported by conference
passed by House. Allocation by State Department to
Defense Department of funds to carry out supply action.

May 25, 1950: H. R. 7797 as reported by conference
passed by Senate. Joint Chiefs of Staff directed to pro-
gram the additional Army and Coast Guard items author-
ized May 15. 1950.

May SO, 1950: National Assembly elections are held in
the Republic of Korea. About 90 percent of the electorate
vote.s, and the established political parties, including both
the supporters of and the opposition to President Rhee,
retain only a small percentage of their Assembly member-
ship ; over 65 percent of the seats go to independents.

June 5, 1950: President approves Foreign Economic
Assistance Act of 1950 (Public Law 535), including au-
thorization of $100,000,000 economic aid to Korea.

June 7, 1950: The North Korea regime proposes a gen-
eral all-Korea election on August 5, a meeting of a Supreme
Korean Assembly on August 15, and the holding of a
preliminary Joint North-South Conference near the 38th
parallel. The proposal specifically forbids the participa-
tion of members of the UN Commission on Korea, Presi-
dent Rhee, Lee Bum Suk, and other co-called national
traitors.

June 19, 1950: The new National Assembly of the Re-
public of Korea convenes for its first meeting. The final
turn-over in Assembly membership is approximately 85
percent.

June 20, 1950: North Korea makes a second unification
proposal, varying only slightly from original offer. This
second proposal emanates from the North Korean Govern-
ment directly rather than from the Democratic Front, the
political instrument for unification propaganda.

Jvne 25, 1950: The North Korea People's Army and
border constabulary forces invade South Korea and launch
amphibious landings, supported by air attacks on Seoul
and other strategic locations. General MacArthur directed
to send available MDAP equipment from stocks of the
Far Eastern Command.

June 25, 1950: The United States sponsors resolution
befoi'e UN Security Council that armed attack on Republic
of Korea by forces from North Korea constitutes breach of
the peace and calling for immediate cessation of hostilities.
Re.solution passes 9 to 0.

June 27, 1950: Statement by President of United States
announcing he has ordered air and sea forces to give troops
of Republic of Korea cover and support.

General MacArthur begins implementation of the Presi-
dent's order.

UN Security Council resolution adopted, calling upon
members of UN to furnish such assistance to the Republic
of Korea as may be necessary to repel armed attack.
Adopted 7 to 1 (later changed to 8 to 1, when India on June
20 voted in favor).

June SO, 1950: Statement by President of United States
that he has authorized General MacArthur to use certain
supporting ground units, authorizing USAF to conduct
missions on specific targets in northern Korea wherever
militarily necessary, and ordering naval blockade of entire
Korean coast.

As of this date, the following countries have announced
they would assist in enforcing the UN Security Council's
resolutions : The United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand,
China, and the Netherlands.

180

Department of State Bulletin

BENELUX— A CASE STUDY IN ECONOMIC UNION

by Howard J. Hilton, Jr.

Benelux is the abbreviation used to describe the
union of the Netherlands, Belgium, and Luxem-
bourg or, to be more precise, the union of two
economies, that of the Netherlands and that of
the economic union of Belgium-Luxembourg
which was previously established as a tariff union
in 1921. The first stage in creating the Benelux
Union was the organization of a tariff union. The
next stage, and the one through which Benelux
is now passing, is that of restricted union or pre-
union. The final objective is complete economic
union.

In days past, when currencies were freely con-
vertible and based upon gold, the terms "customs
union" and "economic union" were practically
synonomous since the elimination of customs bar-
riers between any two countries created an area
within which the free play of economic forces
produced an integrated economy. This situation,
however, no longer exists. Although Belgium
and Luxembourg, on the one hand, and the Neth-
erlands, on the other, have had a virtual customs
union since 1948, they do not expect to attain eco-
nomic union before mid-1950 at the earliest. This
fact does not imply that the fundamental require-
ments for an economic union have changed since
such a union remains an area of free economic
activity unhampered by political boundaries. It
does mean, however, that the difficulties to be over-
come in attaining economic union have increased.
Among these difficulties may be mentioned the
foreign-exchange controls and quantitative re-
strictions which have been imposed as a result of
the so-called "dollar shortage."

Different economic philosophies manifest in the
two economies following the termination of hostil-

iuly 3 J, 7950

ities complicate the solution of these technical
problems; nevertheless, the three countries are
strenuously engaged in reconciling differences and
in solving the problems involved in economic
union.

The lesson of Benelux — as the outstanding con-
temporary experiment in deliberate economic
union — reveals the difficulties involved in such a
project as well as in charting the paths for over-
coming these obstacles. Fortunately, the states-
men of these three countries, realizing the impor-
tance of their experience, are interested in making
it available to others. They have, for example,
been the host to the European Customs Union
Study Group and have provided much material
for that organization.'

CONCEPTION OF BENELUX

Benelux was conceived during the war when the
three Governments-in-exile decided that, follow-
ing liberation, the three countries would form a
customs union as the first step toward complete
economic union. On September 5, 1944, the three
countries signed a customs convention by which
they agreed to establish a common tariff. This
convention, however, established the framework
for only a customs community. It did not pro-
vide for the elimination of excise duties and other

' They have also prepared English translations of basic
documents, e. g., Report on the Conference of Cabinet Min-
isters of the Netherlands, Belgimn and Luxembourg, held
at The Hague on March 10th to 13th, 191,9. Much of the
documentation on Benelux which was made available to
the Select Committee on Foreign Aid was incorporated in
the valuable report on Benelux to be found in the Pinal
Report on Foreign Aid (H. Kept. 1845, 80th Cong. 2d sess.,
pp. 181-189). The material for this article has been
drawn largely from these two sources.

181

taxes upon goods originating in partner countries,
and the additional steps required to achieve a com-
plete customs union or for the mutual adjustment
of such duties and taxes and the coordination of
policies are necessary for the formation of an
economic union.

In the midst of the world economic crisis of
1932, at the Ouchy convention, the three countries
endeavored to establish a preferential system by
agreeing to a 10 percent reduction in duties levied
on goods exchanged among themselves. Further
annual reductions of 10 percent were to follow this
initial reduction. This arrangement was never
implemented primarily because the United King-
dom and the United States contended that it vio-
lated most- favored-nation agreements.

Although the complementary nature of the two
economies facilitates the achievement of economic
union, the problems are mmierous and compli-
cated.

Belgium is a heavily industralized country with
a large steel industry, whereas the Netherlands
draws primarily on Belgium and Luxembourg for
her steel requirements. In agriculture, the two
economies are in about the same situation with
respect to cereals, but the Netherlands produces
surpluses of vegetables and dairy products which,
prior to the war, she exported primarily to the
German market.

In order to make the union a reality, free move-
ment of goods, capital, and persons will be neces-
sary and will require, in addition to many other
essential conditions, general comparability of
price, tax, and wage structures. Many technical
difficulties beset such an arrangement: Belgium
and Luxembourg, for example, have not yet suc-
ceeded in equalizing their sales and excise taxes
after 18 years of economic union.

Following liberation, the three countries en-
countered great difficulties in making even the
customs community a reality. The Netherlands
suffered months of famine and destruction under
German occupation; Belgium, having been lib-
erated with a minimum of destruction, was serv-
ing as a base for Allied operations. The payments
received from the Allies enabled Belgium to re-
cover more quickly with a minimum of economic
controls. The Netherlands, on the other hand,
suffered destruction not only of physical plants,
roads, harbors, and housing, but also of the net-
work of financial and commercial relationships.

In planning the economic recovery of the coun-
try, the Netherlands Government instituted an
elaborate set of controls covering both production
and consumption as well as strict controls over
foreign trade. She established the level of living
by controlling wages, prices, rationing, and by
subsidizing certain products.

Because of these differences and the preoccu-
pation of each country with the problems of
recovery, the customs convention was not imple-
mented immediately upon liberation ; however, the
Conference of Cabinet Ministers, which met at
The Hague in April 1946, took steps to enforce
and to strengthen the customs convention of Sep-
tember 5, 1944. Since that date, the three coun-
tries have made steady progress in reconciling the
different views, in meeting the many problems
associated with integi-ating these divergent na-
tional economies into an economic union, and in
developing the necessary organizations to handle
joint problems.

Despite the efforts to realize the tariff union
in 1946, the common tariff did not enter into force
before January 1, 1948. The period of preunion
was scheduled to begin on July 1, 1949, with the
achievement of the economic union proper by July
1, 1950. In the protocol of October 1949, the
contracting parties agreed that the full economic
union would be established on July 1, 1950, and
would be developed in the light of the experience
gained during the jsreunion period. Although the
developments following devaluation have favored
the formation of complete economic union, some
delays have been incurred which have postponed
the date for the implementation of economic union.
Even when the proclamation of full economic
union is made, certain limitations may possibly
have to be maintained for goods and payments.

It is, of course, recognized that the continual H
existence of such limitations would not be con-
sonant with the criteria for the attainment of the
economic union. As defined by the report of the
Cabinet Ministers:

An economic union of two or more sovereign States
covers a definite economic territory :

a. wherein persons, goods and capital can move freely;

b. wherein the establislimeut and application of the
economic, financial and social policies are coordinated ;

c. which acts in its relations to third countries as a
single economic, financial and social entity, except in mat-
ters of purely national interest, which cannot have reper-
cussions on the partner countries.

182

Department of State Bulletin

ORGANIZATION FOR ECONOMIC UNION

To f ullill the requirements of this definition of
economic union requires a great measure of agree-
ment and an organization for the coordination of
policies. In addition, there is always the neces-
sity for good faith and understanding and consid-
eration of problems from the point of view of
union interest rather than national interest. The
three countries, in appreciation of this factor, have
decided to refer difficult problems, which might
endanger good economic relations between the
three countries, to the Board of Presidents of the
Customs Convention Councils. The Conference
of Cabinet Ministers noted that "the fact that this
body can approach these problems from a Union,
rather than from a national viewpoint, makes it
reasonable to expect a satisfactory solution in
many cases."

In addition to the conferences of the Ministers,
which have been held on the average of twice a
year, the administration of Benelux required the
establishment of a Council for Economic Union,
an Administrative Council on Customs Duties,
which is assisted by a Commission for Customs
Disputes, a Commercial Agreement Council, and
a General Secretariat.

The conferences of Cabinet Ministers are held to
settle the major problems encountered in realizing
economic union and to plan the further steps to be
taken. At the Conference held in March 1949,
the Cabinet Ministers organized six ministerial
committees to study the problems raised and dis-
cussed in the report from the President of the
Council. The range of problems presented to the
Cabinet Ministers is indicated by the scope of these
six committees which investigated problems relat-
ing to (1) the return to free consumption and the
reduction of subsidies, (2) the coordination of in-
vestment programs, (3) fiscal policy, (4) social
policy, (5) monetary and commercial policy, and
(6) agricultural policy. At the meeting held in
October 1949, the Ministei-s approved resolutions
concerning waterways and seaport problems and
parliamentary contacts, in addition to further
resolutions on some of the above problems.

The Council for Economic Union consists of
three delegates of the Netherlands and three dele-
gates of the Economic Union of Belgium and
Luxembourg (hereinafter referred to as Bleu).
It transmits its views to competent authorities in
the Netherlands and Bleu concerning the

measures which they might intend to take for the
purpose of regulating imports, exports, and tran-
sit by imposing restrictions of an economic char-
acter, such as licenses, quotas, or special license fees
and administrative charges. For the purpose of
establishing the conmion regime, it also coordi-
nates such of these measures as may be introduced
and achninisters joint import, export, and transit
quotas. The Council for Economic Union may
also inform the competent authorities of its views
concerning all measures relating to bounties or
subsidies which the contracting parties intend to
adopt.

The Administrative Council on Customs Duties
also consists of three delegates from the Nether-
lands and three from Bleu. It proposes meas-
ures designed to unify the legislative provisions
and regulations governing the collection of im-
port and excise duties. A Commission on Cus-
toms Disputes assists this Council.

The Commission on Customs Disputes, at the
request of the competent Ministers, makes binding
decisions in the cases of disputes arising from the
application of the legal provisions and regulations
resulting from the agreement. It communicates
its decisions to the competent Ministers who are
responsible for implementing them.

The Commercial Agreements Council, which,
likewise, consists of three representatives of each
party, has the function of insuring the coordina-
tion of measures in respect of relationships estab-
lished with third countries. This is the body with
primary responsibility for meeting the require-
ment that the economic union speak with one
voice. In the tariff negotiations under the Gen-
eral Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, the Bene-
lux delegation was divided into a series of work-
ing groups headed alternately by a representative
of the Netherlands and by a representative of
Bleu.

The General Secretariat handles the work for
the intraunion bodies and makes the necessary
preparations for the conferences of the Cabinet
Ministers.

PROBLEMS OF ECONOMIC UNION

Balance of Payments

As indicated above, economic union requires the
free movement of goods, persons, and capital, and

July 31, 1950

183

the coordination of certain types of internal legis-
lation and of relations with third countries. One
of the basic considerations in achieving economic
union is the maintenance of an equilibrium in the
payments among the parties of the union. With-
out this equilibrium, the members of the economic
union would find it difficult, if not impossible, to
permit the uncontrolled movement of goods and
capital. Chronic deficits in the payments position
also affect the movement of people and the pos-
sibility of coordinating internal taxes. One of
the primary objectives in forming an economic
union, in the view of the Benelux experts, must,
therefore, be the attainment of an equilibrium in
the payments position of the parties. This
equilibrium naturally involves the relation be-
tween the union and third countries, for the fa-
vorable balance of trade with other countries by
one member may be used to finance its deficit with
the other member. The payments problem in
Benelux, which arises from the apparently in-
tractable bilateral balance-of -payments disequilib-
rium between the Netherlands on the one side and
Bleu on the other, has proved the major obstacle
to attaining complete economic union.

The Netherlands deficit in its trade with Bleu
is not merely the result of the war, but postwar
developments and the program for economic
union have magnified the proportions of the prob-
lem. Prior to the war, the Netherlands imported
from Bleu around 50 percent more than she ex-
ported. Transfers of gold or balances in other
currencies covered the balance. In the postwar
period, the deficit has been somewhat higher, the
Netherlands importing around 60-70 percent more
than her exports to Bleu. The settlement of this
balance in the postwar period has proved to be
a real problem. Although the Netherlands has
some sterling balances, she has no surplus gold or
dollar balances over her own direct requirements
to settle the deficit, and Bleu is unwilling to take
large sterling balances beyond its own needs un-
less these balances are convertible into dollars.
The Economist describes this manifestation of
divergent economic interest as the dollar line that
runs through the heart of the potential union. To
one side, lies Holland, recently closely associated
with the sterling area ; and, on the other, are Bel-
gium and Luxembourg, for all economic intents
and purposes part of the dollar world.

The solution to the payments problem may re-
quire a fundamental economic adjustment by the

184

parties in the union. During the transitional
stage, or preunion, as it is termed, restrictions are
to be maintained to control the volume of trade
and capital movements, while an effort is being
made to remove the causes of imbalance. The
parties of Benelux agreed that, during this stage,
certain conditions must be fulfilled. The three
countries must return to a system of free consump-
tion and the realization and maintenance of in-
ternal monetary equilibrium. Dutch exports
would have to be increased in order to provide
sufficient currency for additional imports from
Bleu. Although the Union can be realized, with-
out unifying the currencies of the central banks
of partner countries, by continuing the present
technical procedure of exchanging guilders and
Belgian francs through their respective central
banks, the countries agreed that, as an essential
condition of such an arrangement, one partner
cannot be permitted to accumulate the currency
of another.

In order that the Netherlands might make the
necessary changes in her policy to permit the ful-
fillment of these conditions for preunion, the Bleu
agreed to grant credits to the Netherlands on the
understanding that the amounts of these credits
would be automatically adjusted to the extent of
the trade liberalization measures taken by the
Netherlands in agreement with the Governments
of Belgium-Luxembourg. In determining the de-
gree of priority to be assigned to the various cate-
gories of decontrolled goods, special attention was
to be paid, on the one hand, to products involved
in the employment policy pursued by the Bleu
and, on the other hand, to the conditions essential
to the abolition of rationing and restrictions on
the Netherlands market. By April 1, 1950, ap-
proximately 98 percent of the national trade be-
tween the members was not subject to quantitative
restrictions.

EGA aid has played an important role in financ-
ing the Netherlands deficit with Bleu. With this
conditional aid, Bleu has been able to grant the
Netherlands drawing rights and credits up to
139 million dollars for the year ending June 30,
1950.

Coordination of Relations With Tiiird Countries

During the period of preunion and continuing
through the period of complete union, the com-
mercial and monetary policies of the members to-
ward third countries are to be coordinated. New

Depatiment of Sfafe Bulletin

trade and payments agreements are to be con-
eluded only after prior consultation between part-
ners. Once these common agreements have been
prepaivd, negotiated, and put into effect, the re-
sulting receipts and expenditures are to be worked
out according to an automatic procedure. This
procedure could be established either by institut-
ing a common foreign-currency fund or by main-
taining separate foreign-currency funds. In both
cases, however, the Benelux experts feel that the
effort should be concentrated on working out a
common trade and payments policy particularly
■with reference to the dollar area. The bilateral
balance could be covered by foreign currency
supplied by the debtor country ; but, in any case,
a safety clause should be provided to enable timely
discovery and redress of any fundamental devia-
tions which might develop in the balance-of-pay-
ments positions.

The initial step to achieve this coordination was
taken with the organization of the Commercial
Agi-eements Council. In customs and tariff nego-
tiations, for example, those under the General
Agreements on Tariffs and Trade, Belgium, the
Netherlands, and Luxembourg speak as one
voice — that of the Benelux delegation. In other
international conferences, they generally adopt a
.common attitude.

Free Movement of Goods

The first condition of a tariff union or customs
union is the establishment of a common tariff and
the elimination of duties on products exchanged
between members of the union. Benelux achieved
this condition with the introduction of the com-
mon tariff on January 1, 1948. Quantitative re-
strictions imposed to protect the balance-of-pay-
ments position of the members and to assure the
fulfillment of various trade and payments agree-
ments still rigidly controlled trade among the
members of Benelux. The external features of
these restrictions are gradually being coordinated,
and those applicable to other members are to be
eliminated.

As a first step in the elimination of such re-
strictions, the members are replacing the system
of licenses by that of the "declaration in lieu of
license" which will permit free importation while
maintaining the possibility of checking imports
a posteriori. Since quotas have become a device
for protecting domestic industries in the absence
of tariffs, the removal of such restrictions affects

special interests previously protected and forces
the rationalization of production. The Govern-
ments will have to ignore the pleas of special
interests or fonnulute other solutions than protec-
tion for their problems in the interest of attain-
ing the objective and advantages of complete
economic union.

The removal of controls, the elimination of sub-
sidies, the adjvistment of price structures, the co-
ordination of sales and excise taxes, the adoption
of similar consumer credit policies, and the mutual
adjustment of port and transit charges are all
steps which, to a greater or lesser degree, affect
the free movement of goods. Once they are taken,
the removal of quantitative restrictions and the
rationalization of production are facilitated.

The three Governments agreed in March 1949
to remove controls over the distribution of con-
sumer goods and over the allocation of raw mate-
rials. The removal of all such controls is partly
dependent upon international factors such as the
international allocation of raw materials and the
availability of foreign currency and foreign loans
for the purchase of such goods. They also agreed
to abolish all rationing of consumer goods by the
end of 1949. For imports of certain products
from third countries, primarily those financed by
dollar payments, the three Governments recog-
nized the possible necessity of maintaining, as a
temporary measure, regulations on the rationing
and allocation of such products. In these cases,
the decision is to be made by mutual agreement,
and joint action is to be taken to formulate and
implement the decision.

The removal or adjustment of subsidies is im-
portant not only for the free movement of goods
but also for the free movement of capital. The
subsidies policy pursued in the Benelux countries
is not a natural historical phenomenon but is a
combination of temporary prewar and postwar
measures, which may be altered as conditions im-
prove. One exception to these measures is the
Netherlands "monopoly system" of agricultural
subsidies which is an element of the Netherlands
agricultural policy for influencing price levels and
jDroducers' income. In cases of import subsidies
for maintaining domestic prices, agreements can
be reached governing the amount of the subsidies
to be paid until foreign prices and domestic prices
become adjusted. At the pi-esent time, the Neth-
erlands subsidizes the difference between the im-
port price and the domestic price of bread grains,

July 37, 7950

185

meats, vegetables, and oils. Belgium, on the other
hand, subsidizes the importation of flour products
as a means of maintaining the price of bread.
Subsidies on production pi-ovide a more difficult
problem. As a general principle, the objective in
Benelux is the complete elimination of such sub-
sidies with the exception of those which, by mutual
agreement, are deemed to be required by the par-
ticular structure of the economy.

As a general principle for achieving economic
union, all controls on prices should be removed and
normal economic forces should establish price
levels. The member Governments of Benelux
have accepted this principle but with the recog-
nition of the right of the Governments, after con-
sultation and by mutual agreement, to issue price
regulations for all cases where world economic
developments or disturbances in certain sectors of
the economy make such action desirable. In addi-
tion, when marked structural differences cause an
appreciable divergence in the price of essential
products in the three countries, the Governments
may take special measures to alleviate the possible
consequences of these differences.

Although economic union does not necessarily
require the unification of the fiscal system and the
equalization of taxes, the three Governments of
Benelux have agreed that unification of different
systems of taxation should be as thorough as pos-
sible, particularly for direct taxes on goods such as
import duties, excise duties, purchase taxes, turn-
over taxes, and taxes for motor vehicles. They
have made much progress in this direction. A
protocol of December 22, 1947, unified the excise
duties on fruit wines and sparkling fermented
beverages. Another agreement was concluded on
December 16, 1948, providing for unification of
additional excise charges and the elimination of
others. The Customs Administrative Council of
Benelux has proposed further steps in this direc-
tion. The common system based on these pro-
posals will result in an increase in fiscal revenues
for the Netherlands as against a marked decrease
in Belgium and Luxembourg.

The mutual adjustment of port and transit
charges is recognized as an important element in
the effective organization and operation of eco-
nomic union. The Governments of Benelux have,
therefore, appointed a special committee to under-
take the study of the technical, economic, and
financial aspects of the problems concerning sea-
ports and waterways.

Free Movement of Capital

As in the case of free movement of goods, the
free movement of capital requires the fulfillment
of a number of conditions. The payments posi-
tion of the member countries, which, as previously
mentioned, is a basic factor in all aspects of eco-
nomic union, should be balanced without the ne-
cessity of unusual settlements in gold or large
governmental loans. Continuing capital move-
ments may, of course, be utilized to offset tempo-
rary deficits in the exchange of commodities and
to restore basic equilibrium in the trade pattern of
the member countries. If a substantial propor-
tion of the capital transferred is utilized for capi-
tal investments designed to increase the produc-
tion of products which can compete in third coun-
tries and which are needed in other parts of the
union, then, such capital movements would have
the effect of correcting disequilibrium in the bal-
ance of payments. In an area as small as that
covered by Benelux, coordination of large-scale
capital investments may serve a useful function
in promoting the type of investment best designed
to insure the viability of the union. Production
subsidies, which arbitrarily alter the competitive
position of industries, are to be abolished or ad-
justed by mutual agreement. The experts agree
that corporation taxes and other charges influ-
encing the movement of capital must be recognized
and, where necessary, adjusted by mutual agree-
ment.

The members of Benelux accept the converti-
bility of the currencies within the union. They
recognize that special attention will have to be
given to the conditions which determine the mu-
tual convertibility of both currencies, the Dutch
guilder and the Belgian franc. They are to adopt
measures to recognize and to remedy any disturb-
ances of the monetary equilibrium once it is estab-
lished. Such measures are to be concentrated in
the field of commercial policy. As as basis for
convertibility, they recognize that arrangements
will have to be developed during the preunion
stage to insure unity of action in currency policiy
to be pui'sued in relation to third countries. Such
arrangements are compatible with the mainte-
nance of separate internal monetary regimes and
with the autonomy of the central banks. Pay-
ments to third countries could be made either
through the central banks acting jointly or from a
common currency fund. Without such unity of
action, convertibility would operate to the disad-

186

Department of Slate Bulletin

vantage of one or the othei" of the members.

The aim of the program for the coordination
of investment is to insure the highest and most
bahmced level of employment possible in the three
countries. Consideration is to be given to the
demographic development in order that produc-
tive capacity will increase in those ai'eas in which
industrial workers increase from year to year.
Investments naturally should be made in regions
where cost price is lowest for products of equal
quality excluding all artificial considerations. The
members of Benelux have agreed that investment
policy, which is to follow the principles adopted
by Oeec, should give due consideration to market-
ing possibilities for new products and the im-
portance of the proposed investments to the bal-
ance-of-payments position. Under the Benelux
program, coordination will be limited to those
investments which, on the basis of quality or
quantity, are of primary importance for the eco-
nomic activities of the three countries. Equal
attention is to be given to investments in industry
and agriculture. Investments in important public
works are to be coordinated since such investments
influence the level of emplojanent. The Benelux
Governments believe that the coordination of pri-
vate investments can be facilitated by encouraging
reciprocal understanding and cooperation between
industrial leaders ; however, participating govern-
ments in the Oeec and in the EGA bilateral agree-
ments have undertaken commitments to act against
private restrictive arrangements which interfere
with the achievement of European recovery. Be-
cause of the importance of pure scientific and
applied scientific research to the development of
industry, the three Governments have agreed to
further such research by mutual consultation and
cooperation.

Subsidies, by altering the competitive ability
of various industries within the union, can arbi-
trarily influence the flow of capital. The Govern-
ments therefore will have to eliminate or mutually
adjust the payment of particular subsidies to meet
the needs of the union as a whole. Since tax and
credit policies are also important factors in di-
recting capital movements, arrangements are to
be developed to insure general comparability of
policies in these fields.

The Movement of Persons

In the formation of an economic union among
countries, in which barriers of various types pre-

viously inhibited transfers of population, a num-
ber of factors may influence the movement of
persons within the union. The basic factors de-
termining the ultimate movement of people within
the union are the relative distribution of economic
resources and, thus, the productivity of workers
in various parts of the union, the demographic
pattern, and the mores and customs of the people.
To alter these conditions is difficult. Wage struc-
tures and social policies, which also influence the
movement of persons, are, therefore, the primary
factors to be adjusted.

At the present time, disparities exist in the
structure of wages in the three countries. The
level of wages in Belgium appears to be about 20
percent higher than that in the Netherlands, and
for Luxembourg the difference is about 40 percent.
Although these differences need not be eliminated,
they should be reduced to the degree of difference
that might be expected to exist in different regions
of the same country. The difference in wages may
be expected to decrease as a result of the coordina-
tion of the economic policy of the member
countries.

In order to coordinate the wage structure, the
Ministers asked the Council of the Economic
Union to study the question of wages. This study
involves the collection of comparative data in the
three countries on wages paid to adult men and
women and to juveniles. The job classification of
workers in the three countries also has to be ex-
amined. With this basic information, certain
conclusions could be reached regarding the pur-
chasing power of wages and its probable trend
under the impact of economic union. Light would
also be shed on the factors influencing the migra-
tion of industries especially those of an economic
nature arising from geographical differences or
from excessive wage differentials. In certain
cases, such differentials might hamper the develop-
ment of favorable economic relations among the
members. The Ministers have also suggested that
a study be made for those sectors of production
where great differences in wages exist and where
marked competition may be expected either from
within the union or from foreign countries.

In the field of social security, the first step has
been the conclusion of agreements providing for
reciprocity in covering workers in the countries
parties to the agreements. The members of Bene-
lux hope to extend these arrangements to include

July 3h 1950

187

the other members of the Brussels pact, i.e. France
and the United Kingdom. As a long-range objec-
tive, the Ministers have asked the Council of the
Economic Union to investigate a comprehensive
equalization of social security charges on the
assumption that such equalization is to be pre-
ferred to leveling the charges in individual sectoi-s.

The broader problems in this field have been
assigned to the Council of the Economic Union
for investigation. These relate to the relationship
of unemployment and wages in the three countries,
the demographic problems from the social point
of view, movement of labor within Benelux, and
the preparation of a draft multilateral reciprocity
agreement on social security including the coun-
tries of Benelux and the other members of the
Brussels pact.

Consideration is also to be given to the position
of the farmer. The agricultural policy of the three
countries is designated to insure security in well-

managed enterprises for farmers and agricultural
laborers.

CONCLUSION

Much painful labor between the conception of
economic union and its birth appears evident from
this discussion of the developments and prob-
lems involved in the organization of the Benelux
union. Although the problems would differ in
detail for countries other than Belgium, the
Netherlands, and Luxembourg, the consummation
of economic union by any other countries would
require solutions to the same broad problems. The
important conclusion which can be drawn is that
the problems can be solved. Given good inten-
tions, good will, good faith, and a desire to pro-
mote the common good at the price of some
sacrifice, economic union, with all of its economic
and political advantages, can be born.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale 61/ the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington 25, D. G. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the
case of free publications, which may be obtained from the
Department of State.

Tensions Between the United States and the Soviet Union.

General Foreign Policy Series 22. Pub. 3810. 16 pp.
[Bulletin Reprint] Free.

Addre.ss by Secretary Acbeson made at the Univer-
sity of Ca'lifornia on March 16, 1950, discussing the
Soviet philosophy and motives, etc. and our policy
toward them.

The International Trade and Traffic in Arms— Its Super-
vision and Control. General Foreign Policy Series 23.
Pub. 3822. 26 pp. [BirLLiiTiN Reprint] Free.

Leonard H. Pomeroy outlines the past and present
measures to supervise and control the traffic in arms.
The participation of American citizens and Ameri-
can arms in the Far East clandestine arms traffic is
considered with respect to its implications for U.S.
arms policy and administrative policy.

Aspects of International Petroleum Policy. Commercial
Policy Series 127. Pub. 3845. 0 pp. [Bulletin Reprint]
Free.

Substance of statement by Willard L. Thorp, Assistant
Secretary for Economic Affairs, made before the
special subcommittee on petroleum of the House Com-
mittee on Interstate and Foreign Commerce on April
5, 1950.

188

The ITO Charter: A Code of Fair Trade Practices. Com-
mercial Policy Series 128. Pub. 384.. 14 pp. [Bulletin
Reprint] Free.

Statement by Secretary Acheson on origin, purpose,
general significance, etc., of the Charter. Made be-
fore the House Committee on Foreign Affairs on April
19, 1950.

The Quality of American Patriotism. General Foreign
I'olicy Series 27. Pub. 3848. 8 pp. [Bulletin Reprint]
Free.

Remarks made by Secretary Acheson, made on the
occasion of the 200th anniversary of the Holy Trinity
Parish at Middletown, Conn., on April 17, 19.50.

Strengthening the Forces of Freedom. General Foreign
Policy Series 28. Pub. 3852. 192 pp. 50^.

Selected speeches and statements of Secretary Ache-
son, giving a survey of U. S. foreign policy and dis-
cussion of tJie United Nations, the Ito charter, the
North Atlantic Treaty, the Military Assistance Pro-
gram, etc. as instruments of that policy.

National Commission UNESCO News, June 1950. Pub.

3858. 12 pp. 10^ a copy; $1.00 per year, domestic; $1.35
[ler year, foreign.

Prepared monthly for the United Nations Educa-
tional, Scientific and Cultural Organization.

Threats to Democracy and Its Way of Life. General For-
eign Policy Series 29. Pub. 3859. 14 pp. [BuLLE-niN
Reprint | Free.

Address by Secretary Acheson before the American
Society of Newspaper Editors, Washington B.C.,
April 22, 1950.

The Problem of International Organization Among Coun-
tries of Europe and the North Atlantic Area. Interna-
tional Organization and Conference Series II, European
and British Commonwealth, 2. Pub. 3861. 8 pp. [Bul-
letin Reprint] Free.

Address by Secretary Acheson made before the So-
ciety of Pilgrims, London, May 10, 1950.

Deparfment of Sfate Bulletin

Settlement of Bizonal Fusion Agreement

[Released to the press July 7]

The Department of State announced today that
through an exchange of notes with the British
Embassj' an agreement has been reached on the
settlement of outstanding financial issues under
the bizonal fusion agreement.

The British note quotes the full text of the
United States note and the agreement to conclude
these financial matters became effective upon re-
ceipt of the British note on June 28, 1950.

The original bizonal fusion agreement was
signed by former Secretary Byrnes and Mr. Bevin
on December 2, 19-16 ; it became effective on Janu-
ary 1, 1947. The agreement was revised on De-
cember 17, 1917, and was later extended on
December 31, 1948, March 31, 1949, and June 30,
1949. On September 15, 1949, when the Federal
Republic of Germany was established, the ar-
rangements between the United States and the
United Kingdom for bizonal fusion were super-
seded by trizonal fusion. The trizonal fusion
arrangements are set forth in the Washington
agreements of April 8. 1949, and the Charter
of the Allied High Commission of June 20, 1949.
There remained outstanding, however, certain
financial issues which required settlement by the
United States and the United Kingdom in order
to wind up the bizonal fusion arrangements.
These issues are settled in the attached document,
which deals with the following topics :

(1) Unused portion of British contribution —
the British have undertaken, in the fusion agree-
ment as amended and extended, to make available
certain goods and services under certain condi-
tions. The British contribution had not been
fully utilized when the bizonal fusion agree-
ment came to a close on September 15, 1949.
Paragraph 1 of the attached agreement disj^oses
of the problem of the unused portion of the con-
tribution through a lump sum settlement of
2,450,000 pounds sterling which the Uiiited King-
dom will make to Germany through the Joint
Export -Import Agency.

(2) Paragraph 2 of the agreement deals with
the Joint Export-Import Agency which was orig-
inally established under the fusion agreement as

July 31, 1950

an Allied agency for the handling of Germany's
foreign trade. The functions of this agency have
now been turned over to the German Government.
The jjresent agreement provides for the speedy
final liquidation of the agency and for the turn-
ing over of its assets to the German Government,
subject to appropriate ]Drovision for settlement
of claims outstanding against it.

(3) Paragraph 3 of the agreement deals with
the so-called No. 2 Account maintained by the
Bank of England on behalf of the Joint ExiX)i't-
Import Agency. The No. 2 Account was derived
from funds originally made available to the Joint
Export-Import Agency by the United Kingdom
as a capital contribution. The final liquidation
of the Joint Export-Import Agency permits the
closing of this account under conditions provided
for in this paragraph and under paragraph 6 of
the agreement.

(4) The fourth and fifth paragraphs deal with
the possibility that special measures might be
needed to cover a German sterling deficit. Under
the terms of the Washington agreements of April
8, 1949, it was understood that further contri-
butions by the United Kingdom to Germany
would be in the framework of a multilateral pay-
ments plan. The present provision states that, in
the event that such a plan should not be in exist-
ence and Germany should require sterling in order
to cover its current essential needs, the United
Kingdom would consult with the United States
in regard to this problem if the United States
were at the same time making aid available to
Germany.

( 5 ) The sixth paragraph provides for the wind-
ing up of arrangements laid down in jjaragraph 4
of the agreement of December 17, 1947, for con-
verting into dollars in certain circumstances part
of the sterling balance of the JEIA number 2
account.

(6) The final paragraph of the agreement re-
affirms the intention of the two Governments to
treat contributions made to Germany prior to and
under the fusion agreement as a claim against
Germany to be repaid under terms consistent with

189

the reconstruction of the German economy along
healthy nonaggressive lines.

At the present time, the United States is making
economic aid available to Germany through the
EGA out of funds in part appropriated to EGA
and in part originally appropriated to the Depart-
ment of the Army. Funds for the support of Ger-
many are included in the appropriation request
submitted by EGA for fiscal year 1951. The Army
is no longer requesting funds for economic support
of Germany. In addition to the aid made avail-
able to Germany through contributions under the
bizonal fusion agreement, the United Kingdom
has extended drawing rights to Germany under
intra-European Payments Agreement.

Following is the text of the British note of June
28, 1950 :

I have the honour to acknowledge receipt of your note
of today's date, the terms of which are as follows :

"I have the honor to refer to the discussions which have
taken place between the Government of the United King-
dom and the Government of the United States on the sub-
ject of financial issues arising from the Bizonal Fusion
Agreement of December 2, 1946, as amended tjy the Agree-
ment of December 17, 1947, and its extensions agreed on
December 31, 194S, March 31, 1949 and June 30, 1949, and
the financial issues arising from the Trizonal Fusion which
has been accomplished under the Charter of the Allied
High Commission for Germany.

"In the interest of settling these outstanding issues, I
have the honor to submit the following proposals for the
consideration of the Government of the United Kingdom.

"1. The Government of the United Kingdom will make
available sterling funds to the Government of the German
Federal Republic, by payment to the Joint Export-Import
Agency, in final discharge of its obligations under para-
graph 1 of the Revised Fusion Agreement of December
17, 1947, as subsequently amended and extended. It is
the understanding of the Government of the United States
that the Government of the United Kingdom proposes to
make availalile pounds sterling 1,30,"),000 under paragraph
1 (a) (ii) and pounds sterling 1,150,000 under paragraph
1 (a) (iii) of the Agreement.

"2. In order to implement the provisions of the Charter
of the Allied High Commission and of the Bizonal Fusion
Agreement of June 30, 1949, the Government of the United
States proposes that the two Governments instruct their
respective High Commissioners to work out with the
French High Commissioner suitable arrangements to come
into eilect as promptly as possible for the liquidation of
the Joint Export-Import Agency, the transfer to the Fed-
eral Government of its assets, and the assumption by the
Federal Government of the liability to meet any of the
remaining claims on the Joint Export-Import' Agency
\\hich are approved under procedures established by the
Allied High Commission.

"3. Sterling balances to the credit of the No. 2 Account
of the Bank Deutseher Laender with the Bank of England
will be transferred to the No. 1 Account on June 30, 1950.
While these funds will be regarded as existing resources
for the purposes of the European Payments Union, they
will be segregated in a special sub-account or by other
means and will not be merged with other funds of "the No.
1 Account pending the determination of the rights of the
parties to the Euroi)ean Payments Union with respect
to sterling balances. It is agreed that the United King-
dom Government will not claim that the funds from the
No. 2 Account so transferred should be taken into account
in the determination of drawing rights for the purposes
of the Intra-European Payments Agreement of 1949-50.

190

"4. The Government of the United Kingdom will under-
take to consult with the Government of the United States
in regard to the provision of sterling to meet the current
essential needs of the Federal Republic, in the event that
the Federal Republic should be faced with a deficit in its
sterling availabilities of .such a character as to endanger
the achievement of the objectives of the occupation, and
there is no Intra-European Payments Agreement or other
similar multilateral payments agreement in force, pro-
vided that the United States is concurrently making eco-
nomic aid available to the Federal Republic.

"5. The provisions of the preceding paragraph do not
relate to expenditures which may be incurred for the
maintenance of forces of occupation and control stafC
for Germany.

"fi. As part of the proposals outlined herein the Gov-
ernment of the United States will agree to release the
Government of the United Kingdom from its obligation
for conversion of sterling in the No. 2 Account into dol-
lars under the terms of paragraph 4 of the Revised Fusion
Agreement of December 17, 1947.

"7. The understandings between the two Governments
contained in paragraph 6 (e) of the Bizonal Fusion Agree-
ment of December 2, 1946 with respect to the recovery of
the costs incurred by the two Governments prior and
pursuant to the Agreement remain in force.

"Should these proposals commend themselves to the
Government of the United Kingdom, I have the honor to
suggest that this note and your reply should constitute
an Agreement between our two Governments, which shall
come into force upon the date of your reply."

In reply, I have the honour to inform you that His
Majesty's Government in the United Kingdom accept the
propo.sals set forth in your note and, in accordance with
the suggestion contained therein, your note and this reply
shall be regarded as constituting an Agreement between
our two Governments in this matter, to be in force from
the date of this reply.

I avail myself of this opportunity to renew to you the
a.ssurance of my highest consideration.

Abuse of Kuman Rights
in Satellite States

Statement by Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press July 21'\

I would lilie to comment on the present status
of the efforts which are being made with respect
to the abuse of human riglits and freedoms in
Bulgaria, Himgary, and Rumania.

Over a year ago, the United States, together
with the United Kingdom and certain British
Commonwealth countries, charged the Govern-
ments of Bulgaria, Hungary, and Rumania with
flagrant violation of their obligations under the
treaties of peace to secure to all persons under
their jurisdictions the enjoyment of human rights
and fundamental freedoms. The accused Gov-
ernments, in rejecting the charges, refused to
comply with provisions of the peace treaties for
the resolution of the consequent disputes concern-
ing the interpretation and execution of the
treaties.

Nevertheless, in the interests of human liberty,

Department of State Bulletin

I'usticc, and the integrity of international law, the
Jnited States and other interested Allied Powers
have pressed the issue, step by step, according to
the applicable procedures of the peace treaties.
When this process reached a point at which the
Secretary-General of the United Nations might
have been requested to participate in the action,
the United Nations General Assembly asked the
International Court of Justice for guidance on
several procedural questions which arose because
of the refusal of the accused Governments to co-
operate in the proceedings. Early this year, tlie
Court ruled that treaty disputes exist and that
Bulgaria, Hungary, and Rumania are obligated
to comply with the treaty provisions for the
resolution of such disputes.

The accused Governments denied the compe-
tence of the International Court and persisted in
refusing to participate in the disputes proceedings.
The Court was then asked whether, under the
treaties, commissions could be formed to settle
the disputes without the cooperation of Bulgaria,
Hungary, and Rumania. It is now reported that
the Court has ruled, in effect, that the treaties do
not provide for such a contingency.

The United States will naturally respect the
opinions of the International Court of Justice.
Consequently, although it has been determined
that disputes exist and that the three Governments
in question are legally bound to cooperate in the
settlement of such disputes, their wrongful refusal
to do so obstructs resort, in this instance, to the
disputes procedures provided by the treaties of
peace and renders it necessary, in the light of the
Court's decision, to pursue the issue by other
means.

I want to emphasize that this by no means puts
an end to our efforts in defense of human rights
and freedoms in Bulgaria, Hungary, and
Rumania. The United Nations General As-
sembly has shown a deep and continuing concern
with this problem. In its sessions during 1949,
the Assembly took account of the existing proceed-
ings under the treaties of peace. Now, that
establishment of the proposed treaty commis-
sions has been blocked by willful default on the
part of the accused Governments, the Assembly
will undoubtedly wish to consider what further
steps it should take with respect to the charges that
the Governments of Bulgaiia, Hungary, and
Rumania have been suppressing systematically
the fundamental freedoms of their people.

It is the intent of this Government to bring
to light and place before the conscience of man-
kind the facts relating to the denial of human
rights by the accused Governments. These Gov-
ernments, which have considered themselves free
to disregard treaty obligations and the peaceful
machinery for the settlement of disputes, should
be made to feel the full weight of the condemna-
tion of all free peoples which their actions
provoke.

U.S. and U.K. Establish

Proving Ground for Guided Missiles

[Released to the press July 21]

The Secretary of State and the British Ambas-
sador have today signed an agreement for the
establishment and operation of a long-range
proving ground for guided missiles in the Bahama
Islands.

The base and launching facilities for the
proving ground are located on the east coast of
Florida in the vicinity of Cape Canaveral, and the
flight testing range will extend to the southeast
over the Atlantic Ocean.

The agreement signed today will permit the
United States, jointly with the United Kingdom,
to establish and operate technical and supporting
facilities at selected sites in the Bahama Islands,
which are necessary for acquiring test data and
maintaining continuous control of the guided
missiles throughout their flight.

The agreement will continue in force for a period
of 25 years and authorizes the United States,
jointly with the United Kingdom, to launch, fly,
and land guided missiles in the resignated range
area and to operate such vessels and aircraft m
the area as may be necessary for purposes con-
nected directly with the operation of the range.

The missiles to be flight tested will be unarmed
and will carry instruments for measuring missile
performance, for control of the missile, and for
destruction of the missile in flight if necessary for
reasons of safety. Radar and visual surveillance
will be maintained along the range to determine
the presence and location of any air or surface
craft in the area.

Executive Order on U.S. Higii
Commissioner for Germany Amended '

By virtue of the authority vested in me by the
Constitution and the statutes, and as President of
the United States and Commander in Chief of
the Armed Forces of the United States, Executive
Order No. 10062 of June 6, 1949, entitled "Estab-
lishing the Position of United States High Com-
missioner for Germany,^" is hereby amended as
follows :

1. The following paragraphs are added to the
said order at the end thereof:

"5. The High Commissioner, as representative
of the United States, shall share the four-power
responsibility for the custody, care, and execution
of sentences and disposition (including pardon,
clemency, parole, or release) of war criminals con-

• Ex. O. 10144 ; 1.5 Fed. Reg. 4705.
= BuiiETiN of June 26, 1949, p. 828.

iu\Y 31, J 950

191

fined in Germany as a result of conviction by the
International Military Tribunal, Niirnberg, and
shall be responsible for the custody, care, and ex-
ecution of sentences and disposition (including
pardon, clemency, parole, or release) of war
criminals confined in Germany as a result of con-
viction by military tribunals established by the
United States Military Governor pursuant to Con-
trol Council Law No. 10.

"6. The Commander in Chief, European Com-
mand, shall be responsible for the custody, care,
and execution of sentences and disposition (in-
cluding pardon, clemency, parole, or release) of
war criminals confined in Germany under sen-
tences adjudged by military tribunals established
by United States Military Commanders in Ger-

many and elsewhere, other than those referred to
in paragraph 5 hereof. On the request of the
High Commissioner, the Commander in Chief,
European Command, shall take necessary meas-
ures for carrying into execution any sentences
adjudged against war criminals as to whom the
High Commissioner has responsibility and con-
trol, namely: war criminals convicted and sen-
tenced by military tribunals established pursuant
to Control Council Law No. 10."

2. The term "Commander of the United States
Armed Forces in Germany,'' occurring in para-
graph 3 of the said order, is changed to read
"Commander in Chief, European Command."

This order shall be effective as of June 6, 1949.

Austria Signs Fulbright Agreement

EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITIES FOR 1951 ANNOUNCED

AGREEMENT WITH AUSTRIA

Austria and the United States on June 6 signed
an agreement ^ putting into operation the program
of educational exchanges authorized by the Ful-
bright Act.

The signing is the fii'st such ceremony to take
place at Washington, all previous agreements hav-
ing been signed in the capitals of the countries
concerned.

Secretary Acheson represented the Government
of the United States, and Dr. Ludwig Klein-
waechter. Minister of Austria, represented the
Government of that country.

This agreement is the eighteenth signed under
the act, previous agreements having been signed
with the Governments of Australia, Belgium and
Luxembourg, Burma, China, Egypt, France,
Greece, India, Iran, Italy, Korea, the Netherlands,
New Zealand, Norway, the Philippines, Turkey,
and the United Kingdom.

The agreement provides for a United States
Educational Commission in Austria to assist in the
administration of the educational program fi-
nanced from certain funds resulting from the
sale of United States surplus jiroperty to that
country. It provides for an annual progi'am of
the equivalent of approximately 250,000 dollars
in Austrian schillings for certain educational
purposes.

These purposes include the financing of :

studies, research, instruction, and other educational
activities of or for citizens of the United States of America

' For text of agreement, see Department of State press
release 595.

in schools and institutions of higher learning located in
Austria or of nationals of Austria in United States schools
and institutions of higher learning located outside the
continental United States . . . including payment for
transportation, tuition, maintenance, and other exi>enses
incident to scholastic activities ; or furnishing transporta-
tion for nationals of Austria who desire to attend United
States schools and institutions of higher learning in the
continental United States . . . whose attendance will not
deprive citizens of the United States of America of an
opportunity to attend such schools and institutions.

All recipients of awards under this act are
selected by the Board of Foreign Scholarships,
appointed by the President of the United States.

The Commission in Austria will consist of eight
members, the honorary chairman of which will be
the United States Minister to Austria. The mem-
bers of the Commission will include four citizens
of Austria and four citizens of the United States.

After the members of the Commission in Austria
have been appointed, information about specific
opportunities for American citizens to pursue
study, teaching, or research in that country, for
the 1951-52 academic year, will be made public.
At that time, applications for these opportunities
will be received by :

F07' graduate study

The Institute of International Education
2 West Forty-fifth Street
New York 19, New York

Fulbright Program Advisers on the campuses of
American colleges and universities

For teaching in Austrian elementary or secondary schools

The Uiiitfd States Office of Education
Federal Security Agency
Washington 25, D.C.

192

Department of State Bulletin

For univeraity teaching, or advanced research

The Conference Board of Associated Research

Councils
2101 Constitution Avenue NW.
Washington 25, D. C.

FULBRIGHT OPPORTUNITIES FOR 1951

Opportunities for more than 1,000 Americans to
undertake graduate study, teaching, or research
abroad, during the 1951-52 academic year, under
the terms of tlie Fulbright Act. were announced,
on June 5, by the Department of State. A com-
parable number of opportunities will be available
for foreign nationals to come to the United States
for similar purposes.

The countries in which these opportunities will
be available are Australia. Belgium, Burma,
Egypt. France, Greece. India, Iran, Italy, the
Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, the Philip-
pines, Turkey, and the United Kingdom.

All applications for visiting lecturers, teachers,
and research awards must be submitted by October
15 and for students awards by October 31. Per-
sons wishing to apply should send their inquiries
to the following agency, in addition to those
already listed on the preceding page :

For teaching in American secondary schools abroad

American Schools Service
American Council on Education
744 Jackson Place NW.
Washington 6, D. C.

These awards are made under Public Law 584,
79th Congi'ess, the Fulbright Act, which author-
izes the Department of State to use certain foreign
currencies and credits acquired through the sale
of surplus property abroad for programs of educa-
tional exchange with other nations.

Grants are normally made for 1 academic year
and are renewable only in exceptional cases.
Grants to Americans usually include round-trip
transportation, tuition or a stipend, a living allow-
ance, and a small amount for necessary books and
equipment. Grants to foreign nationals include
round-trip transportation only, and their expenses
in the United States must be met from other
sources. All grants under the act are made in
foreign currencies.

Opportunities in each country are listed below :

Belffium and Lica;e7nl)0iirg. — For Americans : 20
graduate students : 3 teachers ; 3 research scholars ;
2 visiting lecturers. For Belgians and Luxem-
bourgers : travel grants to 20 students; 3 teachere;

4 research scholars ; 1 visiting lecturer.
Burma. — For Americans : 3 graduate students ;

5 teachers ; 5 research scholars ; 5 visiting lecturers.
For Burmese: travel grants to 25 students,
teachers, research scholars, and lecturers.

France. — For Americans: 220 graduate stu-
dents ; 12 teachers ; 30 research scholars ; 10 visit-

Ju/y 31, 1950

ing lecturers; 4 instructors in library science; 4
instructors in social work; 2 instructors in nurs-
ing education. For French : travel grants to an
identical number in the categories listed above.

Greece. — For Americans : 10 graduate students ;
22 teachers; 6 research scholars; 7 visiting lec-
turers. For Greeks : travel grants to 33 students,

10 research scholars and lecturers; 247 scholar-
ships for Greek students to attend American-spon-
sored schools in Greece.

I tall/. — For Americans : 100 graduate students ;

11 teachers; 21 research scholars; 12 visiting lec-
turers. For Italians: travel grants to 80 stu-
dents; 9 teachers; 50 research scholars and lec-
turers; 5 scholarships for Italian students to
attend American-sponsored schools in Italy.

The Netherlands. — For Americans: 25 gi-adu-
ate students; 25 teachers; 4 research scholars; 12
visiting lecturers. For Netherlanders : travel
grants to the United States to 100 students,
teachers, and research scholars and 10 visiting
lecturers.

Nero Zealand. — For Americans: 10 graduate
students ; 2 teachers ; 3 research scholars ; 3 visit-
ing lecturers. For New Zealanders : travel grants
to 10 students; 8 teachers, research scholars, and
lecturers.

The Philippines. — For Americans: 6 graduate
students ; 4 teachers ; 2 research scholars ; 8 visit-
ing lecturers. For Filipinos : travel grants to 35
students; 5 teachers, research scholars, and
lecturers.

Australia, Egypt, India, Iran, Norway, Turkey,
United Kingdom. — The awards to be offered in
these countries are of comparable nature, but the
exact number of awards is not known at the pres-
ent time — and will be announced later. In the
meantime, ai^plications may be submitted to the
agencies listed above by persons interested in
study, research, or teaching in these countries.

Letters of Credence

Greece

The newly appointed Ambassador of Greece
Athanase G. Politis presented his credentials to
the President on July 13, 195U. For texts of the
Ambassador's remarks and the President's reply
see Department of State press release 748 of
July 13.

Portugal

The newly appointed Ambassador of Portugal,
Sehor Luis Esteves Fernandes, presented his cre-
dentials to the President on June 23, 1950. For
texts of the Ambassador's remarks and the Pres-
ident's reply, see Department of State press release
672 of that date.

193

Expanded Information Program Vital to National Security

MESSAGE OF THE PRESIDENT

The President on July 13 sent the following letter to the
Speaker of the House of Representatives ivhich was re-
leased to the press by the White House on the same date.

I have the honor to transmit herewith for the
consideration of the Congress supplemental esti-
mates of appropriation for the fiscal year 1951 in
the amount of $89,000,000 for the Department of
State and the General Services Achninistration.

On several recent occasions I have directed the
attention of the Congress and the Nation to the
growing abuse and vilification of Communist
propaganda. Unsuccessful in its attempts to win
Western Europe through ideological appeals,
communism is seeking to discredit the United
States and its actions throughout the world. If it
succeeds in this effort to create distrust and hatred
of our Government and its motives, the gains we
have recently made in Western Europe may be
substantially nullified. Our material assistance,
to be fully effective, must be complemented by a
full-scale effort in the field of ideas.

The free nations of the world have a great ad-
vantage in that truth is on their side. Communist
leaders have repeatedly demonstrated that they
fear the truth more than any weapon at our com-
mand. We must now throw additional resources
into a campaign of truth which will match in
vigor and determination the measures we have
adopted in meeting postwar economic and mili-
tary problems. Anything less than our best and
most intense effort will be insufficient to meet the
challenge — and the opportunity.

This expanded program has been developed on
the basis of first things first. It does not propose
a general world-wide expansion of our informa-
tion and educational exchange efforts. Instead
it is concentrated on the most critical areas in the
world today. Each of these critical areas has
been studied with great care; our objectives for
each area have been defined. What we ai^e now
doing in each area has been appraised, and the
additional steps needed have been determined.

I regard such an expanded campaign of truth
as vital to our National Security. We will never
attain real security until people everywhere recog-

nize that the free nations of the world are the
true seekers of permanent peace.

The details of these estimates are set forth in
the letter of the Director of the Bureau of the
Budget, transmitted herewith, in whose comments
and observations thereon I concur.

ADVISORY COMMISSION ON INFORMATION
ENDORSES PROGRAM

The President on July 17 received the following com-
munication, dated July 14, from the Advisory Commission
on Information which was released to the press July 17.
Members include Mark Ethridge, Chairman, Mark A. May,
Erwin D. Canham, Philip C. Reed, and Justin Miller.

The Advisory Commission on Information, set
up by Congress under Public Law 402 and ap-
pointed by yourself, desires to communicate to you
its feeling of the urgency of an immediate step-up
in our whole information program directed to
peoples of other countries.

As you are aware, the Commission, since its
organization, has called attention to the anomaly
which exists by reason of the expenditure of 15
billions of dollars a year on defense, 5 to 61/2 bil-
lions a year on economic and foreign aid, and, this
year, a little over 30 million dollars on our total
information and education program designed to
make the rest of the world understand our
purposes.

You have been aware of the necessity for a much
more vigoi'ous "campaign of truth," as you demon-
strated in your speech to the American Society of
Newspaper Editors. In that speech, you said,
among other things,

We know how false these Communist promises are. But
it is not enough for us to know this. Unless we get the
real story across to people in other countries, we will lose
the battle for men's minds by default.

That statement is even truer now than when
you gave utterance to it, because of the aggres-
sion in Korea and the light in which Soviet propa-
gandists have tried to place our resistance to it.
The Korean aggression has made it all the more
imperative that we intensify our effort to give
the true picture of America, her intentions and

194

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

her actions, than it has ever been before. The
Commission feels that the field for that sort of
information is even moi'e fruitful than it has
ever been because the Kremlin has revealed itself
and its intentions more clearly than at any time
since the end of the war. Now is the time to mar-
shal the determination of the peoples of the free
world not to succumb to this vicious ideology
which promises Utopia but gives chains.

Although the Commission heartily endorsed
what you said to the editoi's, it has refrained from
expressing tliat endorsement because it wanted to
see more concrete proposals from the State De-
partment as to how additional money would be
spent and a more explicit statement of the national
objectives which we were trying to communicate
to others.

Within the past few days, the Commission has
had an opportunity to review field studies which
have been made by the Public Affairs Division of
the Department. They are quite explicit as to
facilities which will be required to reach the crit-
ical areas of the world and to counter, as best it
may be done, the tremendous jamming effort which
the Russians are making. They are quite explicit
as to the manpower and money which will be re-
quired to reach the peoples we want to reach.
Moreover, there is a better understanding in the
Depaiiment, and a better expression of that under-
standing, of what our information objectives are.
The Commission has previously reported to the
Secretary of State and to the Congress that there
is a much better integration between policy mak-
ing and policy exposition through information
channels than there has been at any time in the
2 years of the Commission's life.

The proposals which resulted from the Public
Affairs Division's field study and from its policy
studies in the Department have been sent to the
Budget Bureau in the form of a request for a sup-
plemental appropriation for physical facilities
and for operating funds. That proposal is in line
with your own statement to the editors, and we
understand that it has been given approval in
principle for the National Security Council. To
that, the Commission desires to add its own unani-
mous endorsement and stress the urgency of early
action.

We think certain considerations are obvious in
warranting action before the adjournment of
Congress:

The time element is such that the United States
must move as rapidly as possible. We do too little
now, and next year may be too late in many areas.

The propaganda effort of the U.S.S.R., now bor-
dering on open psychological warfare, is a major
threat to this Government's foreign policy objec-
tives.

A psychological offensive by the United States
based on truth is essential if the United States is
to succeed in its foreign policy objectives.

The present funding of the USIE program is in-
sufficient to provide the means effectively to take
the psychological offensive.

The Commission is directing a similar communi-
cation to the appropriate chairmen of the Senate
and House Committees.

Dedication of Memorial at Bastogne

Address hy the President ^

[Excerpts]

As you dedicate this noble monument, it is dif-
ficult to realize that only a few short years ago
these fields and forests of the Ardennes bore one
of the most bitter battles of the war. On this
spot, the backbone of Hitler's armed forces was
broken, for his inability to reduce Bastogne
doomed his final offensive to failure.

Belgium and the United States share a love of
freedom that springs from the roots of our na-
tional characters. We have stood side by side
throughout two world-wide conflicts in defense of
freedom. Today, we find ourselves "partners in
peace" in the North Atlantic Treaty. Both of our
nations fervently desire peace — permanent, ever-
lasting peace — but neither of us is willing to buy
that peace at the price of liberty. As we have
stood united before when our liberty has been en-
dangered, we stand united today in the hope that
proof of our determination to fight again for our
liberty, if necessary, will make it unnecessary for
us to do so. In freedom there is strength and in
union there is strength. Both our nations are
founded on these principles.

This monument commemorates our joint efforts
in battle with Hitlerite Germany. Never again
must we permit Germany or any other nation to
launch such destruction. In spite of the suffering
so bravely endured by your country as a result of
German aggression, you have shown vision, re-
straint, and understanding toward the Germans.
In this attitude, we find a source of hope and en-
couragement, for only vision, restraint, and under-
standing can build a new Europe, all of whose
peoples can live and work together in peace and
freedom.

In future years, we can hope that our children
and grandchildren will look upon this memorial
and know its meaning but without the burning
memory of war's horror — having read of it in their
history books but not knowing its actuality.

^Read by the U.S. Ambassador to Belgium, Robert
Murpby, at the dedication ceremonies, on July 16, at Bas-
togne, Belgium, of a memorial to the Americans who lost
their lives in the battle at Bastogne, and released to the
press on the same date.

Ju/y 31, 1950

195

The United States in the United Nations

REVIEW, JUNE 16-JULY 31

An attack by North Korean forces across the
38th parallel in the early hours of Sunday, June
25, evoked prompt and continuing action on the
part of the United Nations to meet the crisis. To
deal with the problem, up to August 1, the Securi-
ty Council had held seven meetings, none of which
were attended by the Soviet representative. How-
ever, on July 2^ Soviet representative Yakov A.
Malik telephoned the Secretary-General that "in
accordance with established procedure, I am
assuming the Presidency" of tlie Security Coun-
cil in August and requested that a Council meet-
ing be arranged for August 1. This will be the
first time a Soviet representative has attended a
Security Council meeting since the Soviet boycott
began in January, of all United Nations organs
on which the Chinese National Government is
represented.

The eleventh session of the Economic and Social
Council is in progress in Geneva. At Lake Success,
the Trusteeship Council concluded its seventh
session and the Interim Committee held six meet-
ings, the first since February 7. The Economic
Commission for Latin America concluded its meet-
ing in Montevideo, and general conferences of
three specialized agencies ended in Geneva, Mont-
real, and Florence. The International Court of
Justice, sittincr at The Hague, handed down ad-
visory opinions on the questions of the interna-
tional status of South West Africa and on the
satellite peace treaties in connection with alleged
violations of human rights in Bulgaria, Hungary,
and Eumania. Field bodies established by tlie
General Assembly continued to deal with the "prob-
lems in Korea, Greece, Libya, Palestine and other
parts of the world.

Security Council

As a result of the Korean crisis, the Security
Council met in emergency se.ssion on Sunday,
June 25, at the request of the United States. It
had before it a report to the Secretary-General
from the United Nations Commission on Korea in

Seoul reporting on the North Korean attack and
confirming the existence of a situation "which is
assuming character of full-scale war." The
Council adopted a resolution, on the basis of a
United States draft which determined that the
attack of Noi'th Korean forces upon the Republic
of Korea constituted a breach of the peace, called
for the immediate cessation of hostilities and the
withdrawal of North Korean forces to the 38th
parallel, asked the Korean Commission to keep the
Council informed on the execution of the resolu-
tion, and called upon all members to render evei-y
assistance to the United Nations in the execution
of the resolution and to refrain from giving aid
to the North Korean authorities. All Council
members voted for the June 25 resolution except
Yugoslavia, which abstained and the U.S.S.R.
which was absent.

The Council followed up this resolution with
passage of another on July 27, which, after noting
the Korean Commission's report of the noncom-
pliance by the North Korean authorities with the
Council's requests of June 25, recommended that
United Nations members "furnish such assistance
to the Republic of Korea as may be necessary to
repel the armed attack and to restore international
l^eace and security in the area.''

The June 27 resolution received seven affirma-
tive votes. Yugoslavia opposed it, the U.S.S.R.
was absent, and Egypt and India abstained be-
cause of lack of instructions. India, however, at
a June 30 Council meeting announced its accept-
ance of the second resolution.

Under a resolution sponsored jointly by the
United Kingdom and France, the Council on July
7 recommended that offers of military and other
assistance for the ReiJublic of Korea be made
available to "a vniified command under the United
States," asked the United States to designate a
connnander of the unified foi'ces, and authorized
the use of the United Nations flag by the unified
command. Seven states supported the resolution ;
Egyjit, India, and Yugoslavia abstained, and 'the
U.S.S.R. was absent. The United States named

196

Department of State Bultetin

General Doufjlas IMacArtlmr as the couunaiuler
of the unilied forces, and he is now flyin<i the
United Nations tiaji over his headquarters.

Fifty-two United Xations nieniV)ers replied fa-
vorably to Secretary-General Lie's communication
asking support for the Security Council action of
June 25 and 27. All members except Egypt and
Yugoslavia answered the communication. In
addition to the United States assistance furnished
to the Republic of Korea almost immediately fol-
lowing Security Council action, 23 United Nations
members had by July 31 made offers of combat
units, naval and air support, merchant ship-
ping, medical supplies, food, and other material
assistance.

In response to a request in the July 7 resolution,
United States Ambassador Warren R. Austin
presented to the Council on July 25 the first report
of the unified connnand on the Korean operations.
The repoit outlined the coordination of various
United Nations national units of land, sea, and
air forces, and concluded with General Mac-
Artlnir's prediction of continually increasing
strength for the United Nations forces and his as-
sertion that the enemy "has had his great chance
but failed to exploit it." Commendatory state-
ments on the report were made at a brief Council
meeting July 28.

Com>ni»sion. for Conventional Armaments. — On
June 22 and July 20, the working committee of the
Commission for Conventional Armaments contin-
ued consideration of the United States views on
the subject of safeguards for an effective system
of regulation and control of conventional arma-
ments. On May 18 the United States submitted a
paper setting forth the basic elements of a plan of
safeguards; and at these two meetings, three addi-
tional papers were submitted. One dealt with a
proposed organization for the administration of a
system of safeguards. Military and industrial
safeguards were the subjects of the other two pa-
pers. These working papers will be transmitted to
the full Commission for Conventional Armaments
along with the records of the working committee.

General Assembly

The General Assembly's Interim Committee has
been considering the Eritrean Commission's report
and the report of its Sub-Committee on Interna-
tional Cooperation in the Political Field, while
in Libya another step has been taken toward con-
stitutional development. United Nations field
commissions operating in Greece and Palestine
continued their work temporarily in Geneva,
where the International Law Commission has also
been in session. The United Nations representa-
tive for India and Pakistan studied the Kashmir
problem with the Prime Ministers of the two coun-
tries concerned.

Interim Committee. — On July 13 the Interim
Committee began consideration of the report of

the United Nations Commission for Eritrea re-
garding the disposition of that former Italian
colony. The report presents three alternative pro-
posals: (1) federation of Eritrea with Ethiopia,
under the sovereignty of the Ethiopian crown;
(2) reunion of the whole territory with Ethiopia;
and (3) independence for Eritrea after a maxi-
mum period of 10 years under United Nations
trusteeship. In four meetings the delegations ex-
pressed their views on the problem, but readied
no conclusions.

The United States continues to believe that the
best and most equitable solution would be the im-
mediate incorporation of Eritrea, excluding the
western province, into Ethiopia, Charles P. Noyes
told the Committee. However, he continued, the
United States is willing to consider a compromise
solution involving federation of Eritrea and Ethi-
opia under the sovereignty of the Ethiopian
crown, and believes that such a formula otiers
"the best promise of a harmonious reconciliation
of all the interests involved." He expressed the
opposition of the United States to any proposals
involving independence or United Nations trustee-
ship for Eritrea. Ethiopia favored the union of
Eritrea with Ethiopia and opposed independence;
whereas Italy advocated independence as a
solution.

Two meetings of the Committee were devoted
to a discussion of the report of its Sub-Committee
on International Cooperation in the Political
Field and decided to transmit the report to the
General Assembly "for its information and that
of all the member states."

Libya. — The Libyan Council, of which the
United States is one of ten members, approved on
July 11 the membership of a committee which is
to prei^are a plan for calling a Libyan National
Assembly. The committee is composed of seven
representatives from each of the three territories
of Libya — Cyrenaica, Tripolitania, and the Fez-
zan. The assembly was called for under a Gen-
eral Assembly resolution, and its primary task will
be to write a constitution for Libya.

Greece. — The Special Committee on the Bal-
kans, having left a subsidiary grouji in Athens to
maintain liaison between the Committee and its
observer corps, assembled in Geneva late in June
to begin drafting its report to the General Assem-
bly for the year ending July 31, 1950, a task now
nearing completion. On July 18 the Committee
adopted a resolution expressing its serious con-
cern over recent accusations emanating from
Greek Communist leaders, to the effect that the
United States and tlie United Kingdom were fo-
menting a Greek attack upon Albania and Bul-
garia and to that end were engaged in expanding
Greek forces. Stating that the accusations were
false and that it saw no evidence of aggressive in-
tentions or preparations by Greece, the Committee
added that, since aggression is frequently preceded
by propaganda accusing the intended victim of

ii3\y 37, 1950

197

aggressive intentions, the Committee "cannot dis-
regard the possibility that such statements might
constitute an attempt to justify in advance aggres-
sive action."

Palestine. — On July 18 the Conciliation Com-
mission for Palestine transmitted its seventh prog-
ress report to the Secretary-General, including
an annex containing the exchange of notes between
the Commission on the hand, and the Arab states
and Israel on the other, on a proposal to establish
mixed committees for direct negotiations between
the parties regarding the Palestine peace settle-
ment. The Commission expressed regret that
the Arab states and Israel could not reach agree-
ment on the Commission's proposal and announced
its decision to return from Geneva to its official
headquarters in Jerusalem, where it will resume
meetings in August.

Kashmir. — July 20 through 24 the United Na-
tions representative for India and Pakistan, Sir
Owen Dixon, met with the Prime Ministers of
India and Pakistan in New Delhi to discuss solu-
tion of the Kashmir problem. It was announced
that the next meeting of the Prime Ministers is to
be held in Karachi.

Trusteeship Council

With the adoption on July 21 of its report to
the General Assembly, the Trusteeship Council
completed its seventh session, which had been in
progi'ess at Lake Success since June 1. After de-
ciding on June 14 to submit to the General As-
sembly the draft statute for Jerusalem, along with
a report on its findings, the Council began exami-
nation of the annual reports on trust territories
submitted by administering authorities. Reports
on the following territories were considered:
Western Samoa, administered by New Zealand;
New Guinea and Nauru, under Australian admin-
istration; British Togoland; French Togoland;
and the United States' strategic trust territory of
the Pacific islands. Council reports containing
a factual outline of conditions in the territories,
conclusions and recommendations, and individual
observations of Council members were approved
for all six territories.

One petition, presented orally by a representa-
tive of the all-Ewe Conference, urged unification
under one administration of all Ewe people who
i-eside in the Britisli and French Togolands and
the British Gold Coast Colony. In connection
with consideration of this petition, the Council
adopted a joint United States-Argentine resolu-
tion noting the plan of the administering authori-
ties to ascertain the wishes of the inhabitants
of the trust territories and requesting a report
on the plan's progress, and recommending that
appropriate measui'es be taken to insure preserva-
tion of the common traits and traditions of the
Ewe people until a definite settlement is reached.
The Council also handled over 180 other petitions
from individuals or groups in trust territories.

On the final day of the session resolutions were
approved on flying the United Nations flag and
on the improvement of nutrition in the trust terri-
tories. The former, adopted by six affirmative
votes, with Belgium and Australia voting nega-
tively and Argentina, the United Kingdom, and
New Zealand abstaining, recommends that the
United Nations flag be flown over all trust terri-
tories side by side with the flag of the administer-
ing authority and the territorial flag, if there is
one, "it being understood, however, that the Ad-
ministering Authorities have latitude to handle
any practical difficulties of administration which
this recommendation might create."

The Council established a standing committee
comprised of Argentina, New Zealand, the Phil-
ippines, and the United States to deal with the
question of administrative unions in which trust
territories participate.

Other Council action included the transmis-
sion in a special report to the General Assembly
of a declaration of constitutional principles and
the draft trusteeship agi'eement for Somaliland,
under which Italy will administer its former col-
ony; the conclusion of arrangements for a visit-
ing mission to trust territories in East Africa
(Tanganyika, Ruanda-Urundi, and Somaliland) ;
and the establishment of a committee, composed
of Belgium, the Dominican Republic, Iraq, and
the United Kingdom, to revise the provisional
questionnaire, which serves as the basis for the
preparation of administering authorities' annual
i-eports on trust territories under their charge.

Economic and Social Council

Full employment, methods of financing eco-
nomic development of underdeveloped countries,
and the Human Rights Covenant are among the
topics being considered by the Economic and So-
cial Council, which opened its eleventh session on
July 3 in Geneva. Final action, including ap-
proval of a report from seven of the specialized
agencies and five of the Council's commissions,
was taken on a number of the 52 items on the
Council's agenda.

After a general debate on full employment, in-
cluding consideration of a report of a group of
experts on national and international measures
for full employment, the matter was referred to
the Economic Committee for further study. In
this connection the United States submitted a
proposal that United Nations member govern-
ments report periodically to the Secretary-General
on their economic situation and their policies and
programs for employment. The Secretary-Gen-
eral would analyze the reports and make studies
on the problems of full employment in the world
economy. The Economic and Employment Com-
mission which would make recommendations for
action to the Council would consider these reports
and studies.

With regard to financing economic development

198

Deparfmenf of S/afe Bulletin

of underdeveloped countries, also referred to the
Economic Committee for study, the United States
co-sponsored a resolution, recommending, among
other things, that governments promote domestic
measures and international agreements designed
to encourage larger and more stable flow of capital
exports toward underdeveloped countries and
areas. Governments are also asked to take neces-
sary measures to encourage the use of private
capital in economic development.

The draft Covenant on Human Rights was re-
ferred to the Social Committee for consideration
of its broad aspects. A proposal supported by the
United States to send the Covenant to the General
Assembly without discussion by the Council was
defeated.

Approval of the reports of the Social, Popula-
tion, Statistical, Transport and Communications,
and the Status of Women Commissions involved
approval of the number of commission recommen-
dations. The Council expressed its satisfaction
with the reports of the International Labor Or-
ganization, Food and Agriculture Organization,
Universal Postal Union, International Refugee
Organization, and Unesco. In connection with
the latter, a United States-sponsored resolution
was adopted which requested Unesco to seek
greater concentration of its program, and also to
give special attention to assisting underdeveloped
areas through means of education and the develop-
ment of international understanding.

The United States co-sponsored other resolu-
tions (adopted by the Council) one of which un-
derlines the importance of raising the living stand-
ards of aboriginal populations of the American
continent, and another of which concerns teaching
the purposes, principles, structure, and activities
of the United Nations and the specialized agencies
in schools and other educational institutions of
member states. In connection with the latter, Isi-
dor Lubin of the United States emphasized the
necessity of creating public support for the United
Nations and said that the main problem is to get
adults to accept their responsibilities in an inter-
dependent world.

Other Council decisions involved approval of the
Secretary-General's arrangements for a program
of training in public administration and of a re-
port by the International Labor Organization on
the training of technical workers from countries
lacking specialized personnel necessary to the de-
velopment of their national economy. Final ac-
tion was also taken on a number of items relating
to nongovernmental organizations.

Economic Commission for Latin America. —
The third session of the Economic Commission for
Latin America, which took place at Montevideo,
Uruguay, June 5-21, was devoted primarily to a
discussion of specific problems of economic devel-
opment. In this connection the Commission re-
viewed the economic survey of Latin America for
1949 and incorporated its basic conclusions and

recommendations on economic development in a
10-point resolution which received unanimous ap-
proval. The United States representatives ex-
plained that his supporting vote was subject to
study by his Government "to determine whether
there is anything in the resolution which may not
be in harmony with United States economic policy
and international commitments." Other resolu-
tions dealt with the problems of technical assist-
ance ; distribution, markets and prices of agricul-
tural products; immigration; foreign investment;
trade with Europe and intraregional trade; and
agricultural credit.

Specialized Agencies

UNESCO.— On the final day of its fifth session,
which was held in Florence, Italy, May 22-June 17
UNESCO's General Conference adopted a resolution
expressing the belief that the 1951 program con-
stitutes a "more direct and important contribution
to the cause of i^eace than the program of any pre-
vious year." The satisfaction of the delegations
was based largely on the fact that agreement had
been reached that Unesco's program in the future
must contribute more directly to peace; that em-
phasis had been placed on working for the exten-
sion of human rights throughout the world ; that
a greatly expanded project for the reeducation of
Western Germany had been voted; and that a
"decalogue" of basic objectives, proposed in its
original form by the United States, had won gen-
eral concurrence as a guide to the future.

International Labor Organization. — Unemploy-
ment problems, vocational training, industrial re-
lations, and equal jaay for work of equal value by
men and women were among the questions dealt
with by the 33d General Conference of the Inter-
national Labor Organization which met in Geneva
June 7-July 1. In its resolution containing a
plan for combating unemployment the Confer-
ence among other things urged the establishment
of a system of unemployment benefits in countries
having no such schemes. The Conference recom-
mended setting up international standards for
vocational training of adults, including disabled
persons. The Conference will take final action
in 1951 on a recommendation for collective agree-
ments providing international standai-ds for col-
lective bargaining machinery and on the matter of
equal remuneration for equal work by men and
women.

International Civil Aviation Organization. — In
its 3-week session in Montreal which concluded
June 20, the Assembly of the International Civil
Aviation Organization considered a number of
technical, economic, and legal problems involved
in the safe and orderly development of interna-
tional civil aviation. It also approved the report
of the IcAO Council on its past year's work and
elected a new Council of 20 nations to serve as
IcAo's executive body for the next full-scale meet-
ing in 3 years.

i\i\y 37, 7950

199

General Policy Fage

The Korean Situation: Its Significance to the
People of the United States. The Presi-
dent's Message to Congress 163

U.S. and Belgium Consult on Korean Assist-
ance 169

Prime Minister Nehru's Appeal To Settle
Korean Problem by Admitting Chinese
Communists to U.N. Rejected:
Prime Minister Nehru's Message of

July 13 170

Secretary Acheson's Message of July 18 . . 170
Prime Minister Nehru's Message of

July 19 171

Korea in Perspective. Extemporaneous Re-
marks by Secretary Acheson 171

General MacArthur's Estimate of the Korean

Situation 172

Korean Commission Concerned Over Breach

of Geneva Conventions 172

Authority of the President To Repel the
Attack in Korea:
Department of State Memorandum of

July 3, 1950 173

Use of Land and Naval Forces of the United

States for Protection Purposes .... 177
Korea: Chronology of Events, July 1, 1949

to June 30, 1950 179

U.S. and U.K. E.stablish Proving Ground for

Guided Missiles 191

Letters of Credence:

Greece 193

Portugal 193

Dedication of Memorial at Bastogne. Address

by the President 195

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Korean Commission Concerned Over Breach

of Geneva Conventions 172

Abuse of Human Rights in Satellite States.

Statement by Secretary Acheson ... 190

The United States in the United Nations . . 196

Economic Affairs Page

Benelux — A Case Study in Economic Union.

By Howard J. Hilton, Jr 181

International Information and
Cultural Affairs

Austria Signs Fulbright Agreement — Educa-
tional Opportunites for 1951 An-
nounced 192

Expanded Information Program Vital to
National Security:

Message of the President _ . 194

Advisory Commission on Information

Endorses Program 194

Treaty Information

Benelux — A Case Study in Economic LTnion.

By Howard J. Hilton, Jr 181

Settlement of Bizonal Fusion Agreement . . 189
Austria Signs Fulbright Agreement — Educa-
tional Opportunities for 1951 An-
nounced 192

Occupation Matters

Executive Order on U.S. High Commissioner

for Germany Amended 191

Settlement of Bizonal Fusion Agreement . . 189

National Security

U.S. and U.K. Establish Proving Ground for

Guided Missiles 191

The Congress

The Korean Situation : Its Significance to the
People of the United States. The Presi-
dent's Message to Congress

Publications

Recent Releases .

163

188

Howard J. Hilton, Jr.. author of the article on Benelux, a study in
economic union, is International Relations officer, Office of Western
European Affairs, Department of State.

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE) 1980

zJAe/ z/lefia^t7)teni^ /(w t/taie^

For complete contents see back cover

'le

C S: SUPERItJTENOENT OF DOCUMENTS

AUG 24 1950

bulletin

Vol.. XXIII, No. 579 • Publication 3928
August 7, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing OtEce

Washington 26, D.C.

Price:

52 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.50

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1849).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State BnixETiN as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department, Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of internatioTUil relations, are listed
currently.

COURSE OF ACTION UNDER UNIFIED COMIViAND IN KOREA

United States Report to the Security Council ^

U.N. doc. S/1626
Dated July 25, 1950

At 0-100 Korean time on Sunday, 25 June 1950,
the North Korean Army launched a completely
unprovoked invasion of South Korea. North
Korean infantry crossed the 38th parallel, led by
Soviet-made tanks in an estimated number of 100.
The main attack was down the Pochon-Uijongbu-
Seoul corridor. Simultaneously, attacks were
launched in the Ongjin Peninsula to the West,
against Chunchon in the eastern mountains, and
down the east coast road. The North Korean Air
Force covered the amphibious landings, and at-
tacked Kimpo Airfield, near Seoul. The size of
the attack, the fact that it covered the principal
areas along the 38th parallel, and the amount and
character of material involved, and the use of
amphibious landings, indicated clearly that the
invasion had been carefully planned for long in
advance.

The character and disposition of the Republic
of Korea Army indicated that it did not expect
this sudden attack. This fact is supported by a
report of an observation team of the United
Nations Commission on Korea, made along the
38th parallel and dated 24 June 1950. This report
stated that its team of observers "had, in the
course of a two-week inspection been left with the
impression that the Republican Army was or-
ganized entirely for defense and (was) in no
condition to carry out a large-scale attack against
the forces in the North. The observers found that
the Republic of Korea forces were disposed in
depth all along the 38th parallel with no concen-

' Transmitted to the Security Council by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin on July 24. This report is also printed
as Department of State publication 3935.

August 7, 7950

tration of troops at any point, that a large number
of Republic of Korea troops were actively engaged
in rounding up guerrillas and were, in any case,
entirely lacking in the armor, heavy artillery, and
air support necessary to carry off an invasion of
North Korea." These facts controverted com-
pletely the North Korea broadcast from Pyong-
yang, late in the morning of 25 June, that the
Republic of Korea had initiated an attack across
the border and that the North Korean Forces had
been ordered to repel the attack.

Strength of North and South Forces

The North Korean invaders were reported to
have committed initially 6 divisions of Infantry,
3 Border Constabulary Brigades, supported by
approximately 100 Soviet-made T34 and T70
tanks and ample heavy artillery. Their Air Force
held complete control of the air, and was at the
time estimated to be composed of 100-150 Soviet-
made combat planes. The total strength of the
North Korean forces was placed at between 90,000
and 100,000, organized in approximately 7 divi-
sions and 5 brigades, well trained and equipped
chiefly with excellent Soviet material.

Opposed to this mobile army. Republic of Korea
troops were initially deployed along the 38th par-
allel with elements of 4 divisions, with the remain-
der in the interior, without tanks or heavy artillery
and with only 16 trainers as an air force; an organ-
ization assigned primarily for preserving internal
security.

With such a discrepancy in character and arma-
ment between North and South Korea, the actual
date of the assault is immaterial; the potential
for it was present for months.

203

In the light of the above facts, it is apparent that
the attack upon South Korea was a carefully-
planned, full-scale invasion in force.

Four Major Drives From North

From the attack to the fall of Seoul on 28 June,
North Korean forces struck southward across the
38th parallel on 25 June, in four major drives :

A. To the west, a Border Constabulary Brigade
attacked in the Ongjin Peninsula against approxi-
mately one Republic of Korea regiment and was
reported on 26 June in control of the area. How-
ever, a considerable number of Republic of Korea
men escaped by sea.

B. One North Korean division, plus 42-50 tanks
captured Kaesong on the afternoon of 25 June, and
later pushed south through Hunsan toward Seoul.
Another North Korean force of from 8,000-10,000
men, plus more than 50 tanks, drove down the
Pochon-Uijongbu Corridor toward Seoul.

C. A division of North Korean troops, sup-
ported by heavy artillery and tanks, struck south
toward Chunchon.

D. Along the east coast, a Border Constabulary
Brigade reinforced to approximately 10,000, at-
tacked Kangnung and carried out two amphibious
landings further south.

The North Korean attack was initially opposed
by five Republic of Korea divisions located in or
north of Seoul. They were armed with rifles, ma-
chine guns, and other light infantry weapons.
Taken completely by surprise, and facing greatly
superior equipment, they fought desperately, but
were forced to withdraw gradually. Another Re-
public of Korea division, hastily brought up froin
the south, was badly mauled in the fighting of 26
June. An official report on 30 June indicated that
the Republic of Korea forces had suffered a high
percentage of casualties and had lost much equip-
ment in the hurried withdrawal.

Use of Air, Ground, and Naval Forces

On 28 June, aircraft of the United States Air
Force, operating pursuant to the resolution of
the Security Council of the United Nations, began
air operations against the North Korean invaders
in support of Republic of Korea forces and later
struck at military targets north of the 38th parallel
with a view to disrupting the lines of communica-
tions and supply of the invading forces.

The badly decimated Republic of Korea forces

reformed south of the Nan River, and with
U.S.A.F. assistance, sought to delay the North
Korean advance. By sheer weight of numbers
and material they were forced back step by step
until, on 2 July (Korean time) the town of Suwon,
20 miles south of Seoul, was reported in North
Korean hands.

Meanwhile, in pursuance of United Nations rec-
ommendations. United States ground forces were
committed to the area for stabilization of the
front. On 5 July, a very small United States force
made contact with the invaders, south of Suwon.
On 7 July, upon the recommendation of the Secu-
rity Council, the Unified Command was established
and General Douglas MacArthur was designated
by the President of the United States as the Com-
manding General of the forces of the members of
the United Nations.

The first United States troops were small in
number and were committed as a holding force
only. They were followed by additional support-
ing forces as rapidly as these could be transported
to the battle line. Facing odds at times as high as
20 to one, "Our Army troops, ably supported by
tactical aircraft of the United States Air Force
and Navy and our Australian friends, flying under
most adverse conditions of weather . . . distin-
guished themselves in the most difficult of military
operations — a delaying action".

Under the protection of this delaying action
Unified Coimnand forces have steadily been
strengthened. Under the combined impact of
ground, air and naval forces, the progress of
the invasion has been slowed, while the enemy
has suff'ered severe losses on sea and land which
are curtailing his supply and transportation
capabilities.

At the outset of the North Korean invasion,
naval forces available to oppose the aggression
consisted of a small Republic of Korea Coast
Guard. United States and other forces proceeded
to the operational areas and by virtue of over-
whelming superiority established a patrol of both
coasts of Korea. These forces took the necessary
action to prevent movement by sea of forces and
supplies for use in operations against the Republic
of Korea, including ingress and egress to and from
Korean ports of merchant vessels furnishing or
likely to fui'nish assistance to the North Korean
authorities. United Nations Naval Forces covered
some of the initial necessary evacuations, rendered
logistic support, and by operating against North

204

Department of State Bulletin

Korean watevborne forces denied tlie Communist
invaders the logistic support of its forces by sea.

Naval units proceeded to accomplish the water-
lift of troops and supplies to Korea, patrol by
naval aircraft of water and coastal areas, escort
duties and coastal patrol functions. Harassing
fire from naval units on both coasts shelled targets
susceptible to naval gunfire, breached roads, and
generally interfered with enemy communications.
Naval units have attacked North Korean water
trafHc where found, and have already destroyed
approximately one-third of the vessels originally
available to North Korean naval forces.

A new phase of naval operations commenced on
3 July with the first aircraft carrier air strike.
They struck on the west coast of North Korea.
Subsequent carrier strikes on the east coast of
Korea have been made by the British and United
States units. The first amphibious landing by
United Nations Forces was accomplished on the
east coast of Korea on 18 July 1950.

The present naval situation finds both coasts of
Korea covered by naval forces of the Unified Com-
mand. Harassing fire and fire support missions
are being carried out by these forces. Patrols
and reconnaissances are being conducted by naval
patrol planes over coastal and water areas. Logis-
tic support of men, equipment, and supplies by
transport continues with escort.

It has been inspiring to witness the rapidity
with which various Member States have contrib-
uted to the naval forces assisting in the restora-
tion of peace in Korea. The United Kingdom,
Australia, New Zealand, Canada and the Nether-
lands have dispatched vessels to support the
United Nations' effort to cut off supplies for the in-
vading hordes from north of the 38th parallel.
In carrying out this work, shore bombardments
have been conducted where and as necessary to in-
terdict the supply of Communist troops which
have moved into that poi'tion of Korea governed
by the Republic of Korea under the aegis of the
United Nations. Valuable service has also been
rendered by a British naval unit in the rescue from
the water of airmen who had been compelled to
abandon their airplane. The Coast Guard of the
Republic of Korea has been rendering invaluable
service in providing for the security of the shore-
lines. Naval air forces provided by the United
Kingdom has contributed in a major way in the
suppoi't of landing operations at Pohang-dong.

Upon the request by the Security Council of the

United Nations for assistance to defend the Re-
public of Korea against the North Korean aggi'es-
sors, the only forces in the area immediately
available were those United States and British
Commonwealth occupation forces under the com-
mand of General MacArthur in the occupation of
the Japanese Islands. The size and nature of these
forces were suificient only to perform the occupa-
tion duties in Japan.

Task of Achieving Superiority

Before committing the forces, in response to
the Security Council resolutions, they had to be
regrouped and re-equipped from standards for
peacetime occupation of Japan to standards suit-
able for combat in Korea. This also involved
moving these troops, with their equipment and
supplies, from their various occupation stations
in Japan, by combinations of motor, rail, water
and air transportation, to Korea. Even so, all the
materials for sustained combat were not immedi-
ately available to General MacArthur and there-
fore had to be rushed to Korea from the United
States — a distance of one-third of the way around
the globe. Future assistance for the defense of
the Republic of Korea, both men and materials,
must be transported over corresponding distances
from the Member nations of the United Nations
rendering such assistance. The well-planned
attack by the North Korean regime, the size of
their force, their logistical support and their
ability to continue to press the attack, account for
the degree of initiative enjoyed by the aggressor.
The defenders of the Republic of Korea have been
forced to submit to the time and place selected by
the aggressor, and now must dej^end upon assist-
ance from nations peacefully disposed and lying
not merely hundreds, but thousands of miles away.

From the continuing appearance on the battle-
field of large numbers of enemy personnel and
equipment, it is now apparent that the North
Korean aggressors have available to them re-
sources far in excess of their internal capabilities.
This, with the initial advantage of the aggressor,
combines to give the enemy a strength that cannot
be overcome until the United Nations forces
achieve the effect of superiority in weapons and
manpower. The task is not a small one when
viewed in comparison with the potential resources
of the aggressor force. Until forces of the Unified
Command are increased further in strength, the
rapidity with which success will be achieved can-

August 7, 1950

205

not be predicted. However, with the combined
efforts of the United Nations, the full efFect of the
contribution from each member nation will be felt
in the ultimate defeat of the aggressors from north
of tlie 38 degree parallel.

Estimate of Korean Operations

In conclusion, it is believed appropriate to quote
the Unified Commander's latest estimate of the
Korean operations.

With the deployment in Korea of major elements of the
Eighth Army now accomplished the first phase of the
campaign has ended and with it the chance for victory
by the North Korean Forces. The enemy's plan and great
opportunity depended upon the speed with which he could
overrun South Korea once he had breached the Han River
line and with overwhelming numbers and superior weapons
temporarily shattered South Korean resistance. This
chance he has now lost through the extraordinary speed
with which the Eighth Army has been deployed from
Japan to stem his rush. When he crashed the Han Line
the way seemed entirely open and victory was within his
grasp. The desperate decision to throw in piecemeal
American elements as they arrived by every available
means of transport from Japan was the only hope to save
the situation. The skill and valor thereafter displayed in
successive holding actions by the ground forces in accord-
ance with this concept, brilliantly supported in complete
co-ordination by air and naval elements, forced the enemy
Into continued deployments, costly frontal attacks and
confused logistics which so slowed his advance and

blunted his drive that we have bought the precious time
necessary to build a secure base.

I do not repeat not believe that history records a com-
parable operation which excelled the speed and precision
with which the Eighth Army, the Far East Air Force
and the Seventh Fleet have been deployed to a distant land
for immediate commitment to major operations. It merits
highest commendation for the commanders, staffs and
units concerned and attests to their superior training
and high state of readiness to meet any eventuality. This
finds added emphasis in the fact that the Far East Com-
mand, until the President's great pronouncement to sup-
port the epochal action of the United Nations, had no
repeat no slightest responsibility for the defense of the
Free Republic of Korea. With the President's decision it
assumed a completely new and added mission.

It is, of cour.se, impossible to predict with any degree
of accuracy future incidents of a military campaign. Over
a broad front involving continuous local struggles, there
are bound to be ups and downs, losses as well as successes.
Our final stabilization line will unquestionably be rectified
and tactical improvement will involve planned with-
drawals as well as local advances. But the issue of battle
is now fully joined and will proceed along lines of action
in which we will not repeat not be without choice.
Our hold upon the southern part of Korea represents a
secure base. Our casualties despite overwhelming odds
have been relatively light. Our strength will continually
increase while that of the enemy will relatively decrease.
His supply line is insecure. He has had his great chance
but failed to exploit it. We are now in Korea in force,
and with God's help we are there to stay imtil the con-
stitutional authority of the Republic is fully restored.
MacArthur.

South Korean Forces Placed Under
Unified Command of United Nations

On July Z5, Ambassador Warren R. Austin transmitted
to the Secretary-General of the United Nations the fol-
lowing exchange of letters between President Syngman
Rhec of the Republic of Korea and General Douglas
MacArthur. '

15 July 1950

In view of the joint military effort of the United Nations
on behalf of the Republic of Korea, in which all military
forces, land, sea, and air, of all the United Nations fighting
in or near Korea have been placed under your operational
command, and in which you have been designated Supreme
Commander of United Nations Forces, I am happy to
assign to you command authority over all land, sea, and air
forces of the Republic of Korea during the period of the
continuation of the present state of hostilities; such
command to be exercised either by you personally or by
such military commander or commanders to whom you
may delegate the exercise of this authority within Korea
or in adjacent seas.

' U.N. doc. S/1627 of July 25, 1950.
206

The Korean army will be proud to serve under your
command, and the Korean people and Government will be
equally proud and encouraged to have the over-all direc-
tion of our combined combat effort in the hands of so
famous and distinguished a soldier, who also in his person
possesses the delegated military authority of all the United
Nations who have joined together to resist the infamous
Communist assault on the independence and integrity of
our beloved land.

With continued highest and warmest feelings of personal
regard,

* * *

18 July 1950

Please express to President Rhee my thanks and deepest
appreciation for the action taken in his letter of 15 July.
It cannot fail to increase the coordinated power of the
United Nations forces operating in Korea. I am proud
indeed to have the gallant Republic of Korea forces under
my command. Tell him I am grateful for his generous
references to me personally and how sincerely I recipro-
cate his sentiments of regard. Tell him also not to lose
heart, that the way may he long and hard, but the ultimate
result cannot fail to be victory.

Department of State Bulletin

Korean Attack Opens New Chapter in History

Ijy John Foster Dulles
Consultant to the Secretary ^

The Time and the Place

'\^nien the armies of the puppet Communist
regime of North Korea attacked the Republic of
Korea, they opened a new chapter in history. No
one knows how that chapter will end, but, already,
the national response shows that what we shall
write into that chapter will be written with unity,
power, courage, and high resolve.

No doubt, this dangerous moment had to come.
There would be a time when the leaders of
Bolshevik communism would judge that they had
largely exhausted the possibilities of indirect
aggression and would explore the possibilities of
direct aggression. That, they are doing now.

Their timing is understandable. Indirect ag-
gression was no longer likely to pay big dividends.
It was being checked in Europe and in Asia where
lie the Ruhr and Japan — two areas which, it
seems, Bolshevik leaders particularly covet and
which, under their control, would sharply alter
the balance of world power. The European Re-
covery Plan, the North Atlantic pact, and the
Military Aid Program are withering Communist
hopes for overrunning the European continent;
and the Schuman plan would end their hope of
communizing Western Germany.

In Asia, the United States had turned from
what had seemed a policy of drift, and we were
developing policies which would give hope to
those new nations whose independence was en-
dangered by a new form of international enslave-
ment. Secretary Johnson, General Bradley, and
I had gone to Japan to confer with General
MacArthur about Japan's future. That showed
that we did not admit that the Soviet had veto
power over that future and could perpetuate a
do-nothing policy which would enable communism
to make great underground gains.

' An address made before the Commonwealth Club at
San Francisco, Calif., on July 31 and released to the press
on the same date.

The Communist world was in process of being
contained unless it resorted to open force. That
may explain why there came armed attack at this
particular time.

As to place, there were good reasons why Korea
should have been picked.

There was, in North Korea, a thoroughly trained,
fanatical, and well-equipped satellite army with
a hard core of battle-trained veterans drawn from
Siberian and Chinese armies.

Opposed to them, was the young and inexperi-
enced army of the Republic of Korea. It had ex-
cellent morale and discipline but not a single
combat plane or tank or artillery heavy enough
to stop opposing tanks.

The Republic of Korea's army was no conceiv-
able match for the North Korean Red army but
the Communist leaders may have felt that the
Republic, if attacked, would not get help from
the United Nations or the United States. Their
propaganda was spreading that impression
throughout the Republic of Korea and trying to
develop a defeatist attitude.

Our Government sensed the danger and tried
to remove it. On June 21, 1 addressed the Korean
Second National Assembly at its opening session
and pointed out that although the Republic of
Korea was technically not a member of the United
Nations because of Soviet veto, nevertheless the
United Nations considers her as, spiritually, one
of them. I recalled that the United Nations Char-
ter binds all nations —

to refrain from any threat or use of force against your
territorial integrity or political independence.

I went on to say that the Republic of Korea had
built a healthy society which was entitled, on merit,
to membership in the free world, and that as be-
tween the members of the free world —

compulsions to common action are powerful, because they
flow from a profound sense of common destiny." '

' Bulletin of July 3, 1950, p. 12.

August 7, 1950

207

We had hoped that that public declaration might
contribute to peace. But the time fuse had already
been lighted. Almost at the exact time I was
speaking in Seoul, the Communist regime in
Pyongyang was proclaiming its program. It
called for the unification under it of South Korea.
It promised the liquidation of President Rhee
who, it was said, was serving "the plundering in-
terests of American imperialists"; it demanded
the expulsion from Korea of the United Nations
Commission and the holding on August 15 of all-
Korean elections under North Korean auspices.
The next Sunday, the Red army was hurled against
the Republic in order to impose that program.

Even though the Communist leaders may have
been uncertain that their act would bring United
Nations or United States aid to the Republic of
Korea, there is considerable evidence that they
took that possibility into account. That did not
deter them, for they doubtless figured that, if, in
fact. Western powers gave military help to the
Republic of Korea, they might become bogged
down in an all-Asia struggle of the "masses"
against the "colonial imperialists" and their
"lackeys." That has, from the beginning, been a
main point of Stalin's strategy.

A further reason for the selection of Korea was,
no doubt, the important role that the Korean pen-
insula occupies in relation to Japan, Port Arthur,
and Vladivostok. During the Russo-Japanese
war of 1904-5, the control of Korea by Japan pre-
vented the Russians from carrying the offensive
to Japan and made it possible for the Japanese to
capture Port Arthur, 150 miles to the west of
Korea, and to threaten Vladivostok, 75 miles to the
east of Korea. Russian analyses of the cause of
Russia's failure in that war ascribe it largely to
the fact that Japan controlled the Korean penin-
sula. Ever since, Russian strategists sought that
control for Russia.

All in all, it must be conceded that, from the
Bolshevik Communist standpoint, the blow in
Korea was shrewdly struck. To the extent that it
was a surprise, it was a tactical surprise of the
kind that those who strike offensively can usually
inflict on those who accept a defensive role. The
orbit of Soviet and satellite control extends con-
tinuously from the Berin Strait, south to the China
Sea, west to the Mediterranean, and north to the
border of Norway. There are 15,000 miles of iron
curtain, behind which a single will can secretly
prepare and execute land thrusts against any one
of 15 contiguous nations. If to this we add the
capability of striking by air across the Arctic re-
gions, it can be seen how hard is the task of defense.
It was already difficult when the Bolshevik Com-
munists limited themselves to methods of indirect
aggression. Now that they have shown willing-
ness to use also methods of direct aggression the
task of anticipation is truly colossal.

We do not, I think, need to conclude from

208

Korea that the Bolshevik leaders have decided on
general war. The action, there, plainly indicates
that they are now willing to run greatly increased
risks. That, however, cloes not necessarily mean
that they want general war or that they are ir-
revocably committed to provoke it. The place
selected for the first ai'med attack was one that
could be exploited without an open use of Soviet
foi-ces. That indicates that the leaders may not
yet be prepared to make the fateful decision that
would mean general war. It may be that the free
world, by a show of resolution and strength, can
bring the Soviet leaders to avoid that reckless
course.

"Wlien only one assumption gives chance of
winning peace, we must act on that assumption.

Political Objectives

Military victory in the battle of Korea is bound
to loom large in our thinking and acting. But
those who are not directly involved in the fight-
ing must not become mere battle watchers. Korea
must not monopolize our thoughts and actions and
divert us from achieving vital political objectives
elsewhere.

The United States has one very bad habit. In
times of fighting we usually forget all about po-
litical objectives. In my recent book, War or
Peace, I pointed out that we Americans usually
look on war as a kind of gigantic prize fight. The
objective is to knock out your opponent. If you
do knock him out, the job is done. Then, it is in
order to go home, break training, and enjoy your-
self until you may have to go into training for a
return bout.

That habit explains the wisecrack that the
United States has never lost a war and never won
a peace. Our statesmen and diplomats are not
less able than those of other countries; but we
consider that wartime is their vacation time. If
we have even childish capacity to learn by ex-
perience. World War II should have taught us
the folly of that attitude.

At Yalta, Stalin won great political victories
which enabled him to expand Soviet influence into
the heart of Europe and throughout much of north
China. He won those victories because his eye
was on the political ball while we were thinking
only in military terms. Mr. Stettinius, who was
at Yalta as Secretary of State, records that he
asked the President whether he wanted any help
from the State Department. The answer was
"no," because, says Stettinius, the President
thought "it was primarily a military matter and
. . . had best remain on a purely military level."

Mr. Justice Byrnes, who was at Yalta as a
principal political adviser to the President and
who was shortly to become Secretary of State,
says of the Yalta agreement regarding Asia, "I
did not know of this agreement. . . . The evidence
is clear that the agreement was, in great part, a

Department of State Bulletin

military decision."' So it was, from our stand-
point; but not from Stalin's.

Military victory is, of course, indispensable.
But if the moral and material power marshaled
to win victory is not used to attain political objec-
tives, then sacrifice is cruelly wasted.

There are, today, political goals of the utmost
importance which ought to be promoted by the
national strength, unity, and momentum which
we shall develop to help the United Nations win
the battle for Korea. Let me mention three of
the political fronts.

Japan. — The Japanese nation should be given
the opportunity to become equal partners in the
community of the free nations and to contribute
to the peace and security, the economic prosperity
and the cultural and spiritual life of the free
world. As General MacArthur has pointed out,
the conduct of the Japanese under occupation
entitles them to that, legally and morally. The
battle for Korea should not lead the free world
to forget about Japan or to postpone dealing with
her problems. The Japanese are front-seat spec-
tators of a drama which is arousing them from
their postwar stupor. The very fact that the
attack in Korea may be aimed at Japan and de-
signed to check positive and constructive action
there shows how imijortant it is to take such
action. Japan represents the only large industrial
power in Asia outside of the Soviet Union and
that power should, in the future, serve the cause
of freedom and not become a tool of despotism.
Neglect and indecision in Japan could lose the
great gains of General MacArthur's superb ad-
ministration. We could, indeed, lose more in
Japan than can be won in Korea.

Europe. — The free peoples of Europe, backed
by Canada and the United States in the North
Atlantic Council, are seeking security through
increased unity and common defense. There is
still a long way to go, and getting there is more
important than ever. We cannot afford, now, to
neglect that goal.

In the past, concentration upon the problem of
Europe may have led us to subordinate the
problem of Asia. Now that the problem of Asia
hits us with a violence that compels attention, let
us not go wholly into reverse gear and neglect
Europe. We face a two-front struggle, in Asia
and in Europe. That requires from us balanced
effort, for we cannot afford to lose on either front.
The fact that Bolshevik Communists are now
using methods of open warfare in Korea shows
that they may do so elsewhere. That means that
we should speed up the unity and the economic
and military strengthening of a fi'ee Europe that
would include West Germany.

Let us not forget that, although most of Ger-
many and all of Japan are geographically within
the orbit of the free world, they lie at the outer
fringe and are physically close to the world of
despotism. If they were lost to exploitation by

Soviet communism, that would substantially com-
plete the encirclement phase of the strategy that
Soviet communism has announced. The stage
would be set for what they call the final act, which
could be slow strangulation or overpowering as-
sault.

In the long run, the continuing freedom of the
Germans and Japanese can be assured only by
their cooperation. The United States cannot
alone, by remote control, keep the 45 million West
Germans and the 85 million Japanese within the
free world unless our power reinforces the good-
will efforts of the Germans and Japanese them-
selves. These people want to make those efforts,
and they ought to be given that opportunity.
That does not mean giving them national armies
to serve purely national ambitions. It does mean
treating them as equal partners within the frame-
work of a European, a Pacific, or a United Nations
effort which subordinates national ambitions to
goals which advance the general welfare of all
free peoples.

The United Nations. — The Security Council
showed an amazing capacity to respond quickly
and effectively to the needs of the Korean crisis.
However, only unusual circumstances made that
possible. The Soviet Union was boycotting the
Security Council, and the representative of the
Chinese Communist regime had not been seated.
Either, if present, would have vetoed the action
which i^roduced the world's first peacetime dem-
onstration of solidarity against unprovoked
aggression.

No one who wants peace should want the Soviet
to go on boycotting the United Nations. That
recalls the withdrawal of Germany, Italy, and
Japan from the League of Nations. Stalin, speak-
ing of that in March 1939, interpreted it as de-
signed by the "aggressive states ... in order to
have their hands free."

When international differences exist, as they
now do, it is better to bring them into the open,
around a council table, rather than to have the
differing parties separate and each go his inde-
pendent way.

A town meeting is of little value if it is attended
only by those who agi'ee. We want those who differ
to be present when the United Nations functions
as the town meeting of the world.

On the other hand, the members of the United
Nations now have a vision of what the United
Nations can be. The Assembly had established
observers to watch the northern frontier of the
Republic of Korea, anticipating the possibility of
armed attack. When the armed attack occurred,
these observers instantly reported to the Security
Council. The Security Council met within 24
houi'S and initiated a series of actions to repel the
aggression and to restore peace and security in the
area. Fifty-two nations indicated their support
of the Security Council action. The United Na-
tions has established under its flag a United Na-

Augwsf 7, 7950

209

tions military command in Korea, and six mem-
bers have already contributed military force to
that command. Others have offered armed assist-
ance, and the details are being worked out.

That is a magnificent accomplishment, and the
member nations, particularly the smaller nations,
who have seen that accomplishment and who have
taken hope from it, will not be happy to revert to
a condition where similar action on their behalf
could be prevented by one malevolent vote in the
Security Council.

Of course, it is important that the United
Nations should be a universal organization. But
it is also important that that universality should
not turn the United Nations into an impotent
organization.

At this juncture, we can usefully recall the
Senate resolution of June, 1948 — the "Vanden-
berg" resolution — calling for "voluntary agree-
ment to remove the veto from all questions involv-
ing pacific settlements of international disputes
and situations, and from the admission of new
members." If there were such agreement, which
our Government has sought, it would be far easier
to achieve universality.

Prime Minister Nehru of India, the great leader
of a great people, has expressed the hope that the
United Nations should not be plagued by Soviet
boycott or by an unresolved dispute about whether
the Communist regime is now entitled to replace
the Nationalist Government of China. We should
all like to clear up these matters and to see the
United Nations fully representative of all of the
peoples of the world. However, we are bound to
be concerned about seating a Chinese Communist
regime which openly preaches violence as an in-
strument of international policy and which en-
courages the North Korean regime to act in
flagrant defiance of the expressed will of the
United Nations. Our concern about seating that
regime is bound to be deepened when the seating
gives it not merely a right to vote, but a right to
veto the peacemakmg role of the Security Council.

The Korean crisis has opened our eyes to the
great possibilities of good inherent in the United
Nations. There has developed a momentum of
action, a lift of spirit, which should be used to
realize the high hopes which the whole world felt
when, 5 years ago, the United Nations was born
here at San Francisco.

I have now called attention to three political
fronts that require our continuing attention.
There are many more. They ought not to be
obscured by the smoke of battle. Victory is in-
dispensable, but let us be sure this time to use
constructively the power that is required to win
victory.

Policies are of little use unless behind them lies
the power, moral or material, potential or actual,
to make them good. Equally, power is of little
value unless it be the servant of wise policies.
From now on, let policy and power go hand in
hand in quest of peace that is just and durable.

Military Aid to Certain
Free Nations Continued

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press by the White House July 26]

I have today signed S. 3809, the act which will
enable our country to continue military aid to
certain free nations of the world.

The overwhelming support for this act among
the Members of Congress is a further mark of the
unity of purpose of the American people in support
of the foreign policy of the United States. Such
support serves to remind those bent on aggression
that they dare not count on a division of opinion
among our people to help them gain their evil ends.

We are today engaged in a serious undertaking
in the Far East — carrying out our responsibility
as a member of the United Nations. Side by side
with us, under the flag of the United Nations,
stand other members of the United Nations who
have joined to put down the raw aggression which
would dejirive the people of the Republic of Korea
of their freedom.

This spectacular breach of the peace does not
lessen our concern in those other places in the
world where aggression would likewise aflfect the
collective security of the free nations.

We are bound by a solemn pledge to regard an
attack on any of the members of the North Atlantic
Treaty as an attack on us. This pledge recognizes
that the fate of the United States and that of
western Europe are bound together. The act
signed today is a further step toward the common
goal of the North Atlantic Treaty nations. Our
goal is to create the kind of strength which will
deter potential aggressors from attacking so
formidable and united a group and to defeat
aggression, should it come.

This act will permit the United States to make
a significant contribution to that goal by provid-
ing some of the equipment and materials which
our European partners urgently need in building
up the strength they require. Wliat we provide
will be used, under the recent determination of
the North Atlantic Council, to equip balanced
collective forces of the North Atlantic Treaty
nations which are now being created.

In Greece, in Turkey, and in Iran, this act will
permit us to continue to help keep these bastions
strong and determined — free of alien influence
and free to grow and develop in their own way.

The act also authorizes military assistance to
Asia and the Far East, in parts of which direct
conflict is now going on.

The military assistance authorized by this act,
the economic assistance and the other foreign aid
measures we have undertaken — indeed, our entire
foreign policy — recognize one central fact — that,
today, the freedom-loving nations are determined
to stand together to preserve their freedom.

210

Department of State Bulletin

U.S.-Canadian Treaty for Diverting Niagara River for Power Purposes

State7ncnt iy Adrian S. Fisher
Legal Adviser ^

The treaty signed on February 27, 1950, between
the United States and Canada provides for the
equal diversion between the two countries of the
waters of the Niagara River for power purposes.
Under the proposed treaty, this amount will
average approximately 50,000 cubic feet per sec-
ond for each country in the daytime during the
tourist season. Higher amounts will be permitted
at nighttime and during the winter. The present
diversions from the Niagara River are 32,500 cubic
feet per second for this country and 54,000 cubic
feet per second for Canada. Approximately two-
thirds of this is permitted by the existing treaty,
the remainder being permitted by temporary
notes exchanged between the two Governments in
1940, 1941, and 1948. In order to preserve the
beauty of the Falls, the treaty provides for re-
medial works and stipulates certain minimum
amounts of water which are reserved for flow
over the Falls.

Urgent need for additional power in the Niag-
ara Falls region of Canada and the United States
has been felt for several years. The present di-
versions of water for power which are based, in
part, on a number of temporary arrangements as
well as the 1909 Boundary Waters Treaty do not
provide an adequate permanent basis for long-
term redevelopment of this great resource. This
need was recognized in the 1946 report of this
committee dealing with the 1941 St. Lawrence
Basin agreement.

Accordingly, negotiations with Canada were
initiated, and on December 7, 1949, a meeting of
representatives of the two Governments was held
in Washington which resulted in the drafting of
the present treaty.

The United States negotiators at this meeting
included me, as legal adviser of the Depart-
ment of State, E. Robert DeLuccia, chief, Bureau

' Made before a subcommittee of the Senate Committee
on Foreign Relations on June 27 and released to the press
on the same date.

of Power, Federal Power Commission, and Col.
W. E. Potter, acting chief of Engineers for Civil
Works, Corps of Engineers, United States Anny.

Gerald V. Cruise, trustee and chief engineer of
the Power Authority of the State of New York,
Col. Ivan C. Sattem, representing the chairman
of the New York Power Authority, and Ed-
win S. Bundy, vice president and chief engineer
of the Niagara Mohawk Power Company, were
present as technical consultants to our delegation.

It is fair to state that the scenic spectacle of
Niagara Falls and Rapids is an outstanding part
of our national scenic heritage, and this for the
people of both the United States and Canada.
Regular records of the flow of the Niagara River
have been kept for almost a hundred years, and
numerous investigations of its condition have been
conducted during this period. This data now en-
ables the two Governments to make a confident
judgment as to the amount of water which should
flow over the Falls in order to insure the con-
tinuance of the high quality of the scenic spectacle.

In 1926, the Governments of the United States
and Canada established the Special International
Niagara Board to recommend measures for the
maintenance and enhancement of the beauty of the
Falls and Rapids. This Board recommended the
construction of remedial works above the Falls;
and, finally, in 1942, the two Governments com-
menced construction of a submerged weir, which
when completed in 1948 almost doubled the flow
over the American Falls. Construction of this
weir, however, was only a part of the remedial
works recommended by the Board, and it has long
been necessary to conclude an arrangement with
Canada to provide for construction of the re-
mainder of these works.

The growing urgency to provide for the develop-
ment of the water resources of the river for power
is illustrated by the history of the agreements re-
lating to the use of the waters for power, begin-
ning with the treaty between the United States

Augusf 7, J950

211

and Canada of January 11, 1909, regarding bound-
ary waters. This treaty provided for permanent
diversions of 20,000 cuuic feet per second in the
United States and 36,000 cubic feet per second in
Canada. Notes exchanged between the two Gov-
ernments in 1940, 1941, and 1948, autliorize adcli-
tional diA^ersions of 12,500 cubic feet per second in
this country and 18,000 and 20,500 cubic feet per
second during the navigation and nonnavigation
seasons respectively, in Canada. Of the two hitter
amounts, 5,000 culaic feet per second is compen-
sated for by the diversion into Lake Superior from
the Long Lac-Ogoki River of an equivalent
amount of water from the Hudson Bay Drainage
Basin in Canada. These exchanges of notes do
not provide a satisfactory legal basis for the con-
struction of new hydroelectric power facilities
which are needed to replace and supplement the
older plants now in operation.

The power situation in northeast United States
became critical during World War II when the
heavily industrialized Niagara area developed so
serious a power shortage that it became necessary
to ration power among the factories producing
war materials. After a temporary decline in 1945
and 1946, the demand for power in this area ad-
vanced sharply and is now actually larger than
during the war. An even more critical shortage
exists in Ontario where extensive industrialization
has occurred in recent years. At various times, in-
cluding the postwar period, it has been necessary
to ration the consumption of power in Ontario
both for civilian and industrial purposes.

This drastic and growing shortage of power in
the Niagara area naturally created the interest in
redevelopment of the waters of the river which re-
sulted in a report of the Federal Power Commis-
sion, completed in September of last year, entitled
Ponsibilities for Redevelopjnent of Niagara Falls
for Pawer. This report, together with the 1929
report of the Special International Niagara Board,
provided the necessary technical basis for nego-
tiating this treaty.

Analysis of the Treaty

Article I of the resulting treaty terminates the
third, fourth, and fifth paragraphs of article V of
the Boundary Waters Treaty of 1909, which pro-
vide for the permanent power diversions from the
Niagara River, and the exchanges of notes dated
May 20, 1941, October 27, 1941, November 27, 1941,
and December 23, 1948, which provide for the
subsequent temporary diversions. I should like
to insert copies of these exchanges in the record at
this time. These permanent and temporary di-
versions terminated by article I would be replaced
by the permanent diversions provided for in ar-
ticle V of the new treaty. The necessary usage of
water for sanitary, domestic, and navigation pur-
poses is not affected by the new treaty.

The protection of the beauty of the Falls
through construction of remedial works by insur-

ing a proper spread of the flow of water over the
Falls is provided for in article II of the treaty,
which is based upon the final report submitted to
the United States and Canada on December 11,
1929, by the Special International Niagara Board
mentioned above. While this Board made specific
recommendations for the remedial works, it seemed
advisable before completing them to review the
recommenchxtions in the light of experience and
IDresent conditions. As sucli, a review will requii-e
investigations on both sides of the boundary ; and,
as the International Joint Commission has con-
ducted many investigations into works of this
character required in connection with changes in
the level of boundary waters under the 1909 treaty,
it was considered advisable to place the respon-
sibility for these investigations on this inter-
national body. The recommendations of the In-
teniational Joint Commission as to the nature and
design of remedial works and the allocation of
the task of construction between the two countries
are subject to approval of both United States and
Canada. Upon such approval, construction is to
be conducted under the supervision of the Com-
mission.

Article II further provides a limitation of 4
years within which the remedial works shall be
completed after the date of approval and directs
that the two countries shall share the total cost
of the works equally.

Article III is a definition of the waters which
are subject to the provisions of the new treaty.
Such waters are the total outflow from Lake Erie
through three outlets — the Welland Canal, the
Niagara River, and the Black Rock Canal through
Buffalo Harbor — less waters used and necessaiy
for domestic, sanitary, and navigation purposes.
This provision is in accordance with the priorities
established by article VIII of the Boundary
Waters Treaty of 1909 as to the order of prece-
dence to be observed among the various uses for
boundary waters. Water, for one or more of the
three latter purposes, is now beings diverted
through the Welland and Black Rock Canals and
directly from the Niagara River. Water is also
diverted for navigation purposes from the Niagara
River to the New York State Barge Canal at
Tonawanda, about 13 miles downstream from
Buffalo.

Article III provides that the water which is
being diverted from the Hudson Bay drainage
basin in Canada into the Great Lakes system
through the Long Lac-Ogoki works shall con-
tinue to be governed by the exchange of notes of
October 13 and 31 and' November 7, 1940. These
notes authorized Ontario to turn these Long Lac-
Ogoki waters into the Great Lakes system and take
out the equivalent for power purposes at the Falls.
Tliis was a temporary measure pending a final
Great Lakes-St. Lawrence agreement between the
two countries. However, under article III the
divei'sion at Long Lac-Ogoki will be limited to

212

Department of State Bulletin

amounts of water which can be diverted through
the existing works.

Article III defines the watei-s which are the
subject matter of the treaty. This same definition
is used in articles IV and V of the treaty which
deal with the water necessary for maintenance of
the scenic spectacle of Niagara Falls and Kapids
and with the water which may be diverted for
power purposes.

Article IV of the treaty provides for the regu-
lation of the flow of water over the Falls for scenic
purposes. It has been worked out with particular
regard to the tourist season and the hours of day-
light and gives priority to the use of water for
maintaining the beauty of the Falls. While Mi*.
DeLuccia of the Federal Power Commission will
explain the details of this proposed method of
maintaining the beauty of the Falls, I should like
to mention that the schedule of flows set forth in
this article, in general, follows the recommenda-
tions of the special Niagara Board of 1929 and,
where is fails to do so, it constitutes, in our
opinion, a definite improvement from the point
of view of preserving the natural spectacle. Ac-
cording to the approach of the special board in
1929, power diversion would have had first call on
the flow of the river (after domestic, sanitary,
and navigation uses) and the remainder would
have been available for the Falls and Rapids, an
amount which would have fluctuated with the
changing river flows. Under article IV of the
new treaty, positive protection for the Falls and
Eapids is provided by giving them a prior call on
the river flow, with power diversions limited to
the remainder.

Article V of the new treaty provides that the
outflow from Lake Erie, remaining after use of the
flows necessary for domestic, sanitary, navigation,
and scenic purposes, may be diverted for power
purposes.

Article VI provides that waters made available
for power purposes under the new treaty shall be
divided equally between the United States and
Canada.

Article VII directs that representatives of the
two countries acting jointly shall ascertain and
determine the amounts of water available for the
purposes of the treaty and shall keep records
thereof. The flow of the river varies from day
to day, and the amount which may be diverted
for power purposes under the treaty depends on
the time of day. Accordingly, it is necessary, as
a practical matter, to empower official representa-
tives of Canada and the United States to allot the
water for the various purposes in accordance with
the terms of the treat}^ This activity is now be-
ing carried on by an officer of the United States
Corps of Engineers in cooperation with an officer
of the Water Resources Division of the Depart-
ment of Resources and Development of Canada by
virtues of notes exchanged on February 3, July 25,
and August 21, 1923, copies of which are supplied

for the record. Article VII merely makes provi-
sion for continuing the existing practice and gives
authority for such changes in procedure as the
new treaty may make advisable.

Article VIII provides that one country having
sufficient facilities for the purpose may utilize the
unused portion of the other country's share of
water for power purposes until the second country
has completed facilities to use its own full share.
It may take some time for the parties to the treaty
to construct the necessary works to make full use
of the water made available for power purposes.
Therefore, it was believed advantageous to make
provision for avoiding waste of the water during
this period.

Article IX frees each country from responsibil-
ity for injury or damage occurring in the territory
of the other country as a result of acts authorized
by the treaty.

Article X provides that the new treaty shall
come into force upon exchange of ratifications and
shall remain in force for 50 years thereafter. Fol-
lowing this period, the treaty can be terminated
after 1 year's notice by either country of its inten-
tion to terminate the treaty. The long term of
50 years takes into consideration the probable pe-
riod of time needed for amortization of the very
large investments, running into hundreds of mil-
lions of dollars, which will be required for the re-
development permitted under the terms of the new
treaty.

I am advised that the Canadian Parliament has
considered this treaty and favorable action there-
on was taken on June 14, 1950. Consequently, the
Canadian Government is prepared to bring the
treaty into effect as soon as it receives the approval
of this Government. I believe that such joint ac-
tion will initiate steps on both sides of the bound-
ary to relieve the power shortage and preserve the
scenic beauty of the Falls.

The Department of State recommends without
qualification the approval of this treaty by the
Senate.

Greece Grants Income Tax Exemption
on U.S. Aircraft Operations

[Released to the press July 25]

The Greek Government has notified the Ameri-
can Embassy at Athens that, in consideration of
the exemption from income taxation granted by
United States law (Internal Revenue Code, sees.
212 and 231) with respect to earnings derived from
the operation of aircraft registered under the laws
of a foreign country which grants an equivalent
exemption to United States citizens and corpora-
tions, American air navigation enterprises are ex-
empt from the Greek "patente" tax and from the
tax on income realized in Greece. The exemption,
retroactive from July 1, 1946, is reciprocal.

August 7, 1950

213

Pacific Weatlier Stations Program
Agreed Upon by U.S.-Canada

[Released to the press June 25]

The establishment, at an early date, of a joint
Pacific network of ocean-weather ships has been
agreed upon by the Canadian and United States
Governments, it was announced today at Ottawa
and Washington by Lionel Chevrier, Minister of
Transport, and Dean G. Acheson, Secretary of
State.

Agreement has been reached on a plan to estab-
lish a network of seven stations across the north
Pacific to provide an interim program until a
broader international agreement can be worked
out by the International Civil Aviation Organiza-
tion.

Five weather stations (called "N" for Nan, "O"
for Oboe, "Q" for Queen, "S" for Sugar, "T" for
Tare) are to be operated by the United States and
one station ("P" for Peter) by Canada. The
Japanese will continue to operate a station ("X"
for X-ray) in the far western Pacific.

The Canadian Government has been operating
an Atlantic Ocean weather station at position "B"
for Baker, off the Labrador coast, on a joint basis
with the United States Government. Under the
new agreement, the United States will take over
complete operation at station "B," allowing Can-
ada to concentrate her full efforts on the Pacific.

The new agreement is in full conformity with
previous international agreements on the estab-
lishment and maintenance of weather-ship net-
works on both the Atlantic and the Pacific.

The agreement marks a significant step forward
in insuring better weather forecasts for both coun-
tries, as well as further guarding the safety of
transoceanic aviation and shipping.

tives of Canadian Government Departments will
take part in the expedition, with J. W. Burton
of the Northwest Territories Administration, De-
pai'tment of Resources and Development, Ottawa,
acting as senior Canadian repi'esentative. The
senior representative of the United States Weather
Bureau will be C. J. Hubbard, chief of Arctic
jjrojects in the Weather Bureau.

The ships are due to sail from Boston and Hali-
fax in mid-July. The supplies will be unloaded
at the central joint weather station at Resolute
Bay, Cornwallis Island, and will, subsequently, be
shipped to the more northerly weather stations by
air transport, possibly next spring. It is expected
that the ships will return to home ports by the
end of September.

Ice conditions for water transportation in the
Canadian Arctic are normally favorable for a
short time each year, usually during the latter
part of August and the first part of September.
It is anticipated that the icebreakers and cargo
ships will encounter considerable ice before they
reach their main destination at Resolute.

Should ice conditions be favorable, it is antici-
pated that an attempt will be made by the U.S.S.
Edisto and the U.S.C.G.C. Eastwind to reach the
most northerly weather station in Canada which
is located within 500 miles of the North Pole. This
new joint weather station, named "Alert" after
Capt. George Nares' ship which wintered in the
vicinity during 1875-76, was established in April
by air transport. The same icebreakers recon-
noitered the station site during the 1948 summer
supply expedition. If conditions are such that
icebreakers cannot reach the station this sum-
mer, additional supplies will be carried in by air
later this year. Time and conditions permitting,
the two icebreakers may also carry supplies to the
joint weather station at Eureka and reconnoiter
the south coast of Melville Island where a further
weather station might be established at some future
date.

U.S.-Canadian Weatlier Stations
To Be Resupplied by Ship

{Released to the press July 11]

It was announced at Ottawa and Washington
today that the meteorological stations in the Ca-
nadian Arctic islands that have been established
jointly by the Meteorological Division of the De-
partment of Transport of Canada and of the
United States Weather Bureau will again be re-
supplied by ship this summer.

The resupply expedition will be carried out by
United States Navy and Coast Guard ships under
the command of Capt. G. E. Peterson, United
States Navy. These ships are the U.S.S. Edisto
and the U.S.C.G.C. Eastwind, icebreakers; the
U.S.S. Whitley, a cargo ship, and the U.S.S.
LST-633, serving as a cargo vessel. Representa-

Nortliwest Atlantic Fisheries
Convention Enters into Force

[Released to the press July 10]

The international convention for the Northwest
Atlantic fisheries, opened for signature at Wash-
ington from February 8-22, 1949, entered into
force on July 3, 1950, in accordance with the terms
of article XV, thereof, which provides that it
shall enter into force upon the deposit of instru-
ments of ratification by four signatory govern-
ments.

The fourth instrument of ratification was de-
posited on July 3, 1950, by Canada with this Gov-
ei-nment, which is designated by the convention as
the depositary government. The United States,

214

Department of State Bulletin

Iceland, and the United Kingdom had previously
deposited instruments of ratification.

Under the terms of the convention, there will
now be established the International Commission
for the Northwest Atlantic Fisheries and separate
panels for each of the five siibareas constituting
the over-all area covered by the convention. All
contracting governments will be represented on
the Commission, and those contracting govern-
ments having jjarticular fishing interests in each
subarea will be repi'esented on the panels of the
subareas.

The primary function of the Commission will
be to collect, collate, and disseminate scientific in-
formation on international fisheries in the con-
vention area. Although the Commission has no
direct regulatory powers, any panel may transmit
through the Commission to the contracting govern-
ments recommendations for measures, based upon
scientific information, which are deemed necessary
for maintaining those stocks of fish which support
international fisheries in the convention area.
Within a specified time, after acceptance of such
recommendations by the panel governments of each
subarea affected, the measures will become appli-
cable to all contracting governments.

Trade Agreement With Mexico
Terminated

The Department of State announced on June 23
that notes have been exchanged between repre-
sentatives of the Government of the United States
of America and the Government of the United
Mexican States terminating the trade agreement
between the two Governments signed December 23,
1942. As the result of this exchange of notes, the
United States-Mexican trade agreement will cease
to be in force after December 31, 1950.^

Under present United States laws and policies,
imports from Mexico will, upon termination of
the trade agreement, be subject to the same tariff
treatment as that accorded to imports of the same
products from other countries, except Cuba and
the Republic of the Philippines, under the most-
favored-nation principle.

The trade agreement with Mexico was signed in
1942. In 1946 and 1947, the Mexican Govern-
ment was confronted with a large imbalance in its
trade with the United States which resulted in
a serious drain on its reserves of dollar exchange.
She was also faced with strong pressures to in-
crease tariffs to protect her domestic industries, to
encourage economic development, and to restore

' For the text of the U.S. note and a list of changes in
the U.S. import duties which will result from termination
of this trade agreement, see Department of State press
release 676 of June 23.

the protective incidence of specific duties to earlier
levels.

In 1947, the Mexican Government, impelled by
these circumstances and after consultation with
this Government in cases where consultation was
required, took a number of steps to restrict im-
ports. These steps included a prohibition against
imports of a wide range of nonessential goods, in-
cluding some items covered by the trade agree-
ment, and a change to the ad valorem equivalent,
or higher, of the duty in 1942 on some 5,000 items
not covered by the trade agreement. By the end
of the year, it became evident that the Mexican
Government would also find it necessary to make
similar increases in rates on products included in
the trade agreement.

Rather than denounce the agreement without
the fullest exploration of the facts and the maxi-
mum effort to reach an agreed solution, the United
States agreed to provisional increases by Mexico
in duties on the trade-agreement items to levels
equivalent on an ad valorem basis to those pro-
vided in the trade agreement when it first came into
effect. From the point of view of the United
States, this materially lessened the benefits of the
agreement, and the Mexican Government agreed
on her part to negotiations intended to restore the
balance in the agreement through revision of the
new Mexican rates on items not previously in-
cluded in the trade agreement. These negotiations
were begun in April 1948.

As stated in the note, representatives of the
United States and Mexican Governments have, for
many months, endeavored earnestly to find a basis
for achieving a mutually satisfactory revision of
the agreement. This has unfortunately proved
to be impossible, and the two Governments have
consequently agreed that the agreement should
be terminated.

U.S.-Mexico Tuna Convention
Enters into Force

[Released to the press July 11]

A convention between the United States and
Mexico for the establishment of an International
Commission for the Scientific Investigation of
Tuna, signed at Mexico City on January 25, 1949,
entered into force today upon the exchange of
instruments of ratification by Secretary Acheson
and Rafael de la Colina, Mexican Ambassador.^

This convention provides for a Commission
composed of two national sections of four mem-
bers each, which will engage in scientific investi-
gation of tuna and tuna-like fishes of the eastern

' For text of the convention see Department of State
press release 53, dated January 25, 1949. For announce-
ment of the signing of the convention see Btjt.t.f.tin of
Feb. 6, 1949, p. 174.

Augusf 7, 7950

215

Pacific Ocean, as well as those fishes which are
used for bait in the tuna fisheries. Scientific in-
formation now available, based on studies made
in the past, is not sufficiently extensive to indicate
■whether tuna stocks are in danger of depletion.
The two coimtries will cooperate under the con-
vention with a view to maintaining the popula-
tions of these fishes at a level which will assure a
maximum utilization year after year without de-
pletion.

This convention is similar to the convention be-
tween the United States and Costa Eica for the
establishment of an Inter-American Tropical
Tuna Commission, signed at Washington, May 31,
19-19, in that the Commission to be established is
an investigatory body, and any regulatory meas-
ures which are indicated by the study would have
to be the subject of future negotiation between the
two countries.

Cuba Makes New Rates of Duty
Effective Without 30-Day Notice

[Released to the press June 15]

and would be even more seriously effected if Unit«d
States exporters could continue for another 30
days to send products to Cuba under the old rates
of duty.

Products which were in transit to Cuba and
products covered by consular invoices which had
been cleared by Cuban consulates before June 12,
1950, will apparently be allowed to enter Cuba
at the old rates of duty.

It is regretted that it was not possible to per-
suade the Cuban Government to grant more tnan
the 12-day notice which United States exporters
had that new rates of duty had been agreed upon.

U.S.-Argentina Sign Agreement
for Relief From Double Taxation

[Released to the press July 20]

On July 20, 1950, Secretary Acheson and Dr. Don
JerOnimo Remorino, Argentine Amiassador, signed and
exchanged notes constituting an agreement between the
United, States and Argentina for the avoidance, on. a
reciprocal basis, of double taxation on earnings derived
from the operation of ships and aircraft. The texts of
the two notes follow.

The State Department has received a complaint
from the Commerce and Industry Association of
New York charging that the Cuban Government
made effective on June 12, without advance notice,
the increased rates of duty on ribbons and trim-
mings, nylon hosiery, and rubber tires and tubes
agreed to by the United States in renegotiations
with Cuba which had recently been concluded.^
The Association urged that the Department re-
quest the Cuban Government for a 30-day grace
period before the increased rates of duty become
effective.

The matter has been discussed with representa-
tives of the Cuban Government who state that it
was necessary for the Cuban Government to make
the new rates of duty effective without the usual
30-day notice because imports into Cuba had in-
creased tremendously since notice was given that
renegotiations would be undertaken with Cuba
early in February of certain items in the Cuban
schedule IX of the General Agreement on Tariffs
and Trade." In addition to this notice, the De-
partment announced on February 7 that the rene-
gotiations of ribbons and trimmings, nylon ho-
siery, and rubber tires and tubes had begun on
February 6.^ The Cuban Government considers
that these announcements, together with the an-
nouncement of May 31, had given United States
exporters sufficient notice in the circumstances and
that certain Cuban industries had been adversely
affected by the considerable increase in imports

' BiTLi.ETiN of .Tune 12, 1950, p. 980.
' BuixETiN of Jan. 9, 19.^)0, p. 58.
" Bulletin of Feb. 20, 1950, p. 297.

216

ARGENTINE NOTE

[Translation]

I have the honor, in the name of the Government of
the Argentine Republic, to inform Your Excellency that,
with a view to the avoidance of double taxation of earn-
ings derived from the operation of ships and aircraft and
to promote trade with the United States of America, the
Argentine Government agrees to the following :

1. The Argentine Government, exercising the powers
conferred b.v Article 10 of Law No. 11,682 (text revised
in 1947), shall, on the basis of reciprocity, exempt from
tax on income and from any other tax on profits the
earnings of corporations organized in the United States
of America, or of individuals who are nationals of and
resident in the United States of America and are not
resident in Argentina, derived from the operation of ships
or aircraft documented or registered under the laws of
the United States of America which call at ports of
Argentina or land at airports in Argentina.

2. The expression "operation of ships or aircraft" means
the business, carried on by owners or charterers of ships
or aircraft, of transporting persons, including the embark-
ing and landing of passengers, and transporting articles,
including the loading and unloading thereof.

3. The expression "corporations organized in the United
States of America" means any stock company or other
juridical person organized in accordance with the laws
of the United States of America and the head office and
central administration of which are situated within the
territory of that country. The expression shall be deemed
to include also the Government of the United States of
America or any company or agency thereof.

4. The exemptions provided for in paragraph 1 shall
extend to all earnings derived from the operation of ships
or aircraft with respect to taxable years beginning on or
after .January 1, 1946. The Government of Argentina
may terminate this agreement by giving to the Govern-
ment of the United States of America notice in writing
six months in advance.

The Government of Argentina will consider this note,
together with a reply from Your Excellency confirming

Departmenf of S/afe Bulletin

that the Government of the United States of America
agrees to terms corresponding with those outlined above,
as constituting an agreement between the two Govern-
ments.

U. S. NOTE

I have the honor to aclcnowledge the receipt of Your
Excellency's note of this date, in which it is stated that,
witli a view to the avoidance of double taxation on earn-
ings derived from the operation of ships and aircraft and
to promote trade with the United States of America, the
Argentine Government agrees to exemption in the terms
stated in that note. Reciprocally, the Government of the
United States of America agrees to the following:

1. The Government of the United States of America, in
accordance with Sections 212 (b) and 231 (d) of the
United States Internal Revenue Code (as amended by
Public Law 514 approved May 4, 1948), shall, on the basis
of reclproiity, exempt from tax on income and from any
other tax on protits the earnings of corporations organized
in Argentina or of individuals who are nationals of and
resident in Argentina and are not resident in the United
States of America derived from the operation of ships or
aircraft, documented or registered under the laws of Ar-
gentina, which call at ports of the United States of
America or land at airports in the United States of
America.

2. The expression "operation of ships or aircraft" means
the business, carried on by owners or charterers of ships
or aircraft, of transporting persons, including the em-
barking and landing of passengers, and transporting
articles, including the loading and unloading thereof.

3. The expression "corporations organized in Argentina"
means any stock company or other juridical person or-
ganized in accordance with the laws of Argentina and
the head office and central administration of which are
situated within the territory of that country. The ex-
pression shall be deemed to include also the Government
of Argentina or any company or agency thereof.

4. The exemptions provided for in paragraph 1 shall
extend to all earnings derived from the operation of ships
or aircraft with respect to taxable years beginning on or
after January 1, 1046. The Government of the United
States of America may terminate this agreement by giv-
ing to the Government of Argentina notice in writing six
months in advance.

The Government of the United States of America will
consider Your Excellency's note above-mentioned, together
with this note in reply, as constituting an agreement be-
tween the two Governments.

Puerto Rico Authorized
To Write Own Constitution

Statement hy Secretary Acheson

[Released to the press Jiili/ 5]

A milestone in the democratic process in this
hemisphere has been eclipsed by the Korean situ-
ation. I refer to the bill which authorizes Puerto
Kico to write its own constitution and which Presi-
dent Truman signed on July 3.

August 7, 1950

897333—50 3

Governor Luis Munoz-lNIarin has already in-
structed the Insular Election Board to begin prep-
arations for an island-wide referendum as to
whether the constitution should be accepted. The
bill states that any Puerto Rican constitution
"shall provide a republican foi-m of government
and shall include a Bill of Rights." Since 1917,
the insular government has operated under the
Organic Act passed by Congress.

The present measure had the support of both
federal and insular administrations and biparti-
san support of both the Congress and the Insular
Legislature.

It is a recognition of the political maturity and
good citizenship of the Puerto Rican people and
is proof of our Government's democratic practice
of its democratic faith. It demonstrates the posi-
tive participation by the people of Puerto Rico,
of their own volition, in the functions and obliga-
tions of United States citizenship.

U.S.-Cuba To Renegotiate
Rates of Duty on Cotton Waste

[Released to the press 'July 20]

The Governments of Cuba and the United
States will begin on August 18, 1950, at Washing-
ton, the renegotiation of the Cuban rates of duty
applicable to cotton-wiping waste and cotton felt
or batting.

Interested persons are invited to express their
views orally or in writing regarding any aspect
of these negotiations to the Committee for Reci-
procity Information. Written communications
shoulcl be addressed to "The Chairman, Committee
for Reciprocity Information, Tariff Commission
Building, Washington 25, D. C", and, if possible,
10 copies of the statement or letter should be fur-
nished. The closing date for receiving views is
August 17, 1950.

At the time the General Agreement on Tariffs
and Trade was negotiated in 1947, cotton-wiping
waste was entered free of duty under Cuban tariff
item 112-B, and cotton felt or batting was entered
free of duty under either item 112-A or 112-B,
and the United States Government had understood
that such tariff treatment would continue under
the Agreement. However, the Cuban Govern-
ment has not agreed with this interpretation and
has reclassified these two products, making them
dutiable under item 128-D at 350 a kilogram.
Since it has not been possible to reach agreement
between the two Governments regarding the
proper tariff classification, it has been agreed to
negotiate the rates of duty which should be appli-
cable to them.

217

Visit of Australian Prime Minister

Statement hy Secretai-y Aches on
[Released to the press July 26]

Prime Minister Menzies of Australia is arriv-
ing in Washington tomorrow for a few days visit
during which he will call on the President and
other officials of this Government. The Prime
Minister's visit at this time is most welcome. We
appreciate the opportunity which it will afford
for the discussion of matters of common interest
ta owv two countries.

Relations between the United States and Aus-
tralia have been particularly friendly in the past
and are being further strengthened at the present
time by the close cooperaticm of Australian and
United States forces in Korea. Australia re-
sponded promptly to the United Nations Se-
curity Council resolutions and has already
supplied air and naval forces which have made an
effective contribution to the operations in Korea.
The Australian Government this morning an-
nounced that Australian ground forces will be
made available.

We also welcome the decision of the Australian
Government to postpone its plans to withdraw its
occupation forces in Japan.

U.S.-Union of South Africa To Sign
Supplementary Tax Protocols

[Released, to the press July i3]

According to information received by the De-
partment of State from the American Embassy
in the Union of South Africa, arrangements have
been completed for the signing on July 14, 1950,
by the plenipotentiaries of the United States and
the Union of South Africa, of two supplementary
tax protocols between the two countries. One of
the protocols supplements the income-tax conven-
tion of December 13, 1946, and the other supple-
ments the estate-tax convention of April 10, 1947.

As soon as possible after the receipt of the orig-
inals of the protocols from the American Embassy,
they will be submitted to the President for trans-
mission to the Senate for consideration, together
•with the conventions of 1946 and 1947, which are
now pending in the Senate Committee on Foreign
Eelations. It is expected that the texts of the
protocols will be made public by the Senate.^

Each of the supplementary protocols sets forth
certain modifications in, or additions to, the con-
vention to which it relates and will enter into

' Texts of the conventlims of 1946 and 1947 were made
public in S. Doc. fix. O and FF, respectively, SOtli Cong.,
1st sess.

force upon the exchange of instruments of rati-
fication and continue effective in accordance with
the convention provisions relating to duration.

The principal objective of the protocol relating
to income taxes is to broaden the scoiae of the ben-
efits to taxpayers under the 1946 convention
through exemptions or credits designed to elim-
inate double taxation as to income taxable both
by the United States and by the Union of South
Africa.

The protocol contains provisions relating to :

(1) Exemption from taxation of income de-
rived from the operation of ships and aircraft.

(2) Exemption from taxation, on certain con-
ditions, of earned income for personal services.

(3) Taxation of royalties from the operation of
mines, quarries, or natural resources and taxation
of rentals from real property.

(4) A clarification of article V (1) of the 1946
convention, regarding taxation of industrial and
commercial profits.

(5) Deletion of article XII of the 1946 conven-
tion.

(6) Amplification of article XIV of the 1946
convention relating to the exchange of informa-
tion.

(7) Revision of article XV of the 1946 conven-
tion so as to place a limitation on the giving of
assistance, under article XV, in the collection of
taxes.

The protocol relating to estate taxes contains
only one substantive article, whereby a limitation
is placed on the giving of assistance, under article
VIII of the 1947 convention, in the collection of
taxes.

Senator McCarthy's Accusations
on Files Distort Facts

[Released to the press July 12]

Senator McCarthy today made public a letter
to President Truman, transmitting what he de-
scribed as "proof" that the loyalty files of the
State Department had been stripped of derogatory
information in 1946.

This charge is absolutely false and constitutes
a characteristic distortion of facts. No derogatory
information concerning personnel of the Depart-
ment has been destroyed, and the Tydings sub-
committee has had, in each case referred to it, the
complete loyalty file. The so-called stripping
process which Senator McCarthy attributes to evil
and treacherous motives was actually a thorough-
going reorganization of the Department's person-
nel files — not its loyalty and security files — which
were and are separately maintained in a security
division wholly removed from the personnel
operation.

218

Department of State Bulletin

Furthermore, all persons engaged on the proj-
ect were under explicit instructions, in writing, as
follows :

AU investigative reports found in the personnel file
are to be removed and turned over to the supervisor for
return to the investigations unit [of the security division].

Remove all chronology sheets, medical certificates, or
requests for physical examination, reports of injury, en-
trance and exit interview sheets, and all confidential
material such as : reports on disciplinary actions and
derogatory remarks, and turn over to the supervisor. ;

The facts in the matter are as follows :

Contrary to the impression which Senator Mc-
Carthy seeks to convey, the 1946 files referred to
in his letter to the President and the attachments
were not the loyalty or security files of the Depart-
ment of State. They were the personnel files not
only of the several thousand old-line employees
of the Department but also of several thousand
more persons who had just been transferred to the
Department from wartime agencies.

The personnel files thus received were in various
forms, sizes, and conditions, making it imperative
to reorganize them into some new, unified system.
This project was undertaken solely from the stand-
point of management improvement and efficiency.

In order to provide a readily available personnel
record on each employee, a new filing system was
devised to accommodate the data necessary for
day-to-day personnel operations. This new sys-
tem entailed the removal, for transfer to more ap-
propriate repositories, of various other data not
necessary to those operations, such as duplicate
copies of investigation reports already in the se-
curity files of the Chief Special Agent's office (now
the Division of Security) ; confidential medical
reports ; credit complaints ; reports on disciplinary
actions, etc.

Moreover, all loyalty and security files trans-
ferred to the Department by the wartime agen-
cies were delivered by those agencies to the office
of the Chief Special Agent (now the Division of
Security). These files were never in the hands of
the personnel office.

To the Department's knowledge, the data culled
from the personnel files were not destroyed except
in the case of materials such as duplicate docu-
ments, routine interoffice transmittal sheets, super-
seded forms, etc.

Senator McCarthy makes the statement that
the files involved in the 1946 reorganization
process "became the present loyalty files" of the
Department and implies that they are the files
which the Tydings subcommittee has drawn upon
in its current review of State Department loyalty
cases. As indicated above, this is not true.

The statements contained in the affidavits sub-
mitted by Senator McCarthy as "proof" of his
allegation are cleai'ly based upon a misunderstand-
ing or lack of knowledge on the part of the authors
as to what was to be done with the material in
reorganizing the personnel folders.

The other charges contained in Senator Mc-
Carthy's letter to the President have been refuted
many times. Detailed analyses previously issued
by the Department are available through the Office
of the Special Assistant for Press Relations.

Events in Korea Emphasize
Need for Point 4 Program

Statement hy Ambassador Warren R. Austin

[Released to the press by the U. S. Mission to the V. N.
July 11]

Events in Korea have emphasized the need for
the Point 4 Program of technical assistance. This
act of aggression was carefully prepared. It in-
cluded giving the North Koreans intensive train-
ing in the use of mechanized equipment. The
Communists are using technical training for de-
structive purposes. The answer of the free world
must be to pursue with greater vigor than ever
before our goal of using technical training for con-
structive purposes.

Korea is another example of the persistent Com-
munist campaign to probe for areas of weakness.
Whenever they find such an area, they flock to it
like buzzards. The only final answer to this strat-
egy is to eliminate such areas, to create situations
in which people can choose the way of life they
wish to lead with calm and reason rather than in
terror and desperation.

I regard the Point 4 Program as one of the most
powerful weapons we have yet devised for attack-
ing areas of weakness. Through it, people who
now scratch the earth with sticks can be shown how
to use the plow ; people who are weak and diseased
can be shown the way to health and self-reliance.
People who barely know how to use a wheel in
peacetime can not be expected to use a machine
when attacked.

Today, it is necessary for us to spend American
lives to push back Communist aggi-ession in Korea.
A relatively small investment in the technical as-
sistance program can help avert loss of such lives
in the future and in other localities.

We are working through the United Nations
for the tranquillity of the world. Our national
dedication to this purpose involves responsibility
commensurate with our resources. Reason and
expediency require faithful participation in all
that it takes to remove the exposures and invita-
tions to Communist aggression.

During the past 2 weeks, the United States has
inspired the free world with its capacity for lead-
ership and service. In my opinion, "the world
rightly looks with concern upon the United States
for fulfillment of its contribution to technical
assistance.

Aogosf 7, 7950

219

Toward a Stronger World Organization

hy Francis H. Russell

Director, Office of Public Affairs ^

It is important at the outset of any discussion
of proposals for strengthening our international
institutions to separate the discussion into two
separate inquiries. The first is : What can be done
now to deal with the innnediate threat to peace
and freedom posed by Soviet communism? And
the second inquiry is this: What can be done after
we have eliminated the threat of Soviet aggression
to establisli institutions that will deal effectively
with future problems of peace and freedom and
security ?

This dichotomy in our inquiry is a matter of the
very first importance. If we do not separate these
two problems, we are in a double danger : the dan-
ger of misleading not only others but also ourselves
by implicit assumptions that federation offers a
solution to the Soviet problem; or the opposite
danger of becoming discouraged about the possi-
bilities of a longer term solution to the problem
of world organization because of the imminent and
peculiar nature of the threat of Soviet commu-
nism.

A lot of harm has been done by mixing these
two problems together or by considering one in
terms of the other. Not to be too specific about it,
a statement was made last October by an eminent
representative of an eminent organization before
an eminent committee of Congress in which the
first argmnent for world federation was the uncer-
tainties, the costs, and the dangers involved in our
present efforts to deal with the Soviet threat.

Soviet Disregard for Any World Government

Now, a person would be less than intelligent if
it did not occur to him, from time to time, that we
are living in an unsatisfactory world, a world
marked by a cold war which entails calculated
risks. No one wants risks of wax-, whether calcu-

1 An address dolivert>d before the United World Feder-
alists at Wastiingtou on July 7 and released to the press
on the same date.

lated or not. No one would likely view a continua-
tion of the tension between the Soviet world and
the free world, especially when it involves an
atomic arms race.

But it is dangerously misleading to recite these
dangers as an argument for world government.
For if there is one thing that is clear, it is that
the Soviet Union does not have, and has never had,
the slightest intention of joining in any plan of
world federation in any sense that would be ac-
ceptable to any believer in democracy. In fact,
it is precisely because the Soviet Union has its own
unbending ideas of how the entire world should be
organized that the tensions exist today.

The Soviet Union has her own complete blue-
print for world government worked out in the
most elaborate detail. She has what she regards
as a "science" of the means for bringing it about.
It is the extension to the entire world of the system
now operating behind the Iron Curtain. The
Soviet Union views with complete contempt the
entire philosophy underlying the proposals of the
United World Federalists as it does any other
democratic program. She has never had a mo-
ment's idea of giving any support to the proposals
of the United World Federalists, or of joining in
such a pattern of world government.

Any suggestion that the Soviet Union would
give a serious thought to this proposal betrays a
complete lack of understanding of the nature of
the problem that is posed for the world at the
present time by the Soviet Communist movement.
For this reason, any suggestion that some of the
countries in the free world should make an official
proposal of iminediate steps toward world feder-
ation (if by "world federation" you really mean
world federation ) is worse than merely unrealistic.

It is said that we cannot know before we make
such a proposal whether the Soviet Union would
accede to it and that in any event it would offer
some hope to the rest of the world. But we do
know whether the Soviet Union would accede to
the proposals. We know that she would not.

220

Department of State Bulletin

The events in Korea place an added stamp of cer-
tainty upon this knowledge. What we knew as a
result of the Soviet's cynical disregard of their
various agreements, from the threats against Iran
and Greece and Turkey, from the blockade in Ber-
lin, from the etforts to block economic recovery in
Western Europe, from the attitude of the Soviet
Union in the United Nations — all in complete
jjursuance of Soviet theorj^ — is now just so much
more beyond question.

The position that the Soviet Union has taken
toward the United Nations — her wild use of the
veto, the frustration of orderly meetings by end-
less and pointless discussion, the vilification and
diatribes directed against all people who do not
agree with her, the withdrawal of her representa-
tives from the various organs of the United Na-
tions— are all based not upon a conviction that
the United Nations is inadequate and should be
strengthened but are based upon an effort to frus-
trate and discredit any other pattern of world
organization than that of world communism.

But what about making the offer "just for the
record?" The Soviet Union knows the determi-
luition of the people of the United States to create
effective international organizations. She can
have no doubt on that score. And she has stated
explicitly that she would regard any effort to
strengthen the United Nations, such as a modifica-
tion of the veto, as an unfriendly act. So we know
how the Soviet Union would react to any official
l^roposal for a world government at tliis time.

But what about the reaction of other countries
to such an offer? It would almost certainly be a
reaction of bewilderment that the United States
could make such a suggestion in the light of the
present attitudes and policies of the Soviet Union.
And, in the light of the futility of such an offer, it
would create doubts concerning our wholehearted
support of international cooperative efforts in
their present available form.

Chances for World Government
Without Soviet Union

But, then, we must ask, "If world government
with the Soviet Union is not possible, should we
not proceed to form a 'world federation' without
the Soviet Union ?" Let us recognize immediately
that the arguments for doing this are exactly the
opposite of the arguments for a world government
in which the Soviet Union would participate.
The arguments for an over-all world government
are that that is the only way to avoid a power
race. The arguments for a world government
without the Soviet Union are that it will enable
us to be more effective in such a race.

But would a "world federation" without the
Soviet Union really increase the ability of the
free world to maintain its freedom? Things that
are doubtful, my grandfather used to say, are very
uncertain. And this would appear to be one of
those things. In the first place, the practical

problems of setting up a general federation of
nations and the likelihood of sharp differences
concerning its general outline and innumerable
details would distract the free world from its pres-
ent overriding job. Moreover, it is at least ques-
tionable, in fact highly questionable, whether any-
where near all of the non-Connnunist countries
would join in a general world federation whose
main purpose was to further the struggle against
the encroachments of the Soviet Union. Not all
of the free countries have supported the action
of the United Nations when the issue was recently
presented suddenly and dramatically. A number
of countries which have supported the United
Nations Security Council votes have stated that
that was the limit to which they were prepared
to go. If we, therefore, try to convert the United
Nations at this point into a tighter federation, we
should lose and not gain in the extent and .strength
of our common effort. Other machinery that is
available and can be more easily and quickly
devised is more effective for our present needs.

Revising U.N. To Settle Issues in Cold War

That brings us to another point that was made
in the statement of last October that I referred to ;
that is the suggestion that "the proposal to revise
the United Nations must be combined with a will-
ingness to negotiate a general settlement of the
specific issues in the cold war." The argument for
a general settlement is pursued in greater detail
in an article in the May 1950 issue of the Bulletin
of the Atomic Scientists.

This article points out that the traditional
method of settling peacefully a conflict between
two nations has been to divide disputed territory
which belongs to neither but in wliich both have
an interest into spheres of influence and thus to
satisfy, at least in part, the interests of both sides.
The difficulty with this method is that Soviet dog-
ma is not concerned with territory. It is con-
cerned with people and the people that it wishes
to dominate are all the people of the earth. The
Soviet Union has made it plain that she will never
cease her efforts before she has secured domination
over all the world's population; as Stalin put it
in the official text book of the Communist Party,
the Conmiunist goal is "the victory of Communism
throughout the world."

General Agreement With Soviets
Would Be Mere Illusion

The whole argument for a negotiated general
settlement with the Soviet Union is premised upon
the assumption that the Soviet Union would be
willing for a period of time to operate happily
within its sphere of influence and let the free world
operate within its sphere. As far as it is possible
to be certain of anything in an uncertain world, it
is certain that the Soviet Union would never for a
single moment give up her fanatical efforts to

Augusf 7, 7950

221

bring all of the world under the Soviet sphere of
influence. She would merely utilize any general
agreement for the purpose of consolidating her
strength within her own sphere of influence as a
base for a further attack upon the free world.

There would not be a single second's time be-
tween the signino; of the agreement and the be-
ginning of the effort to subvert the remainder of
the free world. All of the tension, all of the dan-
gers, all of the unsatisfactory conditions that now
exist, would continue between the two new spheres
of influence. To believe that we could achieve a
respite is pure wishful thinking. Tlie Soviet
Union might perhaps go through the formality
of sucli an agreement because it would give a le-
gality and finality to her present domination, be-
cause it would bring liopelessness to people who
are still struggling for their freedoms, and because
it would promote apathy and a false sense of
security in the free world. Indeed it is precisely
because the people who propose a general agree-
ment desire to lessen the international tension that
the Soviet Union would be justified in counting
on such apathy.

It is difficult to see how there can be a "general
agreement" with anyone whose single-minded ob-
jective is to extinguish you. If it is a dispute over
boundaries, or battleships, or trading rights, or
colonies, then, a general agreement is common
sense. For that reason, history is studded with
general agreements. But if the issue is whether
one i^ower shall be permitted to proceed with the
universal establishment of a way of life that ex-
tinguishes all freedom, that is based >ipon absolute
authoritarianism, that brooks no slightest ques-
tioning or opposition, then, it is difficult to see
how a general agreement can be arrived at — un-
less it is a general surrender.

You can sometimes agree with the Soviet Union
on details of clay-to-day living, you can agree,
for whatever it may be worth, on the extent of
communication that you have with Berlin, on the
number of pouches that are permitted to go to
your embassy, but you cannot have a general agree-
ment with the Soviet Union because you either
are agreeing to your own extinction or the extinc-
tion of your freedoms — or you are not getting a
general agreement at all, merely the illusion of
one.

But then the question arises, "Suppose the free
world succeeds in saving South Korea, in saving
Iran, and Greece, and Turkey, and Berlin, in re-
sisting further Soviet encroachments. Wliat
then? Have we nothing to look forward to ex-
cept the continuing alternative of a third world
war or an indefinite continuation of the tension
of the cold war?"

Security Factors That Will Lessen
International Tension

There is another alternative. The objective of
the free world is to erect a stone wall against

222

aggression by strengthening the free forces in the
world through the programs of economic and mili-
tary cooperation, by the various regional instru-
ments that are being developed, by the defense of
Korea, by using and strengthening the United
Nations.

In the atmosphere of security resulting from the
success of these efforts a number of factors can
come into operation. We can have no guaranty,
but there is a good probability of some of them,
and a possibility of all of them, occurring.

These are some of the factors that could operate
to bring about an eventual lessening of interna-
tional tension :

1. Three-fourths of the productive capacity of
the world is in the hands of free people. With
the superior efficiency of the free world, a higher
standard of living can be created — is being cre-
ated— that will, over a period of time, have a
strong attraction for people on the other side.

2. The United States as the leader of the free
forces of the world is contributing to the eco-
nomic health of other countries through the Euro-
pean Recovery Program, the Export-Import
Bank, its contributions to the specialized agencies,
and in other ways. The Soviet Union is draining
the countries within her orbit. These facts will
gradually sink in and be given weight.

3. The monolithic state sometimes works in the
short run; but, over longer periods of time, the
effort of the Kremlin to make all decisions affect-
ing the daily lives of hundreds of millions of peo-
ple over vast stretches of territory will result in
stresses and strains and progressive disintegration.

4. A monolithic organization of economic life,
militating against trade with other areas and
against cooperation with the agencies of the world
that ai*e promoting health, agi'icultural produc-
tion, education, and the exchange of goods, will
tend to result in a lowered standard of living.

5. Under the free way of life, each people has
its own culture, its own economic system, its own
political institutions, which are more attractive
than the enforced uniformity imposed by Moscow.

6. In the long history of tyrannies, the death of
the leader has often released personal ambitions,
causing a weakening of the monolithic structure.

7. The strong attraction of human freedom
even — or perliaps especially — in an area where it is
rigidly eliminated, provides a disruptive force
against any regime that denies it.

In short, if our convictions are sound, if the
democratic process is more in accord with the basic
realities of human nature than total regimentation,
it will, given the opportunity, prove itself. The
steady and relentless operation of innumerable
factors such as those I have just mentioned will
result, in time — if the free world makes the most
of its opportunity — in either a recognition on the
part of Soviet leaders of the necessity of a change
in their attitude toward the rest of the world or in
a disintegration of the Soviet system and its sup-

Deparfment of State Bulletin

planting by one which would be based on dif-
ferent premises of international relationships.
Either of these eventualities would be a victory for
freedom and for peace.

The free nations of the world made an all-out
effort during and following the war to work out
with the Soviet Union a world situation in which
all peoples could live together on a "live and let
live" basis, each determining for itself what kind
of political, economic, and social order it wished.
Tliat effort failed. The Soviet Union insisted on
attempting to extend her own system by force,
by intrigue, by subversion, and by planned chaos
and want. What the free nations of the world are
doing today is to create through strength the basic
situation that they were unable to create by agree-
ment.

Does this argument mean, then, that all talk
about the nature of a more desirable form of world
government is futile? It means only, I suggest,
that there must be an awareness of the timing and
the conditions in which such proposals can be
efi'ected.

Essential Foundations of True Federation

And, so, we come to the second basic question
that I mentioned : what can be done in a world that
would no longer be menaced by Soviet aggression
to establish effective institutions for dealing with
the problems of peace and security?

In talking about federation, we shall not go
amiss if we consult the greatest of all authorities
on federation, the authors of The Federalist. We
can learn many things from them, but there are
two or three that I should like to mention this
evening. The first is the answer to the question :
"What are the essential foundations of a true fed-
eration ?" The second Federalist paper deals with
this question. It is entitled "The True Basis of
a Federal Union." In it, Hamilton wrote,

Independent America is not composed of detached and
distant territories, but of one connected, fertile, wide-
spreading country. Providence has been pleased to give
this one connected country to one united people — a people
descended from the same ancestors, spealjing the same
language, professing the same religion, attached to the
same principles of government, very similar in their man-
ners and customs.

Now, none of the conditions mentioned in The
Federalist as reasons for applying a system of
federation to the group of states on the eastern sea-
board of North America exist as between the
countries of the world today. The people of the
United States and the Soviet Union — to take only
2 of the 80 or more countries of the world — are not
descended from the same ancestors, they do not
speak the same language, they do not profess the
same religion, they are not attached to the same
principles of government, and they are not similar
in their manners and customs.

Would the authors of The Federalist expect the
principles of federation, which they expounded, to
apply with any exactness to the problems of the

present-day world? We may well question
whether the American people are — or should be —
prepared to put the power of levying taxas upon
them, or of regulating immigration, to mention
just two examples, in the hands of a world con-
gress in which persons whose standard of living
averages only a fraction of our own standard of
living would outnumber us by more than ten to
one. Could this discrepancy in voting power be
taken care of by a system of weighted voting?
Possibly. But are we prepared to look the resi-
dents of China in the face and tell them that we
want a system of voting in which each American
would have a full vote and each resident of China
a tenth of a vote ?

Does this mean that we toss The Federalist out
the window? I think not. In fact, I think the
answer to our problem is to be found in The Fed-
eralist. Let us take a look at the ninth paper
where we read :

The science of politics, like most other sciences, has
received great improvement. The etflcacy of various prin-
ciples is now well understood, which were either not
known at all, or imperfectly known to the ancients. The
regular distribution of power into distinct departments;
the introduction of legislative balances and checks ; the
institution of courts composed of judges holding their
offices during good behavior ; the representation of the
people in the legislature by deputies of their own election ;
these are wholly new discoveries, or have made their prin-
cipal progress towards perfection in modern times.

Let US take a look at paper number 14. Here
we read :

Is It not the glory of the people of America, that, whilst
they have paid a decent regard to the opinions of former
times and other nations, they have not suffered a blind
veneration for antiquity, for custom, or for names, to
overrule the suggestions of their own good sense, the
knowledge of their own situation, and the lessons of their
own experience? To this manly spirit, posterity will be
indebted for the possession, and the world for the example,
of the numerous innovations displayed on the American
theatre, in favor of private rights and public happiness.
Had no important step been taken by the leaders of the
Revolution for which a precedent could not be discovered,
no government established of which an exact model did
not present itself, the people of the United States might,
at this moment, have been numbered among the melan-
choly victims of misguided councils, must at best have been
laboring under the weight of some of those forms which
have crushed the liberties of the rest of mankind. Happily
for America, happily, we trust, for the whole human race,
they pursued a new and more noble course. They accom-
plished a revolution which has no parallel in the annals
of human society. They reared the fabrics of governments
which have no model on the face of the globe.

Here, I think, is the advice that we modern-day
federalists must follow. We must do what they
did in 1787. We must learn from the past, not
ape it. We must size up our present problem,
analyze its elements, search wide and deep for new
means and new instruments and new variations of
old instruments.

I shall not be so presumptuous as to try to per-
form that task tonight. But I would like to men-
tion one example. Hamilton reviewed some
developments in the science of government that

Augosf 7, J 950

223

he and his colleagues had drawn upon. Have any
developments in the science of government ap-
peared since Hamilton's time that we can draw
upon? Hamilton had never heard of a TVA or
an SEC or an EGA — or anything remotely re-
sembling them. The concept of a governmental
agency or authority of this type and scope is a
creation of our own time.

But this concept has already been utilized in
efforts to deal with some of our international prob-
lems. The Security Council and the General
Assembly used the agency concept in their pro-
posals for achieving security against atomic
weapons. It seems reasonably clear that if an
international atomic energy authority, along the
lines indicated by these United Nations proposals,
could be set up, we would have a large measure
of security against atomic warfare.

Similarly, the same concept was adopted by
Mr. Schuman, the French Foreign Minister, as
the basis of his far-reaching proposals dealing
with the heavy industry of Western Eurojie, and
dealing incidentally with the ancient conflict be-
tween France and Germany and the integi'ation of
Europe as a whole.

We have not been able to obtain the agreement
of the Soviet Union to meet the problem of atomic
security in this way, nor has the Schuman plan
been worked out and put into operation. But it
seems reasonably certain that arrangements of this
kind are more likely of early accomplishment
than would be a world federal legislature with the
powers usually granted to such a body. The con-
cept of international authorities and agencies is
by no means the only answer to all the problems
of international organization. But it is an in-
stance of one of many approaches that we need
to examine.

Certainly the United World Federalists is right
in saying that we shall need a stronger and more
effective international assembly or legislature.
We shall need international courts with greater
jurisdiction. We shall need improved methods of
carrying out decisions of both the assembly and
the courts.

The task of working out the details for an im-
proved pattern of international cooperation is not
one that can be handled by calling a conference
and turning the problem over to it. The prob-
lems are too complex; there are too many com-
promises of a most vital and far-reaching nature
to be arrived at. It took several years of prep-
aration to rough out the provisions of a United
Nations Charter as a basis for the Dumbarton
Oaks and San Francisco conferences. It will take
at least as long to do the same for any charter
based upon the principles of federation. Ah in-
ternational conference can succeed only if ade-
quate pi-el iminary work has been done. That kind
of work has not yet been done on the problems
involved in world federation.

Here, there is another lesson that we can learn
from Hamilton and Madison : that is the necessity

for the most detailed examination of our situation,
our problems, and possible solutions to those prob-
lems. Anyone who reads The Federalist is struck
by the paucity of general principles and by the
wealth of hard-headed, practical, detailed analy-
sis. The papers deal with the "terrific trifles."
They examine human nature. They look at the
balance sheets of industry and trade.

We have tended to assume at times that because
the men of 1787, as a result of that kind of work,
came up with a particular set of answers to their
own particular problems, those answers are the
answers to our problems. Madison and Hamilton
would never agi-ee for a moment with that.

In sjiite of present Soviet objectives and Soviet
tactics, many things can be done. Some of them
are dramatic, such as the action of the United
Nations Security Council on Korea. The historic
action of the Security Council of the United Na-
tions in invoking military sanctions to deal with
the Communist aggression against Korea is a mile-
stone in the development of effective international
cooi)eration.

Some of the things that need to be done are
humdrum and undramatic : the work of preparing
for the 20 or more meetings of the United Na-
tions, the specialized agencies, and the regional or-
ganizations that take place every day ; the thinking
that must go into planning for improvements in
the international machinery; the education to as-
sure adequate public understanding of these issues.
At the present time, only one out of every four or
five Americans favors an attempt to set up world
government now. At least half of the people of
the country have no conception of what establish-
ment of world government would involve. Much
less than half of those really understand the full
implications.

We have a great task ahead of us. It is encour-
aging that people by the thousands are facing up
to that task. There is one lesson of history we can
safely count upon. If we face our problem with
sufficient vigor and imagination, we shall find the
answer.

Ambassador Katz Appointed to N AC Committee

The Department of State announced on July 17
that Ambassador Milton Katz, recently appointed
United States special representative in Europe
(EGA), has today been appointed the United
States representative on the North Atlantic De-
fense Financial and Economic Committee. Mr.
Katz will fill this post in addition to his other pres-
ent duties. He succeeds Averell Harriman, who
has been appointed special assistant to the Presi-
dent.

The Defense Financial and Economic Commit-
tee has the responsibility of advising the North
Atlantic Council on the financial and economic
aspects of plans for the defense of the North At-
lantic area.

224

Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Calendar of fVIeetings '

Adjourned During July 1950

United Nations:

Seventh Session, Trusteeship Council Lake Success June 1-July 1

Ilo (International Labor Organization) : 33d International Labor Con- Geneva June 7-July 1

ference.
UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organiza-
tion) :

Seminar on Adult Education Salzburg, Austria . . . June 18- July 29

IcAO Council: Eleventh Session Montreal June 22-June 29

Caribbean Commission: Tenth Meeting Martinique June 26-July 1

Sugar Council, International: Meeting of Special Committee London June 2(>-July 19

Electric Systems, International Conference on Large High Tension: 13th Paris June 29-July 8

Biennial Session.

Maritime Signaling Services Conference Paris July 3-15

International Organization for Standardization, Meeting of the Council . Geneva July 3-7

Thirteenth International Conference on Public Education Geneva July 6-14

General Assembly of the International Union of Biological Sciences . . . Stockholm July 7-11

International Congress of Private Law Rome July 8-16

Eighth International Congress of Agricultural Industries Brussels July 9-15

Fao (Food and Agriculture Organization) :

International Meeting on Dairy Technology Reading, England . . . July 10-22

Fourth World Power Conference London July 10-15

Seventh International Botanical Congress Stockholm July 12-20

North Atlantic Council: Military Production and Supply Board .... Copenhagen July 12-13

Fifth International Congress of Scientific Research and Social Struggle Paris July 17-22

Against Cancer.

Sixteenth International Congress of Ophthalmology London July 17-21

Second Meeting of the International Commission for the Regulation of Oslo July 17-26

Whaling.

Fourth Assembly, World Organization of the Teaching Profession . . . Ottawa July 17-22

Third International Conference of the Legal Profession London July 19-26

Sixth International Congress of Radiology London July 23-29

Sixth International Pediatrics Congress Zurich July 24—28

International Conference of Social Work, Fifth General Meeting .... Paris July 23-28

Mine Safety Research Stations, Sixth International Conference of Directors Paris July 24-29

of.

Surplus Population and Migration, Tripartite Committee on London or Paris .... July 18 or 28

Second Pan American Seminar on Gastroenterologists Sao Paulo July 23-29

In Session as of July 31, 1950

United Nations:

Advisory Council for Libya Tripoli April 11-

Second Session, International Law Commission Geneva June 5-

Economic and Social Council: Eleventh Session Geneva July 3-

National Capital Sesquicentennial Celebration Washington, D.C. . . . April 15-

Itu (International Telecommunication Union) : Third International High Rapallo, Italy .... May 8-
Frequency Broadcasting Conference.

U.S. Economic Survey Mission to the Philippines Manila July 7-

• Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.

August 7, 1950 225

Calendar of Meetings Continued

In Session as of July 31, 1950 — Continued

UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organiza-

Seminar on the Improvement of (History) Textbooks Brussels July 12-

Seminar on the Teaching of Geography as a Means of Developing Inter- Montreal July 12-

national Understanding.

Seminar on the Role of Public and School Libraries in Adult Education . Malmo, Sweden . . . . July 24-

Soil Science, Fourth International Congress Amsterdam July 24-

International Institute of Administrative Sciences: Eighth International Florence July 25-

Congress.

Council of Deputies, North Atlantic Treaty Organization London July 25-

Congress of the International Union for Prevention of Venereal Disease . Zurich July 29-

Scheduled August 1-October 31, 1950

Seventh International Assembly of the International College of Surgeons . Buenos Aires Aug. 1-

World Conference of University Women Zurich Aug. 3-

Meeting of Drug Manufacturing Countries, and Joint Meeting of Repre- Geneva Aug. 7-

sentatives of Principal Opium Producing and Drug Manufacturing (1 wk. each)

Countries.

First United States International Trade Fair Chicago Aug. 7-

Eleventh International Exhibition of Cinematographic Art Venice Aug. 8-

Radio and Television Exhibition Copenhagen Aug. 11-

Twelfth Congress of the International Penal and Penitentiary Com- The Hague Aug. 13-

mission.

International Congress of the History of Science Amsterdam Aug. 14-

Eighteenth International Physiological Congress Copenhagen Aug. 15-

Fifth International Congress" on Microbiology Rio de Janeiro .... Aug. 17-

United Nations:

Special Committee on Information Transmitted under Article 73(e) of Lake Success Aug. 18-

the Charter.
Economic and Social Council:

Commission on Narcotic Drugs: Fifth Session Lake Success Aug. 21-

Subcommission on Statistical Sampling: Fourth Session Lake Success Sept. 5

Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East, Regional Conference Bangkok September

of Statisticians.

EcAFE, Technical Conference on Flood Control Simla, India Oct. 30-

Permanent Central Opium Board: 56th Session Narcotic Drugs Geneva Oct. 31-

Supervisory Body: 35th Session and 4th Joint Session of Pcob and
Ndsb.

General Assembly: Fifth Session Lake Success Sept. 19-

Edinburgh Film Festival Edinburgh Aug. 20-

Izmir International Trade Fair Izmir Aug. 20-

Eighth Convention of Speech and Voice Disorders Amsterdam Aug. 21-

Itu (International Telecommunication Union) :

Fifth Session, Administrative Council Geneva Aug. 21-

Extraordinary Administrative Radio Conference The Hague Sept. 25-

First International Congress on Archives Paris Aug. 23-

Vineyards and Wine, Sixth International Congress on Athens Aug. 23-

International Federation for Housing and Town Planning: 20th Inter- Amsterdam Aug. 27-

national Congress.

Conference of International Union of Family Organizations Helsinki Aug. 28-

Ninth International Congress of the Historical Sciences Paris Aug. 28-

Ilo-Who Meeting of Joint Committee on Industrial Hygiene Geneva Aug. 28-

First International Conference on Alcohol and Traffic Stockholm Aug. 30-

International Conference of Mathematicians Cambridge, Mass. . . . Aug. 30-

World Federation for Mental Health: Third Annual Meeting Paris Aug. 31-

Second Congress, International Union of Architects Warsaw Sept. 3-

First World Congress of Cardiology Paris Sept. 3-

Eleventh Congress of the International Union Against Tuberculosis . . . Copenhagen Sept. 3-

Seventh International Congress of Cell Biology New Haven, Conn. . . Sept. 4-

Historiography and Documentation of World War II, International Con- Amsterdam Sept. 5-

ference on.

Third North American Regional Broadcasting Conference: Second Session Washington, D.C. . . . Sept. 6-

Mixed Commission on Ionosphere Brussels Sept. 6-

Fifth Annual Meeting of the Boards of Governors, International Bank for Paris Sept. 6-

Reconstruction and Development, and International Monetary Fund.

XXXIX General Assembly, Interparliamentary Union ........ Dublin Sept. 7-

Sixth Triennial Conference of the Country Women of the World .... Copenhagen Sept. 9-

Levant Fair Bari, Italy Sept. 9-

Second International Congress of Criminology Paris Sept. 10-

Ninth General Assembly, International Scientific Radio Union Zurich Sept. 11-

Marseille International Fair Marseille Sept. 16-

First International Congress on Diseases of the Chest Rome Sept. 17-

First International Exhibition of Applied Electricity (in connection with the Bologna, Italy Sept. 17-

100th Anniversary of the Birth of Augusto Righi Celebration).

226 Deparfmenf of Sfafe BulleI'm

Calendar of Meetings Continued

Scheduled August 1-October 31, 1950 — Continued

Fao (Food and Agriculture Organization) :

Meeting of Fisheries Technologists

Meeting of Herring Technology

Pan American Sanitary Organization, Fourth Session of Directing . . .

Council.
Gatt (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade) :

Third Round of Tariff Negotiations of Contracting Parties

Fifth Session, North Atlantic Council

Pakistan International Industries Fair

Pan American Institute of Geography and History:

Fifth Consultation of Commission on Cartography

Second Consultation of Commission on Geography

Second Consultation of Commission on History

Fifth General Assembly

Pan American Sanitary Conference, Thirteenth

International Council for Exploration of the Sea

International Conference on Ways and Means of Combating Plant Para-
sites.

Third Pan American Conference on Leprosy

Sixth Inter-American Press Congress

IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) :

Rules of the Air Traffic Control Division: Fourth Session

Middle East Regional Air Navigation Meeting: Second Session . . .

Seventh Pan American Railway Congress

Sixth Session, South Pacific Commission

Fourth Session of the International Wheat Council

Central and South African Transport Conference

International Anti-Locust Conference

Third Pan American Congress of Physical Education

♦Tentative.

Bergen, Norway .
Bergen, Norway .
Ciudad Trujillo .

Torquay, England
United States . .
Karachi, Pakistan

Santiago . . .
Santiago . . .
Santiago . . .
Santiago . . .
Ciudad Trujillo
Copenhagen
Rome ....

Buenos Aires .
New York City

Montreal

Mexico City

Noumea, New Cale-
donia.

London

Johannesburg

New Delhi

Montevideo

Sept. 30-
Sept. 24-
Sept. 25-

Sept. 28-

September*

September

Oct. 2-
Oct. 2-
Oct. 2-
Cct. 2-
Oot. 2-
Oct. 2-
Oct. 3-

Oct. 8-
Oct. 8-

Oct. 10-
Oct. 17-
Oct. 10-
Oct. 20-

Oct. 24*-
Oct. 25-
October
October

U.S. Delegations to International Conferences

Public Education

The Department of State announced on July 5
that the United States delegation to the Thir-
teenth International Conference on Public Educa-
tion, convening at Geneva on July 6, is as follows :

Chairman

Clyde A. Erwin, Ph.D., superintendent of Public In-
struction of North Carolina, Raleigh

Delegates

J. Harold Goldthorpe, Ph.D., specialist in exchange of
teachers, Division of International Educational Re-
lations, United States Office of Education, Federal
Security Agency

Ruth E. McMurry, Ph. D., program analyst, Unesco Re-
lations Staff, Department of State

The Thirteenth International Conference on
Public Education is one of a series of conferences
sponsored annually by the International Bureau
of Education and the United Nations Educational,
Scientific and Cultural Organization (Unesco).
The purpose of the Conference is to provide an
opportunity for the comparative examination of
recent developments in public education adminis-
tration and methods.

In order to make possible a review of the edu-
cational questions, which have been of chief con-
cern to school authorities during the school year
1949-50, each participating country has been re-
quested to submit for discussion a brief report on
educational trends. The principal points to be
covered in the reports are : school administration,
school organization, curricula, teaching methods,
teaching staflf, and auxiliary and out-of-school
services.

Questions relating to the introduction of mathe-
matics in primary schools will be discussed. As
the Conference has already, in its last two ses-
sions, dealt with the problems of learning to read
and to write, the forthcoming session will, through
its consideration of mathematics, complete a study
of the three basic techniques of all instruction.

The other subjects which will be considered at
length at the forthcoming Conference are the
teaching of handicrafts in secondary schools and
the international exchange of teachers. With re-
spect to the teaching of handicrafts in the second-
ary schools, the Conference will have documents
assembled by the International Bureau of Edu-
cation, in connection with an inquiry initialed in
1941, as well as a report prepared by the Inter-

August 7, 1950

227

national Bureau, which contains data on the place
of handicrafts in the curriculum, the aims of
handicraft teaching, and handicraft syllabus,
methods of teaching, and equipment and materials
needed for handicraft instruction. The inter-
change of teachers will be considered in the light
of a resolution of the fourth session of the General
Conference of the United Nations Educational,
Scientitic and CuUural Organizations which in-
structed the Director-General to take steps to fa-
cilitate the interchange of teachers among mem-
bers of UNESCO and in the light of requests being
received by Unesco from underdeveloped areas
for aid in recruiting teachers and professors for
schools and colleges in many fields.

Fourth World Power Conference

The Department of State announced on July 7
that the Fourth World Power Conference will
open at London on July 10 with the following
United States Government delegation in attend-
ance:

Delefiate

Wlliiam E. Warne, Assistant Secretary of the Interior

Technical Otservers

E. Robert deLuccia, Chief, Bureau of Power, Federal
Power Commi.ssion

E>Ferett Eslick, Assistant Chief, Power Branch, Economic
Cooperation Administration, Paris

Gail A. Hathaway, Special Assistant, Corps of Engineers,
Department of the Army

The World Power Conference, established at
London in 1924, is a federation of national com-
mittees, the purpose of which is to provide a means
for international discussion of the technical, eco-
nomic, and social problems arising out of the devel-
opment, use, and management of natural resources,
and especially of electric power. National com-
mittees are composed of representatives of govern-
ments, scientific, technical, and industrial organi-
zations, and individual interests concerned with
power. At the present time, national committees
are organized in approximately 46 countries.

Gano Dunn, President of the J. G. ^\niite En-
gineering Corporation, New York City, is chair-
man of the United States National Committee.
The United States Committee has designated Col.
H. S. Bennion, Vice-President, Edison Electric Li-
stitute, New York City, to represent it officially
at the Conference.

The theme of the Fourth Conference will be
"World Energy Resources and the Production of
Power," and technical sessions will be held on the
following subjects: energy resources and power
developments, preparation of fuels, and produc-
tion of power. Following the technical sessions,
there will be a number of study tours of installa-
tions such as petroleum refineries and research sta-
tions, power stations, and collieries.

Improvement of Textbooks (UNESCO)

The Department of State announced on July 11
that the United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization is sponsoring an inter-
national seminar on improvement of textbooks,
particularly history books, which will be held at
Brussels from July 12 to August 23. The United
States delegation is as follows:

Cliairman

Mary G. Kelty, author, lecturer, and school consultant,
Washington, D.C.

Delegates

Howard R. Anderson, chief, Instructional Problems —
Secondary, Division of Elementary and Secondary
Schools, United States Office of Education, Washing-
ton, D.C.

Emma L. Bolzau, head. Social Studies Department, South
Philadelphia High School for Girls, Philadelphia, Pa.

Emerson L. Brown, senior associate editor, Harcourt,
Brace and Company, New Tork

Ryland W. Crary, associate professor of history, Teachers
College, Columbia University, New York

The seminar is expected to make a comparative
study of the systems in use in various countries
for selecting history and other textbooks ; the pro-
duction, presentation, and employment of text-
books in various countries ; and bilateral and mul-
tilateral agreements concerning textbooks. An-
other aim of the seminar is to make a special study
of methods adopted or suggested for the analysis
and improvement of textbooks as aids to interna-
tional understanding. Attention will be given
also to: technical and professional problems com-
mon to writers and users of textbooks ; educational
and psychological problems related to the im-
provement of international understanding through
textbooks ; and the production of studies, bibliog-
rapliies, and other materials for use in campaigns
for improving textbooks.

Ophthalmology

The Department of State announced on July 14
that the president of the American Ophthalmology
Society, John Hughes Dunnington, and Arthur
S. Osborne, science attache, American Embassy,
London, have been designated United States del-
egates to the sixteenth International Congress of
Ophthalmology to be held at London from July
17-21, 1950.

The main subjects for discussion are: the role
of the sympathetic system in the genasis of vas-
cular hypertension and its effect upon the eye, and
the clinical and social aspects of heredity in
ophthalmology. One of the features of the Con-
gress will be a series of exhibitions of scientific,
pathological, and historical interest. There will
be a display of modern books and facilities for
clinical demonstrations. The Congress is expected
to include also a trade exhibition, in which exam-
ples of the most modern types of instruments will
be on view, and a display concerned with the in-
dustrial side of ophthalmology.

228

Department of State Bulletin

Role of Libraries in Adult Education

The Department of State annoiuiced on July 20
that tlie following United States delegation will
attend the United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization (Unesco) Seminar on
the Role of Libraries in Adult Education at
Malmo, Sweden, from July 2-i-August 19 :

Chairman

Ralph Munn, director, Carnegie Library, Pittsburgh, Pa.

Delegates

Fern Long, supervisor. Adult Education Department,
Cleveland Public Library, Cleveland, Ohio.

Helen V. Steiubarger, adult education consultant. Dis-
trict of Columbia Public Library, Washington, D. C.

Unesco is conducting this seminar for the pur-
pose of studying and discussing techniques of
library service and cooperation with adult educa-
tion agencies and social groups with a view to stim-
ulating the development of library educational
services in all Unesco member states.

Soil Science

The Department of State announced on July 20
that the United States delegation to the fourth
international Congress of Soil Science, which will
be held at Amsterdam from July 24-August 1,
is as follows :

Chairman

Charles Edwin Kellogg, Ph.D., chief. Division of Soil
Survey, Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils and Agri-
cultural Engineering, Agricultural Research Adminis-
tration, Department of Agriculture

Vice Chairman

Richard Bradfield, Ph.D., head, Department of Agronomy,
Cornell University Ithaca, N. Y.

Delegates

James Kenneth Ableiter, chief soil correlator. Bureau
of Plant Industry, Soils and Agricultural Engineering,
Agricultural Research Administration, Department of
Agriculture

Firman Edward Bear, Ph.D., head. Department of Soils,
Rutgers University, New Brunswick, N. J.

Francis Eugene Clark, Ph.D., bacteriologist. Bureau of
Plant Industry, Soils and Agricultural Engineering,
Agricultural liesearch Administration, Department
of Agriculture

Ralpli Waldo Cummings, Ph.D., associate director. Agri-
cultural Experiment Station, North Carolina State
College, Raleigh, N. C.

Sterling Brown Hendricks, Ph. D., head soil scientist.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils and Agricultural
Engineering, Agricultural Research Administration,
Department of Agriculture

Roy Douglas Hockensmith, chief. Soil Conservation Sur-
veys Division, Soil Conservation Service, Department
of Agriculture

Professor Hans Jenny, University of California, Berkeley,
Calif.

Walter Pearson Kelly, Ph.D., emeritus professor of
soils, University of California, Berkeley, Calif.

Harold Carl Knoblauch, Ph.D., assistant chief. Office of
Experiment Stations, Agricultural Research Adminis-
tration, Department of Agriculture

Charles Edmund Marchall, Ph.D., professor of soils, Uni-
versity of Missouri, Columbia, Mo.

Harold Edwin Myers, Ph.D., head, Department of
Agronomy, Kansas State College, Manhattan, Kans.

Arthur Geoffrey Norman, Sc.D., chief, C Division, Chem-
ical Corps, Camp Dietrick, Frederick, Md.

Robert Quinn Parks, Ph.D., assistant head. Division of
Soil Management and Irrigation, Bureau of Plant
Industry, Soils and Agricultural Engineering, Agri-
cultural Research Administration, Department of
Agriculture

Lorenzo Adolph Richards, Ph.D., principal soil physicist.
Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils and Agricultural
Engineering, Agricultural Re.search Administration,
U. S. Regional Salinity and Rubidoux Laboratories,
Riverside, Calif.

Professor Emil Truog, chairman. Department of Soils,
University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.

Silvere Cyril Vandecaveye, Ph.D., professor of soils, State
College of Washington, Pullman, Wash.

Advisers

Samuel Shockle.v Obenshain, Ph.D., soil scientist, Bureau
of Plant Industry, Soils and Agricultural Engineer-
ing. Agricultural Research Administration, Depart-
ment of Agriculture

James Thorp, soil scientist, Bureau of Plant Industry,
Soils and Agricultural Engineering, Agricultural Re-
search Administration, Department of Agriculture

The International Society of Soil Science,
which was established in 1900, periodically or-
ganizes international soil science congresses for
the purpose of studying and comparing the vari-
ous problems of the soil. Under the sponsorship
of the society; a soil-science map of the world is
being prepared. Several sections, including one
of Europe, have been completed.

At its forthcoming session, approximately 45
countries will be represented. The agenda of this
meeting will comprise scientific papers and dis-
cussions on such topics as soil structure, soil mois-
ture, clay minerals, microbiology, soil fertility,
and land classification and evaluation.

Pediatrics Congress

The Department of State announced on July
21 that the United States delegation to the Sixth
International Pediatrics Congress, to be convened
at Zurich on July 2-1, is as follows :

Chairman

Dr. Henry F. Helmholz, retired head of pediatrics, Mayo
Clinic, Rochester, Minn.; chief consultant to the
Mid-Century White House Conference on Children
and Youth

Delegates

Dr. Joseph Stokes, Jr., Department of Pediatrics, Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania Medical School, Philadelphia,
Pa.

Dr. Alexander Ashley Weech, Department of Pediatrics,
University of Cincinnati, College of Medicine, Cin-
cinnati, Ohio

Dr. Lawson Wilkins, associate professor, Johns Hopkins
Medical School, Baltimore, Md.

The Swiss Government has invited 62 govern-
ments to participate in this Congress which will
provide outstanding professional leaders in the
field of pediatrics with an opportunity for mutual

August 7, 1950

229

exchange of ideas and important technical infor-
mation in the study of child health and child
disease. Included on the program is the consid-
eration of such topics as: professional problems
and social medicine; pathology of the newborn;
problems of growth ; basic research ; metabolic dis-
orders; blood disease; aetiology of the diarrheal
diseases and dystrophies; virus diseases; bacterial
and protozoal diseases; surgery in cliildhood; and
psychiatry and neurology. A scientific exhibition
will be held in connection with the Congress.

European Migration

The Department of State announced on July 21
that the Secretary of State has appointed Gold-
thwaite Higginson Dorr as United States member
at the meeting of United States, United Kingdom,
and French experts on European migration open-
ing in Paris, July 24. The meeting is the result
of the decisions announced in the communique of
the Foreign Ministers of the United States, United
Kingdom, and France, issued in London on May
13, which recognized the importance and wide
scope of the European migi-ation problem and
stated that the three powers would designate ex-
perts to confer and to consult with experts of other
interested governments, particularly Italy and
Germany, on specific steps which might be taken
in this field.

It is understood that the United States, United
Kingdom, and French experts, after first con-
ferring among themselves upon the present plans
and programs of intra-European and overseas
migration, will confer with the representatives of
the principal countries of emigration and immi-
gration to examine ways in which governments
may assist in facilitating European migration and
the extent to which migration may play a part in
solving the problems of overpopulation in certain
European countries and of healthy economic de-
velopment of countries of immigration. It is ex-
pected also that the experts will wish to draw to
the fullest extent possible upon the knowledge,
experience, and potentialities in this field of such
international agencies as the United Nations and
its specialized bodies, including the Ilo and the
Oeec.

The United States member, Mr. Dorr, will be
assisted by the following advisers: Irwin M.
Tobin, labor adviser, Bureau of European Af-
fairs, Department of State; John Ewing, inter-
national labor specialist. Department of Labor;
Boris Shishkin, director, OSR Labor Division,
EcA, Paris; George Weisz and Guy J. Swope,
Office of Political Affairs, HICOG; G. A. Cos-
tanzo, financial adviser. Department of the
Treasury.

Administrative Sciences

The Department of State announced on July
24 that the United States delegation to the

230

eighth International Congress of Administrative
Sciences, to be convened at Florence, Italy, on July
25, is as follows :

Donald C. Stone (chairman), director of administration,
Economic Cooperation Administration

Everett H. Bellows, deputy executive assistant to the
special representative of the Economic Cooperation
Administration in Europe, Paris

Ralph J. Burton, deputy chief, Government Organization
Branch, Bureau of the Budget

Rowland Egger, professor of public administration, Uni-
versity of Virginia

One of the major items on the agenda of the
Congress is the problem of governmental organi-
zation and coordination for effective participation
in the United Nations and other international
bodies. Another major item is methods of admin-
istrative improvement. Among the specific sub-
jects to be considered under this general heading
are administrative problems common to interna-
tional organizations and methods of dealing with
them; the Institute's (International Institute of
Administrative Sciences) job of providing docu-
mentary materials on administrative practices to
the United Nations for the benefit of its member
states; the Institute's task of providing informa-
tion to German officials on democratic administra-
tive practices; and various other activities in the
field of the international exchange of administra-
tive information and personnel.

The A dministrative Sciences congresses are held
biennially by the International Institute of Ad-
ministrative Sciences. The Institute, a nongov-
ernmental organization insofar as this Government
is concerned, was established at Madrid in 1930,
to foster and promote more efficient administra-
tion in the governments represented by member-
ship in the Institute. The United States section
of the Institute is a standing committee of the
American Society for Public Administration.
Approximately 22 countries are expected to send
representatives to the forthcoming meeting.

Caribbean Commission Concludes
Tenth Meeting

The tenth meeting of the Caribbean Commis-
sion was held at Fort-de-France, Martinique,
June 26-July 1, 1950 under the chairmanship of
Jean Daridan, Minister-Counselor of the French
Embassy at Washington. Three of the United
States Commissioners, Ward M. Canaday, United
States Co-Chairman, Dr. Rafael Pico, and ex-
Governor Jesus T. Pinero of Puerto Rico attended
the meeting.

Tlie most important event of the Commission
meeting was the adoption of a forward-looking
resolution on technical assistance which requested
the Secretary General to develop and present to

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

the Commission projects of technical assistance of
the greatest benefit to the area as a whole, such
projects to include those which could best be
carried out under the auspices of the Commission
itself or by the Commission in cooperation with
other international agencies in the field.

The United States section also presented a tech-
nical assistance project on tourism to be admin-
istered by the Commission. It proposed that the
existing tourist conditions in the area should be
examined with a view to the long term develop-
ment of tourism in the area. The project, as
proposed, should be carried out by a team of hotel
consultants including an operations analyst to
advise the four member Governments on a plan
for actively developing the tourist traffic in the
area.

The Commission also accepted the recommenda-
tions of two successful technical conferences on
livestock and soils science problems held under its
auspices as well as the suggestions of a meteoro-
logical meeting recently held at Martinique under
the auspices of Region IV of the International
Meteorological Organization. These suggestions
call upon the Caribbean Commission for coopera-
tion in a number of practical measures for the im-
provement of the hurricane warning system in the
Eastern Caribbean area.

The Commission also approved of the prepara-
tions being made including an extensive documen-
tation for the West Indian Conference (fourth
session) scheduled to be held at Curacao, N. W. I.,
November 27-December 17, 1950. The principal
theme of the Conference is to be the agricultural
problems of the Caribbean.

U.S. Delegation Withdraws

From Swiss-Allied Accord Meeting

The United States delegation to the quadripar-
tite Conference on the Swiss-Allied Accord, at
Bern, Switzerland, withdrew from that meeting
on July 1.

For several reasons, the United States could
not accept the condition advanced by the Swiss.
Basically, the United States has maintained the
position that the Accord and the Understanding
are not related and that the implementation of
the former does not depend upon the finalization
of the latter. The Allied Delegations assembled
at Bern had no reason to believe that the Swiss
were not of the same view. When the Swiss,
on June 6, extended the invitation for a meeting
on the Accord they made no mention that they in-

tended to interject the Understanding with the
United States.

In an effort to make it possible to proceed with
the scheduled Conference, the United States of-
fered to sign the Understanding, subject to enact-
ment of legislation now pending in the Congress
making it possible for this Government to imple-
ment such arrangements. This offer was rejected
by the Swiss Government.

In a further effort to salvage the scheduled Con-
ference, the United States suggested that if the
proposed modifications were few and minor, as
the Swiss had indicated, they might be acceptable.
This suggestion was made despite the basic posi-
tion of the United States that the implementation
of the Accord is not dependent upon a finalized
Undei-standing. Accordingly, the Swiss were in-
vited to submit their proposed changes for
consideration.

The suggested modifications, however, were nu-
merous and almost all were of major importance.
Several of the proposed changes in integral parts
of the Understanding involved additional conces-
sions to the Swiss beyond those made to our war-
time Allies on points that had been settled
previously on a mutually satisfactory basis after
prolonged discussions.

In view of the character of the suggested modi-
fications, the United States Government could not
accept them. Since the Swiss Government would
not proceed with the quadripartite Conference ex-
cept on its condition, the United States delegation
had no alternative but to withdraw reluctantly
from the Conference. The United States made no
commitment to renegotiate the bilateral Under-
standing at a later date, and no such renegotiation
is now in progress.

The Swiss-Allied Accord which was signed in
May 1946 between France, the United Kingdom,
and the United States, on behalf of the Inter-Al-
lied Reparation Agency, and Switzerland, pro-
vides for the liquidation of German enemy
property located in Switzerland.^ Similar agree-
ments, subsequently, were negotiated with other
European countries and have been implemented.
If the Swiss ever liquidate German property under
the terms of the Accord, one-half of the proceeds
of such liquidation will be retained by Switzer-
land, and one-half will be delivered to the Inter-
Allied Reparation Agency for distribution among
the Allied Powers as reparation from Germany.

It is estimated that German assets in Switzer-
land amount to between 100 million dollars and 200
million dollars, and it is estimated that German
assets in the United States covered in the mem-
orandum of Understanding are 15 million dollars.

' Bulletin of June 30, 1946, p. 1121.

August 7, 1950

231

The Caribbean Commission's Role in Teclinical Assistance

INTERIM VIEWS OF THE FOUR MEMBER GOVERNMENTS

[Released to the press July 20]

On June H, 1950, representatives of the Governments
in the Caribbean Commission — France, the Netherlands,
the United Kinffdom, and tfie United States — agreed upon
a text of a statement containing the interim views of the
four member governments regarding the role of the Carib-
bean Commission in technical assistance programs to he
carried out in the Caribbean area.

These interim views of the member governm,ents were
presented to the Caribbean Commission at its meeting
at Fort-de-France, Martinique, French West Indies, June
26-July 1, 1950. The Commission agreed that the four-
power statement on technical assistance should be made
public by member governments on or after July 20. The
text of the statement follows.

1. The Caribbean Commission at its Ninth
Meeting held in St. Thomas, Virgin Ishmds of
the United States, December 5-9, 1949, adopted
a resolution i-ecommending that a meeting of
representatives of the four Member Governments
should be convened as soon as convenient; "to
decide what part the Caribbean Commission
should play in the initiation, development, and
execution of technical assistance in the area."

2. New sources of technical assistance for under-
developed areas will soon be available under the
Unitecl Nations expanded program and the United
States Point 4 Program. Although the four
Member Governments are not yet in a position
to judge at what time nor to what extent the new
programs will offer effective possibilities to the
Caribbean area and although means for obtain-
ing aid under these schemes have not yet been
fully worked out, they, nevertheless, consider it
desirable to record hereunder their tentative
views on the role the Caribbean Commission might
play in this respect.

?>. The four Member Governments agree that the
Commission is a useful central point at which the
Member Governments can keep one another in-
formed of their technical assistance plans in the
Caribbean region. Tliey also believe that the
Commission might be not only a clearing house
for information but might act as a "coordinating
adviser" as set forth in the resolutions adopted

by the Commission at its Ninth Meeting. The
four Member Governments, accordingly, express
their intention of keeping the Commission in-
formed of all technical assistance projects in the
territories in the Caribbean area for which they
are responsible, as soon as they have been formu-
lated.

4. The four Member Governments also recog-
nize that the Commission may have a part to play
in evaluating the technical assistance needs of the
Caribbean region as a whole and in assisting the
Member Governments to identify problems within
the region which might more effectively and eco-
nomically be dealt with by joint rather than by
individual action. For this purpose the Member
Governments request the Commission specifically :

a. to study and to recommend to them the
princii)al fields in which technical assistance
projects are most urgently needed;

b. to identify problems within the region
which might be dealt with more effectively and
economically by joint rather than by individual
action in the field of technical assistance and to
make recommendations with respect to them.

5. The four Member Governments will also in-
form the Commission of any ideas of their own or
of territorial governments or administrations re-
garding possible future applications for technical
assistance as early as possible, that is while they
are still in a formative stage, if in their view these
ideas are of such a nature as to be susceptible of
joint as opposed to individual action.

6. The four Member Governments will in ap-
propriate cases consider proposals for concrete
projects of technical assistance which might be
administered by :

a. two or more Member Governments acting
jointly or

b. in whole or in part by an international or-
ganization or by the Commission itself,

232

Department of State Bulletin

it being understood that any such actions would
be submitted for the approval ot the Member Gov-
ernment or Governments concerned.

7. The four ]\Iember Governments also request
the Commission through its auxiliary bodies and
agencies and within their terms of reference and
competence to assist at their request Member Gov-
ernment agencies and any international agencies
preparing or executing technical assistance proj-
ects in tlieir territories in the collection, collation,
and analysis of information; in carrying out
studies and in performing administrative and li-
aison services necessary for the preparation or exe-
cution of projects by them.

8. In view of the obligation of the French, the

Netherlands, and the United Kingdom Govern-
ments to coordinate Economic Cooperation Ad-
ministration technical assistance projects affecting
their overseas territories in all parts of the worlcT,
including the Caribbean, through the Overseas
Territories Committee of the Oeec in Paris, the
four Member Governments find it unnecessary for
these arrangements to be duplicated through the
Caribbean Connnission. However, they regard
the intention expressed in paragraph 3 above to
keep the Caribbean Commission fully informed of
all projects to be undertaken in the Caribbean area
as applying to projects under the Economic Co-
operation Administration program, as well as
other projects.

International Court Opens Hearings in Human-Rights Case

[Released to the press June 29]

On June 27, 1950, the International Court of
Justice at The Hague opened its oral hearings
in the human-rights advisory opinion case which
had been referred to it by the United Nations
General Assembly. These hearings were on ques-
tions III and IV submitted to the Court by the
Assembly.

The case grew out of charges by the United
States and other Allied Powers that Bulgaria,
Hungary, and Rumania were violating the human-
rights provision of the peace treaties by such
action as the persecution of church leaders and
the stamping out of political opposition parties.
Those three ex-enemy countries rejected the
charges and, subsequently, denied the existence of
any dispute appropriate for settlement through
the machinery provided by the disputes articles in
the peace treaties. These articles call first for ref-
erence of a dispute to the heads of mission of the
Soviet Union, United Kingdom, and United States
in the capital of the ex-enemy country concerned.
The United States and the other complaining
Allied Powers requested such a reference. The
Soviet Ambassadors in Sofia, Budapest, and
Bucharest refused to meet with their British and
American colleagues for this purpose.

The treaty disputes articles go on to provide
that if a dispute is not settled in this manner, it
should be referred to an arbitral tribunal at the
request of either party to the dispute. Last sum-
mer, the United States, United Kingdom, Canada,
Australia, and New Zealand requested a reference
of their disputes with Bulgaria, Hungary, and
Rumania to arbitration in accordance with the

peace treaties. The three ex-enemy countries re-
fused to appoint their representatives on the arbi-
tral tribunals or to discuss with the United States
and other Allied Powers the appointment of the
third and neutral member of the arbitral tribunals
provided for in the treaties. The peace treaties
specify that the arbitral tribunals are to consist of
one representative appointed by each party to the
dispute, together with a third member to be agreed
upon by the two parties. It is provided further
that, if the parties do not reach agreement on the
third member within 1 month, either party to the
dispute may request the Secretary-General of the
United Nations to make the appointment.^ The
treaties provide that in any event the decision of
the majority of the tribunal is to be considered
the decision of the tribunal and is to be accepted
as definitive and binding by the parties. Follow-
ing repeated rebuffs from the ex-enemy countries,
Canada, the United Kingdom, and the United
States appointed their representatives on the
arbitral tribunals in January 1950. Australia
appointed its representative in April 1950.

U.N. Resolution on Human Rights

In the spring of 1949, the United Nations Gen-
eral Assembly took up the question of the observ-
ance of human rights and fundamental freedoms
in the ex-enemy countries of Eastern Europe ; in
particular, the charges that those countries were
engaging in systematic suppression of political
and religious liberties. The charges had arisen out
of the trials of Cardinal Mindszenty and other

August 7, 1950

233

church leaders in those countries. Following ex-
tended debate, the Assembly passed a resolution
expressing the Assembly's deep concern at the
grave accusations made against the Eastern Eui'o-
pean governments, in regard to the suppression
of rights and freedoms, and recommending that
the machinery provided in the peace treaties be
resorted to for settlement of the disputed ques-
tions which had arisen between certain of the
Allied Powers on the one hand and the ex-enemy
countries on the other.

At its fourth regular session, in the fall of 1949,
the Assembly was apprised of the refusal of the
ex-enemy countries to cooperate in taking the steps
which the Assembly had recommended 6 months
earlier. The General Assembly thereupon decided
to refer four legal questions to the International
Court of Justice in order to secure the Court's
advisory opinion before taking any further steps
in connection with the case. The Assembly first
asked two questions: (I) whether, in fact, there
existed disputes within the meaning of the dis-
putes articles of the peace treaties between certain
Allied Powers on the one hand and the ex-enemy
countries on the other and (II) whether Bulgaria,
Hungary, and Rumania were obligated to appoint
their representatives to the arbitral tribunals pro-
vided for in the disputes articles of the peace
treaties. The International Court of Justice con-
sidered these two questions in February and March
1950, and answered both in the affirmative by an
opinion handed down on March 30, 1950.

The General Assembly requested the Court to
answer two further questions in the event of affirm-
ative answers to the first two questions and in the
event that the three ex-enemy countries failed
within 30 days to appoint their representatives to
the arbitral tribunals. Bulgaria, Hungary, and
Rumania had not appointed their representatives
within 30 days from March 30. The last two ques-
tions put before the International Court of Justice
were as follows: (III) whether under the circum-
stances the Secretary-General of the United Na-
tions was empowered to appoint a third member
to each of the tribunals and (IV) whether a tri-
bunal consisting of a third member so appointed
together with a member appointed by one of the
parties could validly decide a dispute.

Arguments on Questions III and IV

The Court called for the submission of briefs
on these two questions by June 5, 1950, and set
June 27 as the date for the beginning of oral argu-
ments. The United States was again represented
before the court, as on the earlier questions in
February and March, by Benjamin V. Cohen, who
had been appointed by the President as representa-
tive of the United States before the International
Court of Justice in this case. In his oral argument,
Mr. Cohen urged that questions III and IV should
be answered affirmatively by the Court. He con-
tended that the refusal of Bulgaria, Hungary, and

Rumania to appoint representatives to the arbi-
tral tribunals constituted an illegal default on the
part of these countries which should not be held
to enable them to frustrate definitive settlement
of the disputes in accordance with the disputes
articles of the peace treaties. It was the United
States position that the right of these countries
to be represented on the arbitral tribunals was
waived if the countries declined to name their
representatives. Mr. Cohen further pointed out
that negative answers to questions III and IV
would for practical purposes nullify the effect of
the affirmative answers given earlier by the Court
to questions I and II : the Court had held in an-
swering questions I and II that the ex-enemy coun-
tries were bound by the provisions of the disputes
articles in the peace treaties, but there would be
no way of enforcing that obligation if questions
III and IV were answered negatively.

Mr. Cohen argued that the language and his-
tory of the peace treaties made it quite clear that
the treaty articles for the settlement of disputes
were obligatory and not optional. In his
argument he stated:

In the peace treaties the parties have agreed to accept
procedures for the definitive settlement of their treaty
disputes. The parties have no more right to withdraw
or repudiate their acceptance of these settlement pro-
cedures than they have to withdraw or repudiate their
acceptance of the treaties themselves. . . . The treaties
sought to provide procedures of settlement which could
not be blocked by the action or non-action of any one
of the parties. . . . Treaty provisions must be interpreted
in light of their known purposes and objectives. Inter-
national law may find that some conditions must be im-
plied, although not spelled out in treaties, in order to
make effective their known purposes and objectives. But
international law should not and does not read into treat-
ies conditions which defeat their purposes and objectives.
... To read into the disputes article of the treaty a
condition — which certainly is not spelled out in the treaty
and which clearly would have been rejected had it been
proposed — that a party or its representative may prevent
a majority of the commission from reaching a decision
by refusing to participate in the commission's delibera-
tions, would be to defeat and destroy the very purpose
and objective of the disputes article.

In arguing that the refusal of Bulgaria, Hun-
gary, and Rumania to appoint arbitrators should
not be held to provide those countries with an
escape from settlement of their disputes, Mr.
Cohen quoted from the Emperor Justinian's digest
of Roman law the maxim that "no one can improve
his position through his own wrong." He cited
a number of analogies including the well-estab-
lished and familiar proposition that the with-
drawal of an arbitrator from an arbitration al-
ready begun does not prevent the making of an
arbitral award. In concluding his argument, Mr.
Cohen stated:

I submit, Mr. President, that there is no reason in fact
or in law for recognizing any legal power In these gov-
ernments to frustrate the operation of these treaty pro-
cedures by failing to exercise their legal right, which is
also their legal duty, to appoint their representatives
on the treaty commissions. To give them that legal
power would be to assist them to profit by their own

234

Department of State Bulletin

wrong and to improve their position by their own unlaw-
ful default. . . . Negative replies to questions III and IV
would discoui'age efforts of states to work out in advance
of controversy peaceful and orderly procedures for the
adjustment of disputes. For states would know that such
agreements would provide no assurance that the proce-
dures for peaceful setlement would be available when
the need for their use arose. Law-abiding states would
be shackled by obligations which states that are not law-
abiding could set at nought at their own arbitrary will.
Negative replies to questions III and IV would impair the
confidence of states in existing international arbitration
clauses and agreements. ... It is of basic importance
to the fabric of international society that nations shall
feel and show respect for law in their dealings with one
another. It cannot lightly he concluded that the law
in a situation such as that now before the Court brooks
evasion by a defaulting party. . . . Treaty provisions,
and particularly provisions for the definitive settlement
of disputes, should not be construed to allow the parties
unsuspected avenues of escape from the fulfillment of
obligations. Smoldering disputes among states are too
likely to create serious and chronic disturbances of inter-
national relations and eventually endanger peace. Affirm-
ative answers to questions III and IV will strengthen the
faith of men and nations in the integrity of treaty
obligations and in the efficacy of international law.

OEEC Payments Plan Aids
Unification of Western Europe

[Released to the press July IS]

The successful culmination of negotiations in
the Organization for European Economic Cooper-
ation on the European Payments Plan is a con-
structive step in the economic unification of West-
ern Europe. It is confidently anticipated that this
arrangement for multilateral exchange and trans-
ferability of European currencies will provide one
of the principal bases for further trade liberaliza-
tion among the participating countries and the
elimination of the remaining discriminatory fea-
tures of the intra-European trade restrictions.
The plan should go far toward eliminating the
balance-of-paymetits difficulties within Western
E'urope upon which trade restrictions of a dis-
criminatory character have been based.

In the development of this program, it has been
necessary to work out an arrangement satisfactory
to countries which are expected to be net creditors,
on intra-European account, and the net-debtor
members. The former, naturally, desired to re-
ceive payment in dollars for a substantial per-
centage of their net surpluses, while the latter
favored large credit extensioias from the creditors
through the Payments Union with minimum gold
and dollar settlements.

The plan now adopted affords a workable and
equitable compromise between these two positions.
It should provide those members which have furth-
est to go toward economic recovery, and, therefore.

will still be incurring intra-European deficits, with
adequate credits without giving rise to excessive
inflationary effects in the countries able to gener-
ate substantial surpluses in Western European
trade. Provision is also made in the plan for con-
tinuing some measure of grant assistance to certain
members to assist in the financing of their intra-
European deficits when it could not be expected
that they would be able to repay, even over
an extended period, credits obtained for such
financing.

President Designates OEEC
Public international Organization

EXECUTIVE ORDER 10133 >

By virtue of the authority vested in me by section 1
of the International Organizations Immunities Act, ap-
proved December 29, 194.5 (59 Stat. 669), and having
found that the United States participates in the Organi-
zation for European Economic Cooperation under the
authority of the Economic Cooperation Act of 1948 (62
Stat. 137), as amended, and acts making appropriations
therefor, I hereby designate such organization as a public
international organization entitled to enjoy the privileges,
exemptions, and immunities conferred by the said In-
ternational Organizations Immunities Act.

Letters of Credence

Cuba

The newly appointed Ambassador of Cuba,
Senor Dr. Luis Machado y Ortega, presented his
credentials to the President on July 25. For texts
of the Ambassador's remarks and the President's
reply, see Department of State press release 785
of July 25.

Visit of Iraqi Law Specialist

Dr. Saadi Bississo, professor of international
law and criminal psychology at the Royal College
of Law, Baghdad, has arrived in Washington for
a period of 2 weeks to consult with colleagues in
his field. His visit has been made possible through
a grant-in-aid awarded by the Department of
State under the program for the exchange of per-
sons.

Dr. Bississo has been commissioned by the Iraqi
Government to make a draft of juvenile court law.

' 15 Fed. Reg., 4159.

August 7, 1950

235

Meteorological Services for International Air F^avigation

ly Delhert M. Little

Developing uniform world-wide procedures to
provide meteorological service to international air
navigation is one of the aspects of the work of
the International Civil Aviation Organization
(IcAo) and its predecessor, the Provisional
International Civil Aviation Organization
(PiCAo), as well as of the International Meteoro-
logical Organization (Imo). To carry this work
forward, and in the interest of continued coordina-
tion of activities between Icao and Imo in aero-
nautical meteorology, the third session of the
Meteorology Division of Icao met with the fifth
session of the Commission for Aeronautical Mete-
orology of the International Meteorological Or-
ganization at Paris from February 14-March 25,
1950.

Several factors prompted Icao to convene the
third session of the Meteorology Division at that
time. The last previous meeting of the Division
was a special session held at Montreal in Septem-
ber 1947. Procedures for meteorological service
to international air navigation, as developed at
that meeting, served as the basis for an annex to
the Icao convention ^ and for the Icap specifica-
tions for meteorological services to international
air navigation, which details general procedures
to be followed by all contracting states of Icao.
Both the codes and the general procedures were
placed in effect on a world-wide basis on January
1, 1949. ^

Experience in the application of these codes
and procedures established a requirement for their
early review and revision. A full round of re-
gional air navigation meetings has been held in
all of the ten Icao regions since the specifications
were developed, and, in some regions, two such
meetmgs have been held. Icao, therefore, consid-
ered that it should examine the regional meteor-
ological procedures and facilities with a view to
their further coordination and standardization.

Recent and prospective developments in avia-

' Annex .3, "Standards and Recommended Practices-
Meteorological Codes."

tion indicated also requirements for meteor-
ological information and service which the
Meteorology Division needed to consider ; such as
flights at new high levels — including prospective
jet transport operations — pressure-pattern flying,
and new measurements of cloud and visibility at
airports to aid in landings under marginal
weather conditions.

The following contracting states of Icao were
reiiresented at the conference at Paris : Argentina,
Australia, Belgium, Canada, Denmark, Domini-
can Eepublic, Egypt, Finland, Greece, France,
Iceland, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Luxemboui'g, Neth-
erlands, New Zealand, Norway, Philippines, Por-
tugal, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, Union of
South Africa, United Kingdom, and the United
States.

The following states sent observers to the meet-
ing: Indonesia, Saudi Arabia, United States High
Commission for Germany, U. S. S. R., and Uru-
guay.

The following international organizations were
i-epresented : Commission for Aeronautical
Meteorology, (Imo) (Cmae), Federation Aero-
nautique Internationale (Fai), International Air
Transport Association (Iata), and the Interna-
tional Federation of Air Line Pilots Associations
(Ifalpa).

Primary Achievement

The primary acliievement of the conference was
the revision of the specifications for meteorologi-
cal services to international air navigation. Tlae
revision eliminates some of the procedures which
were found difficult to operate, provides for closer
coordination with flight information services —
provided by air traffic service units — provides im-
proved meteorological planning services for opera-
tors, defines more clearly responsibilities of both
operators and meteorological authorities, and, in
general, provides for more efficient and adequate
meteorological service for international flights.

236

Department of State Bulletin

The United States, in general, is in accord with
procedures developed. They cover weather serv-
ice to international aviation involving the issuance
of forecasts of weather and winds for trans-
oceanic flights, including the maintenance of net-
works of observation stations to provide current
weather information at the surface and aloft for
aircraft in flight and about to land. In addition,
the procedures provide advisory weather service
to assist in carrying on air traffic control and
search and rescue activities and to keep operators
aware of adverse weather developments which
may endanger aircraft in the air or on the ground.
They also provide summaries of climatological
data to assist in design of aircraft and planning
aircraft operations over both existing and new air
routes.

Other Conference Work

Tlie remaining work of the conference con-
cerned the meteorological codes, facilities, and
technical matters relating to the operation of the
procedures discussed in the foregoing paragraph.

Tlie conference made a number of recommenda-
tions to the Ijto on additions to and changes in
existing instructions and specifications for the
meteorological codes used in service to interna-
tional aviation. It directed these recommenda-
tions toward eliminating existing defects in the
codes and making them more adequate and usable
than before as media for transmitting meteorolog-
ical information.

The conference recommended Imo action, in
collaboration, as necessary, with Icao and other
international organizations, to develop uniform
procedures and format of aeronautical climato-
logical statistics, to develop the detailed specifica-
tions for an Icao standard atmosphere, and to
study the qualifications of meteorological person-
nel employed in aviation meteorology. With the
Imo rests primarily jurisdiction in these matters.

The conference reviewed the world-wide distri-
bution of meteorological offices, observational net-
works, and broadcast centers for disseminating
weather information in order to determine its ade-
quacy and made recommendations for the guid-
ance of regional air navigation meetings in
determining regional requirements for such facili-
ties. For the guidance of such meetings it recom-
mended a staiKlard format for regional meteoro-
logical supplementary procedures; and it made
recommendations to give the International Tele-
communication Union information on require-
ments for aeronautical meteorological broadcasts.

Supplying Meteorological information

To meet both present and future requirements
for meteorological infonnation, the conference
recommended study and research by states, by

Imo or by Icao, on installation of meteorological
equipment at airports for obtaining special mea-
surements of cloud height, visibility, and visual
range, which is particularly significant to airport
operations; on observations and forecasting of me-
teorological elements for flights at high levels,
with particular emphasis on requirements of tur-
bine engine aircraft; on occurrence of clear air
gusts and gusts at high altitudes; on equipment
and improved methods for measuring ice accretion
on aircraft; and on temperature measurements at
airports and distribution of other elements about
which information is needed for temperature ac-
countability purjioses in aircraft operations.

The conference recommended a limited experi-
mental program for application of meteorological
procedures for pressure-pattern flying for the
North Atlantic region. Pressure-pattern flying is
a procedure for saving time and expense by taking
advantage of favorable winds and weather by de-
viating from the most direct route. The experi-
mental program is intended to find out what
weather services are needed and whether the bene-
fits of applying pressure-pattern procedures to air
navigation are sufficient to justify providing such
sjjecial weather services.

Although some differences of view were evident
on a number of items of the agenda, no items were
so controversial or points of view so strongly held
that the delegates could not resolve the differences.
The fact that all delegations, without reservation,
approved the final report of the meeting indicates
the unanimity of agreement in the final results of
the conference.

The Icao Air Navigation Commission and
Council will review the recommendations of the
meeting and will then submit them to the states for
review and implementation. The International
Meteorological Organization will also take action
on those recommendations with which it is con-
cerned. The revised procedures for providing me-
teorological services for international air naviga-
tion will possibly become effective on a world-wide
basis early in 1951.

John S. Cooper To Attend
NAC Deputies' Treaty Meetings

The President announced on July 20 that John
Sherman Cooper, former United States Senator
from Kentucky and delegate to the Fifth General
Assembly of the United Nations, will accompany
Charles M. Spofford to the initial meetings of the
deputies of the North Atlantic Treaty Council.
As a special adviser to Secretary Acheson, Mr.
Cooper, a Republican, attended the London con-
ference of the North Atlantic Council in May of
this year.

August 7, 1950

137

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

Confirmations

On June 26, 1950, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of H. Freeman Matthews to be Deputy Under Secretary
of State.

On June 26, 1950, the Senate confirmed the nominations
of Henry F. Grady to be Ambassador Extraordinary and
Plenipotentiary of the United States to Iran.

Milton Katz to be United States special representative
in Europe, with the rank of Ambassador Extraordinary
and Plenipotentiary, pursuant to title I of the Foreign
Assistance Act of 1948.

Donald R. Heath to be Envoy Extraordinary and Min-
ister Plenipotentiary of the United States to the State
of Vietnam, to the Kingdom of Cambodia, and to the
Kingdom of Laos.

On June 27, 1950, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of W. Walton Butterworth to be Ambassador Extra-
ordinary and Plenipotentiary of the United States to
Sweden.

Consular Offices

The American consulate at Peiping, China, was officially
closed on April 10, 1950.

The American consulate at Tientsin, China, was offi-
cially closed April 14, 1950.

The American consulate at Bratislava, Czechoslovakia,
was officially closed on June 6, 1950. The American Em-
bassy at Praha will be responsible for the activities for-
merly handled by the Consulate.

Tlie American Embassy Chancery at Capetown, South
Africa, was officially closed on June 30, 1950. All com-
munications for the American Embassy in South Africa
should now be addressed to Pretoria.

THE DEPARTMENT

Appointment of Officers

John A. Loftus has been appointed economic adviser for
the Bureau of Near Eastern, South Asian, and African
Affairs of the Department of State, effective June 16.

The following appointments were announced on May 16 :

Samuel Eeber will replace James Riddleberger, Political
Adviser to the United States High Commissioner for Ger-
many, effective June 23, 1950.

Llewellyn Thompson, Deputy Assistant Secretary for
European Affairs, is to become Minister Counselor at Rome,
effective May 23, 1950, replacing Homer M. Byington, Jr.,
who will return to the United States for assignment in the
D>epartment as Deputy Director of the Office of Western
European Affairs.

James C. Bonbright, Minister Counselor at Paris, will
take Mr. Thompson's place, effective May 23, 1050, as
Deputy Assistant Secretary for European Affairs.

Philip H. Burris as chief. Division of Foreign Reporting
Services, effective June 21, 1950.

J. Jefferson Jones, III, as deputy director, Bureau o£
United Nations Affairs, Office of Dependent Area Affairs,
effective June 5, 1950.

H. Merrell Benninghoff as officer in charge. Dominion
Affairs, Office of British Commonwealth and Nortiiern
European Affairs, effective July 1, 1950.

John F. Melby as special assistant to the Assistant Sec-
retary for Far Eastern Affairs, effective July 7, 1950.

Charles Yost as special assistant to the Ambassador at
Large, Mr. Jessup, effective July 3, 1950.

H. Freeman Matthews as Deputy Under Secretary of
State, effective July 5, 1950.

Jacques J. Reinstein as Alternate United States Member
of the Intergovernmental Study Group on Germany, ef-
fective July 7, 19.50.

Geoffrey W. Lewis as deputy director. Bureau of Ger-
man Affairs, effective July 9, 19.50.

Victor Purse as special assistant to the Deputy Under
Secretary for Administration, effective July 14, 1950.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale hy the Superintendent of Documents, Oovern-
ment Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Address re-
quests direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except
in the case of free publications, which may be obtained
from the Department of State.

Exchange of Official Publications. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2048. Pub. 3809. 3 pp. 5(}.

Agreement between the United States and Colombia —
Effected by exchange of notes, signed at Washington
July 15 and 26, 1949 ; entered into force July 26, 1949.

Aviation : Flights of Military Aircraft. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2042. Pub. 3811. 7 pp. 5<f.

Agreement between the United States and Guate-
mala— Effected by exchange of notes, signed at Guate-
mala December 20, 1949 ; entered into force December
20, 1949.

Relief Supplies and Packages for France — Duty-Free
Entry Payment of Transportation Charges. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 2043. Pub. 3812. 6 pp.
5«(.

Agreement between the United States and France, ex-
tending the application of agreement of December 23,
1948, to Algeria, Tunisia, and the French Zone of
Morocco — Signed at Paris January 31, 1950; entered
into force January 31, 1950.

Army Mission to Honduras. Treaties and Other Inter-
national Acts Series 2041. Pub. 3816. 12 pp. 5«(.

Agreement between the United States and Honduras —
Signed at Washington March 6, 1950 ; entered into
force March 6, 1950.

Consular Officers. Treaties and Other International Acts
Series 2045. Pub. 3823. 32 pp. 15^.

Convention between the United States and Costa
Rica — Signed at San Jos6 January 12, 1948; entered
into force March 19, 1950.

Mutual Defense Assistance. Treaties and Other Inter-
national Acts Series 2010. Pub. 3827. 23 pp. lOff.

Agreement between the United States and Belgium —
Signed at Washington January 27, 1950 ; entered into
force March 30, 1950.

238

Department of State BuHetin

The United States in The United Nations

[July 29-August 4]

Security Council

The meeting of the Security Council on August
1, when Soviet representative Yakov A. Malik
assumed the presidency, was the first United Na-
tions meeting since last January in which the
Soviets have remained to participate while a
Chinese National representative was also present.
At the opening of the meeting, President Malik
ruled that the "representative of the Kuomintang
Group" was not the representative of China and
therefore could not participate in the Council's
meeting. This ruling was challenged by Ambas-
sador Warren R. Austin (U. S.), who maintained
that the President did not have the power to make
such a ruling. In the ensuing vote, the President
was overruled by a vote of eight to three.

The Council then turned to the adoption of the
agenda, whereupon Ambassador Austin opposed
the inclusion of the two items proposed by Pres-
ident Malik — "Recognition of the Representative
of the People's Republic of China as Representa-
tive of China" and "Peaceful Settlement of the
Korea Question." He moved that the agenda con-
tain only one item, "Complaint of Aggression
upon the Republic of Korea," which the Council
had been dealing with for 5 weeks. After pro-
longed discussion of the agenda throughout three
Council meetings, separate votes were taken on
each of the three proposed items, with the result
that "Complaint of Aggression upon the Republic
of Korea" was the only one approved for inclu-
sion. Speaking as the Soviet representative, Mr.
Malik said that the Council's decision was illegal,
but he has continued to participate nonetheless.

On July 31, the Council had adopted a joint
resolution introduced by France, Norway, and the
United Kingdom which requested the Unified
Command "to exercise responsibility for determin-
ing the requirements for the relief and support
of the civilian population of Korea, and for estab-
lishing in the field the procedures for providing
such relief and support." The Secretary-General
is requested to transmit all offers of assistance for
relief and support to the unified command, which
in turn is asked to report to the Security Council
"as appropriate" on its relief activities. Finally,
the Secretary-General, the Economic and Social
Council, and other appropriate United Nations
organs, as well as the specialized agencies and ap-
propriate nongovernmental organizations are

Augusf 7, 7950

asked to provide such assistance as the unified
command may request.

There has been no discussion of the resolution,
submitted by Ambassador Austin on July 31,
which asks the Security Council to condemn the
North Korean authorities "for their continued
defiance of the United Nations" and to call upon
all states "to use their influence to prevail upon
the authorities of North Korea to cease this de-
fiance." The proposal calls upon all states to
refrain from assisting or encouraging the North
Korean authorities and "from action which might
lead to the spread of the Korean conflict to other
areas and thereby further endanger international
peace and security."

Economic and Social Council

The Economic and Social Council added to its
agenda the Security Council's request for coop-
eration in providing relief for Korean civilians
and will consider the matter when delegations have
received instructions from their governments.
The Council also decided that the draft conven-
tion relating to the status of refugees and the
protocol relating to the status of stateless persons
sliould be transmitted to the next General Assem-
bly. It further decided that the ad hoc Committee
on Statelessness should convene in Geneva August
14 to review these drafts. Finally, the Council
approved the reports of its Economic Committee
for Europe and of the Interim Coordinating Com-
mittee for International Commodity Arrange-
ments. The major portion of the Council's activity
was on such items as the draft Covenant on
Human Rights, full employment, the Interna-
tional Children's Emergency Fund, and technical
assistance.

In connection with approval of the report of the
Economic Committee for Europe, the Council
recommended that the necessary funds be allocated
to implement the year's program as decided upon
by the Commission at its last session, although the
United States and United Kingdom reserved the
right to inquire into the financial implications of
certain new undertakings.

Correction

In the Bulletin of July 31, page 196, right-
hand column, line 20 : "July" should read "June."

239

General Policy

C;ourse of Action Under Unified Command in
Korea — United States Report to the
Security Council

South Korean Forces Placed Under Unified
Command of United Nations

Korean Attack Opens New Chapter in History.
By John Foster Dulles, Consultant to the
Secretary

Puerto Rico Authorized To Write Own Con-
stitution. Statement by Secretary
Acheson

Visit of Australian Prime Minister. State-
ment by Secretary Acheson ......

Events in Korea Emphasize Need for Point 4
Program. Statement by Warren R.
Austin

Toward a Stronger World Organization. By
Francis H. Russell

Letters of Credence: Cuba

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Course of Action Under Unified Command in
Korea — United States Report to the
Security Council

South Korean Forces Placed Under Unified
Command of United Nations

Korean Attack Opens New Chapter in
History. By John Foster Dulles, Con-
sultant to the Secretary

Events in Korea Emphasize Need for Point 4
Program. Statement by Warren R.
Austin

International Court Opens Hearings in
Human-Rights Case

The United States in the United Nations . .

Economic Affairs

Greece Grants Income Tax E.xemption on
U.S. Aircraft Operations

Cuba Makes New Rates of Duty Effective
Without 30-Day Notice

U. S.-Cuba To Renegotiate Rates of Duty on
Cotton Waste

Treaty Information

U.S.-Canadian Treaty for Diverting Niagara

River for Power Purposes. Statement

by Adrian S. Fisher

Pacific Weather Stations Program Agreed

Upon by U.S.-Canada

U.S.-Canadian Weather Stations To Be

Resupplied by Ship

Northwest Atlantic Fisheries Convention

Enters Into Force

Trade Agreement With Mexico Terminated .
U.S.-Mexico Tuna Convention Enters Into

Force

Cuba Makes New Rates of Duty Effective

Without 30-Day Notice

Page Treaty Information — Continued Page

U.S.-Argentina Sign Agreement for Relief
From Double Taxation:

203 Argentine Note 216

U.S. Note 217

206 U.S.-Cuba To Renegotiate Rates of Duty

on Cotton Waste 217

U.S.-Union of South Africa To Sign Supple-

207 mentary Tax Protocols 218

U.S. Delegation Withdraws From Swiss-
Allied Accord Meeting 231

^^^ international Information and Cultural Affairs

218 Visit of Iraqi Law Specialist 235

Technical Assistance

219 The Caribbean Commission's Role in Tech-

nical Assistance — Interim Views of the

220 Four Member Governments 232

^^^ National Security

Military Aid to Certain Free Nations Con-
tinued. Statement by the President . 210

International Organizations and Conferences

203 Ambassador Katz Appointed to Nac Com-
mittee 224

206 Calendar of Meetings 225

U.S. Delegations:

Pubhc Education 227

207 Fourth World Power Conference .... 228
Improvement of Textbooks (Unesco) . . 228
Ophthalmology 228

219 Role of Libraries in Adult Education . . 229

Soil Science 229

233 Pediatrics Congress 229

239 European Migration 230

Administrative Sciences 230

Caribbean Commission Concludes Tenth

Meeting 230

213 Oeec Payments Plan Aids Unification of

Western Europe 235

216 President Designates Oeec Pubhc Interna-

tional Organization:

217 Executive Order 10133 235

Meteorological Services for International

Air Navigation. By Delbert M. Little . 236
John S. Cooper To Attend Nac Deputies'

Treaty Meetings 237

21^ The Foreign Service

214 Confirmations 238

Consular Offices 238

214 The Department

214 Senator McCarthy's Accusations on Files

215 Distort Facts 218

Appointment of Officers 238

215 o ... ^.
Publications

216 Recent Releases 238

Delbert M. Little, author of the article on meteorological serv-
ices for international air navigation, is assistant chief of Bureau
(Operations), United States Weather Bureau.

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICEilSSO

jAe^ u)eha/yimen{/ ,(w tnafe^

DISCUSSION OF KOREAN CASE IN SECURITY

COUNCIL 243

ADDITIONAL FUNDS FOR MILITARY ASSISTANCE

REQUESTED 247

U.N. CONFERENCE ON DECLARATION OF DEATH

OF MISSING PERSONS e By John Maktos 264

THE ILO PRELIMINARY CONFERENCE ON MIGRA-
TION • By Irwin M. Tobin 270

THE EUROPEAN CUSTOMS UNION STUDY

GROUP • By Howard J. Hilton, Jr 251

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 580
August 14, 1950

VieNT o*.

^W o,

B. S. SUPERINTfNOfNT OF DOCUMENTS

AUG 24 1950

^Ae ~2)efla/il^m€/)^t a)^ t/ui^

bulletin

Vol. XXIII, No. 580 • Publication 3937
Au^ist 14, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.C.

Price:

52 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.50
Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (February IS, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. Tlie BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

Discussion of Korean Case in Security Council

Statements ty Ambassador Warren R. Austin
U.S. Representative to the Security Council

COMPLAINT OF AGGRESSION
UPON THE REPUBLIC OF KOREA'

Since the Republic of Korea was attacked 5
weeks ago, the action of the Security Council has
been directed toward halting the aggression and
restoring peace and security in the area. Implicit
in all the action taken, has been the effort to keep
the conflict localized.

Success for this effort would not only restore
peace much more rapidly but would remove the
danger inherent in every conflict — the danger of its
spreading and becoming even more destructive
and terrible.

It is clear that not all members of the United
Nations are supporting this vital peace-making
effort of the United Nations. Moral, if not mate-
rial support, is being given to the North Korean au-
thorities that can fairly be regarded as giving aid
and comfort to the enemy of the United Nations.
This is a matter of serious concern.

In these circumstances, it seems wise to reinforce
the efforts of the Council to keep the conflict local-
ized. I am, therefore, tabling for the Council's
consideration a resolution aimed at supporting
that objective. The hour is late, and I do not pro-
pose that we should discuss it today, but I ask that
it be placed on the agenda for consideration at our
next meeting.

Text of Draft Resolution'

The Security Council

Condemns the North Korean authorities for their con-
tinued defiance of the United Nations ;

Calls upon all States to use their influence to prevail
upon the authorities of North Korea to cease this defi-
ance;

' Made on July 31 and released to the press by the U.S.
Mission to the U.N. on the same date. The President of
the Security Council for the month of August is Yakov
A. Malik, U.S.S.R. representative.

' U.N. doc. S/1653 of July 31, 1950.

Calls upon all States to refrain from assisting or en-
couraging the North Korean authorities and to refrain
from action vphich might lead to the spread of the Korean
conflict to other areas and thereby further endanger inter-
national peace and security.

RELIEF AND REHABILITATION IN KOREA^

The resolution before the Council is intended
to set forth in a preliminary way the United Na-
tions responsibilities toward the civilian popula-
tion now suffering in Korea. Every military
conflict brings in its wake suffering to civilian pop-
ulations— the women, the children, the aged, the
homeless. That is true in Korea. Refugees by
the hundreds of thousands have fled before the
aggression which descended on their peaceful
country. Today they are in urgent need of shel-
ter, of food, of medicine, and of many other
necessities.

The United Nations has deep responsibility for
meeting this problem as well as for executing a
direct military operation to throw back the ag-
gressor. The problem is not only to allay human
misery. We must, in addition, recognize that
these are the people who again must rebuild their
country and their government when the war is
ended. They must not be allowed to lose hope.
They must be given the sustenance which will en-
able them, with strength and vigor, to begin anew,
with an abiding faith in the forces of freedom.

Our examination of the problem has demon-
strated to us tliat the most practical method of
handling relief is through the unified command
and its field agency, the United Nations command.
Relief at this moment is, of course, an adjunct of
the military operation. All our combined efforts
must be meshed as smoothly as possible with the

'Made before the Security Council on July 31 and re-
leased to the press by the U.S. Mission to the U.N. on the
same date.

August 14, 1950

243

heroic struggles of United Nations forces on the
battlefield. For that reason the resolution places
primary responsibility on the unified command
"for determining the requirements" of relief and
support, and "for establishing in the field the pro-
cedures for providing" such relief and support.

The resolution invokes for the first time one of
the far-sighted provisions of the Charter — article
65. Article 65 provides that —

The Economic and Social Council may furnish infor-
mation to the Security Council and shall assist the Se-
curity Council upon its request.

The resolution also invokes for the first time,
in the case of aggression, the assistance of the spe-
cialized agencies, who have wisely, under the terms
of their agreements with the United Nations, fore-
seen the need for integrated international action
in a world crisis.

This resolution is an historic step in the total
mobilization of the world's peace machinery. The
agencies we have created so painstakingly over a
period of 5 years are now available for a massive
organized effort to meet the human problems
brought upon us by aggressive warfare. It is the
first time in history that such tools have been at
hand, ready-made, in an emergency of this kind.

Under this resolution, the Economic and Social
Coimcil, and the specialized agencies associated
with the United Nations, can begin to examine
their programs and to recast them as necessary
in line with practical actions they can take in the
present emergency. They can also begin to plan
ahead for the long-run problem of rehabilitation
and reconstruction.

This is true in many fields. In matters of
health, the World Health Organization will have
a great contribution to make in preventing epi-
demics and in restoring the physical health of the
nation. The Food and Agriculture Organization
can contribute to the furnishing of emergency food
supplies ; later to the restoration of Korean farm
production. Unesco can reorganize disrupted
educational facilities in the aggrieved country and
utilize its experience in mass communications to
tell the great story of today's international effort
and to make clear the nature of the aggression in
Korea. All of the specialized agencies can use
their information resource to advance public
understanding of their efforts in Korea and by so
doing arouse the conscience of mankind to con-
tinuing vigorous action against all forms of
oppression.

As relief needs became apparent, the unified
command can make them known to the United
Nations. All loyal members will undoubtedly
wish to contribute what they can to meet these
needs, in accordance with their means and
resources.

Step by step we are building a United Nations
program which will annihilate aggression, not
only in Korea, but throughout the world
community.

Text of Resolution*

The Security Council,

Recognizing the hardships and privations to which
the people of Korea are being subjected as a result of
the continued prosecution by the North Korean forces of
their unlawful attack ; and

Appreciating the spontaneous offers of assistance to
the Korean people which have been made by governments,
specialized agencies, and non-governmental organizations ;

Requests the Unified Command to exercise responsi-
bility for determining the requirements for the relief anid
support of the civilian population of Korea, and for estab-
lishing in the field the procedures for pirovidlng such relief
and support;

Requests the Secretary-General to transmit all offers
of assistance for relief and support to the Unified Com-
mand;

Requests the Unified Command to provide the Security
Council with reports, as appropriate, on its relief activi-
ties;

Requests the Secretary-General, the Economic and So-
cial Council in accordance with Article 65 of the Charter,
other appropriate United Nations principal and subsidiary
organs, the specialized agencies in accordance with the
terms of their respective agreements with the United
Nations, and appropriate nongovernmental organizations
to provide such assistance as the Unified Command may
request for the relief and support of the civilian popula-
tion of Korea, and as appropriate in connexion with the
responsibilities being carried out by the Unified Command
on behalf of the Security Council.

Statement by Secretary Acheson'

I should like to say just a word on the resolution
adopted by the Security Council on July 31 for
providing relief and support of the Korean civil-
ian population.

Under the resolution, the unified command will
exercise the responsibility for determining the re-
quirements for the relief and support of the civil-
ian popidation of Korea, and for establishing in
the field the procedures for providing such relief
and support.

This provision is essential because relief at this
moment is an adjunct of the military operation.
Nothing must interfere with the smoothest pos-
sible coordination of the United Nations military
effort to overcome the unprovoked aggression
against Korea and the pressing-problem of assist-
ance to the Korean people. The unified command
will establish the channels for makmg known its
needs to the United Nations.

On the United Nations side, the Secretary-Gen-
eral will transmit all offers of assistance for relief
and support to the unified command, which will
make the necessary arrangements for making such
assistance effective. The resolution passed on
July 31 also requests the Economic and Social
Council and the specialized agencies affiliated with
the United Nations to assist the unified command.

'U.N. doc. S/1057 of Aug. 1, 19.50; submitted to the
Security Council by France, Norway, and the U.K. on
July 31 and adopted on the same date.

° Made at press conference on Aug. 2 and released to the
I)ress on the same date.

244

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

Noiifioveriiniental oi-fjanizations — for example, the
Red Cross — are also asked to jjrovide such assist-
ance.

In this way it will be possible to utilize offers
of assistance to the people of Korea, whether they
come from governments, the specialized agencies,
or nongovernmental organizations. A number of
members of the United Nations have already in-
dicated their willingness to furnisli food and ma-
terials in support of the United Nations effort in
Korea, and the unified command will now be able
to call forth deliveries at the proper time.

The specialized agencies can also play a con-
siderable part in relieving the sufferings of the
Koreans. For example, the World Health Organ-
ization may provide medical teams, vaccines, and
other assistance. The Food and Agriculture Or-
ganization may contribute to the furnishing of
emergency food supplies and to agricultural re-
habilitation. The United Nations Educational,
Scientific and Cultural Organization has the im-
portant task of increasing public understanding
of United Nations actions in the Korean crisis.

The Economic and Social Council will exercise
its function of coordinating the activities of the
specialized agencies and may be concerned with
the problem of long-range rehabilitation of Korea.

Finally, the United Nations Secretariat will
serve as a connecting link between governments
and agencies on the one hand, and the unified
command on the other.

DEBATE ON U. S. RESOLUTION URGED'

Mr. President : I should like to raise a question
or two about the provisional agenda which you
have circulated for today's meeting.

In the first place, I note that this provisional
agenda does not contain the agenda item which
the Security Council was discussing at its meeting
yesterday afternoon — aggression upon the Repub-
lic of Korea. It is the item which has commanded
the attention of the Council at all the meetings
during the past 5 weeks which you have not
attended.

At the end of yesterday's meeting, after we
adopted measures to speed assistance to the tragic
victims of aggi'ession in the Republic of Korea,
my delegation introduced a resolution (doc.
S/1653). No action was taken by the Security
Council on that resolution, and it remains the
unfinished business of the Security Council. It
was understood that this question would be taken
up at the Council's meeting today.

I realize that, since you were not present at the
Council's meeting, you may not have been aware
of this fact when you circulated the provisional
agenda for today's meeting. However, you now

' Mafle on Aug. 1 and released to the press by the U.S.
Mission to the U.N. on the same date.

have had an opportunity, undoubtedly, to consult
the records of tiie Security Council meeting of yes-
terday, and I hope you will agree that the first
item of business on today's agenda should be a
continuation of the discussion which was started
yesterday afternoon on the United States draft
resolution.

I suggest, therefore, that item 2 on our agenda
for today should read "Complaint of aggression
upon the Republic of Korea." This suggestion is
not based primarily on technical grounds.

The United Nations has devoted gi'eat efforts
throughout the past 5 weeks to halting the North
Korean aggressors and restoring peace in Korea.
The United Nations has put an army into the field
against these aggressors. It is engaged in mobiliz-
ing the strength of the free world in support of
these forces. The response of the membership of
the United Nations to the request of the Security
Council for assistance to the Republic of Korea
has been overwhelming and is increasing daily.

Many problems face the Security Council in
carrying out the great tasks to which it has dedi-
cated itself. It is of the utmost importance to the
United Nations and to the maintenance of interna-
tional peace and security that these efforts of the
United Nations and of this Security Council should
go forward without delay or diversion.

The resolution which I tabled yesterday suggests
steps which could contribute directly to ending the
breach of the peace. Consideration of these steps
and others which would lead to the same objective
should have priority over all other matters.

Action to remove threats to the peace is the most
solemn obligation of the members of this organiza-
tion. The creators of the United Nations empha-
sized this obligation by embodying it in paragraph
1 of article 1 of the Charter. Every peace-loving
state must recognize that its paramount concern
must be to end the breach of the peace in Korea.
So long as aggression continues, all other issues are
secondary. We camiot agi'ee that there is cur-
rently any issue so urgent as the fact that war is
being waged against the United Nations.

I stress this point, Mr. President, because I note
that item 2 of the provisional agenda which you
have presented to us deals with the question of
recognition of the Central People's Government of
the People's Republic of China as the representa-
tive of China. My Government feels, however,
that it is highly inappropriate for the Security
Council to concern itself with this question at this
time.

The United Nations should establish firmly the
clear principle that the question of Chinese rep-
resentation is not linked in any way with the
Korean aggression. The firm opposition of the
United Nations against the barbaric use of force
has given strength and encouragement to all free
peoples. We cannot risk the disillusionment that
would flow from consideration by the United Na-
tions under this duress of such a matter as rep-

August 14, 1950

245

resentation. We are strongly opposed to any
action of this Council which might leave the im-
pression that the question of the tei'mination of
the aggression from North Korea can be contin-
gent in any way upon the determination of the
question of Chinese representation. The accept-
ance of the provisional agenda in the form in
which it appears before us would undoubtedly
create exactly that impression.

The fact of aggression cannot be obscured by
unrelated issues. The overwhelming majority of
the United Nations are pooling their resources in
the common cause of peace. Consideration of the
Chinese representation issue in any relationship
whatever to Korea would divert and distract from
the gi'eat collective effort of the United Nations.

At a time when the United Nations is faced with
overt defiance of its authority, it is pertinent to
recall official statements made by the regime which
the Soviet representative would like to have seated
in the Security Council. That regime has de-
nounced United Nations action in Korea as
"armed aggression," as "intervention in the in-
ternal affairs of Korea," and as a "violation of
world peace." These and other statements amount
to giving assistance and encouragement to the
regime against which the United Nations is taking
preventive action. It would be particularly un-
wise to consider at this time the seating of a regime
that has officially condemned the efforts of the
United Nations to halt aggression in Korea.

To consider at this time the seating of a declared
opponent to United Nations efforts to repulse ag-
gression would weaken the support to which the
United Nations forces at the front are entitled and
would undermine our entire peace-making
endeavor.

The merits of the Chinese representation issue
have been considered by this Council and by al-
most all the other organs of the United Nations
at various times during the past 7 months. All
of us have had many opportunities to explain our
attitude on that question. I do not wish to sug-
gest that it is not within the right of any member
of the Security Council to raise this question anew.
My Government does feel strongly, however, that
the question of China's representation should be
considered separately on its merits at another time.
Accordingly, Mr. Chairman, I shall oppose the
adoption of item 2 of the provisional agenda.

I am also opposed to the adoption of the third
item on the provisional agenda. As I have said,
the Security Council has been dealing for 5 weeks
with the Korean question. It would be entirely
inappropriate for us at this late date to revise
the title of the agenda item under which we are
discussing the Korean question, or to accept any
new title. It is quite clear that the representative
of the Soviet Union, or any other delegate, can
make any proposals with regard to the Korean
question which he sees fit under the agenda item
which we are still considering. Any implication

from the wording of the suggested agenda item
that the Soviet Union is the only nation interested
in peaceful settlement of the Korean question must
be bluntly rejected by this Council. We have be-
come accustomed in tliis and other organs of the
United Nations to agenda items worded primarily
with a view to their propaganda value. However,
it is our long-standing practice to keep our agenda
items very general and simple, and we believe we
should stick to that practice in the present in-
stance. We shall all be glad to hear what the rep-
resentative of the Soviet Union may have to say
on the Korean question. I am confident that the
present woixling of the Korean agenda item will
not limit the scope of his remarks in any way. I
believe it would be a mistake, however, to change
the procedural arrangements under which we have
been working on this subject for this past 5 weeks
during his absence.

I suggest, therefore, that the sole item of busi-
ness on our agenda for this meeting should be the
question of aggression upon the Republic of
Korea. I feel that under that item the first order
of business would of course be discussion and de-
cision on the motion which I presented yesterday.
Any other proposals submitted by other members
of the Council could then be considered.

I move, therefore, that the item following
"Adoption of the agenda" should read "Complaint
of aggression upon the Republic of Korea." I re-
quest that the Council vote separately with regard
to the other two items. I will vote against approv-
ing them.

Nations Offer Ground Forces
For Use in Korea

Excerpts From Statement hy Ambassador Warren
R. Austin, U.S. Representative to the V.N.

[Released to the press hy the U.S. Mission to the U.N.
July 26}

In the space of only a few hours, three more
countries have publicly announced that they in-
tend to support with ground forces, in addition to
their other combat forces already engaged, the
United Nations effort to restore peace and true
independence to the Republic of Korea. Great
Britain, Australia, and New Zealand have offered
ground forces augmenting those already offered
by Thailand and Turkey. As United States rep-
resentative to the United Nations, I express pro-
found appreciation for the contributions to the
common effort that have already been announced.
The Supreme Commander of United Nations
Forces in Korea has announced that our strength
will "continually increase." The news of the
pledges of new military aid by member nations is
early evidence of the soundness of his estimate.

246

Department of State Bulletin

Additional Funds for Military Assistance Requested

[Released to the press ty the White House August 1]

The President today sent the following letter to Sam
Raybum, Speaker of the House of Representatives, trans-
mitting a supplemental estimate of appropriation to pro-
vide military assistance to foreign nations.

I have the honor to transmit herewith for the
consideration of the Congress a supplemental
estimate of appropriation for the fiscal year 1951
of $4,000,000,000 to provide military assistance to
foreign nations.

As I pointed out in my message to the Congress
on July 19, 1950, the Communist assault on the
Republic of Korea has challenged the authority of
the United Nations and jeopardized world peace.

It is now clear that the free nations must acceler-
ate the efforts they are making to strengthen their
common security. They now have no alternative
but to increase rapidly their preparedness to
defend the principles of international law and
justice for which the United Nations stands. This
course provides the best hope of deterring future
calculated outbreaks against the peace of the
world.

In view of this urgent necessity, we have been
reviewing the requirements for the common
defense of the free world. We have been consult-
ing with our associates in the North Atlantic
Treaty with a view to determining what addi-
tional resources must be used by them and by us
to provide an adequate common defense. Most of
these nations, like ourselves, are now making plans
to increase their production of defense equipment
and their armed forces. The greater share of this
effort will, of course, be assumed by these nations
themselves, out of their own resources. However,
the serious problems with which they are con-
fronted make it necessary for us to inci'ease our
military aid to them if they are to make their
maximum contribution to the common defense. It
is not yet possible to determine exactly what each
nation involved in the common defense can and
should provide.

It is already clear, however, that the security of
the free world requires the United States and the
other free nations to put forth a far larger effort

in a much shorter period of time than had orig-
inally been contemplated.

For this reason, I recommend that the Congress
provide $4,000,000,000 in additional funds, to be
used under the Mutual Defense Assistance Pro-
gram. Of this amount, it is estimated that $3,504,-
000,000 will be required for strengthening the
security of the North Atlantic area. The security
of this area is of paramount importance to the
strength of the entire free world.

The balance of the funds requested would be
devoted to expanding and accelerating our mili-
tary assistance to vital areas in other parts of the
world. It is estimated that $193,000,000 will be
required to accelerate and increase the important
programs of military assistance to Greece, Turkey,
and Iran. In view of the increased jeopardy to the
Pacific area caused by the Communist aggression
in Korea, it is estimated that $303,000,000 will be
required to increase and accelerate military assist-
ance to the Republic of the Philippines and to other
nations in southern and eastern Asia. These
funds, added to the amounts already provided and
to the resources supplied by other nations, will aid
in bringing our common defensive strength more
quickly to the level now shown to be necessary.

It is important that the Congress make the
requested amount available as soon as possible.
The bulk of this money will be used to procure
military equipment of the kind which takes a long
time to produce. Much of it will not come off the
production lines for 12, 18, or 24 months after the
signing of the procurement contracts. Speed in
getting this production under way is imperative
if we are to have the equipment for the expanded
forces that are being formed.

The productive capacity of the entire free world
should be drawn on to provide the necessary equip-
ment. The need is so great and so urgent that we
should obtain the necessary defense articles wher-
ever they can be produced most quickly, most
cheaply, and with the most efficient use of the eco-
nomic resources of the free nations.

While it will undoubtedly be necessary for the

August 14, 1950

247

United States to manufacture the major part of
the equipment to be supplied out of these funds, it
will also be necessary for other nations to share
the burden to the extent that they can. A signifi-
cant portion of the arms needed can be produced
abroad. In many instances, however, there are
resources and manpower which foreign countries
can allocate to defense production only if those
countries are supplied with additional production,
equiiDment and materials. Such equipment and
materials will substantially increase the produc-
tive resources which the free nations can devote
to the common defense.

It is contemplated, therefore, in the program I
am recommending, that part of the funds requested
will be used to procure military items and produc-
tion equipment and materials abroad and to pro-
vide equipment and materials, procured in the
United States or in other countries, for defense
production abroad. Authority already exists for
these activities under the Mutual Defense Assist-
ance Program. If we are to take full advantage
of foreign productive capacity, we will have to
use greater sums for these purposes than we have
been using in the past and will have to purchase
the necessary military equipment or production
aids in any market where such procurement can
be most effectively accomplished.

Equipment which is procured abroad under this
program can either be used within the country
which produces it or transferred to other coun-
tries engaged in the common defense. The equip-
ment produced abroad, and that produced in the
United States, under the Mutual Defense Assist-
ance Program, will be made available to other free
countries in accordance with their needs and their
ability to use it effectively. To the extent that
this equipment is not made available to other
countries, it will constitute a valuable addition to
our own defense stocks. I wish to make it very
plain that this equipment will go forward to other
countries only to supplement, and not to take the
place of, their own strong efforts. Transfers to
other North Atlantic Treaty nations will be con-
sistent with definite defense plans developed by
the Treaty Organization.

In intensifying our efforts and the efforts of
those joined with us to increase our common de-
fensive power, we must not lose sight of the fact
that military power rests on economic strength.

It is vitally important that the free nations cre-
ate a gi'eater degree of combined military strength
in being than has been previously maintained. It
is also vitally important that we continue to build
up our combined economic strength, capable of
rapid mobilization in the event of emergency.

The expansion of the mutual defense program
will not be a substitute for economic aid. Oii the
contrary, the burden which we expect the other
nations to bear in the common defense effort makes
it all the more necessary to continue our economic
aid. A greatly expanded program of defense pro-

duction will impose serious economic burdens, and
the cost of maintaining expanded military forces
will add to those burdens.

Therefore, if the free nations are to achieve the
economic and military strength which are neces-
sary for our common defense, we must continue
to give full support to the European Recovery
Program.

The increased military aid program I am rec-
ommending is as vital to our national security as
the increased military appropriations I have pre-
viously recommended for our own armed forces.
The security of the United States is inseparably
bound up with the survival of the free nations
associated with us in the common defense.

U.S. Hospital Ships Designated
for Use in Korea

The following message u-as trmisinitted to United
Nations Secretary-General Lie by Amhussndor Warren R. .
Austin on August 2 and was released to the press hy the
United States Mission to the United Nations on the same
date.

The repi-esentative of the United States to the
United Nations presents his compliments to the
Secretary-General of the United Nations and has
tlie honor to state that the United States Navy
Department has designated as hospital ships under
the terms of the Geneva convention and in accord-
ance with other agreements made on this subject,
the U.S.S. Benevolence, the U.S.S. Consolation,
and the U.S.S. Re-pose. Each such hospital ship
has a gross registered tonnage of 11,758 tons (dis-
placement of 15,540 tons) , a length of 520 feet, one
funnel (machinery and stack aft), two masts
(mainmast and foremast), and three king posts,
which from side view may have the appearance of
masts. The marks of identification on these ships
will be as follows :

(1) Hull painted white;

(2) Horizontal band of green, whole length of
ship ;

(3) Eed Cross painted in middle of starboard
and port sides;

(4) Red Cross painted on deck, illuminated elec-
trically at night;

(5) Eed Cross painted on funnel, illuminated
electrically at night.

In view of the great urgency of this matter, it
is requested of the Secretary-General that the
North Korean authorities be informed as expedi-
tiously as possible of the foregoing designation,
characteristics, and markings.

The United States representative would be gi'ate-
ful if he could be informed by the Secretary-
General of receipt of this information by the
North Korean authorities.

248

Department of State Bulletin

Immediate and Urgent Need To Step Up Defenses

ADDITIONAL FUNDS ASKED FOR MUTUAL DEFENSE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

Statement hy Secretary Acheson '

In view of tlie necessity for prompt action and
in view of the fact that the approjoriate legislative
committees of the Congress have so recently re-
viewed the Mutual Defense Assistance Program,
Congressional leaders of both parties have gener-
ously assured me that they will cooperate in
obtaining early consideration of this matter in
connection with an appropriation bill.

The details of the appropriation estimate are
set forth in the letter of the Director of the Bureau
of the Budget, transmitted herewith.^

The Communist aggression in Korea underlines
the urgent need for strengthening the free world,
quickly and effectively.

The President indicated, in liis message to the
Congress on July 19, 1950, the three ways in which
we must push ahead at once to protect the security
of our country.

One way is to increase immediately the shipment
of weapons and reenforcements to General Mac-
Arthur.

The second way is to build up our armed forces.

The third way is to aid further the free nations
associated with us to build up their defenses
against aggression.

These three courses are interrelated and are ^11
vital aspects of our own security.

The aggression against the Republic of Korea
serves notice to the world that the international
Communist movement will use not only subversion
and propaganda but also the force of arms to
achieve its purposes wherever it can hope to do so
successfully.

Military unpreparedness would be an open invi-
tation to further aggression; conversely, the best
hope of peace in the present situation is to make
it clear that acts of aggression will be resisted and
resisted successfully.

' Made before the Armed Services Subcommittee of the
House Committee on Appropriations on Aug. 2 and released
to the press on the same date.

' Not here printed.

A study of the map of the world makes it obvi-
ous to anyone that it is not just a question of what
the United States can do, or will do, to resist Com-
munist aggression. The question is what the free
world, of which we are a part, can do and will do.

The significance of the United Nations prompt
response to the Communist attack on Korea is that
free nations are willing — are determined — to act
together in a common defense against aggression.

Many of these nations know very well what it
means to be overrun by a police-state tyranny.
There is no lack of resolution. There is no lack of
plans for a common defense against aggression.

The immediate, urgent need is for all of us to
step up our defenses. We and our friends have a
tremendous defense jjotential — more than enough
to deal with the threats which confront us. But we
must, with the greatest speed, translate that poten-
tial into defense in being.

A tank in Korea today is worth many tanks on
the drawing board.

It tal^es time to create defense in being. Many
of the items that are vital to our security take from
6 months to 2 years to produce in the quantities
needed. That is whj' it is essential that no time
is lost in getting production started on many
items which are vital to the common defense.

Together with the other members of the North
Atlantic Treaty organization (Nat), we have
been working on a program to increase the com-
mon defense of this group of nations to a level
adequate to the threat. Details of this program
are still being worked out, but the magnitude of
the task is already apparent.

How the Funds Will Be Used

Of the 4 billion dollars in additional funds now
being requested for the Mutual Defense Assist-
ance Program (MDAP), it is estimated that
3,504 million dollars will be required to strengthen
the security of the North Atlantic area.

This amount will enable us to proceed with those

August 14, 1950

249

measures which are immediately required during
the fiscal year 1951 as our part of the initial phase
of this defense program.

Heavy responsibilities for the increase in our
common defense program fall upon the other
member nations.

We recognize that commensurate efforts by the
other nations, whose total economy is roughly 40
percent of ours, impose burdens more than com-
parable with ours I and we recognize, therefore,
that we have special responsibilities toward the
common effort.

Our deputy to the North Atlantic Council
(Nac), Mr. Spofford, is now engaged in active
consultations with the representatives of other
nations in the North Atlantic Treaty Organization
to work out what each of us can and will do now
to increase our common defense capabilities.

We are confident of the desire and the determi-
nation of the other members of the organization to
increase their efforts. A number of steps have
already been taken in this direction, and others are
planned.

We shall keep the Congress informed of the
progress made by the members of the treaty organ-
ization in achieving an acceleration and an in-
crease in their defense efforts.

Although the largest portion of these funds is
to be used to strengthen the security of the North
Atlantic area, as an area of particular importance
to the strength of the entire free world, we must
continue to expand and accelerate our military
assistance to vital areas in other parts of the world.

In Greece and Turkey, our military aid pro-
grams have made marked progress. We are also
sending military aid to increase the military
strength of Iran. It is estimated that 193 million
dollars of the additional funds will be needed
to enable us to speed up or increase the programs
in these three countries as may be required.

The outbreak of Communist aggression against
Korea has also created a need for additional mili-
tary assistance to the Philippine Government and
to other nations in the general area of China. It
is planned that 303 million dollars of the addi-
tional funds will be available for this purpose.

Recent events have made it clear that our
defense efforts in all these vital areas must be in-
creased and speeded up. The epitaph of freedom,
if it is ever written, would be "too little and too
late." We must have enough, and we must have it
soon enough.

To make this possible, it is necessary to draw
upon the resources of the entire free world. The
bulk of the funds requested is needed to increase
substantially the production of military equip-
ment in the United States for use in the common
defense. But all the needs for defense equipment
cannot be met out of stocks and production in this
country. The United States cannot and should not
seek, by its own efforts alone, to create the joint
defensive strength needed.

MDAP To Draw Upon Resources of Free World

There are several means by which the Mutual
Defense Assistance Program can draw more fully
upon the resources of the entire free world than has
been done in the past.

By using the authority which is contained in
existing mutual defense assistance legislation for
military procurement abroad, we shall be able to
avoid having an undue part of the burden fall
upon our own economy and to obtain many items
more cheaply and more quickly than they could
otherwise be obtained.

To some extent, such procurement will also ease
the additional dollar strain which will result when
productive facilities abroad are turned to defense
purposes.

The great increase which is now required in the
magnitude of our military production at home
makes it necessary not only to procure abroad
but also to facilitate the transfer between countries
of items needed in the common defense.

This will enable us, for example, to combine jet
engines produced in one country with airframes
produced in a second country to bolster the air
defenses of a third country.

As you know, the principle of balanced collective
forces has been agreed upon and is being put into
practice by the nations of the North Atlantic com-
munity. The flexibility which procurement abroad
will yield will be a valuable adjunct to tliis
principle.

In some cases, a more effective use of industrial
capacity abroad for defense production can also
be achieved by a relatively small increase in the
aid we can furnish for this purpose. Some of these
plants are now idle, for lack of an essential link
in the production process. Others require assist-
ance in conversion to defense production. By sup-
plying vitally needed production equipment, parts,
or materials, we can galvanize into action addi-
tional sources of military equipment.

On the basis of our limited experience thus far
with this type of assistance, it is clear that such
aid yields many times its value in finished defense
equipment. With the aid of some nonferrous
metals and a quantity of machine tools, for ex-
ample, a production line in France was able to start
turning out combat vehicles.

To make a fuller use of production capacity
abroad, it will be necessary both to increase the
scope and broaden the criteria for production
assistance under the legislative authority which
now exists.

We must recognize, in the administration of the
Mutual Defense Assistance Program, that the
health and the vitality of the economies of the
countries associated in this effort are a fundamen-
tal part of the defensive strength of this group
of nations. Resourceful and vigorous measures
are required to insure that the tremendous increase
in our defensive strength in being can be accom-
(Continued on page 21 If)

250

Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bulletin

THE EUROPEAN CUSTOMS UNION STUDY GROUP

by Howard J. Hilton, Jr.

Since its organization in 1947, the European
Customs Union Study Group has been steadily
examining the problems involved in the forma-
tion of a European Customs Union or separate
regional unions between various European coun-
tries. The problems of a European Customs
Union, as Henri Spaak, Minister of State in Bel-
gium, pointed out in his opening address at the
first meeting of the Study Group, is not only a
technical one but also, and to a greater extent, a
political problem. He felt that, if a group as
competent as the Study Group were to throw some
light on the problem and to give some concrete in-
dication regarding the constitution of the Europe
of the future, the governments would not overlook
such indications. The peoples of Europe are
aware that the future of their own prosperity and
the future of peace, itself, depend on political ac-
cord as well as a coordination of economic efforts
of the various peoples.

The first press release of the Study Group, which
reiterated this view, stated :

In tbe circumstances prevailing in Europe today it is
imperative that any proposal which might have a long
term stabilizing influence both in the economic and politi-
cal spheres should be studied in an earnest and positive
spirit. It is in this spirit and with a full realization of
the far-reaching implications that the Study Group is
conducting its work.'

Study Group Formed September 12, 1947

The governments represented on the Committee
of European Economic Cooperation formed the

European Customs Union Study Group on Sep-
tember 12, 1947. In the words of the declaration,^
the Study Group was created "for the purpose of
examining the problems involved and the steps to
be taken in the formation of a Customs Union or
Customs Unions" between any or all of the member

'Press release of the European Customs Union Study
Group, Brussels, Mar. 23, 1948, p. 13.

' The full text of the declaration as reproduced in the
general report of the Committee of European Economic
Cooperation, Paris, Sept. 21, 1947, vol. i, p. 35, follows :

During the course of the discussions of the Committee
of Cooperation in Paris, it has been agreed that every
available means should be found of promoting a stable
and healthy economy in Europe within the framework of
expanding world trade. As a contribution to the attain-
ment of this objective the possibility of forming a Customs
Union or Unions in accordance with the principles of the
draft Charter for the proposed International Trade Or-
ganization has been raised, and it has been recognized
that decisions to form such Unions cannot be taken with-
out preliminary study.

The Governments of Austria, Belgium, Denmark,
France, Greece, Ireland, Iceland, Italy, Luxemburg, the
Netherlands, Portugal, the United Kingdom and Turkey
have accordingly decided to create a Study Group for the
purpose of examining the problems involved and the steps
to be taken, in the formation of a Customs Union or Cus-
toms Unions between any or all of those Governments
and any other Governments invited to participate in the
work of the Study Group. The Governments of Belgium,
Luxemburg and the Netherlands have agreed to act as
sponsoring powers. They are arranging for invitations
to join the group to be issued to other States and will
convene a first meeting of the Study Group as soon as
sufficient opportunity has been given for other States to
signify their desire to adhere to the Study Group.

The Study Group will seek to establish appropriate
relationships with the Interim Tariff Committee to be set
up under the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade,
and with the International Trade Organization as it is
established.

Augusf 14, 7950

251

governments and any other governments invited
to participate in the work of the Study Group.

At the time this declaration was signed, a num-
ber of the governments signified their intentions
to examine the possibility of forming certain re-
gional customs unions. The Governments of Bel-
gium, Luxembourg, and the Netherlands which
had signed the customs convention at London on
September 5, 1944, stated that the Parliaments of
the three countries had approved the convention
and that it was to enter into force by January 1,
1948. The four Scandinavian countries — Den-
mark, Norway, Sweden, and Iceland — announced
that they were taking steps to examine "the pos-
sibility of extending economic cooperation between
their countries, including the question of the elim-
ination, wholly or partly, of the customs frontiers
of the four countries." ^ The French Govern-
ment declared her readiness "to enter into nego-
tiations with all European Governments sharing
these views who wished to enter a customs union
with France and whose national economies are
capable of being combined with the French econ-
omy in such a way as to make a viable unit." ^
On September 19, the Greek and Turkish Govern-
ments declared that they would cooperate in the
work of the Study Group and would study the
possibility of forming a customs union.

The Study Group held its first meeting at Brus-
sels from November 10-14, 1947, at the invitation
of the coimtries comprising the Benelux Union.
D. P. Spierenburg, head of the Benelux delegation,
was elected chairman of the Study Group, and Mr.
Calmes of Luxembourg, was elected vice-chairman.
Representatives of the following Governments
attended the meeting: Austria, Belgium, Den-
mark, France, Greece, Iceland, Ireland, Italy,
Luxembourg, Netherlands, Portugal, Switzerland,
United Kingdom, and Turkey. The Govern-
ments of Norway and Sweden sent observers ; and,
because of the special economic relationships with
the United Kingdom, the Goverimnents of Canada,
Australia, New Zealand, South Africa, and India
also sent observers.^ Mr. Spierenburg said, in de-
scribing the work of the Study Group that, "This
is the first time in history that such thorough-
going preparatory activities have been attempted

' Ibid., pp. 34 and 35.
' IMd., p. 36.

among a large number of countries to bring about
close economic cooperation." °

Customs Union To Be Based on the ITO Charter

"The sort of customs union which is contem-
plated by the Study Group" is described in its
first report as "one which would combine coopera-
tive action among the member countries with such
freedom to develop along their natural paths as
possible." ' It is to be conceived within the frame-
work of the charter for an International Trade
Organization (Ito) with the objective of creating
"a new entity which is something more than the
sum of the countries composing it, which would
enable the Union as a whole and the individual
countries better to play their part in multilateral
trade." * In its technical construction, the cus-
toms union will be developed in accordance with
article 44 of the Ito charter. Since most of the
members of the Study Group are also Contracting
Parties to the General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade (Gatt), they are obligated to observe ar-
ticle XXIV, which is similar to article 44 of the
charter. These provisions, which establish the
criteria for customs unions, require the elimina-
tion of duties and other restrictive regulations
of commerce with respect to substantially all the
trade between constituent territories of the union
and the application to the trade of territories out-
side the union of substantially the same duties and
other regulations, which shall not, on the whole,
be higher than their general incidence prior to
the union. Both provisions also recognize the de-
sirability of increasing freedom of trade by the
development, through voluntary agreement, of
closer integration between the economies of the
countries party to such agreements.

' Subsequently, invitations were extended to the repre-
sentatives of the American, British, French, and Russian
zones of occupation of Germany to nominate observers.
The American, Britisli, and Freneli, accordingly, nomi-
nated observers, but the Russians refused the invitation.
The Federal Government of Germany at the fifth meeting
was invited to participate as a full member in the work of
the Group. The United States, at this time, was also
invited to delegate observers to its meetines. The Gov-
ernments of Norway and Sweden assumed full member-
ship at the third meeting.

"Reported in Economic Information (Economische
Voorlichting, Feb. 11, 1948).

'Press release of the European Customs Union Study
Group, Brussels, Mar. 23, 1948, p. 12.

'Ibid., p. 12.

252

Department of State Bulletin

The Problems of a Common Tariff

After preliminary study, the Study Group con-
cluded that the establishment of a common tariff
involved essentially five problems. These are (1)
the establishment of a conunon nomenclature, (2)
determination of the basis for calculating tariffs,
(3) determination of the height of the tariff, (4)
the selection between single and double column
tariffs, and (5) tlie definition of dutiable value.

Tlie Customs Union Study Group decided to
use the Geneva draft as a basis for the nomencla-
ture to be prepared. After a number of years of
studj^, experts attached to the League of Nations
prepared that draft and designed it to create a
framework within which individual countries
could construct their own tariffs. It consisted of
1,000 major headings which were binding while the
subheadings were permissive. It was not a man-
datory tariff nomenclature but one designed to
establish a framework to which tariffs of other
countries, in general, could be made to conform.
The study was not in vain, for the Geneva draft
was used in the revision of the French tariff fol-
lowing the war and in the preparation of the
Benelux tariff. Nevertheless, recent scientific de-
velopments and the necessity to prepare a tariff
that would be mandatory for all members of a
European Customs Union required that consider-
able study and revision be made of the Geneva
draft. Although the Geneva draft could allow
many fine points to remain unsettled, the manda-
tory nature of the Brussels draft required that all
of these points be settled by mutual agreement.
To undertake this study, the Group established a
Pennanent Tariff Bureau at Brussels to operate
under the Customs Committee of the Study
Group.

The selection of the basis for calculating the
tariffs involves, essentially, a choice between spe-
cific duties and ad valorem duties. Although
specific duties have the great virtue of simplicity
of application, their incidence varies greatly with
changes in price levels. It was, in general, agreed
that the basis of the tariff duties would be ad
valorem with the understanding that specific
duties could be utilized if calculation on this basis
were justified for technical, economic, or fiscal
reasons. The decision calling for the utilization
of the ad valorem basis raised the important prob-
lem of the definition to be used in determining
dutiable value.

Considerable variation is to be found in ad
valorem duties depending upon the definition of
dutiable value. In some countries, the c. i. f. price
is used whereas in others, the United States, for
example, the f.o.b. price determines the dutiable
value. For those items where the original cost is
low and cost of transportation and insurance is
high, the variation to be found in the duties ap-
plicable according to the different systems may be
considerable. The Customs Committee estab-
lished a special subcommittee to study this ques-
tion of valuation.

The method to be used in determining the
height of the tariff, so that it would meet the re-
quirements imposed by relevant provisions of
Gatt and the Ito charter, raises many problems.
A straight average of the tariff's would obviously
not be satisfactory for some countries have pro-
hibitive tariff rates for special items. If these
tariff' rates are given equal weight, then certain
products in the common tariff would require the
application of a high rate of tariff which would
on the whole have greater incidence for the entire
area than existed prior to the formation of the
union. Such an approach would create a statis-
tical bias favoring the higher tariff countries. A
purely mechanical approach based on weighted
averages designed to eliminate this bias, likewise,
would not be entirely satisfactory, for the height
of tariffs for individual products may produce im-
portant economic implications for particular
countries. It is necessary, therefore, in the deter-
mination of an average incidence, to consider the
economic factors. As stated in the first report,
the sample rates will gradually be developed as
the common nomenclature becomes generally ac-
cepted by the experts. Arithmetical methods will
be used to obtain a rough average of existing
tariffs for the purpose of illustration.

No one supposes, however, that the final rates which
could be put into operation could be reached save by a
process of negotiation which would take into account the
needs of the various countries concerned. The level of
the common tariff would have important effects both on
industries including agriculture and on price levels and
national economies generally.'

Economic Committee

With due consideration to this problem and its
relation to the elimination of tariffs and other re-

• lUd, pp. 3-4.

August 14, 1950

253

strictions between prospective members of the
Union, the Study Group, at its third meeting,
established an Economic Committee. It has the
task of examining the effects on the economies of
member countries of the elimination of tariff bar-
riers between them in the event of a customs union
established according to the principles of the Ito
charter. The initial program of the Committee
was set forth as follows :

The study of the economic consequences of the elimina-
tion of customs barriers within a Union should initially
be limited to a certain number of products or sectors of
production. It is considered that the first work to be
undertaken Is to invite participating countries to prepare
a report relating to those sectors of their national economy
which would, in their opinion, be significantly affected,
whether adversely or favourably, by the formation of a
Customs Union. Each country represented on the Eco-
nomic Committee is asked to prepare for the first meeting
of this Committee, a list of products or sectors of produc-
tion which it, for its part, proposes to study. These dif-
ferent lists would be considered by the Economic Commit-
tee at its first meeting with a view to determining which
products or sectors of production included on the lists of
some countries, but not of others, ought to be studied in
the same way by any or all of the latter so as to obtain,
(where necessary) a comprehensive picture of the effect of
a Customs Union upon the sectors of economy involved
in all countries where those sectors play a significant
role.'°

The Study Group also instructed the Economic
Committee to obtain from the participating coun-
tries the data required to execute its task. The
Study Group suggested that the following infor-
mation would be found necessary for each product
or sector of production to be studied :

1. Data showing the quantity of national pro-
duction, both prewar and postwar with indications
on conditions affecting production, namely, de-
pendence on indigenous or imported raw mate-
rials, legislation, and any other measures which
might affect production ;

2. data on internal consumption ;

3. data on imports and exports ;

4. incidence of tariffs;

5. position regarding existing preferential rates
of duties granted by participating coimtries to
overseas territories and other countries outside the
prospective union ;

6. an indication of the policies of individual
governments for developing production;

7. protective measures other than customs du-
ties and in particular quantitative restrictions and

considerations relating to exchange controls; and
8. on the assumption that a Customs Union is to
be fully operative the best possible estimate on the
basis of available data of the effects on the volume
of output, consumption, exports, imports, and em-
ployment in the sector of production under
consideration.

This Committee, in carrying out the tasks as-
signed, submitted a full report to the Study Group
for consideration at its fourth plenary session held
in December 1948. The report of the Economic
Committee, however, received only cursory exami-
nation. The Study Group discussed three
methods by which a customs union could be
achieved. The first method consisted of the for-
mation of regional unions, such as the Benelux and
the Franco-Italian Customs Union. These unions
would then, ultimately, be combined into one gen-
eral European Union. The second method en-
visaged the progressive removal of barriers,
product by product, until finally all products
would be freed of restrictions and a customs union
would have been achieved. The third method
provided for the realization of a European Union
by stages, first a tariff union, then, gradual reduc-
tions until a customs union would be achieved.

The Study Group felt that these three methods
were not entirely incompatible but that two tasks
should be completed before any conclusions were
reached. It felt that a common specimen tariff
using the tariff nomenclature of the Permanent
Tariff Bureau must be prepared. Also, action
would have to await the studies to be made by the
Organization for European Economic Coopera-
tion (Oeec) on the coordination of the long-term
programs presented by the governments.^'

Since that meeting, the work of the Economic
Committee has been suspended.

The Customs Committee

The Customs Committee, dealing with the more
technical aspects of the formation of a customs
union, has been more active than the Economic
Committee, and its work has received more con-
sideration than that given the report of the
Economic Committee. The Customs Committee
has established various technical groups such as
the Permanent Tariff Bureau, the Valuation
Subcommittee, and the Procedure Subcommittee

'Ibid., attachment.

"Press release of the European Customs Union Study
Group, Dec. 6, 1948.

254

Department of State Bulletin

to produce solutions to the problems involved in
establishing a common tariff. These groups are
now drafting a final text for the common nomen-
clature and are preparing a specimen tariff.
They are also working on such problems as the
definition of dutiable value, control and settlement
of disputes, origin of goods, weights, tares and
containei-s, treatment of mixtures, methods for
drawing up the explanatory notes and the alpha-
betical index of the tariff, the provisions to be es-
tablished for exceptional duty-free facilities and
conditional duty-free admissions, and methods
for insuring uniform application of the tariff.

After 2 years of concentrated effort, the Cus-
toms Committee produced a draft nomenclature
which it submitted for consideration to the Study
Group at its fifth plenary session held November
14-17, 1949. At that session, the Study Group
agreed that, subject to possible contractions and
revisions, the nomenclature should serve as a basis
for the common tariff of a union or unions. Pend-
ing the establishment of such a union or unions
the Study Group recommended that the govern-
ments concerned should conclude an international
convention to make obligatory the adoption of the
headings of the sections and chapters of this
nomenclature. The Study Group also recom-
mended that other international organizations
should base their work on the text of the 1949
nomenclature. This work of the Study Group
has already produced concrete results. Several
participating countries have signified their inten-
tion to adopt the draft nomenclature in its
entirety."

Future Program of the Study Group

The next plenary meeting of the Customs Union
Study Group was originally scheduled for April
18, 1950, but because of delays in the preparation
of some of the reports, it had to be postponed until
July 24. At the next meeting, the revision of the
nomenclature, which has been entrusted to a small
committee under the authority of the Customs
Committee, will be considered. The task of this
committee is to reduce as much as possible the
number of main headings and to proceed with the
adjustment of the detailed nomenclature with a
view to its use as the basis for a common tariff.
It will also consider an international convention

^' Press release of the European Customs Union Study
Group, Nov. 17, 1949.

for the adoption of the main headings and a com-
mon definition of value, the preparation of which
has been entrusted to another special body. This
special committee is also to prepare a specimen
tariff based on average rates.

The Study Group also invited the Customs
Committee to present suggestions on the desira-
bility of establishing a consultative committee of
the member countries. This committee would ad-
vise on means of insuring uniformity and har-
mony in the application of the draft conventions
regarding the tariff nomenclature and the common
rules of valuation.

In connection with the trade liberalization pro-
gram of the Oeec, the Study Group requested the
Oeec to make available the lists of goods likely to
be freed from quantitative restrictions in order
that it could examine whether excessive tariffs
would prevent these measures from haviiag full
effect.

The results of the next plenary session of the
European Customs Union Study Group will be
eagerly awaited, for they will reveal the degree of
progress achieved in solving these technical prob-
lems which, after all, are but steps in the direction
of greater unity and cooperation.

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S.

Edward Michael Law Yone, editor of the Ran-
goon English language daily, the Nation.

Louis Meerts, editor of the Gazet Van Ant-
werpen, Antwerp, Belgium.

Eliezer Peri, Director General of Kupat Cholim,
a medical insurance organization of the General
Federation of Jewish Labor, and also vice mayor
of Tel Aviv.

Arne S. Lundberg, Under Secretary for the
Swedish Ministry of Transport.

Nerio Siegfried Wagner Battendieri, member of
the Cabinet to the Brazilian Ministry of Labor.

Carl Axel Alenius of Helsinki, the first Finnish
student to come to the United States on a scholar-
shiiJ from the United States Government.

These visits have been made possible through
grants-in-aid awarded by the Department of
State.

Eleven Korean teachers of English, the first to
come to the United States on United States Gov-
ernment grants-in-aid under the Smith-Mundt
Act, arrived at Washington on June 26 for 2 weeks
stay.

The teachers came to the United States in March
and, since that time, have received training in the
latest methods of teaching English as a foreign
language.

August 14, 7950

255

Information Requested on Japanese Held in Soviet Territory

Statement hy William J. Sehald
Acting U.S. Political Adviser for Japan ^

At the 118th meeting of the Council on July 19,
the British Commonwealth member asked if the
chairman could inform the Council with respect
to reports which had appeared in the press regard-
ing an exchange of notes between the Governments
of the United States and the Soviet Union on the
problem of Japanese repatriation.

On June 9, 1950, the United States Government
sent a note to the Soviet Government pointing out
that it (the U.S.S.R.) had made no reply to the
United States note of December 30, 1949,= request-
ing Soviet agi-eement to the designation of an
international humanitarian body charged with
making a first-hand survey of the fate of Japanese
prisoners of war who are still unaccounted for in
Soviet territory. In a note dated July 16, the
Soviet Government stated that a full reply with
respect to the matter raised by the United States
was contained in two Tass dispatches which were
published on April 22 and June 9, 1950. I shall
hand the Secretary-General texts of the notes
between the United States and the Soviet Govern-
ments for inclusion in the record.

On July 22, 1950, I received fi'om the acting
Soviet member a letter, copies of which I have
already provided to members of the Council, which
forwarded the text of a communication from the
Soviet Ministry of Foreign Affairs dated July 17,
1950, enclosing copies of two Tass statements datecl
April 22 and June 9, 1950. So far as I can per-
ceive, these two Tass statements are the same as
those referred to in the Soviet note to the United
States Government. I think you may be interested
in having me read to you the text of the July 17
statement of the Soviet Ministry of Foreign
Affairs as supplied by the acting Soviet member.
It is as follows :

' Made before the Allied Council for Japan on Aug. 2 and
released to the pres.s in Washington on Aug. 3. Mr. Sehald
is also U.S. member of and chairman of the Council.

' Delivered on Jan. 3, 1950 ; see Bulletin of Jan. 16, 1950,
p. 102.

The U.S.S.R. Embassy in Washington received a note
from the State Department of the United States of America
on 12 June, which asserted that there still is a large num-
ber of Japanese prisoners of war in the Soviet Union.

On 16 July the Embassy forwarded to the State Depart-
ment a reply which informed them that the subject matter
was completely covered by the article published in Tass on
22 April and the Tass statement of 9 June concerning the
completion of the repatriation of the Japanese prisoners of
war from the Soviet Union.

This is a truly extraordinary document. Wlien
one government replies to a serious proposal by
another government on a subject of major impor-
tance merely by flippantly referring to a couple of
statements which have meanwhile been issued by
a press agency, it is indeed a novel dejiarture from
usual forms of intercourse between two friendly
governments.

This headquarters, and I as chairman of this
Council, have repeatedly called upon the Soviet
member and the Soviet Government for informa-
tion regarding Japanese interned on Soviet terri-
tory since the end of the war. We have vainly
asked for even the most elemental vital statistics
or any information regarding the numbers and
names of j^risoners held, their location, and the
conditions under which they are living. In all
this time — nearly 5 years — we have not received
even a morsel of information which we have re-
quested, and repatriation of those who have
already returned has been a painfully tedious
process subject to factors and, apparently, whims
of which only Soviet authorities know the secret.
And now, in reply to all of our requests, in answer
to entreaties of the Japanese people and demands
of the world press and public opinion, we here,
like the United States Government, are told that
we may find the answers to everything in two brief
and cursory articles published by the Tass News
Agency.

The Tass items mentioned, I may add, merely
refer to a statement issued in May 1949 to the

256

Department of State Bulletin

effect that upon the return of 05,000 persons to
Japan during 1949 Japanese repatriation woiikl be
completed, with the exception of 1487 prisoners
who "were tried and are under judicial examina-
tion for the war crimes that they have connnitted"
and 971 prisoners who have "connnitted crimes
against the Chinese people." I will only remind
the Council in this regard that extensive informa-
tion and statistical data already placed before the
Council reveal on the basis of figures carefully
compiled by General Headquarters and by the
Japanese Government that some 370.000 Japanese
still remain unaccounted for. And, to support
these figures, it is important to note that competent
quarters of the Japanese Government have in-
formed me (hat they have assembled the names of
over 200,000 Japanese who are known to have been
held on Soviet territory and have not yet been
returned to Jai:>an.

The Soviet Government must have some good
reason for not giving a conscientious and forth-
right reply to all the requests it has received for
information regarding Japanese prisoners. Can
it be that the Soviet Government does not have this
information — that it has never known the number,
names, and locations of these Japanese ? Does the
Soviet Union believe that this Council and General
Headquarters, or the United States Government,
or the Japanese people and world opinion will be
content to be referred to terse news items giving
only the most meager and obviously totally in-
accurate information? Does the Soviet Govern-
ment perhaps desire to shift the odium of a reply
to a news agency and thereby hope to avoid
responsibility for such a gross distortion of truth?
Can Soviet officials really propose thus cavalierly
to dispose of the lives of hundreds of thousands of
human beings?

Obviously, the problem of Japanese repatriation
is still a long way from settlement. Clearly, onr
questions have not been answered; and the pro-
posal made by the United States Government in
response to a request by the Supreme Commander
based on the suggestion of the British Common-
wealth member still stands. Moreover, repatria-
tion figures contained in the Tass statements cited
are so widely at variance with statistics carefully
compiled by General Headquarters and the Japa-
nese Government after most painstaking surveys,
as well as with eyewitness reports of repatriates
already returned to -Japan, as to substantiate the
abundant need for an on-the-gronnd impartial
survey such as was formally proposed by the
United States Government last December and
by the Government of the Commonwealth of Aus-
tralia in January,

I conclude by restating the many previous i-e-
quests of this Council for comprehensive and ade-
quate information regarding Japanese who have
been held in Soviet territory since the end of the
war, including vital statistics and name rosters,
and by expressing the hope that the Soviet Union

will, in recognition of the seriousness with which
this matter is viewed in all responsible quarters,
find it possible to give the most careful and favor-
able consideration to the possibility of accepting
an impartial on-the-spot survey which has been
proposed in all sincerity and in good faith.

United States Note of Jwae 9, 1960

The Secretary of State presents his compliments
to the Charge d'Aifaires ad interim of the Union
of Soviet Socialist Republics and refers to the
Secretary's note of December 30, 1949, requesting
the cooperation of the Soviet Union in the matter
of repatriating or otherwise accounting for over
370,000 Japanese nationals who, according to fig-
ures considered reliable, are in areas under Soviet
control, dead or alive.

The note under reference alluded to the repati-i-
ation obligations of the Soviet Union under the
Potsdam Declaration of July 26, 1945, and pointed
out that the prolonged detention of prisoners after
the cessation of hostilities is in jiatent conflict with
accepted international concepts of fundamental
human rights and freedoms and with humani-
tarian principles as set forth in the Geneva
Convention of 1949 relative to the treatment of
prisoners of war which was signed by some sixty
Powers including the Soviet Union. In the inter-
ests of resolving a problem of long-standing con-
cern to the Allied Powers and Japan, the note
specifically requested that the Soviet Government
agree to the designation of an international hu-
manitarian body or organization charged with
making a complete first-hand survey of the situa-
tion with a view to obtaining exact information on
Japanese held in Soviet areas since the cessation of
hostilities.

The Embassy is reminded that the note under
reference has not been answered or acknowledged,
directly or indirectly, since its delivery over five
months ago and that an early indication of the
reaction of the Soviet Government to the United
States Government's proposal would be appreci-
ated.

U.S. Member of Ruhr Authority

The Department of State announced on August
3 that the White House has approved the appoint-
ment of Charles A. Livengoocl as the United States
representative to the International Authority for
the Euhr, with the rank of minister, succeeding
Henry Parkman, who becomes head of the ECA
in France.

Mr. Livengood is expected to leave Washington
about August 21 to assume his new duties with the
Authority, headquarters of which is Dusseldorf,
Germany.

August 14, 1950

898185—50 3

257

The Point 4 Program— Plan for World-Wide Good Neighborliness

hy CapiLS M. Waynick,

Acting Administrator, Office of Technical Cooperation and Development ^

Our Government lias admitted its sense of fra-
ternal duty and enunciated a purpose to lead the
free world in the pooling of resources to extend
technical aid where it is needed to help lift the
level of well-being. The President of the United
States expressed this purpose cogently in his in-
augural message in January 1949. He said :

. . . We must embark on a bold new program for making
the benefits of our scientifle advances and industrial prog-
ress available for the improvement and growth of under-
developed areas. . . .

Our aim should be to help the free peoples of the world,
through their own efforts, to iiroduce more food, more
clothing, more material for housing and more mechanical
power to lighten their burdens. . . .

Only by helping the least fortunate of its members to
help themselves can the human family achieve the decent,
satisf.ving life that is the right of all people. . . .

Democracy alone can supply the vitalizing force to stir
the peoples of the world into triumphant action, not only
against their human oppressors, but also against their
ancient enemies — hunger, misery, and despair.

Events have brought our American democracy to new
influence and responsibilities.

This was the essence of the original Point 4
declaration. The United Nations unanimously
acclaimed it, and the Congress of the United
States has authorized the launching of a program
based upon it. With planning as well-advanced
as practicable before the final green light, those
who are working on Point 4 are awaiting the
Congressional appropriation for the first year's
work.

We believe in a democratic society of free men,
and we have faith in the checks and balances of
the free enterprise system as a device for plenty
with liberty and human dignity. But we need to
do more than to believe; we need to extend that
faith.

The leaders of other free peoples recognize the
need. Recently, one of the most representative

' Excerpts from an address made before the Social Foun-
dation at the University of Denver, Denver, Colo., on July
21 and released to the press on the same date.

meetings of the United Nations welcomed the
Point 4 idea as a way to prosperity and peace.
Forty-nine other nations joined the United States
in pledging substantial contributions to the
program.

In the period since the Second World War, we
have poured out billions to help once rich and
powerful nations to get on their feet. We could
not leave them prostrate with their freedom at
stake after the shooting ended any more decently
than we could have deserted them under fire.
Such great grants in aid are a device that is, and
ought to be, temporary. But the restoration of
prosperity in the free world calls for positive
planning and neighborly cooperation. Energiza-
tion of constructive forces by the injection of
what we call know-how in places where it is
grossly lacking is the most logical way to begin
building a bridge across the "dollar gap."

America did not originate all of the ingenuity
that has gone into her effective technology. For
a century, men came across the seas, intelligent,
ambitious men. They found here a better atmos-
phere for encouragement of talented adventure.
Their skills along with those of the native popu-
lation went into the making of the production
miracle of which we boast.

This flow of immigrants reached its floodtide
during the first years of the present century. The
height of it brought some 9 million to our shores
from the old world in the first decade of the
century. Under legal restriction the tide subsided
and only about a half-million entered in the 10
years ending with 1940.

We still import brains and skilled hands but not
in former quantities. In the Point 4 proposal to
export trained personnel for technical cooperation
with the rest of the free world, we have a plan
that promises to bring us as many benefits as
we bestow. We have no monopoly of ideas and
technical knowledge, and there is a two-way flow
of both to be expected in this program.

258

Department of Stale Bulletin

Pursuant to commitments made to our Ameri-
can Allies during the war, we liave establislied
and maintained a number of cooperative projects
in Latin America for a term of years. These have
been limited largely to projects in the fields of
food production, sanitation and health, and edu-
cation. From this experience, we know the pro-
gram can be mutually advantageous.

Development of the productive potential of the
Western Hemisphere, in the long run, should be
an American obsession. The population of the
other American Kepublics in the aggregate about
equals our own. They are our customers buying
from us the greater part of all they import. In
their possession, are raw materials we must have
if our own economy is to expand. We need the
friendship and economic cooperation of our Amer-
ican neighbors just as they need ours.

Our experience with technical assistance in
Latin America helped to inspire the original con-
cept of Point 4, and it affords us a ready guide into
the practical phases of the program. We know
from this experience that the plan will work. We
have seen food production increased, disease re-
duced, vocational education advanced. We have
witnessed the increase of technically trained forces
in all the areas in which these projects have
worked, and we are confident that extension of the
program already under way is clearly indicated as
the proper launching of Point 4.

Coming into the United Nations and to us from
all over the underdeveloped world, are calls for
help. The calls are for aid in down-to-earth prac-
tical things. How to increase food production,
how to conserve food that is produced, is knowl-
edge wanted of the program in all areas. The
people who are turning to us are interested in irri-
gation, flood control, soil conservation, forestry,
improvement and protection of grain, silos, meat
and fish, slaughter houses, marketing methods,
power, subsistence industries, medical education,
TB, VD, malaria, cholera, leprosy and yaws con-
trol, nutrition, child care, public nursing — these
and myriad other things embraceable in projects
of the kind with which we have had considerable
experience.

Technical forces in large numbers will be needed
to man the projects contemplated for the program,
but all these forces do not need to be top-flight ex-
perts. Under competent direction, the educa-
tional part of the movement will produce a con-
stantly increasing stream of technicians drawn
from our own numbers and from the personnel
selected for training in the countries where the
projects will be operating.

The tentative budgeting of the funds proposed
for use in the progi-am for the first year breaks
operations down into 18 categories. These are the

following: Economic surveys; agriculture and
forestry; fisheries; reclamation, hydroelectric
power, flood control ; mineral resources | industry ;
labor; transportation; health; education; social
security and social services; statistics; public ad-
ministration; financing; housing; communica-
tions; hydrographic and geodetic; weather.

Most of the program effort will be directed to
getting an effective grass-roots impact on the
human-need problems of food, health, and voca-
tional education. Some of it will go to develop-
ment of effective interest in power and essential
local industries. If the program is successful, it
will open channels for the flow of capital to aid in
economic development. Loans that can be justi-
fied as safe and some considerable amount of ven-
ture capital may be expected to flow from our own
country, but the most important factor should be
the conversion of domestic wealth to dynamic use.
In many of the underdeveloped countries, can be
found such resources awaiting the spark needed
for their energization.

Here, is a program designed to be a vital new
part of our foreign policy. Indeed, I should say
it is designed to be a basic part of the common
policy of the free nations of the world.

It is coming into play in a period of emergency,
but is it not an emergency program. It is not
designed as an instrument of the cold war but as
a logical, permanent plan for world-wide good
neighborliness.

The program is not intended to substitute any
force for competition but to increase the area of
cooperation in a constructively competitive econ-
omy. It is something that would be needed if
there were no danger from an autocracy trying
to hide itself under the mantle of democracy.

Operating through the United Nations in large
part as it will be and, in part, on a bilateral basis,
the Point 4 Program can do what the Secretary-
General of the United Nations has said he ex-
pects it to do — open a road to world peace and
prosperity.

Point 4 is the beginning of a great adventure.
Its purpose is to bring human energy to bear upon
the great business of making the world more pleas-
antly habitable and life in it more satisfying. It
is intended to disarm the hatreds and fears that
divide men and cause war. It's an experiment in
the creation of good will, the mightiest of all social
forces, and the only force strong enough to turn
swords into plowshares and to reduce the heavy
burden of armaments which now afflicts our coun-
try and the world. Slenderly financed, it will
begin frugally, as perhaps it should begin, but I
believe it to be in principle the most important
direction given to international policy in our time.

August 14, 1950

259

The President Sends Midyear
Economic Report to tiie Congress

Excerpt from the Presidents Message ^

Recent international events make it more im-
portant now tlian ever before that vre maintain and
expand onr stren<^th on the home front. For the
sinews of all our strength, everywhere in the
world, are found in what we achieve here at home.
We must make full use of our great productive
resources, our ever-improving industrial and sci-
entific techniques, and our growing labor force.
We must ledirect a part of these resources to the
task of resisting aggression. And in doing this,
we must not let inflation undermine ovir efforts.

The world responsibilities of the United States
have become heavy. Clearly, they wnll become
still heavier before the united efforts of the free
nations of the world produce a lasting peace. The
American people know how much is at stake.
They are pre|3ared to shoulder their tasks without
flinching.

The facts .should warn us equally against easy
indifference and sensational alarm. This is not
the time for business as usual. We are not now
living under peaceful world conditions. But
neither are we engaged in a general or widespread
war. We are in a situation between these opposite
extremes, and economic policy should be guided
accordingly. It is urgent to make some shifts in
economic policy now. We must also speed up
our preparation now to take more drastic action
later if it should become necessary to do so.

Economic policy, to the best of our ability and
foresight, should proceed in line wnth our ap-
praisal of the developing situation. While it
should not lag behind, it should not run blindly
ahead.

The international policy of the United States is
directed toward averting a full-scale war. We are
following the only course open to a free and strong
nation in the face of the challenge confronting
us. We are acting together with other free
peoples, through the United Nations, to put down
the aggi'ession in Korea, and to build the combined
strength needed to deter aggression elsewhere.

The response of the whole Nation to develop-
ments in the Far East has already provided an
overwhelming demonstration of unity in the
conduct of our international policy. This has
lifted the spirits of our friends all over the world.
In these difficult times, there is the same need for
unity on the economic front here at home. If our
economy should fail to realize its full potential,

' The Midyear Economic Report of the President, trans-
mitted to the Congress .July 19.")0 (tonether with a report
to tlie President on the economic situation at midyear 1950
by the Council of Economic Advisers), H. Doc. 644, 81st
Cong., 2d. sess.

our international strength and our domestic
strength would both be affected. We cannot af-
ford division on the home front, when some of our
young men are fighting overseas. We cannot af-
ford an economy which performs below its best,
when nothing but tlie best will assure the triumph
of freedom and of right.

This unity in our economic affairs is attainable.
We have gathered a wealth of practical experience
about how our economy works, and about what
promotes its strength and progress. Five years
after the greatest of all wars, and even before the
events of last month, we had reached the highest
levels of peacetime production and employjnent
ever known. We had passed through a period of
inflation and conquered a postwar recession with-
out permitting it to deepen into a depression.
Based upon this record, those who work in private
enterprise and those who work in Government —
of both political parties — have reached agreement
upon many national economic policies. This is
far more important than some of the surface dis-
agreements.

We must expand the area of agreement in the
trying times ahead. And trying times they will
be. We must enlarge our military outlays and
related programs, when we had hoped to be able
to reduce them further. We must realize that
the engagement in Korea will be costly and may
not be short. We must prepare against the possi-
bility that other crises may arise elsewhere. We
must continue to recognize that both economic and
military aid will be required for the further
strengtliening of the free peoples of the world.

All of this means new problems for our econ-
omy— soluble problems, but not easy ones.

Our economy has the human and material re-
sources to do the job ahead — if we achieve the
unity which will enable us to do our best.

Strong evidence of the power of the United
States economy is contained in the record of its
performance during the first half of this year.
That record is summarized at the end of this Eco-
nomic Report, and is detailed in the accompany-
ing report of the Council of Economic Advisers,
"The Economic Situation at Midyear 1950."

Viewed in its entirety, the economy at midyear
1950 had made a remarkable recovery from the
moderate recession of 19-19. New i«cords of peace-
time production, employment, and real incomes
were reached. Reasonable balance of jirices had
been achieved. The outlook in mid-June was for
stability and new growth on a sound basis. To-
ward the end of June, however, the Korean out-
break brought rapid changes. The necessity for
large new public outlays began to have both eco-
nomic and psychological impacts. Many impor-
tant prices commenced to rise I'apidly. New pri-
vate and public policies are needed quickly to deal
with these new developments.

260

Department of State Bulletin

The Problem of Underdeveloped Areas

hy Donald D. Kennedy

Deputy Director^ Office of South Asian Affairs ^

The act for international development, which
became law in June 1950, establishes as national
policy that there should be a broad program of
technical cooperation with all who stand in need
of help in carrying forward their economic de-
velopment. This act makes possible the expan-
sion of previous efforts; it authorizes the
President to coordinate all the work in this field
in order that maximum results may be achieved;
and it j^ermits the contribution of additional funds
and personnel to the United Nations and other in-
ternational organizations to expand the scope of
their activities. This last possibility is of partic-
ular significance because of the effect it should
have on increasing the prestige and importance
of United Nations organizations. The expansion
of our technical cooperation as an outgrowth of
affirmed national policy will result in great bene-
fit to us as well as to the other nations of the world.
Failure on our part to implement Point 4 which
was originally announced by the President in his
inaugural address in January 1949 would have
led to disastrous psychological reactions as well as
to long-term economic losses.

The vision which has led to the development of
this concept has been broad and the scope of con-
tribution which is contemplated is wide. In gen-
eral, major attention would be directed toward
further improvement in agricultural methods, in
health, and in education. Developments in these
areas will assist and make more effective technical
aid in tlie fields of mineral resources and industrial
production. Transportation, labor standards,
public administration, education, and social serv-
ices are not to be neglected. Not only is it ex-
pected that experts will be detailed to foreign
countries but the technicians and skilled personnel
of these countries would also be brought to the
United States. Other countries are to be encour-

* Excerpts from an address made before the Columbia
University summer session at New York, N. Y., on Aug.
3 and released to the press on the same date.

aged to cooperate either directly or through the
United Nations. And nothing would be done ex-
cept through the full cooperation and prior con-
sent of all concerned.

This program of technical cooperation is not
the whole answer to the problem of economic
development and improved standards of living.
Many avenues of approach must be used and used
in a coordinate manner. An unescapable element
in the economic development of any country is the
requirement for capital investment, some domes-
tic, some from abroad. Plants, railroads, dams,
irrigation works, school systems, hospitals — all
these cost money and require large capital invest-
ment. The United States has been an investor in
foreign lands for many years. We now have
large reserves of private capital, and it is hoped
that holders of this capital will make it available;
but there are, unfortunately, some conditions
which impede for the time being any large invest-
ment in certain parts of the world. In the past.
United States citizens have preferred Europe and
Latin America and, except for a few special fields
such as petroleum, have left alone the underdevel-
oped areas of South Asia, the Near East, and
Africa. In addition, fortunately, there are inter-
national and governmental sources of capital now
available — the International Bank for Keconstruc-
tion and Development (Ibrd) and the Export-
Import Bank — and the United States will, of
course, continue to support these institutions.

In many other ways we can contribute and will
continue to contribute to the economic develop-
ment of underdeveloped countries. The Eco-
nomic Cooperation Administration (EGA) has
been a major factor in the improved production of
capital goods as well as consumer goods, and has
made possible a much higher volume of world
trade than otherwise would have been the case. It
has also been of direct help to underdeveloped
areas through its assistance to dependent terri-
tories of the metropolitan participants. Similar
aid jirograms involving Greece and Turkey, the

Augusi 14, 1950

261

Philippines, and Korea, and, more recently,
Southeast Asia, are also effective in improving
techniques, increasing output, and opening new
resources or making more effective use of existing
resources. In a less direct way, perhaps, but of
long-term significance, are the General Agreement
on Tariffs and Trade and the accompanying tariff
reductions under the Trade Agreements Act and
our program for negotiating modern treaties of
friendship, commerce, and navigation which
should establish a more certain basis for American
investors.

It must be recognized that there are difficul-
ties—substantial ones— in the way of a rapid, or
even a slow but sure, development of the economies
of those countries which are in most need of such
development. These difficulties relate both to our
giving assistance and to the coordination of such
assistance with efforts by the recipients. Some
of the more important of these present real
problems.

Limited Availability

of Capital for Investment

Perhaps the most important difficulty relates to
the need for large investment of capital and the
limited availability of such capital under present
world conditions. On the one hand, underde-
veloped countries do not poss&ss, internally, large
reserves of savings and are frequently unable to
mobilize what they have ; on the other hand, there
has been little interest in general in such areas on
the part of foreign investors. To meet their in-
ternal problem, these countries tend to move more
and more toward government financing — a trend
which is regarded with disfavor by our own pri-
vate interests since it is a move toward more state
control and socialism.

Sources for external capital include the Ibed,
the Export-Import Bank, and private investors.
In addition, the EGA has made capital grants and
loans for development purposes to Korea, certain
areas in Africa, Ghina, Greece, and Turkey ; and
external capital has also been made available to the
Philippines.

Of the "World Bank's total loan commitments
of approximately 725 million dollars since its es-
tablishment, only about 200 million dollars have
been made to underdeveloped countries; the Ex-
port-Import Bank has to date extended loans to
the countries of Asia, the Near East, and Africa
of less than 650 million dollars, although its total
loan commitments since its inception in 1934 are
about 4.5 billion dollars. The record of private
financing is particularly disappointing. Of the
total long-tenn United States investment which
has been made abroad in the first 4 years after the
war, amounting to 14.2 billion dollars, only 2.1
billion dollars was from private sources; and of
this relatively small 4-year total, a very minor
fraction was invested in the underdeveloped coun-

tries of South Asia, the Near East, and Africa.
For example, the total additional American direct
investment in India from August of 1947 to the
end of 1949 was only 1 million dollars. Further,
the capital market for foreign securities in the
United States appears almost nonexistent.

The reasons for this lack of interest on the part
of American investors are varied. They relate
to unstable political conditions, including the fear
of war; absence of basic service industries, in-
cluding communications, transportation, and
other services of supply ; presence of restrictions
on the right to do business and the fear that the
industries in which they might invest may shortly
be nationalized and that there will not be adequate
compensation forthcoming; fear of limitation on
the right to expand operations and restrictions
on the right to manage one's enterprise, including
requirements for employment and training of
local personnel and major participation by local
capital; restrictions on the right to benefit from
the income from investment and fear that restric-
tions, which typically operate through exchange
controls, will preclude receipt of any of the
profits ; existence of unfavorable tax burdens, some
of which are created by United States laws; and
comparatively greater attractiveness of the
United States investment market.

A way must be found through or around these
difficulties. I do not believe that the American
investor really expects to have all his problems
disappear or be solved for him. The United
States Government or the foreign government, or
both together, can and will obviate or mitigate
some of the hazards. It is hoped that political un-
certainties will be substantially reduced through
increased stability, a reduction in those current
tensions now causing great concern, and steadily
improving effectiveness of the United Nations in
I'esisting aggression and in develoi^ing a basis for
peaceful settlement of disputes. But, whatever
the situation, investment funds from external
sources will have to be forthcoming.

Fear of Foreign Domination Under New Guises

Many of these countries have but newly
achieved their independence. They are sensitive
about any foreign influence which might lead to
domination and exploitation and, hence, look
askance at an open-door policy for investors.
This concern has naturally colored official an-
nouncements of economic and industrial policy,
which, in turn, have revealed a direction toward
greater regulation of internal economic activity
and a rather favorable attitude toward present or
future nationalization of some segments of their
economy. Statements and regulations of this
character on the part of new or of relatively un-
known governments create uncertainty in the
minds of outsiders and in some cases, no doubt,
also in the minds of citizens of the country itself.

262

Department of State Bulletin

So far as the United States is concerned, it can be
plainly said that we do not have any designs in-
volving the establishment of a new form of colo-
nialism which would be accomplished through the
export of American capital. Only growing con-
fidence arising out of friendly help and favorable
experience will reduce this fear of foreign
domination.

Lack of Enough Skilled Personnel

Nothing can be accomplished in the way of satis-
factory programs without qualified people.
Wliether it be the control of malaria or the con-
struction of a tire factory, personnel, both tech-
nical and administrative, is an essential. Such
technicians are lacking in underdeveloped areas,
and they are all too few in the United States and
other technically advanced countries. It will be
necessary for us to engage in a major effort to ob-
tain people who have the qualifications techni-
cally, who are willing to leave their present
employment, and who have the other personal
characteristics which are essential in establishing
friendly association with others of different cul-
tures and outlook.

One of the important things is that our people
should live with those who actually engage in the
operations of growing food and performing other
daily tasks. The man who can take a simple agri-
cultural instrument and show people how to use
it, and can explain different types of seeds and
have people understand, is all important. For
example, improving by 10 percent the yield of rice
in Asia would contribute tremendously in meeting
food needs. The people who will really accom-
plish something in this area will be those who
know how to teach and those who understand and
sympathize with the backgi'ound and the attitudes
of the people they are trying to help.

These are the major difficulties; others exist —
many of them. They relate to local problems of
security, concern with respect to political trends,
the development of an organization to plan and
carry out programs, dislocations caused by war,
discouragement because of slow progress. We
must, however, find a way not only to take indi-
vidual steps but also to put together the multitude
of efforts required and to make real progress on
the entire front.

Point 4 is in the American tradition. Point 4
is a program of cooperation. We cannot reach
the goal others are striving for simply by our own
efforts; the full and freely given cooperation of
all is an essential. Self-help by the governments
and the people themselves will be necessary. And
the individual himself must not expect a miracle
of achievement to surround him and his people
at any moment.

What is really at the heart of the world situation
today is an attempt to control men's minds — and
therefore a drive to appeal to men's minds. We

must not become lost in the physical elements of
an economic program such as this, but we must
consider and emphasize the moral and spiritual
values which such a program can embrace and
support.

Wliat we envisage cannot be done by us alone ;
it will require the cooperation of evei-yone, includ-
ing the leaders and the workers of other countries.
It will require understanding of each other, con-
fidence in our mutual aims and objectives, and a
determination to carry on that will not permit us
to be diverted.

Reparations Plant for Producing
Aluminum Offered U. S. Industry

[Released to the press August 3]

The Department of State today announced the
availability for purchase by American interests
of a plant for the production of primary alu-
minum. The plant was part of the equipment of
the Vereinigte Aluminium-Werke A. G. at Toging
Inn, Bavaria, Germany and was awarded to the
United States by the Inter-Allied Reparation
Agency after consideration of claims submitted
by other governments which were equally anxious
to obtain this valuable equipment.

The equipment being offered is for use in the
production of primary aluminum by the pot-line
process, also known as the Soderberg Process. The
equipment comprises, among other things, ap-
proximately 160 units of aluminum jjot-line equip-
ment with an estimated yearly productive capacity
of 18,000 metric tons of pig aluminum.

Although other governments were eager to ac-
quire this equipment, the United States, because of
the desirability of increasing the aluminum pro-
duction capacity in this country, pi'essed its claim
for this equipment and it was allocated to the
United States. The part plant is offered for use
in this country or for use by American nationals
in a third country. A number of American busi-
ness firms have already expressed interest in the
equipment being offered, and the State Depart-
ment will make arrangements for their representa-
tives to inspect the plant in Germany.

Dismantling of the plant began last March and
should be completed early in October. The equip-
ment, which will be sold for cash in United States
dollars and which will be delivered to the pur-
chaser at a German border point is reported to be
in good condition.

The sale will be conducted on a competitive
sealed bid basis with bids scheduled for opening
at 10 : 00 a.m., Washington, D. C. time, September
26, 1950. Information and forms for bidding are
available at the Lend-Lease and Surplus Property
Staff, Department of State, Annex No. 7, 21st and
C Streets NW., Washington, D. C.

August 14, 1950

263

U.N. Conference on Declaration of Death of Missing Persons

hy John Maktos

HISTORY AND BACKGROUND

By Eesolution 369 (IV), of December 3, 1949,
the General Assembly of the United Nations de-
cided that an international conference of govern-
ment representatives should be convened for the
purpose of concluding a convention on the subject
of declaration of death of missing persons. The
steps leading to this resolution were the following.

Action by Preparatory Commission for IRO

The Preparatoi-y Commission for the Interna-
tional Eefugee Organization (Iro) originally
dealt with the subject. In its transmittal memo-
randum, the Preparatory Commission stated that,
as a result of the Second World War and particu-
larly of the mass deportations and the techniques
of modern warfare, millions of persons had disap-
peared whose death must reasonably be assumed
but could not conclusively be established. Consid-
erable aid in remedying the resulting uncertainty,
affecting principally marriages and inheritances,
can be derived from declarations of death, but
the national rules of law at present governing this
matter are inadequate to meet the magnitude of
the problem.

In certain countries, no declarations of death
are issued. In many instances, a competent tri-
bunal is not readily accessible to the interested per-
sons whom the events of war have dispersed over
the globe. In certain other instances, proof of
death of a missing person cannot be established
under existing procedures. Moreover, declara-
tions of death obtained in one country are fre-
quently denied legal effect in others.

Failure to furnish death certificates resulted in
inability on the part of heirs to establish title to
propeily of missing persons. Furthermore, a
surviving husband or wife cannot i-emarry and the
guardianship of orphan children cannot be defi-
nitely established.

The Preparatory Commission concluded that, in
the existing stage of legal development, the coun-

tries concerned could not take simultaneous and
parallel action independently of each other. An
international solution of the problem had to be
sought, and an international convention appeared
to be the apjjropriate means of eliminating the ex-
isting difficulties.

In a communication to the Secretary-General of
the United Nations, dated June 3, 1948, the Execu-
tive Secretary of the Preparatory Commission re-
quested that the item, "Action for the solution of
legal difficulties arising from the absence, due to
war events or persecution, of persons whose death
cannot be conclusively established," be jilaced on
the agenda of the seventh session of the Economic
and Social Council.

Action by ECOSOC

The Economic and Social Council (Ecosoc)
first considered the item at its seventh session in
July-August 1948. The representative of the
United States declared that the problem was not
limited to refugees but affected the relatives of all
who had disappeared during the war, including
those of six million Jews who had disappeared as
a result of Nazi persecution. The representative
of the U.S.S.R. stated that the problem would
cease to exist once the question of refugees had
been settled by the repatriation of all displaced
persons desiring repatriation. The representative
of Poland doubted the need for the preparation of
a convention. He thought that a suitable recom-
mendation to the member states might be sufficient.
However, the Council rejected his proposal. The
representatives of Australia, Chile, China, France,
United Kingdom, and the United States, among
others, considered that the preparation by the
Secretary-General of a preliminai-y draft conven-
tion on the subject was a suitable method for deal-
ing with the problem. By Eesolution 158 (VII),
of August 24, 1948, the Council recognized the
problem to be urgent and important and one that
an international convention could best solve. It

264

Department of State Bulletin

requested the Secretary-General to prepare a draft
convention on the subject in collaboration with
the International Eefuoee Organization and other
competent organizations. This draft ^Yas first to
be submitted to member states and then to the
Council at its eighth session.

The Secretariat of the United Nations, after
holding preliminary consultations with the Iro
and several other organizations concerned with
the problem, prepared a draft convention and
transmitted it on October 2G, 1948, to the member
governments for conniient. The Secretariat sub-
mitted its draft to the eighth session of the
Council, which considered the procedure to be
followed in connection with this matter. Various
methods were proposed: (1) to refer the matter
to a later session of the Council; (2) to refer the
matter to the International Law Commission, and
(3) to refer the matter to an ad hoc Committee of
the Council.

On March 2, 1949, the Council adopted an
amended United Kingdom proposal (Res. 209
(VIII) ) which called for the establishment of an
ad hoc Committee composed of seven members of
the United Nations. The Committee was in-
structed, infer alia, to study the Secretariat draft
and to jDrepare a draft or, if necessary, any other
proposals in case it did not consider the drafting
of a convention practicable.

Work of ad hoc Committee

The ad hoc Committee, composed of representa-
tives of Brazil, Denmark, France, Lebanon, Po-
land, the United States, and the U.S.S.R., met at
Geneva from June 7-21, 1949. It examined a
number of comments, amendments, and sugges-
tions by member governments, by the Iro, and
by several nongovernmental organizations.

During consideration of the various procedures
which might solve the problem, the representative
of the U.S.S.R. argued that the conclusion of a
convention was not necessary. He proposed that
the task be carried out by providing full infor-
mation as to the present whereabouts of displaced
persons and by the introduction of legal measures
by those states in which declarations of death had
not been regularized by legislation. The Com-
mittee rejected the Soviet proposal and concluded
that it and other procedures (such as domestic
legislation and bilateral treaties) would not solve
the problem since states would unlikely amend
their internal laws along parallel lines without
obtaining reciprocal treatment in other states.
Such coordinated action would not be possible
except through a more lengthy and cumbersome
procedure than that involved in the adoption of a
convention. The Committee then proceeded to a
detailed revision of the Secretariat draft conven-
tion and prepared a text. By a vote of 5-2, it
decided to report this text to the Council at its
ninth session.

Further Action by ECOSOC

At its ninth session, Ecosoc considered the re-
port of the ad hoc Committee. The majority of
the representatives expressed the view that, be-
cause of the technical legal character of the con-
vention and the urgency of the problem, the
Council should transmit the draft convention
directly to the General Assembly without exam-
ining its provisions in detail. By Resolution 249
(IX), of August 9, 1949, the Council recognized
that the problem was urgent and required for its
solution an international convention. It requested
the Secretary-General to transmit the draft con-
vention proposed by the ad hoc Committee to-
gether with the records of discussion of the ninth
session of the Council to governments for consid-
eration prior to the fourth session of the General
Assembly. The Assembly was recommended to
consider the draft convention during its fourth
session with a view to having a convention adopted
and opened for signature during that session.

Action by General Assembly

The General Assembly's Sixth Committee, to
which the draft convention was referred for con-
sideration, felt that it would not have sufficient
time in which to discuss it in detail before the end
of the fourth session, and, therefore, decicled not
to consider the substance of the draft convention.

The Sixth Committee rejected a Danish pro-
posal to convene by March 1950 an international
conference to conclude a multilateral convention.

On December 3, 1949, the General Assembly
considered the report of the Sixth Committee.
The representative of Denmark stated that he con-
sidered that the draft resolution submitted by the
Sixth Committee, which proposed that the ques-
tion be referred to member states for solution by
internal legislation or by the conclusion of treaties,
was not adequate. He explained that, although
the amendment he had proposed in the Sixth
Committee for the calling of an international con-
ference had been rejected, the matter was of such
importance that he felt the amendment should be
placed before the General Assembly.

The Assembly adopted, iriter alia, the amend-
ment and approved the amended draft resolution
by 29-1, with 15 abstentions. The resolution
called for an international conference of govern-
mental representatives not later than April 1, 1950,
with a view to concluding a multilateral conven-
tion on the subject. The Assembly referred the
draft convention to member states to enable them
to examine it and consider the possibility of adopt-
ing, if necessary, legislative measures on the legal
status of persons as a result of events of war.
Member states were also requested to transmit
their comments to the Secretary-General so that
he might report on them to the General Assembly
at its next regular session.

August 14, 1950

265

On December 9, 1949, the Secretary-General is-
sued invitations to all member governments to
attend the conference.

succeeded in obtaining all the amendments which
were considered desirable from the United States
point of view. The following discussion em-
phasizes the adoption of these amendments.

CONFERENCE ON DECLARATION OF DEATH
OF MISSING PERSONS

The United Nations Conference on Declaration
of Death of Missing Persons met at the temporary
headquarters of the United Nations, Lake Success,
New York, from March 15-April 6, 1950. The
Governments of the following 25 states were rep-
resented at the Conference by delegations: Bel-
gium, Bolivia, Brazil, Burma, China, Cuba, Den-
mark, Ecuador, France, Greece, India, Israel, the
Netherlands, Nicaragua, Pakistan, Peru^ Philip-
pines, Sweden, Syria, Turkey, United Kingdom,
United States, Uruguay, Venezuela, and Yugo-
slavia. The Governments of the following six
states were represented at the Conference by ob-
servers: Canada, Egypt, Ethiopia, Iran, Mexico,
and Thailand. The Iro also was represented by
an observer.

John Maktos represented the United States.

The Conference used as a basis for discussion
the ad hoc Committee's draft convention. On
March 17, 1950, the Conference appointed a draft-
ing committee which was composed of the repre-
sentatives of Belgium, Brazil, Ecuador, France,
Israel, the Netherlands, Turkey, the United King-
dom, and the United States. This Committee held
15 meetings during the period between March 21
and April 3, 1950.

The Conference examined a number of amend-
ments and suggestions and prepared a revised
convention which differed from the one submitted
by the ad hoc Committee. The Conference ap-
proved the convention, as a whole, by 20 votes - 0,
with 1 abstention (Yugoslavia). The convention
prepared by the Conference for accession by states
is annexed to a final act signed at Lake Success on
April 6, 1950, by all the delegates present (21
of the 25). 1

DISCUSSION OF THE CONVENTION
ON DECLARATION OF DEATH
OF MISSING PERSONS

Introduction

The following discussion analyzes the principal
differences between the convention proposed by
the ad hoc Committee which was used by the Con-
ference as a basis for discussion, hereinafter re-
ferred to as the draft convention, and the
convention finally adopted by the Conference,
hereinafter referred to as the convention.

The United States delegate to the Conference

' U.N. doc. A/Conf . 1/0.

Objectives of Convention

Tlie convention, consisting of 20 articles, has 2
main objectives: (1) to facilitate issuance of dec-
larations of death of missing persons on a broad
jurisdictional basis, affording a convenient choice
of tribunals and a simple and inexpensive pro-
cedure; (2) to provide for the recognition of such
declarations made under the convention by other
states parties to the convention.

Discussion of Provisions of Convention

SCOPE

By article 1, the convention provides for decla-
rations of death of persons whose last residence
was in Europe, Asia, or Africa, who have dis-
appeared between the years 1939-1945, under cir-
cumstances affording reasonable ground to infer
that they died in consequence of events of war or
of racial, religious, political, or national persecu-
tion. These persons are referred to as "missing
persons." Members of armed forces serving in the
continents mentioned above, are not, by reason
only of such service, considered as having had
their residence in those continents.

The only difference between the draft conven-
tion and the convention is that the latter provides
also that contracting states may, by notification
to the Secretary-General of the United Nations,
extend its application to persons having disap-
peared subsequent to 1945 under similar circum-
stances. Such extension will apply only as between
those states which have made such notification.
This provision originated in an amendment intro-
duced by Pakistan to extend the scope of the
convention to persons who have disappeared "as
a result of events of war, or other disturbances of
peace during the postwar years until the present
time or may be so reported hereafter." The dele-
gate of the Netherlands opposed this amendment
on the ground that a number of states might have
difficulty in accepting the convention if such wider
scope was given to it. The delegates of Belgium
and Israel expressed a similar view and the latter
offered an amendment to article 1 which was sub-
stantially the provision finally included in this
article.

The delegate of the United States stated on
April 6, 1950, that he wanted it understood that
the word "persecution" in article 1 referred to
"mass persecution in a country." The chairman
of the Conference inquired whether there was any
opposition to this understanding. There was no
opposition and this understanding went into the
record.

266

Department of State Bulletin

COMPETENT TRIBUNALS

The tribunals which are competent ratione loci
to issue declarations of death are enumerated in
article 2. The term "trihunal" as used in the con-
vention applied "to all authorities empowered
ratione materiae to determine the fact of death
under the governing domestic law." Under article
2 of the draft convention, state courts of the
United States could have been considered "com-
petent" to issue declarations of death. Since,
under article 3 of the convention, a competent tri-
bunal must ("shall") issue a declaration, if the
conditions of that article are met, the proposed
convention raised the question whether state
courts, which in given circumstances would be
"competent tribunals," could be required to issue
declarations of death by the convention. In order
to avoid difficulties of this nature, the United
States delegate proposed that there should be
inserted in this article a provision authorizing a
contracting state to designate at least one tribunal
which would, in all cases, be competent to issue
the required declarations. A provision to this
effect is found in paragraph 3 of article 2 of the
convention.

To the list of relatives empowered by the draft
convention to apply for declarations of death there
were added in paragraph 2 (v) of article 2 certain
additional ones such as grandparents, uncles, and
aunts.

The Conference rejected a Yugoslav proposal
which was intended to give priority to cei'tain
tribunals because it felt that it would vitiate the
purpose of the convention. Because of this re-
jection, the delegate of Yugoslavia abstained from
voting on the convention as a whole. He did,
however, sign the final act of the Conference.

APPLICATION FOR DECLARATION OF DEATH

Article 3 provides that any person having "a
legal interest in the matter or "an authority
charged with the protection of the public interest"
may apply for a declaration of death. It also
specifies what persons may be considered as having
a legal interest in, as well as the conditions that
must be met to entitle one to, the issuance of a
declaration of death. The provisions of this
article are practically the same as those of the cor-
responding article in the draft convention, except
that a provision in the latter authorizing certain
organizations to be considered as having a legal
interest was eliminated at the instance of the dele-
gate of the United States.

DATE OF DEATH

Article 4 of the draft convention provided that
in the absence of any other indication, the date of
death should be fixed as the last day of the year
during which death probably took place, provided
that this date should have no effect in causing the
lapse of an insurance policy for nonpayment of

premiums during that year. The United States
representatives proj^osed this proviso at Geneva,
because our courts, in order to avoid the conse-
quences of a lapse in insurance premium payments,
would frequently presume, in the absence of spe-
cific evidence, that death occurred at the time of
disappearance. Thus, if premium payments in a
given case, ceased in January or February, the pro-
viso would prevent a forfeiture which might other-
wise occur by reason of fixing the date at the end
of the year as was required by the draft conven-
tion. In the convention adopted by the Confer-
ence, the proviso was eliminated, but the date of
death was fixed as the "date of disappearance"
and not the last day of the year during which
death probably took place.

EFFECTS OF DECLARATIONS OF DEATH

The convention provides in article 5 that decla-
rations of death shall constitute in the other con-
tracting states "prima facie evidence of death and
the date of death until contrary evidence is sub-
mitted." However, contracting states may, by
special arrangements which shall be notified to the
Secretary-General, grant broader effects to decla-
rations issued in their respective territories.

Article 5 of the convention was substituted for
articles 5 and 11 of the draft convention. Article
5 of the draft convention provided that a declara-
tion of death should have the same effect in the
country in which it was issued "as the official death
certificate issued in accordance with the national
laws of that country." Article 11 provided that
declarations of death should be given the same
effect as declarations issued by the tribunals of the
state where presented, provided that, in states
whose "constitutional system at the time of ratifi-
cation of the convention did not permit the issu-
ance of declarations of death," local law might
provide that declarations issued under the conven-
tion should have the effect of a prima facie pre-
sumption of death and, in the absence of contrary
evidence, should require a finding of death of the
missing person on the date established in the decla-
ration of death.

From the point of view of the United States, the
provisions of article 5 and of article 11 of the draft
convention were undesirable. It was felt that the
provision of article 5 went too far in providing
that every declaration should have the same legal
effect in the country of issuance as an official death
certificate issued in that country. It was felt that
this article should be ehminated in its entirety and
that article 11 should be amended so as to change
the clause "whose constitutional system at the time
of ratification of the Convention did not permit
the issuance of declarations of death" to read "in
states whose legal systems at the time they become
parties to the present Convention do not provide
for the issuance of declarations of death. This
amendment would change the question in each case
from the academic one of whether a constitutional

Augusf 74, 7950

267

system might aiitliorize declarations of death to be
issued to the more definable one of whether the
existing legal system actually provides for the
issuance of declarations of death. In the conven-
tion, the provisions of article 5 of the draft con-
vention were eliminated, and, in article 5 of the
convention, the provisions of article 11 were
changed so as to enable states by special arrange-
ments between themselves to grant to a declara-
tion of death broader effects than that of prima
facie evidence. Article 5 of the convention main-
tains the provision which gives only "prima facie"
effect to declarations of death until contrary evi-
dence is submitted. The undesirable provision re-
garding the "constitutional system" has been
eliminated.

EFFECT OF DECLARATION ISSUED PRIOR TO CONVENTION

Article 6 of the convention provides that dec-
larations of death issued in the territory of one
of the contracting states before the entry into
force of the convention shall have, in the other
contracting states, the validity of a declaration
issued under this convention if the issuing tribunal
certifies that the declaration satisfies the condi-
tions and requirements which are, at present, con-
tained in articles 1, 2, and 3 of the convention.
The delegate of the United States pointed out
that such a provision might be objectionable since
it might be interpreted to affect rights acquired
before such a declaration is presented. In order
to meet this point, the Conference approved his
proposal that the following provision be incor-
porated in article 6 : "However, property or other
rights acquired in such territory before such a
declaration is presented shall not thereby be
impaired."

There was no corresponding article in the draft
convention ; and, as a consequence, the numbers of
practically all the i-emaining articles of the con-
vention do not correspond witli those of the draft
convention.

RES JUDICATA OF DECLARATIONS ISSUED
PRIOR TO CONVENTION

According to article 7, the convention shall not
be construed as impairing the force of res judicata
of final declarations of death having acquired the
force of res judicata. There was no such provision
in the draft convention.

INTERNATIONAL BUREAU FOR DECLARATIONS OF DEATH

Article 6 of the draft convention provided that
there should be "established an International Bu-
reau for Declarations of Death" and that the ex-
penses of the bureau should be allocated among
the states parties to the convention in accordance
with the scale to be established by the Secretary-
General in consultation with such states. During
the discussions of the provision regarding expenses
at the meeting of the ad hoc Committee at Geneva,

268

the United States representative secured the de-
letion of the provision regarding allocation of the
expenses among the states parties to the conven-
tion. However, this action was reconsidered, and
the provision was reinstated at Geneva. The rep-
resentative of the United States continued to urge
the desirability of keeping expenses at a minimum
and of financing them out of the United Nations
budget.

The provision regarding allocation of expenses
according to a scale to be established by the Sec-
retary-General being undesirable from the point
of view of the United States, the delegate of the
United States proposed that the bureau should be
established "within the framework of the United
Nations." He pointed out that, since the conven-
tion is to deal with a problem of general interest
to the United Nations, it should be financed on
the same basis as any other integral part of the
United Nations. The Conference adopted the
United States proposal.

COMMUNICATION OF APPLICATIONS J

The provisions of article 9 relating to communi- I
cation of applications to the international bureau
by a tribunal are substantially the same as those
of the corresponding article 7 of the draft
convention.

PUBLICATION AND COMMUNICATION OF DECISIONS

Article 10 of the convention, wliich deals with
communication of decisions to the international
bureau by tribunals and publication of lists by the
bureau, is substantially the same as the corre-
sponding article 8 of the draft convention except
that notice to the bureau of proceedings for re-
consideration is also required.

LETTERS ROGATORY

Article 9 of the draft convention provides that
the conditions under which tribunals were to af-
ford each other "mutual assistance in proceedings
under the present convention shall be governed by
special agreements relating to mutual assistance
among tribunals or by the applicable legislation
of each country."

The corresponding article in the convention,
article 11, replaces this text by a provision that the
contracting states would execute letters rogatory
relating to proceedings under the convention in
accordance with their domestic law and practice
and international agreements concluded or to be
concluded.

EXEMPTION FROM COSTS AND FREE LEGAL AID

The draft convention provided in article 10 that
proceedings under it sliould be gi'anted exemption
from all costs and charges and that free legal aid
should be provided in all cases where, under the

Department of State Bulletin

national law, such exemption or assistance is
granted to nationals of the country where a pro-
ceedin^C is pending.

The delegate of the United States pointed out
that there was no reason wliy all proceedings
under the convention should be granted exemption
from all costs. Furthermore, lie stated that free
legal assistance should be provided to aliens only
where, in like proceedings, such exemption was
granted to nationals. The corresponding article
of the convention, article 12, takes care of these
objections by providing that aliens instituting
proceedings under the convention shall be granted
exemption from costs and free legal aid only in
cases where, under domestic law, such exemption
or aid is granted in like proceedings to nationals
of a country where a proceeding is pending. In-
digent applicants are made exempt from the
requirement of posting security for costs which
are imposed on aliens alone.

ACCESSION

Article 12 of tlie draft convention opened the
convention for signature or acceptance by a
state. The word "state"' was definecl as including
"the territories for which each State Party to
the present Convention bears international
responsibility."

Article 13 of the convention amended the cor-
resiDonding article 12 of the draft convention by
providing that the convention should be opened
for "accession" rather than for "signature or
acceptance." The United Kingdom delegate stated
that signature was a symbolic act without legal
consequence and the representative of the United
Nations Secretariat explained that the use of
accession was not unprecedented in the United
Nations. The delegate of the United States asso-
ciated himself with the remarks of the delegate of
the United Kingdom.

The broad definition given to the word "state"
in the draft convention presented some difficulties
for certain countries such as the Netherlands and
the United Kingdom, which customarily consult
with certain of their overseas territories before ac-
cepting any international agreements on behalf
of those territories. The delegate of Belgium in-
troduced an amendment to this definition, which
would allow a contracting party to stipulate that
the convention would not apply to certain of its
territories for which it bears international respon-
sibility. After the delegate of the United Eang-
dom had spoken in favor of the proposal, the
delegate of the United States supported the
amendment which was substantially incorporated
in article 13 of the convention.

This article now provides that the word "state"
includes all the territories of a state unless the state
concerned, on acceding to the convention, has stip-
ulated that the convention shall not apply to cer-
tain of its territories. Any state making such a
stipulation may, at any time thereafter, by noti-

fication to the Secretary-General of the United
Nations, extend the ajiplication of the convention
to any or all of such territories.

ENTRY INTO FORCE

Article 14 of the convention provides that the
convention shall come into force on the thirtietli
day following the date of deposit of the second in-
strument of accession. This language is practi-
cally the same as that of the corresponding article
of the draft convention.

Article 14 provides also that for each state ac-
ceding to the convention after the deposit of the
second instrument of accession, the convention
shall enter into force on the thirtieth day following
the date of deposit of its instrument of accession.
This provision is, likewise, substantially the same
as that of article 13 of the draft convention.

APPROVAL BY GENERAL ASSEMBLY

It is provided in article 15 of the convention that
tlie establishment of the international bureau
witliin the framework of the United Nations "shall
require the approval of the General Assembly of
the United Nations."

NOTIFICATIONS BY SECRETARY-GENERAL

Article 16 of the convention, which corresponds
to article 15 of the draft convention, specifies the
seven notifications which must be made by the
Secretary-General.

DURATION

According to article 17, the convention shall be
valid for a period of 5 years from the date of its
entry into force. This provision is the same as
that of the corresponding article of the draft con-
vention. However, article 17 of the convention
contains the following provision which was not
in the draft convention : "proceedings initiated
during, but not concluded before, the expiration
of the validity of the convention may be con-
tinued" and their effects will be the same as if
they had been completed before the expiration of
the convention.

SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES

Article 18 of the convention, as in the corre-
sponding article of the draft convention, provides
that disputes relating to the interpretation or ap-
plication of the convention which have not been
settled by other means shall be referred to the
International Court of Justice. A provision that
a disi^ute shall be brought before the Court either
by notification of a special agreement between the
parties to the dispute or by a unilateral appli-
cation of one of them supplements the draft
convention.

August 14, 1950

269

RESERVATIONS

Article 19 of the draft convention provided that
the Secretary-General shall determine, in the first
instance, whether a reservation to the convention
should or should not be accepted. His determina-
tion was to become final unless he had received,
within 3 months from the date of his communica-
tion to the states concerned, communications from
a majority of states disagreeing with his deter-
mination. However, this provision was not to
apply to reservations regarding certain articles.

The delegate of the United States objected to
this provision as a radical and undesirable de-
parture from the usual practice. The other dele-
gations expressed similar views and the delegate
of Belgium proposed an amendment which be-
came, in substance, article 19 of the convention.

It provides that states may make their accession
to the convention subject to reservations which
may be formulated only at the time of accession.
If a contracting state does not accept the reserva-
tion which another state may have thus attached
to its accession, the former may notify the Secre-
tary-General that it considers such accession as
not having come into force between the state mak-
ing the reservation and the state not accepting it,

LANGUAGE AND DEPOSIT

Article 20 provides that the convention, of
which the Chinese, English, French, Kussian, and
Spanish texts are equally authentic, shall be de-
posited with the Secretary-General, who will
transmit certified copies thereof to the States con-
cerned.

ILO Preliminary Conference on Migration

by Irwin M. Tohin

The Preliminary Conference on Migration
which met at Geneva April 25-May 9, 1950, was
convened in accordance with a decision of the
International Labor Organization (Ilo) Gov-
erning Body taken at its one hundred tenth session
(Mysore, December 19-January 1950). Although
the Conference was, in many respects, a point of
departure for a new type of positive Ilo program
in the field of migration, several years of discussion
and activity on the part of the Ilo in the migra-
tion and manpower fields had preceded it. The
Permanent Migration Committee of the Ilo,
which met three times between 1946 and 1949,
had considered various phases of migration for
employment and land settlement, concentrating
upon the formulation of a convention, model
agreement, and related documents concerning the
rights of migrants for employment. The con-
vention, which the .32d Ilo Conference formally
adopted in June 1949, is now before governments
for ratification.^

Meanwhile, the Ilo had been developing an
active concern with the problem of balanced man-
power utilization as a contribution to economic
recovery and development. The third session of
the Permanent Migration Committee (January

' For the activities of the Permanent Migration Com-
mittee see article on third session of the Ilo Permanent
Migration Committee, Bulletin of Apr. 3, 1949, pp. 421-
424. For U.S. delegation to the preliminary conference,
see Bulletin of May 15, 1950, p. 779.

1949) recommended to the Governing Body that
the Ilo pursue an active policy to assist govern-
ments in making full use of their manpower. The
program subsequently adopted, and now being
carried out, includes steps to strengthen employ-
ment services, develop international definitions of
occupations, and improve methods of industrial
training.

The 32d session of the International Labor Con-
ference further recommended that it should be
the general policy of members (of the Ilo) to de-
velop and utilize all possibilities of employment,
and for this purpose to facilitate the international
distribution of manpower, in particular the move-
ment of manpower from countries which have a
surplus of manpower to those countries which have
a deficiency.

The Preliminary Conference on European Mi-
gration was called as the first major step to imple-
ment this recommendation. Countries of immi-
gration and emigration directly concerned with
migration within Europe or from Europe to other
continents were invited to be represented, as were
the United Nations and its specialized agencies.
The role of the Ilo among the international agen-
cies concerned with migration had already been
confirmed in discussion of the United Nations spe-
cialized agencies coordinating committee and in a
special meeting in February 1949, initiated by the
Ilo. The Preliminary Conference, therefore, took

270

Department of State Bulletin

place with the full agreement, participation, and
support of the international organizations.

The purpose of the Migration Conference, as
stated by the Ilo, was "to find a solution for the
difficulties now restricting the movement of people
from European countries which are overpopulated
in terms of present-day economic development to
countries inside and outside Europe which
urgently need manpower for their own develop-
ment."

In the opening address to the Conference David
A. Morse, Director General of the Ilo, emphasized
that the Conference was not legislative but practi-
cal in character and that it should constitute a step
forward to "uncover the practical obstacles to the
solution of manpower problems and to take, in
cooperation with the governments and interna-
tional organizations concerned, more direct action
to solve them." He further stated that "for each
of the other international organizations repre-
sented the conference provides a similar opportu-
nity to carry forward its operating program suc-
cessfully. For those of you representing immi-
gration and emigration countries, the conference
makes it possible to divine the character of your
problems, to see them in relation to the problems
of others and to discuss techniques for meeting
them."

Agenda

Tlie agenda of the Conference was laid down as
follows :

(1) Exchange of views on present position as regards
migration and factors restricting its development :

(a) position as regards current emigration;

(b) manpower in Europe available for emigration;
demands for manpower for immigration countries ;

(2) Measures necessary to organize migration on the
international and national levels, in particular —

(a) methods of determining:

(i) the number and qualifications of workers avail-
able for emigration ;

(ii) the number and qualifications of workers
required by immigration countries ;

(b) appropriate methods for organizing recruitment,
selection, transport, reception, placement, and settlement
of migrant workers.

(3) Migration and economic development:

(a) desirability of establishing machinery for pro-
moting economic development with respect to both indus-
trial and agricultural projects, taking into account needs
for foreign manpower ; industrial projects ; land settle-
ment schemes ;

(b) technical assistance which international organi-
zations can provide.

(4) Financial basis for plans for economic develop-
ment ; advances and technical aid from international
organizations ; private capital investment.

Participation

The governments represented included almost
all of those concerned with migration within and
from Europe. European governments on hand
were: Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland,
France, Greece, Italy, Luxembourg, the Nether-

lands, Portugal, the United Kingdom, Sweden,
and Switzerland. The German Federal Kepublic
was also represented by observers, who were
accompanied by officials of the Allied High Com-
mission for Germany.

Overseas countries represented were, from the
American Republics: Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil,
Chile, Colomljia, El Salvador, Ecuador, Guate-
mala, Mexico, Panama, Peru, Uruguay, and Vene-
zuela. Other overseas countries were Australia,
Canada, and the United States.

The international organizations present were:
the United Nations, the Food and Agriculture
Organization (Fao), the United Nations Educa-
tional, Scientific and Cultural Organization
(Unesco), the World Health Organization
(Who), International Bank for Reconstruction
and Development (Ibrd), the International Refu-
gee Organization (Iro), the International Trade
Organization (Ito) (interim commission), and
Office of European Economic Cooperation (Oeec)
(observer).

The Ilo Governing Body members were the
Chairman, L. E. Troclet of Belgium ; for the gov-
ernment group, Helio Lobo of Brazil ; for the em-
ployers' group, P. Campanella, president of the
Genoa Industrial Association ; and for the work-
ers' group, F. S. Santi, secretary of the Italian
General Confederation of Labor, who was replaced
toward the end of the Conference by J. Mori, sec-
retary of the Swiss Federation of Trade Unions.

The Conference met in plenary session. Com-
mittee of the Whole (for discussion of agenda
item 1), and two committees, of which the first
discussed agenda item 2 and the second, agenda
items 3 and 4. In addition to this Conference
organization, based upon the agenda, the heads
of delegations were called together on several
occasions for discussion of special problems con-
cerning the future organization of international
efforts to facilitate migration.

Work of the Committees

COMMITTEE 1

The leading objective of this committee was to
devise means of overcoming obstacles to migration
of an administrative or tecnnical character. Sub-
jects considered included (1) provision of infor-
mation on migration opportunities; (2) improve-
ment of recruitment and selection methods; (3)
assistance to emigrants; (4) simplification of ad-
ministrative procedures; (5) the conditions and
financing of transport; (6) improved reception
facilities; (7) placement and settlement services;
(8) transfer of funds and assets, and (9) social
security rights of migrants. The recommenda-
tions adopted were addressed, as appropriate, to
governments of emigration and immigration coun-
tries and to international agencies. In addition,
the conclusions of the committee were intended
to lay the basis for a program of technical assist-

Augusf 14, 7950

271

ance by the United Nations and specialized agen-
cies, especially the Ilo, who declared their readi-
ness to make the necessary facilities available.

Among the technical assistance programs en-
visaged by the committee were aid to requesting
governments in the establishment and execution
of recruitment and selection programs, including
the organization of training courses for officials
responsible for the recruitment and selection of
migrants; help in developing appropriate facili-
ties for information and assistance to migrants
and in organizing reception centers and placement
and settlement services; development of arrange-
ments for systematic exchange of information on
manpower surpluses and deficits; promotion of
greater uniformity in occupational nomenclature ;
assistance in preparing "manpower budgets," and
assistance in facilitating the application of bilat-
eral agreements. As illustrations of the activities
of other international organizations, the Fag was
expected to aid immigration countries in meeting
the problems arising in connection with the settle-
ment of migrants on the land; the Ieo offered to
provide information on migration techniques
based upon its experience in handling DP's, and
Unesco was to undertake studies concerning cul-
tural assimilation of immigrants.

COMMITTEE 2

The discussions and recommendations of the
second committee, which dealt with migration and
economic development, were necessarily of a more
tentative and general character, especially since
it was recognized that the action required lay out-
side the competence of the Ilo. The committee
noted the steps already being taken to promote
economic development which could contribute to
an expanded immigration, and recommended that
action along these lines sliould l)e accelerated.

It was further proposed that in order to achieve
more effective utilization of European manpower
through migration linked to economic develop-
ment (1) the United Nations and the Ilo should
be requested to undertake a joint study of
the relationship between European migration and
overseas economic development; (2) it was sug-
gested that interested immigration countries
should consider whether they wish to submit to
the International Bank requests for financial as-
sistance for execution of projects of economic de-
velopment which might lead to increased immigra-
tion, in the light of a statement by the Bank that
it would be glad to consider such applications ; (3)
the attention of Ecosoc was drawn to the desir-
ability of the provision of United Nations techni-
cal missions, upon request of interested govern-
ments, to review their economic possibilities with
particular attention being given, other things being
equal, to enterprises likely to stimulate immigra-
tion; (4) the United Nations was requested to
undertake a study of the desirability of increasing
purchases of products of immigration countries in

272

order to enable them to acquire the machinery and
equipment indispensable to their economic and so-
cial development, which could in turn facilitate
migration; (5) the Ilo was asked to obtain from
the governments and international oi-ganizations
concerned, on a regular basis, information on the
more imi)ortant economic development projects
related to migration, and (6) the Secretary-Gen-
eral of the United Nations was requested to have
the conclusions of the Conference, as they con-
cerned the financing of economic development in
relation to immigration, discussed at the third ses-
sion of the Economic Commission for Latin
America.^

The Plenary Sessions

The plenary sessions of the Conference, which
adopted the conclusions of the committees with
only minor changes, also afforded an opportunity
for an exchange of views on the present position
as regards migration and factors restricting its
development. Special meetings of heads of dele-
gations, which were concerned primarily with
formulation of a general resolution dealing with
the further steps which should be taken by the Ilo
to develop international activities designed to
facilitate European migration, also were held.

The exchange of views on agenda item 1 re-
sulted in valuable statements of government policy
with regard to emigration and immigration,
stressing the obstacles which must be overcome,
particularly in immigration countries, before
large-scale immigration above existing levels may
be contemplated. Among the obstacles, special
stress was laid on those relating to economic de-
velopment and its financing, the development of
markets and communications to open up unex-
ploited areas, the existing differences in living
and working conditions between coinitries of emi-
gration and nnmigration, and the obstacles of an
administrative nature which complicate the proc-
esses of migration for individual migrants.

Attention was drawn to the part which could
be played by the interested governments and vari-
ous international organizations in surmounting
these and other obstacles, and particular value was
attached to undertaking coordinated programs of
technical assistance in the migration field. It was
also emphasized that while many of the problems
before the Conference concerned organized migra-
tion, the vital contribution made by spontaneous
individual migration should not be underesti-
mated. General agreement was reached on the
need to facilitate such spontaneous migration by
enabling it to take place with a mininumi of fric-
tion. Many delegates emphasized that the human
and social aspects of migration must be constantly
borne in mind, and reference was also made to the
natural desire of trade unions to protect the inter-
ests of their members. To this end stress was laid

' Held in June 1950 at Montevideo.

Department of State Bulletin

on the A-alue of the Mijjration for Employment
Convention and related instruments adopted by
the 194!) International Labor Conference.

In view of its significance as a point of reference
and future development of international assistance
for migration, the general resolution adopted by
the Conference is rejiroduced in full.

The Preliniinnry Migration Conference of countries di-
rectly concerned in migration witliin Europe or from Eu-
rope to other continents,

Having been convened by the Governing Body of the
International Labour OflBce and having met in Geneva
from 2') April to 9 May 1950,

Inspired by the most generous principles of human soli-
darity.

Conscious that a stable peace can be achieved only
through the attainment and preservation of the common
weal.

Expressing the view of the various delegations con-
cerned that it is indispensable to promote a higher degree
of co-operation between the nations for the purpose of
finding a solution to the grave problem of surplus man-
power in certain countries of Europe,

Considering that :

1. The existence of this surplus of manpower endangers
the exercise of certain essential human rights, such as
the right to work and the right to enjoy a minimum of
social and economic security ;

2. Such a situation produces a state of discontent which
not only threatens to disturb the social and economic equi-
librium of the countries concerned but also, through its
natural repercussions, may have serious prejudicial effects
upon other parts of the world ;

3. On the other hand, certain other countries are look-
ing to international assistance and co-operation in order
to attain the economic development and increased tech-
nical capacity needed for expansion and prosperity ;

4. Such development and such increased technical ca-
pacity, combined with the economic potentialities and
natural resources of these countries, can contribute on a
significant scale to the absorption of manpower surpluses
by means of an intensification of migration ;

5. While many efforts in this connection have been
made in the past by emigration and immigration countries
and by international organizations, much still remains to
be done to the same end ;

Appeals to the countries concerned and to the inter-
national organizations to contribute in a spirit of under-
standing and full human solidarity to a satisfactory solu-
tion of the problems caused by surplus population in cer-
tain parts of Europe; and

"Recommends:

That the United Nations and the Specialized Agencies
do everything in their power, taking into account the con-
clusions of the Conference, to further European migra-
tion by technical assistance or other means ;

That the International Labour Organisation :

a. Intensify its present activities in the field of
migration ; and

b. Suggest the best form of co-operation on the inter-
national level with a view to the achievement of the aims
set forth above ; and

c. Draw up, after consultation with the Governments
concerned, appropriate proposals for submission to them
at a subsequent meeting."

Conclusions

In opening the Conference, Director General
Morse laid particular stress on its "preliminary"
character. It was regarded as essential that, be-
fore substantial and effective efforts could be made

in the migration field, a full examination of all the
factors was reciuired; the purpose of this Prelimi-
nary Conference, therefore, was to make the neces-
sary information available, bring problems to
light, and propose whatever steps could be taken.

In addition to an essential exchange of views,
the Conference adopted practical recommenda-
tions for technical assistance and government
action which, if carried out, hold promise of hav-
ing a substantial long-range impact bearing upon
solution of the migration problem. The meeting
recognized that certain matters existed, for ex-
ample, financing economic development or trans-
port, with which this Conference itself was not in
a position to consider. However, even there the
outlines of the problems were discerned and steps
were taken which should insure continued exam-
ination and development of fruitful lines of action.

During the course of the Conference, the United
States delegation emphasized (1) the contribution
now being made by the United States, especially
through our DP legislation, in absorbing the war-
dislocated refugees and expellees in Europe; (2)
the interest of the United States in helping to find
solutions for the problem of overpopulation in
certain European countries, and the related prob-
lem of manpower needs for economic development
in countries of immigration; (3) the desirability
of an international technical assistance program
in this field to be carried out by Ilo, and {'i) the
willingness of the United States to examine, within
the framework of existing aid programs, ways in
which the United States might be of assistance
with regard to essential migration movements.
The United States representatives also suppoi'ted
the general resolution which authorized the Ilo
to proceed with further exploration of interna-
tional activities to facilitate migration.

The profound interest of the United States in
the problems discussed at the Ilo Conference was
reflected in the declaration on migration adopted
by the Foreign Ministers of the United States, the
United Kingdom, and France at London on May
13, who exjDressecl the belief that, "in view of the
importance and wide scope" of the migration prob-
lem, "it would be desirable to make a general
review of the various activities in this field" to
determine "whether there are additional ap-
proaches which could be undertaken." To that
end, they agreed to designate experts of their three
Governments who would consult at an early date
among themselves and with other interested gov-
ernments, particularly Italy and Germany in view
of their major interest in the problem. In their
declaration, the three Foreign Ministers took note
of the valuable work on migration problems
already going forward in the Ilo, the United
Nations and its specialized agencies, and the
Oeec, and, in particular, mentioned the conclu-
sions reached at the Ilo Preliminary Migration
Conference, which had just completed its work at
Geneva.

August 14, 1950

273

Thailand Signs Fuibriglit Agreement Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S.

Thailand and the United States signed on July
1 an agreement putting into operation the program
of educational exchanges authorized by the Ful-
bright Act.

Tlie signing took place at Bangkok, with Nau
Worakan Bancha, Minister of Foreign Affairs,
representing the Government of Thailand and
Edwin F. Stanton, American Ambassador to
Thailand, representing the United States.

All recipients of awards under this act are
selected by the Board of Foreign Scholarships,
appointed by the President of the United States.

The Foundation in Thailand will consist of
eight members, the honorary chairman of which
will be the United States Ambassador to Thai-
land. The members of the foundation will in-
clude four citizens of Thailand and four citizens
of the United States.

After the members of the Foundation in Thai-
land have been appointed, information about spe-
cific opportunities for American citizens to pursue
study, teaching, or research in that country will
be made public. At that time, applications for
these opportunities will be received by :

For graduate study

The Institute of International Education
2 West Forty-fifth Street
New York 19, New York

Fulbright Program Advisers on the campuses of
American colleges and universities.

For teaching in Thai elementary or secondary schools
The United States OflSce of Education
Federal Security Agency
Washington 25, D.C.

For teaching m American elementary or secondary schools
abroad

The American Council on Education
744 Jackson Place, NW.
Washington C, D.C.

For university teaching, or advanced research

The Conference Board of Associated Research

Councils
2101 Constitution Avenue, NW.
Washington 25. D. C.

Need To Step Up Defenses — Coyitinued from page 250

plished in the immediate future without a dis-
proportionate strain upon any of the participat-
ing nations.

We ai-e confident that other nations will extend
the fullest possible cooperation to this common ef-
fort, and we, for our part, can be content with no
less effort than the situation requires.

The security of our country and of the free
world of which we are a part will depend upon
what we do now.

We face the need for a tremendous defense effort
to be undertaken with the utmost speed, and that
need must be answered by each of us who bears a
measure of responsibility for the future security
of our country.

Victor J. Thys, assistant general secretary of the
Metal Woi'kers Union of Belgium, is beginning a
tour of the United States.

Lode Deweerdt, general secretary of the
Landelijke Bedienden Centrale, Antwerp, Bel-
gium, is spending several weeks in the United
States.

G. L. Mapara, general secretary of the Indian
National Railway Workers Federation and mem-
ber of the General Council for the Indian National
Trade Union Congress, New Delhi, arrived in
Washington on July 20 to spend several weeks.

Eric Dumbleton, editor of the Auckland Star,
Auckland, New Zealand, began a tour of the
United States on July 20.

These visits have been made possible by the De-
partment of State under the program for the ex-
change of persons.

Americans Visiting Abroad

Dr. Ben Eiseman, chief resident surgeon,
Barnes Hospital, St. Louis, Missouri will lecture
in Thailand.

David H. Grimm, associate professor of dental
surgery, University of California, will teach den-
tistry at Central University of Venezuela at
Caracas.

Charles A. Myers of the Massachusetts Institute
of Technology will serve as specialist in industrial
relations in Sweden for 4 months.

These visits have been made possible through
grants-in-aid awarded by the Department of
State.

Willard L. Thorp Resigns from ECOSOC

The President on June 30 accepted the resig-
nation of Willard L. Thorp, Assistant Secretary
for Economic Affairs, as United States represent-
ative on the Economic and Social Council of the
United Nations. For the text of exchange of cor-
respondence between the President and Mr. Thorp,
see White House press release of June 30.

THE DEPARTMENT

Interdepartmental Standards
Council Established

1. An Interdepartmental Standards Council
has recently been established to coordinate matters
involving national and international standardiza-

274

Department of State Bulletin

tion of commercial significance in which the
United States Government is interested. The
council is composed of representatives from 15
Federal agencies including, the Department of
State. The secretariat and the chairmanship of
the council are provided by the Federal Supply
Service, General Services Administration.

2. The council has the following terms of
reference :

a. Study Governmental policy on national
and international standardization in broad com-
modity fields and technical practices, and recom-
mend to proper authorities such measures of
coordination and such changes in policy or statute
as may be found necessary.

b. Study and recommend appropriate chan-
nels for maintaining contact and coordinating the
exchange of information between the United
States and foreign governments and among the
recognized groups and technical organizations
within the United States Government and indus-
try concerned with standardization matters affect-
ing broad commodity fields and technical practices.

3. The Chief of the International Business
Practices Policy Staff, Office of International
Trade Policy, has been designated as the Depart-
ment of State representative to the council. Any
standardization matters of general interest should
be brought to the attention of the coimcil through
the Department's representative.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Govern-
ment Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Address re-
guests direct to the Su perintendent of Documents, except
in the case of free publications, which may be obtained
from the Department of State.

United States Educational Commission in the United
Kingdom. Treaties and Other International Acts Series
2051. Pub. 3830. 2 pp. 50.

Agreement between the United States and Great
Britain and Northern Ireland amending agreement
of September 22, 1948, as amended — Effected by ex-
change of notes, signed at London January 20, 1950 ;
entered into force January 20, 1950.

United States Educational Foundation in India. Treaties
and Other International Acts Series 2054. Pub. 3842.
9 pp. 50.

Agreement and explanatory memorandum between the
United States and India — Signed at New Delhi Feb-
ruary 2, 1950 ; entered into force February 2, 1950.

Current Problems in the Conduct of Foreign Policy. Gen-
eral Foreign Policy Series 31. Pub. 3862. 16 pp.
[Bulletin Reprint] Free.

Address by George F. Kennan, Counselor, delivered
before the Institute on United States Foreign Policy,
Milwaukee, Wis., May 5, 1950.

Mutual Defense of the West. General Foreign Policy
Series 32. Pub. 3867. 8 pp. Free.

Background summary of the principles, purposes, and
administration of the Mdap, June 1950.

Current Problems in the Occupation of Germany. Euro-
pean and British Commonwealth Series 15. Pub. 3871.
8 pp. Free.

A fact sheet containing a summary of the 5 years of
Allied occupation, the Allied High Commission, the
Occupation Statute, economic rehabilitation, the
current status of the occupation, etc.

First Semiannual Report to Congress on the Mutual De-
fense Assistance Program (October 6, 1949 to April 6,
1950). General Foreign Policy Series 33. Pub. 3878. 74
pp. 20«S.

Comprehensive summary on Mdap development since
its inception on April 6, 1950.

Diplomatic List, June 1950. Pub. 3879. 160 pp. 300 a
copy ; $3.25 a year domestic. $4.50 a year foreign.

Monthly list of foreign diplomatic representatives in
Washington, with their addresses.

International Trade Organization— Key to Expanding
World Trade and Employment. Commercial Policy Series
130. Pub. 3882. 16 pp. 250.

Contains illustrative charts with brief explanations.

THE CONGRESS

Legislation

International Agreement for the Suppression of the
White Slave Traffic. Message from the President of the
United States transmitting a certified copy of a protocol
amending the international agreement for the suppression
of the white slave traffic signed at Paris on May 18, 1904,
and the international convention for the suppression of
the white slave traffic signed at Paris on May 4, 1910.
S. Ex. B, 81st Cong., 2d sess., 9 pp.

Protocol Amending the Agreement for the Suppression
of the Circulation of Obscene Publications. Message
from the President of the United States transmitting a
certified copy of a protocol amending the agreement . . .
signed at Paris on May 4, 1910. S. Ex. C, 81st Cong.,
2d sess., 9 pp.

Treaty of Friendship, Commerce, and Economic De-
velopment with the Oriental Republic of Uruguay. Mes-
sage from the President of the United States transmitting
a treaty . . . together with a protocol, an additional proto-
col, and an exchange of notes, relating thereto, signed at
Montevideo on November 23, 1949. S. Ex. D, 81st Cong.,
2d sess., 19 pp.

Convention with Ireland for Avoidance of Double T.ixa-
tion and Prevention of Fiscal Evasion with Respect to
Taxes on Estates of Deceased Persons. Message from the
President of the United States transmitting the conven-
tion between the United States of America and Ireland,
signed at Dublin on September 13, 1949. S. Ex. E, 81st
Cong., 2d sess., 9 pp.

Convention with Ireland for Avoidance of Double Taxa-
tion and Prevention of Fiscal Evasion with Respect to
Taxes on Income. Mesisage from the President of the

August 14, 1950

275

Dnited States transmitting the convention between the
United States of America and Ireland, sif-'ned at Dublin
on September 13, 1949. S. Ex. F, 81st Cong., 2d sess.,
16 pp.

Protocol Prolonging the International Agreement Re-
garding the Regulation of Production and Marlieling of
Sugar. Message from the President of the United States
transmitting a certified copy of a protocol dated in Lon-
don, August 31, 1949, prolonging for 1 year after August
31, 1949, the international agreement regarding the regu-
lation of production and marketing of sugar, signed at
London, May 6, 1937. S. Ex. G, 81st Cong., 2d sess.,
6 pp.

Treaty of Friendship, Commerce, and Navigation with
Ireland, witli Protocol Relating Tliereto. Message from
the President of the United States transmitting a treaty
. . . together with a protocol relating thereto, signed at
Dublin on January 21, 1950. S. Ex. H, 81st Cong., 2d
sess., 18 pp.

Claims Convention with Panama, Signed January 26,
1950. Message from the President of the United States
transmitting the claims convention between the United
States of America and the Republic of Panama, signed
at PanamA on January 26, 1950. S. Ex. I, Slst Cong.,
2d sess., 8 pp.

Annex to International Telecommunication Conven-
tion— Telegraph Regulations (Paris Revision, 1949) and
Final Protocol. Message from the President of the United
States transmitting the texts of the telegraph regula-
tions (Paris revision, 1949) and final protocol annexed
to the International Telecommunication Convention, which
were signed in the French language at Paris on August
5, 1949. S. Ex. J, Slst Cong., 2d sess., 177 pp.

Convention with Greece with Respect to Taxes on the
Estates of Deceased Persons. Message from the Presi-
dent of the United States transmitting the convention
between the United States of America and Greece, signed
at Athens on February 20, 1950, for the avoidance of
double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with
respect to taxes on the estates of deceased persons. S.
Ex. K, Slst Cong., 2d sess., 10 pp.

Convention with Greece for Avoidance of Double Tax-
ation and Prevention of Fiscal Evasion with Respect to
Taxes on Income. Message from the President of the
United States transmitting the convention with Greece,
signed at Athens on February 20, 19.50. S. Ex. L, Slst
Cong., 2d sess., 12 pp.

Convention with Canada for the Extension of Port
Privileges to Halibut Fishing Vessels. Message from the
President of the United States transmitting the con-
vention ... for the extension of port privileges to hali-
but fishing vessels on the Pacific coasts of the United
States of America and Canada, signed at Ottawa on March
24, 19.50. S. Ex. M, Slst Cong., 2d sess., 4 pp.

Mrs. Ellen Knauff. H. Rept. 1940, Slst Cong., 2d sess.
[To accompany H. R. 7614] 7 pp.

Export-Import Bank Guaranties of United States Pri-
vate Capital Invested Abroad. H. Rept. 1960, Slst Cong.,
2d sess. [To accompany H. R. 8083] 5 pp.

Authorizing the Construction, Repair and Preservation
of Certain Works on Rivers and Harbors for Navigation
and Flood Control. H. Rept. 1068, Slst Cong., 2d sess.
[To accompany H. R. 5472] 27 pp.

Third Semiannual Report on Educational Exchange
Activities. Letter from the Chairman, United States Ad-
visory Commission on Education Exchange, Department
of State, transmitting the third semiannual report on
the educational exchange activities conducted under the
United States Information and Educational Exchange
Act of 1048 (Public Law 402, 80th Cong.) from July 1 to
December 31, 1949. H. Doc. 556, Slst Cong., 2d sess.
vil, 16 pp.

Supplemental Estimate of Appropriation for the De-
partment of State. Communication from the President
of the United States transmitting supplemental estimate
of appropriation for the fiscal year 1950 in the amount
of .$291,000 for the Department of State. H. Doc. 5.57,
Slst Cong., 2d sess., 2 pp.

Estimate of Appropriation To Pay Claims for Damages,
Audited Claims, and Judgments Rendered Against the
United States. Communication from the President of the
United States transmitting an estimate of appropria-
tion . . . as provided by various laws, in the amount of
$8,627,922.79, together with such amounts as may be
necessary to pay indefinite interest and costs and to cover
increases in rates of exchange as may be necessary to
pay claims in foreign currency. H. Doc. 564, Slst Cong.,
2d sess., 68 pp.

Thirtieth Report to Congress on Lend-Lease Operations.
Message from the President of the United States trans-
mitting the thirtieth report to Congress . . . for the
period ending December 31, 1949. H. Doc. 576, Slst Cong.,
2d sess., 7 pp.

Admission of Foreign Agricultural Workers. S. Rept.
1474, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. 272] 3 pp.

Providing for a Joint Committee on the Legislative
Budget. S. Rept. 1487, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany S. Con. Res. 38] 8 pp.

Extension of Laws of the United States to Certain
Pacific Islands. S. Rept. 1493, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To
accompany H. R. 5166] 6 pp.

Extending the Authority of the Administrator of Vet-
erans' Affairs to Establish and Continue Offices in the
Republic of the Philippines. S. Rept. 1517, Slst Cong.,
2d sess. [To accompany H. R. 6632] 5 pp.

Increasing the Annual Authorization for the Appropri-
ation of Funds for Collecting, Editing, and Publishing of
Official Papers Relating to the Territories of the United
States. S. Rept. 1.519, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany S. 2348] 3 pp.

How Congress Makes a Law. A radio address by U. S.
Senator Francis J. Myers of Pennsylvania. S. Doc. 164,
Slst Cong., 2d sess., 5 pp.

Atlantic Union : Hearings before the Committee on
Foreign Affairs, House of Representatives, Slst Cong.,
2d sess., on H. Con. Res. 107, concurrent resolution invit-
ing the democracies which sponsored the North Atlantic
Treaty to name delegates to a federal convention. Janu-
ary 23, 1950. ill, 43 pp.

To Protect the National Security of the United States :
Hearings before the Committee on Post Office and Civil
Service, House of Representatives, Slst Cong., 2d sess.,
on H. R. 7439, a bill to protect the national security of
the United States by permitting the summary suspension
of employment of civilian officers and employees of vari-
ous departments and agencies of the Government and for
other purposes. March 7, 23, 30, 1950. iii, 102 pp.

Exclusion of Ellen KnaufC : Hearings before Subcom-
mittee No. 1, Committee on the Judiciary, House of Repre-
sentatives, 81.st Cong., 2d sess., on H. R. 7614, a bill for
the relief of Mrs. Ellen KnaufC. March 27 and April 3,
1950. ii, 17 pp.

The Genocide Convention : Hearings before a subcom-
mittee of the Committee on Foreign Relations, United
States Senate, Slst Cong., 2d sess., on Ex. O, the inter-
national convention on the prevention and punishment
of the crime of genocide. January 23, 24, 25, and Febru-
ary 9. 1950. V, 5.55 pp. (Department of State, pp. 10-22.)

Communist Activities Among Aliens and National
Groups : Hearings before the Subcommittee on Immigra-
tion and Naturalization of the Committee on the Judiciary,
United States Senate, Slst Cong., 2d sess., on S. 1832, a
bill to amend the Immigration Act of October 16, 1918,
as amended, Part 3. Appendixes I to VIII, ii, A202 pp.
[Indexed.]

Borrowing Authority of the Commodity Credit Corpor-
ation : Hearings before the Committee on Agriculture and
Forestry, Uiuted States Senate, Slst Cong., 2d sess., on
S. 2826, a bill to increase the borrowing power of Com-
modity Credit Corporation. January 24, 25, February 13,
14, 15, 16, 17, March 15, 16, 17, and 21, 1950. vi, 397 pp.
(Department of State pp. 36S-378.)

Authority to Exercise Import Controls on Fats and Oils
and Rice and Rice Products. S. Rept. 1538, Slst Cong.,
2d sess. [To accompany S. 3550] 4 pp.

Permitting Free Entry of Articles Imported from For-

276

Department of State Bulletin

eisn Countries for the Purpose of Exliibitiou at the First
United States International Trade Fair, Inc., Chicago,
111. S. Itept. 1541, Slst Cons., 2a sess. [To accompany
H. J. Res. 4601 2 pp.

Reorganization Plan Nc. 20 of r.).")0. Transferring of
Functions from the Secretar.v of State and the Depart-
ment of State to the Administrator of General Services.
S. Rept. I'mO, Slst Cong., 2d sess., 6 pp.

Authorizing Contributions to Cooperative for American
Remittances to Europe, Inc. S. Rept. 1553, Slst Cong., 2d
sess. [To accompan.v S. 2496] 5 pp.

Treaty with Canada Concerning Uses of the Waters of
the Niagara River. Message from tlie President of the
United States transmitting the treaty . . . signed at
Washington, February 27, 1950. S. Ex. N, Slst Cong., 2d
sess. 8 pp.

Convention on Road Traffic Dated September 19, 1949,
and Signed on Belialf of the United States of America
and 20 Other Countries. Message from the President of
tlie United States transmitting a convention on road traffic,
which was oiien for signature from September 19 until
December 31, 1949, and during that period was signed on
behalf of the United States of America and 20 other
states, with a related protocol, concerning occupied coun-
tries or territories, which was open for signature at the
same time as the convention. S. Ex. O, Slst Cong., 2d
sess. 54 pp.

Granting of Permanent Residence to Certain Aliens.
H. Rept. 1973, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany H. Con.
Res. 1S7] 2 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.
1999, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res.
65] 3 pp.

Amending the Hatch Act. H. Rept. 2004, Slst Cong.,
2d sess. [To accompany H. R. 1243] 5 pp.

Permitting Free Entry of Articles Imported from For-
eign Countries for the Purpose of Exhibition at the First
United States International Trade Fair, Inc., Chicago,
111. H. Rept. 2016, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany
H. J. Res. 466] 2 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.
2020, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res.
78] 2 pp.

Giving Military Status and Granting Discharges to the
Members of the Russian Railway Service Corps Organized
by the War Department Under Authority of the President
of the United States for Service During the War with
Germany. H. Rept. 2033, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany H. R. 6277] 4 pp.

Providing for Expenses of Conducting Studies and In-
vestigations Authorized by Rule XI (1) (H) Incurred by
the Committee on Expenditures in the Executive Depart-
ments. H. Rept. 2049, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany H. Res. 524] 1 p.

Report on Audit of Export-Import Bank of Washington,
1949. Letter from Comptroller General of the United
States transmitting a report ... H. Doc. 548, Slst Cong.,
2d sess. V, 26 pp.

The Immigration and Naturalization Systems of the
United States. Report of the Committee on the Judiciary
pursuant to S. Res. 137 (80th Cong., 1st sess., as amended),
a resolution to make an investigation of the immigration
system. S. Rept. 1515, Slst Cong., 2d sess. xviii. 925 pp.,
xxvi, [Indexed.]

Seventh Report to Congress of the Economic Coopera-
tion Administration, for the Quarter Ended December 31,
1949. H. Doc. 571. Slst Cong., 2d sess. 158 pp.

Report of War Claims Commission. Message from the
President transmitting the report of the War Claims
Commission with respect to war claims arising out of
World War II, pursuant to the War Claims Act of 1948
(Public Law 896, 80th Cong), as amended. H. Doc. 580,
Slst Cong., 2d sess. 95 pp.

United States Participation in the United Nations.
Message from the President transmitting the fourth an-
nual report on the activities of the United Nations and
the participation of the United States. H. Doc. 598, Slst
Cong., 2d sess. 242 pp.

nrst Semiannual Report on the Mutual Defense Assist-
ance Program. Message from the President transmitting
the first semiannual report on the Mutual Defense Assist-
ance Program, covering the period from the inception of
the program to April 6, 1950. H. Doc. 613, Slst Cong.,
2d sess. 74 pp.

Recommendation That the United States Continue to
Provide Military Aid to Other Free Nations. Message
from tlie President transmitting a recommendation that
the United States continue to provide military aid to
other free nations during the fiscal year 1951. H. Rept.
616, Slst Cong., 2d sess. 5 pp.

Petroleum Study : Petroleum Imports. Progress report
of the Committee on Interstate and Foreign Commerce
pursuant to section 136 of the Legislative Reorganization
Act of 1946, Public Law 601, 79th Cong., and House
Res. 107, Slst Cong. H. Rept. 2055, Slst Cong., 2d
sess. 24 pp.

Foreign Economic Assistance Act of 1950. Confer-
ence report. H. R. 2117, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany H. R. 7797] 83 pp.

Free Importation of Musical Instruments by Religious
or Charitalile Institutions Manufacturing Such Instru-
ments in Foreign Countries. H. Rept. 2159, Slst Cong., 2d
sess. [To accompany H. R. 3934] 2 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.
12167, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res. 73]
2 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.

2168, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res.
75] 2 pp.

Susijension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.

2169, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res.
76] 2 pp.

Amending the Displaced Persons Act of 1948. H. Rept.
2187, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany H. R. 4567]
16 pp.

Providing for the Enlistment of Aliens in the Regular
Armv. H. Rept. 2188, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany S. 2269] 6 pp.

Sheep-Raising Industry. H. Rept. 2268, Slst Cong.,
2d sess. [To accompany S. 1165] 3 pp.

Borrowing Power of Commodity Credit Corporation.
H. Rept. 2269, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany H. R.
6.567] 5 pp.

Continuing for a Temporary Period Import Control
Authority With Respect to Fats and Oils, and Rice and
Rice Products. H. Rept. 2272, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To
accompany H. R. 8737] 3 pp.

Protocol Prolonging the International Agreement Re-
garding the Regulation of Production and Marketing of
Sugar. S. Ex. Rept. 1, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany Ex. G, Slst Cong., 2d sess.] 2 pp.

Protocol Bringing Under International Control Drugs
Outside the Scope of the Convention of July 13, 1931, as
Amended. S. Ex. Rept. 2, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To ac-
company Ex. H, Slst Cong., 1st sess.] 4 ijp.

Protocol Amending the Agreement for the Suppression
of the Circulation of Ob.scene Publications. S. Ex. Rept.
3, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany Ex. C, Slst Cong.,
2d sess.] 2 pp.

Protocol Amending the International Agreement for the
Suppression of the White Slave Traffic. S. Ex. Rept. 4,
Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany Ex. B, Slst Cong., 2d
ses.s.] 2 pp.

Treaty of Friendship, Commerce, and Economic De-
velopment With the Oriental Republic of Uruguay. S.
Ex. Rept. 5, Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany Ex. D,
Slst Cong., 2d sess.] 7 pp.

Convention With Canada for the Extension of Port
Privileges to Halibut Fishing Vessels. S. Ex. Rept. 6,
Slst Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany Ex. M, Slst Cong., 2d
sess.] 3 pp.

Consular Convention With Ireland. Message from the
President of the United States transmitting a con.sular
convention between the United States and Ireland, signed
at Dublin on May 1, 1950. S. Ex. P, Slst Cong., 2d sess.
23 pp.

August 14, 1950

277

Foreign Economic Assistance Act of 1950. Conference
report on the bill (H. R. 7797) to provide foreign economic
assistance. S. Doc. 168, 81st Cong., 2d sess. 14 pp.

Estimate of Appropriation — International Development.
Communication from the President of the United States
transmitting an estimate of appropriation, in the amount
of $26,900,000, to provide for an expanded program for as-
sistance to economically underdeveloped areas, fiscal year
1951, in the form of an amendment to tlie budget. S. Doc.
171, 81st Cong., 2d sess. 3 pp.

Supplemental Estimate of Appropriation — Interna-
tional Children's Welfare Work. Communication from
the President of the United States transmitting a supple-
mental estimate of appropriation, in the amount of
$15,000,000, for the International Children's Welfare
Work, fiscal year 1951, in the form of an amendment to
the budget. S. Doc. 172, 81st Cong., 2d sess. 2 pp.

Supplemental Estimate of Appropriation — Department
of State. Communication from the President of the
United States transmitting a supplemental estimate of
appropriation, in the amount of $27,4.50,000, for the De-
partment of State, fiscal year 1951, in the form of an
amendment to the budget. S. Doc. 173, 81st Cong., 2d
sess. 2 pp.

Displaced Persons Act of 1948. Conference report on
the bill (H. R. 4507) to amend the Displaced Persons Act
of 1948. S. Doc. 179, 81st Cong., 2d sess. 16 pp.

Amending Title 28, United States Code. S. Kept. 1568,
81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. 638] 6 pp.

Authorizing the Admission into the United States of
Certain Aliens Possessing Special Skills, Namely, Teodor
Egle, Karlis Fogelis, Vasily Kils, and Aleksanders Zel-
menis. S. Kept. 1636, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accom-
pany H. R. 4604] 4 pp.

The United States in the United Nations

[August 5-11]

Security Council

In its meetings on August 4, 8, and 10, the Se-
curity Council was largely concerned with a long
procedural debate over the question of seating the
representative of the Republic of Korea. Ambas-
sador Yakov A. Malik (U.S.S.R.) as President of
the Council has continued to refuse to rule on a
point of order raised by the Chinese representa-
tive, and supported by the United States, the
United Kingdom, France, and others. These dele-
gations have maintained that in accordance with
the July 25 decision of the Council the representa-
tive of the Republic of Korea is entitled to continue
to participate in the Council discussion of the
Korean crisis and that it is the Council President's
duty to seat him. Ambassador Malik has main-
tained that representatives of both the South
Korean and North Korean regimes should be in-
vited.

At the opening of the meeting on August 4,
Ambassador Malik introduced a resolution where-
by the Security Council would decide: (a) "in the
course of the discussion of the Korean question,
to invite the representative of the People's Re-
public of China and also to hear representatives
of the Korean people"; and (b) "to put an end to
the hostilities in Korea and at the same time to
withdraw foreign troops from Korea." Another
Soviet proposal presented on August 8 asked the
Council to recognize that United States bombing
of Korean towns and villages was a "gross viola-
tion of the universally accepted rules of interna-
tional law." The Council was asked to call upon
the United States to cease the bombing of towns
and populated areas and "also the shooting up
from the air of the peaceful population in Korea" ;
and to instruct the Secretary-General to call the
decision of the Council immediately to the atten-
tion of the United States.

In the course of the meetings, Ambassador War-
ren R. Austin (U.S.) gave a detailed statement of
the United States position on responsibility for
the Korean war and answered a number of charges
made by Ambassador Malik.^ He commended as
an effort to promote a truly peaceful settlement of
the Korean question the United States resolution
which asks the Security Council to condemn the
North Korean authorities "for their continued de-
fiance of the United Nations" and to call upon
all states "to use their influence to prevail upon
the authorities of North Korea to cease this
defiance." The resolution also calls on all states
to refrain from assisting or encouraging the
North Korean authorities and "to refrain from ac-
tion which might lead to the spread of the Korean
conflict to other areas . . ." Ambassador Malik,
on the other hand, made several lengthy statements
in which he accused the United States of being the
only aggressor in Korea.

Economic and Social Council

The 11th session of the Economic and Social
Council during its sixth week in Geneva completed
action on the reports of the Commission on Hu-
man Rights, the Subcommission on Freedom of In-
formation, Unesco, the Economic Commissions for
Latin American and for Asia and the Far East,
and the International Telecommunication Union.
These reports had been considered earlier by vari-
ous committees which had made recommendations
and resolutions with regard to them. The Council
also adopted a number of proposals concerning
relations with and coordination of specialized
agencies. In addition, it called the attention of
governments to the Secretary-General's report on
insecticides and urged them to adopt measures for

' In this issue and following issues of the Bulletin will
be printed U.S. statements on this important debate.

278

Department of State Bulletin

increasing the supply and utilization of insecti-
cides in the control of malaria.

The Council decieied to transmit the draft In-
ternational Covenant on Human Rights to the
General Assembly with a recommendation that it
reach a decision on certain policy issues. These
issues involved the general adequacy of the first
IS articles and of the articles relating to imple-
mentation of the Covenant; and the desirability
of including special articles on (1) the applica-
tion of the Covenant to Federal States and to non-
self-governing and trust territories, and (2) on
economic, social, and cultural rights. The Council
recommended that the draft Covenant subse-
quently be returned to the Commission on Human
Rights for revision in the light of the directives
from the Assembly and requested that the Council
resolution be transmitted to member states for
comment. The United States representative ab-
stained on the resolution regarding future action
on the Covenant in view of the preference that the
Covenant be completed this year.

With regard to a draft Convention on Freedom
of Information, also dealt with in the report of
the Commission on Human Rights, the Council
rejected a resolution recommending that the Gen-
eral Assembly proceed with elaboration of that
document. The United States representative ex-
plained that he considered the resolution both
unnecessary and undesirable. The Convention
would be before the General Assembly in any
event, he explained, and such a recommendation
by the Council would appear to prejudge the
decision to be taken by the Assembly.

Other of the Council's recommendations in con-
nection with the report of the Commission on
Human Rights involved a request to Unesco
to emphasize educational activities designed to
eliminate discrimination and prejudice, and a re-
quest that member governments be invited to
furnish information on legislation and other
action found useful in preventing discrimination
and protecting minorities.

In completing action on the report of the Sub-
commission on Freedom of Information and the
Press, the Council approved a number of recom-
mendations relating to freedom of information,
one of which involved transmitting to the General
Assembly a resolution condemning the jamming
of foreign broadcasts and asking the Assembly to
call on all member governments to refrain from
such interference with freedom of information.
Although the United States representative voted
for the resolution, he said that his delegation still
held the view expressed earlier in the Social Com-
mittee that the specific reference to the Soviet
Union in connection with interference with radio
broadcasts should not have been deleted from the
resolution. With regard to the draft code of
ethics for journalists, which had been considered
by the Subcommission, the Council approved a
recommendation that the Secretary General trans-

mit the code for comment to information enter-
prises and professional associations and submit an
analysis of the comments to the Subcommission
for use in its reexamination of the draft code at
its next session. Among other recommendations
approved was one that member states, when com-
pelled to declare a state of emergency, should not
impose measures to limit freedom of information
beyond those required by the situation.

With regard to the report of the Economic Com-
mission for Latin America, the Council noted
"with a]5])roval" the Commission's proposal for a
study of ways and means to expand trade between
Latin American and Europe and recommend the
allocation of funds necessary to implement the
decisions of the last session of the Commission.
The United States representative abstained in the
vote on this resolution, explaining that the United
States could not accept all the conclusions in the
Economic Survey of Latin America nor agree with
some of the recommendations of the Commission
with regard to economic development.

In approving the report of the Economic Com-
mission for Asia and the Far East, the Council
noted in particular the work program outlined in
the report and recommended the allocation of
funds necessary to execute it. The United States
representative was among those who expressed
satisfaction with the improvement of the Commis-
sion's work. He also stressed the need for eco-
nomic and social advancement in Asia and said
that he thought the Commission's success rested
on its ability to isolate specific problems and con-
centrate on them.

After reviewing the report of the International
Telecomrnunication Union, the Council asked that
organization in its next annual report to include
a general review of its work during the year and
an account of its relations with other international
organizations and of measures taken under its
agreement of relationship with the United Nations.
This resolution was originally proposed in the
Council's Coordination Committee by the United
States representative who felt that the Union's
report before the Council was inadequate.

Commission for Conventional Armaments

At its meeting on August 9, the Commission for
Conventional Armaments decided to transmit the
report of its Working Committee, for the period
of May 18-August 9, to the Security Council, with
a covering letter which will serve as the Commis-
sion's own report. The chairman of the commit-
tee described the committee's work, during this
period, on the question of safeguards as "only the
first step" toward the ultimate goal of an effective
system of regulation and control of conventional
armaments. In commending the contributions of
certain members to the committee's work, the
chairman expressed appreciation for the four
United States working papers.

August 14, 1950

279

^€m£en^

General Policy Page

Discussion of Korean Case in Security Coun-
cil. Statements by Ambassador Warren
R. Austin:
Complaint of Aggression Upon the Republic

of Korea 243

Relief and Rehabilitation in Korea. . . . 243
Debate on U.S. Resolution Urged .... 245
Nations Offer Ground Forces for Use in
Korea. Excerpts From Statement by
Ambassador Warren R. Austin .... 246
U.S. Hospital Ships Designated for Use in

Korea 248

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Discussion of Korean Case in Security Coun-
cil. Statements by Ambassador Warren
R. Austin:
Complaint of Aggression Upon the Repub-
lic of Korea 243

Relief and Rehabilitation in Korea. . . . 243
Debate on U.S. Resolution Urged .... 245

Nations Offer Ground Forces for Use in
Korea. Excerpts From Statement by
Ambassador Warren R. Austin .... 246

U.S. Hospital Ships Designated for Use in

Korea 248

U.N. Conference on Declaration of Death of

Missing Persons. By John Maktos . . 264

Ilo Preliminary Conference on Migration.

By Irwin M. Tobin 270

Willard L. Thorp Re-signs From Ecosoc . . . 274

The United States in the United Nations . . 278

Economic Affairs

The European Customs Union Study Group.

By Howard J. Hilton, Jr 251

Reparations Plant for Producing Aluminum

Offered U.S. Industry 263

Treaty Information

Thailand Signs Fulbright Agreement .... 274

International information and page

Cultural Affairs

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S 255, 274

Americans Visiting Abroad 274

Occupation Matters

Information Requested on Japanese Held in
Soviet Territory. Statement by William
J. Sebald 256

U.S. Member of Ruhr Authority 257

Technical Assistance

The Point 4 Program — Plan for World-Wide
Good Neighborliness. By Capus M.
Waynick 258

The Problem of Underdeveloped Areas. By

Donald D. Kennedy 261

international Organizations
and Conferences

U.N. Conference on Declaration of Death of

Missing Persons. By John Maktos . . 264

Ilo Preliminary Conference on Migration.

By Irwin M. Tobin 270

The Congress

Additional Funds for Military Assistance

Requested 247

Immediate and Urgent Need To Step Up
Defenses — Additional Funds Asked for
Mutual Defense Assistance Program.
Statement by Secretary Acheson. . . . 249

The President Sends Midyear Economic
Report to the Congress. Excerpt From
the President's Message 260

Legislation 275

The Department

Interdepartmental Standards Council Estab-
lished 274

Publications

Recent Releases 275

vtpmiitc/yA

Hoivard J. Hilton, Jr., author of the article on the European Cus-
toms Union Study Group, is International Relations Officer, Office of
Western European Affairs.

John Maktos, author of the report on the United Nations conference
on the declaration of death of missing persons, is assistant legal
adviser for International Organization Affairs. Mr. Maktos served
as United States representative at the conference.

Irwin M. Tobin, author of the article on the Ilo migration confer-
ence is labor adviser in the Bureau of European Affairs, and served
as an adviser on the United States delegation to the conference.

tJ/i€/ ^eha/y^tmeni/ xw tnaie^

DISCUSSION OF KOREAN CASE IN THE SECURITY
COUNCIL:
Statements by Ambassador Warren R. Austin .... 283
Statement by Secretary Acheson 286

UNITED STATES EXPRESSES VIEWS IN ECOSOC ON

FULL EMPLOYMENT • By Isador Lubin 307

THIRD REPORT ON THE ACTIVITIES OF THE FAR

EASTERN COMMISSION 288

PRESERVING OUR BASIC LIBERTIES AND PRO-
TECTING THE INTERNAL SECURITY OF THE
UNITED STATES • Message of the President to the
Congress 294

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 581
August 21, 1950

.o'*^'' "»

Me Qje/icvyi^&ni x^/ yta(e JOUllGllD.

U. S. SUPERINTfNDfNT OF DOCUMENTS

AUti KXi950

For sale by the Supermtendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.O.

Price:

62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.60

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has

been approved by the Director of the

Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1949).

fiote: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

Vol. XXIII, No. 581 • Publication 3940
August 21, 1950

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a tceekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

Discussion of Korean Case in the Security Council

DEBATE ON ADOPTION OF AGENDA

Statements hy Ambassador Warren R. Austin
V.S. Representative in the Security Gowncil

On August 2, Ambassador Austin made the following
statement before the Security Council which was released
to the press by the United States Mission to the United
Nations on the same date.

The United States of America has proposed that
the item following "Adoption of the agenda"
should be "Complaint of aggression upon the Re-
public of Korea." I have put this motion in writ-
ing. It is on the table in front of everyone here.
There were several reasons for putting this motion
in writing in addition to the oral motion which I
made previously. One reason was in order to make
perfectly clear exactly what the motion is; that is,
an amendment proposed to the provisional agenda.
The reason why I want to make that clear is in
order to have a ruling under rule 33 of our pro-
visional rules of procedure, if it becomes necessary
to have a ruling. That rule says :

The following motions shall have precedence in the
order named over all principal motions and draft resolu-
tions relative to the subject before the meeting:

After naming five different motions, we come
to no. 6, "to introduce an amendment."

Another reason why this was put into writing
was to make it perfectly clear that it cannot be
confused with the items on the provisional agenda
which are now numbered 2 and 3. It is distinct
and separate from those items. These items, of
course, cannot be voted upon first because the pro-
visional agenda has not been adopted. The pro-
visional agenda cannot be adopted until we have
disposed of the proposed amendment.

In the argument presented by the representative
of the Soviet Union at the beginning of the meet-
ing this afternoon, he made some references to the
filing and to the question of which was submitted
to the Council first, whether it was the provisional
agenda before us or this motion to amend. I want
to call the Council's attention to the fact that ever
since the 25th day of June, and until the 31st day of
July, which was the last meeting before the repre-
sentative of the Soviet Union returned to the
Security Council, the agenda has been the same.

Item 1 was "Adoption of agenda." That is the
same as the proposal here. However, item 2 differs.
Throughout all those meetings, item 2 has been
"Complaint of aggression upon the Republic of
Korea." When business is being transacted by the
Security Council under an item such as that and it
does not proceed to its conclusion, what happens?
Does the passing of 31 days stop consideration of
that item? Does that change the business of the
Security Council ? Rule 10 provides that any item
of the agenda of a meeting of the Security Council,

Consideration of which has not been completed at that
meeting, shall, unless the Security Council otherwise de-
cides, automatically be included in the agenda of the
next meeting.

This is mandatory. The rule says "shall." Le-
galistically speaking, and I do not want to lean
on this too much, as I said in the beginning, this is
an item of the agenda even though it does not ap-
pear in the agenda. To make sure that it shall be
there in writing, so that everyone will understand
it and the record will be kept straight, and that it
will be the item following the first item, which is
entitled "Adoption of agenda," the United States
filed this motion. It was filed before the proposal
for the agenda which was submitted by the repre-
sentative of the Soviet Union. I shall make no
point of the rule which provides for the making
of the provisional agenda in a different way. Suf-
fice it to say that the business before this Council
at this moment is the question of whether the
Council will or will not amend that provisional
agenda. There is no option here to vote upon two
or more other items ; there is just one item to which
the Council can legally devote its attention at this
moment, and that is a procedural item.

In view of some of the remarks made here, I wish
to make a brief statement. The act of aggression
against the Republic of Korea is the most urgent
business before the Security Council. Under this
agenda item, every member of the Council is com-
pletely free to make proposals leading toward the
termination of the breach of peace. Observe the
language. It reads "Complaint of aggression
upon the Republic of Korea." If any representa-
tive has proposals to make or resolutions to sub-
mit regarding the breach of peace in Korea, they

August 27, 7950

283

can be made witliin the framework of the agenda
item which has been before this Council for the
last 5 weeks and which is legally before it now
automatically. If there are proposals to be made,
refusal to present them within the Council's regu-
lar agenda inevitably will cast doubt on their sin-
cerity.

As I stated yesterday, the United States cannot
agree that the question of Chinese representation
can take precedence over the fact of armed aggres-
sion. Nor can the United States agree that the
termination of aggression be made contingent on
other issues. So long as men are dying on the
battlefield in defense of the United Nations, this
Council will not wish to cheapen their suffering or
sully their heroism by seeming to engage in the
consideration of deals.

The Council may wish to consider other issues
now or at later meetings. But, first, the Council
should consider the issue that is legally before it.
Not only on these formal grounds do I take this
position, but I feel that it is clear that today's meet-
ing should proceed forthwith to consider the
"Complaint of aggression upon the Republic of
Korea," the substance of the matter. Only one
resolution is before you at the present time, and
that should be taken up and disposed of. If there
are any other proposals to be made that will gen-
uinely promote peace and security in the area of
conflict, the whole spirit of humanity demands
that they be made without further delay.

On August S, Ambassador A^istin made the -following
statement before the Security Council which was released
to the press by the United States Mission to the United
Nations on the same date.

I am in sympathy with the purpose of the sug-
gestion made by the representative of Egypt.^
I would certainly have remained silent had there
not occurred here an event which is entirely im-
proper and which is so virulent and startling in its
substance, as well as in its use in violation of all
the rules that govern the Security Council and in
the derogation of the rights of other members of
this Council. I would have remained silent, but I
cannot remain silent in the face of a repetition of
those ancient charges to which we have listened
for a period of years from the Soviet Union. Per-
haps I might have accepted the statements as
merely evidence of a certain type of peculiar
character and given no attention to the matter of
answering the statements if it were not for the fact
that this statement does something else. This
statement has a new kind of attack in it ; this state-
ment contains a new slander; this statement ex-
presses a new threat and a new provocation. This
is a statement against the United Nations and all of

' The representative of Egypt, Mahaud Fazi Bey, had
suggested the debate on the agenda be closed and that the
members proceed to the vote.

the great moral principles for which it stands, and
we cannot sit by here in silence and allow it to go
unanswered. I have asked for the privilege of
making a very brief statement at the earliest time
that I could because other names were on the list
of speakers before that statement had been made.

A poor people is suffering irreparable damage
and loss at this moment. That great, ancient
people is also suffering damage that is reparable,
but it will take years to recover from the devasta-
tion of this demon that has been turned loose on
that peninsula. Not only are we interested in the
preservation of those people but we are there
because we are interested in the great principles
of the United Nations. We are interested in the
security and freedom of individual nations, no
matter how weak they may be. We are especially
interested in Korea because it is a product of the
principles of the United Nations as expressed by
all these nations which are members of this great
voluntary association, excepting that member
which makes the charge we had to listen to today
and which was not a matter that was admissible
upon the point in order — and that is the agenda,
whether a certain item will be added to the agenda
next after the first item entitled "Adoption of the
agenda."

While the sons of members of this organization
are over there under the flags of their own nation-
alities and countries and fighting also under the
blue and white banner of the United Nations and
while we in the Security Council have introduced
a resolution that would aid and help them to bring
to an end the devastation that is going on there,
what do we have interrupting this procedure: a
speech by the president ^ who makes use of his
office to talk about a matter that is not in point and
is oTit of order.

Since the Soviet Union representative takes
issue primarily with the position of the United
States of America, I suppose he expects that I
should speak to the charges he has raised about
the United States of America. I have too high a
regard and too great a deference for your own
great interest in getting to the point here to enter
upon that debate at this time. I am in utter
sympathy with the suggestion made by the repre-
sentative of Egypt that we get to a vote.

I am not going to try to prove at this time that
the Republic of Korea was not the aggressor ; that
it did not attack the forces of North Korea; that
the United States is not really the influence that
unleashed the Korean war; that there is a United
Nations command in Korea ; that we are trying to
back and support in the United Nations ; and that
53 members of the United Nations are interested
in supporting our flag over there. We are tired,
and I think the whole world is tired, of these obvi-
ous and shameless travesties of the realities with
which we in this room are supposed to deal.

' Yakov A. Malik, U.S.S.R. representative in the Security
Council.

284

Department of State Bulletin

Surely, the time for tliat sort of thing has passed,
and the matters we are dealing with today are too
tragic and too real to be served by any preoccupa-
tion with propagandistic distortions which were
properly referred to here yesterday as "upside-
down language." In any case, my Government
sees no need and feels no desire to attempt today to
fill witli any more words of its own the immense
abyss wiiich lies between the statements of the rep-
resentative of the Soviet Union Government and
the facts of this situation as they are known the
world over and as they were reported by a United
Nations Commission. We doubt if the represent-
ative of the Soviet Union genuinely desires an
examination by this Council of the question of
whose design and whose command brought about
the unleashing of this new wave of tragedy and
bloodshed which has overtaken the international
community. Inad\ ertently, he might expose the
villain. His propaganda statement, like many
othei-s that we have heard in the past, rests on a
total and unabashed perversion of facts. This has
been attested to by the United Nations Commis-
sion on the spot and the voluntary support given
to the action of the Council by 53 member states.
Now, let us have regard for the truth and a proper
use of the freedom of debate and of the exercise of
the vote in an organization that is supposed to be
democratic. Let us have regard for all the other
members of the Security Council who wish to ad-
vance to the transaction of our business and have
this motion presented for a vote. We do not stand
on informality here. The motion that is before
this Council is as follows :

A motion by the United States representative
that the item following "Adoption of the Agenda"
in the agenda of this meeting should be "Com-
plaint of aggression upon the Republic of Korea."

If that motion is put and carried, then this item
"Complaint of aggression upon the Republic of
Korea" will be the item that will follow the words
"Adoption of Agenda." ^

^ The provisional agenda as proposed by the president of
the Security Council, Yakov A. Malik, on Aug. 1, was as
follows: (1) adoption of the agenda; (2) recognition of
the representative of the Central People's Government of
the People's Republic of China; and (3) peaceful settle-
ment of the Korean question.

The U.S. proposal that the item following "Adoption of
the agenda" should be "Complaint of aggression upon the
Republic of Korea" was adopted by the Security Council
on Aug. 3 by the following vote : 8 in favor (China, Cuba,
Ecuador, Egypt, France, Norway, U.K., and U.S.) ; 1
opposed (U.S.S.R.) ; and 2 abstained (India, Yugoslavia).

Item 2 as originally proposed was defeated on Aug. 3 by
the following vote: 5 in favor (India, Norway, U.S.S.R.,
U. K., and Yugoslavia) ; 5 opposed (China, Cuba, Ecuador,
France, and U.S.) ; and 1 abstained (Egypt).

Item 3 as originally proposed was defeated on Aug. 3 by
the following vote: 3 in favor (Egypt, India, and
U.S.S.R.) ; 7 opposed (China, Cuba, Ecuador, France, Nor-
way, U.K., and U.S.) ; and 1 abstained (Yugoslavia.)

PROTEST AGAINST PRESIDENT MALIK'S
OBSTRUCTION OF PROCEDURE

On August 8, Ambassador Austin made the following
statement before the Security Council which ivas released
to the press by the United States Mission, to the United
Nations on the same date.

It is desirable, is it not, to pass at the earliest
time a resolution of the Security Council which
has a practical chance of assisting toward peace
and in the meantime of confining the war to the
area of Korea. Is it not true that that is the great
objective before us ? All of this maneuvering, cun-
ning, and device by which the president hinders
and obstructs procedure in the Security Council
does not tend toward peace, does not tend toward
limiting the area of combat.

It is not edifying to the Security Council for
the representative of the Soviet Union to use his
position as president of the Security Coimcil to
make these charges here, that the United States
of America is the aggressor, that the Southern
Koreans provoked the North Koreans by invading
North Korea, and doing this on the time of the
Security Council and on the time of those poor
boys over there who are under fire while we monkey
and twist the rules and the Charter of the United
Nations solely for the purpose of preventing prog-
ress toward peace and toward the consideration
of a resolution first on the table that has a tendency
at least to narrow the area of conflict and to clarify
the picture before the world.

When the president, as such, or as the represent-
ative of the Soviet Union — it makes no difference
which hat he wears while he is doing it — but, when
he undertakes to persuade this great audience here
present and in all the world outsidej that the
United States of America is an aggressor in Korea,
I would like to ask :

Whose troops are attacking deep in the country
of somebody else? The North Koreans.

Whose country is being overrun by an invading
army ? The Republic of Korea.

Who is assisting the Republic of Korea to de-
fend itself ? The United Nations, with the support
of 53 out of 59 members.

Who has the influence and the power to call oflf
the invading Northern Korean Army? The So-
viet Union.

Who then is supporting the United Nations
Charter and working for peace? The 53 members
of the United Nations who are assisting the Re-
public of Korea.

Is the Soviet Union one of the 53 ? No.

What member of this Security Council is assist-
ing in the Security Council the invaders? The
Soviet Union.

Now, all these performances that have occurred
here creating a very bad impression, I am sure,
upon all peace-loving nations, just delay the day

August 27, 1950

285

of consideration of a resolution before us that has
a sincere goal of peace and of assistance to those
who are trying out the peace-making functions of
the United Nations. We are now struggling for
a week in a procedural quagmire. It must be
apparent to all of us and to the world that the
Soviet representative, who under our rules of pro-
cedure is acting as president of the Security Coun-
cil this month, will not abide by our rules of
procedure or by the expressed will of this Council.

The record shows that he has made every effort
to stop our work and keep us from our business.
If his campaign of obstruction goes on, it can lead
to only one consequence. The Security Council
will be stalled on dead center for the remainder
of this month unable to discharge its responsi-
bility under the Charter of keeping the peace.
This is the challenge we must meet.

I am reluctant to conclude that the Soviet Gov-
ernment intends to achieve this result.

I, therefore, suggest that we adjourn to a day
certain, that is, on 3 o'clock Thursday, in order to
allow the Soviet delegation to communicate with
Moscow and obtain instructions from their Gov-
ernment, instructions which will enable the Se-
curity Council to function and instructions that
will enable their representative to make his ruling
which he has declared time after time that he is
not in a condition to make.

During this interval, I suggest that we other
delegations consult together to determine what
steps we will take to assert the authority of the
Security Council in the event that the Soviet Gov-
ernment continues its campaign to prevent its
president from acting.

Mr. President, I definitely move that we adjourn
until 3 p.m., Thursday, August 10.

SOVIET TACTICS AIM TO THWART
U.N. EFFORTS TO RESTORE PEACE

Statements hy Secretary Apheson
[Released to the press August ll'\

The tactics adopted by the Soviet representative
presiding over the Security Council have hamp-
ered Council discussion of the one item at present
before it for consideration ; namely, the complaint
of aggression upon the Republic of Korea. His
obstruction of the Security Council's business has
carried him so far as a point-blank refusal to rule
on a point of order — that is, to function as presi-
dent— where if he had ruled, and thus presided,
business might have proceeded.

By disregard of the duties of his office, by dila-
tory tactics, and by reiterated reversals of the
truth, the Soviet reiDresentative has obstructed but
not prevented presentation of the facts.

These facts are that the Security Council itself
has by a large majority determined the existence
and nature of the aggression and that the United
Nations has been taking effective, unified action
to repel it and to restore peace; furthermore, that
United Nations forces are fighting for a principle,
the principle that aggression cannot and will not
be tolerated.

On the other hand, the U.S.S.R. has taken no
step to induce the puppet regime in North Korea
to cease hostilities and restore peace. It has clearly
shown, in demanding the withdrawal of United
Nations forces from Korea, that the settlement it
desires in Korea is abject submission to Communist
control.

In view of this situation, the questions Ambas-
sador Austin posed on August 8 before the Security
Council cannot be too frequently insisted upon.
We must ask again :

Whose troops are attacking deep in someone else's
country? Tiie North Kore.ans.

What country is overrun by an invading army which,
as is certified by a United Nations Commission, attacked
without provocation? The Republic of Korea.

Who is assisting the Republic of Korea to defend itself?
The United Nations, with the support of 53 of its 59
members.

Who has the influence and power to call off the North
Koreans? The Soviet Union.

Is the Soviet Union 1 of the 53 members of the United
Nations who are supporting the United Nations Charter
and working for peace? No !

In the light of these questions, and the answers
which they inevitably evoke, the tactics of the So-
viet representative as President of the Security
Council are easy to understand. They are in-
tended to thwart the United Nations effort to
restore peace and security.

After what I have just felt it necessary to say,
(the tactics of the Soviet representative in the
Security Council) I turn with pleasure to speak of
the performance of duty to the United Nations of
a very different order.

As the battle in Korea goes on, I know that hun-
dreds of millions of men and women in the free
nations of the world look with gratitude and pride
to the United Nations forces in Korea and to their
gallant and inspiring leader. General MacArthur.
Upon this force are pinned the hopes of all of us
that the solemn obligations undertaken by all who
ratified the Charter of the United Nations to main-
tain peace and security and the freedom of all
peoples from aggression may become a living
reality.

The debt of all of us to these brave men and their
great leader can never be paid, but earnest of
payment can be made by the most complete and
unwavering support.

They carry with them our hopes and aspirations
for peace. We share with General MacArthur his
confidence in the outcome.

286

Department of State Bulletin

Assistant Secretary Hickerson
Explains U.S. Aims in Korea
to American Women for Peace

[Released to the press August S]

A delegation of the American Women for Peace
today called at the Department of State and
were received by Assistant Secretary John D.
Hickerson.

The delegation advocated the abandonment of
the use of the atomic and hydrogen bombs as
weapons of war and the effectuation of an imme-
diate settlement of the Korean war.

After hearing the views of the delegation, Mr.
Hickerson made the following response :

The United States is for peace. American soldiers and
their United Nations comrades-in-arms are dying in Korea
for peace and for the right of all peoples to live in freedom
and without fear of aggression. The free world has
finall.v learned that nonviolence does not preserve freedom
in the face of aggression and that the alternative is
slavery.

The peaceful people of the Republic of Korea, which was
established under United Nations auspices, have been
savagely attacked without warning and without a shred
of justification, and the United Nations, pledged to main-
tain peace, has responded with unity and vigor to this
breach of the peace. The United Nations efforts in tlie
past to maintain the peace without resort to force have
been blocked by only one country and its satellites. In
this connection, it is worth remembering that there would
probably not be an atomic weapon in existence today if
the U.S.S.R., and the U.S.S.R. alone, had not refused to
accept the control plan adopted by an overwhelming ma-
jority of the members of the United Nations.

The Security Council has set the conditions under which
the bloodshed in Korea can be stopped. The Security
Council has been defied by the North Korean aggressors.
The 53 nations who stand behind the Security Council's
action are still waiting for the North Korean aggressors,
and for those who control their destiny, to comply with
the Security Council's order. Until they do, the United
Nations has no other course but to put down tliis aggres-
sion with all the determination and power at its command.
The United States supports the United Nations in its firm
stand for peace and freedom.

North Koreans Delay Actions
in Reporting to Red Cross

U.N. doc. S/1676
Sent August 8

Commission today unanimously adopted follow-
ing message to Secretary-General :

Request that you bring following to notice of the Security
Council :

(1) Since notification received by Secretary-General
from North Korean authorities of their intention adhere
provisions of Red Cross convention on treatment of prison-
ers of war nothing further heard here of measures taken
by them to give effect to this assurance.

(2) Reports continue to circulate that uncivilized and
unhuman practices extend by North Koreans to wounded
and others. United Nations CommLssiou on Korea has
instructed its military observers to check upon these
reports as far as possible and to establish authenticity

and facts which can be brought to notice of the Interna-
tional Red Cross and others concerned.

(3) South Korean authorities have given practical
demonstration their intention abide by both spirit and
letter of conventions including article 3 of 1949 signed
by them on 4 July by the provision of full supervisory
facilities to the International Red Cross representative
both by South Korean authorities and unified command.

(4) Similar International Red Cross supervisory facili-
ties will provide only assurance that North Koreans im-
plementing their expressed intentions not only toward
prisoners held captive by them but also in respect to the
treatment of wounded and others.

(5) United Nations Commission on Korea urges Se-
curity Council to offer to assist International Red Cross
further as only duly authorized and independent inter-
national body responsible for supervision of Red Cross
conventions with any efforts it may have initiated to
secure North Korean agreement to acceptance of Inter-
national Red Cross representatives in North Korea as
direct intermediaries in this matter.

(6) United Nations Commission on Korea further urges
that strongest possible voice should be raised throughout
whole civilized world in protest against delay in giving
Red Cross supervisory protection to prisoners of war, non-
combatant captives and wounded and requests Security

Council to seek positive assistance from those countries
able to influence North Korean authorities to this.

Voice of America Begins
Vietnamese Language Programs

[Released to the press August 5]

The Department of State today announced the
addition of a twenty-fifth language, Vietnamese, to
the broadcast schedule of the Voice of America,
effective August 13.

According to Foy D. Kohler, chief of the De-
partment's International Broadcasting Division,
the daily 15-minute Vietnamese program will in-
clude news and features about the United States
and American relations with the Far East. It will
be broadcast from 6 a.m. to 6 : 15 a.m., eastern day-
light savings time (6 p.m. to 6: 15 p.m. Vietnam
time) by five short-wave transmitters in the United
States and relayed by two short-wave transmitters
at the American relay base in Honolulu and by
one medium- wave and three short-wave transmit-
ters at the American relay base at Manila.

With the inauguration of the Vietnamese pro-
gram, the Voice of America will be broadcasting
in six languages and one dialect to the Far East,
the Indonesian broadcasts having been inaugu-
rated last December 27. The others are : Korean,
Russian, English, Mandarin, and Cantonese.

The Vietnamese desk will come under the direc-
tion of Elmer Newton, chief of the Far East sec-
tion of the Voice of America.

August 21, 1950

287

Third Report on the Activities of Far Eastern Commission:
December 24, 1948-June 30, 1950 >

SUMMARY OF ACTIVITIES

Two previous reports by the Secretary-General ^
have described the work of the Far Eastern Com-
mission from its first meeting on February 26, 1946
to July 10, 1947, and from July 10, 1947, through
December 23, 1948. The present report covers tlie
period from December 24, 1948 tlirough June 30,
1950.

The Far Eastern Commission is charged with
formulating —

the policies, principles, and standards in conformity with
which the fulfillment by Japan of its obligations under
the Terms of Surrender may be accomplished. (See
terms of reference, appendix 11.)

Pursuant to this requirement of its terms of
reference, the Commission adopted 41 policy deci-
sions during the first 15 months of its activity ; 13
during the next 18 months; and 9 during the
period covered by this report. This brings to a
total of 63 the number of policy decisions reached
by the Commission since its inception. The policy
decisions covered in the present report deal with
the following subjects : trial of Japanese war crim-
inals; reform of the Japanese agricultural system;
restoration of patent rights to allied nationals, in-
cluding rights previously held on utility models
and designs ; restoration of trade-mark rights, to-
gether with regulations governing Japanese use of
trade names and the marking of merchandise ; and
several revisions of previous policy decisions gov-
erning the restitution of looted property and access
by Allied governments to technical and scientific
information in Japan. Descriptions of each of
these policy decisions follow below and verbatim
texts of each will be found in the appendixes to this
report.^

' Released to the press by the Far Eastern Commission
on Aug. 10.

^ Activities of the Far Eastern Commission: Report by
the Secretary Qeneral, February 26, 19Ji6, July 10, 1947,
Department of State publication 2888.

The Far Eastern Commission: Second Report b)/ the
Secretary General. July 10. l'.)J,7~December 23, i9//8, De-
partment of State publication 3420.

' Appendixes referred to are not here printed.

288

In addition to the formulation of policy, the Far
Eastern Commission has continued to serve as the
principal means whereby member governments,
through their representatives on the Commission,
have exchanged views on the progress of the Allied
occupation of Japan. The Commission has like-
wise continued to provide a channel through which
member governments have been able to obtain
from time to time the views of General MacArthur,
Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers in
Japan.

A significant event of the period treated in this
report was the admission of the Republic of Burma
and the Dominion of Pakistan to membership in
the Far Eastern Commission. Paragraph v, 1,
of the terms of reference of the Far Eastern Com-
mission provides that —

The membership of the Commi.ssion may be increased
by agreement among the participating Powers as condi-
tions warrant by the addition of representatives of other
United Nations in the Far East or having territories
therein.

On November 16, 1949, the Governments of
Burma and Pakistan were notified that their ap-
plications for membership in the Commission had
been accepted in accordance with this provision
of the terms of reference. At the plenary session
of the Commission held the next day, the Ambas-
sador of Burma, U So Nyun, and the Ambassador
of Pakistan, M. A. H. Ispahani, took their seats
at the Commission table as representatives of their
respective governments.

The year 1949 also saw the retirement of Maj.
Gen. Frank R. McCoy as United States representa-
tive and chairman of the Commission. General
McCoy had been appointed by President Truman
to serve as United States representative on the Far
Eastern Advisory Commission. At its second
meeting, the Far Eastern Advisory Commission
elected General McCoy chairman. Following the
transformation of that body into the Far Eastern
Commission, in accordance with the terms of the
Moscow agreement of December 27, 1945, General
McCoy continued to serve as United States repre-
sentative and was elected chairman of the new
body at its first meeting. General McCoy served

Department of Stale Bulletin

as chairman of the Commission until November 30,
li>4i), at which time he resi<j;necl as United States
representative and chairman of the Commission to
retire to private life, thus marking the end of a
career of 5(5 years of almost uninterrupted public
service to the Government of tlie United States.
In addition to liolding many military posts of
great responsibility. General McCoy also rendered
distinguished service in the civilian field of inter-
national affairs. He served as Director tieneral of
the Red Cross and Commander of American Re-
lief Mission to Japan after the disastrous earth-
quake of 1923. He supervised the presidential
election in Nicaragiuv in 1928, was chairman of the
Commission of Inquiry and Conciliation (Bolivia-
Paraguay) in 1929, was the American member of
the League of Nations Commission of Inquiry
(Manchuria) in 1932, and was a member of the
Roberts Committee to inquire into Pearl Harbor.
General McCoy thus brought to the chairmanship
of the Far Eastern Commission a long experience
which contributed much to the success of the Com-
mission's deliberations.

General McCoy's successor as United States rep-
resentative is Maxwell M. Hamilton, who was ap-
pointed by President Truman immediately follow-
ing General McCoy's resignation. Mr. Hamilton,
a career officer in the Foreign Service of the United
States, has served in many important diplomatic
posts both in Europe and Asia, and from 1937 to
1943 was chief of the Far Eastern Division of the
Department of State. Mr. Hamilton assumed his
duties as United States representative on the Far
Eastern Commission on December 1, 1949. At its
I75th meeting on December 8, 1949, the Commis-
sion elected Mr. Hamilton chairman.

At the plenary session of the Far Eastern Com-
mission on 19 January 1950, tlie Soviet representa-
tive submitted a proposal to remove the present
Chinese representation from membership in the
Far Eastern Commission and its committees. The
Commission then voted to lay the Soviet proposal
on the table. Following this action, the Soviet
delegation left the meeting.

Although the Soviet delegation has not attended
any meetings of the Far Eastern Commission since
January 19, 1950, the Commission has continued
to hold regular sessions and to transact business.

The remainder of this report is devoted to a de-
scription of the policy decisions adopted during
the period between December 24, 1948 and June 30,
1950.

Recent Policies

TRIAL OF JAPANESE WAR CRIMINALS

At its 142d meeting on 24 February 1949, the
Far Eastern Commission adopted a policy deci-
sion *' stating that no further trials should be

initiated with respect to Japanese suspected of
having planned, prepared, or conspirecl to wage
a war of aggression. This policy decision states
that "no further trials of Japanese war criminals
should be initiated in respect of offenses classified
under pai-agraph 1 a of the policy decision of the
Far Eastern Conmaission entitled Apprehension^
Trial and Pimishnwnt of War Grimiinals in the
Far East passed by the Commission on 3 April
1946." ^

Paragraph 1 a of the 1946 policy decision reads
as follows :

1. The term "war crimes" as used herein includes :
o. Planning, preparation, initiation or waging of a war
of aggression or a war in violation of international
treaties, agreements and assurances, or participation in a
common plan of conspiracy for the accomplishment of any
of the foregoing.

These crimes are commonly referred to as
"Class A" crimes.

It will be recalled that the Potsdam Declaration
of 26 July 1945 announced that — •

stern justice shall be meted out to all war criminals,
including those who have visited cruelties upon our
prisoners.

The United States Government in October 1945,
prior to the establishment of the Far Eastern
Commission, forwarded a directive to the Supreme
Commander with instructions regarding the prose-
cution of suspected Japanese war criminals and
the establishment of an Inteniational Military
Tribunal for the Far East. Subsequently, at the
Moscow Conference of December 1945, the Far
Eastern Commission was established. Five weeks
after its initial meeting in Washington, the Com-
mission approved the policy decision already men-
tioned above {Apprehension, Trial and Punish-
ment of War Criminals in the Far East, 3 April
1946). This policy decision was transmitted to
the Supreme Commander through the Joint Chiefs
of Staff in accordance with the procedure pre-
scribed by the Terms of Reference of the Com-
mission; the directive issued in accordance with
this policy decision superseded the earlier United
States directive.

On 26 April 1946, an indictment was lodged with
the International Military Tribunal for the Far
East by the Prosecution Section of the Supreme
Commander's Headquarters. The indictment
charged 28 Japanese with having committed not
merely the Class "A" crimes referred to above, but
also "B" and "C" offenses : violation of the laws or
customs of war, and crimes against humanity, such
as murder, extermination, enslavement, etc. The
indictment charged offenses covering a period of
17 years and committed throughout the greater
part of Eastern Asia. Trial was formally begun
on 4 June 1946. Evidence submitted was collected

■■ Api)endix 1. Buixetin of May 1, 1949, p. 570.
August 27, 7950

'Activities of the Far Eastern Commission: Report hy
the Secretarii General, February 26. 191,6^uly 10, 1947,
Department of State publication 2888, p. 97.

289

not only from sources in the Far East but also
from sources in Europe and the United States.

The trial lasted for nearly two and a half years.
Of the twenty-eight men originally indicted, two
died in the course of the trial and a third was
adjudged mentally incompetent for trial. The
remaining twenty-five were all convicted in a
lengthy judgment read to the Tribunal between
4 November and 12 November 1948. All but one
were found guilty of the crime of waging or con-
spiring to wage aggressive war ("Class A" crimes) .
Eleven were also found guilty of "B'" and "C
crimes.

Sentences were passed on the 25 convicted war
criminals on 12 November 1948. Seven were sen-
tenced to death by hanging; sixteen received
sentences of life imprisonment; and two were
sentenced to 20 years and 7 years respectively.

Between midnight and 12 : 33 a.m. on 24 De-
cember 1948, following unsuccessful appeals to
the United States Supreme Court to review their
sentences, the seven men sentenced to death by
the International Military Tribunal for the Far
East, including former Premier Hideki Tojo, were
hanged in Sugamo Prison in Tokyo.

The policy decision approved by the Far East-
ern Commission on 24 February 1949, and de-
scribed above, officially closed the door on any
further trials of Japanese for Class "A" crimes.

Five weeks later at its 147th meeting on 31
March 1949, the Far Eastern Commission recom-
mended to its eleven member governments that,
if possible, investigations of suspected Japanese
war criminals, accused of either "B" or "C" crimes
(violations of the laws or customs of war ; or mur-
der, extermination, enslavement, deportation, or
other inhumane acts committed against any civil-
ian population or prosecutions on political, racial,
or religious grounds) should be completed by June
30, 1949, and trials of such persons completed by
September 30, 1949.^ The crimes referred to here
are defined as follows in the policy already men-
tioned above {Apprehension, Trial and Punish-
ment of War Criminals in the Far East, 3 April
1946) :

b. Violations of the laws or customs of war. Sucli
violations shall include but not be limited to murder, iU
treatment or deportation to slave labor or for any other
purpose of civilian population of, or in, occupied territory,
murder or ill treatment of prisoners of war or persons on
the seas, or elsewhere improper treatment of hostages,
plunder of public or private property, wanton destruction
of cities, towns or villages or devastation not justified by
military necessity.

c. Murder, extermination, enslavement, deportation and
other inhumane acts committed against any civilian poi>
ulation, before or during the war or prosecutions on
political, racial or religious grounds in execution of or in
connection with any crime defined herein whether or not
in violation of the domestic law of the country where
perpetrated.

° Appendix 2. Bulletin of May 1, 1949, p. 5G9.
290

AGRARIAN REFORM

On 28 April 1949, the Far Eastern Commission
at its 151st meeting approved a policy decision ^
endorsing the basic principles underlying the land
reform program being carried out in Japan by
the Japanese Government under the guidance of
the Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers

(SCAP).

This policy decision supplemented an earlier
policy decision of the Commission, "Principles for
Japanese Farmers' Organizations" of 9 December
1948 ' which specified that farmers' cooperatives
and farmers' unions were to be encouraged.

A program of agrarian reform was instituted
in Japan by Scap soon after the beginning of the
Occupation. Acting under the terms of the orig-
inal Presidential Policy Statement of 22 Septem-
ber 1945 (generally referred to as the U. S. Initial
Post-Surrender Policy for Japan ) and later under
the terms of the Far Eastern Commission's Basic
Post-Surrender Policy of 19 June 1947, the
Supreme Commander issued directives to the Japa-
nese Government ordering it to take immediate
steps —

... to insure that those who till the soil of Japan shall
have a more equal opportunity to enjoy the fruits of their
labor (Soap directive to the Japanese Government of 9
December 1945).

The three major goals of the Japanese land
reform jarogram, as evidenced by the measures
listed in the new Fec policy decision, have been :
(1) the elimination of the system of rents payable
in kind and the exaction of exorbitant rents; (2)
the large-scale transfer of the ownership of land
from the landlord class to the tenantry and the
creation thereby of a numerous class of indepen-
dent owner-farmers ; (3) the facilitation of credit
extension and education in agricultural techniques
to ofierating farmers.

Legislation and administrative action to carry
out each of these goals have been undertaken by
the Japanese Government during the past three
years. As a result, over 5,300,000 acres of farm
land have been purchased by the Japanese Govern-
ment from landlords and resold to tenants at rea-
sonable prices. For the remaining, approximately
10 percent of the land still tilled by tenants, rent
ceilings have been established, and written con-
tracts giving the tenant greater security are re-
quired. Some 32,600 agricultural cooperative
associations and 10,700 agricultural mutual relief
associations have also been formed. The policy
decision, adopted by the Far Eastern Commission
on 28 April 1949, calls for continued application
of the principles underlying this program.

' Appendix 3. Bulletin of May 22, 1949, p. 670.

'See Appendix 3, p. 23, The Far Eastern Commission:
Second Report by the Secretary General, Jiilu 10, 1947-
Decemher 23, 19J,S, Department of State publication 8420.

Department of State BuUetin

POLICY TOWARD PATENTS, UTILITY MODELS,
AND DESIGNS IN JAPAN

At its 145th meeting on 17 March 1949, the Far
Eastern Commission approved a policy decision "
calling for the reestablishment of an etrective pat-
ent system in Japan, requiring full publication of
all patents in Japan and providing for the restora-
tion of Allied-owned patent rights which were lost
as a result of the war.

The Japanese patent office, while already op-
erating under the guidance of the Occupation
authorities at the time this policy decision was
approved, was obligated under the new policy to
expand its functions to approximately its pre-war
standards, including such previous functions as
the publication of official gazettes and patent speci-
fications. Furthermore, under this policy deci-
sion, the Japanese patent law was required to
contain explicit provisions for the disclosure "of
all information necessary to the working of a pat-
ented invention." The policy decision further re-
quired that those provisions "shoidd be strictly
enforced."

In general, protection is given under the policy
decision to all holders of patent rights in Japan,
whether those rights derive from patents honored
in Japan at the time the policy decision was
adopted, from rights restored under the policy, or
from rights newly acquired during the period of
occupation. However, certain qualifications were
placed upon the exercise of such rights. For ex-
ample, the protective provisions do not apply to
German-owned or former German-owned patents
in Japan. Similarly, in any case where the con-
tinued protection of patent rights conflicts with
present or future policy decisions of the Far East-
ern Commission, Commission policy decisions
must be given precedence. Furthermore, in cases
where the continued protection of patent rights
interferes with the production, use, sale, or im-
portation of products "necessary to carry out the
purposes of the occujjation," the usual protection
need not be granted. In such cases, the Supreme
Commander is empowered to request the Japanese
Government "to invoke appropriate provisions of
the Japanese patent law" with a view to protecting
the interests of the Occupation. The policy deci-
sion also contains a provision preventing the main-
tenance in secrecy of any patents in Japan, and
requiring that existing secret patents "should be
published and treated in the same manner as all
other patents." A further provision requires that
pending applications heretofore treated as secret
"should be removed from such classification and
treated in the same manner as all other applica-
tions."

The policy decision adopted by the Far Eastern
Commission also contains special provisions

' Appendix 4. Documents and State Papers, May 1949,
p. 795.

whereby those Allied nationals whose patent
rights were lost during the course of the war may
remedy their situation and in some measure be
compensated for losses sustained. Under the
policy, any Allied nationals who lost their normal
patent rights may request, within a reasonable
period of time and in accordance with procedures
to be established by the Supreme Commander, the
revalidation and restoration of their patent rights.
Upon restoration or revalidation, such patent-
holders are entitled to "all the rights and privi-
leges to which any Jiational of any country is
entitled under the Japanese patent law existing
at the time of such restoration."

In requesting revalidation or restoration, the
Allied patent-holder is given a choice under the
policy of either accepting such funds as would
normally have accrued to him during the period
in which he did not enjoy his full rights, or accept-
ing an extension of the duration of his patent for
the same period of time. Should he prefer to
accept the extension of the period of duration of
his patent, he is required to remit any funds re-
ceived by him or credited to him from the effective
date of the loss of his rights to the date of restora-
tion. Similarly, he must waive all claim to royal-
ties for use of the patent during the period of loss.
In this connection, the Supreme Commander,
while not responsible under the policy for attempt-
ing to obtain compensation for Allied nationals
for any use which may have been made of their
patents during the period of loss, is, however,
responsible for making available to such persons
information regarding any funds credited to their
accounts in the form of royalties during that
period.

A further provision in the new policy decision
requires that applications for patents in Japan
which were filed by Allied nationals and which
were pending on the effective date of loss but on
which no patents were issued, should, upon request
of the original applicant, be reinstated as pend-
ing applications in the Japanese patent office and
restored to the original applicant.

A final provision makes the policy decision ap-
plicable not only to patents as generally under-
stood but also to "registered utility models" and
"registered designs."

Summarizing, the patent policy decision adopted
by the Far Eastern Commission requires the re-
turn to normal operation of the Japanese patent
office, full publication of all patents in Japan, and
restoration to Allied nationals of patent rights
lost during the war.^"

'° On 23 March 1949 the U.S. Government, invoking its
authority under par. Ill, 3, of the terms of reference
of the Far Eastern Commission, issued the following in-
terim directive. [See Bulletin of Apr. 17, 1949, p. 502.]

August 21, 1950

291

TRADE-MARKS, TRADE NAMES, AND
MARKING OF MERCHANDISE IN JAPAN

Another policy decision affecting the i^roperty
rights of Allied nationals was adopted by the Com-
mission on 28 July 1949 in the field of trade-marks,
trade names, and the marking of merchandise in
Japan." This policy decision provides for the
restoration of Allied-owned trade-mark rights
which were lost as a result of the war, and for the
protection of Allied trade-mark rights in Japan
and elsewhere against infringement by the Japa-
nese.

At the outbreak of hostilities between Japan
and the Allied countries, all trade-mark rights in
Japan belonging to Allied nationals were seized
under Japanese war-time laws applying to all Al-
lied property rights. The Commission's policy
decision provides for the restoration of such rights,
without payment of fees, upon request made by the
owners to the Supreme Commander for the Al-
lied Powers. Registrations are to be extended
from the date of restoration for a period equiva-
lent to the unexpired period at the time they were
lost. For example, an American trade-mark
which had been registered in Japan for a twenty-
year period on 7 December 1931, still had ten years
to run on 7 December 1941, when it ceased to be
effective because of the war. If, after the owner
made request to the Supreme Commander and
complied with procedure established by him under
the terms of the policy decision, it were restored
on 15 November 1949, it would remain in effect for
ten years from that date and expire on 14 Novem-
ber 1959. The date of loss is considered in the
policy decision to be the date of outbreak of hos-
tilities between Japan and the country of the
owner, or where applicable, the date after which
the trade-mark could no longer be exercised be-
cause of conditions arising out of World War II.

The Commission's policy decision also provides
that applications for trade-marks which had been
filed by Allied nationals and were pending at the
outbreak of hostilities must automatically be rein-
stated as pending applications without fee.

An Allied national who had filed the first ap-
plication for a trade-mark in any country within
six months previous to the date on which he could
no longer file an application in Japan, was given
one year from the effective date of the Commis-
sion's policy decision in which to file an applica-
tion in Japan with a right of priority based on
his first filing.

Before the war, serious commercial difficulties
were created by the Japanese practice of copying
foreign designs and mismarking goods. This
also included infringement of trade-mark rights
of foreigners in Japan and in areas in which Jap-
anese goods competed. During the Allied oc-
cupation, the Japanese Government was on sev-
eral occasions directed by Scap authorities to halt

" Appendix 5. Bulletin of Aug. 29, 1949, p. 309.
292

infringement of Allied trade-marks by Japanese
manufacturers in specific cases. The Commis-
sion's policy decision also requires the Japanese
Government to prevent future registration of
marks which are confusingly similar to well-
known foreign marks and permits United Nation
nationals to apply for cancellation of any such
marks already registered. Application for can-
cellation of infringing marks is to be made to the
Japanese Bureau of Patents, which is instructed
to deal expeditiously with them and, if the facts
submitted are correct, cancel the contested regis-
tration.

The policy decision further provides that steps
should be taken to assure that goods manufac-
tured in Jaj^an are not marked in a way that sug-
gests that they were made in other countries, and
that export goods are not marked so as to misrep-
resent their quantity, quality, or content.

The policy decision concludes with a general
provision requiring the protection of all existing
or restored trade-mark rights in Japan which do
not conflict with policy decisions established by
the Far Eastern Commission, and a provision mak-
ing the policy decision applicable not only to ac-
tual trade-marks, but also to "trade names and to
commercial or corporate names or marks."

RESTITUTION OF LOOTED PROPERTY

On 29 September and 6 October 1949, the Far
Eastei'n Commission approved amendments to
one of its earlier policy decisions on the subject
of restitution of looted property.^-

It will be recalled that on 29 July 1948, the Far
Eastern Commission approved a policy decision
governing the restitution of property found in
Japan which could be identified as having been
looted from Allied countries.^^ Among other
things, the policy decision authoi'ized the Supreme
Commander for the Allied Powers to liquidate
property known to have been looted but which,
after careful inspection, could not be identified as
to ownership. The proceeds from such liquida-
tion would form a secured fund which Scap was
authorized to use at his discretion, as a credit
basis for the occupation, provided that he pre-
served its initial value. The policy decision pro-
vided that the fund should ultimately be dis-
tributed by 1 October 1949 among the countries
looted by Japan during the war (Australia, China,
France, India, the Netherlands, the Philippines,
and the United Kingdom) in proportion to the
"recognized national reparations shares" of those
countries. /

As the specified date of 1 October 1949 ap-
proached, it was evident that the distribution of
the secured fund in the manner provided for in the

'" Appendixes 6 and 7. Bulletin of Nov. 21, 1949, p.
790.

"The Fur Eastern Commission: Second Report hy the
Secretary General. July If), li)i,1-December 23, 1948, De-
partment of State publication 3420, pp. 37-41.

Department of State Bulletin

policy decision would be impossible for two
reasons : Scap had not yet been able to complete the
liquidation of all the unidentified looted property;
the countries represented on tlie Far Eastern Com-
mission had not yet been able to agree on a schedule
of shares for reparations from Japan on which
distribution of the secured fund was to have been
based.

In the light of this situation, the Far Eastern
Commission on 29 September 1949 removed the
deadline date of 1 October 1949 by amending
paragraph 8 of its policy on restitution of looted
jDroperty as follows:

The secured fund shall be made available for distribu-
tion to the recipient countries not later than 1 April 1950.

On 6 October 1949, the Far Eastern Commis-
sion approved a further amendment taking account
of the fact that reparations shares had not yet
been agreed on by the Far Eastern Commission.
This amendment reads as follows :

The secured fund should finally be distributed among
the countries herein specified (Australia, China, France,
India, the Netherlands, the Philippines, and the United
Kingdom) in accordance with the percentages mentioned
above [i.e. reparations shares], or in accordance with a
schedule of shares to be agreed upon by such countries,
payable in United States dollars or, at the discretion of
the Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers, in foreign
exchange acceptable to the countries concerned.

The above amendment thus makes it possible, in
the absence of an agreed schedule of reparations
shares, for the seven looted countries to work out
among themselves a schedule of shares applicable
to the distribution of the secured fund.

EXTENSION OF FEC POLICIES ON ACCESS

TO JAPANESE TECHNICAL AND SCIENTIFIC INFORMATION

It will be recalled that the Commission adopted
during 1948 two policy decisions dealing with the
subject of access to Japanese technical and scien-
tific information in Japan. The first of these,
approved on 24 June 1948, read as follows:

During the period from July 1, 1948 through March 31,
1949, technical representatives of the Governments of
members of the Far Eastern Commission should be per-
mitted access to and the right to take copies of the details
of any technical or scientific processes of industrial or
commercial value which are of Japanese origin and owner-
ship and which were developed prior to December 31, 194.5.

Technical or scientific information obtained by any
representative of the government of a member of the Far
Eastern Commission pursuant to this policy statement
should be promptly and fully disclosed to Scap for dis-

semination to other interested members of the Far Ea.stern
Commission upon .specific request."

The second, aiDproved on 23 December 1948,
read as follows:

1. Scap may, insofar as it proves administratively prac-
tical, and without prejudice to arrangements for Fec
member nations in accordance with the principles estab-
lished in "Access to Japanese Technical and Scientific
Information in Japan,"" (approved by the Far Eastern
Commission on 24 June 1948 and forwarded to the Supreme
Commander on 1 July 1948) permit investigation of Japa-
nese technical processes by non-F^c countries at war with
Japan subsequent to 7 December 1941.

Any technical or scientific information thus obtained
should be promptly and fully disclosed to Scap. Such
information should be disseminated by Scap in response
to specific requests.

2. Technical or scientific information disclosed to Scap
in accordance with paragraph 2 of "Access to Japanese
Technical and Scientific Information in Japan" should,
upon specific request be made available to non-Fixj coun-
tries at war with Japan subsequent to 7 December 1941.'°

During the early part of 1949, the Far Eastern
Commission had under discussion the problem of
extending the right of access to technical and sci-
entific information in Japan beyond the 31 March
deadline governing the above policy decisions.
At its 147th meeting, held on 31 March, the Com-
mission agreed to a preliminary extension until
1 July 1949," pending consideration of the advisa-
bility of a still further extension. At its meeting
on 7 April the Commission agreed to a further
extension to 31 December 1949.^*

As a result of this action by the Commission,
technical missions of Fec member countries and
non-member countries then in Japan for the pur-
pose of investigating Japanese technical and scien-
tific processes were permitted to remain until 31
December 1949 to complete their investigations,
and those countries which had been unable to send
technical personnel to Japan during the period
covered by the previous policy decisions were given
a further opportunity to do so.

Washington, D. C.
30 June 1950

Nelson T. Johnson

Secretary General

" The Far Eastern Commission: Second Report J>y the
Secretary General, July 10, 191,1-Deeemher 23, 19^8. De-
partment of State publication 3420, p. 43.

''IbUL, p. 43.

"■ Ibid., p. 43.

" Appendix 8.

"Appendix 9. Bulletin of June 26, 1949, p. 833.

August 21, 7950

293

Preserving Our Basic Liberties and Protecting
the internal Security of tlie United States'

Message From the President

To the Congress of the United States:

I am presenting to the Congress certain con-
siderations concerning the steps we need to take
to preserve our basic liberties and to protect the
internal security of the United States in this period
of increasing international difficulty and danger.
We face today, as we have always faced in time of
international tension, the question of how to keep
our freedom secure against internal as well as
external attack, without at the same time unduly
limiting individual rights and liberties.

Throughout our history as a nation, our people
have always — and properly — been wary of govern-
ment action which limited personal liberty. At
the time our Constitution was being debated, there
was considerable fear that it did not properly
safeguard the exercise of individual freedom. As
a result, the first ten amendments to the Constitu-
tion— the Bill of Rights — were adopted, in order
to make sure that the Federal Government would
not infringe upon the free exercise of religion,
freedom of speech, freedom of the press, the right
of peaceable assembly, and the other basic rights
which are essential in a free society. The Bill of
Rights was then, and remains today, a stirring
embodiment of our democratic ideals — an inspira-
tion to free men everywhere and to those who
would be free.

At the same time, the Bill of Rights was not
intended to prevent the Government from main-
taining our Nation's integrity against subversion
or attack. For example, the right of the people
to keep and bear arms, which is guaranteed in the
Bill of Rights, obviously gives no license for the
building up of an armed revolutionary movement
within our borders.

Accordingly, the Govermnent has enacted laws,
from time to time, against espionage, sabotage,
and other internal threats to our national safety.
Each of these laws necessarily places some restric-

• H. doc. 679, 81st Cong. 2d sess.
294

tions on individual liberty for the protection of the
Nation.

It has always been difficult to draw the line be-
tween restrictions which are projjer because they
are necessary for internal security, and restric-
tions which are improper because they violate the
spirit or the letter of the Constitution. It is clear
that on certain occasions that line has been over-
stepped.

Soon after our Government began functioning
under the Constitution, there was enacted, in 1798,
the group of legislative acts Imown as the alien
and sedition laws. These laws were ostensibly de-
signed to prevent activities which would under-
mine the Nation's safety and independence. But
in fact they were broad enough — and were used —
to imprison many leading citizens, including a
Member of Congress, who expressed disagreement
with the policies of the administration then in
office.

The alien and sedition laws were so repugnant
to the free spirit of our people that they played an
important part in the disappearance of the Feder-
alist Party, which sponsored them, and the objec-
tionable features of these laws were shortly re-
l^ealed or allowed to expire. That experience
taught us a great lesson: that extreme and arbi-
trary security measures strike at the very heart of
our free society, and that we must be eternally
vigilant against those who would undermine free-
dom in the name of security.

Since the time of the alien and sedition laws,
there have been recurrent periods, especially in
wartime, when the safety of our Nation has been
in danger. Each of these occasions has confronted
us with a new set of conditions to which we have
had to adjust our internal security laws and pro-
cedures.

At the same time, each of these periods of dan-
ger has been seized on by those who, in good faith
or bad, would severely limit the freedom of our
people in a misguided attempt to gain greater

Department of State Bulletin

security. As we look back now, we can see that
there have been certain times when we have, to
some extent, repudiated our own ideals of freedom
in an excess of zeal foi. our safety. Nevertheless,
it is a tribute to the strong faith and common sense
of our people that we have never for long been mis-
led by the hysterical cries of those who would sup-
press our constitutional freedoms.

The present period is one of the times in which
it has been necessary to adjust our security meas-
ures to new circumstances. The particular dan-
ger which we have had to meet has been created
by the rise of totalitarianism — first the totalitar-
ianism of the right, and now that of the left.

Today we face most acutely the threat of the
Communist movement, international in scope, di-
rected from a central source, and committed to
the overthrow of democratic institutions through-
out the world.

The major danger from the Communist move-
ment lies in its use of armed force and the threat
of aggression through which it is trying to estab-
lish its control over free nations. To meet this
danger, we are working vigorously with other free
nations to build a strong and effective common de-
fense.

Communist imperialism also seeks to weaken
and overthrow free nations by working within
their borders.

Through their own political parties, and by
trying to make alliances with non-Communist
political groups, the Communists attempt to gain
political power. The best defense against this
aspect of the Communist threat is a vigorous,
functioning democracy which succeeds in meeting
the needs of its people. A vigilant people, who
exercise their democratic rights to keep their Gov-
ernment active in the interests of all, can defeat
the efforts of Communists to attain electoral
power.

In the United States the Communist Party has
never received more than a minute portion of the
national vote. The good sense of the American
people, and their faith in democracy, have utterly
rejected the false political appeal of communism.

As a part of their campaign to weaken free
nations from within, the Communists try to in-
filtrate and gain control of the most vital citizens'
organizations, such as unions, associations of vet-
erans, business groups, and charitable, educa-
tional, and political societies. In this country,
these attempts have — with few exceptions — been
successfully thwarted by the common sense and
hard work of the members of those organizations,
who have defeated the Communists through demo-
cratic processes, or forced them into isolated
groups which are clearly and definitely identified
as Communist-controlled.

The success of our labor-union members and
leaders in exposing and eliminating Communists
who had managed to gain positions of authority
in the labor movement is particularly noteworthy.

This demonstrates that open and public demo-
cratic processes provide the most effective way to
prevent Communists from dominating the activi-
ties and policies of private groups in our country.

If the Communists confined their activities in
this country to the open and public channels of
the democratic process, we would have little con-
cern about them. But they do not so limit their
activities. Instead, to serve the ends of a foreign
power, they engage in espionage, sabotage, and
other acts subvereive of our national safety.

To protect us against activities such as these, we
must rely primarily upon Government action.
We must have effective internal security measures
to prevent acts which threaten our national safety.

These measures must be accurately devised to
meet real dangers. They must not be so broad as
to restrict our liberty unnecessarily, for that would
defeat our own ends. Unwise or excessive secur-
ity measures can strike at the freedom and dignity
of the individual, which are the very foundation
of our society, and the defense of which is the
whole purpose of our security measui'es.

In considering the laws that are needed to pro-
tect our internal security against Communist ac-
tivities, we should remember that we already have
tested legal defenses against treason, espionage,
sabotage, and other acts looking toward the over-
throw of our Government by force or violence.
Strong laws exist on the statute books — a number
of them enacted or strengthened in recent years —
under which we have proceeded and are proceed-
ing vigorously against such crimes.

The treason laws make it a crime for anyone
owing allegiance to the United States to levy war
against his country, to give aid and comfort to
its enemies, or to conceal knowledge concerning
treasonable activities.

The espionage laws make it a crime to gather,
give, receive, or transmit documents or similar
materials concerning the national defense of the
United States with intent or reason to believe that
they are to be used against the interest of the
United States. Furthermore, these laws make it a
crime for anj-one who has national-defense infor-
mation to communicate it to any person not
entitled to receive it.

The sabotage laws make it a crime for anyone,
with intent to interfere with the national defense,
to attempt to injure or destroy any material,
premises, or utilities which are important to the
national defense.

There are other laws which make it a crime for
two or more persons to "conspire to overthrow,
put down, or to destroy by force the Goverinnent
of the United States ... or by force to prevent,
hinder or delay the execution of any law of the
United States." There are also laws which make
it a crime to advocate or teach the overthrow of
the United States Government, or any State or
local government, by force or violence, to organize
any group for that purpose, or to be a member of

August 27, 7950

295

such a group, knowing its purpose. In 1948,
eleven of the most important leaders of the Com-
munist Party in this country were indicted under
these laws. After a long trial, all were convicted,
and their conviction was affirmed by an appellate
court on August 1, 1950.

In addition to the criminal laws outlined above,
there is a set of laws governing immigration,
naturalization, and travel between our country
and others. These laws permit the Government to
exclude or deport any alien from this country who
may be dangerous to our internal security, and to
forbid or to regulate the travel abroad of United
States citizens who may be engaged in subversive
activity.

The laws I have been describing apply to pri-
vate citizens and groups. A special set of laws and
procedures applies to Government employees.
Here our purpose is to exclude or remove from
Government service persons who may be disloyal,
even tliough they have committed no crime, and to
keep from positions of importance persons who
cannot be trusted to maintain security regulations,
even though they may be loyal citizens and satis-
factory employees in all other respects.

More than three years ago, the Executive
Branch revised and improved its procedures for
dealing with questions of employee loyalty and
security. These new procedures have proved
effective in protecting the Government against
disloyal persons and persons whose employment
constitutes a security risk.

The various laws and procedures I have out-
lined make up a strong set of legal safeguards
against acts by individuals and groups which
strike at the internal security of the United States.
Over the last few years, we have successfully
prosecuted several hundred cases in the courts
under existing internal security laws. In this
process we have obtained a gi-eat deal of experi-
ence in the application of these laws. We have
discovered a few defects, some of them minor and
others of greater importance, in some of the exist-
ing statutes. In view of the situation which con-
fronts us, it is important that these defects be
remedied. At this time, therefore, I wish to rec-
ommend that the Congress enact certain legislation
before the close of the present session.

First, I recommend that the Congress remedy
certain defects in the present laws concerning
espionage, the registration of foreign agents, and
the security of national-defense installations, by
clarifying and making more definite certain lan-
guage in the espionage laws, by providing an ex-
tended statute of limitations (in place of the pres-
ent 3-year statute) for peacetime espionage, by
requiring persons who have received instruction
from a foreign government or political party in
espionage or subversive tactics to register under
the Foreign Agents Registration Act, and by giv-
ing broader authority than now exists for the
President to establish security regulations con-

cerning the protection of military bases and other
national-defense installations.

Second, I recommend that the Congress enact
legislation permitting the Attorney General to
exercise supervision over aliens subject to deporta-
tion and to require them, under the sanction of
criminal penalties, to report their whereabouts
and activities at regular intervals. In a number
of cases, aliens uncler deportation orders cannot
be deported because no other country will accept
them. A bill pending before the Congress would
permit the Attorney General in certain cases to
detain such aliens in his custody for indefinite
periods of time — not pursuant to a conviction for
crime but on the basis of an administrative de-
termination. Such action would be repugnant to
our traditions, and it should not be authorized.
Present law, however, is inadequate to permit
proper supervision of deportable aliens, and should
be strengthened as I have indicated.

Under the leadership of the National Security
Council, the agencies of the Government which
administer our internal security laws are keeping
these laws under constant study to determine
wliether further changes are required to provide
adequate protection. If it does appear that further
improvements in these laws are needed, I shall
recommend them to the Congress.

By building upon the framework now provided
by our basic laws against subversive activities, we
can provide effective protection against acts which
threaten violence to our Government or to our
institutions, and we can do this without violating
the fundamental principles of our Constitution.

Nevertheless, there are some people who wish
us to enact laws which would seriously damage
the right of free speech and which could be used
not only against subversive groups but against
other groups engaged in political or other activi-
ties which were not generally popular. Such
measures would not only infringe on the Bill of
Rights and the basic liberties of our people, they
would also undermine the very internal security
they seek to protect.

Laws forbidding dissent do not prevent sub-
versive activities; they merely drive them into
more secret and more dangerous channels. Police
states are not secure; their history is marked by
successive purges, and growing concentration
camps, as their governments strike out blindly in
fear of violent revolt. Once a government is com-
mitted to the principle of silencing the voice of
opposition, it has only one way to go, and that is
down tlie path of increasingly repressive measures,
until it becomes a source of terror to all its citizens
and creates a country where everyone lives in fear.

We must, therefore, be on our guard against
extremists who urge use to adopt police-state meas-
ures. Such persons advocate breaking down the
guaranties of the Bill of Rights in order to get at
the Communists. They forget that if the Bill
of Rights were to be broken down, all groups, even

296

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

the most conservative, would be in danger from the
arbitrary power of government.

Legislation is now pending before the Congress
which is so broad and vague in its terms as to
endanger the freedoms of speech, press, and as-
sembly protected by the First Amendment. Some
of the proposed measures would, in effect, impose
severe penalties for normal political activities on
the part of certain groups, including Communists
and Communist Party-line followers. This kind
of legislation is unnecessary, ineffective, and dan-
gerous.

It is unnecessary because groups such as the
Communists cannot accomplish their evil purposes
in this country through normal political activity.
They will be" repudiated by the people as they
have always been.

It is ineffective because it does not get at the
real dangers from the Conununists in this country.
These dangers come, not from normal political
activity, but from espionage, sabotage, and the
building up of an organization dedicated to the
destruction of our Government by violent means —
against all of which we already have laws.

This kind of proposed legislation is dangerous
because, in attempting to proscribe, for groups
such as the Communists, certain activities that are
perfectly proper for everyone else, such legislation
would spread a legal dragnet sufficiently broad to
permit the prosecution of people who are entirely
innocent or merely misguided. As far as the real
conspirators against our institutions are con-
cerned, such legislation would merely have the
effect of driving them further underground and
making it more difficult to reach them. Further-
more, if such legislation were held unconstitu-
tional, as it well might be, it would make martyrs
out of our worst enemies and create public sym-
pathy for them.

Extreme proposals of this type reflect the wide-
spread public concern about conamunism which
most of our people feel today. In some communi-
ties, this concern has resulted in the enactment of
unnecessary or unconstitutional laws or ordinances
designed to suppress subversive activity.

We must not be swept away by a wave of
hysteria.

It is natural, perhaps, to think that we can wipe
out the dangers which confront us by passing a
law. But we cannot get rid of communism just
by passing a law. We must, of course, have effec-
tive legal defenses, but the principal protection of
a free society against subversion is an alert and
responsible citizenry dedicated to the advancement
of freedom through democratic means.

This is the way to build real security for our
country — and every citizen can help. Everyone in
public life has a responsibility to conduct himself
so as to reinforce and not undermine our internal
security and our basic freedoms. Our press and
radio have the same responsibility. Private groups
of all kinds, and citizens in their daily work and

August 27, 7950

89924T— 50 3

in their homes, are equally concerned with the ques-
tion of protecting our liberties and our national
security. We must all act soberly and carefully,
in keeping with our great traditions. This is im-
portant not only to our own country, but to the
success of the cause of freedom in the world.

Throughout the world, communism is seeking
to discredit our system of constitutional liberties.
The Communists know that the leadership and
good will which our Nation enjoys arise in great
measure from the fact that men here have the bless-
ings of liberty. Consequently, the propaganda of
communism is devoted to a bitter and unceasing
attempt to blacken and distort our national charac-
ter and our way of life.

This propaganda is a formidable threat to the
unity of the free nations in working for peace.
The best answer to it is not words, but deeds. We
must demonstrate that we are a couiitry in which
men can live together and advance together as a
free societj'. This alone can prove the falseness
of the Communist attack. It would be tragic in
the highest degree if we were to frighten ourselves
into destroying those very liberties which are the
basis of our moral leadership in the struggle for
peace.

I am determined that the United States shall be
secure. I am equally determined that we shall keep
our historic liberties.

Success in achieving both these objectives is of
exceptional importance in the present period of
international tension. For by our actions we must
maintain the United States as a strong, free people,
confident in our liberties, and moving forward with
other free peoples to oppose aggression and to build
a just peace for all mankind.

Harry S. TEUMAisr.

The White House, August 8, 1950.

National Action Essential

in Absence of Collective Security

Statement 'by Secretary -General Lie

[Released to the press hy the V.N. August 7]

It is understandable and in conformity with
their responsibilities that member governments,
when faced with the failure to make peace and
the consequent delay in establishing a United
Nations collective security system, should look to
their own defenses and form such bilateral and
multilateral associations as would, in their opin-
ion, strengthen their security.

At such a time as this, I believe there must be
strong national defenses and the people must be
willing to carry the burden of armaments. Dis-
armament can come only as part of a collective
security system and when an atmosphere of mutual
confidence such as prevailed during the war has
been reestablished.

297

Annual Report of the Secretary-General on the Work
of the United Nations, July 1, 1949-June 30, 1950/

INTRODUCTION

My fifth annual report to the General Assembly
on the work of the United Nations is written at a
time of serious danger to the peace of the world
and to the continued existence of the Organization.

United Nations Approach
to the Problem of Peace

The judgment of the San Francisco Conference
was that the best hope of preventing a third world
war from occurring sooner or later lay in the crea-
tion, maintenance and development of a universal,
world-wide organization within which could be
peacefully contained all the different ideologies
and conflicting aims of all the nations of the world.

This approach did not rule out bilateral and
multilateral arrangements based on common in-
terests of a regional, political, economic or cul-
tural nature and aimed at strengthening the de-
fences and systems of jsarticular groups of nations
and maintaining or improving their place in the
world. Nor did it rule out the idea of peaceful
competition between different systems and differ-
ent cultures — competition by achievement, bj'
example, by attraction, and by any other lawful
means not involving the use of armed force.

The United Nations Charter, as I understand it,
not only does not rule out any of these things ; it
provides for all of them either explicitly or im-
plicitly. The United Nations conception does,
however, give primacy to the maintenance and de-
velopment of the one oi'ganization in whicli all na-
tions can share — the United Nations. It does this
because of the common recognition that military
strength alone, or economic strength alone, or
ideological strength alone, or any combination of

' General Assembly Official Records : Fifth Session, Supp.
No. 1 (A/1287), Lake Success, N.Y. xiv, 143 pp., for sale
by tlie International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N.Y., at $1.50
a copy. The report contains a review of the political and
security questions ; economic and social questions ; trus-
teeship and non-self-governing territories problems; legal
questions; development of public understanding; and or-
ganization, administration, and finance.

these has never, in the past and in the long run,
prevented continent-wide and world-wide wars.

This order of priorities — this recognition of the
supremacy of the United Nations and the second-
ary place of all other efforts at increasing the na-
tional security of individual nations — is clearly
reflected in the Charter itself, in Article 103, which
says:

In the event of a conflict between the obligations of
the Members of the United Nations under the present
Charter and their obligations under any other interna-
tional agreement, their obligations under the present
Charter shall prevail.

I believe that the United Nations approach to the
problem of peace is as right and necessary today
as it was in 1945. The difficulty and the danger lie
elsewhere.

Failure of the Allied Powers
To Make Peace Settlements

Throughout its existence the Organization has
been gravely hampered by the conflicts among the
victorious Powers over the peace settlements of the
Second World War. The founders of the United
Nations provided separate machinery for the mak-
ing of the peace treaties with Germany, Japan,
and their allies.

The main piece of machinery for this purpose
has been the Council of Foreign Ministers. It has
succeeded in completing the peace treaties with
Italy, Hungary, Romania, Bulgaria, and Finland.
It has made substantial progress towards com-
pleting a peace treaty for Austria. However, it
has so far failed to reach agreement on the terms
of a peace treaty for Germany. Neither has the
Council of Foreign Ministers nor the Far Eastern
Commission attemjited to wi'ite a peace treaty for
Japan.

Without the basic settlements required to estab-
lish a foundation of reasonable stability and order
in the world, the great and inevitable changes that
are taking place will condemn mankind to chaos.
It is the failure to make such settlements that,
for five years, has prevented the United Nations
from creating the system of collective security
provided for in the Charter.

298

Department of State Bulletin

The essential elements of such a system of col-
lective security do not yet exist. There is as yet
no plan for the control, regulation, reduction or
prohibition of armaments, including atomic bombs
and other weapons of mass destruction. There is
as yet no agreement in existence regarding the
forces that should be pledged by Members under
Article 43 of the Charter to enforce decisions of
the Security Council against threats to the peace,
breaches of the peace, and acts of aggression.

It should be clear by now that the creation of a
United Nations system of collective security as it
is envisaged in tlie Charter can be expected from
the JNIember nations only as it results from or ac-
companies a settlement of the conflicts for power
and position resulting from the defeat of Germany
and of Japan.

United Nations Action
To Restore Peace in Korea

The attack upon the Republic of Korea by North
Korean forces is the latest and worst of a series of
dangerous crises which have arisen for the most
part out of the failure to arrive at a settlement of
post-war problems, and the consequent failure to
establish a collective security system based on uni-
versal acceptance. The Government of the Re-
public of Korea was chosen on the basis of elec-
tions held in South Korea under United Nations
auspices. It was declai'ed by the General Assem-
bly at its third session to be the only lawful govern-
ment in Korea. The General Assembly on
various occasions has also called upon Member
States and all Koreans to assist in every possible
way the work of the United Nations Commission
on Korea, and to refrain from any acts deroga-
tory to the purposes of the Assembly's resolution,
which were directed towards the peaceful reuni-
fication of Korea under a freely elected democratic
government.

Defiance of the United Nations by armed force
under the circumstances prevailing in Korea con-
stitutes a threat to international peace of a most
serious character, worse even than the deadlock in
Berlin, where the use of armed force did not occur.

In tnis situation there has been only one thing
for the United Nations to do — to act quickly and
decisively. This the Security Council did. The
Council branded the fighting a breach of the peace
under Chapter VII of the Charter and called for
a cease-fire within twenty-four hours of the first
word of the fighting. Two days later, when fight-
ing continued in spite of the Security Council's
demand for a cease-fire, the Council acted again.

The Council did not have at its disposal the
forces that it should have had under Article 43 for
enforcement purposes. Instead, it recommended —

. . . that the Members of the United Nations furnish
such assistance to the Republic of Korea as may be neces-
sary to repel the armed attack and to restore interna-
tional peace and security in the area.

The United States of America, and other coun-
tries, are providing assistance to the Republic
of Korea in the form of both military material
and contingents of their armed forces. At this
moment, as I complete my annual report, these
forces are fighting on behalf of the United Na-
tions to assist the Republic of Korea to repel the
attack and to restore international peace and se-
curity in Korea. On the recommendation of the
Security Council, they are fighting under the uni-
fied command of the Commander designated by
the United States of America. Further, the Coun-
cil has authorized the use by these United Nations
forces of the United Nations flag. The United
States has been requested to report on the course
of action taken under the unified command.

At the present date (12 July) there is no means
of foreseeing the outcome of the United Nations
action. Forty-seven Governments have notified
me of their support for the decisions and recom-
mendations of the Security Council. The Union
of Soviet Socialist Republics and certain other
Governments have maintained that the Security
Council acted illegally and have refused their
support.

Once peace is restored in Korea, it will then be
more important than ever that a new attempt
should be made to resume the jirocesses of negotia-
tion, mediation and conciliation for the settlement
of the conflicts that divide the world and threaten
to condemn us all to a third world war.

Peace is what we must work for — peace, not war,
not only in Korea but in the whole world.

The United Nations has already used the ma-
chinery of negotiation, mediation, and concilia-
tion to help prevent or stop wars in the Near
East, in Indonesia and between India and
Pakistan. It has exerted its pacifying influence
in disputes occurring in other parts of the world
as well. The most dangerous of these, the great
Power deadlock over Berlin, was resolved by an
agreement that crowned efforts made, both outside
and inside the United Nations, to settle the dispute.

Record of the United Nations

During the first five years of its existence, the
United Nations system has repeatedly demon-
strated its capacities in many other fields.

The most cursory re-examination of the record
of the Organization will furnish convincing evi-
dence of achievement, and of greater potentiali-
ties for the future. In the face of political diffi-
culties of a most fundamental nature, the Mem-
ber Governments have, nevertheless, succeeded in
creating and operating a vast and effective system
for co-ojierative world action in virtually every
field of human endeavour.

Where abundant achievements are not as yet
apparent it must be remembered that, particularly
in the economic and social field, the first years
have been used to lay a groundwork that is now

August 21, 1950

299

just Hearing completion. It would be a tragic
•waste if tliis foundation were to be destroyed or
left idle on account of political strife, when there
is such gi'eat need for mankind to pool its re-
sources for attaining higher standards of life and
greater social progress.

Even during the past twelve months, when it has
been operating under the most severe handicaps,
the Organization has continued to do much good
and useful work. Its accomplishments, together
with the record of the accompanying disappoint-
ments and the temporary failures, are discussed in
the chapters of my report. Here I need only list
the major decisions and acts of the United Nations
between 1 July 1949 and 30 June 1950, which have
been or can be of constructive benefit to the world :

1. The decisions of the General Assembly in
favour of the independence of Libya within two
years, and of Somaliland after ten years of trustee-
ship, and the establishment of agencies to assist in
carrying out these decisions.

2. The transfer of sovereignty over Indonesia by
the Netherlands to the Republic of the United
States of Indonesia, the culmination of a three-
year process in which the United Nations played
a major mediatory role.

3. The renewed effort of the Security Council to
settle the dispute over Kashmir between India and
Pakistan by sending a United Nations representa-
tive to the spot to assist the parties in the prepara-
tion of a plan of demilitarization and to supervise
its implementation.

4. The successful maintenance of the armi-
stice regimes between Israel and her neighbours
through the operation of the United Nations
Mixed Armistice Commissions, despite the delays
and differences preventing the conclusions of a
definitive peace settlement for the area.

5. The progressive pacification of the northern
borders of Greece after three years during which
the United Nations Special Committee on the Bal-
kans and its predecessor performed a useful and
necessary observer role, although unable to secure
a settlement of outstanding disputes between
Greece and her northern neighbours.

6. The launching of the United Nations ex-
panded programme of technical assistance for eco-
nomic development by unanimous action of the
General Assembly, followed by the decisions of the
Technical Assistance Conference and the pledging
of $20 million by the Member States for the first
period of the programme.

7. The holding of the United Nations Scientific
Conference on the Conservation and Utilization of
Resources, wliich produced a valuable exchange of
ideas and knowledge among leading resource sci-
entists and conservationists and will thus serve as
a well-spring for future international action.

8. The preparation by the Commission on Hu-
man Rights of the first of a series of covenants
aimed at giving expression in international law

to various human rights proclaimed in the Uni-
versal Declaration of Human Rights.

9. The long-sought agreement of the principal
opium-producing countries on a plan for limiting
the world production of opium to that required
for medical needs, to be achieved by the establish-
ment of an international opium monopoly with a
view to strengthening the control of narcotics and
hence checking drug addiction.

10. The establishment of the United Nations Re-
lief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in
the Near East to take over the relief of Arab refu-
gees and to provide for public works projects to
replace direct relief, in hne with proposals made
by the United Nations Economic Survey Mission.

11. The decision to appoint a High Commis-
sioner for Refugees, when the International Refu-
gee Organization terminates its programme in
1951, and to establish a permanent oflSce under his
direction.

12. The further development of the interna-
tional supervisory functions of the United Nations
Trusteeship System by the receipt and examina-
tion of a greatly increased number of petitions and
by visits to eight of the Trust Territories of the
periodical visiting missions of the Trusteeship
Council; the formulation and negotiation, for
former Italian Somaliland, of a trusteeship
agreement incorporating provisions designed to
strengthen the system of supervision not found in
other trusteeship agreements.

13. The advisory opinion of the International
Court of Justice reaffirming the principle of inter-
national responsibility for South West Africa.

14. The steadily inci'easing calls upon the Inter-
national Court of Justice for advisory opinions
and for the settlement of juridical disputes.

The above list could be extended. As it stands
it is, I think, sufficient to demonstrate the con-
tinuing usefulness of the United Nations during
the past twelve months in the face of the most crip-
pling effects of the "cold war" that the Organiza-
tion has yet suffered.

Question of the Representation of CKina

The first crisis for the Organization during the
year was the outcome of the civil war in China.
Both the Nationalist Government, now in Formosa,
and the Central Government of the People's Re-
public of China at Peking, which controls the
mainland, claim the right to represent the Republic
of China in the United Nations. The dispute has
been made the more serious because the Republic of
China is one of the five permanent members of the
Secux-ity Council, and because the Soviet Union,
followed by other eastern European countries, has
refused to participate in meetings of the United
Nations organs in which China is represented by
a Nationalist delegate.

As Members are aware, since February I have

300

Department of State Bulletin

made every effort to assist in discovering a solu-
tion of tlie deadlock.

In the first place, in so far as the representation
of China is concerned, I have urged an inquiry to
determine which government has the power to
employ the resources and direct the people of the
State in fulfilment of the obligations of member-
ship in the United Nations. I have expressed the
opinion that the government which has the power
should represent China in the United Nations.
Otherwise, the people of China are denied their
fundamental constitutional right under the Char-
ter to be represented in the United Nations at all
times.

I have taken the position that this inquiry
should be undertaken and its findings should be ap-
plied without reference either to boycotts or to the
policies of recognition or non-recognition on the
part of any Member State. I have urged that the
question of the representation of China in the
United Nations — which is a constitutional and
legal question — should be separated from ex-
traneous considerations that arise on both sides
from the present world situation.

Continuing Deadlock in the World Conflict

The dispute over the representation of China
would not have assumed such dangerous propor-
tions had it not been for the overriding crisis in
world affairs.

When I presented my fourth annual report one
year ago, there was renewed hope that the "cold
war" might be moderated during the succeeding
months. The Council of Foreign Ministers had
just met for the first time in more than a year. It
had formally approved the agreement breaking
the Berlin deadlock, and had instructed the Dep-
uties to complete the peace treaty for Austria. Al-
though no progress had been made in respect of a
peace treaty for Germany, it was indicated that
the Foreign Ministers might meet again in New
York during the fourth session of the General
Assembly.

The hope for a resumption of active negotia-
tions on a peace treaty for Germany was disap-
pointed. The Council of Foreign Ministers did
not meet during the fourth session and has not
met since. The Deputies have not succeeded in
reaching agreement on the last remaining points
of difference over the peace treaty for Austria.

Although there was no rapprochement between
the two conflicting points of view during the
fourth session of the General Assembly, it was the
desire of the Assembly that the great Powers
should resume negotiations on major issues out-
standing between them in the United Nations,
particularly on atomic energy. On that issue, the
Assembly specifically asked the six permanent
members of the Atomic Energy Commission to
explore all possible avenues and examine all con-
crete suggestions with a view to determining
whether they might lead to an agreement.

Once again the renewed hope for a resumption
of negotiations within the United Nations was
doomed to disappointment. The question of the
representation of China came to a head, and this
was followed by the refusal of the Soviet Union
to participate in meetings attended by representa-
tives of the Chinese Nationalist Government.

Instead of the hoped-for resumption of negotia-
tions. Members have been faced since the begin-
ning of 1950 by a total stalemate on the
outstanding issues of the world conflict. Not only
has thei'e been no progress whatever in enlarging
the area of agreement, but the parties have not
even sat down together at the conference table.
As long as this state of affairs is permitted to
continue, the world will remain committed to an
intensification, month by month, of the conflict.

Efforts Towards Breaking the Deadlock

In the face of this very dangerous state of
affairs, I have felt it my duty as Secretary-
General to make whatever contribution lay within
the scope of my powers and duties towards break-
ing the deadlock, restoring the United Nations to
full working order and acting in other ways on
behalf of the preservation of peace.

Believing that the situation called for nothing
less than a reaffirmation of the whole United Na-
tions approach to the problem of peace-building
and a fresh start by Governments, I prepared a
memorandum containing a series of points for con-
sideration in developing a twenty-year programme
for achieving peace through the United Nations.
I discussed this memorandum with the Heads of
the Governments and with the Foi-eign Ministers
of the United States of America, the United
Kingdom, France, and the Soviet Union during
my visits this spring to Washington, London,
Paris, and Moscow. On 6 June 1950, I formally
submitted the memorandum to the Governments
of the fifty-nine Member States, together with a
covering letter, and I have now placed it on the
provisional agenda of the coming session of the
General Assembly.

I should like to repeat here the introductory
statements of that memorandum setting forth my
beliefs and my approach to the present crisis :

As Secretary-General, it Is my firm belief that a new
and great effort must be attempted to end the so-called
"cold war" and to set the world once more on a road that
will offer greater hope of lasting peace.

The atmosphere of deepening international mistrust can
be dissipated and the threat of the universal disaster of
another war averted by employing to the full the re-
sources for conciliation and constructive peace-building
present in the United Nations Charter. The employment
of these resources can secure eventual peace if we accept,
believe and act upon the possibility of peaceful co-
existence amoiij; all the Great Powers and the different
economic and political systems they represent, and if the
Great Powers evidence a readiness to undertal^e genuine
negotiation — not In a spirit of appeasement — but with
enlightened self-interest and common sense on all sides.

Measures for collective self-defence and regional

Augusf 27, 1950

301

remedies of otlier kinds are at best interim measures, and
cannot alone bring any reliable security from the prospect
of war. The one common undertaking and universal in-
strument of the great majority of tlie human race Is the
United Nations. A patient, constructive long-term use of
its potentialities can bring a real and secure peace to the
world. I am certain that such an effort would have the
active interest and support of the smaller Member States,
who have much to contribute in the conciliation of Big-
Power differences and in the development of constructive
and mutually advantageous political and economic
co-operation.

The ten points made in my memorandum are
some of them procedural and some of them sub-
stantive. They are not intended to be a definitive
and formal programme. They constitute rather
an outline of preliminary proposals as a basis for
a programme. Taken together, they represent an
over-all approach to the problem of peace based
on the spirit and intentions of the United Nations
Charter and its founders and designed to secure
for this purpose increasing and more effective use
by the Governments of Member States of the ma-
chinery of the United Nations and the specialized
agencies.

Need for a Resumption of Negotiations
Within tlie United Nations

A requirement for the successful launching of a
new effort to revitalize the United Nations and
bring its full resources to bear upon the "cold war"
is to gather around the same table the policy-
making officials of the principal Powers. Most
negotiations in the United Nations are, normally
and rightly, carried on by the permanent repre-
sentatives. But the founders of the United Na-
tions also saw that it would be necessary to bring
together from time to time the men who make
policy as well as the men who execute it.

The provisions in the Charter and in the rules of
procedure for the Security Council for periodic
meetings twice a year were drawn up to meet this
need. Such meetings, if properly conducted,
would provide an opportunity for a review at the
highest level of outstanding issues. Clearly, they
should be most carefully prepared in advance.
There may be, and probably will be, occasions
when these exchanges of views, no matter how
carefully prepared, will fail to bring the parties
closer to agreement. That need not lead to dis-
appointment, provided it is understood in advance
that such meetings cannot be expected to produce
solutions by magic and that they should be re-
garded instead as an important part of a contin-
uingprocess of negotiation — a process which in
the united Nations should never end.

I felt that the time had come when these provi-
sions should be implemented. The extended dead-
lock, the virtual absence of contract between the
two opposing parties for a period of many months,
the increased tempo of propaganda on all sides, the
high state of tension, all seemed to be to underline
the great need for a meeting of the Foreign Min-

302

isters, even if only for the purpose of starting the
wheels of negotiation turning once again.

The emergency created by the breach of the peace
in Korea interrupted my efforts to bring about such
a meeting. The need for it, however, will be
greater than ever when United Nations action has
succeeded in restoring peace to Korea. I do not
believe that Member States adhering to the Charter
can ever accept the doctrine of irreconcilable and
irrevocable division of the world into warring
camps, not so long as the least possibility exists of
preventing a third world war by peaceful settle-
ments based on the principles of the Charter. But
I also believe it will take nothing less than a bold
and enlightened act of statesmanship to bring
about a resumption of negotiations and to halt fur-
ther deterioration towards another world war.

Universality of Membership

The Members of the United Nations are well
aware of my views on universality of membership.
I have expressed them in two previous aimual re-
ports. These views have been strengthened by the
further worsening of the international situation
and by the increasing number of walls and curtains
of clistrust and suspicion that separate the nations.
The United Nations is the one organization in
existence that belongs to the whole world and I
believe every reasonable step should be taken to
enable the whole world to belong to the Organiza-
tion. There are all kinds of governments and all
kinds of economic and social systems. The United
Nations is the place where they should meet to
negotiate, and, when necessary, to mediate and
to conciliate.

The executive heads of the specialized agencies
and I have joined in a report to the Economic and
Social Council in which we have made a strong
plea for the maintenance of the spirit of univer-
sality in the approach to peace and to increased
economic and social well-being. We have asked
all Governments to make renewed efforts towards
achieving in fact true universality in the member-
ship and programmes of the United Nations and
of those of the specialized agencies which are
founded on that prmciple.

United Nations Action

To Raise Standards of Living

I feel that the specialized agencies of the United
Nations have demonstrated their potentialities for
the promotion of peace and prosperity in the Mem-
ber States. Unfortunately, these potentialities re-
main largely unrealized as a result of the non-par-
ticipation of some countries and because of the
rather narrow limits of the aid given by most of
the participating Governments to the specialized
agencies and of the secondary role in foreign pol-
icy generally assigned to their work.

In my report last year, and on other occasions,

Department of State Bulletin

I liave called attention to the immense changes
that hare occurred in Asia since the war. The
peoples of that continent, which includes more
than half the whole population of the world and
possesses the richest undeveloped resources, have
moved and are continuing to move with irresistible
force towards full national emancipation and
equal partnership with the rest of the world. The
United Nations has helped this movement, and will
continue to help it, I hope, in many ways. The
influence of the Organization has been and should
be exerted towards securing the necessary changes
by peaceful means instead of by the use of force.
Although Africa lags behind Asia in the forward
movement towards equality, the peoples of Africa
are equally determined to win their way to a better
life. The United Nations is helping them also.

But there is a further aspect of the problem.
The peoples of Asia and Africa, like the peoples
of other under-developed areas of the world, are
faced with pressing social and economic needs
which require tremendous efforts to meet them, not
least because these efforts are so long overdue. The
extent and nature of these economic and social
needs are not always easily understood by more
fortunate peoples living far away. Nevertheless,
the prol)lems are there and must be wrestled with.

Hundreds of millions of human beings are anx-
iously awaiting the dawn of a new life. Notwith-
standing the complex and difficult character of
the action that needs to be taken, any avoidable
delay at this stage might easily exhaust the pa-
tience of millions — a patience which has long been
heavily taxed. The peoples of Asia and of under-
developed areas in other parts of the world as well,
are calling for action now.

The true interests of the world at large are not
in conflict with this justified desire. The inter-
dependence of all continents and areas does in fact
require a series of bold acts, beginning at the earli-
est possible moment and extending over many
years, to replace the widespread misery and pov-
erty of the under-developed areas by a steadily
increasing prosperity and improved social organi-
zation which, in turn, will prove of benefit to the
whole world.

Viewed in this light, the expanded United Na-
tions programme of technical assistance for eco-
nomic development is a good beginning, but only
a beginning. A vast progi-amme of self-help and
mutual aid is needed, conceived with boldness and
soundly executed, embracing not only technical
assistance but financial investment, and many
other measures to increase industrial and agi'icul-
tural production, to expand world trade and to in-
troduce better techniques for dealing with health,
education and welfare problems.

Clearly, such a programme can be developed
only step by step and it cannot go faster than the
capacity of the Member States to execute it will
allow. Clearly, also, it will be difficult to allocate
sufficient resources unless the competing claim of

arms production on these resources caused by the
"cold war'' can be lessened. I believe, however,
that even the first steps in the development of such
a programme can help to reduce the present
tensions.

Future of the United Nations
and Prospects of World Peace

At the time that this report is written it is not
possible to be confident about the future of the
United Nations and the prospects of world peace.
But it is equally impossible to be hopeless. There
is too much support among the peoples of the
world for the United Nations and too much con-
structive work being carried on under United Na-
tions auspices to pei'mit any of those who bear the
burdens of authority in the Governments of Mem-
bers or in the Secretariat of the United Nations to
relax for an instant in the determination to do
everything possible to save the United Nations as
a universal Organization standing firmly against
war and to make it a stronger instrument for peace
and progress.

If the United Nations is able to emerge intact
and successful from the present crisis, its strength
and influence will be immeasurably enhanced, and
the world will be much closer to lasting peace than
at any time since 1945.

12 July 1950

Tetg\'e Lee
Secretary- General

EXCERPTS FROM STATEMENT

BY SECRETARY-GENERAL TRYGVE LIE >

The job of the United Nations is to do all it can
to prevent a third world war, by conciliation
whenever possible, by force when necessary.

In Korea, there has plainly been a well-prepared
armed attack by North Korean forces upon the
Republic of Korea, which was established under
United Nations auspices.

That attack is being met, as it should be, by
collective United Nations action to repel it and to
restore peace in Korea.

It is my duty as Secretary-General, as it is the
duty of all the member governments, to do every-
thing to bring this United Nations action in Korea
to a successful conclusion.

That is the first priority now.

This does not mean, however, that either the
member governments, or I as Secretary-General,
should abandon efforts for peace by negotiation,
conciliation, and mediation.

' Made on the occasion of the release of the fifth annual
report for an NBC Broadcast by the U.N. and the Univer-
sity of Chicago Round Table on Aug. 6 and released to the
press by the U.N. on the same date.

August 27, 1950

303

Fifth Regular Session of tiie General Assembly

PROVISIONAL AGENDA

Septeinber 19, 1950, Flushing Meadow, New York

U.N. doc. A/1293
Dated July 21, 1950

1. Opening of the session by the Chairman of the delega-
tion of the Philippines

2. Minute of silent prayer or meditation

3. Appointment of a Credentials Committee

4. Election of the President

5. Constitution of the JIain Committees and election of
officers

6. Election of Vice-Presidents

7. Notification by the Secretary-General under Article 12,
paragraph 2, of the Charter

8. Adoption of the agenda

9. Opening of the general debate

10. Report of the Secretary-General on the work of the
Organization

11. Report of the Security Council

12. Report of the Economic and Social Council

13. Report of the Trusteeship Council

14. Election of three non-permanent members of the
Security Council

15. Election of six members of the Economic and Social
Council

16. Election of two members of the Trusteeship Council

17. Appointment of the Secretary-General of the United
Nations

18. Installation of the Assistant Secretary-General in
charge of Conference and General Services

19. Admission of new Members : advisory opinion of the
International Court of Justice (resolution 296 J (IV)
of 22 November 1949)

20. Palestine:

(a) Question of an international regime for the
Jerusalem area and protection of Holy Places :
special report of the Trusteeship Council (reso-
lution 303 (IV) of 9 December 1949)

(b) Assistance to Palestine refugees: report of the
Director of the United Nations Relief and Works
Agency for Palestine Refugees in the Near East
(resolution 302 (IV) of 8 December 1949)

21. Former Italian colonies (resolution 289 (IV) of 21
November 1949) :

(a) Report of the United Nations Commissioner in
Libya

(b) Report of the Administering Powers In Libya

(d) Report of the United Nations Commission for
Eritrea

(e) Report of the Interim Committee of the General
Assembly on the report of the United Nations
Commission for Eritrea

(f) Report of the Interim Committee of the Gen-
eral Assembly on the procedure to be adopted
to delimit the boundaries of the former Italian
colonies in so far as they are not already fixed
by international agreement

22. Threats to the political independence and territorial
integrity of Greece (resolution 288 (IV) of 18 No-
vember 1049) :

(a) Reiwrt of the United Nations Special Commit-
tee on the Balkans

(b) Repatriation of Greek children : report of the
Secretary-General

23. Threats to the political independence and territorial
integrity of China and to the peace of the Far East,
resulting from Soviet violations of the Sino-Soviet
Treaty of Friendship and Alliance of 14 August 1945
and from Soviet violations of the Charter of the
United Nations : report of the Interim Committee of
the General Assembly (resolution 292 (IV) of 8
December 1949)

24. The problem of the independence of Korea : report of
the United Nations Commission on Korea (resolution
293 (IV) of 21 October 1949)

25. Observance in Bulgaria, Hungary and Romania of
human rights and fundamental freedoms: advisory
opinion of die International Court of Justice (resolu-
tion 294 (IV) of 22 October 1949)

26. International control of atomic energy (resolution 299
(IV) of 23 November 1949)

27. Action to achieve or maintain full employment and
economic stability : report of the Economic and Social
Council (resolution 308 (IV) of 25 November 1949)

28. Economic development of under-developed countries :
report of the Economic and Social Council (resolution
306 (IV) of 16 November 1949)

29. Co-ordination between the United Nations and the
specialized agencies :

304

Department of State Bulletin

(a) Agreements between the United Nations and
tlie specialized agencies: reiiort of tlie Econ-
omic and Social Council (resolution 309 (IV)
of 24 November 1949)

(b) Concentration of effort and resources: report
of the Economic and Social Council (resolution
310 (IV) of 24 November 1949)

(c) Administrative budgets of tbe specialized
agencies : report of the Advisory Committee on
Administrative and Budgetary Questions

(d) Administrative and budgetary co-ordination
between the United Nations and the specialized
agencies : report of the Secretary-General

30. Draft Convention on Freedom of Information : report
of the Economic and Social Council (resolution 313
(IV) of 20 October 1949)

31. Advisory social welfare services: report of the Econ-
omic and Social Council (resolution 316 (IV) of 17
November 1949)

32. Refugees and stateless persons (resolution 319 (IV)
of 3 December 1949) :

(a) Provisions for the functioning of the High
Commissioner's Office for Refugees : draft
resolution proposed by the Elconomic and Social
Council

(b) Definitions of the term "refugee" to be applied
by the High Commissioner for Refugees : recom-
mendations of the Economic and Social Council

(c) Problems of assistance to refugees: Memoran-
dum from the General Council of the Inter-
national Refugee Organization of 20 October
1949

(d) Election of the High Commissioner for Refugees

33. Administrative unions affecting Trust Territories:
report of the Trusteeship Council (resolution 326 (IV)
of 15 November 1949)

34. Information from Non-Self-Governing Territories:

(a) Summary and analysis of information trans-
mitted under Article 73e of the Charter : report
of the Secretary-General

(b) Information transmitted under Article 73e of
the Charter: report of the Special Committee

35. Question of Soutli West Africa : advisory opinion of
the International Court of Justice (resolution 338
(IV) of 6 December 1949)

36. Headquarters of the United Nations: report of the
Secretary-General (resolution 350 (IV) of 24 Novem-
ber 1949)

37. Financial reports and accounts, and reports of the
Board of Auditors :

(a) United Nations, for the financial year ended
31 December 1949

(b) United Nations International Children's Emer-
gency Fund, for the financial year ended 31 De-
cember 1949

38. Status of budgetary authorizations for the financial
year 1950 :

(a) Statement of 1950 budget expenses to 30 June
1950

(b) Advances from the Working Capital Fund : re-
port of the Secretary-General (resolution 358
(IV) of 19 December 1949)

(c) Unforeseen and extraordinai-y exi)enses for
1950 : report of the Secretary -General ( resolu-
tion 357 (IV) of 10 December 1949)

(d) Supplementary estimates for 1950: report of
the Secretary-General

39. Budget estimates for the financial year 1951 :

(a) Budget estimates prepared by the Secretary-
General

(b) Salary, allowance and leave system of the
United Nations: report of the Secretary-Gen-
eral

40. Scale of assessments for the apportionment of the ex-
penses of the United Nations: report of the Com-
mittee on Contributions (resolution 343 (IV) of 20'
October 1949)

41. Permanent Financial Regulations of the United Na-
tions : report of the Secretary-General

42. Permanent Staff Regulations of the United Nations:
report of the Secretary-General

43. Appointments to fill vacancies in the membership of
subsidiary bodies of the General Assembly :

(a) Advisory Committee on Administrative and
Budgetary Questions

(b) Committee on Contributions

(d) Investments Committee: confirmation of the-
appointment made by the Secretary-General

(e) United Nations Administrative Tribunal

44. United Nations Joint Staff Pension Fund : annual re-
port of the United Nations Staff Pension Committee

45. Expenses of the Permanent Central Opium Board.
Assessment of non-members of the United Nations,
signatories of the Convention of 19 February 1925-
relating to narcotic drugs: report of the Secretary-
General (resolution 353 (IV) of 24 November 1949)

46. Organization of a United Nations postal administra-
tion: report of the Secretary-General (resolution 342
(IV) of 20 October 1949)

47. United Nations telecommunications system : report of
the Secretary-General (resolution 240 (III) of 18
November 1948)

48. Convention on the declaration of death of missing
persons: report of the Secretary -General (resolution
369 (IV) of 3 December 1949)

49. Question of the majority required for the adoption by
the General Assembly of amendments to and parts of
proposals relating to important questions: report of
the Secretary-General (resolution 362 (IV) of 22
October 1949)

50. Reparation for injuries incurred in the service of the
United Nations: report of the Secretary-General (res-
olution 365 (IV) of 1 December 1949)

51. Designation of non-Member States to which a certified

August 27, 1950

305

copy of the Revised General Act for the Pacific Settle-
ment of International Disputes shall be communicated
by the Secretary-General for the purpose of accession
to this Act: report of the Secretary-General (resolu-
tion 372 (IV) of 3 December 1949)

52. Report of the International Law Commission on the
work of its second session

53. Draft Declaration on Rights and Duties of States :
report of the Secretary-General (resolution 375 (IV)
of 6 December 1949)

54. Draft rules for the calling of non-governmental con-
ferences: report of the Secretary-General (resolution
367 (IV) of 3 December 1949)

55. Registration and publication of treaties and interna-
tional agreements : report of the Secretary-General

56. Regulations to give effect to article III, section 8, of
the Headquarters Agreement between the United Na-
tions and the United States of America : report of the
Secretary-General

57. Reservations to multilateral conventions : item pro-
posed by the Secretary-General

58. Treatment of people of Indian origin in the Union of
South Africa : item proposed by India

59. Permanent invitation to the Arab League to attend
sessions of the General Assembly : item proposed by
Syria

60. The appropriate adjustment of the frontiers between
Egypt and the former Italian colony of Libya with par-
ticular reference to paragraphs 2 and 3 of Annex XI
of the Treaty of Peace with Italy : item proposed by
Egypt

61. Develoi>ment of a 20-year program for achieving peace
through the United Nations : item proposed by the
Secretary-General

62. Recognition by the United Nations of the representa-
tion of a Member State : item proposed by Cuba

NAC Deputies Work To Increase
Strength of Defensive Forces

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press August 11]

I am encouraged by the work which the North
Atlantic Council deputies have done so far and
believe that in the future they will be able to give
substantial assistance to integrating individual
national efforts of the North Atlantic Treaty coun-
tries into effective common action. Mr. Spofford
has told me of the action which the deputies took
during their first 2 weeks of meeti)igs. This action
was along two parallel lines of effort in increasing
the defensive strength in the North Atlantic area.

The deputies requested the appropriate North

Atlantic Treaty Organization bodies to prepare
expanded and accelerated military production pro-
grams for high priority items of military equip-
ment and to report these to the deputies later this
month.

The deputies also agreed to consult the govern-
ments with regard to the immediate steps which
the governments will take to increase effective
military forces for the defense of the North At-
lantic area within a year's time and to report these
plans in the meetings of the deputies later this
month. Mr. Spofford, the chairman of the North
Atlantic Council of Deputies, was requested to
consult with Secretary Johnson, chairman of the
Defense Committee, to obtain recommendations as
to further action the deputies might take with a
view to immediate strengthening of defense forces.
These reports will constitute the basis for further
work by the deputies when they reconvene on
August 22.

Mr. Spofford has told me that the deputies were
convinced that, as a result of the act of aggression
committed against the Republic of Korea and the
fact that aggression in other parts of the world
cannot be ignored, it is even more urgent than
before that immediate steps be taken to strengthen
the defenses of the North Atlantic area. Mr.
Spofford believes that the deputies are determined
to spare no efforts in assisting the governments in
rendering the support which the situation requires.

Hooker A. Doolittle Leaves
for Indonesia

Hooker A Doolittle, United States representa-
tive on the United Nations Commission for Indo-
nesia, left New York on August 3 for his new post.
Mr. Doolittle received his commission of appoint-
ment from President Truman on July 29, follow-
ing Senate confirmation. He holds the personal
rank of Minister and will replace Edwai'd A. Dow,
Jr., a Foreign Service officer who has been the
acting United States representative on the Com-
mission since December 28, 1949.

Mr. Doolittle will join representatives of Aus-
tralia and Belgium as the third member of the
United Nations Commission charged with observ-
ing the implementation of the agreements entered
into last year by the Netherlands Government and
Indonesian representatives at the Hague round-
table conference. These agreements provide for
the sovereign status of the Indonesians within the
Netherlands Union and set forth in detail the ways
in which relations between the Netherlands and its
former colony are to be determined.

306

Deparlmenf of Stafe BuUetin

United States Expresses Views in ECOSOC on Full Employment

Excerpts From Statement hy Isador Luhin

U.S. Representative in the Economic and Social Council ^

Mr. President : As you pointed out at our last
session, the members of the Economic and Social
Council were obligated to do three things with re-
gard to the experts' report on full employment.
They were to study it carefully, to give it as wide
publicity as possible, and, to express the views of
their Governments on the report and to submit
any alternative proposals which they may have.

My Government attempted to meet these obli-
gations fully. Various agencies and departments
of the United States Government have studied the
report in detail. Mj' Government has also sought
the views of organized labor groups, farmers' or-
ganizations, business groups, and citizens' associa-
tions. It has received their valuable comments
and suggestions.

On the basis of these studies and discussions, I
shall undertake to express the views of my Gov-
ermnent on the experts' report.

The Economic and Social Council and the Sec-
retary-General's action in appointing a committee
of experts was prompted by the desire of the mem-
ber nations to give more concrete meaning to the
pledge of a full employment policy in the United
Nations Charter. This pledge represents accept-
ance of new responsibilities by governments, and
it reflects a deeply rooted insistence of the people
all over the world to banish fear of want and
insecurity.

May I reaffirm, Mr. President, that the Gov-
ermnent and the people of the United States ac-
cept these responsibilities. They are determined
that our current high levels of economic activity
shall be maintained and strengthened.

We agree with the experts that the full employ-
ment pledge of the United Nations Charter and
similar declarations of national policy by individ-
ual countries mark a "historic phase in the evolu-

' Marie at plenary meeting of the 11th session of Ecosoc
at Geneva on July 17 and released to the press by the U.S.
delegation, Economic and Social Council, on the same date.

tion of the modern conception of the functions and
responsibilities of the democratic state."

Our own declaration of policy in this respect
is embodied in legislative action by our Congress.
Expressing the interests of our people, the Con-
gress of the United States, in the Employment Act
of 1946, declared:

. . . that it is the continuing policy and responsibility
of the Federal Government to use all practicable means
consistent with its needs and obligations and other essen-
tial considerations of national policy, with the assistance
and cooperation of industry, agriculture, labor, and State
and local governments, to coordinate and utilize all its
plans, functions, and resources for the purpose of creating
and maintaining. In a manner calculated to foster and
promote free competitive enterijrise and the general wel-
fare, conditions under which there will l^e afforded useful
employment opportunities. Including self-employment, for
those able, willing, and seeking to work, and to promote
maximum employment, production, and purchasing power.

The popular demand upon which this declara-
tion of a full employment policy was based was
not capricious or fleeting. It was born of two
cataclysmic experiences, shared also by the rest
of the world : the experience of the great depres-
sion of the thirties and the experience of the war.
The first gave us the determination that, never
again, shall we tolerate the frustration and waste
that result from depressions; the second demon-
strated in dramatic contrast what human initiative
and skill and modern technology can produce
under free governments, and with free labor, if all
resources are effectively employed.

The efforts of the Government to protect our
people from the hardships of depression developed
from temporary emergency measures into new pro-
grams of lasting value. Thus, the functions of
government today, as compared with 20 years ago,
reflect profound changes in our social and eco-
nomic policies and institutions. We now have so-
cial security for the aged, the unemployed, and
the dependent. Bank deposit insurance, the regu-
lation of the security market, and the stimulation
of certain types of investment have become ac-

Awgusf 27, 7950

307

cepted functions of our Government. Public
housing programs are being forwarded side by
side with measures to stimulate private housing.
We aid our farmers through farm price and inconae
supports. We also have undertaken to make agri-
culture more productive and farm life more attrac-
tive by soil conservation programs by extending
rural roads, schools, and electric power lines. The
conservation and development of our resources,
particularly in the field of water and power, have
become a major responsibility of government.
These public functions have been carried forward
in a manner that promotes both private initiative
and the general welfare.

Conception Gained From War Experience

The experience of the war gave us renewed con-
fidence that we could raise our sights still further.
It gave us a conception of what we could expect
an economy of free enterprise and free labor to
produce under peaceful conditions. It gave tan-
gible evidence of the substantial rise in standards
of nutrition, clothing, and other amenities of life
that are possible with modern technology.

Even before the war was over, we, the people of
the United States, through our Government and
private organizations, undertook to make real the
promise of these potentialities of our economy.

We surveyed our housing conditions and ap-
praised the tremendous improvements which were
needed and possible.

We assessed our natural resources, our rivers,
forests, and soil and inventoried the work that had
to be done in order to preserve and effectively
utilize what nature had given us.

We reviewed our educational, cultural, medical,
and recreational facilities and noted the great and
sustained effort that was necessary to provide a
growing population with progressive standards in
these fields.

And, equally important, we assessed the destruc-
tion and suffering that war had brought to many
areas of the world; and we determined that we
would not fail in doing our part in a joint effort
of international reconstruction.

As we envisaged all the work that should be
done, we were in hope that we were entering a
phase of peace and world-wide coopei'ation and
that the resources we had utilized for war could
be entirely converted to urgent peacetime purposes.
To a large extent, we did convert such resources
to the purposes of peace.

A wartime Federal budget of almost 100 billion
dollars in the fiscal year 194.5 was cut down to be-
low 34 billion dollars by the fiscal year 1948. Mili-
tary and defense expenditures, alone, were cut
from 8.5 billion dollars to 11 billion dollars. As
fast as resources were released from war use, they
were devoted to replacing and expanding indus-
trial equipment, to restocking depleted inventories,
to liuilding homes, and to increasing consumption
and raising the standard of living.

By 1947, it became evident that our hopes for a
peaceful and cooperative world were not material-
izing to the extent we had expected. As a result,
we felt compelled to increase budget expenditures
for defense from 11 billion dollars in the fiscal
year 1948 to 13.5 billions in subsequent years.
Tliis was a moderate increase. But the important
thing to us was that it was an increase. We had
hoped for a reduction. This increase in armament
expenditures, together with the requii-ements of
foreign aid programs, during a period of ex-
panded domestic investments, created such a de-
mand on our resources that we had to combat infla-
tionary trends and a strain on our labor resources
rather than, as some had expected, fight deflation
and unemployment.

Mr. President, I submit that the cynical sugges-
tion that the United States has relied on increased
armament and foreign aid programs to maintain
full employment is an unmitigated distortion.
The truth is the vei-y opposite. The magnitude of
these programs forced restraint and postponement
of many urgently needed domestic projects. The
fact that, now, 5 years after the end of the war,
many of our schools ai'e still badly overcrowded,
many of our roads in poor repair, and many of our
housing and community development projects are
being undertaken at a pace far below our need can
be attributed in major degree to the competing
needs of defense and international aid ex-
penditures.

The profound changes in the economy of the
United States that have taken place during the
past two decades have been accompanied by a tre-
mendous increase in our economic strength. The
annual output of the United States has grown
from 145 billion dollars in 1929 to 270 billions in
1950, measured in constant dollars. Our total an-
nual investment in plant and equipment is more
than twice as high as in the prewar period. In
terms of 1950 dollars, it has risen from 11.4 to
24.7 billions. We built more than a million new
dwelling units in 1949. We shall build more than
a million and a quarter in 1950. Consumption
per capita, measured in real terms, is now more
than one-third above the prewar level of 1939.

Nor does this per capita average tell the whole
story. Compared with prewar years, the distri-
bution of incomes has become somewhat more even,
with the result that the standard of living in lower
income brackets has increased by substantially
more than this average.

These changes in our economy have been re-
flected not only in the increases in our total output
and in the higher living standards of our people
but also in a greatly increased shock resistance and
resiliency in our economy as demonstrated by the
course of the recession of 1949 and the subsequent
recovery.

Wlien industrial production decreased by more
than 10 percent over the course of half a year, the
flow of income and the rate of consumption hardly

308

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

fell at all. As compared with 59.6 million in June
of a j-eai' ago, civilian employment last month —
before the attack on Korea — aggregated 61.5 mil-
lion, a ]5eacetime record for this season of the yeai'.
Unemployment, on an adjusted basis, fell from
approximately 6 ]:)ercent of tlie labor force to less
than 5 percent. From the low point of July 19-19,
the index of production has risen, in June 1950,
by 22 percent.

The moderate character of the recession of 1949,
as compared to the downturn following World
War I, has siven renewed confidence to American
business, tlans for new plant and equipment
have been revised upward and inventories
expanded.

Gratifying and reassuring as this rapid recov-
ery has been, it has by no means removed our
concern over possible future depression and large
scale unemployment. Should the need arise, we
are prepared to put into effect, any or all of the
familiar devices. We have programs in prepara-
tion for legislative adoption. The devices that we
shall use will be determined by the causes and
character of such emergency as may develop.

However, we are not satisfied simply with
measures by which the Government tries to offset
fluctuations in the economy. We are aiming be-
yond that — at a more ambitious goal, namely, the
promotion of a private enterprise system in which
the various sectors grow in balanced proportion.
This task of economic stabilization requires more
than government action ; it requires a cooperative
effort, shared alike by business, farmers, labor, and
government.

It cannot be overemphasized that economic
stabilization is not merely an isolated technical
problem. The policy of the United States, as
embodied in the Employment Act, aims at recon-
ciling the objectives of economic and social prog-
ress, economic security, and individual liberty.

We appreciate the fact that these three objec-
tives, if pursued to the extreme, might become in-
compatible with one another. The most rapid
economic and social advancement, if pursued with-
out regard to any other consideration, may create
instability. Absolute assurance of economic se-
curity might interfere with the flexibility needed
for progress, or might lead to a degree of economic
regulation and regimentation that would interfere
with desirable individual freedom in economic
affairs.

We recognize that each nation must work a
reconciliation among these objectives in its own
way.

Our own experience has brought home to us
that freedom, progress, and security are goals that
are possible of achievement and that none need be
sacrificed for the others.

Summary and Conclusion

Mr. President, in summary, my Government

takes the following position with respect to the ex-
jjerts' report:

With respect to the domestic measures :

1. We accept the idea of full employment tar-
gets. We prefer however, that they be expressed
not only in terms of unemployment but also in
terms of employment, production, and other rele-
vant factors to provide more effective guides in
the formulation of full employment programs.

2. We accept the proposition that each country
should adopt and announce a comprehensive pro-
gram for full employment.

3. We believe that the experts overemphasize
compensatory measures and treat inadequately
those measures which are designed to promote
balanced economic expansion.

■1. We agree with the experts that each country
should prepare suitable programs ready for adop-
tion in case of substantial unemployment. We
do not agree, however, that mechanical schemes for
automatic compensatory changes in tax rates, so-
cial security contributions, or in other programs
are effective or desirable means of bringing about
stabilization.

5. We agi'ee with the recommendation that each
country should adapt its legislative and adminis-
trative procedures and its statistical services to
the requirements of a full employment policy.

With respect to the international measures :

1. We agree with the recommendation for con-
sultation among government to establish a new
equilibrium in world economic relationships but
prefer to use the existing machinery of the United
Nations for that purpose.

2. We favor a larger and more stable interna-
tional flow of investment funds, both public and
private, but we disagree with the recommendation
that such funds should be provided under an auto-
matic or formula scheme.

3. We believe that the International Monetary
Fund can play an important part in mitigating
the international effects of ecouomic fluctuations,
particularly when more countries balances of pay-
ments are in approximate equilibrium. But we
do not accept the experts' proposal that countries
suffering depression be obligated automatically to
deposit their currency and that other countries
have automatic drawing rights on such currencies,
according to a predetermined formula.

Our recommendations for action by this Coun-
cil are incorporated in a draft resolution. Briefly,
we recommend that the member governments of
the United Nations should periodically report to
the Secretary-General on their economic situa-
tion and on their targets, policies, and programs.
He, in turn, should analyze these reports and make
studies bearing on the problem of full employment
in the world economy in cooperation with the ap-
propriate specialized agencies. These reports and
studies should be considered by the Economic and

August 27, 7950

309

Employment Commission. The Commission
should appraise the adequacy of national full em-
ployment policies and programs, in both their do-
mestic and international aspects, examine them for
possible conflict with each other, and make recom-
mendations for action to the Council.

We further recommend that the Seci'etary-Gen-
eral appoint a group of experts to prepare a report
on underemployment, particularly in underdevel-
oped countries.

Mr. President, such action by the Council would,
I believe, be the logical development of activities
already initiated by the United Nations. It would
be a further implementation of our pledge in the
Charter to take joint and separate action in pursuit
of full employment.

Mr. President, May I add a final word.

The American people will not again tolerate a
major depression. Our pledge to keep our economy
on an even keel is embedded in our laws. We are

determined to use every resource at our disposal
to maintain and expand our high levels of economic
activity. This is a solid political fact.

Through our free institutions we shall pursue a
policy of steadily rising production and employ-
ment. We shall do this not for domestic reasons
alone. We shall do it, also, because we recognize
the place of the American economy in the world
economic and political structure. We know that
we can no more live in economic isolation than in
political isolation.

The people of the United States recognize their
responsibilities in this respect. We trust that the
knowledge of this fact by the other members of
the United Nations will be a basic factor in their
own economic thinking and in the making of their
economic policies. With such mutual understand-
ing and confidence, we can drive ahead in our ef-
forts to promote the great objectives of the United
Nations.

Assistance Available to American Business

Through the ECA Guaranty Program in Marshall Plan Countries

The following information is made available iij the
Office of Small Business of the Economic Cooperation Ad-
ministration.

The purpose of this bulletin is to acquaint
American manufacturers with the investment op-
portunities for American business firms in Euro-
pean enterprises as a result of the recently ex-
panded provisions of the Marshall Plan law.

In order to increase the participation of private
enterprise in achieving European recovery, the
United States Congress has provided greater scope
and broadened government protection to private
American investment through the Economic Co-
operation Act of 1950.

Under the new legislation, both large and small
businessmen who invest in or license foreign pro-
ducers in Marshall Plan countries, such intangi-
bles as techniques, patents, and processeSj will be
able to obtain guaranties of convertibility into dol-
lars of the foreign-currency receipts received from
such investment or license. Of significance also
to American manufacturers, is the provision which
authorizes the guaranty against the risk of loss
through expropriation or confiscation by the ac-
tion of a participating country, a successor gov-
ernment or governing authority.

To assist the American manufacturers in locat-
ing interested foreign firms, the ECA's Office of
Small Business has established a "contact clear-
ing house," the function of which is to put Amer-
ican manufacturers in touch with receptive over-
seas companies and vice versa.

Under this program, ECA's Office of Small
Business is bringing together American companies
and foreign firms located in Marshall Plan coun-
tries which are interested in entering into con-
tracts for American techniques, patents, processes,
services, and in some cases, equipment. For ex-
ample, such arrangements may be for investment
of dollars, equipment, services, techniques, pat-
ents, or processes, by the American manufacturer
in return for an interest in the foreign enterprise ;
or for a licensing agreement calling for royalty
payments by the foreign firm to the American
manufacturer for the use of patents or processes.

Through this program, ECA overseas is vigor-
ously contacting banking institutions, trade, com-
mercial, and other associations which are in a
favorable position to locate interested foreign
firms that are desirous of entering into contracts
with American companies to manufacture and
market abroad those American products for which
foreign markets are or may be limited by "dollar
shortage." Under this program, our overseas
offices, upon receipt of information regarding for-
eign firms interested in entering into such arrange-
ments, are passing such information on to the
Office of Small Business in Washington to be dis-
tributed to ECA Field Counselors, the Depart-
ment of Commerce Field Offices, and any subse-
quent channels which the Office of Small Business
shall designate.

The Department of Commerce will continue to
provide American companies interested in such

310

Deporfmenf of State Bulletin

arrangements with an_y information which would
assist them in deciding whether such arrangements
are feasible. For example, the Department of
Commerce will make available to American com-
panies any information which the Department
may have or can procure with respect to the mar-
ketability of these products either within the area
in which such products would be manufactured or
possible receptivity in foreign markets. The De-
partment of Commerce has available the Interna-
tional Reference series relating to the establish-
ment of a business abroad, living and operation
costs, and pertinent data on the laws, regulations,
labor conditions, costs, etc. The Department also
issues periodical summaries of import-control
regulations and special releases on registration
fees, labor legislation, and similar factors pertain-
ing to this subject. The Department can also pro-
vide information on communication, transporta-
tion, power, and other public-utility facilities.
The technique of requesting the Foreign Service
of the Department of Commerce to make a check
on the foreign firms in which the American com-
pany might be interested can and will be employed
if desired.

The maximum service that may be rendered by
this plan will extend only to effecting appropriate
contact between the American companies and the
foreign companies interested in entering into such
arrangements. Any negotiations subsequent to
this stage will be carried on entirely by the Ameri-
can and foreign companies through ordinary busi-
ness procedures. It should be noted, however, that
negotiations concerning guaranty coverage should
be carried on with the industrial guaranties
branch, industry division, ECA, prior to the
consummation of the above negotiations between
the American company and the foreign firm. It
should also be noted that foreign government ap-
proval under the guaranty program is required
as a condition precedent to any contract entered
into between an American company and a foreign
firm. The questionnaire attached (form ECA
385) is not to be construed as an application for a
guaranty.

American manufacturers interested in having
information regarding their company distributed
throughout the Marshall Plan countries, should
complete the enclosed questionnaire in its entirety
in duplicate and forward to the Office of Small
Business, Economic Cooperation Administration,
800 Connecticut Avenue, Washington 25, D.C.

Charles A. Richards
Special Assistant to the Administrator

for Small Business

Attachment [Not printed.]

Air Transport Agreement
With France Amended

[Released to the press August 9]

By an exchanyc of notes of June 23 and July 11, 1950,
the text of the air transport services agreevient between
the Government of the Republic of France and the Oov-
ernment of the United States of America of March 27,
19!fS teas amended. The text of the United States note,
accepted in the French note, follows.

The Embassy of the United States of America presents
its compliments to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and
has the honor to refer to the Ministry's Note of January
25, 1950.' The Embassy is instructed by the Department
of State to inform the Ministry that the Government of
the United States of America is prepared, in at;cordance
witli the request of the French Government, set forth in
the Ministry's Note under reference, to grant Miami as
the new terminal to Air France on Route No. 4 in Sched-
ule I to the Air Transport Services Agreement concluded
between the two Governments on March 27, 1946. Ac-
cordingly, it is proposed that the description of Route
No. 4 in Schedule I (Routes to be served by the Air Car-
riers of the French Republic) be amended to read as
follows :

"4. Martinique via Guadeloupe and via intermediate
points to Puerto Rico, and beyond via the Dominican
Republic and Haiti to Miami ; in both directions."

The Government of the United States further proposes
that Route 2 in Schedule II to this aforesaid Agreement
(Routes to be served by the Air Carriers of the United
States) be amended to read as follows :

"2. Tlie United States via intermediate points over the
North Atlantic and Spain to Marseille or Nice and beyond
Milan, Budapest and points south of the parallel of Buda-
pest to Turkey and thence via intermediate points to a
connection with Route 8 and beyond on said route ; in
both directions."

The Embassy will be glad to receive confirmation of
the acceptance of the above proposals by the Ministry
of Foreign Affairs. It is understood that this Note, to-
gether with the Ministry's affirmative reply con.stitutes
the amendment of the Route-Annex to the Air Transport
Services Agreement of Blarch 27, 1946, to the extent speci-
fied in these notes exchanged between the Ministry of
Foreign Affairs and this Embassy, such amendment to
be effective from the date of the Ministry's Note.

Letters of Credence

Haiti

The newly appointed Ambassador of the Repub-
lic of Haiti, Gustave Laraque, presented his cre-
dentials to the President on August 7, 1950. For
translation of the Ambassador's remarks and the
President's reply, see Department of State press
release 805 of August 7.

' Not here printed.

Augusf 21, 7950

311

I. G. Farben Creditors Advised To File Claims Immediately

{Released to the press August 7]

The Department of State announced today that
the United States High Connnissioner for Ger-
many advises that all creditors with outstanding
claims against 170 former companies controlled by
the I. G. Farben Industries AG, which is presently
in dissolution, are required to file their claims with
the Tripartite I. G. Farben Control Office in
Frankfui't.

The following instructions have been issued to-
gether with a list of 170 companies controlled by
the I. G. Farben Combine:

All creditors who assert claims not yet satis-
fied against any of the following companies and
whose claims originated prior to July 5, 1945, are
hereby required to file their claims with the Tri-
partite I. G. Farben Control Office, 28 Mainzer-
landstrasse, Frankfurt/Main, Germany, as fol-
lows :

Creditors having their legal residence, their le-
gal seat, or the seat of their management

within Germany, within three months after
the date of this publication;

outside of Germany but within Europe, within
four inonths after the date of this publication ;

outside of Europe, within six months after the
date of this publication.

The claims should be filed in three copies, sep-
arately for each debtor company, and should con-
tain the following statements:

(a) full name and address of the creditor,

(b) the creditor's present domicile and na-
tionality and his domicile and nationality at the
time when his claim came into existence,

(d) amount of the claim as at July 5, 1945,

(e) brief description of the claim and it.°
origin,

(f ) reference to records evidencing the claim,
and to correspondence, if any, referring to such
claim.

Following is the list of companies against which
claims are to be filed :

Agfa-Photo GmbH, Dusseldorf

Agfa-Photo GmbH, Frankfurt

Agfa-Photo GmbH, Hamburg

Agfa-Photo GmbH, Hannover

Agfa-Photo GmbH, Koeln

Agfa-Photo GmbH, Muenchen

Agfa-Photo GmbH, Stuttgart

Aitiengesellschaft fuer Stickstoffduenger, Knapsack

Aktlengesellschaft zur gemeinnuetziijen Besehaffung von

Wohnungen, Frankfurt/Main, -Hoechst
Alkali GmbH

AUgemeine Verwaltungs-Gesellschaft mbH
Alzwerke GmbH
Anorgana GmbH

Anorgana-Gefolgschaftshilfe GmbH
Astra Grundstuetks A. G.
Bad Homburger Heilquellen GmbH
Badische Saphir-Schleifwerke GmbH
Carl Bauer & Co. (O. H. G.)

Bayrische Essigessenz-Verkaufsstelle Chr. Dederer GmbH
Bayrlsche StickstofCwerke A. G.
Beamtenerholungsheim Saarow GmbH
Behring-Institut Berlin GmbH
Behringwerke A. G.
Bielefelder Sackfabrlk GmbH
Bourjau & Co. K. G.

Dr. Heinrich von Brunck Gedaechtnisstiftung GmbH
Carbidkontor GmbH
Celluloid-\'erkaufs-GmbH
Chemiewerk Homburg A. G.
Chemiscbe Forschungsgesellschaft mbH
Chemisclie Studiengesellschaft "Uniwapo" GmbH
Chemische Verwertungsgesellschaft Oberhausen mbH
Chemische Werke Huels GmbH
Chlorzink-Produkte GmbH
Citrovin-Fabrik GmbH
Clarashall GmbH

Consortium fuer elektrochemische Industrie GmbH
Cuprama Spinnfaser GmbH
Curta & Co. GmbH

Deutsch-Koloniale Gerbstoff-Ge.sellschaft mbH
Deutsche Edelsteingesellschaft vorm. Hermann Wild A. G.
Deutsche Laenderbank A. G.
Deutsche Oxhydric GmbH
Deutsche Sprengchemie GmbH
Donar GmbH fuer Apparatebau
G. C. Dornheim A. G.
Drawin GmbH
Drugofa GmbH

Duisburger Kupferhuette (A, G.)

Dynamit-Actien-Gesellschaft vorm. Alfred Nobel & Co.
Eckbert & Ziegler GmbH
Eibia GmbH fuer chemisclie Produkte
Eibia Gefolgschaftsfuersorge GmbH
Elektrochemische Produkte GmbH
Elektrochemische Werke Breslau GmbH

312

Department of State Bulletin

Elektroschmelzwerk Kempten A. G.

Elite Oiuiuistuecks GmbH

Ethyl GmbH

Faserholz GmbH

Fassholzfabrik Goldbach GmbH

Fertilia Chemische Werke A. G.

Fluorit-Werke GmbH

Fluor-rrodukte GmbH

Flusspatwerke GmbH

Fliiss- und Schwei'spatwerke Pforzheim Doeppenschmitt

& Co. GmbH
Friedrichsberger Bank e. GmbH
Fusger GiMindstuecks-A. G.
Gefolgschaftshilfe der Aktiengesellschaft f. Stickstoffduen-

ger GmbH, Knapsack
Gefolgschaftshilfe der Curta & Co. GmbH, Berlin e. V.
Gefolgschaftshilfe GmbH der Firma Friedrich Uhde K. G.
Gemeinnuetzige Baugesellschaft mbH
Gemeinnuetzige Siedlungsgesellschaft Duisburger Kiip-

ferhuette mbH
Gemeinnuetzige Siedlungsgesellschaft Kalle mbH
Gemeinnuetzige Wohnungs-Gesellschaft mbH, Leverkusen
Gemeinnuetziges Wohnungsunteinehmen Chemische

Werke Huels, gmbH
Gemeinnuetziges Wohnungsunternehmen der I. G. Farben-

industrie A. G. Frankfurt GmbH
Gemeinnuetziges Wohnungsunternehmen I. G. GmbH, Lud-

wlgshafen
Gustav Genschow & Co. A. G.
Gesellschaft fuer Aufbereitung mbH
Gesellschaft fuer Synthese-Produkte mbH
Gesellschaft mbH zur Verwertung chemischer Erzeugnisse
Gewerkschaft Auguste Victoria
Gewerkschaft des konsolidierten Steinkohlenbergwerkes

"Breitenbach"
Gewerkschaft Goetzenhain zu Darmstadt
Gewerkschaft Stein V
Gewerkschaft Stein VII
Gewerkschaft Stein IX
Gewerkschaft Stein X

"Griesogen" Griesheimer Autogen-Verkaufs-GmbH
Grundstuecks-Verwaltungsgesellschaft "Osten" mbH, Ber-
lin
Guano-Werke A. G.

Handelsgesellschaft Auguste Victoria (O. H. G.)
Handels- nnd Industrie Kontor GmbH
Hoelkenseide GmbH in Liqu.
Hoffman & Engelmann A. G.
Hoffman & Engelmann Gefolgschaftshilfe GmbH
Hruby & Co. (O. H. G.)
Huetten-Chemle GmbH
Igerussko Handelsgesellschaft mbH
I. G.-Gefolgschaftshilfe GmbH, Frankfurt
Indanthren-Haus Frankfurt GmbH
Indanthren-Haus Hamburg GmbH
Indanthren-Haus Koeln GmbH
Indanthren-Haus Muenchen GmbH
Indanthren-Haus Stuttgart GmbH
Kalle & Co. A. G.
Kalle Gefolgschaftshilfe GmbH
"Karato" GmbH
Klueser & Co. K. G.
Koeln-Rottweil A. G.
Lagerstein Verkaufsge.sellschaft mbH
Laenderbank-Fugger Unterstuetzungs-Einrlchtung GmbH
Lindener Zuendhuetchen- und Patronenfabrik A. G.
"Liveg" Lizenz-Verwertungs-GmbH
Luranil-Baugesellschaft mbH
Magnetophon GmbH
"Movea" GmbH

Professor Dr. Paul Mueller-Stiftung GmbH
Niedersachsen Oel-Gesellschaft mbH
Pallas GmbH Konzernversicherung

Pensionskasse der Angestellten der I. G. Farbenindustrie
A. G. Frankfurt/M, Versicherungsverein auf Gegen-
seitigkeit
Pensionskasse der Angestellten der I. G. Farbenindustrie
A. G. Leverkusen am Rhein, Versicherungsvereign auf
Gegenseitigkeit

August 27, 1950

Pensionskasse der Angestellten der I. G. Farbenindustrie

A. G. Ludwigshafen am Rhein, Versicherungsverein

auf Gegenseitigkeit
Plastro-Gesellschaft mbH
Pulverfabrik Hasloch a. M. GmbH
"Pyrodur" Vereinigte Haertenmaschinen GmbH
Pyrophor-Metallgesellschaft A. G.
Rheinische Elektrodenfabrik GmbH
Rheinische Gummi- und Celluloidfabrik A. G.
Rheinisches Spritzgusswerk GmbH
Rheinisch-Westfaelische Sprengstoff A. G.
Roheisenverkaufsgesellschaft Duisburger Kupferhuette

mbH
Sauerstofe-Fabrik Berlin GmbH
"Schildkroete" Rheinische Dauerwaesche- und Kunst-

stoffwarenfabrik GmbH
Hermann und Margarethe Sehmitz-Stiftung GmbH
Schwefel GmbH
Schwefelnatrium GmbH
Selektor-Bau- und Handelsgesellschaft mbH
"Sextra" Schwefel-Extraktions- und Raffinations-GmbH
Siedlungsgesellschaft Wasag GmbH
Sprengstoff Verkaufsgesellschaft mbH
Steedener Kalwerke GmbH
Stickstoff-Ost GmbH
Stickstoft-Syndikat GmbH
Walter Strehle GmbH

Studiengesellschaft fuer Metallgewinnung mbH
SuperphosphatXahrik Nordenham A. G.
Terra-Grundstuecks GmbH
Titan-Gesellschaft mbH
Ingenieur-Buero Friedrich Uhde K. G.
"Venditor" Kunststoff-Verkaufs-GmbH
Vereinigte Sauerstoffwerke GmbH

Verkaufsgemeinschaft Pyroteehnischer Fabriken GmbH
Verkaufsgesellschaft fuer KungststofC-Erzuegnisse mbH
Verkaufsstelle fuer Oxalsaeure und Ameisensaeure GmbH
Versuchswerk fuer Kautschukverarbeitung GmbH in Liqu
Vertilungsstelle fuer Chlorkalk (Ges. des Buergerl.

Rechts)
Waaren-Commissions A. G.
Dr. Alexander Wacker Gesellschaft fuer Elektrochemische

Industrie GmbH
Gebr. Wandsleben GmbH
Wasag-Chemie A. G.
Westfaelisch-Anhaltische Sprengstoff A. G. Chemische

Fabriken
Westfaelische Leichtmetallwerke GmbH
Westgas GmbH
WolfC & Co. K. G. a. A.

Worbla Celluloid-Handels-Gesellschaft mbH
Ziegelei Graesbeck GmbH
Zuenderwerke Ernst Bruen GmbH
Zellglas-Export-Syndikat GmbH

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

Confirmations

On July 26, the Senate confirmed the following nomina-
tions :

John E. Peurifoy to be American Ambassador Ex-
traordinary and Plenipotentiary to Greece and to serve
concurrently and without compensation as chief of the
American Mission for Aid to Greece;

C. Tyler Wood as deputy United States special repre-
sentative in Europe, with the rank of Ambassador
Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary.

313

Public Notices Affecting U.S. Property Owners in Germany'

Land Central Banks, Law No. 66

Whereas the establishment of the Bank Deutscher
Laender has made It necessary to amend and coordinate
the legislation establishing Land Central Banks :

It is hereby ordered as follows :

I. LEGAL STATUS

Section 1

1. The Land Central Banks are juridical persons under
public law and the seat of each of the said Banks is as
follows :

In the Land of Bavaria — Munich ;
In the Land of Bremen — Bremen ;
In the Land of Hesse — Frankfurt a/M ;
In the Land of Wuerttemberg-Baden — Stuttgart.
Each of the said Banks is authorized to maintain
branches within the Land in which it has its seat.

2. The Board of Directors shall decide upon the estab-
lishment of branches and upon their organization. The
decision requires the consent of the Bank Supervisory
Authority.

II. FUNCTIONS

Section Z

Within the provisions of Military Government Law No.
60 (Revised) "Establishment of a Bank Deutscher
Laender," and of any legislation issued from time to time
in pursuance thereof, a Land Central Bank shall have the
following functions which are more particularly specified
in Sections 13 to 17 inclusive :

1. To regulate the circulation of currency and the supply
of credit ;

2. To promote the solvency and liquidity of credit in-
stitutions and to hold and administer the required mini-
mum reserves against deposits in credit institutions ;

3. To act as the sole fiscal agent of the Land in respect
of funds supplied as new currency under Article XV of
Law No. 01 (Currency Law) or obtained from taxation,
when required by the Land to invest Land deposits in
equalization claims issued by the Land, provided that the
Bank may be required at any time by the Land to re-
purchase such claims; to execute financial transactions
for, or grant short-term credits to, the Land or corpora-
tions of Public Law insofar as these tasks are not incum-
bent on other institutions ;

4. To assist non-cash transfers and clearing of checks

' 15 Fed. Reg. lOSlff and 1546. The above laws, procla-
mations, and regulations, issued by the Military Govern-
ment for Germany (U.S.) and/or the Allied Commission
are deemed to be of interest to certain U.S. citizens as
having legal effect upon them or their property.

within the Land and to assist in financial transactions
with other German Laender and with foreign countries
in accordance with Directives of the Bank Deutscher
Laender ;

5. To attend to the safekeeping and management of
securities and to their transfer ;

6. A Land Central Bank shall subscribe to the capital of
the Bank Deut.scher Laender as provided in Military Gov-
ernment Law No. 60, Revised, "Establishment of a Bank
Deutscher Laender."

III. ORGANIZATION

Section 3

1. Each Bank shall be managed by the Board of
Managers which shall consist of the President, Vice Presi-
dent and the number of other officers required by its
by-laws.

2. The Board of Managers shall require for its decisions
a simple majority of the votes east; the vote of the Presi-
dent shall be decisive in the event of a tie.

3. The President and the Vice President shall be ap-
pointed by the Minister President upon the recommenda-
tion of the Minister of Finance; the other members of the
Board of Managers shall be appointed by the Board of
Directors upon the recommendation of the President.

4. The term of office of the members of the Board of
Managers shall be five years. Reappointment is permis-
sible. During tlie first five years of the existence of a
Land Central Bank, a shorter term of office may be fixed
by the by-laws for the members of the Board, other than
the President.

5. Upon recommendation of the Bank Supervisory
Authority any member of the Board of Managers may be
discharged at any time, for important reasons, by the
appointing authority.

Section 4

1. The Board of Managers shall represent the Land
Central Bank in judicial iiroceedings and all otlier
matters.

2. Declarations of the Board of Managers are binding
upon the Land Central Bank when made by two members
of the Board of Managers ; such declarations may also be
made by agents who have been designated by the Board
of Managers.

3. The Board of Managers of independent branches
shall represent the Land Central Bank in judicial proceed-
ings and all other matters within the field of activity
of such l)ranelies. Declaration made by such independent
branches shall be binding upon the Land Central Bank,
when made by two managing ofiicers or their agents.

4. Legal proceedings may be Instituted against an inde-
pendent branch arising out of the operation of its business
in the court having jurisdiction at the seat of such branch.

5. Declarations made to an authorized representative
of a Land Central Bank shall be deemed to be notice to
the Bank.

314

Department of State Bulletin

Section 5

1. The President of a Land Central Bank may appoint
notarial officials for such Bank and its branches. Such
notarial officials shall possess the qiialiflcations for the
office <if a judge and shall have an official seal.

2. Such notarial officials nia.v exercise the official func-
tions of a notary in the conduct of the affairs of a Land
Central Bank. Tlie authority to represent a Land Cen-
tral Bank may he proved by the certification of such
notarial official.

Section 6

1. The salaries, pensions and pensions to survivors of
the members of the Board of Managers shall be regulated
by contracts with the Land Central Bank, represented by
the Board of Directors. Contracts with the President and
Vice President shall be subject to the approval of the
Minister President.

2. The legal status of officials, employees and workers
of the Land Central Bank shall be determined by special
by-laws to be issued by the Board of Managers with the
consent of the Board of Directors.

Section 7

1. The entire management of a Land Central Bank shall
be supervised by the Board of Directors. The Board of
Directors shall establish the principles for the execution
of the functions of a Laud Central Bank. In so doing it
shall be bound by the decisions of the Board of Directors
of the Bank Deutscher Laender.

2. The Board of Directors shall consist of nine mem-
bers. Out of their number a Chairman shall be appointed
by the Minister President upon the recommendation of the
jiinister of Finance. The President of the Land Central
Bank shall be the Vice Chairman. The other members
of the Board of Directors shall be :

The head of tlie Bank Supervisory Authority, one rep-
resentative each from agriculture, trade and industry,
workers and employees, to be appointed by the Minister
having competence in these respective fields. The share-
holders shall elect one member each from cooperative,
private and public law credit institutions ; the election
procedure shall be laid down in regulations, issued under
Section 27 (4).

3. The initial term of office of the members of the
Board of Directors, other than the Vice Chairman, shall
be one year ; thereafter a term of office not exceeding three
years may be fixed by the by-laws. Reappointment or
reelection is permissible.

4. Decisions of the Board of Directors shall be by a
simple majority of the votes cast ; the vote of the Chair-
man shall be decisive in the event of a tie. The presence
of not less than one-half of all members shall be required
to constitute a quorum.

Section 8

1. The members of the Board of Managers and of the
Board of Directors, as well as all other persons in the
service of a Land Central Bank, are prohibited from dis-
closing matters affecting the Land Central Bank or its
organization of which they have knowledge, particularly
in regard to business transactions of the Bank and the
extent of credits granted ; such prohibitions shall con-
tinue after the termination of their services with the
Bank.

2. They may not testify in court regarding such matters
without the consent of the Bank Supervisory Authority.
Such consent may only be refused where the testimony
would substantially endanger the public welfare or render
more difficult the fulfilment of public tasks. The decision
of the Bank Supervisory Authority shall be subject to
review by the court in which the matter in question is
pending. If it appears that the Bank Supervisory Au-
thority has unreasonably withheld consent, the court may
require the giving of testimony without such consent.

IV. LAND SUPERVISION

Section 9

The Land Central Bank shall be subject to Land super-
vision, to be exercised by the Bank Supervisory Authority.

V. CAPITAL

Section 10

1. The Capital of each Land Central Bank shall be in
the form of Stock in the following amounts:

(a) 50 million Deutsche Mark for the Land of Bavaria ;

(b) 10 million Deutsclie Mark for the Land of Bremen ;

(d) 30 million Deutsche Mark for the Land of Wuert-
temberg-Baden.

2. The capital shall be initially subscribed for by the
Land whose Minister of Finance shall exercise the rights
accruing to the Land from Such investment.

3. The Minister of Finance shall, before March 1, 1950,
in agreement with the Board of Directors, dispose of the
stock by sale to the credit institutions required to main-
tain minimum reserves (Section 14, paragraph 2). The
cooperative, private and public law credit institutions
shall participate equally in tlie purchase of stock ; details
as to distribution within each group shall be determined
in the by-laws.

VI. ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENT
AND DISTRIBUTION OF PROFITS

Section 11

1. The annual financial statement shall be prepared by
the Board of Managers within three months after the
end of the fiscal year. It sliaU be subject to the approval
of the Board of Directors, after examination. The Board
of Directors shall, upon approval thereof, give a release
(Entlastung) to the Board of Managers. The Board of
Managers shall publish the annual financial statement.

2. The fiscal year shall be the calendar year.

Section 12

1. The annual net profit shall be transferred to legal
reserve until such reserve amounts to one-tenth of the
capital.

2. After the legal reserve has reached the amount pro-
vided for in paragraph 1, one-fifth of the net profits shall
be transferred to such reserve until the legal reserve
equals at least one-tenth of the total liabilities, or the full
amount of the capital, whichever shall be greater. From
one-half of the net profits remaining the shareholders shall
receive a dividend of not exceeding 4% of their capital
stock as determined by the Board of Directors. The re-
maining undistributed net profits, insofar as they are not
used to create free reserves on the decision of the Board
of Directors witli the consent of the Minister of Finance,
shall accrue to the Land.

3. The legal reserve shall be used only to offset depre-
ciation and other losses. The existence of free reserves
to offset depreciation and other losses shall not preclude
use of the legal reserve.

VII. BUSINESS ACTIVITIES

Section 13

1. Within the provisions of Military Government Law
No. 60, Revised, "Establishment of a Bank Deutscher
Laender", and of any legislation issued from time to time
in pursuance thereof, the Land Central Bank may execute
business transactions with_credit institutions and public
agencies with respect to the following :

(1) Purchase and sale of three-name bills of exchange
and of checks, the signatories to which are known to be

August 21, 1950

315

solvent. Such bills of exchange shall be of a maturity of
not more than three months from the date of purchase ;
they shall be genuinely commercial bills. The require-
ment of a third signature may be dispensed with, provided
collateral or other security is furnished to guarantee pay-
ment of such bill or check ;

(2) Purchase and sale of treasury bills issued by the
Bizonal Economic Administration or by any German Land
which mature within three months from the date of pur-
chase. The Board of Directors may fix the maximum
amount of treasury bills which a Land Central Bank
may hold or on which it may grant loans in accordance
with subparagraph 5 (b) of this Section;

(3) Purchase and sale in the open market, in order to
regulate the money market, of the following types of
fixed interest bearing securities fully listed on a Stock
Exchange : obligations of the Bizonal Economic Admin-
istration, of the Laender or of other public corporations,
mortgage bonds (Pfandbriefe) and municipal debentures;
the particular securities concerned shall be determined by
the Board of Directors after consultation with the Board
of Managers ;

(4) Purchase and sale of foreign exchange, gold, sil-
ver and platinum, subject to existing legal restrictions ;

(5) The grant and acceptance, for not more than three
months, of interest bearing loans (Lombard loans) against
the following securities ;

(a) Bills of exchange meeting the requirements of
subparagraph 1, up to an amount not exceeding nine-tentlis
of their face value ;

(b) Treasury bills issued by the Bizonal Economic
Administration or by any German Land, meeting the
requirements of subparagraph 2, to an amount not ex-
ceeding nine-tenths of their face value ;

(c) Fixed interest bearing securities designated by the
by-laws and treasury bills and registered debts (Schuld-
buchforderungen) of the Bizonal Economic Administra-
tion or of a German Land which mature within one year
from the date of such loan, to an amount not exceeding
three-fourths of their current quotation ; in the absence
of a quotation, the Board of Managers shall fix the loan
value according to existing possibilities of realization ;

(d) Equalization claims against the Land placed to the
credit of financial institutions within such Land.

Where a debtor is in default on such Lombard loan,
the Land Central Bank shall be entitled, without special
authorization or intervention of a court, to sell the col-
lateral publicly through one of its officers or through
any ofliicial authorized to carry out public auctions ; where
the collateral is quoted on a stock exchange or has a
market price, the sale may also be effected by private
treaty by one of the officers of the Land Central Bank or
by a broker at the market price ; the proceeds shall be
used to recover costs, interest and principal. The Land
Central Bank shall retain this right as against other
creditors and as against the estate of the bankrupt
debtor.

(6) To grant credits to the Land and, with approval
of the Minister of Finance, to public law corporations
specified in Section 2, paragraph 3, for the purpose of
covering temporary cash deficits. The aggregate of such
short-term loans shall not exceed one-fifth of the total
deposits.

(7) Purchase and sale, from and to financial institu-
tions of the Land, of equalization claims against the Land
allowed under the provisions of the Third Law for Mone-
tary Reform (Conversion Law), or under any regulations
issued from time to time in pursuance thereof.

2. The rates of discount, interest and other charges
applicable to the above mentioned transactions shall be
fixed by the Board of Directors according to the direc-
tions of the Bank Deut.scher Laender and be published
by the Board of Managers.

Section H

1. A Land Central Bank may accept non-interest bear-
ing giro and other deposits.

2. Credit institutions having their seat or branch
within the Land shall be required to maintain with the
Land Central Bank minimum reserves in a fixed propor-
tion to their deposit liabilities. The amount of the re-
serve requirements and the method of maintaining such
reserves shall be fixed by the Board of Directors in ac-
cordance with the regulations issued by the Board of
Directors of the Bank Deutscher Laender.

Section 15

1. The Land Central Bank shall serve as a central
clearing house for all banking transfers and collection of
checks between the credit institutions of the Land. The
inter-Land settlement of money transfers and collection
of checks of the Land Central Bank and other credit
institutions of the Land shall be effected through the
Bank Deutscher Laender with which the Land Central
Bank shall maintain corresponding accounts. The Land
Central Bank shall facilitate payments to and from for-
eign countries, subject to existing legal restrictions.

2. The Board of Directors may issue directives dealing
with the organization and handling of money transfers
and check collections within the Land.

Section 16

1. The Land Central Bank may receive in safe custody
any valuables, and in particular, may hold and manage
securities, on behalf of credit institutions and public
authorities.

8. The Land Central Bank may act as Central De-
pository for Securities, and In particular may regulate
the transfer of securities. For such purpose it may enter
into agreements with other Central Depositories for
Securities.

3. The business activities mentioned in paragraph 1 and
2 are subject to general regulation by the Bank Deutscher
Laender.

4. The Land Central Bank may not exercise voting
rights arising from securities managed or held by it in
safe custody.

Section 11

[1.] A Land Central Bank, when certifying a check
drawn on itself, shall thereby assume primary liability to
the holder in due course for payment. It shall also
remain liable as regards the drawer and endorser.

2. The Land Central Bank is authorized to certify a
check only when it has been previously covered by
sufljcient funds.

3. Payment of a certified check may not be refused
although, subsequent to certification, bankruptcy pro-
ceedings have been instituted against the drawer of the
check.

4. The obligation of payment arising out of the certifi-
cation of a check shall cease if the check is not presented
for payment within one month of the date of issue. The
provisions of Article 40 of the Negotiable Instruments Law
(RGBI., 1933, I, 597) shall govern proof of presentation.

5. A claim arising from the certification of a clieck is
barred two years after expiration of the period within
which the check should have been presented for payment.

6. The provisions governing jurisdiction and procedure
in the Negotiable Instruments Law shall apply mutatis
mutandis in actions on claims arising from certification.

7. The certification of a check shall not create an
obligation to pay any tax or duty.

Section 18

A Land Central Bank shall encage in transactions,
other than those authorized by the provisions of Section
13-17, only for the account of third parties who have
provided full cover, or for the purpose of conducting its
own business operations, or for the benefit of its employees,
or for the execution and liquidation of permissible business
transactions.

316

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

VIII. WEEKLY STATEMENT

Section 19

1. A Land Central Bank shall publish regularly a state-
ment of its assets and liabilities as at the 7th, 15th, 23rd
and last day of eacli month.

2. Such published statement shall contain:

(1) Under assets:
Cash :

Balances with the Bank Deutscher Laender :

(a) Minimum balances,

( b ) Free balances ;
Postal checli balances ;

Balances with otlier Land Central Banks and with German

credit institutions outside the Land ;
Treasury bills and sliort-term treasury certificates of the

Laender ;
Treasury bills and short-term treasury certificates of the

Bizonal Economic Administration;
Bills of exchange and checks ;
Equalization claims ;
Securities purchased in the open market;
Other securities ;
Short-term loans :

(a) to the Government of the Land,

(b) to other public agencies;
Collateral loans :

(a) against bills of exchange,

(b) against equalization claims,

(c) against other security ;
Foreign balances freely convertible;
Foreign balances not freely convertible;
Participation in the Bank Deutscher Laender ;
Other assets.

(2) Under liabilities :
Capital ;

Legal and other reserves;
Deposits :

From credit institutions within the Land ;

From credit institutions in other German Laender ;

From public authorities ;

From other domestic depositors ;

From foreign depositors ;
Uability arising out of collateral loans from the Bank

Deutscher Laender against :

(a) bills of exchange,

(b) equalization claims,

3. In addition, all contingent liabilities in respect of
endorsement of bills of exchange and the total of equaliza-
tion claims sold to Bank Deutscher Laender shall be dis-
closed.

Section 22

1. A Land Central Bank shall rank equally with the
several departments of the Land Government.

2. The provisions regarding the liability of the Land
for the acts of its oflioials slinli apply mutatis mutandis
to the liability of a Land Central Bank.

Section 23

One insertion in the gazette used by the Government
of the Land for official publications shall be sufficient for
matters required to be published by a Land Central Bank.
Any such publication shall be deemed effective on the date
of issue of the gazette.

Section 24

In respect to taxation, building construction, housing,
and leasing of property, a Land Central Bank .shall enjoy
the same privileges as are accorded to the highest Land
authorities.

Section 25

A Land Central Bank shall not be the legal successor to
the German Reichsbank, but this paragraph shall not be
construed so as to prevent a Land Central Bank from
dealing with the assets of the Reichsbank which have
been transferred to it by order or consent of Military
Government.

Section 26

The German text of tliis Law shall be the official text

Section 27

1. This Law is applicable within the Laender of
Bavaria, Wuerttemberg-Baden, Hesse and Bremen, and
shall become effective on 15 April 1949.

2. The following German Laws are hereby repealed :

(a) Law No. 50 of the Land Government of Bavaria of
27 November 1946;

(b) Law No. 55 of the Land Government of Wuerttem-
berg-Baden of 7 December 1946 ;

(d) Law concerning the Establishment of the Land
Central Bank in Bremen of 6 March 1947.

3. Without prejudice to any subsequent settlement with
the German Reichsbank, all actions heretofore taken pur-
suant to and in conformity with Section 26 of each of
such laws shall be unaffected by such repeal.

4. The Land Minister of Finance shall issue the legal
and administrative regulations necessary for the imple-
mentation of this Law.

By order of Military Government.

IX. PENAL PROVISIONS

Section 20

1. Any member of the Board of Managers who deliber-
ately misrepresents or conceals in the published weekly
statements prescribed in Section 19, or in the annual
financial statement, the true condition of a Land Central
Bank, shall be giiilty of an offense and shall, upon con-
viction, be liable to imprisonment not exceeding five years
or a fine not exceeding DM 25,000 or both.

2. Prosecution shall be instituted at the request of the
Bank Supervisory Authority.

X. CONCLUDING AND TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

Section 21

The by-laws of a Land Central Bank shall be issued
by the Board of Directors. Such by-laws shall require
the approval of the Bank Supervisory Authority.

THE DEPARTMENT

Walter S. Surrey Resigns
as Assistant Legal Adviser

Secretary Acheson accepted on July 6 the resignation^
effective June 30, 1950, of Walter Sterling Surrey, As-
sistant Legal Adviser to the Department and Consultant
to the Mutual Defense Assistance Program. For text of
correspondence between the Secretary and Mr. Surrey,
see Department of State press release 720.

August 21, 1950

317

The United States in tlie United Nations

[August 12-18]

Economic and Social Council

The Economic and Social Council temporarily
adjourned its eleventh session on August 16 fol-
lowing completion of the fifty-third and last
item on its agenda. The Council has been meet-
ing at Geneva since July 3. The Council had de-
cided previously not to close this session and to
authorize its president to reconvene it whenever
necessary in order to implement the resolution
adojDted unanimously by the Council on August
14 ^ setting forth its role in providing such as-
sistance for the relief and support of the civilian
population of Korea as the unified command may
request. This action was taken by tlie Council
in implementation of a request by the Security
Council. In addition to declaring the Council's
readiness to provide such assistance as the uni-
fied command may request, the resolution asks
the support of specialized agencies, subsidiary
bodies of the United Nations, and appropriate
nongovernmental organizations to this end. In
addition, United Nations members, the Secretary-
General, and appropriate nongovernmental or-
ganizations are asked "to assist in developing
among the peoples of the world the fullest possible
understanding of and support for the action of the
United Nations in Korea." The Secretary-
General is asked to report to the Council on action
taken under this resolution, and to include when
appropriate any useful data on longer-term meas-
ures for economic and social assistance to the
Korea people.

The Council in its final week made a number
of other important decisions on matters in both
the economic and social fields. These decisions
pertained to maintenance of full employment,
financing economic development, and long-range
activities for children, refugees, and stateless
persons.

FULL EMPLOYMENT

The Council embodied its conclusions, relative
to the maintenance of full employment, in a reso-
lution which included a series of recommenda-
tions to member states, provided for new studies
in this field by the Secretariat and expert groups,
and for examination of this problem by the Eco-
nomic, Employment and Development Commis-
sion (heretofoi'e called the Economic and Em-
ployment Commission). The United States
representative told the Council that he was par-

' For text of resolutions, see following issue of the
Bulletin.

ticularly pleased that the resolution had been
adopted unanimously and that he thought its
goals could be achieved if all governments would
try to implement the resolution.

ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT

Tlie recommendations of the Council with re-
gard to financing economic development were in-
corporated in a resolution calling for continued
study of this problem and the encouragement of
effective methods of mobilizing domestic capital
for economic development as well as for methods
of increasing the flow of international capital for
development purposes. United Nations activities
in the field of technical assistance, as reported by
the Secretary-General, were noted with satisfac-
tion. The Council also reviewed the first report
of its Technical Assistance Committee and of the
Technical Assistance Board. With regard to the
earlier General Assembly recommendation that
the Council consider the problem of economic de-
velopment and social progress in the former Ital-
ian colonies, the Council called the attention of the
Secretary-General, the executive heads of the spe-
cialized agencies, and the Technical Assistance
Board to the special need for early action grant-
ing technical assistance to Libya. The Secretary-
General was asked to suggest to the General As-
sembly a means by which Libya can continue to
receive technical assistance after she has acquired
independence and before she becomes a member of
the United Nations.

INTERNATIONAL CHILDREN'S EMERGENCY FUND

Turning to the social field, the Council adopted
a resolution, co-sponsored by the United States,
on the future organization and status of the In-
ternational Cliildren's Emergency Fund. The
resolution provides for the establishment of a
United Nations International Children's Endow-
ment Fund with the dual purpose of "(a) provid-
ing supplies, training services, and advisory as-
sistance in support of the recipient countries' per-
manent programs for children, and (b) meeting
relief needs in cases of serious emergencies." The
agreed functions of the Fund represent a com-
promise between the United States view, which
favored placing the major emphasis on technical
assistance, and that of certain other countries,
which favored continuance of the present Inter-
national Children's Emergency Fund in essen-
tially its present form. The operational activi-
ties of the Fund will be financed by voluntary
contributions. A provision calling for General
Assembly consideration of the advisability of in-

318

Department of State Bulletin

creasinc; tho amount of the Fund by a sum of
money from member states in accordance with the
regidiir scale of contributions to the United Na-
tions budget was deleted over the objection of the
United States representative, who said that he
votecl for the resolutions as a whole with some
hesitancy because of this deletion.

In the' earlier consideration of this question, by
the Council's Social Committee, the United States
representative declared that the United States
"stands squarely behind the establishment of a
permanent United Nations program for children."
He added, "It supports the creation or continua-
tion of machinery which will ensure the perma-
nency and efi'ectiveness of such a program and is
willing to share with all other governments the
financial burden of carrying out this task."

REFUGEES AND STATELESS PERSONS

The problem of refugees and stateless persons
was dealt with by the Council in several of its
aspects. In reviewing the report of the Ad Hog
Conmiittee on Refugees and Stateless Persons, the
Council also reviewed a draft convention relating
to the status of refugees and a draft protocol on
statelessness. The Council decided that the Ad
Hoc Committee should revise these drafts in the
light of comments of governments and specialized
agencies and of the Council's discussion so that
they could be considered by the General Assembly
at its next session. In another resolution relating
to statelessness, the International Law Commis-
sion was urged to prepare the necessary draft
convention or conventions for the elimination of
statelessness. Agi'eement was also reached on a
statute setting forth the functions of the Office of
the High Commissioner for Refugees. At its last
session, the General Assembly decided to estab-
lish as of January 1, 1951, such an office to provide
for the international protection of refugees after
the termination of the activities of the Interna-
tional Refugee Organization. According to the
statute, the High Commissioner is to seek perma-
nent solutions for the jDroblems of the refugees
falling under his competence "by assisting gov-
ermnents and, subject to the approval of the
government concerned, voluntary agencies in fa-
cilitating their voluntary repatriation or their
assimilation within new national communities."

FORCED LABOR SITUATION

The United States and British representatives
charged the U. S. S. R., on the next to the last day
of the session, with extending its forced labor
practices both within the Soviet Union and the
countries in her orbit. These representatives pro-
posed that five independent experts be selected by
the United Nations and the International Labor
Organization to survey the forced labor situation.
Discussion of the matter was deferred to the next

session, however, in view of the short time remain-
ing before the scheduled adjournment of the
Council.

Advancing higher education in trust territories
was another social problem dealt with by the
Council. The Council drew the attention of ad-
ministering authorities to the United Nations ex-
panded technical assistance program and invited
them to request technical assistance in connection
with this problem. With regard to social, eco-
nomic, and educational conditions in non-self-
governing territories, the Council decided that,
wherever possible, these should be covered in all
its relevant studies and drew the attention of the
administering members to the facilities available
for technical assistance in matters of economic de-
velopment and social welfare.

Other Council action involved noting the report
of the Ad Hoc Committee on Slavery, election of
members of its commissions, and adoption of the
calendar of conferences for 1951. Finally, the
Council established an ad hoc committee, of which
the United States is a member, to investigate the
question of the organization and functioning of
the Council and its commissions, and to report to
the thirteenth session of the Council. This pro-
posal was cosponsored by the United States.

Security Council

The Security Council continued its discussion
of the Korean question on August 11, 14, and 17.
The Indian representative, Sir. B. N. Rau, sug-
gested on August 14 that the Council consider
establishment of a committee consisting of the six
nonpermanent Council members (Cuba, Ecuador,
Egypt, India, Norway, and Yugoslavia) to con-
sider proposals looking toward a "peaceful and
just settlement in Korea." The committee he en-
visaged would consider proposals already sub-
mitted or presented in the future, including those
from sources outside the Security Council, such as
the United Nations Commission on Korea, and
would make recommendations to the Council. He
said that he would be prepared to present a reso-
lution embodying his proposal if it "finds sufficient
support, in principle."

During the August 17 meeting, Ambassador
Warren R. Austin (U.S.) commended India's in-
itiative in attempting to promote some progress
in the Council and noted particularly the effec-
tiveness of Sir Rau's point that the United Nations
would have to frame its own proposals for the
future of Korea. He reiterated the desire of the
United States for peace and outlined some long-
range aims for consideration by the Council or
the General Assembly, including free. United Na-
tions-supervised elections throughout Korea, a
United Nations agency to assist the Republic in
establishing a democratic government in a re-
united Korea, and early admission of Korea to
the United Nations.

August 21, 1950

319

^wwCem//^

General Policy Page

Discussion of Korean Case in the Security
Council:
Debate on Adoption of Agenda. State-
ments by Ambassador Warren R. Aus-
tin 283

Protest Against President Malik's Obstruc-
tion of Procedure. Statement by Am-
bassador Warren R. Austin 285

Soviet Tactics Aim To Thwart U.N. Efforts
To Restore Peace. Statements by Secre-
tary Acheson 286

Assistant Secretary Hickerson Explains U.S.
Aims in Korea to American Women for
Peace 287

North Koreans Delay Actions in Reporting to

Red Cross 287

Letters of Credence: Haiti 311

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Discussion of Korean Case in the Security
Council:
Debate on Adoption of Agenda. State-
ments by Ambassador Warren R. Aus-
tin 283

Protest Against President Malik's Obstruc-
tion of Procedure. Statement by Am-
bassador Warren R. Austin 285

Soviet Tactics Aim To Thwart U.N. Efforts
To Restore Peace. Statement by Secre-
tary Acheson 286

Assistant Secretary Hickerson Explains U.S.
Aims in Korea to American Women for
Peace 287

North Koreans Delay Actions in Reporting to

Red Cross 287

National Action Essential in Absence of
Collective Security. Statement by Sec-
retary-General Lie 297

Annual Report of the Secretary-General on
the Work of the United Nations, July 1,
1949-June 30, 1950 298

Excerpts From Statement by Secretary-Gen-
eral Trygve Lie 303

Fifth Regular Session of the General Assem-
bly— Provisional Agenda 304

Hooker A. Doolittle Leaves for Indonesia . . 306

United States Expresses Views in Ecosoc on
Full Employment. Excerpts From
Statement by Isador Lubin, U.S. Rep-
resentative in Ecosoc 307

The United States in the United Nations . . 318

Economic Affairs Page

Assistance Available to American Business
Through the ECA Guaranty Program in
Marshall Plan Countries 310

Treaty Information

Air Transport Agreement With France

Amended 311

Nac Deputies Work To Increase Strength of
Defensive Forces. Statement by Secre-
tary Acheson 306

international information and
Cultural Affairs

Voice of America Begins Vietnamese Lan-
guage Programs 287

Occupation Matters

Public Notices Affecting U.S. Property Own-
ers in Germany 314

I. G. Farben Creditors Advised To File Claims

Immediately 312

Third Report on the Activities of the Far
Eastern Commission: December 24,
1948-June 30, 1950 288

National Security

Nac Deputies Work To Increase Strength of
Defensive Forces. Statement by Secre-
tary Acheson 306

The Congress

Preserving Our Basic Liberties and Protecting
the Internal Security of the United
States. Message From the President .

The Foreign Service

Confirmations . . .

The Department

Walter S. Surrey Resigns as Assistant Legal

Adviser

294

313

317

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTINS OFFICE: 1950

fjne/ ^eh€(/^tmen{/ ,€^ Cnafe^

REPORT OF THE UNITED NATIONS COMMAND

OPERATIONS IN KOREA 323

PRESIDENT MALIK'S CONTINUED OBSTRUCTION
TACTICS IN THE SECURITY COUNCIL • State-
ments by AmhassadoT Warren R. Austin 326

REPORT OF THE TRUSTEESHIP COUNCIL ON

TRUST TERRITORY OF THE PACIFIC ISLANDS . 336

THE GENERAL AGREEMENT ON TARIFFS AND
TRADE— NEGOTIATIONS BEGINNING SEPTEM-
BER 1950 343

For complete contents see back cover

Vol XXIII, No. 582
August 28, 1950

-vi®'*'' o».

f-^TES O^

^ 9efiamtmene ^f ytate DUilGllIl

Vol. XXIII, No. 582 . Publication 3948
August 28, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington 26, D.O.

Price:

62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.60

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (February 18, 1949).
Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bulletin as the source wUl be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the Tfhite House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

REPORT OF THE UNITED NATIONS COMMAND OPERATIONS IN KOREA

For the Period of July 20-31, 1950 >

U.N. doc. S/1694
Transmitted Aug. 17

I herewith submit a report of the United
Nations command operations in Korea for the
period July 20-31, inclusive. Details of these
operations are in press communiques 98 to 126,
inclusive, and Korean press releases 127 to 177,
inclusive. A general description of the opera-
tions for the period is as follows :

By July 20, main enemy colunans, each of ap-
proximately division strength, reinforced by
tanks, were contacted and identified at the follow-
ing points : 4th North Korean Division, northwest
of Taejon; 2d North Korean Division, southeast
of Chongju ; 15th North Korean Division, 15 miles
southeast of Chongju ; 5th North Korean Division,
north of Yongju; and there were unidentified
elements north of Yongdok. The enemy 1st, 3d,
and 6th Divisions, also identified by this date, were
either in reserve, regrouping, or en route to other
battle areas. The battle front was not a continu-
ous line, but rather, it consisted of a series of
columns of battalion and regimental size probing
main roads and mountain trails in an effort to pen-
etrate United Nations positions. The greatest
concentration was massed for the drive toward
Taejon, with decreasing strength toward the east.
The enemy forces on the east coast were separated
from those to the west by most rugged mountains.
However, in the mountainous area, from Yong-
yang south to Yongchon, there were an estimated
1,500 guerrillas. The guerrillas, often inter-
mingled with refugees, became one of the major
security problems of the campaign.

' Transmitted to the Security Council by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin, U.S. representative in the Security
Council, on Aug. 17.

Taejon Sector

In the Taejon sector, the enemy employed two
and possibly three divisions with tank support.
The delaying force in this area was the United
States 24th Division and elements of the United
States 25th Division. This delaying force exe-
cuted a planned withdrawal to Yongdong on July
21. The position at Yongdong was held for 4 days,
showing an increased United Nations strength.
Nevertheless, the enemy was able to muster such
superior forces that he penetrated our flanks and
forced the withdrawal of the delaying force to
Hwanggan on July 26 and to Kumchon on July
30. Meanwhile, the 6th North Korean Division,
which had garrisoned Seoul, was reported on July
23 to have moved south in the direction of
Chonju. With the 6th Division echeloned to the
rear, the 4th North Korean Division initiated a
major strategic envelopment to the south against
weak Republic of Korea militarized police forces.
Driving virtually unopposed toward the western
and south ports the enemy seized Mokpo, Kwang-
ju, Amwon [Namwon], and Chinan on July 24.

The enveloping force then shifted direction of
movement to the east toward the vital ports of
Masan and Pusan. Yosu and Hadong were taken
on July 27, and, by July 28, enemy forces reached
eastward to Kochang, and, to the north, extended
the line to Muju. This major envelopment was
possible to an enemy who employed at least nine
divisions against a United Nations ensemble of
only three United States divisions and four Re-
public of Korean divisions, all understrength.

East of Taejon, in the sector opposing the forces
of the Republic of Korea, enemy progress was
less rapid. The 15th North Korean Division,

August 28, 1950

323

driving down the Chungju-Hamchang axis, was
reinforced on July 28 by the 1st North Korean
Division. These enemy forces continued making
local advances until they reached the outskirts of
Hamchang. East of the Hamchang area, enemy
forces believed to be from the 5th North Korean
Division finally occupied Yongju by July 24 and,
thereafter, made no appreciable progress during
this period. On the east coast, the action was
initially fluid with alternating withdrawals and
advances in the vicinity of Yongdok. By July 26,
the 5th North Korean Division was positively
identified in the east coast area, and, by the 29th,
Yongdok was in enemy hands. Infiltration and
guerrilla operations in rear areas which initially
constituted some annoyance were materially re-
duced by the close of the period.

Strength of North and South Forces

On July 31, there were 11 enemy divisions iden-
tified on the line of contact, with the possibility
of two or three additional formations. The
enemy dispositions formed a discontinuous line
from Chinju in the south, northward through
Kochang, Hwanggan, and Hamchang, and east-
ward through Yongju to Yongdok with the great-
est concentration of divisions in the central part
of this line. However, the wide envelopment in
the south and southwest continued as the enemy
action of major significance. The general pat-
tern of enemy strategy, predicated on superiority
of forces and armament, is a double envelopment,
in the north via Hamchang, in the southwest via
Kochang-Cliinju, while maintaining pressure in
the center to prevent displacement of United Na-
tions forces.

As yet no army forces of member nations other
than the United States have arrived in Korea.
The Republic of Korea forces have been reorgan-
ized into two corps and have been resupplied with
United States equipment. They have progressed
admirably. In addition, the Republic of Korea
forces have demonstrated by limited attacks and
determined defensive operations that they are do-
ing and will continue to do their utmost in de-
fense of their country. Their withdrawals have
been more to preserve continuity of the battle
front than because of enemy pressure. United
States and Republic of Korea army forces with
their increased artillery and larger caliber rock-
ets have proven that they can meet and destroy
the North Korean tanks.

U.N. Naval Forces and Actions

Naval forces were considerably augmented dur-
ing this period by the addition of several United
States and British units and a few units from
other nations. Eight nations are now repre-
sented by naval forces and assistance : Australia,
Canada, France, Netherlands, New Zealand, the
Republic of Korea, the United Kingdom, and the
United States. To date, the bulk of shipping
necessary to the conduct of the Korean war has
been provided by the United States. Naval forces
have maintained a continuous and effective patrol
of North Korean ports and coastlines. Carrier
air strikes of increasing frequency have ranged
from strategic targets in the north to battlefield
targets in close support of the ground movement.
A patrol on both coasts, directed primarily toward
interception of enemy shipping to the south, has
effectively stopped all coastal water movement of
enemy troops and supplies. Shore bombardments
as requested by infantry vmits on the east coast
have proved to be very effective in destroying
military targets, harassing the enemy at night,
and disrupting coastal land communications.
When returning to our bases for logistic support,
patrol ships have performed additional tasks of
convoying and escorting shipping to and from
Pusan. Naval units have participated in the
evacuation of the sick and wounded from Korea
to locations of security and better care in Japan.
The accomplishment of these continuing tasks
has, to date, resulted in relatively minor interfer-
ence or resistance by the enemy in the form of
aerial strafing or bombardment by shore-based
artillery. There has been no naval interference
by the enemy.

U.N. Air Force Action

United States light bombers and United States,
Australian, and Republic of Korea fighters con-
tinually attacked targets in close support of
ground troops, including attacks on tanks, trucks,
artillery pieces, and bridges. United States me-
dium bombers attacked and destroyed the Chosen
explosives manufacturing plant at Konan. Sev-
eral marshaling yards were disrupted and many
railroad and highway bridges were cut, thereby
reducing and delaying the flow of supplies to
North Korean forces. Due to the heavy air at-
tacks on rail and highway traffic during daylight,
the North Korean forces resorted to moving prac-
tically all traffic at night. This was countered by

324

Department of State BuUelin

increased night attacks on concentrations of
traftic. A considerable number of United States
fighter aircraft were brought to Japan by the
United States Navy carrier Boxer to augment the
fighters previously available. Canadian troop
carrier aircraft joined the United States Military
Air Transport Service operations in carrying men,
supplies, and materials to the Far East. Al-
though a few enemy sorties were flown, enemy air
activity during the period was negligible.

Communist Propaganda Menace

The false and inflammatory Communist propa-
ganda, which has been so largely responsible for
the continuing disunity among Koreans, has be-
come an increasing menace because of the disrup-
tion of normal press and radio facilities in the
Republic of Korea. To combat this propaganda.
United Nations command headquarters leaflets
and radio broadcasts are utilizing that most power-
ful of weapons, the truth. Two and one-half
hours of broadcasts are beamed to Korea daily
and over 25 million leaflets have been dropped by
aircraft. In addition to the latest factual news
reports, citizens and soldiers of North Korea, and
of the Republic of Korea, are being informed of
the steps taken by the United Nations to restore
peace. The leaflets and broadcasts are designed
to reveal to North Koreans the duplicity of their
leaders and to bring encouragement to the people
of the Republic of Korea.

Summary

In summary, the operations of the United Na-
tions forces for the period were :

A. Army: Army operations were basically
planned withdrawals and delaying actions to gain
time. The build up of forces has continued at an
accelerated rate. The reorganization of Republic
of Korea forces and their resupply with United
States equipment has enabled them to make lim-
ited attacks and a determined defense. Infiltra-
tion and guerrilla operations in rear areas have
been materially reduced.

B. Navy : Naval forces have been augmented by
additional United States and British units, and
French, Netherlands, Canadian, and New Zealand
combat ships have been added to the United Na-
tions command. To date, the bulk of transport
shipping has been provided by the United States.
A continuous and effective naval patrol of North

Korean ports and coastlines has been maintained.
Carrier air strikes of increasing frequency have
ranged from strategic targets in the north to bat-
tlefield targets in close support of the ground
movement. Shore bombardments on the east coast
have proved to be very effective in destroying
military targets, harassing the enemy at night,
and disrupting coastal land communications.

C. Air : United States light and medium bomb-
ers and United States, Australian, and Republic
of Korea fighters have continually attacked tar-
gets in close support of ground troops. Numerous
marshaling yards were disrupted and many rail-
road and highway bridges were cut. Canadian
troop carrier aircraft are now assisting in air
transport.

Conclusion

In conclusion :

The ground fighting continues to be of a most
savage character. The tenacity and valor of our
heavily outnumbered forces rivals the almost
fanatical determination of the enemy. The whole
operation has assumed the character of a major
campaign in which all United Nations command
forces are conducting themselves admirably. I
cannot speak too highly of the splendid coopera-
tion and the perfect coordination not only within
but also between the defense contingents of the
various nationalities that comprise the United
Nations forces. It is a picture of complete unifi-
cation, both professional and national.

The international character of the operations in
Korea has received important emphasis since the
preparation of the last report in the offers of com-
bat forces made by a number of members of the
United Nations. But, it is my sincere hope that
the member nations of the United Nations will
without delay build up the strength of our ground
forces. To bring the conflict to a successful con-
clusion quickly, it is essential for the member na-
tions to act speedily. The material utility of each
contribution is directly related to the rapidity with
which it is dispatched. Urgent attention, there-
fore, should be given to the arrival of organizations
now in being.

If agreeable, it is my intent to render reports
as of the first and fifteenth of each month to the
United Nations on the progress of the field
operations.

August 28, J950

325

President Malik's Continued Obstruction Tactics in the Security Council

Statements hy Warren R. Austin

U.S. Representative in the Security Council '

Much of the time since the representative of the
Soviet Union assumed the office of president 10
days ago has been consumed by a discussion of
what should be discussed. For several days, there
has been a point of order before the Council in
regard to which the representative of the Soviet
Union has made extensive remarks which he con-
siders relevant. Those remarks show clearly that
the representative of the Soviet Union possesses
an inadequate understanding of the facts. Per-
haps his insistent refusal to rule on the point of
order made arises from that inadequate knowledge
or understanding of the facts of the Korean situa-
tion. I believe that that is the charitable ex-
planation of the astonishing assertions that the
president has made in relation to the procedural
issues before us. Because all of us wish to help
him discharge his duties to this Council as its
president, I should like to review for him a few
of the relevant facts.

Review of Recent Korean History

During the recent world war, the leading Allies,
including the Soviet Union, pledged the freedom
and independence of Korea. By agreement be-
tween the United States and the Soviet Union at
the time of Japan's surrender, the 38th parallel
was selected as an administrative boundary line
for convenience in accepting the surrender of
Japanese troops. This was a temporary military
division ; it was not a permanent political division.
It was interpreted differently, however, by the
Soviet Government, which proceeded to turn the
38th parallel into a hard and fast frontier. In
an effort to correct this obvious violation of war-
time pledges made to the Korean people, my Gov-
ernment has consistently urged the abolition of
the military frontier and the creation of a 'demo-

* Made before the Security Council on Aug. 10 and re-
leased to the press by the U.S. Mission to the U.N. on the
same date. For previous statements see Buixetiw of
Aug. 14, p. 243, and Aug. 21, 1950, p. 283.

cratic and independent government of unified
Korea.

In 1947, in 1948, and in 1949, the General Assem-
bly by overwhelming majority urged the same
things. It has maintained in Korea for nearly 3
years a Commission charged with the completion
of these tasks. The Coirunission has been denied
access to North Korea — that is, that part of Korea
north of the 38th parallel — by the Soviet Union
as the occupying power. South of that parallel,
the United Nations Commission on Korea has
supervised two elections, certified the establish-
ment of a democratic government, and verified the
withdrawal of United States occupation forces.
The General Assembly itself has accepted the
Government of the Republic of Korea as the only
valid and lawful government in Korea. Many
members of the United Nations have recognized
the Republic of Korea, whose admission to the
United Nations was blocked by the Soviet veto.

This summary of political history should make
it clear what government has blocked the unity
and independence of Korea, what government has
established a puppet government in its zone of
military control, and what government has defied
the I'econamendations of the United Nations.

Battle for Freedom

The determination of the United Nations to
insure that Korea shall be free, unified, and inde-
pendent of outside influence from anj' great power,
on or off the continent, has never wavered. This
is what the United Nations forces are fighting to
uphold in Korea. The battle we are fighting is
not a battle for any fragment of the population;
it is a battle for the right of the Korean people
to choose their own future. It is a supreme effort
to give the Korean people the right to control
their own destinies, a right that so many countries
caught in the net of imperialism with a new
name — Communist imperialism — have lost.

326

Deparlmeni of State Bulletin

If the efforts of the United Nations had not been
blocked by the Soviet Union and the authorities
in North Korea, then Korea today would be free
and independent. Below the line of the 38th par-
allel, the light of day has shone. The United Na-
tions observers could watch and report. They
could tell us what was happening — the faults of a
new nation, as well as its virtues. They could
certify to us that democracy was having its strug-
gles, but that it was succeeding.

Above that line, all was darkness. The arbi-
trary action of one great power — and one great
power alone — kept the United Nations observers
from fulfilling above that line the task assigned to
them by the General Assembly. This great power
was free to pick and choose its instruments as it
wished, to carry out its imperialist purposes in
Northern Korea.

Could one call these instriunents of Communist
imperialism the representatives of the Korean
people ? Certainly the United Nations has never
been given any information that would lead this
body to believe that such was the case. To call
them the representatives of the Korean people
must be only a tragic witticism when addressed to
those who know how quickly nationalism, patri-
otism, and independence in other countries have
been crushed to produce subservient puppet gov-
ernments— zombi governments that breathe and
speak and act but have no soul.

The United Nations tried to peer through the
mists that enshrouded this regime. Nothing could
be seen. The only voice that was heard was the
echo of a greater voice that had come rolling and
rumbling across steppe and tundra and mountain
from a faraway place. To call this echo, this
voice from the living dead, the authentic voice of
the Korean people can only be a grotesque attempt
at humor. The United Nations has tried to hear
the voice of the people of Korea. In so far as they
are able, these people have spoken in the hearing
and under the eyes of the accredited observers of
the United Nations. The representative of these
Korean people, Dr. John M. Chang, the Ambassa-
dor of the Republic of Korea, is in this chamber.

Attack From the Darkness

On June 25, the mists that for 5 years had cov-
ered North Korea parted. Out of the fog came a
mighty military machine to launch an unexpected
and unprovoked attack on the Republic of Korea.
This was the spearhead of the new imperialism,
for the tanks and guns that hurtled out of the
darkness were organized for only one purpose —
to crush the independence of the Korean people
and wipe from the earth the only representative
government of that country. At last, the world
knew what kind of rulers had been placed in power
over the northern fragment of the country, and
why they had been chosen.

Although the representative of the Soviet Union
did not feel able to attend the meetings of the

Security Council called when Korea was invaded,
he must have read the reports submitted to us by
the United Nations Commission on Korea.

On June 24, the day before the attack, the ob-
servers for the Commission reported that their
"principal impression" was that the Republican
Army "is organized entirely for defense and is in
no condition to carry out attack on large scale
against forces of the north." The Commission
itself, composed of representatives of Australia,
China, El Salvador, France, India, the Philip-
pines, and Turkey, found on June 26 that "judg-
ing from actual progress of operations Northern
I'egime is carrying out well-planned, concerted,
and full-scale invasion of South Korea."

These reports completely dispose of the fantas-
tic charges that the aggression was launched by
the troops of the Korean Republic.

I might also recall tliat, many months before,
the United Nations had verified that American
forces had been totally withdrawn from Korea.
The United Nations was never able, however, to
verify that Russian troops had left the area they
controlled. So far as any United Nations observa-
tion is concerned, the Soviet Union might still
control by military force all areas north of the
38th parallel. I am not stating that this is a fact.
I am simply saying that the United Nations has
never had opportunity to learn by observation any-
thing to the contrary.

Subsequent military developments have proved
to anyone with a knowledge of warfare that the
invasion by the North Koreans was carefully
planned and had been prepared over a long period
of time. I am sure the representative of the Soviet
Union will agree that it must have taken many
months to train the drivers and gunners who are
now massacring their fellow countrymen and de-
fying the United Nations.

Security Council Resolution

In the face of the improvoked aggression
launched by the North Koreans, the Security
Council met within 24 hours of the attack and
adopted a resolution calling for the immediate
cessation of hostilities for the withdrawal of the
North Korean forces to the 38th parallel and for
the rendering of "every assistance" by all mem-
bers to the United Nations "in the execution of this
resolution." That was addressed to all members.

As the attack continued, the President of the
United States, at noon on June 27, announced sup-
port for this resolution by ordering the United
States air and sea forces to assist the troops of the
Korean Government. On the same day, June 27,
the Security Council recommended that all mem-
bers furnish such aid to the republic of Korea as
might be necessary to repel the attack and restore
international peace and security in the area. Since
that time, 53 members have supported the United
Nations action to restore peace in Korea. Many
of them have offered, and some have already sent,

August 28, 1950

327

military support or other types of assistance. All
are working and fighting together under the
United Nations flag and under a unified command
in a great common effort to put down lawless ag-
gression. To call such a United Nations function
"aggression" is like calling aid to a peaceful citi-
zen, attacked by a thief in the night, aggression.
Yet, the Soviet repi-esentative obstructs all ef-
forts of the Security Council to perform its peace-
making functions by speeches charging the United
States as the aggressor.

Facts Concerning Korea

These are the facts of recent Korean history.

To make sure that there can be no misunder-
standing, let me restate the main questions which
have arisen in this debate and give tlie answers, on
which the bulk of mankind has already agreed.

Whose troops are attacking deep in somebody else's
territory? Tlie North Koreans.

Whose territory is overrun by an invading army? That
of the Bepublic of Korea.

Who is assisting the Republic of Korea to defend itself?
The United Nations, with the support of 53 of the 59
members.

Who has the influence and the power to call off the in-
vading North Korean Army? The Soviet Union.

Who is responsilile for the bombing and bloodshed that
inevitably ensued from the act of aggression? The North
Koreans and those who support them.

Who, then, can stop the bombing and the bloodshed?
The North Koreans and those who support their
aggression.

What member of the Security Council is supporting the
North Korean regime in the Security Council? The Soviet
Union.

What kind of a "peaceful settlement" has the Soviet
Union proposed? The kind of settlement that would send
the United Nations police away and leave the bandits to
plunder Korea at will.

Who, then, is supporting the United Nations Charter
and really working for peace? The 5.S members of the
United Nations who are supporting the Republic of Korea.

Is the Soviet Union one of the 53? No.

The Soviet representative, in his remarks and
his proposals, suggests in effect tliat the United
Nations forces should leave Korea and leave the
defenseless Korean Republic to be slaughtered, at
lei.sure and without danger, by tlie aggressor.

No, sir. The United Nations will not do that.
No nation, great or small, could ever again feel
safe or hold any confidence in this body if we al-
lowed such shameless advice.

A man's house has been attacked by a band of
bandits, who have occupied most of its rooms and
driven him and his family into one corner of it.
He has called the police, who have arrived to help
him hold the corner, while reinforcements, which
will drive the invading band out of the house, are
on the way. At this point, a powerful patron of
the invaders suggests "peaceful settlement of the
question"; he says the shooting should stop and
that the police should go back to headquarters.
The invaders would remain in possession of most
of the house. They would hold onto their weapons.
The householder and his family would be left in

their corner, nearly disarmed and wounded,
barred from the kitchen and the larder. Does this
proposal appeal to the householder as "peaceful
settlement f" And what will the community think
of a police force which accepts such a proposal?

The United Nations has undertaken to protect
the Korean people from aggression and to help the
Korean people attain freedom, unity, and peace.

The "peace" proposed by the Soviet resolution
is the kind of peace that ensues when the innocent
victim lies dead and still.

This Council believes in the kind of peace en-
dorsed by Prime Minister Nehru, a living, dy-
namic, peace.

New Resolution Condemns Aggression

There is before the Council another resolution
which really does seek a peaceful settlement of the
Korean question, document S/1653. That resolu-
tion, submitted on July 31 by the United States
delegation, contains three simple elements : a con-
demnation of aggression, an appeal for the use of
the influence that could halt the North Korean
defiance of the United Nations, and an effort to
keep the conflict localized until peace is restored.

There is notliing obscure or devious about such
a proposal. Its peaceful purpose is clear. Faith-
ful support of its terms would, beyond any doubt,
terminate promptly this breaclt of the peace. One
can only be astonished that a state whicli has so
often expressed its peaceful intentions should
characterize a contribution to peace in the terms
employed by the representative of the Soviet
Union.

I hope the Soviet Union will agree with the
United States that the deliberate use of armed
attack as an instrument for seeking national polit-
ical objectives is an uncivilized act denounced by
the Charter of the United Nations. I hope that
the spokesman for the Soviet Government will
agree that to wage, condone, or support aggressive
warfare is an act of cynical brutality. I express
this hope because, thus far, the Soviet Union is
the only one of the great powers on this earth that
has held aloof from the condemnation of aggres-
sive warfare in Korea. Refusal to condemn such
aggression will make it clear who is for peace and
who is not.

If law and order are to be established in the
world community, there can be no temporizing
with defiance of the orders of the Security Council
to end a breach of the peace. We have come to-
gether in this voluntary association determined
that aggression shall cease to be profitable. Our
action here, as well as the action of our forces in
the field, must constitute a clear warning to all
potential aggressors. Armed defiance of the
United Nations is armed defiance of the people of
the world. It must be condemned as the ultimate
lawlessness. We must insure that every aggres-
sion is a complete failure. For the sake of peace
in the future, we can do no less.

328

Department of Slate Bulletin

Obligations of U.N. Members

Membership in the United Nations involves
many obligations. Every state which has signed
the Charter has solemnly pledged to —

take effective collective measures for the prevention
and removal of threats to the peace, and for the suppres-
sion of acts of aggression.

Every state that has signed the Charter has sol-
emnly pledged to —

refrain from giving assistance to any state against
which the United Nations is taking preventative or en-
forcement action.

Moreover, every member has joined in a pledge
to—

insure that states which are not members of the United
Nations act in accordance with its principles so far as may
be necessary for the maintenance of international peace
and security.

These obligations are set forth in the first two
articles of the Charter. Their application to the
breach of the peace in Korea is apparent. There
can be no doubt whatever of the obligations placed
on every member of the United Nations by the
breach of the peace. Every member is clearly
called upon to do everything in its power to halt
aggression and restore the peace in accordance
with the Charter.

It should not be necessary to issue a special ap-
peal to states to use their influence upon the au-
thorities of North Korea to cease defiance of the
Security Council We should be able to assume
that every peaceloving state would take such action
automatically. Faithful adherence to the Charter
pledges 1 have cited should eliminate any necessity
for a special act of the Security Council. Unfor-
tunately, the facts make it clear that Charter obli-
gations are not being fulfilled. To appreciate the
need for the second paragraph of the United States
draft resolution, one has only to ask: Whose
planes, whose tanks and whose training have made
it possible for the North Koreans to defy the
United Nations?

Every rej^resentative on the Council is aware
that the bloodshed in Korea could be halted this
very day, if certain member states were prepared
to fulfill their Charter obligations. Hundreds of
lives and thousands of casualties could have been
spared long since, if those member states had re-
sponded to the action of this Council, as we had
every right to expect them to respond. The fear
of war could be lifted from the peoples of this
earth if one certain member of this Council would
endorse, without qualification, the second para-
graph of the United States draft resolution.

Soviet Actions Oppose Peace Assertions

The world knows that strong and powerful in-
fluences exist which have not been employed in
the pursuit of peace. When the representative of
the Soviet Union returned to this Comicil, after

his self-imposed absence, the whole world hoped
this was a sign that those influences would be acti-
vated in support of peace. Those hopes have been
disappointed. All the maneuvering which has
taken place here since the first of August has not
confused the millions of men and women outside
the Soviet sphere who are free to read what they
like, think what they like, and speak what they
believe. People all over the world know that in-
ternational communism could halt the conflict in
Korea today. Those people will know what con-
clusions to draw from the prolongation of the
bloodshed. Rarely has there been such a direct
opportunity to demonstrate that repeated protes-
tations for peace have been sincere. The whole
world knows in which direction to look for the
signal that could halt the evil of war.

At the meeting of the Council on July 28 our
highly respected colleague, the representative of
India, Sir Benegal Rau, closed his statement with
these words :

If the North Koreans, even at this stage, would comply
with the Council's resolution of 25 June — now that they
know the world's verdict — they would spare Korea much
needless suffering, they would allay fears of a world con-
flagration and strengthen the hands of those who are
working for peace.

The resolution before us takes inspiration from
those words. Its central objective is to keep the
conflict confined to Korea and to end it there.
In spirit and in substance it carries forward the
resolution on the essentials of peace endorsed at
the last General Assembly by 53 nations. It em-
bodies a practical application of those essentials
of peaceful coexistence, so loudly proclaimed but
so seldom practiced.

Since the outbreak of hostilities of June 25 every
action taken by my Government has had one cen-
tral objective — to suppress aggression in Korea —
and until that is accomplished, to prevent its
spread. This is the central objective of the reso-
lution before us. It puts forward an elemental
obligation of good citizenship in the world com-
munity :

to refrain from action which might lead to the spread of
tlie Korean conflict to other areas and thereby further
endanger international peace and security.

Armed conflict anywhere endangers peoples
everywhere. Inherent in every conflict is the ter-
rible possibility that it may spread and engulf us
all. The gravest responsibility of every govern-
ment is to prevent that from happening. There
is no reason that excuses any government from
meeting that responsibility.

Faithful support of the resolution before us
would strongly support the peacemaking functions
of the United Nations. It does not presume to
answer all the problems before us. It does seek
to make an urgent and practical step in the direc-
tion of peace. I deeply hope that every one of us
is prepared to make at least this contribution to
the welfare of mankind.

August 28, 1950

329

The distinguished representative of India has
taken the initiative in bringing to our attention
the necessity for giving urgent attention to the
purposes for which the United Nations is fight-
ing in Korea.^

I know that this initiative on the part of India's
representative has stimulated all of us to think
seriously and constantly of our peace aims — the
ultimate outcome of our present military effort.
He has effectively made the point that the United
Nations will have "to frame and publish its own
proposals for the future of Korea, once hostilities
cease and the North Korean authorities withdraw
their forces in accordance with the resolution
already adopted by the Council."

My Government welcomes the belief of Sir Bene-
gal Rau that now, as well as in the future, we must
turn these problems over and examine them thor-
oughly. We hope that other delegates will give
us the benefit of their thoughts on these matters
so that the United Nations will be able to act with
wisdom and assurance. This exchange of views
should contribute to the objective stated by the
representative of India.

Korea Should Be Free

The United Nations is engaged in a struggle
to give a small nation the right to live in liberty and
independence, free from political pressure from
any side. United Nations forces are not fighting
in Korea and mobilizing their resources all over
the world in order to further the political or mili-
tary interests of any country. They are doing so
because they believe if they protect one small
country, they are protecting all countries, great
and small from political oppression and military
invasion.

The United States, like almost every other mem-
ber of the United Nations, wishes to live in peace,
in tolerance, and in productive cooperation with
its neighbors in the world community. The
United States is determined to support the ef-
forts of the United Nations to insure that all
countries, small and great, may be free from ag-
gression. The United States believes that if
aggression is stopped in Korea, it is less likely to
break out elsewhere. The United States believes
that the restoration of peace in Korea by the
United Nations will strengthen peace everywhere.

The United States has no designs on Korea as a
military base. Events have made that very clear.
We hope some day to see it agreed that no great
power will try to dominate a unified Korea. There
would be no American troops — no forces of any
of the other United Nations — in Korea today if
the North Korean authorities had exercised the
restraint which the Soviet Union was in a posi-
tion to suggest to them.

' Made on Aug. 17 and released to the press by the U.S.
Mission to the U.N. on the same date.

If now, the Soviet Union would exercise its in-
fluence, the breach of the peace would be ended
forthwith. If now, the Soviet Union would
decide to respect the independence of its neighbors
and live in true friendliness with the rest of the
world, if it would prove its words by deeds, the fear
that now grips the world would disappear. If that
were done, the United Nations then could concen-
trate its entire effort on bettering the lot of man-
kind— and waste less of its energies and resources
in coping with such situations as that we face now
in Korea.

U.N. Aid to Korea

But the fighting in Korea continues and the
United Nations effort to repel the attack grows
stronger and stronger. New forces are being
pledged and shortly will be transported to the
scene. Thailand, Turkey, the United Kingdom,
Canada. Australia, New Zealand, and tlie Philip-
pines thus far have offered ground forces for
.service in Korea. In all, nearly 30,000 fully
equipped ground troops have thus far been pledged
to support the forces of the United States and the
Republic of Korea now in action under the flag
of the United Nations.

The naval forces of Australia, Canada, France,
the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, and the
United Kingdom have joined those of the United
States in Korean waters. The air forces of
Australia and Canada have joined in the opera-
tion, and contributions from Belgium, Greece, and
the Union of South Africa have been pledged.
Many other types of assistance are being offered
by many other nations. Thus, it becomes ap-
parent to all that the United Nations is not the
feeble body that some have tried to make it.

Yet, even while the cannons roar, we must con-
sider the aims for which we are fighting. We
must ask ourselves questions regarding the kind
of peace that the outcome of the conflict should
bring. We must ask ourselves if there is anything
we can do now to assure that the purposes for
which we pray and fight may be more quickly
accomplished.

Objectives of U.N.

The Security Council and the General Assembly
already have built a firm basis for any future
action which might be decided upon to fulfill
the objectives for which the United Nations is
now fighting.

The Security Council has set as its first ob-
jective the ending of the breach of the peace.
This objective must be pursued in such a manner
that no opportunity is provided for another
attempt at invasion.

Another objective is to provide a demonstration
of United Nations achievement in regard to Korea
that will deter and prevent aggression anywhere.

330

Department of State Bulletin

The General Assembly, for 3 years, lias sought
the establishment by the Korean people of a free,
unified, and independent nation. The United
Nations must see that tne people of Korea attain
complete individual and political freedom.

Shall only a part of the country be assured this
freedom? I think not. This question has already
been decided by the General Assembly resolutions
of 1947, 1948, and 1949. The Korean people expect
that when their Gethsemane has passed, they will
all have the right to freedom and unity. Korea's
prospects would be dark if any action of the
United Nations were to condemn it to exist in-
definitely as "half slave and half free," or even
one-third slave and two-thirds free. The United
Nations has consistently worked for a unified
country, an independent Korea. The United
Nations will not want to turn from that objective
now.

The General Assembly has decided that fair and
free elections should be held throughout the whole
of the Korean peninsula and has directed the
United Nations Commission on Korea to perform
that task. Thus far, it has been prevented from
functioning in the area controlled by the North
Korean regime. But, surely, this objective of
holding free elections throughout all of Korea
under the supervision of the United Nations must
be maintained.

As order is brought out of chaos, some United
Nations body should be on the spot to lend all
practicable assistance to the Republic in estab-
lishing democratic government in the reunited
Korea. Such a body might be effective in helping
to dispel suspicion and might materially aid the
transition from war to a secure peace.

I am not, of course, making any specific sugges-
tions for action now. I am only turning over
ideas that, after more mature consideration, the
United Nations, through the Security Council or
the General Assembly, may choose to accept or
reject.

Also, we cannot forget that the General Assem-
bly has stated the objective of achieving the ad-
mission of Korea to the United Nations as early
as possible.

All these are long-range aims. We should not
lose sight of them, even in the tumult of fighting.
The United Nations has undertaken a mighty
task. I believe that all 53 nations associated in
this effort to stop aggression will remain steadfast
in their support of the principles of the United
Nations and of its peacemaking functions.

Good Faith for Action Needed

There is a reservoir of wisdom that exists in this
and other bodies of the United Nations, and I feel
we should all do our bit to contribute ideas to a
discussion that is of such vital interest to all the
world.

Some things we have to take on trust. We are

less trustful, however, when once our original
trust has been betrayed. I think that very few
countries today will view with overconfidence the
attitude of groups of countries that have com-
mitted or supported aggression. We need deeds
of peace as well as words of peace to reassure us.
We will want safeguards of a substantial kind to
bring us confidence that the main purpose of our
action in Korea is truly accomplished — the estab-
lishment of a secure independent country that
shall neither threaten others nor be itself
threatened.

As this discussion continues, we may learn how
the broad objectives of the United Nations can
be achieved in this one particular country. We
may learn how to bring that country out of the
agony that has been inflicted upon it with the
least amount of injury.

But much responsibility rests upon the Soviet
delegate and his Government. Will they forsake
suspicion and isolation and join in a frank and
free exchange of ideas with the rest of the world ?

Will they believe that no country desires to
threaten them in Korea or anywhere else around
their vast perimeter? Will the Soviet Govern-
ment join in the effort to build the United Nations
as the major safeguard against attack by any state
on any state?

Mr. President, does the Soviet Government wish
peace in Korea ?

It can have peace.

Does the Soviet Government wish to end the
fighting ?

It can end the fighting.

Does the Soviet Government feel the need for
some assurance from the United Nations that a
free and independent Korea will not in any way
threaten the security of the Soviet Union ?

I have no doubt that it can obtain that assur-
ance.

Can all of us accept the principles contained in
the resolutions adopted by the General Assembly
on November 14, 1947, December 12, 1948, and
October 21, 1949?

Can all of us agree that the United Nations
ought to have free and unhampered access to and
full freedom to travel within all parts of Korea?

Can all of us support free elections supervised
by the United Nations in such a manner as to
insure they will be carried out by secret ballot,
without fraud and free from intimidation?

If the answers to these questions should be in
the affirmative, many of the issues which trouble
us now would be on the road to solution.

What is needed is good faith and the will to
act upon that faith.

The opportunity is here. The place is here.
The time is at hand. Only the word and the deed
are lacking.

We are waiting, Mr. President. And while we
wait, the strength of the United Nations increases.
Its resolution will neither flag nor fail.

August 28, 1950

331

ECOSOC Will Remain in Session To Aid South Korea

The Economic and Social Council, meeting in
Geneva, on August 2, formally added to the agenda
of its current session an item on aid to the civilian
population of Korea.

This action followed a meeting of heads of del-
egations on August 1 to consider action on the
Security Council resolution which was communi-
cated on that date to the president of the Economic
and Social Council, Hernan Santa Cruz. The
Council agreed, however, that no discussion was
to be held on this question for several days in
order to enable delegations to get instructions
from their respective governments.

The Security Council joint resolution was
introduced by France, Norway, and the United
Kingdom.^

Text of Resolution

The Security Council,

Recogxizino the hardships and privations to
which the people of Korea are being subjected as a
result of the continued prosecution by the North
Korean forces of their unlawful attack ; and

Appreciating the spontaneous offers of assistance
to the Korean people which have been made by gov-
ernments, Specialized Agencies, and non-governmen-
tal organizations ;

Reqnests the Unified Command to exercise respon-
sibility for determining the requirements for the
relief and support of the civilian population of
Korea, and for establishing in the field the procedures
for providing such relief and support ;

Requests the Secretary-General to transmit all
offers of assistance for relief and support to the
Unified Command ;

Requests the Unified Command to provide the
Security Council with reports, as appropriate, on
its relief activities ;

Requests the Secretary-General, the Economic and
Social Council in accordance with Article 6'5 of the
Charter, other appropriate United Nations principal
and subsidiary organs, the Specialized Agencies in
accordance with tlie terms of their respective agree-
ments with the United Nations, and appropriate
non-governmental organizations to provide such as-
sistance as the Unified Command may request for
tlie relief and support of the civilian population of
Korea, and as appropriate in connection with the
responsibilities being carried out by the Unified
Command on behalf of the Security Council.

Ambassador Warren R. Austin, United States
representative in the Security Council, said the
resolution was intended to set forth "in a prelimi-
nary way" the responsibilities of the United
Nations toward the civilian population of Korea.
The United Nations had a "deep responsibility"
to meet the problem of the refugees and the needs
of the people who would have to rebuild their
country when the aggressor liad been repulsed.

The best method of handling relief, Mr. Austin
said, was through the unified command and "its
field agency, the United Nations Command."

The resolution before the Council invoked for
the first time one of the "farsighted provisions" of
the Charter, namely Article 65, he observed. The
resolution also invoked for the first time in the
case of aggression the assistance of specialized
agencies and was "a historic step in the mobiliza-
tion of the world peace machinery," Mr. Austin
declared.

The specialized agencies could now begin to plan
ahead for rehabilitation and reconstruction.
Thus, the World Health Organization would play
a great role in preventing epidemics and rebuild-
ing the liealth of the Korean people. The United
Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural
Organization and the Food and Agriculture Or-
ganization could do the same in their fields.

The specialized agencies could, under the resolu-
tion, also begin "to recast their programs" to adapt
them to the needs of the present, Mr. Austin said.

Thus, step by step, the United Nations were
building up a program to annihilate aggression
not only in Korea but also all over the world, Mr.
Austin concluded.

Following is the text of the resolution adopted
unanimously by the Economic and Social Council
at Geneva on August 14.^

The Economic and Social Council,

Profoundly Concerned over the hardship and the suffer-
ing weight upon the people of Korea by the unlawful attack
of the North Korean forces.

Determined to do everything in its power for the relief
and support of the civil population of Korea,

Having Given Due Consideration to the resolution
adopted by the Security Council on 31 July, 19.50, and
the request addressed to it in that resolution under the
terms of Article 65 of the Charter,

' U.N. doe. S/1652, adopted July 31, 1950. The resolution
was adopted by a 9--0 vote with 1 alsstention (Yugoslavia).

' Released to the press by the U.N. Information Center
at Geneva on Aug. 14, 1950.

332

Department of State Bulletin

Bearing in Mind the agreements between the United
Nations and the specialized agencies which provide for
cooperation of these agencies with the Economic and
Social Council in renderins such assistance to the Se-
curity Council as that Council may request, and deeply
conscious of its functions and responsibilities under
Chapters IX and X of the Charter,

1. Declares its readiness to provide for such assistance
as the unified command may request In accordance with
the above-mentioned resolution,

2. Requests the specialized agencies and appropriate
subsidiary bodies of the United Nations to lend their ut-
most support in providing such assistance as may be re-
quested by the unified command through the Secretary-
General for the relief and support of the civilian popula-
tion of Korea, and authorize the Secretary-General to
transmit directly to them such requests for assistance as
fall within their respective fields of competence ;

3. Invites government members of the United Nations,
the Secretary-General and appropriate nongovernmental
organizations, particularly those in consultative status
with the Economic and Social Council, to assist in devel-
oping among the peoples of the world the fullest possible
understanding of and support for the action of the United
Nations in Korea and requests the Secretary-General to
seek on behalf of the Council the cooperation of the spe-
cialized agencies as appropriate for this purpose ;

4. Authorises the Secretary-General to invite appro-
priate nongovernmental organizations to give such help
as is within their power for the relief of the civilian
population in Korea, and requests him to make suitable
administrative arrangements in this connection ;

5. Requests the Secretary-General to render progress
reports to the Economic and Social Council on the action
taken under this resolution and to include when appro-
priate such other information and observations as may
be helpful for consideration of longer-term measures for
economic and social assistance to the people of Korea ;

6. Decides not to close the present session when the
Council has disposed of the present agenda but to adjourn
it temporarily, and authorizes the President, in consulta-
tion with the Secretary-General, to reconvene the Coun-
cil at United Nations headquarters whenever necessary
in connection with matters requiring action under this
resolution.

Korea's Fight for Independence

On August 14 the White Bouse announced that
the President sent the following message to Presi-
dent Syngman Rhee of the Republic of Korea:

On this second anniversary of the procla-
mation of the Republic of Korea, which finds
the United States and other members of the
United Nations aiding your people in the
common purpose of repelling a savage and
ruthless Communist invader, I convey to
Your Excellency and to the people of Korea
the good wishes of the people of the United
States. The American people have watched
with great satisfaction the impressive
achievements of the Republic of Korea since
its founding two years ago. I know that the
aggressor will be repelled and that the people
of Korea will achieve the freedom and inde-
pendence which are their natural right. By
a stanch adherence to the principles of right
and democracy, victory is assured.

U.S. Requests U.N. Use Good Offices
for Red Cross Activities in North Korea

Following is the text of a letter transmitted to Secre-
tary-General Trygve Lie by Ambassador Warren R.
Austin on August IJf and released to the press by the
United States Mission to the United Nations on the same
date.

Excellency: I have the honor to advise that
the treatment of the Prisoners of War and civilian
internees by the forces invading the Republic of
Korea is a matter of deep concern to the Govern-
ment of the United States.

Arrangements have been made to facilitate the
humanitarian mission of Mr. Frederick Bieri,
Delegate of the International Committee of the
Red Cross, who will operate in the territory con-
trolled by the Unified Command under General
MacArthur. In accomplishing his mission, it is
expected that Mr. Bieri will carry out the services
for the Prisoners of War provided for in the
Geneva Conventions of 1929 and 1949. Arrange-
ments have already been made by my Government
and by the Headquarters of the United Nations
Command to collect and disseminate information
regarding the Prisoners of War and civilian in-
ternees in cooperation with the International
Committee of the Red Cross.

On the other hand, my Government has not re-
ceived any information as to steps taken by persons
in control in North Korea to implement their
promise to be guided by the humanitarian princi-
ples of the Geneva Conventions regarding Prison-
ers of War.

It is requested that you extend your good offices
to the end that a representative of the Interna-
tional Committee of the Red Cross be allowed
entry into the territory controlled by the persons
in authority in North Korea to carry out the same
type of humanitarian services with respect to the
Prisoners of War that the International Com-
mittee of the Red Cross delegate is enabled to
carry out in South Korea. It is also requested
that you extend your good offices to the end that
arrangements may be made for the collection and
transmission of information regarding members
of the United Nations forces in custody of the
North Koreans and for ensuring to the Prisoners
of War and civilian internees other protective and
humanitarian rights under the Geneva Conven-
tions.

I should appreciate being informed of any ac-
tion that you may take in this matter, which is
of urgent and vital concern to the American people
and their Government, as it will unquestionably
be to the nationals and Governments of other
United Nations countries whose forces are or may
become engaged in the conflict.

Accept [etc.].

Aogosf 28, 1950

333

ECA Authorizations for Aid
to Korea in July and August

[Released to the press iy ECA August 16]

More than 11 million dollars worth of railroad
equipment, food, fuel, medicine and drugs, and
other nonmilitary supplies are being supplied to
the Republic of Korea under the United States
economic aid program to the war-torn peninsula.

Reporting on United States steps to bolster the
civilian economy of free Korea, Dr. Edgar A. J.
Johnson, director of the Korea program for the
Economic Cooperation Administration, said that
ECA was authorizing purchases of vitally needed
goods to maintain the country's transportation
and communications system, combat health prob-
lems, and supply civilians with necessary food.

All of ECA's procurement for Korea, Dr. John-
son said, is coordinated with the military supply
program. Although the commodities being fi-
nanced under ECA's program are vitally needed
now to maintain the civilian economy, many of
the goods will ultimately be used in the countiy's
reconstruction and rehabilitation program.

Authorizations issued during July totaled
$7,429,200. Approvals of $3,868,500 during the
first week in August brings the cumulative total
since the start of hostilities to $11,297,700. ECA
said that some of the supplies had already reached
Korea, others are en route, and the remainder is
still to be procured.

More than one-third of the ECA purchase ap-
provals—$4,-340,000 for railroad and related equip-
ment— will be used in Korea's transportation
system. The authorizations for railroad equip-
ment include: $1,330,000 for standard gauge
locomotives; $1,750,000 for locomotive repairs;
$527,000 for railroad repair equipment; $250,000
for railroad flat cars ; $190,000 for railroad freight
car tanks; $135,000 for railroad freight trucks;
$85,000 for creosoted bridge and switch ties;
$40,000 for replacement parts for locomotives;
$28,000 for railroad equipment; and $5,000 for
tubes and pipe for locomotives.

Coal for the railroads and the thermal power
plants is being procured under a $1,000,000 au-
thorization. Another $194,000 is being used to
purchase petroleum and products.

To combat health problems in free Korea, ECA
has authorized the purchase of $498,000 worth of
drugs, medicines, and vaccines and is spending
$800,000 for insect control and water purification.
The authorizations for this type of commodities
include : $18,000 for oxygen ; $18,000 for smallpox
vaccine; $135,000 for other vaccines; $2,000 for
reefers to safeguard vaccines and $325,000 for
drugs and medicines.

Although civilian supplies of food have not
become critical since agricultural production in

South Korea before the hostilities was good, au-
thorizations totaling $423,200 for food have been
issued.

Jeeps, trucks, tires, and related equipment are
being purchased under authorizations totaling
$829,500. This includes : $550,000 for trucks and
spare parts ; $270,000 for truck tires ; $8,500 for i
jeeps; and $1,000 for batteries and bulbs. I

Other authorizations will permit the purchase
of tin ingot, lead ingot, copper ingot, steel shapes,
wool waste, asphalt, and paper bags. The re-
mainder of the authorizations provide funds for
ocean transportation, inland freight, warehouse
charges, and teclinical services.

Latvian Expression on the
Korean Situation Aci^nowledged

[Released to the press August 14]

The Department of State today released the text of the
United States reply dated A^igust 9, 1950, to the aide-
memoire of July 27 by the Minister of Lithuania, the
Chargd of Latvia, and the acting consul general of
Estonia in charge of legation. Text of the United States
aide-memoire follows.

With reference to the aide-memoire of July 27,
1950, which was presented to the Department of
State by the Honorable the Minister of Lithuania,
the Charge d'Aifaires of Latvia, and the acting
consul general of Estonia in charge of legation
and in confirmation of the conversation of that
date, the Secretary of State informs the above-
named representatives of the Baltic States as
follows:

The Department of State is pleased to receive
the expression of appreciation tendered by the
representatives of Estonia, Latvia, and Lithuania
on behalf of their respective countries for the
policy followed by the United States Government
toward the Baltic States. The Department is also
pleased to note the approval expressed by the rep-
resentatives of Estonia, Latvia, and Lithuania of
the policy followed by the United States and the
United Nations with respect to the recent develop-
ments in Korea. As is well known, these policies
conform with the traditional views of the United
States Government concerning the rights of all
peoples to self-determination and freedom from
aggression.

The request of the representatives of the Baltic
States that the United States support considera-
tion by the United Nations "of the genocidal mass
deportations and of the appalling situation in gen-
eral in the Baltic States" will be brought to the
attention of the Department's representatives who
are directly concerned with United Nations affairs.

334

Department of State Bulletin

Soviet Distortions Demand

an American Campaign of Truth

STATEMENT BY SECRETARY ACHESON

IReleascd to the press August 11]

I would like to emphasize that the new wave of
Soviet propaganda and distortions against the
United States and against the great majority of
the United Nations, makes it all the more urgent
that we step up our activities in what the President
has called the American campaign of truth.

We have drawn up plans for taking the offensive
in a campaign of truth, and it is my earnest hope
that the Congress will continue to expedite action
on the President's request for the appropriation to
carry out this new campaign. It is heartening to
know of the vigorous support being given this
action by various Members of Congress.

PLANS OUTLINED BY HOWLAND SARGEANT

[Released to the press August 15]

Howland H. Sargeant, Deputy Assistant Secre-
tary for Public Affairs, discussed plans for the
President's new campaign of truth at a meeting to-
day of the National Inventors Council at the De-
partment of Commerce Building.

In outlining to the inventors the Department's
proposed 89 million-dollar expansion for its infor-
mation and educational exchange program, Mr.
Sargeant particularly discussed some of the efforts
which are now being made to devise new ways of
penetrating the Cominform's iron curtain with the
truth about the United States and what it stands
for in world affairs. Mr. Sargeant also appealed
to the nation's inventors for all possible aid in
the development of new devices and techniques
which might be helpful in this campaign.

Mr. Sargeant pointed out that the Department's
89 million-dollar supplementary budget request
for the expanded program, now pending before
Congress, included substantial allocations for re-
search in the field of new devices and techniques
and, particularly, for more intensified antijam-
ming operations designed to curtail Soviet inter-
ference with Voice of America broadcasts.

Mr. Sargeant also revealed that the Department
was arranging with one of the country's leading
private research organizations for special studies
along these lines.

Hearings on the Department's supjilementary
request for the expanded information and educa-
tional exchange program were recently concluded
before a subcommittee of the House Appropria-
tions Committee, and the subcommittee's report is
now being awaited. Hearings in the Senate are
expected to start in the near future.

PUBLISHER'S COUNCIL ENDORSES PROGRAM

The Department of State announced on August
16 that Assistant Secretary Edward W. Barrett
and other officers of the public affairs area of the
Department of State met, on that date, with repre-
sentatives of the American Book Publisher's
Council to discuss the Department's plans for an
expanded United States information and educa-
tional program. The meeting was suggested by
the Council in order to give its members an oppor-
tunity to express their views on the expansion of
the information program now before Congress.
The Council has given the proposed new program
its full endorsement.

The publishers were represented at the meeting
by John O'Connor, president of Grosset and Dun-
lap and also president of the Council ; Harold K.
Guinzburg, president of Viking Press; Cass
Canfield, chairman of the Board, Harper &
Brothers ; Henry A. Laughlin, president of Hough-
ton Miiflin Company; Datus C. Smith, Jr., direc-
tor, Princeton University Press; Jack Dalton,
director of libraries at the University of Virginia,
representing the executive secretary of the Ameri-
can Library Association, and Theodore Waller of
the American Book Publishers Council.

PSYCHOLOGICAL STRATEGY BOARD

TO COORDINATE FOREIGN INFORMATION

[Released to the press August 17]

The Department of State today announced the
establishment of a national psychological strategy
board which, under the Secretary of State, will
have responsibilities for coordinating foreign in-
formation and psychological strategy in situations
where joint action by more than one agency of the
Government is required in this field.

The Department of Defense, the Joint Chiefs
of Staff, and the Central Intelligence Agency have
been requested to designate representatives to sit
on the board.

In addition, the National Security Resources
Board and the Economic Cooperation Adminis-
ti-ation have been invited to provide liaison
representatives.

The Assistant Secretary for Public Affairs will
serve as chairman.

For some months, an interdepartmental ad-
visory committee has been drawing up plans in
the overseas information field to cope with various
types of emergencies that might possibly arise.

Today's move amounts to intensification and
augmentation of the activities of that committee
to ass-ure continuous planning and coordination
in this field.

August 28, 1950

335

Report of the Trusteeship Council to the Security Council
on the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands

TJ.N. doc. S/1628 [excerptB]
Dated July 25, 1950

I. Introduction

In accordance with Article 83 of the Charter,
and with the resolution adopted by the Security
Council at its 415th meeting on 8 March 1949 and
the resolution ^ adopted by the Trusteeship Coun-
cil at the forty-sixth meeting of its fourth session
on 24 March 1949, the Trusteeship Council has
carried out on behalf of the Security Council those
functions of the United Nations under the Inter-
national Trusteeship System relating to political,
economic, social and educational advancement of
the inhabitants of the Trust Territory of the
Pacific Islands, designated as a strategic area.

II. Examination of the Annual Report

The report of the Government of the United
States of America on the administration of the
Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands for the
period ending 30 June 1949 was transmitted ^ to
the members of the Trusteeship Council on 27 Feb-
ruary 1950 and was placed on the agenda for the
seventh session.

Eear-Admiral Leon S. Fiske, Deputy High
Commissioner of the Trust Territory, who had
been appointed as the special representative of
the Administering Authority, submitted written
answers ^ to written questions addressed to him by
members of the Council on the I'eport and on the
administration of the Territory. During the
twelfth and thirteenth meetings, the special rep-
resentative of the Administering Authority
answered oral questions of members of the
Council.

During the thirteenth and fourteenth meetings,
the Council held a general discussion with a view
to formulating conclusions and recommendations
relating to the report and to conditions in the
Territory, and appointed a Drafting Committee
consisting of the representatives of Australia,

M6 (IV), T/296.

= T/470. See Bulletin of Mar. 20, 1950, p. 457.

' T/L.89.

Dominican Republic, China and the United King-
dom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, to
draft a report to form part of the report of the
Trusteeship Council to the Security Council on its
activities at its seventh session with respect to
strategic areas under Trusteeship.

The draft prepared by the Drafting Committee
was considered by the Council at its twenty-first
and twenty-seventh meetings and at the latter
meeting the Council adopted the report as a whole.

[Here follows Part One. Outline of condi-
tions as stated in the annual report of the
Administering Authority and by the special

representative]

Part Two. Conclusions and Recommendations
Approved by the Trusteeship Council

1. GENERAL

The Council congratulates the Administering
Authority on the substantial progress made in all
fields during the year under review and is of the
opinion that the progress achieved is all the more
notable because of the scattered nature of the
islands comprising the territory and the relatively
short time during which they have been under the
administration of the United States.

2. POLITICAL ADVANCEMENT

(a) Application of international treaties and, con-
ventions
The Council notes that the Administering Au-
thority is studying the question of the application
to the Trust Territory of international treaties,
agreements and conventions, including Interna-
tional Labour Organisation conventions and rec-
ommendations, and expresses the hope that the
results of this study will soon be made available to
the Council.

(5) Status of the Territory and its inhabitants

The Council notes that organic legislation for
the Territory, including a definition of the legal
status of the inhabitants, is the subject of renewed

336

Department of State Bulletin

stufly and expresses the hope that such legislation
will soon be enacted.

The Council notes with gratification the estab-
lishment of a field headquarters on Truk and re-
quests the Administering Authority to continue
to give consideration to the possibility of placing
the seat of government within the Territory itself,
in accordance with the Council's recommendation
adopted during its fifth session.

{d) Terntorial, regional., and local bodies

The Council commends the Administering Au-
thority for its progressive development of regional
and local organs of self-government and recom-
mends that the Administering Authority press
forward with its long-range plans to establish a
Territory-wide legislative body and that it proceed
progressively to democratize the municipalities.

3. ECONOMIC ADVANCEMENT

{a) Economic diversification

The Council, noting the steps taken by the Ad-
ministering Authority to foster indigenous fishing
enterjjrises and indigenous-operated shipping,
recommends that the Administering Authority
continue its efforts to diversify the economy of the
Territory.

(&) Head tax

The Council, taking note of the explanation
given by the Administering Authority as to the
desirability of utilizing the head tax at the present
time, as well as the assurances of the Administer-
ing Authority that it fully appreciates the desir-
ability of introckicing, as soon as practicable, taxes
based on ability to pay, reiterates its recommenda-
tion that the Administering Authority consider
the ultimate abolition of the head tax and its re-
placement by a more progressive system of
taxation.

The Council, taking note of the existence of
systems of customary tributes (payments in cash
or in kind) to indigenous chiefs or headmen, ex-
presses the hope that the Administering Authority
will take such steps as may be possible, so as to
ensure that these customs are not abused.

4. SOCIAL ADVANCEMENT

(a) Status of women

The Council, noting with satisfaction the elec-
tion of two women to the Palau Congi-ess, ex-
presses the hoj^e that the Administering Authority
will encourage increasing participation by the
women of the Territory in the discussion and
management of island affairs.

(6) Puilic health

The Council commends the Administering Au-
thority on the great jjrogress achieved in the field

Augusf 28, 7950

902200—50 3

of public health, and considers that the statistical
information to be derived from the medical survey
undertaken by the Administering Authority will
be of great value.

5. EDUCATIONAL ADVANCEMENT

The Council commends the Administering Au-
thority on the pi'ogress achieved in education,
trusts that this development will continue and
recommends that the Administering Authority
consider the possibility of the greater use of radio
for mass education.

[Here follow the titles, observations of
members of the Trusteeship Council repre-
senting their individual opinions only, peti-
tions, and visiting mission.]

U.S. Delegation to
Non-Self-Governing Territories
Special Committee

The Department of State announced on August
7 that Benjamin Gerig, director. Office of Depend-
ent Area Affairs, Department of State, recently
designated by the President as United States rep-
resentative on the United Nations Special Commit-
tee on Economic, Social and Educational Condi-
tions in Non-self-governing Territories, will attend
a meeting of that Committee at Lake Success be-
ginning August 18. The following advisers have
been named to assist Mr. Gerig :

Ambrose Caliver, Ph. D., Office of Education, Federal Se-
curity Agency

Jolui C. Creerh, Commander (USNR), Economics Officer,
OfHce of Island Governments, Department of the Navy

James P. Davis, Director, Division of Territories and
Island Possessions, Department of the Interior

Phyllis li. LeRoy, Office of Dependent Area Affairs, Depart-
ment of State

The Special Committee was established at the
fourth session of the General Assembly for a 3-year
period to examine the Secretary-General's sum-
maries and analyses of the information transmitted
under article 73 (e) of the Charter by eight mem-
bers of the United Nations which administer non-
self-governing territories and to make certain rec-
ommendations thereon for the consideration of the
General Assembly. In addition to the eight mem-
bers transmitting information, eight other mem-
bers elected by the Fourth Committee are members
of the Special Committee.

Among the items to be discussed by the Special
Committee are the progress achieved in develop-
ment programs in non-self-governing territories
over the past 3 years, technical assistance accorded
to non-self-governing territories by specialized in-
ternational bodies, and the factors to be taken
into account in deciding whether a territory is or
is not a territory whose people have not yet at-
tained a full measure of self-government.

337

U.S. Administration of Pacific Trust Territory '

Statement 'by Rear Admiral Leon S. Fiske

U.S. Special Representative for the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands '

As I feel sure that all members of the Council
are familiar with the geographical and ethnolog-
ical situation in tlie Pacific islands, I will not re-
count the many details which I presented to the
Council last July. I would simply remind you
that the trust territory covers an ocean area as
large as the United States, although the total dry
land area is only 687 square miles; and that the
total population of some 54,000 indigenous people
is comjDrised of eight different language and cul-
tural groups, regularly residing in 64 of the 96
distinct island groups which are dispersed in the
area. Direct contact between large groups of the
population is therefore difficult, expensive, and
time-consuming. In some insfiances, landings
have to be made directly over a reef and through
the surf and can be effected with safety only in
calm weather. In a few instances, the weather
has been so bad on successive trips of the civil
administration field parties that they have been
unable to land at a particular island over a period
of several months.

This division of people geographically, lin-
guistically, and culturally, constitutes the big
problem confronting the administration. To
meet it, and to be responsive to the objectives of
the trusteeship agreement, requires a much larger
number of ships and airplanes and a larger ad-
ministrative, technical, and educational staff than
would be required for the same number of people
under ordinary conditions. This logistic prob-
lem, as we term it, is a very expensive one and,
because of the high costs involved, inevitably
affects the means available to the administering
authority for the implementation of all programs
for the advancement of the inhabitants. I feel

'For additional data concerning U.S. adniinLstration of
tiie trust territory of tlie Pacific islands see Bulletin of
Mar. 6. 1949, p. 294 ; Aug. 1, 1949, pp. 133, 134, 130 ; Mar.
20. 1950, p. 457.

'Made before the Trustee.'jhip Council on June 19 and
released to tlie press by the U.S. Mission to the U.N. on
the same date.

sure that the members of the Trusteeship Council
will appreciate the fact that the administering
authority has been generous in making available
metropolitan funds and facilities in response to
its trust.

Cost of Administration

Although locally derived revenues ai'e perhaps
on the order of $300,000, the aggregate cost to the
United States of administering the Pacific islands
is estimated to be at least 7 million dollars annu-
ally. The total cost is difficult to estimate pre-
cisely, as innumerable services and facilities in
kind are supported out of subdivisions of the fed-
eral budget other than the specific appropriation
for island governments. We do know that the
ships and planes employed for the Pacific island
administration alone cost more than 4 million dol-
lars' annually to maintain and operate, without
regard to depreciation and the capital investment
involved.

The year now under review, namely, that end-
ing June 30, 1949, may be regarded as a period of
consolidation in the administration of the trust
territory. During this time, the administration
has been developing its program based on a con-
tinuing evaluation of the needs of the several com-
munities and framed within the limits of funds
available. The result has been a gradual but not
always dramatic advance, providing, we believe, a
good foundation for furtlier progress in the future.

I wish, particularly, to invite your attention to
the fact that the recommendations which you ap-
proved at the fifth session of the council were not
made until after the close of the year covered by
the report now under examination. Consequently',
the report does not reflect the action taken as a
result of your recommendations. These have,
nevertheless, been most carefidly considered; but
the action based on them will naturally be re-
flected in later reports. Several of the recom-

338

Department of State Bulletin

luoiuiatioiis concerned matters upon whicli the
administering autliority was already at work. The
action taken on some of these matters has been
indicated in the replies to your written questions.
I wish, however, to review briefly at this time the
action taken to date on each ol' the specific recom-
mendations approved by the Council last year.

Action Taken on Council's Recommendations

Although it has not seemed practicable as yet to
transfer the seat of government to a site within
the territory itself, the administering authority
has established a field headquarters on Truk, which
is near both the geographical and population cen-
ters of the area. Officials whose duties entail the
most direct contact with the indigenous inhabit-
ants will henceforth operate from that headquar-
ters. Those presently based there are the chief
administrator of the field headquarters, the chief
justice, the associate justice, the staff anthropolo-
gist, the staff agriculturist, the staff conservation-
ist, the staff medical officer, and the staff fishing
and shipping commissioner. It is estimated that
to build suitable headquarters for the high com-
missioner's entire staff at Truk, or at some other
point within the territory, if based on the present
scale of administration, would cost 25 million dol-
lars or more. Even if funds were now available, a
construction program would require at least 4 or 5
years for comijletion. A recommendation for con-
struction of permanent facilities has been sub-
mitted by the high commissioner to the Navy
Department. Pending the availability of more
aclequate facilities within the territory, the balance
of the high commissioner's staff, including the
deputy high commissioner, moved last October
from Guam to Pearl Harbor, Hawaii. There, they
are immediately available for consultation with
the high commissioner and are in an advantageous
position to coordinate arrangements for the logis-
tic supiDort of the trust territory and to confer
witli the numerous scientific and professional ad-
visers, many of whom reside in or pass through
Hawaii. A small liaison office remains on Guam
to facilitate the flow of personnel and goods to
and from the trust territory.

As I have indicated in my written answer to a
question by the delegation of the Philippines, the
executive departments concerned are at present
reviewing the proposed oi-ganic legislation for the
trust territory, previously submitted to the Eighti-
eth Congress, with a view to its resubmission to the
present Congress.

DEVELOPMENT OF REGIONAL GOVERNMENTAL ORGANS

The administering authority has continued its
efforts to develop regional governmental organs.
The Marshall Islands Congress has been estab-
lished. Proposed charters are under consideration
for the establishment of similar bodies for the

northern Marianas (Saipan district) and for the
Ponape district. At the invitation of the high
commissioner, indigenous representatives from
each district, familiar particularly with economic
conditions, participated in a staff conference at
Guam. Indigenous superintendents of schools
also participated in a conference at Honolulu with
staff and district educational administrators and
the Educational Advisory Committee for the trust
territory.

The administering authority has continued to
encourage, but not to demand, the selection of
municipal officials by popular election rather than
on a hereditary basis. In several municipalities,
officials have been elected to perform the govern-
mental functions previously performed by hered-
itary leaders. The administering authority is
convinced that the development of democratic
local institutions in the Western sense must be an
evolutionary rather than a revolutionary process.
In furtherance of the separation of administra-
tive and judicial powers, an associate justice has
been appointed, who is independent of the civil
administrators and devotes his entire time to judi-
cial duties.

The Angaur phosphate mining arrangement,
which had been under review by the achninistering
authority for over a year prior to your recom-
mendation on the subject, is being completely
revised on the basis of a mutual agreement
reached between agencies of the administering
authority, the Supreme Commander for the Allied
Powers, and the Angaurese. This new agi-eement
has been approved by all concerned, subject to the
execution of a supplementary agreement between
the high commissioner and the Angaurese. De-
tails of these agreements are set forth in the
written answer to a question by the delegation of
the Philippines. Briefly, the new agreement pro-
vides for a severance fee of $2.00 a ton paid into
a trust fund to be administered by the high com-
missioner for the benefit of the Angaurese people
plus payment into the trust territory treasury of a
processing tax of 15 percent of the value of the
phosphate removed.

The administering authority is continuing its
effort to clevelop the fishing industry as an indig-
enous industry. To date, no perinits have been
granted to outside fishing companies.

The administering authority is reviewing the
existing taxation system but believes that the time
is not ripe for the" abolition of the liead tax. As
yet, and probably for some time to come, the
administering authority considers that this is a
satisfactory and desirable form of tax under the
cultural, economic, and political conditions pre-
vailing in the trust territory.

The administering authority is continuing its
efforts to diversify and improve the island econ-
omy with a view to raising the standard of living
as high as indigenous leadership and resources will
permit.

August 28, 1950

339

BROADENING EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITIES

In order to broaden the oj^portiinities for sec-
ondary school training, the administering author-
ity is ottering new coui-ses at the Pacific Island
Teacher Training School on Truk, in addition to
those in the teacher training program.

The administering authority is continuing to
send a few i^romising indigenous students to
Hawaii and the continental United States for
higher education. It may also be of interest to
the representative of the Philippines to know that
five students from the trust territory are now
23ursuing their education in the Philippines. A
young man fi'om Yap is now on his way to Yale
University where he will assist a professional
linguist in the develoiDment of a standardized
system for writing the Yapese language.

I request your indulgence at this point to touch,
briefly, upon what to my mind are the outstanding
accomplishments of the administering authority
in implementation of its mission of furthering the
political, economic, social, and educational ad-
vancement of the people of the Pacific islands. In
each of these broad fields, the initial steps taken,
following the American occupation and the re-
patriation of some 70,000 Japanese in 1945 and
1946, have broadened into well-defined programs.

Accomplishments of Administering Authority

POLITICAL

In the field of political advancement, our most
concrete accomplishment has been the development
of over 100 municipalities, as basic units of local
government. Our objective is to organize at least
one of these on each inhabited atoll or separate
island. Of the principal officials now holding
office in these municipalities, 135 were selected by
popular election, 45 by appointment, and 33 hold
office on a hereditary basis. Many of those ap-
pointed and of those holding office on a heredi-
tary basis are in the Palau district, which includes
the very conservative and quite isolated islands
south and east of Yap where the people still hold
tenaciously to their ancient customs; here, how-
ever, it is only fair to say, the people are also
surprisingly self-reliant and very largely self-
sufficient. The development of municipalities was
started under American military government and
has progressed at a most gratifying rate with
indigenous leaders taking a constantly increasing
initiative and responsibility. At first, the con-
ception of a municipality's responsibility for its
own costs was a baffling one: but, as a result of
repeated visits of field trip omcers, all except the
more conservative islands now appear to have
grasped the basic concepts of both the responsi-
bility of officials to the people and the responsi-
bility of the people for their own municipal needs.
In some instances, the payment of elementary
school teachers' salaries by municipalities, es-

pecially in the case of teachers from other islands,
has been a problem. An experiment is being tried
in meeting this in the Ponape and Truk districts
through the collection, at the request of the munic-
ipalities, of their cigai-ette tax on a district-wide
basis and the payment of their teachers therefrom.
As I have noted earlier in commenting on the action
taken on your recommendations, we have also de-
veloped regional advisory bodies as rapidly as the
people in any given region appear prepared to cope
with the complexities of government above the
community level. Here again, a growing under-
standing of the value of Western democratic pi'oc-
esses is to be noted. To enable illiterate persons
to vote, various devices have been introduced, as
explained in our report. For example, in some
instances, iDhotographs have been conspicuously
displayed and the voter allowed to indicate his
choice from these photographs. In other in-
stances, each voter, filing past a civil administra-
tion official seated at a point apart fi'om the rest
of the voters, has whispered the name of his
I^reference.

JUDICIAL

To strengthen the judicial ariu of the govern-
ment, a chief justice, responsible directly to the
head of the administering agency, was, as I men-
tioned last year, appointed in 1948.

A district court of broad general jurisdiction,
stafi^ed by trained lawyers, has been established to
handle the more serious cases and to give the in-
digenous inhabitants a clearer conception of
justice as understood in the AVestern world. It
also serves as a court of review to pass on actions
of the lower courts. This district court holds
sessions at each of the civil administration centers
and at other points as occasion may require. At
the same time, indigenous leaders have been
utilized in the lower courts and, guided by the two
legally trained district judges, are developing a
consciousness of their responsibilities and an in-
creasing proficiency in the administration of
justice. A clerk's office under the charge of an
indigenous clerk of courts has been established in
each district. This serves as a permanent and
public repository for court records, as well as for
records of land transfers.

ECONOMIC

In the economic field, the Island Trading Com-
pany of Micronesia has been an outstanding factor
in the rehabilitation and development of the com-
merce of the trust territory. The organization
and operation of this company are explained in
further detail in the answer to one of the written
questions by the delegation of China. Briefly,
this government agency persistently seeks for
favorable markets for trust territory products
throughout the world and imports trade goods
for purchase by the indigenous inhabitants, while

340

Deparfment of State Bulletin

at tlie same time lemlinji- a helpiiio; hand to its
indigenous competitors and curtailing its activities
wlienever and wherever it appears that indigenous
interests are able adequately to meet the need. It
fixes its trade-goods prices so as to reflect the same
cost factors faced by private importers. Although
this i^ractice may occasionally make for disap-
pointment and sometimes cause misunderstanding
among certain individual inhabitants, a practice
such as this is believed to be an all-important step
in the economic education of the people and the
building up of their self-reliance. I emphasize
again that the Island Trading Company is an
agency of the civil government of the trust terri-
tory and, as such, all its profits and its entire net
worth are for the benefit of the peoi^le of the trust
territory'. In addition to its other activities, the
company affords a freight-forwarding service for
any of the indigenous merchants who desire to buy
or sell independently. The company has recently
created the economic development fund, described
in my answer to the written question by the delega-
tion of China, and an economic division whose sole
purpose is to foster the development of the econ-
omy of the trust territory. The company is pre-
pared to make loans or gi-ants, or, if necessary, to
set up and operate pilot plants on a demonstration
basis, all with a view to establishing additional
native enterprises and diversifying their produc-
tive economy.

While the administering authority continues to
provide freight and passenger service on its ves-
sels, it is also aiding in the development of indige-
nously operated shipping by making Navy small-
craft hulls available for conversion by indigenous
boat builders and pays bonuses on copra delivered
by native boats. Eighty-nine such hulls have been
so distributed throughout the trust territory since
the first of the present calendar year. These lo-
cally operated craft are carrying an increasing
propoition of the intradistrict commerce of the
territorj^ particularly in the Marshall Islands.

SOCIAL

In the field of social advancement, most conspic-
uous progress has been made in public health. As
indicated in our report, active yaws, which was
originally estimated to be present in 90 percent of
the population, has been reduced until an open le-
sion of yaws is now seen infrequently, probably in
less than 1 percent of the patients presenting them-
selves for treatment. Dispensaries, serving in
effect as small hosjjitals, have been established at
each civil administration center. At other loca-
tions, we have established three subdispensaries
with provision for in-patient care, and 87 subdis-
pensaries with provision for out-patient care only.
Health aides, trained at these dispensaries by ad-
ministration medical personnel, are located at out-
lying islands. They are visited by medical officers
and dentists every few months; cases requiring
hospitalization are transferred to a disi^ensary.

Perhaps the most striking experiment in the field
of public heallh has been the equipping of a medi-
cal survey ship, specially fitted out as a floating
clinic and laboratory, with the most modern equip-
ment and a staff of medical and dental officers and
technicians. This vessel, the U. S. S. Wh/'dbei/,
proceeds from island to island and makes physical
examinations, chest X-rays, seriological, and other
analyses of the inhabitants, from which individual
health records are being set up for virtually the
entire population. We have already examined
approximately 35 percent of the total" population
of the territory. It is expected that it will take
another year to complete this detailed sui'vey.
Although the statistics compiled thus far by the
medical survey unit aboard the U. S. S. Whidbey
indicate that the incidence of pulmonary tubercu-
losis is not as great as some had feared, tuberculo-
sis continues to be a problem; but we are continu-
ing to attack it vigorously and have established a
tuberculosis ward in each district dispensary.

To assist in understanding the human and cul-
tural needs of the population, we have employed
four anthropologists on a full-time basis during
the past year, anci two more have been recruited to
start work this summer.

EDUCATIONAL

In the field of education, almost universal ele-
mentary school attendance for children of scliool
age has been attained except at a few outlying
points. Intermediate school education is offered
at each civil administration center, and also at
Yap. One of the prime essentials to the self-suf-
ficiency of the people is a larger number of jirofes-
sionally and technically trained indigenous lead-
ers. To meet this need, the School of Medical
Assistants, the School of Dental Assistants, and
the School of Nursing on Guam and the Pacific
Island Teacher Training School on Truk, have
been established. The Teacher Training School
is now broadening the scope of its activities.
Commencing this fall, it is planned to offer courses
leading to diplomas in government, agriculture,
business, and liberal arts, in addition to the estab-
lished courses now offered in teaching and com-
munications. As more teachers are graduated
from the Teacher Training School, we will raise
the standard of teaching in the outlying elemen-
tary schools and plan to increase the number of
years of instruction offered until all of them are
up to our goal of six grades, already attained at
the larger centers.

In order to preserve the best elements of the
indigenous cultures, the administering authority
encourages the perpetuation of native folklore,
songs, dances, and arts, and, where appropriate,
fosters this through the schools. In a Yap school,
for instance, an aged, tattooed patriarch, dressed
in a loin cloth, may from time to time be seen re-
counting Yapese traditions and customs to an
earnestly attentive group of school children.

August 28, 1950

341

The United States officials responsible for the
determination and execution of programs in con-
sonance with obligations undertaken in the trus-
teeship agreement, have sought to bring to the
problem in all of its complexities the best profes-
sional, technical, and scientific advice obtainable.
Numerous surveys and technical studies have been
undertaken, such as the economic survey by U.S.
Commercial Company in 1946, the coordinated
investigation of Micronesian anthropology in
1947 and 1948, and the scientific investigations in
Micronesia in 1949 and 1950. More than 100
scientists have participated or are participating
in this research work.

The last two of these programs were processed
under the auspices of the Pacific Science Board of
the National Research. In 1948, the Pacific
Science Boai-d conducted conferences in Honolulu
and Washington on the subject of conservation in
Micronesia, attended by an aggregate of 75
scientists and other experts, representing a large
number of the scientific institutions and agencies
in the United States. Subcommittees of the Pa-
cific Science Board meet annually in Hawaii to
review conservation in Micronesia and insect
control for Micronesia. These committees con-

duct continuous studies of their subjects ; the tech-
nical members are available for consultation with
the staff of the High Conunissioner at all times.
The administering authority owes much to their
generous help.

We must acknowledge our debt also to the Edu-
cational Advisory Committee for the trust terri-
tory, composed of distinguished educators from
the university and other institutions in Hawaii.
Its members have made frequent visits to the dis-
tricts including remote islands and meet periodi-
cally with the district and staff educational ad-
ministrators eitlier at the University of Hawaii
or in the field. They have been of inestimable
value in advising as to the fundamental outline
of our educational program, in reviewing the
progress from time to time, and in screening can-
didates for teaching positions in the trust ter-
ritory.

In its second annual report and in the answers
to the written questions submitted to the special
representative, the administering authority has
again endeavored to present a full and very frank
account of conditions in the trust territory of the
Pacific islands.

Current United Nations Documents:
A Selected Bibliography^

Economic and Social Council

Report of the Sub-Commission on Freedom of Information
anil of the Press to the Economic and Social Council
(Fourth Session). B/1672, May 26, 1950. 21 pp.
mlmeo.

Report of the Commission on Human Rights (Sixth Ses-
sion), March 27-May 19, 1950. E/1681, May 25, 1950.
86 pp. mimeo.

United Nations Research Laboratories. Report of the
Committee of Scientific Experts of International
Research Laboratories, August 1949. E/1649, May 19,
1950. 21 pp. mimeo.

Full Employment. Measures Taken by Various Countries
for the Purpose of Achieving Full Employment Dur-
ing the Six Months Ending 1 January 1950. E/1G98,
May 24, 1950. 69 pp. mimeo.

United Nations Research Laboratories. Second Report
by the Secretary-General on the question of estab-

' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N. Y. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.

The United Nations Secretariat has established an Offi-
cial Records series for the General Assembly, the Security
Council, the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship
Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission ; which in-
cludes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and reports
of the various commissions and committees. Publications
in the Officinl Records series will not be listed in this
department as heretofore, but information on securing
subscriptions to the series may be obtained from the
International Documents Service.

lishlng United Nations research laboratories. E/1699,
May 24, 1950. 21 pp. mimeo.

Inter-Governmental Organizations. List of Inter-Govern-
mental Organizations in the Economic and Social
Fields. E/1687, May 23, 1950. 59 pp. mimeo.

Technical Assistance for Economic Development. Fourth
Report by the Secretary-General on activities under
General Assembly resolution 200 (III). E/1700, June
5, 1950. 26 pp. mimeo.

Advisory Social Welfare Services. Report by the Secre-
tary-General. E/1702, May 24, 1950. 13 pp. mimeo.

Report of the Population Commission (Fifth Session),
May 22 to June 2, 1950. E/1711, June 6, 1950. 29 pp.
mimeo.

Long-Range Activities for Children. Reiport by the Sec-
retary-General. E/1725, July 10, 1950. 60 pp. mimeo.

Arrangements Regarding Report of the Council to the
General Assembly. Measures to Promote Economic
Development being taken by the United Nations and
Specialized Agencies. Report by the Secretary-Gen-
eral. E/1729, June 23, 1950. .33 pp. mimeo.

Technical Assistance for Economic Development. Ex-
panded programme of Technical Assistance for the
Economic Development of Underdeveloped Countries.
First Report of the Technical Assistance Board to
the Technical Assistance Committee. E/1742, July
4, 1950. 37 pp. mimeo.

Economic Survey of Asia and the Far East 1949. Pre-
pared by the Secretariat of the Economic Commission
for Asia and the Far Ea-^t. [E/CN. 11/260, June 25,
1950.] 485 pp. printed. .$3.00.

Agricultural Requisites in Latin America. Report of the
Joint ECLA/FAO Working Party. [E/CN. 12/83/
Rev. 1, Feb. C, 1950.] 156 pp. printed. $1.25.

Security Council

Letter Dated 1 June 19.50 From the Secretary-General to
the President of the Security Council Transmitting
the Sixth Progress Report of the United Nations
Conciliation Commission for Palestine. S/1488, June
1, 1950. 1 p. mimeo.

342

Deparfment of State Bulletin

THE GENERAL AGREEMENT ON TARIFFS AND TRADE

Negotiations Beginning September 1950
Second Supplementary Announcements '

U.S. INTENTION TO UNDERTAKE
TRADE-AGREEMENT NEGOTIATIONS

The Interdepartmental Committee on Trade
Agreements today issued a notice stating that the
United States intends to undertalve trade agree-
ment negotiations at Torquay, England, beginning
September 28, 1950, with the Republic of Cuba.
This is the second notice supplementary to that
of April 11, 1950, published April 14, 1950. The
first supplementary notice was published on May
15, 1950. The original and first supplementary
notices enumerated 23 countries, other than Cuba,
with which it is proposed to negotiate at Torquay.-

In all cases, negotiations may be cari'ied on with
respect to all areas for which the countries named
have authority to conduct trade-agreement nego-
tiations. On the part of the United States, nego-
tiations will be conducted under the provisions
of the Trade Agreements Act of 1934, as amended
and extended.

Annexed to the second supplementary notice
published today is a list, the second list supple-
mentary to that published on April 14, of products
imported into the United States, on which United
States concessions may be considered during the
negotiations.

' Printed from Department of State publication 3944,
and released to the press Aug. 17. For announcement
of U. S. intention to undertalse trade-agreement negotia-
tions, together with the first supplementary notice, see
Bulletin of May 15, 1950, p. 762; May 29, 1950, p. 866,
respectively.

' These 23 countries are : Australia, Austria, Belgium,
Brazil, Canada, Denmark, Dominican Republic, France,
Federal Republic of Germany, Guatemala, India, Indo-
nesia, Italy, Korea, Luxembourg, Netherlands, New Zea-
land, Norway, Peru, Sweden, Turkey, Union of South
Africa, and United Kingdom.

Also, today, the Committee for Reciprocity In-
formation announced that public hearings on to-
day's supplementary notice and list will be opened
on September 25, 1950.

Applications for appearance at these hearings
will be received until noon on September 7, 1950,
and written briefs and statements until noon on
September 14, 1950.

The United States may negotiate initially at
Torquay with any country named in the notice
published on April 14, or in either of the supple-
mentary notices, with regard to any product ap-
pearing on the list annexed to any of the three
notices.

No specific concessions will be considered at Tor-
quay on any product which has not appeared
either on the list published on April 14 or one of
the two supplementary lists, unless a further sup-
I^lementary list is published and an opportunity
is given for further supplementary hearings.

Appearance of a particular product on any of
these lists does not necessarily mean that a conces-
sion on that product will be made. The inter-
departmental trade-agreements organization will
not make recommendations to the President as to
products on which concessions may be offered in
the negotiations until views and information from
interested persons have been received at the public
hearings and analyzed in the light of all other in-
formation available to the organization. Actual
granting of concessions will, of course, depend on
final success of the negotiations.

As in the cases of the notice published on April
14 and of the first supplementary notice published
on May 15, the notice issued today states that the
negotiations with countries other than Cuba may
involve elimination, reduction, or continuation of
preferential tariff treatment for products of Cuba,

Augusf 28, 7950

343

with regard to any item on the published lists
which is now the subject of such preferential
treatment.

At the public hearings announced today to open
September 25, 1950, the Committee for Reci-
procit_y Information will receive views and infor-
mation regarding concessions which may be
considered on products a^jpearing on the list pub-
lished today, and on tariff or other concessions
which may be requested from Cuba.

CojDies of the second supplementary list of prod-
ucts on which concessions may be considered may
be obtained from the Committee for Reciprocity
Information, Tariff Commission Building, Wash-
ington 25, D.C. This list may be inspected at the
field oflices of the United States Department of
Commei'ce. Tariff and other information regard-
ing dutiable and duty-free articles on the list is
contained in the Summaries of Tarijf Information,
prepared by the United States Tariff Commission
in 1948. These Summaries may be inspected at
the offices of the Tariff Commission in Washing-
ton, at the Customs House in New York City, in
the field offices of the Department of Commerce in
most large cities, in the libraries of most large
colleges and universities, and in the public libraries
of most large cities. The 44 parts of the Sum-
tnaries, together with a commodity index, are
available by purchase from the Superintendent of
Documents, Government Printing Office, Wash-
ington 25, D.C. A price list for these documents
may be obtained from the Superintendent of
Documents, the Tariff Commission, or the field
offices of the Department of Commerce. Individ-
ual parts range in price from 15 cents to 60 cents.
Separate pages of the Sum.ma.ries, for particular
commodities, may be obtained on request from the
Tariff Commission. A compilation entitled
United States Import Duties (1950) gives up-to-
date information on existing rates of United States
duties. It is available by purchase from the Su-
perintendent of Documents at $2.00. (The Super-
intendent of Documents requires remittance with
order) .

INTERDEPARTMENTAL COMMITTEE
ON TRADE AGREEMENTS

I. Trade- Agreement Negotiations with Cu1).t, wiiicli is a
contracting party to the General Agreement on Tariffs
and Trade;

II. Snpplementary notice as to Trade-Agreement Nego-

tiations with the Countries Named in the Notices of April
11, 1950, published April 14, 19150 and May 15, 1950 ;

III. Possible adjustment in Preferential Rates on Cu-
ban Products.

Pursuant to section 4 of the Trade Agreements
Act, approved June 12, 1934, as amended, (48
Stat. 945, ch. 474, Public Law 307, 81st Cong.) and
to paragraph 4 of Executive Order 10082 of Octo-
ber 5, 1949 (14 Feci. Reg. 6105), notice is hereby
given by the Interdepartmental Committee on
Trade Agreements of intention to conduct trade-
agreement negotiations with the Republic of Cuba.
This notice is the second notice supplementary to
the notice by the committee dated April 11, 1950,
published April 14, 1950 (15 Fed Reg. 2114).

There is annexed hereto a list of articles im-
ported into the United States to be considered for
possible modification of duties and other import
restrictions, imposition of additional import re-
strictions, or specific continuance of existing
customs or excise treatment in proposed trade-
agreement negotiations with the Republic of Cuba
and with any of the coimtries with which trade-
agreement negotiations were proposed in the notice
of April 11, 1950, published April 14, 1950, viz.,
Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada,
France, the Federal Republic of Germany, Guate-
mala, Korea, Luxembourg, New Zealand, the Neth-
erlands, Norway, Peru, Turkey, the Union of
South Africa, and the United Kingdom, and in
the supplementary notice of May 15, 1950, viz.,
Denmark, the Dominican Republic, India, Indone-
sia, Italy, and Sweden. Articles included in the
list annexed to the Committee's notice of April 11,
1950, published April 14, 1950, and in the supple-
mentary notice of May 15, 1950, may be considered
also in negotiations with Cuba.

In the case of each article in the list annexed to
this notice with respect to which the corresponding
product of Cuba is subject to preferential treat-
ment, the negotiations with any country other than
Cuba will involve the elimination, reduction, or
continuation of the preference, perliai)S with an
adjustment or sijecification of the rate applicable
to the product of Cuba.

No article will be considered in the negotiations
for possible modification of duties or other import
restrictions, imposition of additional import re-
strictions, or specific continuance of existing cus-
toms or excise treatment unless it is included,
specifically or by reference, in the list annexed
to (he notice by the Committee of April 11, 1950,

344

Deparimeni of State Bulletin

published April 14, 1950, in the list annexed to the
supplementary notice of May 15, 1950, or in the
annexed list, or unless i*- is subsequently included
in a supplementary public list. No duty or im-
port tax imposed under a paragi-aph or section of
the Tariff Act or Internal Revenue Code other
than the paragraph or section listed -with respect
to such article will be considered for a possible
decrease, although an additional or separate duty
on an article included in the annexed list which
is imposed under a paragraph or section other than
that listed may be bound against increase as an
assurance that the concession under the listed
paragraph will not be nullified.

Persons interested in export items may present
their views regarding any tariff (including pref-
erential tariff) or other concessions that might be
requested of the Republic of Cuba.

Pursuant to Section 4 of the Trade Agreements
Act, as amended, and Paragraph 5 of Executive
Order 10082 of October 5, 1949, information and
views as to any aspect of the proposals announced
in this notice may be submitted to the Committee
for Reciprocity Information in accordance with
the announcement of this date issued by that
Committee.

The United States Tariff Commission has issued
a notice (15 Fed. Reg. 2114) stating the location
and availability of tariff and commodity informa-
tion pertinent to the pending negotiations.

By direction of the Interdepartmental Com-
mittee on Trade Agreements this I7th day of
August, 1950.

Cakl D,. Corse, Chairman
Interdepartmental Committee
on Trade Agreements

COMMITTEE FOR RECIPROCITY
INFORMATION

I. Trade-Agreement Negotiations with Cuba, whicli is
a contracting party to tlie General Agreement on Tariffs
and Trade ;

II. Supplementary Notice as to Trade-Agreement Negoti-
ations with the Countries Named in the Notices of April
11, 1950, published April 14, 1950, and May 15, 1950 ;

III. Possible Adjustment in Preferential Rates on Cuban
Products.

Submission of Information to the Committee for Reci-
procity Information.

Closing Date for Application to be Heard, September 7,
1950.

Closing Date for Submission of Briefs, September 14,
1950.
Public Hearings Open, September 25, 1950.

The Interdepartmental Committee on Trade
Agreements has issued on this day a notice of in-
tention to conduct trade-agreement negotiations
with the Republic of Cuba.

Annexed to the notice by the Interdepartmental
Committee on Trade Agreements is a list of articles
imported into the United States to be considered
for possible trade-agreement negotiations which is
the second notice supplementary to the list an-
nexed to the notice by that Committee of April 11,
1950, published April 14, 1950, (15 Fed. Reg.
2114). Articles in both these lists, and in the list
annexed to the supplementary notice by that Com-
mittee of May 15, 1950, may be considered for
negotiation with the Republic of Cuba and with
the countries named in the notice of April 11, 1950,
published April 14, 1950, and in the notice of May
15, 1950.

The Interdepartmental Committee on Trade
Agreements has also announced in such notice
that, in the case of each article in the list with
respect to which the corresponding product of
Cuba is subject to preferential treatment, the nego-
tiations referred to with any country other than
Cuba will involve the elimination, reduction, or
continuation of the preference, perhaps with an
adjustment or specification of the rate applicable
to the product of Cuba.

The Committee for Reciprocity Information
hereby gives notice that all applications for oral
presentation of views in regard to the foregoing
proposals, which must indicate the product or
products on which the individuals or groups desire
to be heard, shall be submitted to the Committee
for Reciprocity Information not later than 12 : 00
noon, September 7, 1950, and all information and
views in writing in regard to the foregoing pro-
posals shall be submitted to the Committee for
Reciprocity Information not later than 12 : 00
noon, September 14, 1950.

Such communications shall be addressed to "The
Cliairman, Committee for Reciprocity Informa-
tion, Tariff Commission Building, Washington 25,
D.C." Ten copies of written statements, either
typed, printed, or duplicated shall be submitted,
of which one copy shall be sworn to.

Public hearings will be held before the Com-
mittee for Reciprocity Information, at which oral

August 28, 1950

345

statements will be heard. The first hearing will
be at 10 : 00 a.m. on September 25, 1950, in the
Hearing Room in the Tariff Commission Build-
ing, 7th and E Streets, NW., Washington 25, D.C.
Witnesses who make application to be heard will
be advised i-egarding the time and place of their
individual appearances. Appearances at hear-
ings before the Committee may be made only by
or on behalf of those persons who have filed writ-
ten statements and who have within the time pre-
scribed made written application for oral presen-
tation of views. Statements made at the public
hearings shall be under oath.

Persons or groups interested in important prod-
ucts may present to the Committee their views
concerning possible tariff concessions by the United
States in negotiations with the Republic of Cuba
on any product, whether or not included in the list
annexed to the notice of intention to negotiate.
However, as indicated in the notice of intention to
negotiate, no tariff reduction will be considered on
any product which is not included in the list
annexed to the public notice by the Interdepart-
mental Committee on Trade Agreements of April

11, 1950, published April 14, 1950 (15 Fed. Reg.
2114), in the list annexed to the notice of May 15,
1950, the list annexed to the notice issued by said
Committee on this date, or in a supplementary
public list.

Persons interested in export items may present
their views regarding any tariff (including prefer-
ential tariff) or other concessions that might be
requested of the Republic of Cuba.

Copies of the list attached to the notice of inten-
tion to negotiate may be obtained from the Com-
mittee for Reciprocity Information at the address
designated above and may be inspected at the field
offices of the Department of Commerce. The
United States Tariff Commission has issued a
notice (15 Fed. Reg. 2114) stating the location and
availability of tariff and commodity information
pertinent to the pending negotiations announced
herein.

By direction of the Committee for Reciprocity
Information this I7th day of August, 1950.

Edwaed Yardlet, Secretary^
Committee for Reciprocity Informatioii.

U.S. Notifies Swiss of Intention To Terminate Trade Agreement

[Released to the press August 17]

The Department of State announced today that
on recommendation of the Interdepartmental
Committee on Trade Agreements the 1936 trade
agreement with Switzerland will be terminated
on February 10, 1951, unless the Government of
Switzerland is able to agree by October 15, 1950,
to the inclusion of the standard escape clause in
the agreement.

A note was delivered on August 10, by the Amer-
ican Legation at Bern, to the Government of Swit-
zerland giving 6 months notice of the United States
intention to terminate the agreement. It was
specified, however, that this formal notice of ter-
mination would be withdrawn if at any time
before October 15, 1950, the Government of Switz-
erland found it possible to agree to an exchange of
notes amending the trade agi'eement of 1936 to
include the standard escape clause provision.

The date of October 15, 1950, has been estab-
lished so as to reduce to a minimum the uncertain-
ties which exporters and importers may face in
attempting to arrange their affairs in the light of
possible termination of the agreement.

346

The escape clause would permit either Switzer-
land or the United States to suspend in whole or
in part any obligation incurred by either country
under the agreement, including tariff concessions
if, as a result of unforeseen developments and of
the obligation, a product is being imported in such
relatively increased quantities and under such con-
ditions as to cause or threaten serious injury to
domestic producers of like or directly competitive
products. Since 1943, all trade agreements nego-
tiated by the United States contain such an escape
clause, and article XIX of the General Agreement
on Tariffs and Trade, to which the United States
is a party, corresponds to that provision. It is an
integral part of United States foreign economic
policy to have all trade agreements contain this
escape clause provision.

Discussions with representatives of the Swiss
Government looking toward the inclusion of the
escape clause in the 1936 trade agreement with
Switzerland have been underway since early 1949.

Department of State Bulletin

German Federal Republic's IVIonthly Economic Review'

The outstanding development in May was a shift
in the commodity trade balance of Western Ger-
many with the Oeec (Marshall Plan) area. From
a dencit of $4,000,000 in April, the May balance
was plus hj $11,000,000, the first plus balance since
November 1949. The reversed position apparently
represents a vindication of the EGA trade liberali-
zation program in which Western Germany played
a leading role by relaxing import restrictions be-
fore other participating countries in the Marshall
Plan took similar action. Initially, Western Ger-
many's trade balance ran up a large deficit, but
subsequent relaxation of restrictions in other coun-
tries and other adjustments have placed the situa-
tion more nearly in balance, and at a higher level
than before the trade liberalization program was
undertaken.

Otherwise, the month of May saw general im-
provement in the Western German economy; it
somewhat resembled a convalescent partly re-
covered from a long illness but needing further
treatment for complete recovery. Industrial pro-
duction increased, further postponement of "dol-
lar" food imports was announced, unemployment
declined, the foreign trade and payments position
improved and, except for seasonal increases in
fresh fruit and vegetable prices, the price situation
was stable.

Advances were still not sufficient, however, to
warrant unqualified confidence that the economy
will soon attain stability at or near the full em-
ployment level. Basic weaknesses remain, princi-
pal of which is the necessity for an increase in
productivity in export industries, and to this end
investment problems are being carefully con-
sidered by Occupation and West German authori-
ties, especially the investment of counterpart
funds arising from the sale of EGA and GARIOA
financed imports.

Foreign Trade

In May, West German exports of more than
$140,000,000 were the highest for any postwar

^ Based on the latest figures and trends available when
the August 1950 Information Bulletin went to press; pre-
pared by the Analytical Reports Branch of the Program
Review Division of the Office of Economic Affairs, HICOG.

August 28, 1950

month, while imports fell to $161,000,000. Exports
were 87 pei'cent of imports compared with 60 per-
cent in the first quarter of 1950 and 50 percent in
1949. The import surplus was reduced to $21,000,-
000 from $49,000,000 in April.

The most noteworthy development in the distri-
bution of the trade was the gain in exports to the
Oeec participating countries, which was concen-
trated in the continental countries as exports to
sterling participants declined slightly. Oeec trade
showed an export surplus for the first time since
November 1949. Exports totaled $100,000,000;
imports were $89,000,000.

The decline in imports was spread among all
major classifications. Receipts of textile raw ma-
terials were considerably less than in April, but
those of grains were about the same. Most of the
export gain was in finished manufactures, notably
machinery and cotton textiles.

The following table gives the principal trade
data for the month :

WEST GERMAN FOREIGN COMMODITY TRADE— MAY 1950

[Thousand dollars]

CATEGORIES Imports Exports

Food and Agriculture 66,271 1,964

Industry 91,839 138,328

Raw Materials 52, 288 20, 894

Semi-finished goods 18,199 26,523

Finished Manufactures 21,352 90,911

Total 161,110 140,292

AREA

Total Non-Participating Coun-
tries 72,316 39,424

U. S. A 26,903 4,157

Canada 186 1,002

Central America 3,677 1, 2U

South America 13,742 8,120

Non-Participating Sterling

Countries 13,037 3,927

Eastern Europe 6,235 14,166

Other Countries 8, 536 6, 84 1

Participating Countries 88, 760 1 00, 484

Non-Sterling 77, 587 93,476

Sterling 11,173 7,008

Unspecified 34 384

Total 161,110 140,292

IMPORT surplus: $20,818,000

347

Finance

Further steps were taken toward improving the
investment picture in Western Germany, among
them being a detailed procedure for the progres-
sive relaxation of current restrictions on foreign
investment in Germany which was approved on
June 15 by the Council of the Allied High Com-
mission. This action followed the approval in
principle by the Council on May 31 of the reopen-
ing of Germany to foreign investment.

Prices

The consumer price index increased three points
in May to 156 percent of 1938. The rise was due
wholly to seasonal increases in fresh fruit and
vegetable prices. The food index rose from 160
in April to 168 in May. The basic materials price
index rose one point to 197 percent of 1938, owing
to slight rises in numerous industrial raw products.
The price indices were as follows for May:

CONSUMER PRICE INDEX ■— BIZONAL AREA

Wage/salary earner's family of four, with one child under 1
1938=100

March 1950 April 1960 May 1910

Total 153 153 156

Food 159 160 2 168

Stimulants 285 285 285

Clothing 191 189 188

Rent 102 102 102

Heat and Light 119 119 119

Cleaning and Hygiene. 148 148 147
Education & Entertain-
ment 141 141 140

Household Goods 166 164 163

Traveling 133 133 133

^ The Consumer Price index is not yet available on a Trizonal basis.

' Because of the seasonal increase in the prices of fruit and vefretables
(substituting in May the vegetables of the new harvest for those of the old
harvest), a consumer price index has also been calculated for the two months,
May and June, excluding the prices of fruit and vegetables.

annually would approach the 11,100,000 ton limi-
tation.

The leveling off in consumer goods output re-
flects a lag in consumer purchasing despite some
improvement in worker earning and declining un-
employment. Also, merchants are holding sizable
inventories which will not move readily at current
prices because of style and quality factors. The
production index and figures on production in
major industries are in table on page 357.

Labor

Unemployment totaled 1,609,000 at the middle
of June, a decrease of 124,000 since mid-May.
Mid-June unemployment was 10.5 percent of the
wage and salary earning labor force. Employ-
ment totaled 13,680,000— larger by 210,000 than
mid-May. Federal government work-creation and
housing projects have as yet contributed little to
the favorable employment trend, and the added
purchasing power made available by rising em-
ployment has not yet increased employment in
consumer goods industries. In fact, employment
conditions in textile industries deteriorated.

Employment programs supported by some
states, however, contributed greatly toward reliev-
ing unemployment. Bavaria, Lower Saxony and
Schleswig-Holstein, which harbored most of the
unemployment and most of the refugees, were en-
abled by these work-creation and liousing pro-
grams to record declines which over the last four
months averaged about 70 percent of the total
decline in unemployment for Western Germany.

Average weekly gross earnings of manual work-
ers in the manufacturing and building industries
continued to rise during the first quarter, being
two percent higher in March than last December.
The weekly earnings index was 145.3 percent of
1938 ; the consumer price index was 153 percent of
1938.

BASIC MATERIALS PRICE INDEX
[1938=100]

March April Man

Food '169 '168 i>169

Industry 215 214 215

total '197 '196 "197

»— Provisional.
' — Revised.

Industry

The May industrial production index (1936
= 100) was 106. The investment goods group in-
creased from 99 in April to 103, which results
partly from the channeling of counterpart funds
into industrial investment. Other major catego-
ries were unchanged from April. The industries
showing the greatest increases during May were
oil refining, coal by-products, stones and earths,
non-ferrous metals and vehicles. Steel ingot pro-
duction in May was 914,258 metric tons, which

348

Agriculture

As expected, an additional $16,000,000 of the
1949/50 dollar food import program was found
to be not immediately required and shipments will
be delayed until after August 1. In place of the
fats and oils originally planned, approximately
36,000 metric tons of sugar will be imported.

Despite some storm damage, crop prospects con-
tinued to be favorable. Early fruits and vegeta-
bles are reaching the market at relatively high
prices because imports of these commodities are
not as large as this time last year.

Economic Situation in Berlin

Some improvement has occurred, but viewed
realistically the economic situation in western Ber-
lin remains unsatisfactory. Industrial production
during April was 30 percent of the 1936 produc-

Department of State Bulletin

tion, as compared with 28 percent in March. Pro-
duction during May and June were probably no
higher than April. A lack of markets for western
Berlin's products is the principal barrier to in-
creased output. In some cases, however, where
markets are available, a lack of production facili-
ties and a shortage of working capital constitute
the primary bottlenecks.

The increase in employment and decrease in
unemployment in recent months were due pri-
marily to the public works program financed by
counterpart funds. A total of 57,000 were em-
ployed under that program on June 24. Unem-
ployment was 271.000 on June 15, as compared
with 308,000 on February 15. Were it not for the
public works program, unemployment in western
Berlin now would be around 330,000 considering
that the labor force has increased about 20,000.

During April shipments of goods from western
Berlin to western Gei-many were valued at DM
51,000.000, as compared with DM 53,000,000 in
March, and with a post-blockade high of DM
67,000,000 during December 1949. Direct exports
of goods to foreign countries during April 1950
were valued at DM 6,338,000, as compared with
DM 6,483,000 in March. Shipments to Eastern
Germany continue at a low level.

Mainz Exhibiting Treasured Psalter ^

At the formal opening of the Johannes Guten-
berg celebration at the Kurfuersten Schloss in
Mainz June 24. United States Assistant High
Commissioner Benjamin J. Buttenwieser pre-
sented to Dr. Franz Stein, mayor of Mainz, the
famed 500-year-old Mainz Psalter, which was
returned to Germany from the United States
recently.

More than 600 Mainz citizens crowded the au-
ditorium of Kurfuersten castle in Mainz to hear
brief addresses from Mr. Buttenwieser, Mayor
Stein and Dr. Alois Ruppel, director of the
Gutenberg Museum.

Although the greater share of the task of return-
ing historical documents and works of art lost or
looted during the war is now completed in western
Germany, Mr. Buttenwieser emphasized the
serious effort that is still continuing to locate Ger-
man treasures abroad.

Citing the decision of the American government
to make special efforts to recover European treas-
ures, Mr. Buttenwieser pointed out that "it has
been possible for us to send back to Germany a
number of items of considerable importance which,
in one way or another, had been lost and found
their way into the American market. I might
mention tapestries belonging to the Bavarian na-
tional collections, a painting from the Bremen

'Reprinted from Informatioti Bulletin, Office of U.S.
High Commissioner for Germany, August 1950.

Kunsthalle and a rare ivory from Kassel.

"By all standards the most spectacular of these
recovered items," he continued, "is the Mainz
Psalter, which we are today placing in the tem-
porary custody of the city of Mainz for exhibition
during the Gutenberg festival.

"Therefore, personally and on behalf of my gov-
ernment, it is with greatest pleasure and genuine
gratification, Mr. Mayor, that I place in your cus-
tody, for the duration of the Gutenberg celebra-
tions, this famous and precious book — a book
which served as a glowing and abiding symbol of
the enormous benefits to the increase of learning,
and hence the dissemination of democratic ideals,
which flow from the invention of printing in your
historical city."

In a brief address following Mr. Buttenwieser,
Mayor Stein stated that the Mainz Psalter, which
is particularly honored and treasured in his city,
will be given a position of prominence beside the
famed Gutenberg Bible, which is also housed in
the Gutenberg Museum of Mainz. He emphasized
the appreciation of his city for the efforts of the
United States Government in returning the noted
book to Mainz for the celebrations.

Dr. Ruppel, one of Germany's leading authori-
ties on ancient printing, stated that few books in
the 500 years since the printing of the Mainz
Psalter can compare to it for beauty and care in
printing.

Steps for Narcotic Control in Germany ^

The Allied High Commission has invited the
German federal government to take steps to estab-
lish a central administration for the control of
narcotics in order that the German authorities
may eventually assume full international respon-
sibility in this field.

At present, the French, United Kingdom, and
United States authorities in Germany are respon-
sible to the narcotics commission of the Economic
and Social Council of the United Nations for tlie
control of narcotics in their respective zones of
occupation.

In a letter to the federal chancellery, the Allied
High Commission proposed that a German central
administration be established to fulfill the pur-
poses of the final act of the International Drug
Convention of 1931. This act calls upon govern-
ments to establish special administrations to con-
trol traffic in narcotic drugs, to suppress illicit
traffic, and to organize a campaign against drug
addiction.

After the German authorities have taken the
necessary steps for effective administration of the
control of narcotics, the Allied High Commission
will discuss with the federal government the actual
transfer of international responsibility in this
field.

August 28, 1950

349

Public Notices Affecting U. S. Property Owners in Germany

Establishment of a Bank Deutscher Laender,
Law No. 60 CRevised)

Whereas the Military Governors and Commanders-in-
Chief of the United States and British Zones have agreed
to establish a Bank Deutscher Laender in order to pro-
mote in the common interest the best use of the financial
resources of the area served by the member Land Central
Banks, to strengthen the currency and credits system and
to coordinate the activities of the said Central Banks, and

Whereas British Military Government is promulgating
Ordinance No. 129 (amended I) for the British Zone in
order to give effect to this agreement,

Now it is hereby ordered as follows :

LEGAL STATUS AND SEAT OF THE BANK

Article I

1. A Bank Deutscher Laender (hereinafter referred to
as the "Bank") is hereby established as a juridical per-
son under public law with its place of business and legal
seat in Frankfurt.

2. Except as otherwise provided herein, the banking
activities of the Bank shall be limited to transactions with
member Land Central Banks, central banks of other Ger-
man Laender, and of foreign countries or their equivalent
and Bizonal Economic Administration.

3. Except as otherwise provided herein or by law, the
Bank shall not be subject to the instructions of any po-
litical body or public non-judicial agency.

4. The Bank shall not be subject to the provisions of
the Reichsgesetz ueber das Kreditwesen (German Banking
Act).

5. The Bank shall not maintain any branches or sub-
sidiaries or atfiliates.

RELATIONS TO ALLIED BANK COMMISSION

Article II

6. In determining the policies of the Bank, the Board
of Directors shall be subject to such directions as may be
Issued by the Allied Bank Commission.

7. The Bank shall submit to the Allied Bank Commis-
sion such reports and information as the Commission may
require.

FUNCTIONS AND BUSINESS ACTIVITIES

Article III

8. The Bank shall have the exclusive right to issue
notes and coins within the area of its competence.

9. The Bank shall promote the solvency and liquidity
of the member Land Central Banks.

10. The Bank shall establish common policies with re-
spect to banking and shall ensure, as far as possible, the

maximum uniformity in banking policies within the sev-
eral Laender.

11. a. The Bank may issue directions for the general
regulation of bank credit, including interest and dis-
count rates and open market operations of the member
member Land Central Banks.

b. Interest and discount rates may differ as among the
members Land Central Banks.

c. The Bank may regulate the establishment of mini-
mum reserve requirements for individual banks. Such
regulations shall be issued by the member Land Central
Banks.

12. a. The Bank shall assume and effect all banking
transfers which result from the orders of third parties
and which are transfers over Land boundaries. Credit
institutions must execute all such transfers through their
accounts with the Land Central Banks.

b. The Bank may permit exceptions to this provision.

13. The Bank may engage in the following transactions
with Central Banks.

a. Purchase and sell foreign exchange and gold, silver
and platinum, subject to existing legal restrictions;

b. Accept deposits;

c. Rediscount bills of exchange ;

d. Grant loans against :

(1) Bills of exchange,

(2) Treasury bills, securities, and registered debt
(Schuldbuchforderungen) issued by the Bizonal Economic
Administration or by any Land within the area of com-
petence or the member Land Central Banks.

(3) Fixed-interest-bearing securities and registered
debt (Schuldbuchforderungen) on which any member Land
Central Bank has made advances or which it has acquired
on the open market.

e. Provide facilities for the safekeeping and custody of
securities and valuables.

14. The Bank may:

a. Grant to the Bizonal Economic Administration short-
term advances in anticipation of specific revenues, which
advances shall not exceed the amount of three hundred
million (300,000,000) Deutsche Marks, unless the Board
of Directors, by a decision of three-quarters of its mem-
bers, raises this limit to five hundred milion (500,000,000)
Deutsche Marks ;

b. Serve as fiscal agent, vpithout charge, for the Bizonal
Economic Administration, Including acceptance of de-
posits, purchase and sale of treasury bills, fixed-interest-
bearing securities and registered debt (Schudbuchforder-
ungen) and provision of payment facilities and facilities
for the safekeeping and custody of valuables and
securities ;

c. Purchase and sell, in the open market, treasury bills
issued by the Bizonal Economic Administration;

d. Purchase and sell, in the open market, fixed-interest-
bearing securities and registered debt (Schuldbuchforder-
ungen) of the Bizonal Economic Administration ;

* 15 Fed. Reg. 1052 ft. The above laws were issued by
the Military Government for Germany (U.S.).

350

Department of Stale Bulletin

o. Grant to any one or more of tlie Laender Rheinland-
I'f.ilz, Wuerttemberg-Hohenzollern, and Baden, short-term
advances in anticipation of specific revenues, which ad-
vances shall not in the aggregate exceed the amount of
forty million (40,000,000)" Deutsche Marks, unless the
Board of Directors, by a decision of three-quarters of its
members, raises this limit to sixty million (60,000,000)
Deutsche Marks.

15. a. The Bank shall give advice to the appropriate au-
thorities with resiject to foreign exchange policy.

b. Subject to any legislation for the time being in force,
the Bank may directly or through authorized agents,
acquire and dispose of, for its own account or the account
of others, foreign exchange (defined as means of payment
and bills of exchange expressed in foreign currencies and
balances with foreign banks, gold, silver, and platinum),
and for this purpose it may maintain accounts with foreign
banks.

c. The Bank shall regulate foreign exchange trans-
actions including, when licensed, foreign exchange trans-
actions prohibited by Article I of Military Government
Law No. 53 or Article II of Military Government Law
No. 52 in respect to property covered by Article I,
paragraph 1 (f ) of the latter Law.

16. The Bank, upon request, shall serve as fiscal agent
for the Joint Export-Import Agency and equivalent
agencies in other German Laender.

17. The Bank shall regulate the collection, assembly
and evaluation of monetary and banking statistics and
establish rules for their preparation by and through the
member Land Central Banks.

18. Transactions, other than those specified in para-
graphs 8 to 17 (inclusive) of this Article, may be under-
taken by the Bank for internal administrative purposes
only.

19. a. The Bank shall fix and publish interest and dis-
count rates for its transactions, with the member Land
Central Banks.

b. The Bank shall fix mimimum reserve requirements
for the member Land Central Banks and may require
the deposit of such reserves with the Bank. Such reserve
requirements shall not exceed 30% of the total deposits
with the member Land Central Banks.

c. The Bank shall publish the interest rates for its
transactions with the Bizonal Economic Administration.

d. The Bank shall not pay interest on deposits.

ORGANIZATION

Article IV

20. The policies of the Bank shall be determined by the
Board of Directors and executed by the Board of
Managers.

21. a. The Board of Directors shall consist of a Presi-
dent, the President of the Board of Managers, and the
Presidents of each of the member Land Central Banks.

b. The Board of Directors shall arrive at its decisions
by a simple majority of the votes cast, each member
having a single vote. The vote of the President shall
be decisive in the event of a tie. The presence of more
than one half of all members of the Board of Directors
shall be required to constitute a quorum.

c. The Deputy of the President of the Board of Man-
agers shall be entitled to attend all meetings of the Board
of Directors and take part in all discussions. He shall
be entitled to vote, however, only when acting for and
in the absence of the President of the Board of Managers.

d. The President of the Board of Directors shall be
elected by a simple majority of the members of the Board,
excluding the President in office and the President of the
Board of Managers, who for this purpose, shall not vote.
His term of oflBce shall be three (3) years. Ke-election is
permissible. The President shall not be, during his term
of office, a member of the Board of Directors, or Board
of Managers of any member Land Central Bank.

e. The President of the Board of Managers, or In his
absence, his Deputy, shall be Vice-Chairman of the Board
of Directors.

22. a. The emoluments of the President of the Board of
Directors and the members of the Board of Managers
shall be fixed by contract between the person concerned
and the Bank repre.sented by the Board of Directors.

b. The by-laws of the Bank shall determine the terms
of employment of its officers, employees and workers.

23. a. The Board of Directors shall not delegate the
responsibility for the functions of the Bank enumerated
in—

Article III ;

Article IV, Paragraph 22 a, 24 b, and c ;

Article V, Paragraph 25 b, 28 a and b, and 29;

Article VI, Paragraph 31 a and b, and 34 a.

It may, however, in its discretion, and subject to its
general supervision, delegate the discharge of this and
any other functions.

b. When, in the opinion of the President of the Board
of Managers, action is necessary and delay of action
would be prejudicial to the fulfilment of the functions of
the Bank, the President of the Board of Directors may
act for the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors
should be convened immediately thereafter to approve or
disapprove the measures taken.

24. a. The Board of Managers shall consist of a Presi-
dent, a Deputy and a number of Managers to be fixed by
the by-laws.

b. The President of the Board of Managers and his
Deputy shall be elected, and their terms of office fixed,
by the Board of Directors, excluding the President of the
Board of Directors and the President of the Board of
Managers who, for this purpose, shall not vote. The
other members of the Board of Managers shall then be
appointed by the full Board of Directors for such terms as
may be determined by the Board of Directors. Re-election
and re-appointment are permissible.

c. Any member of the Board of Managers may be dis-
charged at any time by the Board of Directors for im-
portant reasons which shall be stated in detail. Terms
of employment may provide that such discharge shall be
without prejudice to any financial benefits accruing
thereunder.

d. The President of the Board of Managers shall be
responsible to the Board of Directors for the execution
of all decisions of the Board of Directors and for the gen-
eral conduct of the business of the Bank.

e. The Board of Managers shall advise its President
and assist him in carrying out the policies and decisions
of the Board of Directors.

f. The Board of Managers shall represent the Bank in
judicial proceedings and all other matters.

g. Any two members of the Board of Managers shall
have the power to make declarations of legal intent
(Willenserklaerungen) on behalf of the Bank. Such
declarations shall also be valid if made by agents who
have been duly authorized by the Board of Managers.

h. For a declaration of legal intent (Willenserklae-
rung) to be made to the Bank, it shall suffice if such decla-
ration is made to one member of the Board of Managers
or to any other agent duly authorized by the Board of
Managers.

CAPITAL, WEEKLY AND ANNUAL STATEMENTS,
AND DISTRIBUTION OF PROFITS

Article V

25. a. The capital of the Bank shall be one hundred
million (100,000,000) Deutsche Marks, subscribed by all
Land Central Banks within the area in which this Law ia
effective in proportion to the amounts of their deposits on
1 March 1948.

b. The Board of Directors may within two years from
1 March 1948 re-apportion the capital participation.

August 28, 7950

351

26. The Board of Managers shall publish statements of
the financial position of the Bank as at the 7th, 15th, 23rd
and last day of each month. Such statements shall con-
tain at least the following items :

a. Assets :
Cash on hand ;

Foreign currencies and coins ;
Unrestricted claims on foreign debtors;
Restricted claims on foreign debtors;
Treasur.v bills of the Bizonal Economic Administration ;
Pixed-interest-bearing securities of the Bizonal Eco-
nomic Administration ;
Bills of exchange ;
Collateral loans against —

(1) Treasury bills of the Bizonal Economic Adminis-
tration ;

(2) Treasury bills of the Laender;

(3) Bills of exchange ;

(4) Securities of the Bizonal Economic Administration ;

(5) Securities of the Laender;

(6) Other securities;

Cash advanced to the Bizonal Economic Administra-
tion ;
Other assets.

b. Liabilities:
Bank notes issued ;
Coins issued ;

Required balances of member Land Central Banks;

Free balances of member Land Central Banks ;

Deposits of the Bizonal Economic Administration ;

Other deposits ;

Other liabilities ;

Capital ;

Legal reserve fund ;

Contingent reserve.

27. The Board of Managers shall, furthermore, establish
and publish consolidated statements of the financial posi-
tion of the Bank and its member Land Central Banks as
at the last day of each month.

28. a. The Board of Managers shall prepare an annual
financial statement of the Bank within three months of
the end of each calendar year. The Board of Directors
shall thereupon examine and, upon approval thereof, pub-
lish such financial statement and shall give release
(Entlastung) to the Board of Managers accordingly. If
such financial statement is not approved, the Board of
Directors shall take appropriate action. An annual state-
ment, approved by the Board of Directors, shall in any
event be published not later than five months after the end
of the calendar year covered thereby.

b. The annual financial statement and the books of
the Bank shall be audited by expert and independent audi-
tors selected by the Board of Directors before such state-
ment is transmitted to the Board of Dii-ectors by the
Board of Managers. Such annual audit, however, shall
not preclude any independent audit of any transactions
which may be ordered at any time by the Allied Bank
Commission.

c. The Fiscal year of the Bank shall be the calendar
year.

29. Annual net profits, after the establishment of con-
tingent reserves as determined by the Board of Directors,
shall accrue as a legal reserve fund. Such accrual, how-
ever, shall not exceed, in any one year, twenty percentum
(20%) of the total amount of the capital of the Bank.
Such legal reserve fund shall not in the aggregate exceed
the total amount of such capital. The remaining net
profits shall be distributed to each member Land Central
Bank in proportion to its capital participation.

b. In respect of taxation, building construction, hous-
ing, and leasing of property, the Bank shall enjoy the
same privileges as are accorded to the highest authorities
in the area of competence of the Bank.

31. a. The Bank may require such reports and other
Information from the member Land Central Banks as it
considers necessary for the discharge of its responsi-
bilities.

b. Subject to the provisions of paragraph 7 of Article
II, the members of the Board of Directors and of the
Board of Managers as well as other persons in the service
of the Bank Deutscher Laender are prohibited from dis-
closing matters aifecting the Bank Deutscher Laender
or its organization of which they have knowledge, par-
ticularly in respect of business transactions of the Bank
and the extent of credits granted ; such prohibition shall
continue after the termination of their services with the
Bank.

c. The members of the Board of Directors and the
President of the Board of Managers may not, without
consent of the President of the Board of Directors, and
the members of the Board of Managers and those other
persons mentioned under (b) may not, without consent of
the President of the Board of Managers, give evidence in
court. Such consent may only be refused where the evi-
dence would substantially endanger the public welfare
or render more diflJcult the fulfillment of public tasks.
The decision of the President of the Board of Directors
and the President of the Board of Managers shall be
subject to review by the court in which the suit in which
the matter in question arises is pending. If it appears
that the consent has been withheld unreasonably, the
court may order the giving of evidence or the production
of documents without such consent.

d. The Bank, in conjunction with the Bank super-
visory authorities of the Laender, shall establish prin-
ciple.? for the audit and certification of the accounts of the
member Land Central Banks.

e. The Bank shall not issue any list of securities eligible
for collateral, or any list of credit ratings.

32. The provisions regarding the liability of the state
for acts of public officials shall apply mutatis mutandis to
the liability of the Bank.

33. a. The President of the Board of Managers may
appoint notarial officials for the Bank. Such notarial
officials shall possess the qualifications for the office of
a judge and shall have an official seal.

b. Such notarial officials shall be entitled to exercise
the official functions of a notary in the conduct of the
affairs of the Bank. The authority to act for and on
behalf of the Bank may be proved by the certification of
such notarial official.

34. a. The Board of Directors shall issue the by-laws
of the Bank, the regulations directed to the member Land
Central Banks, necessary to implement the provisions of
this Law and the administrative regulations necessary
for the conduct of the business of the Bank. Such by-laws
and regulations shall require approval by the Allied Bank
Commission and .shall bind only the Bank and its mem-
ber Land Central Banks.

b. The by-laws and implementing regulations of the
Bank, as well as any other public notices concerning the
affairs of the Bank, shall be published in the official
Gazette of the Bizonal Economic Administration.

c. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, the by-
laws and the regulations published, as provided in para-
graph b of this Section, shall be deemed to be effective
as from the date of issue of such Gazette.

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Article VI

30. a. The Bank shall rank equally with the several De-
partments of the Bizonal Economic Administration.

PENALTIES

Article VII

35. Any member of the Board of Directors or Board of
Managers of the Bank who knowingly misrepresents or

352

Department of State BvUetin

conceals the financial conditions of the Bank or of the
member Land Central Banlis in any financial statement
or report required under the provisions of this Law, or
who causes or participates in causing a false entry to be
made in, or a material er.try to be omitted from, such
financial statement or report shall be liable to imprison-
ment not exceeding five years or a fine not exceeding
DM1(X),000, or both, unless the offense committed is one for
which a greater penalty is provided under any other law.

3G. Any member of the Board of Directors or of the
Board of Managers of the Banlv or of any member Land
Central Banli or any ofticial of such bank who violates,
aids or participates in the violation of any implementing
regulations issued under the provisions of this Law, shall
be liable to imprisonment not exceeding one year or a fine
not exceeding DM20,000, or both, unless the offense com-
mitted is one for which a greater penalty is provided under
any other law. The regulation must expressly refer to
the sanctions provided in this paragraph.

37. Except as otherwise expressly provided, prosecu-
tions arising under this Article shall be instituted in the
Land courts.

SUPERVISION

Article II

OTHER PROVISIONS

Article VIII

38. The German text of this Law shall be the official
text and the provisions of Military Government Ordinance
No. 3, as amended, and of Article II, paragraph 5 of Mili-
tary Government Law No. 4, as amended, shall not apply.

39. This revised Law shall become effective within the
Laender of Bavaria, Wuerttemberg-Baden, Hesse and
Bremen on 1 November 1948.

By order of Military Government.

Decentralization of Banks, Law No. 57 (Revised)

Pursuant to agreements reached between the Military
Governors and Commanders-in-Chief of the United States,
British and French Zones in the field of decentralization
of banks, it is hereby ordered as follows :

5. The technical supervision of banks within each Land
shall be exercised by the Minister of Finance through the
Land Bank Supervisory Authority in accordance with
legislation enacted or to be enacted by each Land. Such
supervision shall secure compliance with all regulations
issued by the Land Central Banks.

CUSTODIANS FOR CERTAIN BANKS

Article III

6. The independent and disinterested custodians who
have heretofore been appointed pursuant to the provisions
of Military Government Law No. 57, in its original version
"Custodians for Certain Bank Organizations," for the
Deutsche Bank, Dresduer Bank and Commerz Bank shall
continue in office. When a new appointment becomes
necessary, such appointment shall be made in the same
manner as the original appointment was made.

7. Each custodian so appointed shall manage, admin-
ister, preserve, maintain and safeguard the property of
the bank of which he has been appointed custodian and
maintain accurate records and accounts thereof and of
the income therefrom.

8. Each custodian may, subject to the approval of the
appropriate Land Government and in conformity with
the provisions of this Law, make such changes in the
present management of the Bank in respect of which he
has been appointed custodian as may be necessary or
desirable.

9. A custodian so appointed shall not be subject to the
control, direct or indirect, of the present shareholders or
directors of the bank in respect of which he has been
appointed custodian.

10. Changes in the names of the banks specified in para-
graph 6 of this Article, which have heretofore been made
by the custodians thereof, pursuant to Military Govern-
ment Law No. 57 in its original version, are hereby
ratified and confirmed.

PROHIBITIONS

REGULATIONS

Article I

1. No bank having its head office in any Land within
the United States Zone shall establish or maintain any
branch or branches outside such Land, except that banks
whose operations are confined to the granting of medium
or long term credit may, with approval of the Bank
Deutscher Laender, establish and maintain branches out-
side the Land in which their head offices are situated.

2. Except for the control exercised by the Bank
Deutscher Laender, the activities of any bank in any
Land within the United States Zone shall be completely
independent of any control, direct or indirect, by any
banking institution (including any holding company or
trust company), governmental agency or trade or similar
organization situated outside such Land.

3. The provisions of paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article
shall not be construed as precluding any bank from en-
gaging in transactions outside the Land in which its ac-
tivities are concentrated or from maintaining corre-
spondent relations with other banks in or outside such
Land.

4. The Deutsche Verkehrs-Kreditbank A. G. shall be
exempt from the provisions of this Article with respect
to business transacted by it for or on behalf of the Deutsche
Reichs-bahn and its agencies.

Article IV

11. The Minister President of each Land, or the Land
Minister designated by him, may issue legal and adminis-
trative regulations necessary to implement this Law.

REPEALS

Article V

12. Military Government Law No. 57, "Custodians for
Certain Bank Ol-ganizations" and Amendment No. 1
thereto are repealed.

EFFECTIVE DATE

Article VI

13. This Law is applicable within the Laender of Ba-
varia, Hesse, Wuerttemberg-Baden and Bremen. It shall
become effective on 15 April 1949.

By Order of Military Government.

[The foregoing notices were deposited for the Secretary
of State by Geoffrey W. Leiois, Acting Deputy Director,
Bureau of Oerman Affairs, on February 11, 1950.1

August 28, 1950

353

German Visitors in tlie United States

[Released to the press August JS]

PLANS FOR GROUP

The Department of State announced today that
348 German exchange high school and college
students, teachers, and agricultural and labor lead-
ers will arrive in New York on August 23, on the
S. S. Brazil.

Of the group, 199 are college students sponsored
jointly by the Department of State and the Insti-
tute of International Education, which has found
scholarship opportunities for the group in colleges
and universities throughout the country. There
are 69 student teachers, also sponsored by the
Department of State and the Institute of Interna-
tional Education, who will study American educa-
tional methods. A group of 24 teenagers spon-
sored by the Department of State and the Ameri-
can Field Service will live with private families
throughout the country and attend local high
schools.

A total of 34 additional college students have
been sponsored by the following private groups
and organizations : Mennonite Central Committee;
American Field Service; Rotary Educational
Foundation of Atlanta; Georgia District of Ki-
wanis International; American Association of
University Women; Church World Service.

The remainder of the group is made up of 22
adult leaders in German labor, agricultural, and
educational fields, who will be sponsored jointly
by the Department of State and the Departments
of Labor and Agriculture, and the Federal Se-
curity Agency.

COMMENT BY HENRY BYROADE, DIRECTOR
THE BUREAU OF GERMAN AFFAIRS

Developments within Germany point with
ever-increasing emphasis to the values achieved
by the cultural exchange program sponsored by
the Department of State. Changes in the culture
of any nation develop most effectively when its
own leaders, professional or cultural, are the lead-
ers in presenting changing concepts. New ideas
are fostered by new experiences. Especially in
Germany, following its period of isolation from
the world, it is necessary that present and poten-
tial leaders have the possibility of experiencing
life in democratic countries.

The Department of State has developed a pro-
gram of exchange which brings carefully selected
Germans to the United States and sends American
specialists in various fields to Germany. It in-
cludes projects of various types all basically de-
signed to provide Germans an opportunity to ob-
serve American democratic institutions and

practices. The projects for Germans who are at
the present time in positions of leadership must
obviously provide for a relatively short American
visit, usually 3 months.

During this time the exchangees in small groups
or individually participate in well-planned ex-
periences of a professional nature. Certain other
projects are operated to provide opportunities for
study and practical observation for young trainees
who give promise of potential leadership in their
profession or occupation. The student projects
provide 1-year study opportunities in American
schools and colleges for selected outstanding stu-
dents. All types of projects provide ample op-
portunity for unscheduled experiences in Ameri-
can life generally and in American home life.

Actions taken by Germans who have already
returned to Germany after participation in the
exchange program show that positive influences
ai'e being created and intensified for more demo-
cratic practices in Germany and for a much better
understanding and appreciation for the American
way of life.

U.S. Specialists Visiting Germany

A party of eight American specialists in the
fields of agricultural extension, home economics,
labor relations, public health, legal affairs, edu-
cation, and religious affairs arrives in Germany
August 21 to work with German organizations on
projects designed to contribute to the implementa-
tion of the foi-eign policy objectives of the Depart-
ment of State and of the Office of the United States
High Commissioner for Germany.

These specialists have been awarded grants of
3-6 months to enable them to participate in the
cultural exchange program between Germany and
the United States.

The American specialists in the party are :

Raymond Aune, Rochester, Minnesota, agricultural agent,
Olmstead County, Minnesota, and assistant professor,
University of Minnesota

Hardy C. Dillard, Charlottesville, Virginia, professor of
law at the University of Virginia and lecturer at the
National War College

Margaret Fedde, Lincoln, Nebraslia, chairman of the
Home Economics Department at the University of
Nebraska

Frederick W. J. Heuser, New York, professor emeritus at
Columbia University and secretary, Germauistic
Society of America

Clark Kerr, El Cerrito, California, director of the Insti-
tute of Industrial Relations at the University of
California

William M. Schmidt, BI.D., Needham, Massachusetts,
associate professor of maternal and child health prac-
tice. Harvard School of Public Health

Irving R. Tabershaw, M.D., New York, director. Eastern
Medical Division, Liberty Mutual Insurance Com-
pany, associate professor, Columbia University, and
clinical adviser, Atomic Energy Commission

Fred D. Wentzel, Upper Darby, Pennsylvania, director of
publications. Board of Christian Education, Evangel-
ical and Reform Church.

354

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

ITU Cancels Radio Conference
Scheduled for September

[Released to the press August 15]

Tlie Extraordinary Administrative Radio Con-
ference scheduled to meet in The Hague, Septem-
ber 1950, has been postponed, the Secretary Gen-
eral of the International Telecommunication
Union (Itu) announced by telegram to the De-
partment August 13.

Under the terms of the telecommunications con-
vention and the international radio regulations
annexed thereto, which were drafted at Atlantic
City by 72 member countries of the Itu, there was
to be convened an Extraordinary Administrative
Radio Conference. The original agenda of this
Conference was to approve an international fre-
quency list. However, the preparation of this list
gave rise to certain difficulties, and, accordingly,
the agenda was later amended to include the com-
pletion of the preparation of the frequency lists
with regard to the portions of the spectrum which
could not be resolved by the Provisional Frequency
Board, which was created by the Atlantic City
convention for the purpose of bringing an orderly
frequency assignment for the radio spectrum.
Additionally, the Hague Conference was to have
approved frequency allocation lists drafted for
specialized services such as aeronautical, mobile,
and high-frequency broadcasting. The third
item on the Hague agenda was to determine the
time and manner of entry into force of the over-all
frequency allocation list.

The motivating force in asking that the Hague
Conference be postponed was the United States
which on July 26 telegraphed the Secretary Gen-
eral of the Itu stating :

In view of present world conditions the United States
considers it would be impossible for the Extraordinary
Administrative Radio Conference to obtain substantial
agreement on any of its agenda items. Accordingly, the
United States proposes postponing Conference, the future
date to be determined at an appropriate time by the Ad-
ministrative Council of the Itu or by other conventional
procedures.

The United States took this position reluctantly
and only because it seemed useless to expand man-

power and funds on a conference which, in the
last analysis, could not accomplish its objectives
or even obtain substantial agreement. In submit-
ting this proposal, the United States requested
the Secretary General of the Itu to circulate all
Itu members by telegram for their comments on
the United States proposal.

The Itu has now announced that 56 countries
have declared in favor and that, accordingly, the
Conference will be postponed. Included in the
56 is the U.S.S.R.

The United States further proposed that the
work done at Atlantic City, and at subsequent
conferences looking to a long-range plan of or-
derly frequency allocation, should not be scrapped
and that a new Extraordinary Radio Conference
should be convened as soon as a favorable occasion
arises. In the interim, the International Fre-
quency Registration Board (Ifrb), created under
the terms of the Atlantic City telecommunication
convention and functioning at Geneva as an inte-
gral part of the Itu, should conduct studies on
problems which have resulted from efforts to pre-
pare a new international frequency list. Such
studies would be directed toward favorable solu-
tion of those problems with results to be available
for consideration by administrations whenever the
Conference is ultimately held.

U.S. Delegations to
International Conferences

Film Festivals

The Department of State announced on August
8 and 9 that J. Walter Evans, head of the Contract
Film Division, Photographic Center, Department
of the Navy, has been designated United States
delegate to the Edinburgh Film Festival to be
held at Edinburgh, Scotland, August 20-Septem-
ber 10, 1950, and that Arthur Menken, United
States Public Affairs officer at Naples, Italy, has
been designated United States representative to
the International Exhibition of Cinematographic

August 28, 1950

355

Art at Venice, Italy, August 8-September 10,
1950.

Gwendolyn T. Barrows, assistant public affairs
attache, American Embassy, London, has been
designated adviser to Mr. Evans.

The Edinburgh Film Festival was organized in
1947 under the sponsorship of a committee widely
representative of the film interests in Great Britain
and in close collaboration with the British Gov-
ernment for the purpose of showing realistic, docu-
mentary, and experimental films on a noncompeti-
tive basis. Every film selected by the British
Committee for showing at the festival is awarded
a certificate. The United States participated in-
formally in the 1948 and 1949 festivals through
the American Embassy at London.

The purpose of the festival at Venice is to give
public recognition to those films which demon-
strate outstanding progress in this medium of
artistic expression and cultural advancement.
The Unitecl States Government has participated
in previous festivals in 1948 and 1949.

Twenty-eight countries are expected to partici-
pate in the festival at Venice this year.

The United States Government has sent 20 films
to Kome to be forwarded to Venice. The Inter-
departmental Review Committee on Visual and
Audio Materials, composed of representatives of
all of the motion-picture producing agencies of
this Government, made the selections.

The following United States Government films
will be shown at Edinburgh and Venice :

Outbreak — Shows the nature of foot-and-mouth disease
and enlists aid in prevention and combating it. (De-
partment of Agriculture)

Water for a Nation — Shows importance of water and re-
lationship of the farm to conservation of water. (De-
partment of Agriculture)

Country Storekeeper — Cross section of American life.
(Department of Defense — Army)

First as a Child — How public funds are used in local serv-
ices for crippled children. (Federal Security
Agency-Children's Bureau)

Food for Thought — Improvement in health of children in
better methods of planning, preparing, and serving
school lunches. (Department of the Interior)

BurroiKjhs Newsboy FouniUition — Opportunities for health
and happiness provided underprivileged children in
a large American city. (Department of State)

Children's Zoo — Actual scenes in New York zoo where
children are permitted to see a model dairy farm and
play with small farm animals. (Department of
State)

River Showboat — Group of drama students of a college
sail and perform on a showboat on the Ohio and
Missouri Rivers. (Department of State)

Shipbuilders of Essex— Shows skilled craftsmen at work
building a wooden sailing vessel. (Department of
State)

The Tangleioood Story — Annual Berkshire Music Festival
atTanglewood (near Great Harrington), Mass. (De-
partment of State)

Safe Tuberculosis Nursing — To develop and teach tech-
niques in nursing designed to prevent the spread of
tubercle bacilli

Additional films to be shown at Edinburgh are :

Time Out-Occupational Therapy in Tuberculosis — Bridg-
ing the gap between hospitalization and subsequent
reemployment. (Department of Defense-Army)

Hazards in Oround Operation of Jet Aircraft — Flight
safety. (Department of Defense-Navy)

Take Time for Tomorrow — Armed I'orces education.
(Department of Defense-Navy)

International House — Cross section of persons living there
and the opportunities for better relationship between
different nationalities. (Department of State)

R. F. D. — Takes the audience over route of R. P. D. to
show how postal communication frees rural areas of
isolation. (Department of State)

Weathermen of the Sea — Shows valuable service of
weather station vessels. (Department of Treasury-
Const Guard)

Additional films to be shown at Venice include :

Surinval in the Arctic Tundra — A Department of the Air
Force film covering survival in the Arctic tundra when
correct use is made of available equipment and nat-
ural resources

Bailing Out — A United States Navy color cartoon on flight
safety

Breast Cancer — The Problem of Early Diagnosis — A film
produced by the Public Health Service, Federal Se-
curity Agency

Breast Self-E-ramination — A film produced by the Public
Health Service, Federal Security Agency, to teach
women the importance of periodic self-examinations
to detect the appearance of cancer or other growth

Resistive Exercises in Physical Therapy for Thoraco-
plasty— A film made by Veterans' Administration
which presents new techniques in the application of
resistive exercises with tuberculosis patients follow-
ing operation with removal of ribs

Journey Back — A film made by the Veterans' Adminis-
tration to illustrate the medical rehabilitation of
neurology patients

You Can Hear Again — A Veterans' Administration film
which provides information for veterans with im-
paired hearing

Intra-Oral Structures and Their Movements — A Veterans'
Administration film which shows some remarkable
pictures, taken before plastic surgery was attempted,
of the mouth and throat of a patient who had a large
portion of his face removed to arrest cancer.

Surgical Approaches to the Elbow Joint — A Veterans' Ad-
ministration film which contains an animated study
of arm anatomy and illustrations of several ap-
proaches to surgery on the elbow joint

Penal and Penitentiary Congress

The Department of State announced on August
15 that the Twelfth International Penal and Peni-
tentiary Congress will meet at The Hague, Nether-
lands, on August 14 with the following United
States delegation in attendance :

Chairman.

James V. Bennett, director. Federal Bureau of Prisons

United States Commissioner

Sanford Bates, Department of Institutions and Agencies,
State of New Jersey, Trenton

Alternate United States Commissioner

Thorsten Sellin, professor of sociology, University of Penn-
sylvania, Philadelphia

356

Department of State Bulletin

Delegates

Mary Stovens Baird, chairman of the Board of Jlanagers,
New Jersey State Reformatory for Women, Bernards-
ville

E. R. Cass, general secretary, American Prison Associa-
tion, New York

Rutli E. Collins, superintendent, House of Detention for
Women, New York

Norman S. Fenton, chief of Classification Bureau, Depart-
ment of Corrections, Sacramento, Calif.

Edgar A. Gerlach, Prison Branch, Office of the General
Counsel, High Commissioner for Germany

Sheldon Glueck, professor of criminology. Harvard Law
School. Cambridge, Mass.

Albert G. Fraser, Prison Society of Pennsylvania, Phila-
delphia

Maxwell B. Grossman, Col., USA (Ret.), Commissioner of
Correction, Boston

Garrett Heyns, warden, Michigan reformatory, Ionia

Peter P. Lejins, professor of sociology. University of Mary-
land. College Park

Fannie Saxe Long, member, Pennsylvania Prison Society,
Wilkes-Barre

Edna Mahan. superintendent. New Jersey State Reforma-
tory for Women, Clinton

William Shands Meacham, associate editor, Norfolk Vir-
ginia Pilot, Norfolk

Reuben Oppenheimer, chairman and director, Department
of Correction, Baltimore

Walter Reckless, professor of sociology, Ohio State Uni-
versity, Columbus

James J. Robinson, chairman. Committee on International
Criminal Law of the American Bar Association, Wash-
ington, D. C.

Joseph W. Sanford, penologist. Department of the Air
Force, Washington, D. C.

Jesse M. Shelton, % Robert and Associates, Atlanta, Ga.

J. Stanley Sheppard, president, American Prison Associa-
tion, Salvation Army Headquarters, New York

Isabel Smyth, confidential assistant to director, Bureau

of Prisons, Department of Justice
Sydney H. Souter, chief of the Prison Branch, Office of

the General Counsel, Higli Commissioner for Germany
Paul W. Tappan, professor of criminology. New York

University, Leonia, N. J.

International Penal and Penitentiary Con-
gresses were convoked at approximately 5-year
intervals during the period before World War II
to make possible an exchange of views among
responsible crijninological officials of various
countries in an effort to develop penal standards
and progressive methods of preventing crime and
treating delinquents. The First Congress, which
was held at London in 1872, provided for the es-
tablishment of the continuing body now known,
as the International Penal and Penitentiary Com-
mission. The Eleventh Congress was held in 1935
at Berlin.

The Twelfth Congress will deal with a variety
of specific questions relating to such matters as
problems encountered in the application of penal
law, the problem of a code of penal execution,
and measures which might be substituted for the
penal sentence in order to take into account the
needs of a humane defense of society.

Meetings of the Commission will be held imme-
diately i^receding and following the forthcoming
Congress. In the meetings of the Commission,
the chief question to be considered will be that of
the relations of the Commission with the United
Nations.

INDEX OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION

19i9

TOTAL ALL INDUSTRIES ^P"^ March

(incl. electricity & gas) ' 86 101

(excl. electricity & gas) • 82 98

Investment goods (total) 80 '9Z

Raw materials 71 '79

Finished products 85 101

General production goods

(incl. electricity & gas) 103 120

(excl. electricity & gas) 95 112

Consumer goods 75 96

\;J^'JS^'A [PRODUCTION OF MAJOR COtMMODITIES

COMMODITy"3|5 fev Unit of Measure March'

Hard coal (gross mined) 1,000 metric tons.. 9, 802

Crude petroleum metric tons.. 90, 135

Cement do 795, 134

Bricks (total) thousands.- 198, 174

Pig iron metric tons _ . 767, 094

Steel ingots do 1,001, 534

RoUed steel finished products do 650, 101

Farm tractors (total) ' pieces.- 4, 208

Typewriters "^ do 16, 157

Passenger cars (incl. chassis) do 15, 457

Cameras (total) do 139,003

Sulphuric acid (incl. oleum) metric tons (^ SOa).- 91, 314

Calcium carbide metric tons-- 55, 440

Soap (total) do 8, 095

Newsprint do 14, 985

Auto and truck tires pieces-- 202, 458

Shoes (total) 1,000 pairs.- 6, 535

» = Excl. food processing, stimulants and buildings.

'* = Standard, long-carriage and portable typewriters,

'= Revised.

p= Preliminary.

'= Excluding accessories, parts, and spare parts.

April

May

104

106

101

104

'99

103

109

112

120

'113

114

'96

April •

May '

8,363

8,667

89, 524

93, 844

850, 722

852, 889

252, 646

350, 573

682, 629

719, 770

885, 666

914, 258

574, 526

625, 228

3,892

3,949

14, 046

1.5, 662

14, 739

16, 378

132, 046

150, 588

93, 396

95, 801

58, 456

62, 630

6,621

8,390

12, 586

14, 792

164, 801

188, 347

5,522

6,440

August 28, 1950

357

Recruiting Program Seeks Personnel
for Domestic and Foreign Service

[Released to the press August 17]

The Department of State is presently engaged
in a special recruiting program to select men and
women for stenograpliic and clerical positions in
the Department and in American embassies, lega-
tions, and consulates throughout the world.

For this purpose, representatives will establish
headquarters in the cities and for the periods listed
below to interview and test applicants for steno-
graphic and clerical positions overseas and to
interview stenographers who are interested in
positions in Washington, D.C.

Employees in the Foreign Service are appointed
on a world-wide basis and are expected to accept
assignment to any foreign post for a minimum of
2 years. Applicants must be American citizens
between 21 and 35 years of age, single and with-
out dependents, and in excellent physical condi-
tion. Stenographers are required to take dictation
at 100 words per minute and must be able to type at
50 words per minute. All clerical positions re-
quire an ability to type by the touch system.

Stenographers applying for positions in the De-
partment in Washington who do not have civil
service status will be considered for a temporary
indefinite appointment. Conditions under which
they may acquire Civil Service status while serv-
ing on temporary appointments will be explained
by the representatives.

THE DEPARTMENT

Realinement Shifts Responsibility
for Conduct of Relations With Burma

The Department of State announced on August 15 that
under a new realinement in the Department the responsi-
bility for general conduct of foreign relations with Burma
has been transferred to the Bureau of Far Eastern Affairs
from tlie Bureau of Near Eastern, South Asian and Afri-
can Affairs. The transfer was effective August 10. R.
Austin Acly, a Foreign Service ofiicer, is the otficer in
charge of Burma affairs.

There has also been established an Office of Near East-
ern Affairs and an Office of African Affairs. Fraser
Wilkins, a Foreign Service officer, has been named acting
director of the Office of Near Eastern Affairs, and Elmer H.
Bourgerie, a Foreign Service officer, has been designated
acting director of the Office of African Affairs. The pres-
ent office of African and Near Eastern Affairs has been
abolished.

Appointment of Officers

The following designations in the Bureau of European
Affairs were also made effective recently :
Theodore C. Achilles, policy planning adviser
Homer M. Byington, Jr., director of the Office of Western

European Affairs
Francis T. Williamson, deputy director, Office of Western

European Affairs
Richard H. Davis, officer in charge of U.S.S.R. Affairs

Itinerary of Recruitment Representatives

Pennsylvania, New York and New Jersey

CrxT

Erie, Pennsylvania
Buffalo, New York
Rochester, New York
Scranton, Pennsylvania
Allentown, Pennsylvania
Camden, New Jersey
Trenton, New Jersey

Middle West States

Minneapolis, Minnesota
Davenport, Iowa
Peoria, Illinois
Springfield, Illinois
Kansas City, Missouri
Omaha, Nebra.ska
Des Moines, Iowa

Northwestern States

Spokane, Washington
Seattle, Washington
Portland, Oregon
Boise, Idaho
Salt Lake City, Utah
Provo, Utah
Denver, Colorado

*Subject to change.

Hotel Headquaktebs

Lawrence Hotel
Statler Hotel
Cadillac Hotel
Casey Hotel
Americus Hotel
Walt Whitman Hotel
Stacey-Trent Hotel

Hotel Curtis
Blackhawk Hotel
Pere Marquette Hotel
Abraham I.incoln Hotel
Bellerive Hotel
Fontenelle Hotel
Hotel Fort Des Moines

♦Davenport Hotel
♦Olympic Hotel
♦Hotel Benson
•Boise Hotel
♦Utah Hotel
♦Roberts Hotel
♦Brown Palace Hotel

Dates

Aug. 21 through 23
Aug. 24 through 29
Aug. 30 through Sept. 2
Sept. 3 through 7
Sept. 8 through 11
Sept. 12 through 13
Sept. 14 through 16

Aug. 21 through 26
Aug. 28 through 30
Aug. 31 through Sept. 2
Aug. 31 through Sept. 2
Sept. 4 through 9
Sept. 11 through 14
Sept. 15 through 16

Sept. 5 through 9
Sept. 10 through 16
Sept. 17 through 23
Sept. 24 through 26
Sept. 27 through Oct.
Oct. 3 through 5
Oct. 7 through 13

358

Department of State Bulletin

Assistance Offered Unified Command in Korea

In response to coniniunications from the Secre-
tary-General of the United Nations immediately
following the action of the Security Council of
June 25 and June 27 on Korea, and again on July
14, at which time information regarding possible
additional assistance to the unified command, in-
cluding combat forces, was requested, members of
the United Nations have offered the following
assistance.

Military

Australia-

Belgium — ■
Bolivia —
Canada — •

China —
Costa Rica-

France — ■
New Zealand —
Philippines —

Thailand —

Turkey-
United Kingdom-

Naval

AustraUa —
Canada —
Denmark — ■
France —
Netherlands — •
New Zealand — •
Norway —
United Kingdom-
Air

Australia —
Belgium — ■

Canada —

China-

ground troops; Australian in-
fantry force in Japan to be
built up to full war establish-
ment so it can be used at earli-
est possible date
ground troops

30 officers of the regular army
recruitment of special infantry
brigade
33,000 troops

offer of volunteers for prelimi-
nary training in the United
States

ground troops unit
special combat unit
regimental combat team of
5,000 officers and men
combat team of 4,000 officers
and men
4,500 troops

-self-contained force of troops;
immediately available infantry
force from Hong Kong.

2 ships; 1 destroyer

3 destroyers

cargo liner motorship
1 sloop

1 destroyer

2 frigates
merchant tonnage

-naval forces in Japanese waters

1 RAAF fighter squadron
aid in air transport from United
States to Korea
1 long-range squadron, includ-
ing ground crews; complete
passenger facilities of Cana-
dian commercial air service be-
tween Vancouver and Tokyo
on two flights weekly west-
bound and equivalent one flight
weekly eastbound
20 C-46 transports

Air — Continued

Greece — ■
Union of
South Africa

Medical

Denmark —

Ethiopia —

India —

Israel — •

Philippines —
Sweden — ■

Other Assistance

Chile-
Costa Rica —

Cuba —
Lebanon —

Liberia —
Nicaragua —

Panama —

Philippines-
Thailand —

6 transport Dakota aircraft
1 fighter squadron

medicaments; Red Cross am-
bulance unit or fuUy equipped
hospital ship

$100,000 Ethiopian dollars for
medical supplies
field ambulance unit ; small sur-
gical unit, if needed
medical assistance (certain
drugs)

certain vaccines
field hospital at Swedish ex-
pense, manned by Swedish per-
sonnel

copper, saltpeter, other stra-
tegic materials

adequate sites for air or sea
bases and troop quarters or
stations in Costa Rica
"essential articles"
$50,000 for relief of Korea war
victims, particularly wounded
United Nations combatants
$10,000 m natural rubber
foodstuff's; raw materials such
as rubber, personnel (unspeci-
fied)

use of bases and merchant ma-
rine for United Nations forces;
farm land use for assistance in
provisioning forces
copra, cocoanut oil, rice, soap;
17 Sherman tanks, 1 tank
destroyer
foodstuffs, such as rice

Argentina, Brazil, Colombia, Cuba, Dominican
Republic, Mexico, Peru, Philippines, Union of
South Africa, Uruguay, and Venezuela have indi-
cated their willingness to consult with the Unified
Command (USG) with respect to the type of as-
sistance which they might usefully offer. In addi-
tion, a number of other states which supported the
Security Council action in Korea have informed
the Secretary-General of their desire to provide
assistance within the limits of their resources and
have consulted informally with the United States
to this end.

Editor's Note : The above material is presented in place
of the weekly section "The United States in the United
Nations."

August 28, 1950

359

'y^e/rtytii/

General Policy Page

Report of the United Nations Command
Operations in Korea — For the Period of
July 20-31, 1950 323

President Malik's Continued Obstruction
Tactics in the Security Council. State-
ments by Warren R. Austin 326

U.S. Requests U.N. Use Good Offices for Red

Cross Activities in North Korea .... 333

EGA Authorizations for Aid to Korea in July

and August 334

Latvian Expression on the Korean Situation

Acknowledged 334

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Report of the United Nations Command
Operations in Korea — For the Period of
July 20-31, 1950 323

President Malik's Continued Obstruction
Tactics in the Security Council. State-
ments by Warren R. Austin 326

Ecosoc Will Remain in Session To Aid South

Korea 332

U.S. Requests U.N. Use Good Offices for Red

Cross Activities in North Korea .... 333

Report of the Trusteeship Council to the
Security Council on the Trust Territory
of the Pacific Islands 336

U.S. Administration of Pacific Trust Terri-
tory. Statement by Rear Admiral Leon
S. Fiske 338

Current United Nations Documents: A

Selected Bibliography 342

Assistance Offered to Unified Command in

Korea 359

Economic Affairs

EGA Authorizations for Aid to Korea in July

and August 334

U.S. Notifies Swiss of Intention To Ter-
minate Trade Agreement 346

Treaty Information

The General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade — Negotiations Beginning Septem-
ber 1950, Second Supplementary An-
nouncement 343

U.S. Notifies Swiss of Intention To Terminate

Trade Agreement 346

International Information and

Cultural Affairs page

Soviet Distortions Demand an American
Campaign of Truth:
Statement by Secretary Acheson .... 335
Plans Outlined by Howland Sargeant . . 335
Publisher's Council Endorses Program . . 335
Psychological Strategy Board To Coordi-
nate Foreign Information 335

German Visitors in the United States:

Plans for Group 354

Comment by Henry Byroade 354

U.S. Specialists Visiting Germany 354

Occupation Matters

German Federal Republic's Monthly Eco-
nomic Review 347

Mainz E.xhibiting Treasured Psalter .... 349
Steps for Narcotic Control in Germany . . 349
Public Notices Affecting U.S. Property Own-
ers in Germany 350

International Organizations
and Conferences

U.S. Delegations:

Non-Self-Governing Territories Special

Committee 337

Film Festivals 355

Penal and Penitentiary Congress .... 356
Itu Cancels Radio Conference Scheduled for

September 355

The Department

Recruiting Program Seeks Personnel for
Domestic and Foreign Service ....

Realinement Shifts Responsibility for Con-
duct of Relations With Burma ....

Appointment of Officers

The Foreign Service

Recruiting Program Seeks Personnel for
Domestic and Foreign Service ....

358

358
358

358

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1*90

JAe/ z/Jehcm^t'men^ ^^ tnate/

EXPOSING SOVIET PROPAGANDA TACTICS •

Statement by Ambassador Austin . , ••• 370

AMBASSADOR JESSUP ANSWERS QUESTIONS ON

KOREA 374

REPORT OF UNSCOB TO THE GENERAL ASSEM-

BLY • A Summary Account by Harry N. Howard ... 363

For complete contents see back cover

'^ol. XXIII, No. 583
September 4, 1950

^eNT Ofr

-»TES °

fJAe

z/^e/ia/yim^ent ^£^ tndle Jk^ LI. JL J. \D L JL JL JL

Vol. XXIII, No. 583 • Publication 3954
September 4, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U. S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D. C.

Price:

62 Issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.50

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

THE REPORT OF THE U.N. SPECIAL COMMITTEE ON THE BALKANS
TO THE FIFTH SESSION OF THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY

hy Harry N. Hoioard, United Nations Adviser

Bureau of Near Eastern., South Asian and African Affairs

A SUMMARY ACCOUNT

Significance of UNSCOB

The United States has been concerned with the
problem of threats to the political independence
and territorial integrity of Greece since the end
of World War II. The problem has occupied the
United Nations since December 1946, when a
Commission of Investigation was established for
the purpose of examining the situation along the
northern frontiers of Greece. On October 21,
1947, the General Assembly established a Special
Committee on the Balkans which has functioned
in Greece during the past 3 years. Australia,
Brazil, China, France, Mexico, the Netherlands,
Pakistan, the United Kingdom, and the United
States have been represented on the Special Com-
mittee since the beginning of its work in Novem-
ber 1947. The Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
and Poland have refused service on the Commit-
tee. Jefferson Patterson is now the United States
representative on the Committee, on which Am-
bassador Alan G. Kirk and Minister Gerald A.
Drew have previously served.

The fifth annual report of the Secretary-Gen-
eral of the United Nations to the General Assembly
rightly listed establishment of the Special Com-
mittee as one of "the major decisions and acts of
the United Nations," and noted : ^

The progressive pacification of the northern borders of
Greece after three years during which the United Nations
Special Committee on the Balkans and its predecessor
I)erformed a useful and necessary observer role, although

' U.N. doc. A/128T. Annual Report of the Secretary-
General on the Work, of the Organisation. 1 July 1949-
30 June 1950, p. x. Bulletin of Aug. 21, 1950, p. 300.

unable to secure a settlement of outstanding disputes
between Greece and her northern neighbours.

Despite the improved situation along the northern
frontiers of Greece, it had become clear by August
1950 that, in the interest of international peace
and security in the Balkans, the United Nations
should maintain its vigilance over the political
independence and territorial integrity of Greece.

Cliaracter of tlie 1950 Report

On July 31, 1950, the United Nations Special
Committee on the Balkans signed its unanimous
report to the fifth session of the General Assem-
bly.^ This report follows the general outlines of
those previously submitted to the General Assem-
bly in 1948 and 1949,' although it differs in some
important particulars. Essentially the report is
divided into six chapters, as follows :

I. Creation, Function and Organization of the
United Nations Special Committee on the Balkans ;

II. Conciliatory Role of the United Nations
Special Committee on the Balkans;

III. External Support of the Greek Guerrilla
Movement ;

IV. Refugees and Repatriation of Greek Na-
tionals ;

'U.N. doc. A/1307; (A/AC.16/1055). Report of the
United Nations Special Committee on the Balkans, signed
at Geneva, on July 31, 1950. Annexes to the report con-
tain (1) the texts of the resolutions of the General Assem-
bly of Oct. 21, 1947, Nov. 27, 1948, and Nov. 18, 1949; (2)
compcsition of the Special Committee; (3) organization
of the ob.servation system; (4) principles for the main-
tenance of good frontier relations; (5) specimen of Greek
questionnaire; and (6) a map of the area.

' See U.N. docs. A/574, 644, 692, 935, and 981.

September 4, 1950

363

V. Conclusions;

VI. Recommendations.

History and Organization of the Special Committee

On December 19, 1946, the Security Council
unanimously approved the establishment of a
Commission of Investigation Concerning Greek
Frontier Incidents, which, after an extended in-
vestigation, reported on May 23, 1947, that Al-
bania, Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia had been assist-
ing the Greek guerrilla movement in an attempt
to overthrow the constitutional government of
Greece. The recommendations of the Commission
as to the establishment of a commission for pur-
poses of observation and conciliation, embodied
in a draft resolution submitted to the Security
Council, were vetoed by the representative of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Eepublics during July-
August 1947, and the case was brought before the
General Assembly in September 1947.*

Chapter I gives a brief historical summary and
analysis of the work of the Special Committee,
stressing the original terms of reference as to
observation and conciliation, and the fact that
"Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia were called
upon to refrain from furnishing aid and assistance
to the Greek guerrilla movement and, in addition,
those countries, together with Greece, were called
upon to cooperate in the pacific settlement of their
disputes." ®

The resolution of the General Assembly of No-
vember 27, 1948, continued the Special Committee,
specifically authorized it to continue to utilize its
observation system — which later served as a model
for the observers on the Korean Commission, and
in execution of its conciliatory role, empowered the
Special Committee, at its discretion, to appoint
and utilize "the services and good offices of one or
more persons whether or not members of the Spe-

* For details, see H. N. Howard, The United Nations and
the Problem of Greece (Department of State publication
2909, 1947, 97 pp.) ; The General Assemlly and the Prob-
lem of Greece, The Department of State Bulletin, Supple-
ment of Dec. 7, 1947, p. 1097 ; "U.N. Special Committee on
the Balkans ; Comment on Report to 3d Ses.sion of the
General Assembly," Documents and State Papers of Sep-
tember 1948, p. 363 ; "The Problem of Greece In the Third
Session of the General Assembly," ibid., January 1949, p.
543 ; Greece and the United Nations, 19l,G-19Ji9 : A Sum-
mary Record, Bulletin of Sept. 19, 1949; The Greek Ques-
tion in the Fourth General Assembly of the United Natio7is.
(Reprinted from Bulmtin of Feb. 27, Mar. 6, 1950.)

• See chap. I, par. 3.

cial Committee." The following year, the resolu-
tion of November 18 largely reiterated the provi-
sions of the earlier resolutions and, in addition,
called upon Albania and Bulgaria, in particular,
to permit international verification of the disarm-
ing and disposition of Greek guerrillas who had
fled to their territories, recommended that an arms
embargo be applied against Albania and Bulgaria,
until the Special Committee or other competent
United Nations organ had determined that they
had ceased to give aid to the Greek guerrillas, and
called upon all states harboring Greek nationals,
outside Greece as a result of the guerrilla opera-
tions, "to facilitate the peaceful repatriation to
Greece of all such individuals who desired to re-
turn and live in accordance with the law of the
land." The Secretary-General was authorized to
assist in such repatriation.

Both in 1948 and in 1949, unanimous resolutions
dealt with the repatriation of Greek children.

The Conciliatory Role
of the Special Committee

Chapter II discusses the conciliatory role of the ,
Special Committee, once more indicating the co- ^
operative attitude of the Government of Greece
with regard to the Committee and the refusal of
the Governments of Albania, Bulgaria, and Yugo-
slavia to cooperate with it. With respect to
Yugoslavia, the report notes the improvement of
Greek- Yugoslav relations and especially the
agreement of May 21, 1950, to exchange ministers.
Chapter II also outlines the work of the Special
Committee on the problem of frontier conventions
and points to certain "Principles for the Mainte-
nance of Good Frontier Relations" (amiex IV),
worked out by the Special Committee in the inter-
est of avoiding or settling frontier incidents.
These suggestions are based on principles and
provisions embodied in such previously operative
frontier conventions as the Greek-Bulgarian
agreement of 1931, the various Soviet nonaggres-
sion treaties of 1933,' the draft proposals of the
Conciliation Committees on Greece (1948-1949),
the draft declaration on the rights and duties of
states of the Commission on International Law,

*At the 482d meeting of the Security Council on Aug.
3, Mr. Malik, the Soviet representative, referred at length
to the definition of aggression embodied in the 1933
treaties, and, at the 485th and 486th meetings on Aug.
10 and 11, he spoke of the "internationally accepted"
definition of aggression embodied therein.

364

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

and the resolution of the General Assembly on
"The Essentials of Peace."

Although the Special Committee was aware that
without sound political relations, frontier con-
ventions as such would not solve the problems
involved, it believed that it would be well to indi-
cate detailed views on the subject to the parties
concerned in the interest of and in implementation
of its own conciliatory role.

External Support

of the Greek Guerrilla Movement

Chapter III deals with the question of external
support of the Greek guerrilla movement, the
evidence concerning which was obtained through
the observation system of the Special Committee.'
The Special Committee noted the improved situa-
tion along the northern frontiers of Greece during
1950, as a result of the operations of the Greek
National Army against the Greek guerrillas in
1949. It points out, however, that Albania and
Bulgaria have persisted in attitudes and actions
which are not conducive to peace in the Balkans ; *
the report states that :

Instead of active support of guerrilla fighting, Albanian
and Bulgarian actions have tended more and more to take
the form of: (a) support of the retreat from Greece of
scattered groups of guerrillas, (b) the harbouring of
Greek guerrillas in a manner contrary to the resolution
of the General Assembly which called for international
verification of their disarming and disposition, and (c)
a continuing demonstration of unfriendliness and even
hostility, marked by a series of largely minor frontier
incidents and numerous charges of frontier violations.

Similarly, the Special Committee indicated that
it had kept in mind the various statements of the
Greek Communist Party and its leaders that the
guerrillas had not laid down their arms but "only
put them aside." *

Refugees and Repatriation
of Greek Nationals

Chapter IV deals with the problem of refugees
and the repatriation of Greek nationals. Five
categories of persons are involved, as follows:

(1) International refugees who have sought
asylum in Greece, those under the International
Refugee Organization now numbering some 1,189
individuals ;

' Annex III.
'Par. 62.
' Loc. cit.

(2) internal refugees, displaced as a result of
the guerrilla warfare in Greece, who now appear
to have been reduced from a peak figure of 684,197
in May 1949 to approximately 10,000 in June 1950 ;

(3) Greek civilians who, for one reason or an-
other as a result of the guerrilla operations are
now in the countries to the north of Greece, num-
bering thousands ;

(4) Greek military personnel detained, espe-
cially in Albania and Bulgaria, the estimated
number being 1,713;

(5) Greek children, more than 20,000 in num-
ber, who were removed from their homes during
the guerrilla operations and taken into certain
of the states of Eastern Europe.

Conclusions

The Special Committee embodied its conclusions
in chapter V of the report. Once more the Special
Committee expresses views on the uncooperative
attitude of Albania and Bulgaria, particularly,
while noting the improved relations between
Greece and Yugoslavia. In contrast to the reports
of 1948 and 1949, the Special Committee, as a re-
sult of the military operations in 1949, expresses
the belief that "the threat to the political inde-
pendence and territorial integrity of Greece has
altered in character. The organized guerrilla
movement within Greece now consists of the activi-
ties of scattered bands." Nevertheless, the Special
Committee points out that

many thousands of Greek guerrillas fled beyond the north-
ern frontiers of Greece ; the disarming and disposition
of these guerrillas have not been verified by any inter-
national agency ; and the Greek guerrilla leaders them-
selves claim that their forces still exist. While the guer-
rilla leaders have of necessity suspended, at any rate for
the time being, their effort to dominate Greece by armed
force, their aims have not been abandoned. The Greek
guerrilla radio continues to operate from Romanian terri-
tory. Apart from the fact that guerrillas are being har-
boured outside Greece, the remnants of the movement
within Greece have not been dissolved.

The Special Committee notes that Yugoslavia
has maintained the policy, announced by Marshal
Tito on July 10, 1949, of closing its frontier with
Greece, but the Committee calls attention to the
evidence that Bulgaria, in particular, "has con-
tinued to give moral and material assistance to
guerrilla raiding and sabotage parties on and near
the Greek border" and states that aid of this kind
on the part of Bulgaria and also of Albania, "has

September 4, 1950

365

necessarily been considerably reduced because of
the flight of the bulk of the guerrillas from Greek
territory, but it has not ceased." The report in-
dicates "that the continuing potential threat to
Greek political independence and territorial in-
tegrity is to be found at present chiefly in
Bulgaria." i"

The report also points to the failure of permit-
ting international verification of the disarming
and disposition of Greek guerrillas by states har-
boring these people, contrary to the resolution of
the General Assembly of November 18, 1949. It
concludes that conditions in Greece would now
"facilitate the peaceful repatriation to Greece of
those Greek nationals who desire to return to live
in accordance with the law of the land." As to
the repatriation of Greek military personnel cap-
tured by the guerrillas and removed to the coun-
tries to the north of Greece, the report declares
that "despite repeated requests by the Government
of Greece, and in violation of international prac-
tice, no lists of these prisoners have been circu-
lated by the governments concerned and all efforts
made by the Special Committee to assist in their
repatriation have proved futile."

It was natural that the Special Committee, in
the light of two unanimous resolutions of the Gen-
eral Assembly with respect to the repatriation of
the Greek children, should view "with the gravest
concern the fact that no Greek children have yet
been repatriated to their homes in Greece."
Apart from certain proposals indicating that the
Yugoslav Government intended to comply with
these resolutions of the General Assembly, the
report declares that :

the two unanimous resolutions of the General Assembly
calling for the repatriation of the children removed from
Greece during the course of the guerrilla warfare have
had no practical results despite the untiring efforts of

"The Commission of Investigation (U.N. doc. S/S60,
part III, A, par. 1) concluded in 1947 that "Yugoslavia,
and to a lesser extent, Albania and Bulgaria have sup-
ported the guerrilla warfare in Greece." In 1948 (U.N.
doc. A/574, par. 188), the Special Committee concluded
that "the Greek guerrillas have received aid and assistance
from Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia" and that the
assistance had been given with the knowledge of the Gov-
ernments concerned. In 1949, the Special Committee
(U.N. doc. A/935, pars. 139, 140, 141) declared that Albania
and Bulgaria had "continued to give moral and material
assistance to the Greek guerrilla movement," Albania
being "the principal source of material assistance," while
Yugoslav aid "has diminished and may have ceased."

the Secretary-General of the United Nations and the In-
ternational Bed Cross organizations. . . . The basic fail-
ure to resolve this problem constitutes a continuing source
of international friction as well as a standing challenge
to the United Nations and to the most elementary humani-
tarian principles.

The Special Committee also expressed the view
that an international body, such as the Interna-
tional Refugee Organization, should remain in
charge of the work being carried out in behalf of
the approximately 1,200 international refugees
who had sought asylum in Greece during the past
several years.

Finally, the SjDCcial Committee concludes "that
the vigilance of the United Nations with respect
to the political independence and territorial integ-
rity of Greece has been, and remains, a significant
factor in maintaining peace in the Balkans," and
further indicates that "the remaining problems of
the Greek guerrilla warfare and outstanding inter-
national difficulties with regard to the Greek ques-
tion still constitute a source of danger, if of a
modified nature." Among the problems, "the ur-
gent solution of which constitutes a prerequisite
for the restoration of normal relations between
Greece and her northern neighbors," are the f ol- 1
lowing : '

( 1 ) International verification of the disarming
and disposition of Greek guerrillas outside Greece ;

(2) the repatriation of Greek children to their
homes ;

(3) the repatriation of detained Greek soldiers
and other Greek nationals ; and,

(4) the conclusion of conventions for the regu-
lation and control of the common frontiers be-
tween Greece, on the one hand, and Albania,
Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia, on the other.

In the view of the Special Committee, "only
when these problems have been solved . . ., will
conditions in the Balkans be such as to permit the
reestablishment of normal relations between the
four Governments."

Recommendations

The recommendations of the Special Commit-
tee, embodied in chapter VI, and the conclusions
are subject to revision, if advisable, prior to the
fifth session of the General Assembly. In general,
the recommendations are reminiscent of those con-
tained in the reports of 1948 and 1949, in view of
the continuing nature of the problems involved.

366

Deparlment of Sfafe Bulletin

For example, it is recommended that the Gen-
eral Assembly, once more, take note of the assist-
ance given to the Greek guerrillas, "by Albania
and Bulgaria in particular," contraiy to the prin-
ciples and purposes of the Charter of the United
Nations, in contravention of the previous recom-
mendations of the General Assembly, and "endan-
gering peace in the Balkans." In this connection,
the Special Conunittee also recommends that all
member states and all other states, "and espe-
cially Albania and Bulgaria," be called upon "to
do nothing which would encourage or permit a
renewal of armed action against Greece."

In view of its conciliatory role, the Special
Committee recommends that Albania, Bulgaria,
and Greece be called upon to establish diplomatic
relations and to establish frontier conventions with
effective machinery for the regulation and con-
trol of their common frontiers and the peaceful
settlement of their frontier incidents along lines
proposed by the Special Committee.

In view of the flight of some thousands of Greek
guerrillas in 1949, the Special Committee recom-
mends that Albania and Bulgaria, in particular,
be called upon again "to permit international veri-
fication of their disarming and disposition of the
Greek guerrillas who have entered their respective
territories." It is also proposed, as in 1949, that
the General Assembly recommend to all members
of the United Nations and all other states that
they refrain from supplying arms or war materials
to Albania and Bulgaria until either the Special
Committee or another competent United Nations
organ has determined that their unlawful assis-
tance to the Greek guerrillas has ceased, and that
account be taken, in their relations with Albania
and Bulgaria, of their compliance with the recom-
mendations of the General Assembly in their
relations with Greece. It is also suggested that
Albania, Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia and all other
states concerned, be called upon to facilitate the
peaceful repatriation to Greece of detained Greek
nationals "who may desire to return to live in
accordance with the law of the land."

In the light of the resolutions of the General
Assembly in 1948 and 1949 and in view of previous
failures to obtain any practical results, the Special
Committee recommends that the General Assem-
bly, in "a humanitarian spirit, detached from
political or ideological considerations, make every
possible effort to find some means of restoring the
Greek children to their homes."

Finally, no doubt with the crisis in Korea and
the disturbed world situation in mind, the Special
Committee recommends —

that the General Assembly consider the advisability of
maintaining an appropriate United Nations agency on the
Balkans, in the light of the current international situation
and of conditions prevailing along the northern frontiers
of Greece.

REPORT OF THE U.N.

SPECIAL COMMITTEE ON THE BALKANS

[Excerpts]

Chapter V. Conclusions

206. In conformitv with the terms of General
Assembly Resolution No. 288 (IV), of 18 Novem-
ber 1949, the Special Committee has consistently
endeavoured to promote the establishment of nor-
mal diplomatic and good neighbourly relations be-
tween Albania, Bulgaria, and Yugoslavia on the
one hand and Greece on the other. The Govern-
ment of Greece has continued to cooperate with
the Special Committee, while the Governments of
Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia, as in the past,
have refused either to cooperate with it or to
recognize it.

207. Diplomatic and good neighbourly relations
between Greece on the one hand and Albania and
Bulgaria on the other do not exist. Diplomatic
relations between Greece and Yugoslavia exist and
an agreement was reached between the two Gov-
ernments on 21 May 1950 for an exchange of
ministers.

208. In view of the elimination of large-scale
guerrilla activity along the northern frontiers of
Greece, as a result of the operations of the Greek
Army in 1949, the Special Committee believes that
the threat to the political independence and terri-
torial integrity of Greece has altered in character.
The organized guerrilla movement within Greece
now consists of the activities of scattered bands.
Nevertheless, many thousands of Greek guerrillas
fled beyond the northern frontiers of Greece ; the
disarming and disposition of these guerrillas have
not been verified by any international agency ; and
the Greek guerrilla leaders themselves claim that
their forces still exist. While the guerrilla leaders
have of necessity suspended, at any rate for the
time being, their effort to dominate Greece by
armed foi'ce, their aims have not been abandoned.
The Greek guerrilla radio continues to operate
from Romanian territory. Apart from the fact
that guerrillas are being harboured outside Greece,
the remnants of the movement within Greece have
not been dissolved.

209. While Yugoslavia has maintained the pol-
icy, announced in July 1949, of closing her fron-
tier with Greece, and frontier relations between
the two countries have, for the most part, been
correct, there is evidence to indicate that Bulgaria

September 4, 1950

367

in particular has continued to give moral and ma-
terial assistance to guerrilla raiding and sabotage
parties on and near the Greek border. Aid of this
nature to the Greek guerrillas on the part of Bul-
garia and also Albania has necessarily been con-
siderably reduced because of the flight of the bulk
of the guerrillas from Greek territory, but it has
not ceased. The Special Committee is of the opin-
ion that the continuing potential threat to Greek
political independence and territorial integrity is
to be. found at present chiefly in Bulgaria.

210. Large numbers of Greek guerrillas are
known to be present in various countries of eastern
Europe as a consequence of the guerrilla retreat.
The States harbouring them have failed to give
effect to the General Assembly's recommendations
with respect to the verification by an international
agency of their disarming and disposition.

211. With regard to the repatriation of Greek
nationals at present in countries to the north of
Greece as a result of the military operations and
subsequent retreat of Greek guerrilla forces, the
Special Committee has consistently endeavoured
to assist in achieving a solution of the problem.
It has noted that the amelioration of the situation
in Greece has given rise to conditions which would
facilitate the peaceful repatriation to Greece of
those Greek nationals who desire to return and
live in accordance with the law of the land.

212. Likewise, the Special Committee has given
serious consideration to the important problem of
the repatriation of Greek military personnel cap-
tured by the Greek guerrillas and removed by them
to the countries to the north of Greece. Despite
repeated requests by the Govermnent of Greece,
and in violation of international practice, no lists
of these prisoners have been circulated by the

§overnments concerned and all efforts made by the
pecial Committee to assist in their repatriation
have proved futile.

213. The Special Committee has viewed with
the gravest concern the fact that no Greek children
have yet been repatriated to their homes in Greece.
The Special Committee has noted the definite pro-
posals of the Yugoslav Government indicating
that it intended to fulfil the terms of the reso-
lution of the General Assembly regarding this
question, and that seventeen Greek children from
Yugoslavia had been sent to their parents in
Australia. But apart from this, the two unani-
mous resolutions of the General Assembly calling
for the repatriation of the children removed from
Greece during the course of the guerrilla warfare
have had no practical results despite the untiring
efforts of the Secretary-General of the United Na-
tions and the International Red Cross organiza-
tions. The failure of the States concerned to
return these children to their homes has given
rise to widespread indignation and sorrow. The
basic failure to resolve this problem constitutes a
continuing source of international friction as well
as a standing challenge to the United Nations and

to the most elementary humanitarian principles.

214. The problem of international refugees in
Greece has continued to develop during the course
of the past year. In view of the movement of
political and other refugees across the northern
frontiers into Greece, the Special Committee is
convinced that an international body should re-
main in charge of the work being accomplished in
Greece at present by the International Refugee
Organization. The Special Committee also be-
lieves that it would be advantageous that these
refugees should be resettled outside Greece.

215. The Special Committee considers that the
vigilance of the United Nations with respect to the
political independence and territorial integrity of
Greece has been, and remains, a significant fac-
tor in maintaining peace in the Balkans. Never-
theless, the remaining problems of the Greek guer-
rilla warfare and outstanding international diffi-
culties with regard to the Greek question still
constitute a source of danger, if of a modified
nature.

216. Among the problems still remaining, the
urgent solution of which constitutes a prerequisite
for the restoration of normal relations between
Greece and her northern neighbours are : interna-
tional verification of the disarming and disposition
of Greek guerrillas outside Greece; the repatria-
tion of Greek children — a problem which has done
much to perpetuate bad relations between Greece
and her northern neighbours ; the repatriation of
detained Greek soldiers and other Greek nationals ;
and conclusion of conventions for the regulation
and control of the common frontiers between
Greece and her northern neighbours. Only when
these problems have been solved, in compliance
with the General Assembly's recommendations,
will conditions in the Balkans be such as to permit
the re-establishment of normal relations between
the four Governments.

Chapter VI. Recommendations

217. In the light of the evidence before the Spe-
cial Committee and its conclusions drawn there-
from, and subject to the right to submit supple-
mentary or revised recommendations prior to the
opening of the fifth session of the General As-
sembly, if deemed advisable:

The Special Committee reconwiends :

1. That the General Assembly take note of the
assistance given to the Greek guerrillas by Albania,
and by Bulgaria in particular, in disregard of the
Assembly's recommendations, as being contrary
to the purposes and principles of the United Na-
tions Charter, and endangering peace in the
Balkans,

2. That the General Assembly call upon all
Member States and all other States, and especially
Albania and Bulgaria, to do nothing which would
encourage or permit a renewal of armed action
against Greece,

368

Department of State Bulletin

3. That the General Assembly once more call
upon Albania, Bulgaria and Greece to establish
diplomatic relations and to renew previously oper-
ative frontier conventions or conclude new ones
providinc; effective machinery for the regulation
and control of their common frontiers and for
the peaceful adjustment of frontier incidents along
the lines suggested by the Special Committee,

4. That the General Assembly again call upon
all States concerned, and in particular Albania
and Bulgaria, to permit international verification
of the disarming and disposition of the Greek
guerrillas who have entered their respective
territories,

5. That the General Assembly again recommend
to all Members of the United Nations and to all
other States:

(a) To refrain from the direct or indirect pro-
vision of arms or materials of war to Albania and
Bulgaria until the Special Committee or another
competent United Nations organ has determined
that the unlawful assistance of these States to the
Greek guerrillas has ceased ;

(b) To take into account, in their relations
with Albania and Bulgaria, the extent to which
those two countries henceforth abide by the rec-
ommendations of the General Assembly in their
relations with Greece;

6. That the General Assembly again call upon
Albania, Bulgaria and Yugoslavia and all other
States harbouring or detaining Greek nationals,
as a result of the guerrilla operations against
Greece, to facilitate the peaceful repatriation to
Greece of all such individuals who may desire
to return and live in accordance with the law of
the land,

7. That the General Assembly, in a humani-
tarian spirit, detached from political or ideological
considerations, make every possible effort to find
some means of restoring the Greek cliildren to
their homes,

8. That the General Assembly consider the ad-
visability of maintaining an appropriate United
Nations agency on the Balkans, in the light of
the current international situation and of condi-
tions prevailing along the northern frontiers of
Greece.

THE CONGRESS

Legislation

Economic Assistance to Certain Areas In the Far Bast
Report of the Committee on Foreign Affairs on S. 2319, a
bill to promote world peace and the general welfare,
national interest, and foreign policy of the United States
by providing aid to the Republic of Korea. H. Rept. 1571,
81st Cong., 2d sess. 25 pp.

Authorizing the Admission into the United States of
Certain Aliens Possessing Special Skills, Namely, Teodor
Egle, Karlis Fogelis, Vasily Kils, and Aleksanders Zel-
menis. H. Rt^pt. 1627, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany
H. R. 4604] 9 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.

1639, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res. 44]
2 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.

1640, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res. 45]
2 pp.

Authorizing the Printing of Additional Copies of Senate
Report No. 1158, Eighty-flrst Congress, First Session, En-
titled "Progress on the Hoover Commission Recommenda-
tions." H. Rept. 1669, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany
S. Con. Res. 70] 1 p.

The Displaced Persons Analytical Bibliography. Report
(Supplemental) of a special subcommittee of the Com-
mittee on the Judiciary, House of Representatives, pur-
suant to H. Res. 238, a resolution to authorize the Com-
mittee on the Judiciary to undertake a study of Immigra-
tion and nationality problems. H. Rept. 1687, 81st Cong.,
2d sess. Ill, 82 pp.

International Claims Settlement Act of 1949. H. Rept.
1693, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany H. R. 4406]
2 pp.

Continuance of Veterans' Administration OflSce in the
Republic of the Philippines. H. Rept. 1718, 81st Cong.,
2d sess. [To accompany H. R. 6632] 4 pp.

Certain Cases In Which the Attorney General Had Sus-
pended Deportation. S. Rept. 1325, 81st Cong., 2d sess.
[To accompany S. Con. Res. 78] 2 pp.

Summary of the Legislative Record of the Eighty-first
Congress, First Session, Together with A Statement Rela-
tive Thereto Pursuant to a Request of the Honorable
Scott W. Lucas, United States Senator from Illinois. S.
Doc. 124, 81st Cong., 1st sess. ii, 33 pp.

Seventh Semiannual Report of the Atomic Energy Com-
mission, January 1950. S. Doc. 130, 81st Cong., 2d sess.
X, 228 pp.

The Federal Budget in Brief, Fiscal Year 1951 (July 1,
1950-June 30, 1951) Executive Office of the President,
Bureau of the Budget. S. Doc. 131, 81st Cong., 2d sess.
45 pp.

Survey of EGA in Europe by Senator Pat McCarran.
Report to the Joint Committee on Foreign Economic Co-
operation, S. Doc. 141, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [Pursuant to
sec. 124 of Public Law 472, 80th Cong.] 11, 13 pp.

An Analysis of the ECA Program. Staff Study of the
Joint Committee on Foreign Economic Cooperation . . .
S. Doc. 142, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [Pursuant to sec. 124 of
Public Law 472, 80th Cong.] II, 26 pp.

The Proposed European Payments Union. Submitted
by the Joint Committee on Foreign Economic Coopera-
tion . . . S. Doc. 144, 81st Cong., 2d sess. iii, 11 pp.

Palestine Refugees : Hearings before the Committee on
Foreign Affairs, House of Representatives, 81st Cong.,
2d sess., on S. J. Res. 153, a joint resolution for the
authorization of a contribution by the United States to
the United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestine
Refugees in the Near East ; February 16 and 17, 1950. ill,
75 pp. [Indexed.]

Continuance of Veterans' Administration Office In the
Republic of the Philippines: Hearing before a subcom-
mittee of the Committee of Veterans' Affairs, House of
Representatives, 81st Cong., 2d sess., on H. R. 6632, a bill
to extend the authority of the Administrator of Veterans'
Affairs to establish and continue offices in the Republic of
the Philippines ; February 16, 1950. iii, pp. 1427-1465.

Displaced Persons : Hearings before the subcommittee
on amendments to the Displaced Persons Act of the Com-
mittee on the Judiciary, United States Senate, 81st Cong.,
1st and 2d sess., on Bills to amend the Displaced Persons
Act of 1948 ; March 25, April 8, July 26, 27, August 4, 5, 11,
17, 18, 19, 23, 25, 26, 31, September 1, 9, 16, 28, 30, October
8, 7, 8, 1949; January 3, 5, 19, February 3, 6, 14, 15, 16,
17, 22, 24, March 3, 7, 8, 10, 13, 15, 16, 1950. iv, 1237 pp.
{Continued on page 395)

September 4, 1950

369

Discussion of Korean Case in the Security Council

EXPOSING SOVIET PROPAGANDA TACTICS

Statement hy Ambassador Warren R. Aiostin
U.S. Representative in the Security Coimcil ^

Some of the proceedings of this Council under
the presidency of the Soviet Union representative
must certainly have filled with misgivings the
hearts of people all over the world who believe in
the United Nations and look to it as their best
hope for preventing another world war.

With the eyes of the world upon us, the actions
of the Soviet Union representative in subverting
the presidency of the Security Council have ob-
structed even the commonplace and regular pro-
cedures historically recognized as necessary for
substantive decisions. I will not recount those
actions. I will only observe that there can now
be no doubt who it is amongst us that seeks every
opportunity to frustrate the hopes of peace-loving
people. The statement made to us by the Soviet
Union representative at our last meeting has dis-
pelled all doubt.

There are a few aspects of the recent statements
to this Council by the representative of the Soviet
Union to which I will refer. Before doing so, I
refer to the repeated efforts of the Soviet Union
representative implying that everyone who fails
to agree with him is, ipso facto, a satellite of the
United States. I can understand how difficult it
must be for the distinguished Soviet Union rep-
resentative to comprehend that not all big nations
browbeat all smaller nations whenever and wher-
ever the opportunity arises. It is a natural conclu-
sion to be drawn from a knowledge of Soviet
foreign policy.

Apparently, the Soviet Union representative can
conceive of relationships between nations only in
terms of power, in terms of the stronger dominat-
ing the weaker. Therefore, whenever he sees other
countries support the same principles the United
States supports, he concludes my Government haa
enmeshed them in some brutish stratagem. This

'Made bpfore the Security Council on Aug. 22; printed
here from U.N. doc. S/PV. 4S9 of Aug. 22, 1950.

is a philosophy worthy of some witchdoctor who
has created so many soulless zombies in his own
graveyard that he ends up believing the earth is
peopled entirely by such creatures.

The Soviet Union representative could not be
more mistaken. The earth is peopled by men and
women who believe in individual liberty and na-
tional independence. If the Soviet Union repre-
sentative would brush the scales of an antique
doctrine from his eyes, he could see for himself the
true aspirations of peoples of every race and creed ;
he could understand that men and nations will act
together when the liberties they cherish jointly
were at stake; he could understand that, inside
and outside the United Nations, on every continent,
men will vote together, will act together, and will
make common sacrifice because they firmly adhere
to the great principles on which peace and freedom
must rest.

If the Soviet Union representative understood
these things, we might then have an end to his futile
efforts to make black white, and white black. We
might be spared more of the fantastic version of
events with which the Soviet Union representative
has sought to catch the unwary and confuse the
uninformed.

The most i^ersistent distortion has been the
Soviet Union representative's insistence that a
peaceful settlement of the Korean issue would be
advanced if the representatives of the North Ko-
rean aggressoi'S were to be seated at tliis Council
table. This, in fact, appears to be the major Soviet
Union proposal for "peaceful settlement." It is
like arguing that an assassin should be allowed to
justify his act while still plunging his knife into
the body of his victim. Such a "peaceful" proposal
can lead only to the peace of the graveyard.

We are told we should place the invader, who
has an unbroken record of defiance of the United
Nations, befoi-e us on an equal footing with the

370

Department of State Bulletin

Republic of Korea which was established with the
help of the United Nations and which the General
Assembly has found to be the only lawful govern-
ment in Korea. We art told to invite the male-
factor to this table while he continues to defy our
authority and denounce our decisions.

Tlie coui'se of action proposed by the Soviet
Union representative would place a premium on
aggression. Whether or not that is the Soviet
Union purpose, that woidd be its effect. The
North Koreans are presented to us by the Soviet
Union representative as a party to a dispute.
This, he tells us. is "the fact. This is not a dis-
pute ! Even the Soviet Union representative must
be aware that 53 members of the United Nations
are in agreement that North Korea is an aggres-
sor— and that this is a breach of the peace. There-
fore, we can have no thought of hearing the ag-
gressor so long as he continues his defiance.

The Soviet Union representative has read to
this Council carbon copies of the falsehoods being
spread all over the world by misguided minorities
who support Communist imperialism. Mr. Presi-
dent, it is not necessary to answer each falsehood,
one by one. All one needs is to expose the tricks
of propaganda which are being used here.

Soviet Propaganda Devices

Contempt for the intelligence of men and women
lies behind every propaganda device which is not
based on truth. A number of such devices are
clearly discernible in the recent statements made
to this Council by the Soviet Union representative.
Today, I deal with only three of them : the "false
label" trick, the trick of "concealing guilt by accu-
sation," and finally, the trick now generally known
as the technique of the "Big Lie."

THE "FALSE LABEL" TRICK

Let us consider first the "false label" trick.
Here falsehood is presented as fact. Accordingly,
the propagandist keeps saying, "This is an irref-
utable fact," or begins the falsehood with the
phrase, "as is well-known." Of course, nothing of
the sort is well-known, or the Soviet Union repre-
sentative would not waste the time by repeating
distortions of the record and trying to sell them as
facts.

There is a simple way to expose the "false label"
trick. When the housewife cans her fruits and
vegetables in the fall, she puts a label on each jar
before storing it away. If she puts the label
"peaches" on a jar containing applesauce, the label
does not magically change the contents. One can
quickly test the label by opening the jar and
sampling the real thing inside.

Let us examine the jar placed before the Security
Council by the representative of the Soviet Union.
He said that no United Nations tags or flags sent
by Mr. Lie to General MacArthur could hide the
stark fact of United States aggression. He said
that today. The Soviet Union representative told

the Council, in a speech which he made before this
one:

"After provoking this conflict and seeing that
the political regime of Syngman Rhee was collaps-
ing, the United States resorted to open interven-
tion." Now, here comes the label trick : "Such are
the irrefutable facts, and the United States repre-
sentative is not in a position to deny them."

I am in a position to open that falsely labeled
jar and let the world see what is inside, — apple-
sauce. I welcome the opportunity, in answer, to
give wider circulation to the report of the United
Nations Commission on Korea, contained in its
cablegram of June 26, 1950.

The report said in part :

For the past two years the North Korean regime has
by violently abusive propaganda, by threatening gestures
along the 3Sth parallel and by encouraging and support-
ing subversive activities in the territory of the Republic
of Korea, pursued tactics designed to veeaken and destroy
the Government of the Republic of Korea established
under the auspices of the United Nations Temporary Com-
mission on Korea and recognized by the General Assembly.

Do you know of any more independent, unbiased
witness ?

The message from these official observers of the
United Nations goes on to describe the elections of
May .30, 1950, which were "successfully conducted
in an atmosphere of law and order," with all par-
ties except the underground Communist Party par-
ticipating. The Commission reports:

There have been distinct signs of improvement in recent
months in both economic and political stability of the
country.

The May 30, 1950 elections produced a new Na-
tional Assembly "with some 130 Independents out
of a total of 210 members." That is more than
half. The party which received a majority in 1948
lost its majority to other parties.

It is true that in those states controlled by the
Soviet Union Government, the political party
which directs the police force never loses the elec-
tion. Perhaps that is the difficulty. Perhaps it
is the inability of the Soviet Union representative
to conceive of an election going against the party
which it assumes must control the police. The
president charged in the Security Council today
that American gauleiters and United States mo-
nopolists imposed the Government on South Korea.
But, Mr. President, in the free world any party
may win an election. Perhaps the Soviet Union
representative is also confused by the fact that
the people of Korea were offered a choice of politi-
cal parties for which they might vote. But, Mr.
President, in the free world that does happen.

The secret ballot, cast without fear or intimida-
tion, and counted fairly, gives every man a voice
in his own destiny. Could it be that this is the
thought the Soviet Union representative has in
mind when he refers, as he so often does, to the
"ruling circles" of the United States? There are
ruling circles in the United States, different from

Sepf ember 4, 1950

371

those to which the president refers. There is a
total, according to the last census, of oven 150 mil-
lion "ruling circles." I fear, however, that in the
Soviet Union there is but one "ruling circle." If
the day should arrive that the people of the Soviet
Union are free to vote for more than one party,
we might be able to refer to the "ruling circles" of
the Soviet Union. If that day should arrive, we
might be able to say that the Soviet Union had
made a striking advance toward the democracy
already achieved within the Republic of Korea.

The facts, far from showing the collapse of the
political regime in the Republic of Korea, demon-
strate the opposite. In spite of the tactics of the
Communists to weaken and destroy the Republic
from within, the new Republic, by democratic
methods, strengthened itself in the election of
May 30, 1950. The obvious conclusion is that
when the'North Korean regime found it could not
take the Republic from within, it launched its ag-
gression to take it by force of arms from without.
The United Nations acted with dispatch and
unity. The United States supported that United
Nations action. The old "label trick" did not
work. Not even the label devised here today by
the president can stick. The labels it "a colossal
international bluff." Events daily expose this
type of trick.

Another declaration boldly labeled as a "fact"
is the Soviet Union claim here that the North
Koreans have only the armaments sold to them by
the Soviet Union Government when the Red Army
withdrew. This so-called "fact" should be tested
against such evidence as the plainly labeled Soviet
shell marked "1950" which United Nations forces
have uncovered. This shell did not explode on the
battlefield. It exploded in the Security Council.
I think we might properly call it a misguided mis-
sile. Of course, I recognize that this may be just
another case of false Soviet labeling.

CONCEALING GUILT THROUGH ACCUSATION

Now let us consider the trick of concealing guilt
through accusation. The classic example of this
trick, of course, is that of the thief who, in running
away from the policeman, cries, "Stop thief !" at
the honest man ahead of him in order to confuse
the pursuers. This is the type of trick that has
been employed in an effort to prove that the North
Korean invaders merely have been defending
themselves from an attack by the Republic of
Korea.

In using this technique, the Soviet Union repre-
sentative forgets that the record of every aggres-
sor in recent times is fresh in people's minds. Let
us cite only two examples from the record of the
master aggressor.

Hitler, on September 1, 1939, having concluded
his pact of friendsliip with the Soviet Union
and a secret protocol agreeing to the division of
Poland witli the Soviet Union, declared that "the
Polish State has rejected a peaceful solution of

the problem of neighbourly relations with Ger-
many," and that "force must be met by force."
"The battle," declared Hitler, "will be fought in
defense of German territory and honour." J

The Nazi dictator employed the same old thief- \
calling "stop thief" technique when he launched
his dastardly attack on the Soviet Union in 1941.
On June 22, 1941, in justifying the Nazi march
against the Soviet Union, Hitler said :

During the night of June 17, to June 18, Russian patrols
again penetrated into the Reich's territory and could only
be driven bacli by prolonged firing. This has brought us to
the hour when it is necessary for us to take steps against
this plot devised by the Jevpish Anglo-Saxon warmongers
and equally the Jewish rulers of tlie Bolshevist centre in
Moscow.

The Hitler deception did not succeed. Aggres-
sion was crushed, and the weapons we produced
as part of our contribution were toasted by Gen-
eralissimo Stalin at Tehran as necessary to the
victory of the Soviet Union against the Hitlerite
aggressors.

This same trick of covering one's own guilt by
accusing others of the crime is employed in the
recurring statement that the fight in Korea is noth-
ing but an extension of American imperialism.
For example, the Soviet Union representative told
us the other day that "United States ruling circles
are now attempting to pervert the whole of the
United Nations into a weapon for the defence of
American capital investments." We have heard
him repeat that charge in other language today.
Indeed, he says that we have draped the flag of the
United Nations over the United States in order
to hide the aggression by the United States.

The representative of China on last Thursday
expounded the nature of Soviet imperialism in
Asia as it is today. It is the revival and extension
of ancient Czarist imperialism which has devel-
oped human exploitation to the high degree repre-
sented in the systematic looting of Manchuria and
the absorption of Outer Mongolia.

What are the facts concerning Korea? Of
course, we have never been permitted to obtain
knowledge of the economic relationship between
the North Korean "zombie" regime and the Soviet
Union. Therefore, we are left to ask, what are
the diabolical American investments which they
say the "ruling circles" of the United States are
protecting ? Who are the monopolists about which
Mr. Malik makes the accusation today — an accusa-
tion made for a purpose.

It is true that Americans for decades have been
making "investments" in Korea. These invest-
ments are of a very special kind. They are invest-
ments in churches, schools, hospitals, and clinics.
They are investments in the uplifting of the Ko-
rean people, ministering to the hungry, the sick
and the heavy-laden. Missionaries, teachers, doc-
tors, and nurses are the "monopolists" and "ruling
circles" you are talking about, sir.

Aside from these investments of mercy, let us

372

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

SCO what the facts are concerning tliose to which
^oll referred today by name, Mr. President.

(lilbert Associates, which the president men-
tioned, is in Korea to conduct an electric power
survey designed to increase the amount of electric
power available to the people of Korea. It is not
a construction concern. Its primary purpose is to
help South Korea replace the electric power which
formerly came from North Korea but which was
cut off arbitrarily by the Soviet Union occupation
forces. In 1948, at the time of the elections, the
Soviet Union occupation forces in North Korea
sought to terrorize the people in the South by put-
ting obstructions in the way of sale of electric
power to the South. The refusal to sell power to
the Republic, initiated by the Soviet authorities
has been continued by the Northern "zombie"
regime. Gilbert Associates performed a service
for which it received a fee. That is as sinister
as that operation has ever been.

Let us look at the Tungsten Associates to which
the representative of the Soviet Union referred.
It is owned by the Republic of Korea. It sells
tungsten to all buyers including buyers from coun-
tries other than the United States. That is the
truth in that case.

The Korean Oil Storage Company is a ware-
house on distribution operation. It is not a "mo-
nopoly." Competitive opportunities are unre-
stricted. The learned "ruling circle" of the Soviet
Union can use this as one of its biggest lies.

At Kimpo Airfield a concern named Borne As-
sociates has been employed to reconstruct the field
for the benefit of the Koreans. It owned no part
of the field at the time of the invasion. It was
temporarily operating the tower of the field and
performing other services at the request of the
Korean authorities.

The criterion of any investment is whether or
not it produces profits, is it not? Can the repre-
sentative of the Soviet Union prove that any of
the operations he mentioned has ever resulted in
dollar remittances out of Korea? He can not.
The United States has put millions of dollars into
Korea for the assistance of the people of Korea.
That, Mr. President, is the fact.

Here is one final example of the technique of
accusing the innocent in order to conceal guilt.

One-fourth of a recent speech by the represent-
ative of the Soviet Union was devoted to efforts
to discredit the objective testimony of the United
Nations Commission on Korea. He asserted that
the "composition of the Commission is in no way
a guarantee of its objectivity" and referred to
"fabricated reports of the Commission dictated by
MacArthur." This is an insult to the seven
nations represented on this Commission, namely,
Australia, China, El Salvador, France, India, the
Philippines, and Turkey, and to the majority of
the General Assembly which established and is
supporting that Commission, and which still sup-
ports that Commission.

September 4, 1950

The representative of the Soviet Union rejects
the unanimous judgment of these seven men from
these seven countries, based on on-the-spot ob-
servations, that North Koreans launched an un-
provoked attack. If you do not accept the word
of the United Nations Commission, whose word
can you take? The Soviet Union wants us to
take their word on who started it — but they claim
they were not even there.

TECHNIQUE OF THE "BIG LIE"

I come now to the propaganda trick with which
the world has had the saddest experience within
the past 15 years. It is commonly known as the
technique of the "Big Lie."

Hitler spread the theory that if a propagandist
will not tire of repeating an assertion, no matter
how preposterous, he can make it stick in many
minds. That is easier to do if no one is allowed
to contradict the propagandist and confront him
with facts. But here in the United Nations we
can confront him with facts.

In his speech at the last meeting of this Council,
the representative of the Soviet Union referred
several times to "the aggression of which the
United States is guilty against the Korean people."
This statement has been repeated over and over
through every Soviet-inspired channel on earth.
We have had it telegraphed to us by others, and
we have heard it again today. It is a lie. It is a
"Big Lie."

Today Mr. Malik asked : What was Mr. Austin
proposing? And he answered his own question.
First, he said, the representative of the United
States was proposing a continuation of the war
and increasing the scope of aggression; and sec-
ond, a return to the General Assembly resolutions
on Korea. The representative of the United
States, he said, would like to pass those resolutions
which would mean a return to the Sygman Rhee
regime. This also meant that not only South
Korea but the whole of Korea was to become an
American colony, under American monopolists
and American gauleiters.

This is a beautiful example of the "Big Lie."

Only in the weird world of Soviet propaganda
is there any doubt concerning the origin of the
aggression in Korea. The aggressor is the regime
established in Pyongyang when the Soviet Union
was in military occupation of North Korea. The
aggressor is the North Korean regime which was
established in direct defiance of the United Na-
tions and which has continued to defy both the
Security Council and the General Assembly.

United States forces did not start the aggres-
sion in Korea. United States forces came to
Korea only in support of Security Council action
to repel North Korean aggression. To call the
action of those governments who are seeking to
support the resolutions of the Security Council an
act of aggression, is a falsehood so grotesque that

373

even the technique of the "Big Lie" cannot dis-
guise it.

These, Mr. President, are the facts.

The Security Council acted on Sunday, June 25,
calling for immediate cessation of liostilities and
withdrawal of the North Korean forces forthwith.
That same resolution, adopted by 9 votes to 0,
called upon "all members to render every assistance
to the United Nations in the execution of this res-
olution and to refrain from giving assistance to
the North Korean authorities. Let us not forget
that last phrase in the resolution, "to refrain from
giving assistance to the North Korean authorities."

If the North Korean authorities had obeyed that
order within the next 24 hours, there would have
been no need for the Security Council resolution
of June 27, nor would police action in support of
the United Nations have been required. The Se-
curity Council's order is still being defied by the
Nortii Korean regime and by those who support it.
No tricks of repetition can cover up that big truth.

This attempt to turn black into white by saying
black is white can be exposed by two simple ques-
tions.

Did the Soviet Union bring to the Security
Council on June 25, a complaint that the United
States had made an armed attack on North Korea ?

Did the Soviet Union bring to the Security
Council a complaint that the Republic of Korea
had invaded North Korea?

No. The ruling circle at Moscow had ample
time in which to do that. Their failure is con-
sistent only with the fact that the aggressor was
the North Koreans.

We have heard many declarations from the rep-
resentative of the Soviet Union to the effect that

the Soviet Union desires a peaceful settlement in
Korea. No doubt we will hear more such declara-
tions. Unfortunately, our experience to date
causes us to treat this statement with reserve until
we find evidence that the Soviet Union will act
for peace as well as talk for peace.

My country is sacrificing the lives of many of
its young men in order to bring I'eal peace to
Korea. Other members of the United Nations
are making or are preparing to make similar sacri-
fices. We, therefore, have urgent reason for tak-
ing action, compatible with United Nations ob-
jectives, to attain peace in Korea.

The representative of the Soviet Union spoke
to us on Thursday of the influence of his Govern-
ment and how able it is to exert influence in inter-
national affaire. Why not let us see that influence
employed in the cause of peace ? We know that if
the Soviet Union Government wanted the fighting
stopped in Korea, it could be stopped today.
Tlierefore, I hope the Soviet Union representative
will understand if there is disgust at his apparent
disposition to regard peace only as an item of
conversation.

My Government is working for peace, sacri-
ficing for peace. So are 52 other membei-s of the
United Nations. Our words are backed up by
deeds.

Mr. President, I think I need say no more today
concerning the propaganda tricks employed by
the representative of the Soviet Union.

The real task before us is to dispose of propa-
ganda tricks, to stop dodging the real issues of
the Korean conflict, and to carry forward with
the central issue of restoring peace and security
to the area. This requires the regular order.

Ambassador Jessup Answers Questions on Korea ^

SEVAREID : Some of the letters I get these days, Mr.
Jessup, ask why we are fighting in somebody else's war.
How would you answer those letters?

Jessup: We are not fighting somebody else's
war, Mr. Sevareid. We are in Korea as part of
a United Nations effort. And we are there for
the sake of our own peace and security.

When 59 nations signed the United Nations
Charter, they pledged that they would not use
force in settling international problems and that
they would rally to the defense of free nations
when aggression was committed. When the North

' A radio interview by Eric Sevareid, CBS commentator,
on Aug. 27, which was released to the press on the same
date.

Korean armies invaded the Republic of Korea,
there was no question that an act of brutal aggres-
sion had been committed. There was also no ques-
tion about who started it. A United Nations com-|
mission was on the spot in Korea, and its reports
proved beyond a doubt that the North Koreans
were the aggressors.

When the Security Council of the United Na-j
tions acted, it was to request a cease-fire order anc
to ask member governments to rally to the defense
of the hard-pressed Republic of Korea under their
obligations in the United Nations Charter. If
aggression had been permitted to go on in Korea,
uncensured, undeterred, despite tlie clear reports
of the United Nations' own commission in the field,
the result would have been that the nations of the

374

Department of Stale Bulletin

world — by demonstration — would have shown
they were not prepared to resist aggression, that
they were not prepared to maintain the peace.
Snch failure to act would have been an encourage-
ment to potential aggressors elsewhere.

SEVAREID: One of the questions that is asked is
whether our policies in Korea up to the time of the inva-
sion had been a failure, and whether in fact the invasion
came as a result of that failure?

Jessup: On the contrary, I believe that any
fair-minded person, looking at what we had accom-
plished in Korea, in the face of tremendous diffi-
culties, would agree that the results of our policy
there were good.

When it became clear that the Soviet Union
would not cooperate in allowing the Korean people
to set up a free and united government of their
own, we took the case to the United Nations. As
a result, free and democratic elections were held
under the supervision of the United Nations every-
where in Korea except in that part which was
under the control of the Soviet Union. On the
basis of these elections, the Republic of Korea was
established. Without this action of the United
Nations, the whole of Korea would still have been
occupied territory, held in the control of two
powers.

In the Republic of Korea, under a democratic
constitution, the people of Korea worked diligently
during the 2 years from 1948 to 1950 to improve
their well-being. They were making marked
strides in the development of democratic practices,
in increasing education, literacy, and a higher
standard of living.

Meanwhile, the Soviet Union was suppressing
the national aspirations of the Korean people in
its zone of occupation, where it was creating, be-
hind the iron curtain, a regime totally subservient
to the whims and designs of Soviet policy.

By subversion and guerrilla activity, agents
from the north sougiit to overthrow the Republic
of Korea from within, and failed.

Finally, the contrast between the progress in
the Republic of Korea and the imperialistic domi-
nation of the North Koreans brought the open and
naked use of military force. This act of aggres-
sion was intended to wipe out the example of
democracy next door.

SEVAREID : In view of the threat from the north, why
had we not prepared the Republic of Korea to defend
itself against such an act of aggression ?

Jesstjp: We knew it was a danger spot — one
among many in the world today. Within the
limits of our capabilities and our commitments in
various parts of the world, we were earnestly try-
ing to provide the Republic of Korea with the
means for its own defense.

From the end of the war, more than 500 million
dollars worth of military and economic aid was
given the Republic of Korea. With this aid, the
Republic of Korea was able to deal with its eco-
nomic problems, and to deal successfully with

repeated efforts at subversion and infiltration from
the north. To meet successfully and at once an
attack of the magnitude which has been launched,
however, would have required the constant pres-
ence of a large force of American troops. To
nuiintain such superior forces in all the places in
the world that might be subject to such attack
would have required vast total forces on our part.
No one in this country has seriously advocated
that we should maintain enough forces to police
the entire world.

U. N. Effort

SEVAREID : A moment ago, you said that this was
a United Nations affair. A lot of people, to judge by the
letters I receive, are wondering whether the other mem-
bers of the United Nations are doing their share?

Jessup : It is true that in the initial stages of
the fighting, American and South Korean forces
have played a predominant role. It is quite pos-
sible that if this action had taken place in some
other part of the world, the forces of other mem-
bers of the United Nations might have had to bear
the initial brunt. We had some forces nearby that
could be put into action relatively quickly. This
was also true of British and Australian naval and
air forces, which, as you know, have been in it
since the early weeks.

But despite the problems of distance and logis-
tics, other nations are getting aid on the way. The
United Kingdom has had troops fighting against
the international Communist movement in Malaya
for years, but despite this, they are sending ground
forces to Korea. I cannot possibly list here all
those who are helping, but offers have been re-
ceived from 30 nations and these offers are under
consideration or have been accepted.

SEVAREID : When the tide of battle turns in Korea,
when we push back the aggressors, what is our military
objective? Is it to bring about surrender of the aggressor
forces — to occupy all of Korea — north and south — or to
stop at the 3Sth parallel?

Jessup: The action against aggression in
Korea is a United Nations action. The answer to
your question is a United Nations answer, not just
an American answer. The General Assembly laid
down principles for the future of Korea. We are
acting in a unified command. Neither in future
movements by that command nor in final settle-
ment will we act unilaterally.

We must remember that this is primarily a
problem of the future of the Korean people, and
the objective of United Nations action from the
beginning has been to create a situation in which
they could freely decide their own form of gov-
ernment. The United States aim is to support the
United Nations in that objective.

Decisions on future military steps will be made
to meet the circumstances as they develop.

SEVAREID: And what about final settlement of the
Korean problem? Will it end as two armed camps? Will
two governments exist as before June 25th? Will there
be a United Korea?

September 4, 1950

375

Jessup : This action is again a matter requir-
ing a United Nations decision. In the Cairo dec-
laration, we pledged that we would support the
principle of a free and independent Korea. The
Soviet Union subsequently accepted this principle
as binding on itself as well. By its action, how-
ever, it has prevented the fulfillment of that
promise except in that part of Korea where the
United Nations was able to operate. The United
Nations has, in several resolutions, declared its
support of the establishment of a free, inde-
pendent, and unified Korea. I am sure that will
remain its aim as it is ours.

SEVAREID: To return to the position of the United
States in all this : Does the action taken by us in Korea
bring us closer to a general war?

Jessup : On the contrary. The act of aggres-
sion against the Eepublic of Korea may have had
the effect of heightening international tension, but

1 think the firm and prompt response of the United
Nations, with wholehearted United States support,
will help to put a damper on potential further
aggression. As history has shown, if an aggressor
is bent on making an attack, he can seize any ex-
cuse for it he wants. But the attitude of free
countries, their solidarity, their determination, and
their ability to resist aggression can deter an
aggressor from launching an attack.

Strength of Free Forces

SEVAREID : With the Korean battle going on, with our
troops fighting in Asia and holding only a beachhead, can
it be claimed that the forces of freedom are in better
posture than before the Korean invasion?

Jesstjp: Consider the United Nations once
again. People had gotten into the habit of think-
ing that the United Nations was just a body that
talked. People came to feel that their hopes that
the United Nations could rally to resist aggression
were false hopes — that such action just could not
happen. But it did happen. And the action taken

2 months ago is a milestone — all-out action of a
kind never taken by the League of Nations or any
other international body.

This action has awakened the free world to the
strength that lies in united effort and given it
higher faith in the United Nations.

As to your reference to our troops fighting in
Asia, the Russians portray it as Americans fight-
ing Asians. But our troops as all of us know are
fighting for Koreans side by side with Koreans.
Some of the United Nations forces in the field now
have fully integrated units of Korean and United
States fighting men. Contingents soon to join
them include Asians from the Philippines and
Thailand.

The advantage of initiative in the fighting so
far lias lain with the aggressor, as it always does
at the outset. You will recall the Kaiser in Bel-
gium, Hitler when he attacked Poland, the Japa-
nese in the early stages of the Pacific war. It is an
old story — lightning attack on a peaceful world.

The striking thing in Korea has been the valiant
delaying action of the defending troops. With
the continuing response by other members of the
United Nations, the t^de of battle will soon turn.

SEVAREID: What is the feeling in Asia? I would
take as a note of despair for our cause the phrase heard
frequently lately : "We have lost all Asia."

Jessup : So far as Asia is concerned, it is true
that the voice of Kremlin propaganda is the only
voice which is saying: "All Asia is lost." It is
not believed where people can know the truth
through access to the facts.

All over Asia, the spirit of national independ-
ence is alive. Now, the Soviet Union tries to play
on that feeling, and use it for her own imperialist
purposes. Soviet theory as announced by Stalin
himself provides for a two-stage operation in deal-
ing with movements like these. The first stage
involves getting control of the nationalist move-
ment. The second stage results in making the
new country subservient to the Kremlin. We
have but one aim in our dealings with the people
of Asia — and that is to give genuine help to the
nationalist movement.

When I traveled in Asia early this year, I found
that many of the people of Asia who have access
to other information than Kremlin propaganda
know this and know that the United States has
no territorial ambitions and no desire for gain in
Asia.

Facts Concerning Formosa

SEVAREID: In respect to Formosa — concerning that
area, we have taken our own action without United Nations
backing.

Jessup : I think it is important to get the facts
clear about the Formosan situation. It is true that
the United Nations Security Council resolutions
about Korea did not cover the situation in For-
mosa. However, the order of the President on
June 27, directing the Seventh Fleet to prevent
any attack on Formosa, was directly connected
with the aggression against the Republic of Korea.

The President pointed out, and I quote what he
said.

The attack upon Korea makes it plain beyond
all doubt that communism has passed beyond the
use of subversion to conquer independent nations,
and will now use armed invasion and war. . . .
In these circumstances the occupation of Formosa
by Communist forces would be a direct threat to
the security of the Pacific area and to United
States forces performing their logical and neces-
sary functions in that area.

The President instructed Ambassador Austin,
our representative at the United Nations, to report
this action immediately to the Security Council,
and he did so on that same day. If the command
to the Seventh Fleet had been an act of aggression,
we would hardly have reported it immediately to
the Security Council.

376

Department of State Bulletin

On July 19, the President in his message to Con-
gress again exphiined our action regarding For-
mosa and explicitly said that we had no territorial
ambitions whatever concerning that island, and wo
did not seek for ourselves any special privileges
on Formosa. He said that the military neutraliza-
tion of Formosa was '"without prejudice to political
questions affecting that islancl." He said further
that we wanted to have all questions affecting For-
mosa settled by pacific means as envisaged in the
Charter of the United Nations.

Two days ago, the Chinese Communists sent a
message to the Security Council accusing us of
aggression on Formosa and demanded that the
Security Council take action. Ambassador Austin
immediately made an official statement saying that
we would welcome United Nations consideration
of the Formosan question. We said that we would
approve full United Nations investigation either
at Lake Success or on Formosa itself and that we
would assist the United Nations in any considera-
tion it decided to give to this problem.

In short, what we have done about Formosa has
been done in the open and has been laid fully
before the United Nations.

SEVAREID : What about sacrifices which you and I —
which Americans must make in this time of world emer-
gency?

Jessup : It is important to understand that sac-
rifices whicli must be made by us are not solely a
result of Korea. Korea brings the question dra-
matically to our attention, but what has happened
is merely a symptom of the evil at large in the
■world. Even if Korea could be settled tomorrow,
the people of the United States must still be ready
for sacrifice.

Dictatorship today uses slave labor and a police
state to build and maintain force with which to
strike at peace-loving states. The great challenge
put to us by this evil force is to show that democra-
cies can by self -discipline build up and maintain
strength and security without sacrificing the things
we consider of greatest importance, our basic dem-
ocratic principles.

Clearly we are going to have to make economic
and military sacrifices — very considerable ones
perhaps — to make sure that we can go on living
in a free and peaceful world. But those are not
the only calls that will be made on us. As a people
we are going to have to be firm, patient, and
steady. We are going to have to forego the hope
of easy answers, of quick, simple solutions.

There is no push-button diplomacy any more
than there is push-button war in Korea. And
there are GI's in diplomacy just as there are in
the Army. There is much f ootslogging to do. And
it is not just a matter of decisions by the brass hats
in the high command.

SEVAREID: How long will the emergency go on?
How long must we — an impatient people — put up with the
strain of a cold war?

September 4, 1950

903258—50 3

Jessup : No one can say for how long we must
be prepared for the difficult task of accepting our
world as a troubled world. It would be a lot
easier, I admit, if someone could promise: "In 3
months, or 3 years, or 10 years our problems would
be solved." But no one can surely say.

However long the period, it is worth the saci'i-
fice. The sacrifices in Korea are very real ones, but
they are as nothing compared with the sacrifices
which would come with general war.

SEVAREID : Korea is where the figliting is now, but
there are potential trouble spots in many areas of the
world. What of them? Are not there definite limits to
what we can do if the fire should break out in other
quarters?

Jessup: If we wanted an absolute guaranty
against the march of aggressors anywhere, we
would have to have vast armies around the world.
I agree we cannot do that. Instead, we must work
constantly with other nations to build our collec-
tive strength, and we must rely on our allies as
well as on ourselves. As events in Korea have
proved, we seem to be on the way to finding means
for making international organization effective as
a collective way to keep the peace.

SEVAREID : Can that be true even if the Kremlin does
not share this view?

Jessup : Yes, it can. Peace and freedom have
made great gains in some very important areas
of the world despite the Soviet attitude. Perhaps
the most important gain has been the united re-
sponse of the free world to the act of aggression in
Korea. We had hoped to build peace tlirough
international cooperation including the coopera-
tion of the Soviet Union. Since, however, the So-
viet Union has not seemed to want to cooperate
in building a peaceful world, we are now seeking
to achieve peace by strengthening the free world
so that we can prevent aggression. In the mean-
time, we have no fear that we shall come to a place
where every avenue of diplomacy has been ex-
hausted. Diplomacy has given us great new in-
struments that we have only begun to test. We
have new ways of concerting and multiplying our
strength, new ways of informing the minds of
men — new ways of attacking economic and social
sources of international conflict.

For it is not just a military challenge that we
face. The basic objective of our foreign policy is
to help create the kind of a world in which people
can live their lives in peace. Tlie existence of
poverty, illiteracy, disease, hunger — these things
are the breeders of unrest on which promoters of
dissatisfaction play. And so it is important that
we sujDport measures for international economic
and political cooperation along with our great
defense effort. These measures are not only re-
quired to meet the Soviet challenge but are basic to
our long-run objectives.

SEVAREID : It used to be said that we were so con-
cerned with the problem of Europe that we were neglecting
Asia. Is the situation now such that we are so concerned
with Asia that we are neglecting Europe?

377

Jesstjp: I cannot agree with the first part of
your question which as I have heard it stated
before suggests that the Marshall Plan and the
North Atlantic Treaty were not justified. Some
people carry the idea further and say we should
have had exactly the same programs for the Far
East. Plans and progi-ams which fit the needs and
the opportunities of one area are not always suited
to another. Of course, we have vital interest in
Europe and that interest is as great today as it
was before Korea. I do not say it is greater than
it was, but I do think the general awareness of its
importance has increased.

A few minutes ago, I suggested that diplomacy
or foreign policy is not all a matter of push-button
decisions. It is also not all headline stuff. There
are quiet, long-range, steady activities which are
going on constantly around the globe. Coming
back directly to the European question, there is a
new spirit abroad there. The growth of that spirit
is directly related to what we have done to help.
The signs of that spirit include these headline
events :

The courageous Schuman Plan to bring Ger-
many and France together in the economic field;
the steady increase in the importance and author-
ity of international bodies such as the North
Atlantic Treaty and the Council of Europe; the
increase in economic prosperity and the decline of
the Communist parties; the new determination
and decisions to move forward rapidly with the
essential measures of defense.

Is War Inevitable?

SEVAREID : A question which seems to be in the
minds of many people these days is: Is war inevitable?
And some go on to say that if war does seem inevitable,
should not we settle the whole thing right now by dropping
atomic bombs on Moscow?

Jesstjp : War is never inevitable. Let us keep
that fact constantly before us. The threat of war
is a serious one. There is no doubt about that.
But if we and our allies make ourselves strong, so
that there will not be any temptation for aggres-
sion, and if we are steady and determined, we may
be able to maintain the peace.

By thinking that war is inevitable, however, we
will help to make it so. People who are defeatist
about war are taking an easy way out, in their
minds. And it is a disastrous way of thinking.
Responsible and mature citizens realize, I am sure,
that the destruction of war is so catastrophic, that
no stone must be left unturned in the effort to
maintain our security and our highest values by
peaceful means. It is my faith, and the convic-
tion of our Government, that this can be done, if
the free men of the world are determined to do it.

SEVAREID : That answers, then, the second part of
the question too — about the dropping of atomic bombs on
the Soviet Union now.

Jessup : I think it does, since war is not, in my
belief, by any means inevitable. Dropping atomic
bombs on the Soviet Union now is not the way we
act ; it is not the way America does things. But I
do not see how anyone can believe that, even if our
conscience permitted us to precipitate a war by
dropping atomic bombs now, we would be any
better on than we are. Such an action would not
only not solve any problems, it would also create
many new and terribly difficult problems. Even
if such an action were to be successful in knocking
out the Soviet Union, it would leave occupation
and reconstruction problems of such complexity
as to make our present postwar problems look like
child's play. And we would have sacrificed the
respect and support of other nations. I do not
believe this view can be seriously entertained by
anyone who has given it thorough consideration.

SEVAREID : There is time for a closing thought from
you.

Jessup : America is facing the most dangerous
period in its history. It is of utmost importance
that Americans see clearly who and what are re-
sponsible for the dangers we face. Above all, the
force of world communism and its leaders — the
men in the Kremlin — are responsible. They are
the culprits.

When the interests of democratic nations clash
with those of dictatorship, the dictator has what
can be a strong advantage. He makes unilateral
decisions. There is only one line, one authority,
one national opinion in the Soviet Union. In pre-
serving the very things we stand for, we in the
United States must pursue a course which does not
permit unity by decree. But when the American
people face a fundamental challenge to their lib-
erty, they pull together. Not at this point can
we afford to be divided, to waste our energies in
the recriminations among ourselves. If we are to
win over the forces of slavery which are on the
march today, we must be one nation indivisible!

Death of Colonel Unni Nayar in Korea

The Department of State announced on August
14 that it had learned with deepest regret of the
death in Korea of Colonel Unni Nayar, who had
recently left Washington to serve the United Na-
tions as India's alternate delegate on the Korean
Commission. Colonel Nayar was a brilliant and
indefatigable worker in the important task of in-
creasing understanding between India and the
United States.

He was thoroughly admired and respected by an
unusually wide circle of friends in press and radio
work and in the Government who extend their sym-
pathy to his family, to his colleagues in the Embassy
of India, and to the Government of India in their
tragic loss.

Editor's Note : Colonel Nayar was killed when
his jeep hit a land mine.

378

Departmenf of Sfafe Bulletin

President Truman Urges Senate Approval

of Genocide Convention in View of Korean Crisis

[Released to the press by the White House August 26]

The President today sent the following letter to Senator
Tom Connolly, Chairman, Committee on Foreign Rela-
tions, United States Senate.

My dear Senator Connally : Ambassador Aus-
tin, the United States representative to the United
Nations, has transmitted to me a note from the
Ambassador to the Republic of Korea with re-
spect to the Convention on the Prevention and
Punishment of Genocide. I enclose a copy of this
note for your information. As you will see, the
note points out that this convention is a very im-
portant instrument since it brings under the pro-
tection of international law both small nations
and religious groups. The Ambassador of Korea
calls attention to the imminent danger to the
Christian population of Korea from the Commu-
nist invaders.

This tragic situation brings out the need for
the free and civilized nations of the world to co-
operate in outlawing this shocking crime of de-
liberate extermination of entire national, ethnical,
racial or religious groups. Genocide has not oc-
curred in the United States, and I cannot believe
that it would ever occur here. But in other parts
of the world various national and religious groups
still face this threat. These unfortunate people
need whatever help can be given them by the more
fortunate nations of the world. In ratifying the
Genocide Convention, we will let the world know
that the United States does not condone mass
atrocities any more now than in the past, and we
will indorse the principle that such conduct is
criminal under international law. This action by
the United States will at least be a deterrent to
the rulers of certain countries who consider geno-
cide a justifiable means to promote their political
objectives. I also regard speedy ratification of
the Genocide Convention as essential to the effec-
tive maintenance of our leadership of the free and
civilized nations of the world in the present
struggle against the forces of aggression and
barbarism.

In view of your own distinguished service in the
establishment and subsequent operations of the
United Nations, I know that you particularly ap-

preciate the importance of our maintaining our
prestige in that organization. I sincerely hope
that the Senate Foreign Relations Committee will
report favorably on the Genocide Convention
within the next few days, and that the Senate will
also take favorable action, and that the United
States may become a party to the Genocide Con-
vention before the next session of the General
Assembly of the United Nations.
Very sincerely yours,

Harry S. Truman

Following is a copy of the note from the Korean Am-
bassador to Ambassador Austin.

July 31, 1950

Excellency : According to the resolution of the
General Assembly of the United Nations on De-
cember 3, 1949, the Republic of Korea was invited
to adhere to the Genocide Convention. At the
very time when the Government of Korea was
about to ratify the Convention, my country was
overrun by the north Korean invaders. Being
prevented temporarily from joining with other
nations of the world in this great humanitarian
endeavor because of the disaster which befell my
people and my country, I wish to make a modest
contribution to this great cause by bringing to the
attention of your Government a new international
need for the Genocide Convention which arises out
of the sufferings of my people.

There is imminent danger that the invaders will
commit genocide in Communist-controlled Korea
on the Christian population, which amounts to
some 700,000 persons, of which 400,000 are Protes-
tants and about 300,000 are Catholics. By impli-
cation, the Christians are considered by the Com-
munists as opposed to the rule of Moscow.
Moreover, the Christians have provided many men
who have played an important part in Korean
national life. You will be interested to know that
the President of my country. His Excellency Dr.
Syngman Rhee, is of the Protestant faith and the
signer of this letter a Roman Catholic.

The invaders obviously cannot exterminate the

September 4, 1950

379

entire Korean nation, but they certainly will try,
and are already trying to destroy the Korean peo-
ple in part by liquidating those who provide na-
tional, cultural and religious leadership and who
lend to the nation forces of cohesion. Since these
practices are covered exactly by ai'ticle two of the
Genocide Convention, the Convention becomes a
very important instrument of international law
for the protection of a part of the Korean people.
Let me assure Your Excellency that my Govern-
ment appreciates the great contributions made by
your Delegation in adopting the Convention. In
particular, it shares the views expressed by your
Delegation at many of the United Nations meet-
ings, on the importance of the Genocide Conven-
tion which introduces for the first time the concept
of nationSj races, and religious groups as objects
of protection by international criminal law. It
also meets the challenge of contemporary delib-

erate attempts to build empires on the ruins of
small nations and to construct a barbaric godless
society by extirpating religious groups.

Therefore, this being a necessary and urgent
law, and my people being in grave danger, I take
the liberty of appealing to your Government,
through your good offices, for the early ratifica-
tion of the Genocide Convention. Ratification
before the opening of, or during the first month of,
the next General Assembly of the United Nations
would greatly accelerate its enactment as law. If
your Government will generously agree to take my
appeal under its usual generous consideration, my
people will have the great moral and historic satis-
faction of knowing that their sufferings in this
crucial hour have not been in vain.

Accept [etc.]

John M. Chang

A7nbassador

The Threat of Communist Imperialism

iy John C. Ross

U.S. Deputy Representative in the Security Council ^

Can there be any doubt that the armed attack
upon the Republic of Korea is part of a Soviet
Communist plan of world domination?

The significance of the aggression upon the Re-
public of Korea lies in the fact that the Communist
masters of the North Korean puppets revealed by
the attack their willingness to resort to armed
force — directly contrary to obligations assumed in
the United Nations Charter — to achieve imperial-
istic aims of world domination.

This was a rude shock — a rough awakening.

Wliile the Soviet Union may not seem ready at
the moment to engage its own armed forces for
aggressive purposes, yet the armed attack upon the
Republic of Korea shows that international com-
munism is prepared to risk the holocaust by en-
gaging the armed forces of Communist puppets,
equipped with weapons of Russian manufacture,
for aggression against a neighbor. We are here
confronted with a new method which does not fit
into the familiar pattern.

The Catalogue

The familiar pattern of Soviet communism had
become well-known long before the invasion of
Korea. The catalogue includes :

' Excerpts from an address made before a convention of
Hadassah on Aug. 23 and released to the press by the U.S.
Mission to the U.N. on the same date.

I. Abroad

A. Direct seizure of foreign territory by force
of arms — aggi'ession in its crudest sense, as in the
case of the war on Finland.

B. Indirect seizure assisted by the presence and
direct intervention of Soviet armed forces, as in
the case of Rumania, Hungary, Bulgaria, and
Baltic States.

C. Indirect seizure accompanied by subversion
and guerrilla action from within and crass efforts
at intimidation from without. Such tactics suc-
ceeded in Czechoslovakia but have failed in Greece,
Turkey, and Iran.

D. Attempts to penetrate and destroy demo-
cratic governments and democratic institutions
like labor unions in the free nations.

E. The technique of the "big lie" originated by
Hitler and exploited by the propaganda agencies
of Soviet communism and even oy representa-
tives of the Soviet Union to the United Nations,
particularly since August 1.

II. At Home

A. The degradation of the individual and the
elimination of basic human freedoms; the denial
of the right of emigration.

B. The contorteci and paralytic discipline of
thought-control imposed upon science, literature,
art, and music.

C. Brutal mass deportations of minority
groups ; discrimination and open attacks in official

380

Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bulletin

iniblications against Jewish writers, described
oupluMuistically as "liomeless cosmopolitans."

D. Persecution of tlie religions of all faiths.

E. The abjuration of God and the deification of
man, machine, and materialism.

That is the catalogue — that is the pattern of
Soviet conmiunism.

Free World Appeal

The disquieting thing about the behavior of the
Soviet Union, outside as well as inside the United
Nations, is that the Soviet Union does not seem
to understand that peace requires some sacrifice
or pooling of sovereignty, some give as well as
take, some willingness to give up to the com-
mon international welfare, narrow, self-seeking,
nationalistic objectives; some willingness to get
in step with the free world army of peace instead
of insisting all the time that the rest of the army
is out of step with the Soviet Union.

The free world wants to live at peace with the
Soviet Union. There is no question about that.
What the free world wants to know is whether the
Soviet Union wants to live at peace with it,
whether the Soviet Union is willing to abandon
its present suicidal course, whether it has the
moral courage to acknowledge its mistakes,
whether it has enough sense of humor to see
itself as the rest of the world sees it — in a posture
that would be ridiculous if it were not so tragic.

Witness the spectacle of the Soviet represen-
tative in the Security Council flaying the dead
donkey of "Western Imperialism." Even the
ghost of that mythical animal has been laid with
the granting of freedom and national independ-
ence to the Philippines, India, Pakistan, and Indo-
nesia, for example.

We are not living in Alice's Wonderland but in
a world where sober account must be taken of the
facts of life.

The free world, including the relatively new
nation states of the Near East and Asia, is threat-
ened today by a new imperialism — the imjjerial-
ism of Soviet communism. This new imperialism
is a challenge in every part of the world to the
preservation of fundamental human freedoms, to
the right of national self-determination and in-
dependence, to the opportunity for material ad-
vancement and improved living standards.

The tentacles of Soviet Communist imperialism
reach out from the center of the Eurasian land
mass to crush the new, independent states of Asia
and the Near East.

Soviet Abuse of Security Council

The free world will begin to believe in Soviet
devotion to peace when it sees some evidence that
the Soviet Union is willing to back its words with
deeds. A good place for the Soviet Union to be-
gin, of course, would be to use its influence with
the puppet authorities of North Korea to comply

with the Security Council resolutions of June 25
and June 27. They have this influence — Mr.
Malik admitted it in the Security Council on
August 17.

Thus far, however, there is not the slightest sign
that the Soviet Union intends to use its influence
to halt the aggi-ession in Korea by calling off the
North Korean invaders.

There is no evidence that the Soviet Union in-
tends to use its influence with the North Korean
Communist authorities to halt the bombing and
the bloodshed in Korea that inevitably ensues from
acts of aggression.

There is not the slightest sign that the Soviet
Union intends to join the 53 members of the
United Nations who are supporting the United
Nations Charter and really working for peace in
Korea.

There is not the slightest sign that the Soviet
Union is willing to abandon its defiance of the
General Assembly's recommendations of Novem-
ber 1947, December 1948, and October 1949 to the
end that a free, independent, and unified nation
may be established in Korea.

There is not the slightest sign that the Soviet
Union agrees with the overwhelming majority of
the members of the United Nations that the United
Nations should have free and unhampered access
to and full freedom to travel within all parts of
Korea.

There is not the slightest sign that the Soviet
Union will support free elections in Korea, super-
vised by the United Nations so as to insure they
will be carried out by secret ballot, without fraud,
and free from intimidation.

Instead of this what have we seen and heard
during the month of August in the Security
Council ?

AVe have seen a malicious misuse of the presi-
dency of the Security Council, the prostitution of
that high office for a propaganda campaign of lies,
calumny, and slander.

We have seen that representatives of the Repub-
lic of Korea have been denied their right to sit
at the Council Table in accordance with the Coim-
cil's decision of June 25.

We have heard a proposal that representatives
of the North Korean aggressors be invited to
sit at the Council table. Under our concept of law,
the accused should be heard. But does one listen
to an outlaw before he has been apprehended
and so restrained that he can no longer damage
individuals or society ?

We have heard a proposal that representatives of
Communist China be invited to the Council table.
But does one invite the accomplice of an arsonist
into the parlor?

We have heard a proposal that the United Na-
tions forces fighting in defense of the Korean
Republic and in defense of the United Nations
Charter, be withdrawn from Korea. Does the
fire brigade withdraw with the fire still raging?

September 4, 1950

381

No, there is no evidence that the Soviet Union
seeks peace in Korea !

Meanwhile, however, in compliance with the
resolutions of the Security Council, 53 members of
the United Nations support the effort to halt ag-
gression in Korea. Twenty-nine of them have al-
ready made specific offers of assistance to the
United Nations. A large number have offered
military assistance, including ground forces which
are urgently needed to share the travail of the
battle for peace.

This is a truly inspiring example of collective
security at work. All nations, great and small, can
take pride, and comfort in this united effort for
peace. For there is no real security against ag-
gression except collective security.

Letter of Appreciation for Aid

in Korean Evacuation Sent to Norway

The Department of State on August 21 an-
nounced that an official letter of appreciation and
commendation had been sent to the Norwegian
Government for transmittal to the owners, cap-
tain, and crew of the Norwegian M.S. ReinhoU
for its outstanding services and the exceptionally
fine treatment it accorded evacuees from Inchon,
Korea, last June.

According to the American mission to Korea at
Tokyo, Capt. Hjalmar Johansen, Master of the
Reinholt, and all his crew ";ave up their berths
and worked continuously without sleep, attending
to the needs of the more than 650 women and chil-
dren, many of whom were ill and all of whom were
distraught. The mission has further advised that,
without exception, all of the evacuees who crowded
the freighter with the normal passenger accom-
modations of 12 had nothing but the highest praise
for the unselfish demonstrations of kindness and
attention given to their needs during the trip from
Inchon, Korea, to Fukuoka, Japan, June 26
through June 28.

Two Congressmen Impressed

Witli Soutli Korean Figliting Quality

The following is a joint release prepared ty Representa-
tives Henry J. Latham and Hugh Scott. It was released
in Taegu, Korea, on August 20, through the United States
Information Services' facilities.

Representative Henry J. Latham of New York
and Representative Hugh Scott of Pennsylvania
visited Taegu today on their return from the front
lines of the Marine Corps 1st Brigade. Congress-
man Scott is a Navy commander and Congressman
Latham is a Navy lieutenant-commander. Both

382

are on a tour of extended naval duty and both of
them are veterans of action in the Pacific during
World War II.

The two American Representatives have just re-
turned from participation in airstrikes by task
force 977 and have visited Republic of Korea and
United States troops north of Taegu. They also
called on Admiral Sohn Won and members of his
staff in Pusan.

Congressmen Latham and Scott stated :

Every American officer and man with whom we have
talked is high in his praise of the courage, the tenacity,
the patriotism, and the fighting ability of the Republic
of Korea forces. There is no doubt about it ; free people
fight better in the long run, and we feel confident that
their efforts and the constantly increasing military power
of the United Nations forces will ultimately guarantee
the blessings of liberty to the great Korean people and
will fulfill the pledge of the Unite<l Nations and of the
United States that Korea shall have a free and independ-
ent government of its own choosing, whose security will
be guaranteed by the community of nations under the
same protection which all other free nations will continue
to enjoy against the evil transgi'essors and authoritarians.

The two Congressmen were especially impressed
with the effective action of the South Korean
Navy and the success of Republic of Korea
Marines in recent skillful military action.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale ty the Superintendent of Documents, Oovemment
Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the
case of free publications, which may be obtained from the
Department of State.

United States Educational Commission in Korea.

Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2059. Pub.

3866. 11 pp. 50.

Agreement between the United States and Korea —
Signed at Seoul April 28, 1950; entered into force
April 28, 1950.

U. S. National Commission UNESCO News, July 1950.

Pub. 3808. 11 pp. 10^ a copy ; $1 a year domestic, $1.35
a year foreign.

The monthly publication of the United States National
Commission for Unesco.

Diplomatic List, July 1950. Pub. 3912. 159 pp. 30(* a
copy; $3.25 a year domestic, $4.50 a year foreign.

Monthly list of foreign diplomatic representatives in
Washington, with their addresses.

United States Policy in the Korean Crisis. Far Eastern

Series 34. Pub. 3922. 68 pp. 25«f.

Documents bearing on United States policy toward the
developments in Korea since the North Korean Com-
munist attack.

(Conlinued on'page 399)

Department of State Bulletin

Commissioner McCloy Refuses To Sign
Sham Peace Resolution

[Released to the press August 25]

The follotvhiff letter icas sent by United States Eigh
Cofnmissio7ier John J. McCloy, on August 2Ji, to the Com-
7nunist-si)onsored Frcie Deutsehe Jugend group in Kcmp-
tau-Erzgehirge, Satony (Soviet :one) in response to the
Youth group's letter of July 10 asking Mr. McCloy to be-
come a signatory to the Stockholm resolution.

Lianne Koesler, Margot Wielund, Clirista Loeffler,
Anita Uhlig, Alice Uhlig, Lothar Drescher, Ger-
traude Beck. Dieter Elener, Karl Fischer, Hel-
mut Weber, Willi Zimmer :

Thank 5'ou for your letter of July 10, 1950,
which asks that I subscribe to the Stockholm Keso-
lution. Wlien it first appeared, I carefully read
the Stockliolm Resolution. My inability to be-
come one of the signatories comes, I think, from
a greater interest in peace than that which you
profess.

My inability comes from the certain knowledge
that there are important and glaring omissions
from the text of the Resolution about which you
and many others appear to have been kept com-
pletely unaware. The Stockholm Resolution seeks
to promote the utterly illusory and unenforceable
Soviet proposals concerning atomic energy, ig-
noring the effective control plan approved by the
overwhelming majority of the United Nations and
opposed only by the Soviet Union and four of its
satellites.

The plan approved by the overwhelming ma-
jority provides for bomb-destruction, international
ownership, true international inspection, and ef-
fective controls. The Soviet-sponsored plan pro-
vided for bomb-destruction, no genuine inter-
I national inspection, and no genuine controls. The
Stockholm Resolution makes the same major
omission.

The second omission from your resolution con-
cerns aggression. The Stockholm Petition con-
' demns the atomic bomb and does not say anything
' else. It purposely does not cover the aggression
in other forms presently being practiced by Com-
munist forces. Signers of the Petition seem
obliged to agree that it is all right for one country
to attack another with all weapons except the
atomic bomb.

The signers of the Petition would also condemn
as aggressor a country brutally attacked by
another in the event it were to use atomic weapons
in its own defense.

I would be more disposed to believe this Pe-
tition was designed to induce peace if it condemned
the only really aggressive instrument in the world
today, which is the vast and fully mobilized forces
of Soviet Russia and her satellites.

Indeed, I cannot understand how eleven young
people, such as I assume you to be, can indulge
m the hypocrisy of an appeal for peace in the

face of the fact of cold aggression and slavery
perpetrated against those all about you and still
call yourselves Free German Youth. I am in firm
disagreement with people who, like you, are per-
mitting themselves to be deceived and mis-led nito
believing or pretending to believe the paradox that
aggression is not aggression or that an attacker can
be called a victim.

The basic hypocrisy of the peace appeal is illus-
trated by the fact that just before the North Ko-
rean Armed Forces launched their unprovoked at-
tack against the Republic of Korea, more than half
the population of North Korea was reported to
have signed the Petition. Your Petition attempts
to divert attention from Communist aggression, to
divert attention from Soviet opposition to effective
international controls of atomic production, and
to induce the free nations to divest themselves of
the weapon which, combined with airpower, has
served to deter Russian aggression at such differ-
ent times as in Iran during 1947 and in Germany
during the blockade of Berlin. It is a shocking
thing that such fine words as peace and freedom
can be so abused.

For these reasons, in my judgment, you should
not have signed the Stockholm Petition, and for
these reasons, I will not.

Press Reports on West German
Remilitarization Inaccurate

Statement hy Secretary Acheson

[Released to the press August 23]

I have had a report from Mr. McCloy of the
meeting of the Allied High Commissioners with
Chancellor Adenauer, and I am aware of some of
the press reports of this meeting. The press re-
jjorts, I have seen, place emphasis on the alleged
fact that Chancellor Adenauer demanded remilita-
rization of Germany and that he specifically asked
for a German army of various thousands of men,
depending on the report.

This was not the tone or character of the meet-
ing according to my report. Adenauer presented
the security situation as he saw it, particularly
the remilitarization going on in Eastern Germany,
which he characterized as being entirely outside
the police field and along the line of straight re-
militarization. This was apparently the basis for
the meeting and for his remarks. He did make a
plea for greater strength in Western Europe, in-
cluding Germany. I believe from the report I
have that this is his greatest concern and that he
has not attempted to prejudge the extent or man-
ner of German participation in increasing this
strength.

%epiember 4, 1950

383

The general strengthening of "Western Europe
is a question on which we are all devoting the
utmost attention. The manner in which this
strength is to be obtained and what contribution
Germany may make to the defense of the West is a
matter for discussion among governments. At
this stage, I feel it would not be useful for me to
comment further on this subject.

Extrusion Press From Reparation
Agency Offered for Sale

[Released to the press August 25]

The Department of State announced today the
availability for purchase by American interests of
a partially completed extrusion press for light
metals of 12,000 ton capacity. (An extrusion
press is used to shape semifinished metal products
by forcing preheated metal through dies under
great pressure.) This press was part of the equip-
ment of the Vereinigte Leichtmetallwerke at
Hannover-Linden, Germany, and was awarded to
the United States by the Inter- Allied Reparation
Agency after a request for allocation had been sub-
mitted by this country.

The press being offered, which is partially com-
plete, was manufactured by Schloemann- — a promi-
nent designer of German heavy presses — at Diissel-
dorf , Germany and was purchased in 1944 by the
Vereinigte Leichtmetallwerke but was never
installed.

The United States pressed its claim for this
equipment on the behalf of American business
firms who had expressed an interest in expanding
their heavy extrusion press capacity. This part
press is offered for use in this country or for use
by American nationals in a third country. A
number of American business firms have already
expressed interest in the equipment being offered,
and the State Department will make arrangements
for their representatives to inspect the plant in
Germany.

The equipment, which will be sold for cash in
United States dollars, and which will be delivered
to the purchaser at a German border point, is re-
ported to be in good condition.

The sale will be conducted on a competitive
sealed bid basis with bids scheduled for opening at
10 : 00 a.m. e.d.t., October 10, 1950. Information
and forms for bidding are available at the Lend-
Lease and Surplus Property Staff, Department of
State, Annex No. 7, 21st and C Streets, NW.,

Washington,

D.C.

Western European Defense Includes
German Participation and Security

Statem.ent hy John J. McCloy

U.S. High Coimnissioner for Germany '

During recent months, the governments of the
democratic powers have given serious study and
have been making plans to strengthen the security
and defense of Western Europe, including Ger-
many. These security needs including those of
Germany, have been considered and dealt with by
the High Commissioners in conjunction with the
highest authorities in Washington, Paris, and
London.

German security is enhanced rather than re-
tarded by the present relationship between Ger-
many and the Western powers. Western Europe
must be and will be strengthened. Defense of
Europe must be a joint effort and strength will be
achieved. This will include Germany and require
of the German people and their representatives
straightforward and cooperative action. This is
the time for resolution and straight thinking on
the part of all the democratic peoples and their
governments.

As for the American Army and other United
Nations forces in Korea, they are fighting and
dying for the cause of freedom — the freedom of
other nations quite as much as American freedom.
Democratic peoples may be slow to start, but they
can and do generate overwhelming power and they
are victorious. Several times in history Ameri-
can military strength has been underestimated —
I think one should hesitate to do it again.

Booits Given Berlin Medical Institutes

Twentj'-three cases of medical books were given
recently by the United States Army Medical Serv-
ice to the Free University of Berlin. Most of the
several hundred books treat the subjects of nutri-
tion, anaesthetics, psychiatry, surgery, and com-
municable diseases. Some reference books were
included. All these recent publications will help
in bringing the Berlin medical profession up to
date on medical developments in the United States.
Tlie books were distributed by the Free University
of Berlin to the Medical Faculty, the Robert Koch
Institute, and tlie Institute for Psycho-Therapy.

" Made at Frankfort, Germany, on Aug. 23 and released
to the press in Washington on Aug. 24.

384

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

Fostering International Understanding

THIRD SEMIANNUAL REPORT ON EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE
JULY TO DECEMBER 1949 >

Bilateral Programs of International Exchange
Conducted or Serviced by the Department

In addition to its support of cooperative inter-
national exchanges through the United Nations
and its specialized agencies, the United States is
conducting directly a number of programs of ex-
change on a country-to-country basis.

The Department of State has a major role of
policy leadership and coordination with respect to
all of these exchanges. In addition, the Depart-
ment has other responsibilities ranging from the
direct conduct of certain programs to assistance
and facilitation of exchange programs of other
Federal agencies. The Department also facilitates
and assists the exchange projects of numerous pri-
vate organizations.

Those bilateral Government exchange programs
for which the Department of State has primary
responsibility - include the following:

Program

Program under the Buenos Aires Treaty
(convention for the promotion of inter-
American cultural relations): Provides for
exchange of professors, teachers, and
students, between the United States and
16 other American Republics.

Philippine rehabilitation program: Provides
grants for Philippine citizens for training
In the United States in scientific, technical,
and public service fields.

Program under the Fulbright Act: Provides
for the exchange of students, teachers,
professors, and research scholars between
the United States and certain other coun-
tries (financed by foreign currencies ob-
tained from the sale of surplus United
States war materials).

Institute of Inter-American Affairs program:
Provides a United States agency to collab-
orate with countries nf the American Re-
publics in planning, financing, and execut-
mg special technical programs.

Authorization

Buenos Aires Treaty of Sept.
16, 1937.

Public Law 370, 79th Cong,
(as amended by Public
Law 882, 80th Cong.)

Public Law 684, 79th Cong.

Public Law 369, 80th Cong,
(as amended by Public
Law 283, 81st Cong.).

*An excerpt from third semiannual report on educa-
tional exchange activities. H. doc. 556, 81st Cong., 2d.
sess. For texts of the Commission's first and second
reports, see respectively, H. doc. 56, 81st Cong., 1st sess. ;
H. doc. 431, Slst Cong., 2d. sess. ; also Bulletin of Feb. 27,
1949, p. 263 ; Feb. 13, 1950, p. 239 ; and Feb. 20, 1950, p. 283.
The fourth report on activities from January to June 1950
will appear in the next issue.

'Those educational exchange programs for which the
Department of State is responsible under the terms of the
governing laws or other instruments of authorization.

Smith-Mundt program: Provides for a world-
wide program of educational, cultural,
scientific, and technical exchange of persons
and materials between the United States
and other cooperating nations.

Program for exchanges with Finland: Pro-
vides for a program of exchange of persons,
educjUional, scientific, and technical ma-
terials between the United States and Fin-
land: to be financed by payments on
World War I debts by Finland.

Chinese student-aid program: Provides
United States financial assistance to needy
Chinese students in the United States.

German educational exchange program:
Provides for exchange of persons and ma-
terials with the western zone of occupied
Germany.

Authorization

Public Law 402, 80th Cong.
Public Law 265, Slst Cong.

PubIicILaw4327, Slst Cong.
Do.

The Commission's Relationships
to the Bilateral Programs

The Commission on Educational Exchange was
established by Public Law 402 for the purpose of
formulating and recommending to the Secretary
of State educational exchange policies and pro-
grams for carrying out the objectives of Public
Law 402, Eightieth Congress, which are —

... to enable the Government of the United States to
promote a better understanding of the United States in
other countries, and to increase mutual understanding be-
tween the people of the United States and the people of
other countries.

The educational exchange program which is
carried out under the authority of Public Law 402
and for which the Commission has statutory re-
sponsibility is a world-wide Government-financed
operation for the exchange of persons and mate-
rials, as well as for Government facilitation and
stimulation of the exchange program of private or-
ganizations and agencies. The scope of Public
Law 402 activities for fiscal year 1950 is shown in
the following accompanying tables :

Table 1. Funds available for fiscal year 1950 by
area of the world.

Table 2. A listing of diplomatic posts with
UsiE (United States Information and Educa-
tional Exchange) offices as of December 31, 1949.

September 4, 1950

385

In accordance with congressional intent as set
forth in committee reports ^ the Commission has
assumed the same general responsibility for the
program of educational exchanges with Finland
(conducted under Public Law 265, 81st Cong.)
that it has for activities carried out under the
authority of Public Law 402.

In addition to its responsibilities for the pro-
gram conducted under Public Laws 402 and 265,
the Commission has agreed, at the request of the
Department of State, to act in an advisory ca-
pacity for all progi-ams of international exchange,
insofar as such programs contribute directly or
indirectly to the objectives of Public Law 402.
(See appendix II, p. 16.) In such capacity the
Commission advises and assists the Secretary of
State but has no authority over any of the "non-
Public Laws 402 and 265" programs which include
the Philippine rehabilitation progi-am, the
Chinese student-aid program, and other programs
listed on page 1 of this report.

Therefore, the Commission's activities and re-
ports will emphasize, but not be confined to, prob-
lems encountered in planning for and conducting
educational exchanges financed from funds ap-
propriated under the authority of Public Law 402,
Eightieth Congress, and Public Law 265, Eighty-
first Congress.

For 1950 the Commission plans to give consider-
ation to the following major problems, which in-
volve many of the Department's progi'ams of inter-
national exchange:

A 5-year projection for the educational ex-
change progi-am (policy and program plans).

United States educational resources for the
Government's exchange programs (Point 4, the
German program, Public Law 402, etc.).

The Commission's relationships with private or-
ganizations, including the appointment of special-
ized advisory committees under section 801 (6) of
Public Law 402.

Orientation in United States institutions and
way of life for all United States Government ex-
change programs.

Basic education in Point 4 countries.

Educational exchange programs in special areas
(Germany, Finland, Spain, etc.).

Evaluation of the Department's international
exchange programs (development of criteria and
techniques).

Foreign opinion of the level of American cul-
tural achievements.

General Appraisal of Department's Work
in Bilateral Exchange Programs

Because of the instability of the postwar period
and changing conditions in all areas of the world,

' H Kept. No. 119.5, Foreign Affair Committee; S. Kept.
No. 740, Foreign Relations Committee.

numerous difficulties are encountered in the con-
duct of Government-supported bilateral exchange
programs.

The Commission also wishes to call attention to
the very complex relationships which the De-
partment must maintain with individuals and or-
ganizations in order to conduct the various
programs effectively and carry out the intent of
Congress. Such relationships are necessary in
order to insure proper and careful selection of
Americans and foreign nationals being exchanged
under private and Government programs. The
Department has found it necessary and desirable
to maintain active contacts with more than 800
colleges and universities in all States and Terri-
tories of the United States and with more than
600 private organizations throughout this country.
In addition, the Department must give direction
and assistance to 16 binational educational com-
missions established in as many countries under
the terms of the Fulbright Act. The Department
also cooperates actively with various committees
on study and training which have been established
in other countries to participate in the selection
of foreign nationals who come to the United States
for study and training under private and Gov-
ernment auspices.

Because these exchange programs conducted by
the Department are administered by people and
deal with people, the human element is involved.
This means that there may be mistakes of judg-
ment, delays, and other instances where exchange
projects are not handled to the complete satis-
faction of all concerned. The Commission con-
siders, however, that the Department, in coopera-
tion with private agencies, is progressively solving
many of the problems involved.

The Commission's appraisal of the Depart-
ment's conduct of the various exchange programs
is based on its observations over a period of ap-
proximately 2 years, as well as the review by the
Chairman of the educational exchange operations
in Italy, Egypt, Greece, Yugoslavia, Switzerland,
France, and Spain.

Anonymous Dollar Contribution
to Voice of America

[Released to the press August 25]

The Department of State today received an
anonymous contribution of 1 dollar to help
strengthen the Voice of America.

Accompanying the money was the following
note :

It would be silly to think that a dollar would help to
increase the Voice's range very much — but at least it will
do no harm.

386

Department of State Bulletin

The contribution was addressed simply to Voice
of America Broadcast and was postmarked Sara-
sota, Florida.

Under Government regulations, the Department
is required to turn over the dollar to the United
States Ti'easury.

Voice of America Extends
Korean and Cantonese Programs

[Released to the p7-ess August S5]

The Department of State today announced the
addition of two 15-minute daily bi'oadcasts to its
Far Eastern program. One of the new broad-
casts is an additional 15-minute program in the
Korean language from 6 to 6: 15 p.m. e. s. t. (8 to
8 : 15 a.m. Korean time). This broadcast extends
the previous 15-minute Korean "Breakfast" show
to a full half-hour program.

The other program is an additional 15-minute
broadcast in the Cantonese dialect, from 6:45 to
7 : 00 p.m. e. s. t. (6 : 45 to 7 : 00 a.m. China coast
time). This broadcast similarly extends the pre-
vious 15-minute Cantonese "Breakfast" show over
to a full 30 minutes.

The two new programs were inaugurated on
August 20.

This brings to a total of 7% hours the present
output of the Voice of America to the Far East.
The Voice is now broadcasting 30 program hours
a clay in a total of 25 languages, including pro-
grams beamed to the Far East in Korean, Can-
tonese, Vietnamese, Indonesian, Mandarin, Rus-
sian, and English.

CBS Official Named Consultant
for 'Campaign of Truth'' Program

The Department of State announced on August
25 the appointment of Davidson Taylor, formerly
vice president of Columbia Broadcasting System,
as a special consultant.

Mr. Taylor will represent the Assistant Secre-
tary for Public Affairs in initiating and coordi-
nating the direction of a number of research and
development projects being undertaken in connec-
tion with the Department's "Campaign of Truth."

Mr. Taylor will be particularly concerned with
the efforts now being made to find new and im-
proved means of getting the truth into areas of
the world from which it is now partly or wholly
excluded.

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S.

H. S. J. Hullugalle, journalist from Colombo,
Ceylon, and Mrs. (H. R.) Theja Gunewardene,
vice-president and chief organizer of the associa-
tion of Women's Institutes (Rural) , Ceylon, began
a tour of the United States on August 3.

Pierre V. Donzelot, director general of higher
education of the French Ministry of National Ed-
ucation, will visit various universities to observe
the administration of scientific laboratories and
methods of teaching engineering, dentistry, and
medicine.

Moshe Rosetti, chief secretary of the Knesset
(Israeli Parliament) will visit in the United States
for the purpose of observing the organization of
federal, state, and local legislative bodies.

Keighbod Zafar, general director of a construc-
tion company in Tehran, will investigate low-cost
housing projects, as well as dams and road con-
struction projects.

These visits have been made possible through
grants-in-aid awarded by the Department of
State.

Americans Vif iting Abroad

G. Glenwood Clark, associate professor of Eng-
lish, College of William and Mary, will serve as
visiting professor of American literature at the
University of Brazil, Rio de Janeiro, for the fall
term of the forthcoming academic year.

Dr. Neal A. Weber, associate professor of zo-
ology at Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pa.,
will serve for 1 year, beginning this fall, as visiting
professor of zoology at the College of Arts and
Sciences, Baghdad, Iraq.

Dr. Isaac Leonard Stright, professor of mathe-
matics. State Teachers College, Indiana, Pa., will
serve for 1 year as visiting professor of mathe-
matics at the Higher Teachers Training College,
Baghdad, Iraq.

Louis Kraft, general secretary of the National
Council of the Jewish Welfare Board, New York
City, and a leading figure in the field of social work,
will lecture at the School of Social Work at
Jerusalem. This lectureship is sponsored jointly
by the Department and the National Jewish Wel-
fare Board.

Dr. J. Leon Shereshefsky, head of the chemistry
department at Howard University, will teach
physical chemistry at the Hebrew Institute of
Technology, Haifa, Israel, during the next aca-
demic year.

These visits have been made possible through
grants-in-aid awarded by the Department of State.

September 4, 1950

387

Department Expresses Regrets
on Revised Senate Coffee Report

Statement by Secretanj Acheson

[Released to the press August 23]

Although the revised report on coffee prices
issued yesterday by the Senate Committee on
Agriculture and Forestry eliminated some of the
features of the original report which caused such
widespread misunderstanding and resentment, the
Department regrets that the committee did not
adopt certain other changes recommended by the
Department of State when Assistant Secretary
Edward G. Miller, Jr., appeared before the Com-
mittee on June 20, 1950.^ These recommenda-
tions would have settled doubts raised by the re-
port in Latin America concerning basic United
States policies.

The suggested changes, which would not have
impeded a thorough investigation of the charges
of market manipulations, related principally to
passages in the original report which do not ap-
pear relevant to the question of price but were,
nevertheless, misinterpreted by our friends in the
other Americas as hostile toward their legitimate
economic interests.

The attitude of the Department of State, in this
matter, has been clear for some time. On June 20,
Assistant Secretary Miller, in testimony before the
Senate Committee on Agriculture and Forestry,
defined the views of the Department on a subcom-
mittee report on coffee which had just been

Mr. Miller observed that the I'eport had created
a large measure of resentment in 14 of the 20
Latin American Republics. He expressed the hope
that the committee would amend the report in a
manner calculated to make possible the attainment
by the United States of the desirable twin objec-
tives of uncovering alleged market manipulations
and of demonstrating a friendly understanding of
the problems of the friendly governments con-
cerned.

The committee consented to appoint another
subcommittee to revise the report. Its revisions
were accepted yesterday by the full committee.

I am confident that the members of the commit-
tee, collectively and individually, share in our
Government's support of the principle of the good
neighbor who respects his own rights and, be-
cause he does, respects the rights of others.

I am also confident that the legislative, as well
as the executive, branch of our Government con-
tinues its unqualified support of inter-American
cooperation, hemispheric solidarity and under-
standing based upon mutual respect — the fruits
of which have never been more evident than in
the active support which the entire Western Hem-
isphere has given the actions of the United Nations
in the Korean conflict.

U.S.-U.K. Cancel Agreement

on Extension of Time for Copyright

[Released to the press August 14]

On July 26, 1950, the United States and Great
Britain, by an exchange of notes, canceled their
copyright extension of time agreement of March
10, '1944,= effective from December 29, 1950.

Because of wartime inability of citizens of each
of these countries to conform to the conditions
and formalities of the copyright laws of the other,
this agreement had been negotiated to extend the
time for such compliance on a reciprocal basis.
The 1944 agreement comprised an exchange of
notes. United States Presidential Proclamation
No. 2608, and the United Kingdom Copyright
(United States of America) Order, 1942. Neither
the proclamation nor the order in council con-
tained a termination date. Since it appeared
that citizens of both countries would have had
ample time by December 29, 1950, to take advan-
tage of this extension, both Governments agreed
to terminate the aforementioned agreement effec-
tive on that date.

On behalf of the United States, the President
issued on May 26, 1950, a proclamation terminat-
ing Proclamation No. 2608 as of December 29,
1950. It is expected that the British Government
will issue a new order in council shortly, terminat-
ing its earlier order in council.

Pacific Port Privileges Extended
for Canadian Halibut Fishermen

[Released to the press August 41

A convention between the United States and
Canada for the extension of port privileges to
halibut fishing vessels on the Pacific coasts of the
United States and Canadaj signed at Ottawa on
March 24, 1950, was proclaimed by the President,
August 2, 1950. The convention entered into force
on July 13, 1950, upon the exchange of instruments
of ratification at Ottawa.

By this convention, fishermen of each country
engaged in the halibut fishery of the north Pacific
Ocean are granted privileges in the ports of entry
of the other country to obtain supplies, repairs
and equipment, and to land their catches of halibut
and sablefish without the payment of duties, sell
them locally on payment of the applicable customs
duty, transship them in bond under customs super-
vision to any port of their own country, or sell
them in bond for export.

■ Bulletin of July 24, 1950, p. 140.
' Bulletin of Mar. 11, 1944, p. 243.

388

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

United States fisliiiifr vessels have been accorded
certain privileges in ports of British Columbia
for over 50 years. For short periods in the past,
this Government has extended similar privileges,
under wartime powers and by special legislation,
to Canadian fishermen in Alaskan ports. Except
for such periods, prior to the entry into force of
this convention, Canadian fishing vessels could
enter port of the United State only when in dis-
tress or to secure supplies, repairs, or equipment.

Although the United States under this conven-
tion extends privileges to Canadian halibut fisher-
men in all west-coast ports, the exercise of the
privileges will for geographical reasons be con-
fined mainly to Alaskan ports and to Seattle,
Washington.

Road Convention Ratified

[Released to the press August 21]

The President on August 17, 1950, ratified the
convention on road traffic, opened for signature
at Geneva on September 19, 1949, and a related
protocol concerning occupied countries or terri-
tories opened for signature at the same time.^ Ad-
vice and consent to ratification of the convention
and related protocol was given by the Senate on
August 0, 1950.

The United States is the first government to
ratify the convention which was formulated at
the United Nations Conference on Road and Motor
Transport held at Geneva from August 23 to Sep-
tember 19, 1949, and which has been signed by 20
other countries.

The convention is designed to facilitate interna-
tional motoring and will make it easier and more
convenient for motorists to take their cars to for-
eign countries for touring purposes. It estab-
lishes a basis for world-wide uniformity in the re-
ciprocal recognition of motor-vehicle registration
certificates, drivers permits, and customs bonds;
the identification of vehicles in international traf-
fic; rules for safe driving; equipment require-
ments, including brakes, lights, and other techni-
cal characteristics ; and the permissible maximum
dimensions and weights of motor vehicles on high-
ways designated for international traffic. When
the treaty comes into force, a United States motor-
ist will be able to take his car to any foreign
country which is a party to the convention and
enjoy reciprocity similar to that which he now
experiences in his travels among the various states
of the Union. His state registration card and
driving license will be recognized abroad, and his
car will bear the identifying symbol "USA."

' For an article on International road traffic by H. H.
Kelly, see Bulletin of Dec. 12, 1949, p. 875a.

Sepf ember 4, 1950

Notice of U.S. Ratification of
Four Conventions Sent to U.N.

[Released to the press August 21
by the U.S. Mission to the U.N.]

Ambassador Warren R. Austinj United States
representative to the United Nations, today an-
nounced the transmittal to the Secretary-General
of the United Nations of the instruments of rati-
fication of four conventions drafted under United
Nations auspices. The conventions are:

1. The convention on the Intergovernmental
Maritime Consultative Organization, one of the
projected specialized agencies associated with the
United Nations. The United States is the fourth
government to deposit its instrument of ratifica-
tion with the Secretary-General, the others being
the United Kingdom, Canada, and the Nether-
lands. To bring the convention into force, the
ratification of 21 countries is required, including
seven having 1 million gross tons of shipping..

2. The convention, signed at Paris November 19,
1948, bringing synthetic drugs within the scope of
the 1931 convention limiting the manufacture and
regulating the distribution of narcotic drugs.
Under this convention, international limitations
and regulations apply to drugs certified by the
World Health Organization to be habit-forming.

3. The protocol, signed at Lake Success May
4, 1949, amending international agi'eements for
suppression of the white slave traffic.

4. The protocol of May 4, 1949, amending the
international agreement for the suppression of the
circulation of obscene publications.

In the case of the two protocols, the effect would
be to transfer to the United Nations certain func-
tions formerly performed by the French Govern-
ment, such as acting as a repository of communi-
cations provided for in the earlier conventions.

In his letter transmitting notice of the Imco rati-
fication. Ambassador Austin conveyed the text of
a statement set forth in the Senate s resolution of
June 27, 1950, designated as a "reservation and
understanding," asserting that it is understood
that since nothing in the convention "is intended to
alter domestic legislation with respect to restric-
tive business practices," the convention "does not
and will not have the effect of altering or modi-
fying in any way the application of the anti-trust
statutes of the United States of America."

Ambassador Austin's letter added that this state-
ment is considered "merely a clarification of the
intended meaning of the convention and a safe-
guard against any possible misinterpretation."
He expressed the hope, therefore, that the state-
ment would not be considered a reservation re-
quiring formal approval of other signatory
governments.

"Article 2 of the convention provides that the
functions of the Organization 'shall be consulta-
tive and advisory,' " the Ambassador wrote.

389

"Article 3 of the convention indicates that the
functions of the Organization are to make recom-
mendations and to facilitate consultation and ex-
change of information. The history of the con-
vention and the records of the conference at which
it was formulated indicate no intention to nullify
or alter the domestic legislation of any contracting
party relating to restrictive business practices or
to alter or modify in any way the application of
domestic statutes governing the prevention or reg-
ulation of business monopolies."

Jose de San (Vlartin —
Celebrated American Hero

Statement "by the President

[Released to the press hy the White Bouse August 161

The people of the United States are honored to
join the citizens of the other American Republics
in observing the one-hundredth anniversary of the
death of General Jose de San Martin, founder of
Argentine independence, who led a liberating
army across the Andes and gave freedom to Chile
and Peru.

It has been said of San Martin that rather than
a man he was a mission. His name represents the
American ideal of democracy, justice, and liberty.
His deeds have earned him a proud place in his-
tory. His memory is part of the spirit of freedom
and independence in North and South America
alike.

The solidarity of the Americas rests upon firm
foundations. Not the least of these is the faith
we inherited from San Martin and the other great
figures of our past in the future of a free and en-
lightened humanity. It is no exaggeration to say
that one of the warmest features of inter- American
friendship and understanding is our mutual ap-
preciation of the men who shaped our destinies.

San Martin was such a man.

While he is hailed today in Argentina as the first
among his country's heroes, his memory is equally
revered throughout the rest of the continent whose
future was shaped in good part by his spectacular
triumphs on the field of battle. In the United
States, we honor him as much for his humanitar-
ianism as for his achievements in action.

It does not detract from the other great heroes
of the independence of the Americas to say that his
impersonal devotion to the cause of freedom and
his rejection of material honors make San Martin
the personification of unselfish idealism.

It is fitting that we honor San Martin at a time
when our sympathies and support go out to a new
and far-off republic which is struggling for ex-
istence as it enters the third year of its life. The
spirit of the "Great Captain," who placed his life
at the service of liberty, is very much with us.

U.S. Navy Personnel To Serve
as Advisory Mission in Venezuela

The Department of State announced on August
23 that Secretary Dean Acheson and Senor Don
Jose Rafael Pocaterra, Ambassador of Venezuela
to the United States, signed, on that date, an agree-
ment providing for the detail of officers and en-
listed men of the United States Navy as an ad-
visory mission to serve in Venezuela. The agree-
ment is to continue in force for 4 years from the
date of signature and may be extended beyond
that period at the request of the Government of
Venezuela.

The agreement is similar to numerous other
agreements in force between the United States
and certain other American Republics providing
for the detail of officers and enlisted men of the
United States Army, Navy, Air Force, or Marine
Corps to advise the armed forces of those coun-
tries. The provisions of the agreements relate
to the duties, rank, and precedence of the person-
nel of the mission, the travel accommodations to
be provided for the members of the mission and
their families, and other related matters.

Mutual Defense Survey Mission
To Visit Portugal on Aid Program

A joint Mutual Defense Assistance Progi-am
survey mission, representing the Departments of
State and Defense, will leave Washington, August
24, for Lisbon to conduct discussions concerning
the proposed military assistance program for Por-
tugal, the Department announced on August 23.

The group will proceed first to London for dis-
cussions with American officers of the regional
Mutual Defense Assistance organization.

The chairman of the joint survey mission will
be Eli Stevens, an officer of the Mutual Defense
Assistance group, Department of State. Col.
William G. Lee, Jr., Air Force, will be chief of the
Defense group. Other members of the Defense
group will be Lt. Col. John H. Bell, Air Force;
lit. Col. William W. Harvey and Maj. Clarence J.
Baldwin, Army ; and Commander John V. Cam-
eron and Lt. Comdr. Paul T. Ray, Navy.

Portugal is 1 of 12 nations signing the North
Atlantic Treaty and 1 of 9 Western European na-
tions included in the fiscal year 1951 Mutual De-
fense Assistance Program. Last week, Gen. J. F.
de Barros Rodrigues, Chief of Staff, Portugese
Army, represented the Portugese Government at
meetings held at Washington by the North Atlan-
tic Ocean Regional Planning Group, 1 of 5 re-
gional groups of the North Atlantic Treaty
Oiganization.

390

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Calendar of IVIeetings ^

Adjourned During August 1950

Itu (International Telecommunication Union):

Third International High Frequency Broadcasting Con-
ference.
United Nations:

International Law Commission: Second Session . . . .
Economic and Social Council:

Eleventh Session

Meeting of Drug Manufacturing Countries

Joint Meeting of Representatives of Principal Opium
Producing aud Drug Manufacturing Countries.
UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cul-
tural Organization) :

Seminar on the Improvement of Textbooks

Seminar on the Teaching of Geography as a Means of

Developing International Understanding.
Seminar on the Role of Public and School Libraries in
Adult Education.

Fourth International Congress on Soil Science

International Institute of Administrative Sciences: Eighth

International Congress.
North Atlantic Treaty Organization: Council of Deputies
Congress of the International Union for the Prevention of

Venereal Disease.
Seventh International Assembly of the International Col-
lege of Surgeons.

World Conference of University Women

First United States International Trade Fair

Radio and Television Exhibition

Twelfth Congress of the International Penal and Penitenti-
ary Commission.

International Congress on the History of Science

Eighteenth International Physiological Congress

Fifth International Congress on Microbiology

Eighth Convention of Speech and Voice Disorders . . . .

First International Congress on Archives

Conference of the International Union of Family

Organizations.
Ninth International Congress of Historical Sciences . . . .

In Session as of August 31, 1950

United Nations:

Advisory Council for Libya

Special Committee on Information Transmitted Under
Article 73(e) of the Charter.
Eleventh International Exhibition of Cinematographic Art

Edinburgh Film Fe.«tival

Izmir International Trade Fair

Sixth International Congress on Vineyards and Wine . . . .
International Federation for Housing and Town Planning:

20th International Congress.
First International Conference on Alcohol and Traffic . . .

Florence and Rapallo, Italy

Geneva . . . .

Geneva . . . .
Geneva . . . .
Geneva . . . .

Brussels . . . .
Montreal . . .

Malmo, Sweden

Amsterdam . .
Florence . . .

London . . . .
Zurich , . . .

Buenos Aires . .

Zurich

Chicago . . . .
Copenhagen . .
The Hague . .

Amsterdam . .
Copenhagen . .
Rio de Janeiro .
Amsterdam . .

Paris

Helsinki . . . .

Paris

Tripoli . . .
Lake Success .

Venice . . .
Edinburgh . .
Izmir, Turkey
Athens . . .
Amsterdam .

Stockholm . .

Apr. 1-Aug. 19

June 5-Aug. 6

Julv 3-Aug. 16
Aug. 7-12
Aug. 14-19

July 12- Aug. 23
July 12-Aug. 23

July 24-Aug. 19

July 24-Aug. 1
July 25-Aug. 3

July 25-Aug. 4
July 29-Aug. 1

Aug. 1-5

Aug. 3-12
Aug. 7-19
Aug. 11-20
Aug. 14-19

Aug. 14-21
Aug. 15-18
Aug. 17-24
Aug. 21-26
Aug. 23-26
Aug. 28-31

Aug. 28 (1 day)

Apr. 11-
Aug. 18-

Aug. 8-
Aug. 20-
Aug. 20-
Au? 23-
Aug. 27-

Aug. 30-

' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
September 4, 1950

391

Calendar of Meetings — Continued

ln][Session as of August 31, 1950 — Continued

International Conference of Mathematicians

World Federation for Mental Health: Third Annual Meeting

Scheduled September 1-November 30, 1950

Ittj (International Telecommunication Union) : Fifth Ses-
sion of Administrative Council.
Eleventh Congress of the International Union Against

Tuberculosis.
United Nations:

Economic and Social Council:

Subcommission on Statistical Sampling: Fourth Ses-
sion.
Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East:

Regional Conference of Statisticians.
Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East:

Meeting of Transport Experts.
Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East:

Technical Conference on Flood Control.
Permanent Central Opium Board and Narcotic Drugs

Supervisory Body.
Economic Commission for Europe: Meeting of the Coal

Committee.
Commission on Narcotic Drugs: Fifth Session . . . .
Economic Commission for Latin America: Fourth
Session.

Seminar on Public Personnel Management

General Assembly: Fifth Session

Third North American Regional Broadcasting Conference:

Second Session.
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
and International Monetary Fund: Fifth Annual
Meeting of the Boards of Governors.
Thirty-ninth General Assembly of the Interparliamentary
Union.

Levant Fair

Vienna International Fall Fair

International Scientific Radio Union: Ninth General As-
sembly.

Journ^es liurales Internationales

ICAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) :

Special Meeting on Climb Requirements

Air Navigation Commission: Fifth Session

Council: Eleventh Session

Air Transport Committee: Eleventh Session

Rules of the Air and Air Traffic Control Division: Fourth

Session.
Middle East Regional Air Navigation Meeting: Second

Session.
Rules of the Air and Air Tratfio Control Division: Fourth
Session.

Marseille International Fair

First International Exhibition of Applied Electricity (in
connection with Celebration of 100th Anniversary of .the
Birth of Augusto Righi).
Pan American Sanitary Organization:

Eleventh Meeting of the Executive Committee

Fourth Session of the Directing Council

Thirteenth Pan American Sanitary Conference

Twelfth Meeting of the E.xecutive Committee

Fao (Food and Agriculture Organization) :

Meeting on Herring Technology

Meeting of Fisheries Technologists

Latin American Meeting on Livestock Production . . .
Forestry and Forest Products Commission for Asia and
the Pacific.

Tenth Session of the Council

Special Session of the Conference

Eleventh Session of the Council

UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural
Organization) :
Inter-American Seminar on Elementary Education . . .
Meeting of Experts To Establish a Coordinating Commit-
tee on Social Science Documentation.
Meeting on Improvement of Bibliographical Services . ,

392

Cambridge, Mass.
Paris

Geneva . . .
Copenhagen .

Lake Success .
Bangkok . .
Bangkok . .
Simla, India .
Geneva . . ,
Geneva . . .

Lake Success .
Undetermined

Lake Success .
Lake Success .
Washington .

Paris

Dublin

Bari, Italy
Vienna .
Zurich

Brussels

Paris . .
Montreal
Montreal
Montreal
Montreal

Istanbul .

Montreal

Marseille . .
Bologna, Italy

Ciudad Trujillo
Ciudad Trujillo
Ciudad Trujillo
Ciudad Trujillo

Bergen, Norway
Bergen, Norway
Turrialba . . .
Bangkok . . .

Washington
Washington
Washington

Montevideo
Paris . . .

Paris

Aug. 30-
Aug. 31-

Sept. 1-
Sept. 3-

Sept. 5-

September

Oct. 24-

Oct. 30-

Oct. 31-

Nov. 21-

Nov. 30-
November

Sept. 15-
Sept. 19-
Sept. 6-

Scpt. 6-

Sept. 7-13

Sept. 9-26
Sept. 10-17
Sept. 11-23

Sept. 14-16

Sept. 14-
Sept. 19-
Sept. 27-
Sept. 28-
Oct. 10-

Oct. 17-

Nov. 14-

Sept. 16-
Sept. 17-

Sept. 20-
Sept. 25-
Oct. 2-
Oct. 11-

Sept. 24-
Sept. 30
Oct. 9-
Oct. 16-

Oct. 25-
Nov. 11-
Nov. 13-

Sept. 25-
Oct. 16-

Nov. 7-
Deparlment of Sfafe Bullef'm

Calender oj Meetings — Continued

Scheduled September 1-November 30, 1950 — Continued

General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade:

Third Round of Tariff Negotiations of Contracting
Parties.

Fifth Session of the Contracting Parties

North Atlantic Council: Fifth Session

Pan American Institute of Geography and History:

Fifth Consultation of Commission on Cartography . . .

Second Consultation of Commission on Geography . . .

Second Consultation of Commission on History ....

Fifth General Assembly

International Council for Exploration of the Sea

Third Pan American Conference on Leprosy

Sixth Inter-American Press Congress

Iro (International Refugee Organization):

Sixth Session

Eighth Session of Executive Committee

Seventh Pan American Railway Congress

South Pacific Commission: Sixth Session

Ilo (International Labor Organization) :

Third Session of Petroleum Committee

113th Session of Governing Body

Third Session of Industrial Committee on Textiles . . .
Fourth Session of the International Wheat Council ....

International Anti-Locust Conference

Postal Union of the Americas and Spain: Sixth Congress .
Third Pan American Congress on Physical Education . . .

Third Inter-American Congress on Brucellosis

Conference of Survey Authorities

Caribbean Commission: Eleventh Meeting

West Indian Conference: Fourth Session

♦Tentative.

Torquay, England . . . .

Torquay, England . . . .
New York

Santiago

Copenhagen

Buenos Aires

New York City

Geneva

Mexico City

Noumea, New Caledonia .

Geneva

Brussels

Lyon

London

New Delhi

Madrid

Montevideo

Washington

Wellington, New Zealand .
Curagao, Netherlands West

Indies.
Curagao, Netherlands West

Indies.

Sept. 28-

Nov. 2-
September

Oct. 2-*
Oct. 2-*
Oct. 2-*
Oct. 2-*
Oct. 2-
Oct. 8-
Oct. 8-

Oct. 9-
Oct. 9-
Oct. 10-
Oct. 20-

Oct. 23-
Nov. 15-
Nov. 28-
Oct. 24-*
October
October
October
Nov. 6-
Nov. 6-
Nov. 24-

Nov. 27-

Sixth Session of European Customs Union Study Group

PRESS COMMUNIQUE OF JULY 28

The European Customs Union Study Group ^
held its sixth plenary session at Brussels from July
24 to 28, under the chairmanship of Mr. Spieren-
burg, and the vice-chairmanship of Mr. Calmes.

The following countries were represented :

Austria

Benelux (Belgium, Luxembourg, Netherlands)

Denmark

France

Greece

German Federal Republic

Iceland

Italy

Norway

Portugal

Sweden

Switzerland

Turkey

United Kingdom of Great Britain and

Northern Ireland

Observers represented :

Australia

Canada

Ceylon

India

New Zealand

Union of South Africa

Organization for European Economic Cooperation

United Nations Organization

United States of America

The Study Group examined and discussed the
report presented to it by the Customs Committee
at the conclusion of the work carried out by the
various technical committees responsible to this
Committee (Special Nomenclature Committee,
Valuation Subcommittee) in accordance with the

' For an article on the European Customs Union Study
Group by Howard J. Hilton, Jr., see Bulletin of Aug. 14,
1950, p. 251.

September 4, 1950

393

instructions which the Customs Committee had
received from the Study Group.
This work included:

a. the preparation of a contracted customs
nomenclature reduced to main headings;

b. the preparation of a common definition of
customs value;

c. the preparation of draft conventions bring-
ing into operation the contracted nomenclature
and the definition of customs value ;

d. proposals concerning the setting up of the
consultative committees which would have the
duty of insuring the uniform application of the
conventions.

The Study Group examined the 1950 nomen-
clature obtained by revising the 1949 nomenclature
and reducing it to main headings.

The principal features of the 1950 nomenclature
are as follows:

(a) The number of main headings is now
1095, as compared with 1360 in the 1949 text, and
991 in the League of Nations 1937 nomenclature;

(b) All these headings are intended to be
obligatory for states entering into the convention.
These states must not add or delete any headings ;

(c) On the other hand, contracting states
will be entirely free to create under the obligatory
main headings any subheadings they may require.
They will thus be able to adapt their existing tariffs
to the nomenclature and make all necessary pro-
vision for tariff rate distinctions.

The Study Group decided to recommend this
nornenclature to the governments of the partici-
pating countries with a view to its incorporation
in a convention.

The work undertaken since 1948 to establish a
common definition for customs value has con-
tinued since the last plenary session of the Study
Group.

The Study Group approved the definition pro-
posed by the Customs Committee in its entirety,
with a view to incorporating it in the convention.

Two draft conventions, on the nomenclature and
on value, will be submitted to the governments of
the participating countries.

As a result of these decisions, the Study Group,
desirous of having the conventions signed before
the end of the year, decided on the following work
programme :

1. The Study Group recommends to govern-
ments the adoption of the 1950 nomenclature and
the definition of value with a view to their inser-
tion in international conventions.

2. The governments will advise, by September
11, 1950, at the latest, whether they accept the text
of the nomenclature, the definition of value and
the substance of the draft conventions.

3. At the same time, on September 11, 1950, the
Customs Committee will meet in Brussels to study

answers of the governments and will decide, in
collaboration with a committee of jurists, upon
the final form to be given to the draft conventions.

4. On October 24, 1950 a plenary session of
the Study Group held in Brussels, will take note of
the conventions and recommend them to the par-
ticipating countries.

5. Early in December the plenipotentiaries of
the various participating states will sign the
conventions.

During its session, the Study Group discussed
the advisability of being endowed with an interna-
tional status.

A restricted Working Party was appointed to
study this problem and present appropriate recom-
mendations at the next session of the Group.

U.S. Delegation to Fifth Session
of the General Assembly

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press hy the ^Vhite House August 2^]

I am today nominating the following persons to
be representatives of the United States to the fifth
session of the General Assembly of the United
Nations, to be held at New York, beginning Sep-
tember 19, 1950:

Warren R. Austin, Vermont

Mrs. Anna Eleanor Roosevelt, New York

John J. Sparkman, United States Senator from the State

of Alabama
Henry Cabot Lodge, Jr., United States Senator from the

State of Massachusetts
John Foster Dulles, New York

The following are being nominated to be alter-
nate representatives of the United States of
America to the fifth session of the General As-
sembly of the United Nations, to be held in New
York, beginning September 19, 1950 :

Benjamin V. Cohen, New York
John Sherman Cooper, Kentucky
Ernest A. Gross, New York
Edith S. Sampson, Illinois
John O. Ross, New York

The Secretary of State will he head of the dele-
gation, and, in his absence. Ambassador Austin as
senior representative of the United States will
serve as chairman of the delegation.

The nomination of Senator John J. Sparkman
and Senator Henry Cabot Lodge, Jr., to serve as
representatives, represents a return to the practice
of having Members of Congress participate in the
delegation to the General Assembly.

The selection of Senator Sparkman and Senator
Lodge has been made after consultation with the
leaders in the Senate Foreign Relations Commit-
tee and upon the basis of including Senators who

394

Department of Slate Bulletin

are not up for reelection this fall. It has been
agreed with the leader? of the Foreign Relations
Committee of the Senate and of the Foreign Af-
fairs Committee of the House of Representatives
that two Members of the House of Representatives
shall be nominated to serve on the delegation to the
General Assembly next year. The participation
in the delegation of a Republican and a Democratic
Senator represents another step in the bipartisan
foreign policy.

U.N. Consideration of Formosa
Possible Agenda Item

Statement hy Michael J. McDermott
Chief Press Officer

[Released to the press August 2-}]

The United States would welcome United
Nations consideration of the Formosa problem.
By direction of the President, Ambassador Austin
notified the Security Council at once of the action
taken by the United States on June 27.^ In the
President's statement of that same date, it was
indicated that the problem is one which might be
considered by the United Nations.^

Of course, the Security Council should not be
diverted from the urgent business already on its
agenda, the aggression against the Republic of
Korea.

Earl J. McGratii Heads
Educational Mission to Israel

[Released to the press April 24]

Dr. Earl J. McGrath, United States Commis-
sioner of Education, left on April 24 from New
York for Israel to confer with Israeli Government
officials and educators regarding a survey to be
made by a United States educational mission under
his leadership.

At the request of the Government of Israel, the
mission is being sent to assist and advise them in
developing an educational program adapted to
meet the country's increasing needs in this field.

This fall, after the schools are in session, the
other members of the mission will join Dr. Mc-
Grath in Israel to begin the survey and will be
assigned there for about 2 months.

Jointly financed by the Government of Israel
and the Government of the United States, the mis-

' Bulletin of July 3, 1950, p. 6.
= lUd., p. 5.

sion is being sent under the provisions of Public
Law No. 402, Eightieth Congress.

Legislation — Continued from page 369

War Claims Act of 1948. S. Rept. 1323, 81st Cong., 2d
sess. [To accompany S. 2872] 5 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.
1762, 81st Cong., 2d sess.. To Accompany S. Con. Res. 48.
2 pp.

— H. Rept. 1763, 81st Cong., 2d sess.. To accompany S.
Cong. Res. 51. 2 pp.

Extending the Rubber Act of 1948. H. Rept. 1773, 81st
Cong. 2d sess.. To accompany H. R. 7579. 7 pp.

Amending the Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938
in Certain Respects. H. Rept. 1775, 81st Cong., 2d sess..
To accompany H. R. 4386. 4 pp.

Authorizing the President to Appoint Lt. Col. Charles
H. Bonesteel, as Executive Director of the European Co-
ordinating Committee Under the Mutual Defense Assist-
ance Act of 1&49, Without Affecting His Military Status
and Perquisites. H. Rept. 1796, 81st Cong., 2d sess.. To
accompany S. 2911. 2 pp.

General Appropriation Bill, 1951. H. Rept. 1797, 81st
Cong., 2d sess.. To accompany H. R. 7786. 337 pp.

Granting of Permanent Residence to Certain Aliens.
H. Rept. 1801, 81st Cong., 2d sess.. To accompany H. Con.
Res. 181. 2 pp.

Foreign Economic Assistance. H. Rept. 1802, 81st
Cong., 2d sess.. To accompany H. R. 7797. 14 pp.

Foreign Economic Assistance. Supplemental report of
the Committee on Foreign Alfairs, House of Representa-
tives on H. R. 7797, a bill to provide foreign economic
assistance. Title I : The Economic Cooperation Act of
1950. H. Rept. 1802. Part 2, 81st Cong., 2d sess. iv, 60
pp.

— Title II : The United Nations Palestine Refugee Aid
Act of 1950. H. Rept. 1802, Part 3, 81st Cong., 2d sess.
ill, 26 pp.

— Title III : An Act for International Development.
H. Rept. 1802, Part 4, 81st Cong., 2d sess. ill, 38 pp.

— Title I : The Economic Cooperation Act of 1950. H.
Rept. 1802, Part 5, 81st Cong., 2d sess. iv, 63 pp.

Expellees and Refugees of German Ethnic Origin. Re-
port of a special subcommittee of the Committee on the
Judiciary, House of Representatives, pursuant to H. Res.
238, a resolution to authorize the Committee on tlie
Judiciary to undertake a study of immigration and na-
tionality problems. H. Rept. 1841, 81st Cong., 2d sess.,
Iv., 87 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.
1853, 81st Cong., 2d sess., To accompany S. Con. Res. 55.
2 pp.

— H. Rept. 1854, 81st Cong., 2d sess.. To accompany S.
Con. Res. 58. 2 pp.

— H. Rept. 1855, 81st Cong., 2d sess., To accompany S.
Con. Res. 62. 2 pp.

Enhancing Further the Security of the United States
by Preventing Disclosures of Information Concerning the
Cryptographic Systems and the Communication Intelli-
gence Activities of the United States. H. Rept. 1895, 81st
Cong., 2d sess.. To accompany S. 277. 5 pp.

Supplemental Estimates of Appropriation for Various
Departments and Agencies. Message from the President
of the United States transmitting supplemental estimates
of appropriations for the fiscal year 1950 in the amount of
$79,887,861 for various departments and agencies. H.
Doc. 543, 81st Cong., 2d sess. 23 pp.

Report on the Operations of the Department of State
(Under Public Law 584). Communication from the
President of the United States transmitting a report by
the Secretary of State on the operations of the Depart-
ment of State under section 2 of Pulilic Law 584, 79th
Cong., as required by that law. H. Doc. 527, 81st Cong.,
2d sess. V, 72 pp.

Fifth Report to Congress of the Economic Cooperation
Administration. H. Doc. 416, 81st Cong., 2d sess. ix,
141 pp.

Sepf ember 4, 1950

395

The United States in the United Nations

Security Council

[August 26-September 1]

At the end of August, during which month
Ambassador Yakov A. Malik of the U.S.S.R.
presided as president, the Security Council still
had on its agenda the "Complaint of aggression
upon the Republic of Korea". No progress had
been made by the Council during the fourteen
meetings held during the month. The Council
voted on August 29 and 31, respectively, to add
two items to its agenda, "Complaint of invasion of
Taiwan (Formosa)" and "Complaint of bombing
by Air Force of the territory of China," both of
which were introduced by Ambassador Malik.
Inclusion of a third item, also proposed by Ambas-
sador Malik, on "The unceasing terrorism and
mass executions in Greece" was rejected by the
Council. The United States opposed its inclusion,
Ambassador Austin said, because there is no indi-
cation that the problem is a threat to peace or
even an international dispute. Instead, he said,
the essence of the problem has been the effort of
international Communist groups to overthrow the
constitutional Government of Greece through
force.

Two communications concerning Formosa were
presented to the Council on August 25. One was
from the "Foreign Minister of the People's Repub-
lic of China" accusing the United States of "open
encroachment of the territory of the People's
Republic of China" and asking the Council "to
take immediate measures to bring about the com-
plete withdrawal of all the United States armed
invading forces from Taiwan and from other ter-
ritories belonging to China." The second com-
munication was from Ambassador Austin to the
Secretary-General explaining United States policy
with regard to Formosa. United States action,
the letter declared, was "an impartial neutralizing
action addressed both to the forces on Formosa and
to those on the Mainland." It recalled President
Truman's declaration that the United States has
no designs on Formosa. The United States would
welcome United Nations consideration of the case
of Formosa and would approve "full United Na-
tions investigation here or on the spot." How-

ever, the letter states, the Council should not be
diverted from its consideration of the aggression
against the Republic of Korea.

Another cable from the "Foreign Minister of
the People's Republic of China" was called to
the Council's attention by Pi-esident Malik on
August 29. In it, "United States aggression
forces in Korea" were accused of strafing Chinese
territory in Manchuria. The Council's decision
at the ensuing meeting to include on its agenda
"Complaint of bombing by Air Forces of the terri-
tory of China" was preceded by a 6-hour debate.
In the course of the debate. Ambassador Austin
acknowledged the possibility that a fighter air-
craft might by mistake have strafed an airstrip in
Manchuria but reiterated that strict instructions
had been given by the military authorities in
Korea to confine their operations to the territory
of Korea. The possibility of such a mistake, he
said, emphasized the desirability of sending a
United Nations Commission to the area to make
an objective investigation of these charges.

Following its decision on August 29 to include
the Formosa item on the agenda, the Council re-
jected a Soviet proposal to invite "immediately,"
because of the distance involved, a representative
of the "Chinese Central People's Republic" to par-
ticipate in the Council discussion. Ambassador
Austin, although reserving judgment on the
merits of the proposal, said that the United States
could not agree to such exceptional treatment in
connection with this item and certainly not to
"premature" treatment of it. Ambassador T. F.
Tsiang of China vigorously opposed inclusion of
any item concerning Formosa and declared that
there was no United States aggression against
China.

Ambassador Malik on August 31 introduced a
resolution asking the Council to condemn the
"illegal acts of the Government of the United
States" and placing on it full responsibility for
the acts and the damage caused to the "People's
Republic of China" "and also for all the conse-
quences that may arise as the result of such acts."
The resolution also asks the Security Council to
call upon the United States to prohibit such illegal
acts violating Chinese sovereignty.

396

Department of State Bulletin

THE DEPARTMENT

The purpose of the Department's participation
in training institutions of the Armed Forces is
to enable diplomatic and military officers to engage
in joint study of political and strategic problems
affecting the national security.

Department and Foreign Service
Officers To Study at War Colleges

[Released to the press August IS]

Nineteen officers of the Department and Foreign
Service have been selected to attend the 1950-51
sessions of the National War College. In addi-
tion, three officers have been chosen to attend the
Naval War College, Newport, R.I.

Selections are as follows :

National War College

Maurice M. Bernbaum, first secretary of Embassy, Quito
John Willard Carrigan, counselor of Embassy, Caracas
Leonard J. Cromie, officer in charge of Greek Affairs,

Office of Greek, Turkish and Iranian Affairs
Edward A. Dow, Jr., acting United States representative,

United Nations Commission for Indonesia
James Espy, first secretary of Embassy, La Paz
Pulton Freeman, acting deputy director, Office of Chinese

Affairs
John W. Halderman, officer in charge of Pacific Settle-
ment Affairs, Office of United Nations Political and

Security Affairs
Warren S. Hunsberger, chief. Division of Research for

the Far East, Office of Intelligence Research
Philip W. Ireland, first secretary of Embassy, Cairo
Henry Koch, acting assistant chief, Division of German

Economic Affairs, Bureau of German Affairs
Cecil B. Lyon, counselor of Embassy, Warsaw
Roy M. Melbourne, officer in charge of Yugoslav Affairs,

Office of Eastern European Affairs
Jack D. Neal, associate chief, Division of Security, Office

of Controls
J. Graham Parsons, first secretary of Embassy, New

Delhi (also at Nepal)
Leonard H. Price, officer in charge, Caribbean Affairs,

Office of Middle American Affairs
David A. Roberston, politico-military adviser, Bureau of

Near Eastern, South Asian and African Affairs
Harry H. Schwartz, executive secretary, Policy Planning

Staff
Henry E. Stebbins, first secretary of Embassy, London
John M. Steeves, first secretary of Embassy, New Delhi

Carlisle H. Humelsine Confirmed as
Assistant Secretary

On July 26, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of Carlisle H. Humelsine to be an Assistant Secre-
tary of State.

Appointment of Officers

John F. Simmons as chief of protocol, effective July 20.

Marcus J. Gordon as executive director in the Interim
Office of Technical Cooperation and Development, effective
July 12.

President Submits Additional
Budget Estimates to Congress

On August 16 the President transmitted to the
Congress supplemental estimates of appropriation
for the fiscal year 1951 for the State, Interior, and
Treasury Departments totaling $7,110,669.

Additional appropriations requested for the De-
partment of State amount to $3,605,669. Of this
sum, $3,500,000 is to pay claims of civilian em-
ployees and contractors of the United States who
sustained personal property losses resulting from
the emergency evacuations from Korea. The sum
of $105,669 is to pay the United States share of
the cost of the Inter-American Tropical Tuna
Commission, which was established by a conven-
tion between the United States and Costa Rica,
signed May 31, 1949.

President Truman Appeals
Point 4 Appropriation

recently consul general at Saigon, [Released to the press by the White House August 25]

The President today sent the folloiving letter to Sam
Rayhurn, Speaker o/ the House of Representatives.

Dear Mr. Speaker: The importance of the
Point 4 appropriation in the struggle against
Communist imperialism cannot be overempha-
sized.

Although the amount involved is relatively
small in terms of dollars, the Point 4 Program
has come to be a symbol of hope for millions of
people all over the world. In countries where the
choice between Communist totalitarianism and the
free way of life is in the balance, this program can
tip the scales toward the way of freedom.

Naval War College

George M. Abbott,
Indochina

Robert H. S. Eakens, chief. Petroleum Policy Staff, Office
of International Trade Policy

Howard Elting, Jr., first secretary of Embassy, Welling-
ton, New Zealand

The Department participates in the operation
of the National War College by assigning a senior
diplomatic officer as deputy for foreign affairs.
Waldeniar J. Gallman, who was formerly Ambas-
sador to Poland, has been appointed to act in this
capacity. It is also assigning, as faculty adviser
on political affairs to the Air War College for the
1950-51 session, James Lampton Berry of the De-
partment's Policy Planning Staff.

September 4, 1950

397

The advance agents of the Communist conspir-
acy loudly promise the peoples of these countries
a better way of life. We know that communism
cannot deliver on these promises. We know that
the way of freedom actually can and will provide
a better life for people everywhere. But only
through such action as the Point 4 Program can
we demonstrate that fact in concrete and practical
terms.

If the reduction made by the conference com-
mittee in the amount appropriated by the Senate
for Point 4 is allowed to stand, it will largely de-
stroy the program's effectiveness. More than that,
it will be regarded throughout the world as evi-
dence that this country cannot be depended upon
to help the millions of people in the underdevel-
oped areas of the world in bettering their lot. This
attempt to save some 10 million dollars will do
more for the Communists in their attack on the
free world than hundreds of millions of dollars
of their own propaganda.

At a time when we are calling upon our young
men to go into battle in the cause of freedom, I
can conceive of no more tragic blunder than to
throw away this opportunity of doing so much to
strengthen the cause of freedom at such little cost.

to carry out such measures as may properly be
taken to strengthen within the framework of
existing quadripartite agreement the authority of i
the Austrian Government and to lighten the bur-
den of occupation on Austria to the greatest pos-
sible extent.

Ambassador Donnelly is a career diplomat who
has had a long and distinguished record of service
in Canada and Latin America. He was a mem-
ber of the United States delegation to the Rio
de Janeiro Confei'ence in 1947 and the Bogota
Conference in 1948, and, for the past 4 years, lie
has served brilliantly as United States Ambassa-
dor to Venezuela. I have selected Mr. Donnelly for
this new and challenging assignment because of
his long and outstanding record of public service
and achievement.

As Minister he will be accredited to the Aus-
trian Government and as High Commissioner,
he will represent the United States in the Allied
Commission for Austria. He will succeed John
G. Erhardt, now Ambassador to the Union of
South Africa, as Minister to Austria, and Lt. Gen.
Geoffrey Keyes, who will retire in October, as
High Commissioner. The United States occupa-
tion forces in Austria will be commanded by Maj.
Gen. Leroy Irwin.

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

Walter J. Donnelly Nominated
for Top Austrian Posts

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press by the White Souse August 24]

I am today sending to the Senate of the United
States the nomination of Walter J. Donnelly of
Washington, D.C., to be Envoy Extraordinary
and Minister Plenipotentiary of the United States
of America to Austria and concurrently United
States High Commissioner for Austria.

The designation of Mr. Donnelly is based on
the decision of the three Western Foreign Minis-
ters at their London meeting on May 18, 1950
"to proceed at an early date to appoint civilian
high commissioners in Austria in accordance with
the provisions of Article 9 of the Control Agree-
ment of June 28, 1946."

The Governments of the United Kingdom and
France have previously announced the appoint-
ments of Sir Harold Caccia and Jean Payard, re-
spectively.

The three Western powers have taken this step
because in the absence of an Austrian treaty —
blocked by the Soviet Union — they are determined

Christian Ravndal To Head

Mission to Paraguayan Inauguration

The Department of State announced on August
14 that President Truman has appointed Chris-
tian Ravndal, United States Ambassador to Uru-
guay, to head a special mission to attend the in-
auguration of Provisional President Frederico
Chaves of Paraguay at Asuncion on August 15.

The special mission includes : Archibald Ran-
dolph, United States Charge d'Affaires at Asun-
cion ; Brig. Gen. Burton Hovey, Air Attache to the
American Embassies at Buenos Aires and Asun-
cion; Col. Christian Clarke, Army Attache to the
American Embassies at Buenos Aires and Asun-
cion; Capt. W. A. Evans, Naval Attache to the
American Embassies at Buenos Aires and Asun-
cion; Hector C. Adams, Jr., Second Secretary to
the American Embassy at Asuncion ; and Robert J.
Redington, Second Secretary to the American
Embassy at Asuncion.

Consular Offices in Cuba To Resume
Visa Functions

[Released to the press August 24]

Shortly after the termination of hostilities in
World War II, the Department of State granted
a waiver of the nonimmigrant passport visa re-
quirements for native-born Cuban citizens pro-
ceeding to the United States from Cuba on busi-

398

Deparfmeni of Sfafe Bulletin

ness or pleasure visits of 29 days or less. In ac-
cordance with authority provided in section 30 of
the Alien Registration Act of 1940, this waiver
was granteei on the basis of an emergency ai"ising
from the lack of sufficient consular personnel and
facilities to handle the large volume of nonimmi-
gi'ant visa applications of Cubans desiring to enter
the United States for temporary stay. Under
this procedure, native-born Cuban citizens in pos-
session of a valid passport have been admitted to
the United States without a visa for a period not
to exceed 29 days.

Complaints have been voiced by the United
States immigration authorities regarding abuses
of the visa waiver privilege by persons Avho have
sought illegally to remain in the United States
in excess of the period for which they were ad-
mitted and by persons who, although inadmissible
under the immigration laws, may have utilized
the immigration waiver privilege as a means of
obtaining admission to the United States. The
Judiciary Committee of the United States Senate
has heard testimony on this subject during the
course of the present year, and the chairman of

Recent Re\eases— Continued from page S82

Economic Cooperation With Luxembourg Under Public
Law 472— SOth Congress, as amended. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 2030. Pub. 3771. 9 pp.
50.

Agreement between tlie United States and Luxem-
bourg amending agreement of July 3, 1948— Eftected
by exchange of notes signed at Washington January
17 and 19, 1950 ; entered into force January 19, 1950.

Economic Cooperation With Portugal Under Public
Law 472— SOth Congress, as amended. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 2033. Pub. 3827. 18 np.
100.

Agreement between the United States and Portugal
amending agreement of September 28, 1948 — Signed
at Lisbon February 14, 1950; entered into force Febru-
ary 14, 1950.

Foreign Consular OflBces in the United States, April 1,
1950. General Foreign Policy Series 24. Pub. 3833. 48
pp. 200.

Complete and official listing of the foreign consular
offices in the United States, together with their juris-
dictions and recognized personnel.

North Atlantic Ocean Weather Stations. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 2053. Pub. 3835. 26 pp
100.

Agreement between the United States and other gov-
ernments— Open for signature at London May 12-June
30, 1949 ; entered into force January 13, 1950.

d Vlutual Defense Assistance. Treaties and Other Inter-
national Acts Series 2014. Pub. 3850. 23 pp. 100.

the Committee, Pat McCarran, has publicly ex-
pressed serious concern over the operation of the
visa waiver procedure.

The Department of State has extended and will
continue to extend its full cooperation to the other
agencies of this Government in order to insure
full compliance with the immigration laws by per-
sons seeking to enter the United States. In the
case of those aliens desiring to travel from Cuba
to the United States who are not now required to
obtain a visa, the Department is prepared thi'ough
its consular offices in Cuba to undertake the usual
visa functions as soon as the necessary arrange-
ments can be made for that purpose.

Consular Offices

An American consular agency at Buenaventura, Co-
lombia was officially opened on j'uly 24, 1950 ; the consulate
closed July 22.

The American consulate at Patras, Greece was officially
closed on July 15, 1950.

An American consulate was established at Benghazi
(Bengasi), Libya on July 31.

Agreement between the United States and Luxem-
bourg— Signed at Washington January 27, 1950; en-
tered into force March 28, 1950.

Economic Cooperation With Ireland Under Public Law
472 — SOth Congress, as amended. Treaties and Other In-
ternational Acts Series 2027. Pub. 3857. 9 pp. 50.

Agreement between the United States and Ireland
amending agreement of June 28, 1948 — Effected by ex-
change of notes signed at Washington February 17,
and 18, 1950 ; entered into force February 18, 1950.

Exchange of Official Publications. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2058. Pub. 3865. 3 pp. 50.

Agreement between the United States and Switzer-
land— Effected by exchange of notes signed at Wash-
ington January 5 and February 24, 1950; entered into
force February 24, 1950.

Air Service — Facilities in the Philippines. Treaties
and other International Acts Series 2062. Pub. 3873. 5
pp. 50.

Agreement and exchange of notes between the United
States and the Republic of the Philippines — Signed at
Baguio March 16, 1950 ; entered into force March 16,
1950.

The Sterling Area, Sterling Accounts, and Sterling Bal-
ances. Economic Cooperation Series 27. Pub. 3914.
4 pp. Free.

A fact sheet defining terms and listing countries
concerned.

Atomic Energy

Policy Series 20.

and Foreign Policy. General Foreign
Pub. 3921. 5 pp. Free.

iepiember 4, 1950

A fact sheet summarizing the problems involved in the
international control of atomic energy, including the
U.N.-Soviet deadlock.

399

General Policy Page

Discussion of Korean Case in the Security
Council: Exposing Soviet Propaganda
Tactics. Statement by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin 370

Ambassador Jessup Answers Questions on

Korea 374

Death of Col. Unni Nayar in Korea .... 378

The Threat of Communist Imperialism. By

John C. Ross 380

Letter of Appreciation for Aid in Korean

Evacuation Sent to Norway 382

Two Congressmen Impressed With South

Korean Fighting Quality 382

Commissioner McCloy Refuses To Sign Sham

Peace Resolution 383

Jos6 de San Martin. Statement by the Pres-
ident 390

United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

The Report of the U.N. Special Committee on
the Balkans to the Fifth Session of the
General Assembly. By Harry N.
Howard

Discussion of Korean Case in the Security
Council: Exposing Soviet Propaganda
Tactics. Statement by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin

U.N. Consideration of Formosa Possible
Agenda Item. Statement by Michael J.
McDermott

The United States in the United Nations . .

363

370

395
396

international Information
and Cultural Affairs

Fostering International Understanding: Third
Semiannual Report on Educational Ex-
change, July to December 1949 .... 385

Anonymous Dollar Contribution to Voice of

America 386

Voice of America Extends Korean and

Cantonese Programs 387

CBS Official Named Consultant for "Cam-
paign of Truth" Program 387

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S 387

Americans Visiting Abroad 387

Earl J. McGrath Heads Educational Mission

to Israel 395

Occupation Matters

Press Reports on West German Remilitariza-
tion Inaccurate. Statement by Secretary
Acheson 383

Extrusion Press From Reparation Agency

Offered for Sale 384

Western European Defense Includes German
Participation and Security. Statement
by Commissioner McCloy 384

Occupation Matters — Continued page

Books Given BerHn Medical Institutes . . . 384
Mutual Defense Survey Mission To Visit

Portugal on Aid Program 390

Treaty Information

President Truman Urges Senate Approval of
Genocide Convention in View of Korean
Crisis 379

U.S.-U.K. Cancel Agreement on Extension of

Time for Copyright 388

Pacific Port Privileges Extended for Canadian

Halibut Fishermen 388

Notice of U.S. Ratification of Four Conven-
tions Sent to U.N 389

Road Convention Ratified 389

U.S. Navy Personnel To Serve as Advisory

Mission in Venezuela 390

International Organizations
and Conferences

Calendar of Meetings 391

Sixth Session of European Customs Union
Study Group: Press Communique of

July 28 393

U.S. Delegation to Fifth Session of the
General Assembly. Statement by the
President 394

Technical Assistance

President Truman Appeals Point 4 Appropria-
tion 397

The Congress

Legislation 369

Department Expresses Regrets on Revised
Senate Coffee Report. Statement by
Secretary Acheson 388

The Department

Department and Foreign Service Officers To

Study at War Colleges 397

Carlisle H. Humelsine Confirmed as Assistant

Secretary 397

Appointment of Officers 397

President Submits Additional Budget Esti-
mates to Congress 397

The Foreign Service

Walter J. Donnelly Nominated for Top
Austrian Posts. Statement by the Presi-
dent 398

Christian Ravndal To Head Mission to Para-
guayan Inauguration 398

Consular Offices in Cuba To Resume Visa

Functions 398

Consular Offices 399

Publications

Recent Releases 382

■. S. aOVERHHENT PRINTING OFFICE! 1950

iJ/i€/ ^ehcf/y^tmmii/ aw t/va^

-^j

AIMS AND OBJECTIVES IN RESISTING AGGRES-
SION IN KOREA • Address by the President 407

REPORT OF THE UNITED NATIONS COMMAND

OPERATIONS IN KOREA 403

USIE CAPITALIZES ON SOVIET PROPAGANDA

BLUNDERS • By Assistant Secretary Barrett 414

GERMANY— THE CENTER OF A MAELSTROM OF

INTERESTS O By Henry Byroade 426

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 584
September 11, 1950

..<'^"'*.,

%/ne zi^^ut/yim^&n^ ^^ c/tale

bulletin

Vol. XXIII, No. 584 • Publication 3957
September 11,1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Qovernment Printing Office

Wasliington 26, D.O.

Price:

S2 issues, domestic $6, foreign $3.60

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has

been approved by the Director of the

Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Dbpabtuent
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a tveekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

REPORT OF THE UNITED NATIONS COMMAND OPERATIONS IN KOREA

For the Period of August 1-15, 1950 ^

U.N doc. S/1756
Transmitted Sept. 2. 1950

I herewith submit report number three of the
United Nations Command Operations in Korea for
the period 1 to 15 August, inchisive. Details of
these operations are contained in Eighth Army
Communiques numbered 13 to 40 inclusive and
Korean releases numbered 178 to 253.

A general description of the operations for the
period is as follows :

Enemy action during the period was charac-
terized by a rapid follow-up of United Nations
withdrawals and a tightening of the squeeze of the
lodgement area in southeastern Korea. Two
major penetrations of the United Nations position
were effected and maintained during the period,
and at the close of the period a third potential
penetration loomed as the result of a progressive
enemy concentration.

Along the south coast, enemy forces drove
through Chinju on the 1st of August and contained
a two-pronged attack in the direction of Masan,
ivith two major units, the north Korean 4tli and
th Divisions. The deepest penetration in this
iector was reached on the 6th of the month when
lorth Korean forces were stopped eight miles west
)f Mason by a United Nations counter-offensive.
Task force Kean launched the firet United Nations
ittack in this sector at 0630 on 7 August. This
"orce consisted of the 25th United States Infantry
Division, the 5th United States Regimental Com-
)at Team, the 1st United States Provisional Ma-
ine Brigade, and a Republic of Korea force of
)attalion size. The purpose of this attack was to
•emove the southern threat to the Pusan base and
secure suitable defense areas. The attack pro-

' Transmitted to the Security Council by Ambassador
iVarren R. Austin, U.S. representative in the Security
!!!ouncil, on Sept. 2.

eptember 11, 1950

gressed smoothly and efficiently with minimum
losses to United Nations forces. All units reached
their objectives by 13 August after having ad-
vanced about twenty miles. This attack not only
secured the southern approaches to the beachhead,
but also showed that the north Korean forces will
not hold under attack. The "withdrawal" of some
of the north Korean 6th Division miits became a
full retreat. Much north Korean equipment was
abandoned to United Nations forces during this
operation.

To the north of this sector, in the early part of
the period, the operations of United Nations forces
followed the trend reported in my previous reports.
Units were on extended fronts of fifteen-thirty
miles per division, with light liaison only possible
between units. Penetration and infiltration could
not be prevented, and a strategic withdrawal be-
came necessary. On the night of 2-3 August, the
United States 1st Cavalry and 24th Infantry
Divisions conducted an orderly planned with-
drawal of about twenty miles to the NaMong
River line. Tlie enemy advanced east from Ko-
cliang to close on the Naktong River line by the
4th of August. Patrols of this force, identified
as the 4th Division, probed up and down the
river line under the cover of an artillery duel. On
the 6th of the month, the enemy selected his cross-
ing site at a bend in the river eight miles south of
Pugong-n.

Crossings began on the night of the 6th, and by
the 8th the enemy had pushed one regiment into
the bridgehead in the face of repeated local coun-
ter-attacks. By the 14th of the month the enemy
had pushed probably the bulk of his division into
this bridgehead at great cost in casualties.

403

In the central part of the sector, generally
astride the Kumchon-Taegu axis, the enemy drove
hard against Kumchon from three directions on
August 1, and then promptly followed the
planned United Nations withdrawals from the
area. The enemy used his front-line pre-war divi-
sions in this area, the veteran 2nd, 3rd, and 1st
Divisions. The significance of these dispositions
is best portrayed in a comparison of frontages,
the Republic of Korea 1st Division held a front
of twelve miles while its neighbor to the south,
the 1st Cavalry Division covering Taegu, held a
front of twenty-eight miles, in a disposition of
regiments abreast along the river front. This dis-
crepancy of numerical and tactical strength which
was critical from the beginning of the campaign
has improved slightly but never to a point of se-
curity for the United Nations forces. They are
compelled to continue the fight at great odds.

By the 4th of the month, the enemy closed on
the Naktong River line opposite Waegwan and
again, as in the south, began probing for a crossing
site. Twenty miles southwest of Taegu a small
enemy force filtered across the river and disap-
peared into the hills before it could be destroyed.
Northwest of Taegu, at Waegwan, the enemy
pushed two battalions across on the 8th of the
month. The next day the 1st United States
Cavalry Division and 1st Republic of Korea
Division attacked and forced the enemy to evacu-
ate the remnants of this force to the west bank of
the river. When the enemy deployment termi-
nated, an estimated five divisions were employed in
this sector, and, near the end of the period, there
were indications of a general concentration of
forces across the river from Waegwan in prepara-
tion for heavy assault.

Against the northern part of the line, the enemy
drove down the Chungju-Taegu axis and the
Yonju-Andong axis with a total of three divisions,
the 13th, 15th, and 8th Divisions. Under this
attack and to preserve the continuity of the line
with the withdrawal of United States forces
described above, it was necessary to direct the
I and II ROK Corps to withdraw to better
defensive positions. The Republic of Korea Army
withdrawal was conducted in an orderly fashion
on the successive nights of 2-3 and 3-4 August.
Hamchang and Andong were secured by the enemy
on the 3d, and the parallel drives continued against
the stiffening resistance of the Republic of Korea
forces in this sector. Three Enemy regiments con-

centrated in an attack from Yonggi-dong on the
9th and drove as far as Kunwi, twenty-five miles
north of Taegu but were forced to withdraw in
the face of United Nations counter-attacks on the
11th to a general line through Uisong. Republic
of Korea forces conducted their defense operations
with determination and inflicted heavy losses on
the attackers.

On the east coast, the town of Yongdok changed
hands twice during the period. On the 3rd of
the month, the enemy lost the town to attacking
forces of the 3rd ROK Division, but, by the
lOtli, he had built up his forces in the area suffi-
ciently to retake the town and drive a few thou-
sand yards south. Inland from the Yongdok-Po-
hang-dong axis an enemy force of two regiments,
later identified as elements of the 12th Divi-
sion, filtered through the rugged mountain trails
over a period of days. By the 9th, this force
reached the general vicinity of Kigye, ten miles
west of Pohang-dong and, by the 12th of the
month, had entered Pohang-dong and had driven
within mortar range of the United Nations airfield
in that vicinity. By the 10th of August, this threat
was considered sufficiently serious to again read-
just the Republic of Korea and some United States
Army Forces. This readjustment resulted in an-
other local withdrawal to the line : Kunwi, Kusan-
dong, Changsa-dong.

At the end of the period, the hard-pressed enemy
4th Division retained its bridgehead across the
Naktong River west of Yongsan. On the east
flank, the enemy continued to draw off United Na-
tions forces in the east by his deep penetration
to Pohang-dong, and slowly concentrated his
forces northwest of Taegu poised for a final drive
to Taegu and Pusan. Enemy committed forces
now consist of twelve fully identified divisions
with a possibility of two additional.

In the enemy rear areas, a large troop concen-
tration was reported near the northeastern border
of Korea indicating possible recruitment of
Koreans from southeastern Manchuria.

Augmentation of United Nations forces in
Korea during this period included the 2nd United
States Infantry Division and the 1st United States
Provisional Marine Brigade from the United
States, the 5th United States Regimental Combat
Team from Hawaii and an increase in United
States combat and service support units. Dur-
ing the close of the period, a material num-
ber of United States tank units were arriving

404

Department of State Bulletin

and will soon be ready to enter combat. The
Republic of Korea Ancj' continued to improve
its orjranization and combat effectiveness. Several
new ROK infantry regiments that had been
previously activated and undergoing training
were ready and committed to combat during the
period. The Republic of Korea Army is showing
determination and gallantry in the defense of its
country, and developing increased tactical skill
and maneuverability. Tliere are still no United
Nations ground units assisting the Republic of
Korea in Korea except United States Army and
Marine units. These units continue their gallant
and effective action although heavily outnumbered
and reflect their excellent peacetime training.

The information I have received on the size and
type of units offered by Member Nations shows a
united and determined spirit in the nations of the
United Nations to repel the invader of the Repub-
lic of Korea that is gratifying. I still feel it my
duty to report to you that contributions must be
forthcoming without delay if this threat to inter-
national security is to be resolved promptly.

Naval Activities Intensified

United Nations Naval Forces, now comprising
warships from eight nations, are operating under
the control of the United Nations Naval Com-
mander, Vice Admiral C. T. Joy. The co-ordinated
efficiency of this command is an exemplary oper-
ation in proving the ability of the United Nations
to quickly assemble their naval strength in dis-
tant areas and operate jointly with great effective-
ness. Such a co-ordination of naval strength by
so many nations in an area so far distant from
home naval bases is unparalleled in history. Re-
cent augmentations to this formidable force have
included significant additions of United States air-
craft carriers.

These naval forces have been continuously
engaged in their tasks with ever increasing effec-
tiveness. To meet the threat of increasing num-
bers of troops and supplies coming from the
northernmost regions of Korea, naval aircraft
have been employed in interdiction missions to
disrupt rail and road facilities and road networks.
Naval aircraft have also been employed with excel-
lent results on north Korean strategic targets
including barracks, oil installations, factories,
warehouses, power stations, marshalling yards,
and railroad stations, vehicle and supply concen-
trations. In close support of the Infantry, naval

aircraft operating in almost continuous applica-
tion, and guided by ground controllers, have found
a great number of various military targets in the
battle area. At sea, naval aircraft have ranged the
coasts, striking military targets along the enemy
lines of water communications.

Naval surface craft have continued the constant
patrol and interdiction of enemy water, rail, and
highway movement along both coasts. On the
east coast, cruisers and destroyers have been bom-
barding as called for and in direct support of the
Infantry, in addition to their patrol functions.

Naval escort of troop ships and shipping con-
tinues to guarantee arrival of additional men and
supplies in the battle area and safe evacuation and
care of wounded.

United Nations Naval Forces were virtually un-
hampered by the enemy. On the 2nd of August,
a duel between an enemy shore battery and a
destroyer cost the enemy his shore battery.

Problems of Identification Difficult

Since the enemy is apparently forcing civilian
labor to his use, problems of identification have
become difficult. At sea, the enemy is using every
available craft, but United Nations forces in close
co-ordination with the South Korea Navy are mak-
ing every effort toward proper identification in
order to allow continuance of innocent fishing.
On land, civilians are carrying supplies in push-
carts and donkey carts which burn and explode
when strafed. The enemy hides vast quantities of
military equipment in civilian dwellings, resulting
in the necessity to fire and destroy such dwellings
when such information is firm. However, the
problem of avoiding the killing of innocent civil-
ians and damages to the civilian economy is con-
tinually present and given my personal attention.
Tlie United Nations foi'ces are urgently endeavor-
ing to restrict destruction to the established mili-
tary forces of the invader.

Air Forces Whittle at Enemy Potential

United States Far East Air Force medium
bombers struck heavy blows at north Korean in-
dustrial targets of military significance and at the
north Korean transportation system. The Ko-
rean manufacturing complex, the largest in the
Far East, and the oil refinei-y at Wonsan, have
been extensively damaged by successive attacks.
The marshalling yards in Pyongyang, Wonsan,
and Seoul have been repeatedly attacked, as have

September 17, 1950

405

yards of levSS consequence. A general transporta-
tion interdiction program continues with destruc-
tion of rail and highway bridges along principal
lines of communication. The rail and port trans-
portation center at Najin-dong was also bombed.

A heavy toll of north Korean troop and materiel
strength is being taken by the Far East Air Force
light bombers and fighters and by Koyal Aus-
tralian Air Force fighters in close ground support
action. From three hundred to five hundred sor-
ties are now flown daily by United Nations Air
Forces committed to action in Korea.

The intensity of night intruder missions by
fighters and light bombers has been stepped up
with gratifying results.

Against United Nations air activity the enemy
still refuses to send his diminishing air force
aloft in strength greater than one or two planes at
a time. The enemy lost a total of fourteen aircraft
destroyed with additional numbers damaged hut
managed to increase somewhat the volume and
effectiveness of his anti-aircraft fire.

Prisoners of War Well Treated

During the period, a total of four hundred sixty-
four north Korean prisoners were taken by United
Nations Forces. This brings the total collected to
date to seven hundred nineteen. I have extended
the proclamation I issued as Commander-in-Chief
of all United States Forces in the Far East witli
regard to treatment of prisoners so that it now ap-
plies to all forces of the United Nations Command.
I have accepted Mr. Frederick Bieri, International
Red Cross, as an accredited delegate to this com-
mand under Paragraph 3, Article 10, and Para-
graph 4, Article 26 of the Geneva Convention rela-
tive to treatment of prisoners of war, 12th August
1949. Mr. Bieri has been provided logistic sup-
port in Korea and given full opportunity to carry
out his mission. Mr. Bieri's reports show clearly
that the orders for compliance with the Geneva
Prisoner of War Convention are being carried out.
Mr. Bieri's reports prove to the world that the
discipline and treatment of prisoners of war are
excellent in the United Nations Command prisoner
of war collecting points, enclosures, and camps.
Capture cards are mailed to Geneva promptly. In
addition, I have established a branch Prisoner of
War Information Bureau in the Provost Mar-
shal's Section of the United Nations Command
where all required data in regard to enemy pris-
oners of war is recorded and copies transmitted

406

through Washington to the International Com-
mittee of the Red Cross in Geneva.

Koreans Kept Informed

United Nations radio broadcasts and air-
dropped leaflets are the only major channels of ac-
curate information still open to the Korean people.
An additional 2,230,000 leaflets and news sheets,
making a grand total of 27,230,000, have been
dropped by aircraft over north Korean and oc-
cupied territory, and regular broadcasts totaling
two and one-half hours continue daily. Tlie high-
est priority is being given to messages designed to
save human life. Civilians are warned daily to
move away from militai-y targets that must be
bombed. North Korean soldiers are being in-
formed of the humane treatment guaranteed them
as prisonei-s of war and encouraged to lay down
their arms and abandon the cause of aggression.
Despite communist tactics of terror and intimida-
tion to prevent reception of these leaflets and radio
messages, there is increasing evidence of their
effectiveness among those whom the communists
have so ruthlessly denied access to the truth.

Summary

Army. — United Nations Army forces are still
out-numbered and hence were required to conduct
some strategic withdrawals. The United Nations
base area has been correspondingly reduced. The
fluid conditions of the ground combat have been
considerably stabilized. The United Nations
treatment of prisoners of war conforms with the
Geneva Convention.

Navy. — United Nations Naval Forces continue
their important missions with increased effective-
ness. In both naval and air operations strict
measures are enforced to insure no attacks against
innocent civilians or needless destruction of the
civilian economy of either Republic of Korea or
nortli Korea.

Air. — United Nations air power is growing in
strength and effectiveness particularly in the capa-
bilities of the bombers. Co-ordination between
ground and air units is improving the effectiveness
of Air Forces in close support of the ground units.

Conclusion. — I am glad to report that during
this period the cohesion displayed by the United
Nations Forces of this Command has proven the
validity of the United Nations concept for peace.
My gravest concern is for a prompt build-up of now
outnumbered ground forces of this command.

Department of State Bulletin

Aims and Objectives in Resisting Aggression in Korea

Address by the President '

Tonight, I ■want to talk to you about Korea,
about why we are there, and what our objectives
are.

As I talk with you, thousands of families in this
land of ours have a son, or a brother, or a husband
Ighting in Korea. I know that your thoughts and
opes are contantly with them — and so are mine.

These men of ours are engaged once more in the
age-old struggle for human liberty. Our men,
and the men of other free nations, are defending
"with their lives the cause of freedom in the world.
They are fighting for the proposition that peace
shall be the law of this earth.

We must and shall support them with every
ounce of our strength and with all our hearts.
We shall put aside all else for this supreme duty.

No cause has ever been more just or more
important.

For the first time in all history, men of many
nations are fighting under a single banner to up-
hold the rule of law in the world. This is an
inspiring fact.

If the rule of law is not upheld, we can look
forward only to the horror of another world war
and ultimate chaos. For our part, we do not
intend to let that happen.

Two Courses Faced by Free World

Two months ago, Communist imperialism turned
from the familiar tactics of infiltration and sub-
version to a brutal attack on the small Republic of
Korea. When that happened, the free and peace-
loving nations of the world faced two possible
courses.

One course would have been to limit our action
to diplomatic protests, while the Communist
aggressors went ahead and swallowed up their
victim. That would have been the course of
appeasement. If the history of the 1930's teaches

'■ Delivered by radio from the White House on Sept. 1 and
released to the press by the White House on the same date.

US anything, it is that appeasement of dictators is
the sure road to world war. If aggression were
allowed to succeed in Korea, it would be an open
invitation to new acts of aggression elsewhere.

The other course is the one which the free world
chose. The United Nations made its historic de-
cision to meet military aggression with armed
force. The eifects of that decision will be felt far
beyond Korea. The firm action taken by the
United Nations is our best hope of achieving world
peace.

It is your liberty and mine which is involved.
Wliat is at stake is the free way of life — the right
to worship as we please, the right to express our
opinions, the right to raise our children in our
own way, the right to choose our jobs, the right to
plan our own future, and the right to live without
fear. All these are bound up in the present action
of the United Nations to put down aggression in
Korea.

We cannot hope to maintain our own freedom
if freedom elsewhere is wiped out. That is why
the Aerican people are united in support of our
part in tliis task.

During the last 5 years, we have worked day in
and day out to achieve a just and lasting peace.
We have given every possible proof of our desire
to live at peace with all nations. We have worked
for liberty and self-government for people the
world over. Most nations have joined with us in
this effort, but the Soviet Union and the nations it
controls have unceasingly hampered all eflForts to
achieve a just peace.

The Soviet Union has repeatedly violated its
pledges of international cooperation. It has
destroyed the independence of its neighbors. It
has sought to disrupt those countries it could not
dominate. It has built up tremendous armed
forces far beyond the needs of its own defense.

Communist imperialism preaches peace but
practices aggression.

In these circumstances, the free nations have
been compelled to take measures to protect them-

Sep/ember II, 1950

407

selves against the aggressive designs of the Com-
munists.

Tlie United Nations was able to act as it did in
Korea because the free nations in the years since
World War II have created a common determina-
tion to work together for peace and freedom.

Every American can be justly proud of the role
that our country has played in bringing this about.

Record]To Create Unity Among Free Nations

We have taken the lead in step after step to
create unity and strength among the free nations.
The record of these steps is impressive. Let me
recall some of them to you.

In 1945, we helped to bring the United Nations
into existence at San Francisco.

In 1946, the United States gave its full support
to the successful action taken by the United
Nations to jjrotect Iran against Communist
invasion.

In 1947, we began our military and economic aid
to Greece and Turkey, which has helped those
countries to keep their independence against Com-
munist attacks and threats.

Also in 1947, by the treaty of Rio de Janeiro,
we joined with the other American nations to
guarantee the safety of the Westei'n Hemisphere.

In 1948, the Marshall Plan checked the clanger
of Communist subversion in Europe; and, since
that time, it has brought the free nations more
closely together in a strong economic framework.

The Berlin airlift, in 1948 and 1949, defeated
the Soviet effort to drive the free nations out of
the democratic outpost of western Berlin.

The North Atlantic Treaty, in 1949, served
notice that the nations of the North Atlantic com-
munity would stand together to preserve their
freedom.

Today, in 1950, we are going ahead with an
enlarged program for military aid to strengthen
the common defense of free nations.

Step by step, these achievements in the struggle
between freedom and Communist imperialism
have brought the free nations closer together.

When the Communist movement turned to open,
armed aggression in Korea, the response of the
free nations was immediate.

Fifty-three of the fifty-nine members of the
United Nations joined in meeting the challenge.
Thirty have already pledged concrete aid to the
United Nations to put down this aggression.

Thus far, the brunt of the fighting has fallen
upon the armed forces of the Republic of Korea
and the United States. In addition, naval forces
from Australia, Canada, France, Great Britain,
the Netherlands, and New Zealand have been and
are now in action under the United Nations com-
mand. Fighting planes from Australia, Canada,
and Great Britain have joined the operation.

Ground forces have been offered by Thailand,
the Philippines, Turkey, Australia, France, and

other countries. Some British troops have landed
in Korea and more are on their way. All of these
will serve under the flag of the United Nations
and under the United Nations Commander, Gen-
eral MacArthur.

Our own men, with their gallant Korean com-
rades, have held the breach. In less than 8 weeks,
five divisions of United States troops have moved
into combat, some of them from bases more than
6,000 miles away. More men are on the way.
Fighting in difficult country, under every kind of
hardship, American troops have held back over-
whelming numbers of the Communist invaders.
Our naval and air forces have been carrying the
attack to the military bases and supply lines of the
aggressors.

Our men have fought with grim gallantry. All
of us, especially those of us who are old soldiers,
know how worthy they are of a place on that long
and honored roll of those who created and pre-
served liberty for our country.

Tlie soldiers of the Republic of Korea have been
fighting fiercely for their own freedom.

The determination of the South Koreans to
maintain their independence is shown not only by
the valor of their soldiers in the battle line but
also by countless supporting activities of the whole
population. They are giving every possible as-
sistance to the United Nations forces.

These United Nations troops are still outnum-
bered. But their hard and valiant fight is bring-
ing results. We hold a firm base of about 3,500
square miles. For weeks, the enemy has been ham-
mering, now at one spot, now at another, some-
times at many points at once. He has been beaten
back each time with heavy loss.

The enemy is spending his strength recklessly
in desperate attacks. We believe the invasion has
reached its peak. The task remaining is to crush
it. Our men are confident, the United Nations
command is confident, that it will be crushed. The
power to do this is being gathered in Korea.

Right now, the battle in Korea is the front line
in the struggle between freedom and tyranny.
But the fighting there is part of a larger struggle
to build a world in which a just and lasting peace
can be maintained.

That is why we in the United States must in-
crease our own defensive strength over and above
the forces we need in Korea. That is why we must
continue to work with other free nations to in-
crease our combined strength.

The Congress is now acting on my request to
increase our program of arms aid to other free
countries. These nations are greatly increasing
their own efforts. Our aid is not a substitute but
is an addition to what they themselves do.

In Western Europe alone, there are over 200
million people. Next to ours, their industry is
the world's greatest workshop. They are joining
with us to develop collective forces for mutual
defense — our defense as well as their own.

408

Department of State Bulletin

U.S. — Key Element in Strength

The armed forces of tho United States are a key
element in the strength of the free world. In view
of the threats of aggression which now face us,
we shall have to increase these forces, and we shall
have to maintain larger forces for a long time to
come.

We have had about II/2 million men and women
on active duty in our Army, Navy, and Air Force.
Our present plans call for increasing this number
to close to 3 million, and further increases may
be i-equired.

In addition to increasing the size of our armed
f oi'ces, we must step up sharply the production of
giuis. tanks, planes, and other military equipment.
We shall also have to increase our stockpile of
essential materials, and expand our industrial
capacity to produce military supplies.

We have the ability and the resources to meet
the demands which confront us. Our industry
and agriculture have never been stronger or more
productive. We will use as much of this economic
strength as is needed to defend ourselves and
establish peace.

Hitler and the Japanese generals miscalculated
badly, 10 years ago, when they thought we would
not be able to use our economic power effectively
for the defeat of aggression.

Let would-be aggressors make no such mistake
today.

We now have over 62 million men and women
employed — more than we have ever had before.
Our farmers are producing over 20 percent more
than they were in 1940. The productive capacity
of our manufacturing industry is 60 percent great-
er than it was 10 years ago, when the Axis dic-
tators threatened the world.

We must now divert a large share of this pro-
ductive power to defense purposes. To do this
will require hard work and sacrifice by all of us.
I know all of us are pi'epared to do whatever is
necessary in the cause of peace and fi'eedom. We
have never j^et failed to give all that is needed in
that cause, and we never will.

In order to increase our defense effort rapidly
enough to meet the danger that we face, we shall
have to make many changes in our way of living
and working here at home. We shall have to give
up many things we enjoy. We shall all have to
work harder and longer. To prevent inflation
and runaway prices, we shall have to impose cer-
tain restrictions upon ourselves.

The Congress has today completed action on
legislation to enable us to channel the necessary
effort to defense production, to increase our pro-
ductive capacity, and to hold down inflation.

After this legislation is signed, I intend to talk
to you again, to explain what your Government
proposes to do, and how each citizen can play his
part in this national effort.

As we move forward to arm ourselves more
quickly in the days ahead and as we strive with

the United Nations for victory in Korea, we must
keep clearly in mind what we believe in and what
we are trying to do. We also want the rest of the
world to understand clearly our aims and our
hopes.

Statement of U.S. Aims and Policy

First: We believe in the United Nations.
When we ratified its Charter, we pledged our-
selves to seek peace and security through this
world organization. We kept our word when we
went to the support of the United Nations in
Korea 2 months ago. We shall never go back on
that pledge.

Second : We believe the Koreans have a right to
be free, independent, and united — as they want to
be. Under the direction and guidance of the
United Nations, we, with others, will do our part
to help them enjoy that right. The United States
has no other aim in Korea.

Third : We do not want the fighting in Korea to
expand into a general war. It will not spread
unless Communist imperialism draws other armies
and governments into the fight of the aggressors
against the United Nations.

Fourth : We hope in particular that the people
of China will not be misled or forced into fighting
against the United Nations and against the Amer-
ican people, who have always been and still are
their friends. Only the Communist imperialism,
which has already started to dismember China,
could gain from China's involvement in war.

Fifth : We do not want Formosa or any part of
Asia for ourselves. We believe that the future
of Formosa, like that of any other territory in dis-
pute, should be settled peacefully. We believe
that it should be settled by international action
and not by the decision of the United States or of
any other state alone. The mission of the Seventh
Fleet is to keep Formosa out of the conflict. Our
purpose is peace, not conquest.

Sixth: We believe in freedom for all the na-
tions of the Far East. That is one of the reasons
why we are fighting under the United Nations for
the freedom of Korea. We helped the Philippines
become independent, and we have supported the
national aspirations to independence of other
Asian countries. Russia has never voluntarily
given up any territory it has acquired in the Far
East; it has never given independence to any
people who have fallen under its control. We not
only want freedom for the peoples of Asia but we
also want to help them secure for themselves bet-
ter health, more food, better clothes and homes,
and the chance to live their own lives in peace.
The things we want for the people of Asia are
the same things we want for the people of the
rest of the world.

Seventh : We do not believe in aggressive or
preventive war. Such war is the weapon of dic-
tators, not of free democratic countries like the
United States. We are arming only for defense

September ?7, 1950

409

against aggression. Even though Communist
imperialism does not believe in peace, it can be
discouraged from new aggression if we and other
free peoples are strong, determined, and united.

Eighth : We want peace and we shall achieve it.
Our men are fighting for peace today in Korea.
We are working for peace constantly in the United
Nations and in all the capitals of the world. Our
workers, our farmers, our businessmen, all our
vast resources, are helping now to create the
strength which will make peace secure.

We want peace not only for its own sake but
because we want all the peoples of the world,
including ourselves, to be free to devote their full
energies to making their lives richer and happier.
We shall give what help we can to make this
universal human wish come true.

We invite all the nations of the world, without
exception, to join with us in this great work.

The events in Korea have shown us again all the
misery and horrors of war. The North Koreans

have learned that the penalties of armed conflict
fall as heavily on those who act as tools for the '
Communist dictatoi-ship as they do on its victims.
There will be no profit for any people who follow
the Communist dictatorship down its dark and
bloody path.

Against the futile and tragic course of dictator-
ship, we uphold, for all people, the way of free-
dom— the way of mutual cooperation and inter-
national peace. We assert that mankind can find
progress and advancement along the path of peace.
At this critical hour in the history of the world,
our country has been called upon to give of its
leadership, its efforts, and its resources, to main-
tain peace and justice among nations. We have
responded to that call. We will not fail.

The task which has fallen upon our beloved
country is a great one. In carrying it out, we ask
God to purge us of all selfishness and meanness
and to give us strength and courage for the days
ahead.

Members of UNESCO Executive Board Condemn Aggression in Korea

STATEMENT BY SECRETARY ACHESON

[Released to the press August 30]

The members of the Unesco Executive Board
meeting in Paris have unanimously condemned
the attack on the Republic of Korea. The Board
approved a program of education explaining the
responsibilities of the United Nations in the pres-
ent world situation and has called on "all those
who wish to live in peace to contribute to the de-
fenses of peace."

The action of Unesco will have a powerful in-
fluence among teachers, writers, and other leaders
of thought and opinion throughout the world,
particularly in many of the areas where the na-
ture of the brutal assault on Korea has been ob-
scured or distorted by Communist propaganda.
It recognizes that such aggression threatens the
whole pattern of international cooperation which
has been constructed through the United Nations.

I also would like to call attention to the state-
ment of Luther H. Evans, Librarian of Congress
and a member of the Unesco Executive Board.
Dr. Evans spoke as an individual, but he voiced
the attitude of the citizen leaders of the Unesco
movement throughout the United States. His 17
colleagues on the Board, of as many different

' Made at a special meeting of the Executive Board of
UNESCO at Paris on Aug. 28 and released to the press on
the same date.

nationalities, also, doubtless reflect the views of
their peoples.

STATEMENT BY LUTHER H. EVANS'

The United Nations has called on its member
nations to repel the armed attack on the Republic
of Korea. In doing this, it has taken an historic
step — transforming the hope of outlawing aggres-
sion into the determination to defeat such ag-
gression.

Institutions, like men, have a purpose in life,
else there is no reason for their existence. The
United Nations was created by the peoples of the
world for certain purposes proclaimed in
the Charter. The preeminent purpose is to
strengthen peace and prevent aggression.

When peace was wantonly broken in Korea by
the deliberate aggression of armed forces, the
United Nations was challenged to justify its ex-
istence. It met that critical test by ranging the
forces of justice against the aggressor. By that
act the United Nations became, in fact as well as
in name, the defender of the peace.

The purposes of Unesco are set forth in its con-
stitution. Foremost among these is the purpose
to contribute to peace and security by furthering
universal respect for justice, for tlie rule of law,
and for the human rights and fundamental free-

410

Departmenf of Sfafe Bulletin

doms affirmed for all peoples by the Charter of
the United Nations. Those are the very princi-
ples which the United Nations is fighting to up-
hold in Korea, a member of Unesco.

The duty of Unesco is plain. It must fulfill
its obligation to the United Nations by explaining
to the peoples of the world, with the help of
teachers, scholars, writers, and other leaders in
the communication of knowledge and ideas, that
the issue in Korea is clearly drawn between the
defense of peace and permitting brute aggres-

sion to succeed. It must help create throughout
the world an understanding of the vital role that
the United Nations has assumed in Korea and the
responsibilities it faces in other areas of possible
aggression. Naturally, Unesco must also do its
full part in rebuilding the shattered life of the
Korean nation.

The United Nations has spoken for the con-
science of mankind. Unesco can have no greater
task than to uphold the United Nations as the
defender of peace. Let us get on with the task !

osition on the Formosan Question

LETTER FROM AMBASSADOR AUSTIN
TO SECRETARY-GENERAL LIE

[Rrlcased to the press August 25
hii the U.S. Mission to the D.N.]

FoUoiving is the text of a letter sent to the Secretary-
t!< iivral of the United Nations, Trygve Lie, iy the United
^tiitrs representative to the United Nations, Amhassador
Warren R. Austin.

There has been circulated to members of the
Security Council a paper which charges the United
States with aggression against Formosa. The
[5:iper asks the Security Council to consider the
question of Formosa.

The United States Government does not intend

to discuss at this time this paper or the ridiculous

falsehoods which it contains. It does wish to take

Ills occasion to make a further statement about the

Formosan question.

On June 27 the United States representative
lead at the Security Council the following state-
ment of the President of the United States : ^

In Korea the Government forces, which were armed to
prevent border raids and to preserve internal security,
ui'ie attacked by invadins forces from North Korea.
riie Security Council of the United Nations called upon the
invading troops to cease hostilities and to withdraw to
,tlie 3Sth parallel. This they have not done but, on the
ontrary, have pressed the attack. The Security Council
called upon all members of the United Nations to render
every assistance to the United Nations in the execution
of this resolution. In these circumstances, I have ordered
United States air and sea forces to give the Korean Gov-
ernment troops cover and support.

The attack upon Korea makes it plain beyond all
doubt that communism has passed beyond the use of sub-
version to conquer independent nations, and will now use
armed invasion and war. It has defied the orders of
the Security Council of the United Nations, issued to

' See also Bulletin of July 3, 1950, p. 5.
September 17, 7950

preserve international peace and security. In these cir-
cumstances, the occupation of Formosa by Communist
forces would be a direct threat to the security of the Pacific
area and to United States forces performing their lawful
and necessary functions in tliat area.

Accordingly, I have ordered the Seventh Fleet to pre-
vent any attack on Formosa. As a corollary of this action,
1 am calling upon the Chinese Government on Formosa
to cease all air and sea operations against the mainland.
The Seventh Fleet will see that this is done. The deter-
mination of the future status of Formosa must await the
restoration of security in the Pacific, a peace settlement
with Japan, or consideration by the United Nations.

I have also directed that United States forces in the
Philippines be strengthened and that military assistance
to the Philippine Government be accelerated.

I have similarly directed acceleration in the furnish-
ing of military assistance to the forces of France and
the Associated States in Indochina and the dispatch of
a military mission to provide close working relations
with those forces.

I know that all members of the United Nations will
consider carefully the consequences of this latest aggres-
sion in Korea in defiance of the Charter of the United
Nations. A return to the rule of force in international
affairs would have far-reaching effects. The United
States will continue to uphold the rule of law.

I have instructed Ambassador Austin, as the repre-
sentative of the United States to the Security Council, to
report these steps to the Council.

Since then, the President of the United States
on July 19 made the following declaration in a
message to the Congress : ^

In addition to the direct military effort we and other
members of the United Nations are making in Korea, the
outbreak of aggression there requires us to consider its
implications for peace throughout the world. The attack

' See also Bltlletin of July 31, 1950, p. 165.

411

upon the Republic of Korea makes it plain beyond all
doubt that the international Communist movement is
prepared to use armed invasion to conquer independent
nations. We must, therefore, recognize the possibility
that armed aggression may take place in other areas.

In view of this, I have already directed that United
States forces in support of the Philippines be strengthened
and that military assistance be speeded up to the Philip-
pine Government and to the Associated States of Indo-
china, and to the forces of France in Indochina. I have
also ordered the United States Seventh Fleet to prevent
any attack upon Formosa, and I have requested the
Chinese Government on Formosa to cease all air and sea
operations against the mainland. These steps were at
once reported to the United Nations Security Council.

Our action in regard to Formosa was a matter of
elementary security. The peace and stability of the
Pacific area had been violently disturbed by the attack on
Korea. Attacks elsewhere in the Pacific area would
have enlarged tlie Korean crisis, thereby rendering much
more difficult the carrying out of our obligations to the
United Nations in Korea.

In order that there may be no doubt in any quarter about
our intentions regarding Formosa, I wish to state that
the United States has no territorial ambitions whatever
concerning that island, nor do we seek for ourselves any
special position or privilege on Formosa. The present
military neutralization of Formosa is without prejudice
to political questions affecting that island. Our desire is
that Formosa not become embroiled in hostilities disturb-
ing to the peace of the I-'acific and that all questions affect-
ing Formosa be settled by peaceful means as envisaged in
the Charter of the United Nations. With peace reestab-
lished, even the most complex political questions are sus-
ceptible of solution. In the presence of brutal and un-
provoked aggrftssion, however, some of these questions
may have to be held in abeyance in the interest of the
essential security of all.

These statements and the facts to which they
related make perfectly clear certain fundamental
points which the people of the world will have
clearly in mind:

1. The United States has not encroached on the
territory of China, nor has the United States
taken aggressive action against China.

2. The action of the United States in regard to
Formosa was taken at a time when that island was
the scene of conflict with the mainland. More
serious conflict was threatened by the public dec-
laration of the Chinese Communist authorities.
Such conflict would have threatened the security
of the United Nations Forces operating in Korea
under the mandate of the Security Council to
repel the aggression on the Republic of Korea.
They threatened to extend the conflict through the
Pacific area.

3. The action of the United States was an impar-
tial neutralizing action addressed both to the
forces on Formosa and to those on the mainland.
It was an action designed to keep the peace and
was, therefore, in full accord with the spirit of

the Charter of the United Nations. As President
Truman has solemnly declared, we have no designs .
on Formosa, and our action was not inspired by
any desire to acquire a special position for the
United States.

4. The action of the United States was expressly
stated to be without prejudice to the future politi-
cal settlement of the status of the island. The
actual status of the island is that it is territory
taken from Japan by the victory of the Allied
Forces in the Pacific. Like other such territories,
its legal status cannot be fixed until there is
international action to determine its future. The
Chinese Government was asked by the Allies to
take the surrender of the Japanese forces on the
island. That is tlie reason the Chinese are there

now.

5. The United States has a record through his-
tory of friendship for the Chinese people. We
still feel the friendship and know that millions
of Chinese reciprocate it. We took the lead with
others in the last United Nations General Assem-
bly to^ secure approval of a resolution on the
integrity of China. Only the Union of the Soviet
Socialist Republics and its satellites did not ap-
prove that resolution.

6. The United States would welcome United
Nations consideration of the case of Formosa.
We would approve full United Nations investiga-
tion here or on the spot. We believe that United
Nations consideration would contribute to a peace-
ful, rather than a forceable solution of that
problem.

7. We do not believe that the Security Council
need be or will be diverted from its consideration
of the aggression against the Republic of Korea.
There was a breach of the peace in Korea. The
aggressor attacked, has been condemned, and the
combined forces of the United Nations are now in
battle to repel the aggression. Formosa is now
at peace and will remain so unless someone resorts
to force. If the Security Council wishes to study
the question of Formosa we shall support and
assist that study. Meanwhile, the President of the
Security Council should discharge the duties of his
office and get on with the item on the agenda which
is the Complaint of Aggression Against the Re-
public of Korea, and, specifically, the recognition
of the right of the Korean Ambassador to take his
seat and the vote on the United States resolution
for the localization of the Korean conflict.

I request that this letter be circulated to mem-
bers of the Security Council.

LETTER FROM PRESIDENT TRUMAN
TO AMBASSADOR AUSTIN

[Released to the press hij the White House August 28]

As I told you on the telephone this morning, I
want to congratulate you on your able presenta-
tion of the views of the United States Government

412

Departmenf of Sfafe Bulletin

in the Security Council of the United Nations
from the first onset of tlie aggression against the
Republic of Korea. Throughout the entire course
of the proceedings, you have represented this Gov-
ernment with great effectiveness and in full accord-
ance with my directions.

The letter which you addressed to the Secretary-
General of the United Nations on August 25 on
the subject of Formosa admirably sums up the
fundamental position of this (jovernment as
it had been stated by me on June 27 and in my
message to the Congress on July 19. Yon have
clearly set forth in that letter the heart and essence
of the problem. You have faithfully set down
my views as they were then and as they are now.

To the end that there be no misunderstanding
concerning the position of the Government of the
United States with respect to Formosa, it may be
useful to repeat here the seven fundamental points
which you so clearly stated in your letter to Mr.
Lie.

[Here follow the seven points as printed above in
Ambassador Austin's letter.]

These seven points accurately record the posi-
tion of the United States.

In the forthcoming discussion of the problem
in the Security Council, you will continue to have
my complete support.

Editor's Note : On Aug. 29, the President sent the fol-
lowing message to General of the Army, Douglas Mac-
Arthur which was released to the press by the White
'' House on the same date :

I am sending you for your information the text of a
letter which I sent to Ambassador Austin dated August 27.
I am sure that when you examine this letter, and the letter
which Ambassador Austin addressed to Trygve Lie on
August 25 (a copy of which I am told was sent your head-
quarters that night), you will understand why my action
of the 20th in directing the withdrawal of your message
to the Veterans of Foreign Wars was necessary.

General Collins and Admiral Sherman have given me a

comprehensive report of their conversations with you and

I of their visit to the United Nations forces now fighting

il under your command in Korea. Their reports were most

satisfactory and highly gratifying to me.

The text of the letter to Ambassador Austin referred to
above follows :

[Here follows text of the President's letter to
Ambassador Austin as printed above.]

Unified Command Aircraft Accused
of Flying Over China

Following is the trait of a letter to Becretary-Oeneral
Trygve Lie from Ambassador Warren R. Austin, repre-
sentative to the United Nations, dated August 29 and
released to the press ^V the U.S. mission on the same date.

There has been circulated to members of the
Security Council a paper (S/1722) ^ which charges
that military aircraft, operating under the Unified

Command which is resisting the aggression on the
Republic of Korea, under the authority of the
United Nations Security Council, have overflown
and strafed Chinese territory in Manchuria.

The instructions under which aircraft are oper-
ating under the Unified Command in Korea
strictly prohibit them from crossing the Korean
frontier into adjacent territory. No evidence has
been received to indicate that these instructions
have been violated. The United States, for its
part, would welcome an investigation on the spot
by a Commission appointed by the Security
Council.

With reference to certain statements made in
the paper in question, it is hardly necessary to
point out that the forces of aggression now breach-
ing the peace in Korea are those which invaded
the Republic of Korea from the North and that
these forces are being resisted by the United Na-
tions. The action now being taten by the United
States and other loyal Members of the United
Nations in Korea is being conducted in accordance
with and under the mandate of the United Nations.

I request that this letter be circulated to the
Members of the Security Council.

Soviet Jamming Apparatus
Drowns Out IVIalik's U.N. Speecii

[Released to the press Septem-ber 2]

The State Department revealed today that the
U.S.S.R., in her effort to drown out the Voice of
America, inadvertently jammed a speech by her
own United Nations delegate, Jacob Malik, during
a meeting of the Security Council of August 25.

At 4: 45 p.m. (e.d.t.), on that date, the regular
Voice of America Polish language transmission
was interrupted to make way for a United Nations
broadcast, over the same frequencies, of a session
of the Security Council.

Inasmuch as Mr. Malik was acting as chairman,
he took a prominent part in the opening of the
Council's proceedings. At 5 p.m. (e.d.t.), while
Mr. Malik was making a speech in Russian, the
Soviet jamming opened up full blast, evidently in
the belief it was a Voice of America Russian show.
The jamming continued steadily until 5 : 30 p.m.

Mr. Malik continued talking until 5 : 08 p.m.,
after which his remarks were translated into Eng-
lish and French, ending at 5 : 24 p.m.

Consequently, not only 8 minutes of his speech
in Russian but also the English and French trans-
lations were jammed by his own propaganda
machine.

' Not here printed.

September II, 1950

413

USIE Capitalizes on Soviet Propaganda Blunders

hy Edward W. Barrett

Assistant Secretary for Public Affairs '

There is one simple point I want to emphasize
today. That point is that it is high time for Amer-
icans to stop being defeatist about the so-called
propaganda war. We have not lost it; we are
not losing it ; we can win it.

Many Americans, whom you and I know, are
too inclined to look at the other fellow and say,
"Gee, isn't he smart ! And aren't our own people
dumb !"

The blunt truth is that Joe Stalin and his crowd
have increasingly proved that they are blunderers
in this field. They have made stupid errors on
which we are capitalizing and on which we can
capitalize more. At the risk of repeating what is
obvious to some here, let us look at the score :

Let me remind you of the Communists' gross
miscalculation of how the United Nations and the
United States would behave in Korea.

Let me remind you of how Stalin has poured
millions of dollars into trying to convince the
world that America is the aggressor in Korea —
and of how he has failed to convince three-quarters
of the world's population.

Soviet Blundering

Then please note liow we, helped by Stalin's
own blundering, have so discredited the Soviet's
far-flung, phony peace petition until it is being
ridiculed throughout much of the free world to-
day. Hundreds of thousands v/\\o signed the peti-
tion are now publicly retracting their signatures.

Let me point out that the verb "to Malik" is be-
coming a synonym througliout much of the world
meaning "to perform official deception"' — as a re-
sult of the performance of the U.S.S.E. in the
United Nations Security Council. That verb, in-
cidentally, was originated by the Baltimore Swn

' Excerpts from remarks before the Overseas Writers at
Washington, D. C, on Aug. 29 and released to the press on
the same date.

and publicized around the world by the Voice of
America.

Let us remember that Stalin has completely
failed to win over the satellite populations, even
though he has them under his complete control.
Despite 4 years of intensive Soviet propagandiz-
ing, any informed visitor will tell you that be-
tween 60 percent and 90 percent of the captive
populations are today anti-Soviet.

Going back further, let us bear in mind the
Soviet handling of the original Marshall Plan
proposals. Renisal to permit the satellites to
join is still deeply resented in Poland and
Czechoslovakia.

Let us not forget the Kremlin's whole handling
of the Tito situation.

And let us remember how the veto and walk-out
technique in the United Nations has been an un-
savory spectacle to most of the world.

Finally, look how unsuccessful Uncle Joe's un-
precedentedly huge propaganda machine has been
lately with the nations of the world. Today, 53
nations are lined up on the side of the free world —
our side. The Soviet Union has nine nations.

I recognize that the cause of freedom lost ground
in China. That is imfortunately true. There are
respected students of fundamental trends who
years ago predicted that if China were liberated
from Japan, she would automatically turn Com-
munist. They have proved right despite our best
efforts to prevent it.

Communist Losses

At the same time, let us just remember what you
know well : that while Cliina was moving toward
Joe Stalin's field, Tito's Yugoslavia was moving
out. Meanwhile, the forces of freedom snatched
Italy, and Greece, and Turkey away from Stalin's
grasp. Communist campaigns were repulsed in
Fi-ance, in Scandinavia, and elsewhere.

Of course, information, or propaganda, is not

414

Department of State Bulletin

solely responsible for those events. It is just one
vi the factors — on both sides. But the fact re-
mains that, with the possible exception of China,
no country has gone Communist except under force
of arms. And even in China, force of arms was
one of the factors involved. Not in a single nation
has connnunism been adopted by a straight ma-
jority vote of the people concerned. Most of the
world's peoples are beginning to recognize the
bungling deceitfulness of the Kremlin. Uncle Joe
has crassly overplayed his propaganda hand.
Kremlin propaganda has not only been unscrupu-
lous; it has generally been crude, stiff, and
unimaginative. Much of the world is now ready
to be convinced that the free world is the world
of the future and that freedom is on the march.

All these blunders of the Kremlin are based
on its mammoth misconception of the mind of the
outside world.

The servant of the Soviet state in Russia today
gets only limited knowledge of the nature of out-
side society, and even this is screened through
Alarx-Lenin-Stalin theory. All this limitation in-
vites mistakes in judgment.

Let us i-emember that Soviet postwar policy was
based largely on three fundamental assumptions,
all arrived at around ID-t-t. They were :

1. The withdrawal of United States troops from
Europe meant United States return to isola-
tionism.

2. The United States could not shift from war
to peace economy without an economic collapse.

3. There would be rivalry instead of alliance
between Britain and the United States.

As a res>dt of persisting in holding to these beliefs,
the Soviet has blundered, blundered badly, and
continues to blunder in the propaganda field.

The time is now ripe for us to intensify our psy-
chological offensive — to wheel out our big gims and
capitalize on the reputation for integrity which
has been so painstakingly earned by the workers
of the United States information services, by the
Voice of America, by the BBC, and by others.

Work of U.S. Information Services

And let me speak a moment about the work
which has been done by our information-services
and our radio. I speak as one who does not claim
credit, since I am still fairly new on this job. I
speak also as one who has come to admire very
deeply the able and loyal men and women who
have carried on this work since long before I took
office — and who, today, are improving it with the
passage of every week.

Among those who are quiveringly awestruck by
Joe Stalin's supposed propaganda abilities, it is
now a minor vogue to speak of the Voice of Amer-
ica as being "dull" or "ineffectual." Just recently,
these views have been publicly expressed by three
well-known Americans — a journalist and two pub-

lic figures. I took the trouble to go and talk to
all three. What do you think I found? Not one
of these people had heard a single Voice of Amer-
ica broadcast in 3 years. One of them had read
a few scripts. Another had talked with two
people who recently returned from overseas.

Now, against these glib criticisms, let me sug-
gest that you —

Ask the views of the United States Advisory
Commission on International Information, estab-
lished by the Congress. This Commission con-
sists of Mark Ethridge, publisher of the Louisville
C ourier-J ouifiml ; Philip Reed, chairman of the
Board of General Electric; Erwin Canham, edi-
tor of the Christian Science Monitor; Justin Mil-
ler, iDresident of the National Association of
Broadcasters; and Mark May, director of the
Institute of Human Relations at Yale University.
This group has studied the output of the Voice
and of USIE at home and abroad for 2 full years.
While offering suggestions for further improve-
ment, they have found the output good and effec-
tive. Mark May, after a long-term study abroad,
reported :

The most general conclusion is that of all the existing
radio sets in Poland, Czechoslovakia, and Yugoslavia, at
least three-fourths and perhaps more are tuned to the
Voice of America once each day.

I suggest, too, that you ask the view of Joseph
B. Phillips, foreign correspondent, foreign editor,
and one-time aide to General Eisenhower, who
did a month-long survey of the output of the Voice
and of the USIE and found it "surprisingly good."

Or you might ask the views of our ambassadors
overseas whose own effectiveness depends in part
on the effectiveness of the United States radio
and information services.

Or ask the views of any of those who have sam-
pled the letters that come into the Voice of Amer-
ica— letters that last year totaled 10,000 a month
and now total 30,000 a month.

IMPACT BEHIND IRON CURTAIN

Or you might talk with the teams of interrog-
ators who systematically question escapees from
the iron curtain — and who have found that some
80 percent of them listened regularly to the Voice
of America. I have just seen the interrogation
report on a Soviet major who defected. He de-
clared that he always listened to the "Voice" and
that most of the other Soviet officers in Germany
did likewise.

Or you might study the reports made by cross-
section panels of listeners in countries abroad —
panels that are far more helpful in improving
output than could possibly be the critiques of indi-
viduals in this country.

Again, you could ask the independent polling
organizations which have conducted surveys in
countries like France — and found in France, inci-

Sepf ember IT, 1950

415

dentally, that 18 percent of the entire adult popu-
lation listens to the Voice of America. A recent
survey in Germany showed that 54 percent of the
radio audience in the American zone and 48 per-
cent of the audience in the Western sector of
Berlin listen to the 7 : 00 to 7 : 30 p. m. [Berlin
time] daily program of the Voice of Ainerica,
which is relayed locally.

Also, you would be interested in the views of
the many foreign governments which have found
the Voice of America programs of such quality
that arrangements have been made to rebroadcast
them over their own radio networks.

BULWARK AGAINST COMMUNISM

You might ask officials of the Italian Govern-
ment to tell you how important was the part
played by the United States information services
in repulsing the Communist threat in Italy.
Again, anyone who was in Russia last year will
tell you what happened when Mrs. Kasenkina
jumped from a consulate window at New York.
They will tell you that the Russians suppressed
the news but that the "Voice" broadcast it and
that the news was all over Russia within 6 hours.
And they will tell you how the Russian Govern-
ment was openly laughed at for its performance
in this case — and how that Government soon
started trying to jam the Voice of America.

No, as a newcomer to Government, I say that
these really dedicated workers of the United States
information service and the Voice of America
deserve our deep thanks. They have helped in a
very major way to stem the tide of communism —
and, actually, to turn it back in many areas. On
occasion after occasion, they have produced bril-
liant material. Surely, the general level can be
improved — and is being improved. But anyone
who blankets the output with the words "dull" and
"ineffectual" simply does not know what he is
talking about.

Today, I sincerely believe we face enormous
new possibilities. With added funds and with
new reinforcements of talent and manpower, and
finally with the very important help of American
private information media, we can step up im-
mensely our counteroflfensive of truth. We will
not win easily or quickly. But if we employ
maximum vigor and strength, we will surely win.

Advisory Commission To Review
Information Program With President

[Released to the press August SI]

The members of the United States Advisory
Commission on Information called on President
Truman on August 31 to review with him the

' Btjlletin of May 1, 1950, p. 669.
416

State Department's plans for a broadening and
intensification of its information program in re-
sponse to the President's recent call for a great,
new "Campaign of Truth."

The Commission, established by Congress in
1948 to serve as an advisory body to the Secretary
of State and to make independent reports to Con-
gress, is made up of a group of distinguished ex-
perts in the information field. It is headed by
Mark F. Ethridge, publisher of the Louisville
Courier- Journal and the Louisville Times.

Presddent Truman's call for the campaign of
truth, to combat false Soviet propaganda, was
made in his speech to the American Society of
Newspaper Editors last April 20.^ The members
of the Commission arrived at Washington for a
special meeting to analyze and discuss the State
Department's current plans for shifting its world-
wide information program into high gear.

The Commission also conferred with Assistant
Secretary Barrett and his staff concerning infor-
mation strategy now being planned with a view
toward cutting thi-ough the confusion of Kremlin
propaganda. The Commission has already given
its full endorsement and support to the proposed
campaign of truth.

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S.

The visits of the following persons have been
made possible through grants-in-aid awarded by
the Department of State under the program for
the exchange of persons:

Aristides John Macris, in charge of the agri-
cultural extension program of the Near East
Foundation Project, Athens, Greece, will visit
agricultural centers.

M. C. Balakrishna Menon, assistant editor of
the Indian Express, Madras, India, will study the
American press and will visit various agricultural
and reclamation projects and educational systems.

Habib Naficy, former under secretary of the
Ministry of Labor of Iran, will study American
labor unions, labor-management relations, and the
administration of the Department of Labor.

Ricardo Vivado Orsini, president of the Chilean
Broadcasting Association and owner of the station
Radio del Pacifico, Santiago, Chile, will observe
radio techniques and procedures, program record-
ing, and television broadcasting.

Jacques S. Hoek, political correspondent for the
Calvinist Daily TrovM of The Hague, the Nether-
lands, will study American press and radio com-
mentating techniques and the Federal and State
governments.

Dr. Palmi Hannesson, rector of Reykjavik
Junior College, Reykjavik, Iceland, will observe
various aspects of the American educational sys-
tem and of geological research.

Deparfmenf of Sfafe BuWet'in

Fostering International Understanding

FOURTH SEMIANNUAL REPORT ON EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE
JANUARY TO JUNE 1950 >

"The Campaign of Truth"

The Congress is now considering the President's
proposal to provide a campaign of truth through
an expansion of the international information and
educational exchange programs. The United
States Advisory Commission on Educational Ex-
change, established by the Congress and appointed
by the President, considers that an expression of
its views on this proposal is appropriate, in view
of the Commission's legal responsibilities for ap-
praising the educational exchange program and
reporting regularly thereon to the Congress.

Recent events in Korea serve as a tragic illustra-
tion of the urgent need for a campaign of truth.
The situation there shows clearly the real methods
of Communist aggression which begin with skill-
ful, and maliciously untruthful propaganda and
end with violence such as the seizure of the instru-
ments of order within a country by a coup d'etat
or outright invasion. It is a striking fact that the
Commimist blow does not fall imtil the way has
been skillfully prepared.

In Korea, where American troops are giving
their lives in an effort to halt aggression, we must
now rely on military actions to restore peace. This
situation may become a blueprint for other coun-
tries of the world where the Communists have
declared psychological warfare against this coun-
try on a broad front. The United States is
charged with being a warmongering aggressor,
avaricious in motive, and too decadent to provide
the creative forces for a new and better world
order.

Fortunately, the case which the United States
has to present to the world is one of great strength
and appeal because we are telling the truth. Over
and against the Communist charges of aggression
stand two firm policies — support for the freedom
of other nations and joint action through the

* Excerpt from fourth semiannual report on educational
exchange activities, H. Doc. 648, 81st Cong., 2d sess. For
material on the third report, see Buixetin for Sept. 4,
1950, p. 385.

Sepfember 11, 1950

904368 — 50 3

United Nations on international problems.
Against the charges of a concern only for the pluto-
cratic classes stand the simple, obvious facts of the
dignity and standard of living of the American
laborer. Against the slurs of weakness stand the
gi-eat achievements of American technology, the
highly organized character of American society,
and the moral strength of our people. Against the
steady march of dictatorship and aggression,
stands American leadership in consolidating the
free world. But these facts cannot be effective
unless they are made known. The United States
information and educational exchange programs
are the major means by which this can be done.

The President has requested the Eighty-first
Congress to provide additional funds for the
United States information and educational ex-
change services which, as presently financed, can-
not wage the necessary campaign. Not to wage
it will be to accept defeat in many lands not only
for ourselves but for the free world we believe
in.

For 2 years the Commission on Educational Ex-
change has been working with this program in an
advisory capacity. As we have come to know it
in detail, we have become convinced that it is an
effective program. Furthermore, as experience is
gained, it becomes increasingly a better program.
The recently completed re-study of areas of spe-
cial importance, which has supplied the basis for
the program now before the Congress, represents
in our judgment a definite step forward in plan-
ning. We believe both the information and edu-
cational exchange programs worthy of confidence
and support. The basic elements of the educa-
tional exchange programs are bringing key indi-
viduals to this country for observation, study, and
association with their professional colleagues and
taking to foreign countries a true picture of the
United States by whatever appear to be the most
effective means — films, books, photographic ex-
hibits, literature, American teachers, lecturers,
students, and specialists. The program varies
from one country to another both in content and

417

media depending upon local factors. Some de-
tails of it may not be approved by some individ-
uals. This is to be expected, since the problems
to be met are varied, complex, and difficult.

From its knowledge of the program, this Com-
mission recommends that the Congress give full
support to these plans for expansion.

Recommendations of the Advisory Commission
and Action Taken by the Department of State

SUPPLEMENT TO PREVIOUS RECOMMENDATIONS
ON AID TO DESTITUTE CHINESE^STUDENTS

Reoormnendation {submitted to the Department
of State July 21, 1950)

The Commission considers that its general pro-
posals for United States financial aid to destitute
foreign students remain sound but that subsequent
changes in the Far East necessitate a revision of
its recommendations with respect to destitute
Chinese students. (The text of these proposals
may be found on pp. 9-11, H. Doc. No. 4.31, 81st
Cong., December 29, 1949.) The following is a
revision of these recommendations :

The Commission approves efforts of the United
States Government to strengthen democratic ele-
ments in China by providing educational oppor-
tunities in this country for future Chinese leaders.
Further, insofar as the Commission's previous rec-
ommendations are concerned, we wish to leave to
the discretion of the Department of State the
question of requiring the return to China of Chi-
nese students in the United States. However,
even though this question must be decided in the
light of changing conditions in China and the
availability of funds, the program should be based
on the general guiding principle that foreign stu-
dents should return to their own countries upon
completion of their educational program and
make their training and experience available to
their own people.

Action

(Recommendations submitted simultaneously
with this report; insufficient time for Department
of State to reply.)

REPORTS FROM PERSONS RECEIVING
U.S. GOVERNMENT GRANTS

Recommendation {submitted July 21, 1950)

The Commission on Educational Exchange
recommends that the Department of State, in
order to insure the proper supervision, control,
and evaluation of the exchange-of-persons pro-
grams, require all persons receiving United States
Government grants to submit adequate reports
covering their activities during the period of the
grant.

Action

(Recommendations submitted simultaneously
with this report; insufficient time for Department
of State to reply.)

RELATIONSHIP OF INFORMATION AND EDUCATIONAL
EXCHANGE SERVICES OF PUBLIC LAW 402, 80TH CONGRESS

Recommendation {sxthmitted to the Department
of State July 21, 1950)

The Commission on Educational Exchange has
received several communications from private
groups and individuals recommending a change
in the relationship between the information and
educational exchange programs of Public Law
402. The Commission has given a great deal of
study to this question, taking into consideration
the legislative history of Public Law 402, as well
as the nature of the two services and the relation-
ship which would make for the most effective con-
duct of both. As a result of our study, the
Commission has reached the following conclu-
sions :

{a) The information and educational exchange
services have been established to achieve the same
broad objectives. Each service provides different
methods of doing this.

(6) The Congress in establishing two separate
advisory Commissions made clear its desire that
neither phase of this total program should be
neglected and that full and complete attention
sliould be given to the formulation and execution
of separate policies and programs for each service.
To further carry out congressional intent, the De-
])artment has established separate offices to ad-
minister the two services — the Office of Educa-
tional Exchange and the Office of International
Information.

(c) Coordination is achieved in a number of
ways, chief of which is the maintenance of the
posts of Assistant Secretary and General Man-
ager to insure single top-level command of the two
services. In the overseas operation this same
principle is carried out on a lesser scale by the
work of the public affairs officers.

{d) It is the opinion of this Commission that
the relationship between the information and edu-
cational exchange services, as established by the
Department of State, is in accord with congres-
sional intent and satisfactory from a policy and
program standpoint. We consider, however, that
if financially possible, more extensive coordination
of the two services on individual projects would in-
crease their effectiveness. For example, the pur-
poses of the educational exchange service could be
furthered greatly by an even greater use of the
Voice of America to inform other countries con-
cerning educational and cultural activities in the
United States. Likewise, the showing of docu-
mentary films descriptive of American life is re-
garded by this Commission as one of the more use-

418

Department of State Bulletin

fill instruments of the educational exchange
program ; there is need +'or more of these. On the
other hand, the educational exchange service might
contribute a great deal to the information service
by increasing the number of grants given to foreign
nationals engaged in information work in other
countries — journalists, broadcasting officials, film
producers, etc.

Action

(None required.)

STABILIZATION OF THE LATIN-AMERICAN PROGRAM

Recommendation {submitted to the Department
of suite, July 21, 1950)

The Commission on Educational Exchange
makes the recommendation to the Department of
State that it investigate the possibility of utilizing
foreign currency credits resulting from the sale
of United States surplus property to stabilize the
educational exchange program in the other Ameri-
can Republics.

Action

(Eecommendations submitted simultaneously
■with this report ; insufficient time for the Depart-
ment of State to reply.)

THE ORIENTATION OF FOREIGN NATIONALS EMPLOYED
IN USIE> PROGRAM AT OVERSEAS POSTS

Recom,m£7idation {submitted to the Department of
State, February 13, 1950)

It has been brought to the attention of the Com-
mission on Educational Exchange by officials of
the Department of State and by individual mem-
bers of the Commission returning from visits to
overseas posts that foreigii nationals are being em-
ployed by the information and educational ex-
change program for work which involves inter-
preting the United States to the local communities.
These personnel have proved efficient and to a cer-
tain extent responsible for the successful operation
of the program overseas, despite the fact that
many of them have never been to the United States.

The Commission recommends that a program
be developed for bringing the most deserving and
promising of these alien employees to the United
States for consultation and orientation as a means
of preparing them to do an even better job.

Action

The Department of State accepted the above-
mentioned recommendation and immediately de-
veloped a project for bringing 42 locally employed
personnel to the United States from 31 different
countries. These employees received advanced
training in the various information and educa-
tional exchange offices in Washington and New
York. In addition, they visited certain cities in
the United States to observe first-hand the demo-
cratic community in action.

THE COMMISSION ON OCCUPIED AREAS-
RELATIONSHIP TO THE DEPARTMENT
AND THE COMMISSION ON EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE

ReeoTmnendation {submitted to Department of
State April 17, 1950)

After a careful review of the operations of the
Commission on Occupied Areas, and its contribu-
tion to this Government's cultural progi'ams, the
Commission makes the following recommenda-
tions :

The Department of State should encourage the
Commission on Occupied Areas to continue to
function as a private agency to which the De-
partment can turn for specialized advice. The
Department of State, in utilizing the services of
the Commission on Occupied Areas, should ascer-
tain that no conflict exists between the duties of
that Commission and those of the Commission on
Educational Exchange.

The Commission on Educational Exchange, in
turn, will keep the Commission on Occupied Areas
fully informed of its activities and request that
body to do likewise. Further, the Commission
on Educational Exchange has appointed one of
its members. Dr. Martin R. P. McGuire, to serve
in a liaison capacity with the Commission on
Occupied Areas so as to bring to the attention of
the Commission any program or policy items of
interest to both Commissions.

Action {text of Department of State''s reply of
Jime 21, 1950)

With respect to the recommendation concerning
the Commission on Occupied Areas, representa-
tives of the Department have participated in
meetings of the Commission and of the panels
which it has established in a number of substantive
fields. The Commission has proven to be a useful
instrument for reaching those organizations and
institutions whose understanding and support is
essential for the development of an extensive and
effective program in Germany.

The Department has also found it useful to con-
tinue contractual arrangements initiated by the
Department of the Army in the fiscal year 1949
when appropriated funds first became available
for educational exchanges with Germany. Under
these arrangements the Commission on Occupied
Areas working through its panels assumed respon-
sibility for developing and administering pro-
grams of observation, study, and training in the
United States for German exchange visitors in
certain selected fields. The Department is utiliz-
ing the services of this Commission in those fields
in which it appeared that no other established pub-
lic or private agency was equipped or prepared to
furnish the required services, or in which the logi-
cal private agency to provide such services had al-

' Programs under the U.S. Information and Educational
Exchange Act of 1948 (Public Law 402, SOth Cong.).

Sepiember II, 1950

419

ready affiliated itself with the Commission on
Occupied Areas.

In the current fiscal year the Department has
entered into a contract with the Commission for
handling 449 German exchange visitors in the
fields of youth and community activities, religious
affairs, and certain projects in the field of govern-
mental institutions, representing approximately
one-third of the total number of German visitors
in the so-called leader category, who are to be
brought to the United States under the 1950 pro-
gram. This contract will probably be extended
to cover 50 German leaders in the field of legal
affairs.

The Department has also concluded a contract
with the Commission on Occupied Areas for the
organization and conduct of a 1-week general
orientation course in American life and institu-
tions for all German leaders arriving in the United
States under the program.

In addition, the Department has sought the as-
sistance of the panels of the Commission on Oc-
cupied Areas in locating and recruiting American
citizens in the various substantive fields qualified
to undertake assignments as United States special-
ists in Germany.

EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGES WITH SPAIN

Reconvmendation (suimitied to the Department
of State Apml 17, 1950)

The Commission on Educational Exchange
makes the following recommendations to the De-
partment of State :

The Commission on Educational Exchange has
previously recommended to the Department of
State that the United States take steps to keep the
door open to unofficial exchanges with countries of
eastern Europe and initiate Government-sup-
ported programs only where their governments
show a desire to cooperate. Our recommendation
carried the proviso that in all such exchanges ap-
propriate measures be taken to safeguard the na-
tional security. It is the Commission's view that
the principles set forth in this recommendation
have application to other areas of the world as
well.

The Commission is in general agreement that —

(1) An educational exchange program with
Spain would bring individuals who have been ex-
posed to totalitarian political beliefs into contact
with democratic ways of thinking and acting and
therefore directly assist in the execution of the
present United States foreign policy toward
Spain.

(2) More cordial cultural connections between
this country and Spain would have salutary influ-
ence on the relationships between the United
States and the Latin American countries.

Spain is very active culturally in the American
Republics, through the Hispanidad movement and

other channels. A cultural program of exchange
sponsored by the Department, using governmental
funds if possible, would have a beneficial impact
on the Latin American climate of opinion toward
this country.

The Commission recommends, therefore, that
the Department of State undertake an official edu-
cational exchange program with Spain since it is
believed that that country desires to cooperate and
reciprocate in the establishment of such a pro-
gram. The Commission is unwilling at this time,
however, in the absence of any recommendation
from tlie Department of State, to ask for the elim-
ination or curtailment of programs with other
countries in order to initiate a Government-sup-
ported exchange program with Spain. In this
connection, it is our understanding that the De-
partment is now evaluating the world-wide pro-
gram from the standpoint of priorities for each
country, including Spain. This procedure has
our strong endorsement.

Tlie Commission recommends, further, that the
Department of State encourage and facilitate un-
official exchanges with Spain, that is, exchanges
which do not involve the outlay of United States
Government funds.

Action {text of Departinent of State's reply of
June m, 1950)

In view of the urgency of other areas there will
be no expansion in the official exchanges between
Spain and the United States. However, the De-
partment will assist private organizations, both in
Spain and the United States, to arrange exchange
programs which are financed entirely through pri-
vate sources. Promotion of exchanges by the De-
partment will provide for an exchange of mate-
rials and persons for the purpose of interchanging
knowledge and skills in all fields of activity, in-
chiding education, science, and technical skill,
which have no political implications. Exchanges
financed by the Spanish Government will be re-
viewed in the light of all factors and approved or
disapproved on an individual basis.

Several Americans, including three who are
well known in the music and art fields, visited
Spain during 1949-50, where they received sub-
stantial assistance from the USIE office in Madrid.
Julie Andre, the American singer of songs from
the Western Hemisphere, and Julius Katchen, one
of America's outstanding young pianists, were
hailed enthusiastically by Spanish audiences and
tlie press. Assistance was also given Mr. Homer
St. Gaudens, director of the department of fine arts
of tlie Carnegie Institute in Pittsburgh, during
his visit in Spain for the purpose of selecting
European canvases for the Pittsburgh interna-
tional exhibition of contemporary paintings to be
held at the Carnegie Institute from October to
December 1950.

In the fall of 1949 the Department facilitated
the attendance of a Spanish student to the New

420

Department of State Bulletin

York Mirror Youth Forum, Similarly, assistance
has been given to enable a young Spanish student
to attend the Youth Incorporated program
"Hands Across the Sea" to be held during July
and August 1950.

NEED FOR CLARIFICATION OF BASIC OBJECTIVES
OF EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE PROGRAM

Reco7nmendation (suhmitted to the Department of
State March 31, 1950)

Basic to all considerations of the educational
exchange program is the question of objectives.
There is need for the Department of State to de-
velop a sharper definition and to insure a clearer
understanding of the objectives. It is recom-
mended that this be done and that the Commis-
sion's views, given below, be taken into considera-
tion. We shall appreciate the Department's com-
ments on these views.

The broad purpose of this program has been
stated in Public Law 402 of the Eightieth Con-
gress, the Smith-Mundt Act. In the words of the
act, its purpose is "to increase mutual understand-
ing between the people of the United States and
the people of other countries." This general
statement, however, can be broken down into sev-
eral more specific ones.

In the first place, a program of educational and
cultural exchange certainly includes making other
nations aware of United States resources in tech-
nology and economics, but also of American social
organizations, cultural activities, and moral
strength. The ignorance about us even in coun-
tries with which we have had many contacts is
often astonishing. "Is it true," asked a Yugoslav
last summer, "that in the United States even the
workers have automobiles?" Knowledge of the
resources of the United States will lead to in-
creasing use of her goods and products, contacts
with her institutions, and a growing awareness of
the values to be gained by friendly relationships
and mutual cooperation.

Secondly, and more important, is the task of
providing an understanding of the character and
motives of the United States and confidence in
her purposes. This is of the first importance.
It cannot be achieved by declarations of the purity
of our motives, nor can it be bought with gifts. It
can only be secured by enabling other peoples to
know our country and our people, our democratic
processes, our political principles, our problems,
and our ideals, and letting them judge for them-
selves. Confidence, in other words, must come
from personal contacts and knowledge. Its oppo-
site is suspicion, which is the product of ignorance
and uncertainty.

In the third place, it must be kept in mind that
educational and cultural exchanges, in addition
to ci-eating understanding and confidence, have
values of their own in that they are mutually bene-
ficial to all who take part in them. It would be a

mistake to conceive of the educational exchange
program solely in terms of what others may learn
about us. It is a two-way street. The United
States stands for a world which exchanges freely
not only its goods but also its ideas, and it will
profit along with other nations in the development
of that kind of a world.

If these are the basic objectives of the educa-
tional exchange program, certain consequences
follow.

In the first place, few undertakings could more
effectively support and forward the foreign pol-
icies of tile United States. It will do this, not by
propaganda for specific objectives, but rather by
bringing about growing understanding of Ameri-
can life, confidence in this country's broad ob-
jectives, and a desire to be associated with her in
working toward these ends. These are the in-
dispensable conditions for continuing cooperation
between free and democratic peoples.

A second consequence is that the emphasis will
vary as countries differ in their development.
While all these pur23oses will always be present,
the emphasis in countries out of touch with the
United States and strongly influenced by nations
closer to them might fall upon providing a knowl-
edge of our national resources. Yugoslavia is a
case in point. On the other hand, with a country
like Great Britain, which has many relationships
with the United States and a highly developed cul-
ture, the emphasis will fall on the objectives of the
American people, the ways in which our social and
political institutions function, and the mutual ad-
vantages of cultural exchanges.

A third consequence of the principles set forth
is that this educational exchange program is not a
program of beneficent educational paternalism.
Its task is not to assume the educational obliga-
tions of other countries. To be sure, the objectives
of understanding and of assistance will often over-
lap. One can go further and say that understand-
ing with another people can perhaps be achieved
best by contacts and associations in areas of their
special needs and interests. The guiding princi-
ples, however, need to be kept clear, otherwise we
shall find ourselves assuming obligations which
are not properly ours, and in the end arousing
resentment for interfering in purely internal af-
fairs. Closely associated with this is another half-
truth, namely, that the object of the program of
educational exchange is to make friends for the
United States. Obviously that is a desideratiun
of all parts of our foreign policy, and it can rea-
sonably be expected to be furthered by this pro-
gram. There is, however, no short cut to genuine
friendship. Like happiness, it is a byproduct of
other things. The friendly attitude, which the
United States desires and reciprocates, will be a
result of our genuine desire to know other peoples
and have them know us and to be associated with
them in activities of common concern.

The educational exchange program is not an

%epiember 17, 7950

421

effort to "Americanize" other nations. Such a
policy could be successful only until it were found
out. The program is reciprocal in character, as
the Congress wrote into the provisions of the
Smith-Mundt Act.

The tendency of some individuals to defane
educational and cultural relations in terms of
academic undertakings and fine arts has been re-
ferred to above. If the broad objective is under-
standing between the peoples of these countries
and of the United States, the program cannot be
confined to these areas. It must be concerned
with whatever are the significant forces and move-
ments which can interpret the United States to
other peoples. The American system of public
schools and free libraries, the organization of the
typical American home with its lack of servants
and its use of labor-saving devices, the great phil-
anthropic record of the American people— these
and many other aspects of our social and cultural
life have their place in any interpretation of
America. But having said this, one must go on to
say that the arts have their place also in this
program, if a way can be found to deal wisely with

them. , . , , ,

A broad program of the sort which has been
outlined is of obvious importance and value to
the United States. As a gi-eat world power, we
will continue to be the object of constant criticism
and judgment. For a number of reasons— the
Communist journals being only one of the fac-
tors—we are not getting a good press in Europe
as a whole. Direct contact with American life
and Ajnerican thought is the best corrective of
misinformation, misunderstanding, and suspicion.
Europe is sick of propaganda. We have the op-
portunity of providing something better. Even
in countries where political relationships with this
country are strained, there is a widespread popular
desire to know more about the United States and
our way of life. Probably no nation in history
ever had so receptive a field for the establishment
of ties of a nonpolitical character with other peo-
ples. It is the unanimous opinion of this Cfom-
mission that an educational exchange progi-am
with other countries will yield immediate and
lasting benefits to this country and to the achieve-
ment of world peace.

We believe the clarification of aims and ob-
jectives is one of the most important responsibili-
ties of the officers in charge of this program, and
we urge that steps be taken to achieve this.

Action {Department of State's reply of Jvme 21,
1950)

The Commission's views relating to the basic
objectives of the educational exchange program
are being given careful consideration by respon-
sible officers of the Department who also attach
utmost importance to their clarification. As I be-
lieve the members of the Commission have already
been informed, a basic restudy of the whole in-
formation and educational exchange program is

422

being undertaken by Assistant Secretary Barrett
and his staff. From this will emerge a restatement
of objectives which will be submitted for the Com-
mission's consideration at an early date, together
with a new plan for world-wide operations.

(Note. — At the June 23 meeting of the U. S.
Advisory Commission on Educational Exchange,
the Commissioners and Assistant Secretary of
State Barrett reviewed a draft statement on the
objectives of the program which had been pre-
pared by the Department of State. This state-
ment is now being given intensive study by both
departmental officers and members of the Com-
mission for the purpose of developing a final
statement.)

THE QUESTION OF THE ESTABLISHMENT
OF NEW USIE OFFICES IN 1950

Recommendation {submitted to the Depa/rtment
of State, March 31, 1950)

On November 23, 1949, the Department of State
informed the Commission that provision had been
made for the opening of 12 new USIE offices at
diplomatic posts during 1950 in selected cities in
Europe, the Near East, and the Far East, but that
plans were subject to revision in the light of rap-
idly changing conditions in eastern Europe and
the Far East.

After a great deal of consideration of this plan,
in the light of its study of the basic objectives of
the program, the Commission recommended to the
Secretary of State in its quarterly report for the
period October 1 to December 31, 1949, that the
Department not engage in a program of general
expansion until certain fundamental questions
now under consideration by the Department and
the Commission have been settled. These ques-
tions relate to whether this program should be
realined so that it is carried out on a larger, more
effective scale in a few countries or be continued
with the current, or greater geographic coverage.
Other questions deal with what activities will
prove most efficient in the long run in achieving
the ends which are sought.

Action {Department of Stated reply of Jwne 21,
1950)

Considerations affecting the establishment of
new USIE posts abroad, which the Commission
emphasizes in this report are fully acceptable to
the Department. In fact, these considerations and
others have guided the Department's action in
this respect during the current year. During 1950
there has not been the expansion we planned at
the beginning of the year, due in part to the politi-
cal situation in eastern Europe and the Far East.
Wliile 2 new posts have been opened during the
year (Glasgow, Scotland, and Martinique, French
West Indies), 14 have been closed in other areas
where operations were rendered impossible be-
cause of action of the host government.

Deparrmenf of SJofe Bulletin

FOREIGN OPINION OF LEVEL

OF AMERICAN CULTURAL ACHIEVEMENTS

Recommendation {s^ibmitted to the Department
of State, March 31, 1950)

Among the prejudices concerning the United
States to be founcl in other countries, one of tlie
most firmly established is the view that this coun-
try is mechanical-minded, materialistic, and es-
sentially ''uncultured." This, like any belief
wliich tends to undermine other nations' respect
ior this country, is of interest to both the Depart-
ment and the Commission.

The Commission has felt, particularly in the
light of communications from some of our over-
seas missions, that this problem should not be
ignored. It recognizes the many difficulties in-
volved in a fine-arts program designed to con-
vince other peoples by a series of exhibits, con-
certs, and other activities of American achieve-
ments in the fine-arts fields. It has asked the
Department of State to make studies of the prob-
lem. Meanwhile, it recommends that in those
countries where this prejudice is particularly
strong, or is felt to be of special importance, grants
be made under the category of leaders and spe-
cialists to key individuals in the fine-arts fields to
visit the United States. These individuals would
then be able to study developments in their re-
spective fields and to determine whether or not
the criticisms are justified.

Action {Department of State's reply of Jvme 21,
1950)

The Department is in accord with the Com-
mission's \aews set forth in the final section of the
report concerning foreign opinion of the level of
J American cultural achievements. It will comply
I with the Commission's recommendation in plan-
ning the program for 1951 when emphasis will be
placed on exchanging leaders and specialists in the
fine arts field, particularly in those coimtries where
ignorance or misunderstanding of American cul-
tural achievements is most prevalent.

The Commission should know, however, that
some attention has already been given to this ques-
tion. During the present fiscal year, the Office of
Educational Exchange has made six awards to
leaders and specialists in the fine-arts field, and has
given three grants to Americans in these fields to
lecture abroad.

As the Commission requested, a study of the
Department's future policy with respect to fine

arts has been undertaken. The findings resulting
from this study, together with the Commission's
review thereof, will form the basis for the Depart-
ment's future policy concerning fine arts.

EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGES WITH YUGOSLAVIA

ReconiMiendation {suhmitted to the Department
of State December 12, 1949)

On October 19, 1949, the Commission on Educa-
tional Exchange recommended inter alia that the
United States not engage in any Government-sup-
ported programs of educational exchange with the
countries of eastern Europe until their govern-
ments give evidence of a desire to cooperate in the
mutually helpful and friendly spirit required by
the Smith-Mundt Act (Public Law 402, 80th
Cong.).

It now appears that Yugoslavia is desirous of
establishing on a basis of reciprocity and friend-
ship such exchange relationships. The Commis-
sion on Educational Exchange therefore recom-
mends that the Secretary of State —

(1) Take steps to initiate selected projects of
educational exchange between the United States
and Yugoslovia with appropriate screening, se-
lection, and other procedures to safeguard the
national security.

(2) Facilitate and continue such exchanges on
a reciprocal basis satisfactory to the Department
of State provided that, and so long as, the Govern-
ment of Yugoslavia gives evidence of its desire
to cooperate with the United States in this matter
in the friendly spirit of the Smith-Mundt Act.

Action (Department of Staters reply of Febru-
ary 1, 1950)

On February 1, 1950, the Under Secretary of
State acknowledged the receipt of this recommen-
dation and informed the Commission that the pro-
posal had been sent to the United States Embassy
in Belgrade for consideration.

At the June 23 meeting of the Commission, De-
partment of State officials informed the Conmiis-
sioners that a reply had been received from the
United States Embassy in Belgrade and that a
proposed program is in the process of formulation,
subject to the success of current efforts to establish
appropriate security safeguards and satisfactory
reciprocal arrangements.

September IT, 1950

423

Senate Support Expressed for Campaign of Truth

LETTER FROM SENATORIAL GROUP
TO THE PRESIDENT

The following letter, signed hy 28 Senators,' was trans-
mitted to the President on August 18, 1950.

The American people join you and us in being
seriously disturbed by world conditions and by
their effect on our own well being.

We see our sons fighting across the Pacific
against heavy odds of distance, against an enemy
who trains and equips an army of satellites.

We fear other outbreaks at other and unexpected
points at a similar or greater cost to us of precious
life and treasure.

To support this and future emergencies, we face
a heavy increase in taxation and a reduction in
our standard of living.

Finally, we are reintroducing wartime controls
in a time of nominal peace. We are by necessity
opening up our lives to a measure of totalitarian
control, in our endeavor to arrest the flood tide of
totalitarian tyranny elsewhere.

In view of these critical conditions we urge upon
you a psychological and spiritual offensive against
the Kremlin, devised to bring the Russian and
American people into contact and into relations
of mutual brotherhood.

Let us explain to them the grim necessity of the
western world for arming ourselves when we have
seen their rulers sweep over nation after nation,
destroying their freedom and enslaving their
peoples. While the rulers of Russia have been
doing this, the capitalist nations have been free-
ing tlieir colonies for self government.

Let us tell the Russian people that we want to
live in peace with them and hope that their rulers
will not compel us to fight them. We would like
to help them to get a better life from their rich soil,
forests and mines.

' Senators Ralph E. Flanders, A. Willis Robertson, H.
Alexander Smith, John C. Stennis, John W. Bricker, Styles
Bridges, Hugh Butler, Homer E. Capehart, Virgil M. Chap-
man, Milton R. Young, Forrest C. Donnell, Paul H. Douglas,
.T. W. Fulbright, ('arl Hayden, Robert C. Hendrickson,
Spessard L. Holland, Hubert H. Humphrey, Irving M. Ives,
Robert S. Kerr, Herbert Lehman, Burnet R. Ma.ybank,
Karl E. Mundt, Leverett Saltonstall, Margaret Chase
Smith, John Sparkman, Edward J. Thye, Kenneth S.
Wherry, and Alexander Wiley.

424

We are now saying this in an indirect and
partial way through the Voice of America. We
need more funds and a great expansion of facili-
ties. But more than money, we need a new vigor,
a new imagination, a new directness and plainness
of speech. We need the message to be continu-
ously, indefinitely reiterated. We need to use
means new and old, thought of and unthought of,
traditional and revolutionary.

Mr. President, let us declare total mobilization
and total engagement of our psychological and
spiritual forces. Thus may be soften and erode
the foundations of the Politburo, escape the ap-
palling expenditure of life and treasure with
which we are faced, and thus escape the totalitar-
ian control of our lives which neither you, we, nor
the American people can contemplate without
dismay.

LETTER FROM THE PRESIDENT
TO SENATOR FLANDERS

The President sent the follomng letter to Ralph B. Flan-
ders, United Stales Senate, on August 30.

I have studied with interest the letter of August
eighteenth, signed by you and 27 other Senators,
calling for "total engagement of our psychological
and spiritual forces." It is gratifying to have this
expression of support for the Campaign of Truth
which we are now waging throughout the world.

As you know, I have for many years consistently
urged the expansion of our activities in the field
of international information and education. The
Voice of America, through its radio broadcasts,
has produced concrete results in giving the facts
about the United States to people all over the
world. The Government's films, publications,
libraries, overseas information centers, and ex-
change of persons activities have given the world a
clearer understanding of this country's progress
and ideals. Week by week, there is increasing
evidence that our program for getting the truth
to people on both sides of the iron curtain is suc-
cessful and can be made even more successful.

On Api-il 20 of this year, I issued a public call

Department of State Bulletin

for a greatly expanded Campaign of Truth. At
that time, I stated :

Because of the pressing need to increase our efforts
along this line, I have directed the Secretary of State to
plan a strengthened and more effective national effort
to use the great povper of truth in working for peace,
l^is effort will require the imagination and energies of
private individuals and groups throughout the country.
We shall need to use fully all the private and governmental
means that have proved successful so far — and to dis-
cover and employ new ones. . . .

We must make ourselves known as we really are — not
as Communist propaganda pictures us. We must pool
our efforts with those of the other free peoi)les in a
sustained, intensified program to promote the cause of
freedom against the propaganda of slavery. We must
make ourselves heard round the world in a great cam-
paign of truth.

The Secretary of State, in testifying on the Benton
Resohition, has also expressed the need for
strengthening the information and educational
exchange program.

Fortunately, the Government has been able to
draft for service in this campaign a number of
outstanding men whose qualifications for the work
have been widely hailed by the press and public.
We are continuing to bring into the Government
men with wide experience and vision who can lend
new vigor to this important activity. With the
cooperation of two distinguished advisory com-
missions, we are setting up panels of consultants
in order to draw upon the ideas and energies of
citizens and organizations outside the Government.

The Advisory Commission on International In-
formation, under the chairmanship of Mark Eth-
ridge, publisher of the Louisville Oowier Journal,
has unselfishly spent many weeks studying our

information operations in this country and abroad.
The members of this Commission have been of
enormous assistance in bringing about steady im-
provement in this field.

The Advisory Commission on Educational Ex-
change, under the chairmanship of Dr. Harvie
Branscomb, Chancellor of Vanderbilt University,
has been of comparable assistance in improving
the programs for exchange of persons, for over-
seas libraries and information centers, and related
activities. Both of these Commissions have re-
ported to me that our operations have clearly
demonstrated their worth to the American taxpay-
ers, have steadily improved month by month, and
are now in a position where large-scale expansion
is both justified and urgently needed.

NAC Ministers To Meet at New York

[Released to the press Aiigust 29]

Agreement has been reached that the North At-
lantic Treaty Foreign Ministers will hold the next
session of the North Atlantic Council at New
York on September 15 and 16. At present, the
North Atlantic Council deputies, who are meet-
ing at London, are engaged in preparatory work
for the September meeting of the Council.

Although the composition of the United States
delegation for the September Council meeting
has not been determined. Secretary Acheson will
be assisted by Charles M. Spofford, United States
representative on and chairman of the Council
deputies.

Supplementary Agenda Items

for Fifth Session of General Assembly '

U.N. doc. A/1332
Dated Aug. 24, 1950

1. Admission of new Members to the United Nations :
item proposed by El Salvador

2. Relations of States Members of the United Nations
with Spain : item proposed by the Dominican Republic

3. Draft First International Covenant on Human Rights
and measures of implementation : item proposed by
the Economic and Social Council

4. Draft Convention relating to the status of refugees:
item proposed by the Economic and Social Council

5. Long-range activities for children. Establishment of
United Nations International Children's Endowment
Fund : item proposed by the Economic and Social
Council

6. Technical assistance for Libya after achievement of
independence : item proposed by the Economic and
Social Council

7. Freedom of information :
(a) Interference with radio signals (Economic and

' See BUU.ETIN of Aug. 21, 1950, p. 304.
September 7 7, 7950

Social Council resolution 306 B (XI) ) : item pro-
posed by the Economic and Social Council
(b) Question of the freedom of information and
of the Press in times of emergency (Economic
and Social Council resolution 306 C (XI) ) : item
proposed by the Economic and Social Council

8. Strengthening of democratic principles as a means
of contributing to the maintenance of universal peace :
item proposed by Chile

9. Palestine :

(a) Repatriation of Palestine refugees and pay-
ment of compensation due to them ; implementa-
tion of General Assembly resolutions regarding
this question : item proposed by Egypt, by Iraq,
by Saudi Arabia and by Syria

(b) Report of the United Nations Conciliation Com-
mission for Palestine

10. Relations of States Members and specialized agen-
cies with Spain : item proposed by Peru

11. Failure of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
to repatriate or otherwise account for prisoners of
war detained in Soviet territory : item proposed by
Australia, the United Kingdom and the United States
of America

425

Germany — The Center of a Maelstrom of Interests

by Henry Byroade

Director, Bureau of German Affairs ^

I know that you have all heard a great deal
about Germany since the war's end some 5 years
ago. American emotions run high on this aspect
of our foreign policy in Germany, and there is no
lack of opinion as to what we should or should
not be doing m Germany. For instance, you have
heard that we are rebuilding Germany into an in-
dustrial Frankenstein that will again menace the
interests and security of its neighbors. At the
same time, you have heard criticism that we have
dismantled Germany's war plants and have thus
held her back. You have heard that we have
condoned the return of nazism in Germany and
that political reform, in general, is not keeping
step with economic I'ecovery ; in short, that we
are rebuilding Germany again in her own image.

Yet, others express the opinion that the time
has come for Germany to assume control of her
own armed forces.

Such is the American public opinion on Ger-
many today. The extremes are that we are going
too fast or too slow.

There is little wonder that the American citizen
should have this great interest in what is done in
Germany, and it is altogether healthy and de-
sirable that he does. It is the task of the Depart-
ment of State to take into account these sti'ong
interests and these differences of opinion in formu-
lating its policy on Germany. That guiding
thought is always with those of us who work
on German afFairs.

But there are many other interests centered on
Germany. In fact, Germany is the center of a
great maelstrom of interests, and these interests
meet there with considerable force. The very fact
that Germany is divided into four zones of occu-
pation— the British, the French, the American,
and the Soviet zone contiguous to Poland — means
that automatically the interests of four nations
would be meshed into what is done in Germany.

' statement made on a television broadcast over the
Columbia Broadcasting System on Aug. 20.

There is little wonder that the French, a neigh-
bor to the south, or the British, somewhat farther
removed yet still much closer than we, would have
great interests and great emotion about what
is done there. The interests, on the whole, of the
three Western Powers and of the Germans them-
selves have, however, meshed in a manageable
pattern. That such was not the case with our
fourth all}', the Soviet Union, is well-known to
all of you.

When the Soviet Union decided to lower the
iron curtain through Europe and through Ger-
many, she created a division of interest that
became almost unmanageable. Germany became
the heart and focal point of this conflict in Europe,
and it is this conflict that represents in many
respects one of our most critical foreign policy
problems today.

Berlin is much publicized as the center of East-
West tension. Yet it represents only in miniature
the greater theater of all Germany in this struggle.
Here, again, you see the former German capital
divided into four zones on this same pattern. But
again, like all of Germany, there remains for all
practical purposes only one great division, and
that is between West and East.

Attempts To Reach Agreement With U.S.S.R.

I should like to remind you of the very great
efforts made in the past to reach agreement with
the Soviet Union on Germany. It is well that
we do not forget either the courage of conviction
or the jiatience of such personages as General Clay,
Military Governor, or General Marshall, Secretary
of State, or others who struggled with this
problem.

When the three Foreign Ministers met in Lon-
don in late fall in 1947, it became crystal clear
that our efforts to reach agreement with the Soviet
Union on Germany could not succeed. The West-
ern Powers reluctantly and with a deep sense of
responsibility could only conclude that they must

426

Department of State Bulletin

proceed in the three Western zones towards Ger-
man self-government and economic unity that had
been denied for all of Germany.

There was a good foundation on which to pro-
ceed in the three Western zones. From the early
days of chaos and confusion following the war,
German society was progressing along the road to
normalcy. Reconstruction of both plant and
spirit was under way. Economic aid, largely from
the United States, had supplemented German
resources and American food had eased the loss of
Germany's eastern agricultural area.

Establishment of German Government

One of the first steps was the reinstatement of
free elections and the secret ballot. To the
younger generation of Germans that was a novel
experience, but they were quick to grasp the sig-
nificance of this new medium of political expres-
sion and they went to the polls to cast their ballots.
It was in such a free election under the processes
of a new democratic constitution that a Western
German Federal Government for the French,
British, and American zones was set up on Septem-
ber 21 of last year. The capital of the Federal
Republic is at the city of Bonn. It is there that
the two freely elected legislative bodies, the
Bundestag and the Bundesrat, hold their sessions.

The leaders of this new Government are Dr.
Theodore Huess, the President of the Federal
Republic, and Dr. Konrad Adenauer, the Chan-
cellor of the Republic.

Dr. Huess was a professor of philosophy and
law at Heidelberg University. He was dismissed
by the Xazis. Incidentally, he was the co-author
of the previous Weimar Constitution. Dr. Ade-
nauer was the mayor of Cologne until 1934. He
was subsequently dismissed by the Nazis. In July
of 19M, he was thrown into a concentration camp
by the Nazis and was liberated by the Allies.

On that same day of last year, military govern-
ment came to an end and an Allied High Commis-
sion of civilian character took its place. John J.
McCloy became the United States High Commis-
sioner for Germany. General Maxwell Taylor
assumed command in Berlin. On that same day,
here at home, the control of German affairs passed
from the Department of the Army to the Depart-
ment of State. We no longer ruled the Germans
as we did under military government. We be-
lieved the time had come to allow freely elected
Germans to assume greater responsibility in their
own affairs.

The control of the electorate over the Bundestag
and the Bundesrat — in other words, the Con-
gi'ess — and over the executive branch of govern-
ment and the administrative is a system not
greatly unlike our own.

It is in violent contrast to the system in the
East. There, a government is composed of offi-
cials appointed by its Communist leaders. This

September 7 7, 7950

is the exact opposite of the structure in the West.
In the West, you have ultimate control of the gov-
ernment by the people, and, in this system, you
have ultimate control of the people by the govern-
ment. So we have arrived today in Germany's
split between East and West.

The Future of Germany

The question before us now is where do we go
in the future?

We can conceive of tlu'ee courses of action in
dealing with our problems in Germany.

The first is to make the Germans genuine believ-
ers in democracy in the Western sense. This
strikes at the very fundamentals of the problem
but is, of course, a long-range project.

The second course is the maintenance of Allied
controls over Germany which are based, in the
last analysis, on force. This is exemplified by the
High Commission, the occupation troops, the Ruhr
Authority, and the Military Security Board. It
is the negative course and, although it may be a
course of practical security, it is one hardly judged
to bring the West and Germany more closely to-
gether.

The third course is integration of Germany into
a United Europe. By this, we mean the formation
in Europe of a framework of states in which Ger-
many would eventually become an equal partner.
It would have to be a framework of such nature
and such character as to satisfy the energies and
the economic desires and the legitimate political
aspirations of the Germans. It should also be of
a character to take advantage of the inherent
abilities of the Germans.

We are, in fact, proceeding along all three of
these courses, but, as we turn away from the con-
cepts of military government, we are stressing
more and more the two positive courses, one and
three. In fact, the greater success we can have in
these two positive courses, the less we shall have
to rely upon the negative course of Allied control.

We believe, in fact, the time is near when the
Germans can be given greater responsibility over
their own authorities. A portion of my staff is
now in London working with the French and
British on this very problem. We wish to remove
to the greatest extent feasible the practical
barriers that still stand between noi'mal relations
of Germany with other nations. We also wish to
give the Germans greater control in their own
internal affairs.

In any such step forward, we would, of course,
expect the Germans to assume certain additional
responsibilities and obligations.

Everything we do in Germany must be meas-
ured in terms of its effect on and the effect by this
great and rising menace from the East.

I know no better picture of this situation than
the recent Whitsuntide affair in Berlin. You will
remember the march of nearly half-a-million East
German Communist youths upon Berlin. This

427

occasion, because of the initiative and determina-
tion of our officials in Germany, was a failure for
the Soviets since it had been their announced in-
tention to invade the Western sectors of Berlin
and discredit the position of the Western Allies.
This did not happen, and, hence, we won another
battle in Berlin. It is not a victory, however, on
which we can receive much satisfaction, for it
demonstrates to us the deadly perversion of Ger-
man youth at the hands of the Soviet Union. The
extreme regimentation, the flaming torch, and the
goose step form a pattern not unlike that of the
Hitler Youth of 1939.

Those of the Communist youths that crossed the
borders in the Western sectors of Berlin in defi-
ance of the orders of their leaders saw a picture
they will not soon forget. Unlike the distorted
picture they had been given, the living conditions,
the shops, the theaters, the vast international
automobile show under way, but above all the gen-
eral atmosphere and the spirit and determination
of the people formed deep impressions upon them.
It is perhaps the undesirability from the Soviet
point of view of Eastern Germans returning back
to their homeland with this picture that caused
them to change their mind.

I believe we hold the initiative over the Soviet
Union in Germany more clearly today than we
have at any other time since the end of the war.
It is only the use of crude force or the fear psy-
chosis that can be caused by an unbalanced display
of force that could cause us to lost that initiative.

QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

DAVID SCHOENBRUN [HEAD OP CBS PARIS BU-
REAU] : What does the State Department consider to be
the factors involved in deciding to rearm Germany?

Mr. Btroade: I hope in making up your own
mind on that question that you will realize one
fundamental fact. Our problems in Germany re-
solve themselves into two great fields. One is to
contain and counteract the Soviet design on Ger-
many. But the other is to get, in the last analysis,
the right type of Germany in the future. In spite
of the great menace from the East, none of us
wishes to give away that great objective.

There can he no doubt that the national re-
armament of Germany would be a factor in the
type of Germany we are going to get in the future.
Germany is now in a very formative stage. There
are many reasons for that. But there are also
other factors.

This is not a field in which the United States
could or should make up its mind alone. For,
in this, above all fields, the Allies must remain in
common unity, and there is certainly no greater
time in which unity is necessary among the Allies.

You also have to consider the feelmgs of the
Germans themselves because it is hardly within
our power — and it wouldn't work if we had to

do it by power — for us to force a rearmament of
Germany. A bulk of the German people have
very strong feelings against German rearmament.
I do not believe they wish to see a German General
Staff or a German Army or in fact the German
uniform entering at this stage of this formative
life.

MR. SCHOENBRUN: Do you have something else
in mind or do some of our Allies have something In
mind other than the national rearmament of Germany or
the recreation of the German General Staff, something
perhaps like Churchill suggested at the Council of
Europe, the formation of a European Army?

Mr. Btroade : The Churchill proposal and the
action of the Council at Strasbourg today, so far
as I know, have given us very little clue as to
how a European Army might be formed, the fun-
damentals of the plan, and how and when and in
what way might the German contribution be
expected. In the absence of such fundamentals
and in the absence of the attitude of the European
nations thereon, it is very difficult for us to draw a
conclusion. However, I should like to say this.

This country would naturally warmly support
any move from Europe that would increase their
solidarity and their common defense. We cer-
tainly believe that the Churchill proposal warrants
the greatest study by all governments concerned.

ALLEN JACKSON [CBS NEWS BROADCASTER]:
What do you think the likelihood is of another Korean
incident developing in Europe, particularly with Berlin
as the possible focal point?

Mr. Bteoade: I want to point out one great
difference between the situation in Germany and
that in Korea. In Korea, our occupation troops
have been withdrawn under the supervision of the
United Nations. In Germany, of course, our
troops are still there and accompanied by French
and British troops. Any attack by the Soviet or
by East German forces would, therefore, have to
be a direct attack upon the combined armies of
the West. Whether or not the forces in the East
would make such a decision and accept the conse-
quences is something I cannot estimate.

MR. JACKSON : How about the dismantling program?
You mentioned something about that. Is that going for-
ward pretty rapidly, so fast that perhaps Germany Is
likely to be weakened as a force in the whole reconstruc-
tion of Europe, or is there any reason to feel that it is not
going fast enough in some ways?

Mr. Bteoade: The dismantling program is
practically finished. It is still going on. There
are remnants of war plants and prohibitive indus-
tries that are being cleaned up. But I believe that
by the end of next month it will be finished with
the exception, let us say, of a couple of projects.
But for all practical purposes, it is now finished.

MR. SCHOENBRUN : If the East German Communists
were to attack, create an act of aggression, would It be our

428

Department of State Bulletin

policy to consider that the Russians as an occupying power
are directly responsible or vould it be considered just a
satellite action?

Mr. Byroade: I believe that the various inter-
governiiiental agreements, including Potsdam, and
the definition and acceptance of occupational re-
sponsibilities could leave us with no other conclu-
sion in any such major event as an attack from the
Soviet zone. We could onlj' conclude that that
was an action sponsored by and condoned by the
Soviet Governnient.

MR. HOWE [CBS COMMENTATOR] : ProbaWy we
should point out in passing that in tlie ease of North Korea
the Soviets had withdrawn ; there was not any open active
occupation of North Korea by the Russian troops as there
is of Germany.

Mr. Btroade : That is correct.

MR. JACKSON: In your briefing, you spoke of the
democratization program in Germany. How has that pro-
gressed to this time?

Mr. Byroade: If we are expecting immediate
perfection in that or if we ever expect to create
Germans in our own image, we will fail. How-
ever, I believe a great deal is being done and I
believe it is one of our greatest successes in Ger-
many. This involves, for instance, the exchange
1 program in which hundreds — and this year thou-
sands, we hope — of Germans will come to this
country to study. It involves exchange of stu-
dents, labor leaders, governmental officials, Ger-
mans from all walks of life coming to this country
to see our way of government and our way of
life. It involves the picture of the American way
of life throughout Germany by all types of infor-
mational media. But it also involves American
officials working with the Germans at all levels,
including the lowest, the kreis or township, to
show by example our way of life. I believe
dividends are definitely being gotten.

MR. SCHOBNBRUN : We have been talking about Ger-
many as thougli she were an isolated problem or some
prize to be won in a tug of war. There is a new approach
being tried in Europe. I refer specifically to the Schu-
man Plan. I would like to know what the State Depart-
ment thinks of the Schuman Plan for the integration of
industry among the five or six nations that have started
it.

Mr. BYftoADE : Let me point out how the Schu-
man Plan for coal and steel really fits into our
policy for Germany. You remember I said our
third course of action was to integrate Gennany
into Western Europe. This is a concept that
had great hope in Germany as long as a year
and a half ago when the Council of Europe was
being formed and Winston Churchill was voicing
the concept of a United Europe. This was one
thing that would stir the interests of even the

homeless German youth, for in this type of ap-
proach he could see again some way for Germany
to take its rightful place in .Europe. Unfor-
tunately, that feeling diminished because the work
of the United Europe had not progressed as rap-
idly as has been hoped.

The Schuman Plan has completely reversed
that. Let there be no mistake about this. The
Schuman Plan is perhaps the greatest develop-
ment since the war in Europe, and perhaps for
decades before that, because it drives to the very
heart of Europe's problems, the Franco-German
rapprochement. In the political effects of the
Schuman Plan, we see great hopes of eventual
German integration in Western Europe.

MR. SCHOENBRUN : What is the status of nazism Id
Germany now?

Mr. Byroade: I believe nazism as such is
dead. I don't mean there are not lingering tend-
encies, lingering individuals, that should not be
perhaps where they are, nor do I mean there are
not tendencies in Germany which we have to
watch. I would not classify them as being the
National Socialist Party.

East German Election Law
Degrades Democratic Process

Statement T)y Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press August SO]

I have been advised that an election law for
the October 15, 1950, elections to the East Ger-
man parliament has been passed by the so-called
German Democratic Republic, the puppet Com-
munist regime which the Soviet Union has es-
tablished in Eastern Germany.

Contrary to one of the basic principles of demo-
cratic practice, this election law makes absolutely
no provision for a secret vote. I understand that
according to the law, the voter is handed the bal-
lot as he enters the voting place. His name is
checked off a list. If he desires, he may then
make a change on the ballot although no booth or
other secret place is provided for him to do that.
If he makes a change he is automatically recog-
nized as an anti-Communist, for those voting the
Communist ticket do not have to make any indi-
cation whatever on the ballot. The voter is then
required to drop his ballot into an urn.

This entire process takes place in front of the
voting board, the members of which are all mem-
bers of the Communist Party or its affiliated or-
ganizations. I hardly need point out how brazen
an example this is of typical Communist degrada-
tion of the democratic process.

September ?I, 7950

429

U. S. S. R. Fails To Account for Prisoners of War

U.N. doc. A/1339
Transmitted Aug. 25

Following is text of notes addressed to Secretary-Oenr
eral Trygve Lie from United Nations representatives of
Australia, United Kingdom, and the United States.

Excellency : We liave the honor to refer to our
teleg:rain of August 20, 1950, submitting the item
"Failure of the Union of Soviet Socialist Repub-
lics to Repatriate or Otlierwise Account for Pris-
oners of War Detained in Soviet Territory" to be
placed on the Provisional Agenda of the Fifth
Session of the General Assembly.

The explanatory memorandum, referred to in
the above-mentioned telegram, follows:

At the end of hostilities in Europe and in the
Far East in 1945, large numbers of military per-
sonnel of various nationalities were in the hands
of the Allied Powers. The prompt repatriation
of these prisoners was demanded by accepted inter-
national practice and no less by the elementary
principles of humanity.

The Allied Powers clearly recognized at the out-
set this responsibility and entered into agreements
to repatriate prisoners of war. (See paragraph
9 of Potsdam Proclamation of July 26, 1945 ; For-
eign Ministers Agreement in Moscow, April 23,
1947; Agreement between the U.S.S.R. and the
Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers in
Japan, of December 19, 1946, Annexes I, II, and

The Soviet Union has not complied fully with
these agreements. Moreover, the other Govern-
ments concerned have on various occasions re-
quested the U.S.S.R. to furnish information con-
cerning its repatriation programs and have even in
certain cases oflFered transportation facilities for
repatriation. However, on April 22, 1950, and
May 5, 1950, Tass announced tliat the U.S.S.R. had
completed the repatriation of all Japanese and
German prisoners of war from its territories
except for persons detained in connection with
war crimes or on account of illness. ( Annexes IV
and V).

Evidence exists to show that these statements
are not true. Moreover, the Japanese Diet on

' Released to the press by the U.S. Mission to the U.N.
Aug. 27, 1950.

May 2, 1950, and the Bundestag of the Federal
German Government on May 5, 1950, adopted res-
olutions protesting these announcements and ap-
pealing for every possible assistance to bring about
an early settlement of the problem. (Annexes VI
and VII).

On the basis of the evidence of Soviet non-com-
pliance, Governments having control responsibil-
ity in Germany and Japan have on various
occasions stated to the Soviet Government their
inability to give credence to the Tass announce-
ments and have requested it to agree to the designa-
tion of an international humanitarian body or or-
ganization which should make a thorough
examination of the repatriation program at first
hand. (Annexes VII, IX, and X).

Since all these efforts have been without avail,
the Governments of Australia, the United King-
dom, and the United States now consider it essen-
tial to place the matter before the General
Assembly under Articles 10, 14, and 1 (3) of the
Clmrter. The three Governments hope that the
General Assembly will consider means whereby
full information on all these persons may be ob-
tained and the repatriation of all those now living
may be secured.

Further documents will be supplied later.

Accept [etc.]

For these reasons, I am glad to see that you and
your colleagues agree that "we need more funds
and a great expansion of facilities." On July 13,
I transmitted to the Congress an appropriation
request for $89,000,000 to carry forward the Cam-
paign of Truth. The House of Representatives
has cut this amount to $65,655,850. This is far
less than the amount needed to carry on the kind
of campaign that you advocate. I trust that you,
and the other members of the Senate wlio signed
tlie joint letter of August 18, will support the full
amount of $89,000,000 necessary for the expansion
of our education and information activities. The
Senate can render a great service if it will see that
the necessary funds are provided. At a time when
the Kremlin is sparing no effort to spread the most
flagrant lies about this country and our allies, we
must forge ahead with this great and affirmative
campaign. Truth must prevail throughout the
world, if we are to have just and lasting peace.

430

Department of State Bulletin

Annex I

Proclamation Defining Teiins for Japanese Sur-
render, Potsdam, July 20, 19J/>, Paragraph 9

The Japanese military forces, after being completely
disarmed, shall be permitted to return to their homes with
the opportunity to lead peaceful and productive lives.

Annex II

Foreign Ministers Agreement, Moscow, April 23,
WJf7

1. German prisoners-of-war located in the territory of
the Allied Powers and in all other territories will be re-
turned to Germany by December 31, 1948.

2. The repatriation of German prisoners-of-war will be
carried out in accordance with the plan which will be
worked out by the control council not later than July 1
of this year.

Annex III

Agreement Between the U.S.SJ?. and the Su-
preme Cormnander for the Allied Powers in Japan,
December 19, 19Jfi

AGREEMENT Reached Concerning Repatriation of
Japanese Prisoners of War and Japanese Nationals from
Territory of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and
from Territories under the Control of the U. S. S. R.
to Japan, as well as Korean Nationals from Japan to
Korea North of the 38° North Latitude.

All sections of this agreement have been concurred in
by the Member of the Allied Council for Japan from the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and the representa-
tives of the Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers
in Japan, whose signatures appear at the end of this
document.

Section I — Persons Subject to Repatriation

1. Following i)ersons are subject to repatriation from
territory of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and
territories under the control of the Union of Soviet So-
cialist Republics :

a. Japanese prisoners of war.

b. Japanese nationals (repatriation of Japanese na-
tionals from territory of U. S. S. R. is made on voluntary
basis).

2. Subject to repatriation from the territory of Japan
are Koreans numbering 10,000 persons, who previously
resided in Korea north of the 38° north latitude and
who were born in the aforementioned part of Korea.

Section II — Ports and Rates of Movement

1. The following ports will be used for repatriation of
Japanese from the territory of the U. S. S. R. and terri-
tories under the control of the U. S. S. R. : Nahodka,
Maoka, Genzan, Kanko and Dairen (Dalny). Repatria-
tion of Koreans referred to in paragraph 2, Section I,
from Japan will be made through the port of Sasebo.

2. The rate of movement of Japanese from the above-

mentioned Soviet ports Is established as 50,000 persons per
month.

3. Repatriation of Koreans from Japan to northern
Korea will be made simultaneously, by means of shuttle
operations, and after 10,000 Japanese have been repa-
triated from northern Korea to Japan.

4. Both parties of this agreement respectively reserve
the right, to change the ptirts designated for repatriation
and the rates of movement or temporarily suspiend the
repatriation in case of unforeseen circumstances (climatic
conditions, icing, difficulties encountered under winter
conditions In transporting repatriates to ports of embarka-
tion, etc.).

Section III — Embarkation Procedure and
Transportation

1. Transportation facilities, for repatriation of persons
indicated in Section I of this agreement from all iwrts
designated for this purpose, will be provided by the Su-
preme Commander for the Allied Powers in Japan. No
passengers, other than the persons of the above-mentioned
categories, will be transported on ships assigned for
repatriation.

2. The responsibility for assembling persons, subject to
repatriation, in ports as well as the responsibility for their
embarkation, rests with the authorities directing the re-
patriation from that particular port. These authorities
are also charged with the responsibility over all the de-
tails concerning selection of repatriates to be placed on
board each ship, planning of the order of embarkation
and supervision of same.

3. When dispatching ships for repatriation of repatriates
to the Soviet ports indicated in paragraph 1, Section II,
tlie Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers in Japan
will select ships whose rated capacity will accommodate
the number to be lifted as shown in the notification, as
mentioned in paragraph 2, Appendix 1, below. Under
these conditions ships will be loaded to their full capacity.
Ships will arrive in Soviet ports indicated in paragraph 1
of Section II for repatriation of repatriates not later than
fourteen days after the notification is submitted by the
Soviet representatives to the Supreme Commander for
the Allied Powers in Japan.

4. At the Soviet ports and ports which are under the
control of the U.S.S.R., Japanese repatriates will be
transferred by representatives of the Soviet authorities,
according to rosters and acts written in the Russian lan-
guage, to the masters of ships arriving from Japan for
repatriates. Upon arrival of ships bearing Koreans from
Japan at Genzan and Kanko (Northern Korea), the repa-
triates will be transferred by the master of the ships,
according to rosters and acts written in the English
language, to the Soviet authorities.

5. In the waters of the Soviet Union and in those under
the control of the U.S.S.R., ships operating under the
control of the Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers
and used in repatriation will follow routes and regulations
prescribed by the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, as
stated in Appendix 1.

6. Regular navigation communications will be main-
tained in accordance with the regulations, stated in
Appendix 2.

Sepfember II, 1950

431

Section IV — Supply for Repatriates and Ships Assigned
for Repatriation

1. It is the responsibility of the Supreme Commander
for the Allied Powers in Japan to see that the following
is provided by the Japanese Government :

a. All food supply necessary for the feeding of repatri-
ates from the time of embarkation until their arrival to the
port of destination.

b. Medical service and supply for repatriates for the
entire length of trip aboard ship.

c. Ship stores, including fuel, etc. as well as fresh water
supply for ships sailing for the port of Nahodka, for the
entire round trip and the time while ships are docked or
harbored at ports of embarkation.

2. All expenses connected with the repatriation of
Japanese prisoners of war and Japanese nationals from
the territory of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
and from territories under control of U.S.S.R., as well
as the expenses covering repatriation of Koreans from
Japan, will be charged against the account of the Japanese
Government.

3. The Soviet party agrees to render in case of emergency
(damaged ship) possible assistance and aid to the dam-
aged ship which arrived for repatriates. On such cases,
the masters of the ships must sign the bills presented for
the rendered assistance, which shall be paid without any
delay in United States dollars by the Supreme Commander
for the Allied Powers.

Section V — Sanitation and Medical Measures

1. Both parties are bound to fulfill in their respective
ports the following requirements for medical processing
of all repatriates.

a. Small-pox vaccination to be given to all repatriates.

b. Typhoid vaccine to be given to all repatriates.

c. Cholera vaccine to be given to all repatriates (either
In spring or fall).

d. Disinfestation of all repatriates and disinfestation
of their baggage.

2. No repatriates with contagious diseases will be
allowed to embark.

3. The fulfillment of all the above mentioned measures
must be stated in a clause written into the act covering
the transfer and acceptance of repatriates which is signed
by the representative of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics and the captain or master of the ship.

4. Ships assigned for repatriation will be cleansed and
disinfested in Japan.

Section VI — Possession of Repatriates

1. Japanese prisoners being repatriated are permitted
to take with them such personal belongings, in hand bag-
gagie, as are allowed for exportation by customs
regulations.

2. Japanese nationals subject to repatriation, will be
permitted to bring with them their personal belongings
not exceeding 100 kilograms per person, with the excep-
tion of such items as are not allowed for exportation by
customs regulations.

3. Japanese prisoners of war and Japanese nationals
will be permitted to bring with them their personal papers
as well as Japanese yen not exceeding the following

amounts per person: 500 yen for oflBcers; 200 yen for sol-
diers, and 1,000 yen for nationals. All repatriates will be
permitted to bring with them their personal postal savings
pass book, bank pass books, and other personal documents,
issued by Japanese financial institutions, which are pay-
able in Japan.

4. Koreans being repatriated from Japan vrill be per-
mitted to bring with them, unimi)eded and duty-free, their
personal things and household belongings not exceeding
200 kilograms per person, as well as some light machinery
and handicraft equipment belonging to them, in excess of
not more than 1,000 kilograms per person.

5. Korean repatriates returning to northern Korea will
also be permitted to bring with them the following:

a. 1,000 yen per person.

b. Postal savings pass books and bank pass books
issued by financial institutions in Japan and Korea.

c. Insurance policies issued in Japan and Korea.

d. Checks, drafts and certificates of deposit drawn on
and issued by financial institutions in Japan, payable in
Japan.

Section VII

This agreement is made or written in the English and
the Russian Language. In interpreting this agreement,
both texts are considered being identical and authentic.

K. N. Derevyanko, Lt. Gen. Paui, J. Mueixeb, Maj. Gen.

Member of the Allied Conn- GSC

cil for Japan from the Representative for the Su-

Union of Soviet Socialist prerne Commander for

Republics the Allied Powers

19 December 1946 19 December 1946

Tokyo, Japan Tokyo, Japan

Appendices

Appendix 1 — Procedure Covering Harboring of Ships
in Soviet Ports and in Ports Under Control of U.S.S.R.

Appendix 2 — Navigation Communications

Appendix 1 — Procedure Covering Harboring of Ships in
Soviet Ports and in Ports under Control of U.S.S.R.

1. Harboring facilities at the ports.

a. Port of Nahodka can harbor ships of any tonnage
with draught up to 7 meters. The daily harboring ca-
pacity is 1-2 ships simultaneously.

b. Port of Maoka can harbor ships with draught up to
6 meters. Daily harbor capacity is 2-3 ships simul-
taneously.

c. Ports of Genzan and Kanko (Northern Korea) can
harbor ships up to 10,000 tons. Daily harbor capacity
of each of these ports is 2 ships simultaneously.

d. Port of Dairen can harbor ships up to 10,000 tons.
Daily harbor capacity is 3 ships simultaneously.

2. The notification that a contingent is ready for re-
patriation and the ships may be dispatched from Japan
for their transportation, will be given to the Supreme
Commander for the Allied Powers each time in advance
through the Member of the Allied Council for Japan from
the U. S. S. R., indicating name of the port from which
repatriates are to be repatriated, the number to be re-
patriated, the approximate time of repatriation, and the
exact location of the point (with indication of latitude
and longitude) where ships enroute to ports of embarka-

432

DeparSmeni of Slate Bulletin

tlon will be met by Soviet craft and will proceed further
under their escort into the ports.

3. Taking into account the statement in paragraph 2
above, the Supreme Commander for the Allied Powers
will notify the Member of the Allied Council for Japan
from U. S. S. R. in advance of each ship leaving Japan on
a repatriation trip, giving the estimated date of de-
parture, name of the ship, type, estimated time of arrival
in the port of destination and the shipmaster's last name.

Appendix 2 — Navigation Communications

1. Navigation messages may be received by means of
establishing communications with the following radio
Stations :

a. Maritime agency of foreign navies in Vladivostok via
radio station in Nahodka Bay. This radio station main-
tains observation of the sea from 0100 to 0500 hours, from
0600 to 1000 hours, from 1100 to 1300 hours and from
1500 to 1700 hours (Moscow time). Call sign is UKI.
Frequency 500 KG.

b. Maritime agency at the port of Maoka. Call sign is
UFO ; frequency 50 KC. Observation of the sea main-
tained 24 hours per day.

c. (1) Port of Kanko — radio station will maintain ob-
servation of the sea 24 hours a day. Call sign — UWG —
2 ; frequency 500 KC.

(2) Port of Genzan — radio station will maintain ob-
servation of the sea 24 hours a day. Call sign — UWU —
2; frequency 500 KC.

d. Port of Dairen — radio station maintains observation
of the sea (Moscow time) from 0100 to 0200 ; from 0230 to
0300; from 0330 to 0500; from 0530 to 0900; from 0930
to 1600; from 1630 to 1900 and from 2000 to 2400. Call
sign — UWC ; frequency— 500 KC.

2. Russian language will be used in all navigation
messages issued by Soviet ports and ports controlled by
U.S.S.R.

3. English language will be used in all navigation
messages issued from aboard ships, arriving at repatria-
tion ports in Soviet or Soviet-controlled areas.

Annex IV

Toss Announcements-
the U.S.S.R.

-Prisoners of War from

Tass Announcement, April 22, 1950

It was communicated in the statement of the Repre-
sentative of the Council of Ministers of the U.S.S.R. on
Repatriation Affairs on May 20, 1949 that by May 1949
the overwhelming majority of the Japanese war prisoners
had been repatriated from the Soviet Union to Japan and
that the remaining war prisoners, numbering 95,000 men,
were subject to repatriation during the year 1949, with
the exception of persons who are under investigation In
connection with war crimes committed by them.

Tass has been authorized to communicate that at pres-
ent the Soviet agencies have completed the repatriation of
the remaining Japanese war prisoners mentioned in the
statement of the Representative of the Council of Minis-
ters of the U.S.S.R. on Repatriation Affairs dated May
20, 1949. There have not been repatriated 1,487 Japanese
war prisoners sentenced or under investigation for war

%eptembet 11, 1950

crimes committed by them, 9 Japanese war prisoners who
are subject to repatriation after the completion of their
medical treatment and 971 men, Japanese war prisoners,
who committed serious crimes against the Chinese people
and who are placed at the disposal of the Central People's
Government of the Chinese People's Republic.

Since Japan's capitulation tliere have been repatriated
from the Soviet Union to Japan 510,409 Japanese prisoners
of war in all, besides 70,880 men, prisoners of war who
were immediately released in 1945 in the zone of combat
operations.

Tass Announcement, June 9, 1950

In connection with the rejjeated statements of official
American and Japanese circles and the spreading of all
kinds of false communications in the reactionary press
abroad concerning the number of Japanese war prisoners
who are in the U.S.S.R., Tass has been authorized to
state the following.

It was communicated in the statement of the Adminis-
tration of the Representative of the Council of Ministers
of the U.S.S.R. on Repatriation Affairs dated May 20,
1949 that of the total number of 594,000 soldiers and offi-
cers of the Japanese Army taken prisoners by May 1, 1949,
there were repatriated to Japan 418,166 men, not coimting
70,880 men released immediately in the zone of combat
operations and that on May 1, 1949 there remained in the
Soviet Union unrepatriated 95,000 men.

In the communication of Tass dated April 22, 1950
"concerning the completion of repatriation of Japanese
war prisoners from the Soviet Union" it was officially
stated that the repatriation of the 95,000 Japanese war
prisoners, who remained by May 1949 in the territory of
the Soviet Union has been completed with the exception
of 1,487 war prisoners sentenced or under investigation for
war Climes committed by them, as well as 9 war prisoners
who are subject to repatriation after the completion of
their metlical treatment and 971 men, prisoners of war,
who committed serious crimes against the Chinese people
and who are placed at the disposal of the Central People's
Government of the Chinese People's Republic. It was in-
dicated in the communication of Tass in this connection
that the repatriation of Japanese war prisoners from the
U.S.S.R. had been completed in full.

In spite of the exhaustive facts quoted in these ofl3cial
statements, there are spread in the United States of
America and in Japan invented communications concern-
ing a large number of Japanese war prisoners who have
allegedly remained in the territory of the U.S.S.R.

Tass has been authorized to declare that the said
communications of foreign circles are of a maliciously
slandering nature with respect to the Soviet Union and
that they aim to distract the attention of the Japanese
people from the policy of the U.S.A. directed toward the
economic and political enslavement of Japan.

Annex V

Tass Announcement, Mat 5, 1950

In communication Tass of January 1949 it was shown
that vast majority German POW's were repatriated from
Soviet Union to Germany by end 1948 and that repatria-

433

tion remaining POW's being conducted according plan
adopted by Soviet Government and should be concluded
during 1949.

Tass is authorized to state the last group POW's num-
bering 17,538 has now been repatriated.

Thus repatriation German POW's from Soviet Union
to Germany now completely finished. Since Germany's
capitulation there have been repatriated from Soviet
Union to Germany 1,939,063 German POW's, including
58,103 turned up during 1947-49 among POW's of other
nationalities found in Soviet Union.

Of number German POW's on Soviet Union territory
there remain 9,717 persons convicted grave war crimes,
3,815 persons whose war crimes in process investigation,
and also 14 persons now detained owing illness who will
be repatriated after treatment.

Annex VI

Resolution Adopted hy the Hoitse of Representa-
tives avd the House of Councillors of the Japanese
Diet, May 2, 1950

[Translation!

Resolution for request for acceleration of repatria-
tion of unrepatriated Japanese and investigation
into their actual situations through the United
Nations.

Since the termination of the war, the people of Japan
have to this day faithfully carried out the provisions of the
Potsdam Declaration.

Yet today, after the lapse of almost five years since the
end of the war, there still remain in the Soviet Union and
in the areas under Soviet influence (including Siberia,
Saghalien, Northern Korea, Dairen and Chinese Com-
munist areas) more than 300,000 Japanese whose fate is
unknown.

Notwithstanding the repeated request made to the Soviet
Union through the Allied General Headquarters for an
official report, the Soviet Union has made no official
response, and the whole people of Japan have been deeply
pained in heart and mind. Representing this feeling of
our people, by means of this resolution taken by tliis
House, this House is resolved to request the Supreme
Commander for the Allied Powers to appeal to the justice
and public opinion of the world through the United
Nations Organization and to afford every possible assist-
ance for bringing about the early settlement of this ques-
tion and especially for his highest consideration with
regard to the realization of the following :

1. That all of our nationals still remaining in the Soviet
Union and in the areas under Soviet influence (including
Siberia, Saghalien, Northern Korea, Dairen and Chinese
Communist areas) be repatriated as early as possible.

2. That it be arranged to announce the names of those
among the internees in the Soviet Union and in the areas
under Soviet influence who have died, who have been asso-
ciated with war crimes, who are .serving sentence and who
are detained for illness.

3. That it be arranged for an investigation team of the
United Nations or neutral or humanitarian body to
investigate in the Soviet Union and in the areas under

Soviet control the situation of life and death of our
interned nationals.

Annex VII

Resolution Adopted hy the Bvmdestag of the
Federal Republic of Germany, '^^ay 5^ 1950

In the name of the German people, the Bundestag re-
jects the assertion disseminated yesterday by the Soviet
radio that the repatriation of German prisoners of war
from the Soviet Union has been completed. It is just as
untrue as the long-since disproved statement of the Soviet
News Agency Tass which asserted in early 1947 that there
were at that time only 890,000 prisoners of war in the
Soviet Union.

The Soviet Union has repeatedly broken all Its promises
to release German prisoners of war by a given time. Even
today, five years after the end of the war, hundreds of
thousands of German prisoners of war in the Soviet
Union await return to their homes. Moreover, thousands
of deportees, men and women, who never were soldiers,
are held in the Soviet Union and are damned to slave
labor there. Even in very recent days the number of
these unfortunates has been again increased by mass ship-
ments from the allegedly de-activated concentration camps
of the Soviet occupation zone.

The Bundestag requests the Federal Government im-
mediately to take the necessary steps with the Allied
High Commission to bring about the following results :

(1) The publication of the names, crimes and where-
abouts of the detained prisoners of war and deported
civilians.

(2) The naming of those who have died in prisoner of
war camps under Soviet control.

(3) A search for the missing.

In our distress we call upon the world and appeal to
the conscience of every individual : Help free these un-
fortunate people.

The freely elected representatives of the German peo-
ple, the Bundestag, protest most solemnly against this in-
justice, and expects that the solidarity of all democratic
peoples, esjiecially the United Nations, will lead them to
endorse this protest and cooi)erate, so that the hour of
liberation may soon strike for tlie last prisoner of war of
all nations.

Annex Vlil

Notes from Australia to the Soviet Embassy in
Canberra *

Note of January 5, 1950

The Department of External Affairs presents its compli-
ments to the Embassy of the U. S. S. R. and has tlie hon-
our to inform the Embassy that the Australian Govern-
ment is concerned at the large number of Japanese pris-
oners of war who appear to be still detained by the
U. S. S. B.

Tlie Embassy will remember that paragraph 9 of the

'No reply to these notes had been received at the time
of presentation of this memorandum.

434

DGpatimQni of Sfafe Bulletin

rotsdam Proclamation of 26 July 1045 states, "The Jap-
anese military forces, after being completely disarmed,
sliall lie permitted to return to tlieir homes witli the op-
pcirtunity to lead peaceful and productive lives." The
Embassy will also be aware that the repatriation of
Japanese prisoners of war held by Allied Powers other
tlian the U. S. S. R. was virtually completed in 1947.

TASS News Agency reported on 20 May 1949 that 95,000
Japanese prisoners of war were stlU held by the U. S. S. K.
According to figures carefully compiled by the Japanese
Government and checked from every available source,
this large figure siven by TASS does not account for the
additional 376,929 prisoners still in areas under Soviet
control. The Australian Government is forced to con-
clude that if the TASS figure is correct, the discrepancy
between that and the Japanese Government estimate can
only be accounted for by an abnormally high death rate
among Japanese prisoners awaiting repatriation by the
TJ. S. S. R. In this connection the Australian Government
has observed that the U. S. S. R. has continually refused to
furnish notifications of the deaths of Japanese prisoners
and feel bound to p<iint out to the Government of U.S.S.R.
that failure to provide such information as well as the
prolonged detention of prisoners after the cessation of
hostilities is contrary to the accepted international con-
cepts of fundamental human rights and the humanitarian
principles contained in the Geneva Convention of 1949
which has been signed by the U. S. S. R.

The Australian Government expresses the hope that
the Government of the U. S. S. R. will accept the prin-
ciple that an international humanitarian organization
should be designated as protecting power to conduct full
and impartial Investigations into the position of those
Japanese detained in areas under the control of the
TJ. S. S. R. since the end of the war. The representative
of the British Commonwealth countries on the Allied
CJouncil for Japan put forward such a proposal at the
Council's meeting on 21 December and its acceptance by
the U. S. S. R. would undoubtedly greatly assist in clarify-
ing the present unsatisfactory position.

Note of FEnRUART 10, 1950

The Department of External Affairs presents its com-
pliments to the Embassy of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics and has the honour to refer to the Department's
Note of 5th January, 1950, regarding the Australian Gov-
ernment's concern at the large number of Japanese pris-
oners-of-war who are apparently still detained by the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics.

The Australian Government hopes that the Government
of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics will soon be in
a position to reply to the suggestion contained in the
Department's Note of 5th January that an international
humanitarian organization should be designated as pro-
tecting power to conduct a full and impartial investigation
into the position of the remaining Japanese prisoners-of-
war now estimated at 371,929.

I ° A similar note was addressed on the same day by the
C United States Embassy in Moscow to the Soviet Govern-
ij ment. No reply to either of these notes had been received
at the time of presentation of this Memorandum.

Annex IX

Exchange of Notes Between the United States and
the Soviet Union

United States Note of June 9, 1950

The Secretary of State presents his compliments to the
Charge d'Affaires ad interim of the Union of Soviet Social-
ist Republics and refers to the Secretary's note of De-
cember 30, 1949, requesting the cooperation of the Soviet
Union in the matter of repatriating or otherwise account-
ing for over 370,000 Japanese nationals who, according
to figures considered reliable, are in areas under Soviet
control, dead or alive.

The note under reference alluded to the repatriation
obligations of the Soviet Union under the Potsdam Decla-
ration of July 26, 1945, and pointed out that the prolonged
detention of prisoners after the cessation of hostilities is
in patent conflict with accepted international concepts
of fundamental human rights and freedoms and with hu-
manitarian principles as set forth in the Geneva Conven-
tion of 1949 relative to the treatment of prisoners of war
which was signed by some sixty Powers including the
Soviet Union. In the interests of resolving a problem of
long-standing concern to the Allied Powers and Japan, the
note specifically requested that the Soviet Government
agree to the designation of an international humanitarian
body or organization charged with making a complete first-
hand survey of the situation with a view to obtaining
exact information on Japanese held in Soviet areas since
the cessation of hostilities.

The Embassy is reminded that the note under reference
has not been answered or acknowledged, directly or in-
directly, since its delivery over five months ago and that
an early indication of the reaction of the Soviet Govern-
ment to the United States Government's proposal would
be appreciated.

Soviet Note of July 16, 1950

The Embassy of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics
presents its compliments to the Department of State of
the United States of America and, referring to the note
of the Department of State dated June 9 and received by
the Embassy on June 12, has the honor to communicate
that the question raised in the note has been fully ex-
hausted by the published communication of April 22 and
the statement of June 9 by the Telegraph Agency of the
Soviet Union (TASS), the texts of which are enclosed.
[For texts of these statements, see Annex IV J

Annex X

Note Addressed hy the Emhaussy of the United
Kingdom in Moscow to the Soviet Government on
Jidy U, 1950 3

His Majesty's Embassy present their compliments to
the Ministry of Foreign Affairs for the U. S. S. R. and
under instructions from His Majesty's Principal Secretary
of State for Foreign Affairs in the United Kingdom have
the honour to invite reference to a Soviet press announce-
ment of the 5th May, 1950 stating that repatriation of
German prisoners of war from the Soviet Union had been
completed with the exception of 9,717 persons convicted

%ep\emhet II, 1950

435

of grave war crimes, 3,815 persons whose alleged war
crimes are under investigation and 14 persons detained
owing to illness.

2. The claim that only 13,546 German prisoners remain
in Soviet custody has been received with shock and grave
concern in Germany and throughout tlie civilised world
since it stands in manifest contradiction to the fact that
large numbers of German prisoners of war known to have
been held by the Soviet Government have not yet returned
to their homes. In this connexion His Majesty's (iovern-
ment in the United Kingdom wish to draw to the attention
of the Soviet Government a recent census carried out in
the German Federal Republic which has shown that sev-
eral tens of thousands of Germans have not yet returned
from the Soviet Union although their relatives have infor-
mation that they were in Soviet custody.

3. In failing to complete the repatriation of German
prisoners of war and to furnish information regarding
them the Soviet Government has demonstrated complete
disregard for the principles of common humanity. It has,
moreover, failed to honour the following explicit under-
takings.

(A) At a meeting of the Council of Foreign Ministers
at Moscow in April 1947 the Four Occupying Powers under-
took to repatriate, by the 31st December, 1948 at the
latest, all German prisoners of war in their custody. The
Governments of the United Kingdom, United States and
Fi-ance have respected this undertaking.

(B) No satisfactory reply has yet been received to
enquiries by His Majesty's Government regarding Soviet
action in respect of this agreement. In acknowledging one
of these enquiries the Soviet Government while admitting
in a Note of the 24th January, 1949 that an unspecified
number of German prisoners, about whom no information
was furnished, was still held in the Soviet Union, gave a
clear undertaking that their repatriation would be com-
pleted by or during 1949.

4. The Soviet Government alone bear the heavy respon-
sibility for the suffering and distress which their conduct
in this matter has brought to the many Germans still in
Soviet custody and to their relatives and friends at home.
In the earnest desire that this suffering might be mitigated
His Majesty's Government now urge the Soviet Govern-
ment to take the following measures.

(A) To furnish detailed information regarding the
identity of 9,717 persons allegedly convicted of war crimes,
the 3,815 persons whose alleged war crimes are under
Investigation, and the 14 persons said to be under treat-
ment for illness. Such information should include Uie
places of imprisonment, charges preferred against, and
sentences imposed on, those who have been convicted,
the present state of the investigations being undertaken,
and the whereabouts and treatment of tho.se who are sick.

(B) To guarantee to prisoners accused of or con-
demned for war crimes the right accorded by all countries
to correspond with their families.

(C) To give full details of any persons whom the
Soviet Government, by cla.ssifleation as civilian workers
or in any other way, have deprived of prisoner-of-war
status and have thereby excluded from their prisoner-of-
war statistics.

(D) To supply information on the number, identity,
date of death and place of burial of Germans who have
died in captivity in the U.S.S.R. or in transit.

(E) To agree to establishment of an Impartial inter-
national body which would undertake an investigation
in the Soviet Union designed to determine the position
of prisoners of war known to have been in Soviet custody,
in accordance with the Geneva Convention of the 27th
July, 1929, to which the Soviet Government is a party.
This body might take the form of an ad hoc commission
designated by the United Nations, or of a group com-
posed of the representatives of the Four Occupying Pow-
ers in Germany, or of representatives of neutral powers,
or of any other group mutually acceptable. It should
be noted In this connexion that the United Kingdom,
United States and France, at the time when they still
hail German prisoners of war in their custody, furnished
full information concerning them and permitted full and
impartial access to prisoners of war by international
agencies.

5. Although confining themselves at present to the
question of German prisoners of war. His Majesty's Gov-
ernment cannot disregard, and are likewise disturbed by,
the failure of the Soviet Government to repatriate or to
account for numerous nationals of former German occu-
pied countries taken prisoner or brought to the Soviet
Union as civilian internees during the war.

6. His Majesty's Government retjuest that the Soviet
Government will inform them of the action they are pre-
pared to take in this matter. His Majesty's Government
are, for their part, prepared to lend their cooperation to
the Soviet Government in any appropriate way in order
to bring to an end the present unsatisfactory state of
affairs.

British Embassy, Moscow
July lJ,th, 1950

Three Foreign Ministers
To Meet at New York

[Released to the press August 28]

During their meeting in May of this year, the
Foreign Ministers of France, the United Kingdom,
and the United States decided to meet on a regular
basis about twice a year to discuss problems of
mutual interest. Taking advantage of the fact
that the Ministers will be present in New York in
September for the opening of the regular session
of the General Assembly of the United Nations,
the three Foreign Ministers will meet at New York
from September 12-14 to discuss current develop-
ments affecting the tliree countries. The Foreign
Ministers' meeting will be preceded by preliminary
talks in Washington between representatives of
the three Governments.

436

Department of State Bulletin

Additional Funds for MDAP Supported

Statement by Secretary Acheson '

There are two points I should like to stress in
discussing the additional appropriations needed
for the Mutual Defense Assistance Program
(Mdap).

The first point is that speed is essential in
stepping up our support of the common defense
arrangements.

The need for speed in strengthening the free
world is underlined by the Communist aggression
in Korea.

The international Communist movement has
shown that it does not hesitate to use force to
conquer a sovereign and independent nation where
it can hope to do so successfully.

The Communist ho^De for the conquest of inde-
pendent Korea in one easy swallow has been
thwarted by the prompt action of the United Na-
tions. By this response, the free nations have
made it clear that they are determined to act
together in a common defense against aggression.

Position of Strength Against Communist Aggression

The best hope of peace in the present situation
lies in the creation of a position of strength in
these nations sufficient to deter Communist
aggression.

The strength of the free nations is potentially
great — more than enough to deal with this threat.
But we must translate that potential into defense
in being with the greatest speed.

The capabilities of the Communist movement
for further acts of aggression must be the measur-
ing rod by which we judge the adequacy of our
defensive strength. By this measurement, it is
evident that a forced draft effort on a very large
scale is required.

It takes time to create defense in being. To build
up armies, and to equip them with tanks and
planes takes many months after the necessary
decisions are made.

' Made before the Senate Appropriations Committee
on Aug. 30 and released to tlie press on the same date.

The magnitude of the task before us is apparent.
It is also apparent that we cannot wait for the
complete refinement of plans before beginning to
increase necessary prodiiction of equipment.

What is certain is that the steps which can be
taken as a result of the proposed 4 billion dollar
fund are urgently needed. The sooner they can
be begun, the shorter will be the critical period
until they have resulted in actual defensive
strength in being. That is why immediate action
is required.

Defense Build-up — A Cooperative Effort

The second point I want to stress is that this
increased defensive build-up must be a cooperative
effort.

It is not what the United States alone can do
that will deter further aggression but what the
free nations of the world, acting together, can do.

The magnitude of the job and the speed with
which it must be done make it clear that the re-
sources of all free nations and their wholehearted
cooperation are needed.

In the North Atlantic area, where the largest
portion of these funds is to be used, the expansion
of the common defense program is being worked
out on the basis of an increase of effort on the part
of each of the member nations in the North Atlan-
tic Treaty Organization.

Our deputy to the North Atlantic Council, Mr.
Spofford, has been engaged in active consultations
with the other representatives on the Council to
work out what each of us can and will do now to
increase our common defense capabilities.

The position of our Government — which Mr.
Spofford has set forth in these discussions — is that
the additional aid from this country for the North
Atlantic area is primarily for the procurement of
equipment for the expanded defense forces of
member nations in accordance with integrated
North Atlantic Treaty defense plans.

%epiembeT 71, 1950

437

This equipment can only be useful for this pur-
pose if the expanded forces are in fact provided,
and it will only be transferred as and to the extent
that such forces are available and are trained to
employ it.

This aid is designed to complement the maxi-
mum defense and defense production efforts which
our fellow members of the North Atlantic Treaty
Organization can make, consistent with their own
economic stability.

In response to our inquiries, most of the North
Atlantic Treaty countries have indicated their
intentions to increase their defense efforts and
have indicated the general magnitude of the efforts
which they feel they should undertake.

The speed with which they have replied has been
most gratifying and has reflected a sense of ur-
gency on their part, which we welcome. Their
projected plans are now under active study in
this Government and are also being discussed in
the current session of the deputies to the North
Atlantic Council.

The strengthening of the North Atlantic area
is important for the security of the entire free
world, but we must, in addition, expand and ac-
celerate our military assistance to certain vital
areas in other parts of the world.

It is estimated that 193 million dollars of the
additional funds will be needed to place us in a
position to speed up or increase the programs in
Greece, Turkey, and Iran.

Additional military assistance to the Philip-
pines and to other nations in the general area of
China, made necessary by the outbreak of Com-
munist aggression against Korea, will require 303
million dollars of the funds requested.

The bulk of the funds requested for all these
areas is needed to increase substantially the pro-
duction of military equipment in the United States
for use in the common defense. But all the needs
for defense equipment cannot and should not be
met out of stocks and production in this country.

I stress the cooperative character of this effort
because there are several means by which the
Mutual Defense Assistance Program can draw
more fully upon the resources of the entire free
world.

Distribution of Production Load

By using the authority which is contained in
existing Mutual Defense Assistance legislation for
military procurement abroad, we shall be able
to obtain many items more cheaply and more

quickly than they could otherwise be obtained.
This will, in addition, make for a more equitable
distribution of the production load.

To some extent, such procurement will also ease
the additional dollar strain which will result when
productive facilities abroad are turned to defense
purposes.

The great increase which is now required in the
magnitude of our military production at home
makes it necessary to procure abroad not only
completed items but also component parts and to
transfer this equipment as needed.

This will enable us, for example, to combine jet
engines produced in one country with air frames
produced in a second coimtry to bolster the air
defenses of a third country.

In some cases, a more effective use of industrial
capacity abroad for defense production can also
be achieved by a relatively small increase in the
aid we can furnish for this purpose. Some of
these plants are now idle for lack of an essential
link in the production process. By supplying
vitally needed production equipment, parts, or
materials, we can galvanize into action additional
sources of military equipment.

On the basis of our limited experience, thus far,
with this type of assistance, it is clear that such
aid yields several times its value in finished defense
equipment. With the aid of some nonferrous
metals and some machine tools, for example, a
production line in France was able to start turning
out combat vehicles.

We must recognize, in the administration of the
Mutual Defense Assistance Program, that the
health and vitality of the economies of the coun-
tries associated in this effort are a fundamental
part of the defensive strength of this group of
nations.

Resourceful and vigorous measures are required
to insure that the tremendous increase in our
defensive strength in being is undertaken in the
immediate future without a disproportionate
strain upon any of the participating nations.

The security of our country, and of the free
world of which we are a part, will depend upon
the speed and the cooperation with which this
Program is put into effect.

The defense effort required is tremendous, but
we cannot afford to do less.

438

Department of State Bulletin

The United States in the United Nations

[September 1-8, 1950]
Security Council

With the end of August, Sir Gladwin Jebb
(United Kingdom) assumed the presidency of the
Security Council for the month of September. At
meetings on September 1, 5, 6, and 7, discussion of
the "Complaint of aggression upon the Republic
of Korea" was resumed.

Wlien the Council sustained a presidential rul-
ing on September 1 that it was obligated by the
June 25 decision to invite the representative of
the Republic of Korea to participate in its debates
on Korea, Ambassador John M. Chang was seated.
The Security Council rejected a Soviet resolution,
introduced early in August, which called for an
invitation to North Korean representatives as well.
The vote was 2 (U.S.S.R., Yugoslavia) -8, with
Egypt abstaining. In his statement, Korean
Representative Chang attributed North Korean
aggression directly to the Soviet Union through
the Northern Communist "puppets."

The Security Council, at the September 5 meet-
ing, had before it the IFnited States resolution of
July 31, condemning North Korean defiance of
the United Nations and seeking to localize the
Korean conflict, the Soviet "peaceful settlement"
resolution calling for withdrawal of foreign troops
from Korea, and the Soviet resolution on United
States bombing in Korea. In connection with the
general matter of aggression in Korea, Ambassa-
dor Austin called attention to the United States
communication to the Security Council regarding
the shooting down off Korea on September 4 of
a plane with Red Star markings. This incident,
Ambassador Austin emphasized, illustrated the
advisability of localizing the conflict in Korea,
and he stressed the pertinence of the United States
resolution. The Soviet attitude toward this reso-
lution, he said, would be an indication of its atti-
tude toward the United Nations peace efforts.

During the general discussion, which continued
through September 6, representatives of France,
Norway, Cuba, Egypt, Ecuador, Republic of
Korea, and the United Kingdom voiced full agree-
ment with the United States resolution as a na-
tural and timely corollary to the June 25 and 27
resolutions. Ambassador Malik attacked it as
aimed at camouflaging and justifying "bloody
aggression" and intervention in Korean internal
affairs. Opposition to the main Soviet resolution

was general. The vote (September 6) on the
United States resolution was 9-1, the U.S.S.R.
opposing and Yugoslavia abstaining. President
Jebb declared it not adopted because of the nega-
tive vote of one permanent member. Later, the
Soviet "peaceful settlement" resolution was re-
jected by a vote of 1 to 8, with Egypt and Yugo-
slavia abstaining.

At the beginning of the September 6 meeting, a
communication from Ambassador Malik was read
into the Security Council's record. This letter
contained the text of a note from the U.S.S.R. to
the United States on the incident involving the
shooting down off Korea of a Soviet bomber. The
note rejected the United States account as "men-
dacious," protested against such "criminal" ac-
tion, and demanded punishment of those respon-
sible as well as the payment of reparations.
Although Ambassador Malik argued that the So-
viet note should not enter into Council discussions
of the Korean question, the incident being an issue
solely between the United States and the U.S.S.R.,
President Jebb ruled that both the Soviet and
United States views should be taken into consider-
ation. In the exchange over whether the com-
munication should be examined by the Security
Council, Ambassador Austin stated he would
speak at a later date on the Soviet note.

In tlie discussion, September 7, of the Soviet
resolution on United States bombing in Korea,
Ambassador Malik charged that the "barbaric"
and "inhuman" action of the United States air
force in Korea contravened the 1907 Hague con-
vention. Ambassador Ernest A. Gross (United
States) in reply stressed that United Nations air
operations were directed solely at military tar-
gets while the aggressor in Korea had resorted to
all manner of tricks to divert the world's atten-
tion from his crime. The alleged violations, Am-
bassador Gross continued, should be investigated
by the International Red Cross, which had so far
not been admitted into North Korea. Opposition
to the Soviet resolution was also expressed by the
Indian, United Kingdom, and Norwegian repre-
sentatives.

With reference, the complaint of bombing by air
forces of the territory of China, Ambassador Gross
outlined a proposed United States draft to set up
a commission comprising India and Sweden, which
would investigate on the spot the charges leveled
by the Chinese Communist authorities.

September 11, 1950

439

General Policy Page

Report of the United Nations Command
Operations in Korea — For the Period of
August 1-15, 1950 403

Aims and Objectives in Resisting Aggression

in Korea. Address by the President . 407

Position on the Formosan Question:

Letter From Ambassador Austin to Secre-
tary-General Lie 411

Letter From President Truman to Ambas-

ador Austin 412

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Report of the United Nations Command
Operations in Korea — For the Period of

August 1-15, 1950 403

Members of Unesco Executive Board Con-
demn Aggression in Korea:
Statement by Secretary Acheson .... 410

Statement by Luther H. Evans 410

Position on the Formosan Question :

Letter From Ambassador Austin to Secre-
tary-General Lie 411

Letter From President Truman to Ambas-
sador Austin 412

Unified Command Aircraft Accused of Flying

Over China 413

Supplementary Agenda Items for Fifth Ses-
sion of General Assembly 425

U.S.S.R. Fails To Account for Prisoners of

War 430

The United States in the United Nations . . 439

International Information and
Cultural Affairs

Soviet Jamming Apparatus Drowns Out

MaUk's U.N. Speech 413

USIE Capitahzes on Soviet Propaganda

Blunders. By Edward W. Barrett . . 414

Advisory Commission To Review Informa-
tion Program With President 416

International information and Cultural pagi)
Affairs — Continued

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S 416

Fostering International tfnderstanding —
Fourth Semiannual Report on Educa-
tional Exchange 417

Senate Support Expressed for Campaign of
Truth:
Letter From Senatorial Group to the Pres-
ident 424

Letter From the President to Senator

Flanders 424

Occupation Matters

Germany — The Center of a Maelstrom of

Interests. By Henry Byroade .... 426

East German Election Law Degrades Demo-
cratic Process. Statement by Secretary
Acheson 429

National Security

Aims and Objectives in Resisting Aggression

in Korea. Address by the President . . 407

Additional Funds for Mdap Supported. State-
ment by Secretary Acheson 437

The Congress

Fostering International Understanding —
Fourth Semiannual Report on Educa-
tional Exchange 417

Senate Support Expressed for Campaign for
Truth:
Letter From Senatorial Group to the Pres-
ident 424

Letter From the President to Senator

Flanders 424

Additional Funds for Mdap Supported. State-
ment by Secretary Acheson 437

International Organizations
and Conferences

Nac Ministers To Meet at New York . . . 425
Three Ministers To Meet at New York . . 436

U- S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1980

JAe^ ^e^a^tmeni/ xw t/taie^

FOREIGN POLICIES TOWARD ASIA— A TELEVI-
SION INTERVIEW WITH SECRETARY ACHESON . 460

REVIEW OF SECURITY COUNCIL ACTION IN

DEFENSE OF KOREA • By Ambassador Warren R.
Austin ••••••••••••••••• 451

FUNDAMENTALS OF FAR EASTERN POLICY • By

•i^;ij^Assistant Secretary Rusk •«•••«...•. 465

FREE GERMAN YOUTH VISIT WEST ZONE IN

BERLIN 443

CONFERENCE ON TONNAGE MEASUREMENT OF

SHIPS • By John W. Mann 471

For complete contents see back cover

A "^ 0

Vol. XXIII, No. 585
September 18, 1950

^/te ::uei

.,u*w^^. bulletin

Vol. XXIII, No. 585 • Publication 3961
September 18, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U. S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D. C.

Price:

62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.50

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in thefield
of intertuitional relations, are listed
currently.

U. S. SUPERmTENDENT OF OOCUMEHIJ

OCT 20 1950
FREE GERMAN YOUTH VISIT WEST ZONE IN BERLIN

2,500 East German youth visited EI AS during the Whitsunday

Celebration from May 27 to June 1. These comments hy meinhers of BIAS

PoJitical Department summarize impressions from the stream of visitors

FRENTZEL-

We must consider the FDJ members in two age
groups : Group 1 — boys and girls up to 16 years ;
Group 2 — those over 16 years.

Those in Group 1 proved to be almost entirely
uncritical, so that their remarks for and against
communism are not very significant. They came
here primarily out of curiosity and the pleasure
of forbidden fruit and because tliey are hungi-y for
things they have long had to do without. It
seemed clear to me that the anti-Communist in-
fluence of their parents dominates their young
minds. This anti-Communist influence, however,
must not be equated with democratic influence.

RIAS

Radio in the American Sector

FDJ

Freie Deutsclie Jugend

LDP

Liberal Demokratische Partei

SED

Sozialistisclie Einlieits Partei Deutscb-

lands

CDU

Christlicti-Demokratische Union

Amis

Americans

It seemed to me that, for many of these children,
the Wliitsun mass demonstrations were a genuine
erperience that impressed them very much. Or-
ganizational weaknesses — difficulties with trans-
port, messing, and lodging — were of less conse-
quence to them than the feeling of being important
and having some meaningful outlets for their
young energies. It was also an experience for
them to see a little of "the world."

The one thing that can be said with certainty
about this age group is that they will grow away

from pai'ental influence and come increasingly un-
der the influence of state and party organs.

Group 2 deserves more thorough discussion.
The attitude of this group, however, should not
be considered representative of the attitude of
adults: that is, one must not read out of Group
2's ''ideological status" the "ideological status" of
the East zone population.

The mental one-sidedness of these boys and
girls was not the same as that of the former Hit-
ler Youth. Hitler Youth members were much less
critical of their leaders than FDJers are of com-
munism. The Blue Shirts obviously carry about
a cargo of Communist slogans, propaganda theses,
and doctrinaire assertions. Nevertheless, they are
by no means uncritical, and I met none who were
not filled with doubt as to the rightness of Com-
munist ideas. Parental influence is visible also
among this group, and, perhaps even more im-
portant, is the prevailing anti-Communist and

(most noteworthy) anti-Russian atmosphere in the
zone.

However, the Blue Shirts are shockingly ill-
educated and even woi-se informed. It is all too
apparent that for years they have been shut off
from the free world, the radio excepted. The
better educated among them — students of all facul-
ties, in whatever semester — know almost nothing
of Western thought and thought processes. They
know little of logic and nothing about empiricism.
Bertrand Russell and Arnold Toynbee are only
names to them. Even such a man as Silone is at
best regarded as a reactionary Right Socialist who,
according to the official version, is a betrayer of the
working class.

September 18, 1950

443

The effect of Eastern propaganda was noticeable
in the deep distrust with which Bhie Shirts of this
age group at first approached us. They do not
believe that communism is good, and they strongly
doubt the correctness of the Eastern way, but they
are suspicious of Western principles, which are
largely strange to them. I mean that, although
communism does not arouse their enthusiasm, it
has some success in turning them against the West.
Such primitive inventions as the potato-bug story
are not believed, of course. But the following
Eastern propaganda arguments recurred regularly
in our discussions (put, however, as questions, not
as facts) :

(1) The Americans feed West Germany so
well only to prepare the people for a war.

(2) The dismantlings are intended to remove
competition and to make Germany into a colonial
dependency.

(3) Communism is, no doubt, not good but
democracy in West Germany is reactionary and
antisocial.

(4) The Ruhr has been separated from
Germany.

(5) Where are the Wehrmacht casualty rec-
ords? The Soviet figures are surely wrong, but
why do not the Americans release the lists?

(6) West Germany does live better, but only
because it is incurring permanent debts. In this
way, the Americans hope to make the country
accept colonial status.

(7) The East zone lives worse but is achiev-
ing genuine progi-ess through its own resources.

(8) The single-list election will be carried
out because otherwise the reactionaries in the
bourgeois parties would destroy the progress
achieved.

( 9 ) The most important of all arguments : In
the East zone, youth has a real chance. It re-
ceives material support and is given tasks to per-
form.

It was always possible to demonstrate the in-
accuracy of these arguments in a detailed discus-
sion, but, of course, only a relatively small number
of boys and girls could be treated in this personal
way. Even party officers ultimately evidenced a
friendly, sometimes even an eager readiness, to
recognize my arguments and to admit that truth
is not a one-way street.

It was obvious in all our talks that West Berlin
is of incalculable value as an intellectual and mate-

rial show window of the West. It must also be
heavily emphasized that free radio — here, pri-
marily RIAS — is almost the only source of good
information.

STEIN

The great majority of my visitors were con-
vinced that they had been deceived by their leader-
ship. Those especially who had heard the fic-
tions about poisoned food and ill treatment by the
Stumm police declared that they would prefer not
to return home. Most of those who came on Sun-
day and Monday felt a necessity to express their
feelings and raise questions. Matters connected
with the Marshall Plan and West German "in- i
debtedness" came up constantly.

The older FDJ members were gradually be-
coming disturbed over the armed People's Police.
One got the impression that the few "unteach-
ables" were, in fact, only repeating SED slogans
and that they were completely helpless when con-
fronted by factual refutation.

There was unanimous agi'eement that RIAS is
the only station addressing all groups of the popu-
lation. Some visitors said that the zone needs
more concrete advice on how to conduct itself on
individual occasions. Most zone residents hang
on RIAS's words "like drowning men." In nu-
merous cases, youths had come to the Deutsch-
landtreffen only in order to visit RIAS.

I believe that in general the Whitsun rally was
a propaganda success for the West. But upon
their return to their homes, these youths will once
more be exposed to pressure and "hammer" propa-
ganda. Therefore, it is important to keep on pre-
senting Western ideology and reality in simple,
clear form, through examples, concrete compari-
sons, and sincere, moral advice.

DASSUI—

All my visitors were over 14 and the eldest
"youth" was 47. About 2 percent of them could
be considered party liners. The others rejected
the SED and FDJ. The reasons they gave for
visiting us were (1) the need for political infor-
mation; (2) a hunger for Western newspapers,
magazines, illegal publications, etc. ; (3) the desire
to "have their say" for once; (4) a desire to see
RIAS. They also wanted to give us infonnation
on the Wliitsun rally and political events in their
home towns. A substantial number had no spe-

444

Department of State Bulletin

cial reason; they came because residents of the
East or West sectors had told them they ought to
drop in at RIAS. The "oppositionists" who came
to us with concrete questions were usually mem-
bers of the CDU or LDP.

The FDJers were, in general, astonished by their
friendly treatment in West Berlin. Their con-
duct was very decent, their thirst for information
exceptionally marked. The many lunches given
them and the events in the Taberna Academica and
Titania Palace made an especially strong impres-
sion on them.

A basic question posed by youths who are mem-
bers of the "bourgeois" parties was : "Is there any
point in going on with party work?"

EIAS, the visitors said, could count on the
support of 80 percent of the population. There
Avas a general demand : "Give us fighting slogans
(Kampfparolen) and practical pointers on how
to conduct ourselves." RIAS is listened to even
in the SED Party schools and the People's Police.

The basic line of the pro-West FDJers can be
formulated in two sentences: "We're simply fed
up" and "You only have to see the shops here."
There is great hatred of the Russians, but "the
pressure is so strong that you just go along."

The appeal to the spirit of self-sacrifice for a
political ideal is, however, frequently effective
with these young people. Some catchwords of
Communist propaganda have acquired validity
in their minds. For example: I was repeatedly
asked, "Which Mozart Choir is the genuine one ?" ;
"Why don't the Amis release the Wehrmacht
casualty records T' The arrest of West German
Communist leader, Kurt Mueller, was unknown.
The equipping of the People's Police with auto-
matic weapons was "dialetically" motivated and
approved. The party-line FDJers regard the
People's Police as a weapon of the workers.

A frequent topic of discussion was the concen-
tration camps. Here we had almost perfect suc-
cess. We wei'e even able to produce a few former
inmates to relate their experiences in person.
CDU functionaries asked for copies of the Bonn
constitution. There was a great shortage of West-
em newspapers and magazines; all the copies we
would lay hands on were taken in no time.

In all my discussions, whether with party liners
or Western-oriented visitors, the first question
concerned literature. Food and lodging took sec-
ond place. The March rations were so much better
than normal East zone fare that they aroused no

criticism. The zone's diet was adequate to main-
tain the FDJ's morale. Only the older people
draw comparisons. The cheap blue shirts dis-
tracted attention from the fact that for 5 years
textiles have been scarce in the zone.

For the FDJ youth, the single-list election and
the National Front are not frightening phe-
nomena. It seems to them quite natural that the
parties should put their own goals in the back-
ground until national unity has been achieved.
Here we had to discuss, in simple terms, Praha
and the fate of the people's democracies. One
cannot use academic arguments; historic or scien-
tific exposes of communism are ineffective. The
most successful tactic was to describe our general
attitude, then immediately present the other side's
argument, and then to refute this argument. The
result was the comment, "RIAS knows," or "You
can master Communist ideology without being a
Communist." In other words, the tactic led to
the attitude that communism is not something one
must accept with respect, but a recipe that can
be examined and altered like any other.

A knowledge of West German and West Berlin
conditions among the youth cannot be assumed.
There are wide areas of ignorance or misinforma-
tion.

The problem formulated as "How do I face the
pressure on me to join the Communist mass organ-
izations ?" remains unsolved. Here, too, the visit-
ors demanded fighting slogans and a central
resistance leadership.

The subject of elections is especially important.
ISIany youth simply have no conception of an oppo-
sition party. Democracy has been presented to
them as indolent and rather comic. The German's
inclination toward uniforms, marching, decora-
tions, and titles becomes apparent here. In gen-
eral, the mass demonstration had its effect. Satire
is probably the most effective weapon against this
leaning. Showing the ridiculousness of Wilhelm
Pieck's pompous inspection of a line of men stand-
ing at Present Arms is more effective than point-
ing out that the creation of an army breaks some
agreement or other.

There was a very positive attitude toward
RIAS. Confidence in us goes so far that people
come not only with political problems, but for
help in getting jobs, housing, and so forth. Most
of the zone, the visitors confirmed, listen to and
believe RIAS. Even among the SED, few actu-
ally believe that RIAS lies.

Sepfember 18, 1950

445

General impression : Our absolute openness to-
ward the visitors, the friendly treatment, and the
fact that we had some modest resources for their
reception enabled us to accomplish a good deal
with a stream of visitors much greater than had
been expected. Nobody went away without at
least a few ideas to think about, and most were
convinced. To me, the discussions proved that the
Communist-led youth can be won if you have
access to them.

SANDERS-

I talked with about 100 FDJ members. They
were generally less anxious than our regular visi-
tors. They presented their questions and wishes
in a friendly, polite way.

Aside from the usual reasons for visiting us —
RIAS's enormous popularity in the zone and
curiosity to see the station, etc. — the FDJers
wanted to ask questions. In particular, they asked
repeatedly questions which have been dealt with
again and again in our broadcasts.

( 1 ) Why did the Americans and the English
agree with the Soviets to accept the Oder/Neisse
boundary ?

(2) Are there really so many unemployed
in the West ? If so, why is nothing done about it ?

(3) What is really behind Watenstedt-Salz-
gitter, and why are plants blown up that could
easily serve peaceful purposes ?

(4) Is it true that in America Negroes are
treated as second-class citizens?

(5) Not only Communists but our relatives,
too, write us from the West that National Social-
ism is growing again. Is it true that Hitlerites
are again free agents there ?

(6) Would you treat us just as nicely after
the Wliitsiun rally, or is this just a i)ropaganda
action ?

RIAS was unanimously declared to be the
source of infonnation for the zone, despite all
obstacles. Visitors were especially grateful for the
noontime repeat broadcast of "Berlin Speaks to
the Zone."

A number of visitors asked that we support an
action to obtain good Western books for the East
zone. "Our mouths water when we hear of
Churchill's memoirs, Eisenhower's book, and other
such works. But we cannot buy them, even on the
black market, with our worthless marks.. If you

sent them into the zone through RIAS visitors,
tliey would be passed from hand to hand."

HERMANN

Of every 100 FDJ members who wanted to talk
to RIAS, only one came intending to have a
thorough argument with us. The other 99 came
principally because RIAS is a symbol to them,
and they wanted to use the chance to become ac-
quainted with the station.

The visitors' commonest topics of discussion
were free elections, concentration camps, the re-
lease of POW's, forced entry into the SED, pos-
sible limitations on responsibility when "de-SEDi-
fication" trials take place, debts Germany incurs
through such luxury imports as bananas, the dis-
mantling of Watenstedt-Salzgitter, the division of
German. Questions were asked on almost every-
thing having to do with East and West stand-
ards of living.

In most of the individual questions, we had al-
most too easy a time. The simple statement, for
example, that the Soviets do not need to force
anybody to march for peace but could simply allow
free elections to form an all-German government
that could obtain a peace treaty was at once rec-
ognized as valid. This established mutual con-
fidence. All the printed material we could ob-
tain — leaflets, stickers, liamphlets, etc. — was
snatched up eagerly. A factual, objective tone
was appreciated as being pleasingly different from
that of SED material.

The youthful visitors gave me the impression
that RIAS has enormous significance for them.
This ajDplies not only to straight political broad-
casts but to political plays, "Hits of the Week,"
"Mach mit," the Insulaner cabaret, and similar
shows. People began listening to RIAS to learn
of Soviet agents and other facts directly important
to themselves. Then, they became fed up with the
incessant din of the East zone stations' propa-
ganda. Eventually, they came to listen almost
exclusively to RIAS. No counteraction has per-
suaded the intelligent youths among our visitors
to stop believing RIAS. Their comments on spe-
cific programs are of great interest.

(1) Of our youth broadcasts, the visitors
praised particularly the series "You and the Con-
stitution." We were constantly asked for printed
copies of the Bonn constitution. (Other items in

446

Department of State Bulletin

demand included speeches by Jakob Kaiser and
President Heuss ; Kravchenko's book and Orwell's
■'1984.") Visitors warned against making youth
broadcasts too literary or intellectual.

(2) Some visitors asked that the school broad-
casts contain more directly political material,
though not in lecture form.

(3) The lunch-hour repeat broadcast of the
SovZone show is a great success. Almost every-
body can now hear the broadcasts at one time or
another. The Sunday noon hour is also a very
good time for broadcasts of special importance to
the zone. Visitore said that the analysis of Com-
munist propaganda in tlie SovZone broadcasts is
especially effective — it is "ammunition" for our
friends. First-hand reports by people from the
znne are important, too. And it is preferable to
identify speakers in the broadcasts. East zone
listeners want to feel that the men who talk to
them also commit themselves to their support.
The reaction of youths who discovered they were
talking with a broadcaster whom they had often
heard was astonishing. They were immediately
more trusting and very enthusiastic. In any case,
the stream of Wliitsun visitors has practically de-
stroyed our anonymity.

There were several higher functionaries among
the visitors. After factual discussions with us,
they tended to climb out of their ideological boxes.
Wlien both sides agreed to make no use of slogans
and journalistic small change, even the best dia-
lecticians soon gave up their arguments. The
Whitsun demonstration was certainly not the suc-
cess the Communists had hoped for. Just what
West Berlin's reception of the FDJers will mean
for our work in the long run must be seen through
future developments. But at least the visitors
proved that we are on the right path and that the
echo in the zone is stronger than we previously
could afford to assume.

BISCHOF

All the FDJ visitors, even the party liners, de-
clared themselves to be RIAS listeners. The sta-
tion is their link with the Wesjt, the only channel
of information on the West. The regular broad-
casts most frequently listened to are "Berlin
Speaks to the Zone," the Insulaner cabaret, and
the news service and commentary at 1930 hours.

Almost all the visitors achiiitted that they were
uneasy upon entering EIAS. They had expected

Sepf ember 18, 1950

that at best they would meet an unfriendly recep-
tion. Some feared they would meet FDJ spies.
They did not, however, believe the stories about
poisoned oranges.

The East's latest propaganda efforts — the po-
tato-buy story and the assertion that all POW's
have returned — were laughed at. But our visitors
tended to put more stock in the Eastern press'
reports on the hopeless situation of West German
unemployed. West Germany's and West Berlin's
indebtedness, medieval methods of recruiting for
tlie French Foreign Legion, and the rearmament
of West Germany.

"Ideological schooling" does the Communists
more good than the one-sided presentation of cur-
rent events. Such concepts as "exploitation by
monopoly capitalism" and "capitalism needs wars
to solve its economic crises" come to be taken as
explanations of complicated politico-economic
phenomena. There is little possibility of examin-
ing their validity. Older students repeatedly
asked us to help increase the flow of books to the
East. Even the faithful FDJers declared they
would gladly look into Western points of view if
they had the means.

The greater part of our visitors saw Western
printed propaganda material for the first time
during the Whitsun rally. The East zone edi-
tions of West Berlin newspapers were hardly
known to them. When Western material is made
available, every little leaflet travels from hand to
hand.

There were hardly any indications of the exist-
ence of organized resistance. No one had clear
ideas of what could be done illegally. But the
visitors asked for concrete suggestions and direc-
tions from RIAS. Some senior students from
Thuringia said they had concealed a machine gun
and a pistol at home and had also written leaflets.
Another Thuringian FDJ member said he and
some comrades had "stood the local FDJ home on
its head." There seemed to be more deviltry than
political conviction in this act. A young miner
declared that he and his friends would do more in
resistance if EIAS called on them. Most of his
friends, he said, believe that the West has written
them off. There had been some acts of sabotage,
he said, but most people lack courage.

The visit to the Western sectors obviously helped
to break down the months of indoctrination. But
now the FDJ will undoubtedly increase its efforts
to make up for the Whitsun rally's lack of success.

447

This means that Western propaganda activity
must be intensified and no opportunity lost to in-
form the East about actual conditions in the West.
Nevertheless, our broadcasts must not be allowed
to consist of denials. Western goals must be more
clearly formulated. Otherwise, people have the
impression that Western propaganda is on the
defensive.

SOETEBIER-

Of the visitors RIAS had during the Whitsun
rally, two groups interested me, especially students
and factory workers.

I learned from students that they regularly
listen to '"Berlin Speaks to the Zone" and to the
university programs. They complained of the lack
of political literature, cultural works on America,
and specialized literature such as philosophy and
history. Most of them demanded constructive sug-
gestions for meaningful, active resistance. They
also suggested the broadcasting of objective, easily
understandable definitions of common catchwords :
"monopoly capitalism," "imperialism," "cartels,"
"trusts," "economic crises," etc. The students were
agreed that 70 percent of the set-owners in the
zone hear RIAS; only a few people have any
other way of keeping themselves accurately in-
formed. The students came to us because they
regard RIAS as their only link to the Western
world.

It was noteworthy that the strongest will to ac-
tive resistance is to be found among workers who
came to the rally as members of sport and motor-
cycle organizations. The early-morning repeat
broadcast of "Berlin Speaks to the Zone" is widely
heard by workers. RIAS newscasts frequently
form the topic of conversation during the first
break in the day's work. Worker visitors often
said in effect : "Tell us what to do. We are ready
for anything."

Discussions with FDJers who came to expose
"RIAS lies" showed that it is difficult to clear up
certain misconceptions. Communist slogans be-
come mental fui'uiture. Our most effective argu-
ments dealt with the prisoner of war question, con-
centration camps, reparations to the Soviet Union,
the arrogance of the Soviet bringers of culture,
the military character of the People's Police, and,
above all, the Oder/Neisse line. Counterargu-
ments most strongly adhered to by the visitors
concerned unemployment in West Gennany, the

448

separation of the Saar territory, the so-called pro-
tective laws for youth in the East zone, the zone's
"reconstruction without debts," and the desir-
ability of socialization of industry.

Among those who came predisposed to our side
there was a demand for still more broadcasts to the
zone. Programs that show knowledge of local
details are very popular.

Most of the youths were very ready to take any
sort of propaganda material back to the zone.
Among the older students who have been forced
into the FDJ, there is a desire to form resistance
groups. But they lack central leadership and a
constant flow of material. It should be noted that
several expressed lack of confidence in the Fight-
ing Group Against Inhumanity.

In general, I have the impression that almost all
our visitors left the station convinced that the voice
they have been listening to is a truthful one.
They expect too much from us — from wise advise
to imminent liberation. Since the question "Wliat
can we do ?" was at the heart of every conversation,
I consider the problem it poses to be the real out-
come of all the Whitsun visits.

FROEHNEL— M

It is clear that the Communists made a great
mistake in spreading malicious stories about West
Berlin conditions and in trying to close off the
sector boundaries. Once the FDJers learned from
bolder spirits that the boundaries could be crossed
and that the malicious stories were not true, a
friendly invasion began. The attitude of West
Berliners quickly produced a spirit of warm con-
fidence, and this was supported by gifts and
hospitality.

Because of the remarkable stream of visitors to
the station, I was unable to enter into detailed
convereations. I noted, however, that the follow-
ing topics were those on which most visitors
wanted information :

(1) POW matters

(2) Internees and concentration camp pris-
oners

(3) Reparations to the Soviet Union

(4) Dismantling in West Germany

(5) The position of youth in West Germany

(6) Unemployment in West Berlin

(7) Possibilities of emigration

(8) The future of the Eastern territories and
the possibility of return to former liomes

Department of State Bulletin

But the one major topic was RIAS itself. Over
i\nd over again you heprd how much hope the
people of the zone place in RIAS, their only re-
liable connection with the outside world.

The 3'ouths demand a more aggressive attitude
from the West. They believe that the distribution
of printed propaganda material should be inten-
sified and better organized. Many believe that the
courage to act will gradually die unless more sup-
port comes soon. Their greatest fear is that the
Elbe will become a real boundary between East
and West.

PARSENOW

With few exceptions, the visitors conducted
themselves in a frank, pleasant manner. Once an
understandable initial reserve had been broken
down, they became very talkative.

The question that interested them most was
''When can the Zone expect liberation ?" They also
asked why the Western Allies "take so much" from
the Russians. There was much discussion of the
FDJ's methods of compulsion and its false stories
about the Western sectors. The youths were en-
thusiastic in praise of their reception by West
Berliners.

There was unanimity on the point of RIAS's
being the main support of the people of the zone.
The midday repeat broadcast of "Berlin Speaks
to the Zone" was very popular. RIAS commen-
taries are very useful ; next to the newscasts, they
are best able to expose the lies of the East zone
press.

For the FDJ, the Whitsun rally was a failure.
Doubters in its ranks were turned into out-and-
out opponents. Many youths were able to see for
themselves where the truth lies.

'VOA Programs Popular
Among Western Germans

[Released to the press September 1]

The Department of State has received a report
from the Office of the United Stat&s High Com-
missioner at Frankfort showing that the majority
of United States zone and Western Berlin resi-
dents interviewed in a poll of current attitudes re-
garding the Voice of America broadcasts described
the programs as "good" because they are informa-
tive and instructive.

The poll, completed by the Reactions Analysis
staff of theOffice of Public Affairs, United States
High Commissioner, in which trained German
interviewers made a representative sampling of
opinion of 3,000 in the zone, 500 at Berlin, and 300
at Bremen, also disclosed that the Voice of
America audience in West Berlin has increased by
IT percent since June 19-1:9 when a similar study
was made. This audience is now estimated at 55
percent of the population of Western Berlin.

In the United States zone, there has been little
change in the size of the audience. Of those
polled, 36 percent said they generally listen to the
broadcasts which are especially tailored for Ger-
man audiences and beamed direct from New York
for relay by Radio Bremen, Radio Frankfort,
Radio Munich, Radio Stuttgart, and RIAS
Berlin. Listenership in all places surveyed was
;;0 percent of the total public, and 60 percent of
German radio listeners.

Polling Germans on the Voice of America
broadcasts heard daily at 1900 hours over the

September 18, 1950

German stations in the zone and RIAS at Berlin,
interviewers found that 89 percent of the people
who customarily listen at that hour regularly or
occasionally tune in on the "Voice" while part of
this impressive coverage arises from the fact that
the broadcasts blanket the areas surveyed. It was
pointed out that it is possible to tune in on other
programs at that hour, including an hour-long
classical music program of the Radio Leipzig.

Asked to give an opinion on the quality of the
programs, the majority described them as "good."
For the minority who considered them "fair" or
"poor," the reasons assigned included lack of in-
terest, ignoring of German interests, overempha-
sis on politics, and poor reception.

About half of the people who found the "Voice"
programs "good" declared their most valuable fea-
ture to be information about the American way of
life. The second most frequently mentioned
reason was their clarity and instructive value.
Other reasons included objective reporting, in-
teresting lectures and talks, and assurances of the
United States desire to aid Germany.

The majority opinions also were that the
"Voice" broadcasts gave East zone Germans a
favorable impression of the United States, the
main reasons being that they are informative.
Other leading reasons given for saying that the
programs impress Eastern Germans are that they
awaken longing of the people for Western ways,
Western standards, and union with West Ger-
many; give the people support, hope, and en-
couragement, and point up the difference between
Russian and American conditions.

449

Events in Korea Deepen Interest in United Nations

Statement hy Secretary Acheson^

It is an inspiring thing to address a committee
which is made up of representatives so broadly
speaking for our national life. Every interest
in our national life is represented here, and, as I
say, it is inspiring to us in the Department of
State and in the Government to know that all of
you feel in your hearts, as you show by coming
together here, that the very foundation of our
hopes for peace and the foundation of the policy
of your Government is the support of the United
Nations. You make that manifest by your work
on this committee.

I should like to say a special word of apprecia-
tion to Mrs. Roosevelt for serving as chairman of
this committee. Mrs. Roosevelt has never turned
aside from any call to serve the cause of the United
Nations, or, indeed, from any call to serve the
cause of world peace or the interests of her
coiuitry. How she finds time in her busy life to
do these things is a marvel to all of us, but the
fact is that, whenever you need the strong sup-
port which Mrs. Roosevelt always gives to our
United Nations work, there she is woi'king harder
than any of us, and I deeply appreciate her will-
ingness to take the chairmanship of this com-
mittee.

The events of the last month or so have deepened,
if it was possible to deepen it, the interest of this
country and of all the people of this country in the
United Nations. Events in Korea brought those
up in a very real and tangible way. The issues
were perfectly clear. No propaganda in the world
could cloud those issues. Never had there been
a more unprovoked or a more wicked aggression
than was perpetrated on the little country of
Korea by the people living to the north of it, and
the world, I think, was electrified when the United
Nations met that aggression without equivocation
and in the firmest possible way lived up to the
principles of the Charter by saying this aggression

'Made before the National Citizens' Committee for
U.N. Day at Wasliington cu Sept. 7 and released to the
press on the same date.

is an evil thing, and it is a wrong thing, and it
violates the Charter, and the aggressors must go
back where they came from. The United Nations
called upon all the member states to help this little
country which was fighting so bravely for its
existence, and the nations have met that call. That
sent a thrill around the world.

As the weeks and months have gone on, we have
come to the realization that it was a large task
which the United Nations called upon us to do, and
we are trying to do it to the best of our ability.
Men are giving their lives, and people are suffer-
ing in order that the principles of the Charter
should have vitality and should have life. I think
also the interest in the United Nations has
deepened not merely by its response to this aggres-
sion, but also by seeing the other side of the picture,
Mr. Malik's performances during the month of
August have brought out, as no speeches of any-
body else could bring out, the nature of the ob-
struction which has been going on, almost ever
since the United Nations started, to thwart the
purposes of the Charter. People have gotten a
new determination that, by their interest and by
their devotion to the United Nations, they will
overcome this obstruction. In the period when
Mr. Malik was not in the Security Council, one
began to see what the United Nations really could
be if it was permitted to act as its founders thought
it was going to act. It must have the complete and
unwavering support of everyone else so that by
sheer moral pressure we will shame people who
do what has been done in the month of August in
the Security Council.

The purposes of the United Nations in Korea are
really a symbol of all its purposes. In the first
place, the aggression has got to be crushed. That
is one of the fundamental principles of the Char-
ter— that people should be allowed to develop in
their own way, independent of aggression from
the outside, independent of force imposed upon
them by others who want them to lead lives in a
different way from the way they want to live their
lives. So, the first task which has to be done in

450

Department of State Bulletin

Korea is to crush the aggression. But that is by
no means the end.

There are great consti active tasks to be carried
out in Korea : relief and reconstruction after tliis
terrible vrar. There will be the period, as Lincoln
expressed it, of "'binding up the nation's wounds."
Tliere will be the period when the United Nations,
as the great sponsor of Korea, will have to do every-
thing that it can to reconcile the bitternesses which
have grown out of this struggle and to bring
Koreans together without bitterness so that they
can go on and build up the country which the
United Nations forecast in 1947 and '48 when it
spoke of a free and independent Korea. That,
again, is in a microcosm — the whole task of the
United Nations throughout the world. It is to
bring people together, to ease tensions, to heal
bitternesses, and to lead the way in opening to all
peoples a fuller life, a happier life, a life freer
from the burden of disease and povei'ty, a life in
which there is more opportunity for the genera-
tions which are coming on to develop finer tilings
than they have ever hoped for before. That is the
great ambition and the great task of the United
Nations. All of those things it must do in Korea.

Korea is the workshop in which the United Na-
tions has tlie chance to make the prototype of the
kind of world which it wants to make universally.

We are going very shortly to the Fifth General
Assembly of the United Nations. There, we will
find all sorts of problems before us. Probably this

Fifth Assembly will be the most important United
Nations meeting which has ever been held. We
are going to it with a delegation of citizens of the
highest character and ability, and, again, we shall
have the invaluable help of having Mrs. Roose-
velt as a member of that delegation. We shall go
to meet these extremely difficult problems. We go
without any conception that there is an American
idea which must be sold to people. That is not
the attitude with which this delegation goes. We
will have our ideas, we will have our plans, but
we go with the i-eal sense of humility that we are
meeting with representatives of the world; that
they have views which are probably quite as valid
as ours, and, while we want them to hear our
points of view, we want to hear their points of
view. We believe that if, without obstruction and
without name calling, we can sit down and discuss
these questions, then, there is a great chance that
there is a solution for all of them.

And, so, it is against that background that I
again want to thank you for your work in this
committee, work which will come to its flower on
United Nations Day. In working to observe this
day you are working for principles which are as
noble and as fine as ever animated any people at
any time in the world's history.

The United Nations continues to be the hope
of the world for peace. It continues to be the
foundation, the cornerstone of United States for-
eign policy.

Review of Security Council Action in Defense of Korea

Statement hy Ambassador Warren R. Austin
U. S. Representative in the Security Council'^

I am talking to you tonight because I have been
reading the letters and telegrams that many
thousands of Americans and people from other
countries have been sending me these last weeks.
I am grateful for this opportunity to tell you what
I feel about your letters and to give you my esti-
mate of the real significance of what has been
happening in the Security Council in relation to
the defense of Korea.

The messages that have come to me have been a
great inspiration to everyone in the United States
Mission. It is comforting to know that so many
of our people are supporting us so strongly. Your
support and prayers strengthen all of us.

Some people have been so affected by hearing

' Delivered over the Columbia Broadcasting System on
Aug. 31 and released to the press by the U.S. Mission to
the U.N. on the same date.

or seeing the performance of the Soviet delegate
that they have blamed the United States delegate
for not trying to have him thrown out of the
Security Council.

I have now had 4 years of experience in the
United Nations. Today, I believe more firmly
than ever that we can build a world that will be
a safer world, a more prosperous world, a more
just world. But, to get that kind of world, we
have to move forward together with the great
majority of the United Nations who believe, as we
do, in spiritual values and the dignity of man.
We can't achieve our goal in one jump. Above all,
we can't build a peaceful world by leaping into
another world war.

We have obtained a certain amount of leader-
ship in the free world. We did not get that
leadership simply because of our potential military
strength. We owe it chiefly to our moral strength.

September 18, 1950

451

We threaten no other nation. We do not menace
any other country's independence. Inside and
outside the United Nations, we are working for a
heakhy — a free — a peaceful world community.

That is why so many other sovereign nations
are ready to cooperate with us. If the time ever
came — and I pray God it never will — when we
tried to rely on physical power alone without the
moral foundation — we would find that we were
weak indeed.

I think that all of us — especially those who
would have us act rashly without consideration- —
should remember this.

On June 25, when the invasion of the Commu-
nist North Koreans burst upon the independent
Republic of Korea, the Security Council acted at
once. It declared the North Koreans aggressors.
It condemned the North Koreans for bi-eaking the
peace. It ordered them to withdraw. It asked
every member of the United Nations to help in
making sure that the North Koreans obeyed. It
asked all nations to refrain from helping the North
Koreans.

Two days later, on June 27, the Council asked
all United Nations members to assist in repelling
the attack and restoring peace and security.

On July 7, the Council established the unified
command to direct United Nations Forces.

Finally, on July 31, the Council acted to alle-
viate the misery and suffering of the Korean
people whose homes and livelihoods were being
ruined because of the Communist aggression.

You will realize from what I have said that the
whole structure of the United Nations action in
Korea was erected by those decisions of the Secu-
rity Council. Action was underway to repel the
Communist aggressor and relieve the suffering
victims of the aggression.

The speed and unity of purpose displayed by
the Security Council, the authority and humani-
tarian quality of its action, thrilled the entire
freedom-loving and peace-loving world.

That was the situation that existed on August 1
when the representative of the Soviet Union
returned to the Security Council after an absence
of 28 weeks to assume the presidency — as was his
right — for the month of August.

This development interested me greatly, as it
did you. You see, Mr. Malik had announced last
January that he would not come back to the Coun-
cil until the delegate of the Chinese Nationalist
Government was expelled.

Well, Dr. Tsiang, the Chinese delegate, was still
sitting on the Council and here was Mr. Malik —
back again. Mr. Malik has announced he consid-
ered the Council illegal because the Chinese Com-
munist Government was not represented. And,
yet, Mr. Malik has presided and proposed resolu-
tions to a body he had declared completely illegal.

The illegal boycott failed of its purpose, and the
United Nations has gained strength and purpose
through this new success.

Your letters indicate that many of you think
that because no resolutions have been passed dur-
ing August, nothing has happened, that Mr. Malik
has succeeded in paralyzing the United Nations.
That is not correct. Many good things have hap-
pened. Many bad things have been prevented
from happening. Let's deal first with what was
prevented.

It is clear the Soviet Government hoped Mr.
Malik could block the United Nations military
effort to protect the Republic of Korea. That, he
failed to do.

Soviet Action To Weaiten U.N. Effort

The Soviet representative tried to weaken the
United Nations effort with spurious proposals for
peace. That, he failed to do. The insincerity of
his proposals was exposed.

The Soviet representative tried to sow division
among the members of the Council and to isolate
the United States from its colleagues. That, he
failed to do. The Council is more firmly united
on the fundamental issues this last day of Mr.
Malik's presidency than it was on the first.

When he failed to divide, he tried to confuse by
dragging in extraneous issues. Today, he went
to the ridiculous extreme of making charges
against Greece. But again, he failed miserably.

The Soviet representative tried to switch labels
and pin on the United States the label — aggressor.
He tried hard, don't you know, but he failed. The
label just wouldn't stick. He talked a lot; but the
more he talked, the less he was believed; the more
he talked, the more clear it became who was aiding
the North Korean aggressors and who was sup-
porting the victim of aggression — trying to estab-
lish real peace.

The Soviet representative tried to divert atten-
tion from the aggression in Korea by charging
the United States with aggression against China.
He tried to embarrass the United States and em-
broil it in conflict with the vast multitudes of
Chinese who are under Communist control. Hei-e,
too, he failed. The United States replied that we
were perfectly willing to have the United Nations
look into the situation on Formosa. We have
nothing to hide. Moreover, we demonstrated that
we believe international problems can and should
be settled by peaceful negotiation and not by force.
If the Soviets and the regimes they control would
demonstrate a similar belief, a fearful world could
relax and turn to making fewer swords and more
plowshares.

Finally, he tried to put the aggressor — North
Korea — on an equal level with the victim — the
Republic of Korea. Again, he failed. The Coun-
cil, on June 25, had invited the Korean Ambassa-
dor to participate in the discussions. The Soviet
delegate, in his capacity as president, refused to
carry out that decision. He tried to get the Coun-
cil to reconsider its action by submitting a new
resolution stating that the North Koreans, the

452

Deparfmeni of State Bulletin

( hinese Communists, and the Korean Ambassador
should be invited. If we had fallen into this trap
lu- could have used his veto to keep the Korean
Ambassador from the table until he got what he
wanted. Instead, the Council insisted that he rule
as to whether or not the Council had, in fact, al-
ready invited the Korean Ambassador on June 25.
He refused to do this because he knew his ruling
would be challenged and that the vote on that was
clearly procedural and not subject to his veto.
Tomorrow, the new president of the Council, Sir
Gladwyn Jebb of the United Kingdom, will be
free to make the long-delayed ruling. Then, the
Council will be able to proceed to vote on the reso-
lutions before it.

Progress in Repelling Korean Aggression

Meanwhile, a great many helpful, constructive
things have been happening.

During August, the Communist aggressors were
checked. The forces of the United Nations have
become steadily stronger. As of today, 12 nations
have offered to send military personnel to join
our forces and the valiant soldiers of the army of
the Korean Republic. British ground forces al-
ready have arrived. Eight nations have sent naval
assistance. Six nations have offered air assist-
ance, and 11 other nations have stated their
desire to consult with the Unified Command re-
garding the help they might most usefully extend.

The humanitarian task of mobilizing resources
for relief and reconstruction has begun. Thus far,
six nations have offered medical assistance, and
nine nations have made offers of other types of
assistance. In addition the specialized agencies
of the United Nations, like the World Health
Organization, have swung into action.

These things have been happening outside the
Council Chamber, it is true. And I know you are
asking what has been happening inside the Coun-
cil. Here, too, much has been accomplished.

After the actions in June and July, three m.ajor
tasks remained for the Council: (1) to keep the
war from spreading; (2) to make the issues crystal
clear for the people of the world; and (3) to
promote a peaceful solution of the conflict and the
establishment of a free, independent and unified
Korea.

The United States, on July 31, introduced a
resolution designed to keep the conflict localized.
The obstructive tactics of the Soviet delegate have
prevented a vote on the resolution. Nevertheless,
we have made progress toward its objective.

Wlien the Soviet delegate tried to create friction
and conflict over Formosa, we supported and en-
couraged United Nations consideration of the
problem. When the Chinese Communists charged
1 United Nations air forces were bombing Man-
churian territory, the United States immediately
declared it would support an on-the-spot inquiry
into the charges.

The United States, by its action in the United

September 18, 1950

Nations is seeking to eliminate or expose any ex-
cuse or pretext that could be used to spread the
conflict.

The second task was to clarify the issues of the
Korean crisis. In that respect, August has been
one of the most successful months in the history
of the Security Council.

In ordering Mr. Malik to return to the Council,
the Kremlin did the free world a good turn.

Never, otherwise, could the Security Council
have become the center of so much world atten-
tion. In order to make the issues of the Korean
case as clear as the water of Lake Champlain, we
had to grip the interest of the world.

Mr. Malik, this month, has been acting as a kind
of circus barker. His spiel has enticed more peo-
ple than ever before into the big top. Millions
who hardly knew the United Nations existed have
followed both sides of the debate. They have seen
the issues presented.

They have watched and listened and read — and
they have judged the differences between Mr.
Malik's government and the rest of the world.

The people have seen Mr. Malik's tricks and
dodges do nothing but unify the other members of
the Security Council. Because Mr. Malik was sit-
ting at the table, the rest of us have been able to
sharpen and dramatize the issues for all to be-
hold. When people become interested, they also
become informed. That is where Mr. Malik
helped us so much this month.

Every time the representative of the Soviet Gov-
ernment addressed one of his speeches to the world,
some other delegate replied with the facts. I don't
believe that, anywhere in the world, lies will live
very long when the facts which controvert them
can be openly and fully presented.

I believe that the people of Asia, the people of
Europe, and the people of America share one qual-
ity in common — good sense. What Mr. Malik said
just didn't make good sense. Nobody, not even
the Kremlin, can fool all the people all the time.

I know this, because I have asked our Embassies
all over the world to keep us informed on the ef-
fect that the debate in the Security Council is hav-
ing on people's thinking. In some areas, truth has
an uphill Hght, but it has gained ground. People
everywhere are becoming more aware of the Krem-
lin's contempt for people's intelligence, for peo-
ple's ability to distinguish promise from perform-
ance, and fact from falsehood.

Thus, what has happened in the Security Coun-
cil under the presidency of the Soviet delegate has
made the issues more clear to more people more
rapidly than was possible in any other way.

All of this has contributed toward the third
task : the ultimate solution of the Korean problem.
The political future of Korea will be considered
at the session of the General Assembly which opens
only 3 weeks from now. The understanding
gained from the events of the past month will be
of immense help to the representatives of the 59

453

governments who will be present. We can move
forward more rapidly with constructive action to
restore peace to Korea, rebuild the war-torn land,
assist in the restoration of government throughout
the nation, and help a free and independent Korea
take its place among the nations of the earth.

The world has seen the policies of the Soviet
Government in a clear light this month. There is
less reason for doubt in the free world — more rea-
son for confidence than ever before. Freedom and
independence move forward. With the help of
God, they will not be halted.

U.N. Korean Fighter Patrol
Shoots Down Hostile Soviet Bomber

Security Council by the deputy representative of
the United States, Ernest A. Gross, the follow-
ing day.

Admiral Kirk made the following statement in
reply to Mr. Vyshinsky :

The information at my disposal indicates that the ques-
tion to which you refer pertains to defensive action by
United Nations Forces operating in the Korean area in
accordance with resolutions of the United Nations Se-
curity Council and that it has. in fact, been brought to
the attention of the Security Council for appropriate con-
sideration. I am therefore not in a position to accept on
behalf of the United States Government the communica-
tion of the Soviet Government on this subject. It would
appear to be appropriate for any representations on this
question to be presented to the United Nations Security
Council.

Admiral Kirk did not accept the note for
delivery to this Government.

M£SSAGE FROM U.S. DEPUTY
REPRESENTATBVE TO THE U.N.

{.Released to the press September 5]

The following message iras delivered to the Secretary-
Ocneral of the United Nations at 12:30 a.m., e.d.t., today,
and to the President of the Security Council at 12:.'i5 a.m.,
e.d.t., by Ernest A. Gross, deputy to Ambassador Warren
R. Austin, United States representative to the United
Nations.

On September 4, 1950, United Nations naval
forces were operating off the west coast of Korea
at approximately the 38th parallel on missions in
pursuance of the resolution of the Security Council
of June 27, 1950.

At 13 : 29 o'clock, Korean time, a twin-engine
bomber identified only by bearing a Red Star
passed over a screening ship and continued toward
the center of the United Nations formation in a
hostile manner. The bomber opened fire upon a
United Nations fighter patrol which returned its
fire and shot it down.

A United Nations destroyer succeeded in pick-
ing up the body of one member of the bomber crew.
Identification papers indicated that the body was
that of Lt. Mishin Tennadii Vasilebiu, of the
armed forces of the U.S.S.R., Serial No. 25054.

SOVIET NOTE ON BOMBER INCIDENT
REFUSED BY AMBASSADOR KIRK

IReleased to the press September 6]

The American Ambassador at Moscow, Admiral
Alan G. Kirk, was called today to the Soviet
Ministry of Foreign Affairs by Foreign Minister
Vyshinsky, who read to him a note on the subject
of the airplane incident which took place off Korea
on September 4 and which was reported to the

North Korea Slanders U.N. Forces
To Hide Guilt of Aggression

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press September 6]

The aggressor in Korea has tried all manner of
tricks to divert the attention of the world from
his crime. One of these has been to slander the
United Nations forces fighting to stop the aggres-
sion in Korea with the charge that they are bomb-
ing and killing defenseless civilians. The air
activity of the United Nations forces in Korea has
been, and is, directed solely at military targets of
the invader. These targets are enemy troop con-
centrations, supply dumps, war plants, and com-
munications lines. It is well-known that the
Communist command has compelled helpless
civilians to labor on these military sites. Peace-
ful villages are used to cover the tanks of the
invading army. Civilian dress is used to disguise
the soldiers of aggression.

We and all the free peoples of the United Na-
tions abhor war. It was onl}^ a short time ago that
our allies suffered the blows of totalitarian aggres-
sion. It is not we who have brought the horrors
of war to Korea. The world knows, and I am
confident that the people of Korea know, who is
responsible for the calamities which have befallen
their land. I am sure that few will be deceived
by the fraudulent attempt to transfer the guilt
for the crime in Korea to the United Nations forces
which are supporting the people of Korea against
the aggressor.

454

Departmenf of Sfafe Bullefin

Discussion in Security Council of Agenda Items

Statement hy Ambassador Warren R. Austin
U.S. Representative in the Security Council ^

We are about to ■wind up a historic month. The
month of August 1950 will certainly be a "red"
letter month. It has been characterized in the
Security Council of the United Nations by colossal
contempt for the simple rules of the game of life,
"disregard of good morals and good behavior. This
great forum was used to heap contumely upon
men of honor and character and dignity and upon
great nations who love freedom and who have
gained it at great expense. We have endured
tlirough a month of continued, complete sabotage
of parliamentary law and common procedure in
parliamentary bodies, endless disrespect of those
rules that had been regarded as the means of
facilitating and hastening the performance of
business in all j^arliamentary bodies throughout
the free world.

And, it has risen to a climax today. Have we
witnessed anything equal to this before? Two
items placed on the provisional agenda by the
[iresident under the rules and objected to, thus far,
by many members of the Security Council — ^that
is, the preliminary question of whether they shall
be on the agenda of the Security Council is appar-
ently objected to by enough members to make it a
question whether they will indeed be on that
agenda. And, without their being on the agenda
at all, we have listened to the delegate of the Soviet
Union, when he was wearing that hat, launch upon
a discussion of the substance of those two items
which are still in question as to whether they shall
be on the agenda or not.

Not only that — not a question of arguing the
case — but being possessed of this other hat, he also
makes a finding and declares a judgment. He
makes a claini that is contained in these accusa-
tions of barbarous killing, of willful aggression,
of intentional crossing of a boundary line and

' Made before the Security Council on Aug. 31 and
released to the press by the U.S. Mission to the U.N. on
the same date.

bombing innocent civilians and then declares it so.
Advocate, judge — what more next, if he could?

I say that this demonstration will have its reper-
cussions in the world. Peoj^le will draw the infer-
ences from such conduct that are natural, and the
quality of the confidence of even those people who
live in his own country and of the people who live
in the satellites to that country — I say their con-
fidence— in the ruling circle will be shaken.

These items are not yet on the agenda. I am
not going to violate the law just because he has. I
am going to tell you honestly and candidly what
our position is about placing these items on the
agenda and then stop, reserving of course the
right to discuss the merits if they get on the
agenda at the suitable time and when they are
under consideration. I trust that I will not violate
the good sense, common sense of the people of the
world by making the extravagant, the sickening
claims that we have had to listen to here today.
It is impossible that they believe that the people of
the world have not enough intelligence to see
through these absurd charges that they make.

It is possible, of course, that the boundary line
has been crossed. That is a possibility in any war,
especially in a north country where climatic con-
ditions sometime render the crossing of a bound-
ary line accidental. But, to come here and charge
the soldiers of the United States, who love life and
who are humane and who fight only for principles
and never as aggressors, to charge them with cross-
ing a boundary and bombing imiocent civilians is
beyond the credulity of anybody on earth.

I want to say one thing that does not affect the
position of my Government concerning the very
complex question in Asia and in the Orient, but I
am caused to say this by what the distinguished
representative of the Soviet Union said about our
colleague Dr. Tsiang, the lawful representative of
the Government of China, notwithstanding the
claims that he is not that. He is in fact and in law
that, and he sits with us an honored and respected

September 78, J 950

455

colleague. When the charge was made against him
that he had no interest in his own people, his be-
loved people of China, I could not sit here and
silently take that. For I know Chinese char-
acteristics from intimate experience and study.
We all know Dr. Tsiang from very close associa-
tion, and we know that if there ever was a more
dastardly public charge than that made, we have
not heard of it. I hope Dr. Tsiang will retire
tonight believing that he has the coniidence of
his colleagues on the Security Council and we bow
low to his learning and erudition and his honesty
and honor. If we disagree with him politically
in the Security Council at any time, it will not be
a reflection upon Iiis honor or his integrity, or his
fidelity to his dear people.

Item on Complaint of Bombing
of Chinese Territory

Now, we are going to favor putting the subject
matter that is contained in item 4 before this Coun-
cil because it is a charge against the United States
of America. I think it is contemptuous to put this
propaganda language here, certainly after the de-
bate we had yesterday and the action taken by
this Council changing the language from the form
which was obnoxious into a form that dealt with
the subject matter without passing judgment or
trying to do so. Of course, we object to that.

Let me say that, regarding the facts, on August
28 there was submitted to the Security Council —
I am dealing only with facts affecting the question
of whether this item ought to go on the agenda or
not, and I say it ought to — I am on that side of it,
but I say it ought to go in another form and that
is something the Security Council can fix— but, on
August 28, there was submitted to the Security
Council a communication from Mr. Chou-En-Lai
complaining that military aircraft, operating un-
der the unified command in Korea— understand, I
say they were operating under the unified com-
mand. I don't say that Chou-En-Lai said so.
What he said was quite different. He said it was
United States aircraft, in effect trying to convert
a situation from a United Nations situation to a
United States situation, complaining that military
aircraft operating under the unified command in
Korea had overflown and strafed Chinese territory
in Manchuria. On August 29, on behalf of my
Government I submitted to the Council a reply
to the complaint which stated that the instructions
under which aircraft are operating under the uni-
fied command in Korea strictly prohibit them
from crossing the Korean frontier into adjacent
territory and that my Government had received
no evidence that those instructionsi had been
violated.^

In that communication, I also expressed the
view that my Government would welcome an in-

' Bulletin of Sept. 11, 1950, p. 413.
456

vestigation on the spot by a Commission appointed
by the Security Council.

As soon as we received the complaint from Mr.
Chou-En-Lai, the United States military authori-
ties operating under the Commander of the United
Nations Forces in Korea were instructed to make
an immediate investigation to determine whether
there was any evidence to indicate that the charges
were well-founded.

Reports have now been received which indicate
that one F-51 aircraft of the 67 Fighter Bomber
Squadron may have by mistake violated Chinese
territory in Manchuria and strafed an airstrip in
the late afternoon of August 27, 1950. This evi-
dence has not been fully confirmed but indicates
a possibility tliat one F-51 aircraft may have at-
tacked an airstrip at Antung in Manchuria, which
is approximately 5 miles from the Korean border.

As I stated in my communication of August
29, strict instructions have been issued by the mili-
tary authorities in Korea to confine their opera-
tions to the territory of Korea. For example, on
June 29, 1950, in an order to the military forces,
it was stated that special care should be taken to
insure that operations in North Korea were well
clear of the frontier.

On July 2, 1950, the Secretary of the Air Force
of the United States directed the Commanding
General of Air Force Operations to emphasize the
necessity of full briefing to air crews so that there
would be no possibility of attacking targets be-
yond the territory of North Korea.

These same instructions were emphasized again
to the military commands in the beginning and
middle of August.

The evidence which has so far been developed
indicating as it does the possibility that an air-
craft of the United Nations forces in Korea may
have violated the territory of Manchuria, attacked
an airstrip there, only serves to emphasize the de-
sirability of sending a United Nations Commis-
sion to that area which can make an objective in-
vestigation of these charges.

My Government believes that the Security Coun-
cil should establish such a commission without de-
lay. The authorities of North Korea and Man-
churia should provide it with necessary freedom
of movement and safe conduct so that it may make
a thorough investigation of the facts.

For their part, the United States military
authorities would extend to the Commission full
cooperation including access to pertinent records.
The Commission when established can make an
immediate investigation of the incident com-
plained about on August 27, and, if it is found that
an attack did in fact occur, my Government is pre-
pared to make payment to the Secretary-General
for appropriate transmission to the injured parties
such damages as the Commission shall find to be
fair and equitable. In such case, my Government
will see that appropriate disciplinary action is
taken. I am requesting the Secretary-General to j

Department of State Bulletin i

transmit a copy of my statement in the Council
this afternoon to Mr. Chou-En-Lai.

I wouhl be ghad to accept that item on the
agenda, but I believe that the Security Council in
fairness ought to change the wording of it to read
"Complaint of bombing of Chinese territory by
United Nations aircraft." I am prepared, if the
president of the Security Council is unwilling to
accept that amendment, to make a motion that
such an amendment be made in that part of the
agenda before it is submitted for a vote of accept-
ance by the Security Council.

Item on Terrorism and Executions in Greece

I think we have to give heed to what the dis-
tinguished representative of Egypt said and that
we have to make our agenda an instrument that
can be useful and that can expedite the transaction
of our business. I endoree also what the repre-
sentative of the United Kingdom has stated here
and join him also in his statement excepting this :
With respect to the next item to which I now come,
that is, item 5, "Unceasing terrorism and mass
executions in Greece," "A letter from the president
of the Security Council to the members of the
Security Council," I do not assent to this being
submitted to the Council on a motion to strike it
for the reason that under the law of the Council
it is not necessary for the Council to take that
hazard. We do not have to have a majority of
seven here to keep this item off the agenda. The
question is, in normal form, "Shall it be on the
agenda?" The risk of losing is on the president
and if he does not get the necessary seven votes,
the answer is "No," and it goes off the agenda.

I ask, Mr. President, that we be excused by the
United Kingdom from passing on his question
and that we handle this matter in the same way
that we have always handled the question of the
agenda.

I am opposed to this item. In the first place,
it is very unfair to write the item in this way and
put that letter on that is mentioned and not put
the two letters that the distinguished repi-esenta-
tive of Greece has addressed to us. They should
all be on if any are on. The United States opposes
inclusion of item 5 because we consider this strange
communication should not be entertained by the
Security Council. Among all the wild charges
contained in it, there is no single coherent sugges-
tion that this is a threat to international peace or
even an international dispute. It is just as well
that no such pretense is made. After almost 4
years of continuous concern by the United Nations
with the problem of the threat to the territory,
integrity, and political independence of Greece,
the Council knows that the essence of the jiroblem
has been the effort of international communism
incited, supported, and directed from Cominform
countries to overthrow the constitutional Govern-

September 78, 1950

905093—50 3

ment of Greece through force and terror. The
General Assembly has confirmed the existence of
this threat in 1947, 1948, and 1949. During con-
sideration of this problem in the past, charges like
those of item 5 have been made every year by the
Soviet Union. Their apparent purpose has been
to divert the United Nations from the real prob-
lem of aggression against Greece. On all these
occasions, the United Nations has recognized the
introduction of the question of Greek executions
as an obvious maneuver. We have heard it befoi-e.
It is still a maneuver and we propose that the item
be not supported. I will not indulge in a discus-
sion of these two resolutions introduced out of
order at this time, but, when they come up, I think
I will have something more to say.

Universal Training Legislation

[Released to the press by the White Eouse August 29]

The President today sent the following letter to Millard
E. Tydings, Chairman, Armed Services Committee, United
States Senate, and a similar letter to Carl Vinson, Chair-
man, Armed Services Committee, House of Representa-
tives.

Pursuant to our conversation today, I am fur-
nishing you my views about the pending universal
training legislation.

I am very much in favor of universal training
legislation. The record will show that, for the
past five years, I have repeatedly recommended
that the Congress enact legislation of this char-
acter. I am just as strongly in favor of it today
as I have ever been.

However, the realities of the situation are that if
such legislation were enacted tomorrow it could
not possibly be put into effect at once. A universal
training program would require many training
camps and other installations and scores of thou-
sands of experienced military personnel for train-
ing purposes. In view of the demands made on our
military forces by the Korean aggression, it is clear
that we could not possibly make available the in-
stallations and trained military manpower to put
a universal training program into operation at
this time or in the immediately foreseeable future.
Accordingly, it does not seem to me immediately
necessary for the Congress to enact universal
training legislation.

Legislation of this character, however, should
be placed on the statute books at an early date
so that we can put it into operation as soon as
circumstances permit. Accordingly, I hope that
your Committee will continue its active consid-
eration of this legislation with a view to seeking
final action on it in January.

I am sending a similar letter to Chairman Vin-
son of the House Armed Services Committee.

457

The Domestic Role in Building Strength To Deter Communist Aggression

Address hy the President^

Last week, I talked with you about Korea and
about our efforts to maintain peace and freedom
in the world.

Tonight, I want to talk with you about what we
must do here at home to support our fighting men
and to build up the strength which the free world
needs to deter Commimist aggression.

The leaders of Communist imperialism have
great military forces at their command. They
have shown that they are willing to use these
forces in open aggression, in spite of the united op-
position of all the free nations. Under these cir-
cumstances, the free nations have no alternative
but to build up the military strength needed to
support the rule of law in the world. Only in this
way, can we convince the Conmiunist leaders that
aggression will not pay.

To do our part in building up our military
strength and the military strength of the free
nations throughout the world, the United States
must more than double its defense efforts. We
have been spending about 15 billion dollars a year
for defense. We are stepping up this rate rap-
idly. By next June, under our present plans, we
expect to be spending at the rate of at least 30 bil-
lion dollars a year. In the year after that, we
shall probably have to spend much more than 30
billion dollars. And we must be prepared to
maintain a very strong defense program for many
years to come.

This defense program cannot be achieved on the
basis of business as usual. All of us — whether we
are farmers, or wage earners, or businessmen —
must give up some of the things we would ordi-
narily expect to have for ourselves and our
families.

The danger the free world faces is so great that
we cannot be satisfied with less than an all-out ef-
fort by everyone. We have not given up our goal
of a better life for every citizen in this great coun-

' Excerpts from an address delivered by radio from
Washington on Sept. 9 and released to the press by the
White House on the same date.

try of ours. But, for the time being, we have to
make absolutely sure that our economy turns out
the guns and planes and tanks and other supplies
which are needed to protect the world from the
threat of Communist domination.

To do this job, we must meet and solve three
hard, tough problems.

First, we must produce the materials and equip-
ment needed for defense.

Second, we must raise the money to pay the cost
of our increased defense efforts.

Third, we must prevent inflation.

Solving these three problems is the challenge
we face on the home front. And we must solve
them if we are to preserve our freedom and the
peace of the world.

First, is the problem of producing the materials
and equipment we need for defense. We can do
that. But it will impose great new demands upon
the productive power of our economy.

To meet these demands, we must do everything
we can to expand our total production. This will
require harder work and longer hours for every-
body. It will mean additional jobs for women
and older people.

It means that businessmen should expand pro-
ductive facilities, develop new techniques, and in-
crease efficiency in every way possible. It means
enlarging our capacity to produce basic materials
such as steel, aluminum, and copper.

America's productive ability is the greatest in
the history of the world, and it can be expanded
a great deal more to meet the conditions with which
we are faced. With our economy now producing at
an annual rate approaching 275 billion dollars, the
goal I set last year of a 300 billion dollar economy
by 1954 will undoubtedly be far surpassed. With
this kind of dynamic growth, we can arm our-
selves and help arm the free world. We can im-
prove our industrial plants and maintain the
civilian efficiency and morale which underlie our
defensive strength.

But we cannot get all the military supplies we
need now from expanded production alone. This

458

Department of State Bulletin

ixpansion cannot take place fast enongh. There-
fore, to the extent necessary, workers and phmts
will have to stop making some civilian goods and
begin turning out mihtary equipment.

This job of building new plants and facilities
and changing over to defense production is a
challenge to our free economy.

Management and labor can and will do most of
this defense production job on their own initiative.
But there are certain steps which the Govern-
ment must take to see that the job is done promptly
and well.

Yesterday, I signed a new law, the Defense Pro-
duction Act of 1950. This law will enable the
Government to provide special financial help to
businessmen where that is necessary to enhirge
the i^roduction of our mines and factories for de-
fense purposes.

This law also will enable the Government to
make sure that defense orders have top priority
and that manufacturers get the steel, aluminum,
copper, and other materials they need to fill such
oi-ders. This law gives the Government the power
to prevent the hoarding of raw materials essen-
tial to defense. It also enables the Govermnent to
cut down the production of nonessential civilian
goods that use up critical materials.

I have today issued an Executive order author-
izing the appropriate agencies of the Government
to exercise these new defense production powers.
The administration of these and other powers
granted by the new law will be coordi)uited by the
Chairman of the National Security Kesources
Board, Mr. ^Y. Stuai't Symington.

I have directed the agencies to exercise these
production powers vigorously and promptly, mak-
ing use of every resource of American business,
large and small. These powers will be achnin-
istered with one paramount purpose in mind: to
produce the defense equipment we need as rapidly
as possible.

Our second problem is to pay for our increased
defenses. There is only one sensible way to do
this. It is the plain, simple, direct way. We
should pay for them as we go, out of taxes.

There are very good reasons for this.

To the extent that we finance our defense effort
out of taxes now, we will avoid an enormous in-
crease in the national debt. During World War
II, we borrowed too much and did not tax our-
selves enough. We must not run our preseiit de-
fense effort on that kind of financial basis.

Our third problem is to carry out the defense
progi'am without letting inflation weaken and en-
danger our free economy.

The new Defense Production Act provides the
Government with certain powers to stabilize prices
and wages. But the fight against inflation is not

just the Government's fight. It cannot be won
just by issuing Government regulations.

We are all in this situation together. We must
be prepared to accept some reduction in our stand-
ards of living. I am sure that we will be willing
to make sacrifices here at home, if we think of the
much greater sacrifices being made by our sons
and brothers and husbands who are fighting at the
front.

I have also issued an order establishing an Eco-
nomic Stabilization Agency, to be headed by a
Stabilization Administrator. This xVdministra-
tor will guide our voluntary efforts to hold down
inflation. It will also be his task to find out where
and when price and wage controls are needed.

Our goals are plain.

We must produce the goods that are needed.

We should pay for our defense as we go.

We must hold the cost of living steady and keep
down the cost of defense items.

All these things we can do if we work together
and share the sacrifices that must be made. We
can and must submerge petty differences in the
common task of preserving freedom in the world.

The enormous resources and vitality of our free
society have been proved. In World War II, we
astonished the world and astonished ourselves by
our vast production. Since then, our rate of
growth has exceeded our expectations.

Today, spurred by the world-wide menace of
Communist imperialism, we can surpass every pre-
vious record. I am certain that the American
people, working together, can build the strength
needed to establish peace in the world.

Every American must ask himself what he can
do to help keep this Nation strong and free. We
should ask God to give us the faith and the cour-
age we need. We should ask Him for tliat help
which has preserved our Nation in the past, and
which is our great reliance in the years to come.

Letters of Credence

Israel

The newly appointed Ambassador of Israel,
Abba Eban, presented his credentials to the Presi-
dent on September 5, 1950. For translation of
the Ambassador's remarks and the President's
reply, see Department of State press release 898 of
September 5.

September 18, 1950

459

Foreign Policies Toward Asia

A TELEVISION INTERVIEW WITH SECRETARY ACHESON

[Released to the press September JO]

Announcer: What happens abroad happens
to you. The war in Asia is a war on the whole
free world of which we are a part, and some for-
eign aifairs are American affairs. Today by way
of a final report from the Diplomatic Pouch this
will be made clear for all of us by Secretary of
State Dean Acheson. But here to turn the key
and open the Diplomatic Pouch is Charles Col-
lingwood, CBS Wliite House correspondent.

MR. COLLINGWOOD: On this final edition of Diplo-
matic Pouch, which has been produced by CBS in coop-
eration with tlie Department of State, we are very happy
and honored to have with us the Secretary of State, the
Honorable Dean Acheson. Mr. Acheson, a lot of hard
questions have been asked of you of late and two of my
colleagues and I are going to try to ask you some more.
Edward Murrow, distinguished radio correspondent who
has just returned from a trip to Korea and who has seen
at first hand some of the things we are going to talk
about I and Grifling Bancroft, one of the staff of CBS here
in Washington, a Washington reporter of long standing.

MR. MURROW : What are the odds on our getting into
a shooting war with the Soviet Union? Do you think it's
inevitable?

Secretary Acheson : This whole idea that war
is inevitable seems to me to be completely wrong
and very vicious. I remember looking back over
the history of the United States not long ago and
reading the terrible things that were said in the
1850's about the irrepressible conflict. It's talk
like that, talk of an irrepressible conflict, talk
about war being inevitable which tends to make
it so.

War isn't inevitable. It doesn't have to come.
If we go ahead doing the things which we have
to do here, then we have our best chance for peace.

MR. BANCROFT: Well, Mr. Secretary, going ahead
doing what things? What should we do to prevent war
other than not talk about it?

Secretary Acheson : There are a good many
things, and we have been doing them ever since
the end of the war. Before getting into what
we should do, I'd like to make one other point
about what not to talk about and that is the idea
of preventive war which I hear mentioned now
and again. As the President said the other night
that is a thoroughly wicked thing, this talk about
preventive war. It's immoral and wrong from
every point of view, and, when we talk about it,
we tend to bring on the very thing we are trying
to prevent. It's like some poor unhappy creature
who gets worrying so much about the fact of death
that he literally worries himself to death.

It's idiocy of the worst sort to talk in those
terms. It does great harm to our allies. It makes
them believe we are not steady, sensible, and calm.
It does great damage to our chances of peace by
making our enemies believe that their own propa-
ganda is true. Therefore, I strongly urge every-
body to stojJ that sort of talk.

Background of Policies

MR. COLLINGWOOD : Well, Mr. Secretary, how are we
going to prevent war? You have talked often about situa-
tions of strength. Is that a fundamental basis of Ameri-
can foreign policy?

Secretary Acheson : It is an absolutely es-
sential and fundamental basis. Let me go back
a little way and give you some background to this
basic premise of our foreign policy. After the
war, we all hoped and believed that it was going
to be possible to create a rule of law among nations
by establishing a great international institution,
the United Nations, which would be based on law,
which would be based on the idea of preventing
aggression and insuring the independence and
right of each people to live its own independent
existence.

460

Deparfment of State Bulletin

And, then, we began to find there was a power
in tlie world which did not want that to happen.
There was a power which began obstruction.
There was a power which began aggressive action.
I'd just like to point out to you a moment — and if
30U will look at the map with me — some of the
tilings that have been happening along the line
that I have just mentioned over the past 4 or 5
years. I think it's helpful if we get one look at
the whole picture.

Now, the first thing that happened in 1945^6
was the Soviet drive on Iran. This was an at-
tempt of the Soviet Union to take Iran, to go
down through to the Persian Gulf. Almost while
that was going on another drive began against
Turkey, directed first of all at separating the East-
ern provinces of Turkey from Turkey and then
also to gain control of the Straits. Even while
that was continuing in '46-'47, another Communist
prong came down into Greece by means of internal
difficulties in Greece which were sujDported by
Bulgaria and to some extent then by Yugoslavia.

You notice that each one of these prongs [indi-
cating on map] moves westward and the impor-
tant part of it is that if you win any westward
prong you win all those to the east. Wliile the
Greek-Turkish matter was still active, the Soviets
withdrew from the four-power control of Ger-
many and undertook to Sovietize the whole of
Germany. While that was still active, a great
drive began to strengthen the Communist Parties
in France and in Italy. And while all of those
things were going on, in the summer of '48. the
Berlin blockade episode took place and the Kus-
sians tried to drive us out of Berlin. Now, those
were the progressive acts of the Soviet Union in
order to block the progress toward reconstruction
and peace which had been going on in Western
Europe.

MR. BANCROFT: Well, how are we going to combat
this obstructionism of the Soviet Union, Mr. Secretary?

Secretary Acheson : We have to go on doing
the sort of thing which we have been doing in
the past. Again, let me take up each one of these
things.

When this drive upon Iran occurred in '45-'46
President Truman instructed the then Secretary
of State, Mr. Byrnes, to go to the Security Coun-
cil and fight this thing out. Mr. Byrnes did that
and it resulted in the withdrawal of Soviet troops
from Northern Iran and the collapse of the puppet
regime which had been set up in Azerbaijan.

In 1946, the President instructed the Secretary
of State to support Turkey with the aid of the
British and French and resist the attempt to gain
control of the Straits. When the troubles with
Greece began. President Truman brought in on
March 12, 1947, his Greek-Turkish Aid Program
and the result of that has been not only to greatly
strengthen the forces of Turkey but also to quell
the rebellion going on in .Greece and destroy the

guerrillas and get Greece back to a peaceful state
of mind.

When the troubles in Germany began, we
started the program of unifying Germany. First
of all unifying what we could by putting together
the British and the American zones and then
bringing the French zone in and finally creating
the Republic of Western Germany. The whole
attempt to increase communism in Italy and
France and Western Europe was met by the Mar-
shall Plan which hurled back all that growing
communism which came from discontent and
misery, and, finally, the Berlin airlift defeated
that rather crude Soviet attempt to gain control
over Berlin.

And, finally, as this pressure got more and
more it was clear that there had to be some uni-
fication of the defensive forces of the West and
that produced the North Atlantic Treaty and that
led into the Military Assistance Program. Those
are the kinds of thing that we have got to do, Mr.
Bancroft.

Western Europe

MR. BANCROFT : We are creating, or we are attempt-
ing to create, a situation of strength in Western Europe
through the methods you have outlined but you have often
spoken of strength depending upon the will of people
and their determination to believe and to do. Do we
have any real assurance that the people of Western Europe
will fight if it comes to that?

Secretary Acheson : I think we have every as-
surance that they will fight if they have something
to fight with. You obviously can't fight a tank
with your bare hands. You "have been in Korea,
Mr. Murrow, and you the know the tremendous
importance of equipment in dealing with ag-
gression.

Now, if we go forward as we have been going
forward with the North Atlantic Treaty — we have
laid the foundation of organization now — what
remains to be done is to provide the troops, the
organized, balanced, collective forces, and the
equipment to set up an organization, an organiza-
tion of armed forces in the West made up of our
own forces, our Canadian allies, and our Western
European friends which will be powerful enough
to deter any aggression.

MR. BANCROFT : Can you build up forces in the West
powerful enough actually to resist an all-out aggression?

Secretary Acheson: I believe we can and I
believe with modern weapons and ingenuity we
can do again exactly what was done for so many
centuries at the time of the Roman Empire. It
doesn't make any difference that you are out-
numbered. It depends on the strength of the
organization, the superiority of your weapons.
You can hold back all sorts of hordes if you have
that.

September 18, 1950

461

MR. COLLINGWOOD : We are faced now, are we not,
with about 175 to 200 — that is the best estimate that
we can make — Russian divisions. In Western Europe
there are now 12 divisions, counting the American occupa-
tion forces in Western Germany. That presents a tre-
mendous imbalance. What is being done to correct that?

Secretary Acheson : It presents us with, as you
say, a very great problem. And what we have got
to do is to put every ounce of our own energy and
determination and strength into it and go along
with our allies who will do the same thing, I'm
sure, if we do our full part. The gap is very great.
But the gap is not quite so great as the figures
indicate.

MR. MURROW: Could we get off the military aspect
for a moment. There were rumors out in Korea that
there was a certain amount of criticism of you and your
policies — in certain sections of the press and perhaps
even the radio. How are you bearing up? What do you
do for relaxation and relief from this constant tension?

Secretary Acheson : I think the rumors must
have been minimized on their way to Korea.
Well, I bear up, I think, principally by following
the advice of the old Scotch lady to a younger
fi'iend who was in trouble, and the old lady said,
"My dear, you have got to be philosophical about
this. Just don't think about it."

One great thing to do is just not to brood about
these things. Another thing to do is to get some
relaxation which takes your mind off your troubles
and that is what I do out in this little place I have
in the country. I pretty well forget about the
world in the few hours I'm permitted to have out
there.

Asia

MR. COLLINGWOOD: But the world doesn't forget
about you, Mr. Secretary, while you are out there. One
of the things they have been hammering at you about is
the situation in Asia, the failure of American foreign
policy, as they put it, in Asia, for which they give you some
responsibility. Well, what is your answer to these critics
about the condition that we find ourselves in now in the
Far East?

Secretary Acheson : Well, I think the first
answer is that they flatter themselves and me and
all Americans in saying that the troubles which
now exist in the Far East are a failure of Amer-
ican policy. That results from the belief that
Americans are all powerful and that anything
that they want to do happens, and, if things
go wrong, it must be some American mistake.
That isai't the case in Asia at all.

The fundamental fact in Asia is that that vast
continent, quite irrespective of what some people
are talking about, is all in the grip of a great
revolutionary ferment. Peoples of Asia without
discrimination between countries believe two
things fundamentally. One is that they must at-

462

tain, and they must keep their independence from
foreign control. And the other is that the misery
which has overhung their lives for so many cen-
turies is not necessary and that they can improve
and better their own conditions of life.

MR. MURROW : Well, why is it that it seems to be that
the Communists are taking advantage of their revolu-
tionary ferment you speak of and we don't? How can
we overcome that difficulty?

Secretary Acheson : I think it is not true that
the Communists are the only ones who understand
this important fact about Asia and work in con-
nection with it. I shall come in a moment to the
fact that we do also, ^^^lat the Communists do is
the easy thing. They say to these people, all you
need to do in order to get the land which you want
so much, to get rid of the landlords who have been
repressing you for so many centuries, to have more
to eat, to escape taxes, all you have to do is to
become Communist, and, then, all these benefits
will occur to you. As soon as these people fall for
that, if they do fall for that, and, the Communists
take over, "they see that the Communist perform-
ance is very different from the Communist promise.

In.stead of getting land, the State takes the land ;
instead of not paying taxes, all the produce of the
land is taken by the State except a meager amount
for the living of the people who work on it. In-
stead of not having landlords, they have an all
powerful State which is the landlord. And I
believe people will come to understand that.

Now, in some of the countries, coming back to
your question — why don't we do something about
this — I think we have done more about it than
anybody else. I think our history of United
States activities in the Philippines shows that
we understand and have always understood the
great urge of people for independence and have
helped them to attain it. We have understood the
great need of people for better conditions of life
and have helped bring them about. The Philip-
pines has been a model in the East.

The Russians, so far as I know, have never
voluntarily given up one bit of control that they
had. We cooperated earnestly to set up this free
country of the Philippines. In Korea, we took the
initiative in creating a free and independent coun-
try and took it to the United Nations. The United
Nations sponsored the operation. But it was the
United States which has put in the sinews creating
that little country. We tried to do everything
that we could in China to achieve the same thing.
So, I think we understand Asian aspirations, and
I think we have been doing everything possible to
help.

China and Korea

MR. COLLINGWOOD: You mentioned Korea, Mr. Sec-
retary, that we are involved in fighting thei-e. Do you
think the American action^or let us say, the United

Department of State Bulletin

Nations action — in Korea will help us or harm us in our
t'ff iits to win the people of Asia over to our way of
tbinkiug?

Secretary xVchesox : I think that the United
Nations action and our support of it in Korea is
olio of the great turning points in history. I think
it has established tliat tlie free nations of tlie
world understand that the United Natioiis Charter
iiieansi that in the face of naked aggression, such
as in Korea, it is the duty of all of us to step up
and give help to a country which fights bravely
for its own existence.

MR. BANCROFT: Well, Mr. Secretary, what are the
1 liances, do you think, of Communist China getting her-
s.'lt" involved in tlie support of the Korean Communists?

Secretary Acheson: I should think it would
be sheer madness on the part of the Chinese Com-
nuinists to do that, and I see no advantage to them
in doing it.

Let's again look here. We have a map of Asia
and I'd like to make a point here by looking at
it. The Chinese Communist authority runs
throughout this area [indicating on map of Asia]
of China proper. It is not completely in control
of China proper but that is the general area. The
great part of China to the north, which is made
up of Sinkiang, Outer Mongolia, and Manchuria,
is Chinese at the present moment only nominally.
That is where a great cloud from the north, Rus-
sian penetration, is operating and it is quite
obvious that the plan is to absorb those northern
areas of China under Soviet domination.

Xow, I give the people in Peiping credit for
being intelligent enough to see what is happening
to them. Why they should want to further their
own dismemberment and destruction by getting at
cross purposes with all the free nations of the
world who are inherently their friends and have
always been friends of the Chinese as against this
imperialism coming down from the Soviet Union I
cannot see. And since there is nothing in it for
them, I don't see why they should yield to what
is undoubtedly pressures from the Communist
movement to get into this Korean row.

Formosa

MR. BANCROFT: What about Formosa, what do you
see as the long-range solution for that?

Secretary Acheson : When it was decided by
the President that we would lend our support, and
full support, to the United Nations in the Korean
defense, you can see how important it was that,
having taken most of our troops out of Japan and
brought up troops from Okinawa and brought our
fleet up from the Philippines and placed it to the
north, Formosa should be neutralized and should
not be a point of danger upon the left flank of the
whole United Nations position.

And, therefore, the President neutralized it by
saying that the Seventh Fleet would prevent any

attack upon Formosa, and Formosa should not
make any attack upon the mainland. There was
a fair proposition, and it was meant to work both
ways — and it does work both ways. The Presi-
dent also pointed out that what he had said has
nothing to do with foreclosing the political de-
cisions of the future of Formosa. Those should
be made by peaceful means, and he has stressed
over and over and over again that our sole long-
range desire about Formosa is that its future
should be decided by peaceful negotiation and set-
tlement and not by force.

MR. BANCROFT : Well, wasn't it decided at the Cairo
Conference that Formosa would be part of China?

Secretary Acheson: The Cairo Declaration
which was made by the British and the Americans
and the Chinese and was later approved by the
Soviet Union declares that Formosa should be re-
turned to China. It also declares, and this is too
often forgotten in these discussions, that Korea
should be free and independent. In most of the
discussions that we have about Formosa, we are
reminded about the Formosan part of the Decla-
ration, and both the Chinese and the Russians for-
get about the Korean part of the Declaration.

Surely, the Declaration of Cairo is an important
factor to be taken into consideration in the future
settlement. But the future settlement is for the
future. You cannot settle that now while the
struggle is going on in Korea and when this island
must be neutralized in order to protect, as I pointed
out, the left flank of the whole United Nations
position.

38th Parallel

MR. MURROW: Would you say, Mr. Secretary, that
the same thing applies to whether or not we stop at the
38th parallel in Korea, that that again is something that
must be determined by the conditions that exist when
we get there or approach it?

Secretary Acheson : Yes. I should like to
underline that this is a United Nations decision.
The United Nations have set up the goal of a
united and free Korea. That was in their resolu-
tion in the General Assembly in '47 and '48. Now,
how this United Nations operation is conducted is
for the United Nations to decide. And, as you
correctly jjoint out, Mr. Murrow, the United Na-
tions cannot decide that before it is clear on how
and under what circumstances its forces reach the
38th parallel.

Soviet Menace

MR. COLLINGWOOD : Well, Mr. Secretary, you spoke
a moment ago of the dark cloud of Soviet imperialism
which is casting a shadow over the outer provinces of
China. What are we going to do about that? Is it true,
as some of your critics have suggested, that we have
written off Asia?

September 18, 1950

463

Secretary Acheson : It certainly is not true
that we have written off Asia. By "we writing it
off" I presume that you mean that, as far as the
State Department is concerned, we think Asia is
lost to the free world. We do not think so. We
do not think any part of it is lost. We still believe
that the Chinese are going to be Chinese before
they are going to be Communists. We believe that
the people of Indochina will see this menace which
is comiiig toward them. We think that the people
of the Philippines will, and the people of Indo-
nesia, and the people of Japan, and the people of
Korea. We are helping all of those countries.

MR. COLLINGWOOD: What do we do In the mean-
while, wait for the dust to settle, a phrase which has been
attributed to you?

Secretary Acheson: Yes, it has been attrib-
uted to me. I say very clearly that we wait for
nothing. We are acting now and we are acting
vigorously, and we are going to continue to act.
We must get on with the establishment of clear
future relations between Japan and the rest of
the world. We must, if we possibly can, clear up
this matter in Korea, and we must help the other
countries to remain free and independent of Soviet
imperialism.

MR. MURROW : Mr. Secretary, you have shown us two
maps, one of Asia and one of Europe. You sit behind
that big desk in the State Department and look in both
directions. Where is our major weight to be put in this
shifting contest with the Soviet Union?

Secretary Acheson : It is very hard to put our
major attention anywhere. We have to look at all
these points and work at all of them together.
But I think we must put our major effort at the
present moment into creating strong North At-
lantic defense forces. If we have those forces —
united, balanced, collective forces — strong, well-
equipped, able and ready to deter aggression, then
problems all over the world take on a different
shape. Such forces alone will change problems
in Greece, in Turkey, and in Yugoslavia, in the
Middle East and in the Far East.

MR. BANCROFT: Well, speaking of Yugoslavia, do
you look for more breaks between the Communists, such
as Marshal Tito has led in Yugoslavia?

Secretary Acheson : It's very difficult to expect
the sort of break between the Communists in the
Eastern European satellite states and the Russians
such as you have in Yugoslavia. The unhappy
Poles, for instance, now find that their army is
under the command of a Soviet general. The
Czechs, who border on Russia, find that they are
penetrated by the Russian secret police. The same

is true in Hungary, in Rumania, and in Bulgaria.
Those people have pretty well lost the power to
revolt at the present time. It doesn't mean that
they have lost it forever, but I do not immediately
expect them to declare their independence as the
Yugoslavs have.

MR. BANCROFT: Well, Mr. Secretary, what is the
time element of all this? How long do you think this
struggle is apt to go on ?

The Dangerous Future

Secretary Acheson: Mr. Bancroft, this isn't
going to be a short effort and it isn't going to be
an easy one. This is a tough job. The job before
us is to organize our own great industrial power
to produce the goods which are necessary for
defense. The same thing has got to be done by
our allies. The job is to raise, the men who are
going to use those goods and that equipment in
order to provide the defense for the West. It
isn't going to be short as I said, and it isn't going
to be easy. And it is going to be done in a period
which is going to be dangerous.

This isn't an easy safe performance we are in
and there are elements of danger in it. It's going
to take a lot of steady nerves and a lot of strong
determination and, above all, the absence of any
sort of hysteria. We have just got to face this
thing and see it through and it's going to take time.

MR. BANCROFT: But it's not a hopeless task?

Secretary Acheson : It's not a hopeless task
at all. And it's an essential task and a hopeful
task because it leads to the goal for which we are
struggling and that is to settle, so far as we can
settle, the great differences which are outstanding
between East and West. And to settle those differ-
ences we have got to talk on equal temis. We
cannot have one party very strong in terms of arm-
ament and the other party very weak. We have
got to talk as equals. And once we reach that
point, I believe that with that equality of posi-
tion and with the effects of time, we can work
out in a peaceful way stability in the world and
peace between East and West.

MR. MURROW: Isn't it essential, too, Mr. Secretary,
that we do more than we are now doing in order to try
to tell the rest of the vporld what it is we are trying
to do?

Secretary Acheson : It is absolutely essential.
Just only last week, I was before a Senate Com-
mittee testifying about the greatly enlarged pro-
gram which we want to have under President
Truman's direction to carry this campaign of
truth to every corner of the world.

464

Departmenf of Sfafe Bullefin

Fundamentals of Far Eastern Foreign Policy

/*// Dean Rush

Assistant Secretary for Far Eastern Affairs *

Our purposes in Asia are the same as in other
parts of the world. Our foreign policy rests upon
a need for world conditions in which our great
American experiment in freedom can survive and
flourish. We need not be ashamed to state our
policy in such terms — we are the kind of people
we are, and we ai-e on our side. As we see it,
then, what should we like to see in Asia and in
our relations with the great peoples of Asia?

Hopes for Asia and the World

Freedom. — The peoples of Asia organized and
TOverned by institutions of their own making and
oy men of their own choice; their relations with
other peoples and governments resting solidly
upon mutual consent;

Equal Partnership. — The nations of Asia ac-
tively participating as full and equal members of
the international community on the basis of agreed
principles set forth in such great documents as
the Charter of the United Nations;

Sec'unty. — The nations of Asia secure from ag-
gression, whether by armed attack or by the in-
sidious methods of penetration and subversion;

Peaceful Process. — The nations of Asia settling
their disputes among themselves by peaceful means
and throwing their full support to the efforts of
the United Nations to maintain peace on the basis
of law and justice;

Material W ell-Being. — The development of their
resources, the lifting of their standards of living,
rapid increases in mutually beneficial trade ;

Cultural Exchange. — A rich interchange of cul-
tural values, each giving according to its own cre-
ative genius and receiving according to its own
tastes and needs;

Good Neighbors. — Friendly association with

^ Excerpts from an address made before the National
Convention of American Veterans of World War II at
Cleveland, Ohio, Sept. 9 and released to the press on the
same date.

the American people and our Government across a
wide range of political, economic, and cultural re-
lationships.

If at this point you are bored, take care — for
you may be infected with a spiritual anemia which
can easily produce a tragedy of historic propor-
tions. The most important political fact of our
generation may prove to be that the power, wealth,
and imagination of the American people are com-
mitted to the purposes of peace, human liberty,
and economic well-being, for ourselves and others.
But if, at the very moment when such a fact can
be decisive, we lose its meaning and forget that
we are a vital part of the great revolution of hu-
man freedom, we can easily succumb to the reac-
tionary forces of a Communist conspiracy.

These things are among our basic purposes;
they are not set by government but by the Ameri-
can people. They reflect what we should like to
see, not what we think we already have. They are
policies, not facts. I have not tried to look at
them through Asian eyes. We are Americans,
and it is our business to see clearly through Ameri-
can eyes. Our Asian friends will take care of
looking at such matters through Asian eyes.
Wlien this happens, we need not worry too much
about whether we and they shall see eye to eye.
When we discuss our mutual interests through
diplomacy or at the conference table, we habitu-
ally find a vast identity of interest. We and they
have registered our basic policy in a large number
of great international documents such as the Char-
ter of the United Nations. In this great melting
pot of a nation of ours, the American people have
worked out a form of simple ideas which are
broadly humanistic in character and which are
generally shared with men and women around the
world.

If we are to maintain relations with our friends
in Asia on a sound and friendly basis, it can only
be done by being what we are and discussing our
joint concerns with them in a frank and friendly

September 18, 1950

465

manner. If differences arise, they can be settled
as among reasonable men with common purposes.
What Asians think of us is important to us.
Wliat we think of Asians is of no less importance
to them. We do only harm by supposing that
friendship with Asia requires us to respond to
every whim or fancy which we hear from Asia or,
more likely, from some among us who seem to
think they know how to speak for Asia.

Obstacles in Asia

Why are our simple policies not simple facts?
What are the obstacles which stand in the way?

First, let us note briefly some of the obstacles in
Asia:

Grinding Poverty. — Hundreds of millions of
men and women whose energies are wholly con-
sumed by a desperate struggle for existence;

Lack of Capital Plant. — Vast areas and vast
populations without the elementary means of com-
munication, without simple and efficient tools, or
homes, or schools ; without equipment to transform
natural resources to the service of mankind ; with-
out cheap sources of power and fuel ; without the
means to control floods, irrigate deserts, combat
pestilence ;

Lack of Techmcal Know-How. — An appalling
dearth of engineers, teachers, administrators,
managers and foremen, doctors and nurses, and a
long list of those with the special skills required
to provide a basic institutional life for large
societies ;

Neio and TJ naccustoined Responsihilities for
Their Own Affairs. — New nations which have
thrown off an older order without the new fully
developed to take its place;

Political Inexperience. — On the part of many
who lead and most who follow ;

Military Weakness. — Exposed to external attack
and internal subversion;

Suspicion. — Of each other, of the foreigner, of
the new ; but, particularly, suspicion of the white
man and of the west — still remembered as foreign
rule, usually seen in the big hotels and fine houses
and not in the villages and paddy fields ;

Propaganda. — A persistent and insidious bar-
rage by Communist imperialism, designed to con-
fuse, to foster resentment, to prevent the growth
of stable governments and productive economies,
to set class against class and race against race —
whatever leads to weakness in the path of Com-
munist ambition ;

Aggression. — Cold, cynical, flagrant aggi'ession
by organized armies as in Korea, unleashed by the
international Communist conspiracy in defiance
of the basic law of the world community and in
total disregard for hunmn life and the lot of the
miserable peoples directly involved; aggression
also by the devious methods of subversion and
penetration, stealth and intimidation — aggression

no less dangerous and more difficult to meet, in
many ways, than open attack.

Before we pass on, perhaps we sliould note that
there are obstacles here, in the United States, which
complicate our relations with Asia. I think first
of a good deal of ignorance and indifference among
us ; as a people we have much to learn and much
to unlearn about Asia. Our schools and colleges
have a new challenge to meet — for knowledge
means understanding and not a glandular reaction
to the latest headline.

I suspect that there are also some illusions among
us. We are inclined to forget that we have rela-
tions with other people, not control over them. We
are inclined to drop their complicated problems
into the slot machine of our own preconceptions
and crank out a bright and shiny solution for their
troubles — which often has nothing to do with their
situation in fact, nor with their ciUtural traditions,
their moral codes, their capabilities or their needs.

But most important of all, perhaps, is our ex-
ample. What we do is a more eloquent expression
of policy than what we say. We as a people are
deeply concerned about Asia and its peoples, and
I haven't the slightest doubt about our sincerity.
But what about the Asians in our own commu-
nities— and the men and women of other races who
share our Amei'ican life with us'^ We Americans
are deeply concerned about human liberty, and
we have repeatedly demonstrated a willingness to
die for it. Can we tell our friends abroad that the
presumption of innocence is as firmly established
as it used to be — or that we remain ready to let
hostile ideas do vigorous battle with each other in
order that truth might emerge bright and strong
from the contest ? The peoples of Asia are sitting
as a great jui-y and are passing judgment upon our
way of life ; there is no place for us to hide from
our own performance.

Program for Action

What about the job aliead of us? We have
talked about our purposes and policies and some of
the obstacles which stand in the way of their
achievement. How do we proceed to get on with
our objective and to overcome the principal
obstacles?

Fii'st, we must accept the proposition that the
problems of Asia are to be worked out by the gov-
ernments and peoples of Asia — not to alibi any
lack of interest or effort on our part, but because
t\\Q peoples of Asia themselves will insist upon it.
We can help, but we cannot take over.

Second, we must allow no misunderstanding
about the nature of our own interest in Asia. We
seek no territories, no special privilegs, no special
position. We shall act in our own interest, but we
have long since determined that our selfish interest
lies in the conduct set forth in the Charter of the
United Nations and in joint iiction with others
to pursue its purposes.

466

Department of State Bulletin

Third, we shall support the national aspirations
of the peoples of Asia to be free, to determine their
own institutions, to select their own rulers, and to
legulate their relations with others on the basis
of consent.

Fourth, we shall act vigorously and loyally as
a member of the United Nations to deal with ag-
gression. The peace and security of Asia were
directly challenged by the lawless and unprovoked
aggression in Korea. Indeed, the peace of tlie
world and security of our own homeland are at
stake there. We shall not tread the dismal path
to disaster marked out during the thirties by Man-
churia, Ethiopia, the Rliineland, Poland, and
Pearl Harbor. Aggi'ession must be stopped in
Korea. We shall do everything we can to pre-
\ent the war from spreading. We call upon those
who are recklessly giving aid and assistance to the
aggressors in Korea to reflect soberly upon the
meaning of the resolution of the Security Council
which was supported by a solid majority of nine
members on Thursday — a resolution vetoed by the
.Soviet Union.

Fifth, we believe that the United Nations must
liave an opportunity to give effect to its long-
standing policy in favor of a free and united
Korea along the lines set forth in the resolutions
of the General Assembly over the past 3 years.

Sixth, we insist upon the cessation of hostilities
between Fonnosa and the China mainland and
sliall support the peaceful settlement of the For-
mosa problem by international action. We wel-
come its consideration by the United Nations.
We shall continue our economic assistance pro-
gram for Formosa and shall furnish selected mili-
tary assistance to put it in a better position to de-
fend itself if an attempt is made to dispose of the
Formosa problem by armed attack.

Seventh, we shall try to find a way to sustain
the historic friendship between the American and
Chinese iseoi^les and to make it clear that we have
no aggressive designs whatever upon China. We
must make it equally clear that we shall take a
most serious view of acts of aggression which
might be set in motion in mainland China on be-
half of a Communist conspiracy and that we shall
not accept the right of any clique in China to pre-
side over the dismemberment of China for the
benefit of Soviet imperialism.

Eighth, we shall strongly support the full and
equal participation of the nations of Asia in the
family of nations and shall work closely with them
on matters of common interest. The time has
come to move toward a Japanese jjeace settlement
and to make it possible for Japan to accept the
full privileges and responsibilities of interna-
tional life to which her people are now entitled.
We shall strongly support a})]:>lications for mem-
bership in the United Nations by Ceylon, Indo-
nesia, Nepal, and the Republic of Korea.

Ninth, we shall view with sympathy and inter-
est any joint efl'oit which the nations of Asia and

September 18, 7950

the Far East might wish to make in behalf of the
security or the well-being of the area as a whole.

Tenth, we shall work with our friends in Asia
to strengthen their own institutions and to put
them in better position to meet what the League
of Nations Covenant called "the strenuous condi-
tions of the modern world." That means military
assistance, with high priorities to Indochina and
to the Philippines, but substantial assistance to
others in Southeast Asia whose security is being
threatened. That means economic and teclmical
assistance which the Economic Cooperation Ad-
ministration is in the process of supplying follow-
ing the investigations in Southeast Asia of the
GrifKn Mission. That means prompt action to
work out with the Philippines a number of press-
ing economic and financial problems which have
been studied this summer by the mission headed
by Dan Bell, former Director of the Bureau of
the Budget. That means active United States
support for and participation in the Point 4 Pro-
gram and in other activities of the United Nations
and specialized agencies in Asia. That means
selected support by the Export-Import Bank, such
as the recent 100 million-dollar credit for Indo-
nesia.

Eleventh, we are rapidly expanding our infor-
mation and exchange programs in Asia and the
Far East. We believe that there are natural ties
to bind us and the peoples of Asia together in
firm friendship. Those ties must rest upon truth
and greater knowledge of each other. Surface
irritations will give way to deeper understanding
and mutual respect.

Our Duty in Time of Crisis

We shall not find a miraculous formula with
which to meet the needs of our relations with Asia.
Unremitting toil and persistence and patience will
be required of us. At this time of national danger,
we citizens must close our ranks behind our Presi-
dent and Commander in Chief and provide him
the strength and unity of this great nation. No
man in the world carries responsibility equal to liis
in the present situation. There is no one to whom
he can pass the buck. Partisan or personal con-
siderations must be put aside to support him in the
task of leading free men to peace and security.

It is clear that we must now, as rapidly as
possible, convert more of our potential strength
into actual strength. We are rapidly placing more
men under arms and are gearing our productive
capacity to the complicated weapons of war. It
will be costly and each one of us shall be called
upon to carry a heavy burden.

May I suggest that if we may now wish that
more of our strength were readily available for
combat, we should not for unworthy purposes
consume our energy in recrimination or self-
reproach.

We need not be ashamed of a policy which con-
cerned itself with the building of the peace, the

467

advance of human liberty, and the raising of the
standards of living of men and women in every
quarter of the globe.

We have attempted by every possible means to
make our contribution to the peace. We have made
concessions up to the limits of conscience in an
effort to reach workable agreements.

We can be proud that our foreign policy has
been reflected in submitting atomic weapons^ to
international control, in feeding and clothing
those stricken by the war, in supporting free elec-
tions and government by consent, in building
factories and dams, power plants and railways,
schools and hospitals, in improving seed and stock
and fertilizer, in stimulating markets, and im-
proving the skills and techniques of others in a
hundred diffei-ent ways.

Let these things stand in contrast to a foreign
policy directed toward the extension of tyranny
and using the big lie, sabotage, suspicion, riot, and
assassination, as its tools.

The United States is a giant of great power,
slow to move and slow to anger. Our strength
is chained to the peaceful pursuits of our own peo-
l^le and to the decent opinions of mankind. But
it is not healthy for any regime or group of re-
gimes to incur by their lawless and aggressive con-
duct the implacable opposition of the American
people.

And so, we must look to our strength. The
lawbreaker, unfortunately in the nature of things,
always has the initiative — but the peace-loving
peoples of the world can and now will make them-
selves strong enough to insist upon peace. We
have tried every other method to build the peace —
we must now make it clear to any aggressor that
aggression carries witli it their certain destruction.

We know where lies 99.99 percent of the respon-
sibility for the present threat to peace and free-
dom. And it does not lie in the United States.
Let us not, therefore, in our natural chagrin over
the renewal of sharp tension, rend at our own
vitals by dissension among ourselves in the face
of a common danger.

Communiques Regarding Korea
for the Security Council

General Douglas MacArthur, Commander in
Chief of United Nations connriand, has trans-
mitted communiques regarding Korea to the Sec-
retary-General of the United Nations under the
following United Nations document numbers:
S/1G78, August 8; S/1682, August 10; S/1683,
August 10; S/1686, August 11; S/1687, August
14; S/1689, August 15; S/1691, August 16;
S/1693, August 16; S/1695, August 17; S/1698,
August 18; S/1705, August 22; S/1706, August
23; S/1714, August 24.

Strength of Forces

in Western Europe To Be increased

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press by the White House September 9}

On the basis of recommendations of the Joint
Chiefs of Staff, concurred in by the Secretaries
of State and Defense, I have today approved sub-
stantial increases in the strength of United States
forces to be stationed in Western Europe in the
interest of the defense of that area. The extent
of these increases and the timing thereof will be
worked out in close coordination with our North
Atlantic Treaty partners. A basic element in the
implementation of this decision is the degree to
which our friends match our actions in this regard.
Firm programs for the development of their forces
will be expected to keep full step with the dispatch
of additional United States forces to Europe. Our
plans are based on the sincere expectation that
our efforts M'ill be met with similar action on their
part. The purpose of this measure is to increase
the effectiveness of our collective defense efforts
and thereby insure the maintenance of peace.

Review of Progress Made
Under North Atlantic Treaty

Extemporaneous Remarks by Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press September 6]

I think in looking at the whole North Atlantic
Treaty one needs to get a little perspective. It is
not yet a year since the first meeting of the North
Atlantic Council took place. The Treaty was
ratified sometime in August and the first meeting
was on the 13th of September 1949. Since that
time a very considerable amount has been done
in the way of laying the fundamental plan and
creating the fundamental organization.

The first thing that had to be done was to set
up the framework of the organization. That was
done at the meeting of September 17, 1949. They
there created the main structure of the North At-
lantic Organization : defense under a committee
of defense ministers ; finance imder a committee of
finance ministers; production and supply under
another group ; a military committee made up of
professional military people ; a standing commit-
tee, which was made up of French, British, and
American Chiefs of Staff — that was the organi-
zation.

The next thing they had to do was to devise the
fundamental strategic concept which was called
for, particularly in relation to the United States
military defense assistance program, which is
based on agreed collective Nat plans rather than

468

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

on unintegrated aid to individual nations. That
was worked out and was approved in our meeting
in tlie first of the year, worked out by the soldiers,
put before the defense ministers, recommended by
them to us, and approved by the Council. It then
went to the Pi-esident and was approved by him
and became the basis for operations under the
Mn.vp. Now, that was an important accomplish-
ment.

The defense ministers then got to work on the
implementation of this strategic concept — what
^M're the forces to be, and how were they to be or-
iiaiiized. That came before the defense ministers
in their meeting in April on a report from the
military regional planning groups. At that time,
it was a tentative report. They sent it on to the
Council with their approval. The Council ap-
pioved it at its meeting at London in May and
asked them to take hold of it and with all possible
.■-peed try to shake it down into minimum terms to
get it down into something that just could be done.
In the meantime, the Council asked all the member
irovernments to get on with their programs, be-
cause whatever they did immediately was certain
to be far less than the long-range requirements.

Among other things we did at the May meeting,
besides take that action, was to get estimates of
tlie financial magnitude of the task and then to
center upon this idea of balanced collective
foi-ces as the best means of attaining the necessary
collective strength with available resources — the
central objective of Nato. That was, instead of
having each nation try to have a complete military
setup, to concentrate on the mission which was
assigned to it under the strategic concept and put
all its effort into that. We also created the Coun-
cil of Deputies in order to have a permanent group
sitting all the time trying to get actual plans trans-
lated into terms of men and arms and organization.

The work of the past year, I should think it
fair to say, has laid the foundation of plan and
organization on which now some sinews have to
be put. The deputies have been working very
hard, in the last 2 months, to try and woi'k out,
exactlj^, what each nation should do and how
Nato can fit into that. There have been dis-
cussions back and forth ; plans have been put for-
ward; they have been criticized as not adequate;
thej' have been taken back and increased, and they
are working on that at the present time. So far,
there has not been in fact the increase, there has
lieen hardly the beginning of the increase in the
actual forces in being which is necessary, but be-
fore you could get to that you had to do all the
work that I have been talking about.

I think the great task in the next year, now that
the plans are pretty well laid and major decisions
are pretty well laid, is to get actual men and ac-
tual equipment and actual formations and the
command structure, so that you will have in West-
ern Europe a force which will be adequate to its
defense.

September 18, 1950

Now, commenting on the progress : I am the last
person in the world to say that the progress is
such that one wants to be complacent about it. It
is not that at all, but there has been progress, and
there must be a great deal more progress. I
think we can say that the year has not been
wasted. We have not done all we would like to
have done; in the coming year we have to do
vastly more.

Labor Day Statements
of Union Leaders Praised

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press September 6]

I would like today to pay tribute to the Labor
Day statements of President William Green of
the American Federation of Labor and President
Philip Murray of the CIO. These American labor
leaders have made it clear that their two great
unions support the United States Government in
its "defense of freedom." (Both Mr. Green and
Mr. Murray use that phrase.) And they made it
clear that the nature of communism is well under-
stood.

Mr. Green said of the Communists :

We are familiar with their boundless criminality,
their godless purposes, their convenient alibi
that the end justifies the means. We know what
that "end" means in Soviet Russia and her satel-
lites. It is trul.v the end of labor's freedom,
because it consists of human slavery — political
slavery to the State, economic slavery to the job
and total slavery to the whims of a dictator.

I agree completely with this analysis and with
Mr. Murray's succinct statement as to what the
workers of America want. Mr. Murray said:

The workers of America want a peaceful world,
in which men and women may work to improve
their living standards, their democratic insti-
tutions, their personal good and welfare.

Democracy, Mr. Murray also said, must offer
positive benefits to people of eveiy land, "so that
no human being will be forced to choose only
between degrading poverty and the ultimate
slavery of the Communist system. There can be,
there must be," hei said, "economic progress in
every section of the world — so that communism,
with its destruction of human values, will lose its
appeal for even the most lowly-placed human
being."

Mr. Murray is wholly right. As you know the
Government has long operated in the belief that
conununism will not be attractive to people who
are able to earn a decent living. Accordingly,
we have given many other countries economic as-
sistance, through the European Recovery Pro-

469

gram, Export-Import Bank loans, and through
other measures, and we intend to continue to do
so.

Mr. Green and ^Ir. Murray have well expressed
the basic beliefs and objectives of this country and
its people. Since tliey speak for free labor, what
they say certainly will be noted all over the world,
on both sides of the iron curtain.

Cooperation of Film Industry
With Government Discussed

IReleased to the press September 8]

Assistant Secretary Barrett and other officei-s
of the public affaii-s area of the Department of
State met informally with representatives of the
Council of Motion Picture Organizations today
at the Motion Picture Association of America
offices at Washington.

A special committee representing the Council
is in Washington at the invitation of President
Truman to discuss means of cooperation between
the film industry and the Government. The group
was scheduled to call on President Truman at
12 : 30 p.m. today, to visit Secretary of Commerce
Charles Sawyer at 3 : 30 p.m., and to confer with
other Government officials.

The Council consists of the 10 organized groups
in the film industry and includes leading figures
from all phases of the industry — production, dis-
tribution, labor, talent, and exhibition. The
Council is headed by Ned Depinet, president of
KKO Radio Pictures.

A special three-man committee on cooperation
with the State Department's information pro-
gram has been named by Mr. Depinet and will
confer later with Mr. Barrett. Members of this
group are Cecil B. DeMille, representing the
Motion Picture Industry Council; Gunther Les-
sing, vice president of Disney Productions, rep-
resenting the Society of Indejiendent Motion
Picture Producers; and Francis S. Harmon, vice
president of the Motion Picture Association of
America.

U.S. Films Win Awards

Tlie United States Government jjarticipated
in the Eleventh International Exhibition of Cine-
matographic Art at Venice, Italy, August 8 to
September 10, 1950, and the Department has
been informed that the United States Goveriunent
films have been awarded five fii'st prizes and one
honorable mention, equivalent to second prize.

The first-]irize awards are as follows: surgical
films : /Surgical Approaches to the Elhoio Joint —

470

a Veterans' Administration film which contains
an animated study of arm anatomy and illustra-
tions of several approaches to surgery on the
elbow joint; Journey Back — a film made by the
Veterans' Achninistxation to illustrate the medical
rehabilitation of neurology patients; social rela-
tions films : First as a Child — a film prepared by
the United States Children's Bureau, Federal Se-
curity Agency, to show how public funds are used
in local services for crippled children; technical
films : Shiphuilders of Essex — a film produced for
the Department of State Information Service
wliich snows sltilled craftsmen of Essex, Massa-
chusetts, constructing a wooden fishing trawler;
miscellaneous films: Survival in the Arctic Tvn-
dra — a Department of the Air Force film covering
survival in the Arctic tundra swamps when cor-
rect use is made of available equipment and
natural resources.

Further Suspension

of Excise Tax on Copper Recommended

[Released to the press by the White House September 1]

The President has sent the foUomng tetter to Senor
Felix Nieto del Rio, Ambassador of Chile.

I have read with great interest your memoran-
dum of August twenty-first, in which you express
your concern over the malicious propaganda dis-
seminated by the Communists in Latin America in
order to exploit to their advantage the recent ex-
piration of the suspension of the United States
excise tax on copper.

The decision to reinstate once again a suspension j
of this tax is one that is to be taken by the United
States Congress on the basis of multiple considera-
tions affecting the national interest. The factors
involved include questions of our domestic econo- '
my, international trade, and foreign policy.

At present, there is diversity of opinion in this
country concerning this tax, determined by the
various segments of industry and labor most im-
mediately affected. After careful study of all the
problems involved, I have recommended further
suspension of the tax and the House of Represen-
tatives has approved such extension for a period
of one year. I hope very much that the Senate
will take similar action in the very near future.

I am constantly appreciative of the mutual and
traditional friendship of our two countries and of
the cooperative attitude of the people and Govern-
ment of Chile toward the United States. I am
fully aware of the malicious propaganda devices
practiced by the enemies of our democracies in an
attempt to sow discord amongst us. I earnestly
hope that a happy solution will be reached in this
problem of benefit to both Chile and the United
States and our mutual friendship.

Department of State Bulletin

The Conference on Tonnage Measurement off Ships

STOCKHOLM, JUNE 2-10, 1950

ly John W. Mann

Standards of measurement by which the size of
vessels can be expressed presumably came into ex-
istence to meet the needs of commercial and gov-
ernmental interests. The needs of commerce de-
manded that shippers, consignees, and shipowners
have readily understood terms by which the carry-
ing capacity of a ship could be expressed and to
which the value of vessels could be reduced. Gov-
ernments, botJi sovereign and local, needed a basis
for assessing tonnage taxes, harbor dues, and cer-
tain port charges. Kudimentary systems of ton-
nage measurement existed in the Middle Ages, but
it is also possible that measures for that purpose
were known in still earlier times.

Rules Now in Use

At present, practically all commercial vessels in
international trade are subject to charges for port
facilities, harbor dues, and canal tolls as well as
tonnage taxes. These charges usually are based
upon the gross or net tonnage of the vessels. The
rules for measuring those tonnages are complicated
and vary between nations, especially with respect
to the deductions allowed and the methods of de-
termining such deductions. The principal meth-
ods in use today are based upon the so-called
British system and upon the Swedish system, but
a considerable number of variations and intei'pre-
tations are applied in national rules and practices.
The Suez and the Panama Canal systems differ
still from each other and from national systems.

The United States rules are similar to those in
effect in other countries, being based on the British
rules. They differ from the British rules, how-
ever, in such important matters as the treatment
of spaces exclusively used for water ballast and
of cabins and staterooms above the first deck
(which is not a deck) to the hull, and in other
particulars.

From the standpoint of a naval architect, it is

September 18, 7950

impossible to design a vessel to enjoy the maxi-
mum deductions imder one set of rules without
finding the vessel penalized under another set.
The design of ships is greatly influenced and to
some extent "frozen" by tonnage considerations,
and, in extieme cases, the safety of the ship itself
may be influenced by the desire to realize lai'ger
tonnage deductions. Simplicity, improved eflS-
ciency, and savings would obviously result if every
vessel were measured under one set of rules uni-
versally adopted and uniformly interpreted. The
advantages which would accrue from such a sys-
tem are recognized, but the progress toward uni-
formity is slow because of widely different view-
points and because of the great number of ships
which have been constructed taking full advantage
of technicalities in one or more of the present sys-
tems with resulting savings which might be re-
duced or eliminated under a new and uniform
set of rules.

The League of Nations and Oslo Rules

The League of Nations, to which the matter
had been referred at the instance of the Govern-
ment of Norway, studied the problem of uni-
formity for a number of years beginning in 1924.
In 1939, the League published a set of rules rec-
ommended for international adoption. These are
the so-called Oslo rules which form the basis of
an international convention signed in Oslo in 1947
on behalf of the Governments of Belgium, Den-
mark, Finland, France, Iceland, the Netherlands,
Norway, and Sweden but which to date has been
ratified only by Iceland, the Netherlands, and Nor-
way. If fully effective, the Oslo convention would
make a substantial advance toward producing uni-
formity of admeasurement because Sweden and
Belgium, the principal maritime nations using the
Swedish system, would be brought under the Oslo
rules. As presently administered, the British sys-

471

tem of admeasurement is substantially similar to
that employed by the Oslo states.

However effective the Oslo rules or such modi-
fications might be in securing uniformity of na-
tional measurement rules, full benefit from
uniformity cannot accrue to the naval architect
and the shipowner unless the final rules are
adopted by the two great interoceanic canals.
The United States had considered in 1945 placing
the subject of uniform tonnage measurement on
the agenda of the Safety of Life at Sea Conference
but was dissuaded from doing so by lack of agree-
ment on a firm United States position. At a meet-
ing of the Working Group on Maritime Tonnage
Measurement of the Shipping Coordinating Com-
mittee on February 14, 1950, representatives of
both the Panama Canal and the shipping industry,
as well as representatives of other interested gov-
ernment agencies and industry associations, ex-
pressed a willingness to consider changes in the
United States rules and the Panama Canal rules;
this fact was a tremendous step toward possible
uniformity and encouraged optimism as to its
eventual achievement.

The Suez Canal is a stock company holding a 99-
year lease on the canal, which will revert to the
Government of Egypt in 1968. It is possible that
if all the principal maritime governments and the
Panama Canal should reach agreement the Suez
Canal would follow.

At the meeting of European maritime tonnage
experts held in March 1946 when it was decided
to try to achieve substantial uniformity on the
basis of the Oslo rules, the Panama Canal rules
were given consideration as a basis for interna-
tional agreement. The principal objection to the
Panama Canal rules was the deduction of public
rooms in passenger ships, those present believing
that such spaces possessed earning capacity and
should be included. The Conference also con-
sidered that adherence to the Panama Canal rules
would lead to a considerable increase in the ton-
nage of many ships and, consequently, might cause
hardsliip to many shipowners and that modifica-
tions of tonnage limits mentioned in international
conventions and in national legislation in all parts
of the world would be necessary because of such
increase. The Oslo rules apparently were recom-
mended as the uniform basis not because they were
the best rules which could be devised but because
that system would cause the least disturbance and
so would have the best chance of adoption by the
greatest number of maritime nations.

U.S. Position Given U.N.

The United Nations recently became interested
in the subject of unification of maritime tonnage
measurement and requested the positions of all
member governments on that subject. The United
States position transmitted to the United Na-
tions Secretary-General March 6, 1950, which is
substantially that ( 1 ) the United States recognizes

in general the benefits which could result from
uniformity of admeasurement rules with certain
qualifications, (2) the United States contemplates
making a thorough study of the problems in-
volved, and (3) the United States is in favor of
interchange of views between maritime govern-
ments on the subject and, pending development
of definitive United States proposals, is prepared
to send observers to any international conferences
or meetings on tonnage measurement. The
Transport and Communications Commission of
the United Nations on April 4, 1950, noted that
the Intergovernmental Maritime Consultative
Organization (Imco) would be the competent
agency to handle the problem, was of the opinion
that solution should be sought on the basis of
world-wide uniformity, and recommended that
the United Nations urge governments to continue
their studies of the problem.

The Stockholm Meeting

The United States is interested in conferences
held pursuant to the Oslo convention because it
has reciprocal tonnage arrangements which most,
if not all, of the governments which have adopted
the Oslo rules; because of the savings and other
advantages which would result from international
uniformity; because of the opportunity for per-
sonal contact with foreign admeasurers who often
are called upon to measure ships under the
Panama Canal rules; because of the benefits from
an interchange of views, a consideration of par-
ticular importance in view of the present compre-
hensive study being undertaken in the United
States with the advice and assistance of private
industry.

United States ships are sometimes directly
affected when requiring measurement abroad.
The United States, therefore, sent technical ob-
servers to the admeasurement conferences con-
vened in Oslo in 1947 and 1948 and to the recent
Stockholm Conference. The British Government,
li4ve the United States, is not a signatory to the
Oslo convention but was also represented by ob-
servers at the series of conferences. Although
the representatives of the United States and of
Great Britain were designated observers, actually
they participated freely in the work of the con-
ferences and their views were invited with regard
to all important decisions.

The following countries, members of the Oslo
convention, were represented by official delega-
tions at the Stockholm meeting: Denmark, Fin-
land, France, Iceland, Norway, the Netherlands,
and Sweden. (It is understood that Belgium, a
signatory of the Oslo convention, sent regrets
because a technically qualified representative could
not be spared at the time.)

The United States sent the following observer
delegation :

John W. Mann, senior teelinical observer, who is execu-
tive secretary of the United States Shipping Coordinating :

472

Deparfment of State Bulletin

Cciiiimittee and assistant chief. Department of State
Shippins Policy StafT.

Homy E. Sweet, teelinical observer, who is chief of the
IMvision of Maritime Administration, lUireau of Customs,
Iicpartment of the Treasury; also, chairman of the Ship-
ping; Coordinatins Committee's Working Group on Marl-
limo Tonnage Measurement.

I'reilerick E. Williams, technical observer, who is di-
iiMtor of admeasurement and a member of the Board of
Admeasurement of the Panama Canal.

The principal purpose of the Conference, of
course, was to attempt to secure uniformity in the
construction and application of the Oslo ad-
measurement rules by the governments signatory
to tlie Oslo convention. In view of the provisions
of tliat convention, no changes in or amendments
of the basic rules can be made before certain con-
ditions are met. The need for one such basic
change, a revision of article 58, was pointed out by
the present conference; otherwise it dealt with
interpretation of existing rules.

Many novel and unusual problems of admeasure-
ment were discussed, and, in a number of those
cases, agreement was reached on the construction
and application of the rules to be followed ; in the
other cases, no agreement was reached but in some
of the more important, decision was reached to
consider the matters at the next international
meeting of tonnage experts, scheduled to be held at
The Hague within 2 years after the Stockholm
meeting. In addition, it was decided that future
consideration should be given to changing or
amending the Oslo rules in a few respects and one
recommendation to that effect was adopted.
From the point of view of the United States,
probably the most important decision reached was
the agreement of the conference to consider the
question of water-ballast allowances at the next
meeting in the light of the views expressed by the
United States delegation both at the present con-
ference and at the previous ones held in 1948. In-
ternational adoption of United States views in that
respect would be a substantial step in the direction
of uniformity. Another point of interest was a
proposal by the Norwegian delegation that the
United States rules relating to caulking, etc. of
tonnage oj^enings should C)e included in the
minutes as a guidance to surveyors. The repre-
sentatives of the signatory governments agreed
that the use of battening, caulking, or gaskets of
any kind shall be deemed a contravention of the

I conditions for exemption.
The Conference discussed the broad question of
uniformity and the Chairman invited the United
States senior observer to address the meeting on
» the American attitude toward the Oslo rules and
on tonnage regulations generally. The senior ob-
server referred to the specific matters which
United States observers had brought before the
preceding conference in 1948 ; to the interest of the
United Nations in the problem of unification of
maritime tonnage measurement and the discus-
I sion in the Transport and Communications Com-
j mission; to the United Nations' invitation to

governments to express their views on the prac-
ticability of promoting a more general and closer
adherence to the Oslo rules in accordance with
Ecosoc's resolution of August 1949; and to the
steps which had been taken in the United States
to develop a United States position on the subject
through the Shipping Coordinating Committee to
serve as a basis for reply to the United Nations.
He stated that the United States position had
been agreed to by all the interested United States
Government departments and agencies, including
the Panama Canal, and by interested industry
associations. He referred to the study being or-
ganized in the United States on developing a
simpler, clearer, and more equitable set of rules
than any in use today, indicating that the United
States was fully aware of the many unsuccessful
attempts to develop better rules for international
adoption but still believed the project might be
successful. He indicated frankly the objections
which the Government agencies and the United
States shipping and shipbuilding industries had
expressed with regard to the Oslo rules and indi-
cated that, on the other hand, he was fully aware
that all provisions of the United States rules
probably would not find favor with other govern-
ments. He then answered questions raised by
the various delegations.

The Chairman expressed the meeting's approval
of being so frankly informed of the American po-
sition. He then invited tlie technical observer
from the Panama Canal to give the views of the
Panama Canal tonnage authorities with regard to
any matters of general interest. The discussion
and questions which followed were in the nature
of technical consultation on the methods of review
and verification by the Panama Canal authorities
of Panama Canal certificates and created a great
deal of interest. Several expressions of apprecia-
tion of the helpful and reasonable methods of the
Panama Canal tonnage authorities were made by
rejo resent atives of various countries.

The British views and attitude on the Oslo
rules were requested and given. Representatives
of the signatories to the Oslo convention were then
asked to inform the conference on how their coun-
tries stood in regard to ratification and the repre-
sentatives of Sweden, France, Denmark, and
Finland replied.

The U.S. Report

The United States delegation's recommendation
upon returning from the Conference was similar
to that previously adopted by the Shipping Co-
ordinating Committee. It was, substantially, that
the United States continue to participate in future
conferences of tonnage measurement experts ; that
such participation take the form of observer dele-
gations until the contemplated studies of the sub-
ject matter by the United States have been
completed or sufficiently advanced to permit this
Government to formulate and submit definitive

September 78, 1950

473

proposals ; and that, thereafter, the United States
participate fully in such conferences. The bene-
fits, in the opinion of the delegation, of continued
United States participation would be substantial.

The United States delegation in its report to
the Secretary of State also stated its belief that
any proposals resulting from the United States
study of the admeasurement problem under the
auspices of the Shipping Coordinating Committee
could best be presented for international considera-
tion through the Intergovernmental Maritime
Consultative Organization (Imco), the special-
ized agency of the United Nations which will deal
with intergoverimaental shipping problems.
Imco, when activated, could take steps to include
or merge the present group of tonnage experts or
their successors into a permanent committee which
would formulate recommendations for construc-
tion and interpretation of admeasurement regula-
tions and would make searching studies looking
toward the ideal of a fair and equitable solution
of the problem of world-wide uniformity of
tonnage measurement.

Uniformity in tonnage admeasurement is thus
a goal which has been sought unsuccessfully for
many years. The Oslo convention is the first real
step in that direction, and although the Oslo rules
are not acceptable from the point of view of the
United States and represent a compromise on the
part of the signatory governments, they do con-
stitute a multilateral agreement on a controversial
subject whicli has heretofore been impossible. It
is probable that, if the United States, as a result of
studies, proposes through Imco or otherwise a
different system of admeasurement which is simple
and equitable and does not penalize proper ship
design, that system may receive the support of the
governments now signatory to the Oslo conven-
tion as another step toward a universal system of
admeasurement.

U.S. Opposes Postponement
of Torquay Tariff Negotiations

[Released to the press September 1]

The Department of State, after carefully re-
viewing proposals for postponement of the tariff
negotiations scheduled to begin September 28 at
Torquay, England, has reached the conclusion that
it would be to the best interests of the United
States and of other countries not to postpone the
negotiations, in which some 40 nations are expected
to participate.^

The Department's position on postponement of
the Torquay Conference is as follows :

' For announcemont of U.S. intention to undertal^e trade-
asi'eement neKOtiations, together witli the first and second
supplementary notices, see Bulletin of May 15, 1950, p.
762 ; May 29, 1950, p. 866 ; Aug. 28, 1950, p. 343, respectively.

In reviewing the desirability of going forward
with the Torquay negotiations the Department
has been guided by the conviction, which the Presi-
dent has emphasized, that the task of creating a
defense against aggression is not exclusively a
military task. The ability of this and of other
free nations to resist aggression, even by military
means, is ultimately dependent upon assuring that
our economic strength and theirs is not impaired,
and upon taking additional measures to foster the
individual growth and joint strength of the free
nationa

Torquay and the Defense Program

Accelerated defense j^rograms in the United
States and Western Europe will mean a larger
total demand for goods, greater employment, and
strong inflationary tendencies. To the extent that
tariff reductions increase the volume of imports
into the United States, or decrease the costs of such
imports in our domestic markets, they will con-
tribute to restraining the inflationary pressures
with which we have to deal. Moreover, tariff re-
ductions resulting from the Torquay negotiations
can be expected to contribute to counterinflation-
ary measures taken not only in the United States
but also in most of the friendly countries of the
world, since the effect of such reductions will be
to help hold down prices throughout the world.
Tariff reductions, as made through the careful and
selective procedures of the trade-agreements pro-
gram, present no threat to the American economy.

Another important consideration is that success-
ful conclusion of the Torquay negotiations can
helj) to correct the present imbalance of our trade
by increasing the dollar-earning capacity of other
friendly countries. The increased defense efforts
of our allies promise to increase their need for
dollar goods. These needs can be met in either of
two ways: by increased sales of the goods of
friendly countries in dollar areas, or by increased
financial assistance from the United States. Of
these two means, the former is clearly the more
desirable. Reduction in the need for financial aid
not only reduces the burden on our own taxpayers
but also increases the self-reliance of the nations
associated with us in the defense effort.

Greater military production in Western Europe
will also require the more efiicient use of Western
European economic resources through closer eco-
nomic cooperation. The United States has ex-
pended great effort in furthering close economic
cooperation in Western Europe. There is general
agreement that the Korean situation has increased
rather than diminished the necessity for such co-
oi^eration. The Torquay negotiations promise to
make an important contribution in this direction
by reducing tariffs affecting trade among Euro-
pean countries themselves and thus facilitating
intra-European trade. In this comiection. West-
ern Gei-many is to participate in the Torquay

474

Department of State Bulletin

iu'<rotiatioiis and thus become able to reestablish,
formally, her trade relations -with other Western
-European countries and with the United States.
Such a step is certain to have considerable sig-
[liticance in linking "Western Germany more firmly
o the AYestern World.

The invasion of Korea has greatly increased,
not lessened, the need for economic strength and
luiity in the nations of the free world. The Tor-
quay Conference, by widening the area of interna-
t idual cooperation, and deepening it in degree, will
jontribute to both of these objectives.

Future of the Trade-Agreements Program

Some 40 governments have agreed to partici-
pate in the Torquay negotiations and they have
substantially completed the necessarily extensive
preparations which have required many months
i)f effort. Elaborate administrative arrangements
luive been made at the site of the Conference. An
enterprise of this magnitude requires long-range
])lanning and careful timing. It cannot be "put
off" for a few months without jeopardizing the
whole program of trade-barrier reduction. The
United States herself, of coui'se, does not have au-
thority to postpone or cancel the negotiations, al-
though her refusal to participate would probably
result in cancellation of the Conference. Such
action would destroy the confidence of other coun-
tries in the good faith of this Government which
has for yeare taken world leadership in a program
for reducing trade barriers and would be regarded
by these countries as an American repudiation of
the principles of liberalization of international
trade.

Cancellation of the Torquay Conference would
accordingly be a major defeat for the reciprocal
trade-agi'eements program and would call the fu-
ture of the program into serious question. The
period of military rearmament here and in West-
cin Europe is likely to continue for several years.
As indicated above, there is every substantive
reason for continuing trade-agreement negotia-
tions in furtherance of the defense efforts of the
free world during a period of rearmament. If the
Torquay conference were canceled, that would be
looked upon as being in effect a decision by the
United States to retreat from the principles of
the reciprocal Trade Agreements Act.

Question of Injury to Domestic Industries

Some of those who have proposed postponement
of the Torquay Conference because of the Korean
situation have expressed the fear of possible injury
to domestic industries in which they are interested.

There is no real cause for such concern. First,
the Administration has given assurances that no
recommendation will be made for a reduction or
binding of any United States tariff which, in the
considered judgment of the interdepartmental
Trade Agreements Committee, woukl be likely

to cause or threaten serious injury to a domestic
industry. The possibility of such injury is even
less likely after Korea in view of the prospective
high rate of United States production and employ-
ment. Second, if serious injury should, neverthe-
less, be threatened by a concession, it will be pos-
sible to withdraw or modify the concession under
the "escape clause" to which all Torquay conces-
sions will be subject.

North American Broadcasting
Conference Scheduled at Washington

The Department of State announced on Septem-
ber 5 that the second session of the Third North
Ajnerican Kegional Broadcasting Conference will
be convened at Washington, D.C., on September
6 in an effort to conclude an agreement which will
establish operating policies and procedures for
standard band broadcasting in the North Ameri-
can region. The Governments concerned are
Canada, Cuba, the Dominican Kepublic, Haiti,
Mexico, the United Kingdom (on behalf of the
Bahamas and Jamaica), and the United States.

The first session of the Conference, which was
held at Montreal, September-December 1949,^ was
inconclusive because of differences of opinion of
certain participating governments and because not
all governments concerned were represented. The
original North American Kegional Broadcasting
Agreement, signed at Habana in 1937, became
effective in 1941 to continue in force for 5 years.
In 1946, it was extended for an additional 3
years, expiring March 29, 1949. Despite the ex-
piration of the agreement, certain of the signa-
tories have informally indicated their willingness
to abide by the terms of the old agreement pending
the conclusion of a new one.

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S.

The visits of the following persons have been
made possible by grants-in-aid from the Depart-
ment of State under Public Law 265, 81st Con-
gress :

Dr. Risto Olavi Sarvas, senior assistant in the
silvicultural research section of the Forest Re-
search Institute, Helsinki, Finland, will observe
forestry institutions and genetic research.

Nils-Osten Grotenfelt, chief. General Depart-
ment of the Finnish Employers' Confederation,
Helsinki, Finland, will tour American industrial
centers.

' Bulletin of Sept. 26, 1949, p. 460.

September 73, 7950

475

The United States in tiie United Nations

REVIEW, JULY 31 TO SEPTEMBER 15

The Korean situation and related developments
have remained a principal focal point of United
Nations activities over the past 6 weeks. The
Security Council continued to consider the aggres-
sion against the Republic of Korea, and two re-
lated items were added to the Council's agenda —
the alleged bombing of Chinese territory and the
complaint of invasion of Formosa. The U.S.S.R.
ended its boycott of United Nations organs when
her representative assumed the presidency of the
Council in August and tried unsuccessfully to ob-
tain seating of the Chinese Communists in the
Council, the hearing of the North Koreans, and
to condemn United States actions in the Far East.
Resolutions, adopted in this same period by both
the Economic and Social Council (Ecosoc) and
the Executive Board of Unesco are designed to
further United Nations action with regard to
Korea. Ecosoc recessed, instead of adjourning
its eleventh session, so that it could move promptly
if further steps become necessary.

The other principal focus of United Nations
activities in the 6 weeks just passed has been the
preparations for the fifth regular session of the
General Assembly, which convenes on September
19. Ecosoc, at its eleventh session, made recom-
mendations on a number of important matters not
connected with the Korean crisis for considera-
tion by the Assembly. The Special Committee on
Information transmitted under ai'ticle 73(e) of
the Charter concerning non-self-governing terri-
tories has just concluded its pre- Assembly session,
and various other United Nations agencies, such
as the Commission on Korea and the Special Com-
mittee on the Balkans, have recently completed
their reports to the Assembly.

Security Council

"Complaint of aggression upon the Republic of
Korea" continued as the most important item on
the agenda of the Security Council. A determin-
ing factor in the conduct of the Council's business
for tliese weeks was the change in presiding oiK-
cers. On August 1, Soviet representative Yakov
A. Malik, following tlie Norwegian representative,
assumed the presidency. Mr. Malik was succeeded
on September 1 by Sir Gladwyn Jebb (U. K.).

476

On July 31, the Security Council adopted a res-
olution concerned with relief for the civilian popu-
lation of Korea, but for the next month little
progress was made in the substantive work of the
Council because of lengthy procedural debates and
the refusal of the President to rule. No action
could be taken on a resolution, introduced by Am-
bassador Austin on July 31, condemning North
Korean authorities for continued defiance of the
United Nations and calling upon all states to
refrain from aiding North Korea and from action
that might spread the Korean conflict.

At the August 1 meeting, after rejecting a ruling
by President Malik to unseat the representative of
the Chinese National Government, the Security
Council began the procedural debate that contin-
ued throughout the month. The Council first took
up the question of its agenda ; Ambassador Malik
maintained that his proposed items on Chinese
representation and the peaceful settlement of the
Korean crisis — two problems that he claimed were
inextricably linked — should be discussed prior to
the United States item on North Korean aggres-
sion, which had been before the Council since June.
On August 3, the Council voted to include on its
agenda only the latter item — "Complaint of ag-
gression upon the Republic of Korea." At its next
meeting. Ambassador Tsiang (China) raised the
question of inviting the representative of the Re-
public of Korea to participate in the Council's
debates on Korean aggression. Proposing instead
that representatives of both North and South
Korea be invited, President Malik refused to rule
on the contention of China, the United States, the
United Kingdom, and others that the Council had
already decided to extend this invitation by its
June 25 resolution. The question remained in sus-
pense throughout August.

In the first half of the month, the U.S.S.R. in-
troduced two resolutions on the Korean situation:
(1) its "peaceful settlement" draft i-esolution of
August 4, which called for hearing both the North
and South Koreans and for the withdrawal of for-
eign troops from Korea; and (2) its draft resolu-
tion of August .5 that asked the Security Council
to condemn United States air bombing in Korea as
"a gross violation" of international law and to call
upon the United States to cease air bombings. In

Department of State Bulletin

llie second half of the month, two Soviet-proposed
items were added to the Conncil's agenda with
United States concurrence : on Angust 29, "Com-
plaint of invasion of the Island of Taiwan (For-
mosa)" and on August 31, "Complaint of bombing
by air forces of the territory of China." In con-
nection with the latter, Ambassador Malik sub-
mitted a draft resolution asking the Security
Tduncil to condemn the "illegal acts" of the United
States in bombing Chinese territory and to call
niKin the United States to prohibit such acts.

Security Council action proceeded more rapidly
iluring the first weeks in September. On Septem-
ber 1, after the Council had sustained a ruling of
President Jebb, the representative of the Eepublic
of Korea was seated. General discussion on Sep-
tember 5 and 6 and subsequent voting resulted in
the rejection, because of a Soviet veto of the
United States resolution to localize the Korean
conflict, and the overwhelming defeat of the Soviet
"peaceful settlement" resolution. On September
7. after detailed debate, the Council rejected
another Soviet resolution that, condemning the
"barbarous" bombing of Korean civilian popula-
tions by American air forces.

The same day. Ambassador Gross outlined a
I'nited States draft resolution to set up a com-
mission to investigate on the spot the charges re-
garding the bombing by air forces of Chinese
territory, leveled by the Chinese Communist au-
thorities. On September 11, a Soviet proposal to
invite a representative of the "People's Republic
of China" to Council meetings on this matter was
voted down, and another Soviet veto on Septem-
ber 12 caused the rejection of the United States
resolution. The Security Council on September
12 also rejected the Soviet resolution condemning
the United States for alleged bombings in China.
Further discussion of a Soviet proposal to invite
the People's Republic of China to send a repre-
sentative to participate in the Council's discus-
sions of the Formosa question was postponed.

During this period at several closed meetings
the Security Council discussion approved its an-
nual report to the General Assembly.

Kashmir. — The United Nations representative
in Kashmir, Sir Owen Dixon, issued a press state-
ment in Karachi on August 21, before departing
for Europe, in which he had concluded that there
was no immediate prospect of India and Pakistan
composing any of their differences over the States
of Jammu and Kashmir and that no purpose could
be served by his remaining any longer on the sub-
continent. He described his activities since ar-
riving on May 27, 1950, and particularly his meet-
ings with the Prime Ministers of India and Pakis-
tan in New Delhi in July. Efforts to bring about
agi'eement during these conferences upon the
necessary measures preparatory to an over-all
plebiscite, including demilitarization of Kashmir,
were unsuccessful, he stated. He had then pre-
sented alternative suggestions which did not in-

Sepfember 18, 1950

volve an over-all plebiscite, particularly one under
which a plebiscite would be held only in the terri-
tories where the desires of the inhabitants are
uncertain; on the other hand, in the territories
where the inhabitants' desires are known would
be partitioned between India and Pakistan, due
regard being given to geographical, economic,
topographical, and demographical considerations.
However, he reported, agreement could not be
attained to arrange a conference for discussing
any of his plans. He noted that, although the
burden for formulating proposals for settlement
of the dispute, had rested upon him, he was "un-
willing to suppose that after all the examination
which the problem has received, the Governments
will be unable to resolve it by negotiation." Sir
Owen, has not yet made his official report to the
Security Council.

Commission for Conventional Armaments. —
The Commission for Conventional Armaments,
meeting without the Soviet representative, on
August 9 approved the second progress report of
the Working Committee, covering the period May
18-August 9. The Working Committee's report
was transmitted to the Security Council, together
with the Commission's report. The committee re-
port contains no conclusions but simply draws at-
tention to the written and oral statements sub-
mitted by members during the period under re-
view. One French and four United States work-
ing papers were annexed.

General Assembly

Two important agencies established by the Gen-
eral Assembly — the Commission on Korea and the
Special Committee on the Balkans — have recently
released their reports to the parent body, which
will consider them during its fifth session, open-
ing September 19. At Lake Success the Special
Committee on Information transmitted under
article 73 (e) of the Charter also completed its
work in preparation for this year's Assembly
meeting, while in Palestine, Libya, and Somali-
land other United Nations organs continued their
activities.

Korea. — In its report to the General Assembly,
released on September 14, the United Nations
Commission on Korea declares that the June 25
invasion of the Republic of Korea by the armed
forces of the North Korean authorities was an act
of aggression initiated without warning or pro-
vocation, and in execution of a carefully prepared
plan. The object of North Korean policy, it states,
was to secure control over the whole of Korea, if
not by peaceful means, then by overthrowing the
Republic of Korea. The report outlines the origin
of the conflict as an outgrowth of the "artificial
division" of Korea and the failure of the occupy-
ing powers to reach agreement on the method of
giving independence to Korea. It points out that
if internationally supervised elections had been

477

allowed to take place throughout Korea and a
unified and independent state had thereby come
into existence, the present conflict could not have
arisen. The Commission believes that the Korean
people fervently desire a unified, independent state,
but its experience prior to the aggression, the re-
port states, indicated that the North Korean
authorities would never agree to internationally
supervised, democratic elections throughout the
country.

The report outlines the economic and social
problems facing the Korean Republic and traces
the development of repi-esentative government in
the South. It points out that external assistance
will be needed to solve the serious problems of
reconstruction and rehabilitation that will con-
front Korea when the military conflict ends. It
concludes that unification can be the only aim
x-egarding Korea and that when the conditions
disappear under which the country's artificial di-
vision and the resulting antagonisms arose, it will
be possible for the Korean people to come together
again and "to live in peace and to build the strong
foundations of a free, democratic Korea."

Greece. — The report to the General Assembly of
the United Nations Special Committee on the Bal-
kans for the year ending July 31, 1950, was unani-
mously adopted and signed by the Committee in
Geneva on that day and released to the public
on August 27. The report concludes that the
United Nations' vigilance in respect to the politi-
cal independence and territorial integi'ity of
Greece has been and remains a significant factor
in limiting the nature and extent of aggression
against Greece. The Committee believes that the
threat to Greece, which it states is now to be
found chiefly in Bulgaria, has altered in char-
acter but that the residual problems nevertheless
constitute a continuing danger to the maintenance
of international peace and security. It considers
solution of the following urgent problems a pre-
requisite to the restoration of normal relations
between Greece and her northern neighbors: (1)
international verification of the disarming and
disposition of Greek guerrillas outside of Greece;
(2) repatriation of Greek children, detained Greek
soldiers, and other Greek nationals; and (o) the
conclusion of frontier conventions between Greece
and its northern neighbors.

In the report the Committee recommends that
the General Assembly consider the advisability
of maintaining an appropriate United Nations
agency in the Balkans, "in light of the current
international situation and of conditions prevail-
ing along the northern frontiers of Greece." The
Committee's other seven recommendations are that
the General Assembly : ( 1 ) take note of the assist-
ance given Greek guerrillas by Albania and,
especially, Bulgaria ; (2) call upon all states to
do nothing to encourage a renewal of armed action
against Greece; (3) call again upon Albania,
Bulgaria, and Greece to establish normal diplo-

matic relations and frontier conventions; (4) call
upon all states, in particidar Albania and Bul-
garia, to permit the international verification of
the disarming and disposition of Greek guerrillas
in their territories; (5) recommend to all states
that they refrain from furnishing war materials
to Albania and Bulgaria and take into account in
their relations with Albania and Bulgaria the
extent to which those two countries abide by the
General Assembly recommendations; (6) call
upon all states harboring Greek nationals to facili-
tate tlie repatriation of those desiring it; and (7)
make every j)ossible effort to restore displaced
Greek children to their homes.

Non - Self - Govei^ing TerritoneH. — With the
unanimous adoption of its report to the General
Assembly, the Special Committee on Information
transmitted under article 73 (e) of the Charter
completed a 3-week session at Lake Success on
September 12 under the chairmanship of Mr. B.
Shiva Rao of India. The Committee was estab-
lished by the Assemblv to examine the information
transmitted to the United Nations on economic,
social, and educational conditions in non-self-
governing territories; 16 members are equally
divided between those states transmitting such
information and those states that do not.

At the opening of the session the United King-
dom, France, and Belgium announced that they
would continue to participate in the Committee's
work, but they reserved their positions with respect
to Charter limitations on United Nations action
concerning non-self-governing territories and,
therefore, to the Committee's competence. The
U.S.S.R. did not attend the meeting although
China, whose representation has been the cause of
the Soviet boycott of most United Nations organs,
is not a Committee member.

The Committee emphasized this year the prob-
lems relating to education in non-self-governing
territories and, in connection with this item, dis-
cussed the following topics: (1) eradication of
illiteracy; (2) language of instruction ; (3) equal
treatment in educational matters; (4) participa-
tion of inhabitants in education policy formula-
tion and administration; (5) higher education;
and (6) various types of specialized training. A
special report to the Assembly on the Committee's
discussion of education, which is recommended for
transmission to United Nations members and to
Unesco, was approved on September 7.

Secretariat summaries of statistical information,
of progress achieved in accordance with develop-
ment progi-ams, and of information transmitted
voluntarily to the United Nations were discussed
at this session, as well as Secretariat analysesi of
information relating to the following functional
fields : agricultural and economic conditions ; pub-
lic health; labor; and social welfare. Other
topics under consideration included international
collaboration in regard to economic, social, and
education conditions in non-self-governing terri-

478

\i&pat\men\ of Sfafe Bulletin

lories, and technical assistance to such territories.
The Committee selected economic conditions and
development as the special subject for considera-
tion next year.

Palestine. — The Conciliation Commission for
Palestine concluded its session at its headquarters
in Jerusalem on September 2 and departed for
Ankara to comjilete visits to the capitals of the
three member (Tovernments: France, the United
States, and Turke}'. It will reconvene in New
York on October 2. After returning to Jerusalem
on August 6 from Geneva, having adjourned on
July 15, the Conunission resumed direct contact
with the interested governments in the Middle
East by visiting the various capitals to discuss a
] lossible way of carrying out its task. In addition,
the Commission conferred with the Director of the
Relief and "Works Agency for Palestine Refugees
in the Near East, who, with members of the
Agency's Advisory Commission, also conducted a
series of visits to nearby Arab capitals and to
Israel.

Former Italian- Colonies. — On September 2 in
Geneva, the Council for Libya and the United
Xiitions Commissioner for Libj'a, Adrian Pelt,
i( mipleted examination of the latter's report to the
Si'cretarj^-General, for submission to the General
Assembly. The Council had been considering this
matter since August 16.

In Mogadishu the Advisory Council for Somali-
land on August 14 unanimously adopted a resolu-
tion, in response to a May 3 request from the
Italian Administration, on the selection, composi-
tion, and size of the Ten-itorial Council provided
for in the trusteeship agreement.

Economic and Social Council

The Economic and Social Council concluded its
11th session on August 16. One of the Council's
most significant decisions, taken late in the session,
was on the means by which the Council could con-
tribute directly to United Nations action against
aggression in Korea. On August 14, the Council
unanimously adopted a resolution implementing
the Security Council's resolution of July 31 re-
questing United Nations organs and associated
agencies to provide such assistance for the relief
and support of the civilian population of Korea as
the unified command might request. The resolu-
tion adopted made provision for immediate assist-
ance as requested and laid the basis for a later long-
range program of posthostilities aid to Korea. .

The Council's President, Hernan Santa Cruz
(Chile), at the outset of the session, told the 15
delegates — representatives of the Soviet Union,
Poland, and Czechoslovakia were absent — that:
the Korean aggression made evident the neces-
sity of increasing eilorts to attain universal eco-
nomic cooperation in order to promote better liv-
ing standards everywhere and, thereby, contribute
to the elimination of breeding grounds for con-

Sepfember 78, 1950

flict. Toward this end, the Council's work in
economic fields was concentrated primarily on two
interrelated and far-reaching programs: full em-
ployment, and methods of financing economic de-
velopment of underdeveloped countries. Reports
from the Council's various commissions and spe-
cialized agencies were studied. The Council
noted with satisfaction the Secretary-General's
report on United Nations activities in the tech-
nical assistance field and agreed, generally, that
the preparatory stage had passed and that partici-
pating organizations and the Technical Assistance
Board were now in a position to embark on con-
crete technical assistance projects.

In the social field, one of the major tasks before
the Council was examination of the Draft Cove-
nant on Human Rights. The Council decided to
send the Covenant to the General Assembly for
policy guidance and then to the Commission on
Human Rights for further consideration. Other
important decisions taken by the Council con-
cerned refugees and a long-term program for
United Nations aid to children.

Specialized Agencies

Pursuant to the resolutions adopted by the Se-
curity Council on July 31 and the Economic and
Social Council on August 14, the Executive Board
of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization, meeting at Paris in ex-
traordinary session, unanimously approved, on
August 28, a resolution that instructs the Director-
General of UNESCO to relieve the needs of the
Korean civilian population in the fields of educa-
tion, science, and culture, and to carry forward a
program of teaching about the United Nations
and its specialized agencies, emphasizing partic-
ularly the need for collective security, based on
respect for law. The Director-General was fur-
ther authorized: to send a mission to Korea, upon
the request of the United Nations Secretary-Gen-
eral, to investigate the needs of the civilian popu-
lation there ; to provide, upon request, educational
supplies on an emergency basis; to prepare and
launch a campaign for assistance to the Republic
of Korea in the field of educational, scientific, and
cultural relief and reconstruction; to prepare ma-
terials for use in schools; to produce and distribute
these to member states; and to make available to
the United Nations Secretary-General two special-
ists to assist in assembling relevant documenta-
tion in connection with the United Nations Korean
action.

The Boards of Governors of both the Interna-
tional Bank for Reconstruction and Development
and the International Monetary Fund met at Paris
from September 6 to 14. A Czechoslovak propo-
sal to unseat the Chinese representative was de-
feated at the second meeting. The Czechoslovak,
Danish, Indian, and Yugoslav representatives
supported the proposal.

479

General Policy Page

Events in Korea Deepen Interest in United
Nations. Statement by Secretary Ach-
eson 450

Review of Security Council Action in Defense
of Korea. Statement by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin 451

Letters of Credence: Israel 459

Foreign Policies Toward Asia — A Television

Interview With Secretary Acheson . . 460

Fundamentals of Far Eastern Foreign Policy.

By Dean Rusk 465

Strength of Forces in Western Europe To Be

Increased. Statement by the President . 468

Labor Day Statements of Union Leaders
Praised. Statement by Secretary Ache-
son 469

The United Nations and
Specialized Agencies

Events in Korea Deepen Interest in United
Nations. Statement by Secretary Ache-
son 450

Review of Security Council Action in Defense
of Korea. Statement by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin 451

U.N. Korean Fighter Patrol Shoots Down
Hostile Soviet Bomber:
Message from U.S. Deputy Representative

to U.N 454

Soviet Note on Bomber Incident Refused

by Ambassador Kirk 454

North Korea Slanders U.N. Forces To Hide
Guilt of Aggression. Statement by Sec-
retary Acheson 454

Discussion in Security Council of Agenda
Items. Statement by Ambassador War-
ren R. Austin 455

Communiques Regarding Korea for the Secu-
rity Council 468

The United States in the United Nations . . 476

Economic Affairs

Further Suspension of Excise Tax on Copper

Recommended 470

International Information and page

Cultural Affairs

Free German Youth Visit West Zone in

Berlin 443

VOA Program Popular Among Western

Germans 449

Cooperation of Film Industry With Govern-
ment Discussed 470

U.S. Films Win Awards 470

Foreign Nationals Visiting U.S 475

Treaty Information

Review of Progress Made LTnder North At-
lantic Treaty. Extemporaneous Re-
marks by Secretary Acheson 468

Further Suspension of Excise Tax on Copper

Recommended 470

Occupation Matters

Free German Youth Visit West Zone in

Berlin 443

VOA Program Popular Among Western

Germans 449

National Security

The Domestic Role in Building Strength To
Deter Communist Aggression. Address
by the President 458

Strength of Forces in Western Europe To Be

Increased. Statement by the President . 468

International Organizations
and Conferences

The Conference on Tonnage Measurement of
Ships— Stockholm, June 2-10, 1950.
By John W. Mann 471

U.S. Opposes Postponement of Torquay Tar-
iff Negotiations 474

North American Broadcasting Conference

Scheduled at Washington 475

The Congress

Universal Training Legislation 457

John W. Mann, author of the article on tonnage measure-
ment of ships, is Assistant Chief, Shipping Policy Committee
Staff, Department of State.

0. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICEi 19B0

.Bio

JAe/ ^eha^tT^teni^ 4)^ tnaie^

UNITED STATES DEVELOPMENTS IN HUMAN

RIGHTS DURING 1949 483

PROGRESS ON POINT 4 • By Capus M. Waynick

493

FORCED LABOR CONDITIONS IN COMMUNIST-
DOMINATED COUNTRIES • By Walter Kotschnig . 510

For complete contents see back cover

Vol. XXIII, No. 586
September 25, 1950

VlENT o^

•>-«TM 0« '

tJAe

Qje/iwy^md ^/ 9^tale iJllllOlill

Vol. XXIII, No. 586 • Publication 3966
September 25, 1950

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Qovernment Printing OfBce

Washington 25, D.C.

Pkick:

62 issues, domestic $6, foreign $8.60

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Depahtuent
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government ujith information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

OCT 20 195U

UNITED STATES DEVELOPMENTS IN HUMAN RIGHTS DURING 1949

Significant statutory and administrative devel-
opments concerning human rights in the Federal,
State, and local governments in the United States
iuring 1949 are herein presented. It should be
Dorne in mind, however, that these 1949 develop-
;nents can be understood only when viewed against
;he total background of assurances of human
rights in the United States, including the Federal
Constitution, its Bill of Rights and subsequent
amendments to the guaranties contained in the
i^arious State constitutions, and the vast body of
pertinent legislation and court decisions.

In this connection, for example, the United
States Supreme Court in 1949 continued its tradi-
tional role of expanding and interpreting the
many human rights guaranties of the Federal
Constitution relating to personal liberty and se-
curity. In Lu-stig v. United States, the Court
applied the doctrine that evidence which has been
obtained under an illegal search and seizure par-
ticipated in by a Federal officer will not be admis-
sible in a Federal court, in sjoite of the fact that
the search and seizure was conducted by State offi-
cers to whom this principle has not been applica-
ble {Wolfy. Colorado).^

Elsewhere, the Court amplified for the States
the application of the "due process" clause of the
Fourteenth Amendment of the Federal Constitu-
tion to assure their affording basic guaranties of
criminal justice. In Watts v. Indiana, in Turner
v. Pennsylvania, in Harris v. South Carolina, con-

' Ambassador Warren R. Austin, United States repre-
sentative to the United Nations, announced on September
4 transmittal to the Secretary-General, Trygve Lie, of a
report on progress in the field of human rights in 1949 in
the United States. The material is for use in the United
Nations Human Rights Yearbook, which will be available
at a later date from the International Documents Service,
iCoIumbia University Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27,
!New Torl£. The Yearbook for 1948 is sold for $6.00 a
(copy.

' 338 U.S. 74 ; 338 U.S. 25.

victions for murders based on confessions which
were obtained while holding the accused persons
incommunicado for several days without arraign-
ment and without advice as to the prisoners' con-
stitutional rights, were reversed. In Gibbs v.
Burke, the Court held that the accused in a larceny
case had been denied a fair trial because he was not
represented by counsel during a trial in which
hearsay and other improper evidence had been ad-
mitted. It was stated by the Court that the pri-
mary duty is on the trial judge to determine the
accused's need of counsel at arraignment and dur-
ing trial and to decide in each case whether the
need is so great that deprivation of the right works
a fundamental unfairness.^

Guaranties in International Agreements

Three international agreements to which the
Government of the United States is a party and
which entered into force in 1949 contain clauses
protecting human rights.*

Article XI of the treaty of friendship, com-
merce, and navigation between tlie United States
and the Italian Republic, which entered into force
on July 26, 1949, provides that the nationals of
each contracting Government, individually and
collectively, shall be permitted full religious free-
dom when in the territory of the other Govern-
ment; that their nationals, or corporations and
associations, when in the territory of each other,
shall be free to write, report, and gather informa-
tion for dissemination to the public and shall be
free to transmit such information abroad as well
as to publish it within the territory of each other.

The Occupation Statute for Western Germany
defines the powers retained by the three occupying

' 338 U.S. 49 ; 338 U.S. 62; 338 U.S. 68 ; 337 U.S. 773.
'Excerpts from the three acts are included in part II,
Documents.

Sepfember 25, 1950

483

powers, France, the United Kingdom, and the
United States, after the establishment of the Fed-
eral Ee|3ublic of Germany. In this document,
which entered into force on September 21, 1949,
the three Governments declare their intention of
seeing that the German people of the three West-
ern zones enjoy the maximum possible self-gov-
ernment. The three Governments also assure to
the German people of those zones that the agen-
cies of the occupation will respect the civil rights
of every person to be protected against arbitrary
arrest, search, or seizure; to be represented by
counsel; to be admitted to bail, as circumstances
warrant; to communicate with relatives; and to
have a fair and prompt trial.^

On November 22, 1949, the High Commissioners
of the United States, France, and the United King-
dom reached an agreement with the Chancellor of
the Federal Republic of Germany which they hope
will facilitate the incorporation of Germany "into
a peaceful and stable European community of
nations." In article V of the iDrotocol of agree-
ments, the German Federal Government affirms
its resolve, as a freely elected democratic body —

... to pursue unreservedly the principles of freedom,
tolerance, and humanity ... to conduct its affairs ac-
cording to those principles ... to eradicate all traces of
Nazism from German life and institutions ... to liberal- '
ize the structure of government and to exclude authoritari-
anism."

Acts of Congress

The Eighty-first Congress of the United States
approved several laws during 1949 that bear upon
the social and economic rights now recognized ao
fundamental.

Housing Act of lOJfO. — This act, which was ap-
proved on July 15, 1949, authorizes the provision
of low-cost housing units during the next 6 years ;
provides for a comprehensive program of Federal
research designed to relieve underlying technical,
economic, and social housing problems; and au-
thorizes financial assistance to farm owners to
enable them to construct, improve, or repair farm
housing and other farm buildings. Preference for
admission to the low-rent housing authorized by
this act is given families, otherwise eligible, who
are displaced or are about to be displaced by public
slum clearance, redevelopment, or low-rent hous-
ing projects, with certain veteran-preference fea-

' Excerpts from the three acts are included in part II,

Dociiineiits.

tures. The Housing Act of 1949 establishes
national housing policy which reads as follows

. . . the general welfare and security of the Nation and
the health and living standards of its people require hous-
ing production and related community development suffi-
cient to remedy the serious housing shortage, the elimina-
tion of sub-standard and other inadequate housing through
the clearance of slums and blighted areas, and the realiza-
tion as soon as feasible of the goal of a decent home and
a suitable living and environment for every American
family, thus contributing to the development and redevel-
opment of communities and to the advancement of the
growth, wealth, and security of the Nation.'

Fair Labor Standards Amendments of 1949. —
This legislation, which was signed by the Presi-
dent on October 26, 1949, strengthens the Fair
Labor Standards Act of 1938 in the following
ways: (1) Increases the statutory minimum wage
of all workers in interstate commerce as defined
by the act; (2) redefines the term "oppressive child
labor" to correct an unintentional error in the 1938
act which permitted a parent to employ a child in
his custody under 16 years of age in a hazardous
occupation while he could not employ the same
child over 16 years of age in the same occupation
and makes the employment of "oppressive child
labor," as redefined, a direct violation of the act;

(3) extends coverage to include certain agricul-
tural handling and processing occupations; and

(4) permits the administering authorities to super-
vise the payment of, and under appropriate con-
ditions to bring court action to recover, back wages
owed to employees under the terms of the law.'

Hospital Survey and Construction Amend/:, -nts
of 1949. — These amendments were approve. I on
October 25, 1949. They continue and increase
Federal financial aid to the States for the con-
struction of public and other nonprofit hospit.ils.
The amendments also authorize grants-in-aid lo
public and private nonprofit agencies for the study
of the development, utilization, and coordination
of hospital services, facilities, and resources. This
provision is particularly significant as experience
under the Public Health Service Act of July 1,
1944, had indicated that although a great many
small hospitals were being built, they could not
provide a complete service nor could they be stalled
in such a way as to handle all types of cases and
illnesses. It was apparent that these small hos-
pitals needed to be linked with larger hospitals.
The grants-in-aid will make it possible to build up

'63 Stat. 413.

' 63 Stat. 910—1949 and .52 Stat. 1060—1938.

484

Department of State Bulletin

■iiul supplement medical care in rural areas, and
will tend to reverse factors whicli in the past have
led to the concentration of medical personnel and
facilities in the large cities.''

1949 Aiivcndments to the Rural Electri-fication
Act of 1936. — Today the increased use of elec-
;ricity on farms is an important element in im-
proving the standards of living of both the farm
md nonfarm population. Legislation enacted on
October 28, 1949, (C3 Stat. 948) provides for the
?xpansion of telephone services (1) in rural areas,
w iiich include cities and villages of 1,500 popula-
liou or less; and (2) in areas surrounding towns
;ind cities of more than 1,500 population and their
suburban residential areas.^"

Federal Regulations and Instructions

In the execution of national laws, the various
departments and agencies of the executive branch
of the Federal Government from time to time issue
regulations and instructions. Several directives
of this kind were issued during 1949 which
strengthen the enjoj'ment of human rights.

Instructions for Carrying Out the Fair Employ-
in rnt Program. — The President in Executive Or-
der 9980 of July 2G, 1948, called for more effective
application of the long-established policy of em-
ployment in the Federal service on the basis of
merit and fitness alone, without regard to race,
color, religion, or national origin." Instructions
issued bj' the Fair Employment Board of the
United States Civil Service Commission, effective
^larch 24, 1949, require each Government depart-
ment to appoint officers in both their home and
field offices who shall have full operating respon-
sibility for carrying out the President's fair-em-
ployment objectives. Under these instructions,
each department is required to make known the
names of these officers to all its employees.

Amendments to National Gapital Parks Regu-
lations.— The National Park Service of the De-
partment of the Interior amended the National
Capital Parks Regulations on May 20, 1949 to pro-
hibit the publicizing of the facilities, accommoda-
tions, or any activity conducted in the park area
of the national capital in such a way as to reflect
upon or question the acceiitability of any person

because of his race, creed, color, or national origin.
Operators or any employees of any public facility
or accommodation, likewise, are prohibited from
discriminating by segregation or otherwise against
any person in the furnishing of any accommoda-
tion, facility, service, or privilege offered to or
enjoyed by the general public in the park areas of
the city of Washington.

Amended Housing Credit Regulations. —
Amended regulations issued by the Federal Hous-
ing Administration on December 12, 1949, add
several new sections to the National Housing code.
Under these new sections property, the sale or
occupancy of which is placed under any racial or
religious restriction, is not eligible for new Federal
loan guaranties.

Military Directive. — In Executive Order 9981
of July 26, 1948, the President of the United
States proclaimed a policy of equality of treat-
ment and opi^ortunity for all persons in the armed
service without regard to race, color, religion, or
national origin. In furtherance of that policy,
the Secretary of Defense on April 6, 1949, directed
the three branches of the armed services to exam-
ine their jiractices to determine what steps could
and should be taken to eliminate racial discrimi-
nation in the services, and to submit in writing
their detailed proposals. The Air Force's plan
received official approval on May 11, the Navy's
plan on June 7, and the Army's plan on September
30, 1949. Under the Army's new program, for
example, military occupational specialties, for-
merly closed to Negroes, are now open to all quali-
fied personnel; Negro quotas for selection to at-
tend Army schools are abolished, with selection
now made f i-om the best qualified personnel ; pro-
motion is administered on single-standard merit
basis; and white and colored students attending
Reserve Officers' Training Corps (ROTC) sum-
mer training camps remain together and are
trained together. Under the old policy, Negro
ROTC students attending such camps were placed
in Negro units for their training.'^

State and Territorial Legislation

The legislatures of 44 of the 48 States, as well
as those of Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the
Virgin Islands, met in regular session in 1949.

'63 Stat. S9S— 1949 and 58 Stat. 6S2— 194-J.
'° 63 Stat. 948.

" United Nations Yearbook of Human Rights, 1948, pp.
241-2.

" Press releases of the National Military Establishment
3^9A, dated Apr. 20, 1949 ; 35-49A, dated May 11, 1949 ;
and 78-^9A, dated June 7, 1949 ; and press release 256-49
of the Department of Defense, dated Sept. 30, 1949.

September 25, J 950

485

It has not been found practicable to cover every
item in the great volume of their legislation that
has a bearing upon human rights. Appropriation
acts, which are not included in the table, reflect
the continuing support given the maintenance of
civil rights and such economic and social riglats as
social security, housing, health, education, and
similar activities authorized in legislation of
earlier years.

During the year there was considerable con-
troversy regarding the effect of legislation
adopted by some State legislatures which applied
to teachers and others holding public employ-
ment. This legislation related to organizations
believed to advocate the overthrow of the Gov-
ernent by force and violence, and in some cases
called for special oaths of loyalty to the United
States Constitution or of nonmembership in such
organizations.

Perhaps the most fundamental State and Terri-
torial legislation, from the point of view of human
rights, which was enacted during 1949 concerns the
elimination of discrimination on account of race,
creed, color, or national origin in the fields of
employment, education, and public accommoda-
tion, and in State militia. Many laws also were
adopted which either materially strengthen exist-
ing labor laws, or add new features protecting
workers. There were a number of enactments
which specifically aim at the protection of women
and children. Health laws were broadened, pri-
marily to include additional services, such as psy-
chiatric aid.

Discrimination in Employment. — One of the
basic ideals for which the Govenmient of the
United States was founded concerns the right of
an individual to succeed to the best of his ability.

In Graham v. Brotherhood of Firemen^ the
United States Supreme Court reaffirmed a prin-
ciple already established in the field of collective
bargaining in Steel-e v. L. N. R. Co.^ and in Tvm-
stall V. Brotherhood., that an exclusive collective
bargaining representative for a craft or class of
employees has the duty to represent all members
who belong to the craft or class of employees
without racial discrimination."

In Lincoln Union v. Northwestern Co., and x\. F.
of L. V. Ajnerican Sash ami Door Co., the United
States Supreme Court held valid state laws guar-

anteeing a person the opportunity to obtain or
retain employment whether he is or is not a mem-
ber of a labor organization. In an opinion con-
curring in the results reached in these cases, Mr.
Justice Frankfurter noted that article 20, clause 2,
of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights,
adopted by the United Nations General Assembly,
December 11, 1948, declares that, "No one may be
compelled to belong to an association." "

Tills ideal has also received considerable im-
petus in recent years through the passage of what
are called "fair-employment practices acts."

Prior to 1949, four States — New York, New
Jersey, Massachusetts, and Connecticut — had
adopted such acts, with enforcement provisions.
Two other States — Indiana and Wisconsin — had
laws providing for voluntary compliance. Four
new States — New Mexico, Oregon, Rhode Island,
and Washington — enacted legislation during 1949
forbidding racial or religious discrimination in
employment. Although similar, these laws are
not identical in coverage, types of discrimination
prohibited, or methods of administration."

New York, New Jersey, Massachusetts, and
Connecticut enacted measures in 1949 strengthen-
ing the antidiscriminatory laws already on their
statute books. New York, for example, passed a
law in 1949 forbidding questions on place of birth
of applicants for civil service examinations.
New Jersey adopted a law combining the provi-
sions of a 1945 antidiscriminatory measure with
those of its civil-rights law and placing the ad-
ministration of both under a single administra-
tive agency, the Commission on Civil Rights.'^

In addition, California prohibited in 1949 the
inclusion of any question relative to an applicant's
race or religion in application forms for State
employment. Several other States already had
such provisions in their laws respecting civil-serv-
ice employment. Kansas, Nebraska, and Minne-
sota provided for special commissions to study
the problem of discrimination in employment.''

Several cities in the United States have enacted

■ 338 U.S. 232 ; 323 U.S. 192 ; 323 U.S. 210.

"335 U.S. 525; 335 U.S. 538; 335 U.S. 538, .539, note 5.

'" New Mexico 1949, ch. 161 p. 366 ; Oregon 1949, cli. 221
p. 314; Rhode Lsland 1949, ch. 2181, p. 157; Washington
1949, ch. 183 p. 506. The Oregon Act repealed a pre-
vious law which applied only to public employment.

"New York 1949, ch. .384 p. 1053; New Jer.sey 1949,
ch. 11 p. 37 ; Connecticut 1949, ch. 291 p. 262 ; the Massa-
chusetts 1949 session laws had not been published in
time for citation in this Ycnriook.

486

Department of State Bulletin

fair-eniployment-pi-actices acts. One city, Rich-
mond, California, adopted such an ordinance in
1949. It prohibits discrimination on account of
race, creed, or color in hiring by the city or by
its contract and franchise holders, and carries a
fine of $500 or 6 months in jail for violation. The
other cities having similar ordinances include
Chicago, Minneapolis, Philadelphia, Cincinnati,
Milwaukee, and Phoenix, Arizona. The ordi-
nances of three of these cities, Chicago, Minne-
apolis, and Philadelphia, apply to private as well
as to public employment.

Discrimination in Education. — Closely allied to
the ideal of equal employment opportunities for
all is that of equal educational opportunities. The
majority of public schools throughout the United
States have always been open to all races without
distinction. Laws eliminating discrimination be-
cause of race, creed, color, or national origin in
education have recently been adopted by several
States on which questions have arisen. New York
took the lead in this respect by passing a law in
1948 which prohibits racial discrimination in all
schools and colleges, private as well as public,
except those under religious auspices. Two other
States followed the New York example in 1949,
but on a less broad basis. The State of Indiana
adopted a law abolishing separate schools for
white and colored students and progressively
eliminating segregation in its public-school system
from kindergarten to university.^* This law be-
comes fully operative by 1954. A 1949 Wisconsin
law prohibits the establishment of separate schools
or school departments and forbids the exclusion
of any child between the ages of 4 and 20 years
from any public school on account of religion,
nationality, or color.^^

The jDublic schools of Oklahoma, like those of
Indiana and a number of other States,^ have been
organized and maintained on the principle of pro-
viding equal educational opportunities in sep-

" California 1949, ch. 1578 p. 2826 ; Kansas 1949, ch. 289
p. 523. In the case of Minnesota, such a commission had
been appointed in 1947. An appropriation made In 1949
continued the life of that commission for the next 2 years.

" Indiana 1949, ch. 186 p. 603 ; the text of this law will
be found in part II, Documents ; Wisconsin 1949, ch. 433
p. 403.

" See United Nations Yeariook on Human Rights, 1949
p. 244.

" Arkansas, Florida, Kentucky, Georgia, Louisiana, Mis-
sissippi, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia, Ten-
nessee, Texas.

September 25, 7950

arate schools for white and colored students.
However, in response to a ruling by the United
States Supreme Court {Sipuel v. Board of Re-
gents, 332 U. S. 631 ) that equal graduate school
facilities must be provided to Negro students and
in the same full measure as provided for students
of any other color, the State of Oklahoma adopted
a law on June 9, 1949, admitting qualified Negro
students to its institutions of higher learning serv-
ing white students, to pursue such courses of in-
struction as are not given in the institutions
established and maintained for the use of Negro
students. This act stipulated that the courses of
instruction given to Negi-oes in the white insti-
tutions must be either at separate times or in
separate classrooms.-^

Discrimination in Public Accommodation. —
Two States approved legislation during 1949 eli-
minating racial segregation in housing. They
were Connecticut and Wisconsin. The new Con-
necticut law expands the coverage of previous
legislation to include public-housing projects as
well as hotels, restaurants, railroads and other
public transportation, theaters, motion-picture
houses, and recreation parks. It carries a fine or
imprisonment, or both, for violation of its pro-
visions. Wisconsin also amended previous legis-
lation by providing that no veteran, otherwise
eligible, should be discriminated against for ad-
mission to veterans' housing projects because of
race, color, creed, or national origin. The State
of Florida enacted legislation authorizing the
authorities of Miami Beach to prohibit the publi-
cation or distribution of literature tending to dis-
criminate against or actually discriminating
against any person or any religion, race, or creed
in places of public accommodation, resort, or
amusement in the city of Miami Beach.^^

In addition to these laws, other developments
occurred in the field of housing which have an
important bearing on nondiscrimination. In 1948
the Supreme Court of the United States ruled that
State and Federal agencies might not enforce
racial or religious restrictions on the ownership of
real property, thereby removing the support of law
from restrictive housing covenants. In December
1949, the United States District Court for the
northern district of Alabama held unconstitutional
racial zoning ordinances of the city of Birming-

" Oklahoma 1949, table 70, ch. 15 p. 608.
'" Connecticut 1949, ch. 291 p. 262 ; Wisconsin 1949, ch.
592 p. 526; Florida 1949, ch. 26026 p. 1455 (2).

487

ham, barring Negroes from residing in dwellings
in certain sections of the city.

In a court decision, affecting segregation in
public accommodations, the United States District
Court for the eastern district of Virginia lield that
the 1949 order of the United States Civil Aero-
nautics Administrator prohibiting racial segrega-
tion at the Washington National Airport became
the controlling policy at the airport.-'

Other Housing Legislation. — The legislatures of
32 States, and those of Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto
Rico, and the Virgin Islands enacted housing leg-
islation during the calendar year 1949. Most of
the legislation amended and enlarged existing laws
pertaining to housing authorities, or amended or
enacted slum-clearance and redevelopment stat-
utes. The action of the Maine Legislature in en-
acting the Maine Housing Authorities Act is of
particular interest. This act, which is similar to
low-rent housing legislation already in effect in
other states, provides for the creation of local hous-
ing authorities to undertake low-rent housing proj-
ects. Thus, Maine became the forty-second State
to enact legislation aimed at permitting participa-
tion in the federally aided low-rent public-housing
program. The legislatures of at least six States —
California, Illinois, Massachusetts, New York,
Oregon, and Pennsylvania — provided for housing
studies and investigations to ascertain, study, and
analyze all facts relating to community redevel-
opment and housing problems, with particular
reference to legislation supplementary to Federal
enactments. Other subjects covered by 1949 State
housing legislation included greater protection
against evictions, student housing, housing aids for
veterans, provisions for middle-income housing,
and the reconstruction or rehabilitation of dwell-
ings by authorized housing cooperatives for their
members.^^

Discriminationin State Militia. — Several States
followed the example of the Federal Government
(see above) in declaring a policy of equality of
opportunity and treatment for all in the ai-med
services by outlawing racial discrimination in their
National Guards. California, Connecticut, Illi-

nois, Massachusetts, and Wisconsin, as New Jersey
had already done, abolished racial segregation,
wliile New York and Pennsylvania passed laws of
a more general tenor. The Pennsylvania law, for
example, states that —

. . . there shall be equality of treatment and opportu-
nity for all persons . . . giving due regard to the powers
of the Federal Government which are or may be exercised
over all the militia of the Commonwealth and to the time
required to effectuate changes without impairing the
efficiency or morale of the militia.

Minnesota became the ninth State to abolish
racial discrimination in the National Guard. On
November 22, 1949, the Governor of Minnesota
issued a proclamation establishing "equality of
opportunity," Mithout segregation, in the Minne-
sota National Guard (Executive Order C-19).=^

Progress in Labor Laws. — Noteworthy advances
were made during 1949 in State laws regulating
workmen's compensation, unemployment insur-
ance, protection of women workers and children,
and disability compensation.

Each of the 44 States whose legislatures met,
and Hawaii, improved their workmen's com-
pensation laws in one or more respects, prin-
cipally by increasing benefits. For example, 37
States and Hawaii increased benefits for death or
some type of disability by raising the maximum
weekly payment, extending the number of weeks
for such payments, increasing the maximum
percentage of wages for computing benefits, or in-
creasing the aggregate maximum amount of bene-
fits permitted. Benefits for death and for all
types of disability were increased in 25 of the
States and Hawaii. Medical-aid benefits were
liberalized in 19 States and Hawaii. Two States,
New York and Washington, adopted new disabil-
ity compensation laws. The 1949 developments in
this field also indicate a trend toward fuller cover-
age of occupational diseases.-"

■' Shell cij v. Kraemer, 334 U.S. 1, and Ilurd v. Ilodi/c,
334 U. S. 24; Monk v. Binnin(jham, 87 Fed. Supp. 538; Air
Terminal Services v. Rentzel. 81 Fed. Supp. 61.

^ For example : Alaska 1949, ch. 13 p. 53 ; Conn. 1949, no.
299 p. 268; Fla. 1949, ch. 25531 p. 1221 ; Hawaii 1949, Act
379 p. 50; III. 1949, no. 672 p. 1.550; Maine 1949, ch. 297
p. 243 ; Md. 1949, ch. 215 p. 579 ; Minn. 1949, ch. 224 p. 440 ;
Oreg. 1949, ch. 562 p. 907 ; V. 1. 1040, no. 8 ; Wis. 1949, ch.
390 p. 354.

'■" Calif. 1949, ch. 1578 p. 2826 ; Conn. 1949 no. 8 p. 14 ;
Fla. 1949, ch. 26026 p. 1455 (2) ; 111. 1949, no. 1130 p. 1587 ;
Ind. 1949, ch. 186 p. 003 ; Kans. 1949, ch. 289 p. 583 ; N. J.
1949, ch. 1 p. 37 ; N. Mex. 1949, ch. 161 p. 366 ; N. Y. 1949
ch. 384 p. 1053 ; Okla. 1949, table 70, ch. 15 p. 608 ; Oreg.
1949, ch. 221 p. 314 ; Pa. 1949, ch. .568 p. 1903 ; R. I. 1949,
ch. 2181 p. 157 ; S. Dak. 1949, ch. 244 p. 280 ; Wash. 1949,
ch. 183 p. 506; Wis. 1949, ch. 70 p. 104.

^ For example : Ala. 1949, no. 36 p. 47 ; Calif. 1949. ch.
107 p. 346 ; Colo. 1949, ch. 185 p. 522 ; Del. 1949, ch, 160 p.
385; Hawaii 1949, Acts 110 and 112 p. 15; Idaho 1949,
cli. 287 p. 590; Iowa 1949, ch. 60-61 p. 83: N. Jlex. 1949,
ch. 84 p. 201 ; N. Y. 1049, ch. 600 p. 1370 ; N. C. 1949, ch.
399 p. 396 ; Oreg. 1949, ch. 103 p. 127 ; P. R. 1949, no. 311
p. 940 ; R. I 1949, ch. 2269 p. 369 ; S. C. 1949, no. 302 p.
564 ; S. Dak. 1949, ch. 443 p. 417 ; Tex. 1949, ch. 428 p. 797 ;
Wash. 1949, ch. 235 p. 876 ; Wis. 1949, ch. 142 p. 150.

488

Department of State Bulletin

Statutory minimum wages for all workers were
increased in two States, Massachusetts and New
Hampshire, and in the Territory of the Virgin
Islands.

The outstanding trends in imemployment insur-
ance we»e laws increasing benefit amounts and
decreasing employers' contribution rates. Two
States, Texas and Massachusetts, extended the cov-
erage to include respectively governmental work-
ers and maritime workers.^^

Protective legislation for working women and
children included the following: Maine, Tennes-
see, and Alaska adopted new child-labor laws.
Under these laws, a basic minimum age of 16 years,
for full-time employment, is established, thus
making in all 22 States, in addition to Alaska and
Puerto Rico, having this standard. All three of
the new acts also improve maximum-hours-of-
work standards, Tennessee and Alaska setting an
8-hour day, 40-hour week, 5-day week for minors
under 18 years of age, while Maine established an
8-hour day, 48-hour week, 6-day week for minors
under 16 years of age. These acts provide in addi-
tion that special hour regulations shall now apply
to employed children under 16 years of age who
are attending school as well as working. The Ten-
nessee and Alaska laws prohibit night work for
minors under 16. The Maine law elimmates a
former night-work prohibition for minors under
16. Three other States — Indiana, Ohio, and AVis-
consin — passed laws in 1949 modifying previous
child-labor standards. The Indiana law permits
girls of 16 to 17 years of age to work until 9 p.m.
instead of formerly to 7 p.m. on 2 evenings a week
in stores imder vocational-education programs.
The Ohio and Wisconsin laws revise former mini-
mum-age standards regulating the employment of
minors in certain public exhibitions.^*

Laws specifically protecting the rights of
women workers were of two kinds. Three
States — California, Connecticut, and Maine —
and the Territory of Alaska, enacted legislation
requiring the payment of equal wages to women
for comparable work, thereby making 13 jurisdic-

" For example, see also : Alaska 1949, ch. 13 p. 53 ; Ariz.
1949 ch. 80 p. 158 ; Ark. 1949, Act 155 p. 493 ; Colo. 1949,
ch. 245 p. 720; Conn. 1949, no. 307 p. 290; Del. 1949, ch.
160 p. 285 ; Idaho 1949, ch. 144 p. 252 ; 111. 1949, no. 1105
p. 887; Kans. 1949, ch. 288 p. 295; Maine 1949, ch. 430
p. 518 ; P. R. 1949, no. 50 p. 126 ; R. I. 1919, ch. 2175 p. 38.

"» For example : Alaska 1949, ch. 73 p. 189 ; Ariz. 1949,
ch. 74 p. 152 ; Calif. 1949, ch. 127 p. 359 ; Colo. 1949, ch. 112
p. 230 ; 111. 1949, no. 1061 p. 905 ; Maine 1949, ch. 290 p. 231 ;
Minn. 1949, ch. 545 p. 950 ; Pa. 1949, no. 224 p. 847 ; P. R.
1949, no. 304 p. 1,114 ; Tenn. 1949, ch. 201 p. 689.

tions having laws abolishing discrimination in
wages because of sex. Three States improved the
working hours of women. Wider coverage is
provided for the restrictions on hours of work for
women under Maine law. In Wyoming, female
employees in certain occupations requiring con-
tinuous standing are given two rest periods of 15
minutes each day. A Tennessee law establishes a
maximum 50-hour week for women workers.-^

Comjntlsoi^ School Attendance. — Four States
made major changes in their compulsory-school-
attendance provisions, namely, Idaho, Michigan,
Oklahoma, and Wisconsin. The Idaho law low-
ers the upper age from 18 to 16 years for required
school attendance, but strengthens existing law by
eliminating the exceptions under which minors
under 16 years of age were formerly excused from
school attendance. Under the 1949 law, only
children physically or mentally incapacitated may
be excused. The Wisconsin law also eliminates
the exceptions for children under 16, now permit-
ting only high school graduates to leave school
under that age. Michigan eliminated a provision
under which formerly children of 14 and 15, whose
services were needed for the support of their
family or for themselves, might be excused from
school to go to work. Under the new Oklahoma
law, provision is made that unless minors between
the ages of 7 and 18 years are high school grad-
uates, they are required to attend school. The
previous provision permitted children of 16 and
17 to be excused from school for employment, if
they had completed the first 8 grades of school.

A number of states established new minimum
school terms. Georgia and South Dakota ex-
tended their school terms to 9 months; North
Dakota and Nebraska to 8 months ; Delaware from
160 days to 180 days. The North Carolina Legisla-
ture repealed previous legislation under which
the public schools of Currituck County might be
closed in order to allow pupils to pick cotton.^"

" Alaska 1949, ch. 29 p. 80 ; Calif. 1949, ch. 804 p. 1541 ;
Conn. 1949, no. 287 p. 261; Maine 1949, ch. 262 p. 207;
Tenn. 1949, ch. 200 p. 687 ; Wyo. 1949, ch. 126 p. 206.

'° For example : Alaska 1949, ch. 32 p. 86 ; Ark. 1949, Act
67 p. 170 ; Act 131 p. 285 ; Act 315 p. 903 ; Colo. 1949, ch.
153, p. 362; Conn. 1949, no. 271 p. 246; Del. 1949, ch. 76
p. 125; Ga. 1949, no. 333 p. 1406; Hawaii 1949, Act 227
p. 30 ; Idaho 1949, ch. 120 p. 214 ; Ind. 1949, ch. 238 p. 789 ;
Maine 1949, ch. 276 p. 214 ; Mich. 1949, no. 315 p. 666 ; Minn.
1949, ch. 675, p. 1209 ; N. H. 1949, ch. 92 p. 81 ; N. C. 1949,
ch. 154 p. 129 ; N. Dak. 1949, ch. 65 p. 67 ; ch. 143 p. 166 ;
Okla. 1949, table 70 ch. lA p. 517 ; Pa. 1949, no. 280 p. 978 ;
P. R. 1949, no. 55 p. 140 ; R. I. 1949, ch. 2341 p. 550 ; Tex.
1949, ch. 334 p. 625 ; Wis. 1949 ch. 96 p. 122.

lepiember 25, 1950

489

Voting. — Two acts relating to voting by em-
ployees were adopted during 1949. A Nebraska
law permits emi^loyees to be absent for 2 hours to
vote in any election, instead of only in primary
elections. An Arkansas act makes it a misde-
meanor to attempt to influence the vote of an em-
ployee by discharge or threat of discharge from
employment. The State of Tennessee, one of the
seven States requiring the payment of a poll tax
for voting, enacted legislation in 1949 (1) exempt-
ing women and blind persons from the payment of

the poll tax; (2) abolishing payment of it as a
prerequisite for voting in primary elections for
certain political nominations; and (3) limiting
the time for the collection of delinquent poll taxes.
South Carolina moved in 1949 to submit the issue
of a poll tax as a requirement for voting to a gen-
eral election to be held in 1950 (J. R. No. 347).
Similar moves on the part of the legislatures of
Texas and Virginia were defeated in the Novem-
ber 1949 elections in those States.'^

Resolutions Adopted at Sixth Session off Commission on Human Rigiits

From U.N. doc. E/1826
Adopted Aug. 9, 1950

The Economic and Social Council,

Notes that the Commission on Human Rights considers
that the draft international Covenant on Human Rights
relating to some of the fundamental rights of the indi-
vidual and to certain essential civil freedoms is the first
of the series of covenants and measures to be adopted in
order to cover the whole of the Universal Declaration of
Human Rights ;

Notes, further, the decision of the Commission to pro-
ceed at its seventh session with the consideration of addi-
tional covenants and measures dealing with economic, so-
cial, cultural, political and other categories of human
rights, and to consider additional proposed articles in-
cluded in Annex III to its report of the sixth session, to-
gether with any other articles which might be further
proposed by Governments ; and

Approves the decision of the Commission.

The E!conomic and Social Council,

Considering that the Commission on Human Rights,
at its sixth session, resolved to begin at once the prepara-
tion of the execution of its work programme for the year
1951, with a view to assuring to everyone the enjoyment of
economic, social and cultural rights set forth in articles
22 to 27 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights,

Having noted with interest the report submitted by the
Director-General of tlie United Nations Educational, Sci-
entific and Cultural Organization on regulations concern-
ing economic and social rights in the International Cove-
nant on Human Rights (E/1752 and E/1752/Corr. 1),

Requests the Secretary-General :

(a) To transmit to the International Labour Organisa-
tion the proposals for relevant articles on economic and
social rights contained in Annex III to the report of the

sixth session of the Commission on Human Rights, to-
gether with tlie summary records of the debates in the
Commission concerning the inclusion of economic and so-
cial rights in the draft covenant or covenants on human
rights,' so that the said specialized agency may submit to
the Secretary-General, before the seventh session of the
Commission on Human Rights, a detailed report on what
has already been achieved in these fields, what still re-
mains to be achieved and how it might be accomplished,

(b) To make the necessary arrangements for obtain-
ing any collaboration he may think desirable from the
other organs of the United Nations and the other special-
ized agencies ; and

(c) To submit to the Commission on Human Rights,
before its seventh session to be held in 1951, a report on
the information and observations thus obtained, together
with any documentation he may consider relevant

The Economic and Social Council,

Considering the need for thorough and precise infor-
mation relating to the prevention of discrimination and
the protection of minorities,

Requests the Secretary-General :

(a) To invite Governments, Members and non-members
of the United Nations,

(i) To furnish him, as soon as practicable, examples
(with appropriate citations, where possible) of legislation,
judicial decisions, and other types of action which have

" For example : Ark. 1949, Act 2482 p. 1350 ; Calif. 1949,
ch. ir,S p. 383 ; Del. 1949, ch. 132 p. 202 : Nebr. 1949, ch.
86 p. 231 ; Tenn. 1949, ch. 62 p. 21.'. ; ch. 236 p. 790 Act
164 p. 491 ; ch. 271 p. 884.

' See U.N. docs. E/CN. 4/SR. 184-187.

490

Department of State Bulletin

been found to be especially useful in that country in
preventing discrimination in one or more of the tields
covered by the Universal Declaration of Human Rights ;

(ii) To furnisli him, as soon as practicable, full in-
formation regarding the protection of any minority within
their jurisdiction by legislative measures and in the light
of tlie Universal Declaration of Human Rights ; and

(iii) To furnish him, in particular, such information
as could serve as a basis for defining the term
"minorities" ;

(b) To distribute the information received from Gov-
ernments in response to this invitation to the members of
the Sub-Commission on the Prevention of Discrimination
and Protection of Minorities prior to its fourth session.

The Economic and Social Council

Believing that education plays a great part in the pre-
vention of discrimination, and that positive and lasting
results in preventing discrimination are attainable in
educational establishments,

Affibmino its conviction that one of the principal goals
of education should be to eliminate all forms of discrimina-
tion and to eradicate such prejudices as may lead to the
commission of acts of discrimination,

Emphasizing that considerable assistance in this matter
may be given by non-governmental organizations and
private institutions,

Noting with satisfaction the initiative taken in this field
by tJie United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cul-
tural Organization in the improvement of textbooks and
teaching materials, in the conduct of educational seminars,
in the training of teaching personnel, and in the prepara-
tion of a statement on race from the viewpoint of present
scientific knowledge.

Recommends that Member States :

(a) Adopt measures to be applied in educational es-
tablishments designed to eliminate discrimination ;

(b) Distribute the books and pamphlets referred to in
sub-paragraph (b) below as widely as possible among all
their peoples ; and

(c) Introduce, in so far as possible, the ideas contained
in the books or pamphlets referred to in sub-paragraph (b)
below into their education programmes ;

Recommends that the United Nations Educational, Sci-
entific and Cultural Organization :

(a) Give emphasis to such practical educational activi-
ties as are likely to eradicate prejudice and discrimination,
bearing in mind the opportunities afforded through adult
education ;

(b) Undertake, as soon as practicable, preparation and
widest possible dissemination of information through suit-
able books and pamphlets based on scientific knowledge
as well as general moral principles contained in the
Charter of the United Nations and the Universal Declara-
tion of Human Rights and designed to expose fallacies of
race theories and to combat prejudices which give rise to
discrimination.

tion 2/9 (Section 4, paragraph (a)) of 21 June 1046' to
make arrangements for the compilation and publication
of a Yearbook on Law and Usage relating to Human
Rights,

Having considered the reports of the fifth and sixth ses-
sions of the Commission on Human Rights relating to the
question of the Yearbook ;

Having considered the Yearbooks on Human Rights for
1946, 1947 and 1948 compiled and published by the Secre-
tary-General ;

Requests the Secretary -General to continue annually the
compilation and publication of the Yearbook on Human
Rights which, beginning as soon as possible but not later
than with the Yearbook for 1951, shall be compiled on the
following general lines :

(a) Each volume of the Yearbook shall contain a com-
pilation concerning the application, and so far as neces-
sary, the evolution in as many countries as possible of
one of the rights or of a group of closely related rights
set forth in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights.
This compilation shall be prepared from information sui>-
plied by Governments and may include digests of this in-
formation prepared by the Secretary-General and shall be
documente<l by reference to legislative enactments and
other authoritative sources;

(b) For this purpose, the Secretary-General shall draw
up a plan for the consideration of the Commission on Hu-
man Rights indicating, for a number of years ahead,
which right or group of rights should be treated in each
year;

(c) The Yearbook shall continue to record international
and national developments concerning human rights
which have taken place during the year, and for this pur-
pose shall contain :

(i) A report on the work of the United Nations in
the field of human rights ;

(ii) Relevant texts or summaries of international
instruments in this field, including decisions of interna-
tional courts and arbitral tribunals ;

(iii) Texts or summaries of or sufficient references
to constitutional and statutory provisions which consti-
tute impoitant developments in the field of human rights
during the j'ear ;

(iv) Summaries of or sufficient references to decisions
of national courts where these decisions constitute im-
portant developments in the field of human rights ;

(d) The Yearbook shall also include texts or sum-
maries of, or suflBcient references to, basic laws on human
rights in respect of Non-Self-Governing and Trust Terri-
tories, together with other relevant texts in respect of such
territories in the same manner as indicated in paragraph
(c) above;

(e) The Yearbook shall include adequate references to
the sources of any texts or summaries which appear in it.
It shall be produced in a form which is easy to handle and
at a moderate price, and the reproduction of constitutional
or statutory texts shall be confined within the limits im-
posed by these requirements ;

The Economic and Social Council,

Having KEQUESTBa) the Secretary-General, in its resolu-

' See Otficial Records of the Economic and Social Coun-
cil, 1st yr., 2d sess., p. 401.

September 25, 1950

491

Invites Governments to supply to the Secretary-General,
either directly or througli correspondents appointed for
this purpose at the request of the Commission on Human
Rights, relevant information on the points noted above.

The Economic and Social Council,

(1) Having consideeed in its broad aspects the draft
Covenant on Human Rights submitted by the Commission
on Human Rishts in accordance with General Assembly
resolution 217 (III),

(2) Having noted the valuable vFOrk done by the Com-
mission with a view to submitting a draft Covenant to the
General Assembly,

(3) Having noted with satisfaction that the draft Cov-
enant includes articles relating to implementation,

(4) Thanking the Commission for the contribution it
has already made towards the accomplishment of a task
of great importance,

(5) Having given consideration to the questions of (a)
the general adequacy of the first eighteen articles; (b)
the desirability of including siiecial articles on the appli-
cation of the Covenant to federal States and to Non-Self-
Governing and Trust Territories; (c) the desirability of
Including articles on economic, social and cultural rights;
and (d) the adequacy of the articles relating to imiile-
mentation,

(6) Concluding that further progress on the Covenant
cannot be made without basic policy decisions on the
above matters being taken by the General Assembly,

(7) Traiuinits the draft Covenant on Human Rights
together with relevant documentation and records of the
discussion in the Council, to the General Assembly at Its
fifth session for consideration with a view to reaching
policy decisions on the points mentioned in paragraph
(5) above;

(8) Requests the Commission on Human Rights to
consider the draft Covenant further, bearing in mind the
policy decisions of the General Assembly and the views
expressed in the Council at its eleventh session, and to
submit a revised draft Covenant to the Council at its
thirteenth session ;

(9) Requests the Secretary-General to transmit this
resolution, together with the records of the debate at the
eleventh session of the Council, to Member States with a
view to obtaining their observations after the Fifth Ses-
sion of the General Assembly to be forwarded to tlie
Commission on Human Rights.

nomic and Social Council of 14 August concerning Korean
relief, there is established hereby a United Nations Korean
Relief Assistance Fund.

The Purpose of the Fund

The Korean Relief Assistance Fund is established for
the purpose of granting assistance to the people of Korea
in accordance with the resolution concerning Korean re-
lief adopted liy the Security Council on 31 July 1950 and
the resolution of the Economic and Social Council of 14
August. The Fund will be credited with all contributions
of monies and all other income in cash received by the
United Nations for the purpose for which the Fund is
established.

Administration of the Fund

Details of the administration of the Fund will be issued
at a later date. For the time being, the following proce-
dure is established for dealing with offers of assistance,
receipts of contributions, and expenditures and transfers
of funds.

1. Offers op Assistance

All offers of assistance for Korean relief received by
the United Nations will be referred to the Executive Office
of the Secretary-General. The Secretary-General will
communicate such offers to the Unified Command.

2. Receipt of Contributions in Cash

Cash contributions shall be deposited in an appropriate
bank account opened by the Secretary-General in accord-
ance with normal United Nations practices. An official
receipt will be issued for all cash contributions received.
Pending further arrangements, receipt may be ofiicially
acknowledged only by officers of the Bureau of Finance
who have been designated to sign official receipts for
monies received for other purposes.

3. Payments From the Fund

Cash will be paid from the Fund as ordered by tlie
Secretary-General after consultation with the Unified
('ommand. The Director of Finance will effect such pay-
ments upon written orders of the officer designated for
the purpose by the Secretary-General.

Republic of Indonesia Established

The former Republic of the United States of
Indonesia has been transformed into a single, uni-
tarian state and from August 17, 1950, will be
known as the Republic of Indonesia.

Korean Relief Assistance Fund
Established

U.N. doc. ST/AFS/SGB/90
Dated Sept. 8. 1950

The Secretary-Oeneral sent the members of the Staff of

the United Nations the following bulletin:

In accordance with the provisions of Provisional Finan-
cial Regulation 35, and pur.suant to the Security Council
resolution of 31 July 1950 and the resolution of the Eco-

Letters of Credence

Iran

The newly appointed Ambassador of Iran,
Nasrollah Entezam, presented his credentials to
the President on September 15. For texts of the
Ambassador's remarks and the President's reply,
see Department of State press release 950 of
Se]itember 15.

492

Department of State Bulletin

Progress on Point 4

hy Capits M. Waynich, Acting Administrator
Ojfice for Teclinical Cooperation and Development ^

Eecently members of the American Armed
Forces fighting in Korea employed for the first
time a new rocket which they promptly nick-
named "Tiny Tim" because it packs tremendous
jjower in relation to its size. A new enterprise in
foreign affairs may be compared with that rocket
because it too is intended to have an impact out of
all proportion to its size.

Tliis enterprise is the Point 4 Program through
which we and other free countries will offer our
knowledge and skills to help other peoiiles achieve
better living conditions for themselves. Point 4
will cost us 341/2 million dollars this first year.
That is less than one-tenth of one percent of the
36 billion dollar omnibus appropriation bill
which President Truman signed last week. Yet,
tliis relatively small amount of money will set
in motion a great cooperative movement in which
many nations will contribute their skills and re-
sources to a joint effort to make the world a better
habitation for its people.

At a time when we are having to spend billions
to rebuild our military defenses and when Ameri-
can troops are fighting under the banner of the
United Nations to put down aggression in Korea,
it may be asked why we should concern oureelves
with the way other people live in faraway places.
The answer is basically very simple.

Need for Point 4

We and other free people of the world have been
forced, whether we like it or not, to meet Com-
munist aggression wherever it is applied through-
out the world. In some places, this aggression
takes the form of armed invasion. But in other
places, it takes the form of trading on the natural
desires of an oppressed people for a better life.
We must meet that by helping those people to at-
tain a better life by peaceful and democratic ways

' An address made before the Chamber of Commerce,
Cedar Rapids, Iowa, on Sept. 14, 1950, and released to the
press on the same date.

instead of by the false hope of Communist ways.
That better life must be accomplished in part
through the Point 4 Program.

If we can show these peoples what we really
stand for, what our true motives are — if we can
prove to them that the methods and institutions
of a free society provide the environment that
liberates man's spirit and brincfs his talents to full
flower — then we can hope they will turn away
from the false promises of communism. To do
this will i-equire more than words — though words
as well as deeds are important. Point 4 can be-
come a tangible, living expression of American
democracy and what it can mean in the daily lives
of other peoples.

This program must be our answer to a people's
aspiration for a better life. They must see with
their own eyes and experience in their own lives
what democracy can do for them and their fam-
ilies.

Point 4 is the long-range answer to communism.
It looks beyond the present struggle to the con-
tinuing task of creating peace and prosperity for
the i^eojDle who want both. It is this affirmative,
constructive value of Point 4 that has given new
hope and courage to people in many parts of the
world.

The potentialities of such a development can be
glimpsed by recalling something of the history
of our own country. We are all aware of the great
part played in the development of our country
by the millions of immigrants who crossed the
Atlantic in successive waves. We cannot overlook
the fact that these people brought with them more
than the manpower that cleared and cultivated the
land, and built the railroads, the ports, the cities,
and industries of America.

They brought with them their skills and tech-
niques, which also became invaluable contributions
to the building of a new society. And despite the
traditional picture of the penniless immigrant who
crossed the Atlantic in a crowded hold, many of

September 25, 1950

493

them brought some capital, which they put to
work creating new industries, new products, new
opportunities.

From the well-to-do who stayed in Europe came
more capital for investment in the New World.
Until after the outbreak of AVorld War I, the
United States was a net importer of capital. It
was the manpower, the skills and craftsmanship,
and the capital that flowed to the United States
from Europe, as well as the abundant natural re-
sources and the environment of opportunity, that
helped make our country great.

Today, the United States stands in the same
general relationship to the underdeveloped and
aspiring countries of the world as nineteenth cen-
tury Europe stood to our country when it was
young. There are important differences between
opening up a new, sparsely inhabited continent
and sparking a rebirth of hope and activity in
countries some of which are far older than our
own. Yet, the parallel is close enough to open our
eyes to the immense possibilities inherent in the
challenge of the underdeveloped areas.

Problems in Underdeveloped Countries

In many of these countries, the problem is not
to open up physical frontiers but to help people
break out of the vicious circle in which they are
imprisoned. They are sick and hungry and miser-
able because they are desperately poor; they are
poor because they produce too little food and too
few goods; they produce too little because they are
undernourished, and sickly, and illiterate, and be-
cause they lack "know-how" and capital.

How can this self-defeating circle be broken?
President Truman gave the answer in his inau-
gural address:

Greater production is the key to prosperity and peace.
And the key to greater production is a wider and more
vigorous application of modern scientific and technical
knowledge.

This is the key which the Point 4 Program offers
to these people.

Even with such help, the peoples of the under-
developed areas cannot pull themselves up to
higher standards of living overnight. This is a
long-range undertaking. But tliis should not dis-
courage us; our own high standard of living was
not achieved overnight either. Because the need
is so great and because economic development takes
time, the sooner we start, the better.

Program Benefits to U.S.

Some people ask, "What do we get out of it?"
Aside from sound humanitarian and political rea-
sons for undertaking the Point 4 Program, we
also stand to gain much in a material sense. If
there ever was a case of casting our bread upon
the water and having it return to us, this is it.

We are a trading nation, doing the largest ex-
port-import business in the world. Every sizable
increase in purchasing power in other countries is

494

a boost to American business. Before the war, we
sold the other developed countries $5.80 worth of
goods per person every year. We sold the under-
develoised countries only 700 worth of goods per
person. Canada, with only 12 million people,
bought nearly as much from the United States as
the 120 million people in the Latin American
countries did. The answer is purchasing power,
which comes from productivity, the real basis of
all wealth.

It does not take much imagination to see what
even a moderate rise in the purchasing power of
the vast underdeveloped areas could mean to us.
In 1939, the per capita income of the 70 million
people of Indonesia was equivalent to 22 dollars
in our money. That gave the whole nation of
Indonesia an aggregate income of about a billion
and a half dollars a year. In that same period, the
per capita income of Bulgaria, one of the poorer
European countries, was equivalent to 109 dollars
a year.

If the standard of living of the Indonesians had
been raised — not to the same level as that of the
United States, or Great Britain, or Canada but just
high enough on the scale to equal Bulgaria — this
would have multiplied the national income of the
Indonesians 5 times and given them 71/2 billion
dollars to spend annually instead of a billion and
a half. This is only one example of what higher
standards of living can mean in purchasing power
and, consequently, in world trade.

Some people ask if, in helping other peoples de-
velop their economies, we are not creating com-
petition that will ruin our own producers. I think
we can dispose of that fear by turning the ques-
tion around. Would we be better or worse off if the
liighly industralized countries, such as Canada and
Great Britain, which make the same things we do,
suddenly ceased being industralized countries and
dropped to the economic level of the underdevel-
oped areas ? All the records show that the highly
developed countries, with plenty of purchasing
power, are the best customei-s and, except when
democracy fails, the best neighbors. The faster
the underdeveloped areas can be developed, the
more real wealth will be produced to enter into
world trade and the more money other people will
have to spend at the mai'ket place.

This is what I mean when I say that technical
skills and capital, accumulated through the genius
and industry of many peoples, if applied in the
underdeveloped countries in partnership with their
people, can stimulate the greatest increase in pro-
duction and trade in world history. The opportu-
nities are there, and the techniques for doing the
job are already at hand.

Our own Government has learned much about
these techniques during the last 10 yeai's, during
which time we have been carrying on technical
assistance projects on a limited scale, mainly in
Latin America. This trial period has proved that
technical assistance is effective, is inexpensive, ^nd
brings benefits to us as well as the people we aid.

Department of State Bulletin

Technical Assistance and Its Operation

Technical assistance is a rather abstract name
for a very practical commonplace thing. It means
teaching people how to do things tliey did not
know how to do before. It is the age-old process of
education— of transferring knowledge and skill
from one person to another — in this case, specific
kinds of knowledge and skills that make for better
living, and with the added difference and difficulty
that the transfer takes place among people of
many different nationalities.

Iowa is a great agricultural State, and I imagine
that the State agricultural experiment stations
and the State extension service are among the
busiest and best-known institutions. The county
agent takes the knowledge of the latest methods
worked out at the experiment station to the far-
mer on the land and helps him apply this scientific
knowledge in his own operations. The county
agent is giving the farmer technical assistance.
The result is shown in our abundant food supply.

This is the basic principle of Point 4, which can
be applied in a great number of ways. The teach-
ing of better agricultural methods is one of the
most important, because although more than three-
fourths of the people in underdeveloped countries
live on the land, they do not produce enough food
to feed themselves adequately.

Under Point 4, we will send American agri-
cultural technicians abroad to demonstrate im-
proved fanning methods — which often must be
modified to meet local conditions. We will send
public health doctors and nurses and sanitary en-
gineers to show the people how to practice elemen-
tary health habits, combat controllable diseases
such as malaria, and install safe water supply and
sewerage systems. We will send American educa-
tors to help the teachers of other countries organ-
ize better methods of overcoming illiteracy, which
reaches the appalling rate of 90 percent in some
countries. We will continue to bring intelligent,
ambitious people from those countries to the
United States for technical training.

This is what we are talking about when we
speak of teclinical assistance — except that these
are cold and abstract terms, when we are really
dealing with the stuff of life itself. What we are
really talking about is birth and death, hunger and
food, sickness and health. We are talking about
the basic human needs and desires that are the
same all over the world. We are talking about
how to make life better, easier, happier. Since
this is what Point 4 means, how can it help but
establish a common bond among the peoples who
work together in this way ?

Point 4 is made up of two interrelated parts —
technical assistance and capital investment.

EXPENDITURE OF FUNDS

The technical assistance program has now been
authorized by Congress, which appropriated 341^

million dollars for that purpose. Of that amount,
we will contribute 12 million dollars to the tech-
nical assistance program of the United Nations.
Forty-nine other countries together have contrib-
uted another 8 million dollars, making a 20 mil-
lion-dollar program to be carried on by the United
Nations and the specialized agencies.

One million dollars will be contributed to coop-
erative programs planned by the Organization of
American States and regional bodies such as the
Caribbean Commission and the South Pacific Com-
mission. The Department of Commerce will use
400 thousand dollars to provide detailed informa-
tion on investment opportunities to American
businessmen.

Of the remainder, 6.6 million dollars will be used
to continue and expand technical assistance pi'oj-
ects already being carried on by United States
Government agencies in other countries, princi-
pally in Latin America. This leaves 141/2 million
dollars to initiate new projects and administer
the whole program.

Technical assistance is not only one of the least
expensive and most effective ways of helping other
peoples help themselves but also every dollar we
put into this program will be increased by another
dollar and a half contributed by other countries.
Technical assistance will be provided by the
United Nations, other international organizations
and by the United States directly only to those
countries requesting such aid. Each recipient
country will pay pait of the cost, usually in her
own currency and for local labor and materials.
Through the pooling of these contributions for
cooperative projects, total expenditures for the
technical assistance program from all sources are
expected by next July 1 to be running at the an-
nual rate of 85 million dollars.

Now that our appropriation is in hand, we
have sent telegrams to the United States Embassy
in every country likely to desire technical as-
sistance from this Govermnent. Our Ambassadors
are being authorized to receive requests for spe-
cific technical assistance projects from the govern-
ments to which they are accredited, to discuss these
projects with the officials of the other governments,
and to forward these requests to Washington.

HANDLING REQUESTS FOR AID

Wlien the requests are received by the State De-
partment, they will be carefully studied from
every standi^oint. We will determine whether a
specific proposal conforms to the purposes of Point
4, and whether the country involved can make good
use of the kind of assistance requested. We will
see whether the proposed project duplicates or con-
flicts with one being planned by the United Na-
tions or some other international agency.

When we decide that a request for a project
should be granted, we will negotiate an agreement
specifying the responsibilities assumed by each

September 25, 7950

495

government and the pi'oportion of the costs to be
paid by each. When the agreement is approved,
money for the project will be made available from
the Point 4 appropriation and the appropriate
agency of the United States Government will as-
sign technicians to go to the other country and do
the job.

Persons selected for these assignments abroad,
whether already in Govermnent service or re-
cruited from outside the Government, will be
chosen not only for professional competency but
also for their character, personality, and ability
to work with the people of other countries and to
represent the United States abroad. Before they
leave this country, they will be given special orien-
tation and training courses at Washington to fit
them for their specific assignments.

Wlien they arrive at their post abroad, they
will report to the American EmlDassy, get together
with the people of the other country with whom
they are to work, and proceed to carry out the
project. They will be responsible to the American
Ambassador or Minister while at their post and
will receive technical guidance and backstopping
from the agency at Washington which sent them
out to the field. They will make periodic reports
on the progress of their work and the results
accomplished.

Even before the appropriation was finally ap-
jjroved, we had received requests for technical as-
sistance on about 60 projects. These came from
govermnents which were already receiving tech-
nical assistance from us, or which "jumped the
gim" and did not wait for formalities.

We can now promptly ajjprove the continuation
of a number of existing projects and expect soon
to be able to approve new projects at a gradually
increasing rate. American technicians are leaving
the counti-y every few days to carry on existing
projects, and this number will soon be greatly
increased.

With the funds made available by Congress for
Point 4, we should be able to send more than 1,000
American technicians abroad during this first
year on technical assistance missions. We also
expect to bring more than 1,000 people from other
countries to the United States for technical train-
ing. The Government also will contract with
private American business firms to carry out in
other countries technical assistance operations for
which they are specially qualified and to share in
the training in this country of technicians from
abroad.

Capital Investment

But something more than technical assistance
is often needed to reach the desired goal, and that
"something more" is the investment of capital.
In some cases, capital for economic development
projects may justifiably be provided by govern-
ment institutions, such as the Export-Import

Bank of AVashington and the World Bank. But
President Truman has made it clear that the bulk
of the capital needed for investment in the under-
developed areas is to come from private sources.

The fact is that conditions in many underdevel-
oped areas are not favorable to private investment
at this time. Some of these adverse conditions
can be corrected in time by the use of teclmical
assistance. Our own experience 50 yeai's ago in
Cuba, Panama, and the Philippines showed that
after health and sanitation conditions had been
cleaned up, and economic and social conditions
improved, private capital came in and created new
enterprises, new jobs, and new opportunities. One
of the great values of technical assistance is that
it helps create the environment conducive to the
increased flow of investment capital.

But there are governmental as well as natural
barriers to the investment of capital in some un-
derdeveloped countries. Some governments im-
pose stringent and onerous restrictions on foreign
capital which discourage investment. Exchange
difficulties create additional problems.

The State Department is working in various
ways to reduce the factors which discourage
greater American investment abroad. We are
negotiating new commercial treaties with a num-
ber of countries which contain provisions designed
to insure fair treatment both for American in-
vestors and the countries where they make their
investments.

But this is at best a slow process. As a means of
quickening the flow of American capital abroad,
the administration has recommended that as part
of the Point 4 Program the Export-Import Bank
be authorized to make limited guaranties against
extraordinary risks to which foreign investments
are subject. It is proposed that, for a fee, the bank
guarantee investments abroad against expropria-
tion without adequate compensation and against
inability to convert investments and profits from
other currencies back into dollars. Such invest-
ments would not be guaranteed against ordinary
business risks.

Our Government is breaking new gi-ound in
proposing such guaranties, and it will move cau-
tiously in seeking a formula that will prove satis-
factory both to the American investor and to
foreign govermnents. We want to ensure the
American investor adequate protection and fair
treatment, but we also must avoid demanding
special privileges for Americans investing abroad.

We hope that Congress will approve satisfac-
tory legislation that will permit our Government
to go ahead with limited guaranties of foreign
investments. When capital investment is coupled
with technical assistance in a well rounded Point 4
Prpgram, we will have an instrument of foreign
policy that will not only serve the national interest
of the United States but will serve humanity in the
building of a better world.

496

Department of State Bulletin

Methods of Financing Economic Development of Underdeveloped Countries

D.N. doc. E/1843
Adopted Aug. 12, 1950

The Economic and Social Council,

Taking note of the report of the fourth session of the
Sub-Commission on Economic Development (E/CN.l/SO),
the Experts' Report on National and International Meas-
ures for Full Employment (E/1584), the report of the
fourth session of the Economic and Employment Commis-
sion (E/1356, part VIII) ; and,

Considering the studies prepared by the Secretary-
General in pursuance of Council resolutions 179 (VIII)
and 222 D (IX)

A. WITH THE OBJECT OF KEEPING UNDER CONTIN-
UING REVIEW PROBLEMS OF FINANCING ECO-
NOailC DEVELOPMENT

1. Recommends that the Economic Employment and De-
velopment Commission undertake to study and keep under
revievi? the nature and magnitude of the problems involved
in financing the economic development of under-developed
countries, and make recommendations thereon to the Coun-
cil from time to time ;

B. WITH THE OBJECT OF ENCOURAGING EFFEC-
TIVE METHODS OF MOBILIZING DOMESTIC CAPI-
TAL FOR THE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT IN UNDER-
DEVELOPED COUNTRIES AND

2. Having regard to the necessity of mobilizing the domes-
tic financial resources of under-developed countries to the
fullest possible degree either independently or in con-
junction with any foreign funds which may be available
for economic development,

3. Considering the importance of promoting the self-
generating character of economic development, which re-
quires reinvestment as far as possible of increases of in-
come following upon development,

4. Considering the desirability of utilizing and pooling
the credit standing of established industrial enterprises
and financial institutions for facilitating the import of
foreign capital,

5. Draws to the attention of Member Governments the
report prepared by the group of experts convened by the
Secretary-General ' pursuant to Council resolution 222 B
(IX) in which various views and suggestions concerning
methods of increasing and channelling domestic savings
are discussed ; and

6. Commends to the attention of the Governments con-

' U.N. doc. E/1562.
September 25, 7950

906051—50 3

cerned the desirability of considering the formation in
their countries of banking syndicates or development banks
with the participation of domestic banks and industrial
enterprises as a means of attracting and channelling for-
eign investments into essential projects.

C. WITH THE OBJECT OP ENCOURAGING EFFEC-
TIVE METHODS OF INCREASING THE FLOW OF
INTERNATIONAL CAPITAL FOR THE ECONOMIC
DEVELOPMENT OF UNDER-DEVELOPED COUN-
TRIES AND

7. Recoqnizino that :

(a) A more rapid increase of production in under-de-
veloped countries is essential for raising the level of
productive employment and the living standards of their
populations and for the growth of the world economy as
a whole ;

(b) The domestic financial resources of under-developed
countries together with the international flow of capital
for investment have not been sufficient to assure the de-
sired rate of economic development; and

(c) Such accelerated economic development of under-
developed countries requires not only a more effective and
sustained mobilization of domestic savings but also an
expanded and more stable flow of foreign capital invest-
ment;

8. Recommends that :

(a) Governments establish through domestic measures
and, if necessary, through bilateral or multilateral agree-
ments, conditions to encourage participation of foreign
private capital in desirable economic developments either
in the form of direct investment or in the form of invest-
ment in bonds of Governments or of private and public
corporations ;

(b) Governments of the more developed countries seek
to encourage by appropriate means the investment of
private capital by their nationals in under-developed
countries ;

(c) More of the developed countries take early action,
in the light of their balance of payments position, to
grant permission to the International Bank for Recon-
struction and Development to utilize increasing parts of
the IS per cent of their subscriptions which have been
pledged to be payable in domestic currencies, for such
loan transactions as the Bank may be undertaking and
which involve a demand for such currencies, and consider
granting permission to the Bank to place its bond issues
in their financial markets ; and

497

(d) Governments extend progressively, so far as their
balance of payments position and prospects permit, tlie
principle of untied lending to all governmentally con-
trolled or guaranteed foreign lending;

9. Eecognizing that:

(a) Economic development requires the execution not
only of self-liquidating projects but also of projects in
such fields as transport, power, communications, public
health, educational institutions and housing, which, while
not always fully self-liquidating, are justified by reason
of their indirect effect on national productivity and na-
tional income ;

(b) With respect to financing of economic development,
there is no direct logical connection between the imme-
diate expenditures in local and foreign currencies on the
one hand and the desirable amount of domestic and for-
eign financing, respectively, on the other ; and

10. Taking note of the constructive statements made by
the representative of the International Bank for Recon-
struction and Development at the eleventh session of the
Council, and welcoming, as being of special importance
in relation to the problem of economic development of
under-developed countries, his assurance that, in consid-
ering applications for loans, it is the determined policy
of the Bank to examine the size, composition and financial
implications of a borrowing country's investment pro-
gramme as a whole, as well as the details of selected
projects ;

11. Recommends that :

(a) The under-developed countries give greater atten-
tion to the formulation of integrated programmes of de-
velopment and to the planning of loan projects for
presentation to the International Bank for Reconstruc-
tion and Development so as to facilitate the Bank's opera-
tions and thereby accelerate the rate of economic
development ;

(b) Governmental and intergovernmental credit or-
ganizations which can assist in the economic development
of under-developed countries consider means by which the
funds which are at their disposal can be used more effec-
tively to help carry out integrated investment programmes,
designed to carry forward in a co-ordinated manner de-
velopment projects in different branches of the country's
economy, and in general to accelerate the rate of economic
development of under-developed countries;

(c) Institutions providing international loans, in con-
sidering the amount of external finance required in con-
nection with any project, give appropriate consideration
not only to the direct foreign costs but also to the foreign
costs which tend to arise indirectly from the additional
claim which the projects make on local labour and other
resources, and from the additional incomes thus created ;
and

(d) These institutions make any such loans at rates
of interest and on terms of amortization designed to place

the smallest feasible burden on the exchange availabilities
of the under-developed countries, consistent with the
maintenance of these institutions as self-supporting
entities ;

D. WITH THE OBJECT OF FACILITATING FURTHER
STUDIES IN THE FIELD OF INTERNATIONAL
INVESTMENT AND PRICES OF PRIMARY PRODUCTS
AND

12. Considering the great importance for the promotion
of private foreign investments of assurances of ability to
transfer earnings and withdraw capital in the currency
in which the original investment has been made ; and

13. Considering, furthermore, that such assurances of
ability to transfer raise a number of technical difficulties,
some of them closely related to the rights and obligations
of members of the International Monetary Fund ;

14. Expresses the opinion that the practical conditions
under which such assurances can be made effective have
not so far been sufiieiently examined at the technical
level ;

15. Requests Member Governments to provide the Secre-
tary-General and the International Monetary Fund with
such statistical and other data as may be necessary for
the carrying out of the studies referred to below;

16. Recommends that the International Monetary Fund
be requested to assemble and analyze, in consultation with
the International Bank for Reconstruction and Develop-
ment, and when appropriate with other interested inter-
national agencies, the statistical and other data bearing
upon the capacity of under-developed countries to service
investments of foreign capital, with special reference to:

(a) The proportion of the foreign exchange receipts of
such countries currently absorbed by services on foreign
investment as compared with past periods ;

(b) The proportion of foreign exchange receipts of
more developed countries which, in earlier stages of their
development, has been absorbed by services on foreign
investment in these countries ;

(c) Statutory and administrative measures designed to
provide for servicing foreign investment in times of ex-
change stringency ; and

17. Requests the Secretary-General, in co-operation with
the interested international agencies and within the re-
sources available, to undertake a study of the relation of
fluctuations in the prices of primary products to the
ability of under-developed countries to obtain foreign
exchange.

Correction

In the BuLi^ETiN of August 28, 1950, page
334, the head reading "Latvian Expression
on the Korean Situation Acknowledged"
should read "Baltic States' Expression on
tlie Korean Situation Acknowledged."

498

Department of State Bulletin

Administration of the Act for International Development

[Released to the press hy the White House September 8]

STATEMENT BY THE PRESIDENT

I have today signed an Executive order dele-

fating to the Secretary of State the responsibility
or carrying out the Point 4 Program autliorized
by the Congress in the Act for International De-
velopment. Funds were provided in the Appro-
priation Act signed September 6, 1950.

The United States, in undertaking the Point 4
Program, is seeking to help other peoples help
themselves by extending to them the benefits of
our store of technical knowledge. This program
will provide means needed to translate our words
of friendship into deeds. All activities will be on
a cooperative basis, and projects will be under-
taken by the United States only at the request of
other governments.

Communist propaganda holds that the free na-
tions are incapable of providing a decent standard
of living for the millions of people in the under-
developed areas of the earth. The Point 4 Pro-
gram will be one of our principal ways of denion-
sti-ating the complete falsity of that charge. By
patient, diligent eflFort, levels of education can be
raised and standards of health improved to enable
the people of such areas to make better use of their
resources. Their land can be made to yield better
crops by the use of improved seeds and more mod-
ern methods of cultivation. Roads and other
transportation and communication facilities can
be developed to enable products to be moved to
areas where they are needed most. Rivers can be
harnessed to furnish water for farms and cities
and electricity for factories and homes.

The fii"st year's appropriation of 34.5 million
dollars for the Point 4 Program is not a large
sum in comparison with the need. Yet, this money,
together with the contributions of other countries,
will have a cumulative effect in promoting the well-
being of underdeveloped areas. United States
money in this initial phase will be used to a large
extent to provide tecluiical assistance by sending
experts abroad and to bring qualified trainees to
this countiy. The participating countries them-
selves will supply local personnel and additional
funds to help complete the projects.

In the Executive order, I have provided for the
active participation of all Departments and
agencies of the Federal Government whose facil-
ities and experience can contribute to the pro-
gram. I am confident, too, that it will be possible
to draw upon the great body of technical experts in
State and municipal organizations, educational
and research institutions, j^ublic service founda-
tions, and agricultural, labor, business, and other
private groups as their special skills are needed.

Part of the funds appropriated by the Congress
for Point 4 are to be devoted to the United Nations
Technical Assistance Program, which is supported
by contributions from other United Nations mem-
bers as well. The bilateral arrangements between
the United States and other governments will be
supplemented by multilateral arrangements under
United Nations auspices. As this cooperative
movement progresses and the United Nations
program becomes more fully established, we antic-
ipate that more and more of the work will be
carried out under United Nations auspices and
that there will then be a world-wide effort to fur-
ther the economic and social progress of all
peoples.

EXECUTIVE ORDER 10159 <

By virtue of the authority vested in me by the Act for
International Development, approved June 5, 1950 (Title
IV of Public Law 535, 81st Congress), hereinafter referred
to as the act, and as President of the United States, it
is hereby ordered as follows :

1. The Secretary of State is authorized and directed
(a) to perform the functions and exercise the powers and
authority vested in the President by tlie act, except those
so vested by section 413 (a) thereof, and except those
so vested by section 409 thereof except as provided below,
and (b), in coojieration with the heads of other appropri-
ate departments and agencies and wholly-owned corpora-
tions of the Government, to plan and execute the programs
authorized by the act.

2. For the purpose of promoting the effective implemen-
tation of the act, the heads of all departments and agen-
cies the participation of whicli is requested by the
Secretary of State are hereby authorized and directed to

' 15 Fed. Reg. 6103.

September 25, 1950

499

provide for such participation to the maximum extent
consistent witli law.

3. There is established pursuant to section 409 of the
act the International Development Advisory Board. The
members of the Board shall serve for terms of two years.
The Board shall meet at the request of the Secretary of
State to advise and consult with him on general policy
matters. The Secretary of State is authorized to create
and appoint such additional committees in special fields
of activity as he may find, after consultation with the
heads of other appropriate departments and agencies, to
be necessary and desirable, in accordance with the
provisions of section 409 of the act.

4. The Secretary of State shall establish an Interde-
partmental Advisory Council on Technical Cooperation,
to be composed of the heads of participating departments
and agencies or their representatives. The Council shall
be advisory to the Secretary of State.

U.S.-Union of Burma Sign
Agreement for Economic Cooperation

[Released to the press September 13]

David McKendree Key, United States Amtassador to
the Republic of the Union of Burma, made the following
statement upon the signing of the bilateral agreement for
economic cooperation between the United States and
Burma at Rangoon, September IS.

It affords me great pleasure to sign on behalf
of my Government this economic cooperation
agreement between the United States of America
and the Eepublic of the Union of Burma. The
purpose of this agreement, clearly set forth in
the preamble, is to assist Burma to achieve those
sound economic conditions and stable interna-
tional economic relationships so necessary for
the maintenance of individual liberty, free insti-
tutions, and independence. Under the agreement,
the United States is prepared to furnish economic
and teclmical assistance toward these ends.

But back of this purpose there is something more
personal. It is friend speaking to friend in a
tangible way. As recently as September 2, Presi-
dent Triunan said :

We want peace not only for its own sake, but because
we want all peoples of the world, including ourselves,
to be free to devote their full energies to making their
lives richer and happier. We shall give what help we
can to make this universal wish come true.

The detailed working out of the economic coop-
eration program will be decided by mutual agree-
ment between the Government of Burma and the
Government of the United States. The nature of
the projects to be carried out will be determined
on the basis of the proposals put forth by the
Government of Burma. In playing her part, the
United States can provide physical equipment and
technical experience to be applied to recovery, re-
habilitation, and economic development in a wide
variety of fields, including agriculture, mining,
transportation, communications, medical, and gen-

eral health projects. The program can also in-
clude the provision of consumer goods of
importance to general welfare.

The United States Government will look for-
ward to receiving from the Government of Burma
her detailed proposals and is fully confident that
aided by our joint efforts, Burma will move
steadily along tlie road to recovery and economic
strength.

Mr. Minister, I should like to express my warm-
est appreciation for the sincere, frank and fiiendly
manner in wliich representatives of the Govern-
ment of Burma have participated with represent-
atives of the United States in working out the
provisions of the agreement. The spirit of these
negotiations augurs well for the future coopera-
tion of our Governments in carrying out tliis
agreement.

U.S.-Panama Sign Road Convention
for Security of Panama Canal

[Released to the press September 15]

The United States Ambassador to Panama, Mon-
nett B. Davis, and the Foreign Minister of the Ee-
public of Panama, Dr. Carlos N. Brin, on Septem-
ber 14, signed a convention on behalf of their Gov-
ernments which provides for the maintenance and
use of certain highways essential to the security
and maintenance of the Panama Canal. Under
the terms of the convention, the Government of
the United States undertakes to maintain the stra-
tegic Boyd-Roosevelt, or TransTsthmian High-
way and, in return, the Republic of Panama grants
to tlie United States the free use of all public
roads within Panama.

The signing was accompanied by an exchange of
diplomatic notes establisliing a modus vivendi for
the interim period until the convention enters into
force. The accompanying notes terminate point
V of the general relations agreement signed with
Panama on May 18, 1942, which committed the
United States to the payment of one-third of the
total annual maintenance cost of all Panamanian
roads used periodically or frequently by the
Armed Forces of the United States. Also, the im-
mediate maintenance of the Boyd-Roosevelt High-
way by the United States and permission for the
United States to use immediately and without cost
all public roads in Panama are made possible by
the exchange of notes.

The convention will be submitted to the Sen-
ate of the United States for its advice and con-
sent to ratification by the President and to the
National Assembly of Panama. It may be termi-
nated by eitlier Government upon 1 year's notice
after an initial 20-year period.

500

Department of State Bulletin

Tributes to General Smuts

Message From the President

[Released to the press September 12]

On Scpteml>cr 11, President Truman sent the following
messayo to the Prime Minister and Minister for External
Affairs of the Vnion of South Africa, D. F. Malan.

With the death of General Smuts a truly gi'eat
leader has passed from the world. He has a firm
place in history as a philosopher, soldier, and
statesman. We in the United States join with the
Government and people of the Union of South
Africa in mourning his loss. Please convey my
personal sympathy to Airs. Smuts and the other
members of his family.

Message From Secretary Acheson

[Released to the press September IS]

The follou-ing telegram was sent hy Secretary Acheson
to Dr. Daniel Francois Malan, Prime Minister of the Union
of South Africa, on September 12.

The death of General Smuts — a great soldier-
statesman, a great citizen, and a great man — is a
tragic loss to all. General Smuts has stood out
through the long years of world unrest as a steady,
courageous, and inspired leader. The troubled
spirits of men had become accustomed to a mo-
ment's peace, a clearer vision, a new courage from
his actions and his wisdom. These were the rare
gifts he gave not only to his own countrymen but
also to all those who liold firm to the hope of a free
world. My deepest sympathy goes to Mrs. Smuts
and to the people of the Union of South Africa.

President Signs Trade Proclamation;
Agreement With Mexico Terminated

[Released to the press September 8]

The President, on September 6, 1950, signed a
proclamation (No. 2901) giving effect to the termi-
nation as of December 31, 1950, of the trade agree-
ment between the United States and Mexico con-
cluded in 1942.^ The termination was jointly
agreed to by the two Governments through an ex-
change of notes on June 23, 1950. This exchange
of notes was announced by the Department of
State on that date.^ At the same time, there was
made public a list of the changes in United States

' 15 Fed. Reg. 6063.

' Bulletin of Aug. 7, 1950, p. 215.

import duties which will occur as a result of the
termination of the agreement.

The proclamation provides for the tariff treat-
ment wliich, after termination of the agreement
with Mexico, will become effective with regard to
certain petroleum products under the provisions
of the 1939 trade agreement with Venezuela and
under the General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade. In addition, for some articles on which
the general United States tariff rates will be in-
creased as a result of the termination, the procla-
mation specifies the increased preferential rates
applicable to products of Cuba to which prefer-
ential tariff treatment applies.

The proclamation also puts into effect a tech-
nical revision of the United States concession on
Irish potatoes, contained in schedule XX of the
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade. This
revision was made under a waiver obtained by the
United States at the fourth session of the con-
tracting parties to the agreement in April 1950.

Under the original concession, a so-called nor-
mal tariff quota of 1 million bushels of potatoes
per marketing year was permitted entry into the
United States at a rate of 37i/4 cents per 100
pounds, reduced from the 1930 rate of 75 cents per
100 pounds. In addition, the reduced rate would
have applied to imports of potatoes equal to the
number of bushels by which the domestic produc-
tion, as estimated by the Department of Agricul-
ture on September 1, was less than 350 million
bushels. The revised concession would permit re-
duced-duty imports, in addition to the 1-million-
bushel quota, of as many bushels of potatoes as the
estimated production falls short of 335 million
bushels. The revised quota provision will apply
only during the marketing year beginning Sep-
tember 15, 1950.

Unless domestic potato production for 1950 as
estimated by the Department of Agriculture as of
September 1 is below 335 million bushels, no pota-
toes except the so-called normal 1-million-bushel
quota may be imported at the reduced rate during
the coming marketing year. Domestic potato pro-
duction for 1950 was estimated, as of August 1,
at 407,342,000 bushels; the September 1 estimate
has not yet been published.

Americans Visiting^Abroad

Twenty-four American students will leave for
Holland to study on fellowships under the Ful-
bright Act. The group will fly from New York
on September 14 and 15. Prior to their departure,
they will meet at New York for an orientation pro-
gram arranged by the Department of State and
Institute of International Education.

Sepfemfaer 25, 7950

501

Treaty of Friendship, Commerce and Economic Development
Between the United States and Uruguay'

The United States of America and the Oriental Republic
of Uruguay, desirous of strengthening the bonds of peace
and friendship traditionally existing between them and
of encouraging closer cultural, economic, and commercial
relations between their peoples, and being cognizant of
the contributions which may be made toward these ends
by arrangements which facilitate and encourage, on bases
mutually advantageous, cultural interchange, industrial
and economic development, financial and technical coop-
eration, the investment of capital, and commercial inter-
course, have resolved to conclude a Treaty of Friendship,
Commerce and Economic Development, based in general
upon the principles of national and of most-favored-nation
treatment unconditionally accorded, and for that purpose
have appointed as their Plenipotentiaries,

The President of the United States of America :
Christian M. Ravndal, Ambassador Extraordinary

and Plenipotentiary of the United States of America

to the Oriental Republic of Uruguay ; and

The President of the Oriental Republic of Uruguay :
His Excellency Dr. Don Cfisar Charlone, Minister of

Foreign Affairs ;
who, having communicated to each other their full powers,
found to be in due form, have agreed upon the following
Articles :

Article I

1. Nationals of either High Contracting Party shall be
permitted to enter the territories of the other Party and
to remain therein: (a) for the purpose of carrying on
trade between the territories of the two Parties and for
the Purpose of engaging in related commercial activities ;
and (b) for other purposes, subject to the immigration
laws.

2. Nationals of either Party, within the territories of
the other Party, shall be permitted: (a) to travel therein
freely, and to reside at places of their choice; (b) to
enjoy liberty of conscience; (c) to hold both private and
public religious services; and (d) to gather and to trans-
mit material for dissemination to the public abroad, and
otherwise to communicate with other persons inside and
outside such territories by mail, telegraph and other means
open to general public nse.

3. For the purpose of strengthening the friendly rela-

' The Senate advice and consent to ratification was
given on Aug. 9, lOnO. Printed from S. Ex. D, 81st Cong.,
2d sess.

tious and understanding between the two countries by
encouraging mutual contacts between their peoples, the
best facilities practicable shall be made available for
travel by tourists, for the distribution of information
for tourists, and with respect to the entry, sojourn and
departure of visitors.

4. The provisions of the present Article and of Article
XVII shall be subject to the right of either Party to apply
measures that are necessary to maintain public order and
necessary to protect the public health, morals and safety.

Article II

1. The nationals of either High Contracting Party
within the territories of the other Party shall receive the
most constant protection and security, and shall be ac-
corded, in lilie circumstances and conditions, treatment,
protection and security no less favorable than are ac-
corded to the nationals of such other Party for the pro-
tection of their persons, rights, and property. This rule
shall be applicable also to institutions, juridical persons,
and associations.

2. If, within the territories of either Party, a national
of the other Party is accused of crime and taken into
custody, he shall: (a) receive reasonable and humane
treatment; (b) be formally and immediately informed
of the accusations against him; (c) he brought to trial
promptly, with due regard to the necessary preparation
of his defense; and (d) enjoy all means reasonably neces-
sary to his defense, including the services of competent
counsel.

Article III

1. Nationals of either High Contracting Party shall be
accorded national treatment in the application of laws and
regulations within the territories of the other Party that
establish a pecuniary compensation, or other benefit or
service, on account of disease, injury or death arising out
of and in the course of employment or due to the nature of
employment.

2. In addition to the rights and privileges provided in
paragraph 1 of the present Article, nationals of either
Party shall, within the territories of the other Party, be
accorded national treatment in the application of laws
and regulations establishing systems of compulsory in-
surance, under which benefits are paid without an indi-
vidual test of financial need: (a) against loss of wages or
earnings due to old age, unemplo.yment, sickness or dis-
ability, or (b) against loss of financial support due to the

502

Department of State Bulletin

death of father, husband or other person on whom such
support had depended.

Article IV

Each High Contracting Party shall at all times accord
equitable treatment to the capital of nationals and com-
panies of the other Party. Neither Party shall take un-
reasonable or discriminatory measures that would impair
the legally acquired rights or interests of such nationals
and companies in the enterprises which they have estab-
lished or in the capital, skills, arts or technology which
they have supplied. Neither Party shall without appro-
priate reason deny opportunities and facilities for the in-
vestment of capital by nationals and companies of the
other Party ; nor shall either Party unreasonably impede
nationals and companies of the other Party from obtaining
on equitable terms the capital, skills, modern techniques
and equipment it needs for its economic development.

Article V

1. Nationals and companies of either High Contracting
Party shall be accorded, within the territories of the other
Party, national treatment with respect to :

(a) engaging in commercial, manufacturing, process-
ing, financial, construction, publishing, scientific, educa-
tional, religious, philanthropic and professional activ-
ities ;

(b) obtaining and maintaining patents of invention,
and rights in trade marks, trade names, trade labels and
industrial property of all kinds ; and

(c) having access to the courts of justice and to ad-
ministrative tribunals and agencies, in all degrees of
jurisdiction, both in pursuit and in defense of their
rights.

2. Nationals and companies of either Party shall further
be accorded, within the territories of the other Party, in
cases in which national treatment can not be granted,
most-favored-nation treatment with respect to :

(a) exploring for and exploiting mineral deposits;

(b) engaging in fields of economic and cultural activ-
ity in addition to those enumerated in subparagraph (a)
of paragraph 1 of the present Article or in subparagraph
(a) of the present paragraph;

3. Nationals of either Party admitted into the terri-
tories of the other Party for limited purpo.ses shall not,
however, enjoy rights to engage in gainful occupations in
contravention of limitations expressly imposed, according
to law, as a condition of their admittance.

4. Nationals and companies of either Party shall be
permitted to engage, within the territories of the other
Party, technical experts, executive personnel, attorneys,
agents and other specialized employees of their choice, re-
gardless of nationality. Technical experts so engaged
shall be permitted, among other functions, to make ex-
aminations, audits and technical investigations exclusively
for, and to render reports to, such nationals and companies
in connection with the planning and operation of their en-
terprises and enterprises in which they have a financial
interest within the territories of such other Party, regard-
less of the extent to which such experts may have qualified
for the practice of a profession within such territories.

Article TI

1. Nationals and companies of either High Contracting
Party shall be accorded within the territories of the other
Party the right to organize companies for engaging in
commercial, manufacturing, processing, construction,
mining, financial, educational, philanthropic, religious
and scientific activities, and to control and manage enter-
prises which have been lawfully established by them
within such territories for the foregoing and other
purposes.

2. Companies, controlled by nationals and companies
of either Party and constituted under the applicable laws
and regulations within the territories of the other Party
for engaging in the activities listed in paragraph 1 of the
present Article, shall be accorded national treatment
therein with respect to such activities.

Article VII

1. Nationals and companies of the Oriental Republic
of Uruguay shall be accorded, within the territories of
the United States of America :

(a) national treatment with respect to leasing land,
buildings and other real property appropriate to the
conduct of commercial, manufacturing, processing,
financial, construction, publishing, scientific, educa-
tional, religious, philanthropic and professional activi-
ties and for residential and mortuary purposes and with
respect to occupying and using such property; and

(b) other rights in real property permitted by the
applicable laws of the states, territories and possessions
of the United States of America.

2. Nationals and companies of the United States of
America shall be accorded, within the territories of the
Oriental Republic of Uruguay, national treatment with
respect to acquiring by purchase, or otherwise, and with
respect to owning, occupying and using land, buildings and
other real property. However, in the case of any such
national domiciled in, or any such company constituted
under the laws of, any state, territoi-y or possession of
the United States of America that accords less than
national treatment to nationals and companies of the Ori-
ental Republic of Uruguay in this respect, the Oriental
Republic of Uruguay shall not be obligated to accord
treatment more favorable in this respect than such state,
territory or possession accords to nationals and com-
panies of the Oriental Republic of Uruguay.

3. Nationals and companies of either High Contracting
Party shall be permitted freely to dispose of property
within the territories of the other Party with respect to
the acquisition of which through testate or intestate suc-
cession their alienage has prevented them from receiving
national treatment, and they shall be permitted a term
of at least five years in which to effect .such disposition.

4. Nationals and companies of either Party shall be
accorded within the territories of the other Party :

(a) most-favored-nation treatment with respect to
acquiring, by purchase or otherwise, and with respect
to owning and possessing all kinds of personal property,
both tangible and intangible ; and

(b) national treatment with respect to disposing of
property of all kinds.

September 25, 1950

503

Article VIII

1. The dwellings, offices, warehouses, factories and other
premises of nationals and companies of either High Con-
tracting Party located within the territories of the other
Party shall receive, with respect to entry and other inter-
ventions, the full protection of the measures and proce-
dures established by law and of the standards and
principles expressed in Article II of the present Treaty.
Official searches and examinations of such premises and
their contents, when necessary, shall be made with careful
regard for the convenience of the occupants and the con-
duct of business.

2. Property of nationals and companies of either Party
shall receive the most constant protection and security
within the territories of the other Party. The taking
of property legally acquired by the nationals and com-
panies of either Party within the territories of the other
Party shall be subject to procedures and conditions no
less favorable than those legally applicable in the case of
the taking of the property of nationals of such other
Party. Any expropriation shall be made in accordance
with the applicable laws, which shall at least assure the
payment of just compensation in a prompt, adequate and
effective manner.

3. Nationals and companies of either Party shall in no
case be accorded, within the territories of the other Party,
less than national treatment with respect to the matters
set forth in the present Article. Moreover, enterprises in
which nationals and companies of either Party have a sub-
stantial interest shall be accorded, within the territories of
the other Party, not less than national treatment in all
matters relating to the taking of privately-owned enter-
prises into public ownership and the placing of such
enterprises under public control.

Article IX

1. Nationals of either High Contracting Party residing
within the territories of the other Party, and nationals
and companies of either Party engaged in trade or business
or in scientific, educational, religious or philanthropic
activities within the territories of the other Party, shall
not be subject to the payment of taxes, fees or charges
imposed upon or applied to income, capital, transactions,
activities or any other object, or to requirements with
resi)ect to the levy and collection thereof, within the
territories of such other Party, more burdensome than
those borne by nationals and companies of such other
Party.

2. With respect to nationals of either Party who are not
resident or who are not engaged in trade or business
within the territories of the other Party, and with respect
to companies of either Party which are not engaged in
trade or business within the territories of the other Party,
most-favored-nation treatment shall apply.

3. In the case of companies of either Party engaged in
business within tlie territories of the other Party, and in
the case of nationals of either Party engaged in bufsiness
within the territories of the other Party but not resident
therein, such other Party shall not impose or apply any
internal tax, fee or charge upon any income, capital or
other similar basis in excess of that which corresponds
to the business carried on or the capital invested in its

territories, or grant deductions and exemptions less than
those reasonably allocable or apportionable, on a similar
basis, to its territories. A like rule shall apply also in
the case of companies organized and operated exclusively
for scientific, educational, religious or philanthropic
purposes.

4. Each Party, however, reserves the right to : (a)
extend specific advantages as to taxes, fees and charges
to nationals, residents and companies of all foreign coun-
tries on the basis of reciprocity; (b) accord to nationals,
residents and companies of a third country special advan-
tages by virtue of an agreement with such country for the
avoidance of double taxation or the mutual protection of
revenue; and (c) accord to its non-resident nationals and
to residents of contiguous countries more favorable exemp-
tions of a personal nature than are accorded to other non-
resident persons.

Article X

Commercial travelers representing nationals and com-
panies of either High Contracting Party engaged in busi-
ness within the territories thereof shall, upon their entry
into and departure from the territories of the other Party
and during their sojourn therein, be accorded most-favored-
nation treatment in respect of customs and other rights
and priviliges, including, subject to the exceptions in
paragraph 4 of Article IX, taxes and charges applicable to
them, their samples and the taking of orders.

1. Each High Contracting Party shall accord most-
favored-nation treatment to products of the other Party,
from whatever place and by whatever type of carrier
arriving, and to articles destined for exportation to the
territories of such other Party, by whatever route and by
whatever type of carrier, in all matters relating to customs
duties and other charges, internal taxation, sale, storage,
distribution and use, and with respect to all other regu-
lations, requirements and formalities imposed on or in
connection with imports and exports.

2. Neither Party shall impose any prohibition or restric-
tion on the importation of any product of the other Party,
or on the exportation of any article to the territories of
the other Party, that :

(a) if imposed on sanitary or other customary
grounds of a non-commercial nature or in the interest
of preventing deceptive or unfair practices, arbitrarily
discriminates in favor of the importation of the like
product of, or the exportation of the like article to, any
third country ;

(b) if imposed on other grounds, does not apply
equally to the importation of the like product of, or the
exportation of the like article to, any third country ; or

(c) if a quantitative regulation involving allotment to
any third country with respect to an article in which such
other Party has an important interest, fails to afford to
the commerce of such other Party a share proportionate
to the amount by quantity or value supplied by or to such
other Party during a previous representative period, due
consideration being given to any special factors affecting
the trade in the article.

3. As used in the present Treaty the term "products of
means "articles the growth, produce or manufacture of".
The provisions of the present Article shall not apply to
advantages accorded by either Party :

504

Department of State Bulletin

(a) to products of its national fisheries ;

(b) to adjacent countries in order to facilitate fron-
tier traflic; or

Article XII

1. Each High Contracting Party shall promptly publish
laws, regulations and administrative rulings of general
application pertaining to rates of duty, taxes or other
charges, to the classification of articles for customs pur-
poses, and to requirements or restrictions on imports and
exports or the transfer of payments therefor, or affecting
their sale, distribution or use ; and shall administer such
laws, regulations and rulings in a uniform, impartial
and reasonable manner. As a general practice, new ad-
ministrative requirements affecting imports, with the
exception of requirements imposed on grounds of sanita-
tion or public safety, shall not go into effect before the
expiration of 30 days after publication, or, alternatively,
shall not apply to articles en route at time of publication.

2. Each Party shall provide some administrative or
judicial procedure under which nationals and companies
of the other Party, and importers of products of such
other Party, shall be able to obtain prompt review and
correction, if necessary, of administrative action relating
to customs matters, including the imposition of fines
and penalties, confiscations, and rulings on questions
of customs classification and valuation by the customs
authorities.

3. The Parties shall afford to importers reasonable op-
portunity to obtain advice from the competent authorities
regarding classification, valuation and duties on mer-
chandise.

Article XIII

1. Products of either High Contracting Party shall be
accorded, within the territories of the other Party, na-
tional treatment in all matters affecting internal taxation,
sale, storage, distribution and use.

2. Articles produced by nationals and companies of
either Party, within the territories of the other Party, or
by companies of the latter Party controlled by such na-
tionals and companies, shall be accorded therein treatment
no less favorable than that accorded to like articles of
national origin by whatever person or company produced,
in all matters affecting exportation, taxation, sale, distri-
bution, storage and use.

Article XIV

1. Each High Contracting Party undertakes (a) that
enterprises owned or controlled by its Government, and
that monopolies or agencies granted exclusive or special
privileges within its territories, shall make their pur-
chases and sales involving either imports or exports affect-
ing the commerce of the other Party solely in accordance
with commercial considerations, including price, quality,
availability, marketability, transportation and other con-
ditions of purchase or sale; and (b) that the nationals,
companies and commerce of such other Party shall be
afforded adequate opportunity, in accordance with cus-

tomary business practice, to compete for participation in
such purchases and sales.

2. Each Party shall accord to the nationals, companies
and commerce of the other Party fair and efiuitable treat-
ment, as compared with that accorded to the nationals,
companies and commerce of any third country, with re-
spect to: (a) the governmental purchase of supplies, (b)
the awarding of concessions and other government con-
tracts, and (c) the sale of any service sold by the Govern-
ment or any monopoly or agency granted exclusive or
special privileges.

3. The two Parties agree that business practices which
restrain competition, limit access to markets or foster
monopolistic control, and which are engaged in or made
effective by one or more private or public commercial
enterprises or by combination, agreement or other ar-
rangement among such enterprises may have harmful
effects upon commerce between their respective territories.
Accordingly, each Party agrees upon the request of the
other Party to consult with respect to any such practices
and to take such measures as it deems appropriate with
a view to eliminating such harmful efCects.

Article XV

1. Financial transactions between the territories of the
two High Contracting Parties shall be accorded by each
Party treatment no less favorable than that accorded to
like transactions between the territories of that Party and
the territories of any third country. Without prejudice
to the provisions of paragraph 4 of the present Article,
each Party, however, reserves the rights and obligations
it may have under the Articles of Agreement of the Inter-
national Monetary Fund.

2. Nationals and companies of either Party shall be
accorded by the other Party national treatment with
respect to financial transactions between the territories
of the two Parties or between the territories of such other
Party and of any third country.

3. In general, any control imixjsed by either Party over
financial transactions shall, subject to the reservations
set forth in paragraph 1 of the present Article, be so
administered as not to influence disadvantageously the
competitive position of the commerce or investment of
capital of the other Party in comparison with the com-
merce or the investment of capital of any third country.

4. Nationals and companies of either Party shall be per-
mitted freely to introduce capital funds into the territory
of the other Party and, by means of obtaining exchange
in the currency of their own country, to withdraw there-
from capital funds and earnings, whether in the form of
salaries, interest, dividends, commissions, royalties or
otherwise, and funds for the amortization of loans, for
transfers of compensation for property referred to in par-
agraph 2 of Article VIII, and funds for capital transfers.
If more than one rate of exchange is in force, such with-
drawals shall be at an effective rate of exchange, inclusive
of any taxes or surcharges on exchange transfers, that is
just and reasonable. However, a Party shall retain the
right in periods of exchange stringency to apply exchange
restrictions to assure the availability of foreign exchange
for payments for goods and services essential to the health

September 25, J 950

505

and welfare of its people. In the event that either Party
applies such restrictions it shall within a period of three
months make reasonable and specific provision for the
withdrawals referred to, giving consideration to special
needs for other transactions, and shall afford the other
Party adequate opportunity for consultation at any time
regarding such provision and other matter affecting with-
drawals. Such provision shall be reviewed in consulta-
tion with the other Party at intervals of not more than
twelve months.

5. The treatment prescribed in the present Article shall
apply to all forms of control of financial transactions,
including (a) limitations upon the availability of media
necessary to effect such transactions, (b) rates of ex-
change, and (c) prohibitions, restrictions, delays, taxes,
charges and penalties on such transactions ; and shall
apply whether a transaction takes place directly, or
through an intermediary in another country. As used in
the present Article, the term "financial transactions"
means all international payments and transfers of funds
effected through the medium of currencies, securities, bank
deposits, dealings in foreign exchange or other financial
arrangements, regardless of the pui-pose of nature of such
payments and transfers.

Article XVI

1. Between the territories of the two High Contracting
Parties there shall be freedom of commerce and navigation.

2. Vessels under the flag of either Party, and carrying
the papers required by its law in proof of nationality, shall
be deemed to be vessels of that Party both on the high seas
and within the ports, places and waters of the other Party.

3. Vessels of either Party shall have liberty, on equal
terms with vessels of the other Party and on equal terms
with vessels of any third country, to come with their
cargoes to all ports, places and waters of such other
Party open to foreign commerce and navigation. Such
■vessels and cargoes shall in all respects be accorded na-
tional and most-favored-nation treatment within the ports,
places and waters of such other Party ; but each Party
may reserve exclusive rights and privileges to its own
vessels with respect to the coasting trade, inland naviga-
tion and national fisheries.

4. Vessels of either Party shall be accorded national and
most-favored-nation treatment by the other Party with
respect to the right to carry all articles that may be
carried by vessel to or from the territories of such other
Party ; and such articles shall be accorded treatment no
less favorable than that accorded like articles carried in
vessels of such other Party, with respect to: (a) duties
and charges of all kinds, (b) the administration of the
customs, and (c) bounties, drawbacks and other privileges
of this nature.

5. Vessels of either Party that are in distress shall be
permitted to take refuge in the nearest port or haven
of the other Party, and shall receive friendly treatment
and assistance.

6. The term "vessels," as used herein, means all types
of vessels, whether privately owned or operated, or pub-
licly owned or operated ; but this term does not, except
with reference to paragraph 5 of the present Article, in-
clude fishing vessels or vessels of war.

Article XVII

There shall be freedom of transit through the terri-
tories of each High Contracting Party by the routes
most convenient for international transit:

(a) for nationals of the other Party, together with
their baggage ;

(b) for other persons, together with their baggage,
en route to or from the territories of such other Party ;
and

Such persons and articles in transit shall be exempt
from transit, customs and other duties, and from un-
reasonable charges and requirements ; and shall be free
from unnecessary delays and restrictions. They shall,
however, be subject to measures referred to in paragraph
4 of Article I, and to non-discriminatory regulations
necessary to prevent abuse of the transit privilege.

Article XVIII

1. The present Treaty shall not preclude the application
of measures :

(a) regulating the importation or exportation of
gold or silver ;

(b) relating to fissionable materials, to radio-active
by-products of the utilization or processing thereof or
to materials that are the source of fissionable materials;

(c) regulating the production of or traffic in arms,
ammunition and implements of war, or traffic in other
materials carried on directly or indirectly for the pur-
pose of supplying a military establishment;

(d) necessary to fulfill the obligations of a High
Contracting Party for the maintenance or restoration
of international peace and security, or necessary to
protect its essential security interests ;

(e) denying to any company in the ownership or
direction of which nationals of any third country or
countries have directly or indirectly a controlling in-
terest, the advantages of the present Treaty, except
with respect to recognition of juridical status and with
respect to access to courts.

2. Without prejudice to the obligations of either Party
under any other existing or future international agree-
men, the most-favored-nation provisions of the present
Treaty shall not apply: (a) to advantages accorded by
the United States of America or Its territories and pos-
sessions, irrespective of any future change in their politi-
cal status, to one another, to the Republic of Cuba, to the
Republic of the Philippines, to the Trust Territory of the
Pacific Islands or to the Panama Canal Zone ; and (b)
to the advantages accorded by the Oriental Republic of
Uruguay exclusively to the Republic of Bolivia or to the
Republic of Paraguay, provided such advantages are not
extended to a third country.

3. The provisions of the present Treaty relating to
the treatment of goods shall not preclude action by either
Party which is required or specifically permitted by the
General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade or the Havana
Charter for an International Trade Organization during
such time as such Party is a contracting party to the
General Agreement or is a member of the International
Trade Organization. Similarly, the most-favored-natlon

506

Department of Stale Bulletin

provisions of the present Treaty shall not apply to special
advantages aceonied by virtue of the aforesaid Agree-
ment or Charter.

4. The present Treaty does not accord any rights to
engage in political activities.

5. No enterprise of either Party which is publicly
owned or controlled sliall, if it engages in commercial,
manufacturing, processing, shipping or other business ac-
tivities within the territories of the other Party, claim
or enjoy, either for itself or for its property, immunity
therein from taxation, suit, execution of judgment or
other liability to which privately owned and controlled
enterprises are subject therein.

Article XIX

1. The term "national treatment" means treatment
accorded within the territories of a High Contracting
Party upon terms no less favorable than the treatment
accorded therein, in like situations, to nationals, com-
panies, products, vessels or other objects, as the case
may be, of such Party.

2. The term "most-favored-nation treatment" means
treatment accorded within the territories of a Party upon
terms no less favorable than the treatment accorded
therein, in like situations, to nationals, companies, prod-
ucts, vessels or other objects, as the case may be, of any
third country.

3. As used in the present Treaty, the term "companies"
means corporations, partnerships, companies and other
associations, whether or not with limited liability and
whether or not for jwcuniary profit. Companies con-
stituted under the applicable laws and regulations within
the territories of either Party shall be deemed companies
thereof and shall have the rights which pertain to them
as juridical i)ersons recognized within the territories of
the other Party. It is understood that the recognition of
such rights does not of itself confer rights upon com-
panies to engage regularly in the business activities for
which they are organized.

4. National treatment accorded under the provisions
of the present Treaty to companies of the Oriental Re-
public of Uruguay shall, in any state, territory or posses-
sion of the United States of America, be the treatment
accorded therein to companies created or organized in
other states, territories and possessions of the United
States of America.

Article XX

Except as may be otherwise provided, the territories
to which the present Treaty extends shall comprise all
areas of land and water under the sovereignty or au-
thority of either of the High Contracting Parties, other
than the Panama Canal Zone, and other than the Trust
Territory of the Pacific Islands except to the extent that
the President of the United States of America shall by
proclamation extend provisions of the Treaty to such
Trust Territory.

Article XXI

1. Either of the High Contracting Parties shall at any
time grant to the other Party adequate opportunity for
consultation with respect to the matters dealt with in
the present treaty.

2. Any dispute between the Parties as to the interpre-

tation or application of the present Treaty, not satis-
factorily adjusted by diplomacy oi other pacific means,
shall be submitted to the International Court of Justice.

Article XXII

1. The present Treaty shall be ratified, and the rati-
fications thereof shall be exchanged at Washington as
soon as possible.

2. The present Treaty shall enter into force on the
day of exchange of ratifications. It shall remain in
force for ten years from that day and shall continue
in force thereafter until terminated as provided herein.

3. Either High Contracting Party may, by giving one
year's written notice to the other Party, terminate the
present Treaty at the end of the initial ten-year period
or at any time thereafter.

In witness whereof the respective Plenipotentiaries have
signed the present Treaty and have afllxed hereunto their
seals.

Done in duplicate, in the English and Spanish languages,
both equally authentic, at Montevideo, this twenty-third
day of November, one thousand nine hundred forty-nine.

Christian M. Ravndal
C£sAB Chaelone

Protocol

At the time of signing the Treaty of Friendship, Com-
merce and Economic Development between the United
States of America and the Oriental Republic of Uruguay,
the undersigned Plenipotentiaries, duly authorized by
their respective Governments, have further agreed on the
following provisions, which shall be considered integral
parts of the aforesaid Treaty :

1. Rights and privileges with respect to commercial,
manufacturing and processing activities accorded, by the
provisions of the Treaty, to privately owned and con-
trolled enterprises of either High Contracting Party
within the territories of the other Party shall extend to
rights and privileges of an economic nature granted to
publicly owned or controlled enterprises of such other
Party, in situations in which such publicly owned or con-
trolled enterprises operate in fact in competition with
privately owned and controlled enterprises. The preceding
sentence shall not, however, apply to subsidies granted
to publicly owned or controlled enterprises in connection
with: (a) manufacturing or processing goods for gov-
ernment use, or supplying goods and services to the gov-
ernment for government use; or (b) supplying, at prices
substantially below competitive prices, the needs of par-
ticular population groups for essential goods and services
not otherwise practically obtainable by such groups.

2. With reference to paragraph 1 of Article I of the
Treaty, so long as the United States of America permits
the entry into its territories of nationals of the Oriental
Republic of Uruguay upon terms substantially as favor-
able as those applicable upon the date of signature of the
Treaty, the Oriental Republic of Uruguay undertakes to
permit nationals of the United States of America freely
to enter its territories, subject to measures necessary to
maintain public order and to protect the public health,
morals and safety.

3. The term "mineral", as used in Article V, paragraph

%epiember 25, J 950

507

2 (a), refers to petroleum as well as to other mineral
substances.

4. The term ''financial" as used in Articles V and VI
shall not extend to banking that involves a trust or fidu-
ciary function, or that involves receiving deposits except
as may be incidental to international or foreign business
of the banking enterprise.

5. Without prejudice to the obligations of either Party
under any other international agreement, the provisions of
the present Treaty shall not be construed to restrict the
utilization by a Party of accumulated inconvertible cur-
rencies.

6. The provisions of Article XIV, paragraph 2 (b) and
(c), and of Article XVI, paragraph 4, shall not apply to
postal services.

7. The Uruguayan tax system applicable to absentee
landholders (established by Law No. 5377 of January 14,
1916) shall not be affected by the provisions of the Treaty.

8. Nothing in the Treaty shall be construed to limit or
restrict in any way the advantages accorded by the Con-
vention Facilitating the Work of Traveling Salesmen
signed at Washington August 27, 1918.

9. Article XX does not apply to territories under the
authority of either Party solely by reason of temporary
military occupation.

10. It is understood that for the purposes of paragraph
1 of Article XIV, the availability of means of payment is
considered to be a commercial consideration.

In witness whereof the respective Plenipotentiaries
have signed this Protocol and have affixed hereunto their

seals.

Done in duplicate, in the English and Spanish languages,
both equally authentic, at Montevideo, this twenty-third
day of November, one thousand nine hundred forty-nine.
Chmstian M. Ravndal [seal]
CfisAR Charlone [seal]

Additional Protocol

At the time of signing the Treaty of Friendship, Com-
merce and Economic Development between the United
States of America and the Oriental Republic of Uruguay,
the undersigned Plenipotentiaries, duly authorized by
their respective Governments have further agreed upon
the following provisions, which shall be considered In-
tegral parts of the aforesaid Treaty :

1. The provisions of paragraphs 2(b) and 2(c) of
Article XI of the Treaty shall not obligate either High
Contracting Party with respect to the application of quan-
titative restrictions on imports and exports :

(a) that have effect equivalent to exchange restric-
tions authorized in conformity with section 3(b) of
Article VII of the Articles of Agreement of the Inter-
national Monetary Fund ;

(b) that are necessary to secure the equitable distri-
bution among the several consuming countries of goods
In short supply; or

(c) that have effect equivalent to exchange restric-
tions permitted under section 2 of Article XIV of the
Articles of Agreement of the International Monetary
Fund.

2. Restrictions applied by either Party pursuant to sub-
paragraph (c), paragraph 1, of the present Protocol shall,

508

conformable with a policy designed to promote the maxi-
mum development of non-discriminatory multilateral
trade and to expedite the attainment of a balance of
payments position which will obviate the necessity of such
restrictions, depart no more than necessary from the pro-
visions of paragraph 2 (b) and 2 (c) of Article XI of
the Treaty.

In witness whereof the respective Plenipotentiaries have
signed this Protocol and have affixed hereunto their seals.

Done in duplicate, in the English and Spanish languages,
both equally authentic, at Montevideo, this twenty-third of
November one thousand nine hundred and forty-nine.

Christian M. Ravndai,
C£8AB Charlone

Exchange of Notes

Montevideo, November 23, 1SI,9.
The Honorable Christian M. Ravndal,

Amhassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary of the
United States of America.
Mr. Ambassador:

I have the honor to refer to the conversations between
representatives of the Government of the Oriental
Republic of Uruguay and the Government of the United
States of America during the course of the negotiation
of the Treaty of Friendship, Commerce and Economic
Development, signed this day, in regard to its provisions
relating to the treatment to be accorded by either High
Contracting Party to the products of the other with respect
to internal taxation.

In the course of these conversations, the Uruguayan
representatives referred to the fact that Uruguay now
accords national treatment with respect to internal taxa-
tion to all products of the United States of America except
pharmaceutical sijecialties, toilet and perfumery products,
cigarettes, cigars, fortified wines, vermouth, champagne,
matches and playing cards, and to the fact that these
specific articles were excepted from the rule of national
treatment in the Trade Agreement between the two
countries signed at Montevideo, July 21, 1942. The
Uruguayan representatives also referred to the willing-
ness of their Government to negotiate the reduction of
these internal taxes.

The representatives of the United States of America
have referred to Article III (as amended) of the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade which establishes the
rule of national treatment with respect to internal taxes
on imported products, and particularly to paragraph 3
of the said Article which provides for the postponement
of the application of the rule of national treatment in
certain cases.

The conversations to which I have referred have dis-
closed a mutual understanding which is as follows :

With respect to any existing internal tax which is
inconsistent with the provisions of paragraph 1 of Article
XIII of the aforementioned Treaty but which is expressly
authorized by the Trade Agreement between Uruguay and
the United States of America signed at Montevideo July
21, 1942, in which the import duty on the taxed product
is bound against increase, the Government of Uruguay
shall be free to postpone the application of the provisions
of paragraph 1 of Article XIII of said Treaty to such tax

Departmenf of Sfafe Bulletin

until such time as it can obtain release from tlie obliga-
tions of the Trade Agreement in order to permit the
increase of such duty to the extent nwessary to compen-
sate for the elimination of the protective element of the
tax.

Accept, [etc.]

C£sAR Charlone

Montevideo, November 23, 19^9.
To His Excellency Doctor Cesar Charlone,

Minister of Foreign Affairs.
Excellency : I have the honor to acknowledge the re-
ceipt of Your Excellency's kind note of today's date, with
reference to the Treaty of Friendship, Commerce and
Economic Development, which states as follows :

[Here follows the text of the above note.]

The Honorable Chrtstian M. Ravnd.\l,

Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary of the

United States of America."
I have the honor to confirm Tour Excellency's state-
ment of the agreement reached with reference to this
matter.
Accept, [etc.]

Christian M. Ravndal.

Delegation to Inaugural Ceremonies
for President of El Salvador

[Released to the press September 11]

The President has approved the following dele-
gation to represent the United States at the in-
auguration of Major Oscar Osorio as President
of the Eepublic of El Salvador on September 14 :

George P. Shaw, U. S. Ambassador to El Salvador, Special
Ambassador and Head of Delegation

Ralph H. Ackerman, U. S. Ambassador to the Dominican
Republic, Special Ambassador

Representative Albert S. J. Carnaban of Missouri, Mem-
ber

Representative Robert Hale of Maine, Member

Sheldon Z. Kaplan, Staff Consultant, Committee on For-
eign Affairs, House of Representatives, Member

Representing the Department of Defense — Lt.
Gen. William H. Morris, Jr., Commander in chief,
Caribbean Command.

Other names of the delegation, all members of
the United States Embassy in El Salvador,
include :

William A. Wieland, First Secretary
Col. Samuel P. Walker, Jr., Military Attach^
Col. Charles H. Deerwester, Air Attach^
Capt. Alvord .John Greenacre, Naval Attache
Joseph A. Silberstein, Second Secretary
John B. Young, Third Secretary

Tlie inauguration of President-elect Osorio is
especially significant in that it marks a return to
constitutional procedures following a 21-nionth
period of provisional government under the direc-
tion of the Council of Revolutionary Government.
On September 14, Major Osorio, chosen by the
people of El Salvador in free elections, will assume
office as President of the Republic. In coping
successfully witli its many and difficult political
and constitutional problems. El Salvador has pro-
vided an example to all democratic nations who
believe in and struggle to achieve representative
government.

Discussion With Foreign Ministers
Beneficial to Cause of Peace

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press September 11]

In going to New York for talks with the For-
eign Ministers of Great Britain and France, and
the meeting of the North Atlantic Treaty Coun-
cil, and the General Assembly, I ain confident that
our frank discussions will result in agxeement on
practical conclusions which will contribute to pre-
serving peace. It is because I know from experi-
ence the value of discussions of this kind that I
have this confidence that the outcome will be con-
structive. Because it will be a constructive contri-
bution to peace, I am confirmed in the conviction —
which the President and I have recently
reiterated — that we are building a solid founda-
tion to prevent war.

Since the first meetings will be with representa-
tives of European and North Atlantic Countries,
we shall be concentrating our major attention
upon European problems. With the approval of
the President, I will make several concrete propos-
als for discussion by the other Ministers which
I believe will advance the cause to which the North
Atlantic Treaty Organization is dedicated.

I want to emphasize, however, that the talks
this week are to be followed by what will pi-ove to
be the General Assembly's most important session.
There is no question of a small gi-oup of powers
making "decisions" and communicating them to
the representatives of other states. We are en-
gaged in a continuing process of discussion and
negotiation in which all the states of the world are
concerned and in which we expect them all to
participate.

This morning, I talked over several major prob-
lems with the members of the Senate Foreign
Relations Committee and the House Foreign Af-
fairs Committee. I go to the New York meetings
with the assurance that the American people are
united in the work we are carrying on to make the
peace secure.

September 25, 7950

509

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Forced Labor Conditions in Communist-Dominated Countries

hy Walter Kotschnig

U.S. Deputy Representative in ECOSOC^

This item on forced labor appears on the agenda
of our Council for the fourth time. Our discus-
sions of the item at the eighth, ninth, and tenth
sessions of the Council brought out two shocking
facts. First, the existence in this so-called en-
lightened age of ours, in this, our twentieth cen-
tury, of slave labor conditions as inhuman, as
cruel as any we have witnessed in the history of
man. It has become evident to all but the blind
and the wishful that millions of human beings liv-
ing today have been deprived of every vestige of
their basic human rights. They have been torn
away from their homes; their families have been
separated, and they have been herded into concen-
tration camps. Yes, concentration camps, that is
the word for it. Concentration camps of the kind
that we had hoped we had heard the last of, when
Hitler and his criminal regime had been defeated
at a terrific cost to all of us.

Perhaps most terrible of all, it has become evi-
dent that the one country which initiated these
practices, which imposed them on all those other
countries over which it has established its controls,
is the U.S.S.R. : the country which poses as the
liberator of the suppressed masses, the home of the
downtrodden and the oppressed, a member of the
United Nations, a member of this very Council.

And, then, there is the second shocking fact:
that to date we have been unable to do much about
it, that we liave found ourselves stalemated, that
the U.S.S.R. and her friends, while admitting
the existence of forced labor on a large scale, have
refused to cooperate in any impartial inquiry.

'Made before the 11th session of the Economic and
Social Council at Geneva on Aug. 15 and released to the
press by the Council on the same date.

They have refused to make available any informa-
tion regarding the number of people in their con-
centration camps, any information about their
living conditions, the prevailing mortality rate,
the type of labor in which these individuals are
engaged — in short, anything which would have
helped this Council, which would have helped the
United Nations to discharge its obligations under
the Charter to promote the rights of individuals,
to create the kind of world where the well-being of
all would become a secure guaranty for peace.

We cannot continue simply to make speeches
about this condition. To make these speeches is
a hateful task at best. It makes us ashamed of
admitting that we live in a world where man's in-
humanity to man is as gliastly and as ruthless as
it appears to be in the U.S.S.R. and the countries
under the various satellite regimes. The United
Nations has found the will and the means, through
collective action, to deal with military aggression.
We must also find the will and the means to deal
with large-scale planned aggression against the
individual. We cannot stand by silently while the
Charter of the United Nations is violated by some
of its own members. We must awaken the con-
science of the world against this utter negation
of primitive human rights, against this ruthless
exploitation of man by man. Admittedly, we may
not be able to do much for those who suffer and die
in Communist concentration camps. But, at least,
we can do our share in protecting those from their
own folly who may still look toward the Soviet
as an enlightened regime, which assures justice
and equality to all. The existence of concentra-
tion camps with millions of inmates is a travesty
of justice, and the equality of their inmates is the
equality of a graveyard.

510

Department of State Bulletin

Lest tliere be any mistake about the seriousness
of the situation, I have the distasteful task of
putting on record some further evidence which has
come to light regarding conditions in some of the
countries which were "liberated" by the Soviets
and their supportei-s.

Forced Labor Codes

In Rumania, the seventh ordinary session of the
Grand National Assembly, before its adjournment
on May 30, 1950, approved unanimously (of
course, unanimously) after one day of considera-
tion, a lengthy and detailed new national labor
code "inspired by the most advanced labor legis-
lation in the world, that of the Soviet Union."
Among other things, this "inspired" labor legis-
lation provides that Rumanian citizens "in excep-
tional cases, such as calamities and important
stated projects," may be called for "temporary
compulsory labor." "Exceptional cases" — that
sounds hollow to those who know of the almost
daily arrests of large numbers of people who dis-
appear into labor camps. "Important projects,"
incidentially, itself indicates that more than a few
exceptional people are involved in these practices.
And then the word "temporary" — it may be that
once a man or woman is assigned to forced labor
under inhuman conditions, their stay on earth is,
indeed, very temporary. That is perhaps the best
explanation of that particular word.

Take another country : Czechoslovakia.

|B In Czechoslovakia, Vaclav Nosek, Minister of

If Interior, asked the Parliament for nearly trebled

appropriations in 1950 over 1949 for his Ministry,

which controls the secret and uniformed police

and the forced labor camps.

Here is the statement as it appeared in the New
York Times of March 24, 1950, in a dispatch
which has not been challenged as to accuracy :

He (Nosek) said he would need 10,637,952,000 crowns
or ?212,759,040 this year compared with 3,879,983,000
crowns or $77,597,8(50 in 1949. Expenditures for internal
security will exceed those for national defense by more
than 1,000,000,000 crowns . . .

Tlie Interior Ministry's own income, he observed signifi-
cantly, will increase by about one-third over last year's,
thanks to increased revenues from the forced labor camps
as well as from the Official Gazette and the sale of
pamphlets.

This statement is most revealing. It shows that
Czechoslovakia is spending this year four times
as much on her secret police and her concentration
camps than all the states membeis of the United
Nations spend on the United Nations. These fan-
tastic figures further indicate that forced labor
has become an integral part of the economic sys-
tem of Czechoslovakia as it has of the Soviet
Union and the other satellite countries. The sale
of pamphlets can hardly explain the increase of
about one-third of the revenues of the Minister
of Interior. That increase must be attributed
essentially to the income from the forced labor
of the politically dispossessed.

If further jH-oof is needed of the fact that these
camps are used for purposes of political coercion,
it can be found in an announcement made only 3
days ago by the Chechoslovakian Government
which admitted the setting up of labor camps
where security offenders could be sent for periods
up to 2 years. We know, of course, that these
labor camps have existed ever since October 25,
1948. Here, we have a clear-cut admission that
the purpose of these camps is political coercion.

Take these other unfortunate countries : Lithu-
ania, Estonia, Latvia. The New York Times of
April 25, 1950, states that, according to the best
available figures, between 800,000 and 1 million
Lithuanians, out of a total population of less than
3 million; more than 500,000 Latvians out of a
total populatioiT of less than 2 million; and more
than 200,000 Estonians out of a total population
of 1.15 million have been deported. Most of
those deported were shipped out within an hour
of notification and were permitted to take along
only what they could carry on their backs. Some
of the more shocking details of such deportations
were described in the documents which were sub-
mitted to the tenth session of the Economic and
Social Council by the American Federation of
Labor.

Conditions in East Germany

Take the Eastern zone of Germany. Condi-
tions in the uranium mines in Germany, where
labor is particularly dangerous to health, were
described both in the report submitted by the
American Federation of Labor to the Economic
and Social Council and in Mr. Thorp's speech at
the tenth session. A study prepared by the Social
Democratic Party of Germany gives further de-
tails. Note that it is a Socialist workers' party, not
a group of "capitalists" or of "exploiters," to use
terms dear to the Soviets, which gives us these
details. In this report, the conditions are set forth
which prevail in these uranium mines. It is a
sickening document to read. There is just one de-
tail I would like to lift from this document. It
contains a reproduction complete with names and
dates of a work order issued by the Labor Office
of Teltow-Mahlow in the Soviet zone of Germany
which requires the wife of a fugitive from a
forced labor uranium mining camp to report for
work in her husband's stead. I would like to read
that order :

Ardeitsamt Teltow-Mahlow

Branch Office Zossen

Zossen, 21 March 19^9
B/N

Madam Frieda Heyeb

Rangsdorf, Kr. Teltow, Kleine Standallee 863

Concerning your assignment to work in Aue.

The medical examination has revealed your capacity
for the contemplated assignment from here to Aue for
work. You are therefore requested to present yourself
at the Arbeitsamt (Labor Office) in Aue with the installa-

Sepf ember 25, 1950

511

tion assignment card (Einweisungsbescheid) and to begin
working in Aue in place of your husband who has made
his own employment there impossible by fleeing with your
knowledge and your help.

NiTSCHE

Now, note that the wife is ordered by this Labor
Office to report for work in the mines on the
strength of the medical report, and that nowhere
in the order does it appear that she has had the
benefit of judicial process to determine whether
she is actually guilty of the charge made against
her. That, of course, fits in perfectly with the
provisions of the Soviet code which was men-
tioned by the distinguished representative of the
United Kingdom.

This same report goes on to state that not only
wives but also other members of the family are
being sent to the uranium mines if the husband or
brother escaped from their servitude. It points
out, too, the intolerable working conditions suf-
fered by women in forced labor camps, among
which is the fact that they are considered free
game by the Russian soldiers and German workers
alike. The conditions described are very similar
to those found in Russian forced labor camps.
The women find it necessary to make "friends"
witli several men in order to eke out their pitiful
ration allowances. Women are required to work
until 6 weeks prior to the birth of their children,
and the children are separated from their mothers
after birth and cared for in groups to free the
mothers for further work in the mines. Women,
incidentally, are required to fulfill the same quotas
as men and are employed as pick men and trans-
porters of ore.

This shameful list of violations of human rights
could be continued for a long time. I might talk
about Hungary where parents or children are still
looking for some 200,000 Hungarian citizens who
disappeared in the U.S.S.R. I might also talk
about the curious disappearance of hundreds and
thousands of German and Japanese prisoners of
war in the U.S.S.R. I shall desist, however, for
I am sure it must be obvious by now to everyone
that this situation calls for remedial and pre-
ventive action on our part.

Some action might be taken nationally, by those
who share the abhorrence of free peoples every-
where to the kind of exploitation of human labor
which has evidently become an integral part of the
Soviet economy. The laws in my own country,
and probably in many other countries, permit the
exclusion of goods produced by forced or convict
labor in other countries. Joint action along such
lines may eventually become inevitable.

Resolution as Remedy

In the meanwhile, everything possible must be
done to direct the searchlight of public inquiry
upon these intolerable conditions wherever they
may be found. And that is the purpose of the
joint resolution which we were glad to cosponsor

with the delegation of the United Kingdom. This
resolution, if accepted, would provide for a joint
inquiry, joint in the sense that both the Ilo and the
United Nations would assume responsibility for it.
This is an important element of our resolution,
because unless this inquiry is undertaken not only
by the International Labor Organization but also
in the name of the United Nations, some of the
countries which are not members of the Ilo might
find a very easy excuse in escaping from this
investigation.

Furthermore, this resolution provides for the
setting up of a committee of 5 independent mem-
bers. Please note the emphasis on independent
members. We hope that it will be possible to find
5 men or women of the highest possible caliber
who would serve on this committee and whose very
name, background, experience, and record will as-
sure us that their investigation will be an impartial
investigation.

As to the terms of reference, I would like to
underline point 1 of these terms of reference, which
refer to the International Labor Convention No.
29. They refer also (and this is important) to
what we want to get at most specifically, and that
is the systems of forced or corrective labor which
are employed as a means of punishment for hold-
ing or expressing political views out of tune with
the views of the ruling clique or which are on such
a scale as to constitute an important element in the
economy of a given country.

I commend this draft resolution to you and to
my distinguished colleagues on this Council. I
commend it for your careful consideration. The
action here proposed may not go as far as some of
us might wish, but it does, in our opinion, consti-
tute a definite step forward in our common strug-
gle for a common humanity, for a society of free
peoples, free of fear, and free of oppression.

Text of Resolution

U.N. doc. E/L. 104
Dated Auk. 15, 1950

Follounng is the text of the joint draft resolution sui-
mitted to the eleventh session of Ecosoc. The resolution
was not adopted, and consideration of the problem was
deferred to the twelfth session of the Council.

The Economic and Social Council,

Recalling its previous resolutions on the subject of
forced labour and measures for its abolition ;

Considering the replies furnished by Member Govern-
ments to the communications addressed to them by the
Secretary-General in accordance with Resolution 195
(VIII);

Taking note of the communication from the Interna-
tional Labour Organisation setting forth the discussions
on the question of forced labour at the 11th Session of the
Governing Body ;

Decides to invite the International Labour Organisa-
tion to co-operate with the Council in the earliest possible
establishment of an ad hoc Committee on Forced Labour
of not more than five independent members to be appointed
jointly by the Secretary-General and the Director-General
of the International Labour OflBce with the following terms
of reference:

(1) to survey the field of forced labour, taking into

512

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

account the provisions of International Labour Conven-
tion No. 29. and enquiring particularly into the existence,
in any part of the world, of systems of forced or "correc-
tive" labour which are employed as a means of political
coercion or punishment for holding or expressing political
views, or which are on such a scale as to constitute an
important element in the economy of a given country ;

(2) to assess the nature and extent of the problem at
the present time; and

(3) to report the results of its studies and progress
thereon to the Council and to the Governing Body of the
International Labour Office.

Requests the Secretary-General and tlie Director-Gen-
eral to supply the professional and clerical assistance
necessary to ensure the earliest initiation and effective
discharge of the ad hoc Committee's work.

Informal Discussions^To Be Held
on Japanese Peace Treaty

Statement by the President

[Released to the press by the White Bouse September IJ/]

It has long been the view of the United States
Government that the people of Japan were entitled
to a peace treaty which would bring them back
into the family of nations. As is well known, the
United States Government first made an effort in
1947 to call a conference of the nations holding
membership in the Far Eastern Commission to
discuss a peace treaty with Japan. However, pro-
cedural difficulties at that time and since have pre-
vented any progress. The United States Govern-
ment now believes that an effort should again be
made in this direction, and I have, therefore,
authorized the Department of State to initiate
informal discussions as to future procedure, in the
first instance with those governments represented
on the Far Eastern Commission, the ones most
actively concerned in the Pacific war. It is not
expected that any formal action will be taken until
an opportunity has been had to assess the results
of these informal discussions.

This policy in regard to a Japanese peace treaty
is in accord with the general effort of the United
States to bring to an end all the war situations.
We have long pressed the U.S.S.R. for an Austrian
treaty, and we are exploring the possibility of end-
ing the state of war with Germany.

U.S. Delegations

to international Conferences

Civil Aviation Organization

The Department of State announced on Sep-
tember 13 that the United States delegation to the
Special International Civil Aviation Organiza-
tion meeting on climb requirements which will

convene at Paris on September 14, 1950, is as
follows :

Delegate and Chairman

George W. Haldeman, chief. Aircraft Division, Civil Aero-
nautics Administration, Department of Commerce

Advisers

Oscar Bakke, chief. Air Carrier Division, Civil Aeronautics
Board

James A. Carran, chief. Aerodynamics Section, Civil Aero-
nautics Administration, Department of Commerce

Philip A. Colman, Aerodynamics Division engineer, Lock-
heed Aircraft Corporation

Hugh B. Freeman, aeronautical engineer, Airworthiness
Division, Civil Aeronautics Board

J. Ford Johnston, aeronautical research scientist. Flight
Research Division, National Advisory Committee for
Aeronautics, Langley, Virginia

Franklin W. Kolk, manager. Aircraft Analysis Division,
American Airlines

W. Edmund Koneczny, chief, Airworthiness Division, Civil
Aeronautics Board

Raymond B. Maloy, chief, Engineering Flight Test Branch,
Civil Aeronautics Administration, Department of
Commerce

Ivar C. Peterson, director, Technical Service, Aircraft In-
dustries Association

Harry Press, aeronautical research scientist. Dynamic
Loads Division, National Advisory Committee for
Aeronautics, Langley, Virginia

Weldon E. Rhoades, coordinator, Stratocruiser, Flight
Operations, United Airlines

Morril B. Spaulding, Jr., assistant director of the Engi-
neering Division, Air Transport Association

Gilbert V. Tribbett, Icao adviser. Flight Operations Divi-
sion, Civil Aeronautics Administration, Department
of Commerce

Omer Welling, deputy chief. Aircraft Division, Civil Aero-
nautics Administration, Department of Commerce

Secretary to the Delegation

William H. Dodderidge, Division of International Confer-
ences, Department of State

Technicians representing all 58 member nations
of the International Civil Aviation Organization
have been invited to participate in the forthcom-
ing meeting which is being called by the Organiza-
tion in connection with its continuing program to
improve the safety of air transportation. The
meeting will take into account the varying operat-
ing conditions that exist at airports throughout
the world in an attempt to write more modern
climb performance requirements for aircraft en-
gaged in the public carriage of passengers on in-
ternational air routes. Minimum climb perform-
ance standards are most necessary during take-off
and are planned to allow a sufficient safety margin
to enable an aircraft to clear all obstacles in its
path in case of emergency.

Aircraft design was based for many years on
rule-of-thumb methods, and rate-of-climb stand-
ards were established arbitrarily. During the
past 10 3'ears, aircraft design techniques have be-
come more mathematical and more expert, with
the result that more accurate determination of the
necessary rate-of-climb in take-offs under different
conditions is required for the guidance of aircraft
designers.

Sep/ember 25, 1950

513

The forthcoming Paris meeting will discuss two
different methods of arriving at such a determina-
tion. The first, which relates rate-of-climb to
stalling speed, requires an aircraft with a higher
stalling speed to be able to climb more rapidly
and, as a result, encourages designers to produce
aircraft with lower stalling speeds, which can,
therefore, land and take off at slower speeds. The
second method, which is based on careful mathe-
matical analysis, is intended to reflect past operat-
ing experience with this problem in all countries.

pooling information and coordinating research in
an effort to combat chestnut blight and other dis-
eases, to locate and develop disease-resistant
species of chestnut trees, and to make improve-
ments in the culture and use of the chestnut tree.
The conference will also consider the establish-
ment of an international commission, within the
framework of the Food and Agricultui'e Organi-
zation, to serve as an instrument for concerted
action with respect to problems relating to chest-
nut trees.

Herring Technology (FAO)

The Department of State announced on Septem-
ber 15 that Harold E. Crowther, chief. Techno-
logical Section, Fish and Wildlife Service,
Department of the Interior, and Herbert C. Davis,
president. Terminal Island Sea Foods, Ltd., Ter-
minal Island, California, will represent the United
States Government as delegate and adviser, respec-
tively, at two meetings being convened by the
Food and Agriculture Organization (Fao) at
Bergen, Norway.

The first meeting, the Fao meeting on herring
technology', will begin on September 24 and will
be concerned with technological problems related
to the processing, marketing, and distribution of
herring. Participants will present papers sum-
marizing the latest research and technical develop-
ments related to herring.

The Fao meeting of fisheries technologists will
be convened on September 30, immediately follow-
ing the meeting on herring technology. The pur-
pose of the second meeting is to consider the
desirability of arranging for continued coopera-
tion among fisheries technologists on a regional
basis.

Chestnut Tree Production

The Department of State announced on August
30 that on September 5, 1950, the French Gov-
ernment will convene at Paris an international
conference dealing with chestnut tree production
and utilization. Dr. George F. Gravatt, of the
Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils and Agricultural
Engineering, Department of Agriculture, and on
loan to the Economic Cooperation Administra-
tion at Paris, has been designated to represent the
United States Government at this meeting.

The chestnut tree, which in many areas of the
world has been an important source of food, of
wood, and of tanning extracts, has been seriously
threatened in recent years by a number of diseases.
In the eastern part of the United States, for ex-
ample, the chestnut has been comi^letely elimi-
nated by chestnut blight.

The forthcoming conference, to which inter-
ested member countries of the Food and Agricul-
ture Organization of the United Nations have
been invited, will consider ways and means of

514

ITU: Administrative Council

The Department of State announced on August
31 that Francis Colt de Wolf, United States repre-
sentative on the Administrative Council of the
International Telecommunication Union and chief
of the Telecommunications Policy Staff of the De-
partment of State, will represent the United States
Government at the fifth session of the Adminis-
trative Council which will be held at Geneva
beginning September 1. Assisting Mr. de Wolf
as advisers, will be John M. Cates, Jr., acting
officer in charge. United Nations Cultural and
Human Rights Affairs, Department of State, and
Helen G. Kelly, special assistant to the chief of
the Telecommunications Policy Staff, Department
of State.

The Administrative Council was provided for in
the international telecommunication convention,
signed at Atlantic City on October 2, 1947, and
certain protocols annexed thereto. Eighteen
countries are members of the Council which serves
as the policy-making body of the International
Telecommunication Union during intervals be-
tween plenipotentiary conferences of the Union.
The Council held its first session in 1947 at At-
lantic City and its fourth session at Geneva in
1949.

THE DEPARTMENT

Bureau of Inter-American Affairs

Effective September 1, 1950, the following change in I
organization is made for the Bureau of Inter-American
Affairs :

The Office of East Coast Affairs (EC) and the Office of
North and West Coast Affairs (NWC) are abolished.

The Office of South American Affairs (OSA) is es-
tablished. The Office consists of the following organiza-
tional units : North and West Coast Affairs ; Brazilian
Affairs ; aud, River Plate Affairs.

Bureau of European Affairs

Effective September 5, 19."i0, the Bureau of European
Affairs public affairs functions and staff were reorganized

Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bullefin

to provide a public affairs adviser on the staff of the
Assistant Secretary and refrional public affairs specialists
in eiuh of the European bureau offices.

The public atTairs adviser advises the Assistant Secre-
tary on and coordinates the development of public affairs
policy for Eurojx^ and provides over-all representation for
tlie IJureau of European Affairs in relations with the
Public Affairs area and the Si^eeial Assistant for Press
Relations. Tlie regional public affairs specialists develop
with the country and functional ofticers basic country
and program information iwlicy and guidances.

Office of Budget and Finance

Effective August 23, 1950, the following changes are
made in the administrative area:

The Office of Management and Budget (0MB) Is abol-
ished.

There is established an Office of Budget and Finance
(OBF). The Division of Budget and the Division of
Finance are transferred to the new Office of Budget and
Finance.

There Is established a Management Staff in the Office
of the Deputy Under Secretary for Administration. The
Division of Organization is abolished and its functions,
personnel and records are transferred to the new Man-
agement Staff.

Milton Katz Confirmed
as ECE Representative

On Auf^ist 18 the Senate confirmed the nomina-
tion of Milton Katz, of Massachusetts, the United
States special representative in Europe, with the
rank of Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipo-
tentiary, to serve concurrently and without addi-
tional compensation as the United States repre-
sentative on the Economic Commission for Europe
(Ece) of the Economic and Social Council of
the United Nations.

Information Expansion Discussed
With Business Officials

[Released to the press Septemher 12]

Representatives of United States business firms
operating in Europe will hold an all-day meeting
with officials of the State Department on Septem-
ber 14 to explore M'ays in which American industry
can cooperate with the Government in creating
wider knowledge of the United States in that area.

Edward TV. Barrett, Assistant Secretary for
Public Affairs, and Edwin M. Martin, Director of
the Office of European Regional Affairs, will be
among the Departmental officers participating in
the discussion.

The meeting is one in a series being held with
American businessmen and is similar in intent to
previous ones on May 17 and September 7 with
representatives of American companies doing busi-
ness in Latin America.

These sessions are in keeping with the Depart-
ment's policy to increase its consultative program
with American groups to expand further the ef-
fectiveness of its overseas information and educa-
tion activities.

Appointment of Officers

O. Edmund Clubb as Director, Office of Chidese Affairs,
effective .Tuly 5.

Louis J. Halle, Jr. as Policy Planning Adviser to the
Assistant Secretary for Inter-American Affairs, effective
August 21.

The following designations, effective August 23, were
made in the Office of Budget and Finance :

Edward B. Wilber as Director of the Office ;

Henry H. Ford as Chief, Division of Budget ;

Louis Thompson as Chief, Division of Finance;

Harlow J. Heneman as Director of the Management
Staff; and

Charles E. .Johnson as Deputy Director of the Manage-
ment Staff.

The following designations, effective September 1, were
made in the Office of South American Affairs:

Fletcher Warren as Director of the Office ;

Howard H. Tewksbury as Deputy Director of the Office ;

Rollin S. Atwood as Officer in Charge, North and West
Coast Affairs ;

Randolph A. Kidder as Officer in Charge, Brazilian Af-
fairs ; and

Clarence E. Birgfeld as Officer in Charge, River Plate
Affairs.

Walter K. Scott as Deputy Assistant Secretary for
Administration, effective September 12.

Burton Y. Berry has been appointed Deputy Assistant
Secretary for Near Eastern, South Asian and African
Affairs.

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

U.S. Holds Consular Meeting in North Africa

[Released to the press Septemicr 6]

A regional conference of certain United States
diplomatic and consular officers in North Africa
is scheduled to be held from October 2 through 7
at Tangier, International Zone of Tangier.

The meeting will concern itself with problems
confronting the United States in its political, eco-
nomic, cultural, and consular relations with the
countries of North Africa. It will also consider
administrative matters effecting the efficient oper-
ation of United States diplomatic and consular
offices in that area.

George C. McGhee, Assistant Secretary for
Near Eastern, South Asian and African Affairs
(NEA), will head the delegation of Washington

September 25, 1950

515

representatives and will serve as chairman for the
Tangier Conference. He will be assisted by Elmer
H. Bourgerie, Acting Director of the Office of
African Affairs and Sam K. C. Kopper, until re-
cently Officer in Charge of Northern African Af-
fairs and now Deputy Director (designate) for
the Office of Near Eastern Affairs.

Others expected to attend the Tangier meeting
include Richard P. Butrick, Director General of
the Foreign Service ; Charles F. Pick, Jr., Deputy
Executive Director, NEA ; Norman Burns, Officer
in Charge, Economic Affairs, Near Eastern, Dr.
Euth Sloan, Chief, African Branch, Near Eastern,
South Asian and African Affairs/Philippines;
George Steuart, Office of Consular Affairs; Dr.
Vernon McKay, Foreign Affairs Officer, Office of
Dependent Areas Affairs, United Nations Affairs;
Miss Ruth Torrence, Foreign Affairs Analyst, Di-
vision of Research for Near East and Africa;
Samuel Gorlitz, Investment and Economic Devel-
opment Staff of the Bureau of Economic Affairs ;
John Devine, Representative of General Mana-
ger's Office, International Information and Edu-
cational Exchange Program ; Harry Price, Chief,
Dependent Areas Branch, Economic Cooperation
Administration; Clarence Blau, Assistant to the
Director, Office of International Trade, Depart-
ment of Commerce; Col. Stanley Andrews, Di-
rector, Office of Foreign Agricultural Relations,
Department of Agriculture; Capt. G. S. Patrick,
USN, Department of Defense ; Leo R. Werts, As-
sociate Director, Office of International Labor Af-
fairs, Department of Labor ; Olen Warnock, Chief,
Technical Assistance Branch, Department of La-
bor; Harry S. Weidberg, British Commonwealth
and Middle East Division, Office of International
Finance, Department of the Treasury; John W.
Edwards, Office of Reports and Estimates, Cen-
tral Intelligence Agency.

Field representation will include officers from
Tangier, Algiers, Casablanca, Dakar, Tripoli,
Tunis, Asmara, Benghazi (Bengasi), and Rabat.
Representatives from the Ameiican Embassies at
Paris and Cairo will also attend.

Consular Offices

The American consulate at Penang, Federation of
Malaya, under the supervisory jurisdiction of the con-
sulate general at Singapore, was estahlished on August
22, 1950.

The American consulate general at Salisbury, Southern
Rhodesia, was officially opened to the public on May 8,
1050.

Resignation of Ambassador Chiids

On August 28, the White House released to the press
the text of President Truman's letter accepting the resig-
nation of J. Kives Chiids as Ambassador to the Kingdom
of Saudi Arabia and Minister to the Kingdom of Yemen.

THE CONGRESS

The President Does Not Approve
Amended Nationality Act

[Released to the press ly the White Eouse September 9]

To the House of Eepresentatives :

I return herewith, without my approval, H. J.
Res. 238, "To amend the Nationality Act of 1940,
as amended."

"Wlien first introduced in the Congress, this
Resolution provided that the right to become a
naturalized citizen of the United States should
not be denied or abridged because of race. This
was one of the recommendations which I made to
the Congress in the civil rights program submitted
more than 2 years ago. This proposal has received
wide bipartisan support. It represents a positive
response by the United States to a proper demand
of justice and human brotherhood. By this means,
we can give concrete assurance to the peoples of
Asia that no resident of the United States will
fail to qualify for citizenship solely because of
racial origin.

This jirovision remains as section 1 of the Reso-
lution. Unfortunately, the Congress has added
a second section, with a different purpose. This
new section is supposed to strengthen our naturali-
zation laws by inserting new and specific prohibi-
tions against citizenship for aliens who owe
allegiance to present forms of communism and
other totalitarian philosophies.

The existing prohibitions in our naturalization
laws were intended to exclude from citizenship
those who overtly subscribe to the overthrow of our
Government by force or violence. In section 2 of
this Resolution, the Congress has attempted, by
the use of much new language, to reach persons
who may covertly seek to overthrow this Govern-
ment through their association with Communist-
front and similar organizations. However, the
language of this second section is so vague and
ill-defined that no one can tell what it may mean or
how it may be applied. The result might be to
weaken our naturalization laws rather than
strengthen them. The result might also be to
jeopardize the basic rights of our naturalized citi-
zens and other persons legitimately admitted to
the United States.

In my judgment, it would be impossible to ad-
minister this Act without creating a twilight spe-
cies of second-class citizens, persons who could be
deprived of citizenship on technical grounds,
through their ignorance or lack of judgment. If
an individual should, at any time within 5 years
after naturalization, become affiliated with a pro-
scribed organization, this resolution would spe-

516

Department of State Bulletin

cifically make his act prima facie evidence of lack
of attachment to the principles of the Constitution
of the United States. It would place upon him
the requirement of presenting countervailing evi-
dence to prevent the revocation of his citizenship.

This resolution does not even stop with creating
second-class citizens. Where newly naturalized
citizens or legally admitted aliens are concerned,
it could be used to destroy the right of free speech
and the freedom to follow intellectual pursuits
without fear of retaliation from a vengeful Gov-
ernment.

These provisions will inevitably produce great
uncertainty and confusion in administration.
This becomes evident when it is recognized, as it
must be, that the resolution fails to define its terms
and establishes absolutely no ascertainable stand-
ards for tlieir application. Not only is this in
violation of our traditional concepts of what laws
should do, it also makes it impossible to determine
in advance what procedures will be used to prose-
cute alleged violation of the law. I cannot ap-
prove a measure which has these deficiencies.

Our Government will remain dedicated to pro-
tecting the freedom, basic rights, and inherent dig-
nity of the individual. We shall not adopt
prohibitory and punitive statutes without being
absolutely sure that the proposed laws are not a
greater threat than the things against which they
would provide protection. This is particularly
true in the present case since we already have
strong laws protecting us against the naturaliza-
tion of subversive persons. It has not been dem-
onstrated that these laws are inadequate. We
should not forget or become afraid to assert our
belief that eternal vigilance is the price of liberty.

I urge that the Congress reconsider this Reso-
lution at once, reenacting it in such form as to pre-
serve section 1 and to remove those ill-advised pro-
visions in section 2, which seek to strengthen the
Nationality Act of 1940 but which actually weaken
and confuse it. At a time when the United Na-
tions Forces are fighting gallantly to uphold the
principles of freedom and democracy in Korea, it
would be unworthy of our tradition if we continue
now to deny the right of citizenship to American
residents of Asiatic origin.

Arbitrary Appropriations C:its
May Impair Government Services

Statement iy the President

[Released to the press hij the Wliitc House Scptemhcr 6]

1 have signed H. R. 7786, the General Appro-
priation Act of 1951.

This bill provides, in a consolidated form, funds
and other authorizations for the departments
and agencies of the Federal Government for the
fiscal year which began last July 1.

In signing this bill, I am compelled to call at-
tention to a provision which, in my judgment,
represents an unwise and dangerous departure
from proper budgetary practices. This is the
requirement that the Executive Branch reduce the
appropriations enacted by the Congress by a fixed
amount.

The foundation of our budget system is the
preparation of an annual budget by the President
and its presentation to the Congress for review,
adjustment, and final determination.

For more than two hundred pages, this enrolled
bill sets forth in great detail the individual
amounts appropriated by the Congress for the
many programs of the Government. Section
1214, of the bill, however, directs that these in-
dividual and specific decisions by the Congress on
appropriations and authorizations for the Execu-
tive Branch of the Government be reduced by at
least 550 million dollars, "without impairing
national defense." In effect, the bill requires the
Executive Branch to revise the judgment of the
Congress on individual programs to meet an over-
all arbitrary reduction.

This unusual provision represents a failure by
the Congress to exercise its proper responsibility
for enacting appropriations to conduct the Govern-
ment's business.

The needs of our defense effort make it neces-
sary to place primary emphasis on those programs
of the Government which will strengthen our
armed forces, our power to produce for defense,
and the combined power of the free world to
establish peace. In effecting the reduction re-
quired in the bill, a careful review will be made of
all agency programs with a view to curtailing
those which contribute least to these paramount
objectives. This review is now going forward.
It will continue during the coming months. If
reductions greater than the amount specified in
the bill can be made, I shall make them. Neither
the Congress nor the President, however, can state
at this time whether savings even to the extent
arbitrarily required by Congress can be made
without impairing essential Government services.

I also feel obliged to comment upon the pro-
vision of the bill which authorizes loans for the
purpose of assistance to Spain. I do not regard
this provision as a directive, which would be uncon-
stitutional, but instead as an authorization, in
addition to the authority already in existence
under which loans to Spain may be made.

Spain is not, and has not been, foreclosed from
borrowing money from this Government. Money
will be loaned to Spain whenever mutually advan-
tageous arrangements can be made with respect to
security, terms of repayment, purposes for which
the money is to be spent, and other appropriate
factors and whenever such loans will serve the
interests of the United States in the conduct of
foreiarn relations.

September 25, 1950

517

The United States in the United Nations

[September 14-21]

General Assembly

The delegates of 59 nations assembled at Flush-
ing Meadow, New York, on September 19 for the
fifth regular session of the General Assembly.
Ambassador Nazrollah Entezam, delegate of Iran,
was elected president. The unprecedented im-
portance of this session, in the light of recent
events in Korea, was emphasized by retiring
President Carlos P. Romulo who stated, in his
opening speech, that the General Assembly has the
chance of saving "the United Nations and the
peace of the world."

The question of Chinese representation was
raised at the outset by the delegate of India, Sir
Benegal Eau, who introduced a resolution advo-
cating representation of China in the General
Assembly by the Peiping regime. This resolu-
tion was rejected, with 16 voting in favor, 33
against, and 10 abstentions. Two resolutions pro-
posed by the Soviet delegate, Andrei Y. Vyshin-
sky, to exclude the "Kuomintang group" and in-
vite the Chinese Communists to participate in the
Assembly were rejected by overwhelming majori-
ties. The Assembly, however, adopted a Canadian
resolution establishing a special seven-member
committee to study the question of Chinese rep-
resentation and to report back to the Assembly
after there had been opportunity to consider the
Cuban agenda item, dealing with the question of
representation in general. The Assembly agreed
that, pending the report of this special committee,
the Chinese National delegation should be seated
in the Assembly with the same rights as other
delegations.

General debate opened on September 20 with
major statements by Secretary Acheson and by
Mr. Vyshinsky. Secretary Acheson offered a pro-
gram to increase the effectiveness of the United
Nations in dealing with aggression, which in-
cluded proposals for : ( 1 ) calling of an emergency
session of the General Assembly on 24-hour notice
whenever the Security Council is unable to act
because of the veto; (2) establishing a "peace
patrol" to give immediate and independent obser-
vation and reporting from any threatened area;
(3) planning for member nations to designate cer-
tain units within their national armed forces for

i:)rompt service on behalf of the United Nations ;
and (1) forming a committee to study and report
on means that the United Nations could use,
through collective action, to carry out the prin-
ciples of the Charter.

Secretary Acheson also proposed the establish-
ment of a United Nations "recovery force,"
through which member nations could contribute
to relief and reconstruction in Korea at the end of
hostilities, and lie suggested that the General As-
sembly also look into the problem of the future of
Formosa.

The Soviet delegate, in his statement, proposed
a "declaration for the prevention of a new war
and the strengthening of international peace and
security." The suggested declaration, made up
essentially of Soviet proposals offered at previous
sessions, would: (1) condemn war propaganda;
(2) prohibit the use of atomic weapons and recom-
mend the establishment of strict international
control over atomic energy; and (3) recommend
that the five great powers conclude among them-
selves a pact for peace and reduce, in 1950, their
armaments and armed forces by one-third.

On September 21, the General Committee of the
Assembly approved the inclusion of 69 questions in
the Assembly's agenda. Some of these are ques-
tions that have been discussed previously in the
General Assembly, such as the admission of new
members to the United Nations, the disposition of
former Italian colonies, Palestine, relations of
member states with Spain, threats to the political
independence and territorial integrity of Greece,
international control of atomic energy, treatment
of Indians in the Union of South Africa, and vio-
lations of human rights in Bulgaria, Hungary, and
Rumania. The Assembly will also have before it
the report of the United Nations Commission on
Korea, established by the Assembly in 1948 to as-
sist in the unification of Korea and the further
development of i-epresentative government there.
In addition to Secretary Acheson's 4-point pro-
gram for strengthening the United Nations and
Mr. Vyshinsky's proposed declaration for the pre-
vention of a new war, some new problems which
the General Assembly will consider for the first
time include the failure of the U.S.S.R. to re-
patriate German and Japanese prisoners of war.

518

Department of State Bulletin

an item presented jointly by the United States,
the United Kingdom, and Anstralia; a 20-year
program for achieving peace througli the United
Nations, proposed by Secretary-General Trygvie
Lie; and the Cuban item, recognition by the
United Nations of the representation of a member
state.

The problem of Formosa will be discussed in
connection with a new item proposed by the
U.S.S.R. entitled : "Complaint by the U.S.S.R. of
American aggression against China." No de-
cision, however, has yet been taken by the General
Committee on the item proposed by the United
States regarding the future of Formosa.

Interim Committee

After having completed the final items on its
agenda on September 15, the Interim Comrnittee,
on September 18, approved, without objection or
discussion, its report to the General Assembly.

On September 15, the Committee made several
decisions on three important items, with reference
to what data should be included in its report to the
Assembly. Concerning the first item, the future
of Eritrea, the Committee agi'eed to include a
statement by the chairman, praising the draft
formula arrived at in interdelegation consulta-
tions as constituting at least a "set of principles"
on which a solution could be based. The prin-
ciples were not to be included in the report, the
Committee decided, but might be brought for-
ward in the General Assembly by any delegation.

In view of imminent General Assembly con-
sideration and the political nature of the second
item, threats to the independence and territorial
integrity of China, the Committee agreed to make
no recommendations.

With reference to the third item, boundaries of
the former Italian colonies, a United States draft
resolution, setting forth principles to be followed
in determining those boundaries, met with little
support. After discussion of several alternative
procedures, a Lebanese proposal was adopted,
whereby the United States draft resolution was
to be submitted as an annex to the report.

Security Council

The unified command's fourth report on opera-
tions in Korea, covering the period of August 16
to 31, was presented to the Security Council for its

"cognizance" on September 18. The report, read
by United States Ambassador Warren R. Austin,
covered United Nations ground, naval, and air op-
ei'ations and outlined specific military positions.
Accusations of bombings of civilians by United
Nations aircraft were groundless, the report said.
During his reading of the section on foreign sup-
port for North Korean forces. Ambassador Austin
presented "physical proof" of Soviet deliveries of
up-to-date equipment to the invading troops, in-
cluding a late-model Soviet-made 7.62 mm. sub-
machine gun. In addition, the report declared
that although there had been no confirmation of
direct or overt Chinese Communist participation
in the North Korean aggression, the Chinese Com-
munist regime had furnished substantial military
aid by releasing "a vast pool of combat-seasoned
troops of Korean ethnic origin, which provided
the means for expansion of the North Korean
Army."

Insisting on his right to comment on the report,
Soviet Ambassador Yakov A. Malik charged that
the presentation of the report was purely a tactical
move to divert the Security Council and public
opinion from "United States aggression" both in
Korea and Formosa. The evidence presented, Mr.
Malik asserted, was "slanderous" and designed to
fool "simpletons."

Ambassador Austin's reading of the unified
command's report followed more than 2 hours
of procedural debate over the adoption of the
Council's agenda. Although Ambassador Malik
attempted to prevent inclusion of the item "Com-
plaint of aggression upon the Republic of Korea,"
under which the report was presented, that ques-
tion was approved for immediate consideration
by a vote of 10-1. Other substantive items in-
cluded on the Council's agenda were : "Complaint
of invasion of the Island of Taiwan (Formosa),"
submitted originally by the U.S.S.R. on August
29; and a new question "Complaint of expulsion
by Israel of thousands of Palestinian Arabs into
Egyptian territory and the violation by Israel of
the Egyptian-Israeli General Armistice Agree-
ment," proposed by Egypt. In connection with
the latter item, the president of the Council, Sir
Gladwyn Jebb (United Kingdom) called atten-
tion to a communication from Israel. Because of
the lengthy agenda debate, discussion of the For-
mosa and Egyptian questions was postponed until
a later meeting.

September 25, 1950

519

BOSTON PUBLIC LIBRARY

3 9999 06352 747 5

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Department of State bulletin"

See other formats